From 50fb8ded76d2790ad400c811b391b452c5ce123c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ian Beckwith Date: Fri, 24 Jun 2011 04:23:01 +0100 Subject: [PATCH] stick temporary docs in debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch --- debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch | 50204 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ debian/patches/series | 1 + 2 files changed, 50205 insertions(+) create mode 100644 debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch create mode 100644 debian/patches/series diff --git a/debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch b/debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch new file mode 100644 index 0000000..974ea51 --- /dev/null +++ b/debian/patches/01_docs_from_211.patch @@ -0,0 +1,50204 @@ +Description: Documentation and .ini files from ckermit-211 + These files are not shipped with betas. + + +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckututor.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,1959 @@ ++ ++C-KERMIT 8.0 UNIX MANUAL PAGE AND TUTORIAL ++ ++ Frank da Cruz, Christine M. Gianone ++ [1]The Kermit Project, [2]Columbia University ++ ++ [ [3]PDF version ] [ [4]Nroff version ] ++ ++ This document is intended to give the beginner sufficient ++ information to make basic (if not advanced) use of C-Kermit 8.0. ++ Although it might be rather long for a Unix manual page (about 1600 ++ lines), it's still far shorter than the C-Kermit manual, which ++ should be consulted for advanced topics such as customization, ++ character-sets, scripting, etc. We also attempt to provide a clear ++ structural overview of C-Kermit's many capabilities, functional ++ areas, states, and modes and their interrelation, that should be ++ helpful to beginners and veterans alike, as well as to those ++ upgrading to the new release. ++ ++ Most recent update: 24 October 2002 ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CONTENTS ++ * [5]DESCRIPTION ++ * [6]SYNOPSIS ++ * [7]OPTIONS ++ * [8]COMMAND LANGUAGE ++ * [9]INITIALIZATION FILE ++ * [10]MODES OF OPERATION ++ * [11]MAKING CONNECTIONS ++ * [12]TRANSFERRING FILES WITH KERMIT ++ * [13]KERMIT CLIENT/SERVER CONNECTIONS ++ * [14]KERMIT'S BUILT-IN FTP AND HTTP CLIENTS ++ * [15]INTERNET KERMIT SERVICE ++ * [16]SECURITY ++ * [17]ALTERNATIVE COMMAND-LINE PERSONALITIES ++ * [18]LICENSE ++ * [19]OTHER TOPICS ++ * [20]DOCUMENTATION AND UPDATES ++ * [21]FILES ++ * [22]AUTHORS ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ DESCRIPTION [ [23]Top ] [ [24]Contents ] [ [25]Next ] ++ ++ [26]C-Kermit is an all-purpose communications software package from ++ the [27]Kermit Project at [28]Columbia University that: ++ ++ * Is portable to many platforms, Unix and non-Unix alike. ++ * Can make both serial and network connections. ++ * Can conduct interactive terminal sessions over its connection. ++ * Can transfer text or binary files over the same connection. ++ * Can convert text-file character sets in terminal mode or file ++ transfer. ++ * Is customizable in every aspect of its operation. ++ ++ C-Kermit is a modem program, a Telnet client, an Rlogin client, an FTP ++ client, an HTTP client, and on selected platforms, also an X.25 ++ client. It can make its own secure Internet connections using ++ IETF-approved security methods including Kerberos IV, Kerberos V, ++ SSL/TLS, and SRP and it can also make SSH (Secure Shell) connections ++ through your external SSH client application. It can be the far-end ++ file-transfer or client/server partner of your desktop Kermit client. ++ It can also accept incoming dialed and network connections. It can ++ even be installed as an Internet service on its own standard TCP ++ socket, 1649 [[29]RFC2839, [30]RFC2840]. ++ ++ And perhaps most important, everything you can do "by hand" ++ (interactively) with C-Kermit, can be "scripted" (automated) using its ++ built-in cross-platform transport-independent script programming ++ language, which happens to be identical to its interactive command ++ language. ++ ++ This manual page offers an overview of C-Kermit 8.0 for Unix ("Unix" ++ is an operating system family that includes AIX, DG/UX, FreeBSD, ++ HP-UX, IRIX, Linux, Mac OS X, NetBSD, OpenBSD, Open Server, Open Unix, ++ QNX, Solaris, SunOS, System V R3, System V R4, Tru64 Unix, Unixware, ++ Xenix, and many others). For thorough coverage, please consult the ++ published C-Kermit manual and supplements (see [31]DOCUMENTATION ++ below). For further information about C-Kermit, Kermit software for ++ other platforms, and Kermit manuals, visit the Kermit Project website: ++ ++ [32]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ ++ This is a longer-than-average manual page, and yet it barely scratches ++ the surface. Don't be daunted. C-Kermit is a large and complex ++ package, evolving over decades of practice and experience, but that ++ doesn't mean it's hard to learn or use. Its most commonly used ++ functions are explained here with pointers to additional information ++ elsewhere. ++ ++ [ [33]Kermit Home ] [ [34]C-Kermit Home ] [ [35]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ SYNOPSIS [ [36]Top ] [ [37]Contents ] [ [38]Next ] [ [39]Previous ] ++ ++ Usage: kermit [filename] [-x arg [-x arg]...[-yyy]..] [ {=,--,+} text ++ ] ] ++ Or: kermit URL ++ ++ * -x is an option requiring an argument; ++ * -y is an option with no argument. ++ ++ If the first command-line argument is the name of a file, ++ interactive-mode commands are executed from the file. The '=' (or ++ "--") argument tells Kermit not to parse the remainder of the command ++ line, but to make the words following '=' available as \%1, \%2, ... ++ \%9. The "+" argument is like "=" but for use in "kerbang scripts" ++ (explained [40]below). A second command-line format allows the one and ++ only argument to be a [41]Telnet, FTP, HTTP, or IKSD URL. ++ ++ Order of execution: ++ ++ 1. [42]The command file (if any). ++ 2. [43]The initialization file, if any, unless suppressed with -Y. ++ 3. [44]The customization file (if it is executed by the ++ initialization file). ++ 4. [45]The command-line URL (if any, and if so, execution stops ++ here). ++ 5. [46]Command-line options (if any). ++ 6. [47]Interactive commands. ++ ++ Some command-line options can cause actions (such as -s to send a ++ file); others just set parameters. If any action options are included ++ on the command line, Kermit exits when finished unless also given the ++ -S ("stay") option. If no action options are given, no initialization ++ or command files contained an EXIT or QUIT command, and no fatal ++ errors occurred, Kermit issues its prompt and waits for you to type ++ commands. ++ ++ Bear in mind that C-Kermit can be built with selected features ++ disabled, and also that certain features are not available on all ++ platforms. For example, C-Kermit can't be built with TCP/IP support ++ on a platform that does not have TCP/IP header files and libraries ++ (and even if Kermit does include TCP/IP support, it can't be used ++ to make TCP/IP connections on a computer that does not have a ++ TCP/IP stack installed). If your version of C-Kermit lacks a ++ feature mentioned here, use its SHOW FEATURES command to see what ++ might have been excluded. ++ ++ C-Kermit has three kinds of commands: regular single-letter ++ command-line options, extended-format command-line options, and ++ interactive commands. ++ ++ [ [48]Kermit Home ] [ [49]C-Kermit Home ] [ [50]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ OPTIONS [ [51]Top ] [ [52]Contents ] [ [53]Next ] [ [54]Previous ] ++ ++ Like most Unix commands, C-Kermit can be be given options on the ++ command line. But C-Kermit also can be used interactively by giving it ++ [55]commands composed of words, which are more intuitive than cryptic ++ command-line options, and more flexible too. In other words, you don't ++ have to use C-Kermit's command-line options, but they are available if ++ you want to. (By the same token, you don't have to use its interactive ++ commands either -- you can use either or both in any combination.) ++ ++ C-Kermit is generally installed in the PATH as "kermit", and therefore ++ is invoked by typing the word "kermit" (lowercase) at the shell ++ prompt, and then pressing the Return or Enter key. If you wish to ++ include command-line options, put them after the word "kermit" but ++ before pressing Return or Enter, separated by spaces, for example: ++ ++ $ kermit -s ckermit.tar.gz ++ ++ ('$' is the shell prompt; "kermit -s ckermit.tar.gz" is what you type, ++ followed by Return or Enter.) ++ ++ Here is a list of C-Kermit's single-letter command-line options, which ++ start with a single dash (-), in ASCII ("alphabetical") order. ++ Alphabetic case is significant (-A is not the same as -a). The Action? ++ column contains Y for action options and N for non-action options. ++ Option Action? Description ++ -0 N (digit zero) 100% transparent Connect state for "in-the-middle" ++ operation: 8 bits, no parity, no escape character, everything passes ++ through. ++ -8 N (digit eight) Connection is 8-bit clean (this is the default in ++ C-Kermit 8.0). Equivalent to the EIGHTBIT command, which in turn is a ++ shortcut for SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8, SET COMMAND BYTESIZE 8, SET ++ PARITY NONE. ++ -9 arg N (digit nine) Make a connection to an FTP server. Equivalent ++ to the FTP OPEN command. ++ Argument: IP-address-or-hostname[:optional-TCP-port]. ++ NOTE: C-Kermit also has a separate FTP command-line personality, with ++ regular FTP-like command-line syntax. [56]More about this below. ++ -A N Kermit is to be started as an Internet service (IKSD) (only from ++ inetd.conf). ++ -B N Kermit is running in Batch or Background (no controlling ++ terminal). To be used in case Kermit doesn't automatically sense its ++ background status. Equivalent to the SET BACKGROUND ON command. ++ -C arg N Interactive-mode Commands to be executed. ++ Argument: Commands separated by commas, list in doublequotes. ++ -D arg N Delay before starting to send in Remote mode. Equivalent to ++ the SET DELAY command. ++ Argument: Number of seconds. ++ -E N Exit automatically when connection closes. Equivalent to SET EXIT ++ ON-DISCONNECT ON. ++ -F arg N Use an open TCP connection. ++ Argument: Numeric file descriptor of open TCP connection. ++ Also see: -j, -J. ++ -G arg Y Get file(s) from server, send contents to standard output, ++ which normally would be piped to another process. ++ Argument: Remote file specification, in quotes if it contains ++ metacharacters. ++ Also see: -g, -k. ++ -H N Suppress program startup Herald and greeting. ++ -I N Tell Kermit it has a reliable connection, to force streaming to ++ be used where it normally would not be. Equivalent to the SET RELIABLE ++ ON command. ++ -J arg N "Be like Telnet." Like -j but implies -E. ++ Argument: IP hostname/address optionally followed by service. ++ NOTE: C-Kermit also has a separate Telnet command-line personality, ++ with regular Telnet-like command-line syntax. [57]More about this ++ below. ++ -L N Recursive directory descent for files in -s option. ++ -M arg N My user name (for use with Telnet, Rlogin, FTP, etc). ++ Equivalent to the SET LOGIN USER command. ++ Argument: Username string. ++ -O Y (Uppercase letter O) Be a server for One command only. Also see: ++ -x. ++ -P N Don't convert file (Path) names of transferred files. Equivalent ++ to SET FILE NAMES LITERAL. ++ -Q N Quick Kermit protocol settings. Equivalent to the FAST command. ++ This is the default in C-Kermit 7.0 and later. ++ -R N Remote-only (this just makes IF REMOTE true). ++ -S N Stay (enter command parser after action options). ++ -T N Force Text mode for file transfer; implies -V. Equivalent to SET ++ TRANSFER MODE MANUAL, SET FILE TYPE TEXT. ++ -V N Disable automatic per-file text/binary switching. Equivalent to ++ SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL. ++ -Y N Skip (don't execute) the initialization file. ++ -a arg N As-name for file(s) in -s, -r, or -g. ++ Argument: As-name string (alternative filename). When receiving files, ++ this can be a directory name. ++ -b arg N Speed for serial device. Equivalent to SET SPEED. ++ Argument: Numeric Bits per second for serial connections. ++ -c Y Enter Connect state before transferring files. ++ -d N Create a debug.log file with detailed debugging information (a ++ second -d adds timestamps). Equivalent to LOG DEBUG but takes effect ++ sooner. ++ -e arg N Maximum length for incoming Kermit file-transfer packets. ++ Equivalent to SET RECEIVE PACKET-LENGTH. ++ Argument: Length in bytes. ++ -f Y Send a FINISH command to a Kermit server. ++ -g arg N Get file(s) from a Kermit server. ++ Argument: File specification on other computer, in quotes if it ++ contains metacharacters. Equivalent to GET. ++ Also see: -a, -G, -r. ++ -h Y Print Help text for single-letter command-line options (pipe thru ++ 'more' to prevent scrolling). ++ -i N Force binary (Image) mode for file transfer; implies -V. ++ Equivalent to SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL, SET FILE TYPE BINARY. ++ -j arg N Make a TCP/IP connection. ++ Argument: IP host name/address and optional service name or number. ++ Equivalent to the TELNET command. ++ Also see: -J, -F. ++ -k Y Receive file(s) to standard output, which normally would be piped ++ to another process. ++ Also see: -r, -G. ++ -l arg N (Lowercase letter L) Make a connection on the given serial ++ communications device. Equivalent to the SET LINE (SET PORT) command. ++ Argument: Serial device name, e.g. /dev/ttyS0. ++ -m arg N Modem type for use with the -l device. Equivalent to the SET ++ MODEM TYPE command. ++ Argument: Modem name as in SET MODEM TYPE command, e.g. "usrobotics". ++ -n Y Enter Connect state after transferring files (historical). ++ -p arg N Parity. Equivalent to the SET PARITY command. ++ Argument: One of the following: e(ven), o(dd), m(ark), n(one), ++ s(pace). ++ -q N Quiet (suppress most messages). Equivalent to SET QUIET ON. ++ -r Y Receive file(s). Equivalent to the RECEIVE command. ++ Argument: (none, but see -a) ++ -s arg N Send file(s). ++ Argument: One or more local file specifications. Equivalent to the ++ SEND command. ++ Also see: -a. ++ -t N (Historical) Xon (Ctrl-Q) Turnaround character for half-duplex ++ connections (used on serial linemode connections to old mainframes). ++ Equivalent to SET DUPLEX HALF, SET HANDSHAKE XON. ++ -v arg N Window size for Kermit protocol (ignored when streaming). ++ Equivalanet to SET WINDOW-SIZE. ++ Argument: Number, 1 to 32. ++ -w N Incoming files Write over existing files. Equivalent to SET FILE ++ COLLISION OVERWRITE. ++ -x Y Enter server mode. Equivalent to the SERVER command. Also see: ++ -O. ++ -y arg N Alternative initialization file. ++ Argument: Filename. ++ -z N Force foreground behavior. To be used in case Kermit doesn't ++ automatically sense its foreground status. Equivalent to the SET ++ BACKGROUND OFF command. ++ ++ Extended command-line options (necessary because single-letter ones ++ are about used up) start with two dashes (--), with words rather than ++ single letters as option names. If an extended option takes an ++ argument, it is separated from the option word by a colon (:). ++ Extended options include: ++ Option Description ++ --bannerfile:filename File to display upon startup or IKSD login. ++ --cdfile:filename File to be sent for display to the client when ++ server changes directory (filename is relative to the changed-to ++ directory). ++ --cdmessage:{on,off} Enable/disable the server CD message feature. ++ --help Prints usage message for extended options. ++ --helpfile:filename Designates a file containing custom text to ++ replace the top-level HELP command. ++ --nointerrupts Disables keyboard interrupts. ++ --noperms Disables the Kermit protocol file Permissions attribute, to ++ prevent transmission of file permissions (protection) from sender to ++ receiver. ++ ++ Plus several other [58]IKSD-Only options. ++ ++ See the [59]file-transfer section for examples of command-line ++ invocation. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ COMMAND LANGUAGE [ [60]Top ] [ [61]Contents ] [ [62]Next ] [ [63]Previous ] ++ ++ * [64]Command Files, Macros, and Scripts ++ * [65]Command List ++ ++ C-Kermit's interactive command language is the subject of a ++ [66]622-page book and another several hundred pages of updates, far ++ too much for a manual page. But it's not hard to get started. At the ++ shell prompt, just type "kermit" to get C-Kermit's interactive command ++ prompt: ++ ++ $ kermit ++ (/current/directory) C-Kermit> ++ ++ Begin by typing "help" (and then press the Return or Enter key) for a ++ top-level overview, read it, and go from there. Your second command ++ should probably be "intro" (introduction). Note the prompt shows your ++ current directory (unless you tell Kermit to prompt you with something ++ else). ++ ++ Interactive commands are composed mainly of regular English words, ++ usually in the form of imperative sentences, such as: ++ ++ send oofa.txt ++ ++ which tells Kermit to send (transfer) the file whose name is oofa.txt, ++ or: ++ ++ set transfer mode automatic ++ ++ which sets Kermit's "transfer mode" to "automatic" (whatever that ++ means). ++ ++ While typing commands, you can abbreviate, ask for help (by pressing ++ the "?" key anywhere in a command), complete keywords or filenames ++ (with the Tab or Esc key), and edit your typing with Backspace or ++ Delete, Ctrl-W, Ctrl-U, etc. You can also recall previous commands, ++ save your command history, and who knows what else. Give the INTRO ++ command for details. ++ ++ C-Kermit has hundreds of commands, and they can be issued in infinite ++ variety and combinations, including commands for: ++ ++ * Making connections (SET LINE, DIAL, TELNET, SSH, FTP, CONNECT, ++ ...) ++ * Breaking connections (HANGUP, CLOSE) ++ * Transferring files (SEND, GET, RECEIVE, MOVE, RESEND, ...) ++ * Establishing preferences (SET) ++ * Displaying preferences (SHOW) ++ * Managing local files (CD, DELETE, MKDIR, DIRECTORY, RENAME, TYPE, ++ ...) ++ * Managing remote files (RCD, RDEL, RMKDIR, RDIR, ...) ++ * Using local files (FOPEN, FCLOSE, FREAD, FWRITE) ++ * Programming (TAKE, DEFINE, IF, FOR, WHILE, SWITCH, DECLARE, ...) ++ * Interacting with the user (ECHO, ASK, ...) ++ * Interacting with a remote computer (INPUT, OUTPUT, ...) ++ * Interacting with local programs (RUN, EXEC, PTY, ...) ++ * Logging things (LOG SESSION, LOG PACKETS, LOG DEBUG, ...) ++ ++ And of course QUIT or EXIT to get out and HELP to get help, and for ++ programmers: loops, decision making, variables, arrays, associative ++ arrays, integer and floating point arithmetic, macros, built-in and ++ user-defined functions, string manipulation, pattern matching, block ++ structure, scoping, recursion, and all the rest. To get a list of all ++ C-Kermit's commands, type a question mark (?) at the prompt. To get a ++ description of any command, type HELP followed by the name of the ++ command, for example: ++ ++ help send ++ ++ The command interruption character is Ctrl-C (hold down the Ctrl key ++ and press the C key). ++ ++ The command language "escape character", used to introduce variable ++ names, function invocations, and so on, is backslash (\). If you need ++ to include a literal backslash in a command, type two of them, e.g.: ++ ++ get c:\\k95\\k95custom.ini ++ ++ Command Files, Macros, and Scripts ++ ++ A file containing Kermit commands is called a Kermit command file or ++ Kermit script. It can be executed with Kermit's TAKE command: ++ ++ (/current/dir) C-Kermit> take commandfile ++ ++ (where "commandfile" is the name of the command file). Please don't ++ pipe a command file into Kermit's standard input (which might or might ++ not work); if you have Kermit commands in a file, tell Kermit to TAKE ++ the file. ++ ++ In Unix only, a Kermit command file can also be executed directly by ++ including a "kerbang" line as the first line of the file: ++ ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ ++ That is, a top line that starts with "#!", followed immediately by the ++ full path of the Kermit executable, and then, if the Kermit script is ++ to be given arguments on the command line, a space and a plus sign. ++ The script file must also have execute permission: ++ ++ chmod +x commandfile ++ ++ Except for the " +" part, this is exactly the same as you would do for ++ a shell script, a Perl script, etc. Here's a simple but useless ++ example script that regurgitates its arguments (up to three of them): ++ ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ if defined \%1 echo "Argument 1: \%1" ++ if defined \%2 echo "Argument 2: \%2" ++ if defined \%3 echo "Argument 3: \%3" ++ if defined \%4 echo "etc..." ++ exit ++ ++ If this file is stored in your current directory as "commandfile", ++ then: ++ ++ ./commandfile one two three four five ++ ++ prints: ++ ++ Argument 1: one ++ Argument 2: two ++ Argument 3: three ++ etc... ++ ++ This illustrates the basic structure of a standalone Kermit script: ++ the "kerbang line", then some commands. It should end with "exit" ++ unless you want the Kermit prompt to appear when it is finished. \%1 ++ is the first argument, \%2 the second, and so on. ++ ++ You can also create your own commands by defining named macros ++ composed of other Kermit commands (or macros). Here's a simple ++ example: ++ ++ define mydial { ++ set modem type usrobotics ++ set port /dev/ttyS0 ++ if fail end 1 ++ set speed 57600 ++ dial \%1 ++ if success connect ++ } ++ ++ This shows how you can combine many commands into one command, ++ "mydial" in this case (you can use any name you like, provided it does ++ not clash with the name of a built-in command). When this macro ++ definition is in effect, you can type commands like: ++ ++ mydial 7654321 ++ ++ and it executes all the commands in macro definition, substituting the ++ first operand ("7654321") for the formal parameter ("\%1") in the ++ definition. This saves you from having to type lots of commands every ++ time you want to make a modem call. ++ ++ One way to have the macro definition in effect is to type the ++ definition at the Kermit prompt. Another way is to store the ++ definition in a file and TAKE the file. If you want the the definition ++ to be in effect automatically every time you start Kermit, put the ++ definition in your initialization or customization file (explained ++ [67]below). ++ ++ Here's a somewhat more ambitious example: ++ ++ define mydelete { ++ local trash ++ assign trash \v(home)trashcan/ ++ if not defined \%1 end 1 "Delete what?" ++ if wild \%1 end 1 "Deleting multiple files is too scary" ++ if not exist \%1 end 1 "I can't find \%1" ++ if not directory \m(trash) { ++ mkdir \m(trash) ++ if fail end 1 "No trash can" ++ } ++ rename /list \%1 \m(trash) ++ } ++ define myundelete { ++ local trash ++ assign trash \v(home)trashcan/ ++ if not defined \%1 end 1 "Undelete what?" ++ if wild \%1 end 1 "Undeleting multiple files is too hard" ++ if not directory \m(trash) end 1 "No trash can" ++ if not exist \m(trash)\%1 end 1 "I can't find \%1 in trash can" ++ rename /list \m(trash)\%1 . ++ } ++ ++ These macros are not exactly production quality (they don't handle ++ filenames that include path segments, they don't handle multiple ++ files, etc), but you get the idea: you can pass arguments to macros, ++ they can check them and make other kinds of decisions, and the ++ commands themselves are relatively intuitive and intelligible. ++ ++ If you put the above lines into your initialization or customization ++ file, you'll have MYDELETE and MYUNDELETE commands available every ++ time you start Kermit, at least as long as you don't suppress ++ execution of the initialization file. (Exercise for the reader: Make ++ these macros generally useful: remove limitations, add trashcan ++ display, browsing, emptying, etc.) ++ ++ Kerbang scripts execute without the initialization file. This to keep ++ them portable and also to make them start faster. If you want to write ++ Kerbang scripts that depend on the initialization file, include the ++ command ++ ++ take \v(home).kermrc ++ ++ at the desired spot in the script. By the way, \v(xxx) is a built-in ++ variable (xxx is the variable name, "home" in this case). To see what ++ built-in variables are available, type "show variables" at the ++ C-Kermit prompt. To see what else you can show, type "show ?". \m(xxx) ++ is a user defined variable (strictly speaking, it is a macro used as a ++ variable). ++ ++ Command List ++ ++ C-Kermit has more than 200 top-level commands, and some of these, such ++ as SET, branch off into hundreds of subcommands of their own, so it's ++ not practical to describe them all here. Instead, here's a concise ++ list of the most commonly used top-level commands, grouped by ++ category. To learn about each command, type "help" followed by the ++ command name, e.g. "help set". Terms such as Command state and Connect ++ state are explained in subsequent sections. ++ ++ Optional fields are shown in [ italicized brackets ]. filename means ++ the name of a single file. filespec means a file specification that is ++ allowed to contain wildcard characters like '*' to match groups of ++ files. options are (optional) switches like /PAGE, /NOPAGE, /QUIET, ++ etc, listed in the HELP text for each command. Example: ++ ++ send /recursive /larger:10000 /after:-1week /except:*.txt * ++ ++ which can be read as "send all the files in this directory and all the ++ ones underneath it that are larger than 10000 bytes, no more than one ++ week old, and whose names don't end with ".txt". ++ ++ Basic Commands ++ HELP Requests top-level help. ++ HELP command Requests help about the given command. ++ INTRODUCTION Requests a brief introduction to C-Kermit. ++ LICENSE Displays the C-Kermit software copyright and license. ++ VERSION Displays C-Kermit's version number. ++ EXIT [ number ] Exits from Kermit with the given status code. ++ Synonyms: QUIT, E, Q. ++ TAKE filename [ parameters... ] Executes commands from the ++ given file. ++ LOG item [ filename ] Keeps a log of the given item in the ++ given file. ++ [ DO ] macro [ parameters... ] Executes commands from the ++ given macro. ++ SET parameter value Sets the given parameter to the given ++ value. ++ SHOW category Shows settings in a given category. ++ STATUS Tells whether previous command succeeded or failed. ++ DATE [ date-and/or-time ] Shows current date-time or interprets ++ given date-time. ++ RUN [ extern-command [ parameters... ] Runs the given external ++ command. Synonym: !. ++ EXEC [ extern-command [ params... ] Kermit overlays itself with ++ the given command. ++ SUSPEND Stops Kermit and puts it in the background. Synonym: Z. ++ ++ Local File Management ++ TYPE [ options ] filename Displays the contents of the given ++ file. ++ MORE [ options ] filename Equivalent to TYPE /PAGE (pause after ++ each screenful). ++ CAT [ options ] filename Equivalent to TYPE /NOPAGE. ++ HEAD [ options ] filename Displays the first few lines of a ++ given file. ++ TAIL [ options ] filename Displays the last few lines of a ++ given file. ++ GREP [ options ] pattern filespec Displays lines from files ++ that match the pattern. Synonym: FIND. ++ DIRECTORY [ options ] [ filespec ] Lists files (built-in, many ++ options). ++ LS [ options ] [ filespec ] Lists files (runs external "ls" ++ command). ++ DELETE [ options ] [ filespec ] Deletes files. Synonym: RM. ++ PURGE [ options ] [ filespec ] Removes backup (*.~n~) files. ++ COPY [ options ] [ filespecs... ] Copies files. Synonym: CP. ++ RENAME [ options ] [ filespecs... ] Renames files. Synonym: MV. ++ CHMOD [ options ] [ filespecs... ] Changes permissions of ++ files. ++ TRANSLATE filename charsets filename ] Converts file's ++ character set. Synonym: XLATE. ++ CD Changes your working directory to your home directory. ++ CD directory Changes your working directory to the one given. ++ CDUP Changes your working directory one level up. ++ PWD Displays your working directory. ++ BACK Returns to your previous working directory. ++ MKDIR [ directory ] Creates a directory. ++ RMDIR [ directory ] Removes a directory. ++ ++ Making Connections ++ SET LINE [ options ] devicename Opens the named serial ++ port. Synonym: SET PORT. ++ OPEN LINE [ options ] devicename Same as SET LINE. Synonym: ++ OPEN PORT. ++ SET MODEM TYPE [ name ] Tells Kermit what kind of modem is on ++ the port. ++ DIAL [ number ] Tells Kermit to dial the given phone number ++ with the modem. ++ REDIAL Redials the most recently dialed phone number. ++ ANSWER Waits for and answers an incoming call on the modem. ++ AUTHENTICATE [ parameters... ] Performs secure authentication ++ on a TCP/IP connection. ++ SET NETWORK TYPE { TCP/IP, X.25, ... } Selects network type for ++ subsequent SET HOST commands. ++ SET HOST [ options ] host [ port ] Opens a network connection ++ to the given host and port. ++ SET HOST [ options ] * port Waits for an incoming TCP/IP ++ connection on the given port. ++ TELNET [ options ] host Opens a Telnet connection to the host ++ and enters Connect state. ++ RLOGIN [ options ] host Opens an Rlogin connection to the host ++ and enters Connect state. ++ IKSD [ options ] host Opens a connection to an Internet Kermit ++ Service. ++ SSH [ options ] host Opens an SSH connection to the host and ++ enters Connect state. ++ FTP OPEN host [ options ] Opens an FTP connection to the host. ++ HTTP [ options ] OPEN host Opens an HTTP connection to the ++ host. ++ PTY external-command Runs the command on a pseudoterminal as if ++ it were a connection. ++ PIPE external-command Runs the command through a pipe as if it ++ were a connection. ++ ++ Using Connections ++ CONNECT [ options ] Enters Connect ++ (terminal) state. Synonym: C. ++ REDIRECT command Redirects the given external command over the ++ connection. ++ TELOPT command Sends a Telnet protocol command (Telnet ++ connections only). ++ Ctrl-\C "Escapes back" from Connect state to Command state. ++ Ctrl-\B (In Connect state) Sends a BREAK signal (serial or ++ Telnet). ++ Ctrl-\! (In Connect state) Enters inferior shell; "exit" to ++ return. ++ Ctrl-\? (In Connect state) Shows a menu of other escape-level ++ options. ++ Ctrl-\Ctrl-\ (In Connect state) Type two Ctrl-Backslashes to ++ send one of them. ++ SET ESCAPE [ character ] Changes Kermit's Connect-state escape ++ character. ++ ++ Closing Connections ++ HANGUP Hangs up the currently open serial-port or network ++ connection. ++ CLOSE Closes the currently open serial-port or network ++ connection. ++ SET LINE (with no devicename) Closes the currently ++ open serial-port or network connection. ++ SET HOST (with no hostname) Closes the currently open ++ serial-port or network connection. ++ FTP CLOSE Closes the currently open FTP connection. ++ HTTP CLOSE Closes the currently open HTTP connection. ++ EXIT Also closes all connections. Synonym: QUIT. ++ SET EXIT WARNING OFF Suppresses warning about open connections ++ on exit or close. ++ ++ File Transfer ++ SEND [ options ] filename [ as-name ] Sends the given file. ++ Synonym: S. ++ SEND [ options ] filespec Sends all files that match. ++ RESEND [ options ] filespec Resumes an interupted SEND from the ++ point of failure. ++ RECEIVE [ options ] [ as-name ] Waits passively for files to ++ arrive. Synonym: R. ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS [ filename ] Keeps a record of file transfers. ++ FAST Use fast file-transfer settings (default). ++ CAUTIOUS Use cautious and less fast file-transfer settings. ++ ROBUST Use ultra-conservative and slow file-transfer settings. ++ STATISTICS [ options ] Gives statistics about the most recent ++ file transfer. ++ WHERE After transfer: "Where did my files go?". ++ TRANSMIT [ options ] [ filename ] Sends file without protocol. ++ Synonym: XMIT. ++ LOG SESSION [ filename ] Captures remote text or files without ++ protocol. ++ SET PROTOCOL [ name... ] Tells Kermit to use an external ++ file-transfer protocol. ++ FTP { PUT, MPUT, GET, MGET, ... } FTP client commands. ++ HTTP { PUT, GET, HEAD, POST, ... } HTTP client commands. ++ ++ Kermit Server ++ ENABLE, DISABLE Controls which features ++ can be used by clients. ++ SET SERVER Sets parameters prior to entering Server state. ++ SERVER Enters Server state. ++ ++ Client of Kermit or FTP Server ++ [ REMOTE ] LOGIN [ user password ] Logs in to a Kermit server ++ or IKSD that requires it. ++ [ REMOTE ] LOGOUT Logs out from a Kermit server or IKSD. ++ SEND [ options ] filename [ as-name ] Sends the given file to ++ the server. Synonyms: S, PUT. ++ SEND [ options ] filespec Sends all files that match. ++ RESEND [ options ] filespec Resumes an interupted SEND from the ++ point of failure. ++ GET [ options ] remote-filespec Asks the server to send the ++ given files. Synonym: G. ++ REGET [ options ] remote-filespec Resumes an interrupted GET ++ from the point of failure. ++ REMOTE CD [ directory ] Asks server to change its working ++ directory. Synonym: RCD. ++ REMOTE PWD [ directory ] Asks server to display its working ++ directory. Synonym: RPWD. ++ REMOTE DIRECTORY [ filespec... ] Asks server to send a ++ directory listing. Synonym: RDIR. ++ REMOTE DELETE [ filespec... ] Asks server to delete files. ++ Synonym: RDEL. ++ REMOTE [ command... ] (Many other commands: "remote ?" for a ++ list). ++ MAIL [ options ] filespec Sends file(s) to be delivered as ++ e-mail (Kermit only). ++ FINISH Asks the server to exit server state (Kermit only). ++ BYE Asks the server to log out and close the connection. ++ ++ Script Programming ++ DEFINE, DECLARE, UNDEFINE, UNDECLARE, ASSIGN, EVALUATE, ++ SEXPRESSION, ARRAY, SORT, INPUT, OUTPUT, IF, FOR, WHILE, ++ SWITCH, GOTO, ECHO, ASK, GETC, GETOK, ASSERT, WAIT, SLEEP, ++ FOPEN, FREAD, FWRITE, FCLOSE, STOP, END, RETURN, LEARN, SHIFT, ++ TRACE, VOID, INCREMENT, DECREMENT, ... For these and many more ++ you'll need to consult the [68]manual and supplements, and/or ++ visit the [69]Kermit Script Library, which also includes a ++ brief tutorial. Hint: HELP LEARN to find out how to get Kermit ++ to write simple scripts for you. ++ ++ Many of Kermit's commands have synonyms, variants, relatives, and so ++ on. For example, MSEND is a version of SEND that accepts a list of ++ file specifications to be sent, rather than just one file ++ specification, and MPUT is a synonym of MSEND. MOVE means to SEND and ++ then DELETE the source file if successful. MMOVE is like MOVE, but ++ accepts a list of filespecs, and so on. These are described in the ++ [70]full documentation. ++ ++ Use question mark to feel your way through an unfamiliar command, as ++ in this example (the part you type is underlined): ++ ++ C-Kermit> remote ? One of the following: ++ assign delete help login print rename space ++ cd directory host logout pwd rmdir type ++ copy exit kermit mkdir query set who ++ C-Kermit> remote set ? One of the following: ++ attributes file retry transfer ++ block-check receive server window ++ C-Kermit> remote set file ? One of the following: ++ character-set incomplete record-length ++ collision names type ++ C-Kermit> remote set file names ? One of the following: ++ converted literal ++ C-Kermit> remote set file names literal ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ This is called menu on demand: you get a menu when you want one, but ++ menus are not forced on you even when know what you're doing. Note ++ that you can also abbreviate most keywords, and you can complete them ++ with the Tab or Esc key. Also note that ? works for filenames too, and ++ that you can use it in the middle of a keyword or filename, not just ++ at the beginning. For example, "send x?" lists all the files in the ++ current directory whose names start with 'x'. ++ ++ [ [71]Kermit Home ] [ [72]C-Kermit Home ] [ [73]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ INITIALIZATION FILE [ [74]Top ] [ [75]Contents ] [ [76]Next ] [ [77]Previous ++ ] ++ ++ In its default configuration, C-Kermit executes commands from a file ++ called .kermrc in your home directory when it starts, unless it is ++ given the -Y or -y command-line option. Custom configurations might ++ substitute a shared system-wide initialization file. The SHOW FILE ++ command tells what initialization file, if any, was used. The standard ++ initialization file "chains" to an individual customization file, ++ .mykermc, in the home directory, in which each user can establish ++ her/his own preferences, define macros, and so on. ++ ++ Since execution of the initialization file (at least the standard one) ++ makes C-Kermit take longer to start, it might be better not to have an ++ initialization file, especially now that Kermit's default startup ++ configuration is well attuned to modern computing and networking -- in ++ other words, you no longer have do anything special to make Kermit ++ transfers go fast. So instead of having an initialization file that is ++ executed every time Kermit starts, you might consider making one or ++ more kerbang scripts (with names other that .kermrc) that do NOT ++ include an "exit" command, and invoke those when you need the ++ settings, macro definitions, and/or scripted actions they contain, and ++ invoke C-Kermit directly when you don't. ++ ++ To put it another way... We still distribute the standard ++ initialization file since it's featured in the manual and backwards ++ compatibility is important to us. But there's no harm in not using it ++ if you don't need the stuff that's in it (services directory, dialing ++ directory, network directory, and associated macro definitions). On ++ the other hand, if there are settings or macros you want in effect ++ EVERY time you use Kermit, the initialization file (or the ++ customization file it chains to) is the place to put them, because ++ that's the only place Kermit looks for them automatically each time ++ you start it. ++ ++ [ [78]Kermit Home ] [ [79]C-Kermit Home ] [ [80]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ MODES OF OPERATION [ [81]Top ] [ [82]Contents ] [ [83]Next ] [ [84]Previous ] ++ ++ Kermit is said to be in Local mode if it has made a connection to ++ another computer, e.g. by dialing it or establishing a Telnet ++ connection to it. The other computer is remote, so if you start ++ another copy of Kermit on the remote computer, it is said to be in ++ Remote mode (as long as it has not made any connections of its own). ++ The local Kermit communicates over the communications device or ++ network connection, acting as a conduit between the the remote ++ computer and your keyboard and screen. The remote Kermit is the ++ file-transfer partner to the local Kermit and communicates only ++ through its standard input and output. ++ ++ At any moment, a Kermit program can be in any of the following states. ++ It's important to know what they are and how to change from one to the ++ other. ++ ++ Command state ++ ++ In this state, Kermit reads commands from: ++ ++ + Your keyboard; or: ++ + A file, or: ++ + A macro definition. ++ ++ You can exit from Command state back to Unix with the EXIT or ++ QUIT command (same thing). You can enter Connect state with any ++ of various commands (CONNECT, DIAL, TELNET, etc). You can enter ++ file transfer state with commands like SEND, RECEIVE, and GET. ++ You can enter Server state with the SERVER command. The TAKE ++ command tells Kermit to read and execute commands from a file. ++ The (perhaps implied) DO command tells Kermit to read and ++ execute commands from a macro definition. While in Command ++ state, you can interrupt any command, macro, or command file by ++ typing Ctrl-C (hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key); ++ this normally brings you back to the prompt. ++ ++ Shell state ++ ++ You can invoke an inferior shell or external command from the ++ Kermit command prompt by using the PUSH, RUN (!), EDIT, or ++ BROWSE command. While the inferior shell or command is active, ++ Kermit is suspended and does nothing. Return to Kermit Command ++ state by exiting from the inferior shell or application. ++ ++ Connect state ++ ++ In this state, which can be entered only when in Local mode ++ (i.e. when Kermit has made a connection to another computer), ++ Kermit is acting as a terminal to the remote computer. Your ++ keystrokes are sent to the remote computer and characters that ++ arrive over the communication connection are displayed on your ++ screen. This state is entered when you give a CONNECT, DIAL, ++ TELNET, RLOGIN, or IKSD command. You can return to command ++ state by logging out of the remote computer, or by typing: ++ ++ Ctrl-\c ++ ++ That is: Hold down the Ctrl key and press the backslash key, ++ then let go of the Ctrl key and press the C key. This is called ++ escaping back. Certain other escape-level commands are also ++ provided; type Ctrl-\? for a list. For example, you can enter ++ Shell state with: ++ ++ Ctrl-\! ++ ++ To send a Ctrl-\ to the host while in Connect state, type two ++ of them in a row. See HELP CONNECT and HELP SET ESCAPE for more ++ info. ++ ++ Local file-transfer state ++ ++ In this state, Kermit is sending packets back and forth with ++ the other computer in order to transfer a file or accomplish ++ some other file-related task. And at the same time, it is ++ displaying its progress on your screen and watching your ++ keyboard for interruptions. In this state, the following ++ single-keystroke commands are accepted: ++ ++ X Interrupt the current file and go on to the next (if any). ++ Z Interrupt the current file and skip all the rest. ++ E Like Z but uses a "stronger" protocol (use if X or Z don't ++ work). ++ Ctrl-C Interrupt file-transfer mode (use if Z or E don't ++ work). ++ ++ Kermit returns to its previous state (Command or Connect) when ++ the transfer is complete or when interrupted successfully by X, ++ Z, E, or Ctrl-C (hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key). ++ ++ Remote file-transfer state ++ ++ In this state, Kermit is exchanging file-transfer packets with ++ its local partner over its standard i/o. It leaves this state ++ automatically when the transfer is complete. In case you find ++ your local Kermit in Connect state and the remote one in ++ File-transfer state (in which it seems to ignore your ++ keystrokes), you can usually return it to command state by ++ typing three Ctrl-C's in a row. If that doesn't work, return ++ your local Kermit to Command state (Ctrl-\ C) and type ++ "e-packet" and then press the Return or Enter key; this forces ++ a fatal Kermit protocol error. ++ ++ Remote Server state ++ ++ This is like Remote File-transfer state, except it never ++ returns automatically to Command state. Rather, it awaits ++ further instructions from the client program; that is, from ++ your Local Kermit program. You can return the Remote Server to ++ its previous state by issuing a "finish" command to the client, ++ or if you are in Connect state, by typing three Ctrl-C's in a ++ row. You can tell the server job to log out and break the ++ connection by issuing a "bye" command to the client. ++ ++ Local Server state ++ ++ Like Remote-Server state, but in local mode, and therefore with ++ its file-transfer display showing, and listening for single-key ++ commands, as in Local File-transfer state. Usually this state ++ is entered automatically when a remote Kermit program gives a ++ GET command. ++ ++ C-Kermit, Kermit 95, and MS-DOS Kermit all can switch automatically ++ from Connect state to Local File-transfer state when you initiate a ++ file transfer from the remote computer by starting Kermit and telling ++ it to send or get a file, in which case, Connect state is ++ automatically resumed after the file transfer is finished. ++ ++ Note that C-Kermit is not a terminal emulator. It is a communications ++ application that you run in a terminal window (e.g. console or Xterm). ++ The specific emulation, such as VT100, VT220, Linux Console, or Xterm, ++ is provided by the terminal window in which you are running C-Kermit. ++ Kermit 95 and MS-DOS Kermit, on the other hand, are true terminal ++ emulators. Why is C-Kermit not a terminal emulator? [85]CLICK HERE to ++ read about it. ++ ++ [ [86]Kermit Home ] [ [87]C-Kermit Home ] [ [88]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ MAKING CONNECTIONS [ [89]Top ] [ [90]Contents ] [ [91]Next ] [ [92]Previous ] ++ ++ Here is how to make different kinds of connections using interactive ++ Kermit commands (as noted above, you can also make connections with ++ command-line options). Note that you don't have to make connections ++ with Kermit. It can also be used on the far end of a connection as the ++ remote file transfer and management partner of your local ++ communications software. ++ ++ Making a Telnet Connection ++ ++ At the C-Kermit command prompt, simply type: ++ ++ telnet foo.bar.com ; Substitute desired host name or address. ++ telnet xyzcorp.com 3000 ; You can also include a port number. ++ ++ If the connection is successful, Kermit automically enters ++ Connect state. When you logout from the remote host, Kermit ++ automatically returns to its prompt. More info: HELP TELNET, ++ HELP SET TELNET, HELP SET TELOPT. Also see the [93]IKSD section ++ below. ++ ++ Making an Rlogin connection ++ ++ This is just like Telnet, except you have to be root to do it ++ because Rlogin uses a privileged TCP port: ++ ++ rlogin foo.bar.com ; Substitute desired host name or address. ++ ++ More info: HELP RLOGIN. ++ ++ Making an SSH Connection ++ ++ Unlike Telnet and Rlogin, SSH connections are not built-in, but ++ handled by running your external SSH client through a ++ pseudoterminal. Using C-Kermit to control the SSH client gives ++ you all of Kermit's features (file transfer, character-set ++ conversion, scripting, etc) over SSH. ++ ++ ssh foo.bar.com ; Substitute desired host name or address. ++ ++ More info: HELP SSH, HELP SET SSH. ++ ++ Dialing with a Modem ++ ++ If it's an external modem, make sure it is connected to a ++ usable serial port on your computer with a regular ++ (straight-through) modem cable, and to the telephone jack with ++ a telephone cable, and that it's turned on. Then use these ++ commands: ++ ++ set modem type usrobotics ; Or other supported type ++ set line /dev/ttyS0 ; Specify device name ++ set speed 57600 ; Or other desired speed ++ set flow rts/cts ; Most modern modems support this ++ set dial method tone ; (or pulse) ++ dial 7654321 ; Dial the desired number ++ ++ Type "set modem type ?" for a list of supported modem types. If ++ you omit the SET MODEM TYPE command, the default type is ++ "generic-high-speed", which should work for most modern ++ AT-command-set modems. If the line is busy, Kermit redials ++ automatically. If the call does not succeed, use "set dial ++ display on" and try it again to watch what happens. If the call ++ succeeds, Kermit enters Connect state automatically and returns ++ to its prompt automatically when you log out from the remote ++ computer or the connection is otherwise lost. ++ ++ You can also dial from a modem that is accessible by Telnet, ++ e.g. to a reverse terminal server. In this case the command ++ sequence is: ++ ++ set host ts.xxx.com 2000 ; Terminal-server and port ++ set modem type usrobotics ; Or other supported type ++ set dial method tone ; (or pulse) ++ dial 7654321 ; Dial the desired number ++ ++ If the terminal server supports the Telnet Com Port Option, ++ [94]RFC 2217, you can also give serial-port related commands ++ such as SET SPEED, SET PARITY, and so on, and Kermit relays ++ them to the terminal server using the protocol specified in the ++ RFC. ++ ++ More info: HELP SET MODEM, HELP SET LINE, HELP SET SPEED, HELP ++ SET FLOW, HELP DIAL, HELP SET DIAL, HELP SET MODEM, HELP SET ++ CARRIER-WATCH, SHOW COMMUNICATIONS, SHOW MODEM, SHOW DIAL. ++ ++ Direct Serial Port ++ ++ Connect the two computers, A and B, with a null modem cable (or ++ two modem cables interconnected with a null-modem adapter or ++ modem eliminator). From Computer A: ++ ++ set modem type none ; There is no modem ++ set line /dev/ttyS0 ; Specify device name ++ set carrier-watch off ; If DTR and CD are not cross-connected ++ set speed 57600 ; Or other desired speed ++ set flow rts/cts ; If RTS and CTS are cross-connected ++ set flow xon/xoff ; If you can't use RTS/CTS ++ set parity even ; (or "mark" or "space", if necessary) ++ set stop-bits 2 ; (rarely necessary) ++ connect ; Enter Connect (terminal) state ++ ++ This assumes Computer B is set up to let you log in. If it ++ isn't, you can run a copy of Kermit on Computer B and follow ++ approximately the same directions. More info: As above plus ++ HELP CONNECT. ++ ++ With modems or direct serial connections, you might also have to "set ++ parity even" (or "mark" or "space") if it's a 7-bit connection. ++ ++ Of the connection types listed above, only one can be open at a time. ++ However, any one of these can be open concurrently with an [95]FTP or ++ HTTP session. Each connection type can be customized to any desired ++ degree, scripted, logged, you name it. See the manual. ++ ++ NOTE: On selected platforms, C-Kermit also can make X.25 connections. ++ See the manual for details. ++ ++ [ [96]Kermit Home ] [ [97]C-Kermit Home ] [ [98]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ TRANSFERRING FILES WITH KERMIT [ [99]Top ] [ [100]Contents ] [ [101]Next ] [ ++ [102]Previous ] ++ ++ * [103]Downloading Files ++ * [104]Uploading Files ++ * [105]Kermit Transfers the Old-Fashioned Way ++ * [106]If File Transfer Fails ++ * [107]Advanced Kermit File Transfer Features ++ * [108]Non-Kermit File Transfer ++ ++ There is a [109]widespread and persistent belief that Kermit is a slow ++ protocol. This is because, until recently, it used conservative tuning ++ by default to make sure file transfers succeeded, rather than failing ++ because they overloaded the connection. Some extra commands (or ++ command-line options, like -Q) were needed to make it go fast, but ++ nobody bothered to find out about them. Also, it takes two to tango: ++ most non-Kermit-Project Kermit protocol implementations really ARE ++ slow. The best file-transfer partners for C-Kermit are: another copy ++ of [110]C-Kermit (7.0 or later) and [111]Kermit 95. These combinations ++ work well and they work fast by default. MS-DOS Kermit is good too, ++ but you have to tell it to go fast (by giving it the FAST command). ++ ++ Furthermore, all three of these Kermit programs support "autodownload" ++ and "autoupload", meaning that when they are in Connect state and a ++ Kermit packet comes in from the remote, they automatically switch into ++ file transfer mode. ++ ++ And plus, C-Kermit and K95 also switch automatically between text and ++ binary mode for each file, so there is no need to "set file type ++ binary" or "set file type text", or to worry about files being ++ corrupted because they were transferred in the wrong mode. ++ ++ What all of these words add up to is that now, when you use up-to-date ++ Kermit software from the Kermit Project, file transfer is not only ++ fast, it's ridiculously easy. You barely have to give any commands at ++ all. ++ ++ Downloading Files ++ ++ Let's say you have [112]Kermit 95, [113]C-Kermit, or ++ [114]MS-DOS Kermit on your desktop computer, with a connection ++ to a Unix computer that has C-Kermit installed as "kermit". To ++ download a file (send it from Unix to your desktop computer), ++ just type the following command at your Unix shell prompt: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.txt ++ ++ (where oofa.txt is the filename). If you want to send more than ++ one file, you can put as many filenames as you want on the ++ command line, and they can be any combination of text and ++ binary: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.txt oofa.zip oofa.html oofa.tar.gz ++ ++ and/or you can use wildcards to send groups of files: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.* ++ ++ If you want to send a file under an assumed name, use: ++ ++ kermit -s friday.txt -a today.txt ++ ++ This sends the file friday.txt but tells the receiving Kermit ++ that its name is today.txt. In all cases, as noted, when the ++ file transfer is finished, your desktop Kermit returns ++ automatically to Connect state. No worries about escaping back, ++ re-connecting, text/binary mode switching. Almost too easy, ++ right? ++ ++ Uploading Files ++ ++ To upload files (send them from your desktop computer to the ++ remote Unix computer) do the same thing, but use the -g (GET) ++ option instead of -s: ++ ++ kermit -g oofa.txt ++ ++ This causes your local Kermit to enter server mode; then the ++ remote Kermit program requests the named file and the local ++ Kermit sends it and returns automatically to Connect state when ++ done. ++ ++ If you want to upload multiple files, you have have use shell ++ quoting rules, since these aren't local files: ++ ++ kermit -g "oofa.txt oofa.zip oofa.html oofa.tar.gz" ++ kermit -g "oofa.*" ++ ++ If you want to upload a file but store it under a different ++ name, use: ++ ++ kermit -g friday.txt -a today.txt ++ ++ Kermit Transfers the Old-Fashioned Way ++ ++ If your desktop communications software does not support ++ autoupload or autodownload, or it does not include Kermit ++ server mode, the procedure requires more steps. ++ ++ To download a file, type: ++ ++ kermit -s filename ++ ++ on the host as before, but if nothing happens automatically in ++ response to this command, you have to switch your desktop ++ communications software into Kermit Receive state. This might ++ be done by escaping back using keyboard characters or hot keys ++ (Alt-x is typical) and/or with a command (like RECEIVE) or a ++ menu. When the file transfer is complete, you have to go back ++ to Connect state, Terminal emulation, or whatever terminology ++ applies to your desktop communications software. ++ ++ To upload a file, type: ++ ++ kermit -r ++ ++ on the host (rather than "kermit -g"). This tells C-Kermit to ++ wait passively for a file to start arriving. Then regain the ++ attention of your desktop software (Alt-x or whatever) and ++ instruct it to send the desired file(s) with Kermit protocol. ++ When the transfer is finished, return to the Connect or ++ Terminal screen. ++ ++ If File Transfer Fails ++ ++ Although every aspect of Kermit's operation can be finely ++ tuned, there are also three short and simple "omnibus tuning" ++ commands you can use for troubleshooting: ++ ++ FAST ++ Use fast file-transfer settings. This has been the ++ default since C-Kermit 7.0 now that most modern computers ++ and connections support it. If transfers fail with fast ++ settings, try . . . ++ ++ CAUTIOUS ++ Use cautious but not paranoid settings. File transfers, ++ if they work, will go at medium speed. If not, try . . . ++ ++ ROBUST ++ Use the most robust, resilient, conservative, safe, and ++ reliable settings. File transfers will almost certainly ++ work, but they will be quite slow (of course this is a ++ classic tradeoff; ROBUST was C-Kermit's default tuning in ++ versions 6.0 and earlier, which made everybody think ++ Kermit protocol was slow). If ROBUST doesn't do the ++ trick, try again with SET PARITY SPACE first in case it's ++ not an 8-bit connection. ++ ++ Obviously the success and performance of a file transfer also ++ depends on C-Kermit's file transfer partner. Up-to-date, real ++ [115]Kermit Project partners are recommended because they ++ contain the best Kermit protocol implementations and because ++ [116]we can support them in case of trouble. ++ ++ If you still have trouble, consult Chapter 10 of [117]Using ++ C-Kermit, or send email to [118]kermit-support@columbia.edu. ++ ++ Advanced Kermit File-Transfer Features ++ ++ Obviously there is a lot more to Kermit file transfer, ++ including all sorts of interactive commands, preferences, ++ options, logging, debugging, troubleshooting, and anything else ++ you can imagine but that's what the [119]manual and updates are ++ for. Here are a few topics you can explore if you're interested ++ by Typing HELP for the listed commands: ++ ++ Logging transfers: ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS (HELP LOG) ++ ++ Automatic per-file text/binary mode switching: ++ SET TRANSFER MODE { AUTOMATIC, MANUAL } (HELP SET ++ TRANSFER). ++ ++ Cross-platform recursive directory tree transfer: ++ SEND /RECURSIVE, GET /RECURSIVE (HELP SEND, HELP GET). ++ ++ File collision options: ++ SET FILE COLLISION { OVERWRITE, BACKUP, DISCARD, ... } ++ (HELP SET FILE). ++ ++ Update mode (only transfer files that changed since last time): ++ SET FILE COLLISION UPDATE (HELP SET FILE). ++ ++ Filename selection patterns: ++ (HELP WILDCARD). ++ ++ Flexible file selection: ++ SEND (or GET) /BEFORE /AFTER /LARGER /SMALLER /TYPE ++ /EXCEPT, ... ++ ++ Character-set conversion: ++ SET { FILE, TRANSFER } CHARACTER-SET, ASSOCIATE, ... ++ ++ File/Pathname control: ++ SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PATHNAMES, SET FILE NAMES. ++ ++ Atomic file movement: ++ SEND (or GET) /DELETE /RENAME /MOVE-TO ++ ++ Transferring to/from standard i/o of other commands: ++ SEND (or GET) /COMMAND ++ ++ Recovery of interrupted transfer from point of failure: ++ RESEND, REGET (HELP RESEND, HELP REGET). ++ ++ Non-Kermit File Transfer ++ ++ You can also use C-Kermit to transfer files with FTP or HTTP ++ Internet protocols; [120]see below. ++ ++ On a regular serial or Telnet connection where the other ++ computer doesn't support Kermit protocol at all, you have ++ several options. For example, if your desktop communications ++ software supports Zmodem, use "rz" and "sz" on the host rather ++ than Kermit. But if Kermit is your desktop software, and you ++ are using it to make calls or network connections to other ++ computers that don't support Kermit protocol (or that don't ++ have a good implementation of it), then if your computer also ++ has external X, Y, or Zmodem programs that are redirectable, ++ Kermit can use them as external protocols. HELP SET PROTOCOL ++ for details. ++ ++ You can also capture "raw" data streams from the other computer ++ with LOG SESSION (HELP LOG and HELP SET SESSION-LOG for ++ details), and you can upload files without any protocol at all ++ with TRANSMIT (HELP TRANSMIT, HELP SET TRANSMIT). ++ ++ [ [121]Kermit Home ] [ [122]C-Kermit Home ] [ [123]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ KERMIT CLIENT/SERVER CONNECTIONS [ [124]Top ] [ [125]Contents ] [ [126]Next ] ++ [ [127]Previous ] ++ ++ On any kind of connection you can make with Kermit -- serial, TCP/IP, ++ X.25, etc -- you can set up a convenient client/server relationship ++ between your Kermit client (the one that made the connection) and the ++ Kermit program on the far end of the connection (the remote Kermit) by ++ putting the remote Kermit in server mode. This is normally done by ++ giving it a SERVER command, or by starting it with the -x command-line ++ option. In some cases ([128]Internet Kermit Service, SSH connections ++ to a Kermit subsystem, or specially configured hosts), there is ++ already a Kermit server waiting on the far end. Here is a quick ++ synopsis of the commands you can give to the client for interacting ++ with the server: ++ ++ SEND [ switches ] filename ++ Sends the named file to the server. The filename can include ++ wildcards. Lots of switches are available for file selection, ++ etc. Type HELP SEND at the client prompt for details. ++ ++ GET [ switches ] filename ++ Asks the server to send the named file. The filename can ++ include wildcards. Type HELP GET at the client prompt for ++ details. ++ ++ BYE ++ Terminates the server and closes your connection to it. ++ ++ FINISH ++ Terminates the server. If you started the server yourself, this ++ leaves the remote host at its shell prompt. If it was a ++ dedicated server (such as IKSD or an SSH subsystem), FINISH is ++ equivalent to BYE. ++ ++ SET LOCUS { LOCAL, REMOTE, AUTO } ++ (C-Kermit 8.0.201 and later, K95 1.1.21 and later) This tells ++ the client whether file-management commands like CD, PWD, ++ DIRECTORY, DELETE, MKDIR, etc, should be executed locally or by ++ the server. In this type of connection, the default is LOCAL. ++ Use SET LOCUS REMOTE if you want Kermit to behave like an FTP ++ client, in which case these commands are executed remotely, and ++ their local versions must have an L prefix: LCD, LPWD, ++ LDIRECTORY, etc. When LOCUS is LOCAL, then the remote versions ++ must have an R prefix: RCD, RPWD, RDIRECTORY, etc. HELP SET ++ LOCUS for details. SHOW COMMAND to see current locus. ++ ++ The following commands are affected by SET LOCUS: ++ ++ CD, LCD, RCD ++ Change (working, current) directory. HELP CD for details. ++ ++ CDUP, LCDUP, RCDUP ++ CD one level up. ++ ++ DIRECTORY, LDIRECTORY, RDIRECTORY ++ Produce a directory listing. Many options are available for local ++ listings. HELP DIRECTORY for details. ++ ++ DELETE, LDELETE, RDELETE ++ Deletes files or directories. Many options available, HELP DELETE. ++ ++ RENAME, LRENAME, RRENAME ++ Renames files or directories. Many options available, HELP RENAME. ++ ++ MKDIR, LMKDIR, RMKDIR ++ Creates a directory. HELP MKDIR. ++ ++ RMDIR, LRMDIR, RRMDIR ++ Removes a directory. HELP RMDIR. There are dozens -- maybe hundreds -- ++ of other commands, described in the built-in help, on the website, ++ and/or in the published or online manuals. But even if you don't have ++ access to documentation, you can "set locus remote" and then use ++ pretty much the same commands you would use with any FTP client. ++ ++ [ [129]Kermit Home ] [ [130]C-Kermit Home ] [ [131]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ KERMIT'S BUILT-IN FTP AND HTTP CLIENTS [ [132]Top ] [ [133]Contents ] [ ++ [134]Next ] [ [135]Previous ] ++ ++ Kermit's FTP client is like the regular Unix FTP client that you're ++ used to, but with some differences: ++ ++ * It has lots more commands and features. ++ * You can have an FTP session and a regular Kermit serial or Telnet ++ session open at the same time. ++ * FTP sessions can be fully automated. ++ ++ By default Kermit's FTP client tries its best to present the same user ++ interface as a regular FTP client: PUT, GET, DIR, CD, BYE, etc, should ++ work the same, even though some of these commands have different ++ meaning in Kermit-to-Kermit connections; for example, CD, DIR, RENAME, ++ etc, in Kermit act locally, whereas in FTP they are commands for the ++ server. This might cause some confusion, but as in all things Kermit, ++ you have total control: ++ ++ * The [136]SET LOCUS command lets you specify where file management ++ commands should be executed -- locally or remotely -- for any kind ++ of connection. ++ * Any FTP command can be prefixed with the word "FTP" to remove any ++ ambiguity. ++ ++ Pending publication of the next edition of the manual, the Kermit FTP ++ client is thoroughly documented at the Kermit Project website: ++ ++ [137]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpclient.html ++ ++ You also can use HELP FTP and HELP SET FTP to get descriptions of ++ Kermit's FTP-related commands. ++ ++ The HTTP client is similar to the FTP one, except you prefix each ++ command with HTTP instead of FTP: HTTP OPEN, HTTP GET, HTTP PUT, HTTP ++ CLOSE, etc. Type HELP HTTP for details, or visit the to view the ++ [138]manual supplements. HTTP connections can be open at the same time ++ as regular serial or Telnet connections and FTP connections. So Kermit ++ can manage up to three types connections simultaneously. ++ ++ [ [139]Kermit Home ] [ [140]C-Kermit Home ] [ [141]C-Kermit FAQ ] [ ++ [142]FTP Client ] [ [143]HTTP Client ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ INTERNET KERMIT SERVICE [ [144]Top ] [ [145]Contents ] [ [146]Next ] [ ++ [147]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit can be configured and run as an Internet service (called ++ IKSD), similar to an FTP server (FTPD) except you can (but need not) ++ interact with it directly, plus it does a lot more than an FTP server ++ can do. The TCP port for IKSD is 1649. It uses Telnet protocol. ++ C-Kermit can be an Internet Kermit Server, or it can be a client of an ++ IKSD. You can make connections from C-Kermit to an IKSD with any of ++ the following commands: ++ ++ telnet foo.bar.edu 1649 ++ telnet foo.bar.edu kermit ; if "kermit" is listed in /etc/services ++ iksd foo.bar.edu ++ ++ The IKSD command is equivalent to a TELNET command specifying port ++ 1649. For more information about making and using connections to an ++ IKSD, see: ++ ++ [148]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/cuiksd.html ++ ++ You can run an Internet Kermit Service on your own computer too (if ++ you are the system administrator). For instructions, see: ++ ++ [149]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ ++ [ [150]Kermit Home ] [ [151]C-Kermit Home ] [ [152]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ SECURITY [ [153]Top ] [ [154]Contents ] [ [155]Next ] [ [156]Previous ] ++ ++ All of C-Kermit's built-in TCP/IP networking methods (Telnet, Rlogin, ++ IKSD, FTP, and HTTP) can be secured by one or more of the following ++ IETF-approved methods: ++ ++ * MIT Kerberos IV ++ * MIT Kerberos V ++ * SSL/TLS ++ * Stanford SRP ++ ++ For complete instructions see: ++ ++ [157]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ ++ And as noted previously, you can also make SSH connections with ++ C-Kermit if you already have an SSH client installed. ++ ++ [ [158]Kermit Home ] [ [159]C-Kermit Home ] [ [160]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ALTERNATIVE COMMAND-LINE PERSONALITIES [ [161]Top ] [ [162]Contents ] [ ++ [163]Next ] [ [164]Previous ] ++ ++ When invoked as "kermit" or any other name besides any of the special ++ ones, C-Kermit has the command-line options described above in the ++ [165]OPTIONS section. However, if you invoke C-Kermit using any of the ++ following names: ++ ++ telnet Telnet client ++ ftp FTP client ++ http HTTP client ++ https Secure HTTP client ++ ++ Kermit's command-line personality changes to match. This can be done ++ (among other ways) with symbolic links (symlinks). For example, if you ++ want C-Kermit to be your regular Telnet client, or the Telnet helper ++ of your Web browser, you can create a link like the following in a ++ directory that lies in your PATH ahead of the regular telnet program: ++ ++ ln -s /usr/local/bin/kermit telnet ++ ++ Now when you give a "telnet" command, you are invoking Kermit instead, ++ but with its Telnet command-line personality so, for example: ++ ++ telnet xyzcorp.com ++ ++ Makes a Telnet connection to xyzcorp.com, and Kermit exits ++ automatically when the connection is closed (just like the regular ++ Telnet client). Type "telnet -h" to get a list of Kermit's ++ Telnet-personality command-line options, which are intended to be as ++ compatible as possible with the regular Telnet client. ++ ++ Similarly for FTP: ++ ++ ln -s /usr/local/bin/kermit ftp ++ ++ And now type "ftp -h" to see its command-line options, and use command ++ lines just like you would give your regular FTP client: ++ ++ ftp -n xyzcorp.com ++ ++ but with additional options allowing an entire session to be specified ++ on the command line, as explained in the C-Kermit [166]FTP client ++ documentation. ++ ++ And similarly for HTTP: ++ ++ ln -s /usr/local/bin/kermit http ++ ./http -h ++ ./http www.columbia.edu -g kermit/index.html ++ ++ Finally, if Kermit's first command-line option is a Telnet, FTP, IKSD, ++ or HTTP URL, Kermit automatically makes the appropriate kind of ++ connection and, if indicated by the URL, takes the desired action: ++ ++ kermit telnet:xyzcorp.com ; Opens a Telnet session ++ kermit telnet://olga@xyzcorp.com ; Ditto for user olga ++ kermit ftp://olga@xyzcorp.com/public/oofa.zip ; Downloads a file ++ kermit kermit://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/READ.ME ; Ditto for IKSD ++ kermit iksd://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/READ.ME ; (This works too) ++ kermit http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ; Grabs a web page ++ kermit https://wwws.xyzcorp.com/secret/plan.html ; Grabs a secure web pag ++e ++ ++ [ [167]Kermit Home ] [ [168]C-Kermit Home ] [ [169]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ LICENSE [ [170]Top ] [ [171]Contents ] [ [172]Next ] [ [173]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit has an unusual license, but a fair and sensible one given ++ that the Kermit Project must support itself out of revenue: it's not a ++ BSD license, not GPL, not Artistic, not commercial, not shareware, not ++ freeware. It can be summed up like this: if you want C-Kermit for your ++ own use, you can download and use it without cost or license (but we'd ++ appreciate it if you would purchase the manual). But if you want to ++ sell C-Kermit or bundle it with a product or otherwise distribute it ++ in a commercial setting EXCEPT WITH AN OPEN-SOURCE OPERATING SYSTEM ++ DISTRIBUTION such as Linux, FreeBSD, NetBSD, or OpenBSD, you must ++ license it. To see the complete license, give the LICENSE command at ++ the prompt, or see the COPYING.TXT file distributed with C-Kermit 7.0 ++ or later, or download it from ++ [174]ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/COPYING.TXT. Send ++ licensing inquiries to [175]kermit@columbia.edu. ++ ++ [ [176]Kermit Home ] [ [177]C-Kermit Home ] [ [178]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ OTHER TOPICS [ [179]Top ] [ [180]Contents ] [ [181]Next ] [ [182]Previous ] ++ ++ There's way more to C-Kermit than we've touched on here -- ++ troubleshooting, customization, character sets, dialing directories, ++ sending pages, script writing, and on and on, all of which are covered ++ in the manual and updates and supplements. For the most up-to-date ++ information on documentation (or updated documentation itself) visit ++ the Kermit Project website: ++ ++ [183]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ ++ There you will also find [184]Kermit software packages for other ++ platforms: different Unix varieties, Windows, DOS, VMS, IBM ++ mainframes, and many others: 20+ years' worth. ++ ++ [ [185]Kermit Home ] [ [186]C-Kermit Home ] [ [187]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ DOCUMENTATION AND UPDATES [ [188]Top ] [ [189]Contents ] [ [190]Next ] [ ++ [191]Previous ] ++ ++ The manual for C-Kermit is: ++ ++ 1. Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, [192]Using C-Kermit, ++ Second Edition, Digital Press / Butterworth-Heinemann, Woburn, MA, ++ 1997, 622 pages, ISBN 1-55558-164-1. This is a printed book. It ++ covers C-Kermit 6.0. ++ 2. The C-Kermit 7.0 Supplement: ++ [193]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 3. The C-Kermit 8.0 Supplement: ++ [194]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ ++ The C-Kermit home page is here: ++ ++ [195]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ ++ Visit this page to learn about new versions, Beta tests, and other ++ news; to read case studies and tutorials; to download source code, ++ install packages, and [196]prebuilt binaries for many platforms. Also ++ visit: ++ ++ [197]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/scriptlib.html ++ The Kermit script library and tutorial ++ ++ [198]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/newfaq.html ++ The Kermit FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions about Kermit) ++ ++ [199]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ The C-Kermit FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions about C-Kermit) ++ ++ [200]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ The Kermit security reference. ++ ++ [201]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.html ++ C-Kermit Telnet client documentation. ++ ++ [202]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/studies.html ++ Case studies. ++ ++ [203]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ General C-Kermit Hints and Tips. ++ ++ [204]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ Unix C-Kermit Hints and Tips. ++ ++ [205]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvbwr.html ++ VMS C-Kermit Hints and Tips. ++ ++ [206]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ Unix C-Kermit Installation Instructions ++ ++ [207]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvins.html ++ VMS C-Kermit Installation Instructions ++ ++ [208]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ Technical support. ++ ++ [209]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95tutorial.html ++ Kermit 95 tutorial (this document). ++ ++ [210]comp.protocols.kermit.misc ++ The Kermit newsgroup (unmoderated). ++ ++ [ [211]Kermit Home ] [ [212]C-Kermit Home ] [ [213]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ FILES [ [214]Top ] [ [215]Contents ] [ [216]Next ] [ [217]Previous ] ++ ++ [218]COPYING.TXT ++ C-Kermit license. ++ ++ [219]~/.kermrc ++ Initialization file. ++ ++ [220]~/.mykermrc ++ Customization file. ++ ++ ~/.kdd ++ Kermit dialing directory (see manual). ++ ++ ~/.knd ++ Kermit network directory (see manual). ++ ++ ~/.ksd ++ Kermit services directory (see manual). ++ ++ [221]ckuins.html ++ Installation instructions for Unix. ++ ++ [222]ckcbwr.html ++ General C-Kermit bugs, hints, tips. ++ ++ [223]ckubwr.html ++ Unix-specific C-Kermit bugs, hints, tips. ++ ++ [224]ckcplm.html ++ C-Kermit program logic manual. ++ ++ [225]ckccfg.html ++ C-Kermit compile-time configuration options. ++ ++ ssh ++ (in your PATH) SSH connection helper. ++ ++ rz, sz, etc. ++ (in your PATH) external protocols for XYZmodem. ++ ++ /var/spool/locks (or whatever) ++ UUCP lockfile for dialing out (see [226]installation ++ instructions). ++ ++ [ [227]Kermit Home ] [ [228]C-Kermit Home ] [ [229]C-Kermit FAQ ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ AUTHORS [ [230]Top ] [ [231]Contents ] [ [232]Previous ] ++ ++ Frank da Cruz and Jeffrey E Altman ++ The Kermit Project - Columbia Univerity ++ 612 West 115th Street ++ New York NY 10025-7799 ++ USA ++ ++ 1985-present, with contributions from hundreds of others all over the ++ world. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Manual Page and Tutorial / ++ [233]kermit@columbia.edu / 24 October 2002 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.pdf ++ 4. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/test/text/ckuker.nr ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#description ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#synopsis ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#options ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#commands ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#modes ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#connections ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#transfer ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#server ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#ftp ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#security ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#license ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#other ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#files ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#authors ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#synopsis ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 29. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2839.txt ++ 30. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2840.txt ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#options ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#synopsis ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#kerbang ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#kerbang ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#options ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#commands ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#commands ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#description ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#commands ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#transfer ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#options ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#kerbang ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#cmdlist ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckscripts.html ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#modes ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#commands ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#connections ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#initfile ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html#term ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 91. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#transfer ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#modes ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 94. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2217.txt ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#ftp ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 100. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 101. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#server ++ 102. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#connections ++ 103. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#download ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#upload ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#oldfashioned ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#trouble ++ 107. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#advanced ++ 108. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#nonkermit ++ 109. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/kermit.html#notslow ++ 110. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 111. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 112. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 113. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/mskermit.html ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ 117. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckmanual.html ++ 118. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 119. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 120. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#ftp ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 124. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 125. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#ftp ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#transfer ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#transfer ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#server ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpclient.html ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit3.html#x3 ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit3.html#x2.2 ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 146. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#security ++ 147. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#ftp ++ 148. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/cuiksd.html ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 151. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 152. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 153. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 154. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 155. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 156. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 157. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 158. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 160. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 161. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 162. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 163. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#license ++ 164. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#iksd ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#options ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit3.html#x3.1.2 ++ 167. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 170. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 171. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 172. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#other ++ 173. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#personae ++ 174. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/COPYING.TXT ++ 175. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu ++ 176. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 177. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 178. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 179. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 180. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 181. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 182. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#license ++ 183. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 184. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/howtoget.html ++ 185. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 186. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 187. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 188. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 189. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 190. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#files ++ 191. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#other ++ 192. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckmanual.html ++ 193. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 194. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ 195. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 196. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80binaries.html ++ 197. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/scriptlib.html ++ 198. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/newfaq.html ++ 199. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 200. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 201. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.html ++ 202. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/studies.html ++ 203. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 204. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 205. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvbwr.html ++ 206. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 207. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvins.html ++ 208. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ 209. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95tutorial.html ++ 210. news:comp.protocols.kermit.misc ++ 211. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 212. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 213. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 214. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 215. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 216. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#authors ++ 217. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#documentation ++ 218. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/COPYING.TXT ++ 219. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermit.ini ++ 220. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermod.ini ++ 221. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 222. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 223. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 224. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ 225. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 226. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 227. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 228. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 229. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html ++ 230. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#top ++ 231. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#contents ++ 232. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html#files ++ 233. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckuins.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,3519 @@ ++ ++C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Installation Instructions ++ ++ [ [1]Contents ] [ [2]C-Kermit ] [ [3]Kermit Home ] ++ ++ Frank da Cruz ++ The Kermit Project ++ Columbia University ++ ++ As of C-Kermit version: 8.0.211, 10 April 2004 ++ This file last updated: Tue Apr 13 10:14:33 2004 (New York City ++ time) ++ ++ IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, note that ++ this file is a plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the ++ original (and possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ ++[4]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++CONTENTS ++ ++ [5]OVERVIEW ++ ++ 1. [6]INTERNET QUICK START ++ 2. [7]INSTALLING FROM PACKAGES ++ 3. [8]INSTALLING PREBUILT BINARIES ++ 4. [9]BUILDING FROM SOURCE CODE ++ 5. [10]INSTALLING THE KERMIT FILES ++ 6. [11]INSTALLING UNIX C-KERMIT FROM DOS-FORMAT DISKETTES ++ 7. [12]CHECKING THE RESULTS ++ 8. [13]REDUCING THE SIZE OF THE EXECUTABLE PROGRAM IMAGE ++ 9. [14]UNIX VERSIONS ++ 10. [15]DIALING OUT AND COORDINATING WITH UUCP ++ 11. [16]RUNNING UNIX C-KERMIT SETUID OR SETGID ++ 12. [17]CONFIGURING UNIX WORKSTATIONS ++ 13. [18]BIZARRE BEHAVIOR AT RUNTIME ++ 14. [19]CRASHES AND CORE DUMPS ++ 15. [20]SYSLOGGING ++ 16. [21]BUILDING SECURE VERSIONS OF C-KERMIT 8.0 ++ 17. [22]INSTALLING C-KERMIT AS AN SSH SERVER SUBSYSTEM ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++OVERVIEW ++ ++ [ [23]Top ] [ [24]Contents ] [ [25]Next ] ++ ++ WARNING: This document contains notes that have been accumulating ++ since the early 1980s. Many of the products and Unix versions ++ mentioned here have not been heard of in a long while, but that ++ does not necessarily mean they are not still running in some ++ obscure nook. ++ ++ This file contains Unix-specific information. A lot of it. Unlike most ++ other packages, C-Kermit tries very hard to be portable to every Unix ++ variety (and every release of each one) known to exist, including many ++ that are quite old, as well as to other platforms like VMS, AOS/VS, ++ VOS, OS-9, the BeBox, the Amiga, etc. ++ ++ Since C-Kermit gets so deeply into the file system, i/o system, and ++ other areas that differ radically from one Unix platform to the next, ++ this means that a lot can go wrong when you try to install C-Kermit on ++ (for example) a new release of a particular variety of Unix, in which ++ certain things might have changed that C-Kermit depended upon. ++ ++ This file concentrates on installation. For a description of general ++ configuration options for C-Kermit, please read the [26]Configurations ++ Options document. For troubleshooting after installation, see the ++ [27]General Hints and Tips and [28]Unix-Specific Hints and Tips ++ documents. The latter, in particular, contains lots of information on ++ lots of specific Unix platforms. If you want to work on the source ++ code, see the [29]C-Kermit Program Logic Manual ++ ++ You may install C-Kermit: ++ ++ * From an "[30]install package", if one is available. ++ * As a [31]prebuilt binary, if available, plus accompanying text ++ files. ++ * By building from [32]source code. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++1. INTERNET QUICK START ++ ++ [ [33]Top ] [ [34]Contents ] [ [35]Next ] [ [36]Previous ] ++ ++ If your Unix computer is on the Internet and it has a C compiler, ++ here's how to download, build, and install C-Kermit directly from the ++ "tarballs" or Zip archives: ++ ++ 1. Make a fresh directory and cd to it. ++ 2. Download the C-Kermit source code: ++ [37]ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar.Z ++ (compress format) or ++ [38]ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar.gz ++ (gunzip format). ++ 3. Uncompress the compressed tar file with "uncompress" or "gunzip", ++ according to which type of compressed file you downloaded. (If you ++ don't understand this, you could download a (much larger) ++ uncompressed tar archive directly: ++ [39]ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar ++ 4. Now type "tar xvf cku211.tar" to unpack the individual files from ++ the tar archive. ++ 5. Type "rm cku211.tar" to get rid of the tar archive, which is no ++ longer needed. ++ 6. Read the comments at the top of the makefile to find out which ++ target to use and then type the appropriate "make" command, such ++ as "make linux", "make solaris8", etc. ++ 7. This produces a binary in your current directory called "wermit". ++ Start it by typing "./wermit" and [40]try it out to make sure it ++ works. Then read [41]Section 5 for how to install it, or simply ++ copy the wermit binary to the desired public directory, rename it ++ to kermit, and give it the needed permissions (and, if it is going ++ to be used to dial out, give it the same group and owner and ++ permissions as the cu, tip, or minicom program). ++ ++ For secure installations, see [42]Sections 5 and [43]16. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++2. INSTALLING FROM PACKAGES ++ ++ [ [44]Top ] [ [45]Contents ] [ [46]Next ] [ [47]Previous ] ++ ++ Various Unix varieties -- Linux, Solaris, AIX, etc -- now incorporate ++ the idea of "install packages", and many users expect to find all new ++ applications in this format. A selection of install packages might be ++ available for any given release of C-Kermit, but there is a tradeoff ++ between convenience and safety. Unix presents several notable problems ++ to the builder of install packages: ++ ++ a. Since C-Kermit is portable to many non-Unix platforms (VMS, VOS, ++ AOS/VS, etc), some of the files in the C-Kermit distribution do ++ not fit into the Unix application model. In particular, C-Kermit ++ includes some plain text files (described in [48]Section 5) and ++ Unix has no standard place to put such files. Typical Unix package ++ managers do not allow for them. Where should they go, and how will ++ the user know where to find them? ++ b. Installation of any program that will be used to make modem calls ++ requires some important decisions from the installer regarding ++ security and privilege. ++ ++ Item (b) is discussed at length in [49]Sections 10 and [50]11 of this ++ document, but the package-related aspects are also given here. The ++ basic problem is that Unix dialout devices and the UUCP "lock files" ++ that regulate contention for them (described in [51]Section 10) are ++ usually protected against "world". Therefore, the install procedure ++ must either run as root in order to give the Kermit binary the ++ required permissions, group, and/or owner, or else the dialout devices ++ and associated directories must be open for group or world reading and ++ writing. Otherwise, the Kermit program just installed WILL NOT WORK ++ for dialing out. ++ ++ Thus, a well-crafted installation procedure should present the options ++ and allow the installer to choose the method, if any, for regulating ++ access to the dialout devices: ++ ++ a. Check the permissions of the lockfile directory and the dialout ++ devices. If they do not allow group or world R/W access, then: ++ b. "Your UUCP lockfile directory and/or dialout devices require ++ privilege to access. You must either change their permissions or ++ install Kermit with privileges." ++ c. "If you wish to install Kermit with privileges, it will be given ++ the same owner, group, and permissions as the cu program so it can ++ use the dialout devices." ++ d. If they choose (c) but the user is not root, give a message that ++ the install procedure can be run only by root and then quit. ++ ++ It should go without saying, of course, that any binaries that are to ++ be included in an install package should be built fresh on the exact ++ platform (e.g. Red Hat 8.0 on Intel) for which the package is ++ targeted; prebuilt binaries ([52]next section) from other sites are ++ likely to have library mismatches. [53]CLICK HERE for more about ++ building C-Kermit install packages. ++ ++ The Kermit Project does not have the resources or the expertise to ++ make install packages for every platform. Most install packages, ++ therefore, are contributed by others, and they do not necessarily ++ follow the guidelines given above. Pay attention to what they do. ++ ++ If you are an end user who has obtained a C-Kermit install package for ++ a particular platform, you should be aware that some additional steps ++ might needed if you want to use Kermit to dial out. Read [54]Section ++ 10 for details. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++3. INSTALLING PREBUILT BINARIES ++ ++ [ [55]Top ] [ [56]Contents ] [ [57]Next ] [ [58]Previous ] ++ ++ Hundreds of prebuilt C-Kermit binaries are available on the CDROM in ++ the BINARY tree [NOTE: The C-Kermit CDROM is still for version 7.0], ++ and at our ftp site in the [59]kermit/bin area (with names starting ++ with "ck"), also accessible on the [60]C-Kermit website. To install a ++ prebuilt binary: ++ ++ a. Rename the binary to "wermit". ++ b. Make sure it works; some tests are suggested in [61]Section 7. ++ c. Follow steps (b) through (e) in [62]Section 4. ++ d. Install related files as described in [63]Section 5. ++ ++ But first... Please heed the following cautions: ++ ++ a. If you pick the wrong binary, it won't work (or worse). ++ b. Even when you pick the appropriate binary, it still might not work ++ due to shared-library mismatches, etc. (see [64]Section 4.0). ++ c. Don't expect a binary built on or for version n of your OS to work ++ on version n - x (where x > 0). However, it is usually safe to run ++ a binary built on (or for) an older OS release on a newer one. ++ ++ Therefore, it is better to build your own binary from source code ++ ([65]next section) if you can. But since it is increasingly for Unix ++ systems (not to mention VMS and other OS's) to be delivered without C ++ compilers, it is often impractical. In such cases, try the most ++ appropriate prebuilt binary or binaries, and if none of them work, ++ [66]contact us and we'll see what we can do to help. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++4. BUILDING FROM SOURCE CODE ++ ++ [ [67]Top ] [ [68]Contents ] [ [69]Next ] [ [70]Previous ] ++ ++ Also see: [71]Section 8 and [72]Section 9. ++ ++ C-Kermit is designed to be built and used on as many platforms as ++ possible: Unix and non-Unix, old and new (and ancient), ANSI C and ++ K&R. The Unix version does not use or depend on any external tools for ++ building except the "make" utility, the C compiler, and the linker. It ++ does not use any automated configuration tools such as configure, ++ autoconf, automake, libtool, etc. Everything in C-Kermit has been ++ built by hand based on direct experience or reports or contributions ++ from users of each platform. ++ ++ The [73]C-Kermit makefile contains the rules for building the program ++ for each of the hundreds of different kinds of Unix systems that ++ C-Kermit attempts to support. It covers all Unix variations since ++ about 1980 -- pretty much everything after Unix V6. Separate makefiles ++ are used for [74]Plan 9 and [75]2.x BSD. ++ ++ Prerequisites: ++ ++ * The C compiler, linker, and make program must be installed. ++ * The C libraries and header files must be installed (*). ++ * The C-Kermit source code and makefile in your current directory. ++ * The C-Kermit text files ([76]Section 5) in your current directory. ++ ++ * This is becoming problematic in this new age of "selective ++ installs" e.g. of Linux packages. C-Kermit builds will often fail ++ because replying "no" to some obscure Linux installation option ++ will result in missing libraries or header files. Ditto on ++ platforms like AIX and Solaris that don't come with C compilers, ++ and then later have gcc installed, but are still missing crucial ++ libraries, like libm (math). ++ ++ Plus: ++ ++ * For TCP/IP networking support, the sockets library and related ++ header files must be installed. ++ * The math library for floating-point arithmetic support (can be ++ deselected by adding -DNOFLOAT to CFLAGS and removing -lm from ++ LIBS). ++ * Many and varied security libraries for building a secure version ++ (Kerberos, SSL/TLS, SRP, Zlib,...) These are required only if you ++ select a secure target. ++ * For the curses-based fullscreen file-ransfer display, the curses ++ or ncurses header file(s) and library, and probably also the ++ termcap and/or termlib library. Note that the names and locations ++ of these files and libraries are likely to change capriciously ++ with every new release of your Unix product. If you discover that ++ the C-Kermit build procedure fails because your curses and/or ++ termxxx headers or libraries are not named or located as expected, ++ please [77]let us know. In the meantime, work around by installing ++ symlinks. ++ * IMPORTANT: Modern Linux distributions might give you the choice ++ during installation of whether to install the "ncurses development ++ package" (perhaps called "ncurses-devel"). If you did not install ++ it, you won't be able to build C-Kermit with curses support ++ included. In this case, either go back and install ncurses, or ++ else choose (or create) a non-curses makefile target for your ++ platform. To install the ncurses developers tools in Red Hat ++ Linux, do: ++ ++mount redhat cdrom ++goto RedHat/RPMS ++rpm -ivh ncurses-devel*.rpm ++or to have the exact name ls ncurse* and load as ++rpm -ivh filename ++then leave the cdrom and unmount it. ++ ++ * In AIX you might have to go back and install any or all of: ++ ++bos.adt.base ++bos.adt.include ++bos.adt.lib ++bos.adt.libm ++bos.adt.utils ++ ++ from the first installation CD. ++ ++ The makefile might need to be renamed from ckuker.mak to makefile. ++ Directions: ++ ++ a. Type "make xxx" where xxx is the name of the makefile target most ++ appropriate to your platform, e.g. "make linux", "make aix43", ++ etc. Read the [78]comments at the top of the makefile for a ++ complete list of available targets (it's a long list). ++ b. Test the resulting 'wermit' file (see [79]Section 7 for ++ suggestions). If it's OK, proceed; otherwise [80]notify us. ++ ++ NOTE: steps (c) through (e) can be accomplished using the ++ [81]makefile 'install' target as described in [82]Section 5.4. ++ c. Rename the 'wermit' file to 'kermit', copy it to the desired ++ binary directory (such as /usr/local/bin or /opt/something), and ++ if it is to be used for dialing out, give it the same owner, ++ group, and permissions as the 'cu' program (IMPORTANT: read ++ [83]Sections 10 and [84]11 for details). ++ d. Install the man page, ckuker.nr, with your other man pages. ++ e. Install the accompanying text files (see [85]Section 5). ++ f. If you want C-Kermit to also offer a Telnet command-line ++ personality, make a symbolic link as follows: ++ ++cd directory-where-kermit-binary-is ++ln -s kermit telnet ++ ++ If you want C-Kermit to be the default Telnet client, make sure ++ the directory in which you created the symlink is in the PATH ++ ahead of the where the regular Telnet client is. ++ g. If you want C-Kermit to also offer an FTP command-line ++ personality, make a symlink called "ftp" as in (f). ++ h. If you want C-Kermit to also offer an FTTP command-line ++ personality, make a symlink called "http" as in (f). ++ i. If you want to offer an Internet Kermit Service, follow the ++ directions in the [86]IKSD Administrator's Guide. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0. Special Considerations for C-Kermit 8.0 ++ ++ [ [87]Top ] [ [88]Contents ] [ [89]Next ] ++ ++ Also see: [90]C-Kermit Configuration Options ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++4.1. [91]The Unix Makefile ++4.2. [92]The C-Kermit Initialization File ++4.3. [93]The 2.x BSD Makefile ++4.4. [94]The Plan 9 Makefile ++4.5. [95]Makefile Failures ++ ++ (Also see the [96]Configurations Options document, [97]Section 8). ++ ++ Lots of new features have been added in versions 7.0 and 8.0 that ++ require access to new symbols, APIs, libraries, etc, and this will no ++ doubt cause problems in compiling, linking, or execution on platforms ++ where 6.0 and earlier built without incident. This section contains ++ what we know as of the date of this file. ++ ++ The first category concerns the new Kermit Service Daemon (IKSD; see ++ the [98]IKSD Administrator's Guide for details): ++ ++ The wtmp File ++ When C-Kermit is started as an IKSD (under inetd), it makes ++ syslog and wtmp entries, and also keeps its own ftpd-like log. ++ The code assumes the wtmp log is /var/log/wtmp on Linux and ++ /usr/adm/wtmp elsewhere. No doubt this assumption will need ++ adjustment. Use -DWTMPFILE=path to override at compile time ++ (there is also a runtime override). See [99]iksd.html for ++ details. ++ ++ UTMP, utsname(), etc ++ C-Kermit 7.0 gets as much info as it can about its job -- ++ mainly for IKSD logging -- from utmp. But of course utmp ++ formats and fields differ, and for that matter, there can be ++ two different header files, and . Look for ++ HAVEUTMPX and HAVEUTHOST in [100]ckufio.c and let me know of ++ any needed adjustments. ++ ++ Password lookup ++ IKSD needs to authenticate incoming users against the password ++ list. In some cases, this requires the addition of -lcrypt ++ (e.g. in Unixware 2.x). In most others, the crypt functions are ++ in the regular C library. If you get "crypt" as an unresolved ++ symbol at link time, add -lcrypt to LIBS. If your site has ++ local replacement libraries for authentication, you might need ++ a special LIBS clause such as "LIBS=-L/usr/local/lib -lpwent". ++ ++ These days most Unix systems take advantage of shadow password ++ files or Plugable Authentication Modules (PAM). If your system ++ uses shadow passwords you must add -DCK_SHADOW to the CFLAGS ++ list. If your system requires PAM you must add -DCK_PAM to the ++ CFLAGS and -lpam -ldl to LIBS. ++ ++ getusershell() ++ This is called by the IKSD at login time to see if a user has ++ been "turned off". But many Unix platforms lack this function. ++ In that case, you will get unresolved symbol reports at link ++ time for _getusershell, _endusershell; to work around, add ++ -DNOGETUSERSHELL. ++ ++ initgroups() ++ This is called by IKSD after successful authentication. But ++ some platforms do not have this function, so obviously it can't ++ be called there, in which case add -DNOINITGROUPS. ++ ++ setreuid(), setreuid(), setregid() not found or "deprecated" ++ Find out what your Unix variety wants you to use instead, and ++ make appropriate substitutions in routine zvpass(), module ++ [101]ckufio.c, and [102]let us know. ++ ++ printf() ++ IKSD installs a printf() substitute to allow redirection of ++ printf-like output to the connection. However, this can ++ conflict with some curses libraries. In this case, separate ++ binaries must be built for IKSD and non-IKSD use. ++ ++ If you encounter difficulties with any of the above, and you are not ++ interested in running C-Kermit as an IKSD, then simply add NOIKSD to ++ CFLAGS and rebuild. Example: ++ ++make sco286 ++(get lots of errors) ++make clean ++make sco286 "KFLAGS=-DNOIKSD" ++ ++ Some non-IKSD things to watch out for: ++ ++ Return type of main() ++ The main() routine is in [103]ckcmai.c. If you get complaints ++ about "main: return type is not blah", define MAINTYPE on the ++ CC command line, e.g.: ++ ++make xxx "KFLAGS=-DMAINTYPE=blah ++ ++ (where blah is int, long, or whatever). If the complaint is ++ "Attempt to return a value from a function of type void" then ++ add -DMAINISVOID: ++ ++make xxx "KFLAGS=-DMAINISVOID=blah ++ ++ DNS Service Records ++ This feature allows a remote host to redirect C-Kermit to the ++ appropriate socket for the requested service; e.g. if C-Kermit ++ requests service "telnet" and the host offers Telnet service on ++ port 999 rather than the customary port 23. If you get ++ compile-time complaints about not being able to find ++ , , or , add -DNO_DNS_SRV to ++ CFLAGS. If you get link-time complaints about unresolved ++ symbols res_search or dn_expand, try adding -lresolve to LIBS. ++ ++ \v(ipaddress) ++ If "echo \v(ipaddress)" shows an empty string rather than your ++ local IP address, add -DCKGHNLHOST to CFLAGS and rebuild. ++ ++ ++ If this file can't be found at compile time, add -DNOREDIRECT ++ to CFLAGS. This disables the REDIRECT and PIPE commands and ++ anything else that needs the wait() system service. ++ ++ syslog() ++ C-Kermit can now write syslog records. Some older platforms ++ might not have the syslog facility. In that case, add ++ -DNOSYSLOG. Others might have it, but require addition of ++ -lsocket to LIBS (SCO OSR5 is an example). See [104]Section 15. ++ ++ putenv() ++ If "_putenv" comes up as an undefined symbol, add -DNOPUTENV to ++ CFLAGS and rebuild. ++ ++ "Passing arg1 of 'time' from incompatible pointer" ++ This is a mess. See the mass of #ifdefs in the appropriate ++ module, [105]ckutio.c or [106]ckufio.c. ++ ++ gettimeofday() ++ Wrong number of arguments. On most platforms, gettimeofday() ++ takes two arguments, but on a handful of others (e.g. Motorola ++ System V/88 V4, SNI Reliant UNIX 5.43, etc) it takes one. If ++ your version of gettimeofday() is being called with two args ++ but wants one, add -DGTODONEARG. ++ ++ "Assignment makes pointer from integer without a cast" ++ This warning might appear in [107]ckutio.c or [108]ckufio.c. ++ (or elsewhere), and usually can be traced to the use of a ++ system or library function that returns a pointer but that is ++ not declared in the system header files even though it should ++ be. Several functions are commonly associated with this error: ++ ++ + getcwd(): Add -DDCLGETCWD to CFLAGS and rebuild. ++ + popen() : Add -DDCLPOPEN to CFLAGS and rebuild. ++ + fdopen(): Add -DDCLFDOPEN to CFLAGS and rebuild. ++ ++ "Operands of = have incompatible types" ++ "Incompatible types in assignment" ++ If this comes from [109]ckcnet.c and comes from a statement ++ involving inet_addr(), try adding -DINADDRX to CFLAGS. If that ++ doesn't help, then try adding -DNOMHHOST. ++ ++ Complaints about args to get/setsockopt(), getpeername(), ++ getsockname() ++ These are all in [110]ckcnet.c. Different platforms and OS's ++ and versions of the same OS change this all the time: int, ++ size_t, unsigned long, etc. All the affected variables are ++ declared according to #ifdefs within ckcnet.c, so find the ++ declarations and adjust the #ifdefs accordingly. ++ ++ size_t ++ In case of complaints about "unknown type size_t", add ++ -DSIZE_T=int (or other appropriate type) to CFLAGS. ++ ++ 'tz' undefined ++ Use of undefined enum/struct/union 'timezone' ++ Left of 'tv_sec' specifies undefined struct/union 'timeval' And ++ similar complaints in [111]ckutio.c: Add -DNOGFTIMER and/or ++ -DNOTIMEVAL. ++ ++ Symlinks ++ The new built-in DIRECTORY command should show symlinks like ++ "ls -l" does. If it does not, check to see if your platform has ++ the lstat() and readlink() functions. If so, add -DUSE_LSTAT ++ and -DCKSYMLINK to CFLAGS and rebuild. On the other hand, if ++ lstat() is unresolved at link time, add -DNOLSTAT to CFLAGS. If ++ readlink() is also unresolved, add -DNOSYMLINK. ++ ++ realpath() ++ Link-time complains about realpath() -- find the library in ++ which it resides and add it to LIBS (example for Unixware 7.1: ++ "-lcudk70") or add -DNOREALPATH to CFLAGS and rebuild. If built ++ with realpath() but debug log file is truncated or mangled, ++ ditto (some realpath() implementations behave differently from ++ others). If built with realpath() and seemingly random core ++ dumps occur during file path resolution, ditto. ++ ++ Failure to locate header file ++ Usually happens on Linux systems that have the C compiler ++ installed, but not the ncurses package (see comments about ++ selective installs above). Go back and install ncurses, or use ++ "make linuxnc" (Linux No Curses). ++ ++ "Can't find shared library libc.so.2.1" ++ "Can't find shared library libncurses.so.3.0", etc... ++ You are trying to run a binary that was built on a computer ++ that has different library versions than your computer, and ++ your computer's loader is picky about library version numbers. ++ Rebuild from source on your computer. ++ ++ Time (struct tm) related difficulties: ++ Errors like the following: ++ ++"ckutio.c", line 11994: incomplete struct/union/enum tm: _tm ++"ckutio.c", line 11995: error: cannot dereference non-pointer type ++"ckutio.c", line 11995: error: assignment type mismatch ++"ckutio.c", line 11997: warning: using out of scope declaration: localtime ++"ckutio.c", line 11997: error: unknown operand size: op "=" ++"ckutio.c", line 11997: error: assignment type mismatch ++"ckutio.c", line 11998: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_year ++"ckutio.c", line 12000: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_mon ++"ckutio.c", line 12001: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_mday ++"ckutio.c", line 12002: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_hour ++"ckutio.c", line 12003: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_min ++"ckutio.c", line 12004: error: undefined struct/union member: tm_sec ++ ++ are due to failure to include the appropriate time.h header ++ files. Unix platforms generally have one or more of the ++ following: , , and . Any ++ combination of these might be required. Defaults are set up for ++ each makefile target. The defaults can be corrected on the CC ++ command line by adding the appropriate definition from the ++ following list to CFLAGS: ++ ++-DTIMEH Include ++-DNOTIMEH Don't include ++-DSYSTIMEH Include ++-DNOSYSTIMEH Don't include ++-DSYSTIMEBH Include ++-DNOSYSTIMEBH Don't include ++ ++ Note that is relatively scarce in the System V ++ and POSIX environments; the only platform of recent vintage ++ where it was/is used is OSF/1 and its derivatives (Digital Unix ++ and Tru64 Unix). ++ ++ Struct timeval and/or timezone not declared: ++ In some cases, merely including the appropriate time.h header ++ files is still not enough. POSIX.1 does not define the timeval ++ struct, and so the items we need from the header are protected ++ against us by #ifndef _POSIX_SOURCE or somesuch. In this case, ++ we have to declare the timeval (and timezone) structs ++ ourselves. To force this, include -DDCLTIMEVAL in CFLAGS. ++ ++ Warnings about dn_expand() Argument #4 ++ WARNING: argument is incompatible with prototyp. It's the old ++ char versus unsigned char stupidity again. Try to find a ++ compiler switch like GCC's "-funsigned-char". Failing that, add ++ -DCKQUERYTYPE=xxx to CFLAGS, where xxx is whatever 'man ++ dn_expand' tells you the type of the 4th argument should be ++ (presumably either char or unsigned char; in the latter case ++ use CHAR to avoid confusion caused by multiple words. ++ ++ Switch Table Overflow (in [112]ckcuni.c) ++ Add -DNOUNICODE to CFLAGS. ++ ++ Compile-time warnings about ck_out() or tgetstr() or tputs(): ++ Easy solution: Add -DNOTERMCAP to CFLAGS. But then you lose the ++ SCREEN function. Real solution: Try all different combinations ++ of the following CFLAGS: ++ ++-DTPUTSARGTYPE=char -DTPUTSFNTYPE=int ++-DTPUTSARGTYPE=int -DTPUTSFNTYPE=void ++ ++ Until the warnings go away, except maybe "ck_outc: return with ++ a value in a function returning void", and in that case also ++ add -DTPUTSISVOID. ++ ++ "Passing arg 1 of to tputs() makes pointer from integer without a ++ cast": ++ Add -DTPUTSARG1CONST to CFLAGS. ++ ++ "Undefined symbol: dup2" ++ Add -DNOZEXEC to CFLAGS. ++ ++ "header file 'termcap.h' not found" ++ Add -DNOHTERMCAP to CFLAGS. ++ ++ Other difficulties are generally of the "where is curses.h and what is ++ it called this week?" variety (most easily solved by making symlinks ++ in the include and lib directories), or overzealous complaints ++ regarding type mismatches in function calls because of the totally ++ needless and silly signed versus unsigned char conflict (*), etc. In ++ any case, please send any compilation or linking warnings or errors to ++ the author, preferably along with fixes. ++ ++ * C-Kermit does not use the signed property of chars at all ++ anywhere, ever. So if all chars and char *'s can be made unsigned ++ at compile time, as they can in gcc with "-funsigned-char", they ++ should be. ++ ++ IMPORTANT: If you find any of these hints necessary for a particular ++ make target (or you hit upon others not listed here), PLEASE SEND A ++ REPORT TO: ++ ++[113]kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.1. The Unix Makefile ++ ++ [ [114]Top ] [ [115]Contents ] [ [116]Section Contents ] [ [117]Next ] ++ [ [118]Previous ] ++ ++ If your distribution does not contain a file with the name "makefile" ++ or "Makefile", then rename the file called ckuker.mak to makefile: ++ ++mv ckuker.mak makefile ++ ++ Then type "make xxx", where xxx is the platform you want to build ++ C-Kermit for. These are listed in the [119]comments at the top of the ++ makefile. For example, to build C-Kermit for Linux, type: ++ ++make linux ++ ++ Here are some typical examples: ++ ++ Target Description ++ linux Linux, any version on any hardware platform ++ openbsd OpenBSD, any version on any hardware platform ++ aix43 AIX 4.3 ++ aix43g AIX 4.3, built with gcc ++ solaris9 Solaris 9 ++ solaris9g Solaris 9 built with gcc ++ hpux1100 HP-UX 11-point-anything ++ ++ The makefile is quite long, and at least two versions of Unix, SCO ++ Xenix/286 and 2.x BSD, cannot cope with its length. An attempt to ++ "make sco286" gives the message "Make: Cannot alloc mem for env.. ++ Stop". Solution: edit away some or all of the nonrelevant material ++ from the makefile. (A separate version of the makefile is provided for ++ BSD 2.x: ckubs2.mak but C-Kermit 8.0 can't be built for BSD 2.x -- it ++ has simply grown too large.) ++ ++ Some make programs reportedly cannot handle continued lines (lines ++ ending in backslash (\)). If you have a problem with the makefile, try ++ editing the makefile to join the continued lines (remove the ++ backslashes and the following linefeed). ++ ++ Other makefile troubles may occur because tabs in the makefile have ++ somehow been converted to spaces. Spaces and tabs are distinct in Unix ++ makefiles. ++ ++ Similarly, carriage returns might have been added to the end of each ++ line, which also proves confusing to most Unix versions of make. ++ ++ Check to see if there are comments about your particular version in ++ its makefile target itself. In a text editor such as EMACS or VI, ++ search for the make entry name followed by a colon, e.g. "linux:" (if ++ you really are building C-Kermit for Linux, do this now). ++ ++ Check to see if there are comments about your particular version in ++ the [120]ckubwr.txt file ([121]CLICK HERE for the Web version). ++ ++ If you have trouble with building [122]ckwart.c, or running the ++ resulting wart preprocessor program on [123]ckcpro.w: ++ ++ 1. Just "touch" the [124]ckcpro.c file that comes in the distribution ++ and then give the "make" command again, or: ++ 2. Compile ckwart.c "by hand": cc -o wart ckwart.c, or: ++ 3. Try various other tricks. E.g. one Linux user reported that that ++ adding the "static" switch to the rule for building wart fixed ++ everything: ++ ++wart: ckwart.$(EXT) ++ $(CC) -static -o wart ckwart.$(EXT) $(LIBS) ++ ++ If your compiler supports a compile-time option to treat ALL chars ++ (and char *'s, etc) as unsigned, by all means use it -- and send me ++ email to let me know what it is (I already know about gcc ++ -funsigned-char). ++ ++ To add compilation options (which are explained later in this ++ document) to your makefile target without editing the makefile, ++ include "KFLAGS=..." on the make command line, for example: ++ ++make linux KFLAGS=-DNODEBUG ++make bsd "KFLAGS=-DKANJI -DNODEBUG -DNOTLOG -DDYNAMIC -UTCPSOCKET" ++ ++ Multiple options must be separated by spaces. Quotes are necessary if ++ the KFLAGS= clause includes spaces. The KFLAGS are added to the end of ++ the CFLAGS that are defined in the selected makefile target. For ++ example, the "bsd" entry includes -DBSD4 -DTCPSOCKET, so the second ++ example above compiles Kermit with the following options: ++ ++-DBSD4 -DTCPSOCKET -DKANJI -DNODEBUG -DNOTLOG -DDYNAMIC -UTCPSOCKET ++ ++ (Notice how "-UTCPSOCKET" is used to negate the effect of the ++ "-DTCPSOCKET" option that is included in the makefile target.) ++ ++ WARNING: Be careful with KFLAGS. If you build C-Kermit, change some ++ files, and then run make again using the same make entry but ++ specifying different KFLAGS than last time, make won't detect it and ++ you could easily wind up with inconsistent object modules, e.g. some ++ of them built with a certain option, others not. When in doubt, "make ++ clean" first to make sure all your object files are consistent. ++ Similarly, if you change CFLAGS, LIBS, or any other items in the ++ makefile, or you rebuild using a different makefile target, "make ++ clean" first. ++ ++ If you create a new makefile target, use static linking if possible. ++ Even though this makes your C-Kermit binary bigger, the resulting ++ binary will be more portable. Dynamically linked binaries tend to run ++ only on the exact configuration and version where they were built; on ++ others, invocation tends to fail with a message like: ++ ++Can't find shared library "libc.so.2.1" ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2. The C-Kermit Initialization File ++ ++ [ [125]Top ] [ [126]Contents ] [ [127]Section Contents ] [ [128]Next ] ++ [ [129]Previous ] ++ ++ (This section is obsolete.) Read [130]Section 5 about the ++ initialization file. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3. The 2.x BSD Makefile ++ ++ [ [131]Top ] [ [132]Contents ] [ [133]Section Contents ] [ [134]Next ] ++ [ [135]Previous ] ++ ++ This section is obsolete. C-Kermit 6.0 was the last release that ++ could be built on PDP-11 based BSD versions. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4. The Plan 9 Makefile ++ ++ [ [136]Top ] [ [137]Contents ] [ [138]Section Contents ] [ [139]Next ] ++ [ [140]Previous ] ++ ++ Use the separate makefile [141]ckpker.mk. NOTE: The Plan 9 version of ++ C-Kermit 8.0 has not yet been built. There should be no impediment to ++ building it. However, even when built successfully, certain key ++ features are missing, notably TCP/IP networking. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5. Makefile Failures ++ ++ [ [142]Top ] [ [143]Contents ] [ [144]Section Contents ] [ ++ [145]Previous ] ++ ++ First, be sure the source files are stored on your current disk and ++ directory with the right names (in lowercase). Second, make sure that ++ the makefile itself does not contain any lines with leading spaces: ++ indented lines must all start with horizontal TAB, and no spaces. ++ ++ Then make sure that your Unix PATH is defined to find the appropriate ++ compiler for your makefile target. For example, on SunOS systems, ++ "make sunos41" builds C-Kermit for the BSD environment, and assumes ++ that /usr/ucb/cc will be used for compilation and linking. If your ++ PATH has /usr/5bin ahead of /usr/ucb, you can have problems at compile ++ or link time (a commonly reported symptom is the inability to find ++ "ftime" during linking). Fix such problems by redefining your Unix ++ PATH, or by specifying the appropriate "cc" in CC= and CC2= statements ++ in your makefile target. ++ ++ During edits 166-167, considerable effort went into making C-Kermit ++ compilable by ANSI C compilers. This includes prototyping all of ++ C-Kermit's functions, and including the ANSI-defined system header ++ files for system and library functions, as defined in K&R, second ++ edition: , , (except in NeXTSTEP this ++ is ), and . If you get warnings about any of ++ these header files not being found, or about argument mismatches ++ involving pid_t, uid_t, or gid_t, look in ckcdeb.h and make ++ amendments. C-Kermit assumes it is being compiled by an ANSI-compliant ++ C compiler if __STDC__ is defined, normally defined by the compiler ++ itself. You can force ANSI compilation without defining __STDC__ ++ (which some compilers won't let you define) by including -DCK_ANSIC on ++ the cc command line. ++ ++ On the other hand, if your compiler defines __STDC__ but still ++ complains about the syntax of Kermit's function prototypes, you can ++ disable the ANSI-style function prototyping by including -DNOANSI on ++ the command line. ++ ++ For SCO OpenServer, UNIX, ODT, and XENIX compilations, be sure to pick ++ the most appropriate [146]makefile target, and be sure you have ++ installed an SCO development system that is keyed to your exact SCO ++ operating system release, down to the minor version (like 2.3.1). ++ ++ Also note that SCO distributes some of its libraries in encrypted ++ form, and they must be decrypted before C-Kermit can be linked with ++ them. If not, you might see a message like: ++ ++ld: file /usr/lib/libsocket.a is of unknown type: magic number = 6365 ++ ++ To decrypt, you must supply a key (password) that came with your ++ license. Call SCO for further info. ++ ++ If your compiler uses something other than int for the pid (process ++ id) data type, put -DPID_T=pid_t or whatever in your CFLAGS. ++ ++ If you get complaints about unknown data types uid_t and gid_t, put ++ -DUID_T=xxx -DGID_T=yyy in your CFLAGS, where xxx and yyy are the ++ appropriate types. ++ ++ If your compilation fails because of conflicting or duplicate ++ declarations for sys_errlist, add -DUSE_STRERROR or -DNDSYSERRLIST to ++ CFLAGS. ++ ++ If your compilation dies because getpwnam() is being redeclared (or ++ because of "conflicting types for getwpnam"), add -DNDGPWNAM to your ++ CFLAGS. If that doesn't work, then add -DDCGPWNAM to your CFLAGS (see ++ ckufio.c around line 440). ++ ++ If the compiler complains about the declaration of getpwnam() during ++ an ANSI C compilation, remove the declaration from ckufio.c or change ++ the argument in the prototype from (char *) to (const char *). ++ ++ If you get complaints that getpwuid() is being called with an improper ++ type, put -DPWID_T=xx in your CFLAGS. ++ ++ If you get compile-time warnings that t_brkc or t_eofc (tchars ++ structure members, used in BSD-based versions) are undefined, or ++ structure-member- related warnings that might be traced to this fact, ++ add -DNOBRKC to CFLAGS. ++ ++ If you get a linker message to the effect that _setreuid or _setregid ++ is not defined, add -DNOSETREU to CFLAGS, or add -DCKTYP_H=blah to ++ CFLAGS to make C-Kermit read the right -kind-of-file to pick ++ up these definitions. ++ ++ If you get a message that _popen is undefined, add -DNOPOPEN to ++ CFLAGS. ++ ++ If you get a complaint at compile time about an illegal ++ pointer-integer combination in ckufio.c involving popen(), or at link ++ time that _popen is an undefined symbol, add the declaration "FILE ++ *popen();" to the function zxcmd() in ckufio.c (this declaration is ++ supposed to be in ). If making this change does not help, ++ then apparently your Unix does not have the popen() function, so you ++ should add -DNOPOPEN to your make entry, in which case certain ++ functions involving "file" i/o to the standard input and output of ++ subprocesses will not be available. ++ ++ If your linker complains that _getcwd is undefined, you can add a ++ getcwd() function to ckufio.c, or add it to your libc.a library using ++ ar: ++ ++#include ++ ++char * ++getcwd(buf,size) char *buf; int size; { ++#ifndef NOPOPEN ++#ifdef DCLPOPEN ++ FILE *popen(); ++#endif ++ FILE *pfp; ++ ++ if (!buf) return(NULL); ++ if (!(pfp = popen("pwd","r"))) return(NULL); ++ fgets(buf,size-2,pfp); ++ pclose(pfp); ++ buf[strlen(buf)-1] = '\0'; ++ return((char *)buf); ++#else ++ buf[0] = '\0'; ++ return(NULL); ++#endif /* NOPOPEN */ ++} ++ ++#ifdef NOPOPEN ++FILE *popen(s,t) char *s,*t; { ++ return(NULL); ++} ++#endif /* NOPOPEN */ ++ ++ If you get complaints about NPROC having an invalid value, add a valid ++ definition for it (depends on your system), as in the cray entry. ++ ++ If you get some symbol that's multiply defined, it probably means that ++ a variable name used by Kermit is also used in one of your system ++ libraries that Kermit is linked with. For example, under PC/IX some ++ library has a variable or function called "data", and the variable ++ "data" is also used extensively by Kermit. Rather than edit the Kermit ++ source files, just put a -D in the make entry CFLAGS to change the ++ Kermit symbol at compile time. In this example, it might be ++ -Ddata=xdata. ++ ++ Some symbol is defined in your system's header files, but it produces ++ conflicts with, or undesired results from, Kermit. Try undefining the ++ symbol in the makefile target's CFLAGS, for example -UFIONREAD. ++ ++ Some well-known symbol is missing from your system header files. Try ++ defining in the makefile target's CFLAGS, for example -DFREAD=1. ++ ++ You get many warnings about pointer mismatches. This probably means ++ that Kermit is assuming an int type for signal() when it should be ++ void, or vice-versa. Try adding -DSIG_I (for integer signal()) or ++ -DSIG_V (for void) to CFLAGS. Or just include KFLAGS=-DSIG_V (or ++ whatever) in your "make" command, for example: ++ ++make bsd KFLAGS=-DSIG_V ++ ++ You get many messages about variables that are declared and/or set but ++ never used. It is difficult to avoid these because of all the ++ conditional compilation in the program. Ignore these messages. ++ ++ Some of C-Kermit's modules are so large, or contain so many character ++ string constants, or are so offensive in some other way, that some C ++ compilers give up and refuse to compile them. This is usually because ++ the -O (optimize) option is included in the make entry. If this ++ happens to you, you can (a) remove the -O option from the make entry, ++ which will turn off the optimizer for ALL modules; or (b) compile the ++ offending module(s) by hand, including all the switches from make ++ entry except for -O, and then give the appropriate "make" command ++ again; or (c) increase the value of the -Olimit option, if your ++ compiler supports this option; or (d) change the [147]makefile target ++ to first compile each offending module explicitly without ++ optimization, then compile the others normally (with optimization), ++ for example: ++ ++#Fortune 32:16, For:Pro 2.1 (mostly like 4.1bsd) ++ft21: ++ @echo 'Making C-Kermit $(CKVER) for Fortune 32:16 For:Pro 2.1...' ++ $(MAKE) ckuusx.$(EXT) "CFLAGS= -DNODEBUG -DBSD4 -DFT21 -DNOFILEH \ ++ -SYM 800 \ -DDYNAMIC -DNOSETBUF -DCK_CURSES $(KFLAGS) -DPID_T=short" ++ $(MAKE) ckuxla.$(EXT) "CFLAGS= -DNODEBUG -DBSD4 -DFT21 -DNOFILEH \ ++ -SYM 800 \ -DDYNAMIC -DNOSETBUF -DCK_CURSES $(KFLAGS) -DPID_T=short" ++ $(MAKE) ckudia.$(EXT) "CFLAGS= -DNODEBUG -DBSD4 -DFT21 -DNOFILEH \ ++ -SYM 800 \ -DDYNAMIC -DNOSETBUF -DCK_CURSES $(KFLAGS) -DPID_T=short" ++ $(MAKE) wermit "CFLAGS= -O -DNODEBUG -DBSD4 -DFT21 -DNOFILEH -SYM 800 \ ++ -DDYNAMIC -DNOSETBUF -DCK_CURSES $(KFLAGS) -DPID_T=short" \ ++ "LNKFLAGS= -n -s" "LIBS= -lcurses -ltermcap -lv -lnet" ++ ++ As an extreme example, some compilers (e.g. gcc on the DG AViiON) have ++ been known to dump core when trying to compile ckwart.c with ++ optimization. So just do this one "by hand": ++ ++cc -o wart ckwart.c ++ ++ or: ++ ++touch ckcpro.c ++ ++ and then give the "make" command again. ++ ++ Speaking of wart, it is unavoidable that some picky compilers might ++ generate "statement unreachable" messages when compiling ckcpro.c. ++ Unreachable statements can be generated by the wart program, which ++ generates ckcpro.c automatically from [148]ckcpro.w, which translates ++ lex-like state/input constructions into a big switch/case ++ construction. ++ ++ Some function in Kermit wreaks havoc when it is called. Change all ++ invocations of the function into a macro that evaluates to the ++ appropriate return code that would have been returned by the function ++ had it been called and failed, for example: -Dzkself()=0. Obviously ++ not a good idea if the function is really needed. ++ ++ If you have just installed SunOS 4.1.2 or 4.1.3, you might find that ++ C-Kermit (and any other C program) fails to link because of unresolved ++ references from within libc. This is because of a mistake in Sun's ++ /usr/lib/shlib.etc files for building the new libc. Change the libc ++ Makefile so that the "ld" lines have "-ldl" at the end. Change the ++ README file to say "mv xccs.multibyte. xccs.multibyte.o" and follow ++ that instruction. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++5. INSTALLING THE KERMIT FILES ++ ++ [ [149]Top ] [ [150]Contents ] [ [151]Next ] [ [152]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++5.1. [153]The C-Kermit Initialization File ++5.2. [154]Text Files ++5.3. [155]Installing the Kermit Files ++5.4. [156]The Makefile Install Target ++ ++ The C-Kermit executable does not need any external files to run. ++ Unlike, say, the cu program, which on most platforms is useless unless ++ you (as root) edit the /usr/spool/uucp/Systems and ++ /usr/spool/uucp/Devices files to supply whatever obscure and ++ undocumented syntax is required to match some supposedly user-friendly ++ mnemonic to the real pathname of whatever device you want to use, ++ Kermit runs on its own without needing any external configuration ++ files, and lets you refer to device (and network hosts and services) ++ by their own natural undisguised names. ++ ++ Nevertheless, a number of external files can be installed along with ++ the C-Kermit executable if you wish. These include configuration and ++ customization files that are read by Kermit as well as documentation ++ files to be read by people. All of this material is (a) optional, and ++ (b) available on the Kermit website: ++ ++[157]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ ++ and usually in a more pleasant form, perhaps also with updated ++ content. So if your computer is on the Internet, there is no need to ++ install anything but the Kermit executable if users know how to find ++ the Kermit website (and if they don't, Kermit's "help" command tells ++ them). ++ ++ 5.1. The C-Kermit Initialization File ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0 and earlier, the standard initialization file was a ++ key C-Kermit component because: ++ ++ a. It "loaded" the dialing and network directories. ++ b. It defined all the macros and variables for the services ++ directory. ++ c. It defined macros for quickly changing Kermit's file-transfer ++ performance tuning. ++ ++ The standard initialization file is quite long (more than 600 lines) ++ and requires noticeable processing time (the slower the computer, the ++ more noticeable), yet few people actually use the services directory, ++ whose definition takes up most of its bulk. Meanwhile, in C-Kermit ++ 8.0, many of the remaining functions of the standard initialization ++ file are now built in; for example, the FAST, CAUTIOUS, and ROBUST ++ commands. ++ ++ More to the point, many of the settings that could be made only in the ++ initialization and customization files can now be picked up from ++ environment variables. The first group identifies initialization and ++ directory files: ++ ++ CKERMIT_INI ++ The path of your Kermit initialization file, if any. This ++ overrides the built-in search for $HOME/.kermrc. ++ ++ K_CHARSET ++ The character set used for encoding local text files. ++ Equivalent to SET FILE CHARACTER-SET. ++ ++ K_DIAL_DIRECTORY ++ The full pathname of one or more Kermit dialing directory ++ files. Equivalent to SET DIAL DIRECTORY. ++ ++ K_NET_DIRECTORY ++ The full pathname of one or more Kermit network directory ++ files. Equivalent to SET NETWORK DIRECTORY. ++ ++ K_INFO_DIRECTORY ++ K_INFO_DIR ++ The full pathname of a directory containing Kermit (if any) ++ containing ckubwr.txt and other Kermit text files. Overrides ++ Kermit's built-in search for this directory. ++ ++ The next group is related to dialing modems: ++ ++ K_COUNTRYCODE ++ The telephonic numeric country code for this location, e.g. 1 ++ for North America or 39 for Italy. It is recommended that this ++ one be set for all users, system-wide. Not only is it used to ++ process portable-format dialing directory entries, but it is ++ also compared against Kermit's built-in list of "tone ++ countries" to see if tone dialing can be used. Equivalent to ++ Kermit's SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE command. ++ ++ K_AREACODE ++ The telephonic numeric area code for this location, e.g. 212 ++ for Manhattan, New York, USA. Recommend this one also be set ++ system-wide, so shared portable-format dialing directories will ++ work automatically for everybody. Equivalent to Kermit's SET ++ DIAL AREA-CODE command. ++ ++ K_DIAL_METHOD ++ TONE or PULSE. Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL METHOD command. ++ If a dial method is not set explicitly (or implicitly from the ++ country code), Kermit does not specify a dialing method, and ++ uses the modem's default method, which tends to be pulse. ++ ++ K_INTL_PREFIX ++ The telephonic numeric international dialing prefix for this ++ location. Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL INTL-PREFIX command. ++ ++ K_LD_PREFIX ++ The telephonic numeric long-distance dialing prefix for this ++ location. Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL LD-PREFIX command. ++ ++ K_PBX_ICP ++ The telephonic numeric PBX internal call prefix for this ++ location. Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL PBX-INSIDE-PREFIX ++ command. ++ ++ K_PBX_OCP ++ The telephonic numeric PBX external call prefix for this ++ location. Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL PBX-OUTSIDE-PREFIX ++ command. ++ ++ K_PBX_XCH ++ The telephonic numeric PBX exchange (first part of the ++ subscriber number). Equivalent to Kermit's SET DIAL ++ PBX-EXCHANGE command. ++ ++ K_TF_AREACODE ++ A list of one or more telephonic numeric toll-free area codes. ++ ++ K_TF_PREFIX ++ The telephonic numeric toll-free dialing prefix, in case it is ++ different from the long-distance prefix. Equivalent to Kermit's ++ SET DIAL TF-PREFIX command. ++ ++ The final group includes well-known environment variables that are ++ also used by Kermit: ++ ++ CDPATH ++ Where the CD command should look for relative directory names. ++ ++ SHELL ++ The path of your Unix shell. Used by the RUN (!) command to ++ choose the shell to execute its arguments. ++ ++ USER ++ Your Unix username. ++ ++ EDITOR ++ The name or path of your preferred editor (used by the EDIT ++ command). Equivalent to SET EDITOR. ++ ++ BROWSER ++ The name or path of your preferred web browser (used by the ++ BROWSE command). Equivalent to Kermit's SET BROWSER command. ++ ++ Does this mean the initialization file can be abolished? I think so. ++ Here's why: ++ ++ * Kermit already does everything most people want it to do without ++ one. ++ * Important site-specific customizations can be done with global ++ environment variables. ++ * There is no longer any need for everybody to have to use the ++ standard initialization file. ++ * This means that your initialization file, if you want one, can ++ contain your own personal settings, definitions, and preferences, ++ rather than 600 lines of "standard" setups. ++ * If you still want the services directory, you can either TAKE the ++ standard initialization file (which must be named anything other ++ than $HOME/.kermrc to avoid being executed automatically every ++ time you start Kermit), or you can make it a kerbang script and ++ execute it "directly" (the [158]makefile install target does this ++ for you by putting ckermit.ini in the same directory as the Kermit ++ binary, adding the appropriate Kerbang line to the top, and giving ++ it execute permission). ++ ++ In fact, you can put any number of kerbang scripts in your PATH to ++ start up C-Kermit in different ways, to have it adopt certain ++ settings, make particular connections, execute complicated scripts, ++ whatever you want. ++ ++ 5.2. Text Files ++ ++ These are entirely optional. Many of them are to be found at the ++ Kermit website in HTML form (i.e. as Web pages with clickable links, ++ etc), and very likely also more up to date. Plain-text files that ++ correspond to Web pages were simply "dumped" by Lynx from the website ++ to plain ASCII text. The format is whatever Lynx uses for this ++ purpose. If you wish, you can install them on your computer as ++ described in the [159]next section. ++ ++ [160]COPYING.TXT ++ Copyright notice, permissions, and disclaimer. ++ ++ [161]ckermit.ini ++ The standard initialization file, intended more for reference ++ (in most cases) than actual use; see [162]Section 5.1. ++ ++ [163]ckermod.ini ++ A sample customization file. ++ ++ [164]ckermit70.txt ++ Supplement to [165]Using C-Kermit for version 7.0. Available on ++ the Kermit website as: ++ [166]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ ++ [167]ckermit80.txt ++ Supplement to [168]Using C-Kermit for version 8.0. Available on ++ the Kermit website as: ++ [169]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ ++ [170]ckcbwr.txt ++ The general C-Kermit hints and tips ("beware") file. Available ++ on the Kermit website as: ++ [171]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ ++ [172]ckubwr.txt ++ The Unix-specific C-Kermit hints and tips file. Available on ++ the Kermit website as: ++ [173]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ ++ [174]ckuins.txt ++ Unix C-Kermit Installation Instructions (this file). Available ++ on the Kermit website as: ++ [175]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ ++ [176]ckccfg.txt ++ C-Kermit compile-time configuration options. Available on the ++ Kermit website as: ++ [177]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ ++ [178]ckcplm.txt ++ The C-Kermit program logic manual. Available on the Kermit ++ website as: ++ [179]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ ++ [180]ca_certs.pem ++ Certificate Authority certificates for secure connections (see ++ [181]Section 16). ++ ++ 5.3. Installing the Kermit Files ++ ++ There is an "install" target in the [182]makefile that you can use if ++ you wish. However, since every site has its own layout and ++ requirements, it is often better to install the Kermit files by hand. ++ You don't have to use the makefile install target to install C-Kermit. ++ This is especially true since not all sites build C-Kermit from ++ source, and therefore might not even have the makefile. But you should ++ read this section in any case. ++ ++ If your computer already has an older version of C-Kermit ++ installed, you should rename it (e.g. to "kermit6" or "kermit7") so ++ in case you have any trouble with the new version, the old one is ++ still available. ++ ++ In most cases, you need to be root to install C-Kermit, if only to ++ gain write access to directories in which the binary and manual page ++ are to be copied. The C-Kermit binary should be installed in a ++ directory that is in the users' PATH, but that is not likely to be ++ overwritten when you install a new version of the operating system. A ++ good candidate would be the /usr/local/bin/ directory, but the ++ specific choice is site dependent. Example (assuming the appropriate ++ Kermit binary is stored in your current directory as "wermit", e.g. ++ because you just built it from source and that's the name the makefile ++ gave it): ++ ++mv wermit /usr/local/bin/kermit ++chmod 755 /usr/local/bin/kermit ++ ++ or (only after you finish reading this section!) simply: ++ ++make install ++ ++ IMPORTANT: IF C-KERMIT IS TO BE USED FOR DIALING OUT, you must also do ++ something to give it access to the dialout devices and lockfile ++ directories. The 'install' target does not attempt to set Kermit's ++ owner, group, and permissions to allow dialing out. This requires ++ privileges, open eyes, and human decision-making. Please read ++ [183]Sections 10 and [184]11 below, make the necessary decisions, and ++ then implement them by hand as described in those sections. ++ ++ You should also install the man page, which is called ckuker.nr, in ++ the man page directory for local commands, such as /usr/man/man1/, ++ renamed appropriately, e.g. to kermit.1. This is also taken care of by ++ "make install". ++ ++ Optionally, the text files listed in the [185]previous section can be ++ placed in a publicly readable directory. Suggested directory names ++ are: ++ ++/usr/local/doc/kermit/ ++/usr/local/lib/kermit/ ++/usr/share/lib/kermit/ ++/opt/kermit/doc/ ++ ++ (or any of these without the "/kermit"). Upon startup, C-Kermit checks ++ the following environment variables whose purpose is to specify the ++ directory where the C-Kermit text files are, in the following order: ++ ++K_INFO_DIRECTORY ++K_INFO_DIR ++ ++ If either of these is defined, C-Kermit checks for the existence of ++ the ckubwr.txt file (Unix C-Kermit Hints and Tips). If not found, it ++ checks the directories listed above (both with and without the ++ "/kermit") plus several others to see if they contain the ckubwr.txt ++ file. If found, various C-Kermit messages can refer the user to this ++ directory. ++ ++ Finally, if you want to put the source code files somewhere for people ++ to look at, you can do that too. ++ ++ 5.4. The Makefile Install Target ++ ++ The makefile "install" target does almost everything for you if you ++ give it the information it needs by setting the variables described ++ below. You can use this target if: ++ ++ * You downloaded the [186]complete C-Kermit archive and built ++ C-Kermit from source; or: ++ * You downloaded an [187]individual C-Kermit binary and the ++ [188]C-Kermit text-file archive, and your computer has a "make" ++ command. ++ ++ Here are the parameters you need to know: ++ ++ BINARY ++ Name of the binary you want to install as "kermit". Default: ++ "wermit". ++ ++ prefix ++ (lower case) If you define this variable, its value is ++ prepended to all the following xxxDIR variables (8.0.211 and ++ later). ++ ++ DESTDIR ++ If you want to install the Kermit files in a directory ++ structure like /opt/kermit/bin/, /opt/kermit/doc/, ++ /opt/kermit/src/, then define DESTIR as the root of this ++ structure; for example, /opt/kermit. The DESTDIR string should ++ not end with a slash. By default, DESTDIR is not defined. If it ++ is defined, but the directory does not exist, the makefile ++ attempts to create it, which might require you to be root. Even ++ so, this can fail if any segments in the path except the last ++ one do not already exist. WARNING: If the makefile creates any ++ directories, it gives them a mode of 755, and the default owner ++ and group. Modify these by hand if necessary. ++ ++ BINDIR ++ Directory in which to install the Kermit binary (and the ++ standard C-Kermit initialization file, if it is found, as a ++ Kerbang script). If DESTDIR is defined, BINDIR must start with ++ a slash. BINDIR must not end with a slash. If DESTDIR is ++ defined, BINDIR is a subdirectory of DESTDIR. If BINDIR does ++ not exist, the makefile attempts to create it as with DESTDIR. ++ Default: /usr/local/bin. ++ ++ MANDIR ++ Directory in which to install the C-Kermit manual page as ++ "kermit" followed by the manual-chapter extension (next item). ++ Default: /usr/man/man1. If MANDIR is defined, the directory ++ must already exist. ++ ++ MANEXT ++ Extension for the manual page. Default: 1 (digit one). ++ ++ SRCDIR ++ Directory in which to install the C-Kermit source code. If ++ DESTDIR is defined, this is a subdirectory of DESTDIR. Default: ++ None. ++ ++ CERTDIR ++ For secure builds only: Directory in which to install the ++ ca_certs.pem file. This must be the verification directory used ++ by programs that use the SSL libraries at your site. Default: ++ none. Possibilities include: /usr/local/ssl, /opt/ssl, ++ /usr/lib/ssl, . . . If CERTDIR is defined, the directory ++ must already exist. ++ ++ INFODIR ++ Directory in which to install the C-Kermit text files. If ++ DESTDIR is defined, this is a subdirectory of DESTDIR. Default: ++ None. If INFODIR is defined but does not exist, the makefile ++ attempts to create it, as with DESTDIR. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ make install ++ Installs "wermit" as /usr/local/bin/kermit with permissions ++ 755, the default owner and group, and no special privileges. ++ The manual page is installed as /usr/man/man1/kermit.1. Text ++ files are not copied anywhere, nor are the sources. ++ ++ make MANDIR= install ++ Just like "make install" but does not attempt to install the ++ manual page. ++ ++ make DESTDIR=/opt/kermit BINDIR=/bin SRCDIR=/src INFODIR=/doc install ++ Installs the Kermit binary "wermit" as /opt/kermit/bin/kermit, ++ puts the source code in /opt/kermit/src, and puts the text ++ files in /opt/kermit/doc, creating the directories if they ++ don't already exist, and puts the man page in the default ++ location. ++ ++ make BINDIR=/usr/local/bin CERTDIR=/usr/local/ssl install ++ Installs the Kerberized Kermit binary "wermit" as ++ /usr/local/bin/kermit, puts the CA Certificates file in ++ /usr/local/ssl/, and the man page in the normal place. ++ ++ For definitive information, see the makefile. The following is ++ excerpted from the 8.0.211 makefile: ++ ++# The following symbols are used to specify library and header file locations ++# Redefine them to the values used on your system by: ++# . editing this file ++# . defining the values on the command line ++# . defining the values in the environment and use the -e option ++# ++prefix = /usr/local ++srproot = $(prefix) ++sslroot = $(prefix) ++manroot = $(prefix) ++ ++K4LIB=-L/usr/kerberos/lib ++K4INC=-I/usr/kerberos/include ++K5LIB=-L/usr/kerberos/lib ++K5INC=-I/usr/kerberos/include ++SRPLIB=-L$(srproot)/lib ++SRPINC=-I$(srproot)/include ++SSLLIB=-L$(sslroot)/ssl/lib ++SSLINC=-I$(sslroot)/ssl/include ++... ++WERMIT = makewhat ++BINARY = wermit ++DESTDIR = ++BINDIR = $(prefix)/bin ++MANDIR = $(manroot)/man/man1 ++MANEXT = 1 ++SRCDIR = ++INFODIR = ++CERTDIR = ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++6. INSTALLING UNIX C-KERMIT FROM DOS-FORMAT DISKETTES ++ ++ [ [189]Top ] [ [190]Contents ] [ [191]Next ] [ [192]Previous ] ++ ++ This section is obsolete. We don't distribute C-Kermit on diskettes ++ any more because (a)there is no demand, and (b) it no longer fits. ++ ++ If you received a DOS-format diskette containing a binary executable ++ C-Kermit program plus supporting text files, be sure to chmod +x the ++ executable before attempting to run it. ++ ++ In version 5A(190) and later, all the text files on the C-Kermit ++ DOS-format diskettes are in Unix format: LF at the end of each line ++ rather than CRLF. This means that no conversions are necessary when ++ copying to your Unix file system, and that all the files on the ++ diskette, text and binary, can be copied together. The following ++ comments apply to the DOS-format diskettes furnished with version ++ 5A(189) and earlier or to other DOS-format diskettes you might have ++ obtained from other sources. ++ ++ If you have received C-Kermit on MS-DOS format diskettes (such as ++ those distributed by Columbia University), you should make sure that ++ your DOS-to-Unix conversion utility (such as "dosread") both: (1) ++ changes line terminators in all files from carriage-return linefeed ++ (CRLF) to just linefeed (LF) (such as "dosread -a") and remove any ++ Ctrl-Z's, and (2) that all filenames are converted from uppercase to ++ lowercase. If these conversions were not done, you can use the ++ following shell script on your Unix system to do them: ++ ++---(cut here)--- ++#!/bin/sh ++# ++# Shell script to convert C-Kermit DOS-format files into Unix format. ++# Lowercases the filenames, strips out carriage returns and Ctrl-Z's. ++# ++x=$1 # the name of the source directory ++y=$2 # the name of the target directory if [ $# -lt 2 ]; then ++ echo "usage: $0 source-directory target-directory" ++ exit 1 ++fi ++if cd $1 ; then ++ echo "Converting files from $1 to $2" ++else ++ echo "$0: cannot cd to $1" ++ exit 1 ++fi ++for i in *; do ++ j=`echo $i | tr 'A-Z' 'a-z'` ++ echo $x/$i =\> $y/$j ++ tr -d '\015\032' < $i > $y/$j ++done ++---(cut here)--- ++ ++ Cut out this shell script, save it as "convert.sh" (or any other name ++ you prefer), then "chmod +x convert.sh". Then, create a new, empty ++ directory to put the converted files in, and then "convert.sh /xxx ++ /yyy" where /xxx is the name of the directory where the PC-format ++ files are, and /yyy is the name of the new, empty directory. The ++ converted files will appear in the new directory. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++7. CHECKING THE RESULTS ++ ++ [ [193]Top ] [ [194]Contents ] [ [195]Next ] [ [196]Previous ] ++ ++ First some quick checks for problems that can be easily corrected by ++ recompiling with different options: ++ ++ DIRECTORY listing is garbage ++ Permissions, size, and date are random garbage (but the ++ filenames are correct) in a C-Kermit DIRECTORY listing. On some ++ platforms, the lstat() function is present but simply doesn't ++ work; try adding -DNOLSTAT to CFLAGS and rebuild. If that ++ doesn't fix it, also add -DNOLINKBITS. If it's still not fixed, ++ remove -DNOLSTAT and -DNOLINKBITS and add -DNOSYMLINK. ++ ++ curses ++ When you make a connection with C-Kermit and transfer files ++ using the fullscreen (curses) file-transfer display, and then ++ get the C-Kermit> prompt back afterwards, do characters echo ++ when you type them? If not, the curses library has altered the ++ buffering of /dev/tty. Try rebuilding with KFLAGS=-DCK_NEWTERM. ++ If it already has -DCK_NEWTERM in CFLAGS, try removing it. If ++ that doesn't help, then rebuild with -DNONOSETBUF (yes, two ++ NO's). If none of this works (and you can't fix the code), then ++ either don't use the fullscreen display, or rebuild with ++ -DNOCURSES. ++ ++ Ctrl-L or any SCREEN command crashes C-Kermit: ++ Rebuild with -DNOTERMCAP. ++ ++ No prompt after CONNECT: ++ After escaping back from CONNECT mode, does your C-Kermit> ++ prompt disappear? (Yet, typing "?" still produces a command ++ list, etc) In that case, add -DCKCONINTB4CB to CFLAGS and ++ rebuild. ++ ++ Here is a more thorough checklist can use to tell whether your version ++ of C-Kermit was built correctly for your Unix system, with hints on ++ how to fix or work around problems: ++ ++ a. Start C-Kermit (usually by typing "./wermit" in the directory ++ where you ran the makefile). Do you see the C-Kermit> prompt? If ++ not, C-Kermit incorrectly deduced that it was running in the ++ background. The test is in conbgt() in [197]ckutio.c. If you can ++ fix it for your system, please send in the fix (Hint: read about ++ "PID_T" below). Otherwise, you can force C-Kermit to foreground ++ mode by starting it with the -z command line option, as in "kermit ++ -z", or giving the interactive command SET BACKGROUND OFF. ++ b. When you type characters at the C-Kermit prompt, do they echo ++ immediately? If not, something is wrong with concb() and probably ++ the other terminal mode settings routines in [198]ckutio.c. Be ++ sure you have used the most appropriate make entry. ++ c. At the C-Kermit> prompt, type "send ./?". C-Kermit should list all ++ the files in the current directory. If not, it was built for the ++ wrong type of Unix file system. Details below. In the meantime, ++ try SET WILDCARD-EXPANSION SHELL as a workaround. ++ d. CD to a directory that contains a variety of files, symlinks, and ++ subdirectories and give a DIRECTORY command at the C-Kermit> ++ prompt. Do the permissions, size, and date appear correct? If not ++ see [199]Section 4.0. ++ e. Assuming your platform supports long file names, create a file ++ with a long name in your current directory, e.g.: ++ ++$ touch thisisafilewithaveryveryveryveryveryveryveryverylooooooooongname ++ ++ (you might need to make it longer than this, perhaps as long as ++ 257 or even 1025 characters). ++ Check with ls to see if your version of Unix truncated the name. ++ Now start C-Kermit and type "send thisis". Does Kermit ++ complete the name, showing the same name as ls did? If not, wrong ++ filesystem. Read on. ++ f. Make sure that Kermit has the maximum path length right. Just type ++ SHOW FILE and see what it says about this. If it is too short, ++ there could be some problems at runtime. To correct, look in ++ [200]ckcdeb.h to see how the symbol CKMAXPATH is set and make any ++ needed adjustments. ++ g. Send a file to your new Kermit program from a different Kermit ++ program that is known to work. Is the date/timestamp of the new ++ file identical to the original? If not, adjustments are needed in ++ zstrdt() in [201]ckufio.c. ++ h. Go to another computer (Computer B) from which you can send files ++ to C-Kermit. Connect Computer B to the computer (A) where you are ++ testing C-Kermit. Then: ++ i. Send a file from B to A. Make sure it transferred OK and was ++ created with the the right name. ++ j. Send a file from B to A, specifying an "as-name" that is very, ++ very long (longer than the maximum name length on computer A). ++ Check to make sure that the file was received OK and that its name ++ was truncated to Computer A's maximum length. If not, check the ++ MAXNAMLEN definition in [202]ckufio.c. ++ k. Tell C-Kermit on Computer A to "set receive pathnames relative" ++ and then send it a file from Computer B specifying an as-name that ++ contains several directory segments: ++ ++send foo dir1/dir2/dir3/foo ++ ++ Check to make sure that dir1/dir2/dir3/foo was created in Computer ++ A's current directory (i.e. that three levels of directories were ++ created). ++ l. Repeat step k, but make each path segment in the pathname longer ++ than Computer A's maximum name length. Make sure each directory ++ name, and the final filename, were truncated properly. ++ m. Type Ctrl-C (or whatever your Unix interrupt character is) at the ++ prompt. Do you get "^C..." and a new prompt? If instead, you get a ++ core dump (this shouldn't happen any more) "rm core" and then ++ rebuild with -DNOCCTRAP added to your CFLAGS. If it did work, then ++ type another Ctrl-C. If this does the same thing as the first one, ++ then Ctrl-C handling is OK. Otherwise, the SIGINT signal is either ++ not getting re-armed (shouldn't happen) or is being masked off ++ after the first time it is caught, in which case, if your Unix is ++ POSIX-based, try rebuilding C-Kermit with -DCK_POSIX_SIG. ++ n. Type Ctrl-Z (or whatever your Unix suspend character is) to put ++ C-Kermit in the background. Did it work? If nothing happened, then ++ (a)your version of Unix does not support job control, or (b) your ++ version of C-Kermit was probably built with -DNOJC. If your ++ session became totally frozen, then you are probably running ++ C-Kermit on a Unix version that supports job control, but under a ++ shell that doesn't. If that's not the case, look in the congm() ++ and psuspend() routines in [203]ckutio.c and see if you can figure ++ out what's wrong. If you can't, rebuild with -DNOJC. ++ o. Give a SET LINE command for a dialout device, e.g. "set line ++ /dev/tty00". If you got some kind of permission or access denied ++ message, go read [204]Section 10 and then come back here. ++ p. After giving a successful SET LINE command, type "show comm" to ++ see the communication parameters. Do they make sense? ++ q. Type "set speed ?" and observe the list of available speeds. Is it ++ what you expected? If not, see [205]Section 2) of the ++ [206]Configurations Options document. ++ r. Give a SET SPEED command to change the device's speed. Did it ++ work? (Type "show comm" again to check.) ++ s. Try dialing out: SET MODEM TYPE , SET LINE , SET SPEED , DIAL . If ++ it doesn't work, keep reading. After dialing, can you REDIAL? ++ t. If your version was built with TCP/IP network support, try the ++ TELNET command. ++ u. Transfer some files in remote mode on incoming asynchronous serial ++ (direct or modem) connections, and on incoming network (telnet, ++ rlogin, terminal server) connections. If you get lots of errors, ++ try different SET FLOW settings on the remote Kermit program. ++ v. Establish a serial connection from C-Kermit to another computer ++ (direct or dialed) and transfer some files. If you have network ++ support, do the same with a network connection. ++ w. If your version was built with fullscreen file transfer display ++ support, check that it works during local-mode file transfer. ++ Also, check C-Kermit's operation afterwards: is the echoing funny? ++ etc etc. If there are problems, see [207]Section 4. ++ x. If your version was built with script programming language ++ support, TAKE the ckedemo.ksc file to give it a workout. ++ y. Does C-Kermit interlock correctly with UUCP-family programs (cu, ++ tip, uucp, etc)? If not, read the section [208]DIALING OUT AND ++ COORDINATING WITH UUCP below. ++ z. Modem signals... Give a SET LINE command to a serial device and ++ then type the SHOW MODEM command. If it says "Modem signals ++ unavailable in this version of Kermit", then you might want to ++ look at the ttgmdm() routine in [209]ckutio.c and add the needed ++ code -- if indeed your version of Unix provides a way to get modem ++ signals (some don't; e.g. modem signals are a foreign concept to ++ POSIX, requiring politically incorrect workarounds). ++ aa. If it says "Modem signals unavailable", then it is likely that the ++ API for getting modem signals is provided, but it doesn't actually ++ do anything (e.g. ioctl(ttyfd,TIOCMGET,&x) returns EINVAL). ++ ab. In any case, it still should be able to manipulate the DTR signal. ++ To test, SET LINE , SET MODEM NONE, and HANGUP. The DTR light ++ should go out momentarily. If it doesn't, see if you can add the ++ needed code for your system to the tthang() routine in ++ [210]ckutio.c. ++ ac. If your version of Kermit has the SET FLOW RTS/CTS command, check ++ to see if it works: give Kermit this command, set your modem for ++ RTS/CTS, transfer some files (using big packet and window sizes) ++ and watch the RTS and CTS lights on the modem. If they go on and ++ off (and Kermit does not get packet errors), then it works. If ++ your version of Kermit does not have this command, but your ++ version of Unix does support hardware flow control, take a look at ++ the tthflow() command in [211]ckutio.c and see if you can add the ++ needed code (see the section on [212]HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL below). ++ (And please [213]send back any added code, so that others can ++ benefit from it and it can be carried forward into future ++ releases.) ++ ad. If C-Kermit starts normally and issues its prompt, echoing is ++ normal, etc, but then after returning from a CONNECT session, the ++ prompt no longer appears, try rebuilding with -DCKCONINTB4CB. ++ ae. (8.0.206 or later) Type some commands at the C-Kermit prompt. Can ++ you use the Up-arrow and Down-arrow keys on your keyboard to ++ access Kermit's command history? If not, and you're a programmer, ++ take a look at the USE_ARROWKEYS sections of ckucmd.c. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++8. REDUCING THE SIZE OF THE EXECUTABLE PROGRAM IMAGE ++ ++ [ [214]Top ] [ [215]Contents ] [ [216]Next ] [ [217]Previous ] ++ ++ Also see: [218]C-Kermit Configuration Options ++ ++ a. Many of C-Kermit's options and features can be deselected at ++ compile time. The greatest savings at the least sacrifice in ++ functionality is to disable the logging of debug information by ++ defining NODEBUG during compilation. See the [219]Configurations ++ Options document for further information. ++ b. Use shared libraries rather than static linking. This is the ++ default on many Unix systems anyway. However, executables built ++ for dynamic linking with shared libraries are generally not ++ portable away from the machine they were built on, so this is ++ recommended if the binary is for your use only. ++ c. Most Unix systems have a "strip" command to remove symbol table ++ information from an executable program image. "man strip" for ++ further information. The same effect can be achieved by including ++ "-s" among the link flags when building C-Kermit. ++ d. SCO, Interactive, and some other Unix versions have an "mcs" ++ command. "mcs -d wermit" can be used to delete the contents of the ++ ".comment" section from the executable program image. ++ e. Many modern optimizers can be instructed to optimize for space ++ rather than execution efficiency. Check the CFLAGS in the makefile ++ target, adjust as desired. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++9. UNIX VERSIONS ++ ++ [ [220]Top ] [ [221]Contents ] [ [222]Next ] [ [223]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++9.1 [224]Standards ++ 9.1.1. [225]POSIX ++ 9.1.2. [226]ANSI C ++ 9.1.3. [227]Other Standards ++9.2. [228]Library Issues ++9.3. [229]Unix File System Peculiarities ++9.4. [230]Hardware Flow Control ++9.5. [231]Terminal Speeds ++9.6. [232]Millisecond Sleeps ++9.7. [233]Nondestructive Input Buffer Peeking ++9.8. [234]Other System-Dependent Features ++9.9. [235]Terminal Interruption ++ ++ There are several major varieties of Unix: Bell Laboratories Seventh ++ Edition, AT&T System V, Berkeley Standard Distribution (BSD), and ++ POSIX. Each has many, many subvarieties and descendents, and there are ++ also hybrids that exhibit symptoms of two or more varieties, plus ++ special quirks of their own. ++ ++ Seventh edition versions of C-Kermit include the compile-time option ++ -DV7 in the CFLAGS string in the makefile target. Various V7-based ++ implementations are also supported: -DCOHERENT, -DMINIX, etc. ++ ++ AT&T-based versions of Unix Kermit include the compile-time option ++ -DATTSV (standing for AT∓T Unix System V). This applies to System ++ III and to System V up to and including Release 2. For System V ++ Release 3, the flag -DSVR3 should be used instead (which also implies ++ -DATTSV). This is because the data type of signal() and several other ++ functions was changed between SVR2 and SVR3. For System V Release 4, ++ include -DSVR4 because of changes in UUCP lockfile conventions; this ++ also implies -DSVR3 and -DATTSV. ++ ++ For BSD, the flag -BSDxx must be included, where xx is the BSD version ++ number, for example BSD4 (for version 4.2 or later, using only 4.2 ++ features), -DBSD41 (for BSD 4.1 only), -DBSD43 (for 4.3), -DBSD29 (BSD ++ 2.9 for DEC PDP-11s). -DBSD44 is for 4.4BSD, which is the basis of ++ FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, BSDI, and Mac OS X, and which contains many ++ POSIX features, and has little relation to 4.3BSD and earlier. ++ ++ For POSIX, include the flag -DPOSIX. POSIX defines a whole new set of ++ terminal i/o functions that are not found in traditional AT&T or ++ Berkeley implementations, and also defines the symbol _POSIX_SOURCE, ++ which is used in many system and library header files, mainly to ++ disable non-POSIX (i.e. useful) features. ++ ++ Note (circa 1997): In order to enable serial speeds higher than 38400 ++ bps, it is generally necessary to add -DPOSIX (among other things), ++ since the older terminal APIs can not accommodate the new speeds -- ++ out o' bits. But this often also means wholesale conversion to POSIX ++ APIs. In general, just try adding -DPOSIX and then see what goes ++ wrong. Be wary of features disappearing: when _POSIX_SOURCE is ++ defined, all sorts of things that were perfectly OK before suddenly ++ become politically incorrect -- like reading modem signals, doing ++ hardware flow control, etc. POSIX was evidently not designed with ++ serial communication in mind! ++ ++ Case in point: In UnixWare 7.0, #define'ing POSIX causes strictness ++ clauses in the header files to take effect. These prevent ++ from defining the timeval and timezone structs, which are needed for ++ all sorts of things (like select()). Thus, if we want the high serial ++ speeds, we have to circumvent the POSIX clauses. ++ ++ Similarly in SCO OpenServer R5.0.4 where, again, we must use the POSIX ++ APIs to get at serial speeds higher than 38400, but then doing so ++ removes hardware flow control -- just when we need it most! In cases ++ like this, dirty tricks are the only recourse (search for SCO_OSR504 ++ in [236]ckutio.c for examples). ++ ++ For reasons like this, Unix implementations tend to be neither pure ++ AT&T nor pure BSD nor pure POSIX, but a mixture of two or more of ++ these, with "compatibility features" allowing different varieties of ++ programs to be built on the same computer. In general, Kermit tries ++ not to mix and match but to keep a consistent repertoire throughout. ++ However, there are certain Unix implementations that only work when ++ you mix and match. For example, the Silicon Graphics IRIX operating ++ system (prior to version 3.3) is an AT&T Unix but with a BSD file ++ system. The only way you can build Kermit successfully for this ++ configuration is to include -DSVR3 plus the special option -DLONGFN, ++ meaning "pretend I was built with -DBSDxx when it's time to compile ++ file-related code". See the "iris" makefile target. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.1. Standards ++ ++ [ [237]Top ] [ [238]Section Contents ] [ [239]Contents ] [ [240]Next ] ++ ++ SUBSECTION CONTENTS ++ ++9.1.1. [241]POSIX ++9.1.2. [242]ANSI C ++9.1.3. [243]Other Standards ++ ++ In edits 166-167 (1988-89), C-Kermit was heavily modified to try to ++ keep abreast of new standards while still remaining compatible with ++ old versions of C and Unix. There are two new standards of interest: ++ ANSI C (as described in Kernighan and Ritchie, "The C Programming ++ Language", Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 1988) and POSIX.1 (IEEE ++ Standard 1003.1 and ISO/IEC 9945-1, 1990, "Portable Operating System ++ Interface"). These two standards have nothing to do with each other: ++ you can build C-Kermit with a non-ANSI compiler for a POSIX system, or ++ for a non-POSIX system with with an ANSI compiler. ++ ++ 9.1.1. POSIX ++ ++ POSIX.1 defines a repertoire of system functions and header files for ++ use by C language programs. Most notably, the ioctl() function is not ++ allowed in POSIX; all ioctl() functions have been replaced by ++ device-specific functions like tcsetattr(), tcsendbreak(), etc. ++ ++ Computer systems that claim some degree of POSIX compliance have made ++ some attempt to put their header files in the right places and give ++ them the right names, and to provide system library functions with the ++ right names and calling conventions. Within the header files, ++ POSIX-compliant functions are supposed to be within #ifdef ++ _POSIX_SOURCE..#endif conditionals, and non-POSIX items are not within ++ these conditionals. ++ ++ If Kermit is built with neither -D_POSIX_SOURCE nor -DPOSIX, the ++ functions and header files of the selected version of Unix (or VMS, ++ etc) are used according to the CFLAGS Kermit was built with. ++ ++ If Kermit is built with -D_POSIX_SOURCE but not -DPOSIX, then one of ++ the -DBSD or -DATTSV flags (or one that implies them) must also be ++ defined, but it still uses only the POSIX features in the system ++ header files. This allows C-Kermit to be built on BSD or AT&T systems ++ that have some degree of POSIX compliance, but still use BSD or AT&T ++ specific features. ++ ++ The dilimma is this: it is often necessary to define _POSIX_SOURCE to ++ get at new or modern features, such as high serial speeds and the APIs ++ to deal with them. But defining _POSIX_SOURCE also hides other APIs ++ that Kermit needs, for example the ones dealing with modem signals ++ (others are listed just below). Thus all sorts of hideous contortions ++ are often required to get a full set of features. ++ ++ The POSIX standard does not define anything about uucp lockfiles. ++ "make posix" uses NO (repeat, NO) lockfile conventions. If your ++ POSIX-compliant Unix version uses a lockfile convention such as ++ HDBUUCP (see below), use the "posix" entry, but include the ++ appropriate lockfile option in your KFLAGS on the "make" command line, ++ for example: ++ ++make posix "KFLAGS=-DHDBUUCP" ++ ++ POSIX.1 also lacks certain other features that Kermit needs. For ++ example: ++ ++ * There is no defined way for an application to do wildcard matching ++ of filenames. Kermit uses the inode in the directory structure, ++ but POSIX.1 does not include this concept. (Later POSIX revisions ++ include functions named (I think) glob() and fnmatch(), but these ++ functions are not yet in Kermit, and might not be appropriate in ++ any case.) ++ * There is no POSIX mechanism for sensing or controlling modem ++ signals, nor to enable RTS/CTS or other hardware flow control. ++ * There is no select() for multiplexing i/o, and therefore no ++ TCP/IP. ++ * There is no way to check if characters are waiting in a ++ communications device (or console) input buffer, short of trying ++ to read them -- no select(), ioctl(fd,FIONREAD,blah), rdchk(), ++ etc. This is bad for CONNECT mode and bad for sliding windows. ++ * No way to do a millisecond sleep (no nap(), usleep(), select(), ++ etc). ++ * There is no popen(). ++ ++ So at this point, there cannot be one single fully functional POSIX ++ form of C-Kermit unless it also has "extensions", as do Linux, QNX, ++ etc. ++ ++ More on POSIX (quoting from a newsgroup posting by Dave Butenhof): ++ ++ Standards tend to look at themselves as "enabling". So POSIX ++ standards say that, in order to use POSIX functions, a program must ++ define some macro that will put the development environment in ++ "POSIX mode". For the ancient POSIX 1003.1-1990, the symbol is ++ _POSIX_SOURCE. For recent revisions, it's _POSIX_C_SOURCE with an ++ appropriate value. POSIX 1003.1-1996 says that, to use its features ++ in a portable manner, you must define _POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L ++ before including any header files. ++ ++ But for Solaris, or Digital Unix, the picture is different. POSIX ++ is one important but small part of the universe. Yet POSIX ++ unconditionally and unambiguously REQUIRES that, when ++ _POSIX_C_SOURCE=199506L, ALL of the functions and definitions ++ required by the standard, and NO others (except in specific ++ restricted namespaces, specifically "_" followed by an uppercase ++ letter or "__" followed by a lowercase letter) shall be visible. ++ That kinda puts a cramp on BSD and SVID support, because those ++ require names that are not in the "protected" POSIX namespaces. ++ It's ILLEGAL to make those symbols visible, unless you've done ++ something else that's beyond the scope of POSIX to allow the system ++ to infer that you didn't really mean it. ++ ++ In most cases, you should just compile, with no standards-related ++ macros defined. The system will make available every interface and ++ definition that isn't incompatible with the "main stream". There ++ may indeed be cases where two standards cross, and you really can't ++ use both together. But, in general, they play nicely together as ++ long as you don't do anything rash -- like telling the system that ++ it's not allowed to let them. ++ ++ In the area of threads, both Solaris and Digital Unix support ++ incompatible thread APIs. We have POSIX and DCE, they have POSIX ++ and UI. The nasty areas are in the _r routines and in some aspects ++ of signal behavior. You cannot compile a single source file that ++ uses both semantics. That's life. It sounds as if Solaris defaults ++ to the UI variants, but allows you to define this ++ _POSIX_THREAD_SEMANTICS to get around it. We default to POSIX, and ++ allow you to define _PTHREAD_USE_D4 (automatically defined by the ++ cc "-threads" switch) to select the DCE thread variants. That ++ default, because you're operating outside of any individual ++ standard, is really just a marketing decision. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.1.2. ANSI C ++ ++ [ [244]Top ] [ [245]Contents ] [ [246]Section Contents ] [ ++ [247]Subsection Contents ] [ [248]Next ] [ [249]Previous ] ++ ++ The major difference between ANSI C and earlier C compilers is ++ function prototyping. ANSI C allows function arguments to be checked ++ for type agreement, and (when possible) type coercion in the event of ++ a mismatch. For this to work, functions and their arguments must be ++ declared before they are called. The form for function declarations is ++ different in ANSI C and non-ANSI C (ANSI C also accepts the earlier ++ form, but then does not do type checking). ++ ++ As of edit 167, C-Kermit tries to take full advantage of ANSI C ++ features, especially function prototyping. This removes many bugs ++ introduced by differing data types used or returned by the same ++ functions on different computers. ANSI C features are automatically ++ enabled when the symbol __STDC__ is defined. Most ANSI C compilers, ++ such as GNU CC and the new DEC C compiler define this symbol ++ internally. ++ ++ On the downside, ANSI C compilation increases the ++ administrative/bureacratic burden, spewing out countless unneeded ++ warnings about mismatched types, especially when we are dealing with ++ signed and unsigned characters, requiring casts everywhere to shut up ++ the mindless complaints -- there is no use for signed chars in Kermit ++ (or probably anywhere else). Some compilers, mercifully, include a ++ "treat all chars as unsigned" option, and when available it should be ++ used -- not only to stop the warnings, but also to avoid unhelpful ++ sign extension on high-bit characters. ++ ++ To force use of ANSI C prototypes, include -DCK_ANSIC on the cc ++ command line. To disable the use of ANSI prototypes, include -DNOANSI. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.1.3. Other Standards ++ ++ [ [250]Top ] [ [251]Contents ] [ [252]Section Contents ] [ ++ [253]Subsection Contents ] [ [254]Next ] [ [255]Previous ] ++ ++ As the years go by, standards with-which-all-must-comply continue to ++ pile up: AES, XPG2, XPG3, XPG4, FIPS 151-2, successive generations of ++ POSIX, OSF/1, X/Open, Spec 1170, UNIX95, Open Group UNIX98, ISO/IEC ++ 9945 parts 1-4, ISO 9899, 88Open, OS 99, Single Unix Specification ++ (SUS, [256]IEEE 1003.1-2001, not to mention "mature standards" like ++ V7, 4.2/4.3BSD, System V R3 and R4 (SVID2 and SVID3), 4.4BSD (the ++ basis for BSDI, OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD, Mac OS X etc), /usr/group, ++ plus assorted seismic pronouncements of the neverending series of ++ ephemeral corporate consortia, not to mention the libc-vs-glibc ++ turmoil in the Linux arena and who knows what else. ++ ++ None of these standards simplifies life for portable applications like ++ C-Kermit -- each one is simply one more environment to support (or ++ circumvent, as in many cases these standards do more harm than good by ++ denying access to facilities we need, e.g. as noted in above in ++ [257]9.1.1). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.2. Library Issues ++ ++ [ [258]Top ] [ [259]Contents ] [ [260]Section Contents ] [ ++ [261]Subsection Contents ] [ [262]Next ] [ [263]Previous ] ++ ++ On most modern platforms, applications are -- and often must be -- ++ dynamically linked. This has numerous advantages (smaller executables, ++ ability to patch a library and thereby patch all applications that use ++ it, etc), but also causes some headaches: most commonly, the library ++ ID built into the executable at link time does not match the ID of the ++ corresponding library on the target system, and so the loader refuses ++ to let the application run. ++ ++ This problem only gets worse over time. In the Linux and *BSD world, ++ we also have totally different libraries (each with their own names ++ and numbering systems) that cover the same territory; for example, ++ curses vs ncurses, libc versus glibc. Combinations proliferate and any ++ given Unix computer might have any combination. For this reason it is ++ becoming increasingly difficult to produce a "Linux binary" for a ++ given architecture (e.g. PC or Alpha). There has to be a separate ++ binary for (at least) every combination of curses vs ncurses and libc ++ vs glibc. ++ ++ In such cases, the best advice is for every user to build C-Kermit ++ from source code on the system where it will run. Too bad most ++ commercial Unix vendors have stopped including C compilers with the ++ operating system! ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.3. Unix File System Peculiarities ++ ++ [ [264]Top ] [ [265]Contents ] [ [266]Section Contents ] [ [267]Next ] ++ [ [268]Previous ] ++ ++ Normally, including a BSD, System-V, POSIX, or DIRENT flag in the make ++ entry selects the right file system code. But some versions of Unix ++ are inconsistent in this regard, and building in the normal way either ++ gives compiler or linker errors, or results in problems at runtime, ++ typically failure to properly expand wildcard file specifications when ++ you do something like "send *.*", or failure to recognize long ++ filenames, as in "send filewithaveryveryveryveryverylongname". ++ ++ C-Kermit is supposed to know about all the various styles of Unix file ++ systems, but it has to be told which one to use when you build it, ++ usually in the makefile target CFLAGS as shown below, but you might ++ also have to add something like -I/usr/include/bsd to CFLAGS, or ++ something like -lbsd to LIBS. ++ ++ C-Kermit gives you the following CFLAGS switches to adapt to your file ++ system's peculiarities: ++ ++-DDIRENT - #include ++-DSDIRENT - #include ++-DNDIR - #include ++-DXNDIR - #include ++-DRTU - #include "/usr/lib/ndir.h", only if NDIR and XNDIR not defined. ++-DSYSUTIMH - #include for setting file creation dates. ++-DUTIMEH - #include for setting file creation dates. ++ ++ (Note, RTU should only be used for Masscomp RTU systems, because it ++ also selects certain other RTU-specific features.) ++ ++ If none of these is defined, then is used. IMPORTANT: If ++ your system has the file /usr/include/dirent.h then be sure to add ++ -DDIRENT to your makefile target's CFLAGS. "dirent" should be used in ++ preference to any of the others, because it supports all the features ++ of your file system, and the others probably don't. ++ ++ Having selected the appropriate directory header file, you might also ++ need to tell Kermit how to declare the routines and variables it needs ++ to read the directory. This happens most commonly on AT&T System-V ++ based UNIXes, particularly System V R3 and earlier, that provide long ++ file and directory names (longer than 14 characters). Examples include ++ certain releases of HP-UX, DIAB DNIX, older versions of Silicon ++ Graphics IRIX, and perhaps also MIPS. In this case, try adding ++ -DLONGFN to your makefile target. ++ ++ Another problem child is . Most Unix C-Kermit versions ++ need to #include this file from within [269]ckufio.c and ++ [270]ckutio.c, but some not only do not need to include it, but MUST ++ not include it because (a) it doesn't exist, or (b) it has already ++ been included by some other header file and it doesn't protect itself ++ against multiple inclusion, or (c) some other reason that prevents ++ successful compilation. If you have compilation problems that seem to ++ stem from including this file, then add the following switch to CFLAGS ++ in your makefile target: ++ ++-DNOFILEH ++ ++ There are a few odd cases where must be included in one ++ of the cku[ft]io.c files, but not the other. In that case, add the ++ aforementioned switch, but go into the file that needs ++ and add something like this: ++ ++#ifdef XXX /* (where XXX is a symbol unique to your system) */ ++#undef NOFILEH ++#endif /* XXX */ ++ ++ before the section that includes . ++ ++ Kermit's SEND command expands wildcard characters "?" and "*" itself. ++ Before version 5A, commands like "send *" would send all regular ++ (non-directory) files, including "hidden files" (whose names start ++ with "."). In version 5A, the default behavior is to match like the ++ Bourne shell or the ls command, and not include files whose names ++ start with dot. Such files can still be sent if the dot is included ++ explicitly in the SEND command: "send .oofa, send .*". To change back ++ to the old way and let leading wildcard characters match dot files, ++ include the following in your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DMATCHDOT ++ ++ (In C-Kermit 6.0, there is also a command to control this at runtime.) ++ ++ Complaints about data-type mismatches: ++ ++ * If you get compile-time complaints about data type mismatches for ++ process-ID related functions like getpid(), add -DPID_T=pid_t. ++ * If you get compile-time complaints about data type mismatches for ++ user ID related functions like getuid(), add -DUID_T=uid_t. ++ * If you get compile-time complaints about data type mismatches for ++ user-ID related functions like getgid(), add -DGID_T=gid_t. ++ * If you get compile-time complaints about data type mismatches for ++ getpwuid(), add -DPWID_T=uid_t (or whatever it should be). ++ ++ File creation dates: C-Kermit attempts to set the creation date/time ++ of an incoming file according to the date/time given in the file's ++ attribute packet, if any. If you find that the dates are set ++ incorrectly, you might need to build Kermit with the -DSYSUTIMEH flag, ++ to tell it to include . If that doesn't help, look at the ++ code in zstrdt() in [271]ckufio.c. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.4. Hardware Flow Control ++ ++ [ [272]Top ] [ [273]Contents ] [ [274]Section Contents ] [ [275]Next ] ++ [ [276]Previous ] ++ ++ Hardware flow control is a problematic concept in many popular Unix ++ implementations. Often it is lacking altogether, and when available, ++ the application program interface (API) to it is inconsistent from ++ system to system. Here are some examples: ++ ++ a. POSIX does not support hardware flow control. ++ b. RTS/CTS flow control support MIGHT be available for System V R3 ++ and later if /usr/include/termiox.h exists (its successful ++ operation also depends on the device driver, and the device ++ itself, not to mention the cable, etc, actually supporting it). If ++ your SVR3-or-later Unix system does have this file, add: ++ ++-DTERMIOX ++ ++ to your CFLAGS. If the file is in /usr/include/sys instead, add: ++ ++-DSTERMIOX ++ ++ Note that the presence of this file does not guarantee that ++ RTS/CTS will actually work -- that depends on the device-driver ++ implementation (reportedly, many Unix versions treat ++ hardware-flow-control related ioctl's as no-ops). ++ c. Search ("grep -i") through /usr/include/*.h and ++ /usr/include/sys/*.h for RTS or CTS and see what turns up. For ++ example, in SunOS 4.x we find "CRTSCTS". Figuring out how to use ++ it is another question entirely! In IBM AIX RS/6000 3.x, we have ++ to "add" a new "line discipline" (and you won't find uppercase RTS ++ or CTS symbols in the header files). ++ d. NeXTSTEP and IRIX, and possibly others, support hardware flow ++ control, but do not furnish an API to control it, and thus on ++ these systems Kermit has no command to select it -- instead, a ++ special device name must be used. (NeXTSTEP: /dev/cufa instead of ++ /dev/cua; IRIX: /dev/ttyf00) ++ ++ See the routine tthflow() in [277]ckutio.c for details. If you find ++ that your system offers hardware flow control selection under program ++ control, you can add this capability to C-Kermit as follows: ++ ++ a. See if it agrees with one of the methods already used in ++ tthflow(). if not, add new code, appropriately #ifdef'd. ++ b. Add -DCK_RTSCTS to the compiler CFLAGS in your makefile target or ++ define this symbol within the appropriate #ifdefs in ++ [278]ckcdeb.h. ++ ++ To illustrate the difficulties with RTS/CTS, here is a tale from Jamie ++ Watson , who added the RTS/CTS code for the RS/6000, ++ about his attempts to do the same for DEC ULTRIX: ++ ++ "The number and type of hardware signals available to/from a serial ++ port vary between different machines and different types of serial ++ interfaces on each machine. This means that, for example, there are ++ virtually no hardware signals in or out available on the DECsystem ++ 3000/3100 series; on the DECsystem 5000/2xx series all modem ++ signals in/out are present on both built-in serial ports; on the ++ DECsystem 5100 some ports have all signals and some only have some; ++ and so on... It looks to me as if this pretty well rules out any ++ attempt to use hardware flow control on these platforms, even if we ++ could figure out how to do it. The confusion on the user level ++ about whether or not it should work for any given platform or port ++ would be tremendous. And then it isn't clear how to use the ++ hardware signals even in the cases where the device supports them." ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.5. Terminal Speeds ++ ++ [ [279]Top ] [ [280]Contents ] [ [281]Section Contents ] [ [282]Next ] ++ [ [283]Previous ] ++ ++ The allowable speeds for the SET SPEED command are defined in ++ [284]ckcdeb.h. If your system supports speeds that are not listed in ++ "set speed ?", you can add definitions for them to ckcdeb.h. ++ ++ Then if the speed you are adding is one that was never used before in ++ Kermit, such as 921600, you'll also need to add the appropriate ++ keywords to spdtab[] in [285]ckuus3.c, and the corresponding case to ++ ttsspd() in [286]ckutio.c. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.6. Millisecond Sleeps ++ ++ [ [287]Top ] [ [288]Contents ] [ [289]Section Contents ] [ [290]Next ] ++ [ [291]Previous ] ++ ++ There is no standard for millisecond sleeps, but at least five ++ different functions have appeared in various Unix versions that can be ++ used for this purpose: nap() (mostly in System V), usleep() (found at ++ least in SunOS and NeXT OS), select() (found in 4.2BSD and later, and ++ part of any TCP/IP sockets library), nanosleep(), and sginap(). If you ++ have any of these available, pick one (in this order of preference, if ++ you have more than one): ++ ++-DSELECT: Include this in CFLAGS if your system has the select() function. ++-DNAP: Include this in CFLAGS if your system has the nap() function. ++-USLEEP: Include this in CFLAGS if your system has the usleep() function. ++ ++ NOTE: The nap() function is assumed to be a function that puts the ++ process to sleep for the given number of milliseconds. If your ++ system's nap() function does something else or uses some other units ++ of time (like the NCR Tower 32, which uses clock-ticks), do not ++ include -DNAP. ++ ++ Reportedly, all versions of System V R4 for Intel-based computers, and ++ possibly also SVR3.2, include nap() as a kernel call, but it's not in ++ the library. To include code to use it via syscall(3112,x), without ++ having to include Xenix compatibility features, include the following ++ compile-time option: ++ ++-DNAPHACK ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.7. Nondestructive Input Buffer Peeking ++ ++ [ [292]Top ] [ [293]Contents ] [ [294]Section Contents ] [ [295]Next ] ++ [ [296]Previous ] ++ ++ Some AT&T Unix versions have no way to check if input is waiting on a ++ tty device, but this is a very important feature for Kermit. Without ++ it, sliding windows might not work very well (or at all), and you also ++ have to type your escape character to get Kermit's attention in order ++ to interrupt a local-mode file transfer. If your system offers an ++ FIONREAD ioctl, the build procedure should pick that up automatically ++ and use it, which is ideal. ++ ++ If your system lacks FIONREAD but has a select() function, this can be ++ used instead. If the build procedure fails to include it (SHOW ++ FEATURES will list SELECT), then you can add it to your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DSELECT ++ ++ Conversely, if the build procedure tries to use select() when it ++ really is not there, add: ++ ++-DNOSELECT ++ ++ Note: select() is not part of System V nor of POSIX, but it has been ++ added to various System-V- and POSIX-based systems as an extension. ++ ++ Some System-V variations (SCO Xenix/UNIX/ODT and DIAB DNIX) include a ++ rdchk() function that can be used for buffer peeking. It returns 0 if ++ no characters are waiting and 1 if characters are waiting (but unlike ++ FIONREAD, it does not tell the actual number). If your system has ++ rdchk(), add: ++ ++-DRDCHK: Include this in CFLAGS if your system has the rdchk() function. ++ ++ Otherwise, if your version of Unix has the poll() function (and the ++ /usr/include/poll.h file) -- which appears to be a standard part of ++ System V going back to at least SVR3, include: ++ ++-DCK_POLL ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.8. Other System-Dependent Features ++ ++ [ [297]Top ] [ [298]Contents ] [ [299]Section Contents ] [ [300]Next ] ++ [ [301]Previous ] ++ ++ Systems with might have the symbol IEXTEN defined. This is ++ used to turn "extended features" in the tty device driver on and off, ++ such as Ctrl-O to toggle output flushing, Ctrl-V to quote input ++ characters, etc. ++ ++ In most Unix implementations, it should be turned off during Kermit ++ operation, so if [302]ckutio.c finds this symbol, it uses it. This is ++ necessary, at least, on BSDI. On some systems, however, IEXTEN is ++ either misdefined or misimplemented. The symptom is that CR, when ++ typed to the command processor, is echoed as LF, rather than CRLF. ++ This happens (at least) on Convex/OS 9.1. The solution is to add the ++ following symbol to the makefile target's CFLACS: ++ ++-DNOIEXTEN ++ ++ However, in at least one Unix implementation, QNX 4.21, IEXTEN must be ++ set before hardware flow control can be used. ++ ++ In edits 177 and earlier, workstation users noticed a "slow screen ++ writing" phenomenon during interactive command parsing. This was ++ traced to a setbuf() call in [303]ckutio.c that made console (stdout) ++ writes unbuffered. This setbuf() call has been there forever, and ++ could not be removed without some risk. Kermit's operation was tested ++ on the NeXT in edit 178 with the setbuf() call removed, and the ++ slow-writing symptom was cured, and everything else (command parsing, ++ proper wakeup on ?, ESC, Ctrl-U, and other editing characters, ++ terminal emulation, remote-mode and local-mode file transfer, etc) ++ seemed to work as well as or better than before. In subsequent edits, ++ this change was made to many other versions too, with no apparent ill ++ effects. To remove the setbuf() call for your version of Kermit, add: ++ ++-DNOSETBUF ++ ++ Later reports indicate that adding -DNOSETBUF has other beneficial ++ effects, like cutting down on swapping when Kermit is run on ++ workstations with small memories. But BEWARE: on certain small Unix ++ systems, notably the AT&T 6300 and 3B1 (the very same ones that ++ benefit from NOSETBUF), NOSETBUF seems to conflict with CK_CURSES. The ++ program builds and runs OK, but after once using the curses display, ++ echoing is messed up. In this case, we use a System-V specific ++ variation in the curses code, using newterm() to prevent System V from ++ altering the buffering. See makefile entries for AT&T 6300 and 3B1. ++ ++ The Unix version of C-Kermit includes code to switch to file ++ descriptor zero (stdin) for remote-mode file transfer. This code is ++ necessary to prevent Kermit from giving the impression that it is ++ "idle" during file transfers, which, at some sites, can result in the ++ job being logged out in the middle of an active file transfer by ++ idle-job monitors. ++ ++ However, this feature can interfere with certain setups; for example, ++ there is a package which substitutes a pty/tty pair for /dev/tty and ++ sets file descriptor 0 to be read-only, preventing Kermit from sending ++ packets. Or... When a Unix shell is invoked under the PICK ++ environment, file descriptor 0 is inoperative. ++ ++ To remove this feature and allow Kermit to work in such environments, ++ add the compile-time option: ++ ++-DNOFDZERO ++ ++ On some versions of Unix, earlier releases of C-Kermit were reported ++ to render a tty device unusable after a hangup operation. Examples ++ include IBM AIX on the RT PC and RS/6000. A typical symptom of this ++ phenomenon is that the DIAL command doesn't work, but CONNECTing to ++ the device and dialing manually do work. A further test is to SET DIAL ++ HANGUP OFF, which should make dialing work once by skipping the ++ pre-dial hangup. However, after the connection is broken, it can't be ++ used any more: subsequent attempts to DIAL the same device don't work. ++ The cure is usually to close and reopen the device as part of the ++ hangup operation. To do this, include the following compile-time ++ option: ++ ++-DCLSOPN ++ ++ Similarly, there is a section of code in ttopen(), which does another ++ close(open()) to force the O_NDELAY mode change. On some systems, the ++ close(open()) is required to make the mode change take effect, and ++ apparently on most others it does no harm. But reportedly on at least ++ one System V R4 implementation, and on SCO Xenix 3.2, the ++ close(open()) operation hangs if the device lacks carrier, EVEN THOUGH ++ the CLOCAL characteristic has just been set to avoid this very ++ problem. If this happens to you, add this to your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DNOCOTFMC ++ ++ or, equivalently, in your KFLAGS on the make command line. It stands ++ for NO Close(Open()) To Force Mode Change. ++ ++ C-Kermit renames files when you give a RENAME command and also ++ according to the current SET FILE COLLISION option when receiving ++ files. The normal Unix way to rename a file is via two system calls: ++ link() and unlink(). But this leaves open a window of vulnerability. ++ Some Unix systems also offer an atomic rename(oldname,newname) ++ function. If your version of Unix has this function, add the following ++ to your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DRENAME ++ ++ C-Kermit predefines the RENAME for several Unix versions in ++ [304]ckcdeb.h (SVR4, SUNOS41, BSD44, AIXRS, etc). You can tell if ++ rename() is being used if the SHOW FEATURES command includes RENAME in ++ the compiler options list. If the predefined RENAME symbol causes ++ trouble, then add NORENAME to your CFLAGS. Trouble includes: ++ ++ a. Linker complains that _rename is an unresolved symbol. ++ b. Linking works, but Kermit's RENAME command doesn't work (which ++ happens because older versions of rename() might have their ++ arguments reversed). ++ ++ If rename() is not used, then Kermit uses link()/unlink(), which is ++ equivalent except it is not atomic: there is a tiny interval in which ++ some other process might "do something" to one of the files or links. ++ ++ Some Unix systems (Olivetti X/OS, Amdahl UTS/V, ICL SVR3, etc) define ++ the S_ISREG and S_ISDIR macros incorrectly. This is compensated for ++ automatically in [305]ckufio.c. Other systems might have this same ++ problem. If you get a compile-time error message regarding S_ISREG ++ and/or S_ISDIR, add the following to your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DISDIRBUG ++ ++ Finally, here's a symbol you should NEVER define: ++ ++-DCOMMENT ++ ++ It's used for commenting out blocks of code. If for some reason you ++ find that your compiler has COMMENT defined, then add -UCOMMENT to ++ CFLAGS or KFLAGS! Similarly, some header files have been known to ++ define COMMENT, in which case you must add "#undef COMMENT" to each ++ C-Kermit source module, after all the #includes. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.9. Terminal Interruption ++ ++ [ [306]Top ] [ [307]Contents ] [ [308]Section Contents ] [ [309]Next ] ++ [ [310]Previous ] ++ ++ When C-Kermit enters interactive command mode, it sets a Control-C ++ (terminal keyboard interrupt = SIGINT) trap to allow it to return to ++ the command prompt whenever the user types Control-C (or whatever is ++ assigned to be the interrupt character). This is implemented using ++ setjmp() and longjmp(). On some systems, depending on the machine ++ architecture and C compiler and who knows what else, you might get ++ "Memory fault (coredump)" or "longjmp botch" instead of the desired ++ effect (this should not happen in 5A(190) and later). In that case, ++ add -DNOCCTRAP to your CFLAGS and rebuild the program. ++ ++ Job control -- the ability to "suspend" C-Kermit on a Unix system by ++ typing the "susp" character (normally Ctrl-Z) and then resume ++ execution later (with the "fg" command) -- is a tricky business. ++ C-Kermit must trap suspend signals so it can put the terminal back ++ into normal mode when you suspend it (Kermit puts the terminal into ++ various strange modes during interactive command parsing, CONNECT, and ++ file transfer). Supporting code is compiled into C-Kermit ++ automatically if includes a definition for the SIGTSTP ++ signal. HOWEVER... some systems define this signal without supporting ++ job control correctly. You can build Kermit to ignore SIGTSTP signals ++ by including the -DNOJC option in CFLAGS. (You can also do this at ++ runtime by giving the command SET SUSPEND OFF.) ++ ++ NOTE: As of version 5A(190), C-Kermit makes another safety check. ++ Even if job control is available in the operating system (according ++ to the numerous checks made in congm()), it will still disable the ++ catching of SIGTSTP signals if SIGTSTP was set to SIG_IGN at the ++ time C-Kermit was started. ++ ++ System V R3 and earlier systems normally do not support job control. ++ If you have an SVR3 system that does, include the following option in ++ your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DSVR3JC ++ ++ On systems that correctly implement POSIX signal handling, signals can ++ be handled more reliably than in Bell, Berkeley, or AT&T Unixes. On ++ systems (such as QNX) that are "strictly POSIX", POSIX signal handling ++ *must* be used, otherwise no signal will work more than once. If you ++ have POSIX-based system and you find that your version of Kermit ++ responds to Ctrl-C (SIGINT) or Ctrl-Z (SIGTSTP) only once, then you ++ should add the following option to your CFLAGS: ++ ++-DCK_POSIX_SIG ++ ++ But be careful; some POSIX implementations, notably 4.4BSD, include ++ POSIX signal handling symbols and functions as "stubs" only, which do ++ nothing. Look in for sigsetjmp and siglongjmp and read the ++ comments. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++10. DIALING OUT AND COORDINATING WITH UUCP ++ ++ [ [311]Top ] [ [312]Contents ] [ [313]Next ] [ [314]Previous ] ++ ++ NOTE: Red Hat Linux 7.2 and later include a new API that allows ++ serial-port arbitration by non-setuid/gid programs. This API has ++ not yet been added to C-Kermit. If C-Kermit is to be used for ++ dialing out on Red Hat 7.2 or later, it must still be installed as ++ described in this section and the next. ++ ++ The short version: ++ ++ In order for C-Kermit to be able to dial out from your Unix ++ computer, you need to give it the same owner, group, and ++ permissions as your other dialout programs, such as cu, tip, ++ minicom, uucp, seyon, etc. ++ ++ The long version: ++ ++ Make sure your dialout line is correctly configured for dialing out ++ (as opposed to login). The method for doing this is different for each ++ kind of Unix. Consult your system documentation for configuring lines ++ for dialing out (for example, Sun SPARCstation IPC users should read ++ the section "Setting up Modem Software" in the Desktop SPARC Sun ++ System and Network Manager's Guide, or the Terminals and Modems ++ section of the HP manual, "Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals" (e.g. ++ /usr/sbin/sam => Peripheral Devices => Terminals and Modems => Add ++ Modem). ++ ++ Unlike most other multiuser, multitasking operating systems, Unix ++ allows multiple users to access the same serial device at the same ++ time, even though there is no earthly reason why two users should do ++ this. When they do, user A will read some of the incoming characters, ++ and user B will read the others. In all likelihood, neither user will ++ see them all. Furthermore, User B can hang up User A's call, etc. ++ ++ Rather than change Unix to enforce exclusive access to serial devices ++ such as ttys, Unix developers chose instead to use a "lock file". Any ++ process that wants to open a tty device should first check to see if a ++ file of a certain name exists, and if so, not to open the device. If ++ the file does not exist, the process creates the file and then opens ++ the device. When the process closes the device, it destroys the ++ lockfile. This procedure was originated for use with Unix's UUCP, CU, ++ and TIP programs, and so these lockfiles are commonly called "UUCP ++ lockfiles" (UUCP = Unix-to-Unix Copy Program). ++ ++ As you can imagine, this method is riddled with pitfalls: ++ ++ * If a process does not observe the prevailing lockfile convention, ++ then it can interfere with other "polite" processes. And in fact, ++ very few Unix applications or commands handle lockfiles at all; an ++ original design goal of Unix was that "everything is a file", and ++ countless utilities operate on files directly (by opening them) or ++ indirectly through redirection of standard i/o, without creating ++ or looking for lockfiles. ++ * If a process crashes while it has the device open, the lockfile is ++ left behind, preventing further processes from using the device. ++ * Various versions of Unix use different names for the lockfiles, ++ put them in different directories, with different owners and ++ groups and permissions, and specify their contents differently. ++ * On a given platform, the lockfile conventions may change from one ++ Unix release to the next (for example, SunOS 4.0 to 4.1) or, in ++ the case of Linux, across different distributions. ++ * The same tty device might have more than one name, and most ++ lockfile conventions don't allow for this. Similarly for symbolic ++ links. ++ ++ In an attempt to address the problem of "stale" lockfiles, most UUCP ++ implementations put the PID (Process ID) of the creating process in ++ the lockfile. Thus, another process that wants to open the ++ corresponding device can check not only for the lockfile itself, but ++ also can check the PID for validity. But this doesn't work well ++ either: ++ ++ * PIDs are stored in diverse formats that change with every new ++ release (short, integer, long, or string in any of various ++ formats). If the reading program does not follow the same ++ convention as the writing program, it can diagnose a valid PID to ++ be invalid, and therefore not honor the lock. ++ * PIDs recycle. If the lockfile was created by PID 1234, which later ++ crashed without removing the lockfile, and then a new process 1234 ++ exists a the time the lockfile is checked, the lockfile will be ++ improperly taken as valid, and access to the device denied ++ unnecessarily. ++ ++ Several techniques address the problem of multiple names for the same ++ device: ++ ++ * Multiple lockfiles. For example, if the user opens a device ++ through a symlink, a lockfile is created for both the symlink name ++ and the true name (obtained from readlink()). However, when ++ multiple drivers are installed for the same device (e.g. /dev/cua, ++ /dev/cufa, etc), this approach won't work unless all applications ++ *know* all the different names for the same device and make ++ lockfiles for all of them, which is obviously not practical. ++ * Lockfiles whose names are not based on the device name. These ++ lockfiles generally have names like LK.inode/major/minor, where ++ inode, major, and minor are numbers, which will always be the same ++ for any physical device, no matter what its name. This form of ++ lockfile is used in System V R4 and its derivatives, such as ++ Solaris, UnixWare, etc. If lockfiles must be used (as opposed to, ++ say, kernel-based locks), this would seem to be the most effective ++ form. ++ ++ Most versions of Unix were not designed to accommodate third-party ++ communications software; thus vendors of these Unix products feel no ++ compunction about changing lockfile conventions from release to ++ release, since they also change their versions of the cu, uucp, tip, ++ etc, programs at the same time to match. And since the source code to ++ these programs might not be published, it is difficult for makers of ++ third-party products like C-Kermit to find out what the new ++ conventions are. It also forces release of new versions of C-Kermit ++ whenever the OS vendor makes a change like this. ++ ++ Some Unix vendors have taken a small step to simplify communications ++ application development for their products: the inclusion of lockfile ++ routines in the standard system C runtime libraries to shield the ++ application from the details of lockfile management (IBM AIX is an ++ example). When such routines are used, communications applications do ++ not need modification when lockfile conventions change (although they ++ will need recompiling if the routines are statically linked into the ++ application). In the AIX example, the simple function calls ttylock(), ++ ttyunlock(), and ttylocked() replace hundreds of lines of ugly code in ++ C-Kermit that attempts to keep pace with every release of every Unix ++ product over the last 20 years. Inclusion of ttylock() code occurs ++ when: ++ ++-DUSETTYLOCK ++ ++ is included in the CFLAGS. ++ ++ If such routines are available, they should be used. The rest of this ++ section applies when they are not. ++ ++ To fit in with UUCP and other Unix-based communication software, ++ C-Kermit must have the same idea as your system's uucp, cu, and tip ++ programs about what the UUCP lock directory is called, what the ++ lockfile itself is called, and what its contents should be. In most ++ cases, C-Kermit preprocessor flags create the appropriate ++ configuration at compile time if the appropriate makefile target was ++ used (see [315]ckutio.c). The following CFLAGS options can be used to ++ override the built-in configuration: ++ ++ -DLCKDIR ++ Tells Kermit that the UUCP lock directory is ++ /usr/spool/uucp/LCK. ++ ++ -DACUCNTRL ++ Tells Kermit to use the BSD 4.3 acucntrl() program to turn off ++ getty (login) on the line before using it, and restore getty ++ when done. ++ ++ -DHDBUUCP ++ Include this if your system uses Honey DanBer UUCP, in which ++ the lockfile directory and format are relatively standardized. ++ ++ -DLOCK_DIR=\\\"/xxx/yyy\\\" ++ Gives the lock directory name explicitly. The triple quoting is ++ necessary. For example: ++ ++CFLAGS= -DBSD4 -DLOCK_DIR=\\\"/usr/local/locks\\\" -DNODEBUG ++ ++ (NOTE: The triple quoting assumes this is a "top-level" make ++ entry, and not a make entry that calls another one.) ++ ++ -DLFDEVNO The lockfile name uses the tty device inode and major and ++ minor ++ numbers: LK.dev.maj.min, as in Sys V R4, e.g. LK.035.044.008. ++ ++ When the LK.inode.major.minor form is used, a single lockfile is ++ enough. Otherwise, a single lockfile rarely suffices. For example, in ++ Linux, it is common to have a /dev/modem symbolic link to an actual ++ dialout device, like /dev/cua0 or /dev/ttyS0, whose purpose is to hide ++ the details of the actual driver from the user. So if one user opens ++ /dev/modem, a lockfile called LCK..modem is created, which does not ++ prevent another user from simulataneously opening the same device by ++ its real name. ++ ++ On SCO Unix platforms, we have a slightly different problem: the same ++ device is, by convention, known by "lowercase" and "uppercase" names, ++ depending on whether it has modem control. So by convention, ++ communications programs are supposed to create the lockfiles based on ++ the lowercase name. But some programs don't follow this convention. In ++ HP-UX, we have several different names for each serial device. And so ++ on. ++ ++ For this reason, on platforms where the LK.inode.major.minor form is ++ not used, C-Kermit also creates a secondary lockfile (which is simply ++ a link to the first) if: ++ ++ a. The given device name is a symbolic link. The secondary link is ++ based on the device's real name. ++ b. On SCO: The device name is not a symbolic link, but it contains ++ uppercase letters. The primary link is based on the lowercase ++ name; the secondary link is based on the name that was given. ++ c. On HP-UX: The device name starts with "cu". The primary link is ++ based on the name that was given; the secondary link is based on ++ the corresponding "ttyd" device, e.g. "LCK..cua0p0" and ++ "LCK..ttyd0p0". ++ ++ NOTE: symlinks are not handled in HP-UX. ++ ++ Honey DanBer (HDB) UUCP, which is becoming increasingly popular, has ++ two characteristics: ++ ++ a. Lockfiles are kept in /usr/spool/locks/ (usually). ++ b. A lockfile contains the process id (pid) in ASCII, rather than as ++ an int. ++ ++ Non-HDB selections assume the lockfile contains the pid in int form ++ (or, more precisely, in PID_T form, where PID_T is either int or ++ pid_t, depending on your system's C library and header files). (b), by ++ the way, is subject to interpretation: the numeric ASCII string may or ++ may not be terminated by a newline, it may or may not have leading ++ spaces (or zeros), and the number of leading spaces or zeros can ++ differ, and the differences can be significant. ++ ++ Even if you build the program with the right lockfile option, you can ++ still have problems when you try to open the device. Here are the ++ error messages you can get from SET LINE, and what they mean: ++ ++ a. "Timed out, no carrier." This one is not related to lockfiles. It ++ means that you have SET CARRIER ON xx, where xx is the number of ++ seconds to wait for carrier, and carrier did not appear within xx ++ seconds. Solution: SET CARRIER AUTO or OFF. ++ b. "Sorry, access to lock denied." Kermit has been configured to use ++ lockfiles, but (a)the lockfile directory is write-protected ++ against you, or (b) it does not exist. The "access to lock denied" ++ message will tell you the reason. If the directory does not exist, ++ check to make sure Kermit is using the right name. Just because ++ version n of your Unix used a certain lockfile directory is no ++ gurantee that version n.1 does not use a different one. ++ Workaround: ask the system administrator to install a symbolic ++ link from the old name to the new name. Other solutions: (see ++ below) ++ c. "Sorry, access to tty device denied." The tty device that you ++ specified in your SET LINE command is read/write protected against ++ you. Solution: (see below) ++ d. "Sorry, device is in use." The tty device you have specified is ++ currently being used by another user. A prefatory message gives ++ you an "ls -l" listing of the lockfile, which should show the ++ username of the person who created it, plus a message "pid = nnn" ++ to show you the process id of the user's program. Solutions: try ++ another device, wait until the other user is finished, ask the ++ other user to hurry up, or ask the system manager for help. ++ e. "Sorry, can't open connection: reason". The device cannot be ++ opened for some other reason, which is listed. ++ f. "sh: /usr/lib/uucp/acucntrl: not found". This means your Kermit ++ program was built with the -DACUCNTRL switch, but your computer ++ system does not have the BSD 4.3 acucntrl program. Solution: ++ install the acucntrl program if you have it, or rebuild Kermit ++ without the -DACUCNTRL switch. ++ ++ There are two solutions for problems (b) and (c), both of which ++ involve intervention by your Unix system administrator (superuser): ++ ++ a. Have the superuser change the permission of the lockfile directory ++ and to the tty devices so that everyone on the system has ++ read/write permission. ++ ++su% chmod 777 /usr/spool/locks (or whatever the path is) ++su% chmod 666 /dev/ttyXX ++ ++ One risk here is that people can write lots of junk into the ++ lockfile directory, delete other people's files in the lockfile ++ directory, and intercept other people's data as it goes in and out ++ of the tty device. The major danger here would be intercepting a ++ privileged password. Of course, any user could write a short, ++ ordinary, unprivileged program to do exactly the same thing if the ++ tty device was world read/writeable. The other risk as that ++ telephone calls are not controlled -- anybody on your system can ++ make them, without having to belong to any particular group, and ++ this could run up your phone bill. ++ b. Use groups to regulate access. Normally the lockfile directory and ++ and the dialout devices will have the same group (such as uucp). ++ If so, then put everybody who's allowed to dial out into that ++ group, and make sure that the lockfile directory and the tty ++ devices have group read AND write permission. Example: ++ ++su% chmod 770 /usr/spool/locks (or whatever the path is) ++su% chmod 660 /dev/ttyXX ++ ++ User whatever tool is available on your platform to add users to ++ the appropropriate group (e.g. edit the /etc/group file). ++ c. Have the superuser change Kermit to run setuid and/or setgid to ++ the owner and/or group of the lockfile directory and the tty ++ devices if necessary), typically uucp (see [316]next section), but ++ NOT root. Example: ++ ++su% chown uucp kermit - or - chgrp uucp kermit ++su% chmod u+s kermit (setuid) - or - chmod g+s kermit (setgid) ++ ++ and then make sure the lockfile directory, and the tty devices, ++ have owner (setuid) and/or group (setgid) write permission. For ++ example: ++ ++su% chmod o+rwx /usr/spool/uucp ++su% chown uucp /dev/ttyXX ; chmod 600 /dev/ttyXX ++ ++ In some cases, the owner and group must be distinct; the key point ++ is that read/write access is required to both the UUCP lockfile ++ directory and the tty itself. ++ ++ If you make C-Kermit setuid or setgid to root, it refuses to run: ++ ++Fatal: C-Kermit setuid to root! ++ ++ Example: ++ ++crw-r----- 1 uucp uucp 5, 67 Feb 11 06:23 /dev/cua3 ++drwxrwxr-x 3 root uucp 1024 Feb 11 06:22 /var/lock ++ ++ requires suid uucp to get read/write access on /dev/cua3 and sgid to ++ get read/write access on /var/lock (since you can't set Kermit's uid ++ or gid to root). ++ ++ The reason Kermit can't be setuid or setgid to root has to do with ++ the fact that some Unix OS's can't switch user or group IDs in that ++ case. Unfortunately, the prohibition against making Kermit setuid ++ or setgid to root means that Unix C-Kermit can't be used to make ++ rlogin connections by non-root users. (The rlogin port is ++ privileged, which is why the regular rlogin command is setuid root ++ -- which is safe because the rlogin program never has to create or ++ access files like Kermit does.) ++ ++ For the lockfile mechanism to achieve its desired purpose -- ++ prevention of access to the same tty device by more than one process ++ at a time -- ALL programs on a given computer that open, read or ++ write, and close tty devices must use the SAME lockfile conventions. ++ Unfortunately, this is often not the case. Here is a typical example ++ of how this can go wrong: In SunOS 4.0 and earler, the lockfile ++ directory was /usr/spool/uucp; in 4.1 it was changed to ++ /var/spool/locks in the quest for political correctness. Consequently, ++ any third-party programs (such as C-Kermit) that were not modified to ++ account for this change, recompiled, and reinstalled, did not use the ++ same lockfiles as uucp, tip, etc, and so the entire purpose of the ++ lockfile is defeated. ++ ++ What if your Unix system does not have UUCP installed? For example, ++ you have a Unix workstation, and you do not use uucp, cu, or tip, or ++ UUCP was not even supplied with your version of Unix (QNX is an ++ example). In this case, you have two choices: ++ ++ a. If there may be more than one person running Kermit at the same ++ time, competing for the same tty device, then create a special ++ lockfile directory just for Kermit, for example, ++ /usr/spool/kermit, and make sure you have read/write access to it. ++ Then add the following to your makefile target CFLAGS, as shown ++ earlier: ++ ++-DLOCK_DIR=\\\"/usr/spool/kermit\\\" ++ ++ b. If you are the only user on your workstation, and no other ++ processes will ever be competing with Kermit for the dialout tty ++ device, then add -DNOUUCP to your makefile target's CFLAGS and ++ rebuild Kermit. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++11. RUNNING UNIX C-KERMIT SETUID OR SETGID ++ ++ [ [317]Top ] [ [318]Contents ] [ [319]Next ] [ [320]Previous ] ++ ++ Even if you don't intend to run C-Kermit setuid, somebody else might ++ come along and chown and chmod it after it has been built. You should ++ be sure that it is built correctly to run setuid on your system. For ++ POSIX and AT&T Unix based versions, you don't have to do anything ++ special. ++ ++ For 4.2 and 4.3 BSD-based Unix versions, you normally need not add ++ anything special to the makefile. The program assumes that the ++ setreuid() and setregid() functions are available, without which we ++ cannot switch back and forth between real and effective uids. If ++ "make" complains that _setreuid or _setregid is/are not defined, add ++ -DNOSETREU to CFLAGS. In this case it is very likely (but not certain) ++ that you cannot protect ttys and lockfiles against people and have ++ them run Kermit setuid. ++ ++ If make does not complain about this, you should find out whether your ++ BSD version (4.3 or other systems like SunOS 4.x that claim to include ++ BSD 4.3 compatibility) includes the saved-setuid feature (see long ++ notes under edit 146 in ckc178.upd). If it does, then add -DSAVEDUID ++ to CFLAGS. ++ ++ IMPORTANT NOTE: Most Unix system documentation will not give you ++ the required information. To determine whether your Unix system ++ supplies the the saved-original-effective-user/group-id feature, ++ use the ckuuid.c program. Read and follow the instructions in the ++ comments at the beginning. ++ ++ C-Kermit for 4.4BSD-based systems automatically use sete[ug]id(). See ++ [321]ckutio.c. ++ ++ If you have a version of Unix that is not BSD-based, but which ++ supplies the setreuid() and setregid() functions, and these are the ++ only way to switch between real and effective uid, add -DSETREUID to ++ your makefile target. ++ ++ WARNING: There are two calls to access() in [322]ckufio.c, by which ++ Kermit checks to see if it can create an output file. These calls ++ will not work correctly when (a)you have installed C-Kermit setuid ++ or setgid on a BSD-based Unix system, and (b) the ++ saved-original-effective-uid/gid feature is not present, and (c) ++ the access() function always checks what it believes to be the real ++ ID rather than the effective ID. This is the case, for example, in ++ Olivetti X/OS and in NeXTSTEP. In such cases, you can force correct ++ operation of access() calls by defining the symbol SW_ACC_ID at ++ compile time in CFLAGS. ++ ++ If you have a version of Unix that does not allow a process to switch ++ back and forth between its effective and real user and group ids ++ multiple times, you probably should not attempt to run Kermit setuid, ++ because once having given up its effective uid or gid (which it must ++ do in order to transfer files, fork a shell, etc) it can never get it ++ back, and so it can not use the original effective uid or gid to ++ create or delete uucp lockfiles. In this case, you'll either have to ++ set the permissions on your lockfile directory to make them publicly ++ read/writable, or dispense with locking altogether. ++ ++ MORAL: Are you thoroughly sickened and/or frightened by all that you ++ have just read? You should be. What is the real answer? Simple. Serial ++ devices -- such as ttys and magnetic tapes -- in Unix should be opened ++ with exclusive access only, enforced by the Unix kernel. Shared access ++ has no conceivable purpose, legitimate or otherwise, except by ++ privileged system programs such as getty. The original design dates ++ from the late 1960s, when Unix was developed for laboratory use under ++ a philosophy of trust by people within shouting distance of each other ++ -- but even then, no useful purpose was served by this particular form ++ of openness; it was probably more of a political statement. Since the ++ emergence of Unix from the laboratory into the commercial market, we ++ have seen every vestige of openness -- but this one -- stripped away. ++ I'd like to see some influential Unix maker take the bold step of ++ making the simple kernel change required to enforce exclusive access ++ to serial devices. (Well, perhaps not so simple when bidirectionality ++ must also be a goal -- but then other OS's like VMS solved this ++ problem decades ago.) ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++12. CONFIGURING UNIX WORKSTATIONS ++ ++ [ [323]Top ] [ [324]Contents ] [ [325]Next ] [ [326]Previous ] ++ ++ On desktop workstations that are used by only the user at the console ++ keyboard, C-Kermit is always used in local mode. But as delivered, ++ C-Kermit runs in remote mode by default. To put it in local mode at ++ startup, you can put a SET LINE command in your .mykermrc. ++ ++ You can also build C-Kermit to start up in local mode by default. To ++ do this, include the following in the CFLAGS in your makefile target: ++ ++-DDFTTY=\\\"/dev/ttyxx\\\" ++ ++ where ttyxx is the name of the device you will be using for ++ communications. Presently there is no way of setting the default modem ++ type at compile time, so use this option only for direct lines. ++ ++ C-Kermit does not work well on certain workstations if it is not run ++ from within a terminal window. For example, you cannot start C-Kermit ++ on a NeXT by launching it directly from NeXTstep. Similarly for Sun ++ workstations in the Open Windows environment. Run Kermit in a terminal ++ window. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++13. BIZARRE BEHAVIOR AT RUNTIME ++ ++ [ [327]Top ] [ [328]Contents ] [ [329]Next ] [ [330]Previous ] ++ ++ See the "beware file", ++ ++ [331]ckubwr.txt, for hints about runtime misbehavior. This section ++ lists some runtime problems that can be cured by rebuilding C-Kermit. ++ ++ The program starts, but there is no prompt, and certain operations ++ don't work (you see error messages like "Kermit command error in ++ background execution"). This is because Kermit thinks it is running in ++ the background. See conbgt() in [332]ckutio.c. Try rebuilding Kermit ++ with: ++ ++ -DPID_T=pid_t ++ ++ added to your CFLAGS. If that doesn't help, find out the actual data ++ type for pids (look in types.h or similar file) and use it in place of ++ "pid_t", for example: ++ ++ -DPID_T=short ++ ++ Unexplainable and inappropriate error messages ("Sockets not supported ++ on this device", etc) have been traced in at least one case to a lack ++ of agreement between the system header files and the actual kernel. ++ This happened because the GNU C compiler (gcc) was being used. gcc ++ wants to have ANSI-C-compliant header files, and so part of the ++ installation procedure for gcc is (or was) to run a shell script ++ called "fixincludes", which translates the system's header files into ++ a separate set of headers that gcc likes. So far so good. Later, a new ++ version of the operating system is installed and nobody remembers to ++ run fixincludes again. From that point, any program compiled with gcc ++ that makes use of header files (particularly ioctl.h) is very likely ++ to misbehave. Solution: run fixincludes again, or use your system's ++ regular C compiler, libraries, and header files instead of gcc. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++14. CRASHES AND CORE DUMPS ++ ++ [ [333]Top ] [ [334]Contents ] [ [335]Next ] [ [336]Previous ] ++ ++ If C-Kermit constitently dumps core at the beginning of a file ++ transfer, look in SHOW FEATURES for CKREALPATH. If found, rebuild with ++ -DNOREALPATH and see if that fixes the problem (some UNIXes have ++ realpath() but it doesn't work). ++ ++ Total failure of the Kermit program can occur because of bad memory ++ references, bad system calls, or problems with dynamic memory ++ allocation. First, try to reproduce the problem with debugging turned ++ on: run Kermit with the -d command-line option (for example, "wermit ++ -d") and then examine the resulting debug.log file. The last entry ++ should be in the vicinity of the crash. In VMS, a crash automatically ++ produces a "stack dump" which shows the routine where the crash ++ occurs. In some versions of Unix, you can get a stack dump with "adb" ++ -- just type "adb wermit core" and then give the command "$c", then ++ Ctrl-D to quit (note: replace "wermit" by "kermit" or by the full ++ pathname of the executable that crashed if it is not in the current ++ directory). Or use gdb to get a backtrace, etc. ++ ++ In edit 186, one implementation, UNISYS 5000/95 built with "make ++ sys5r3", has been reported to run out of memory very quickly (e.g. ++ while executing a short initialization file that contains a SET DIAL ++ DIRECTORY command). Debug logs show that malloc calls are failing, ++ reason unknown. For this and any other implementation that gives error ++ messages about "malloc failure" or "memory allocation failure", ++ rebuild the program *without* the -DDYNAMIC CFLAGS definition, for ++ example: ++ ++make sys5r3 KFLAGS=-UDYNAMIC ++ ++ As of edit 169, C-Kermit includes a malloc() debugging package which ++ you may link with the Kermit program to catch runtime malloc errors. ++ See the makefile entries for sunos41md and nextmd for examples of how ++ to select malloc debugging. Once you have linked Kermit with the ++ malloc debugger, it will halt with an informative message if a ++ malloc-related error occurs and, if possible, dump core. For this ++ reason, malloc-debugging versions of Kermit should be built without ++ the "-s" link option (which removes symbols, preventing analysis of ++ the core dump). You have several ways to track down the malloc error: ++ Analyze the core dump with adb. Or reproduce the problem with "log ++ debug" and then look at the code around the last debug.log entry. If ++ you have gcc, build the program with "-g" added to CFLAGS and then ++ debug it with gdb, e.g. ++ ++gdb wermit ++break main ++run ++.. set other breakpoints or watchpoints ++continue ++ ++ Watchpoints are especially useful for finding memory leaks, but they ++ make the program run about a thousand times slower than usual, so ++ don't set them until the last possible moment. When a watchpoint is ++ hit, you can use the "where" command to find out which C-Kermit source ++ statement triggered it. ++ ++ If you have the Pure Software Inc "Purify" product, see the sunos41cp ++ makefile entry for an example of how to use it to debug C-Kermit. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++15. SYSLOGGING ++ ++ [ [337]Top ] [ [338]Contents ] [ [339]Next ] [ [340]Previous ] ++ ++ "Syslogging" means recording selected in the system log via the Unix ++ syslog() facility, which is available in most Unix versions. ++ Syslogging is not done unless C-Kermit is started with: ++ ++--syslog:n ++ ++ on the command-line, where n is a number greater than 0 to indicate ++ the level of syslogging. See [341]Section 4.2 of the [342]IKSD ++ Administrator's Guide for details. ++ ++ Obviously you can't depend on users to include --syslog:3 (or ++ whatever) on the command line every time they start C-Kermit, so if ++ you want certain kinds of records to be recorded in the system log, ++ you can build C-Kermit with forced syslogging at the desired level, ++ e.g.: ++ ++make linux KFLAGS=-DSYSLOGLEVEL=2 ++ ++ Levels 2 and 3 are the most likely candidates for this treatment. ++ Level 2 forces logging of all successful dialout calls (e.g. for ++ checking against or phone bills), and level 3 records all connections ++ (SET LINE or SET HOST / TELNET / RLOGIN, etc) so you can see who is ++ connecting out from your system, and to where. ++ ++ Level 2 and 3 records are equivalent to those in the connection log; ++ see the [343]C-Kermit 7.0 Supplement) for a detailed description of ++ the connection log. ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++16. BUILDING SECURE VERSIONS OF C-KERMIT 8.0 ++ ++ [ [344]Top ] [ [345]Contents ] [ [346]Next ] [ [347]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and later may be built with Kerberos(TM) and/or SRP(TM) ++ (Secure Remote Password) and/or SSL/TLS security for strong ++ authentication and encryption of Internet connections. These security ++ methods require external libraries that, in their binary forms, are ++ restricted from export by USA law. See the [348]Kermit Security ++ Reference) for details. C-Kermit binaries themselves are likewise ++ restricted; the C-Kermit binaries that are available for public ++ download on the Internet are not allowed to contain the security ++ options. ++ ++ Sample makefile entries are provided for Linux and many other ++ operating systems. A list of secure makefile entries is included in ++ the Makefile. Complete instructions on building C-Kermit 8.0 with MIT ++ Kerberos; Secure Remote Password; and/or OpenSSL can be found in the ++ [349]Kermit Security Reference. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 comes with a current list of Certificate Authority ++ certificates, including one for the Kermit Project that can be used ++ for authentication to Columbia's [350]Internet Kermit Service (IKSD). ++ You can use C-Kermit 7.0 or later to access Columbia's IKSD securely ++ by installing the Kermit Project certificate in ++ /usr/local/ssl/cert.pem (or the appropriate location based upon the ++ installation of OpenSSL on your system). You can find a copy of the ++ certificates file at: ++ ++[351]ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ca_certs.pem ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++17. INSTALLING C-KERMIT AS AN SSH SERVER SUBSYSTEM ++ ++ [ [352]Top ] [ [353]Contents ] [ [354]Previous ] ++ ++ This requires C-Kermit 8.0.206 or later and an SSH v2 server. If you ++ list C-Kermit as a Subsystem in the SSH v2 server configuration file ++ (as, for example, SFTP is listed), users can make SSH connections ++ direct to a Kermit server as explained here: ++ ++[355]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ ++ The name and location of the SSH server configuration file depends on ++ your platform, which SSH product(s) you have, etc. C-Kermit itself ++ must be referred to in this file as "kermit-sshsub". On the host, ++ install the C-Kermit 8.0.211 binary in the normal way. Then, in the ++ same directory as the C-Kermit binary, make a symbolic link: ++ ++ln -s kermit kermit-sshsub ++ ++ (Note: the "make install" makefile target does this for you.) Then in ++ the sshd configuration file, add a line: ++ ++Subsystem kermit /some/path/kermit-sshsub ++ ++ (where /some/path is the fully specified directory where the symlink ++ is.) This is similar to the line that sets up the SFTP susbsystem. ++ Example: ++ ++Subsystem sftp /usr/local/libexec/sftp-server ++Subsystem kermit /usr/local/bin/kermit-sshsub ++ ++ The mechanics might vary for other SSH servers; "man sshd" for ++ details. The method shown here is used because the OpenSSH server does ++ not permit the subsystem invocation to include command-line options. ++ C-Kermit would have no way of knowing that it should enter Server mode ++ if it were not called by a special name. ++ ++ [ [356]Top ] [ [357]Contents ] [ [358]C-Kermit Home ] [ [359]C-Kermit ++ 8.0 Overview ] [ [360]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Installation Instructions / The Kermit Project / ++ Columbia University / 10 April 2004 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 4. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x0 ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x1 ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x2 ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x3 ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x6 ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x8 ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x12 ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x13 ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x14 ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x15 ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16 ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16 ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x1 ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x2 ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/x3 ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x2 ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x0 ++ 37. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar.Z ++ 38. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar.gz ++ 39. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/archives/cku211.tar ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16 ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x3 ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x1 ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#X10 ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x3 ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80packages.html ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x2 ++ 59. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/bin/ ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80binaries.html ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#build ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 66. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x3 ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x8 ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 73. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 74. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckpker.mk ++ 75. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckubsd.mak ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 77. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 78. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 80. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 81. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.4 ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.1 ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 91. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.1 ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.2 ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.3 ++ 94. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.4 ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.5 ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8 ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 100. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 101. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 102. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 103. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcmai.c ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x15 ++ 105. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 106. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 107. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 108. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 109. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.c ++ 110. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.c ++ 111. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 112. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcuni.c ++ 113. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 117. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.2 ++ 118. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.0 ++ 119. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 120. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckubwr.txt ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 122. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckwart.c ++ 123. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcpro.w ++ 124. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcpro.c ++ 125. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.3 ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.1 ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.4 ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.2 ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.5 ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.3 ++ 141. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckpker.mk ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.4 ++ 146. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 147. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 148. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcpro.w ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 151. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x6 ++ 152. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 153. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.1 ++ 154. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.2 ++ 155. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.3 ++ 156. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.4 ++ 157. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 158. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.4 ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.3 ++ 160. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/COPYING.TXT ++ 161. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermit.ini ++ 162. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.1 ++ 163. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermod.ini ++ 164. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermit70.txt ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 167. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckermit80.txt ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ 170. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcbwr.txt ++ 171. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 172. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckubwr.txt ++ 173. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 174. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuins.txt ++ 175. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 176. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckccfg.txt ++ 177. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 178. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcplm.txt ++ 179. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ 180. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ca_certs.pem ++ 181. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16" ++ 182. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 183. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x? ++ 184. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 185. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5.2 ++ 186. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html#download ++ 187. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80binaries.html ++ 188. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html#download ++ 189. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 190. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 191. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 192. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 193. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 194. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 195. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x8 ++ 196. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x6 ++ 197. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 198. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 199. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4.0 ++ 200. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 201. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 202. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 203. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 204. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 205. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x2 ++ 206. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 207. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 208. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 209. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 210. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 211. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 212. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.4 ++ 213. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 214. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 215. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 216. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 217. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x7 ++ 218. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 219. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 220. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 221. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 222. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 223. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x8 ++ 224. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1 ++ 225. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.1 ++ 226. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.2 ++ 227. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.3 ++ 228. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.2 ++ 229. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.3 ++ 230. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.4 ++ 231. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.5 ++ 232. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.6 ++ 233. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.7 ++ 234. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.8 ++ 235. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.9 ++ 236. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 237. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 238. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 239. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 240. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.2 ++ 241. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.1 ++ 242. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.2 ++ 243. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.3 ++ 244. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 245. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 246. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 247. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1 ++ 248. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.3 ++ 249. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.1 ++ 250. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 251. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 252. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 253. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1 ++ 254. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.2 ++ 255. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.2 ++ 256. http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/007904975/ ++ 257. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1.1 ++ 258. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 259. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 260. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 261. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1 ++ 262. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.3 ++ 263. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.1 ++ 264. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 265. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 266. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 267. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.4 ++ 268. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.2 ++ 269. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 270. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 271. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 272. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 273. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 274. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 275. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.5 ++ 276. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.3 ++ 277. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 278. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 279. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 280. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 281. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 282. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.6 ++ 283. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.4 ++ 284. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 285. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuus3.c ++ 286. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 287. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 288. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 289. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 290. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.7 ++ 291. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.5 ++ 292. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 293. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 294. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 295. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.8 ++ 296. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.6 ++ 297. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 298. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 299. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 300. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.9 ++ 301. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.7 ++ 302. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 303. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 304. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 305. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 306. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 307. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 308. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 309. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 310. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.8 ++ 311. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 312. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 313. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 314. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9 ++ 315. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 316. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 317. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 318. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 319. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x12 ++ 320. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 321. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 322. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 323. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 324. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 325. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x13 ++ 326. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 327. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 328. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 329. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x14 ++ 330. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x12 ++ 331. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckubwr.txt ++ 332. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 333. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 334. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 335. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x15 ++ 336. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x13 ++ 337. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 338. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 339. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16 ++ 340. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x14 ++ 341. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html#x4.2 ++ 342. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 343. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit2.html ++ 344. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 345. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 346. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x17 ++ 347. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x15 ++ 348. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 349. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security80.html ++ 350. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/cuiksd.html ++ 351. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ca_certs.pem ++ 352. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 353. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 354. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x16 ++ 355. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ 356. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#top ++ 357. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#contents ++ 358. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 359. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80.html ++ 360. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckubwr.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,5330 @@ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Hints and Tips ++ ++ Frank da Cruz ++ [1]The Kermit Project, [2]Columbia University ++ ++ As of: C-Kermit 8.0.211 10 April 2004 ++ This page last updated: Fri Apr 16 16:13:14 2004 (New York USA Time) ++ ++ IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, note it ++ is a plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the original (and ++ possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ ++ [3]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ ++ Since the material in this file has been accumulating since 1985, ++ some (much) of it might be dated. [4]Feedback from experts on ++ particular OS's and platforms is always welcome. ++ ++ [ [5]C-Kermit ] [ [6]Installation Instructions ] [ [7]TUTORIAL ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CONTENTS ++ ++ 1. [8]INTRODUCTION ++ 2. [9]PREBUILT C-KERMIT BINARIES ++ 3. [10]PLATFORM-SPECIFIC NOTES ++ 4. [11]GENERAL UNIX-SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS AND BUGS ++ 5. [12]INITIALIZATION AND COMMAND FILES ++ 6. [13]COMMUNICATION SPEED SELECTION ++ 7. [14]COMMUNICATIONS AND DIALING ++ 8. [15]HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL ++ 9. [16]TERMINAL CONNECTION AND KEY MAPPING ++ 10. [17]FILE TRANSFER ++ 11. [18]EXTERNAL FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOLS ++ 12. [19]SECURITY ++ 13. [20]MISCELLANEOUS USER REPORTS ++ 14. [21]THIRD-PARTY DRIVERS ++ ++ Quick Links: [ [22]Linux ] [ [23]*BSD ] [[24]Mac OS X] [ [25]AIX ] [ ++ [26]HP-UX ] [ [27]Solaris ] [ [28]SCO ] [ [29]DEC/Compaq ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1. INTRODUCTION ++ ++ [ [30]Top ] [ [31]Contents ] [ [32]Next ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 1.1. [33]Documentation ++ 1.2. [34]Technical Support ++ 1.3. [35]The Year 2000 ++ 1.4. [36]The Euro ++ ++ THIS IS WHAT USED TO BE CALLED the "beware file" for the Unix version ++ of C-Kermit, previously distributed as ckubwr.txt and, before that, as ++ ckuker.bwr, after the fashion of old Digital Equipment Corporation ++ (DEC) software releases that came with release notes (describing what ++ had changed) and a "beware file" listing known bugs, limitations, ++ "non-goals", and things to watch out for. The C-Kermit beware file has ++ been accumulating since 1985, and it applies to many different ++ hardware platforms and operating systems, and many versions of them, ++ so it is quite large. Prior to C-Kermit 8.0, it was distributed only ++ in plain-text format. Now it is available as a Web document with ++ links, internal cross references, and so on, to make it easier to use. ++ ++ This document applies to Unix C-Kermit in general, as well as to ++ specific Unix variations like [37]Linux, [38]AIX, [39]HP-UX, ++ [40]Solaris, and so on, and should be read in conjunction with the ++ [41]platform-independent C-Kermit beware file, which contains similar ++ information, but applying to all versions of C-Kermit (VMS, Windows, ++ OS/2, AOS/VS, VOS, etc, as well as to Unix). ++ ++ There is much in this document that is (only) of historical interest. ++ The navigation links should help you skip directly to the sections ++ that are relevant to you. Numerous offsite Web links are supposed to ++ lead to further information but, as you know, Web links go stale ++ frequently and without warning. If you can supply additional, ++ corrected, updated, or better Web links, please feel free to [42]let ++ us know. ++ ++ 1.1. Documentation ++ ++ [ [43]Top ] [ [44]Contents ] [ [45]Next ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0 is documented in the book [46]Using C-Kermit, Second ++ Edition, by Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, Digital Press, ++ Burlington, MA, USA, ISBN 1-55558-164-1 (1997), 622 pages. This ++ remains the definitive C-Kermit documentation. Until the third edition ++ is published (sorry, there is no firm timeframe for this), please also ++ refer to: ++ ++ [47]Supplement to Using C-Kermit, Second Edition, For C-Kermit 7.0 ++ Thorough documentation of features new to version 7.0. ++ ++ [48]Supplement to Using C-Kermit, Second Edition, For C-Kermit 8.0 ++ Thorough documentation of features new to version 8.0. ++ ++ 1.2. Technical Support ++ ++ [ [49]Top ] [ [50]Contents ] [ [51]Section Contents ] [ [52]Next ] [ ++ [53]Previous ] ++ ++ For information on how to get technical support, please visit: ++ ++ [54]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ ++ 1.3. The Year 2000 ++ ++ [ [55]Top ] [ [56]Contents ] [ [57]Section Contents ] [ [58]Next ] [ ++ [59]Previous ] ++ ++ The Unix version of C-Kermit, release 6.0 and later, is "Year 2000 ++ compliant", but only if the underlying operating system is too. ++ Contact your Unix operating system vendor to find out which operating ++ system versions, patches, hardware, and/or updates are required. ++ (Quite a few old Unixes are still in operation in the new millenium, ++ but with their date set 28 years in the past so at least the non-year ++ parts of the calendar are correct.) ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 6.0 (6 September 1996), post-millenium file dates are ++ recognized, transmitted, received, and reproduced correctly during the ++ file transfer process in C-Kermit's File Attribute packets. If ++ post-millenium dates are not processed correctly on the other end, ++ file transfer still takes place, but the modification or creation date ++ of the received file might be incorrect. The only exception would be ++ if the "file collision update" feature is being used to prevent ++ unnecessary transfer of files that have not changed since the last ++ time a transfer took place; in this case, a file might be transferred ++ unnecessarily, or it might not be transferred when it should have ++ been. Correct operation of the update feature depends on both Kermit ++ programs having the correct date and time. ++ ++ Of secondary importance are the time stamps in the transaction and/or ++ debug logs, and the date-related script programming constructs, such ++ as \v(date), \v(ndate), \v(day), \v(nday), and perhaps also the ++ time-related ones, \v(time) and \v(ntime), insofar as they might be ++ affected by the date. The \v(ndate) is a numeric-format date of the ++ form yyyymmdd, suitable for both lexical and numeric comparison and ++ sorting: e.g. 19970208 or 20011231. If the underlying operating system ++ returns the correct date information, these variables will have the ++ proper values. If not, then scripts that make decisions based on these ++ variables might not operate correctly. ++ ++ Most date-related code is based upon the C Library asctime() string, ++ which always has a four-digit year. In Unix, the one bit of code in ++ C-Kermit that is an exception to this rule is several calls to ++ localtime(), which returns a pointer to a tm struct, in which the year ++ is presumed to be expressed as "years since 1900". The code depends on ++ this assumption. Any platforms that violate it will need special ++ coding. As of this writing, no such platforms are known. ++ ++ Command and script programming functions that deal with dates use ++ C-Kermit specific code that always uses full years. ++ ++ 1.4. The Euro ++ ++ [ [60]Top ] [ [61]Contents ] [ [62]Section Contents ] [ [63]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and later support Unicode (ISO 10646), ISO 8859-15 Latin ++ Alphabet 9, PC Code Page 858, Windows Code Pages 1250 and 1251, and ++ perhaps other character sets, that encode the Euro symbol, and can ++ translate among them as long as no intermediate character-set is ++ involved that does not include the Euro. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2. PREBUILT C-KERMIT BINARIES ++ ++ [ [64]Top ] [ [65]Contents ] [ [66]Next ] [ [67]Previous ] ++ ++ It is often dangerous to run a binary C-Kermit (or any other) program ++ built on a different computer. Particularly if that computer had a ++ different C compiler, libraries, operating system version, processor ++ features, etc, and especially if the program was built with shared ++ libraries, because as soon as you update the libraries on your system, ++ they no longer match the ones referenced in the binary, and the binary ++ might refuse to load when you run it, in which case you'll see error ++ messages similar to: ++ ++ Could not load program kermit ++ Member shr4.o not found or file not an archive ++ Could not load library libcurses.a[shr4.o] ++ Error was: No such file or directory ++ ++ (These samples are from AIX.) To avoid this problem, we try to build ++ C-Kermit with statically linked libraries whenever we can, but this is ++ increasingly impossible as shared libraries become the norm. ++ ++ It is often OK to run a binary built on an earlier OS version, but it ++ is rarely possible (or safe) to run a binary built on a later one, for ++ example to run a binary built under Solaris 8 on Solaris 2.6. ++ Sometimes even the OS-or-library patch/ECO level makes a difference. ++ ++ A particularly insidious problem occurs when a binary was built on a ++ version of the OS that has patches from the vendor (e.g. to ++ libraries); in many cases you won't be able to run such a binary on an ++ unpatched version of the same platform. ++ ++ When in doubt, build C-Kermit from the source code on the computer ++ where it is to be run (if possible!). If not, ask us for a binary ++ specific to your configuration. We might have one, and if we don't, we ++ might be able to find somebody who will build one for you. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3. NOTES ON SPECIFIC UNIX VERSIONS ++ ++ [ [68]Top ] [ [69]Contents ] [ [70]Next ] [ [71]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.0. [72]C-KERMIT ON PC-BASED UNIXES ++ 3.1. [73]C-KERMIT AND AIX ++ 3.2. [74]C-KERMIT AND HP-UX ++ 3.3. [75]C-KERMIT AND LINUX ++ 3.4. [76]C-KERMIT AND NEXTSTEP ++ 3.5. [77]C-KERMIT AND QNX ++ 3.6. [78]C-KERMIT AND SCO ++ 3.7. [79]C-KERMIT AND SOLARIS ++ 3.8. [80]C-KERMIT AND SUNOS ++ 3.9. [81]C-KERMIT AND ULTRIX ++ 3.10. [82]C-KERMIT AND UNIXWARE ++ 3.11. [83]C-KERMIT AND APOLLO SR10 ++ 3.12. [84]C-KERMIT AND TANDY XENIX 3.0 ++ 3.13. [85]C-KERMIT AND OSF/1 (DIGITAL UNIX) (TRU64 UNIX) ++ 3.14. [86]C-KERMIT AND SGI IRIX ++ 3.15. [87]C-KERMIT AND THE BEBOX ++ 3.16. [88]C-KERMIT AND DG/UX ++ 3.17. [89]C-KERMIT AND SEQUENT DYNIX ++ 3.18. [90]C-KERMIT AND {FREE,OPEN,NET}BSD ++ 3.19. [91]C-KERMIT AND MAC OS X ++ 3.20. [92]C-KERMIT AND COHERENT ++ ++ The following sections apply to specific Unix versions. Most of them ++ contain references to FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), but these ++ tend to be ephemeral. For possibly more current information see: ++ ++ [93]http://www.faqs.org ++ [94]http://aplawrence.com/Unixart/newtounix.html ++ ++ One thread that runs through many of them, and implicitly perhaps ++ through all, concerns the problems that occur when trying to dial out ++ on a serial device that is (also) enabled for dialing in. The ++ "solutions" to this problem are many, varied, diverse, and usually ++ gross, involving configuring the device for bidirectional use. This is ++ done in a highly OS-dependent and often obscure manner, and the ++ effects (good or evil) are also highly dependent on the particular OS ++ (and getty variety, etc). Many examples are given in the ++ [95]OS-specific sections below. ++ ++ An important point to keep in mind is that C-Kermit is a ++ cross-platform, portable software program. It was not designed ++ specifically and only for your particular Unix version, or for that ++ matter, for Unix in particular at all. It also runs on VMS, AOS/VS, ++ VOS, and other non-Unix platforms. All the Unix versions of C-Kermit ++ share common i/o modules, with compile-time #ifdef constructions used ++ to account for the differences among the many Unix products and ++ releases. If you think that C-Kermit is behaving badly or missing ++ something on your particular Unix version, you might be right -- we ++ can't claim to be expert in hundreds of different OS / version / ++ hardware / library combinations. If you're a programmer, take a look ++ at the source code and [96]send us your suggested fixes or changes. Or ++ else just [97]send us a report about what seems to be wrong and we'll ++ see what we can do. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0. C-KERMIT ON PC-BASED UNIXES ++ ++ [ [98]Top ] [ [99]Contents ] [ [100]Section Contents ] [ [101]Next ] ++ ++ Also see: [102]http://www.pcunix.com/. ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.0.1. [103]Interrupt Conflicts ++ 3.0.2. [104]Windows-Specific Hardware ++ 3.0.3. [105]Modems ++ 3.0.4. [106]Character Sets ++ 3.0.5. [107]Keyboard, Screen, and Mouse Access ++ 3.0.6. [108]Laptops ++ ++ 3.0.1. Interrupt Conflicts ++ ++ [ [109]Top ] [ [110]Contents ] [ [111]Section Contents ] [ [112]Next ] ++ ++ PCs are not the best platform for real operating systems like Unix. ++ The architecture suffers from numerous deficiencies, not the least of ++ which is the stiflingly small number of hardware interrupts (either 7 ++ or 15, many of which are preallocated). Thus adding devices, using ++ multiple serial ports, etc, is always a challenge and often a ++ nightmare. The free-for-all nature of the PC market and the lack of ++ standards combined with the diversity of Unix OS versions make it ++ difficult to find drivers for any particular device on any particular ++ version of Unix. ++ ++ Of special interest to Kermit users is the fact that there is no ++ standard provision in the PC architecture for more than 2 ++ communication (serial) ports. COM3 and COM4 (or higher) will not work ++ unless you (a) find out the hardware address and interrupt for each, ++ (b) find out how to provide your Unix version with this information, ++ and (c) actually set up the configuration in the Unix startup files ++ (or whatever other method is used). Watch out for interrupt conflicts, ++ especially when using a serial mouse, and don't expect to be able to ++ use more than two serial ports. ++ ++ The techniques for resolving interrupt conflicts are different for ++ each operating system (Linux, NetBSD, etc). In general, there is a ++ configuration file somewhere that lists COM ports, something like ++ this: ++ ++ com0 at isa? port 0x3f8 irq 4 # DOS COM1 ++ com1 at isa? port 0x2f8 irq 3 # DOS COM2 ++ ++ The address and IRQ values in this file must agree with the values in ++ the PC BIOS and with the ports themselves, and there must not be more ++ than one device with the same interrupt. Unfortunately, due to the ++ small number of available interrupts, installing new devices on a PC ++ almost always creates a conflict. Here is a typical tale from a Linux ++ user (Fred Smith) about installing a third serial port: ++ ++ ...problems can come from a number of causes. The one I fought with ++ for some time, and finally conquered, was that my modem is on an ++ add-in serial port, cua3/IRQ5. By default IRQ5 has a very low ++ priority, and does not get enough service in times when the system ++ is busy to prevent losing data. This in turn causes many resends. ++ There are two 'fixes' that I know of, one is to relax hard disk ++ interrupt hogging by using the correct parameter to hdparm, but I ++ don't like that one because the hdparm man page indicates it is ++ risky to use. The other one, the one I used, was to get 'irqtune' ++ and use it to give IRQ5 the highest priority instead of nearly the ++ lowest. Completely cured the problem. ++ ++ Here's another one from a newsgroup posting: ++ ++ After much hair pulling, I've discovered why my serial port won't ++ work. Apparently my [PC] has three serial devices (two comm ports ++ and an IR port), of which only two at a time can be active. I ++ looked in the BIOS setup and noticed that the IR port was ++ activated, but didn't realize at the time that this meant that COM2 ++ was thereby de-activated. I turned off the IR port and now the ++ serial port works as advertised. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0.2. Windows-Specific Hardware ++ ++ [ [113]Top ] [ [114]Contents ] [ [115]Section Contents ] [ [116]Next ] ++ [ [117]Previous ] ++ ++ To complicate matters, the PC platform is becoming increasingly and ++ inexorably Windows-oriented. More and more add-on devices are "Windows ++ only" -- meaning they are incomplete and rely on proprietary ++ Windows-based software drivers to do the jobs that you would expect ++ the device itself to do. PCMCIA, PCI, or "Plug-n-Play" devices are ++ rarely supported on PC-based Unix versions such as SCO; Winmodems, ++ Winprinters, and the like are not supported on any Unix variety (with ++ [118]a few exceptions). The self-proclaimed Microsoft PC 97 (or later) ++ standard only makes matters worse since its only purpose to ensure ++ that PCs are "optimized to run Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 and ++ future versions of these operating systems". ++ ++ With the exception noted (the Lucent modem, perhaps a handful of ++ others by the time you read this), drivers for "Win" devices are ++ available only for Windows, since the Windows market dwarfs that of ++ any particular Unix brand, and for that matter all Unixes (or for that ++ matter, all non-Windows operating systems) combined. If your version ++ of Unix (SCO, Linux, BSDI, FreeBSD, etc) does not support a particular ++ device, then C-Kermit can't use it either. C-Kermit, like any Unix ++ application, must access all devices through drivers and not directly ++ because Unix is a real operating system. ++ ++ Don't waste time thinking that you, or anybody else, could write a ++ Linux (or other Unix) driver for a Winmodem or other "Win" device. ++ First of all, these devices generally require realtime control, but ++ since Unix is a true multitasking operating system, realtime device ++ control is not possible outside the kernel. Second, the specifications ++ for these devices are secret and proprietary, and each one (and each ++ version of each one) is potentially different. Third, a Winmodem ++ driver would be enormously complex; it would take years to write and ++ debug, by which time it would be obsolete. ++ ++ A more recent generation of PCs (circa 1999-2000) is marketed as ++ "Legacy Free". One can only speculate what that could mean. Most ++ likely it means it will ONLY run the very latest versions of Windows, ++ and is made exclusively of Winmodems, Winprinters, Winmemory, and ++ Win-CPU-fans (Legacy Free is a concept [119]pioneered by Microsoft). ++ ++ Before you buy a new PC or add-on equipment, especially serial ports, ++ internal modems, or printers, make sure they are compatible with your ++ version of Unix. This is becoming an ever-greater challenge; only a ++ huge company like Microsoft can afford to be constantly cranking out ++ and/or verifying drivers for the thousands of video boards, sound ++ cards, network adapters, SCSI adapters, buses, etc, that spew forth in ++ an uncontrolled manner from all corners of the world on a daily basis. ++ With very few exceptions, makers of PCs assemble the various ++ components and then verify them only with Windows, which they must do ++ since they are, no doubt, preloading the PC with Windows. To find a ++ modern PC that is capable of running a variety of non-Windows ++ operating systems (e.g. Linux, SCO OpenServer, Unixware, and Solaris) ++ is a formidable challenge requiring careful study of each vendor's ++ "compatibility lists" and precise attention to exact component model ++ numbers and revision levels. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0.3. Modems ++ ++ [ [120]Top ] [ [121]Contents ] [ [122]Section Contents ] [ [123]Next ] ++ [ [124]Previous ] ++ ++ External modems are recommended: ++ ++ * They don't need any special drivers. ++ * You can use the lights and speaker to troubleshoot dialing. ++ * You can share them among all types of computers. ++ * You can easily turn them off and on when power-cycling seems ++ warranted. ++ * They are more likely to have manuals. ++ ++ Internal PC modems (even when they are not Winmodems, which is ++ increasingly unlikely in new PCs) are always trouble, especially in ++ Unix. Even when they work for dialing out, they might not work for ++ dialing in, etc. Problems that occur when using an internal modem can ++ almost always be eliminated by switching to an external one. Even when ++ an internal modem is not a Winmodem or Plug-n-Play, it is often a ++ no-name model of unknown quality -- not the sort of thing you want ++ sitting directly on your computer's bus. (Even if it does not cause ++ hardware problems, it probably came without a command list, so no Unix ++ software will know how to control it.) For more about Unix compatible ++ modems, see: ++ ++ [125]http://www.idir.net/~gromitkc/winmodem.html ++ ++ Remember that PCs, even now -- more than two decades after they were ++ first introduced -- are not (in general) capable of supporting more ++ than 2 serial devices. Here's a short success story from a recent ++ newsgroup posting: "I have a Diamond SupraSonic II dual modem in my ++ machine. What I had to end up doing is buying a PS/2 mouse and port ++ and install it. Had to get rid of my serial mouse. I also had to ++ disable PnP in my computer bios. I was having IRQ conflicts between my ++ serial mouse and 'com 3'. Both modems work fine for me. My first modem ++ is ttyS0 and my second is ttyS1." Special third-party multiport boards ++ such as [126]DigiBoard are available for certain Unix platforms ++ (typically SCO, maybe Linux) that come with special platform-specific ++ drivers. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0.4. Character Sets ++ ++ [ [127]Top ] [ [128]Contents ] [ [129]Section Contents ] [ [130]Next ] ++ [ [131]Previous ] ++ ++ PCs generally have PC code pages such as CP437 or CP850, and these are ++ often used by PC-based Unix operating systems, particularly on the ++ console. These are supported directly by C-Kermit's SET FILE ++ CHARACTER-SET and SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET commands. Some PC-based ++ Unix versions, such as recent Red Hat Linux releases, might also ++ support Microsoft Windows code pages such as CP1252, or even Latin ++ Alphabet 1 itself (perhaps displayed with CP437 glyphs). (And work is ++ in progress to support Unicode UTF8 in Linux.) ++ ++ Certain Windows code pages are not supported directly by C-Kermit, but ++ since they are ISO Latin Alphabets with nonstandard "extensions" in ++ the C1 control range, you can substitute the corresponding Latin ++ alphabet (or other character set) in any C-Kermit character-set ++ related commands: ++ ++ Windows Code Page Substitution ++ CP 1004 Latin-1 ++ CP 1051 HP Roman-8 ++ ++ Other Windows code pages are mostly (or totally) incompatible with ++ their Latin Alphabet counterparts (e.g. CP1250 and Latin-2), and ++ several of these are already supported by C-Kermit 7.0 and later ++ (1250, 1251, and 1252). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0.5. Keyboard, Screen, and Mouse Access ++ ++ [ [132]Top ] [ [133]Contents ] [ [134]Section Contents ] [ [135]Next ] ++ [ [136]Previous ] ++ ++ Finally, note that as a real operating system, Unix (unlike Windows) ++ does not provide the intimate connection to the PC keyboard, screen, ++ and mouse that you might expect. Unix applications can not "see" the ++ keyboard, and therefore can not be programmed to understand F-keys, ++ Editing keys, Arrow keys, Alt-key combinations, and the like. This is ++ because: ++ ++ a. Unix is a portable operating system, not only for PCs; ++ b. Unix sessions can come from anywhere, not just the PC's own ++ keyboard and screen; and: ++ c. even though it might be possible for an application that actually ++ is running on the PC's keyboard and screen to access these devices ++ directly, there are no APIs (outside of X) for this. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.0.6. Laptops ++ ++ [ [137]Top ] [ [138]Contents ] [ [139]Section Contents ] [ ++ [140]Previous ] ++ ++ (To be filled in . . .) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1. C-KERMIT AND AIX ++ ++ [ [141]Top ] [ [142]Contents ] [ [143]Section Contents ] [ [144]Next ] ++ [ [145]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.1.1. [146]AIX: General ++ 3.1.2. [147]AIX: Network Connections ++ 3.1.3. [148]AIX: Serial Connections ++ 3.1.4. [149]AIX: File Transfer ++ 3.1.5. [150]AIX: Xterm Key Map ++ ++ For additional information see: ++ * [151]http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/aix-faq/ ++ * [152]http://www.faqs.org/faqs/by-newsgroup/comp/comp.unix.aix.html ++ * [153]http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/hypertext/faq/usenet/aix-faq/to ++ p.html ++ * [154]http://aixpdslib.seas.ucla.edu/ ++ * [155]http://www.rootvg.net (AIX history) ++ * [156]ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/aix-faq/part1 ++ * [157]ftp://mirrors.aol.com/pub/rtfm/usenet-by-hierarchy/comp/unix/ ++ aix ++ ++ and/or read the [158]comp.unix.aix newsgroup. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.1. AIX: General ++ ++ [ [159]Top ] [ [160]Contents ] [ [161]Section Contents ] [ [162]Next ] ++ ++ About AIX version numbers: "uname -a" tells the two-digit version ++ number, such as 3.2 or 4.1. The three-digit form can be seen with the ++ "oslevel" command (this information is unavailable at the API level ++ and is reportedly obtained by scanning the installed patch list). ++ Supposedly all three-digit versions within the same two-digit version ++ (e.g. 4.3.1, 4.3.2) are binary compatible; i.e. a binary built on any ++ one of them should run on all others, but who knows. Most AIX ++ advocates tell you that any AIX binary will run on any AIX version ++ greater than or equal to the one under which it was built, but ++ experience with C-Kermit suggests otherwise. It is always best to run ++ a binary built under your exact same AIX version, down to the third ++ decimal place, if possible. Ideally, build it from source code ++ yourself. Yes, this advice would be easier to follow if AIX came with ++ a C compiler. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.2. AIX: Network Connections ++ ++ [ [163]Top ] [ [164]Contents ] [ [165]Section Contents ] [ [166]Next ] ++ [ [167]Previous ] ++ ++ File transfers into AIX 4.2 or 4.3 through the AIX Telnet or Rlogin ++ server have been observed to fail (or accumulate huge numbers of ++ correctable errors, or even disconnect the session), when exactly the ++ same kind of transfers into AIX 4.1 work without incident, as do such ++ transfers into all non-AIX platforms on the same kind of connections ++ (with a few exceptions noted elsewhere in this document). AIX 4.3.3 ++ seems to be particularly fragile in this regard; the weakness seems to ++ be in its pseudoterminal (pty) driver. High-speed streaming transfers ++ work perfectly, however, if the AIX Telnet server and pty driver are ++ removed from the picture; e.g, by using "set host * 3000" on AIX. ++ ++ The problem can be completely cured by replacing the IBM Telnet server ++ with [168]MIT's Kerberos Telnet server -- even if you don't actually ++ use the Kerberos part. Diagnosis: AIX pseudoterminals (which are ++ controlled by the Telnet server to give you a login terminal for your ++ session) have quirks that not even IBM knows about. The situation with ++ AIX 5.x is not known, but if it has the same problem, the same cure is ++ available. ++ ++ Meanwhile, the only remedy when going through the IBM Telnet server is ++ to cut back on Kermit's performance settings until you find a ++ combination that works: ++ ++ * SET STREAMING OFF ++ * SET WINDOW-SIZE small-number ++ * SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PACKET-LENGTH small-number ++ * SET PREFIXING { CAUTIOUS, ALL } ++ ++ In some cases, severe cutbacks are required, e.g. those implied by the ++ ROBUST command. Also be sure that the AIX C-Kermit on the remote end ++ has "set flow none" (which is the default). NOTE: Maybe this one can ++ also be addressed by starting AIX telnetd with the "-a" option. The ++ situation with SSH connections is not known, but almost certainly the ++ same. ++ ++ When these problems occur, the system error log contains: ++ ++ LABEL: TTY_TTYHOG ++ IDENTIFIER: 0873CF9F ++ Type: TEMP ++ Resource Name: pts/1 ++ ++ Description ++ TTYHOG OVER-RUN ++ ++ Failure Causes ++ EXCESSIVE LOAD ON PROCESSOR ++ ++ Recommended Actions ++ REDUCE SYSTEM LOAD. ++ REDUCE SERIAL PORT BAUD RATE ++ ++ Before leaving the topic of AIX pseudoterminals, it is very likely ++ that Kermit's PTY and SSH commands do not work well either, for the ++ same reason that Telnet connections into AIX don't work well. A brief ++ test with "pty rlogin somehost" got a perfectly usable terminal ++ (CONNECT) session, but file-transfer problems like those just ++ described. ++ ++ Reportedly, telnet from AIX 4.1-point-something to non-Telnet ports ++ does not work unless the port number is in the /etc/services file; ++ it's not clear from the report whether this is a problem with AIX ++ Telnet (in which case it would not affect Kermit), or with the sockets ++ library (in which case it would). The purported fix is IBM APAR ++ IX61523. ++ ++ C-Kermit SET HOST or TELNET from one AIX 3.1 (or earlier) system to ++ another won't work right unless you set your local terminal type to ++ something other than AIXTERM. When your terminal type is AIXTERM, AIX ++ TELNET sends two escapes whenever you type one, and the AIX telnet ++ server swallows one of them. This has something to do with the "hft" ++ device. This behavior seems to be removed in AIX 3.2 and later. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.3. AIX: Serial Connections ++ ++ [ [169]Top ] [ [170]Contents ] [ [171]Section Contents ] [ [172]Next ] ++ [ [173]Previous ] ++ ++ In AIX 3, 4, or 5, C-Kermit won't be able to "set line /dev/tty0" (or ++ any other dialout device) if you haven't installed "cu" or "uucp" on ++ your system, because installing these is what creates the UUCP ++ lockfile directory. If SET LINE commands always result in "Sorry, ++ access to lock denied", even when C-Kermit has been given the same ++ owner, group, and permissions as cu: ++ ++ -r-sr-xr-x 1 uucp uucp 67216 Jul 27 1999 cu ++ ++ and even when you run it as root, then you must go back and install ++ "cu" from your AIX installation media. ++ ++ According to IBM's "From Strength to Strength" document (21 April ++ 1998), in AIX 4.2 and later "Async supports speeds on native serial ++ ports up to 115.2kbps". However, no API is documented to achieve ++ serial speeds higher than 38400 bps. Apparently the way to do this -- ++ which might or might not work only on the IBM 128-port multiplexer -- ++ is: ++ ++ cxma-stty fastbaud /dev/tty0 ++ ++ which, according to "man cxma-stty": ++ ++ fastbaud Alters the baud rate table, so 50 baud becomes 57600 baud. ++ -fastbaud Restores the baud rate table, so 57600 baud becomes 50 ++ baud. ++ ++ Presumably (but not certainly) this extrapolates to 110 "baud" becomes ++ 76800 bps, and 150 becomes 115200 bps. So to use high serial speeds in ++ AIX 4.2 or 4.3, the trick would be to give the "cxma-stty fastbaud" ++ command for the desired tty device before starting Kermit, and then ++ use "set speed 50", "set speed 110", or "set speed 150" to select ++ 56700, 76800, or 115200 bps. It is not known whether cxma-stty ++ requires privilege. ++ ++ According to one report, "Further investigation with IBM seems to ++ indicate that the only hardware capable of doing this is the 128-port ++ multiplexor with one (or more) of the 16 port breakout cables ++ (Enhanced Remote Async Node 16-Port EIA-232). We are looking at about ++ CDN$4,000 in hardware just to hang a 56kb modem on there. Of course, ++ we can then hang 15 more, if we want. This hardware combo is described ++ to be good to 230.4kbps." ++ ++ Another report says (quote from AIX newsgroup, March 1999): ++ ++ The machine type and the adapter determine the speed that one can ++ actually run at. The older microchannel machines have much slower ++ crystal frequencies and may not go beyond 76,800. A feature put ++ into AIX 421 allows one to key in non-POSIX baud rates and if the ++ uart can support that speed, it will get set. this applies also to ++ 43p's and beyond. 115200 is the max for the 43P's native serial ++ port. As crytal frequencies continue to increase, the built-in ++ serial ports speeds will improve. To use 'uucp' or 'ate' at the ++ higher baud rates, configure the port for the desired speed, but ++ set the speed of uucp or ate to 50. Any non-POSIX speeds set in the ++ ttys configuration will the be used. In the case of the 128-port ++ adapters or the ISA 8-port or PCI 8-port adapter, there are only a ++ few higher baud rates. ++ ++ a. Change the port to enable high baud rates: ++ + B50 for 57600 ++ + B75 for 76800 ++ + B110 for 115200 ++ + B200 for 230000 ++ b. chdev -l ttyX -a fastbaud=enable ++ + For the 128 ports original style rans, only 57600 bps is ++ supported. ++ + For the new enhanced RANs, up to 230Kbps is supported. ++ ++ In AIX 2.2.1 on the RT PC with the 8-port multiplexer, SET SPEED 38400 ++ gives 9600 bps, but SET SPEED 19200 gives 19200 (on the built-in S1 ++ port). ++ ++ Note that some RS/6000s (e.g. the IBM PowerServer 320) have ++ nonstandard rectangular 10-pin serial ports; the DB-25 connector is ++ NOT a serial port; it is a parallel printer port. IBM cables are ++ required for the serial ports, (The IBM RT PC also had rectangular ++ serial ports -- perhaps the same as these, perhaps different.) ++ ++ If you dial in to AIX through a modem that is connected directly to an ++ AIX port (e.g. on the 128-port multiplexer) and find that data is ++ lost, especially when uploading files to the AIX system (and system ++ error logs report buffer overruns on the port): ++ ++ 1. Make sure the port and modem are BOTH configured for hardware ++ (RTS/CTS) flow control. The port is configured somewhere in the ++ system configuration, outside of Kermit. ++ 2. Tell C-Kermit to "set flow keep"; experimentation shows that SET ++ FLOW RTS/CTS has no effect when used in remote mode (i.e. on ++ /dev/tty, as opposed to a specify port device). ++ 3. Fixes for bugs in the original AIX 4.2 tty (serial i/o) support ++ and other AIX bugs are available from IBM at: ++ [174]http://service.software.ibm.com/rs6000/ ++ Downloads -> Software Fixes -> Download FixDist gets an ++ application for looking up known problems. ++ ++ Many problems reported with bidirectional terminal lines on AIX 3.2.x ++ on the RS/6000. Workaround: don't use bidirectional terminal lines, or ++ write a shell-script wrapper for Kermit that turns getty off on the ++ line before starting Kermit, or before Kermit attempts to do the SET ++ LINE. (But note: These problems MIGHT be fixed in C-Kermit 6.0 and ++ later.) The commands for turning getty off and on (respectively) are ++ /usr/sbin/pdisable and /usr/sbin/penable. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.4. AIX: File Transfer ++ ++ [ [175]Top ] [ [176]Contents ] [ [177]Section Contents ] [ [178]Next ] ++ [ [179]Previous ] ++ ++ Evidently AIX 4.3 (I don't know about earlier versions) does not allow ++ open files to be overwritten. This can cause Kermit transfers to fail ++ when FILE COLLISION is OVERWRITE, where they might work on other Unix ++ varieties or earlier AIX versions. ++ ++ Transfer of binary -- and maybe even text -- files can fail in AIX if ++ the AIX terminal has particular port can have character-set ++ translation done for it by the tty driver. The following advice from a ++ knowledgeable AIX user: ++ ++ [This feature] has to be checked (and set/cleared) with a separate ++ command, unfortunately stty doesn't handle this. To check: ++ ++ $ setmaps ++ input map: none installed ++ output map: none installed ++ ++ If it says anything other than "none installed" for either one, it ++ is likely to cause a problem with kermit. To get rid of installed ++ maps: ++ ++ $ setmaps -t NOMAP ++ ++ However, I seem to recall that with some versions of AIX before ++ 3.2.5, only root could change the setting. I'm not sure what ++ versions - it might have only been under AIX 3.1 that this was ++ true. At least with AIX 3.2.5 an ordinary user can set or clear the ++ maps. ++ ++ On the same problem, another knowledgeable AIX user says: ++ ++ The way to get information on the NLS mapping under AIX (3.2.5 ++ anyway) is as follows. From the command line type: ++ ++ lsattr -l tty# -a imap -a omap -E -H ++ ++ Replace the tty number for the number sign above. This will give a ++ human readable output of the settings that looks like this; ++ ++ # lsattr -l tty2 -a imap -a omap -E -H ++ attribute value description user_settable ++ ++ imap none INPUT map file True ++ omap none OUTPUT map file True ++ ++ If you change the -H to a -O, you get output that can easily be ++ processed by another program or a shell script, for example: ++ ++ # lsattr -l tty2 -a imap -a omap -E -O ++ #imap:omap ++ none:none ++ ++ To change the settings from the command line, the chdev command is ++ used with the following syntax. ++ ++ chdev -l tty# -a imap='none' -a omap='none' ++ ++ Again substituting the appropriate tty port number for the number ++ sign, "none" being the value we want for C-Kermit. Of course, the ++ above can also be changed by using the SMIT utility and selecting ++ devices - tty. (...end quote) ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.5. AIX: Xterm Key Map ++ ++ [ [180]Top ] [ [181]Contents ] [ [182]Section Contents ] [ ++ [183]Previous ] ++ ++ Here is a sample configuration for setting up an xterm keyboard for ++ VT220 or higher terminal emulation on AIX, courtesy of Bruce Momjian, ++ Drexel Hill, PA. Xterm can be started like this: ++ ++ xterm $XTERMFLAGS +rw +sb +ls $@ -tm 'erase ^? intr ^c' -name vt220 \ ++ -title vt220 -tn xterm-220 "$@" & ++ ++--------------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ XTerm*VT100.Translations: #override \n\ ++ Home: string(0x1b) string("[3~") \n \ ++ End: string(0x1b) string("[4~") \n ++ vt220*VT100.Translations: #override \n\ ++ Shift F1: string("[23~") \n \ ++ Shift F2: string("[24~") \n \ ++ Shift F3: string("[25~") \n \ ++ Shift F4: string("[26~") \n \ ++ Shift F5: string("[K~") \n \ ++ Shift F6: string("[31~") \n \ ++ Shift F7: string("[31~") \n \ ++ Shift F8: string("[32~") \n \ ++ Shift F9: string("[33~") \n \ ++ Shift F10: string("[34~") \n \ ++ Shift F11: string("[28~") \n \ ++ Shift F12: string("[29~") \n \ ++ Print: string(0x1b) string("[32~") \n\ ++ Cancel: string(0x1b) string("[33~") \n\ ++ Pause: string(0x1b) string("[34~") \n\ ++ Insert: string(0x1b) string("[2~") \n\ ++ Delete: string(0x1b) string("[3~") \n\ ++ Home: string(0x1b) string("[1~") \n\ ++ End: string(0x1b) string("[4~") \n\ ++ Prior: string(0x1b) string("[5~") \n\ ++ Next: string(0x1b) string("[6~") \n\ ++ BackSpace: string(0x7f) \n\ ++ Num_Lock: string(0x1b) string("OP") \n\ ++ KP_Divide: string(0x1b) string("Ol") \n\ ++ KP_Multiply: string(0x1b) string("Om") \n\ ++ KP_Subtract: string(0x1b) string("OS") \n\ ++ KP_Add: string(0x1b) string("OM") \n\ ++ KP_Enter: string(0x1b) string("OM") \n\ ++ KP_Decimal: string(0x1b) string("On") \n\ ++ KP_0: string(0x1b) string("Op") \n\ ++ KP_1: string(0x1b) string("Oq") \n\ ++ KP_2: string(0x1b) string("Or") \n\ ++ KP_3: string(0x1b) string("Os") \n\ ++ KP_4: string(0x1b) string("Ot") \n\ ++ KP_5: string(0x1b) string("Ou") \n\ ++ KP_6: string(0x1b) string("Ov") \n\ ++ KP_7: string(0x1b) string("Ow") \n\ ++ KP_8: string(0x1b) string("Ox") \n\ ++ KP_9: string(0x1b) string("Oy") \n ++ ++ ! Up: string(0x1b) string("[A") \n\ ++ ! Down: string(0x1b) string("[B") \n\ ++ ! Right: string(0x1b) string("[C") \n\ ++ ! Left: string(0x1b) string("[D") \n\ ++ ++ *visualBell: true ++ *saveLines: 1000 ++ *cursesemul: true ++ *scrollKey: true ++ *scrollBar: true ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2. C-KERMIT AND HP-UX ++ ++ [ [184]Top ] [ [185]Contents ] [ [186]Section Contents ] [ [187]Next ] ++ [ [188]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.2.0. [189]Common Problems ++ 3.2.1. [190]Building C-Kermit on HP-UX ++ 3.2.2. [191]File Transfer ++ 3.2.3. [192]Dialing Out and UUCP Lockfiles in HP-UX ++ 3.2.4. [193]Notes on Specific HP-UX Releases ++ 3.2.5. [194]HP-UX and X.25 ++ ++ REFERENCES ++ ++ For further information, read the [195]comp.sys.hp.hpux newsgroup. ++ ++ C-Kermit is included as part of the HP-UX operating system by contract ++ between Hewlett Packard and Columbia University for HP-UX 10.00 and ++ later. Each level of HP-UX includes a freshly built C-Kermit binary in ++ /bin/kermit, which should work correctly. Binaries built for regular ++ HP-UX may be used on Trusted HP-UX and vice-versa, except for use as ++ IKSD because of the different authentication methods. ++ ++ Note that HP does not update C-Kermit versions for any but its most ++ current HP-UX release. So, for example, HP-UX 10.20 has C-Kermit 6.0; ++ 11.00 has C-Kermit 7.0, and 11.22 has 8.0. Of course, as with all ++ software, older Kermit versions have bugs (such as buffer overflow ++ vulnerabilities) that are fixed in later versions. From time to time, ++ HP discovers one of these (long-ago fixed) bugs and issues a security ++ alert for the older OS's, recommending some draconian measure to avoid ++ the problem. The true fix in each situation is to install the current ++ release of C-Kermit. ++ ++ 3.2.0. Common Problems ++ ++ [ [196]Top ] [ [197]Contents ] [ [198]Section Contents ] [ [199]Next ] ++ ++ Some HP workstations have a BREAK/RESET key. If you hit this key while ++ C-Kermit is running, it might kill or suspend the C-Kermit process. ++ C-Kermit arms itself against these signals, but evidently the ++ BREAK/RESET key is -- at least in some circumstances, on certain HP-UX ++ versions -- too powerful to be caught. (Some report that the first ++ BREAK/RESET shows up as SIGINT and is caught by C-Kermit's former ++ SIGINT handler even when SIGINT is currently set to SIG_IGN; the ++ second kills Kermit; other reports suggest the first BREAK/RESET sends ++ a SIGTSTP (suspend signal) to Kermit, which it catches and suspends ++ itself. You can tell C-Kermit to ignore suspend signals with SET ++ SUSPEND OFF. You can tell C-Kermit to ignore SIGINT with SET COMMAND ++ INTERRUPTION OFF. It is not known whether these commands also grant ++ immunity to the BREAK/RESET key (one report states that with SET ++ SUSPEND OFF, the BREAK/RESET key is ignored the first four times, but ++ kills Kermit the 5th time). In any case: ++ ++ 1. If this key is mapped to SIGINT or SIGTSTP, C-Kermit catches or ++ ignores it, depending on which mode (CONNECT, command, etc) Kermit ++ is in. ++ 2. If it causes HP-UX to kill C-Kermit, there is nothing C-Kermit can ++ do to prevent it. ++ ++ When HP-UX is on the remote end of the connection, it is essential ++ that HP-UX C-Kermit be configured for Xon/Xoff flow control (this is ++ the default, but in case you change it and then experience ++ file-transfer failures, this is a likely reason). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.1. Building C-Kermit on HP-UX ++ ++ [ [200]Top ] [ [201]Contents ] [ [202]Section Contents ] [ [203]Next ] ++ [ [204]Previous ] ++ ++ This section applies mainly to old (pre-10.20) HP-UX version on ++ old, slow, and/or memory-constrained hardware. ++ ++ During the C-Kermit 6.0 Beta cycle, something happened to ckcpro.w ++ (or, more precisely, the ckcpro.c file that is generated from it) ++ which causes HP optimizing compilers under HP-UX versions 7.0 and 8.0 ++ (apparently on all platforms) as well as under HP-UX 9.0 on Motorola ++ platforms only, to blow up. In versions 7.0 and 8.0 the problem has ++ spread to other modules. ++ ++ The symptoms vary from the system grinding to a halt, to the compiler ++ crashing, to the compilation of the ckcpro.c module taking very long ++ periods of time, like 9 hours. This problem is handled by compiling ++ the modules that tickle it without optimization; the new C-Kermit ++ makefile takes care of this, and shows how to do it in case the same ++ thing begins happening with other modules. ++ ++ On HP-UX 9.0, a kernel parameter, maxdsiz (maximum process data ++ segment size), seems to be important. On Motorola systems, it is 16MB ++ by default, whereas on RISC systems the default is much bigger. ++ Increasing maxdsiz to about 80MB seems to make the problem go away, ++ but only if the system also has a lot of physical memory -- otherwise ++ it swaps itself to death. ++ ++ The optimizing compiler might complain about "some optimizations ++ skipped" on certain modules, due to lack of space available to the ++ optimizer. You can increase the space (the incantation depends on the ++ particular compiler version -- see the [205]makefile), but doing so ++ tends to make the compilations take a much longer time. For example, ++ the "hpux0100o+" makefile target adds the "+Onolimit" compiler flag, ++ and about an hour to the compile time on an HP-9000/730. But it *does* ++ produce an executable that is about 10K smaller :-) ++ ++ In the makefile, all HP-UX entries automatically skip optimization of ++ problematic modules. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.2. File Transfer ++ ++ [ [206]Top ] [ [207]Contents ] [ [208]Section Contents ] [ [209]Next ] ++ [ [210]Previous ] ++ ++ Telnet connections into HP-UX versions up to and including 11.11 (and ++ possibly 11.20) tend not to lend themselves to file transfer due to ++ limitations, restrictions, and/or bugs in the HP-UX Telnet server ++ and/or pseudoterminal (pty) driver. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 6.0 (1996) an unexpected slowness was noted when ++ transferring files over local Ethernet connections when an HP-UX ++ system (9.05 or 10.00) was on the remote end. The following experiment ++ was conducted to determine the cause. C-Kermit 6.0 was used; the ++ situation is slightly better using C-Kermit 7.0's streaming feature ++ and HP-UX 10.20 on the far end. ++ ++ The systems were HP-UX 10.00 (on 715/33) and SunOS 4.1.3 (on ++ Sparc-20), both on the same local 10Mbps Ethernet, packet length 4096, ++ parity none, control prefixing "cautious", using only local disks on ++ each machine -- no NFS. In the C-Kermit 6.0 (ACK/NAK) case, the window ++ size was 20; in the streaming case there is no window size (i.e. it is ++ infinite). The test file was C-Kermit executable, transferred in ++ binary mode. Conditions were relatively poor: the Sun and the local ++ net heavily loaded; the HP system is old, slow, and ++ memory-constrained. ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0... C-Kermit 7.0... ++ Local Remote ACK/NAK........ Streaming...... ++ Client Server Send Receive Send Receive ++ Sun HP 36 18 64 18 ++ HP HP 25 15 37 16 ++ HP Sun 77 83 118 92 ++ Sun Sun 60 60 153 158 ++ ++ So whenever HP is the remote we have poor performance. Why? ++ ++ * Changing file display to CRT has no effect (so it's not the curses ++ library on the client side). ++ * Changing TCP RECV-BUFFER or SEND-BUFFER has little effect. ++ * Telling the client to make a binary-mode connection (SET TELNET ++ BINARY REQUESTED, which successfully negotiates a binary ++ connection) has no effect on throughput. ++ ++ BUT... If I start HP-UX C-Kermit as a TCP service: ++ ++ set host * 3000 ++ server ++ ++ and then from the client "set host xxx 3000", I get: ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0... C-Kermit 7.0... ++ Local Remote ACK/NAK........ Streaming...... ++ Client Server Send Receive Send Receive ++ Sun HP 77 67 106 139 ++ HP HP 50 50 64 62 ++ HP Sun 57 85 155 105 ++ Sun Sun 57 50 321 314 ++ ++ Therefore the HP-UX telnet server or pty driver seems to be adding ++ more overhead than the SunOS one, and most others. When going through ++ this type of connection (a remote telnet server) there is little ++ Kermit can do improve matters, since the telnet server and pty driver ++ are between the two Kermits, and neither Kermit program can have any ++ influence over them (except putting the Telnet connection in binary ++ mode, but that doesn't help). ++ ++ (The numbers for the HP-HP transfers are lower than the others since ++ both Kermit processes are running on the same slow 33MHz CPU.) ++ ++ Matters seem to have deteriorated in HP-UX 11. Now file transfers over ++ Telnet connections fail completely, rather than just being slow. In ++ the following trial, a Telnet connection was made from Kermit 95 to ++ HP-UX 11.11 on an HP-9000/785/B2000 over local 10Mbps Ethernet running ++ C-Kermit 8.00 in server mode (under the HP-UX Telnet server): ++ ++ Text........ Binary...... ++ Stream Pktlen GET SEND GET SEND ++ On 4000 Fail Fail Fail Fail ++ Off 4000 Fail Fail Fail Fail ++ Off 2000 OK Fail OK Fail ++ On 2000 OK Fail OK Fail ++ On 3000 Fail Fail Fail Fail ++ On 2500 Fail Fail Fail Fail ++ On 2047 OK Fail OK Fail ++ On 2045 OK Fail OK Fail ++ Off 500 OK OK OK OK ++ On 500 OK Fail OK Fail ++ On 240 OK Fail OK Fail ++ ++ As you can see, downloads are problematic unless the receiver's Kermit ++ packet length is 2045 or less, but uploads work only with streaming ++ disabled and the packet length restricted to 500. To force file ++ transfers to work on this connection, the desktop Kermit must be told ++ to: ++ ++ set streaming off ++ set receive packet-length 2000 ++ set send packet-length 500 ++ ++ However, if a connection is made between the same two programs on the ++ same two computers over the same network, but this time a direct ++ socket-to-socket connection bypassing the HP-UX Telnet server and pty ++ driver (tell HP-UX C-Kermit to "set host /server * 3000 /raw"; tell ++ desktop client program to "set host blah 3000 /raw"), everything works ++ perfectly with the default Kermit settings (streaming, 4K packets, ++ liberal control-character unprefixing, 8-bit transparency, etc): ++ ++ Text........ Binary...... ++ Stream Pktlen GET SEND GET SEND ++ On 4000 OK OK OK OK ++ ++ And in this case, transfer rates were approximately 900,000 cps. To ++ verify that the behavior reported here is not caused by the new Kermit ++ release, the same experiment was performed on a Telnet connection from ++ the same PC over the same network to the old 715/33 running HP-UX ++ 10.20 and C-Kermit 8.00. Text and binary uploads and downloads worked ++ perfectly (albeit slowly) with all the default settings -- streaming, ++ 4K packets, etc. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.3. Dialing Out and UUCP Lockfiles in HP-UX ++ ++ [ [211]Top ] [ [212]Contents ] [ [213]Section Contents ] [ [214]Next ] ++ [ [215]Previous ] ++ ++ HP workstations do not come with dialout devices configured; you have ++ to do it yourself (as root). First look in /dev to see what's there; ++ for example in HP-UX 10.00 or later: ++ ++ ls -l /dev/cua* ++ ls -l /dev/tty* ++ ++ If you find a tty0p0 device but no cua0p0, you'll need to creat one if ++ you want to dial out; the tty0p0 does not work for dialing out. It's ++ easy: start SAM; in the main Sam window, double-click on Peripheral ++ Device, then in the Peripheral Devices window, double-click on ++ Terminals and Modems. In the Terminals and Modems dialog, click on ++ Actions, then choose "Add modem" and fill in the blanks. For example: ++ Port number 0, speed 57600 (higher speeds tend not to work reliably), ++ "Use device for calling out", do NOT "Receive incoming calls" (unless ++ you know what you are doing), leave "CCITT modem" unchecked unless you ++ really have one, and do select "Use hardware flow control (RTS/CTS)". ++ Then click OK. This creates cua0p0 as well as cul0p0 and ttyd0p0 ++ ++ If the following sequence: ++ ++ set line /dev/cua0p0 ; or other device ++ set speed 115200 ; or other normal speed ++ ++ produces the message "?Unsupported line speed". This means either that ++ the port is not configured for dialout (go into SAM as described above ++ and make sure "Use device for calling out" is selected), or else that ++ speed you have given (such as 460800) is supported by the operating ++ system but not by the physical device (in which case, use a lower ++ speed like 57600). ++ ++ In HP-UX 9.0, serial device names began to change. The older names ++ looked like "/dev/cua00", "/dev/tty01", etc (sometimes with only one ++ digit). The newer names have two digits with the letter "p" in ++ between. HP-UX 8.xx and earlier have the older form, HP-UX 10.00 and ++ later have the newer form. HP-UX 9.xx has the newer form on Series 800 ++ machines, and the older form on other hardware models. The situation ++ is summarized in the following table (the Convio 10.0 column applies ++ to HP-UX 10 and 11). ++ ++ Converged HP-UX Serial I/O Filenames : TTY Mux Naming ++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ General meaning Old Form S800 9.0 Convio 10.0 ++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ tty* hardwired ports tty ttyp ttyp

++ diag:mux diag:mux ++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ ttyd* dial-in modems ttyd ttydp ttydp

++ diag:ttydp diag:ttydp

++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ cua* auto-dial out cua cuap cuap

++ diag:cuap ++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ cul* dial-out cul culp culp

++ diag:culp ++ --------------------------------------------------------------------- ++ = LU (Logical Unit) = Devspec (decimal card instance) ++ or = Port

= Port ++ ++ For dialing out, you should use the cua or cul devices. When ++ C-Kermit's CARRIER setting is AUTO or ON, C-Kermit should pop back to ++ its prompt automatically if the carrier signal drops, e.g. when you ++ log out from the remote computer or service. If you use the ttyp ++ (e.g. tty0p0) device, the carrier signal should be ignored. The ++ ttyp device should be used for direct connections where the ++ carrier signal does not follow RS-232 conventions (use the cul device ++ for hardwired connections through a true null modem). Do not use the ++ ttydp device for dialing out. ++ ++ Kermit's access to serial devices is controlled by "UUCP lockfiles", ++ which are intended to prevent different users using different software ++ programs (Kermit, cu, etc, and UUCP itself) from accessing the same ++ serial device at the same time. When a device is in use by a ++ particular user, a file with a special name is created in: ++ ++ /var/spool/locks (HP-UX 10.00 and later) ++ /usr/spool/uucp (HP-UX 9.xx and earlier) ++ ++ The file's name indicates the device that is in use, and its contents ++ indicates the process ID (pid) of the process that is using the ++ device. Since serial devices and the locks directory are not both ++ publicly readable and writable, Kermit and other communication ++ software must be installed setuid to the owner (bin) of the serial ++ device and setgid to the group (daemon) of the /var/spool/locks ++ directory. Kermit's setuid and setgid privileges are enabled only when ++ opening the device and accessing the lockfiles. ++ ++ Let's say "unit" means a string of decimal digits (the interface ++ instance number) followed (in HP-UX 10.00 and later) by the letter "p" ++ (lowercase), followed by another string of decimal digits (the port ++ number on the interface), e.g.: ++ ++ "0p0", "0p1", "1p0", etc (HP-UX 10.00 and later) ++ "0p0", "0p1", "1p0", etc (HP-UX 9.xx on Series 800) ++ "00", "01", "10", "0", etc (HP-UX 9.xx not on Series 800) ++ "00", "01", "10", "0", etc (HP-UX 8.xx and earlier) ++ ++ Then a normal serial device (driver) name consists of a prefix ("tty", ++ "ttyd", "cua", "cul", or possibly "cuad" or "culd") followed by a ++ unit, e.g. "cua0p0". Kermit's treatment of UUCP lockfiles is as close ++ as possible to that of the HP-UX "cu" program. Here is a table of the ++ lockfiles that Kermit creates for unit 0p0: ++ ++ Selection Lockfile 1 Lockfile 2 ++ /dev/tty0p0 LCK..tty0p0 (none) ++* /dev/ttyd0p0 LCK..ttyd0p0 (none) ++ /dev/cua0p0 LCK..cua0p0 LCK..ttyd0p0 ++ /dev/cul0p0 LCK..cul0p0 LCK..ttyd0p0 ++ /dev/cuad0p0 LCK..cuad0p0 LCK..ttyd0p0 ++ /dev/culd0p0 LCK..culd0p0 LCK..ttyd0p0 ++ LCK.. (none) ++ ++ (* = Dialin device, should not be used.) ++ ++ In other words, if the device name begins with "cu", a second lockfile ++ for the "ttyd" device, same unit, is created, which should prevent ++ dialin access on that device. ++ ++ The case allows for symbolic links, etc, but of course it is ++ not foolproof since we have no way of telling which device is really ++ being used. ++ ++ When C-Kermit tries to open a dialout device whose name ends with a ++ "unit", it searches the lockfile directory for all possible names for ++ the same unit. For example, if user selects /dev/cul2p3, Kermit looks ++ for lockfiles named: ++ ++ LCK..tty2p3 ++ LCK..ttyd2p3 ++ LCK..cua2p3 ++ LCK..cul2p3 ++ LCK..cuad2p3 ++ LCK..culd2p3 ++ ++ If any of these files are found, Kermit opens them to find out the ID ++ (pid) of the process that created them; if the pid is still valid, the ++ process is still active, and so the SET LINE command fails and the ++ user is informed of the pid so s/he can use "ps" to find out who is ++ using the device. ++ ++ If the pid is not valid, the file is deleted. If all such files (i.e. ++ with same "unit" designation) are successfully removed, then the SET ++ LINE command succeeds; up to six messages are printed telling the user ++ which "stale lockfiles" are being removed. ++ ++ When the "set line" command succeeds in HP-UX 10.00 and later, ++ C-Kermit also creates a Unix System V R4 "advisory lock" as a further ++ precaution (but not guarantee) against any other process obtaining ++ access to the device while you are using it. ++ ++ If the selected device was in use by "cu", Kermit can't open it, ++ because "cu" has changed its ownership, so we never get as far as ++ looking at the lockfiles. In the normal case, we can't even look at ++ the device to see who the owner is because it is visible only to its ++ (present) owner. In this case, Kermit says (for example): ++ ++ /dev/cua0p0: Permission denied ++ ++ When Kermit releases a device it has successfully opened, it removes ++ all the lockfiles that it created. This also happens whenever Kermit ++ exits "under its own power". ++ ++ If Kermit is killed with a device open, the lockfile(s) are left ++ behind. The next Kermit program that tries to assign the device, under ++ any of its various names, will automatically clean up the stale ++ lockfiles because the pids they contain are invalid. The behavior of ++ cu and other communication programs under these conditions should be ++ the same. ++ ++ Here, by the way, is a summary of the differences between the HP-UX ++ port driver types from John Pezzano of HP: ++ ++ There are three types of device files for each port. ++ ++ The ttydXXX device file is designed to work as follows: ++ ++ 1. The process that opens it does NOT get control of the port until ++ CD is asserted. This was intentional (over 15 years ago) to allow ++ getty to open the port but not control it until someone called in. ++ If a process wants to use the direct or callout device files ++ (ttyXXX and culXXX respectively), they will then get control and ++ getty would be blocked. This eliminated the need to use uugetty ++ (and its inherent problems with lock files) for modems. You can ++ see this demonstrated by the fact that "ps -ef" shows a ? in the ++ tty column for the getty process as getty does not have the port ++ yet. ++ 2. Once CD is asserted, the port is controlled by getty (or the ++ process handling an incoming call) if there was no process using ++ the port. The ? in the "ps" command now shows the port. At this ++ point, the port accepts data. ++ ++ Therefore you should use either the callout culXXX device file ++ (immediate control but no data until CD is asserted) or the direct ++ device file ttyXXX which gives immediate control and immediate data ++ and which ignores by default modem control signals. ++ ++ The ttydXXX device should be used only for callin and my ++ recommendation is to use it only for getty and uugetty. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.4 Notes on Specific HP-UX Releases ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.2.4.1. [216]HP-UX 11 ++ 3.2.4.2. [217]HP-UX 10 ++ 3.2.4.3. [218]HP-UX 9 ++ 3.2.4.4. [219]HP-UX 8 ++ 3.2.4.5. [220]HP-UX 7 and Earlier ++ ++ 3.2.4.1. HP-UX 11 ++ ++ [ [221]Top ] [ [222]Contents ] [ [223]Section Contents ] [ [224]Next ] ++ ++ As noted in [225]Section 3.2.2, the HP-UX 11 Telnet server and/or ++ pseudoterminal driver are a serious impediment to file transfer over ++ Telnet connections into HP-UX. If you have a Telnet connection into ++ HP-UX 11, tell your desktop Kermit program to: ++ ++ set streaming off ++ set receive packet-length 2000 ++ set send packet-length 500 ++ ++ File transfer speeds over connections from HP-UX 11 (dialed or Telnet) ++ are not impeded whatsoever, and can go at whatever speed is allowed by ++ the connection and the Kermit partner on the far end. ++ ++ PA-RISC binaries for HP-UX 10.20 or later should run on any PA-RISC ++ system, S700 or S800, as long as the binary was not built under a ++ later HP-UX version than the host operating system. HP-UX 11.00 and ++ 11.11 are only for PA-RISC systems. HP-UX 11.20 is only for IA64 ++ (subsequent HP-UX releases will be for both PA-RISC and IA64). To ++ check binary compatibility, the following C-Kermit 8.0 binaries were ++ run successfully on an HP-9000/785 with HP-UX 11.11: ++ ++ * Model 7xx HP-UX 10.20 ++ * Model 8xx HP-UX 10.20 ++ * Model 7xx HP-UX 11.00 ++ * Model 8xx HP-UX 11.00 ++ * Model 7xx HP-UX 11.11 ++ * Model 8xx HP-UX 11.11 ++ ++ Binaries built under some of the earlier HP-UX releases, such as 9.05, ++ might also work, but only if built for the same hardware family (e.g. ++ s700). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.4.2. HP-UX 10 ++ ++ [ [226]Top ] [ [227]Contents ] [ [228]Section Contents ] [ [229]Next ] ++ [ [230]Previous ] ++ ++ Beginning in HP-UX 10.10, libcurses is linked to libxcurses, the new ++ UNIX95 (X/Open) version of curses, which has some serious bugs; some ++ routines, when called, would hang and never return, some would dump ++ core. Evidently libxcurses contains a select() routine, and whenever ++ C-Kermit calls what it thinks is the regular (sockets) select(), it ++ gets the curses one, causing a segmentation fault. There is a patch ++ for this from HP, PHCO_8086, "s700_800 10.10 libcurses patch", "shared ++ lib curses program hangs on 10.10", "10.10 enhanced X/Open curses core ++ dumps due to using wrong select call", 96/08/02 (you can tell if the ++ patch is installed with "what /usr/lib/libxcurses.1"; the unpatched ++ version is 76.20, the patched one is 76.20.1.2). It has been verified ++ that C-Kermit works OK with the patched library, but results are not ++ definite for HP-UX 10.20 or higher. ++ ++ To ensure that C-Kermit works even on non-patched HP-UX 10.10 systems, ++ separate makefile entries are provided for HP-UX 10.00/10.01, 10.10, ++ 10.20, etc, in which the entries for 10.10 and above link with ++ libHcurses, which is "HP curses", the one that was used in ++ 10.00/10.01. HP-UX 11.20 and later, however, link with libcurses, as ++ libHcurses disappeared in 11.20. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.4.3. HP-UX 9 ++ ++ [ [231]Top ] [ [232]Contents ] [ [233]Section Contents ] [ [234]Next ] ++ [ [235]Previous ] ++ ++ HP-UX 9.00 and 9.01 need patch PHNE_10572 (note: this replaces ++ PHNE_3641) for hptt0.o, asio0.o, and ttycomn.o in libhp-ux.a. Contact ++ Hewlett Packard if you need this patch. Without it, the dialout device ++ (tty) will be hung after first use; subsequent attempts to use will ++ return an error like "device busy". (There are also equivalent patches ++ for s700 9.03 9.05 9.07 (PHNE_10573) and s800 9.00 9.04 (PHNE_10416). ++ ++ When C-Kermit is in server mode, it might have trouble executing ++ REMOTE HOST commands. This problem happens under HP-UX 9.00 (Motorola) ++ and HP-UX 9.01 (RISC) IF the C-Shell is the login shell AND with the ++ C-Shell Revision 70.15. Best thing is to install HP's Patch PHCO_4919 ++ for Series 300/400 and PHCO_5015 for the Series 700/800. PHCO_5015 is ++ called "s700_800 9.X cumulative csh(1) patch with memory leak fix" ++ which works for HP-UX 9.00, 9.01, 9.03, 9.04, 9.05 and 9.07. At least ++ you need C-Shell Revision 72.12! ++ ++ C-Kermit works fine -- including its curses-based file-transfer ++ display -- on the console terminal, in a remote session (e.g. when ++ logged in to the HP 9000 on a terminal port or when telnetted or ++ rlogin'd), and in an HP-VUE hpterm window or an xterm window. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.4.4. HP-UX 8 ++ ++ [ [236]Top ] [ [237]Contents ] [ [238]Section Contents ] [ [239]Next ] ++ [ [240]Previous ] ++ ++ To make C-Kermit work on HP-UX 8.05 on a model 720, obtain and install ++ HP-UX patch PHNE_0899. This patch deals with a lot of driver issues, ++ particularly related to communication at higher speeds. ++ ++ One user reports: ++ ++ On HP-UX 8 DON'T install 'tty patch' PHKL_4656, install PHKL_3047 ++ instead! Yesterday I tried this latest tty patch PHKL_4656 and had ++ terrible problems. This patch should fix RTS/CTS problems. With ++ text transver all looks nice. But when I switched over to binary ++ files the serial interface returned only rubish to C-Kermit. All ++ sorts of protocol, CRC and packed errors I had. After several tests ++ and after uninstalling that patch, all transvers worked fine. MB's ++ of data without any errors. So keep your fingers away from that ++ patch. If anybody needs the PHKL_3047 patch I have it here. It is ++ no longer availabel from HP's patch base. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.4.5. HP-UX 7 and Earlier ++ ++ [ [241]Top ] [ [242]Contents ] [ [243]Section Contents ] [ ++ [244]Previous ] ++ ++ When transferring files into HP-UX 5 or 6 over a Telnet connection, ++ you must not use streaming, and you must not use a packet length ++ greater than 512. However, you can use streaming and longer packets ++ when sending files from HP-UX on a Telnet connection. In C-Kermit 8.0, ++ the default receive packet length for HP-UX 5 and 6 was changed to 500 ++ (but you can still increase it with SET RECEIVE PACKET-LENGTH if you ++ wish, e.g. for non-Telnet connections). Disable streaming with SET ++ STREAMING OFF. ++ ++ The HP-UX 5.00 version of C-Kermit does not include the fullscreen ++ file-transfer because of problems with the curses library. ++ ++ If HP-UX 5.21 with Wollongong TCP/IP is on the remote end of a Telnet ++ connection, streaming transfers to HP-UX invariably fail. Workaround: ++ SET STREAMING OFF. Packets longer than about 1000 should not be used. ++ Transfers from these systems, however, can use streaming and/or longer ++ packets. ++ ++ Reportedly, "[there is] a bug in C-Kermit using HP-UX version 5.21 on ++ the HP-9000 series 500 computers. It only occurs when the controlling ++ terminal is using an HP-27140 six-port modem mux. The problem is not ++ present if the controlling terminal is logged into an HP-27130 ++ eight-port mux. The symptom is that just after dialing successfully ++ and connecting Kermit locks up and the port is unusable until both ++ forks of Kermit and the login shell are killed." (This report predates ++ C-Kermit 6.0 and might no longer apply.) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2.5. HP-UX and X.25 ++ ++ [ [245]Top ] [ [246]Contents ] [ [247]Section Contents ] [ ++ [248]Previous ] ++ ++ Although C-Kermit presently does not include built-in support for ++ HP-UX X.25 (as it does for the Sun and IBM X.25 products), it can ++ still be used to make X.25 connections as follows: start Kermit and ++ then telnet to localhost. After logging back in, start padem as you ++ would normally do to connect over X.25. Padem acts as a pipe between ++ Kermit and X.25. In C-Kermit 7.0, you might also be able to avoid the ++ "telnet localhost" step by using: ++ ++ C-Kermit> pty padem address ++ ++ This works if padem uses standard i/o (who knows?). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3. C-KERMIT AND LINUX ++ ++ [ [249]Top ] [ [250]Contents ] [ [251]Section Contents ] [ [252]Next ] ++ [ [253]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 3.3.1. [254]Problems Building C-Kermit for Linux ++ 3.3.2. [255]Problems with Serial Devices in Linux ++ 3.3.3. [256]Terminal Emulation in Linux ++ 3.3.4. [257]Dates and Times ++ 3.3.5. [258]Startup Errors ++ 3.3.6. [259]The Fullscreen File Transfer Display ++ ++ REFERENCES ++ ++ For further information, read the [260]comp.os.linux.misc, ++ [261]comp.os.linux.answers, and other Linux-oriented newsgroups, and ++ see: ++ ++ The Linux Document Project (LDP) ++ [262]http://www.tldp.org/ ++ ++ The Linux FAQ ++ [263]http://www.tldp.org/FAQ/Linux-FAQ.html ++ ++ The Linux HOWTOs (especially the Serial HOWTO) ++ ++ [264]http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/Serial-HOWTO.html ++ ++ [265]http://tldp.org/HOWTO/Modem-HOWTO.html ++ ++ [266]ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO ++ ++ [267]ftp://tsx-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/docs/HOWTO ++ ++ [268]http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/ ++ ++ [269]http://www.tldp.org/hmirrors.html ++ ++ Linux Vendor Tech Support Pages: ++ ++ [270]http://www.redhat.com/apps/support/ ++ ++ [271]http://www.debian.org/support ++ ++ [272]http://www.slackware.com/support/ ++ ++ [273]http://www.caldera.com/support/ ++ ++ [274]http://www.suse.com/support/ ++ ++ [275]http://www.mandrake.com/support/ ++ ++ [276]http://www.turbolinux.com/support/ ++ ++ Linux Winmodem Support ++ [277]http://www.linmodems.org/ ++ ++ Also see general comments on PC-based Unixes in [278]Section 3.0. ++ ++ What Linux version is it? -- "uname -a" supplies only kernel ++ information, but these days it's the distribution that matters: Red ++ Hat 7.3, Debian 2.2, Slackware 8.0, etc. Unfortunately there's no ++ consistent way to get the distribution version. Usually it's in a ++ distribution-specific file: ++ ++ Red Hat: /etc/issue or /etc/redhat-release ++ Debian: /etc/debian_version ++ Slackware: /etc/slackware-version (at least in later versions) ++ ++ Did you know: DECnet is available for Linux? See: ++ ++ [279]http://linux.dreamtime.org/decnet/ ++ ++ (But there is no support for it in C-Kermit -- anybody interested in ++ adding it, please [280]let us know). ++ ++ Before proceeding, let's handle the some of the most frequently asked ++ question in the Linux newsgroups: ++ ++ 1. Neither C-Kermit nor any other Linux application can use ++ Winmodems, except in the [281]rare cases where Linux drivers have ++ been written for them. See [282]Section 3.0.2 for details. ++ 2. "Why does it take such a long time to make a telnet connection to ++ (or from) my Linux PC?" (this applies to C-Kermit and to regular ++ Telnet). Most telnet servers these days perform reverse DNS ++ lookups on the client (for security and/or logging reasons). If ++ the Telnet client's address cannot be found by the server's local ++ DNS server, the DNS request goes out to the Internet at large, and ++ this can take quite some time. The solution to this problem is to ++ make sure that both client and host are registered in DNS, and ++ that the registrations are exported. C-Kermit itself performs ++ reverse DNS lookups unless you tell it not to; this is to allow ++ C-Kermit to let you know which host it is actually connected to in ++ case you have made a connection to a host pool (multihomed host). ++ You can disable C-Kermit's reverse DNS lookup with SET TCP ++ REVERSE-DNS-LOOKUP OFF. ++ 3. (Any question that has the word "Telnet" in it...) The knee-jerk ++ reaction is "don't use Telnet, use SSH!" There's nothing wrong ++ with Telnet. In fact it's far superior to SSH as a protocol in ++ terms of features and extensibility, not to mention platform ++ neutrality. The issue lurking behind the knee-jerk reaction is ++ security. SSH is thought to be secure, whereas Telnet is thought ++ to be insecure. This is true for clear-text Telnet (because ++ passwords travel in the clear across the network), but apparently ++ few people realize that [283]secure Telnet clients and servers ++ have been available for years, and these are more secure than SSH ++ (for reasons explained [284]HERE. ++ 4. (Any question that has the word "FTP" in it...) The knee-jerk ++ reaction being "Don't use FTP, use SCP!" (or SFTP). Same answer as ++ above, but moreso. SCP and SFTP are not only not platform neutral, ++ they're diversity-hostile. They transfer files only in binary ++ mode, which mangles text files across different platforms, to the ++ same degree the platform's text-file record format and character ++ set differ. An extreme example would be an Variable-Block format ++ EBCDIC text file on an IBM mainframe, binary transfer of which to ++ Unix would do you little good indeed. FTP was designed with ++ diversity in mind and secure versions are available. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.1. Problems Building C-Kermit for Linux ++ ++ [ [285]Top ] [ [286]Contents ] [ [287]Section Contents ] [ [288]Next ] ++ ++ Modern Linux distributions like Red Hat give you a choice at ++ installation whether to include "developer tools". Obviously, you ++ can't build C-Kermit or any other C program from source code if you ++ have not installed the developer tools. But to confuse matters, you ++ might also have to choose (separately) to install the "curses" or ++ "ncurses" terminal control library; thus it is possible to install the ++ C compiler and linker, but omit the (n)curses library and headers. If ++ curses is not installed, you will not be able to build a version of ++ C-Kermit that supports the fullscreen file-transfer display, in which ++ case you'll need to use the "linuxnc" makefile target (nc = No Curses) ++ or else install ncurses before building. ++ ++ There are all sorts of confusing issues caused by the many and varied ++ Linux distributions. Some of the worst involve the curses library and ++ header files: where are they, what are they called, which ones are ++ they really? Other vexing questions involve libc5 vs libc6 vs glibc vs ++ glibc2 (C libraries), gcc vs egcs vs lcc (compilers), plus using or ++ avoiding features that were added in a certain version of Linux or a ++ library or a distribution, and are not available in others. As of ++ C-Kermit 8.0, these questions should be resolved by the "linux" ++ makefile target itself, which does a bit of looking around to see ++ what's what, and then sets the appropriate CFLAGS. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.2. Problems with Serial Devices in Linux ++ ++ [ [289]Top ] [ [290]Contents ] [ [291]Section Contents ] [ [292]Next ] ++ [ [293]Previous ] ++ ++ Also see: "man setserial", "man irqtune". ++ And: [294]Sections 3.0, [295]6, [296]7, and [297]8 of this ++ document. ++ ++ NOTE: Red Hat Linux 7.2 and later include a new API that allows ++ serial-port arbitration by non-setuid/gid programs. This API has ++ not yet been added to C-Kermit. If C-Kermit is to be used for ++ dialing out on Red Hat 7.2 or later, it must still be installed as ++ described in in Sections [298]10 and [299]11 of the ++ [300]Installation Instructions. ++ ++ Don't expect it to be easy. Queries like the following are posted to ++ the Linux newsgroups almost daily: ++ ++ Problem of a major kind with my Compaq Presario 1805 in the sense ++ that the pnpdump doesn't find the modem and the configuration tells ++ me that the modem is busy when I set everything by hand! ++ ++ I have , kernel 2.0.35. Using the ++ Compaq tells me that the modem (which is internal) is on COM2, with ++ the usual IRQ and port numbers. Running various Windows diagnostics ++ show me AT-style commands exchanged so I have no reason to beleive ++ that it is a Winmodem. Also, the diagnostics under Win98 tell me ++ that I am talking to an NS 16550AN. ++ ++ [Editor's note: This does not necessarily mean it isn't a Winmodem.] ++ ++ Under Linux, no joy trying to talk to the modem on /dev/cua1 ++ whether via minicom, kppp, or chat; kppp at least tells me that ++ tcgetattr() failed. ++ ++ Usage of setserial: ++ ++ setserial /dev/cua1 port 0x2F8 irq 3 autoconfig ++ setserial -g /dev/cua1 ++ ++ tells me that the uart is 'unknown'. I have tried setting the UART ++ manullay via. setserial to 16550A, 16550, and the other one (8550?) ++ (I didn't try 16540). None of these manual settings resulted in any ++ success. ++ ++ A look at past articles leads me to investigate PNP issues by ++ calling pnpdump but pnpdump returns "no boards found". I have ++ looked around on my BIOS (Phoenix) and there is not much evidence ++ of it being PNP aware. However for what it calls "Serial port A", ++ it offers a choice of Auto, Disabled or Manual settings (currently ++ set to Auto), but using the BIOS interface I tried to change to ++ 'manual' and saw the default settings offered to be were 0x3F8 and ++ IRQ 4 (COM1). The BIOS menus did not give me any chance to ++ configure COM2 or any "modem". I ended up not saving any BIOS ++ changes in the course of my investigations. ++ ++ You can also find out a fair amount about your PC's hardware ++ configuration in the text files in /proc, e.g.: ++ ++ -r--r--r-- 1 root 0 Sep 4 14:00 /proc/devices ++ -r--r--r-- 1 root 0 Sep 4 14:00 /proc/interrupts ++ -r--r--r-- 1 root 0 Sep 4 14:00 /proc/ioports ++ -r--r--r-- 1 root 0 Sep 4 14:00 /proc/pci ++ ++ From the directory listing they look like empty files, but in fact ++ they are text files that you "cat": ++ ++$ cat /proc/pci ++ Bus 0, device 14, function 0: ++ Serial controller: US Robotics/3Com 56K FaxModem Model 5610 (rev 1). ++ IRQ 10. ++ I/O at 0x1050 [0x1057]. ++ ++$ setserial -g /dev/ttyS4 ++/dev/ttyS4, UART: 16550A, Port: 0x1050, IRQ: 10 ++ ++$ cat /proc/ioports ++1050-1057 : US Robotics/3Com 56K FaxModem Model 5610 ++ 1050-1057 : serial(auto) ++ ++$ cat /proc/interrupts ++ CPU0 ++ 0: 7037515 XT-PIC timer ++ 1: 2 XT-PIC keyboard ++ 2: 0 XT-PIC cascade ++ 4: 0 XT-PIC serial ++ 8: 1 XT-PIC rtc ++ 9: 209811 XT-PIC usb-uhci, eth0 ++ 14: 282015 XT-PIC ide0 ++ 15: 6 XT-PIC ide1 ++ ++ Watch out for PCI, PCMCIA and Plug-n-Play devices, Winmodems, and the ++ like (see cautions in [301]Section 3.0 Linux supports Plug-n-Play ++ devices to some degree via the isapnp and pnpdump programs; read the ++ man pages for them. (If you don't have them, look on your installation ++ CD for isapnptool or download it from sunsite or a sunsite mirror or ++ other politically correct location du jour). ++ ++ PCI modems do not use standard COM port addresses. The I/O address and ++ IRQ are assigned by the BIOS. All you need to do to get one working, ++ find out the I/O address and interrupt number with (as root) "lspci -v ++ | more" and then give the resulting address and interrupt number to ++ setserial. ++ ++ Even when you have a real serial port, always be wary of interrupt ++ conflicts and similar PC hardware configuration issues: a PC is not a ++ real computer like other Unix workstations -- it is generally pieced ++ together from whatever random components were the best bargain on the ++ commodity market the week it was built. Once it's assembled and boxed, ++ not even the manufacturer will remember what it's made of or how it ++ was put together because they've moved on to a new model. Their job is ++ to get it (barely) working with Windows; for Linux and other OS's you ++ are on your own. ++ ++ "set line /dev/modem" or "set line /dev/ttyS2", etc, results in an ++ error, "/dev/modem is not a tty". Cause unknown, but obviously a ++ driver issue, not a Kermit one (Kermit uses "isatty()" to check that ++ the device is a tty, so it knows it will be able to issue all the ++ tty-related ioctl's on it, like setting the speed & flow control). Try ++ a different name (i.e. driver) for the same port, e.g. "set line ++ /dev/cua2" or whatever. ++ ++ To find what serial ports were registered at the most recent system ++ boot, type (as root): "grep tty /var/log/dmesg". ++ ++ "set modem type xxx" (where xxx is the name of a modem) followed by ++ "set line /dev/modem" or "set ++ line /dev/ttyS2", etc, hangs (but can be interrupted with Ctrl-C). ++ Experimentation shows that if the modem is configured to always assert ++ carrier (&C0) the same command does not hang. Again, a driver issue. ++ Use /dev/cua2 (or whatever) instead. (Or not -- hopefully none of ++ these symptoms occurs in C-Kermit 7.0 or later.) ++ ++ "set line /dev/cua0" reports "Device is busy", but "set line ++ /dev/ttyS0" works OK. ++ ++ In short: If the cua device doesn't work, try the corresponding ttyS ++ device. If the ttyS device doesn't work, try the corresponding cua ++ device -- but note that Linux developers do not recommend this, and ++ are phasing out the cua devices. From /usr/doc/faq/howto/Serial-HOWTO: ++ ++ 12.4. What's The Real Difference Between the /dev/cuaN And /dev/ttySN ++ Devices? ++ The only difference is the way that the devices are opened. The ++ dialin devices /dev/ttySN are opened in blocking mode, until CD ++ is asserted (ie someone connects). So, when someone wants to ++ use the /dev/cuaN device, there is no conflict with a program ++ watching the /dev/ttySN device (unless someone is connected of ++ course). The multiple /dev entries, allow operation of the same ++ physical device with different operating characteristics. It ++ also allows standard getty programs to coexist with any other ++ serial program, without the getty being retrofitted with ++ locking of some sort. It's especially useful since standard ++ Unix kernel file locking, and UUCP locking are both advisory ++ and not mandatory. ++ ++ It was discovered during development of C-Kermit 7.0 that rebuilding ++ C-Kermit with -DNOCOTFMC (No Close/Open To Force Mode Change) made the ++ aforementioned problem with /dev/ttyS0 go away. It is not yet clear, ++ however, what its affect might be on the /dev/cua* devices. As of 19 ++ March 1998, this option has been added to the CFLAGS in the makefile ++ entries for Linux ("make linux"). ++ ++ Note that the cua device is now "deprecated", and new editions of ++ Linux will phase (have phased) it out in favor of the ttyS device. See ++ (if it's still there): ++ ++ [302]http://linuxwww.db.erau.edu/mail_archives/linux-kernel/Mar_98/1441.html ++ ++ (no, of course it isn't; you'll have to use your imagination). One ++ user reported that C-Kermit 7.0, when built with egcs 1.1.2 and run on ++ Linux 2.2.6 with glibc 2.1 (hardware unknown but probably a PC) dumps ++ core when given a "set line /dev/ttyS1" command. When rebuilt with ++ gcc, it works fine. ++ ++ All versions of Linux seem to have the following deficiency: When a ++ modem call is hung up and CD drops, Kermit can no longer read the ++ modem signals; SHOW COMMUNICATIONS says "Modem signals not available". ++ The TIOCMGET ioctl() returns -1 with errno 5 ("I/O Error"). ++ ++ The Linux version of POSIX tcsendbreak(), which is used by C-Kermit to ++ send regular (275msec) and long (1.5sec) BREAK signals, appears to ++ ignore its argument (despite its description in the man page and info ++ topic), and always sends a regular 275msec BREAK. This has been ++ observed in Linux versions ranging from Debian 2.1 to Red Hat 7.1. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.3. Terminal Emulation in Linux ++ ++ [ [303]Top ] [ [304]Contents ] [ [305]Section Contents ] [ [306]Next ] ++ [ [307]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit is not a terminal emulator. For a brief explanation of why ++ not, see [308]Section 3.0.5. For a fuller explanation, [309]ClICK ++ HERE. ++ ++ In Unix, terminal emulation is supplied by the Window in which you run ++ Kermit: the regular console screen, which provides Linux Console ++ "emulation" via the "console" termcap entry, or under X-Windows in an ++ xterm window, which gives VTxxx emulation. An xterm that includes ++ color ANSI and VT220 emulation is available with Xfree86: ++ ++ [310]http://dickey.his.com/xterm/xterm.html ++ ++ Before starting C-Kermit in an xterm window, you might need to tell ++ the xterm window's shell to "stty sane". ++ ++ To set up your PC console keyboard to send VT220 key sequences when ++ using C-Kermit as your communications program in an X terminal window ++ (if it doesn't already), create a file somewhere (e.g. in /root/) ++ called .xmodmaprc, containing something like the following: ++ ++ keycode 77 = KP_F1 ! Num Lock => DEC Gold (PF1) ++ keycode 112 = KP_F2 ! Keypad / => DEC PF1 ++ keycode 63 = KP_F3 ! Keypad * => DEC PF3 ++ keycode 82 = KP_F4 ! Keypad - => DEC PF4 ++ keycode 111 = Help ! Print Screen => DEC Help ++ keycode 78 = F16 ! Scroll Lock => DEC Do ++ keycode 110 = F16 ! Pause => DEC Do ++ keycode 106 = Find ! Insert => DEC Find ++ keycode 97 = Insert ! Home => DEC Insert ++ keycode 99 = 0x1000ff00 ! Page Up => DEC Remove ++ keycode 107 = Select ! Delete => DEC Select ++ keycode 103 = Page_Up ! End => DEC Prev Screen ++ keycode 22 = Delete ! Backspace sends Delete (127) ++ ++ Then put "xmodmap filename" in your .xinitrc file (in your login ++ directory), e.g. ++ ++ xmodmap /root/.xmodmaprc ++ ++ Of course you can move things around. Use the xev program to find out ++ key codes. ++ ++ Console-mode keys are mapped separately using loadkeys, and different ++ keycodes are used. Find out what they are with showkey. ++ ++ For a much more complete VT220/320 key mapping for [311]Xfree86 xterm, ++ [312]CLICK HERE. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.4. Dates and Times ++ ++ [ [313]Top ] [ [314]Contents ] [ [315]Section Contents ] [ [316]Next ] ++ [ [317]Previous ] ++ ++ If C-Kermit's date-time (e.g. as shown by its DATE command) differs ++ from the system's date and time: ++ ++ a. Make sure the libc to which Kermit is linked is set to GMT or is ++ not set to any time zone. Watch out for mixed libc5/libc6 systems; ++ each must be set indpendently. ++ b. If you have changed your TZ environment variable, make sure it is ++ exported. This is normally done in /etc/profile or /etc/TZ. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.5. Startup Errors ++ ++ [ [318]Top ] [ [319]Contents ] [ [320]Section Contents ] [ [321]Next ] ++ [ [322]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit should work on all versions of Linux current through March ++ 2003, provided it was built on the same version you have, with the ++ same libraries and header files (just get the source code and "make ++ linux"). Binaries tend not to travel well from one Linux machine to ++ another, due to their many differences. There is no guarantee that a ++ particular C-Kermit binary will not stop working at a later date, ++ since Linux tends to change out from under its applications. If that ++ happens, rebuild C-Kermit from source. If something goes wrong with ++ the build process, look on the [323]C-Kermit website for a newer ++ version. If you have the latest version, then [324]report the problem ++ to us. ++ ++ Inability to transfer files in Red Hat 7.2: the typical symptom would ++ be if you start Kermit and tell it to RECEIVE, it fails right away ++ with "?/dev/tty: No such device or address" or "?Bad file descriptor". ++ One report says this is because of csh, and if you change your shell ++ to bash or other shell, it doesn't happen. Another report cite bugs in ++ Red Hat 7.2 Telnetd "very seldom (if ever) providing a controlling ++ tty, and lots of other people piled on saying they have the same ++ problem.") A third theory is that this happens only when Linux has ++ been installed without "virtual terminal support". ++ ++ A search of RedHat's errata pages shows a bug advisory (RHBA-2001-153) ++ issued 13 November 2001, but updated 6 December, about this same ++ symptom (but with tcsh and login.) Seems that login was not always ++ assigning a controlling TTY for the session, which would make most use ++ of "/dev/tty" somewhat less than useful. ++ ++ [325]http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/RHBA-2001-153.html ++ ++ Quoting: "Due to terminal handling problems in /bin/login, tcsh would ++ not find the controlling terminal correctly, and a shell in single ++ user mode would exhibit strange terminal input characteristics. This ++ update fixes both of these problems." ++ ++ Since the Red Hat 5.1 release (circa August 1998), there have been ++ numerous reports of prebuilt Linux executables, and particularly the ++ Kermit RPM for Red Hat Linux, not working; either it won't start at ++ all, or it gives error messages about "terminal type unknown" and ++ refuses to initialize its curses support. The following is from the ++ [326]Kermit newsgroup: ++ ++ From: rchandra@hal9000.buf.servtech.com ++ Newsgroups: comp.protocols.kermit.misc ++ Subject: Red Hat Linux/Intel 5.1 and ncurses: suggestions ++ Date: 22 Aug 1998 15:54:46 GMT ++ Organization: Verio New York ++ Keywords: RedHat RPM 5.1 ++ ++ Several factors can influence whether "linux" is recognized as a ++ terminal type on many Linux systems. ++ ++ 1. Your program, or the libraries it linked with (if statically ++ linked), or the libraries it dynamically links with at runtime, ++ are looking for an entry in /etc/termcap that isn't there. (not ++ likely, but possible... I believe but am not certain that this is ++ a very old practice in very old [n]curses library implementations ++ to use a single file for all terminal descriptions.) ++ 2. Your program, or the libraries...are looking for a terminfo file ++ that just plain isn't there. (also not so likely, since many ++ people in other recent message threads said that other programs ++ work OK). ++ 3. Your program, or the libraries...are looking for a terminfo file ++ that is stored at a pathname that isn't expected by your program, ++ the libraries--and so on. I forgot if I read this in the errata ++ Web page or where exactly I discovered this (Netscape install? ++ Acrobat install?), but it may just be that one libc (let's say for ++ sake of argument, libc5, but I don't know this to be true) expects ++ your terminfo to be in /usr/share/terminfo, and the other (let's ++ say libc6/glibc) expects /usr/lib/terminfo. I remember that the ++ specific instructions in this bugfix/workaround were to do the ++ following or equivalent: ++ cd /usr/lib ++ ln -s ../share/terminfo ./terminfo ++ or: ++ ln -s /usr/share/terminfo /usr/lib/terminfo ++ ++ So what this says is that the terminfo database/directory structure ++ can be accessed by either path. When something goes to reference ++ /usr/lib/terminfo, the symlink redirects it to essentially ++ /usr/share/terminfo, which is where it really resides on your ++ system. I personally prefer wherever possible to use relative ++ symlinks, because they still hold, more often than break, across ++ mount points, particularly NFS mounts, where the directory ++ structure may be different on the different systems. ++ ++ Evidently the terminfo file moved between Red Hat 5.0 and 5.1, but Red ++ Hat did not include a link to let applications built prior to 5.1 find ++ it. Users reported that installing the link fixes the problem. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3.6. The Fullscreen File Transfer Display ++ ++ [ [327]Top ] [ [328]Contents ] [ [329]Section Contents ] [ ++ [330]Previous ] ++ ++ Starting with ncurses versions dated 1998-12-12 (about a year before ++ ncurses 5.0), ncurses sets the terminal for buffered i/o, but ++ unfortunately is not able to restore it upon exit from curses (via ++ endwin()). Thus after a file transfer that uses the fullscreen file ++ transfer display, the terminal no longer echos nor responds ++ immediately to Tab, ?, and other special command characters. The same ++ thing happens on other platforms that use ncurses, e.g. FreeBSD. ++ Workarounds: ++ ++ * Use SET XFER DISPLAY BRIEF, CRT, SERIAL, or NONE instead of ++ FULLSCREEN; or: ++ * Rebuild with KFLAGS=-DNONOSETBUF (C-Kermit 8.0) ++ ++ In Red Hat 7.1, when using C-Kermit in a Gnome terminal window, it was ++ noticed that when the fullscreen file transfer display exits (via ++ endwin()), the previous (pre-file-transfer-display) screen is ++ restored. Thus you can't look at the completed display to see what ++ happened. This is a evidently a new feature of xterm. I can only ++ speculate that initscreen() and endwin() must send some kind of ++ special escape sequences that command xterm to save and restore the ++ screen. To defeat this effect, tell Linux you have a vt100 or other ++ xterm-compatible terminal that is not actually an xterm, or else tell ++ Kermit to SET TRANSFER DISPLAY to something besides FULLSCREEN. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.4. C-KERMIT AND NEXTSTEP ++ ++ [ [331]Top ] [ [332]Contents ] [ [333]Section Contents ] [ [334]Next ] ++ [ [335]Previous ] ++ ++ Run C-Kermit in a Terminal, Stuart, or xterm window, or when logged in ++ remotely through a serial port or TELNET connection. C-Kermit does not ++ work correctly when invoked directly from the NeXTSTEP File Viewer or ++ Dock. This is because the terminal-oriented gtty, stty, & ioctl calls ++ don't work on the little window that NeXTSTEP pops up for non-NeXTSTEP ++ applications like Kermit. CBREAK and No-ECHO settings do not take ++ effect in the command parser -- commands are parsed strictly line at a ++ time. "set line /dev/cua" works. During CONNECT mode, the console ++ stays in cooked mode, so characters are not transmitted until carriage ++ return or linefeed is typed, and you can't escape back. If you want to ++ run Kermit directly from the File Viewer, then launch it from a shell ++ script that puts it in the desired kind of window, something like this ++ (for "Terminal"): ++ ++ Terminal -Lines 24 -Columns 80 -WinLocX 100 -WinLocY 100 $FONT $FONTSIZE \ ++ -SourceDotLogin -Shell /usr/local/bin/kermit & ++ ++ C-Kermit does not work correctly on a NeXT with NeXTSTEP 3.0 to which ++ you have established an rlogin connection, due to a bug in NeXTSTEP ++ 3.0, which has been reported to NeXT. ++ ++ The SET CARRIER command has no effect on the NeXT -- this is a ++ limitation of the NeXTSTEP serial-port device drivers. ++ ++ Hardware flow control on the NeXT is selected not by "set flow ++ rts/cts" in Kermit (since NeXTSTEP offers no API for this), but ++ rather, by using a specially-named driver for the serial device: ++ /dev/cufa instead /dev/cua; /dev/cufb instead of /dev/cub. This is ++ available only on 68040-based NeXT models (the situation for Intel ++ NeXTSTEP implementations is unknown). ++ ++ NeXT-built 68030 and 68040 models have different kinds of serial ++ interfaces; the 68030 has a Macintosh-like RS-422 interface, which ++ lacks RTS and CTS signals; the 68040 has an RS-423 (RS-232 compatible) ++ interface, which supports the commonly-used modem signals. WARNING: ++ the connectors look exactly the same, but the pins are used in ++ completely DIFFERENT ways -- different cables are required for the two ++ kinds of interfaces. ++ ++ IF YOU GET LOTS OF RETRANSMISSIONS during file transfer, even when ++ using a /dev/cuf* device and the modem is correctly configured for ++ RTS/CTS flow control, YOU PROBABLY HAVE THE WRONG KIND OF CABLE. ++ ++ On the NeXT, Kermit reportedly (by TimeMon) causes the kernel to use a ++ lot of CPU time when using a "set line" connection. That's because ++ there is no DMA channel for the NeXT serial port, so the port must ++ interrupt the kernel for each character in or out. ++ ++ One user reported trouble running C-Kermit on a NeXT from within ++ NeXT's Subprocess class under NeXTstep 3.0, and/or when rlogin'd from ++ one NeXT to another: Error opening /dev/tty:, congm: No such device or ++ address. Diagnosis: Bug in NeXTSTEP 3.0, cure unknown. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.5. C-KERMIT AND QNX ++ ++ [ [336]Top ] [ [337]Contents ] [ [338]Section Contents ] [ [339]Next ] ++ [ [340]Previous ] ++ ++ See also: The [341]comp.os.qnx newsgroup. ++ ++ Support for QNX 4.x was added in C-Kermit 5A(190). This is a ++ full-function implementation, thoroughly tested on QNX 4.21 and later, ++ and verified to work in both 16-bit and 32-bit versions. The 16-bit ++ version was dropped in C-Kermit 7.0 since it can no longer be built ++ successfully (after stripping most most features, I succeeded in ++ getting it to compile and link without complaint, but the executable ++ just beeps when you run it); for 16-bit QNX 4.2x, use C-Kermit 6.0 or ++ earlier, or else [342]G-Kermit. ++ ++ The 32-bit version (and the 16-bit version prior to C-Kermit 7.0) ++ supports most of C-Kermit's advanced features including TCP/IP, high ++ serial speeds, hardware flow-control, modem-signal awareness, curses ++ support, etc. ++ ++ BUG: In C-Kermit 6.0 on QNX 4.22 and earlier, the fullscreen file ++ transfer display worked fine the first time, but was fractured on ++ subsequent file transfers. Cause and cure unknown. In C-Kermit 7.0 and ++ QNX 4.25, this no longer occurs. It is not known if it would occur in ++ C-Kermit 7.0 or later on earlier QNX versions. ++ ++ Dialout devices are normally /dev/ser1, /dev/ser2, ..., and can be ++ opened explicitly with SET LINE. Reportedly, "/dev/ser" (no unit ++ number) opens the first available /dev/sern device. ++ ++ Like all other Unix C-Kermit implementations, QNX C-Kermit does not ++ provide any kind of terminal emulation. Terminal specific functions ++ are provided by your terminal, terminal window (e.g. QNX Terminal or ++ xterm), or emulator. ++ ++ QNX C-Kermit, as distributed, does not include support for UUCP ++ line-locking; the QNX makefile entries (qnx32 and qnx16) include the ++ -DNOUUCP switch. This is because QNX, as distributed, does not include ++ UUCP, and its own communications software (e.g. qterm) does not use ++ UUCP line locking. If you have a UUCP product installed on your QNX ++ system, remove the -DNOUUCP switch from the makefile entry and ++ rebuild. Then check to see that Kermit's UUCP lockfile conventions are ++ the same as those of your UUCP package; if not, read the [343]UUCP ++ lockfile section of the [344]Installation Instructions and make the ++ necessary changes to the makefile entry (e.g. add -DHDBUUCP). ++ ++ QNX does, however, allow a program to get the device open count. This ++ can not be a reliable form of locking unless all applications do it, ++ so by default, Kermit uses this information only for printing a ++ warning message such as: ++ ++ C-Kermit>set line /dev/ser1 ++ WARNING - "/dev/ser1" looks busy... ++ ++ However, if you want to use it as a lock, you can do so with: ++ ++ SET QNX-PORT-LOCK { ON, OFF } ++ ++ This is OFF by default; if you set in ON, C-Kermit will fail to open ++ any dialout device when its open count indicates that another process ++ has it open. SHOW COMM (in QNX only) displays the setting, and if you ++ have a port open, it also shows the open count. ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 8.0, C-Kermit's "open-count" form of line locking works ++ only in QNX4, not in QNX6 (this might change in a future C-Kermit ++ release). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6. C-KERMIT AND SCO ++ ++ [ [345]Top ] [ [346]Contents ] [ [347]Section Contents ] [ [348]Next ] ++ [ [349]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++3.6.1. [350]SCO XENIX ++3.6.2. [351]SCO UNIX and OSR5 ++3.6.3. [352]Unixware ++3.6.4. [353]Open UNIX 8 ++ ++ REFERENCES ++ ++ * The comp.unix.sco.* newsgroups. ++ * [354]Section 3.10 below for Unixware. ++ * The following FAQs: ++ ++ The comp.sco.misc FAQ: ++ [355]http://aplawrence.com/SCOFAQ/ ++ ++ Caldera (SCO) comp.unix.sco.programmer FAQ: ++ [356]http://www.zenez.com/cgi-bin/scoprogfaq/faq.pl ++ ++ The UnixWare 7/OpenUNIX 8 FAQ: ++ [357]http://www.zenez.com/cgi-bin/scouw7faq/faq.pl ++ [358]http://zenez.pcunix.com/cgi-bin/scouw7faq/faq.pl ++ ++ High Speed Modems for SCO Unix: ++ [359]http://pcunix.com/Unixart/modems.html ++ ++ The UnixWare FAQ ++ [360]http://www.freebird.org/faq/ ++ ++ The UnixWare 1.x and 2.0 Programmer FAQ ++ [361]http://www.freebird.org/faq/developer.html ++ ++ Caldera Support Knowledge Base ++ [362]http://support.caldera.com/caldera ++ ++ [363]http://stage.caldera.com/ta/ ++ Caldera (SCO) Technical Article Search Center ++ ++ [364]http://aplawrence.com/newtosco.html ++ New to SCO (Tony Lawrence) ++ ++ The same comments regarding terminal emulation and key mapping apply ++ to SCO operating systems as to all other Unixes. C-Kermit is not a ++ terminal emulator, and you can't use it to map F-keys, Arrow keys, ++ etc. The way to do this is with xmodmap (xterm) or loadkeys (console). ++ For a brief explanation, see [365]Section 3.0.5. For a fuller ++ explanation, [366]ClICK HERE. ++ ++ Also see general comments on PC-based Unixes in [367]Section 3.0. ++ ++ 3.6.1. SCO XENIX ++ ++ [ [368]Top ] [ [369]Contents ] [ [370]Section Contents ] [ [371]Next ] ++ ++ Old Xenix versions... Did you know: Xenix 3.0 is *older* than Xenix ++ 2.0? ++ ++ In Xenix 2.3.4 and probably other Xenix versions, momentarily dropping ++ DTR to hang up a modem does not work. DTR goes down but does not come ++ up again. Workaround: Use SET MODEM HANGUP-METHOD MODEM-COMMAND. ++ Anybody who would like to fix this is welcome to take a look at ++ tthang() in [372]ckutio.c. Also: modem signals can not be read in ++ Xenix, and the maximum serial speed is 38400. ++ ++ There is all sorts of confusion among SCO versions, particularly when ++ third- party communications boards and drivers are installed, ++ regarding lockfile naming conventions, as well as basic functionality. ++ As far as lockfiles go, all bets are off if you are using a ++ third-party multiport board. At least you have the source code. ++ Hopefully you also have a C compiler :-) ++ ++ Xenix 2.3.0 and later claim to support RTSFLOW and CTSFLOW, but this ++ is not modern bidirectional hardware flow control; rather it ++ implements the original RS-232 meanings of these signals for ++ unidirectional half-duplex line access: If both RTSFLOW and CTSFLOW ++ bits are set, Xenix asserts RTS when it wants to send data and waits ++ for CTS assertion before it actually starts sending data (also, ++ reportedly, even this is broken in Xenix 2.3.0 and 2.3.1). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.2. SCO UNIX AND OSR5 ++ ++ [ [373]Top ] [ [374]Contents ] [ [375]Section Contents ] [ [376]Next ] ++ [ [377]Previous ] ++ ++ SCO systems tend to use different names (i.e. drivers) for the same ++ device. Typically /dev/tty1a refers to a terminal device that has no ++ modem control; open, read, write, and close operations do not depend ++ on carrier. On the other hand, /dev/tty1A (same name, but with final ++ letter upper case), is the same device with modem control, in which ++ carrier is required (the SET LINE command does not complete until ++ carrier appears, read/write operations fail if there is no carrier, ++ etc). ++ ++ SCO OpenServer 5.0.5 and earlier do not support the reading of modem ++ signals. Thus "show comm" does not list modem signals, and C-Kermit ++ does not automatically pop back to its prompt when the modem hangs up ++ the connection (drops CD). The ioctl() call for this is simply not ++ implmented, at least not in the standard drivers. OSR5.0.6 attempts to ++ deal with modem signals but fails; however OSR5.0.6a appears to ++ function properly. ++ ++ Dialing is likely not to work well in SCO OpenServer 5.0.x because ++ many of the serial-port APIs simply do not operate when using the ++ standard drivers. For example, if DTR is dropped by the recommended ++ method (setting speed to 0 for half a seconds, then restoring the ++ speed), DTR and RTS go down but never come back up. When in doubt SET ++ MODEM HANGUP-METHOD MODEM-COMMAND or SET DIAL HANGUP OFF. ++ ++ On the other hand, certain functions that might not (do not) work ++ right or at all when using SCO drivers (e.g. high serial speeds, ++ hardware flow control, and/or reading of modem signals) might work ++ right when using third-party drivers. (Example: hardware flow control ++ works, reportedly, only on uppercase device like tty1A -- not tty1a -- ++ and only when CLOCAL is clear when using the SCO sio driver, but there ++ are no such restrictions in, e.g., [378]Digiboard drivers). ++ ++ One user reports that he can't transfer large files with C-Kermit ++ under SCO OSR5.0.0 and 5.0.4 -- after the first 5K, everything falls ++ apart. Same thing without Kermit -- e.g. with ftp over a PPP ++ connection. Later, he said that replacing SCO's SIO driver with FAS, ++ an alternative communications driver, made the problem go away: ++ ++ [379]ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/pub/unix/driver/fas ++ ++ With regard to bidirectional serial ports on OpenServer 5.0.4, the ++ following advice appeared on an SCO-related newsgroup: ++ ++ No amount of configuration information is going to help you on ++ 5.0.4 unless it includes the kludge for the primary problem. With ++ almost every modem, the 5.0.4 getty will barf messages and may or ++ may not connect. There are 2 solutions and only one works on 5.0.4. ++ Get the atdialer binary from a 5.0.0 system and substitute it for ++ the native 5.0.4 atdialer. The other solution is to upgrade to ++ 5.0.5. And, most of all, on any OpenServer products, do NOT run the ++ badly broken Modem Manager. Configure the modems in the time ++ honored way that dates back to Xenix. ++ ++ Use SCO-provided utilities for switching the directionality of a modem ++ line, such as "enable" and "disable" commands. For example, to dial ++ out on tty1a, which is normally set up for logins: ++ ++ disable tty1a ++ kermit -l /dev/tty1a ++ enable tty1a ++ ++ If a tty device is listed as an ACU in /usr/lib/uucp/Devices and is ++ enabled, getty resets the ownership and permissions to uucp.uucp and ++ 640 every time the device is released. If you want to use the device ++ only for dialout, and you want to specify other owners or permissions, ++ you should disable it in /usr/lib/uucp/Devices; this will prevent ++ getty from doing things to it. You should also changes the device's ++ file modes in /etc/conf/node.d/sio by changing fields 5-7 for the ++ desired device(s); this determines how the devices are set if you ++ relink the kernel. ++ ++ One SCO user of C-Kermit 5A(190) reported that only one copy of Kermit ++ can run at a time when a Stallion Technologies multiport boards are ++ installed. Cause, cure, and present status unknown (see [380]Section ++ 14 for more info regarding Stallion). ++ ++ Prior to SCO OpenServer 5.0.4, the highest serial port speed supported ++ by SCO was 38400. However, in some SCO versions (e.g. OSR5) it is ++ possible to map rarely-used lower speeds (like 600 and 1800) to higher ++ ones like 57600 and 115200. To find out how, go to ++ [381]http://www.sco.com/ and search for "115200". In OSR5.0.4, serial ++ speeds up to 921600 are supported through the POSIX interface; ++ C-Kermit 6.1.193 or later, when built for OSR5.0.4 using /bin/cc (NOT ++ the UDK, which hides the high-speed definitions from CPP), supports ++ these speeds, but you might be able to run this binary on earlier ++ releases to get the high serial speeds, depending on various factors, ++ described by Bela Lubkin of SCO: ++ ++ Serial speeds under SCO Unix / Open Desktop / OpenServer ++ ======================================================== ++ Third party drivers (intelligent serial boards) may provide any speeds ++ they desire; most support up to 115.2Kbps. ++ ++ SCO's "sio" driver, which is used to drive standard serial ports with ++ 8250/16450/16550 and similar UARTs, was limited to 38400bps in older ++ releases. Support for rates through 115.2Kbps was added in the ++ following releases: ++ ++ SCO OpenServer Release 5.0.0 (requires supplement "rs40b") ++ SCO OpenServer Release 5.0.2 (requires supplement "rs40a" or "rs40b") ++ SCO OpenServer Release 5.0.4 or later ++ SCO Internet FastStart Release 1.0.0 or later ++ ++ SCO supplements are at [382]ftp://ftp.sco.com/; the "rs40" series are ++ under directory /Supplements/internet ++ ++ Kermit includes the high serial speeds in all OSR5 builds, but that ++ does not necessarily mean they work. For example, on our in-house ++ 5.0.5 system, SET SPEED 57600 or higher seems to succeed (no error ++ occurs) but when we read the speed back the driver says it is 50. ++ Similarly, 76800 becomes 75, and 115200 becomes 110. Testing shows the ++ resulting speed is indeed the low one we read back, not the high one ++ we asked for. Moral: Use speeds higher than 38400 with caution on SCO ++ OSR5. ++ ++ Reportedly, if you have a script that makes a TCP/IP SET HOST (e.g. ++ Telnet) connection to SCO 3.2v4.2 with TCP/IP 1.2.1, and then does the ++ following: ++ ++ script $ exit ++ hangup ++ ++ this causes a pseudoterminal (pty) to be consumed on the SCO system; ++ if you do it enough times, it will run out of ptys. An "exit" command ++ is being sent to the SCO shell, and a HANGUP command is executed ++ locally, so the chances are good that both sides are trying to close ++ the connection at once, perhaps inducing a race condition in which the ++ remote pty is not released. It was speculated that this would be fixed ++ by applying SLS net382e, but it did not. Meanwhile, the workaround is ++ to insert a "pause" between the SCRIPT and HANGUP commands. (The ++ situation with later SCO releases is not known.) ++ ++ SCO UNIX and OpenServer allow their console and/or terminal drivers to ++ be configured to translate character sets for you. DON'T DO THIS WHEN ++ USING KERMIT! First of all, you don't need it -- Kermit itself already ++ does this for you. And second, it will (a) probably ruin the ++ formatting of your screens (depending on which emulation you are ++ using); and (b) interfere with all sorts of other things -- legibility ++ of non-ASCII text on the terminal screen, file transfer, etc. Use: ++ ++ mapchan -n ++ ++ to turn off this feature. ++ ++ Note that there is a multitude of SCO entries in the makefile, many of ++ them exhibiting an unusually large number of compiler options. Some ++ people actually understand all of this. Reportedly, things are ++ settling down with SCO OpenServer 5.x and Unixware 7 (and Open UNIX 8 ++ and who knows what the next one will be -- Linux probably) -- the SCO ++ UDK compiler is said to generate binaries that will run on either ++ platform, by default, automatically. When using gcc or egcs, on the ++ other hand, differences persist, plus issues regarding the type of ++ binary that is generated (COFF, ELF, etc), and where and how it can ++ run. All of this could stand further clarification by SCO experts. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.3. Unixware ++ ++ [ [383]Top ] [ [384]Contents ] [ [385]Section Contents ] [ [386]Next ] ++ [ [387]Previous ] ++ ++ Unixware changed hands several times before landing at SCO, and so has ++ its [388]own section in this document. (Briefly: AT&T UNIX Systems ++ Laboratories sold the rights to the UNIX name and to System V R4 (or ++ R5?) to Novell; later Novell spun its UNIX division off into a new ++ company called Univel, which eventually was bought by SCO, which later ++ was bought by Caldera, which later sort of semi-spun-off SCO...) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.4. Open UNIX 8 ++ ++ [ [389]Top ] [ [390]Contents ] [ [391]Section Contents ] [ ++ [392]Previous ] ++ ++ SCO was bought by Caldera in 2000 or 2001 and evolved Unixware 7.1 ++ into Caldera Open UNIX 8.00. It's just like Unixware 7.1 as far as ++ Kermit is concerned (the Unixware 7.1 makefile target works for Open ++ UNIX 8.00, and in fact a Unixware 7.1 Kermit binary built on Unixware ++ 7.1 runs under OU8; a separate OU8 makefile target exists simply to ++ generate an appropriate program startup herald). Open Unix is now ++ defunct; subsequent releases are called UnixWare again (e.g. UnixWare ++ 7.1.3). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7. C-KERMIT AND SOLARIS ++ ++ [ [393]Top ] [ [394]Contents ] [ [395]Section Contents ] [ [396]Next ] ++ [ [397]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++3.7.1. [398]Serial Port Configuration ++3.7.2. [399]Serial Port Problems ++3.7.3. [400]SunLink X.25 ++3.7.4. [401]Sun Workstation Keyboard Mapping ++3.7.5. [402]Solaris 2.4 and Earlier ++ ++ REFERENCES ++ ++ * The [403]comp.unix.solaris newsgroup ++ * [404]http://access1.sun.com/ ++ * [405]http://docs.sun.com/ ++ * [406]http://www.sunhelp.com/ ++ * [407]http://www.wins.uva.nl/pub/solaris/solaris2/ ++ * [408]http://www.wins.uva.nl/cgi-bin/sfaq.cgi ++ * [409]ftp://ftp.wins.uva.nl/pub/solaris ++ * [410]http://www.science.uva.nl/pub/solaris/solaris2.html ++ ++ And about serial communications in particular, see "Celeste's Tutorial ++ on Solaris 2.x Modems and Terminals": ++ ++ [411]http://www.stokely.com/ ++ ++ In particular: ++ ++ [412]http://www.stokely.com/unix.sysadm.resources/faqs.sun.html ++ ++ For PC-based Solaris, also see general comments on PC-based Unixes in ++ [413]Section 3.0. Don't expect Solaris or any other kind of Unix to ++ work right on a PC until you resolve all interrupt conflicts. Don't ++ expect to be able to use COM3 or COM4 (or even COM2) until you have ++ configured their addresses and interrupts. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.1. Serial Port Configuration ++ ++ [ [414]Top ] [ [415]Contents ] [ [416]Section Contents ] [ ++ [417]Section Contents ] [ [418]Next ] ++ ++ Your serial port can't be used -- or at least won't work right -- ++ until it is enabled in Solaris. For example, you get a message like ++ "SERIAL: Operation would block" when attempting to dial. This probably ++ indicates that the serial port has not been enabled for use with ++ modems. You'll need to follow the instructions in your system setup or ++ management manual, such as (e.g.) the Desktop SPARC Sun System & ++ Network Manager's Guide, which should contain a section "Setting up ++ Modem Software"; read it and follow the instructions. These might (or ++ might not) include running a program called "eeprom", editing some ++ system configuration file (such as, for example: ++ ++ /platform/i86pc/kernel/drv/asy.conf ++ ++ and then doing a configuration reboot, or running some other programs ++ like drvconfig and devlinks. "man eeprom" for details. ++ ++ Also, on certain Sun models like IPC, the serial port hardware might ++ need to have a jumper changed to make it an RS-232 port rather than ++ RS-423. ++ ++ eeprom applies only to real serial ports, not to "Spiff" devices ++ (serial port expander), in which case setup with Solaris' admintool is ++ required. ++ ++ Another command you might need to use is pmadm, e.g.: ++ ++ pmadm -d -p zsmon -s tty3 ++ pmadm -e -p zsmon -s tty3 ++ ++ You can use the following command to check if a process has the device ++ open: ++ ++ fuser -f /dev/term/3 ++ ++ In some cases, however (according to Sun support, May 2001) "It is ++ still possible that a zombie process has hold of the port EVEN IF ++ there is no lock file and the fuser command comes up empty. In that ++ case, the only way to resolve the problem is by rebooting." ++ ++ If you can't establish communication through a serial port to a device ++ that is not asserting CD (Carrier Detect), try setting the environment ++ variable "ttya-ignore-cd" to "true" (replace "ttya" with the port ++ name). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.2. Serial Port Problems ++ ++ [ [419]Top ] [ [420]Contents ] [ [421]Section Contents ] [ [422]Next ] ++ [ [423]Previous ] ++ ++ Current advice from Sun is to always the /dev/cua/x devices for ++ dialing out, rather than the /dev/term/x. Nevertheless, if you have ++ trouble dialing out with one, try the other. ++ ++ Reportedly, if you start C-Kermit and "set line" to a port that has a ++ modem connected to it that is not turned on, and then "set flow ++ rts/cts", there might be some (unspecified) difficulties closing the ++ device because the CTS signal is not coming in from the modem. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.3. SunLink X.25 ++ ++ [ [424]Top ] [ [425]Contents ] [ [426]Section Contents ] [ [427]Next ] ++ [ [428]Previous ] ++ ++ The built-in SunLink X.25 support for Solaris 2.3/2.4./25 and SunLink ++ 8.01 or 9.00 works OK provided the X.25 system has been installed and ++ initialized properly. Packet sizes might need to be reduced to 256, ++ maybe even less, depending on the configuration of the X.25 ++ installation. On one connection where C-Kermit 6.0 was tested, very ++ large packets and window sizes could be used in one direction, but ++ only very small ones would work in the other. ++ ++ In any case, according to Sun, C-Kermit's X.25 support is superfluous ++ with SunLink 8.x / Solaris 2.3. Quoting an anonymous Sun engineer: ++ ++ ... there is now no need to include any X.25 code within kermit. As ++ of X.25 8.0.1 we support the use of kermit, uucp and similar ++ protocols over devices of type /dev/xty. This facility was there in ++ 8.0, and should also work on the 8.0 release if patch 101524 is ++ applied, but I'm not 100% sure it will work in all cases, which is ++ why we only claim support from 8.0.1 onwards. ++ ++ When configuring X.25, on the "Advanced Configuration->Parameters" ++ screen of the x25tool you can select a number of XTY devices. If ++ you set this to be > 1, press Apply, and reboot, you will get a ++ number of /dev/xty entries created. ++ ++ Ignore /dev/xty0, it is a special case. All the others can be used ++ exactly as if they were a serial line (e.g. /dev/tty) connected to ++ a modem, except that instead of using Hayes-style commands, you use ++ PAD commands. ++ ++ From kermit you can do a 'set line' command to, say, /dev/xty1, ++ then set your dialing command to be "CALL 12345678", etc. All the ++ usual PAD commands will work (SET, PAR, etc). ++ ++ I know of one customer in Australia who is successfully using this, ++ with kermit scripts, to manage some X.25-connected switches. He ++ used standard kermit, compiled for Solaris 2, with X.25 8.0 xty ++ devices. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.4. Sun Workstation Keyboard Mapping ++ ++ [ [429]Top ] [ [430]Contents ] [ [431]Section Contents ] [ [432]Next ] ++ [ [433]Previous ] ++ ++ Hints for using a Sun workstation keyboard for VT emulation when ++ accessing VMS, from the [434]comp.os.vms newsgroup: ++ ++ From: Jerry Leichter ++ Newsgroups: comp.os.vms ++ Subject: Re: VT100 keyboard mapping to Sun X server ++ Date: Mon, 19 Aug 1996 12:44:21 -0400 ++ ++ > I am stuck right now using a Sun keyboard (type 5) on systems ++ running SunOS ++ > and Solaris. I would like to use EVE on an OpenVMS box with ++ display back to ++ > the Sun. Does anyone know of a keyboard mapping (or some other ++ procedure) ++ > which will allow the Sun keyboard to approximate a VT100/VT220? ++ ++ You can't get it exactly - because the keypad has one fewer key - ++ but you can come pretty close. Here's a set of keydefs I use: ++ ++ keycode 101=KP_0 ++ keycode 119=KP_1 ++ keycode 120=KP_2 ++ keycode 121=KP_3 ++ keycode 98=KP_4 ++ keycode 99=KP_5 ++ keycode 100=KP_6 ++ keycode 75=KP_7 ++ keycode 76=KP_8 ++ keycode 77=KP_9 ++ keycode 52=KP_F1 ++ keycode 53=KP_F2 ++ keycode 54=KP_F3 ++ keycode 57=KP_Decimal ++ keycode 28=Left ++ keycode 29=Right ++ keycode 30=KP_Separator ++ keycode 105=KP_F4 ++ keycode 78=KP_Subtract ++ keycode 8=Left ++ keycode 10=Right ++ keycode 32=Up ++ keycode 33=Down ++ keycode 97=KP_Enter ++ ++ Put this in a file - I use "keydefs" in my home directory and feed ++ it into xmodmap: ++ ++ xmodmap - <$HOME/keydefs ++ ++ This takes care of the arrow keys and the "calculator" key cluster. ++ The "+" key will play the role of the DEC "," key. The Sun "-" key ++ will be like the DEC "-" key, though it's in a physically different ++ position - where the DEC PF4 key is. The PF4 key is ... damn, I'm ++ not sure where "key 105" is. I *think* it may be on the leftmost ++ key of the group of four just above the "calculator" key cluster. ++ ++ I also execute the following (this is all in my xinitrc file): ++ ++ xmodmap -e 'keysym KP_Decimal = KP_Decimal' ++ xmodmap -e 'keysym BackSpace = Delete BackSpace' \ ++ -e 'keysym Delete = BackSpace Delete' ++ xmodmap -e 'keysym KP_Decimal = Delete Delete KP_Decimal' ++ xmodmap -e 'add mod1 = Meta_R' ++ xmodmap -e 'add mod1 = Meta_L' ++ ++ Beware of one thing about xmodmap: Keymap changes are applied to ++ the *whole workstation*, not just to individual windows. There is, ++ in fact, no way I know of to apply them to individual windows. ++ These definitions *may* confuse some Unix programs (and/or some ++ Unix users). ++ ++ If you're using Motif, you may also need to apply bindings at the ++ Motif level. If just using xmodmap doesn't work, I can try and dig ++ that stuff up for you. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.5. Solaris PPP Connections ++ ++ [ [435]Top ] [ [436]Contents ] [ [437]Section Contents ] [ [438]Next ] ++ [ [439]Previous ] ++ ++ The following is a report from a user of C-Kermit 8.0 on Solaris 8 and ++ 9, who had complained that while Kermit file transfers worked ++ perfectly on direct (non-PPP) dialout connections, they failed ++ miserably on PPP connections. We suggested that the PPP dialer ++ probably was not setting the port and/or modem up in the same way that ++ Kermit did: ++ ++ I want to get back on this and tell you what the resolution was. ++ You pointed me in the direction of flow control, which turned out ++ to be the key. ++ ++ Some discussion on the comp.unix.solaris newsgroup led to some ++ comments from Greg Andrews about the need to use the uucp driver to ++ talk to the modem (/dev/cua/a). I had to remind Greg that no matter ++ what the manpages for the zs and se drivers say, the ppp that Sun ++ released with Solaris 8 7/01, and has in Solaris 9, is a setuid ++ root program, and simply trying to make a pppd call from user space ++ specifying /dev/cua/a would fail because of permissions. Greg ++ finally put the question to the ppp people, who came back with ++ information that is not laid out anywhere in the docs available for ++ Solaris users. Namely, put /dev/cua/a in one of the priviledged ++ options files in the /etc/ppp directory. That, plus resetting the ++ OBP ttya-ignore-cd flag (this is Sun hardware) to false, seems to ++ have solved the problems. ++ ++ While I note that I had installed Kermit suid to uucp to use ++ /dev/cua/a on this particular box, it seems to run fine through ++ /dev/term/a. Not so with pppd. ++ ++ With this change in place, I seem to be able to upload and download ++ through telnet run on Kermit with the maximum length packets. I ++ note that the window allocation display does show STREAMING, using ++ telnet. Running ssh on Kermit, I see the standard 1 of 30 windows ++ display, and note that there appears to be a buffer length limit ++ between 1000 and 2000 bytes. Run with 1000, and it's tick-tock, ++ solid as a rock. With 2000 I see timeout errors and RTS/CTS action ++ on the modem. ++ ++ Kermit's packet-length and other controls let you make adjustments ++ like this to get around whatever obstacles might be thrown up -- in ++ this case (running Kermit over ssh), the underling Solaris PTY driver. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.6. Solaris 2.4 and Earlier ++ ++ [ [440]Top ] [ [441]Contents ] [ [442]Section Contents ] [ ++ [443]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit can't be compiled successfully under Solaris 2.3 using ++ SUNWspro cc 2.0.1 unless at least some of the following patches are ++ applied to cc (it is not known which one(s), if any, fix the problem): ++ ++ * 100935-01 SparcCompiler C 2.0.1: bad code generated when addresses ++ of two double arguments are involved ++ * 100961-05 SPARCcompilers C 2.0.1: conditional expression with ++ function returning structure gives wrong value ++ * 100974-01 SparcWorks 2.0.1: dbx jumbo patch ++ * 101424-01 SPARCworks 2.0.1 maketool SEGV's instantly on Solaris ++ 2.3 ++ ++ With unpatched cc 2.0.1, the symptom is that certain modules generate ++ truncated object files, resulting in many unresolved references at ++ link time. ++ ++ The rest of the problems in this section have to do with ++ bidirectional terminal ports and the Solaris Port Monitor. A bug in ++ C-Kermit 5A ticked a bug in Solaris. The C-Kermit bug was fixed in ++ version 6.0, and the Solaris bug was fixed in 2.4 (I think, or ++ maybe 2.5). ++ ++ Reportedly, "C-Kermit ... causes a SPARCstation running Solaris 2.3 to ++ panic after the modem connects. I have tried compiling C-Kermit with ++ Sun's unbundled C compiler, with GCC Versions 2.4.5 and 2.5.3, with ++ make targets 'sunos51', 'sunos51tcp', 'sunos51gcc', and even 'sys5r4', ++ and each time it compiles and starts up cleanly, but without fail, as ++ soon as I dial the number and get a 'CONNECT' message from the modem, ++ I get: ++ ++ BAD TRAP ++ kermit: Data fault ++ kernel read fault at addr=0x45c, pme=0x0 ++ Sync Error Reg 80 ++ ... ++ panic: Data Fault. ++ ... ++ Rebooting... ++ ++ The same modem works fine for UUCP/tip calling." Also (reportedly), ++ this only happens if the dialout port is configured as in/out via ++ admintool. If it is configured as out-only, no problem. This is the ++ same dialing code that works on hundreds of other System-V based Unix ++ OS's. Since it should be impossible for a user program to crash the ++ operating system, this problem must be chalked up to a Solaris bug. ++ Even if you SET CARRIER OFF, CONNECT, and dial manually by typing ++ ATDTnnnnnnn, the system panics as soon as the modem issues its CONNECT ++ message. (Clearly, when you are dialing manually, C-Kermit does not ++ know a thing about the CONNECT message, and so the panic is almost ++ certainly caused by the transition of the Carrier Detect (CD) line ++ from off to on.) This problem was reported by many users, all of whom ++ say that C-Kermit worked fine on Solaris 2.1 and 2.2. If the ++ speculation about CD is true, then a possible workaround might be to ++ configure the modem to leave CD on (or off) all the time. Perhaps by ++ the time you read this, a patch will have been issued for Solaris 2.3. ++ ++ The following is from Karl S. Marsh, Systems & Networks Administrator, ++ AMBIX Systems Corp, Rochester, NY: ++ ++ Environment: Solaris 2.3 Patch 101318-45 C-Kermit 5A(189) (and ++ presumably this applies to 188 and 190 also). eeprom setting: ++ ++ ttya-rts-dtr-off=false ++ ttya-ignore-cd=false ++ ttya-mode=19200,8,n,8,- ++ ++ To use C-Kermit on a bidirectional port in this environment, do not ++ use admintool to configure the port. Use admintool to delete any ++ services running on the port and then quit admintool and issue the ++ following command: ++ ++ pmadm -a -p zsmon -s ttyb -i root -fu -v 1 -m "`ttyadm -b -d /dev/term/b \ ++ -l conttyH -m ldterm,ttcompat -s /usr/bin/login -S n`" ++ ++ [NOTE: This was copied from a blurry fax, so please check it ++ carefully] where: ++ ++ -a = Add service ++ -p = pmtag (zsmon) ++ -s = service tag (ttyb) ++ -i = id to be associated with service tag (root) ++ -fu = create utmp entry ++ -v = version of ttyadm ++ -m = port monitor-specific portion of the port monitor administrative file ++ entry for the service ++ -b = set up port for bidirectional use ++ -d = full path name of device ++ -l = which ttylabel in the /etc/ttydefs file to use ++ -m = a list of pushable STREAMS modules ++ -s = pathname of service to be invoked when connection request received ++ -S = software carrier detect on or off (n = off) ++ ++ "This is exactly how I was able to get Kermit to work on a ++ bi-directional port without crashing the system." ++ ++ On the Solaris problem, also see SunSolve Bug ID 1150457 ("Using ++ C-Kermit, get Bad Trap on receiving prompt from remote system"). ++ Another user reported "So, I have communicated with the Sun tech ++ support person that submitted this bug report [1150457]. Apparently, ++ this bug was fixed under one of the jumbo kernel patches. It would ++ seem that the fix did not live on into 101318-45, as this is EXACTLY ++ the error that I see when I attempt to use kermit on my system." ++ ++ Later (Aug 94)... C-Kermit dialout successfully tested on a Sun4m with ++ a heavily patched Solaris 2.3. The patches most likely to have been ++ relevant: ++ ++ * 101318-50: SunOS 5.3: Jumbo patch for kernel (includes libc, ++ lockd) ++ * 101720-01: SunOS 5.3: ttymon - prompt not always visible on a ++ modem connection ++ * 101815-01: SunOS 5.3: Data fault in put() NULL queue passed from ++ ttycommon_qfull() ++ * 101328-01: SunOS 5.3: Automation script to properly setup tty ++ ports prior to PCTS execution ++ ++ Still later (Nov 94): another user (Bo Kullmar in Sweden) reports that ++ after using C-Kermit to dial out on a bidirectional port, the port ++ might not answer subsequent incoming calls, and says "the problem is ++ easy enough to fix with the Serial Port Manager; I just delete the ++ service and install it again using the graphical interface, which ++ underneath uses commands like sacadm and pmadm." Later Bo reports, "I ++ have found that if I run Kermit with the following script then it ++ works. This script is for /dev/cua/a, "-s a" is the last a in ++ /dev/cua/a: ++ ++ #! /bin/sh ++ kermit ++ sleep 2 ++ surun pmadm -e -p zsmon -s a ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.8. C-KERMIT AND SUNOS ++ ++ [ [444]Top ] [ [445]Contents ] [ [446]Section Contents ] [ [447]Next ] ++ [ [448]Previous ] ++ ++ For additional information, see "Celeste's Tutorial on SunOS 4.1.3+ ++ Modems and Terminals": ++ ++ [449]http://www.stokely.com/ ++ ++ For FAQs, etc, from Sun, see: ++ * [450]http://access1.sun.com/ ++ ++ For history of Sun models and SunOS versions, see (should be all the ++ same): ++ * [451]http://www.ludd.luth.se/~bear/project/sun/sun.hardware.txt ++ * [452]ftp://ftp.netcom.com/pub/ru/rubicon/sun.hdwr.ref ++ * [453]ftp://ftp.intnet.net/pub/SUN/Sun-Hardware-Ref ++ ++ Sun SPARCstation users should read the section "Setting up Modem ++ Software" in the Desktop SPARC Sun System & Network Manager's Guide. ++ If you don't set up your serial ports correctly, Kermit (and other ++ communications software) won't work right. ++ ++ Also, on certain Sun models like IPC, the serial port hardware might ++ need to have a jumper changed to make it an RS-232 port rather than ++ RS-423. ++ ++ Reportedly, C-Kermit does not work correctly on a Sun SPARCstation in ++ an Open Windows window with scrolling enabled. Disable scrolling, or ++ else invoke Kermit in a terminal emulation window (xterm, crttool, ++ vttool) under SunView (this might be fixed in later SunOS releases). ++ ++ On the Sun with Open Windows, an additional symptom has been reported: ++ outbound SunLink X.25 connections "magically" translate CR typed at ++ the keyboard into LF before transmission to the remote host. This ++ doesn't happen under SunView. ++ ++ SET CARRIER ON, when used on the SunOS 4.1 version of C-Kermit ++ (compiled in the BSD universe), causes the program to hang ++ uninterruptibly when SET LINE is issued for a device that is not ++ asserting carrier. When Kermit is built in the Sys V universe on the ++ same computer, there is no problem (it can be interrupted with ++ Ctrl-C). This is apparently a limitation of the BSD-style tty driver. ++ ++ SunOS 4.1 C-Kermit has been observed to dump core when running a ++ complicated script program under cron. The dump invariably occurs in ++ ttoc(), while trying to output a character to a TCP/IP TELNET ++ connection. ttoc() contains a write() call, and when the system or the ++ network is very busy, the write() call can get stuck for long periods ++ of time. To break out of deadlocks caused by stuck write() calls, ++ there is an alarm around the write(). It is possible that the core ++ dump occurs when this alarm signal is caught. (This one has not been ++ observed recently -- possibly fixed in edit 190.) ++ ++ On Sun computers with SunOS 4.0 or 4.1, SET FLOW RTS/CTS works only if ++ the carrier signal is present from the communication device at the ++ time when C-Kermit enters packet mode or CONNECT mode. If carrier is ++ not sensed (e.g. when dialing), C-Kermit does not attempt to turn on ++ RTS/CTS flow control. This is because the SunOS serial device driver ++ does not allow characters to be output if RTS/CTS is set (CRTSCTS) but ++ carrier (and DSR) are not present. Workaround (maybe): SET CARRIER OFF ++ before giving the SET LINE command, establish the connection, then SET ++ FLOW RTS/CTS ++ ++ It has also been reported that RTS/CTS flow control under SunOS 4.1 ++ through 4.1.3 works only on INPUT, not on output, and that there is a ++ patch from Sun to correct this problem: Patch-ID# T100513-04, 20 July ++ 1993 (this patch might apply only to SunOS 4.1.3). It might also be ++ necessary to configure the eeprom parameters of the serial port; e.g. ++ do the following as root at the shell prompt: ++ ++ eeprom ttya-ignore-cd=false ++ eeprom ttya-rts-dtr-off=true ++ ++ There have been reports of file transfer failures on Sun-3 systems ++ when using long packets and/or large window sizes. One user says that ++ when this happens, the console issues many copies of this message: ++ ++ chaos vmunix: zs1: ring buffer overflow ++ ++ This means that SunOS is not scheduling Kermit frequently enough to ++ service interrupts from the zs serial device (Zilog 8350 SCC serial ++ communication port) before its input silo overflows. Workaround: use ++ smaller packets and/or a smaller window size, or use "nice" to ++ increase Kermit's priority. Use hardware flow control if available, or ++ remove other active processes before running Kermit. ++ ++ SunLink X.25 support in C-Kermit 5A(190) was built and tested ++ successfully under SunOS 4.1.3b and SunLink X.25 7.00. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.9. C-KERMIT AND ULTRIX ++ ++ [ [454]Top ] [ [455]Contents ] [ [456]Section Contents ] [ [457]Next ] ++ [ [458]Previous ] ++ ++ See also: The [459]comp.unix.ultrix and [460]comp.sys.dec newsgroups. ++ ++ There is no hardware flow control in Ultrix. That's not a Kermit ++ deficiency, but an Ultrix one. ++ ++ When sending files to C-Kermit on a Telnet connection to a remote ++ Ultrix system, you must SET PREFIXING ALL (or at least prefix more ++ control characters than are selected by SET PREFIXING CAUTIOUS). ++ ++ Reportedly, DEC ULTRIX 4.3 is immune to C-Kermit's disabling of ++ SIGQUIT, which is the signal that is generated when the user types ++ Ctrl-\, which kills the current process (i.e. C-Kermit) and dumps ++ core. Diagnosis and cure unknown. Workaround: before starting C-Kermit ++ -- or for that matter, when you first log in because this applies to ++ all processes, not just Kermit -- give the following Unix command: ++ ++ stty quit undef ++ ++ Certain operations driven by RS-232 modem signal do not work on ++ DECstations or other DEC platforms whose serial interfaces use MMP ++ connectors (DEC version of RJ45 telephone jack with offset tab). These ++ connectors convey only the DSR and DTR modem signals, but not carrier ++ (CD), RTS, CTS, or RI. Use SET CARRIER OFF to enable communication, or ++ "hotwire" DSR to CD. ++ ++ The maximum serial speed on the DECstation 5000 is normally 19200, but ++ various tricks are available (outside Kermit) to enable higher rates. ++ For example, on the 5000/200, 19200 can be remapped (somehow, ++ something to do with "a bit in the SIR", whatever that is) to 38400, ++ but in software you must still refer to this speed as 19200; you can't ++ have 19200 and 38400 available at the same time. ++ ++ 19200, reportedly, is also the highest speed supported by Ultrix, but ++ NetBSD reportedly supports speeds up to 57600 on the DECstation, ++ although whether and how well this works is another question. ++ ++ In any case, given the lack of hardware flow control in Ultrix, high ++ serial speeds are problematic at best. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.10. C-KERMIT AND UNIXWARE ++ ++ [ [461]Top ] [ [462]Contents ] [ [463]Section Contents ] [ [464]Next ] ++ [ [465]Previous ] ++ ++ See also: ++ * The Freebird Project (Unixware software repository) ++ [466]http://www.freebird.org/ ++ * The UnixWare FAQ: [467]http://www.freebird.org/faq/ ++ * The following newsgroups: ++ + [468]comp.unix.unixware.misc ++ + [469]comp.unix.sco.misc. ++ ++ Also see general comments on PC-based Unixes in [470]Section 3.0. By ++ the way, this section is separate from the SCO (Caldera) section ++ because at the time this section was started, Unixware was owned by a ++ company called Univel. Later it was sold to Novell, and then to SCO. ++ Still later, SCO was sold to Caldera. ++ ++ In Unixware 2.0 and later, the preferred serial device names (drivers) ++ are /dev/term/00 (etc), rather than /dev/tty00 (etc). Note the ++ following correspondence of device names and driver characteristics: ++ ++ New name Old name Description ++ /dev/term/00 /dev/tty00 ??? ++ /dev/term/00h /dev/tty00h Modem signals and hardware flow control ++ /dev/term/00m /dev/tty00m Modem signals(?) ++ /dev/term/00s /dev/tty00s Modem signals and software flow control ++ /dev/term/00t /dev/tty00t ??? ++ ++ Lockfile names use device.major.minor numbers, e.g.: ++ ++ /var/spool/locks/LK.7679.003.005 ++ ++ The minor number varies according to the device name suffix (none, h, ++ m, s, or t). Only the device and major number are compared, and thus ++ all of the different names for the same physical device (e.g. all of ++ those shown in the table above) interlock effectively. ++ ++ Prior to UnixWare 7, serial speeds higher than 38400 are not ++ supported. In UnixWare 7, we also support 57600 and 115200, plus some ++ unexpected ones like 14400, 28800, and 76800, by virtue of a strange ++ new interface, evidently peculiar to UnixWare 7, discovered while ++ digging through the header files: tcsetspeed(). Access to this ++ interface is allowed only in POSIX builds, and thus the UnixWare 7 ++ version of C-Kermit is POSIX-based, unlike C-Kermit for Unixware 1.x ++ and 2.x (since the earlier UnixWare versions did not support high ++ serial speeds, period). ++ ++ HOWEVER, turning on POSIX features engages all of the "#if ++ (!_POSIX_SOURCE)" clauses in the UnixWare header files, which in turn ++ prevent us from having modem signals, access to the hardware flow ++ control APIs, select(), etc -- in short, all the other things we need ++ in communications software, especially when high speeds are used. Oh ++ the irony. And so C-Kermit must be shamelessly butchered -- as it has ++ been so many times before -- to allow us to have the needed features ++ from the POSIX and non-POSIX worlds. See the UNIXWAREPOSIX sections of ++ [471]ckutio.c. ++ ++ After the butchery, we wind up with Unixware 2.x having full ++ modem-signal capability, but politically-correct Unixware 7.x lacking ++ the ability to automatically detect a broken connection when carrier ++ drops. ++ ++ Meanwhile the Unixware tcsetspeed() function allows any number at all ++ (any long, 0 or positive) as an argument and succeeds if the number is ++ a legal bit rate for the serial device, and fails otherwise. There is ++ no list anywhere of legal speeds. Thus the SET SPEED keyword table ++ ("set speed ?" to see it) is hardwired based on trial and error with ++ all known serial speeds, the maximum being 115200. However, to allow ++ for the possibility that other speeds might be allowed in the future ++ (or with different port drivers), the SET SPEED command for UnixWare 7 ++ only allows you to specify any number at all; a warning is printed if ++ the number is not in the list, but the number is accepted anyway; the ++ command succeeds if tcsetspeed() accepts the number, and fails ++ otherwise. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0 testing, it was noticed that the POSIX method for ++ hanging up the phone by dropping DTR (set speed 0, pause, restore ++ speed) did not actually drop DTR. The APIs do not return any error ++ indication, but nothing happens. I changed tthang() to skip the ++ special case I had made for Unixware and instead follow the normal ++ path: if TIOCSDTR is defined use that, otherwise blah blah... It turns ++ out TIOCSDTR *is* defined, and it works. ++ ++ So in Unixware (at least in 2.1.3) we can read modem signals, hangup ++ by toggling DTR, and so on, BUT... But once the remote hangs up and ++ Carrier drops, the API for reading modem signals ceases to function; ++ although the device is still open, the TIOCMGET ioctl always raises ++ errno 6 = ENXIO, "No such device or address". ++ ++ Old business: ++ ++ Using C-Kermit 6.0 on the UnixWare 1.1 Application Server, one user ++ reported a system panic when the following script program is executed: ++ ++ set line /dev/tty4 ++ set speed 9600 ++ output \13 ++ connect ++ ++ The panic does not happen if a PAUSE is inserted: ++ ++ set line /dev/tty4 ++ set speed 9600 ++ pause 1 ++ output \13 ++ connect ++ ++ This is using a Stallion EasyIO card installed as board 0 on IRQ 12 on ++ a Gateway 386 with the Stallion-supplied driver. The problem was ++ reported to Novell and Stallion and (reportedly) is now fixed. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11. C-KERMIT AND APOLLO SR10 ++ ++ [ [472]Top ] [ [473]Contents ] [ [474]Section Contents ] [ [475]Next ] ++ [ [476]Previous ] ++ ++ Reportedly, version 5A(190), when built under Apollo SR10 using "make ++ sr10-bsd", compiles, links, and executes OK, but leaves the terminal ++ unusable after it exits -- the "cs7" or "cs8" (character size) ++ parameter has become cs5. The terminal must be reset from another ++ terminal. Cause and cure unknown. Suggested workaround: Wrap Kermit in ++ a shell script something like: ++ ++ kermit @* ++ stty sane ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.12. C-KERMIT AND TANDY XENIX 3.0 ++ ++ [ [477]Top ] [ [478]Contents ] [ [479]Section Contents ] [ [480]Next ] ++ [ [481]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 was too big to be built on Tandy Xenix, even in a minimum ++ configuration; version 6.0 is the last one that fits. ++ ++ Reportedly, in C-Kermit 6.0, if you type lots of Ctrl-C's during ++ execution of the initialization file, ghost Kermit processes will be ++ created, and will compete for the keyboard. They can only be removed ++ via "kill -9" from another terminal, or by rebooting. Diagnosis -- ++ something strange happening with the SIGINT handler while the process ++ is reading the directory (it seems to occur during the SET PROMPT ++ [\v(dir)] ... sequence). Cure: unknown. Workaround: don't interrupt ++ C-Kermit while it is executing its init file on the Tandy 16/6000. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.13. C-KERMIT AND OSF/1 (DIGITAL UNIX) (TRU64 UNIX) ++ ++ [ [482]Top ] [ [483]Contents ] [ [484]Section Contents ] [ [485]Next ] ++ [ [486]Previous ] ++ ++ While putting together and testing C-Kermit 8.0, it was discovered ++ that binaries built for one version of Tru64 Unix (e.g. 4.0G) might ++ exhibit very strange behavior if run on a different version of Tru64 ++ Unix (e.g. 5.1A). The typical symptom was that a section of the ++ initialization file would be skipped, notably locating the dialing ++ and/or network directory as well as finding and executing the ++ customization file, ~/.mykermrc. This problem also is reported to ++ occur on Tru64 Unix 5.0 (Rev 732) even when running a C-Kermit binary ++ that was built there. However, the Tru64 5.1A binary works correctly ++ on 5.0. Go figure. ++ ++ When making Telnet connections to a Digital Unix or Tru64 system, and ++ your Telnet client forwards your user name, the Telnet server ++ evidently stuffs the username into login's standard input, and you ++ see: ++ ++ login: ivan ++ Password: ++ ++ This is clearly going to play havoc with scripts that look for ++ "login:". Workaround (when Kermit is your Telnet client): SET LOGIN ++ USER to nothing, to prevent Kermit from sending your user ID. ++ ++ Before you can use a serial port on a new Digital Unix system, you ++ must run uucpsetup to enable or configure the port. Evidently the ++ /dev/tty00 and 01 devices that appear in the configuration are not ++ usable; uucpsetup turns them into /dev/ttyd00 and 01, which are. Note ++ that uucpsetup and other uucp-family programs are quite primitive -- ++ they only know about speeds up to 9600 bps and their selection of ++ modems dates from the early 1980s. None of this affects Kermit, though ++ -- with C-Kermit, you can use speeds up to 115200 bps (at least in ++ DU4.0 and later) and modern modems with hardware flow control and all ++ the rest. ++ ++ Reportedly, if a modem is set for &S0 (assert DSR at all times), the ++ system resets or drops DTR every 30 seconds; reportedly DEC says to ++ set &S1. ++ ++ Digital Unix 3.2 evidently wants to believe your terminal is one line ++ longer than you say it is, e.g. when a "more" or "man" command is ++ given. This is has nothing to do with C-Kermit, but tends to annoy ++ those who use Kermit or other terminal emulators to access Digital ++ Unix systems. Workaround: tell Unix to "stty rows 23" (or whatever). ++ ++ Reportedly, there is some bizarre behavior when trying to use a ++ version of C-Kermit built on one Digital Unix 4.0 system on another ++ one, possibly due to differing OS or library revision levels; for ++ example, the inability to connect to certain TCP/IP hosts. Solution: ++ rebuild C-Kermit from source code on the system where you will be ++ using it. ++ ++ Digital Unix tgetstr() causes a segmentation fault. C-Kermit 7.0 added ++ #ifdefs to avoid calling this routine in Digital Unix. As a result, ++ the SCREEN commands always send ANSI escape sequences -- even though ++ curses knows your actual terminal type. ++ ++ Reportedy the Tru64 Unix 4.0E 1091 Telnet server does not tolerate ++ streaming transfers into itself, at least not when the sending Kermit ++ is on the same local network. Solution: tell one Kermit or the other ++ (or both) to "set streaming off". This might or might be the case with ++ earlier and/or later Tru64, Digital Unix, and OSF/1 releases. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.14. C-KERMIT AND SGI IRIX ++ ++ [ [487]Top ] [ [488]Contents ] [ [489]Section Contents ] [ [490]Next ] ++ [ [491]Previous ] ++ ++ See also: ++ * The [492]comp.sys.sgi.misc and [493]comp.sys.sgi.admin newsgroups. ++ [494]The SGI website ++ * The SGI FAQ: ++ + [495]http://www-viz.tamu.edu/~sgi-faq/ ++ + [496]ftp://viz.tamu.edu/pub/sgi/faq/ ++ ++ About IRIX version numbers: "uname -a" tells the "two-digit" version ++ number, such as "5.3" or "6.5". The three-digit form can be seen with ++ "uname -R". (this information is unavailable at the simple API level). ++ Supposedly all three-digit versions within the same two-digit version ++ (e.g. 6.5.2, 6.5.3) are binary compatible; i.e. a binary built on any ++ one of them should run on all others. The "m" suffix denotes just ++ patches; the "f" suffix indicates that features were added. ++ ++ An IRIX binary built on lower MIPS model (Instruction Set ++ Architecture, ISA) can run on higher models, but not vice versa: ++ ++ MIPS1 R3000 and below ++ MIPS2 R4000 ++ MIPS3 R4x00 ++ MIPS4 R5000 and above ++ ++ Furthermore, there are different Application Binary Inferfaces (ABIs): ++ ++ COFF 32 bits, IRIX 5.3, 5.2, 5.1, 4.x and below ++ o32 ELF 32 bits, IRIX 5.3, 6.0 - 6.5 ++ N32 ELF 32 bits, IRIX 6.2 - 6.5 ++ N64 ELF 64 bits, IRIX 6.2 - 6.5 ++ ++ Thus a prebuilt IRIX binary works on a particular machine only if (a) ++ the machine's IRIX version (to one decimal place) is equal to or ++ greater than the version under which the binary was built; (b) the ++ machine's MIPS level is greater or equal to that of the binary; and ++ (c) the machine supports the ABI of the binary. If all three ++ conditions are not satisfied, of course, you can build a binary ++ yourself from source code since, unlike some other Unix vendors, SGI ++ does supply a C compiler and libraries. ++ ++ SGI did not supply an API for hardware flow control prior to IRIX 5.2. ++ C-Kermit 6.1 and higher for IRIX 5.2 and higher supports hardware flow ++ control in the normal way, via "set flow rts/cts". ++ ++ For hardware flow control on earlier IRIX and/or C-Kermit versions, ++ use the ttyf* (modem control AND hardware flow control) devices and ++ not the ttyd* (direct) or ttym* (modem control but no hardware flow ++ control) ones, and obtain the proper "hardware handshaking" cable from ++ SGI, which is incompatible with the ones for the Macintosh and NeXT ++ even though they look the same ("man serial" for further info) and ++ tell Kermit to "set flow keep" and "set modem flow rts/cts". ++ ++ Serial speeds higher than 38400 are available in IRIX 6.2 and later, ++ on O-class machines (e.g. Origin, Octane) only, and are supported by ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and later. Commands such as "set speed 115200" may be ++ given on other models (e.g. Iris, Indy, Indigo) but will fail because ++ the OS reports an invalid speed for the device. ++ ++ Experimentation with both IRIX 5.3 and 6.2 shows that when logged in ++ to IRIX via Telnet, that remote-mode C-Kermit can't send files if the ++ packet length is greater than 4096; the Telnet server evidently has ++ this restriction (or bug), since there is no problem sending long ++ packets on serial or rlogin connections. However, it can receive files ++ with no problem if the packet length is greater than 4096. As a ++ workaround, the FAST macro for IRIX includes "set send packet-length ++ 4000". IRIX 6.5.1 does not have this problem, so evidently it was ++ fixed some time after IRIX 6.2. Tests show file-transfer speeds are ++ better (not worse) with 8K packets than with 4K packets from IRIX ++ 6.5.1. ++ ++ Reportedly some Indys have bad serial port hardware. IRIX 5.2, for ++ example, needs patch 151 to work around this; or upgrade to a later ++ release. Similarly, IRIX 5.2 has several problems with serial i/o, ++ flow control, etc. Again, patch or upgrade. ++ ++ Reportedly on machines with IRIX 4.0, Kermit cannot be suspended by ++ typing the suspend ("swtch") character if it was started from csh, ++ even though other programs can be suspended this way, and even though ++ the Z and SUSPEND commands still work correctly. This is evidently ++ because IRIX's csh does not deliver the SIGTSTP signal to Kermit. The ++ reason other programs can be suspended in the same environment is ++ probably that they do not trap SIGTSTP themselves, so the shell is ++ doing the suspending rather than the application. ++ ++ Also see notes about IRIX 3.x in the [497]C-Kermit for Unix ++ Installation Instructions. ++ ++ If you have problems making TCP/IP connections in versions of IRIX ++ built with GCC 2.95.2, see the bugs section of: ++ ++ [498]http://freeware.sgi.com/Installable/gcc-2.95.2.html. ++ ++ Reportedly, if you allow gcc to compile C-Kermit on Irix you should be ++ aware that there might be problems with some of the network code. The ++ specifics are at ++ [499]http://freeware.sgi.com/Installable/gcc-2.95.2.html; scroll down ++ to the "known bugs" section at the end of the document. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.15. C-KERMIT AND THE BEBOX ++ ++ [ [500]Top ] [ [501]Contents ] [ [502]Section Contents ] [ [503]Next ] ++ [ [504]Previous ] ++ ++ See also: The [505]comp.sys.be newsgroup. ++ ++ The BeBox has been discontinued and BeOS repositioned for PC ++ platforms. The POSIX parts of BeOS are not finished, nor is the ++ sockets library, therefore a fully functional version of C-Kermit is ++ not possible. In version 6.0 of C-Kermit, written for BeOS DR7, it was ++ possible to: ++ ++ * set line /dev/serial2 (and probably the other serial ports) ++ * set speed 115200 (and at least some of the lower baud rates) ++ * connect ++ * set modem type hayes (and likely others, too) ++ * dial phone-number ++ * set send packet-length 2048 (other lengths for both send and ++ receive) ++ * set receive packet length 2048 ++ * set file type binary (text mode works, too) (with remote kermit ++ session in server mode) ++ * put bedrop.jpg ++ * get bedrop.jpg ++ * get bedrop.jpg bedrop.jpg2 ++ * finish, bye ++ ++ The following do not work: ++ * kermit does not detect modem hangup ++ * !/RUN/PUSH [commandline command] ++ * Running kermit in remote mode ++ * Using other protocols (x/y/zmodem) ++ * TCP networking interface (Be's TCP/IP API has a ways to go, still) ++ ++ C-Kermit does not work on BeOS DR8 because of changes in the ++ underlying APIs. Unfortunately not enough changes were made to allow ++ the regular POSIX-based C-Kermit to work either. Note: the lack of a ++ fork() service requires the select()-based CONNECT module, but there ++ is no select(). There is a select() in DR8, but it doesn't work. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 was built for BeOS 4.5 and works in remote mode. It does ++ not include networking support since the APIs are still not there. It ++ is not known if dialing out works, but probably not. Be experts are ++ welcome to lend a hand. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.16. C-KERMIT AND DG/UX ++ ++ [ [506]Top ] [ [507]Contents ] [ [508]Section Contents ] [ [509]Next ] ++ [ [510]Previous ] ++ ++ Somebody downloaded the C-Kermit 6.0 binary built under DG/UX 5.40 and ++ ran it under DG/UX 5.4R3.10 -- it worked OK except that file dates for ++ incoming files were all written as 1 Jan 1970. Cause and cure unknown. ++ Workaround: SET ATTRIBUTE DATE OFF. Better: Use a version of C-Kermit ++ built under and for DG/UX 5.4R3.10. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.17. C-KERMIT AND SEQUENT DYNIX ++ ++ [ [511]Top ] [ [512]Contents ] [ [513]Section Contents ] [ [514]Next ] ++ [ [515]Previous ] ++ ++ Reportedly, when coming into a Sequent Unix (DYNIX) system through an ++ X.25 connection, Kermit doesn't work right because the Sequent's ++ FIONREAD ioctl returns incorrect data. To work around, use the ++ 1-character-at-a-time version of myread() in ckutio.c (i.e. undefine ++ MYREAD in ckutio.c and rebuild the program). This is unsatisfying ++ because two versions of the program would be needed -- one for use ++ over X.25, and the other for serial and TCP/IP connections. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.18. C-KERMIT AND {FREE,OPEN,NET}BSD ++ ++ [ [516]Top ] [ [517]Contents ] [ [518]Section Contents ] [ [519]Next ] ++ [ [520]Previous ] ++ ++ Some NebBSD users have reported difficulty escaping back from CONNECT ++ mode, usually when running NetBSD on non-PC hardware. Probably a ++ keyboard issue. ++ ++ NetBSD users have also reported that C-Kermit doesn't pop back to the ++ prompt if the modem drops carrier. This needs to be checked out & ++ fixed if possible. ++ ++ (All the above seems to work properly in C-Kermit 7.0 and later.) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.19. C-KERMIT AND MAC OS X (Rhapsody, Darwin, Jaguar, Panther) ++ ++ [ [521]Top ] [ [522]Contents ] [ [523]Section Contents ] [ [524]Next ] ++ [ [525]Previous ] ++ ++ Mac OS X is Apple's 4.4BSD Unix variety, closely related to FreeBSD, ++ but different. "uname -a" is singularly uninformative, as in Linux, ++ giving only the Darwin kernel version number. As far as I can tell, ++ there is no way to find out the Mac OS X version number, such as 10.3 ++ (in Linux you can find the distribution version in a ++ distribution-dependent file). Here are some points to be aware of: ++ ++ * The biggest gotcha for Kermit users is that Mac OS X does not ++ support serial ports and, as far as I can tell, doesn't support ++ its built-in modem either, for anything other than making Internet ++ connections. Macintoshes capable of running Mac OS X, such as the ++ G5, some without serial ports and without any APIs to support ++ them, and also without the UUCP family of programs (including cu), ++ nor any standard for serial-port lockfile directory. ++ * At least early versions of Mac OS X came without Curses, Termlib, ++ or Terminfo libraries. Later versions seem to have ncurses. Kermit ++ uses curses for its file-transfer display. See elsewhere about ++ curses-vs-ncurses confusion. ++ * In the HFS+ file system, filenames are case-folded. Thus ++ "makefile" and "Makefile" are the same file. The UFS file system ++ is, like normal Unix, case-sensitive. ++ * Files that are composed of a resource fork and a data fork... I ++ doubt that C-Kermit does anything useful with them. There is no ++ code in C-Kermit for traditional two-forked Macintosh files, but ++ it could be added if there is any demand. ++ * In case you want to transfer a traditional Macintosh text file (or ++ data fork of a file that is plain text), you can use these ++ C-Kermit commands: ++ ++set file eol cr ++set file character-set apple-quickdraw ++send /text filename ++ ++ * File or pathnames that include spaces must be enclosed in either ++ doublequotes or curly braces in C-Kermit commands. ++ * Mac OS X has its own package format for applications, called ++ "fink". Various fink packages for C-Kermit are floating around ++ that are not standard releases. For example, there's a C-Kermit ++ 8.0.201 package in which C-Kermit was modifed (at least) to use a ++ UUCP lockfile directory that does not exist on vanilla Mac OS X ++ systems. ++ ++ Mac OS X and Serial Ports ++ ++ Apple is in the forefront of companies that believe serial ports have ++ no use in the modern world and so has simply eliminated all traces of ++ them from its machines and OS. But of course serial ports are still ++ needed to connect not only to external modems, but also to the control ++ ports of hubs, routers, terminal servers, PBXs, and similar devices, ++ not to mention barcode readers, POS systems and components, automated ++ factory-floor equipment, and scientific, medical, and lab equipment ++ (to name a few). Among workers in these areas, there is a need to add ++ serial ports back onto this platform, which is being filled by ++ third-party products such as the [526]Keyspan USB Serial Adapter. To ++ use the Keyspan device, you must install the accompanying device ++ drivers, which wind up giving you serial ports with names like ++ /dev/cu.USA19H3b1P1.1. ++ ++ To configure your Mac OS X system to allow C-Kermit to use these (or ++ any other) serial devices: ++ ++ 1. su ++ chgrp xxxx /var/spool/lock ++ chmod g+w /var/spool/lock ++ chgrp xxxx /dev/cu.* ++ (where xxxx is the name of the group for users to whom serial-port ++ access is to be granted). Use "admin" or other existing group, or ++ create a new group if desired. NB: ++ ++ In the absence of official guidance from Apple or anyone else, we ++ choose /var/spool/lock as the lockfile directory because this ++ directory (a) already exists on vanilla Mac OS X installations, and ++ (b) it is the directory used for serial-port lockfiles on many ++ other platforms. ++ 2. Put all users who need access to the serial port in the same ++ group. ++ 3. Make sure the serial device files that are to be used by C-Kermit ++ have group read-write permission and (if you care) lack world ++ read-write permission, e.g.: ++ chmod g+rw,o-rw /dev/cu.* ++ ++ If you do the above, then there's no need to become root to use ++ Kermit, or to make Kermit suid or sgid. Just do this: ++ ++chmod 775 wermit ++mv wermit /usr/local/bin/kermit ++ ++ (or whatever spot is more appropriate). For greater detail about ++ installation (man page, etc), [527]CLICK HERE. ++ ++ Back when Macs had serial ports, they were not RS-232 (the standard ++ for connecting computers with nearby modems) but rather RS-422 or -423 ++ (a standard for connecting serial devices over longer distances). ++ Macintosh serial ports do not support modems well because they do not ++ have enough wires (or more properly in the case RS-422/423, wire ++ pairs) to convey a useful subset of modem signals. The Keyspan USB ++ adapter gives you two Mini-Din8 RS-422 ports, that are no better (or ++ worse) for communicating with modems or serial devices than a real Mac ++ Din-8 port was. In essense, you get Data In, Data Out, and two modem ++ signals. It looks to me as if the signals chosen by Keyspan are RTS ++ and CTS. This gives you hardware flow control, but at the expense of ++ Carrier Detect. Thus to use C-Kermit with a Keyspan USB serial port, ++ you must tell C-Kermit to: ++ ++set modem type none ; (don't expect a modem) ++set carrier-watch off ; (ignore carrier signal) ++set port /dev/cu.USA19H3b1P1.1 ; (open the port) ++set flow rts/cts ; (this is the default) ++set speed 57600 ; (or whatever) ++connect ; (or whatever) ++ ++ Use Ctrl-\C in the normal manner to escape back to the C-Kermit> ++ prompt. Kermit can't pop back to its prompt automatically when Carrier ++ drops because there is no Carrier signal. ++ ++ Instructions for the built-in modem remain to be written. ++ ++ Links: ++ * [528]Unix tips for Mac OS X (Jerry Stratton) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.20. C-KERMIT AND COHERENT ++ ++ [ [529]Top ] [ [530]Contents ] [ [531]Section Contents ] [ ++ [532]Previous ] ++ ++ Also see: ++ ++ [533]http://www.uni-giessen.de/faq/archiv/coherent-faq.general/msg00 ++ 000.html ++ ++ Mark Williams COHERENT was perhaps the first commercial Unix-based ++ operating system for PCs, first appearing about 1983 or -84 for the ++ PC/XT (?), and popular until about 1993, when Linux took over. ++ C-Kermit, as of version 8.0, is still current for COHERENT 386 4.2 ++ (i.e. only for i386 and above). Curses is included, but lots of other ++ features are omitted due to lack of the appropriate OS features, APIs, ++ libraries, hardware, or just space: e.g. TCP/IP, floating-point ++ arithmetic, learned scripts. Earlier versions of COHERENT ran on 8086 ++ and 80286, but these are to small to build or run C-Kermit, but ++ G-Kermit should be OK (as might be ancient versions of C-Kermit). ++ ++ You can actually build a version with floating point support -- just ++ take -DNOFLOAT out of CFLAGS and add -lm to LIBS; NOFLOAT is the ++ default because COHERENT tends to run on old PCs that don't have ++ floating-point hardware. You can also add "-f" to CFLAGS to have it ++ link in the floating-point emulation library. Also I'm not sure why ++ -DNOLEARN is included, since it depends on select(), which COHERENT ++ has. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4. GENERAL UNIX-SPECIFIC HINTS, LIMITATIONS, AND BUGS ++ ++ [ [534]Top ] [ [535]Contents ] [ [536]Next ] [ [537]Previous ] ++ ++ 4.1. Modem Signals ++ ++ There seems to be an escalating demand for the ability to control ++ "dumb serial devices" (such as "smartcard readers", barcode readers, ++ etc) by explicitly manipulating modem signals, particularly RTS. This ++ might have been easy to do in DOS, where there is no operating system ++ standing between the application and the serial device, but it is ++ problematic in Unix, where modem signals are controlled by the serial ++ device driver. If the driver does not provide an API for doing this, ++ then the application can't do it. If it does provide an API, expect it ++ to be totally different on each Unix platform, since there is no ++ standard for this. ++ ++ 4.2. NFS Troubles ++ ++ Beginning with C-Kermit 6.0, the default C-Kermit prompt includes your ++ current (working) directory; for example: ++ ++ [/usr/olga] C-Kermit> ++ ++ (In C-Kermit 7.0 the square braces were replaced by round parentheses ++ to avoid conflicts with ISO 646 national character sets.) ++ ++ If that directory is on an NFS-mounted disk, and NFS stops working or ++ the disk becomes unavailable, C-Kermit will hang waiting for NFS ++ and/or the disk to come back. Whether you can interrupt C-Kermit when ++ it is hung this way depends on the specific OS. Kermit has called the ++ operating systems's getcwd() function, and is waiting for it to ++ return. Some versions of Unix (e.g. HP-UX 9.x) allow this function to ++ be interrupted with SIGINT (Ctrl-C), others (such as HP-UX 8.x) do ++ not. To avoid this effect, you can always use SET PROMPT to change ++ your prompt to something that does not involve calling getcwd(), but ++ if NFS is not responding, C-Kermit will still hang any time you give a ++ command that refers to an NFS-mounted directory. Also note that in ++ some cases, the uninterruptibility of NFS-dependent system or library ++ calls is considered a bug, and sometimes there are patches. For HP-UX, ++ for example: ++ ++ replaced by: ++ HP-UX 10.20 libc PHCO_8764 PHCO_14891/PHCO_16723 ++ HP-UX 10.10 libc PHCO_8763 PHCO_14254/PHCO_16722 ++ HP-UX 9.x libc PHCO_7747 S700 PHCO_13095 ++ HP-UX 9.x libc PHCO_6779 S800 PHCO_11162 ++ ++ 4.3. C-Kermit as Login Shell ++ ++ You might have reason to make C-Kermit the login shell for a specific ++ user, by entering the pathname of Kermit (possibly with command-line ++ switches, such as -x to put it in server mode) into the shell field of ++ the /etc/passwd file. This works pretty well. In some cases, for ++ "ultimate security", you might want to use a version built with ++ -DNOPUSH (see the [538]Configurations Options document for this, but ++ even if you don't, then PUSHing or shelling out from C-Kermit just ++ brings up a new copy of C-Kermit (but warning: this does not prevent ++ the user from explicitly running a shell; e.g. "run /bin/sh"; use ++ NOPUSH to prevent this). ++ ++ 4.4. C-Kermit versus screen and splitvt ++ ++ C-Kermit file transfers will probably not work if attemped through the ++ "splitvt" or GNU "screen" programs because the screen optimization (or ++ at least, line wrapping, control-character absorption) done by this ++ package interferes with Kermit's packets. ++ ++ The same can apply to any other environment in which the user's ++ session is captured, monitored, recorded, or manipulated. Examples ++ include the 'script' program (for making a typescript of a session), ++ the Computronics PEEK package and pksh (at least versions of it prior ++ to 1.9K), and so on. ++ ++ You might try the following -- what we call "doomsday Kermit" -- ++ settings to push packets through even the densest and most obstructive ++ connections, such as "screen" and "splitvt" (and certain kinds of 3270 ++ protocol emulators): Give these commands to BOTH Kermit programs: ++ ++ SET FLOW NONE ++ SET CONTROL PREFIX ALL ++ SET RECEIVE PACKET-LENGTH 70 ++ SET RECEIVE START 62 ++ SET SEND START 62 ++ SET SEND PAUSE 100 ++ SET BLOCK B ++ ++ If it works, it will be slow. ++ ++ 4.5. C-Kermit versus DOS Emulators ++ ++ On Unix workstations equipped with DOS emulators like SoftPC, watch ++ out for what these emulators do to the serial port drivers. After ++ using a DOS emulator, particularly if you use it to run DOS ++ communications software, you might have to reconfigure the serial ++ ports for use by Unix. ++ ++ 4.6. C-Kermit versus Job Control ++ ++ Interruption by Ctrl-Z makes Unix C-Kermit try to suspend itself with ++ kill(0,SIGTSTP), but only on platforms that support job control, as ++ determined by whether the symbol SIGTSTP is defined (or on POSIX or ++ SVR4 systems, if syconf(_SC_JOB_CONTROL) or _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL in ++ addition to SIGTSTP). However, if Kermit is running under a login ++ shell (such as the original Bourne shell) that does not support job ++ control, the user's session hangs and must be logged out from another ++ terminal, or hung up on. There is no way Kermit can defend itself ++ against this. If you use a non-job control shell on a computer that ++ supports job control, give a command like "stty susp undef" to fix it ++ so the suspend signal is not attached to any particular key, or give ++ the command SET SUSPEND OFF to C-Kermit, or build C-Kermit with ++ -DNOJC. ++ ++ 4.7. Dates and Times ++ ++ Unix time conversion functions typically apply locale rules to return ++ local time in terms of any seasonal time zone change in effect for the ++ given date. The diffdate function assumes that the same timezone rules ++ are in effect for both dates, but a date with timezone information ++ will be converted to the local time zone in effect at the given time, ++ e.g., a GMT specification will produce either a Standard Time or ++ Daylight Savings Time, depending on which applies at the given time. ++ An example using the 2001 seasonal change from EDT (-0400) to EST ++ (-0500): ++ ++ C-Kermit> DATE 20011028 05:01:02 GMT ; EDT ++ 20011028 01:01:02 ++ C-Kermit> DATE 20011028 06:01:02 GMT ; EST ++ 20011028 01:01:02 ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ but the implicit change in timezone offset is not recognized: ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo \fdiffdate(20011028 05:01:02 GMT, 20011028 06:01:02 GMT) ++ +0:00 ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Date/time arithmetic, offsets, delta times, and timezone support are ++ new to C-Kermit 8.0, and might be expected to evolve and improve in ++ subsequent releases. ++ ++ On some platforms, files downloaded with HTTP receive the current ++ timestamp, rather than the HTTP "Last Modified" time (this can be ++ fixed by including utime.h, e.g. in SunOS and Tru64...). ++ ++ 4.8. Pseudoterminals ++ ++ The SSH and PTY commands work by assigning a pseudoterminal and ++ reading and writing from it. Performance varies according to the ++ specific platform ranging from very fast to very flow. ++ ++ SSH and PTY commands can fail if (a) all pseudoterminals are in use; ++ or (b) you do not have read/write access to the pseudoterminal that ++ was assigned. An example of (b) was reported with the Zipslack ++ Slackware Linux distribution, in which the pseudoterminals were ++ created with crw-r--r-- permission, instead of crw-rw-rw-. ++ ++ 4.9. Miscellaneous ++ ++ * Reportedly, the Unix C-Kermit server, under some conditions, on ++ certain particular systems, fails to log out its login session ++ upon receipt of a BYE command. Before relying on the BYE command ++ working, test it a few times to make sure it works on your system: ++ there might be system configuration or security mechanisms to ++ prevent an inferior process (like Kermit) from killing a superior ++ one (like the login shell). ++ * On AT&T 7300 (3B1) machines, you might have to "stty nl1" before ++ starting C-Kermit. Do this if characters are lost during ++ communications operations. ++ * Under the bash shell (versions prior to 1.07 from CWRU), "pushing" ++ to an inferior shell and then exiting back to Kermit leaves Kermit ++ in the background such that it must be explicitly fg'd. This is ++ reportedly fixed in version 1.07 of bash (and definitely in modern ++ bash versions). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5. INITIALIZATION AND COMMAND FILES ++ ++ [ [539]Top ] [ [540]Contents ] [ [541]Next ] [ [542]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit's initialization file for Unix is .kermrc (lowercase, starts ++ with period) in your home directory, unless Kermit was built with the ++ system-wide initialization-file option (see the [543]C-Kermit for Unix ++ Installation Instructions). ++ ++ C-Kermit identifies your home directory based on the environment ++ variable, HOME. Most Unix systems set this variable automatically when ++ you log in. If C-Kermit can't find your initialization file, check ++ your HOME variable: ++ ++ echo $HOME (at the Unix prompt) ++ ++ or: ++ ++ echo \$(HOME) (at the C-Kermit prompt) ++ ++ If HOME is not defined, or is defined incorrectly, add the appropriate ++ definition to your Unix .profile or .login file, depending on your ++ shell: ++ ++ setenv HOME full-pathname-of-your-home-directory (C-Shell, .login file) ++ ++ or: ++ ++ HOME=full-pathname-of-your-home-directory (sh, ksh, .profile file) ++ export HOME ++ ++ NOTE: Various other operations depend on the correct definition of ++ HOME. These include the "tilde-expansion" feature, which allows you to ++ refer to your home directory as "~" in filenames used in C-Kermit ++ commands, e.g.: ++ ++ send ~/.kermrc ++ ++ as well as the \v(home) variable. ++ ++ Prior to version 5A(190), C-Kermit would look for its initialization ++ file in the current directory if it was not found in the home ++ directory. This feature was removed from 5A(190) because it was a ++ security risk. Some people, however, liked this behavior and had ++ .kermrc files in all their directories that would set up things ++ appropriately for the files therein. If you want this behavior, you ++ can accomplish it in various ways, for example: ++ ++ * Create a shell alias, for example: ++ alias kd="kermit -Y ./.kermrc" ++ * Create a .kermrc file in your home directory, whose contents are: ++ take ./.kermrc ++ ++ Suppose you need to pass a password from the Unix command line to a ++ C-Kermit script program, in such a way that it does not show up in ++ "ps" or "w" listings. Here is a method (not guaranteed to be 100% ++ secure, but definitely more secure than the more obvious methods): ++ ++ echo mypassword | kermit myscript ++ ++ The "myscript" file contains all the commands that need to be executed ++ during the Kermit session, up to and including EXIT, and also includes ++ an ASK or ASKQ command to read the password from standard input, which ++ has been piped in from the Unix 'echo' command, but it must not ++ include a CONNECT command. Only "kermit myscript" shows up in the ps ++ listing. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6. COMMUNICATION SPEED SELECTION ++ ++ [ [544]Top ] [ [545]Contents ] [ [546]Next ] [ [547]Previous ] ++ ++ Version-7 based Unix implementations, including 4.3 BSD and earlier ++ and Unix systems based upon BSD, use a 4-bit field to record a serial ++ device's terminal speed. This leaves room for 16 speeds, of which the ++ first 14 are normally: ++ ++ 0, 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, ++ and 9600 ++ ++ The remaining two are usually called EXTA and EXTB, and are defined by ++ the particular Unix implementation. C-Kermit determines which speeds ++ are available on your system based on whether symbols for them are ++ defined in your terminal device header files. EXTA is generally ++ assumed to be 19200 and EXTB 38400, but these assumptions might be ++ wrong, or they might not apply to a particular device that does not ++ support these speeds. Presumably, if you try to set a speed that is ++ not legal on a particular device, the driver will return an error, but ++ this can not be guaranteed. ++ ++ On these systems, it is usually not possible to select a speed of ++ 14400 bps for use with V.32bis modems. In that case, use 19200 or ++ 38400 bps, configure your modem to lock its interface speed and to use ++ RTS/CTS flow control, and tell C-Kermit to SET FLOW RTS/CTS and SET ++ DIAL SPEED-MATCHING OFF. ++ ++ The situation is similar, but different, in System V. SVID Third ++ Edition lists the same speeds, 0 through 38400. ++ ++ Some versions of Unix, and/or terminal device drivers that come with ++ certain third-party add-in high-speed serial communication interfaces, ++ use the low "baud rates" to stand for higher ones. For example, SET ++ SPEED 50 gets you 57600 bps; SET SPEED 75 gets you 76800; SET SPEED ++ 110 gets 115200. ++ ++ SCO ODT 3.0 is an example where a "baud-rate-table patch" can be ++ applied that can rotate the tty driver baud rate table such that ++ 600=57600 and 1800=115k baud. Similarly for Digiboard ++ multiport/portservers, which have a "fastbaud" setting that does this. ++ Linux has a "setserial" command that can do it, etc. ++ ++ More modern Unixes support POSIX-based speed setting, in which the ++ selection of speeds is not limited by a 4-bit field. C-Kermit 6.1 ++ incorporates a new mechanism for finding out (at compile time) which ++ serial speeds are supported by the operating system that does not ++ involve editing of source code by hand; on systems like Solaris 5.1, ++ IRIX 6.2, and SCO OSR5.0.4, "set speed ?" will list speeds up to ++ 460800 or 921600. In C-Kermit 7.0 and later: ++ ++ 1. If a symbol for a particular speed (say B230400 for 230400 bps) ++ appears in whatever header file defines acceptable serial speeds ++ (e.g. or or , etc), the ++ corresponding speed will appear in C-Kermit's "set speed ?" list. ++ 2. The fact that a given speed is listed in the header files and ++ appears in C-Kermit's list does not mean the driver will accept ++ it. For example, a computer might have some standard serial ports ++ plus some add-on ones with different drivers that accept a ++ different repertoire of speeds. ++ 3. The fact that a given speed is accepted by the driver does not ++ guarantee the underlying hardware can accept it. ++ ++ When Kermit is given a "set speed" command for a particular device, ++ the underlying system service is called to set the speed; its return ++ code is checked and the SET SPEED command fails if the return code ++ indicates failure. Regardless of the system service return status, the ++ device's speed is then read back and if it does not match the speed ++ that was requested, an error message is printed and the command fails. ++ ++ Even when the command succeeds, this does not guarantee successful ++ operation at a particular speed, especially a high one. That depends ++ on electricity, information theory, etc. How long is the cable, what ++ is its capacitance, how well is it shielded, etc, not to mention that ++ every connection has two ends and its success depends on both of them. ++ (With the obvious caveats about internal modems, is the cable really ++ connected, interrupt conflicts, etc etc etc). ++ ++ Note, in particular, that there is a certain threshold above which ++ modems can not "autobaud" -- i.e. detect the serial interface speed ++ when you type AT (or whatever else the modem's recognition sequence ++ might be). Such modems need to be engaged at a lower speed (say 2400 ++ or 9600 or even 115200 -- any speed below their autobaud threshold) ++ and then must be given a modem-specific command (which can be found in ++ the modem manual) to change their interface speed to the desired ++ higher speed, and then the software must also be told to change to the ++ new, higher speed. ++ ++ For additional information, read [548]Section 9.5 of the Installation ++ Instructions, plus any platform-specific notes in [549]Section 3 ++ above. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7. COMMUNICATIONS AND DIALING ++ ++ [ [550]Top ] [ [551]Contents ] [ [552]Next ] [ [553]Previous ] ++ ++ 7.1. Serial Ports and Modems ++ ++ If you SET LINE to a serial port modem-control device that has nothing ++ plugged in to it, or has a modem connected that is powered off, and ++ you have not given a prior SET MODEM TYPE or SET CARRIER-WATCH OFF ++ command, the SET LINE command is likely to hang. In most cases, you ++ can Ctrl-C out. If not, you'll have to kill C-Kermit from another ++ terminal. ++ ++ Similarly, if you give a SET MODEM TYPE HAYES (or USR, or any other ++ modem type besides DIRECT, NONE, or UNKNOWN) and then SET LINE to an ++ empty port, the subsequent close (implicit or explicit) is liable to ++ hang or even crash (through no fault of Kermit's -- the hanging or ++ crashing is inside a system call such as cfsetospeed() or close()). ++ ++ The SET CARRIER-WATCH command works as advertised only if the ++ underlying operating system and device drivers support this feature; ++ in particular only if a read() operation returns immediately with an ++ error code if the carrier signal goes away or, failing that, if ++ C-Kermit can obtain the modem signals from the device driver (you can ++ tell by giving a "set line" command to a serial device, and then a ++ "show communications" command -- if modem signals are not listed, ++ C-Kermit won't be able to detect carrier loss, the WAIT command will ++ not work, etc). Of course, the device itself (e.g. modem) must be ++ configured appropriately and the cables convey the carrier and other ++ needed signals, etc. ++ ++ If you dial out from Unix system, but then notice a lot of weird ++ character strings being stuck into your session at random times ++ (especially if they look like +++ATQ0H0 or login banners or prompts), ++ that means that getty is also trying to control the same device. ++ You'll need to dial out on a device that is not waiting for a login, ++ or else disable getty on the device. ++ ++ As of version 7.0, C-Kermit makes explicit checks for the Carrier ++ Detect signal, and so catches hung-up connections much better than 6.0 ++ and earlier. However, it still can not be guaranteed to catch every ++ ever CD on-to-off transition. For example, when the HP-UX version of ++ C-Kermit is in CONNECT mode on a dialed connection and CARRIER-WATCH ++ ON or AUTO, and you turn off the modem, HP-UX is stuck in a read() ++ that never returns. (C-Kermit does not pop back to its prompt ++ automatically, but you can still escape back.) ++ ++ If, on the other hand, you log out from the remote system, and it ++ hangs up, and CD drops on the local modem, C-Kermit detects this and ++ pops back to the prompt as it should. (Evidently there can be a ++ difference between CD and DSR turning off at the same time, versus CD ++ turning off while DSR stays on; experimentation with &S0/&S1/&S2 on ++ your modem might produce the desired results). ++ ++ When Unix C-Kermit exits, it closes (and must close) the ++ communications device. If you were dialed out, this will most likely ++ hang up the connection. If you want to get out of Kermit and still use ++ Kermit's communication device, you have several choices: ++ ++ 1. Shell out from Kermit or suspend Kermit, and refer to the device ++ literally (as in "term -blah -blah < /dev/cua > /dev/cua"). ++ 2. Shell out from Kermit and use the device's file descriptor which ++ Kermit makes available to you in the \v(ttyfd) variable. ++ 3. Use C-Kermit's REDIRECT command. ++ 4. Use C-Kermit new EXEC /REDIRECT command. ++ ++ If you are having trouble dialing: ++ ++ 1. Make sure the dialout line is configured correctly. More about ++ this below. ++ 2. Make sure all necessary patches are installed for your operating ++ system. ++ 3. If you can't dial on a "bidirectional" line, then configure it for ++ outbound-only (remove the getty) and try again. (The mechanisms -- ++ if any -- for grabbing bidirectional lines for dialout vary wildly ++ among Unix implementations and releases, and C-Kermit -- which ++ runs on well over 300 different Unix variations -- makes no effort ++ to keep up with them; the recommended method for coping with this ++ situation is to wrap C-Kermit in a shell script that takes the ++ appropriate actions.) ++ 4. Make sure C-Kermit's SET DIAL and SET MODEM parameters agree with ++ the modem you are actually using -- pay particular attention to ++ SET DIAL SPEED-MATCHING. ++ 5. If MODEM HANGUP-METHOD is set to RS232-SIGNAL, change it to ++ MODEM-COMMAND. Or vice-versa. ++ 6. Try SET DIAL HANGUP OFF before the DIAL command. Also, SET DIAL ++ DISPLAY ON to watch what's happening. See [554]Section 8 of the ++ [555]Installation Instructions. ++ 7. Read pages 50-67 of [556]Using C-Kermit. ++ 8. As a last resort, don't use the DIAL command at all; SET CARRIER ++ OFF and CONNECT to the modem and dial interactively, or write a ++ script program to dial the modem. ++ ++ Make sure your dialout line is correctly configured for dialing out ++ (as opposed to login). The method for doing this is different for each ++ kind of Unix system. Consult your system documentation for configuring ++ lines for dialing out (for example, Sun SparcStation IPC users should ++ read the section "Setting up Modem Software" in the Desktop SPARC Sun ++ System & Network Manager's Guide; HP-9000 workstation users should ++ consult the manual Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals, etc). ++ ++ Symptom: DIAL works, but a subsequent CONNECT command does not. ++ Diagnosis: the modem is not asserting Carrier Detect (CD) after the ++ connection is made, or the cable does not convey the CD signal. Cure: ++ Reconfigure the modem, replace the cable. Workaround: SET CARRIER OFF ++ (at least in System-V based Unix versions). ++ ++ For Berkeley-Unix-based systems (4.3BSD and earlier), Kermit includes ++ code to use LPASS8 mode when parity is none, which is supposed to ++ allow 8-bit data and Xon/Xoff flow control at the same time. However, ++ as of edit 174, this code is entirely disabled because it is ++ unreliable: even though the host operating system might (or might not) ++ support LPASS8 mode correctly, the host access protocols (terminal ++ servers, telnet, rlogin, etc) generally have no way of finding out ++ about it and therefore render it ineffective, causing file transfer ++ failures. So as of edit 174, Kermit once again uses rawmode for 8-bit ++ data, and so there is no Xon/Xoff flow control during file transfer or ++ terminal emulation in the Berkeley-based versions (4.3 and earlier, ++ not 4.4). ++ ++ Also on Berkeley-based systems (4.3 and earlier), there is apparently ++ no way to configure a dialout line for proper carrier handling, i.e. ++ ignore carrier during dialing, require carrier thereafter, get a fatal ++ error on any attempt to read from the device after carrier drops (this ++ is handled nicely in System V by manipulation of the CLOCAL flag). The ++ symptom is that carrier loss does not make C-Kermit pop back to the ++ prompt automatically. This is evident on the NeXT, for example, but ++ not on SunOS, which supports the CLOCAL flag. This is not a Kermit ++ problem, but a limitation of the underlying operating system. For ++ example, the cu program on the NeXT doesn't notice carrier loss ++ either, whereas cu on the Sun does. ++ ++ On certain AT&T Unix systems equipped with AT&T modems, DIAL and ++ HANGUP don't work right. Workarounds: (1) SET DIAL HANGUP OFF before ++ attempting to dial; (2) If HANGUP doesn't work, SET LINE, and then SET ++ LINE to totally close and reopen the device. If all else ++ fails, SET CARRIER OFF. ++ ++ C-Kermit does not contain any particular support for AT&T DataKit ++ devices. You can use Kermit software to dial in to a DataKit line, but ++ C-Kermit does not contain the specialized code required to dial out ++ from a DataKit line. If the Unix system is connected to DataKit via ++ serial ports, dialout should work normally (e.g. set line /dev/ttym1, ++ set speed 19200, connect, and then see the DESTINATION: prompt, from ++ which you can connect to another computer on the DataKit network or to ++ an outgoing modem pool, etc). But if the Unix system is connected to ++ the DataKit network through the special DataKit interface board, then ++ SET LINE to a DataKit pseudodevice (such as /dev/dk031t) will not work ++ (you must use the DataKit "dk" or "dkcu" program instead). In C-Kermit ++ 7.0 and later, you can make Kermit connections "though" dk or dkcu ++ using "set line /pty". ++ ++ In some BSD-based Unix C-Kermit versions, SET LINE to a port that has ++ nothing plugged in to it with SET CARRIER ON will hang the program (as ++ it should), but it can't be interrupted with Ctrl-C. The interrupt ++ trap is correctly armed, but apparently the Unix open() call cannot be ++ interrupted in this case. When SET CARRIER is OFF or AUTO, the SET ++ LINE will eventually return, but then the program hangs ++ (uninterruptibly) when the EXIT or QUIT command (or, presumably, ++ another SET LINE command) is given. The latter is probably because of ++ the attempt to hang up the modem. (In edit 169, a timeout alarm was ++ placed around this operation.) ++ ++ With SET DIAL HANGUP OFF in effect, the DIAL command might work only ++ once, but not again on the same device. In that case, give a CLOSE ++ command to close the device, and then another SET LINE command to ++ re-open the same device. Or rebuild your version of Kermit with the ++ -DCLSOPN compile-time switch. ++ ++ The DIAL command says "To cancel: Type your interrupt character ++ (normally Ctrl-C)." This is just one example of where program messages ++ and documentation assume your interrupt character is Ctrl-C. But it ++ might be something else. In most (but not necessarily all) cases, the ++ character referred to is the one that generates the SIGINT signal. If ++ Ctrl-C doesn't act as an interrupt character for you, type the Unix ++ command "stty -a" or "stty all" or "stty everything" to see what your ++ interrupt character is. (Kermit could be made to find out what the ++ interrupt character is, but this would require a lot of ++ platform-dependent coding and #ifdefs, and a new routine and interface ++ between the platform-dependent and platform-independent parts of the ++ program.) ++ ++ In general, the hangup operation on a serial communication device is ++ prone to failure. C-Kermit tries to support many, many different kinds ++ of computers, and there seems to be no portable method for hanging up ++ a modem connection (i.e. turning off the RS-232 DTR signal and then ++ turning it back on again). If HANGUP, DIAL, and/or Ctrl-\H do not work ++ for you, and you are a programmer, look at the tthang() function in ++ ckutio.c and see if you can add code to make it work correctly for ++ your system, and send the code to the address above. (NOTE: This ++ problem has been largely sidestepped as of edit 188, in which Kermit ++ first attempts to hang up the modem by "escaping back" via +++ and ++ then giving the modem's hangup command, e.g. ATH0, when DIAL ++ MODEM-HANGUP is ON, which is the default setting.) ++ ++ Even when Kermit's modem-control software is configured correctly for ++ your computer, it can only work right if your modem is also configured ++ to assert the CD signal when it is connected to the remote modem and ++ to hang up the connection when your computer drops the DTR signal. So ++ before deciding Kermit doesn't work with your modem, check your modem ++ configuration AND the cable (if any) connecting your modem to the ++ computer -- it should be a straight-through modem cable conducting the ++ signals FG, SG, TD, RD, RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, CD, and RI. ++ ++ Many Unix systems keep aliases for dialout devices; for example, ++ /dev/acu might be an alias for /dev/tty00. But most of these Unix ++ systems also use UUCP lockfile conventions that do not take this ++ aliasing into account, so if one user assigns (e.g.) /dev/acu, then ++ another user can still assign the same device by referring to its ++ other name. This is not a Kermit problem -- Kermit must follow the ++ lockfile conventions used by the vendor-supplied software (cu, tip, ++ uucp). ++ ++ The SET FLOW-CONTROL KEEP option should be given *before* any ++ communication (dialing, terminal emulation, file transfer, ++ INPUT/OUTPUT/TRANSMIT, etc) is attempted, if you want C-Kermit to use ++ all of the device's preexisting flow-control related settings. The ++ default flow-control setting is XON/XOFF, and it will take effect when ++ the first communication-related command is given, and a subsequent SET ++ FLOW KEEP command will not necessarily know how to restore *all* of ++ the device's original flow-control settings. ++ ++ 7.2. Network Connections ++ ++ C-Kermit tries to use the 8th bit for data when parity is NONE, and ++ this generally works on real Unix terminal (tty) devices, but it often ++ does not work when the Unix system is accessed over a network via ++ telnet or rlogin protocols, including (in many cases) through terminal ++ servers. For example, an Encore computer with Annex terminal servers ++ only gives a 7-bit path if the rlogin protocol is selected in the ++ terminal server but it gives the full 8 bits if the proprietary RDP ++ protocol is used. ++ ++ If file transfer does not work through a host to which you have ++ rlogin'd, use "rlogin -8" rather than "rlogin". If that doesn't work, ++ tell both Kermit programs to "set parity space". ++ ++ The Encore TELNET server does not allow long bursts of input. When you ++ have a TELNET connection to an Encore, tell C-Kermit on the Encore to ++ SET RECEIVE PACKET-LENGTH 200 or thereabouts. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8. HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL ++ ++ [ [557]Top ] [ [558]Contents ] [ [559]Next ] [ [560]Previous ] ++ ++ SET FLOW RTS/CTS is available in Unix C-Kermit only when the ++ underlying operating system provides an Application Program Interface ++ (API) for turning this feature on and off under program control, which ++ turns out to be a rather rare feature among Unix systems. To see if ++ your Unix C-Kermit version supports hardware flow control, type "set ++ flow ?" at the C-Kermit prompt, and look for "rts/cts" among the ++ options. Other common situations include: ++ ++ 1. The API is available, so "set flow rts/cts" appears as a valid ++ C-Kermit command, but it doesn't do anything because the device ++ driver (part of the operating system) was never coded to do ++ hardware flow control. This is common among System V R4 ++ implementations (details below). ++ 2. The API is not available, so "set flow rts/cts" does NOT appear as ++ a valid C-Kermit command, but you can still get RTS/CTS flow ++ control by selecting a specially named device in your SET LINE ++ command. Examples: ++ + NeXTSTEP: /dev/cufa instead of /dev/cua, /dev/cufb instead of ++ /dev/cub (68040 only; "man zs" for further info). ++ + IRIX: /dev/ttyf2 instead of /dev/ttyd2 or /dev/ttym2 ("man 7 ++ serial"). ++ 3. The API is available, doesn't work, but a workaround as in (2) can ++ be used. ++ 4. The API is available, but Kermit doesn't know about it. In these ++ cases, you can usually use an stty command to enable RTS/CTS on ++ the device, e.g. "stty crtscts" or "stty ctsflow", "stty rtsflow", ++ before starting Kermit, and then tell Kermit to SET FLOW KEEP. ++ 5. No API and no special device drivers. Hardware flow control is ++ completely unavailable. ++ ++ System V R4 based Unixes are supposed to supply a file, ++ which gives Kermit the necessary interface to command the terminal ++ driver to enable/disable hardware flow control. Unfortunately, but ++ predictably, many implementations of SVR4 whimsically place this file ++ in /usr/include/sys rather than /usr/include (where SVID clearly ++ specifies it should be; see SVID, Third Edition, V1, termiox(BA_DEV). ++ Thus if you build C-Kermit with any of the makefile entries that ++ contain -DTERMIOX or -DSTERMIOX (the latter to select ++ ), C-Kermit will have "set flow rts/cts" and possibly ++ other hardware flow-control related commands. BUT... That does not ++ necessarily mean that they will work. In some cases, the underlying ++ functions are simply not coded into the operating system. ++ ++ WARNING: When hardware flow control is available, and you enable in ++ Kermit on a device that is not receiving the CTS signal, Kermit can ++ hang waiting for CTS to come up. This is most easily seen when the ++ local serial port has nothing plugged in to it, or is connected to an ++ external modem that is powered off. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9. TERMINAL CONNECTION AND KEY MAPPING ++ ++ [ [561]Top ] [ [562]Contents ] [ [563]Next ] [ [564]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit is not a terminal emulator. Refer to page 147 of [565]Using ++ C-Kermit, 2nd Edition: "Most versions of C-Kermit -- Unix, VMS, ++ AOS/VS, VOS, etc -- provide terminal connection without emulation. ++ These versions act as a 'semitransparent pipe' between the remote ++ computer and your terminal, terminal emulator, console driver, or ++ window, which in turn emulates (or is) a specific kind of terminal." ++ The environment in which you run C-Kermit is up to you. ++ ++ If you are an X Windows user, you should be aware of an alternative to ++ xterm that supports VT220 emulation, from Thomas E. Dickey: ++ ++ [566]http://dickey.his.com/xterm/xterm.html ++ ++ Unix C-Kermit's SET KEY command currently can not be used with keys ++ that generate "wide" scan codes or multibyte sequences, such as ++ workstation function or arrow keys, because Unix C-Kermit does not ++ have direct access to the keyboard. ++ ++ However, many Unix workstations and/or console drivers provide their ++ own key mapping feature. With xterm, for example, you can use ++ 'xmodmap' ("man xmodmap" for details); here is an xterm mapping to map ++ the Sun keyboard to DEC VT200 values for use with VT-terminal oriented ++ applications like VMS EVE: ++ ++ keycode 101=KP_0 ++ keycode 119=KP_1 ++ keycode 120=KP_2 ++ keycode 121=KP_3 ++ keycode 98=KP_4 ++ keycode 99=KP_5 ++ keycode 100=KP_6 ++ keycode 75=KP_7 ++ keycode 76=KP_8 ++ keycode 77=KP_9 ++ keycode 52=KP_F1 ++ keycode 53=KP_F2 ++ keycode 54=KP_F3 ++ keycode 57=KP_Decimal ++ keycode 28=Left ++ keycode 29=Right ++ keycode 30=KP_Separator ++ keycode 105=KP_F4 ++ keycode 78=KP_Subtract ++ keycode 8=Left ++ keycode 10=Right ++ keycode 32=Up ++ keycode 33=Down ++ keycode 97=KP_Enter ++ ++ Users of Linux consoles can use loadkeys ("man dumpkeys loadkeys ++ keytables" for details. The format used by loadkeys is compatible with ++ that used by Xmodmap, although it is not definitely certain that the ++ keycodes are compatible for different keyboard types (e.g. Sun vs HP ++ vs PC, etc). ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 10. FILE TRANSFER ++ ++ [ [567]Top ] [ [568]Contents ] [ [569]Next ] [ [570]Previous ] ++ ++ If uploads (or downloads) fail immediately, give the CAUTIOUS command ++ to Kermit and try again. If they still fail, then try SET PREFIXING ++ ALL. If they still fail, try SET PARITY SPACE. If they still fail, try ++ ROBUST. ++ ++ If reception (particularly of large files and/or binary files) begins ++ successfully but then fail constently after a certain amount of bytes ++ have been sent, check: ++ ++ * Your ulimit ("ulimit -a") ++ * The amount of available space on the target disk ("df ." or "df -k ++ .") ++ * Your personal disk quota (platform- and site-dependent) ++ * The maximum file size on the receiver's file system (e.g. 2GB in ++ old verions the Linux VFS file system, and/or in applications that ++ have not been recoded to use new "large file" APIs). ++ * If it's an NFS-mounted disk (if so, try uploading to a local disk) ++ * Is there an "idle limit" on the receiving end? ++ ++ If none of these seem to explain it, then the problem is not size ++ related, but reflects some clash between the file contents and the ++ characteristics of the connection, in which case follow the ++ instructions in the first paragraph of this section. ++ ++ Suppose two copies of Kermit are receiving files into the same ++ directory, and the files have the same name, e.g. "foo.bar". Whichever ++ one starts first opens an output file called "foo.bar". The second one ++ sees there is already a foo.bar file, and so renames the existing ++ foo.bar to foo.bar.~1~ (or whatever). When the first file has been ++ received completely, Kermit goes to change its modification time and ++ permissions to those given by the file sender in the Attribute packet. ++ But in Unix, the APIs for doing this take a filename, not a file ++ descriptor. Since the first Kermit's file has been renamed, and the ++ second Kermit is using the original name, the first Kermit changes the ++ modtime and permissions of the second Kermit's file, not its own. ++ Although there might be a way to work around this in the code, e.g. ++ using inode numbers to keep track of which file is which, this would ++ be tricky and most likely not very portable. It's better to set up ++ your application to prevent such things from happening, which is easy ++ enough using the script language, filename templates, etc. ++ ++ Suppose you start C-Kermit with a command-line argument to send or ++ receive a file (e.g. "kermit -r") and then type Ctrl-\c immediately ++ afterwards to escape back and initiate the other end of the transfer, ++ BUT your local Kermit's escape character is not Ctrl-\. In this case, ++ the local Kermit passes the Ctrl-\ to the remote system, and if this ++ is Unix, Ctrl-\ is likely to be its SIGQUIT character, which causes ++ the current program to halt and dump core. Well, just about the first ++ thing C-Kermit does when it starts is to disable the SIGQUIT signal. ++ However, it is still possible for SIGQUIT to cause Kermit to quit and ++ dump core if it is delivered while Kermit is being loaded or started, ++ before the signal can be disabled. There's nothing Kermit itself can ++ do about this, but you can prevent it from happening by disabling ++ SIGQUIT in your Unix session. The command is usually something like: ++ ++ stty quit undef ++ ++ Unix C-Kermit does not reject incoming files on the basis of size. ++ There appears to be no good (reliable, portable) way to determine in ++ advance how much disk space is available, either on the device, or ++ (when quotas or other limits are involved) to the user. ++ ++ Unix C-Kermit discards all carriage returns from incoming files when ++ in text mode. ++ ++ If C-Kermit has problems creating files in writable directories when ++ it is installed setuid or setgid on BSD-based versions of Unix such as ++ NeXTSTEP 3.0, it probably needs to be rebuilt with the -DSW_ACC_ID ++ compilation switch. ++ ++ If you SET FILE DISPLAY FULLSCREEN, and C-Kermit complains "Sorry, ++ terminal type not supported", it means that the terminal library ++ (termcap or termlib) that C-Kermit was built with does not know about ++ a terminal whose name is the current value of your TERM environment ++ variable. If this happens, but you want to have the fullscreen file ++ transfer display, EXIT from C-Kermit and set a Unix terminal type from ++ among the supported values that is also supported by your terminal ++ emulator, or else have an entry for your terminal type added to the ++ system termcap and/or terminfo database. ++ ++ If you attempt to suspend C-Kermit during local-mode file transfer and ++ then continue it in the background (via bg), it will block for "tty ++ output" if you are using the FULLSCREEN file transfer display. This is ++ apparently a problem with curses. Moving a local-mode file transfer ++ back and forth between foreground and background works correctly, ++ however, with the SERIAL, CRT, BRIEF, or NONE file transfer displays. ++ ++ If C-Kermit's command parser no longer echoes, or otherwise acts ++ strangely, after returning from a file transfer with the fullscreen ++ (curses) display, and the curses library for your version of Unix ++ includes the newterm() function, then try rebuilding your version of ++ C-Kermit with -DCK_NEWTERM. Similarly if it echoes doubly, which might ++ even happen during a subsequent CONNECT session. If rebuilding with ++ -DCK_NEWTERM doesn't fix it, then there is something very strange ++ about your system's curses library, and you should probably not use ++ it. Tell C-Kermit to SET FILE DISPLAY CRT, BRIEF, or anything else ++ other than FULLSCREEN, and/or rebuild without -DCK_CURSES, and without ++ linking with (termlib and) curses. Note: This problem seemed to have ++ escalated in C-Kermit 7.0, and -DCK_NEWTERM had to be added to many ++ builds that previously worked without it: Linux, AIX 4.1, DG/UX, etc. ++ In the Linux case, it is obviously because of changes in the (n)curses ++ library; the cause in the other cases is not known. ++ ++ C-Kermit creates backup-file names (such as "oofa.txt.~1~") based on ++ its knowledge of the maximum filename length on the platform where it ++ is running, which is learned at compile time, based on MAXNAMLEN or ++ equivalent symbols from the system header files. But suppose C-Kermit ++ is receiving files on a Unix platform that supports long filenames, ++ but the incoming files are being stored on an NFS-mounted file system ++ that supports only short names. NFS maps the external system to the ++ local APIs, so C-Kermit has no way of knowing that long names will be ++ truncated. Or that C-Kermit is running on a version of Unix that ++ supports both long-name and short-name file systems simultaneously ++ (such as HP-UX 7.00). This can cause unexpected behavior when creating ++ backup files, or worse. For example, you are sending a group of files ++ whose names are differentiated only by characters past the point at ++ which they would be truncated, each file will overwrite the previous ++ one upon arrival. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11. EXTERNAL FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOLS ++ ++ [ [571]Top ] [ [572]Contents ] [ [573]Next ] [ [574]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 11.1. [575]C-Kermit as an External Protocol ++ 11.2. [576]Invoking External Protocols from C-Kermit ++ ++ Unix C-Kermit can be used in conjunction with other communications ++ software in various ways. C-Kermit can be invoked from another ++ communications program as an "external protocol", and C-Kermit can ++ also invoke other communication software to perform external ++ protocols. ++ ++ This sort of operation makes sense only when you are dialing out from ++ your Unix system (or making a network connection from it). If the Unix ++ system is the one you have dialed in to, you don't need any of these ++ tricks. Just run the desired software on your Unix system instead of ++ Kermit. When dialing out from a Unix system, the difficulty is getting ++ two programs to share the same communication device in spite of the ++ Unix UUCP lockfile mechanism, which would normally prevent any ++ sharing, and preventing the external protocol from closing (and ++ therefore hanging up) the device when it exits back to the program ++ that invoked it. ++ ++ 11.1. C-KERMIT AS AN EXTERNAL PROTOCOL ++ ++ [ [577]Top ] [ [578]Contents ] [ [579]Section Contents ] [ [580]Next ] ++ ++ (This section deleted; see [581]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed, Chapter 14.) ++ ++ "pcomm" is a general-purpose terminal program that provides file ++ transfer capabilities itself (X- and YMODEM variations) and the ++ ability to call on external programs to do file transfers (ZMODEM and ++ Kermit, for example). You can tell pcomm the command to send or ++ receive a file with an external protocol: ++ Send Receive ++ ZMODEM sz filename rz ++ Kermit kermit -s filename kermit -r ++ ++ pcomm runs external programs for file transfer by making stdin and ++ stdout point to the modem port, and then exec-ing "/bin/sh -c xxx" ++ (where xxx is the appropriate command). However, C-Kermit does not ++ treat stdin and stdout as the communication device unless you instruct ++ it: ++ ++ ++ Send Receive ++ Kermit kermit -l 0 -s filename kermit -l 0 -r ++ ++ The "-l 0" option means to use file descriptor 0 for the communication ++ device. ++ ++ In general, any program can pass any open file descriptor to C-Kermit ++ for the communication device in the "-l" command-line option. When ++ Kermit is given a number as the argument to the "-l" option, it simply ++ uses it as a file descriptor, and it does not attempt to close it upon ++ exit. ++ ++ Here's another example, for Seyon (a Linux communication program). ++ First try the technique above. If that works, fine; otherwise... If ++ Seyon does not give you a way to access and pass along the file ++ descriptor, but it starts up the Kermit program with its standard i/o ++ redirected to its (Seyon's) communications file descriptor, you can ++ also experiment with the following method, which worked here in brief ++ tests on SunOS. Instead of having Seyon use "kermit -r" or "kermit -s ++ filename" as its Kermit protocol commands, use something like this ++ (examples assume C-Kermit 6.0): ++ ++ For serial connections: ++ ++ kermit -YqQl 0 -r <-- to receive ++ kermit -YqQl 0 -s filename(s) <-- to send one or more files ++ ++ For Telnet connections: ++ ++ kermit -YqQF 0 -r <-- to receive ++ kermit -YqQF 0 -s filename(s) <-- to send one or more files ++ ++ Command line options: ++ ++ Y - skip executing the init file ++ Q - use fast file transfer settings (default in 8.0) ++ l 0 - transfer files using file descriptor 0 for a serial connection ++ F 0 - transfer files using file descriptor 0 for a Telnet connection ++ q - quiet - no messages ++ r - receive ++ s - send ++ ++ 11.2. INVOKING EXTERNAL PROTOCOLS FROM C-KERMIT ++ ++ [ [582]Top ] [ [583]Contents ] [ [584]Section Contents ] [ ++ [585]Previous ] ++ ++ (This section is obsolete, but not totally useless. See Chapter 14 ++ of [586]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition). ++ ++ After you have opened a communication link with C-Kermit's SET LINE ++ (SET PORT) or SET HOST (TELNET) command, C-Kermit makes its file ++ descriptor available to you in the \v(ttyfd) variable so you can pass ++ it along to other programs that you RUN from C-Kermit. Here, for ++ example, C-Kermit runs itself as an external protocol: ++ ++ C-Kermit>set modem type hayes ++ C-Kermit>set line /dev/acu ++ C-Kermit>set speed 2400 ++ C-Kermit>dial 7654321 ++ Call complete. ++ C-Kermit>echo \v(ttyfd) ++ 3 ++ C-Kermit>run kermit -l \v(ttyfd) ++ ++ Other programs that accept open file descriptors on the command line ++ can be started in the same way. ++ ++ You can also use your shell's i/o redirection facilities to assign ++ C-Kermit's open file descriptor (ttyfd) to stdin or stdout. For ++ example, old versions of the Unix ZMODEM programs, sz and rz, when ++ invoked as external protocols, expect to find the communication device ++ assigned to stdin and stdout with no option for specifying any other ++ file descriptor on the sz or rz command line. However, you can still ++ invoke sz and rz as exterior protocols from C-Kermit if your current ++ shell ($SHELL variable) is ksh (the Korn shell) or bash (the ++ Bourne-Again shell), which allows assignment of arbitrary file ++ descriptors to stdin and stdout: ++ ++ C-Kermit> run rz <&\v(ttyfd) >&\v(ttyfd) ++ ++ or: ++ ++ C-Kermit> run sz oofa.zip <&\v(ttyfd) >&\v(ttyfd) ++ ++ In version 5A(190) and later, you can use C-Kermit's REDIRECT command, ++ if it is available in your version of C-Kermit, to accomplish the same ++ thing without going through the shell: ++ ++ C-Kermit> redirect rz ++ ++ or: ++ ++ C-Kermit> redirect sz oofa.zip ++ ++ A complete set of rz,sz,rb,sb,rx,sx macros for Unix C-Kermit is ++ defined in the file ckurzsz.ini. It automatically chooses the best ++ redirection method (but is redundant since C-Kermit 6.0, which now has ++ built-in support for external protocols via its SET PROTOCOL command). ++ ++ Note that external protocols can be used on C-Kermit SET LINE or SET ++ HOST connections only if they operate through standard input and ++ standard output. If they open their own connections, Kermit can't ++ redirect them over its own connection. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 12. SECURITY ++ ++ [ [587]Top ] [ [588]Contents ] [ [589]Next ] [ [590]Previous ] ++ ++ As of version 7.0, C-Kermit supports a wide range of security options ++ for authentication and encryption: Kerberos 4, Kerberos 5 / GSSAPI, ++ SSL/TLS, and SRP. See the separate [591]security document for details. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 13. MISCELLANEOUS USER REPORTS ++ ++ [ [592]Top ] [ [593]Contents ] [ [594]Next ] [ [595]Previous ] ++ ++Date: Thu, 12 Mar 92 1:59:25 MEZ ++From: Walter Mecky ++Subject: Help.Unix.sw ++To: svr4@pcsbst.pcs.com, source@usl.com ++ ++PRODUCT: Unix ++RELEASE: Dell SVR4 V2.1 (is USL V3.0) ++MACHINE: AT-386 ++PATHNAME: /usr/lib/libc.so.1 ++ /usr/ccs/lib/libc.a ++ABSTRACT: Function ttyname() does not close its file descriptor ++DESCRIPTION: ++ ttyname(3C) opens /dev but never closes it. So if it is called ++ often enough the open(2) in ttyname() fails. Because the broken ++ ttyname() is in the shared lib too all programs using it can ++ fail if they call it often enough. One important program is ++ uucico which calls ttyname for every file it transfers. ++ ++ Here is a little test program if your system has the bug: ++ ++#include ++#include ++main() { ++ int i = 0; ++ while (ttyname(0) != NULL) ++ i++; ++ perror("ttyname"); ++ printf("i=%d\n", i); ++} ++ ++ If this program runs longer than some seconds you don't have the bug. ++ ++ WORKAROUND: None FIX: Very easy if you have source code. ++ ++ Another user reports some more explicit symptoms and recoveries: ++ ++> What happens is when invoking ckermit we get one of the following ++> error messages: ++> You must set line ++> Not a tty ++> No more processes. ++> One of the following three actions clears the peoblem: ++> shutdown -y -g0 -i6 ++> kill -9 the ttymon with the highest PID ++> Invoke sysadm and disable then enable the line you want to use. ++> Turning off respawn of sac -t 300 and going to getty's and uugetty's ++> does not help. ++> ++> Also C-Kermit reports "?timed out closing /dev/ttyxx". ++> If this happens all is well. ++ ++------------------------------ ++ ++ (Note: the following problem also occurs on SGI and probably many ++ other Unix systems): ++ ++ From: James Spath ++ To: Info-Kermit-Request@cunixf.cc.columbia.edu ++ Date: Wed, 9 Sep 1992 20:20:28 -0400 ++ Subject: C-Kermit vs uugetty (or init) on Sperry 5000 ++ ++ We have successfully compiled the above release on a Unisys/Sperry ++ 5000/95. We used the sys5r3 option, rather than sys5r2 since we have ++ VR3 running on our system. In order to allow dialout access to ++ non-superusers, we had to do "chmod 666 /dev/tty###, where it had been ++ -rw--w--w- (owned by uucp), and to do "chmod +w /usr/spool/locks". We ++ have done text and binary file transfers through local and remote ++ connections. ++ ++ The problem concerning uucp ownership and permissions is worse than I ++ thought at first. Apparently init or uugetty changes the file ++ permissions after each session. So I wrote the following C program to ++ open a set of requested tty lines. I run this for any required ++ outgoing line prior to a Kermit session. ++ ++ ------ cut here ------- ++/* opentty.c -- force allow read on tty lines for modem i/o */ ++/* idea from: restrict.c -- System 5 Admin book Thomas/Farrow p. 605 */ ++/* /jes jim spath {spath@jhunix.hcj.jhu.edu } */ ++/* 08-Sep-92 NO COPYRIGHT. */ ++/* this must be suid to open other tty lines */ ++ ++/* #define DEBUG */ ++#define TTY "/dev/tty" ++#define LOK "/usr/spool/locks/LCK..tty" ++#include ++ ++/* allowable lines: */ ++#define TOTAL_LINES 3 ++static char allowable[TOTAL_LINES][4] = { "200", "201", "300" }; ++static int total=TOTAL_LINES; ++int allow; ++ ++/* states: */ ++#define TTY_UNDEF 0 ++#define TTY_LOCK 1 ++#define TTY_OKAY 2 ++ ++main(argc, argv) ++int argc; char *argv[]; { ++ char device[512]; ++ char lockdev[512]; ++ int i; ++ if (argc == 1) { ++ fprintf(stderr, "usage: open 200 [...]\n"); ++ } ++ while (--argc > 0 && (*++argv) != NULL ) { ++#ifdef DEBUG ++ fprintf(stderr, "TRYING: %s%s\n", TTY, *argv); ++#endif ++ sprintf(device, "%s%s", TTY, *argv); ++ sprintf(lockdev, "%s%s", LOK, *argv); ++ allow = TTY_UNDEF; i = 0; ++ while (i <= total) { /* look at all defined lines */ ++#ifdef DEBUG ++ fprintf(stderr, "LOCKFILE? %s?\n", lockdev); ++#endif ++ if (access(lockdev, 00) == 0) { ++ allow=TTY_LOCK; ++ break; ++ } ++#ifdef DEBUG ++ fprintf(stderr, "DOES:%s==%s?\n", allowable[i], *argv); ++#endif ++ if (strcmp(allowable[i], *argv) == 0) ++ allow=TTY_OKAY; ++ i++; ++ } ++#ifdef DEBUG ++ fprintf(stderr, "allow=%d\n", allow); ++#endif ++ switch (allow) { ++ case TTY_UNDEF: ++ fprintf (stderr, "open: not allowed on %s\n", *argv); ++ break; ++ case TTY_LOCK: ++ fprintf (stderr, "open: device locked: %s\n", lockdev); ++ break; ++ case TTY_OKAY: ++ /* attempt to change mode on device */ ++ if (chmod (device, 00666) < 0) ++ fprintf (stderr, "open: cannot chmod on %s\n", device); ++ break; ++ default: ++ fprintf (stderr, "open: FAULT\n"); ++ } ++ } ++ exit (0); ++} ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 14. THIRD-PARTY DRIVERS ++ ++ [ [596]Top ] [ [597]Contents ] [ [598]Next ] [ [599]Previous ] ++ ++ Unix versions, especially those for PCs (SCO, Unixware, etc) might be ++ augmented by third-party communication-board drivers from Digiboard, ++ Stallion, etc. These can sometimes complicate matters for Kermit ++ considerably since Kermit has no way of knowing that it is going ++ through a possibly nonstandard driver. Various examples are listed in ++ the earlier sections of this document; search for Stallion, Digiboard, ++ etc. Additionally: ++ ++ * The Stallion Technologies EasyConnection serial board driver does ++ not always report the state of DSR as low. From Stallion (October ++ 1997): "Unfortunately, this is a bug in our driver. We have ++ implemented all of the other TIOMC functions, eg DTR, DCD, RTS and ++ CTS, but not DSR. Our driver should report the actual state of DSR ++ on those of our cards that have a DSR signal. That the driver ++ always reports DSR as not asserted (0), is a bug in the driver. ++ The driver should be either reporting the state of DSR correctly ++ on those cards that support DSR or as always asserted (1) on those ++ cards that do not have a DSR signal. This will be fixed in a ++ future version of our drivers; at this time I cannot say when this ++ will be." And later, "As far as I can tell, we don't support the ++ termios/termiox ioctls that relate specifically to DSR and RI; all ++ the rest are supported. This will, as I mentioned earlier, be ++ fixed in the next release of our ATA software." ++ - World Wide Escalation Support, Stallion Technologies, Toowong ++ QLD, [600]support@stallion.oz.au. ++ ++ Later (December 1997, from the same source): ++ ++ * We have now released a new version of the ATA software, version ++ 5.4.0. This version fixes the problem with the states of the DSR ++ and RI signals and how they were being reported by the driver. ++ This is the problem that you reported in October. The DSR signal ++ is reported correctly on those cards that support the DSR signal, ++ such as the early revision of the EasyIO card and the ++ EasyConnection 8D4 panel, and as always asserted on those cards ++ that do not support the DSR signal in the hardware. The new driver ++ is available from our Web site, [601]www.stallion.com, in the ++ /drivers/ata5/UnixWare directory. ++ ++ [ [602]Top ] [ [603]Contents ] [ [604]C-Kermit Home ] [ [605]C-Kermit ++ 8.0 Overview ] [ [606]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Hints and Tips / [607]The Kermit Project / ++ [608]Columbia University / [609]kermit@columbia.edu ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 4. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1 ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x2 ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x4 ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x5 ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x6 ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x7 ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x8 ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x9 ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x10 ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11 ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x12 ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x13 ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x14 ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.18 ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.19 ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.13 ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x2 ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.1 ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.2 ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.3 ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.4 ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 42. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.2 ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1 ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.3 ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.1 ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1 ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.4 ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.2 ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1 ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1.3 ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x1 ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x4 ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x2 ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.4 ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.5 ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.8 ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.9 ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.10 ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.11 ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.12 ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.13 ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.14 ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.15 ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.16 ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.17 ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.18 ++ 91. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.19 ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.20 ++ 93. http://www.faqs.org/ ++ 94. http://aplawrence.com/Unixart/newtounix.html ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/x3 ++ 96. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/support.html ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 100. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 101. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 102. http://www.pcunix.com/ ++ 103. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.1 ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.2 ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.3 ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.4 ++ 107. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.5 ++ 108. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.6 ++ 109. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 110. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 111. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 112. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.2 ++ 113. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.3 ++ 117. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.1 ++ 118. http://www.linmodems.org/ ++ 119. http://www.microsoft.com/hwdev/platform/PCdesign/LR/default.asp ++ 120. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.4 ++ 124. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.2 ++ 125. http://www.idir.net/~gromitkc/winmodem.html ++ 126. http://www.digi.com/ ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.5 ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.3 ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.6 ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.4 ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.5 ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 146. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.1 ++ 147. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.2 ++ 148. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.3 ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.4 ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.5 ++ 151. http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/aix-faq/ ++ 152. http://www.faqs.org/faqs/by-newsgroup/comp/comp.unix.aix.html ++ 153. http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/hypertext/faq/usenet/aix-faq/top.html ++ 154. http://aixpdslib.seas.ucla.edu/ ++ 155. http://www.rootvg.net (AIX history)/ ++ 156. ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/aix-faq/part1 ++ 157. ftp://mirrors.aol.com/pub/rtfm/usenet-by-hierarchy/comp/unix/aix ++ 158. news:comp.unix.aix ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 160. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 161. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 162. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.2 ++ 163. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 164. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.3 ++ 167. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.1 ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html#servers ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 170. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 171. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 172. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.4 ++ 173. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.2 ++ 174. http://service.software.ibm.com/rs6000/ ++ 175. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 176. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 177. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 178. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.5 ++ 179. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.3 ++ 180. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 181. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 182. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 183. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1.4 ++ 184. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 185. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 186. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 187. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 188. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.1 ++ 189. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.0 ++ 190. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.1 ++ 191. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.2 ++ 192. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.3 ++ 193. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 194. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.5 ++ 195. news:comp.sys.hp.hpux ++ 196. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 197. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 198. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 199. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.1 ++ 200. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 201. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 202. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 203. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.2 ++ 204. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.0 ++ 205. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/makefile ++ 206. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 207. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 208. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 209. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.3 ++ 210. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.1 ++ 211. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 212. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 213. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 214. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 215. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.2 ++ 216. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.1 ++ 217. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.2 ++ 218. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.3 ++ 219. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.4 ++ 220. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.5 ++ 221. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 222. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 223. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 224. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.2 ++ 225. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.2 ++ 226. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 227. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 228. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 229. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.3 ++ 230. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.1 ++ 231. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 232. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 233. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 234. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.4 ++ 235. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.2 ++ 236. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 237. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 238. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 239. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.5 ++ 240. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.3 ++ 241. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 242. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 243. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 244. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4.4 ++ 245. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 246. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 247. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 248. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2.4 ++ 249. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 250. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 251. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 252. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.4 ++ 253. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.2 ++ 254. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.1 ++ 255. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.2 ++ 256. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.3 ++ 257. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.4 ++ 258. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.5 ++ 259. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.6 ++ 260. news:comp.os.linux.misc ++ 261. news:comp.os.linux.answers ++ 262. http://www.tldp.org/ ++ 263. http://www.tldp.org/FAQ/Linux-FAQ.html ++ 264. http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/Serial-HOWTO.html ++ 265. http://tldp.org/HOWTO/Modem-HOWTO.html ++ 266. ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/docs/HOWTO ++ 267. ftp://tsx-11.mit.edu/pub/linux/docs/HOWTO ++ 268. http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/ ++ 269. http://www.tldp.org/hmirrors.html ++ 270. http://www.redhat.com/apps/support/ ++ 271. http://www.debian.org/support ++ 272. http://www.slackware.com/support/ ++ 273. http://www.caldera.com/support/ ++ 274. http://www.suse.com/support/ ++ 275. http://www.mandrake.com/support/ ++ 276. http://www.turbolinux.com/support/ ++ 277. http://www.linmodems.org/ ++ 278. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 279. http://linux.dreamtime.org/decnet/ ++ 280. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 281. http://www.linmodems.org/ ++ 282. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.2 ++ 283. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html#servers ++ 284. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/sshclient.html ++ 285. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 286. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 287. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 288. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.2 ++ 289. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 290. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 291. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 292. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.3 ++ 293. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.1 ++ 294. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 295. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x6 ++ 296. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x7 ++ 297. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x8 ++ 298. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 299. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 300. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 301. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 302. http://linuxwww.db.erau.edu/mail_archives/linux-kernel/Mar_98/1441.html ++ 303. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 304. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 305. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 306. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.4 ++ 307. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.2 ++ 308. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.5 ++ 309. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html#term ++ 310. http://dickey.his.com/xterm/xterm.html ++ 311. http://dickey.his.com/xterm/xterm.html ++ 312. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/xmodmap.txt ++ 313. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 314. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 315. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 316. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.5 ++ 317. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.3 ++ 318. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 319. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 320. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 321. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.6 ++ 322. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.4 ++ 323. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 324. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 325. http://www.redhat.com/support/errata/RHBA-2001-153.html ++ 326. news:comp.protocols.kermit.misc ++ 327. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 328. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 329. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 330. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3.5 ++ 331. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 332. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 333. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 334. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.5 ++ 335. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.3 ++ 336. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 337. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 338. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 339. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 340. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.4 ++ 341. news:comp.os.qnx ++ 342. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ 343. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x10 ++ 344. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 345. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 346. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 347. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 348. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 349. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.5 ++ 350. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.1 ++ 351. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.2 ++ 352. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.3 ++ 353. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.4 ++ 354. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.10 ++ 355. http://aplawrence.com/SCOFAQ/ ++ 356. http://www.zenez.com/cgi-bin/scoprogfaq/faq.pl ++ 357. http://www.zenez.com/cgi-bin/scouw7faq/faq.pl ++ 358. http://zenez.pcunix.com/cgi-bin/scouw7faq/faq.pl ++ 359. http://pcunix.com/Unixart/modems.html ++ 360. http://www.freebird.org/faq/ ++ 361. http://www.freebird.org/faq/developer.html ++ 362. http://support.caldera.com/caldera ++ 363. http://stage.caldera.com/ta/ ++ 364. http://aplawrence.com/newtosco.html ++ 365. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0.5 ++ 366. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckfaq.html#term ++ 367. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 368. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 369. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 370. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 371. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.1 ++ 372. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 373. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 374. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 375. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 376. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.3 ++ 377. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.1 ++ 378. http://www.digi.com/ ++ 379. ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/pub/unix/driver/fas ++ 380. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x14 ++ 381. http://www.sco.com/ ++ 382. ftp://ftp.sco.com/ ++ 383. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 384. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 385. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 386. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.4 ++ 387. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.2 ++ 388. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.10 ++ 389. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 390. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 391. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 392. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6.3 ++ 393. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 394. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 395. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 396. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.8 ++ 397. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.6 ++ 398. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.1 ++ 399. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.2 ++ 400. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.3 ++ 401. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.4 ++ 402. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.5 ++ 403. news:comp.unix.solaris ++ 404. http://access1.sun.com/ ++ 405. http://docs.sun.com/ ++ 406. http://www.sunhelp.com/ ++ 407. http://www.wins.uva.nl/pub/solaris/solaris2/ ++ 408. http://www.wins.uva.nl/cgi-bin/sfaq.cgi ++ 409. ftp://ftp.wins.uva.nl/pub/solaris ++ 410. http://www.science.uva.nl/pub/solaris/solaris2.html ++ 411. http://www.stokely.com/ ++ 412. http://www.stokely.com/unix.sysadm.resources/faqs.sun.html ++ 413. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 414. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 415. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 416. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 417. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 418. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.2 ++ 419. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 420. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 421. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 422. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.3 ++ 423. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.1 ++ 424. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 425. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 426. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 427. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.4 ++ 428. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.2 ++ 429. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 430. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 431. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 432. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.5 ++ 433. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.3 ++ 434. news:comp.os.vms ++ 435. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 436. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 437. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 438. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.6 ++ 439. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.4 ++ 440. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 441. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 442. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 443. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7.5 ++ 444. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 445. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 446. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 447. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.9 ++ 448. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.7 ++ 449. http://www.stokely.com/ ++ 450. http://access1.sun.com/ ++ 451. http://www.ludd.luth.se/~bear/project/sun/sun.hardware.txt ++ 452. ftp://ftp.netcom.com/pub/ru/rubicon/sun.hdwr.ref ++ 453. ftp://ftp.intnet.net/pub/SUN/Sun-Hardware-Ref ++ 454. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 455. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 456. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 457. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.10 ++ 458. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.8 ++ 459. news:comp.unix.ultrix ++ 460. news:comp.sys.dec ++ 461. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 462. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 463. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 464. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.11 ++ 465. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.9 ++ 466. http://www.freebird.org/ ++ 467. http://www.freebird.org/faq/ ++ 468. news:comp.unix.unixware.misc ++ 469. news:comp.unix.sco.misc ++ 470. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.0 ++ 471. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckutio.c ++ 472. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 473. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 474. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 475. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.12 ++ 476. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.10 ++ 477. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 478. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 479. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 480. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.13 ++ 481. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.11 ++ 482. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 483. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 484. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 485. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.14 ++ 486. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.12 ++ 487. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 488. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 489. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 490. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.15 ++ 491. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.13 ++ 492. news:comp.sys.sgi.misc ++ 493. news:comp.sys.sgi.admin ++ 494. http://www.sgi.com/ ++ 495. http://www-viz.tamu.edu/~sgi-faq/ ++ 496. ftp://viz.tamu.edu/pub/sgi/faq/ ++ 497. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 498. http://freeware.sgi.com/Installable/gcc-2.95.2.html ++ 499. http://freeware.sgi.com/Installable/gcc-2.95.2.html ++ 500. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 501. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 502. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 503. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.16 ++ 504. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.14 ++ 505. news:comp.sys.be ++ 506. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 507. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 508. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 509. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.17 ++ 510. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.15 ++ 511. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 512. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 513. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 514. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.18 ++ 515. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.16 ++ 516. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 517. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 518. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 519. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.19 ++ 520. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.17 ++ 521. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 522. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 523. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 524. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.20 ++ 525. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.18 ++ 526. http://www.keyspan.com/products/usb/adapter/ ++ 527. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 528. http://cerebus.sandiego.edu/~jerry/UnixTips/ ++ 529. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 530. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 531. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 532. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3.19 ++ 533. http://www.uni-giessen.de/faq/archiv/coherent-faq.general/msg00000.html ++ 534. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 535. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 536. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x5 ++ 537. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 538. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 539. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 540. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 541. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x6 ++ 542. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x4 ++ 543. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 544. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 545. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 546. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x7 ++ 547. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x5 ++ 548. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#9.5 ++ 549. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x3 ++ 550. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 551. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 552. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x8 ++ 553. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x6 ++ 554. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x8 ++ 555. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 556. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 557. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 558. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 559. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x9 ++ 560. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x7 ++ 561. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 562. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 563. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x10 ++ 564. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x8 ++ 565. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 566. http://dickey.his.com/xterm/xterm.html ++ 567. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 568. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 569. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11 ++ 570. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x9 ++ 571. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 572. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 573. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x12 ++ 574. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x10 ++ 575. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11.1 ++ 576. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11.2 ++ 577. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 578. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 579. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11 ++ 580. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11.2 ++ 581. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 582. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 583. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 584. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11 ++ 585. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11.1 ++ 586. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 587. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 588. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 589. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x13 ++ 590. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x11 ++ 591. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 592. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 593. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 594. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x14 ++ 595. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x12 ++ 596. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 597. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 598. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x15 ++ 599. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#x14 ++ 600. mailto:support@stallion.oz.au ++ 601. http://www.stallion.com/ ++ 602. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#top ++ 603. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html#contents ++ 604. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 605. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80.html ++ 606. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 607. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 608. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 609. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckermit.ini +@@ -0,0 +1,618 @@ ++COMMENT - Standard C-Kermit initialization file ++; ++; For C-Kermit Version: 8.0 ++; ++; Filename: ++; .kermrc (UNIX, OS-9, Aegis) ++; CKERMIT.INI (OS/2, VMS, OpenVMS, AOS/VS, Atari ST, Commodore Amiga) ++; ckermit.ini (Stratus VOS) ++; K95.INI (Kermit 95 -- but this big version is not used there) ++; K2.INI (Kermit/2 -- but ditto) ++; ++; Authors: ++; Frank da Cruz, Christine M. Gianone, Jeffrey Altman ++; Columbia University, New York, NY 10025-7799, USA ++; ++; This is the standard and recommended C-Kermit 8.0 initialization file. To ++; override settings or definitions made in this file, to add new settings or ++; definitions, or to make any other desired customizations, create a separate, ++; personal customization file called: ++; ++; .mykermrc (UNIX, OS-9, Aegis, BeBox, Plan 9) ++; CKERMOD.INI (OS/2, VMS, OpenVMS, AOS/VS, Atari ST, Commodore Amiga) ++; ckermod.ini (VOS) ++; ++; You can also define the customization filename in an environment ++; variable (logical name in VMS), CKERMOD, which takes precedence over ++; the names shown above. ++; ++; WHAT THIS FILE DOES: ++; ++; . Defines your default dialing directory name: ++; .kdd for UNIX, OS-9 and Aegis; CKERMIT.KDD for other operating systems. ++; You can override this with the environment variable K_DIAL_DIRECTORY ++; . Defines your default network directory name: ++; .knd for UNIX, OS-9 and Aegis; CKERMIT.KND for other operating systems. ++; You can override this with the environment variable K_NET_DIRECTORY ++; . Defines your default services directory name: ++; .ksd for UNIX, OS-9 and Aegis; CKERMIT.KSD for other operating systems. ++; You can override this with environment variable K_SERVICE_DIRECTORY. ++; . Defines your customization file name (name given above) ++; . Performs system-dependent setups for UNIX, VMS, OS/2, etc. ++; . Defines VTPRINT macros for use with K95, MS-DOS Kermit, etc. ++; . If you have a services directory, all the macros needed to use it are ++; defined. If you don't have a services directory, the macros are not ++; defined and Kermit starts faster. ++; . Executes your personal customization file, if you have one. ++; NOTE: Your customization file is NOT executed by Kermit itself; it is ++; executed by this file. ++; ++; In UNIX, with C-Kermit 7.0 and later, you can store this file with a name ++; other than .kermrc, and it will not be executed automatically, but, if you ++; give this file execute permission, you can execute directly because of the ++; "kerbang line" at the top, whenever you want all of the above actions to ++; occur. The kerbang line must reflect the actual full path of the Kermit ++; 7.0-or-later executable. ++; ++; C-Kermit 6.0 is documented in the book "Using C-Kermit", 2nd Edition, ++; by Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, 1997, Digital Press / ++; Butterworth-Heinemann, ISBN 1-55558-164-1. New features of subsequent ++; versions are documented at the Kermit website: ++; http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++; ++; Everything after this point depends on the script programming language. ++; The CHECK command terminates this command file immediately if the script ++; programming language (IF command) is not configured. ++; ++set take error on ; This makes CHECK quit if no script language. ++check if ; Do we have an IF command? If not, quit now. ++set take error off ; Back to normal. ++ ++local _sd _servicedir _xp ; Declare local variables. ++ ++COMMENT - C-Kermit version 6.0 or later required. ++; ++ ++asg _xp \v(xprogram) ++if not def _xp asg _xp \v(program) ++if not equal "\m(_xp)" "C-Kermit" - ++ stop 1 \v(cmdfile): This initialization file is only for C-Kermit. ++echo Executing \v(cmdfile) for \v(system)... ++if < \v(version) 60000 - ++ stop 1 \v(cmdfile): C-Kermit 6.0 or later required. ++ ++forward \v(system) ; First do system-dependent items... ++ ++:unknown ; Should not happen ++Stop 1 Error: System type unknown! ++ ++:Aegis ; Apollo Aegis and ++:UNIX ; UNIX, all versions ++asg _myinit - ++ \v(home).mykermrc ; Customization filename ++if remote forward COMMON ; Skip local-mode items if "-R" ++asg _dialdir - ++ \v(home).kdd ; C-Kermit dialing directory ++asg _netdir - ++ \v(home).knd ; C-Kermit network directory ++asg _servicedir - ++ \v(home).ksd ; C-Kermit services directory ++forward COMMON ; End of UNIX section ++ ++:OS9/68K ; OS-9 ++asg _myinit - ++ \v(home).mykermrc ; Customization filename ++if remote forward COMMON ++asg _dialdir - ++ \v(home).kdd ; C-Kermit dialing directory ++asg _netdir - ++ \v(home).knd ; C-Kermit network directory ++asg _servicedir - ++ \v(home).ksd ; C-Kermit services directory ++else set file display crt ++forward COMMON ; End of OS-9 section ++ ++:VMS ; VMS and OpenVMS ++forward COMMON ++ ++:OS/2 ; Kermit 95 ++:WIN32 ++echo This initialization file is not for use with K95. ++forward COMMON ; End of OS/2 section ++ ++:AOS/VS ; Data General AOS/VS ++set window 1 ; Sliding windows don't work ++set file char dg-international ; File character-set ++set xfer char latin1 ; Transfer character-set ++set file display crt ; File transfer fisplay ++def cli push ; Escape to CLI ++def reset - ; Macro to reset DG DASHER terminal ++ run write [!ascii 236 306 301] ++forward COMMON ; End of AOS/VS section ++ ++:Amiga ; Commodore Amiga ++def cls echo \27[H\27[2J ; CLS command to clear the screen ++set file char latin1 ; Use Latin Alphabet 1 for file transfer ++set xfer char latin1 ; ... ++forward COMMON ; End of Amiga section ++ ++:Atari_ST ; Atari ST ++def cls echo \27H\27J ; Clear screen a`la VT52 ++set server display on ; Show file xfer display in server mode too ++set server timeout 15 ; Nonzero required for ^C interruption! ++forward COMMON ; End of Atari ST section ++ ++:Macintosh ; Apple Macintosh ++set server display on ; Show file xfer display in server mode too. ++forward COMMON ++ ++:Stratus_VOS ; Stratus VOS ++asg _myinit \v(home)ckermod.ini ++if remote forward COMMON ++asg _dialdir \v(home)ckermit.kdd ++asg _netdir \v(home)ckermit.knd ++asg _servicedir \v(home)ckermit.ksd ++forward COMMON ; End of Stratus VOS section ++ ++:COMMON ; For all systems ++ ++; Define macros that are useful when running C-Kermit in remote mode. ++; These macros serve no purpose on local-mode-only versions such as ++; OS/2, Macintosh, Amiga, and Atari ST Kermit, so we skip defining them ++; for those systems. ++; ++if not = 0 \findex(\v(system),WIN32:OS/2:Macintosh:Amiga:Atari_ST) - ++ forward files ++ ++; VTPRINT macro. Print a file on your PC's local printer. ++ ++def VTPRINT echo \27[5i, type \%1, echo \27[4i ++; or if your printer needs a formfeed to force the page out: ++; def VTPRINT def echo \27[5i, type \%1, echo \12\27[4i ++ ++; Macros for host-initiated file transfer using APC: ++; NOT NEEDED ANY MORE because of autodownload/autoupload. ++; Remove the following FORWARD command to reinstate these definitions: ++ ++:FILES ++ ++; Get customization and directory file names. Environment variables take ++; precedence, so you do not have to edit this file to change these filenames. ++; ++if def \$(CKERMOD) assign _myinit \$(CKERMOD) ++if not def _myinit assign _myinit \v(home)CKERMOD.INI ++ ++if remote forward CUSTOM ; Skip all this if -R given on command line ++ ++if def \$(K_NET_DIRECTORY) assign _netdir \$(K_NET_DIRECTORY) ++if not def _netdir assign _netdir \v(home)CKERMIT.KND ++ ++if def \$(K_DIAL_DIRECTORY) assign _dialdir \$(K_DIAL_DIRECTORY) ++if not def _dialdir assign _dialdir \v(home)CKERMIT.KDD ++ ++CHECK DIAL ; Is there a DIAL command? ++xif fail { ; No. ++ echo DIAL disabled ++ forward CUSTOM ++} ++ ++CHECK NETWORK ++xif success { ++ xif exist \m(_netdir) { ++ set net directory \m(_netdir) ++ echo { Network directory is \m(_netdir) } ++ } ++} ++ ++if eq "\v(name)" "telnet" forward CUSTOM ++ ++xif exist \m(_dialdir) { ++ set dial directory \m(_dialdir) ++ echo { Dial directory is \m(_dialdir) } ++} ++ ++COMMENT - Services directory ++ ++if def \$(K_SERVICE_DIRECTORY) assign _servicedir \$(K_SERVICE_DIRECTORY) ++if not def _servicedir assign _servicedir \v(home)CKERMIT.KSD ++ ++; If no services directory is found skip all the big macro definitions and ++; go straight to the bottom, where we execute the customization file. ++ ++if not exist \m(_servicedir) forward custom ++ ++echo { Services directory is \m(_servicedir)} ++ ++def MAX_SVCS 200 ; Adjust this if you have more entries ++define _sd 0 ; Assume no services directory ++open read \m(_servicedir) ; Try to open services directory file ++xif success { ++ declare \&d[\m(MAX_SVCS)] ; It's open, declare directory array ++ for \%i 1 \m(MAX_SVCS) 1 { ; Read the lines into the array ++ read \&d[\%i] ++ if fail break ++ } ++ close read ++ xif > \%i \m(MAX_SVCS) { ++ echo Too many entries in services directory ++ echo { Maximum is \m(MAX_SVCS).} ++ echo { Change definition of MAX_SVCS in \v(cmdfile) to allow more. } ++ echo { Services directory disabled.} ++ } else { ++ asg \&d[0] \feval(\%i - 1) ++ define _sd 1 ++ } ++} ++ ++xif not \m(_sd) { ++ def access echo { Services directory not available.} ++ asg list \m(access) ++} else { ++ def FIND { ++ set case off ++ for \%i 1 \&d[0] 1 { ++ if eq {\%1} {\fsubstr(\&d[\%i],1,\flen(\%1))} break ++ } ++ if not > \%i \&d[0] return \&d[\%i] ++ } ++ def LIST { ++ xif > \v(argc) 1 { ++ do find \%1 ++ if def \v(return) echo \v(return) ++ else echo \%1: Not found ++ } else { ++ echo \&d[0] items in services directory: ++ for \%i 1 \&d[0] 1 { echo \fcont(\&d[\%i]) } ++ } ++ } ++ def SPLIT { asg _word1 \%1, asg _word2 \%2 } ++ def DOACCESS { ; (Used internally by ACCESS macro) ++ do \%5 \%6 \%7 \%8 \%9 ; Do the connection macro ++ if fail end 1 ++ split \%3 ; Get words from \%3 ++ asg \%3 \m(_word1) ++ asg \%2 \m(_word2) ++ do \%3 \%4 {\%1} \%2 ; Login macro, userid, password, prompt ++ } ++ def ACCESS { ++ if not defined \%1 end 1 access what? ; Check service ++ do find \%1 ; Look it up ++ if success doaccess {\%2} \v(return) ; OK, try it ++ else end 1 "\%1" not in services directory ; Not found ++ if fail end 1 ; DOACCESS failed? ++ xif eq \v(cmdlevel) 1 { ++ echo ++ echo ACCESS: Login succeeded - CONNECTing... ++ show escape ++ output \13 ++ connect /quietly ++ } ++ } ++} ++ ++:CONNECTION ; Macros for making connections ++ ++COMMENT - SERIAL macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = device name ++; \%2 = speed ++; ++def SERIAL { ++ if < \v(argc) 3 ; All arguments given? ++ end 1 Usage: SERIAL device speed ; No. ++ set line \%1 ; OK, try to SET LINE. ++ if failure - ; If this failed, ++ end 1 Can't open device: \%1 ; print message and quit. ++ set speed \%2 ; Try to set the speed. ++ if fail end 1 Unsupported speed: \%2 ; Failed. ++ echo Connection successful. ; Succeeded. ++} ++ ++COMMENT - NET macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = network type ++; \%2 = host name or address ++; ++def NET { ++ if < \v(argc) 3 end 1 Usage: NET network host ++ set network type \%1 ++ if fail end 1 unsupported network: \%1 ++ set login user ; Don't send user ID. ++ set host \%2 ++ if fail end 1 Can't reach host: \%2 ++ echo Connection successful. ++} ++ ++COMMENT - CALL macro. Arguments: ++; ++; \%1 = modem type ++; \%2 = device name ++; \%3 = speed ++; \%4 = phone number ++; ++def CALL { ++ if < \v(argc) 5 - ; All arguments present? ++ end 1 Usage: CALL modem device speed number ++ xif not equal {\v(modem)} {\%1} { ; Set modem type ++ set modem \%1 ++ if fail end 1 unknown modem type: \%1 ++ } ++ xif not equal {\v(line)} {\%2} { ; Communication device ++ set line \%2 ++ if fail end 1 can't open device: \%2 ++ } ++ xif not equal {\v(speed)} {\%3} { ; Communication speed ++ set speed \%3 ++ if fail end 1 unsupported speed: \%3 ++ } ++ dial \%4 ; Dial the number ++ if fail end 1 Can't place call: \%4 ++ end 0 Connection successful. ++} ++ ++COMMENT - TCPCALL macro. Arguments: ++; ++; \%1 = server name:port ++; \%2 = modem type ++; \%3 = phone number ++; ++def TCPCALL { ++ if < \v(argc) 4 - ; All arguments present? ++ end 1 Usage: TCPCALL server[:port] modem number ++ set net type tcp/ip ; Which network to use ++ if fail end 1 unsupported network: tcp/ip ++ set host \%1 ; Access server and port ++ if fail end 1 can't access server \%1 ++ set modem \%2 ; Set modem type ++ if fail end 1 unknown modem type: \%2 ++ dial \%3 ; Dial the number ++ if fail end 1 Can't place call: \%3 ++ end 0 Connection successful. ++} ++ ++COMMENT - SPRINT macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = Service name or address ++; ++def SPRINT { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 end 1 Usage: \%0 service ++ set input timeout proceed ++ output @D\13 ++ input 10 TERMINAL= ++ if fail end 1 No terminal prompt ++ out D1\13 ++ inp 10 @ ++ if fail end 1 No atsign prompt ++ output c \%1\13 ++ input 10 CONNECTED ++ if fail end 1 Can't access \%1 from SprintNet ++} ++ ++COMMENT - ULOGIN macro. For logging into systems where user ID is required ++; but there is no password. Arguments: ++; \%1 = UNIX user ID ++; ++define ULOGIN { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 end 1 Usage: \%0 userid ++ set input timeout proceed ; Handle timeouts ourselves ++ set case on ; Case is important in UNIX ++ minput 5 login: Username: {User ID:} {User Name:} ++ out \%1\13 ; Send username, carriage return ++ end 0 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - VMSLOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = VMS user ID ++; \%2 = Password. If password not supplied, it is prompted for. ++; \%3 = System prompt. If omitted a default is supplied. ++; ++define VMSLOGIN { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 end 1 Usage: \%0 userid [ password [ prompt ] ] ++ while not defined \%2 { ++ askq \%2 { \%1's password: } ++ } ++ set parity none ; Set communication parameters ++ set duplex full ++ set handshake none ++ set input timeout proceed ; Handle timeouts ourselves ++ in 5 Username: ; Is prompt already there? ++ xif fail { ; No. ++ for \%i 1 3 1 { ; Try 3 times to get it. ++ out \13 ; Send carriage return ++ in 5 Username: ; Look for prompt ++ if success break ; Success, go log in ++ } ++ if > \%i 3 end 1 No Username prompt ++ } ++ out \%1\13 ; Send username, carriage return ++ inp 5 Password: ; Wait 5 sec for this prompt ++ if fail end 1 No password prompt ++ pause ; Wait a sec ++ out \%2\13 ; Send password ++ xif not emulation { ; No emulator built in? ++ set input echo off ; Protect terminal from this ++ minput 10 {\27Z} {\27[c} {\27[0c} ; Get terminal ID query ++ xif success { ; Got one ++ output \27[\?1c ; Send VT100 terminal ID ++ in 2 \27[6n ; Screen dimension query? ++ if succ out \27[\v(rows);\v(cols)R ; Send dimensions ++ } ++ set input echo on ; Echo input again ++ } ++ if not def \%3 - ; If we were not given a prompt ++ asg \%3 {\v(prompt)} ; use the SET LOGIN PROMPT value ++ if not def \%3 - ; If we still don't have a prompt ++ asg \%3 {\13$\32} ; use this one as the default ++ reinp 0 \%3 ; Did we INPUT the prompt already? ++ if fail inp 60 \%3 ; No, look now. ++ if fail end 1 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - UNIXLOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = UNIX user ID ++; \%2 = Password. If password not supplied, it is prompted for. ++; \%3 = System prompt. If omitted a default is supplied. ++; ++define UNIXLOGIN { ++ local \%m \%i ++ if < \v(argc) 2 - ++ end 1 Usage: \%0 userid [ password [ prompt ] ] ++ while not defined \%2 { ++ askq \%2 { \%1's password: } ++ } ++ set input echo on ++ set parity none ; Set communication parameters. ++ set duplex full ++ set handshake none ++ set input timeout proceed ; Handle timeouts ourselves ++ set case on ; Case is important in UNIX ++ def \%m 10 ; Waiting time for INPUT ++ for \%i 1 5 1 { ++ minput \%m login: {ssword:} {Password for \%1:} ++ if success break ++ output \B\13 ++ \%m ::= 6-\%1 ++ } ++ if > \%i 5 end 1 {No response from host} ++ xif = \v(minput) 1 { ; Have username prompt ++ output \%1\13 ; Send username ++ minput 5 {ssword:} {ssword for \%1:} ; Wait for password prompt ++ if fail end 1 {No password prompt} ++ } ++ pause ; Wait a sec ++ out \%2\13 ; Send password ++ if not def \%3 - ; If we were not given a prompt ++ asg \%3 {\v(prompt)} ; use the SET LOGIN PROMPT value ++ if not def \%3 - ; If we still don't have a prompt ++ asg \%3 {\10$ } ; use this one as the default ++ reinp 0 \%3 ; Did we INPUT the prompt already? ++ if fail inp 60 \%3 ; No, look now. ++ if fail end 1 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - VMLINELOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = User ID ++; \%2 = Password ++; ++define VMLINELOGIN { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 - ++ end 1 Usage: \%0 userid [ password ] ++ while not defined \%2 { ++ askq \%2 { \%1's password: } ++ } ++ set parity mark ; Set communication parameters ++ set flow none ++ set handshake xon ++ set duplex half ++ set input timeout quit ; Don't bother with IF FAILURE ++ input 10 BREAK KEY ; Look for BREAK KEY prompt ++ pause 1 ; Wait a second ++ output \B ; Send BREAK ++ input 10 .\17, output logon \%1\13 ; Now log in ++ input 10 .\17, output \%2\13 ; Send password ++ input 10 .\17, output \13 ; Send carriage return ++ input 10 .\17, output \13 ; Send another one ++ end 0 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - VMFULLOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = User ID ++; \%2 = Password ++; ++define VMFULLOGIN { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 - ++ end 1 Usage: \%0 userid [ password ] ++ while not defined \%2 { ++ askq \%2 { \%1's password: } ++ } ++ set input timeout quit ; Quit if INPUT fails ++ set parity even ; Set communication parameters ++ set duplex full ++ set handshake none ++ set flow xon/xoff ++ out \13 ; Send carriage return ++ inp 5 TERMINAL TYPE: ; Get terminal-type prompt ++ out vt-100\13 ; Just send "vt-100" ++ inp 20 RUNNING ; Get RUNNING message ++ pau 1 ; Wait one second ++ out \%1\9\%2\13 ; Send user ID, tab, password ++ out \13\13 ; Two more carriage returns ++ end 0 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - CISLOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = CompuServe User ID ++; \%2 = Password ++; \%3 = Prompt ++; ++define CISLOGIN { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 - ++ end 1 Usage: \%0 userid [ password [ prompt ] ] ++ while not defined \%2 { ++ askq \%2 { \%1's password: } ++ } ++ set terminal bytesize 7 ; No 8-bit characters ++ set input timeout quit ; Skip the IF FAILURE's ++ output \13 ; Send initial carriage return ++ input 5 Host Name: ; Look for Host Name prompt ++ output cis\13 ; Send "cis" and carriage return ++ input 5 User ID: ; Look for User ID prompt ++ output \%1\13 ; Send ID and carriage return ++ input Password: ; Look for Password prompt ++ output \%2\13 ; Send password and CR ++ if not def \%3 asg \%3 \v(prompt) ++ if not def \%3 asg \%3 {CompuServe Information Service} ++ input 30 \%3 ++ end 0 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - DOWLOGIN macro. Arguments: ++; \%1 = Dow Jones Password ++; ++define DOWLOGIN { ++ while not defined \%1 { ; Get password ++ askq \%1 { Dow Jones password: } ++ } ++ set input timeout proceed ++ input 20 SERVICE PLEASE\?\?\?\? ; Look for Dow prompt ++ if fail end 1 No service prompt ++ out djnr\13 ; Select DJNR ++ input 10 @@@@@@@@ ; Get password prompt ++ if fail end 1 No password prompt ++ pause 1 ; Wait a second, then... ++ output \%1\13 ; send password and CR ++ input 30 ENTER QUERY ; Get DJNR query prompt ++ if fail end 1 No main query prompt ++ pause 1 ++} ++ ++COMMENT - DJNRSPRINT macro: Log in to Dow Jones via SprintNet. ++; ++def djnrsprint sprint dow, if success dowlogin ++ ++COMMENT - NOLOGIN macro. Does nothing. Use when login not required. ++; ++def nologin comment ++ ++:CUSTOM ; Customization file ++ ++; In VMS and OpenVMS, allow for system-wide site customizations ++ ++xif equal "\v(system)" "VMS" { ++ xif exist CKERMIT_INI:CKERMIT.SYS { ++ echo Executing CKERMIT_INI:CKERMIT.SYS ++ take CKERMIT_INI:CKERMIT.SYS ++ } ++} ++ ++; Execute user's personal customization file ++ ++xif exist \m(_myinit) { ; If it exists, ++ echo Executing \m(_myinit)... ; print message, ++ take \m(_myinit) ; and TAKE the file. ++} ++ ++; Finish up with traditional greeting. ++ ++if < \v(ntime) 43200 echo Good Morning! ++ else if < \v(ntime) 61200 echo Good Afternoon! ++ else echo Good Evening. ++ ++End ; of C-Kermit 8.0 initialization file. +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckc211.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,3595 @@ ++C-KERMIT CHANGE LOG (Changes since 8.0.200 of 12 Dec 2001) ++ ++Chronological order: Go to the bottom to find the newest edits. ++ ++---8.0.200--- ++ ++Known bugs (+ = fixed after release): ++ ++ + 1. tilde_expand() can call getcwd() with NULL arg. ++ + 2. getexedir() called too early (fatal in combination with (1)). ++ + 3. Kermit "get blah" where blah is a symlink; server refuses to send it. ++ Should not do this if GET not recursive. ++ ? 4. Dave Sneddon's report about VMS fore/background confusion. ++ + 5. FTP GET path/file doesn't work - path not stripped - but MGET works. ++ + 6. IRIX 5.3 compilation problems (have patches from Marcus Herbert) ++ X 7. Filename completion bug (see below) (deferred). ++ + 8. QNX6 herald and other problems. ++ ++------------- ++ ++Merged Jeff's changes, 20 Dec 2001: ++ ++ . Changed all occurrences of "ttnproto == NP_TELNET" to "IS_TELNET()" to ++ account for the difference between SSH and Telnet. ckuscr.c, ++ ckuus[3457].c, ckcnet.h, ckcfns.c, ckudia.c, ckutio.c, ckucon.c, ckucns.c. ++ ++ . Moved SSH pty failure warnings. ckuusr.c. ++ ++ . Security adjustments to FTP module, plus fix an error message. ckcftp.c. ++ ++ . Adjustment of some security-related #ifdefs. ckcdeb.h, ckuus2.c, ckctel.c. ++ ++ . Guard against calling getpwnam() with a NULL arg in tilde_expand() ckufio.c. ++ ++ . Moved getexedir() call to later, where it's safe. ckcmai.c. ++ ++Added SSH ADD and many SSH SET commands from Jeff's spec. Fixed SHOW SSH ++to not dump core if variables weren't set. ckcker.h, ckuus[r3].c, 20 Dec 2001. ++ ++C-Kermit in server mode, client says "get foo" where foo is a symlink. ++Server says "no files meet selection criteria" instead of sending the file. ++It should only refuse to follow symlinks if it's a recursive get. Fixed ++in sgetinit(): ckcpro.w, 21 Dec 2001. ++ ++More work on SSH and SET/SHOW SSH commands. ckuus[r3].c, 21 Dec 2001. ++ ++Undid Jeff's replacement of the SSH pseudoterminal allocation failure ++message, because now it comes out any time an SSH command has to be ++reparsed (in the non-SSHBUILTIN case). ckuusr.c, 21 Dec 2001. ++ ++More SSH and SET SSH command work back & forth with Jeff, plus Jeff added ++SET HOST /NET:SSH. ckcmai.c, ckuus[r37].c, ckcdeb.h, ckuusr.h, 22 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added SSH OPEN switches. ckuusr.c, 22 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added SSH CLEAR, HELP SSH, and HELP SET SSH. ckuus[r2].c, 23 Dec 2001. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . SET TCP commands now apply to SSH ++ . SSH V2 REKEY and FORWRD-{LOCAL,REMOTE}-PORT commands now implemented ++ . Missing DLLs automatically disable appropriate authentication mechanisms. ++ckuusr.c ckcnet.c ckuus3.c ckcmai.c ckcnet.h ckuus4.c, 26 Dec 2001. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . Remove SET SSH KEEPALIVES. ++ . Add help text for SSH AGENT { ADD, DELETE, LIST }. ++ckuus[23].c, 28 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added parsing for SSH AGENT { ADD, DELETE, LIST }. ckuusr.c, 28 Dec 2001. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . Fixed a crash that can happen when making an SSH connection. ++ . Filled in SSH AGENT actions. ++ . Changed default for strict host key check (to ASK) and help text. ++ . uploaded new binaries include ~kermit/os2test/beta/ssh-agent.exe ++ . Read man ssh-agent on ftp.kermit.columbia.edu for details on what it does. ++ckuus[r23].c, 28 Dec 2001. ++ ++"ftp get path/filename" didn't work; the FTP client did not strip the path ++from the local copy of the filename when doing a GET, even though it did ++for MGET. Diagnosis: in doftpget(), the "if (!getone && !skipthis)" statement ++lacked an "else" part for the getone case. ckcftp.c, 28 Dec 2001. ++ ++A while back Jeff reported that in FTP MGET, if you cancel a file with 'x', ++all the rest of the files arrive truncated to 0 bytes. I tried this on both ++Unix and Windows and couldn't reproduce it. ++ ++In the last-minute flurry to release C-Kermit 8.0, I thought I noticed the FTP ++client failing to update the fullscreen file-transfer display. But it seems ++to work right, at least in Unix. When downloading a big file with FTP, all ++the display fields are updated as expected. But smaller files might go by too ++fast for the display to do anything. HOWEVER, in K95 the file transfer ++display does not update itself until the end of the file, even if the file ++takes a long time to transfer. This happens in both the Console and GUI ++versions. A thread thing? (Jeff says no.) Yet the same display works fine ++on Telnet connections. ++ ++In IRIX 5.3, the select()-based CONNECT module had to include ++or else it blew up with "struct timeval" unknown. Since there already was ++a SYSTIMEH CFLAG, I added the #include within #ifdef SYSTIMEH..#endif and ++rebuilt with KFLAGS=-DSYSTIMEH, only to discover that the irix5* targets ++didn't bother to propogate KFLAGS. Fixed in ckucns.c, makefile, 30 Dec 2001. ++ ++Increased IRIX5x Olimit from 2400 to 3000 because of ckuus[34].c. Added ++-ansi, since (Marcus Herbert reported) we were not actually getting ANSI-C ++compilation even though CK_ANSIC was defined. But now that we are, we get ++warnings in , which is included by ckcnet.h: ++ ++ bit-field 'th_off' type required to be int, unsigned int, or signed int. ++ (3.5.2.1(30)) ++ u_char th_off:4, ++ ------ ^ ++Tough. makefile, 30 Dec 2001. ++ ++But adding -ansi to the IRIX 5x targets also make compilation bomb whenever we ++referenced fdopen() or popen(), which evidently don't have prototypes in any ++of the header files. Luckily we already have CFLAGS for this occasion too: ++DCLFDOPEN and DCLPOPEN. Added these to the irix51 target. Also had to copy ++the fdopen()-popen() prototype section to ckuusx.c, which has a new reference ++to fdopen() in a workaround for the curses console buffering bug. makefile, ++ckuusx.c, 30 Dec 2001. ++ ++The QNX6 version did not receive a proper herald (it announced itself as ++"unknown version". Reshuffled #ifdefs in ckuver.h, added display of QNX6 ++and NEUTRINO symbols to ckuus5.c, 30 Dec 2001. ++ ++Lucas Hart sent in a patch for the VMS problem. Apparently it was even worse ++than Dave Sneddon had reported: 8.0 couldn't run at all under Batch. ckvtio.c, ++31 Dec 2001. ++ ++A major obstacle to the usability of the FTP client is that certain commands ++don't behave as FTP users expect: CD, DIR, DELETE, MKDIR, etc, which are local ++rather remote, and there are no LCD (etc), USER, or ACCOUNT commands. We ++could fix this by adding an FTP command-language personality, but file ++management commands can also be remote or local on connections to Kermit ++servers too. So: ++ ++SET LOCUS { LOCAL, REMOTE, AUTO } ++ Sets the locus for unprefixed file management commands. ++ When LOCAL, a REMOTE (or R) prefix is required for ++ to send file management commands to a remote server (e.g. RCD, RDIR). ++ When REMOTE, an L prefix is required to issue local file management ++ commands (e.g. LCD, LDIR). The word LOCAL can't be used as a prefix ++ since it is used for declaring local variables. ++ ++This applies to all types of connections, and thus is orthogonal to SET ++GET-PUT-REMOTE, which selects between Kermit and FTP for remote file-transfer ++and management commands. ++ ++The default LOCUS is AUTO, which means we switch to REMOTE whenever an FTP ++connection is made, and to LOCAL whenever a non-FTP connection is made, ++and switch back accordingly whenever a connnection is closed. ++ ++Implementation (31 Dec 2001): ++ . None of this is compiled if LOCUS is not defined. ++ . Added XYLOCUS (SET LOCUS) and LOCUS definitions: ckuusr.h. ++ . Override by defining NOLOCUS (which inhibits definition of LOCUS). ++ . Added LOCUS to SET keyword table: ckuusr.c. ++ . Added locus & autolocus variables: ckuusr.c. ++ . Added SET LOCUS parsing and variable setting: ckuus3.c. ++ . Added display of LOCUS setting to SHOW COMMAND: ckuus5.c. ++ . Added automatic locus setting to setlin(): ckuus7.c. ++ . Added automatic locus setting to ftpopen() and ftpclose(): ckcftp.c. ++ ++How to catch all the places where a Kermit connection is closed? Turns out ++we've done this before, when we added the connection log. So I made ++dologend() take care of locus switching. But dologend() was not compiled in ++if certain symbols were defined, such as NOLOCAL, or not defined, such as ++CKLOGDIAL. So I (a) rearranged the #ifdefs so that even if these would ++otherwise have obliviated dologend(), now they leave a piece of it for ++locus-setting; (b) moved the prototype out of #ifdefs; and (c) took all calls ++to it out of #ifdefs. ckcker.h, ckcfn2.c, ckcmai.c, ckucns.c, ckucon.c, ++ckuus[r347x].c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added locus checking to the following commands: DIRECTORY, CD/CWD, CDUP, ++DELETE, PWD, MKDIR, RMDIR, RENAME. ckuusr.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added LDIRECTORY, LCD/LCWD, LCDUP, LDELETE, LPWD, LMKDIR, LRMDIR, ++LRENAME. ckuusr.[ch], 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added USER and ACCOUNT commands, which are the same as FTP USER and FTP ++ACCOUNT. ckuusr.[ch], ckcftp.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Since automatic locus switching could be a big surprise for most people, I ++printed message any time it changed. ckcftp.c, ckuus[37].c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Added help text for the new L commands and filled in missing HELP text for ++SET GET-PUT-REMOTE, CDUP, MKDIR, and RMDIR. ckuus2.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Changed help text of CD, DIR, etc, for LOCUS. Changed the help text for ++RCD, RPWD, RDEL, RDIR, etc, to mention that they also work with FTP servers. ++Updated HELP REMOTE for this too. ckuus2.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++Made sure code builds with NOLOCAL, NOLOGDIAL, and NOLOCUS (it does). ++ ++The IKSD command, when given with a /USER: switch, sends the user ID to the ++IKSD. But the SET HOST /USER: command does not, when making a connection to a ++Kermit service. This makes it impossible to script IKSD interactions using ++only client commands. Furthermore, even if you include a /PASSWORD switch ++with the IKSD command, it does not send the password. I added code near the ++bottom of setlin() to do this. If we have a connection to a Kermit service ++and a /USER: switch was given, then we attempt a REMOTE LOGIN. If a ++/PASSWORD: switch was not given then if the username is "ftp" or "anonymous", ++we automatically supply a password of user@host; otherwise we prompt for a ++password. If a /USER: switch was not given, it acts like before. It all ++works, but it might not be the best way (or place) to do it. setlin(): ++ckuus7.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++ NOTE: The above change doesn't help with IKSD /USER:anonymous, ++ the server prompts for password anyway, not sure why. ++ ++ NOTE 2: What about secure authentication? We have to test to see ++ if user was already authenticated before sending the login packet. ++ ++Added /opt/kermit and /opt/kermit/doc to info_dir[] list (for Solaris). ++ckuus5.c, 31 Dec 2001. ++ ++From Jeff: new Help text for SET TERM FONT (K95 GUI). ckuus2.c, 1 Jan 2002. ++ ++More work on help text for file management commands -- e.g. we can't lump ++the L-commands together with the unprefixed ones; they need separate entries. ++Also: added missing HELP REMOTE PWD, improved the default case (in which ++help text had been omitted for a valid command). ckuus2.c, 1 Jan 2002. ++ ++It seems VMS C-Kermit was pretty much ignoring the -B (force background) and ++-z (force foreground) command-line options. Fixed in congm(): ckvtio.c, ++1 Jan 2002. ++ ++Tested the SET LOCUS business with VMS C-Kermit, which does not have a ++built-in FTP client. Of course in this case there is no automatic locus ++switching, but SET LOCUS REMOTE works nicely on IKSD connections. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . #ifdef adjustments for LOCUS changes. ++ . SSH KEY CREATE /TYPE:SRP. ++ . Fix \v(serial) to not be 8N2 by default if speed is 0. ++ . Don't let doexit() run if sysinit() hasn't been called first. ++ckuus[r247x].c, 2 Jan 2002. ++ ++Made SET BACKGROUND { ON, OFF } do exactly the same as -B and -z options. ++ckuus3.c, 2 Jan 2002. ++ ++Updated user-visible copyright dates to 2002 (but still need to do all the ++source-module comments). ckcmai.c, ckuus[25].c, 2 Jan 2002. ++ ++Rearranged #include in ckucns.c that was done for IRIX 5.3, ++to avoid conflicts in SV/68 R3v6. 3 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Dave Sneddon: Code changes in VMS sysinit() and congm() to work around ++problems in batch, SPAWN'd, etc, and change CTTNAM from TT: to SYS$INPUT:. ++ckcdeb.h, ckvtio.c, 3 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . Fixed typo in definition of CTTNAM for VMS. ckcdeb.h ++ . Moved macro definitions for SSHBUILTIN from ckuus3.c to ckuusr.h ++ so they can be referenced in ckuus7.c ++ . Added SSH functionality to SET HOST: ++ SET HOST /NET:SSH /CONNECT hostname [port] /switches ++ . Fixed SET NET TYPE so it won't reject SSH if SSH is installed. ++ . Changes to allow IKSD to continue functioning. Somehow this minor change ++ to ckcmai.c got lost in one of the back and forth exchanges. ++ . HELP TEXT for UCS2 kverb ++ . Fix a problem in K95 where multiple threads could be attempting to ++ send a telnet negotiation simultaneously. ++ckcmai.c ckcdeb.h ckuus2.c ckuus3.c ckuusr.c ckuusr.h ckuus7.c ckctel.c ++ck_crp.c ckuat2.h ckuath.c, 4 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ ++ Peter Runestig complaining that the Telnet Forward X code was corrupting ++ data. This resulted in a very thorough examination of the telnet module ++ code and a discovery of some rather significant problems. The root of the ++ problems is the lack of thread safety. To correct this problem the ++ following was done. ++ ++ All code (regardless of module) which outputs telnet commands is placed ++ into a mutex region to ensure that competing output threads do not result ++ in interleaving their output. This could happen for instance when the ++ forward-x thread is forwarding data and the user changes the window size ++ or sends an AYT or BREAK. Next the buffer used for input and output ++ processing were identical. This means that output data could be treated ++ as input or vice versa. Ugh.... ++ ++ I also spent some more time cleaning up setlin(). Mostly reorganizing the ++ code into single if (...) blocks so that breaking it up will be easier. ++ ++ckctel.c ckuus7.c, 4 Jan 2002. ++ ++Updated internal copyright notices. All modules, 5 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ More of same, plus new makefile target and changes from Spike Gronim ++ for freebsd44+srp+openssl. ++ckcdeb.h ckcnet.c ckctel.c ckuus7.c ck_ssl.c makefile, 5 Jan 2002. ++ ++Some minor updates and fixes to SSH and SET SSH help text. ++ckuus2.c, 6 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added SET RGB-COLORS for GUI. ckuusr.[ch], ckuus3.c, 6 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: More Telnet changes, Debug semaphores for K95, etc: ckcdeb.h, ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[r35x].c, ckctel.[ch], ckuath.c, 7 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added --xpos:n --ypos:n, SET GUI WINDOW POSITION x y, and changed SET ++RGB-COLORS to SET GUI RGBCOLOR. Action needs to be filled in (in setguiwin() ++in ckuus3.c), and gui_xpos and gui_ypos need to be defined in cko???.c. ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[r3y].c, 7 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added --fontname:name --fontsize:name (and facename as synonym for fontname). ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[7y].c, 7 Jan 2002. ++ ++Moved GUI (not OS/2) SET TERM FONT code in ckuus7.c to its own routine, ++setguifont(), in ckuus3.c, and made GUI SET TERM FONT call this routine, ++and also made SET GUI FONT call the same routine. ckuus[37].c, 7 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added --termtype:, --height:, --width:, --user:. Also added symbols for ++--telnet:, --ssh:, --ftp:, --[remote-]charset, and --password:, but didn't ++fill them in. --password: is probably not a good idea (but we allow it for ++FTP); the others involve a lot of code-shuffling and reconciliation, which ++I'll try to do when I get a chance (especially the connection ones, which ++can be done as part of the setlin() restructuring). ckuusr.h, ckuusy.c, ++8 Jan 2002. ++ ++Also I tried commenting out the #ifndef KUI..#endif's around SET TERMINAL ++CHARACTER-SET (easier said than done because a crucial #endif was mislabeled). ++Let's see if it compiles & works... ckuus7.c, 8 Jan 2002 ++ ++Added FTP [ OPEN ] /NOINIT, meaning don't send REST, STRU, and MODE commands ++upon making an FTP connection. This allows connection to servers that close ++the connection (or worse) when given these commands (e.g. Linux 2.4 TUX 2.0 ++FTP server). ckcftp.c, 8 Jan 2002. ++ ++Looked at adding caller ID support for the ANSWER command: ++ ++ . SET ANSWER CALLER-ID { ON, OFF } ++ . SET ANSWER RINGS ++ . \v(callid_xxx) xxx = { date, time, name, nmbr, mesg } ++ . CKD_CID modem capability ++ . Set CKD_CID for modems that have it. ++ . A quick survey shows: ++ - USR V.90: No (but Jeff says some USRs have it). ++ - V.250: No ++ - Lucent Venus: No ++ - USR: #CID=1 (the ones that have it -- X2?) ++ - Diamond Supra: #CID=1 ++ - Rockwell 56K: #CID=1 ++ - PCTEL: #CID=1 ++ - Zoltrix: +VCID=1 ++ - Conexant: +VCID=1 ++ . Since there are different commands to enable caller ID reporting, ++ we need a new field in struct MDMINF. ++ . SHOW MODEM and SHOW DIAL would need updating. ++ . etc etc... ++ ++This is all way too much for now so I just did the setting of the \v(callid_*) ++variables. These are reset at the beginning of an ANSWER command, and then ++set by the ANSWER command if they come in; thus they persist from the time ++they are collected until another ANSWER command is given. To take advantage ++of autoanswer, the user has to enable it in the modem (all the modems I found ++that support it have it disabled by default), and also has to set the number ++of rings to at least 2. This can be done with (depending on the modem): ++ ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=2#CID=1\{13} ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=2+VCID=1\{13} ++ ++and undone with: ++ ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=1#CID=0\{13} ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=1+VCID=0\{13} ++ ++The variables can be accessed only after the call is answered. Therefore the ++only way to refuse a call is to answer it, inspect the variables, and then ++hang it up if desired. Future Kermit releases can do this more nicely (as ++sketched out above.) Also while I was in the dialing code, I added result ++code VCON (= VOICE), used by several of the newer modems. These changes are ++untested. The SET ANSWER command is written but commented out. ckuusr.h, ++ckcker.h, ckuus[r3].c, ckudia.c, 8 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: fixes to --termtype:, --height:, --width:, --user:, and filling in ++of --rcharset:, which required extracting code from settrm() into a separate ++parse-method-independent remote character-set setting routine. ckuus[7y].c, ++8 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: More work on TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET code reorganization, and ++reinstatement of SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET in K95G. Also, fix char/CHAR ++warnings in Telnet module. ckuus7.c, ckctel.c, 9 Jan 2002. ++ ++Made SET TERM CHARACTER-SET visible for all builds, including K95G, and filled ++in HELP text for it. ckuus[27].c, 9 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added help text for new extended options. ckuusy.c, 9 Jan 2002. ++ ++Commented out the return(-2) statement at the end of xgnbyte() to make the ++"Statement not reached" errors go away, after checking to make sure that there ++was no path that could fall through to the end. I'm 99.99% sure there isn't, ++but that doesn't mean that some compilers might not still complain. ckcfns.c, ++9 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: fix typo in the K95 extended-option help text; add more ++semaphores to network i/o. ckuusy.c, ckcnet.c, 10 Jan 2002. ++ ++Undid ansiisms in set{lcl,rem}charset() declarations. ckuus7.c, 10 Jan 2002. ++ ++Removed a duplicated clause from the install target. makefile, 10 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: more semaphores. ckcnet.c, 11 Jan 2002. ++ ++Moved references to tmpusrid and tmpstring out of NOSPL #ifdefs -- they can ++be used with NOSPL. setlin(): ckuus7.c, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Made a dummy dologend() routine outside of #ifndef NOICP, so we don't have ++to enclose every reference to dologend in #ifdefs. (I had added a bunch of ++calls to dologend() throughout the code to handle automatic LOCUS switching.) ++ckuus3.c, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Moved "extern int nettype" outside of NOICP #ifdefs in ckuus4.c for NOICP ++builds. 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Moved a misplaced #ifdef in the VERSION command. ckuusr.c, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Did 81 different feature-selection builds on Linux (RH 7.0), all OK after the ++changes listed above for today. 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added prototypes for set{rem,lcl}charset(). ckcxla.h, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Added ckcxla.h to dependencies for ckuusy.c. ckvker.com, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Made a correction to the HELP SET LOCUS text and supplied a missing comma ++for HELP REMOTE. ckuus2.c, 13 Jan 2002. ++ ++Built OK on HP-UX 11.11 (K&R and ANSI), Solaris 8 (cc), Solaris 2.5.1 (gcc), ++SunOS 4.1.3 (cc and gcc), VMS 7.1 (DEC C, net and nonet), Unixware 7.1.1, ++Tru64 4.0G, HP-UX 10.20 (K&R), AIX 4.3.3, FreeBSD 2.2.8, Slackware 8.0, IRIX ++6.5.13f, IRIX 5.3 (??? Can't tell -- the computer ran out of swap space -- but ++it was OK a few days ago), VMS 5.5-2 (VAX C, UCX + nonet)... HP-UX 9.05, ... ++ ++Some corrections to comments in HP targets from PeterE. makefile, 14 Jan 2002. ++ ++Corrections to prototypes for set{rem,lcl}charset() (VOID, not void) from Jeff. ++ckcxla.h, 14 Jan 2002. ++ ++Builds, cont'd... SINIX 5.42, Red Hat Linux 5.2 on i386, SuSE 7.0 on S/390, ++Red Hat 7.1 on IA64, QNX 4.25, HP-UX 5.21/WinTCP, ..., ++ ++Dell Coleman noticed that in AIX, the COPY command always ++says "Source and destination are the same file" when the destination file ++doesn't exist. This is because in AIX, realpath() fails with ENOENT (errno ++2). The zfnqfp() code already accounts for this, but evidently not well ++enough. So I did what I should have done long ago. zfnqfp() was originally ++accomplished with do-it-yourself code. Later I added support for realpath(), ++and partitioned the routine into mutually exclusive compile-time sections: ++#ifdef CKREALPATH realpath()... #else do-it-yourself... #endif. But if ++realpath() failed, there was no recourse to the do-it-yourself code. Today I ++replaced the #else with the #endif, so the do-it-yourself part is always ++included and is executed if the realpath() call fails. Built and tested on ++AIX 4.3.3 and Solaris 2.5.1, as well as on Linux with and without the ++realpath() code included. zfnqfp(): ckufio.c, 16 Jan 2002. ++ ++Separated K95 and C-Kermit test version numbers, so C-Kermit can be RC.02 ++while K95 is Beta.01. ckcmai.c, 16 Jan 2002. ++ ++Inhibited 0-length writes by conol() and conoll(), since they cause big ++trouble with the AIX 4.3.3 pty driver, e.g. when you have an SSH connection ++into AIX and run C-Kermit there. ckutio.c, 16 Jan 2002. ++ ++Suppressed "Switching LOCUS..." messages from FTP client when it was invoked ++from the command line. ckcfns.c, 17 Jan 2002. ++ ++Dave Sneddon noticed that FOPEN /APPEND gets "?Write access denied" in VMS ++if the file exists. This is apparently because VMS zchko() does the wrong ++thing. Commenting out the call zchko() in the VMS case gets past this but ++then the appended part of the file has different attributes than the orignal ++part, e.g.: ++ ++ abc <- original line (horizontal, normal) ++ d <- appended line (vertical) ++ e ++ f ++ ++VMS fopen() takes an optional 4th argument: a series of RMS keyword=value ++pairs. Kermit doesn't give any. Experimentation shows that appending to ++a Stream_LF works fine. That'll be a restriction for now, until somebody ++sends in code to get the RMS attributes of the original file and feed them ++to fopen(). Also need code to fix VMS zhcko() to say whether it's OK to ++append to a file. ckuus7.c, 17 Jan 2002. ++ ++Somebody suggested I could get a working Kermit for Neutrino 2+ by doing the ++QNX6 build on Neutrino itself. I verified that this can't be done -- at least ++not by me -- since Netutrino 2+ doesn't have a compiler, and we already know ++the version cross-built for it on QNX4 doesn't work. 17 Jan 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: SET SSH GSSAPI KEY-EXCHANGE { ON, OFF } parsing, SHOW SSH. ++ckuus3.c, 18 Jan 2002. ++ ++PeterE suggested that SET ESCAPE allow 8-bit escape characters because of the ++difficulty in entering Ctrl-\ on European keyboards and the hardship (e.g. to ++EMACS and VI users) of sacrificing another C0 control character. Like ++everything these days, this turns out to be rather a bigger deal than it would ++seem. The SET ESCAPE parser calls setcc(), which accepts control characters ++in various formats (literal, ^X notation, or numbers), and gives an error ++return if the value is not 0-31 or 127. This is changed easily enough to also ++allow numbers between 128 and 255. But who else calls setcc()? The commands ++for setting Kermit packet start and end characters. No big deal, this gives ++people a bit more flexibility in case they need it, but it won't be ++documented. setcc(): ckuus7.c, 18 Jan 2002. ++ ++Since code to display the escape character is scattered all over the place, ++and some of it indexes into an array based on the character value (which would ++now dump core if the escape character was > 128), I put the code in one place, ++a new shoesc() routine in ckuusx.c (which needs to be outside #ifndef NOICP, ++since the CONNECT modules use it even in command-line only builds). Also ++discovered that this code was indexing into the nm[] array with tt_escape to ++get "enabled" or "disabled", which is no longer appropriate, so fixed this ++too. ckuusr.h, ckuus[5x].c, 18 Jan 2002. ++ ++Made SHOW ESCAPE, SHOW TERM, and the various CONNECT modules call shoesc(), ++and updated HELP SET ESC. ckuus[25].c, ckucns.c, ck[cuvd9]con.c, 18 Jan 2002. ++ ++After all that, it occurred to me that this is a really bad idea for K95, ++with all the confusion about Console code pages, OEM code pages, Windows ++code pages, and Unicode. But I tried "echo \161" at the K95 prompt and got ++the expected 8-bit character in both the Console version and the GUI, so ++maybe it's OK after all. ++ ++Removed the automatic IKSD login code from setlin() since it complicates ++interactive anonymous login. ckuus7.c, 20 Jan 2002. ++ ++An #ifdef clause from Matthew Clarke to avoid "redeclaration of free" error ++when building a curses version of C-Kermit for AIX 2.2.1 on RT PC. ckuusx.c, ++22 Jan 2002. ++ ++Took care of one detail I omitted when adding the 8-bit escape character: ++not stripping the 8th bit before comparing the keyboard char with the escape ++char. ck[uv]con.c, ckucns.c, 24 Jan 2002. ++ ++Started to go through Jeff's changes of the last week but he had run trim -t ++on them, which untabifies, so the diffs were huge. Retabifying Jeff's files ++only makes matters worse. So instead of comparing each old and new source ++file in EMACS windows with M-X Compare-Windows like I usually do (which can't ++be told to ignore whitespace), I had to work from the diff -c -b listings. ++In ascending order of size of diffs: ++ ++ckcker.h: Add I_AM_SSHSUB definition. ++ckuusr.h: XXLINK and VN_PERSONAL, etc, definitions. ++ckuusy.c: Support for "I Am SSHSUB" invocation. ++ckuus5.c: Support for new K95 directory structure. ++ckcmai.c: Init endianness earlier (K95 TYPE was broken), "I Am SSHSUB" support. ++ckuus7.c: Security #ifdefs, SSH OPEN /PASSWORD, SSHSUB support ++ckcftp.c: <-- SAVE TIL LAST ++ckuus6.c: Add LINK command for K95 on NT. ++ckuus4.c: Support for new K95 directory structure; SSHSUB support ++ckuus3.c: Support for new K95 directory structure; some SSH changes ++ckuus2.c: Changes to SSH related help text, add HELP LINK text ++ckuusr.c: LINK command, SSH OPEN /PASSWORD: /SUBSYSTEM: switches, ++ Pattern-management fixes. ++ckctel.c, ck_ssl.c, ckuath.c, ckcnet.c: ++ Took Jeff's without looking. ++ckuusx.c, ckucns.c, ckucon.c, ckwart.c: ++ My changes from weeks ago that were never picked up. ++ ++Built OK on Solaris with gcc and on SunOS with (K&R non-ANSI) cc. ++31 Jan 2002. ++ ++Meanwhile, Jeff had made various changes in response to Jaya Natarajan at IBM, ++whose basic complaint was that numerous failure conditions were not being ++detected if the fullscreen file-transfer display was active. Jeff found that ++this was because big blocks of code were skipped in that case and changed the ++code not to do that, which fixed the reported problems. But later Jaya said ++that "ftp mget file1 file2" acted like "ftp mget *", so it seemed that Jeff's ++fixes broke file selection. After taking Jeff's fixes for ckcftp.c, however, ++I still could not reproduce the problem. ckcftp.c, 31 Jan 2002. <-- Later, ++it turned out the problem was with IBM's custom FTP server. ++ ++Fixed updates that I missed yesterday in ckcftp.c, ckuusr.c. Moved misplaced ++#ifdef in ckuusy.c breaking nonet builds. Added #ifdefs to sysinit() for ++nonet builds in ckutio.c. Ran through build-in-many-configurations script ++in Linux, all builds OK. 1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Moved shoesc() definition outside of NOXFER to fix NOXFER builds. ++ckuusx.c, 1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Added MYCUSTOM definition alongside KERMRC and changed KERMCL to be the ++same as CKMAXPATH, instead of some random hardwired number. ckuusr.h, ++1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Changed ckcdeb.h to define DIRSEP and ISDIRSEP(), and put #ifndef ++[IS]DIRSEP..#endif around all [IS]DIRSEP definitions in ck[udso]fio.c, so we ++can finally put away the many repeated #ifdef chains when we get around to it. ++1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Make VMS zkermini() return 1 on success, 0 on failure, rather than 0 always. ++ckvfio.c, 1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Added code to doinit(), just before it goes to execute the init file. If the ++init file name we are about to open is empty or fails zchki(), substitute the ++customization filename. For now this code is in #ifdef USE_CUSTOM..#endif, ++which is not defined by default. It does the trick in Unix and VMS. Also ++included code from Jeff for K95, but this needs verification and testing. ++Also used DIRSEP and ISDIRSEP() throughout doinit() instead of the long #ifdef ++chains. ckuus5.c, 1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Moved shoesc() prototype from ckuusr.h to ckcker.h so modules that need it ++don't have to include ckuusr.h just for this one thing (example: ckvcon.c). ++1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Defined USE_CUSTOM by default, except if NOCUSTOM is defined. ckuusr.h, ++1 Feb 2002. ++ ++Fixed kermit-sshsub code to really enter server mode, and to print ++"KERMIT READY TO SERVE..." so scripts can wait for it. Also bumped the ++C-Kermit test ID to RC.03 and the K95 one to Beta.02. ckcpro.w, ckcmai.c, ++2 Feb 2002. ++ ++I was thinking about adding SET COMMAND BUFFER-SIZE to let people allocate ++as big a buffer as they wanted at runtime, mainly for defining huge macros. ++Moved the SCMD_blah definitions from ckuusr.h to ckuus3.c, since they aren't ++used anywhere else. But stopped there since the rest turns out to be a rather ++big deal. ckuusr.h, ckuus3.c, 2 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 3 Feb 2002: ++ . Fix an out-of-order modem name in the SET MODEM TYPE table: ckudia.c. ++ . Use SET LOGIN USER and PASSWORD if present. ckcftp.c. ++ ++Cody Gould noticed that array declarations had become case sensitive, and ++upper case didn't work. Diagnosis: misplaced case conversion in xarray(). ++Fixed in ckuus5.c, 4 Feb 2002. ++ ++SHOW VAR dumps core on \v(sexpression) or \v(svalue) -- failure to check for ++NULL pointer. I wonder why this didn't happen before (answer: because I was ++doing it on SunOS; now I'm doing it on Solaris). ckuus4.c, 6 Feb 2002. ++ ++I've had several requests for "show var name name name...". I added this to ++doshow(), such that SHOW VAR works exactly as it did before (if you don't give ++it an arg, it lists all variables; if you give it an arg, it appends "*" to it ++and lists all matching variables) but now you can also give more than one arg ++and it works the same way with each one as it did before if you gave it a ++single item (i.e., "*" is appended, so "show var os cmd" shows all variables ++whose names begin with "os" or "cmd". You can also freely use pattern ++notation, including anchors. Hmmm, no, actually it's different in that now ++each includes an implied * before AND after, so "show var version" shows all ++variables whose name contain "version" rather than all variables whose names ++start with it. ckuus5.c, 6 Feb 2002. ++ ++Cody Gould reported that WRITE FILE blah blah \fexec(anything) ... got a ++spurious "File or Log not open" error. This turns out to be a rather ++pervasive problem -- whenever you use \fexec() it calls the parser recursively ++and this can run roughshod over global variables, such as our innocent little ++x, y, and s. The fix in this case was to put x and y on the stack. The same ++thing probably needs doing in about 10,000 other places. Too bad C isn't ++Algol. ckuusr.c, 6 Feb 2002. ++ ++Minor fix to SHO VAR -- the "^" anchor wasn't working (e.g. "show var ^os"). ++ckuus5.c, 6 Feb 2002. ++ ++Fixes from Jeff for FTP file-transfer character-set translation in K95 and ++in WIKSD, plus updated K95 SSH help text. ckcftp.c, ckcfns.c, ckuus2.c, ++7 Feb 2002. ++ ++Server has its date set in the past. Client says "remote dir". Server sends ++A packet containing old date. If client has FILE COLLISION UPDATE, it ++rejects the directory listing. Changed gattr() to only reject real files ++(introduced by F packet), not X-packet material like directory listings. ++ckcfn3.c, 7 Feb 2002. ++ ++Up-down arrow keys for command recall. People have been asking for it for ++years but now it's actually important because of PDAs that don't have Ctrl ++keys. Would have been trivial except that we use getchar() rather than ++coninc() for reading from the keyboard in Unix so conchk() doesn't help. In ++fact there are lots of other places where conchk() is used this way and works ++only by accident. The only reason we never noticed a problem before is that ++characters don't usually arrive from the keyboard that fast. But when an ++arrow key sends "ESC [ A" all once, the stdin buffer gets some extra stuff in ++it, which getchar() will return next time, but which coninc()/conchk() will ++never see. So I added a new cmdconchk() routine which, if the keyboard is ++being read with getchar() rather than coninc(), looks at the stdin buffer. ++Unfortunately, however, there is no API for this, nor is there any standard ++way to access the stdin buffer directly. So first I did it for Solaris. Then ++to make it portable requires a survey of the headers for every platform. I ++found four major variations: ++ ++ stdin->_r: ++ {Free,Open,Net}BSD, BSDI ++ stdin->_cnt: ++ SunOS, Solaris, HP-UX 5-6, AIX, VMS, SINIX, IRIX 5.3-6.5, DGUX ++ 4.2BSD, 4.3BSD, OSF/1..Tru64, QNX4, Unixware 1.0-2.1.0 ++ stdin->__cnt: ++ HP-UX 7-11, SCO: OSR5.0.6a, Unixware 2.1.3-7.x, OU8, UNIX 3.2v4.x ++ Subtract read from end pointer (_IO_file_flags defined): ++ Linux (tested on RH 5.2 thru 7.1) ++ ++The Linux method is new and different to account for multibyte characters. ++All the others assume character == byte. ++ ++For docs: ANSI only, 7-bit only; both application and cursor modes are ++accepted. Only up and down arrow are handled; left and right arrows cause ++a beep. ckucmd.c, 8 Feb 2002. ++ ++Build-all: Discovered that changing CTTNAM from TT: to SYS$INPUT: in VMS ++(which was done on 3 Jan 2002 to work around problems starting Kermit in ++batch, spawn'd, etc) breaks Kermit on VMS 5.5/VAX (concb() fails with "lacks ++sufficient privilege"; if you enable all privs Kermit starts but then spews ++out a constant stream of BEL characters). If you put dftty back to "TT:", ++everything is fine -- I have no idea why, so I used #ifdef VMSV70 to decide, ++which is totally crude. Next I had to find where the boundary really is: VAX ++vs Alpha? VAX C vs DEC C? Or between VMS releases? Built on: ++ . VMS 6.2 Alpha (DEC C) - OK with TT: ++ . VMS 6.2 Alpha (DEC C) - OK with SYS$INPUT: <-- keep this one ++ . VMS 7.1 VAX (DEC C) ++So the final condition is #ifdef VMSV60. ckvker.com, ckvtio.c, ckuus5.c. ++ ++QNX 6 needed some attention too: ++ . Whoever did the makefile target made the default port "/dev/ser1". ++ . Arrow keys... ++But I gave up on getting arrow keys to work -- it should be just like *BSD, ++but for some reason gcc complains that struct FILE has no _r member, even ++though it does (getchar uses it). ++ ++Checked stdio.h on Mac OS X and it looks like the *BSDs. ++ ++--- C-Kermit 8.0.201 --- ++ ++Removed -g from solaris2xg+krb5+krb4+openssl+shadow makefile target -- it ++was producing a 15MB binary! makefile, 14 Feb 2002. ++ ++Fixed a couple thinkos in "make install": $(DESTDIR) should not have been ++included in the tests for whether INFODIR or SRCDIR were desired. makefile, ++14 Feb 2002. ++ ++(tarball refreshed 16 Feb 2002) ++ ++--- C-Kermit 8.0.201 --- ++ ++From Jeff: Better seeding of \frandom(): ckcmai.c, ckuus4.c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Make arrow keys work in WIKSD, but now also unconditionally ++compile arrow-key code in all versions. ckucmd.c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ckuath.c, ck_ssl.c, ckcnet.c (didn't look). 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++Added ORIENTATION command, that lists the various important directories, and ++\flongpathname() and \fshortpathname(), which do path format conversions in ++Windows, and are just synonynyms for \fpathname() elsewhere. The new functions ++need building and testing in Windows. ckuusr.h, ckuus[r24].c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++Changed PWD for Windows only to show both short and long paths (but only if ++they are different; otherwise it behaves as before). ckuusr.c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++Changed default Windows prompt to show long pathname. ckuus5.c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++Updated INTRO command to mention FTP, HTTP, and SSH. ckuus2.c, 18 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: fixes for typos in GetLongPathName() code: ckuus[r4].c, 22 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: net/auth updates: ckcnet.c, ckuath.c, 22 Feb 2002. ++ ++Added -DUSE_FILE__CNT to NCR MPRAS targets, George Gilmer: makefile, ++24 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Add support for GetLongPathName() in Win95 and NT: ckcdeb.h, ++ckuus[r4].c, 24 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: More fixes for FTP SIGINT, plus fix [M]PUT /MOVE. ckcftp.c, ++24 Feb 2002. ++ ++Fixed an unguarded reference to inserver, gtword(): ckucmd.c, 24 Feb 2002. ++ ++Adapted RETRIEVE for use with FTP connections; this one was missed when ++adapting GET, REGET, MOVE, etc. ckuus6.c, ckcftp.c, 24 Feb 2002. ++ ++Added special COPYRIGHT command text for the free version of WIKSD. ++ckcmai.c, ckuusr.c, 24 Feb 2002. ++ ++C-Kermit, when in CONNECT mode and given the U sequence, would ++unconditionally close the connection if it was a network connection. This ++is bad when Telnetting to a modem server. I added to code to prevent this ++in the RFC2117 TELNET COMPORT case but I'm not sure how to exend this to the ++general case (or whether it would be a good idea). ckucns.c, 24 Feb 2002. ++ ++During file transfer, chktimo() calls ttgspd() for every packet, which clearly ++doesn't make sense on network connections, especially since on Telnet COMPORT ++connections it results in a network speed query for every packet. Rearranged ++the code so this happens only on true serial-port connections. ckcfn2.c, ++24 Feb 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Fix reversed ANSI/non-ANSI function declarations clauses in ++ckcftp.c, 26 Feb 2002. ++ ++Changed Unix CONNECT module to call kstart() only when it has a chance of ++doing anything (i.e. a Kermit packet has been partially detected, or the ++packet start character just came in), rather than unconditionally on every ++incoming character. ckucns.c, 8 Mar 2002. ++ ++FTP PUT /SERVER-RENAME:, /RENAME-TO:, /MOVE-TO: were sticky. Patch: In ++ckcftp.c, near the top of doftpput(), add the lines marked with "+": ++ ++ makestr(&filefile,NULL); /* No filename list file yet. */ +++ makestr(&srv_renam,NULL); /* Clear /SERVER-RENAME: */ +++ makestr(&snd_rename,NULL); /* PUT /RENAME */ +++ makestr(&snd_move,NULL); /* PUT /MOVE */ ++ putpath[0] = NUL; /* Initialize for syncdir(). */ ++ ++ckcftp.c, 26 Mar 2002. ++ ++\fday() and \fnday() were broken for dates prior to 17 Nov 1858. Fixed in ++fneval(): ckuus4.c, 28 Mar 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . New calling convenion for demoscrn(): ckucmd.c, ckuusx.c ++ . Fix for host-initiated 80/132 col screen mode change. ckuus7.c. ++ . New \v(desktop) variable: K95 user desktop directory, ckuusr.h, ckuus4.c ++ . New \v(rfc2717_signature) var: Telnet Com Port, ckuusr.h, ckuus4.c ++ . Uncomment "not-reached" return(-2) in xgnbyte(): ckcfns.c ++ . New dates: ckcmai.c. ++ . Telnet Com Port fixes: ckutio.c ++ . SET PRINTER fixes for K95: ckuus3.c ++ . Session limit adjustments: ckuus3.c ++ . New directory layout for K95 (TAKE, ORIENT): ckuusr.c ++ . Fixes for Telnet Com Port, recycling SSH connections: ckuusr.c ++ ++From me, not picked up by Jeff previously: ++ . kstart() speedup: ckucns.c. ++ ++1 Apr 2002. ++ ++---K95 1.1.21--- ++ ++From Jeff, 4 Apr 2002: ++ . More fixes for Telnet Com Port: ckuus4.c, ckudia.c, ckutio.c, ckcnet.c: ++ . network connections will check for carrier detect if SET ++ CARRIER-WATCH is ON. This could have a potential conflict if ++ the option is negotiated and the carrier is off, but the site ++ requires login. ++ . modem hangup message generated since the dial module did not ++ believe that network modems could be reset with a DTR drop. ++ . Version number adjustments: 8.0.203, 1.1.99: ckcmai.c. ++ . Security: ck_ssl.[ch], ckuath.c. ++ ++---C-Kermit 8.0.203--- ++ ++From Jeff, 6 Apr 2002: ++ . Fix typo in HELP REMOTE HOST: ckuus2.c. ++ . More Telnet Com Port fixes: ckctel.c, ckcnet.c, ckudia.c, ckutio.c ++ ++From Jeff, 9 Apr 2002: ++ . Fix autodownload problem: ckcfn[2s].c. ++ ++Chiaki Ishikawa reported that in Linux (two different kinds), if you choose ++hardware parity, CONNECT, then escape back, the speed can change. I tracked ++this down to the following statement in ttvt(): ++ ++ tttvt.c_cflag &= ~(IGNPAR); /* Don't discard incoming bytes */ ++ ++Somehow execution of this statement corrupted the speed words of the termios ++struct, which are entirely separate words that are nowhere near the c_cflag ++member. Anyway, the statement is wrong; it should be: ++ ++ tttvt.c_cflag |= IGNPAR; /* Don't discard incoming bytes */ ++ ++Fixing it cured the problem; don't ask me why. ckutio.c, 9 Apr 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ fixes the problem reported by robi@hastdeer.com.au. The request to ++ enter server mode was received while we were entering server mode. ++ But the server was waiting for the response to REQ_STOP sent to the ++ client. Therefore, we weren't quite in server mode yet and the ++ request to enter server mode was rejected. A check for the sstate ++ value solves the problem. ckctel.c, 10 Apr 2002. ++ ++Chiaki Ishikawa (CI) discovered the real cause for the speed changing problem. ++I was setting the IGNPAR bit in the wrong flag word: it should have been ++c_iflag instead of c_oflag, silly me. Fixed in ttvt() and ttpkt(): ckutio.c. ++I also did a thorough census of all the termio[s] flags to ensure each was ++applied to the right flag word -- they were, IGNPAR in the HWPARITY case was ++the only mistake. CI also discovered that the speed words in the Linux ++termios struct are not used at all -- the speeds are encoded in an ++undocumented field of c_cflag, which explains the problem. 10 Apr 2002. ++ ++Any use of \{nnn} character notation in a macro definition, loop, or other ++braced block caused an "unbalanced braces" parse error. The backslash in this ++case is not quoting the open brace; it's introducing a balanced braced ++quantity. Special-cased in getncm(): ckuus5.c, 12 Apr 2002. ++ ++The semantics of "if defined \v(xxx)" were changed in 8.0 to avoid obnoxious ++error messages when xxx was not a built-in variable (see notes of 19 Nov ++2000), such that "if defined \v(xxx)" would always succeed if there were such ++a variable, even if it had no value. The behavior that is documented in the ++book (and also in ckermit70.html) and that we had in versions 6 and 7, was ++that IF DEFINED \v(xxx) would fail if \v(xxx) was defined but had an empty ++value OR if it was not defined, and would succeed only if it was defined and ++had a value. Fixed in boolexp(): ckuus6.c, 12 Apr 2002. ++ ++What about \function()s? IF DEF \fblah() presently succeeds if the function ++exists; you don't even have to give arguments. I think this behavior is more ++useful than if I required valid arguments and then evaluated the function -- ++you can do that anyway with 'if not eq "\fxxx(a,b)" "" ...' Of course this ++argument applies to "if def \v(xxx)" too, except that the current behavior is ++consistent with the 7.0 behavior, so there is no need for a change. ++ ++Kent Martin discovered that if a macro contains a LOCAL statement for a ++variable whose name is the same as, or a unique left substring of, the macro's ++name, then undefining the local variable makes the macro disappear: ++ ++ define DateDiff { ++ echo {DateDiff(\%1) executing...} ++ } ++ define Kent { ++ do DateDiff {2} ++ local date ++ assign date {} ++ do DateDiff {3} <-- This fails (A) ++ } ++ do DateDiff {1} ++ do Kent ++ do DateDiff {4} <-- So does this (B) ++ ++The first part of the problem is that "assign date {}" called delmac with ++exact=0, so delmac evidently deleted first macro whose name started with ++"date" -- and since the only one was DateDiff, that's the one that was ++deleted. Fixing this (change "delmac(vnp,0)" to "delmac(vnp,1)" in dodef()) ++got us past A. The second part was making the same fix to the delmac() ++call in popclvl(). ckuus[56].c, 13 Apr 2002. ++ ++The INPUT command ignored the parity setting, thus SET PARITY EVEN, ++INPUT 10 "login:" didn't work. Fixed in doinput(): ckuus4.c. Also fixed a ++bogus #ifdef COMMENT section that messed up the block structure of the module ++and therefore EMACS's indenting. 18 Apr 2002. ++ ++Added sco32v500net+ssl and Added sco32v505net+ssl targets, from Scott Rochford ++at Dell (not sure yet if they work). Makefile, 19 Apr 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 22 Apr 2002: ++ . Added "darkgray" color and made "dgray" an invisible synonym: ckuus3.c. ++ . Fix carrier sense on Telnet Com Port immediately after dial: ckudia.c. ++ . Change krb5_des_blah() arg list: ckutio.c. ++ . Fix ttgmdm() for Telnet Com Port: ckutio.c. ++ . Fix tthang() return code: ckutio.c. ++ . Add aix43gcc+openssl target: makefile. ++ ++From Jeff, 25 Apr 2002: ++ . Fix SET GUI keyword table: ckuus[37].c. ++ . A final fix to Telnet Com Port: ckctel.c, ckcnet.c. ++ ++From Jeff, 26 Apr 2002: ++ . Another final fix to Telnet Com Port: ckctel.c, ckudia.c. ++ ++From Jeff, 27 Apr 2002: ++ . separate the wait mechanism for TELNET SB COMPORT synchronous messages ++ from the asynchronous TELNET SB COMPORT MODEMSTATUS messages: ckctel.[ch] ++ . fix debug messages in Certificate verify functions: ck_ssl.c, ckcftp.c.a ++ ++Frank, 27 Apr 2002: ++ . Fixed VMS zgetfs() to fail when file doesn't exist: ckvfio.c. ++ . Fixed UNIX zgetfs() to check for null or empty arg: ckufio.c. ++ . Added #include for time() call: ckcmai.c. ++ . Add casts to args in tn_wait() calls: ckctel.c. ++ ++SINIX-P 5.42 (Pyramid architecture) makefile target from Igor Sobrado. ++makefile (no source-code changes), 1 May 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 5 May 2002, ++ . Fix some "unknown host" messages: ckcftp.c. ++ . Add more casts to tnc_wait() calls: ckudia.c. ++ . Improvements to SHOW SSH, SHOW GUI: ckuus3.c. ++ . Fixes to SET COMMAND { WIDTH, HEIGHT }: ckuus3.c. ++ . Updates to ck_ssl.[ch], ckctel.c, ckcnet.c. ++ ++Fixed the erroneous setting of ssh_cas during switch parsing rather than ++after cmcfm() in setlin(): ckuus7.c, 5 May 2002. ++ ++setlin() decomposition (2300 lines), Part One: ++ ++ . Copied a big chunk from the end of setlin(), beginning with net directory ++ lookup, but only the network-specific and common parts, to a new routine, ++ cx_net(), 900 lines. ++ ++ . Extracted many repetitious lines of error-message code from cx_net() ++ to a new routine, cx_fail(). Error messages are stored in slmsg, and ++ also printed but only if we were not called from a GUI dialog (and ++ QUIET wasn't set, etc etc). Any adjutments in this policy can now be ++ made in one place. ++ ++ . I put a call to cx_net() in setlin() just before all the code it replaced. ++ It works for TELNET and SET HOST /TELNET. ++ ++ . Built with mkwatsol-k5k4ssl; after a couple fixes it builds OK and makes ++ Kerberized connections OK. ++ ++ . Copied the serial-port and common parts of the setlin() post-cmcfm() ++ code to another new routine, cx_serial(), about 275 lines. Fixed ++ messages not to come out when called from GUI dialog, etc. Inserted ++ a call to cx_serial() at the appropriate spot in setlin(). Tested ++ serial connections on watsun with "set line /dev/ttyh6", works OK. ++ ++ . Removed all the code from setlin() that was copied to cx_*(). This slims ++ setlin() down to 1120 lines. Tested regular Telnet, Kerberized Telnet, and ++ serial connections again, all OK. The Unix version of the SSH command is ++ OK too. ++ ++setlin() deconstruction, Part Two: ++ ++Now that we have the common network and serial connection pieces moved out of ++setlin(), we still need to move out the little code snippets for each network ++type that take place between command confirmation and the common code we just ++replaced. As far as I can tell, this needs doing only for SSH. The code ++labeled "Stash everything" copied to cx_ssh() but I didn't remove the original ++code since I can't test this. I think I'm done -- maybe I'm overlooking ++something but I don't know what... First we need to test the heck out of it ++in all command-line versions (K95 and C-Kermit). Then to use this from ++the GUI, see the calling sequences for cx_serial(), cx_net(), and cx_ssh(): ++ ++ . For serial or TAPI connections, the GUI should call cx_serial(). ++ . For SSH connections, it should call cx_ssh() and then cx_net(). ++ . For all other network connections, just calls cx_net(). ++ ++ckuus7.c, Cinco de Mayo de 2002. ++ ++New ckuus7.c from Jeff, 8 May 2002. Merge cx_ssh() into cx_net(). Also: I ++had made line[] an automatic variable, since the global line[] buffer is used ++by almost every parsing routine in C-Kermit to hold string fields between ++parsing and execution but Jeff says he found that some code somewhere depended ++on line[] containing the hostname after setlin() was finished. ++ ++From Jeff, 10 May 2002: ++ . Fix SET SSH STRICT-HOST-CHECKING parse: ckuus3.c. ++ . Add prototypes for cx_net() and cx_serial(): ckuusr.h. ++ . Add ANSI versions of cx_net() and cx_serial() declarations and supply a ++ missing parameter in the cx_serial() invocation, change SSHCMD cx_net() ++ invocation to new form. ++ ++From Jeff, 16 May 2002: ++ . ANSI strictness changes: ck_ssl.[ch] ++ . New DIALER command: ckuusr.[ch] ++ . Correction to how -0 turns off autodownload: ckuusy.c ++ . Prototypes for GUI menu action functions: ckuusr.h. ++ . Replace setting of GUI-action variables by function calls: ckuus[3457x].c ++ . Fix FTP -z switch parsing: ckcftp.c. ++ . Fix SET HOST testing of setlin() return code: ckuus3.c ++ ++From Jeff, 18 May 2002: ++ . Allow half-size GUI fonts: ckuus[35y].c. ++ ++Fixed setguifont() to parse fractional font sizes and round to nearest half ++point. ckuus3.c, 18 May 2002. ++ ++For GUI, wrote front ends for getyesno(), readtext(), and readpass(): ++ ++ . uq_ok() prints text and gets Yes/No, OK/Cancel, or just OK response. ++ This replaces getyesno() and can also be used for alert or help boxes. ++ ++ . uq_txt() prints text and gets a single text response. Replaces ++ readtext() and readpass(). ++ ++ . uq_mtxt() is like uq_txt() but allows multiple text fields. Replaces ++ any combination of readtext() and readpass(). ++ ++Obviously the #ifdef KUI portions of the uq_blah() routines need filling in. ++ckuusr.h, ckuus3.c, 18 May 2002. ++ ++Converted selected getyesno() calls to uq_ok(): ckcftp.c, ckuus3.c, ckuus6.c. ++Some were not converted because it was inappropriate, e.g. DELETE /ASK; others ++because they're in Jeff's code. The most interesting conversions are in the ++DIAL command when DIAL CONFIRMATION is ON. Here there is a dialog for each ++phone number asking if it's OK (ug_ok()) and if not, asking for a replacement ++(uq_txt()); seems to work fine in C-Kermit. All the candidates for uq_mtxt() ++are in Jeff's code. 18 May 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Convert remaining getyesno/readtext/readpass calls to uq_blah() ++so they can be GUI dialogs. ckuus[37].c, ckcftp.c, ckuath.c, ck_ssl.c, ++21 May 2002. ++ ++Added KCD command = CD to symbolic directory name (EXEDIR, COMMON, APPDATA, ++TMPDIR, etc etc). ckuusr.h, ckuus[r25].c, 21 May 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 28 May 2002: ++ . --title: commandline option: ckuusr.h, ckuusy.c ++ . Fix some #includes, move some declarations: ckcfns.c ++ . Change K95 version from Dev.00 to Beta.01 ++ . ASK[Q] /GUI: ckuus6.c. ++ . Various GUI screen updates and #ifdefs: ckuus7.c ++ . Add missing cx_net() calls to new setlin() for file SuperLAT..: ckuus7.c ++ . Updated uq_*() routines for GUI dialogs: ckuus3.c. ++ ++Added GETOK switches (/TIMEOUT for all; /POPUP and /GUI for K95G): ++ckuus6.c, 29 May 2002. ++ ++Added HELP SET GUI text. ckuus2.c, 29 May 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . Another K95-specific #include for ckcfns.c. ++ . More items for K95G Actions menu. ++ . Change K95G Locus switching to call setlocus() rather than set variable. ++ . Ditto for several other variables now settable from Actions menu. ++ . Fix SET HOST /NET:SSH status code so IF SUCCESS works. ++ . Fix SHOW SSH port-forwarding. ++ckcfns.c, ckuus[r367].c, ckcftp.c, ckcmai.c, 30 May 2002. ++ ++Changed SET LOCUS to have a new value, ASK, corresponding to new autolocus ++value of 2, K95G only. Changed setlocus() to not do anything if the new and ++old loci are the same, otherwise to invoke a GUI dialog in K95G if autolocus ++is 2, and also to handle any text messages. Changed SHOW COMMAND to show ASK ++value for SET LOCUS. Rewrote HELP SET LOCUS. ckuusr.[ch], ckuus[23].c, ++ckcftp.c, 30 May 2002. ++ ++Add a missing space to Locus popup, and fix Jeff's version of the code to ++compile in C-Kermit. ckuusr.c, 31 May 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, for K95 GUI, 6 June 2002: ++ . Force some GUI popups to be in foreground: ckuus3.c. ++ . Fix SHOW TERM font display: ckuus5.c. ++ . Update K95 version numbers and date (4 June 2002): ckcmai.c. ++ . Add note about encrypted private keys vs scripts to HELP SET AUTH: ckuus2.c. ++ . Fix SET HOST for DECnet: ckuus7.c. ++ ++--- K95 2.0 --- ++ ++From Jeff, 7 June 2002: ++ . Fix some #ifdefs for Unix builds (locus, dial, etc): ckuus7.c ++ . Add gui_resize_scale_font() prototype: ckuus3.c ++ . Add some missing SET GUI commands: ckuus3.c ++ . Update version numbers: ckcmai.c ++ ++--- K95 2.0.1 --- ++ ++From Jeff, 11 June 2002: ++ . Conditionalize Locus-switching popup text for GUI/Console: ckuusr.c. ++ . Fix the SRP_installed_as_server() function. The new API returns TRUE even ++ if the SRP config and password files cannot be found. Went back to the old ++ API. This bug affects C-Kermit 8 when built with SRP as well as 1.1.21 ++ through 2.0.1. Since iksdnt.exe has not been shipped yet I fixed it and ++ uploaded a new non-beta build of it. ckuath.c. ++ ++From Jeff, 12 June 2002: ++ . Fix SSH AGENT ADD: ckuusr.c. ++ . Fix --facename: option to not fail if name unknown: ckuusy.c. ++ . Fixes for OpenSSL 0.9.7 and OpenBSD 3.1: ck_ssl.c. ++ . Fix SET AUTH TLS VERIFY NO to prevent a dialog but still a warning if ++ SET AUTH TLS VERBOSE ON is set: ck_ssl.c. ++ . Fix FTP code to verify the hostname as specified by the user and not ++ the hostname discovered by the reverse DNS lookup. For example, ++ FTP OPEN kermit.columbia.edu ++ should produce a dialog because that name is not in the certificate ++ even though ftp.kermit.columbia.edu (the reverse DNS name) is: ckcftp.c. ++ ++Add support for Solaris 9 and NetBSD 1.6. makefile, ckuver.h, ckcdeb.h, ++13 Jun 2002. ++ ++Discovered that Solaris 9 wants to hide the members of struct FILE, and ++enforces this for 64-bit builds. They offer some functions like __fbufsize() ++to get the info, but not the info we need for reading escape sequences (the ++_cnt member). Let's hear it for political correctness. Created new solaris9g ++(32-bit) and solaris9g64 (64-bit) targets. Sorry, no arrow keys in 64-bit ++mode. Also no more direct access to sys_errlist[]; must use strerror(). ++makefile, ckucmd.c, 13 Jun 2002. ++ ++Added solaris9g+openssl+zlib+pam+shadow, which in turn required adding ++solaris2xg32+openssl+zlib+pam+shadow, needed for gcc 3.1 in which you have ++to specify 32-bit. Fails for some mysterious reason in link step ++(can't find libssl.so.0.9.6 even though it's there). makefile, 13 Jun 2002. ++ ++Solaris 8 empty socket problems again -- tthang() times out, subsequent ++tcsetattr() calls do horrible things. Added a bandaid to ttclos(): don't ++call tcsetattr() any more if hangup timed out. ckutio.c, 14 June 2002. ++ ++Gerry B reported the bandaid got us bit farther but Kermit still disappears. ++Added code to reassert the alarm signal handler, since it is likely that ++Solaris has become stricter about this since last time I looked. (Later ++Gerry reported back that this did the trick -- C-Kermit now exits normally ++and releases the lockfile). ttclos(): ckutio.c, 17 Jun 2002. ++ ++If you use Kermit to copy a file to a destination file that already exists and ++is longer than the source file, the destination file is not truncated. I had ++mistakenly assumed that setting O_CREAT in the open() call in zcopy() would ++create a new copy of the file. Fixed by also setting O_TRUNC. ckufio.c, ++17 Jun 2002. ++ ++Updated HELP INPUT and MINPUT text to explain 0 and -1 timeout values, and ++HELP DIAL to explain about entering CONNECT mode automatically. ckuus2.c, ++17 Jun 2002. ++ ++Got rid of client-side "Press the X or E key to cancel" message when giving ++a REMOTE command if QUIET is set or if XFER DISPLAY is NONE. ckuus7.c, ++17 Jun 2002. ++ ++From Jeff 25 Jun 2002: ++ . Add SUN terminal type: ckuusr.h, ckuus[57].c. ++ . Add GUI file transfer display: ckcker.h, ckuus[47x].c. ++ . Changes to allow C-Kermit to build with OpenSSL 0.9.7. Current ++ C-Kermit code is designed to compile with 0.9.6 and earlier. To ++ compile with 0.9.7 you must specify -DOPENSSL_097. This avoids ++ missing symbols in the DES library. The functions in OpenSSL were ++ renamed in 0.9.7 to avoid link time conflicts with Kerberos 4. ++ ckufio.c ck_crp.c ckuath.c ck_ssl.h ck_ssl.c, makefile. ++ ++From Jeff 26 Jun 2002: ++ . apparently the SSL Passphrase Callback function was not converted ++ from readpass() to uq_txt() ++ . FTP Authentication failure errors were not being reported to the ++ user. So a failure would appear to be a successful completion ++ unless FTP DEBUG was ON. Now the message is reported unless ++ the QUIET flag is set. ++ck_ssl.c, ckcftp.c. ++ ++SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL didn't work for FTP; fixed in putfile() and getfile(): ++ckcftp.c, 1 Jul 2002. ++ ++Changed debug log for FTP to log "FTP SENT" and "FTP RECD" for protocol ++messages, just like we do for Telnet, to make it easy to grep them out of ++the log. ckcftp.c, 1 Jul 2002. ++ ++In FTP MGET /UPDATE, equal times spuriously caused download. doftpget() was ++misinterpreting chkmodtime()'s return code. ckcftp.c, 3 Jul 2002. ++ ++In FTP MGET /RECOVER, recovery is skipped if the local file is newer than ++the remote. This would seem to make sense, but when a download is ++interrupted, the partial file never gets the date of the remote file, so ++the partial file is always newer, and recovery never works. Fixed in ++recvrequest() by commenting out the date check. ckcftp.c, 3 Jul 2002. ++ ++A better way to fix the previous problem is to always set the file date from ++the server and then only allow /RECOVER to work when the dates are equal. ++But that's not possible because MDTM is not implemented universally, and it ++conflicts with how Kermit currently works, namely that FTP DATES are OFF by ++default. Also, checking dates prevents [M]GET /RECOVER from working with ++files that were incompletely downloaded by some other FTP client. ++ ++In FTP MGET /RECOVER ..., the first file in each group ++is always downloaded. Diagnosis: Kermit sends "TYPE A" prior to NLST (as it ++must). Then when it sends its first SIZE command, it's still in ASCII mode, ++so the server sends the "ASCII size" rather than the binary size, which does ++not agree with the size of the local file (which was downloaded in binary ++mode), so recovery is always attempted even when the files are identical. The ++TYPE A command is sent by initconn(). After the remote_files() call, we have ++to change the type back to the prevailing type before sending the first SIZE ++command. Fixed in cmdlinget() and doftpget(): ckcftp.c, 3 Jul 2002. ++ ++In FTP MGET /EXCEPT: used with SET XFER DISPLAY brief, files that ++are skipped just say ERROR instead of saying why they were skipped. Fixed ++in doftpget(): ckcftp.c, 3 Jul 2002. ++ ++Added EXIT to top-level HELP text. ckuus2.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Strip braces in REINPUT n {string}. ckuusr.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Added /QUIET switch to ASK-class commands. This means not to print any error ++messages when an ASK-class command times out waiting for a response. Made ++sure that when a timeout occurs, the command fails. Also made sure the ++c-Kermit prompt doesn't write over the ASK prompt if ASK times out. Also ++fixed ASK, when it times out, not to return -9, which it did in one case, ++which causes a command-stack dump. ckuus[267].c, ckucmd.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed SET FILE INCOMPLETE help text, which said that both KEEP and AUTO were ++the default. ckuus2.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++If you SET FTP DEB ON and then turn it OFF, the MGET temp file is still kept. ++Fixed by getting rid of ftp_knf variable and using ftp_deb to control whether ++temp file is deleted (ftp_knf was being set from ftp_deb anyway, but then ++wasn't being reset by SET FTP DEB OFF). ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++If an FTP transfer was in progress but the FTP connection drops and automatic ++locus switching is enabled, the locus does not change; thus (for example) a ++subsequent DELETE command makes Kermit send a REMOTE DELETE packet on stdout. ++Fixed in lostpeer(): ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++For docs: FTP CD with no arg might not be accepted by the server; e.g. the ++Kermit FTP server says "501 Invalid number of arguments". ++ ++The FTP module never handled SET INCOMPLETE. Fixed in doftprecv2(). ckcftp.c, ++13 Jul 2002. ++ ++When FTP DATES is ON, we set an incoming file's date only if the file was ++received successfully. Changed the code to set the file's date even if it was ++received only partially (assuming we can get the date from server). ckcftp.c, ++13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Suppose we were doing FTP MGET /UPDATE from a server directory of 100,000 ++files. Kermit would send a SIZE command for every file unconditionally. On ++some connections, e.g. to the Red Hat Rawhide server, each one could take up ++to 30 seconds. That would be 3 million seconds = 34 days. Don't send a SIZE ++command during the selection phase unless a /SMALLER or /LARGER selector was ++given. Once the file is selected, send a SIZE command only if one hadn't been ++sent for that file already. ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Made [M]GET and [M]PUT /UPDATE switch imply FTP DATES ON, since they didn't ++work unless it was. ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Added FTP [M]GET /DATES-DIFFER, which is like /UPDATE except it selects files ++that are newer or older, rather than only newer. This allows updates from ++sources where files might be rolled back to earlier versions. It's a bit ++dangerous if you use it without knowing what it's for, since it allows older ++files to overwrite newer ones. (Code is also in place for [M]PUT ++/DATES-DIFFER, and it works, but I commented it out because it's either ++useless or dangerous since when uploading, you can't set the the file dates ++when they are arrive on the server.) ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Changed chkmodtime() to remember if MDTM fails on a particular connection ++because it's an unknown command (500, 502, or 202), and if so, not to ask ++again. ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++With this last change, I think it's safe to change the default for FTP DATES ++from OFF to ON. ckcftp.c, 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Increased max number of /EXCEPT: patterns from 8 to 64 for file transfer (not ++necessarily for other things). This is now a compile-time symbol NSNDEXCEPT. ++ckcker.h, ckcmai.c, ckclib.c, ckcfns.c, ckcftp.c, ckuus[rx].c. 13 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed FTP MGET to not send SIZE command when there is a name collision and ++FILE COLLISION is DISCARD, even if /SMALLER or /LARGER were also specified. ++ckcftp.c, 15 Jul 2002. ++ ++MGET fails if no files were transferred, even if the reason is that no files ++met the selection critieria: /COLLISION:DISCARD, /UPDATE, /SMALLER, etc. ++Changed MGET to succeed in that case. domget(): ckcftp.c, 16 Jul 2002. ++ ++Big problems with canceling MGET; Ctrl-C cancels the current file, but we ++don't break out of the file loop, we just go on to the next file. Worse, if ++we're executing a command file that has a series of MGETs, Ctrl-C doesn't ++break us out of the command file. Fixed by making failftprecv() and ++failftprecv2() "chain" to the main SIGINT handler, trap(). This is fine in ++Unix, but I'd be really surprised if it works in K95 so I put it in #ifndef ++OS2. Ditto for MPUT: Added the same treatment to failftpsend() and ++failftpsend2(). Ditto for cmdcancel(). To adapt to K95, search for "TEST ME ++IN K95" (5 places). ckcftp.c, 16 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed previous fix to account for the fact that failftpblah() can be called ++not only upon Ctrl-C, but also if transfer interrupted with X or Z. ++ckcftp.c, 16 Jul 2002. ++ ++Yesterday's fixes revealed another problem: Interrupt MGET with Ctrl-C, start ++another MGET, and the file list is total garbage. Diagnosis: secure_getc() ++and secure_getbyte() use internal static buffer pointers. The only way they ++ever get reset is when the data connection is closed by the server, so if you ++interrupt a GET, the pointers are not reset and the next network read (e.g. of ++an NLST response) returns whatever junk was lying around in the old buffer. ++ckcftp.c, 17 Jul 2002. ++ ++FTP MGET temp file is kept only if FTP DEBUG is ON. Changed FTP module to ++also keep it if the regular debug log is active. ckcftp.c, 17 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed version test in ckermit.ini: should be 6 digits, not 5. 17 Jul 2002. ++ ++Changed C-Kermit version number to 8.0.205 so scripts can test for the ++recent changes. ckcmai.c, 18 Jul 2002. ++ ++---8.0.205--- ++ ++SET FILE COLLISION UPDATE would unset FTP DATES due to a typo in the recent ++changes. ckcftp.c, 21 Jul 2002. ++ ++FTP [M]GET /DATES-DIFFER really should have been a collision option. Added ++this option (implemented for FTP only) to both SET FTP COLLISION and the ++FTP [M]GET /COLLISION: table, so this way if you have lots of [M]GETs, you ++don't have to put /DATES-DIFFER on each one. ckcker.h, ckcftp.c, 21 Jul 2002. ++ ++"FTP MGET a* b* c*" would fail to get any c*'s if no b*'s existed. ++ckcftp.c, 21 Jul 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 22 Jul 2002: ++ . Beginnings of Ann Arbor Ambassador terminal emulation for K95; ++ ckuus[57].c, ckuusr.h. ++ . Bump K95 version number to 2.0.2: ckcmai.c ++ ++Added -DCK_PAM -DCK_SHADOW to all Solaris targets, 2.6 and above. makefile, ++23 Jul 2002. ++ ++Discovered that CK_SCRIPTS path search for TAKE files was #ifdef'd out ++except for K95. Fixed in ckuusr.c, 25 Jul 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: changes to support K95 italics: ckuus[57].c, 25 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed path search for TAKE to not search the CK_SCRIPTS path if the filespec ++contains any directory or path parts. Added a new function to check for ++this: int hasnopath(filespec) in ckucmd.c: 26 Jul 2002. ++ ++Update HP-UX build instructions from PeterE: makefile, 26 Jul 2002. ++ ++Commented out "const" from struct pam_message declarations because it ++causes "initialization type mismatch" warnings. ckufio.c, 26 Jul 2002. ++ ++Suppose you have a network directory containing a listing for host "foo": ++ ++ foo tcp/ip foo.bar.com ++ ++Then in K95 you give a command "set host /network-type:ssh foo". This ++results in the directory lookup replacing the "ssh" network type with TCP/IP, ++and making a Telnet connection. Fix attempted at about line 8625 of ckuus7.c ++in cx_net(); needs testing in K95. 26 Jul 2002. ++ ++FTP Password: prompt in Unix was not allowing editing. The code looked right; ++I put in some debugging and suddenly it worked. Took out the debugging and ++it still worked. Maybe I dreamed it. Anyway, I fixed the "FTP SENT" debug ++log entry to not record the password, and removed a redundant section above ++to log the same thing, but prior to any charset conversion. ckcftp.c, ++27 Jul 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 28 Jul 2002: ++ . Fix typo in initxlist(): ckcmai.c. ++ . Fix typo in Friday's set-host fix: ckuus7.c. ++ . Move parsing of --height/width command-line args after prescan(): ckuusy.c. ++ ++Added invisible top-level SITE and PASSIVE commands for FTP as a convenience ++for habituated FTP client users. ckuusr.[ch], ckcftp.c, 28 Jul 2002. ++ ++A while back a user asked if it was possible to MGET a bunch of files from ++an FTP server and have them all appended to each other upon arrival. The ++obvious way to do this would have been: ++ ++ mget /collision:append /as-name:bigfile *.* ++ ++But to make this work, I had to get rid of the "as-name must contain ++variables" check in the MGET parser. doftpget(): ckcftp.c, 28 Jul 2002. ++ ++Verified that it was possible to do the same thing (GET a bunch of files ++and append them all into one result file) with Kermit protocol. It works ++fine but in this case there is no /COLLISION switch; you have to SET FILE ++COLLISION APPEND first. 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++Changed COPY /APPEND to allow wild source to single destination file, e.g. ++"copy /append *.* bigfile". ckuus6.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++From Mark Berryman: a replacement for zchkpath(), the VMS routine that checks ++whether a file is in the current directory; the old one (that I wrote) was ++a hack that only worked sometimes. Martin Vorlaender verified Mark's code in ++the situation where mine was breaking (server running in captive account). ++ckvfio.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++PeterE reported a problem with SWITCH case labels that start with '#': ++The problem is that the SWITCH variable contents in this case happens to be ++a comment, e.g.: ++ ++ CMD(M)[_forward # Stand: 24.07.2002] ++ ++so the GOTO target is null. The solution would be for SWITCH to put the GOTO ++(_FORWARD) target in quotes. But GOTO does not strip quotes or braces from ++around its target. Fixed in ckuusr.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed the SWITCH macro definition to put the _FORWARD target in quotes. ++ckuus5.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++PeterE also reported that an empty SWITCH case label did not work. There's no ++particular reason why it should, but after a brief look, it wasn't that hard ++so I did it. It required commenting out the check for empty labels and fixing ++the comparison in dogoto(). Now it's possible to read lines from a file and ++use each line as a SWITCH variable, with patterns as case labels, including an ++empty label to match empty lines, #* labels to match comment lines, etc. ++ckuus[r6].c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++PeterE also reported the value of \%* acquiring a trailing blank when ++referenced inside a SWITCH statment. This happens because \%* is formed using ++\fjoin() on the \&_[] array based on its dimension, and at some point the ++dimension is spuriously increased by one. As a workaround, I made \fjoin() ++ignore trailing empty \&_[] array elements and oddly enough this also fixed ++the growing dimensions problem. The many script torture tests reveal no ill ++effects, so it seems like a keeper. ckuus4.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++Some of Peter's sample scripts made C-Kermit 8.0.201 dump core, but no more. ++ ++Fixed "delete xxx" to print an error message and fail if if xxx does not exist. ++Ditto for when xxx is a directory. ckuus6.c, 30 Jul 2002. ++ ++Patches to SSL modules from Jeff based on yesterday's advisory. ck_ssl.[ch], ++31 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed some typos affecting the filename collision action during command-line ++FTP [M]GET. ckcftp.c, 31 Jul 2002. ++ ++Fixed SHOW FTP to handle FTP COLLISION DATES-DIFFER. ckcftp.c, 31 Jul 2002. ++ ++A while back someone pointed out that SET CONTROL UNPREFIX ALL and SET ++PREFIXING NONE gave different results. Fixed them to use the same code. ++Also made "set prefixing none" visible. ckuus3.c, 4 Aug 2002. ++ ++Added SET CD HOME , to let the user specify which directory is intended ++when "CD" or "KCD" is given by itself. This is because in Windows, some ++applications set up their own HOME environment variable that isn't necessarily ++where the user wants "cd" to go, but redefining HOME can interfere with the ++application (example: Windows EMACS). SET CD HOME was done by adding a myhome ++variable, initially a NULL pointer, and then changing homepath() to use it if ++it is set. zhome() is not affected. Also the homepath() prototype had been ++missing from header files. ckcmai.c, ckuusr.h, ckuus[2345].c, 4 Aug 2002. ++ ++PeterE got another core dump with his SWITCH statement. Found a place where ++an out-of-bounds array reference could occur if the switch variable was ++empty. ckuus6.c, 5 Aug 2002. ++ ++PeterE noticed that if the switch variable contained a comma, spurious matches ++could occur with the label pattern. The real problem turns out to be what ++happens when the SWITCH variable doesn't match any of the case labels and ++there is no DEFAULT label. Fixed by having dogoto() in the SWITCH (_FORWARD) ++case pop the command stack before returning failure, i.e. by moving the ++"if (stopflg) return(0);" statement down a few lines. ckuus6.c, 5 Aug 2002. ++ ++PeterE noticed that a SWITCH case label of :* did not match an empty SWITCH ++variable. Fixed in doswitch(): ckuus6.c, 6 Aug 2002. ++ ++In testing the previous fix, I found it only worked sometimes. Inspection ++of the debug log showed that a statement like: ++ ++ if (y == -3) s = "{}"; ++ ++was assigning "{" rather than "{}" to s. Replacing the string constant by a ++buffer containing the same string fixed it. The reason (guessed correctly by ++PeterE) was the following sequence: ++ ++ y = cmfld("Variable name","",&s,xxstring); ++ if (y == -3) s = "{}"; ++ len = ckstrncpy(tmpbuf,brstrip(s),TMPBUFSIZ); ++ ++brstrip() (by design and as documented) affects the string in place. But in ++this case the string is a constant, not data in a buffer, so all further uses ++of "{}" get the wrong string (at least in optimized builds). The only real ++cure is to change brstrip() to make a copy of its argument if it has to do ++anything to it. This will slow down some scripts, but it's too risky to ++leave it as it was. ckclib.c, 6 Aug 2002. ++ ++The previous change required an audit of the C-Kermit code to make sure that ++no references to brstrip() depended the result buffer being persistent, or the ++result pointer indicating a position in the source buffer. Oops, it turns out ++that thousands of places rely on brstrip() working in place. Therefore the ++change had to be undone. There's no good way to write a dummy-proof brstrip(); ++programmers either have be sure they're not calling it with a pointer to a ++string constant, or else they have to copy the result back to the right place ++each time. Better to leave it as it was and audit the code to fix any calls ++that refer to string constants (turns out there were only two). Restored the ++original fix to doswitch() (replacing the string constant by a buffer holding ++the same string), plus minor fixes to ckcftp.c, ckuus[r36].c, 6 Aug 2002. ++ ++We need file dialogs in several situations in the K95 GUI. I added a "user ++query" routine for this, uq_file(), in ckuus3.c, filling it in only for Unix. ++Then I added code to call it from rcvfil() when (a) it's an autodownload, and ++(b) SET TERM AUTODOWNLOAD is ASK (I just added this option; it needs to be set ++to see it in action -- maybe it should be the default for KUI, in which case ++initialize "int autodl = ?" to TAD_ASK in ckcmai.c). Works fine, except of ++course it interferes with the file-transfer display, but that won't be a ++problem in K95G. ckuusr.h, ckuus[37].c, ckcfns.c, ckucns.c, 6 Aug 2002. ++ ++Another place we need a file dialog is when Kermit is a URL interpreter. The ++problem is: how can we let the user decide whether Kermit should ask? There ++really isn't any way. Either it always asks or it never does. In this case I ++think it makes sense to always ask if it's KUI, otherwise never. I added the ++code for ftp: URLs to to doftprecv2(), which I tested successfully in Unix ++before putting it into #ifdef KUI..#endif. Also added code for http[s] to ++ckuusy.c in #ifdef KUI..#endif, not tested. ++ ++Still need this added for K95G Actions->Capture. The clearest example is the ++FTP one. Just search for KUI in the FTP module. ++ ++Some minor adjustments to yesterday's work, mainly just comments, plus ++generate the full pathname for the default file. ckuus3.c, ckcftp.c, ++7 Aug 2002. ++ ++Note: for some reason cmofi() is not supplying the default value if user ++enters an empty name... (but that won't affect the Windows version). ++ ++Added /USER: and /PASSWORD: switches to SET TCP { HTTP-PROXY, SOCKS-SERVER }. ++ckuus3.c, 7 Aug 2002. ++ ++New 'uninstall' target from PeterE, works by having the 'install' target ++write an UNINSTALL shell script. makefile, 8 Aug 2002. ++ ++Added some debugging statements to the VMS communications i/o module to try ++to track down a problem that occurs when the controlling terminal is a LAT ++device. ckvtio.c, 10 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed the non-K95 uq_file() to respect the given default name, but still show ++the fully qualified absolute pathname for the default in the dialog. The ++reason to not use the fully qualifed name as the default in the cmxxx() calls ++is that this can easily result in a whole directory tree being created due to ++directory aliases, symlinks, etc. So when you get a file by referring to its ++URL (e.g. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/READ.ME), uq_file() converts the ++READ.ME part to (e.g.) /home/fdc/tmp/READ.ME but gives just "READ.ME" as the ++default when parsing the name. This way the user knows where it will go and ++gets an opportunity to change it, and if the default is accepted, it goes into ++the current directory. uq_file(): ckuus3.c, 10 Aug 2002. ++ ++Found the spot for calling uq_file() for kermit:// URL downloads. Added ++prefatory text to filename prompts for Kermit and FTP downloads. ckcfns.c, ++ckcftp.c, 10 Aug 2002. ++ ++Now with kermit:// or ftp:// URL downloads there's no way to disable the ++prompting. I could easily make SET TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD ASK cover these ++cases too (even though "terminal" has nothing to do with FTP or URL ++downloads). OK, I did this, but now prompting is disabled by default. ++ckcftp.c, ckcfns.c. 10 Aug 2002. ++ ++Enabled file prompting (adl_ask) by default in K95G, disabled it by default ++everywhere else. So now FTP and Kermit URL downloads as well as terminal-mode ++Kermit (but not Zmodem) downloads are prompted for if TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD is ++ASK, which is it by default only in K95G. But this will happen only if ++uq_file() is filled in for K95G; otherwise everything should work as before. ++ckcmai.c, 10 Aug 2002. ++ ++Notes: ++ . Need a better command to control this. ++ . FTP URL downloads are almost instantaneous, whereas Kermit URL downloads ++ take a really long time to set up (logging in takes at least 10 seconds). ++ ++From Jeff, 13 Aug 2002: ++ . Increase K95 version to 2.1.0: ckcmai.c. ++ . SET TCP { HTTP-PROXY, SOCKS-SERVER } /USER: /PASSWORD: actions: ckuus3.c. ++ ++From PeterE: a new install target that's only about half as a big as the ++previous one, yet still generates an UNINSTALL script. makefile, 13 Aug 2002. ++ ++Vace wanted to be able to give the FTP client an offset for the server time, ++in case the server's time (or timezone) is set incorrectly. I added this by ++building on all the date/time parsing/arithmetic code -- notably delta times ++-- that was done for C-Kermit 8.0. The new command is SET FTP ++SERVER-TIME-OFFSET delta-time; shows up in SHOW FTP and HELP SET FTP. ++ckcftp.c, 13 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed HELP ASK and HELP GETOK text. ckuus2.c, 14 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed GETOK to accept /GUI switch even in K95.EXE and C-Kermit, just like ASK ++does (in which case, it just ignores it). ckuus6.c, 14 Aug 2002. ++ ++SET XFER CHAR TRANSPARENT no longer disables character-set translation because ++file-scanning turns it back on. The "new way" to disable character-set ++translation is SET XFER TRANSLATION OFF. This needlessly confuses users who ++expect the old way to still work. So I fixed SET XFER CHAR TRANSPARENT to set ++XFER TRANSLATION OFF, and SET XFER CHAR anything-else to set it back ON. ++ckuus3.c, 15 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed SET TERM AUTODOWNLOAD { ON, OFF } to turn off the ASK flag (adl_ask). ++ckuus7.c, 16 Aug 2002. ++ ++Added FEAT query to FTP client from draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-13.txt. FEAT is ++sent along with REST 0, MODE S, and STRU F if /NOINIT is not included in the ++FTP OPEN command. Parsing the FEAT result is handled by turning the "auth" ++argument to getreply() into a function code: GRF_AUTH to parse AUTH reply; ++GRF_FEAT to parse FEAT reply. For GRF_FEAT, getreply() fills in a flag array, ++sfttab[] (server feature table); sfttab[0] > 0 means server responded to the ++FEAT query, in which case individual elements are set > 0 for each supported ++feature. ckcftp.c, 18 Aug 2002. ++ ++If server sends a feature list, display it if FTP DEBUG is on, then set mdtmok ++and sizeok (the flags that say whether it's OK to send MDTM and SIZE commands) ++accordingly. If user gives an [M]PUT /RECOVER command and server has ++announced it doesn't support REST, print a warning but try anyway (maybe ++change this later). Responses about other features that we use such as AUTH ++and PBSZ are ignored for now -- i.e. we try them anyway. And of course ++responses for features we don't care about (LANG, TVFS, PROT) are ignored. ++ckcftp.c, 18 Aug 2002. ++ ++If the server says it supports MLST, use MLSD instead of NLST to get the file ++list. This is done in remote_files() with some simple string-twiddling. Then ++replace the relevant (but not all) SIZE commands with code to first check if ++we already got the size from the MLSD response and use that instead rather ++than asking again. Same deal for MDTM. ckcftp.c, 18 Aug 2002. ++ ++Checked that this works when giving pathnames in the MGET filespec. Checked ++to make sure everything works as before with servers that don't support FEAT ++or MLSD. Checked to make sure FTP OPEN blah /NOINIT worked with servers that ++do support FEAT and MLSD. Checked that FTP CHECK works. It's all OK. ++ ++Tested only with Ipswitch server; need to find and test with others. ++ ++The stack of temp files needed for MGET /RECURSIVE is annoying because what ++if we run out of file descriptors... But the spec doesn't provide a way to ++request a recursive listing. ++ ++Supplied a missing comma in HELP SET CD text. ckuus2.c, 19 Aug 2002. ++ ++Generalized parsing of MLST/MLSD file facts and values. Got file type from ++server and had MGET skip non-regular files. ckcftp.c, 19 Aug 2002. ++ ++Kirk Turner-Rustin reported that if Unix C-Kermit has a SET ++HOST PTY connection (e.g. SSH) open, local window size changes are not ++propogated through the connection to the host. I imagine that must be because ++the SIGWINCH signal is caught by Kermit and its children don't see it; maybe ++if I pass it along to the child fork, all will be OK. Began by exporting ++"slavepid" from the pty module and changing its name to pty_fork_pid. Moved ++the SIGWINCH handler, winchh(), from ckctel.c to ckutio.c. Armed it from Unix ++sysinit() so it's always armed. This way window changes affect Unix C-Kermit ++no matter what mode it's in: tt_rows, tt_cols, cmd_rows, and cmd_cols are all ++kept in sync. Then if we're not in remote mode (i.e. we have a ttyfd), we ++call tn_snaws() and rlog_snaws() (which should be ok since they return right ++away if the appropriate kind of connection is not open) and then if ++(pty_fork_pid > -1), a SIGWINCH signal is sent to it. ckupty.c, ckctel.c, ++ckutio.c, 20 Aug 2002. ++ ++All this works fine except the PTY part; in other words, the original problem ++is not fixed. The "kill(pty_fork_pid,SIGWINCH)" call executes without error ++but has no effect because the size of the PTY never changed. To make this ++work I had to add an ioctl() to change the size of the PTY before sending it ++the SIGWINCH. Compiles and works ok on Linux and Solaris; Kirk also confirmed ++it for AIX 4.3.3. ckutio.c, 20 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed xlookup() to work for uppercase keywords. ckucmd.c, 20 Aug 2002. ++ ++Fixed FTP parsefeat() and parsefacts() to use xlookup() instead of lookup(), ++since abbreviated keywords are not allowed. ckcftp.c, 20 Aug 2002. ++ ++Adjusted some lines from yesterday's window-size code for platforms I hadn't ++tried yet. ckutio.c, 21 Aug 2002. ++ ++EXIT from K95 when it has an FTP connection open and it pops up the ++Locus dialog. Made it not do this if it knows it's in the act of EXITing. ++ckuus[rx].c, 22 Aug 2002. ++ ++In K95, FTP GET in ASCII mode results in a file with Unix line terminators ++even though the protocol is correct: ++ ++ RETR smjulie.txt ++ 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for smjulie.txt (1878 bytes). ++ ++The source file is a regular Unix text file with LF at the end of each line. ++It's incredible that nobody noticed this before. It only came to light when ++somebody tried to open a downloaded text file with Notepad, which doesn't ++handle Unix-format files (Wordpad and Emacs have no problems with them). The ++problem was in doftprecv2() in the FTT_ASC section. There was no conditional ++code for Unix vs Windows. In all cases, the code discarded incoming CR's in ++ASCII mode. I put the CR-discarding code in #ifdef UNIX..#endif. ckcftp.c, ++22 Aug 2002. ++ ++Removed super-verbose debugging from gtword(): ckucmd.c, 23 Aug 2002. ++ ++Gregory Bond reported a problem with "if defined \$(BLAH) ..." inside of a ++SWITCH statement. It wasn't really the SWITCH that was doing it, it was the ++fact that he had enclosed the SWITCH case in braces, which made it an ++"immediate macro" (XXMACRO). The XXMACRO code parsed the macro definition ++(the part inside the braces) with cmtxt(...,xxstring), which should have been ++cmtxt(...,NULL) to defer the evaluation of the interior of the macro until it ++was executed. This is better illustrated with the following example: ++ ++ { echo START, for \%i 1 3 1 { echo \%i }, echo STOP } ++ ++which totally fell on its face prior to the fix. Also fixed ?-help for ++immediate macros, which was broken too. ckuusr.c, 23 Aug 2002. ++ ++RFC959 says STOU does not take an argument. But every FTP server I've ++encountered but one accepts the arg and constructs the unique name from it, ++which is better than making up a totally random name for the file, which is ++what RFC959 calls for. Especially because there is no way for the client to ++find out the name chosen by the server (because RFC 959 and 1123 are ++contradictory, plus no servers follow either one of them for this anyway). So ++we try STOU with the argument first, which works with most servers, and if it ++fails, we retry it without the arg, for the benefit of the one picky server ++that is not "liberal in what it accepts" UNLESS the first STOU got a 502 code ++("not implemented") which means STOU is not accepted, period (which happens ++with ProFTPD). ckcftp.c, 25 Aug 2002. ++ ++Added SET FTP ANONYMOUS-PASSWORD (plus help text and show value). ckcftp.c, ++25 Aug 2002. ++ ++Made FTP command "not available" if NOFTP is defined. ckuusr.c, 25 Aug 2002. ++ ++Forced client to send a TYPE command upon initial connection, since given ++the variable quality of FTP servers, it's not safe to assume the server is ++in ASCII or any other particular mode. ckcftp.c, 25 Aug 2002. ++ ++SET FTP CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION ON is completely broken in K95, although it ++works fine in C-Kermit. Furthermore it is broken in both the GUI and Console ++versions, so it's not a Unicode vs OEM console-character-set issue. ++ ++Added Concurrent PowerMAX OS target from Tom Horsley. makefile, ckuver.h, ++27 Aug 2002. ++ ++Minor fixes to FTP module from Jeff. ckcftp.c, 27 Aug 2002. ++ ++New Makefile target for Mac OS X 10.2, needs -DNDSYSERRLIST added, from ++William Bader. 2 Sep 2002. ++ ++SET OPT DIR /DOTFILES didn't work for server listings. A few years ago when ++I front-ended zxpand() with nzxpand(), I missed a couple places where ++traverse() needed to refer to xmatchdot (nzxpand's argument flag) rather than ++global matchdot. Fixed in traverse(): ckufio.c, 2 Sep 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 4 Sep 2002: ++ . setautodl(x) -> setautodl(x,y): ckuusr.h, ckuus[7y].c ++ . Add another parameter to popup_readblah(): ckuus6.c ++ . Sort out some confusion in scanfile() where a parameter was also used as a ++ local flag. ckuusx.c. ++ . Protect restoring of saved terminal idle parameters with a flag that says ++ they were actually saved. ckuusr.c. ++ . Rework uq_text() and uq_mtxt(). ckuus3.c. ++ . Fix FTP charset translation for little-endian hardware: ckcftp.c. ++ ++The latter still doesn't work in Linux: ++ ++ (/home/fdc/kermit/) C-Kermit>set ftp server-character-set latin1-iso ++ (/home/fdc/kermit/) C-Kermit>set file character-set utf8 ++ (/home/fdc/kermit/) C-Kermit>get latin1.txt ++ ++Results in "????????: file not found". But it works fine on the Sun. ++ ++Jeff's patch removed a little-endian byte-swap (LEBS) from doftpsend2(). But ++the real problem was that LEBS was not being done consistently throughout the ++module. There were similar xgnbyte()/xpnbyte() loops elsewhere in the code, ++and all of them needed to work the same way. Undoing Jeff's fix and then ++adding the LEBS to the loop in getreply() makes downloads work right, but the ++messages are still messed up (they come out in Chinese :-) Begin by moving all ++byte-swapping operations that occur in ckcftp.c itself into a new function, ++bytswap(). It's either right to do it all the time, or to do it never; this ++way we can turn it on and off in one place. ++ ++xp/gnbyte() include behavior that depends on what Kermit is doing: W_SEND, ++etc. xpnbyte() tests W_KERMIT, which is a combination of W_SEND, W_RECV, etc. ++Defined a new symbol W_XFER, which is like W_KERMIT but includes W_FTP. These ++are all the "whats" in which character sets might need to be converted. ++Changed the W_KERMIT reference in xpnbyte() to W_XFER. Fixed the inderminate ++"what" state after an FTP command by moving "what = W_COMMAND;" from before ++the main parse loop to inside it (this didn't matter before the addition of ++FTP but now it does). ckcker.h, ckcftp.c, ckuus5.c, 6 Sep 2002. ++ ++Finally I changed xlatec() to be consistent with all the other xgnbyte() / ++xpnbyte() usage throughout the FTP module and, poof, everything worked in ++Linux (and still works on the Sun). We still need some work in Windows (where ++the file character-set is not necessarily the console character set for ++messages) but we can tackle that next. ckcftp.c, 6 Sep 2002. ++ ++Checking yesterday's work: ++ ++Kermit file transfers with charset translation work fine in both directions. ++ ++FTP GET with charset translation works fine on both BE and LE ++ ++Fixed a typo in yesterday's changes that made FTP PUT with charset translation ++always upload 0-length files. ckcftp.c, 7 Sep 2002. ++ ++FTP PUT (after the typo was fixed) with charset translation works fine on BE, ++but on LE the message comes out in Chinese and the resulting file gets ? or ++nothing for all for the accented letters: ++ ++ FTP... Kermit ++ Up Dn Up Dn Term ++ BE OK OK OK OK xx ++ LE no OK OK OK xx ++ ++xx = C-Kermit CONNECT mode with translation doesn't seem to do anything, not ++only in today's code, but also in the 8.0 release version: "set term char ++latin1 utf8" -- SHOW CHAR shows the right stuff, but no translation is done. ++Ditto for the 7.0 release. That can't be right... ++ ++But one problem at a time -- what's wrong with LE FTP uploads? Note that ++XLATE works on the same machine, so it's obviously confusion in xgnbyte() ++about "what". Suppose we make xgnbyte() ALWAYS return bytes in BE order. ++This makes sense because xgnbyte() is almost always used to feed xpnbyte(), ++and xpnbyte() requires its bytes to come in BE order. This means that all ++code that uses xgnbyte()/xpnbyte() loops can be simplifed, which I did for ++the FTP module. ckcfns.c, ckcftp.c, 7 Sep 2002. ++ ++Of course Kermit protocol uses xgnbyte() too, but only for filling ++packets, and packets never contain UCS2 and even if they did, it would have ++to be big-endian, so no changes needed for getpkt(). Now we have: ++ ++ FTP... Kermit ++ Up Dn Up Dn ++ BE OK OK OK OK ++ LE OK OK OK OK ++ ++Now let's look at the remaining xgnbyte() calls in the rest of the code: ++ ++ckuus4.c: ++ xlate() uses it of course. I simplified the general-case loop. ++ Works OK on both Sun and Linux. ++ ++ckuus6.c: ++ typegetline() uses it. I commented out the byte swap. Seems OK. ++ ++Built and tested on Linux, Solaris, and SunOS. I'm sure I must have broken ++something, but the main things are better than they were. Kermit and FTP ++transfers need testing in K95, as well as the TYPE command (there's a bunch of ++special K95 code in there). C-Kermit charset translation during CONNECT is ++still broken, or else I forgot how to use it, but that's a separate issue ++since xgnbyte()/xpnbyte() are not involved. And we still need to do something ++in FTP getreply() for K95 to convert messages to the console character set for ++display, rather than the file character set (should be trivial). Also there's ++still a lot of extra debugging and commented-out junk in ckcftp.c to be ++cleaned up after more testing. ++ ++During yesterday's testing, I noticed that REMOTE SET { FILE, XFER } ++CHARACTER-SET didn't work. The server accepted these commands but they didn't ++seem to do anything. In fact, they did work, but they were undone later by ++code in sfile() that restored the global settings in case they had been ++temporarily overridden by autoswitching or whatever. The solution is to ++"unsave" the saved values whenever a global setting is performed explicitly. ++Tested successfully against Sun and Linux servers. Also the server end of ++REMOTE SET needed updating for Unicode. ckcfn[s3].c, ckuus3.c, 8 Sep 2002. ++ ++Cleaned commented-out cruft and extra debugging from ckcftp.c. 8 Sep 2002. ++ ++Kermit autodownload with ASK file dialog: if user supplied an absolute ++pathname, it was treated like a relative one. Fixed the invocation of ++uq_file() in rcvfil() to temporarily override the RECEIVE PATHNAMES setting. ++ckcfns.c, 10 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added SET TERMINAL ROLL KEYSTROKES { SEND, RESTORE-AND-SEND, IGNORE }, parse ++only. Needs implementation (search for tt_rkeys and rollkeytab in ckuus7.c). ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[27].c, 10 Sep 2002. ++ ++If FILE INCOMPLETE is DISCARD and a file is being received by IKSD but IKSD ++gets a Telnet LOGOUT command, the partial file is not deleted. In fact this ++happens any time doexit() is called for any reason during file reception, ++e.g. because of SIGHUP. Added code to doclean() to check if a download ++output file was open, and if so, to delete it after closing it if keep==0. ++ckuusx.c, 10 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added a brief one-line message after remote-mode file transfer saying ++what (or how many) file(s) were transferred, where they went, and whether ++the transfer was successful -- kind of an automatic WHERE command, useful ++with autodownloads so you know what happened. ckcpro.w, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++The Unix and VMS C-Kermit CONNECT modules have botched remote-charset to ++local-UTF8 translation ever since the Unicode was first added in v7.0. Fixed ++in ckucns.c, ckucon.c, ckvcon.c, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++On to pattern-matching... The matchdot business should apply only for (Unix) ++filename matching, not for general string matching. Fixed in ckmatch(): ++ckclib.c, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++A bigger problem occurs in filename matching. Somehow the dirsep == fence ++business interferes with matching {foo,bar,baz} segments. For example, I have ++a filename "foo" and I want to match it with the pattern "{foo,bar}". Somehow ++the segment pattern becomes "*/foo" and doesn't match the string. Where does ++the '/' get tacked on? I don't even know how to explain this, but the short ++story was that ckmatch(), under certain circumstances, would back up to before ++the beginning of the filename string, which just happened to contain a "/" ++(and before that a ".") because of who was calling it. Obviously this is not ++how to write a pattern matching function... Ensuring that it never backs up ++beyond the beginning of a string fixed the immediate problem and does not seem ++to have broken any other matching scenarios (I have 150 of them in my test ++script). ckclib.c, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++There's still a problem though. Suppose the a client sends "dir {{.*,*}}" to ++a server. This asks for a directory listing of all files that begin with ++dot as well as all files. Still doesn't work because we don't normally show ++dot-files, but in this case it SHOULD work because ".*" was explicitly ++requested. Staring at the ckmatch() code revealed how to fix this, and I did, ++but that was only half the problem. The other half was that the list of ++files being fed to ckmatch() did not include the dotfiles in the first place. ++The cure here is to change nzxpand() to prescan the pattern to see if it ++includes a leading dot, and if so to set the "xmatchdot" flag itself, even ++if it wasn't set by the caller. ckclib.c, ckufio.c, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++Now that {foo,bar,...} patterns work better, I added a quick hack to the ++DIRECTORY command to allow multiple filespecs to be given, in which case we ++combine them into a {file1,file2,...} pattern before calling nzxpand(). Works ++fine but it's a hack because you don't get file lists upon "?" in the second ++and subsequent filespec fields, but I doubt anyone will notice. So now, ++finally, people can do "dir .* *" like they do in Unix (except with ls) to get ++a listing of all files in a directory without having to know about or use the ++/DOTFILES switch. This was NOT done for the server end of RDIR because of ++ambiguity of spaces as separators versus filename characters.) domydir(): ++ckuus6.c, ckuus[r2].c, 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added a CONTINUE command. In a script, this does whatever CONTINUE did before ++(e.g. in a FOR or WHILE loop). At the prompt, it calls popclvl(), which gives ++a more natural way to continue a script that has "shelled out" to the prompt. ++ckuusr.[ch], 11 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added help text for CONTINUE. ckuus2.c, 12 Sep 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 16 Sep 2002: ++ . SET TERM ROLL KEYSTROKES for K95: ckuusr.h, ckuus7.c ++ . Remove the doexit() call from the Telnet TELOPT_LOGOUT handler: ckctel.c ++ ++Fixed an FTP debug message to be consistent with Kermit ones. ++ckcftp.c, 16 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added SET/SHOW TRANSFER REPORT to turn the post-transfer report off and on. ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[234].c, 16 Sep 2002. ++ ++Fixed Solaris (and maybe some other SVORPOSIX builds) to find out their full ++hostname rather than just short form (e.g. watsol.cc.columbia.edu rather than ++just watsol). ckhost(): ckuusx.c, 16 Sep 2002. ++ ++"cat somefile | kermit -Ts -" is supposed to send stdin in text mode, but ++K95's file transfer display reports BINARY. Looked at C-Kermit code; it seems ++fine. Looked at packet and debug logs; C-Kermit was indeed sending in text ++mode and announcing it correctly. K95 gattr() is doing the right thing: ++ ++ gattr file type[AMJ]=3 ++ gattr attribute A=text=0 ++ gattr sets tcharset TC_TRANSP[A] ++ ++Same thing happens when C-Kermit is receiving. Yet when I send an actual ++file, rather than stdin, it's received in text mode. The only difference is ++that stdin does not have a Length attribute in its A-packet, so in this case ++the receiver skips any calls to screen() that show the length or percent done. ++Aha, so maybe it's just a display problem -- scrft() is not being called to ++repaint the file type if the size was not known. Fixed in opena() by ++removing the IF clause from "if (fsize > -1L) xxscreen(SCR_FS,0,fsize,"");". ++ckcfn3.c, 18 Sep 2002. ++ ++K95 user has a listfile containing some regular filenames and then some ++filenames that include paths and has all kinds of problems with MGET /LISTFILE ++(pieces of different names concatenated to each other, etc). Setting up the ++same scenario here, I don't see the same problems but I do see "Refused: Name" ++when we go to get a path/name file. This happens because (a) we had already ++got a top-level file with a certain name, (b) a file in a subdirectory has the ++same name, (c) we are stripping the path before calling zchki(), and (d) ++FTP COLLISION is set to DISCARD. How do we make FTP not strip the path? ++ ++This is an interesting question... The answer depends on where the user ++wants the file to go. Normally if you tell an FTP client to "get foo/bar", ++you want the file "bar" to be downloaded to the current directory. ++ ++Anyway, it turns out the FTP module uses paths locally during MGET only if ++/RECURSIVE was specified. So: ++ ++ mget /listfile:blah /recursive ++ ++should have made this work, but it didn't because in the /LISTFILE case, ++we have effectively turned an MGET into a series of GETs, where the code to ++check whether to strip the path didn't check the recursive flag because how ++could a GET (as opposed to an MGET) be recursive? Adding this exception to ++the if-condition got us a bit farther but now when we try to open the output ++file in doftprecv2(), zopeno() fails because the name contains a dirsep. ++We have to call zmkdir() first but that wasn't happening because some other ++flag wasn't set right in this case. Finally zmkdir was called, but with ++the wrong string. After fixing that, it works. Now we should be able ++to use /RECURSIVE to force the pathname to be used on the local end. ++ckcftp.c, 19 Sep 2002. ++ ++Checked FTP filename conversion issues. FTP FILENAMES AUTO is supposed to ++mean LITERAL if "wearealike" OR server is UNIX or Windows, otherwise ++CONVERTED, but there were places where this rule was not applied consistently, ++fixed now. ckcftp.c, 21 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added SET FTP DISPLAY, which is like SET TRANSFER DISPLAY but applies only to ++FTP, mainly because I tended to type it all the time. Now if you have dual ++sessions, each session can have its own transfer display style. ckcftp.c, ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[347].c, 21 Sep 2002. ++ ++Back to FTP MLSD. We're supposed to match the pattern locally, not rely on ++the server to filter its list according to the client's pattern. Thus we must ++also allow an empty argument to MGET and must not send a filespec with MLSD. ++Actually this is tricky -- how is the client supposed to know whether to send ++a filespec. For example, if the user's command is "mget foo*bar", and the ++server supports MLSD, then what should the client do? The client does not ++know the wildcard syntax on the server, so for all the client knows, this ++might be a valid directory name, in which case it should be sent. On the ++other hand, the user might intend it as a wildcard, in which case it should ++NOT be sent. But the FTP client can't read the user's mind. This is another ++serious flaw in the Elz/Hethmon draft. Anyway, I got the local matching ++business working for MLSD as long as the user's MGET arg is really a pattern ++and not a directory name. To be continued... ckcftp.c, 21 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added FTP { ENABLE, DISABLE } { FEAT, MLST }. If we always send FEAT, we ++usually get a complaint. If we send FEAT and MLST is negotiated, there is a ++good chance it is misimplemented or will have undesirable side effects, such ++as sending huge file lists. NOTE: /NOINIT on the FTP OPEN command also ++disables both of these. ckcftp.c, 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Fixed mkstemp() code in FTP remote_files(). mktemp() does not open the file, ++mkstemp() does open it; previously we had been opening it again and never ++closing the first instance so every MGET would create another open file ++descriptor. ckcftp.c, 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added debug messages for temp-file creation and lines read from the temp file. ++ckcftp.c, 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Eliminated sending of some extraneous TYPE commands, but there's still room ++for improvement. ckcftp.c, 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Moved definition of build date to top of ckcmai.c. 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added recursion to MGET with MLSD... It's all done in remote_files(). ++Temp-file pointers are on a stack (max size 128). When parsing MLSD lines ++from the temp file and we see "type=dir", we create the local directory by ++calling zmkdir(), change to the remote by sending CWD, increment the depth, ++and call ourselves. When reading from a temp file, upon EOF we close and ++dispose of the temp file, return -3 if currently at top level, otherwise we ++free the tmpfile name, decrement the depth, send CDUP to the server, "cd .." ++locally, and go back and read the next line from the previous but now current ++temp file. Conceptually simple but needed hours of debugging -- what must ++be static, what must be on the stack... Seems OK now but still needs some ++heavy testing. ckcftp.c, 22 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added FTP { ENABLE, DISABLE } { SIZE, MDTM } and add help text for FTP ++ENABLE and DISABLE. ckcftp.c, 23 Sep 2002. ++ ++Don't allow restart if SIZE disabled. ckcftp.c, 23 Sep 2002. ++ ++Make sure all implicit SIZE commands are surpressed if SIZE disabled. ++ckcftp.c, 23 Sep 2002. ++ ++If an explicit FTP MODTIME command is sent when MDTM is DISABLED, and it ++succeeds, re-ENABLE MDTM. Ditto for SIZE. ckcftp.c, 23 Sep 2002. ++ ++If an explicit FTP FEATURES command is sent during an FTP session, redo the ++features database from it. ckcftp.c, 23 Sep 2002. ++ ++After further discussion with Robert Elz, I realized I had to expose the ++underlying MGET mechanisms to the user; the draft isn't going to change, and ++the new spec will result in undesirable effects if the client tries to "do the ++right thing" by magic in all situations; thus the user must have some new ++controls: ++ ++ MGET [ /MLST, /NLST, /MATCH:xxx ] [ filespec [ filespec [ ... ] ] ] ++ ++These switches let the user force the use of MLSD or NLST when there's a ++choice, and to force local use of a pattern rather than sending it to the ++server, and even to send a directory name to the server at the same time as ++specifying a pattern for local matching, and of course by default we try to do ++the right thing in all scenarios. Symbols only; not coded yet. ckuusr.h, ++23 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added the three new switches to MGET, plus /MLST is an invisible synonym for ++/MLSD. If /NLST or /MLSD is given it, it forces the corresponding FTP protocol ++directive. ckcftp.c, 25 Sep 2002. ++ ++Now for the tricky part: now we have two separate concepts for what to send to ++the server: a filename or wildcard to be interpreted by the server (NLST only) ++or a directory from which to get a list of all the files (NLST or MLSD), ++possibly together with a pattern to be used by the client to match filenames ++returned by the server. This required giving remote_files() an additional ++argument. Now it uses "pattern" (if any) strictly for local pattern matching ++(because now it is the /MATCH: switch argument, not the MGET filespec), and ++"arg" (the MGET filespec) is what it sends to the server, maybe (see the ++comments in the code for the actual details); either or both these can be ++null. ckcftp.c, 25 Sep 2002. ++ ++Discovered that "mget foo", where foo is a directory name, never worked. ++Fixed in remote_files(): ckcftp.c, 25 Sep 2002. ++ ++Going through every combination of NLST, MLSD, /MATCH:, and MGET arg and ++debugging each case until OK... Then also with the panix.com NetBSD server ++(lukemftpd 1.0) which also supports MLSD.... 11 test cases all debugged and ++tested OK. ckcftp.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added /NODOTFILES switch to FTP MGET, to control what happens with dot-files ++if the server includes their names in the list (as lukemftpd does). There's ++no point in adding a /DOTFILES switch because what could it possibly do? ++ckcftp.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Changed a bunch of "skipthis++" to "continue" in doftpget(), to avoid ++error messages when skipping files that user said she wanted to skip. ++ckcftp.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Added help text for the new MGET switches. ckcftp.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Don't switch LOCUS when making an FTP connection until logged in. ++ckcftp.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Fixed LDIR to run Kermit's built-in DIRECTORY code rather than the external ++directory program. ckuusr.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++Protect iswild() against NULL args. ckufio.c, 26 Sep 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: SET GUI WINDOW RUN-MODE { MAXIMIZE, MINIMIZE, RESTORE }, ++plus variables for GUI Window X position, GUI Window Y position, GUI ++Window X resolution, GUI Window Y resolution, GUI Window Run mode. ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[24].c, 27 Sep 2002. ++ ++From Ronan Flood: updated FreeBSD 1.0 makefile entry, plus an #ifdef to protect ++sysconf() calls. makefile, ckutio.c, 28 Sep 2002. ++ ++Change ftp_auth() to return(0) if an AUTH command gets a 500 response, so it ++doesn't keep sending other kinds of AUTH commands. ckcftp.c, 29 Sep 2002. ++ ++Changes from Jeff to yesterday's changes. ckcftp.c, 30 Sep 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: SSH command-line personality. Uses same command line as the Telnet ++personality. ckcker.h, ckcmai.c, ckuus[4y].c, 3 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 7 Oct 2002: ++ . SET PRINTER CHARACTER-SET. ckuxla.c, ckuusr.h, ckuus[25].c ++ . Promotion of K95 to Beta.01. ckcmai.c ++ . Promotion of SET GUI { MENUBAR, TOOLBAR } to visible. ckuus3.c ++ ++Changed the URL parser as follows: if the username and/or password fields are ++present but empty, as in: ++ ++ ftp://@ftp.xyzcorp.com/somepath ++ or: ftp://:@ftp.xyzcorp.com/somepath ++ but not: ftp://:ftp.xyzcorp.com/somepath ++ ++the pointer for these items becomes a pointer to an empty string, rather than ++a NULL pointer. Then when we go to open the connection, if the username ++string pointer points to an empty string, we prompt for the username (and/or ++password). ckuusy.c 9 Oct 2002. ++ ++Jason Heskett reported an interesting bug involving a core dump when an ++ON_EXIT macro is defined that executes another macro. Sometimes. He was able ++to send a short command file that always crashed. Diagnosis: ON_EXIT, when it ++is called, pokes itself out of the macro table by setting its own entry in the ++macro name list to an empty string. But this interferes with any macro ++lookups that are done while executing ON_EXIT's body and also evidently some ++code is not happy with empty macro names... To fix: replace "on_exit" with ++"on_exxx", so the replacement keyword is (a) nonempty, and (b) doesn't wreck ++the alphabetical sorting of the table. ckuusx.c, 9 Oct 2002. ++ ++Added makefile targets for FreeBSD 4.6 and 5.0. Built and tested on 4.6; ++don't know about 5.0. ckuver.h, makefile, 9 Oct 2002. ++ ++Added targets for AIX 5.2 and 5.3; totally untested. ckuver.h, makefile, ++9 Oct 2002. ++ ++Built current source on Unixware 7.1.3 (make uw7); it's fine. 9 Oct 2002. ++ ++Promoted C-Kermit to 8.0.206 Beta.01 in hopes of a simultaneous release ++with K95 2.1. ckcmai.c, 9 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Change KERMITFONT definitions to use the new (Unicode 3.1) code ++points for the terminal graphics characters (such as VT100 horizontal scan ++lines), rather than private-use codes. ckcuni.c, 10 Oct 2002. ++ ++Jason Heskett also complained that REMOTE CD would print the name of the new ++directory returned by the server even if he SET QUIET ON. This is a tricky ++one. Which server replies should the QUIET settings apply to? If I give a ++REMOTE DIRECTORY command, it means I want to see the directory listing, ++period. But if I give a REMOTE CD command, I get an "unsolicited" response ++message that SET QUIET ON should suppress. Adding message suppression to ++rcv_shortreply() is close, but not totally right; for example, it also ++suppresses the response to REMOTE PWD, which is not helpful. The only right ++way to do this is to suppress for REMOTE CD only, which can be done only by ++setting a (new) global flag, rcdactive. ckuus[r57].c, ckcpro.w, 10 Oct 2002. ++ ++Ditto for REMOTE LOGIN response message ("Logged in"). ckuus7.c, 11 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: SET GUI WINDOW FONT { NAME, SIZE }. ckuusr.h, ckuus4.c, 11 Oct 2002. ++ ++Quick preliminary 8.0.206 build-all: ++ ++ OK SunOS 4.1.3 ++ OK Solaris 2.5.1 ++ OK Solaris 9 ++ OK AIX 4.3.3 ++ OK HP-UX 10.20 ++ OK VMS 7.1 Alpha + TCP/IP ++ OK VMS 7.1 Alpha nonet ++ OK VMS 5.5 VAX + TCP/IP ++ OK VMS 5.5 VAX nonet ++ OK Unixware 7.1.3 ++ OK FreeBSD 3.1 ++ OK FreeBSD 4.6 ++ OK NetBSD 1.5.2 MVME (Gerry B) ++ OK Sinix 5.42 ++ ++Sinix build got stuck on ckuusr.c even though we're not optimizing on Sinix ++any more. Rebooting the machine fixed it. ++ ++Fixed some #ifdefs for VMS in new incomplete-file deletion code in doclean(). ++ckuusx.c, 11 Oct 2002. ++ ++Moved uq_blah() prototypes from ckuusr.h to ckcker.h because these routines ++are called in modules that don't (and shouldn't have to) include ckuusr.h. ++11 Oct 2002. ++ ++Jeff verified secure builds on Linux and Solaris. ++ ++Custom-build workout: 80 different feature-selection combinations: ++ . Fixed yesterday's change for NOSPL: ckcfns.c. ++ . Fixed conflict between NORECALL and USE_ARROWKEYS: ckucmd.c. ++ . Moved setseslog() from ckuus5.c to ckuusx.c to avoid link-time foulups. ++ . Fixed an unguarded reference to zmkdir() in ckcftp.c. ++ . Protected rmsg() by #ifndef NOXFER: ckuus7.c. ++ . Protected initxlist() by #ifndef NOXFER: ckcmai.c. ++ . Fixed unguarded references to g_url struct in xx_ftp(): ckuusy.c. ++ . Fixed unguarded references to tt_snaws() in winchh(): ckutio.c. ++ ++--- 8.0.206 Beta.01 11 Oct 2002 --- ++ ++From Jeff, 16 Oct 2002: ++ . Fix K95 RMDIR: ckcfn3.c. ++ . Makefile targets for Red Hat 7.2, 7.3, 8.0: ckuver.h, makefile. ++ . Added \v(log_xxx) for each kind of log for PeterE: ckuusr.h, ckuus4.c. ++ . Added SET TERM ATTRIBUTE DIM { ON, OFF }: ckuus[27].c. ++ . Change "const" to "CONST" in some PAM declarations. ckufio.c. ++ ++Added SET MATCH { DOTFILE, FIFO } { ON, OFF }. A FIFO special file is a named ++pipe, used for interprocess communication. It must be opened at both ends, so ++it's silly to match them by default; opening a FIFO and attempting to read ++will block forever unless somebody is writing into the other end. Made the ++MATCH FIFO default OFF in all cases. The dotfile default is the same as ++always (OFF for UNIX, ON elsewhere); SET MATCH DOTFILE is simply a more ++untuitive and findable command than SET WILD KERMIT /MATCH-DOT-FILES. Note ++that SET MATCH DOTFILE undoes SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY /[NO]DOTFILES, and vice ++versa. ckcmai.c, ckuusr.h, ckuus[23].c, ckufio.c. 17 Oct 2002. ++ ++Added client and server end of REMOTE SET MATCH { DOTFILE, FIFO } { ON, OFF }. ++The new protocol codes are 330 and 331, respectively. ckuus[367].c, ckcfns.c, ++17 Oct 2002. ++ ++Adjusted the "match dot if pattern starts with dot" heuristic in nzxpand() ++to not kick in if the filespec is "./foo". This probably needs more work. ++ckufio.c, 17 Oct 2002. ++ ++Fixed typo in transcribing Jeff's ckcfn3.c code from yesterday. 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Moved some help text out of #ifdef ANYSSH that had nothing to do with SSH. ++(Idea for a new EMACS feature: M-X list-ifdef-environment.) ++ckuus2.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Removed "set file { permission, protection }" keywords, which led nowhere. ++ckuus7.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Added -DSV68 to all SV/68 targets. Make ckgetfqhostname() just return its ++argument in SV/68; it dumps core otherwise. In case this happens anywhere ++else, add -DNOCKGETFQHOST to CFLAGS. makefile, ckcnet.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++For PeterE, added SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PERMISSIONS { ON, OFF } so incoming and ++outbound permission attributes can be set separately. ckuus[27].c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Changed SHOW ATTRIBUTES to show In and Out permissions separately. ++ckuus5.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Fixed REDO to display the command it's redoing and to add it to the bottom ++of the recall buffer. ckuusr.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++Discovered that DATE SATURDAY dumps core... Apparently it always did; this ++case was not included in the date-time torture test script. The crash happens ++because the DATE parsing code doesn't check for a NULL date-converion ++error-message pointer. Fixed in ckuusr.c, 18 Oct 2002. ++ ++The reason DATE SATURDAY got a date-conversion error was that this path thru ++the code left a result pointer unset. Fixed in cmcvtdate(): ckucmd.c, ++19 Oct 2002. ++ ++DATE SUNDAY +1DAY returned incorrect results (for any day-of-week name, any ++delta time), even though DATE TODAY +1DAY worked fine. Fixed in cmcvtdate(): ++ckucmd.c, 19 Oct 2002. ++ ++SET TAKE ECHO ON counted each line twice when GOTO was active. Fixed in ++dogoto(): ckuus6.c, 19 Oct 2002. ++ ++Jeff noticed: ++"KERMIT READY TO GET... ++ RCVD: (2 files) Last: [/amd/prost/p/kd/jaltman/.src/ckonet.c] (OK) ++the last file attempted may have been ckonet.c but it certainly was ++not the last file received" (similarly for sending). Fixed by having two ++pointers for each name; a preliminary pointer, which is set for each file at ++the beginning of the transfer (when we have all the needed info), and a final ++one that is set from the preliminary one only after the file was transferred ++successfully. This corrects not only the automatic "wheremessage" at the end ++of a remote-mode transfer, but also the WHERE and SHOW FILE command results. ++ckuusx.c, ckcfn[s3].c, ckcpro.w, 19 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: Improve ORIENTATION message for K95 to say which directories are ++for which INI files. ckuusr.c, 23 Oct 2002. ++ ++Removed Beta designation from herald. ckcmai.c, 23 Oct 2002. ++ ++Put final dates and ID strings in Unix and VMS build procedures. ++Makefile, ckvker.com, 23 Oct 2002. ++ ++Build-all... #ifdef adjustments: ckcfns.c... 83 different feature-set ++combinations build OK on Linux. 23 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: SET WIN95 HORIZONTAL-SCAN-LINE-SUBSTITUTIONS. ckuusr.h, ckuus7.c, ++24 Oct 2002. ++ ++Fixed Heath-19 graphic character-set table to use new Unicode 3.1 values ++if WIN95 HORIZ OFF. ckcuni.c, 24 Oct 2002. ++ ++Changed tx_usub() to return Unicode 3.1 values if WIN95 HORIZ OFF. ++ckcuni.c, 24 Oct 2002. <-- No backed off on this. ++ ++Some problems during build-all: ++ ++ . VMS 7.1 TGV 4.2: If I make a Telnet connection with it, then try to send ++ a file (itself. wermit.exe) over the connection, the connection drops ++ after about 20%, the thermometer zooms out to 100% and SUCCESS is reported. ++ This doesn't happen with UCX. ++ ++ . VMS 7.3 TGV 4.3: ckcmai.c won't compile because of a complaint about the ++ declaration of select() (which ckcmai.c doesn't use) in ++ SYS$COMMON:[SYSLIB]DECC$RTLDEF.TLB. Ditto in VMS 7.2 TGV 4.3. ++ Adding NOSELECT to CFLAGS doesn't help. I don't think the VMS version ++ even uses select(). But the TGV 4.3 builds were OK in 8.0.201, so what ++ changed? I don't see anything in ckcnet.h that would have done it. ++ ++It builds OK with VMS 7.1 / TGV 4.2 but sending files on Telnet connections ++fails in a strange way: the connection drops, but the thermomoter goes to 100% ++and success is reported. I don't know why the connection is dropping (s_errno ++is 32 == "broken pipe"), but the spurious success indication is because of ++a double failure in sdata(): (1) The packet-sending loop index could go ++negative without breaking the loop when streaming; (2) if spack() fails, ++sdata() should return -2, not -1 (which means EOF). Also if any ttchk() in ++sdata() returns < 0, sdata should return -2. I fixed this code (which has ++been this way for YEARS) and now VMS C-Kermit properly fails when it gets ++the spack() error, but ttchk() in this case still doesn't think the connection ++is lost, but that must be our new problem with MultiNet. ckcfns.c, ++27 Oct 2002. ++ ++The compilation failure in ckcmai.c is a clue... The problem was that I added ++#ifdef VMS / #include / #endif to shut up complaints about the time() ++call. Evidently something in VMS gives MultiNet a bad case of ++indigestion; removing it fixes the compilation and the result works fine. The ++transmission failures in the other case seem to be a coincidence -- something ++to do with the U of Arizona (probably some obscure VMS quota on my IDs there, ++or some kind of network connection throttling), since it doesn't happen ++anywhere else. ckcmai.c, 27 Oct 2002. ++ ++Changed four occurrences of "void" to "VOID" in ckcftp.c, 27 Oct 2002. ++ ++Defined NOCKFQHOSTNAME for HPUXPRE65. Might also need this for HP-UX 7 ++and maybe 8. ckcnet.c, 27 Oct 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: PAM_CONST definition to clear up warnings caused by different ++vendors' definitions of PAM structs. ckufio.c, 28 Oct 2002. ++ ++Unixware 2.1.0 build bombs immediately with "UX:make: ERROR: line too long" ++(which line?) Not worth chopping up the makefile to fix but in a pinch it ++could be done. 2.1.3 builds OK. ++ ++Did another 20-some platform builds, bringing the total to 83, plus a final ++runthrough of the build-with-84-different-feature-set-combinations script on ++Linux. Should be good to go! ++ ++--- 8.0.206 24 Oct 2002 --- ++ ++Finally got access to Linux on IA64 again. Builds OK but dumps core ++immediately on startup. Adding -DNOCKGETFQHOST was necessary but not ++sufficient. In this case, the very call to ckgetfqhostname() from ckhost() ++(which is in ckuusx.c) was dumping core; thus I had to move the definition of ++NOCKGETFQHOST from ckcnet.c to ckcdeb.h, add an #ifdef __ia64__ clause to it, ++and protect the call to ckgetfqhostname() with it. Obviously there has to be ++a better fix but this will have to for now. ckcnet.c, ckuusx.c, ckcdeb.h, ++31 Oct 2002. ++ ++Link step fails in Mandrake 9.0 with undefined references to res_search, ++dn_expand, and crypt. Turns out the linux makefile target tests for the ++existence of libcrypt.a and libresolv.a, but in Mandrake 9.0 they exist ++only as *.so. Changed linux target to look for both. makefile, 1 Nov 2002. ++ ++Vace reported that "ftp mget a b c" would get ALL files from the server's ++directory if c did not exist. Diagnosis: off-by-one error in counting MGET ++args processed. Naturally fixing this bug revealed another (this time ++cosmetic) one, which resulted in spurious error messages when hitting MGET ++args that have no match on the server. Fixed in ckcftp.c, 1 Nov 2002. ++ ++Rebuilt about 60 of the most important Unix binaries to pick up the fixes ++31 Oct - 1 Nov 2002, and refreshed the FTP site with new sources, tarballs, ++ZIP files, etc. Sat Nov 2 19:11:30 2002 ++ ++From Martin Vorlaender and Jeff, SSL/TLS support for VMS: ++ckuusr.h, ckuath.h, ckcnet.c, ckctel.c, ckuath.c, 10 Nov 2002. ++ ++Added PASV as invisible synonym for PASSIVE. ckcftp.c, 10 Nov 2002. ++ ++--- 8.0.206 24 Oct 2002 #2 --- ++ ++More work on SSL in VMS: Jeff + Martin Vorlaender: ck_ssl.c ckcmai.c ckcnet.c ++ckctel.c ckuath.h ckvcon.c ckvtio.c ckvker.com 10-15 Nov 2002. ++ ++Discovered that ckvfio.c would not compile on VMS 6.1 with UCX 4.1 because ++ was missing, which is explicitly included. Enclosed the ++#include in #ifdef NOCONVROUTINES..#endif and rebuilt with ++@[users.fdc.src]ckvker.com "" "" "NOCONVROUTINES". 16 Nov 2002. ++ ++Fixed the "ftp mget */data/*" problem with two small changes to doftpget(): ++ckcftp.c, 16 Nov 2002. Placed a copy of ckcftp.patch in ~kermit/f. ++ ++From Lucas Hart: Fixes for VAX C 2.x and CMU TCP/IP. "Can't guarantee that ++the revised CKVOLD will work for all combinations of more recent ++VMS/compiler/TCPIP releases, but I've tested it for compatibility on our AXP ++VMS 6.2, UCX 4.0, DECC 5.6, your AXP VMS 7.1, DEC TCPIP 5.1, DECC 6.0 as well ++as with VAX VMS 5.4, VAX C 3.2, CMU12 and VAX VMS 4.7, VAX C 2.4." ckvfio.c, ++ckvtio.c, ckuus5.c, ckvker.com, ckvold.com, 17 Nov 2002. ++ ++From Jeff: More work on VMS SSL. Now it actually works, even in CONNECT mode, ++except it hangs when it gets an error alert or the remote closes the ++connection. ckcnet.c. ckvtio.c, 17 Nov 2002. ++ ++NOTE: Lucas's changes should go into the 8.0.206 source code but it's too ++late since ckvtio.c (upon which he based his changes) is already full of ++SSL code. ++ ++MGET in K95 in totally broken FOR SOME PEOPLE (mainly me) if the TMP (or TEMP) ++value is too long. It works fine if you set these to C:\TMP. Diagnosis: (1) ++we were malloc'ing only 16 bytes for the temp file name (I think this was my ++fault -- I was only looking at the "ckXXXXXX" part and forgetting that this ++was appended to the TMP path); (2) the Windows version of mktemp() wants you ++to use the value pointed to by the pointer it returns, rather than assuming ++the mktemp() arg will be modified in place. The code was changed to malloc a ++longer string and to use the return value from mktemp() (if any) rather than ++assuming that mktemp() modified its argument string (in K95 only -- not sure ++about Unix platforms; the man pages differ on this, but at least this way if ++some mktemp() version does NOT alter its argument, we still have a usable ++filename (like /tmp/ckXXXXXX)). Of course this won't be good for recursive ++MLSD downloads, but we can always issue patches for the Unix version later if ++needed. The Linux and BSD versions use mkstemp() anyway. There is, however, ++a danger of a memory leak in the Unix version if the user has defined a TMPDIR ++or CK_TMP environment variable whose value is longer than 9 bytes. All this ++is highly unlikely so we should be OK. ckcftp.c, 17 Nov 2002. ++ ++--- K95 2.1.1 and updated ck[uv]206.{tar,zip} but not C-Kermit binaries --- ++ ++From Jeff: Fixes for Telnet Com Port Control, update to a newer release of ++OpenSSL: ck_ssl.c ck_ssl.h ckcdeb.h ckcftp.c ckcmai.c ckcnet.c ckctel.c ++ckuath.c ckuath.h ckucns.c ckuus4.c ckuus5.c ckuusr.c ckuusr.h ckvcon.c ++ckvfio.c ckvker.com ckvtio.c ckvvms.h, 25 Nov 2002. ++ ++--- K95 2.1.2 and C-Kermit 8.0 CDROM --- ++ ++From Jeff, 28 Nov 2002: ++ . Updated SSL modules: ck_ssl.[ch]. ++ . Fixed cipher-list display in SHOW AUTH & FTP ssl_auth(): ckuus7.c. ckcftp.c ++ . Some minor tn_wait() fixes: ckctel.c. ++ . Preliminary SSL support for VMS CONNECT: ckvcon.c. ++ ++Bumped C-Kermit edit number to 207. ++ ++From Jeff, 29 Nov 2002: "[C-Kermit was dumping core on SCO OSR5 Telnet Com Port ++connections because] the SCO compiler treats all characters as signed. This ++was causing 'sprintf(buf,"02x ",ch);' to produce strings such as "ffffffc2" ++instead of "c2" for values between 128 and 255. This wrote beyond the end of ++a buffer and blew away the stack. Having fixed this I also noticed that ++conect() did not properly check for carrier when TN CPC was negotiated. This ++has now been fixed as well." ckucns.c, ckucon.c, ckctel.c, 29 Nov 2002. ++ ++From Jeff, 30 Nov 2002: Fix SSL for VMS and also carry forward the CPC fixes ++to VMS. ckcnet.c, ckvtio.c, ckvcon.c, 30 Nov 2002. ++ ++Changed copyright dates that are displayed (but not yet all the internal ++ones) from 2002 to 2003. ckcmai.c, 3 Jan 2003. ++ ++Fixed the FTP module's brief-format transaction log, which had the status ++inverted: OK for FAILED and v.v. ckcftp.c 3 Jan 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, 4 Jan 2003: ++ . Make /MOVE-TO:xxx convert xxx to full pathname: ckuus[r67].c, ++ . Make SHOW OPTIONS ALL show both kinds of options: ckuus2.c. ++ . More command-line personalities: ckcmai.c, ckuusy.c. ++ . New NOSCROLL command for K95: ckuusr.[ch], ckuus2.c. ++ . New lockdown and other command-line options: ckuusr.h, ckuusy.c. ++ . SSL interface updated to OpenSSL 0.9.7: ck_ssl.c. ++ . SET TERM LINE-SPACING and CURSOR xxx NOBLINK: ckuus[27]c. ++ . Expanded SHOW GUI command: ckuus3.c ++ . New SHOW TABS code: ckuus5.c. ++ ++Updated SUPPORT (BUG), NEWS, and INTRO texts. ckuus[26].c. 5 Jan 2003. ++ ++Fixed FTP module to suppress "'FEAT': Command not understood" message ++unless FTP DEBUG is ON. ckcftp.c, 6 Jan 2003. ++ ++Got a report that C-Kermit dumps core on Solaris when executing a certain ++script. Seems to be related to changing vnambuf[] in zzstring() from an ++automatic array to a malloc'd buffer (see notes from 29 Jun 2000). Changed ++it to an automatic buffer except for K95. ckuus4.c, 6 Jan 2003. ++ ++Nope, that's not it. It evidently happens only after FTP PUT has been used. ++Fixed solaris9g makefile target to include -funsigned-char and built a new ++binary. Determined that building with gcc and -funsigned-char makes no ++difference. makefile, 7 Jan 2003. ++ ++I did a preliminary audit, looking at the items in the left column: if used in ++a given routine, are there any obvious mistakes: ++ ++ 1 2 3 4 5 ++ doftpput->putfile->sendrequest->doftpsend2->secure_write ++malloc OK OK OK OK OK ++makestr OK OK OK OK OK ++automatic arrays OK OK OK OK OK ++[ck]str[n]cpy OK OK OK OK OK ++[ck]str[n]cat OK OK OK OK OK ++sprintf OK OK OK OK OK ++nzltor OK OK OK OK OK ++zfnqfp OK OK OK OK OK ++memcpy OK OK OK OK OK ++bcopy OK OK OK OK OK ++ ++secure_write sends the data directly on clear-text connections. On secure ++connections, it calls secure_putbuf(), which calls secure_putbyte(), but we ++aren't using those, so secure_write() is the end of the call chain for FTP ++PUT. doftpsend2 has buf[] as an automatic array, which it reads file data ++into using zxin (binary mode only), but this looks OK. Still, I changed it ++read 1 less than the buffer size (fread) just in case. Also there was one ++debug() statement that referred to an automatic array (fullname[]) before it ++was initialized (but not used in this case), which I fixed. ckcftp.c, ++7 Jan 2003. ++ ++FTP GET /RECURSIVE somepath/somefile still didn't work, despite what the ++notes of 19 Sep 2001 say. There are so many paths through the code, ++depending on switch values, GET vs MGET, etc, that a crucial spot was missed. ++Fixed in doftpget(): ckcftp.c, 7 Jan 2003. ++ ++Back to the core dump... after two days of full-time debugging, I found the ++culprit: the buffer-full test in the zzout() macro should have been ">=" ++rather than just ">", thus Kermit wrote 1 byte past the end of the malloc'd ++FTP PUT output buffer, ucbuf. Why did it never happen in K95? Because, since ++it's a secure build, FUDGE_FACTOR is defined there. But it's not defined in ++Solaris or other clear-text builds. Although the crash wouldn't happen in ++secure builds, the 1-byte leak might have caused errors in the data transfer. ++In non-Solaris clear-text builds, like Linux, I suspect that malloc() tends ++add something for safety (especially given the man page statement that it ++allocates "at least" what you asked for). Another reason the problem escaped ++notice is that zzout() is used only for text-mode PUTs (and then only when ++there is no character-set translation), but most transfers these days are ++binary and/or downloads. Anyway, in the course of debugging, a lot of small ++cleanups were done: sizeof(blah) for all arrays was replaced by the same ++symbolic size that was used to allocate the array, numeric array sizes were ++replaced with symbolic ones, etc. The real fix is one character long. ++ckcftp.c, 9 Jan 2003. ++ ++Got a report that "mget /recursive */somedir/*" downloaded the files into ++the current directory, rather than re-creating the remote directory structure. ++Fixed in doftpget(): ckcftp.c, 10 Jan 2003. ++ ++Unix C-Kermit did not allow file transfer if started under inetd and accessed ++via Internet raw socket (or whatever). Diagnosis: isatty() and friends would ++fail causing ttopen() to fail. Fixed by adding escape clauses for "-l 0" ++situations (i.e. Kermit invoked with an already-open file descriptor) at the ++appropriate places. ckcmai.c, ckutio.c, 14 Jan 2003. ++ ++From Jeff for K95 2.1.3 ++ . Add test for startflags & 128 to trap() for ignoring BREAK. ++ . Fix for SHOW TRANSMIT. ++ ++--- K95 2.1.3 --- ++ ++FTP USER, FTP ACCOUNT, plus the various prompts and switches for FTP username, ++password, and account all neglected to strip quotes, and in most cases quotes ++are necessary to specify a username that contains spaces. ckcftp.c, ++15 Jan 2003. ++ ++FTP MPUT f1 f2 f3... gets a parse error if any of the fn's do not match an ++existing file. This is bad for scripts. In doftpput(), cmfdb() looks for ++keywords (switches) or CMIFI. When it hits CMIFI, it exits from the initial ++parse loop and then does additional cmifi()s in a loop until done. The most ++obvious fix is to parse each field with cmfdb(CMIFI,CMFLD), i.e. fall back to ++CMFLD if CMIFI doesn't match anything. Then if CMFLD was used, we don't add ++the filespec to the list. This is a rather big change but it seems to work. ++No error messages or failures happen for non-matching fields, but an error ++message is printed (and the MPUT command fails) if none of the fields match ++any files. This fix got in too late for 2.1.3; workaround: use C-Shell ++like wildcard list (ftp mput "{*.abc,foo.*}"). ckcftp.c, 16 Jan 2003. ++ ++GREP did not pass its pattern through the expander, thus variables could ++not be used for patterns. This must have been an oversight -- I can't find ++anything in my notes about it. Fixed in dogrep(): ckuus6.c, 24 Jan 2003. ++ ++New makefile target for HP-UX 11.xx with OpenSSL from Tapani Tarvainen. ++makefile, 31 Jan 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: ++ . Avoid core dump when dereferencing tnc_get_signature(): ckuus4.c. ++ . Bump version numbers to 8.0.208, 2.1.4: ckcmai.c. ++ ++Added /NOLOGIN to FTP [OPEN]. ckcftp.c, 10 Feb 2003. ++ ++Don't dump core if FTP DEBUG is ON and FTP OPEN does not include a service. ++openftp(): ckcftp.c, 10 Feb 2003. ++ ++HELP PATTERN text incorrectly identified commands and functions with ++floating and anchored patterns. The corrected lists are: ++Floating: GREP, TYPE /MATCH:, /EXCEPT: patterns, \farraylook(), ++Anchored: IF MATCH, file-matching wildcards, \fsearch(), \frsearch() ++ckuus2.c, 10 Feb 2003. ++ ++INPUT n \fpattern(xxx) did not work for case-independent comparisons. ++Fixed in doinput(): ckuus4.c, 10 Feb 2003. ++ ++It seems \fpattern() didn't work with MINPUT at all. There was no code to ++handle \fpattern() in the MINPUT parse loop, so it never worked. The code ++had to be totally rewritten to use cmfld() in a loop, rather than cmtxt() ++and then cksplit(). Furthermore, whenever any of the fields was an ++\fjoin(), this had to be split. ckuusr.c, 10 Feb 2003. ++ ++Macro replacement via \m() and \fdefinition() does not work as advertised ++(i.e. case sensitively) for associative array elements; e.g. \m(xxx) is ++treated the same as \m(xxx), contrary to section 7.10.10 of the C-Kermit ++7.0 update notes, and to the fact that the two really do exist separately. ++Fixed by adding a static function isaarray(s) which succeeds if s is an ++associative array reference and fails otherwise, and then having \m() ++and \fdef() call mxxlook() (case-sensitive lookup) if isaarray(), otherwise ++(as before) mxlook()). ckuus4.c, 11 Feb 2003. ++ ++Fixed FTP OPEN to allow the /USER switch to override SET FTP AUTOLOGIN OFF, ++just as /NOLOGIN overrides SET FTP AUTOLOGIN ON. ckcftp.c, 11 Feb 2003. ++ ++In K95, "set key \1234 \27H" (any SET KEY command in which the first char of ++the definition was backslash, and the ONLY character after the backslash ++quantity was an uppercase letter, that letter would be lowercased). Diagnosis: ++xlookup() poking its argument (see notes from July 2000). Jeff sent a fix. ++ckucmd.c, 15 Feb 2003. ++ ++Ran my S-Expression torture test to make sure Sexps still worked. They do, ++except the bitwise & and | operators were broken, e.g. (& 7 2) and (| 1 2 4) ++get "Invalid operand" errors. Jeff's code had added an early failure return ++from the lookup loop when when a single-byte keyword matched a keyword that ++started with the same byte but was more than one byte long. So "&" would hit ++"&&" and fail instead of continuing its search (xlookup tables aren't sorted ++so there can be no early return). Fixed in xlookup(): ckucmd.c, 16 Feb 2003. ++ ++Got rid of "krbmit" target from makefile. It's still there, but we don't ++use it any more. All secure targets now use "xermit", and produce a binary ++called wermit, just like the regular ones do (except the old ckucon.c ones). ++Non-secure targets, since they don't define any of the security symbols, ++wind up compiling and linking to (mostly) empty security modules. makefile, ++15 Feb 2003. ++ ++Added \fcvtdate(xxx,3) to format its result in MDTM format (yyyymmddhhmmss, ++all numeric, no spaces or punctuation). Of course these numeric strings ++are too big to be 32-bit numbers and are useless for arithmetic, but they're ++useful for lexical comparison, etc. ckuus[24].c, 16 Feb 2003. ++ ++The following FTP commands did not set FAILURE when they failed: RMDIR, ++CD, CDUP, Fixed in the corresponding doftpblah() routines. ckcftp.c, ++16 Feb 2003. ++ ++RENAME would sometimes not print an error message when it failed, e.g. in K95 ++when the destination file already existed. ckuus6.c, 17 Feb 2003. ++ ++Fixed COPY error messages, which did not come out in standard format when ++/LIST was not included. ckuus6.c, 17 Feb 2003. ++ ++Fixed #ifdefs in ck_crp.c to allow nonsecure builds on old platforms like ++System V/68 R3. 19 Feb 2003. ++ ++Similar treatment for ck_ssl.c. 20 Feb 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, 21 Feb 2003: ++ . AIX53 and AIX52 symbols for ckcdeb.h, makefile. ++ . New gcc targets for various AIX 4.x/5.x versions: makefile. ++ . Copyright date updates: ck_crp.c, ck_ssl.c. ++ . ENABLE/DISABLE QUERY broken because keyword table out of order: ckuusr.c. ++ . Fixed the use of HTTP proxies for HTTP [RE]OPEN for Unix: ckcnet.c. ++ ++Also for K95 only: Allow file transfer when K95 is invoked on the remote end ++of a connection to a Pragma Systems Terminal Server connection; automatically ++SET EXIT HANGUP OFF when invoked with open port handle ("k95 -l nnnn"). ++ ++"cd a*" failed even when "a*" matched only one directory. Fixed in cmifi(): ++ckucmd.c, 21 Feb 2003. ++ ++In the Unix version, replace "extern int errno;" with "#include " ++if __GLIBC__ is defined, since glibc now defines a thread-specific errno. ++ckcdeb.h, 26 Feb 2003. ++ ++Added #ifdefs to skip compilation of ckuath.c in nonsecure builds. Tested ++by building both secure and regular versions in Linux. ckuath.c, 26 Feb 2003. ++ ++Ran the build-in-84-different-configurations script on Linux to make sure it ++still builds with all different combinations of feature selection options. ++All OK. 26 Feb 2003. ++ ++Built on VMS. Needed to add a prototype for mxxlook*() to ckuusr.h; built ++OK otherwise. 26 Feb 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: More #ifdef shuffling for nonsecure builds: ckuath.c, ck_ssl.c, ++27 Feb 2003. ++ ++Added code to ensure \v(download) ends in a directory separator in Unix, ++Windows, and OS/2. ckuus7.c, 27 Feb 2003. ++ ++Added code to K95 zfnqfp() to tack on directory separator when returning ++a directory name. ckofio.c, 27 Feb 2003. ++ ++Somehow an old copy of ckuath.c popped to replace the new one. Put the new ++one back. 28 Feb 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Fix typo in my K95 zfnqfp() code from yesterday; fixes for handling ++UNCs uniformly, no matter which way their slashes are leaning. ckofio.c, ++28 Feb 2003. ++ ++At Jeff Mezei's suggestion, separate text and binary mode open sequences ++for VMS session log. ckvfio.c, 28 Feb 2003. ++ ++Added freebsd48 target for FreeBSD 4.8. makefile, 1 Mar 2003. ++ ++Changed Mac OS X entries to include -DUSE_STRERROR. makefile, 2 Mar 2003. ++ ++Fixed GETOK /GUI to evaluate its text argument. ckuus6.c, 3 Mar 2003. ++ ++Jeff fixed the K95 Dialer QUICK dialog to (a) allow templates, and (b) have ++a Save-As option. 3 Mar 2003. ++ ++Jeff fixed a problem with the Xmodem-CRC checksum being crunched whenever ++there was a retransmission. 7 Mar 2003. ++ ++Added target/banner for Tru64 5.1B. makefile, ckuver.h, 5 Mar 2003. ++ ++In Unix, the zcopy() routine (used by the COPY command) reset the user's umask ++to 0 for the remainder of the Kermit process lifetime. The bug was in ++ckufio.c 8.0.194, 24 Oct 2002, and is fixed in ckufio.c 8.0.195, 6 Mar 2003. ++Of course this happened after building 155 C-Kermit 8.0.208 binaries. (But ++before officially releasing 8.0.208.) ++ ++In the VMS version, changed: ++ ++ while ((n--) && xx_inc(2) > -1) ; ++to: ++ while ((n--) && xx_inc(2) >= 0) ; ++ ++to suppress the "...is being compared with a relational operator to a constant ++whose value is not greater than zero" warning. ckvtio.c, 7 Mar 2002. ++ ++Added a debug call to dologend in hopes of catching overzealous Locus ++switching, which seems to happen only in K95. ckuus3.c, 7 Mar 2002. ++ ++Rebuilt binaries for some of the more current Unix releases: AIX 4.3.3-5.1, ++Solaris 7-9 , Red Hat 7.0-8.0, Slackware 8.1, Freebsd 4.7-4.8, NetBSD 1.6, ++OpenBSD 3.2, Unixware 7.1.3, Open Unix 8, OSR5.0.6a, etc. A Unix binary with ++COPY umask fix shows a 6 Mar 2003 date for "UNIX File support" in SHOW ++VERSIONS; a binary without the fix shows 24 Oct 2002. ++ ++C-Kermit 8.0.208 dated 14 March 2003 released on 10 March 2003. ++ ++---8.0.208--- ++ ++From Jeff 13 Mar 2003: ++ . Updated SSL module allows importation of tickets from host. ++ . freebsd50+openssl target: makefile. ++ . FTP PUT /PERMISSIONS error message for K95: ckcftp.c. ++ ++Fixed MINPUT to strip quotes or braces from around targets (this was broken ++on Feb 10th). Thanks to Jason Heskett for discovering and reporting this ++(killer) bug. ckuusr.c, 14 Mar 2003. ++ ++Changed version number to 209 Dev.00. ckcmai.c, 14 Mar 2003. ++ ++While debugging the alphapage script, I found that the command "minput 8 \6\13 ++\21\13 \13\27\4\13 \30\13" gets "?Not confirmed" in 8.0.208 and 8.0.209, but ++not in 206 and earlier. This problem too was introduced on Feb 10th by ++changing MINPUT parsing from cmtxt() followed by cksplit() to cmfld() in a ++loop. cmfld() uses setatm() to return its result and of course setatm() ++breaks on \13. Changing setatm() not to do this would break everything else. ++But cmfld() has no arguments that let us tell it to do anything different in ++this case. Changing the API would be a disaster. The only solution is to add ++an "MINPUT ACTIVE" (minputactive) global variable that tells cmfld() to tell ++setatm() not to break on CR. Now MINPUT with braced targets containing CR ++and/or LF works in 209, 206, and 201 (but not 208). ckucmd.c, ckuusr.c, ++ckuus5.c, 15 Mar 2003. ++ ++MINPUT n \fjoin(&a) works OK if all the members of \&a[] are text strings, but ++if they are strings of control chars (as above), they don't get separated by ++the spaces. For example in: ++ ++ dcl \&a[] = "\4\5" "\6\7" xxx ++ minput 10 \fjoin(&a) ++ ++MINPUT gets two targets: "aaa" and "\4\5 \6\7 xxx". The bug was in the ++cksplit() call in the \fjoin() case of MINPUT: it needed to specify an ++include set consisting of all the control characters except NUL. ckuusr.c, ++16 Mar 2003. ++ ++But there's still a problem: ++ ++ dcl \&a[] = "\4\5\13\10" "\6\7" "xxx" ++ ++creates an array whose first member is "^D^E (one doublequote included). But ++if braces are used instead, there's no problem. Same deal as MINPUT: cmfld() ++breaks on CR or LF, thus the end quote is lost. If I set minputactive for ++DECLARE initializers too, that fixes it. Is there any reason not to do this? ++Can't think of any (famous last words)... ckuusr.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++Since it has multiple applications, changed the flag's name from minputactive ++to keepallchars. ckucmd.c, ckuus[r5].c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++\v(exedir) wasn't being set correctly (it included the program name as well ++as the directory). Fixed in getexedir(): ckuus4.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++SET CARRIER-WATCH "auto matic" (spurious space in supplied keyword). ++Cosmetic only; it still worked. Fixed in setdcd(): ckuus3.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++"directory a b c" listed too many files -- all files whose names END WITH a, ++b, or c, rather than the files whose names WERE a, b, or c. Diagnosis: The ++filespec is changed into a pattern: {a,b,c}, which is the correct form. It is ++passed to nzxpand(), which goes through the directory getting filenames and ++sending each one to ckmatch() with the given pattern. ckmatch() receives the ++correct pattern but then prepends a "*" -- that's not right. It's not just ++in filename matching either. The following succeeds when it shouldn't: ++ ++ if match xxxxc {{a,b,c}} ++ ++Changing ckmatch() to not prepend the "*" to each segment fixes the command ++above but breaks lots of others. Running through the "match" torture-test ++script shows the problem occurs only when the {a,b,c} list is the entire ++pattern, and not embedded within a larger pattern. Testing for this case ++fixed the problem. ckmatch(): ckclib.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++Fixed FTP MODTIME to not print anything if QUIET ON. ckcftp.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++Picked up a new ckuath.c from Jeff, not sure what the changes are. 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++Did a few regular and secure builds to make sure I didn't wreck anything. ++ ++Changed version number to 209 (final). ckcmai.c, 16 Mar 2003. ++ ++Jason Heskett found another bug: if you define a macro FOO inside the ++definition of another macro BAR, and FOO's definition includes an odd number ++of doublequotes (such as 1), FOO's definition absorbs the rest of BAR's ++definition. Example: ++ ++ def TEST { ++ .foo = {X"} ++ sho mac foo ++ } ++ do test ++ sho mac foo ++ ++Results in: ++ ++ foo = {X"}, sho mac foo ++ ++Diagnosis: the TEST definition becomes: ++ ++ def TEST .foo = {X"}, sho mac foo ++ ++and the macro reader is erroneously treating the doublequote as an open ++quote, and then automatically closes the quote at the end of the definition. ++The error is that a doublequote should be significant only at the beginning of ++a field. But the macro reader isn't a command parser; it doesn't know what ++a field is -- it's just looking for commas and skipping over quoted ones. ++First we have to fix an oversight: SET COMMAND DOUBLEQUOTING OFF should have ++worked here, but it wasn't tested in this case. Fixed in getncm(): ckuus5.c, ++17 Mar 2003. ++ ++There are only certain cases where it makes sense to treat doublequotes as ++signicant: ++ ++ . An open quote must be at the beginning or preceded by a space. ++ . A close quote is only at the end or else followed by a space. ++ ++This too was fixed in getncm(): ckuus5.c, 17 Mar 2003. ++ ++A fix from Jeff SSL/TLS FTP data decoding. ckcftp.c, 18 Mar 2003. ++ ++Tried building C-Kermit on a Cray Y-MP with UNICOS 9.0. "int suspend", ++declared in ckcmai.c and used in many modules, conflicts with: ++ ++ unistd.h:extern int suspend __((int _Category, int _Id)); ++ ++The "=Dsuspend=xsuspend" trick doesn't work for this; there is no way around ++the conflict other than to rename the variable: ckcmai.c, ckutio.c, ++ckuus[35xy].c. 26 Mar 2003. VMS and K95 not affected. ++ ++OK that gets us past ckcmai.c... Then in ckutio.c I had to add a new #ifdef ++around the LFDEVNO setting, because the Cray didn't have mkdev.h. Could not ++find a Cray-specific manifest symbol, so I made a new makefile target (cray9) ++that sets this symbol. Having done this I have no idea what kind of lockfile ++would be created, but I also doubt if anybody dials out from a Cray. The ++binary should run a C90, J90, or Y-MP. makefile, 26 Mar 2003. ++ ++Added a target for SCO OSR5.0.7. makefile, ckuver.h, 30 Mar 2003. ++ ++Changed since 208: ++makefile ckuver.h ckcmai.c ckclib.c ckcftp.c ckucmd.c ckuus*.c ckutio.c. ++ ++---8.0.209--- ++ ++From Mark Sapiro, a fix for the March 17th doubleqote fix, getncm(): ckuus5.c, ++4 Apr 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, 29 Apr 2003: ++ . Corrected target for HP-UX 11.00 + OpenSSL: makefile, ++ . Do not allow WILL AUTH before WONT START_TLS: ckctel.h ckctel.c ++ . Add hooks for SFTP and SET/SHOW SFTP: ckcdeb.h ckuusr.h ckuusr.c ckuus3.c ++ . Add SKERMIT ckuusr.h ckuusr.c ++ . Add ADM-5 terminal emulation: ckuus7.c, ckuus5.c ++ . Uncomment and update HELP SET SSH V2 AUTO-REKEY: ckuus2.c ++ . Enable IF TERMINAL-MACRO and IF STARTED-FROM-DIALER for C-Kermit: ckuus6.c ++ . Fix conflicting NOSCROLL keyword definition: ckuusr.h ++ . Set ttname when I_AM_SSH: ckuusy.c ++ . Add extended arg parsing for SSH, Rlogin, Telnet: ckuusy.c, ckuus4.c ++ . Security updates: ckuath.c, ck_ssl.c ++ . Change K95 version number to 2.2.0: ckcmai.c ++ . Save K95 term i/o state before executing keyboard macro: ckuus4.c ++ . Add tests for SSH Subsystem active during INPUT/OUTPUT/CONNECT: ckuus[45].c ++ . Enable K95 SET SSH V2 AUTO-REKEY: ckuus3.c ++ ++SFTP and SET SFTP subcommands are implemented up to the case statements. ++ ++Files of mine that Jeff hadn't picked up: ++ ckuver.h ckcftp.c ckutio.c ckuusx.c (just minor changes for last build-all) ++ ++On 4 Jan 2003, SET RECEIVE MOVE-TO was changed to convert is argument to an ++absolute path, which made it impossible to specify a relative path, then ++move to different directories and have it apply relatively to each directory. ++Changed this as follows: ++ ++ . Parser uses cmtxt() rather than cmdir() so it won't fail at parse time. ++ . If path is absolute, we fail at parse time if directory doesn't exist. ++ . In reof() we run the the path through xxstring (again, in case deferred ++ evaluation of variables is desired) and then, if not null, use it. ++ . If the directory doesn't exist, rename() fails and reof() returns -4, ++ resulting in a protocol error (this is not a change). We do NOT create ++ the directory on the fly. ++ ++I also fixed SET SEND/RECEIVE RENAME-TO to parse with cmtxt() rather than ++cmdir(), since it's parsing a text template, not a directory name, e.g. ++"set receive rename-to file-\v(time)-v(date)-\v(pid)". This was totally ++broken, since when I don't know. We don't call xxstring() in this parse, so ++evaluation is always deferred -- I'd better not change this. ckuus7.c, ++ckcfns.c, 1 May 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, Sat May 3 14:15:23 2003: ++ . Pick up the right isascii definition for K95: ckctel.c ++ . malloc... ckuath.c (new safe malloc routines for K95) ++ . Add author listing: ckuus5.c ++ . SSH Heartbeat support (K95 only): ckuus[23].c ++ . Prescan --height and --width to avoid window resizing at startup: ckuusy.c ++ . Add checks for fatal() or doexit() called from sysinit(): ckuusx.c ++ . Move some K95-specific definitions to ckoker.h: ckcdeb.h ++ . Add support for ON_CD macro in zchdir(): ckufio.c ++ . Add a command to let FTP client authenticate with SSLv2: ckcftp.c ++ . Fix parsing of FTP file facts like "UNIX.mode": ckcftp.c ++ ++ON_CD will need some explaining (to be done). It's implemented for Unix, ++VMS, WIndows, and OS/2. ++ ++The FTP file facts fix came from first exposure to the new OpenBSD FTP ++server: ftp://ftp7.usa.openbsd.org/pub/os/OpenBSD/3.3/i386/ ++The period in "UNIX.mode" caused an erroneous word break, adding junk to ++the filename. ++ ++About the malloc changes, Jeff says "K95 is not behaving well in low memory ++environments. I'm not sure that C-Kermit does much better. The program does ++not crash but it certainly does not behave the way the user expects it to. ++I'm beginning to think that any malloc() error should be treated as fatal." ++ ++Not visible in these changes because it's in K95-specific modules: Jeff made ++SET ATTRIBUTES OFF and SET ATTRIBUTES DATE OFF apply to XYZMODEM transfers. ++ ++From Jeff, 11 May 2003: ++ . Add support for SSH Keepalive to relevant SET command (K95): ckuus3.c ++ . Reduce max overlapped i/o requests from 30 to 7 (K95): ckuus7.c ++ . Don't call sysinit() in fatal(): ckuusx.c. ++ . Some new conditionalizations for SSL module: ck_ssl.c ++ ++The doublequote-parsing fixes from March and April broke the SWITCH statement, ++which is implemented by internally defining, then executing, a macro. If I ++drop back to the old dumb handling of doublequotes, everything is fixed except ++the problem of March 17th. But can we really expect getncm() to pre-guess ++what the parser is going to do? getncm()'s only job is to find command ++boundaries, which are represented by commas. Commas, however, is needed IN ++commands too. We take a comma literally if it is quoted with \, or is inside ++a matched pair of braces, parens, or doublequotes. It is not unreasonable to ++require a doublequote in a macro definition to be prefixed by \ when it is to ++be taken literally. The proper response to Jason Heskett's complaint of March ++17th should have been to leave the code alone and recommand an appropriate ++form of quoting: ++ ++ def TEST { ++ .foo = {X\"} ++ sho mac foo ++ } ++ ++And this is what I have done. Another reason for sticking with the old method ++is that it's explainable. The "improved" method, even if it worked, would be ++be impossible to explain. Btw, in testing this I noticed that the switch-test ++script made 8.0.201 dump core. Today's version is fine. The problem with ++quoted strings inside of IF {...} clauses and FOR and WHILE loops is fixed ++too. Perhaps "unbroken" would be a better word. ckuus5.c, 11 May 2003. ++ ++Vace discovered that FTP MGET /EXCEPT:{... (with an unterminated /EXCEPT list) ++could crash Kermit. Fixed in ckcftp.c, 11 May 2003. ++ ++CONTINUE should not affect SUCCESS/FAILURE status. ckuusr.c, 11 May 2003. ++ ++Fixed an oversight that goes back 15 years. While \{123} is allowed for ++decimal codes, \x{12} and \o{123} were never handled. ckucmd.c, 11 May 2003. ++ ++Added support for Red Hat and /usr/sbin/lockdev. Supposedly this ++allows Kermit to be installed without setuid or setgid bits and still be able ++to lock and use the serial device. Compiles and starts, but not tested. ++ckcdeb.h, makefile, ckutio.c, ckuus5.c, 16 May 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: FTP ASCII send data to host when FTP /SSL was in use was broken. ++ftp_dpl is set to Clear when FTP /SSL is in use. This was causing the data to ++be written to the socket with send() instead of the OpenSSL routines. ++ckcftp.c, ckuath.c, 21 May 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Stuff for Kerberos 524: ckcdeb.h. Fixes for FTP; "FTP ASCII send ++data did not properly compute the end of line translations. On Unix (and ++similar platforms) the end of line was correct for no character sets but ++incorrect when character sets were specified. On Windows/OS2, the end of line ++was correct when character sets were specified and incorrect when they were ++not. On MAC, both were broken. Also, FTP Send Byte counts were incorrect ++when character sets were specified." ckcftp.c. 17 Jun 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: fixes to HTTP /AGENT: and /USER: switch action: ckcnet.c ckuus3.c ++ck_crp.c ckcftp.c ckuus2.c ckuusy.c ckuusr.c ckcnet.h, 21 Jun 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Fix SET DIALER BACKSPACE so it can override a previous SET KEY ++(e.g. from INI file): ckuus7.c. Some SSL/TLS updates: ck_ssl.c. HTTP support ++for VMS and other VMS improvements (e.g. a way to not have to hardwire the ++C-Kerit version number into the build script) from Martin Vorlaender: ++ckcnet.h, ckuus[r3].c, ckcdeb.h, ckvtio.c, ckcnet.c, ckvker.com. Built on ++Solaris (gcc/ansi) and SunOS (cc/k&r). The new VMS script tests the VMS ++version and includes HTTP support only for VMS 6.2 or later. 2 Jul 2003. ++ ++Tried to build on our last VMS system but it seems to be dead. Looks like a ++head crash (makes really loud noises, boot says DKA0 not recognized) (fooey, I ++just paid good money to renew the VMS license). Tried building at another ++site with: ++ ++ Process Software MultiNet V4.3 Rev A-X, ++ Compaq AlphaServer ES40, OpenVMS AXP V7.3 ++ Compaq C V6.4-008 on OpenVMS Alpha V7.3 ++ ++Had to make a few corrections to ckvker.com. But still, compilation of ++ckcnet.c bombs, indicating that the SELECT definition somehow got lost ++somewhere since the 209 release (i.e. no SELECT type is defined so it falls ++thru to "SELECT is required for this code"). But I don't see anything in ++ckcdeb.h or ckcnet.[ch] that would explain this. Not ckvker.com either ++(putting the old one back gives the same result). OK, I give up, maybe it's ++just that I haven't tried building it on MultiNet recently. What about UCX? ++Aha, builds fine there except for warnings about mlook, dodo, and parser in ++ckvfio.c (because of ON_CD) -- I suppose I have #include ... (done) ++Anyhow it builds OK and the HTTP code is active and almost works (HTTP OPEN ++works; HTTP GET seems to succeed but creates an empty file every time). Tried ++building under MultiNet at another installation; same bad result. ++ ++OK so why won't it build for MultiNet? Comparing ckcnet.c with the 209 ++version, not a single #ifdef or #include is changed. Tried building with ++p3="NOHTTP" -- builds OK, aha. Where's the problem? Not ckcnet.h... ++Not ckcdeb.h... OK I give up, will revisit this next time I get time to ++do anything with the code. ++ ++Later Jeff said "Martin did not implement VMS networking for the HTTP code. ++All he did was activate the #define HTTP which happens to work because his ++connections are using SSL/TLS connections. http_inc(), http_tol(), etc have ++no support for VMS networking regardless of whether it is UCX or MULTINET. ++The vast majority of HTTP connections are not secured by SSL/TLS. It makes no ++sense to support HTTP on VMS until someone is willing to either do the work or ++pay have the work done to implement VMS networking in that code base." So the ++fix is to not enable HTTP for VMS after all. Removed the CKHTTP definition ++for VMS from ckcdeb.h, 6 Jul 2003. ++ ++Fixed ckvfio.c to #include (instead of ) to pick up ++missing prototypes. 6 Jul 2003. ++ ++From Arthur Marsh: solaris2xg+openssl+zlib+srp+pam+shadow and the corresponding ++Solaris 7 target. makefile, 6 Jul 2003. ++ ++Remove duplicate #includes for , , and from ++ckcftp.c. 6 Jul 2003. ++ ++Add -DUSE_MEMCPY to Motorola SV/68 targets because of shuffled #includes in ++ckcftp.c. 8 Jul 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Fix problems mixing SSL and SRP without Kerberos. Plus a few minor ++#define comment changes and a reshuffling of #defines in ckcdeb.h to allow me ++to build on X86 Windows without Kerberos. ckcdeb.h, ck_crp.c, ckuath.c, ++10 Jul 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: updated ckuat2.h and ckuath.c, 29 Jul 2003. ++ ++Mats Peterson noticed that a very small Latin-1 file would be incorrectly ++identified as UCS-2 by scanfile(). Fixed in ckuusx.c, 29 Jul 2003. ++ ++Fixed ACCESS macro definition to account for the fact that FIND is now a ++built-in command. ckermit.ini, 30 Jul 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Fix for typo in urlparse() (svc/hos): ckuusy.c, 18 Aug 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Redhat9 makefile targets (needed for for OpenSSL 0.9.7): ++makefile, 19 Aug 2003. ++ ++GREP /NOLIST and /COUNT did too much magic, with some undesirable fallout: ++"GREP /NOLIST /COUNT:x args" printed "file:count" for each file. "GREP ++/COUNT:x /NOLIST args" did not print "file:count", but neither did it set the ++count variable. Removed the magic. Also one of the GREP switches, ++/LINENUMBERS, was out of order. Fixed in ckuus6.c, 20 Aug 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: "Reorganizing code to enable building with different subsets of ++options; a few typos corrected as well." ckcdeb.h, ckuver.h (for RH9), ++ckcnet.c, ckuus7.c, ckuus3.c: 24 Aug 2003. ++ ++Scanfile misidentified a big PDF file as text because the first 800K of it ++*was* text (most other PDF files were correctly tagged as binary). Fixed ++by adding a check for the PDF signature at the beginning of the file. ++scanfile(): ckuusx.c, 25 Aug 2003. ++ ++Ditto for PostScript files, but conservatively. Signature at beginning of ++file must begin with "%!PS-Ado". If it's just "%!" (or something nonstandard ++like "%%Creator: Windows PSCRIPT") we do a regular scan. Also added "*.ps" ++to all binary filename patterns. ckuusx.c, 4 Sep 2003. ++ ++Ditto (but within #ifndef NOPCLSCAN) for PCL (E) and PJL (%) files, ++but no binpatterns (note: ".PCL" is the extension for TOPS-20 EXEC scripts). ++ckuusx.c, 4 Sep 2003. ++ ++Added comments about OpenSSL 0.9.7 to all linux+openssl targets. ++makefile, 4 Sep 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Added - #define ALLOW_KRB_3DES_ENCRYPT. When this symbol is defined ++at compilation Kermit will allow non-DES session keys to be used during Telnet ++Auth. These session keys can then be used for Telnet Encrypt. The reason ++this is not compiled on by default is that the MIT Kerberos Telnet does not ++follow the RFC for constructing keys for ENCRYPT DES when the keys are longer ++than 8 bytes in length. ckuath.c, ckuus5.c, 4 Sep 2003. ++ ++"ftp mget a b c" succeeded if one or more of the files did not exist, even ++with "set ftp error-action proceed". This is because the server's NLST file ++list does not include any files that don't exist, so the client never even ++tries to get them. Fortunately, the way the code is structured, this one was ++easy to fix. ckcftp.c, 14 Sep 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Corrected code in ckcnet.c to ensure that Reverse DNS Lookups are ++not performed if tcp_rdns is OFF. Fixed ck_krb5_getrealm() to actually return ++the realm of the credentials cache and not the default realm specified in the ++krb5.conf file. Previously krb5_cc_get_principal() was not being called. ++Fixed ck_krb5_is_tgt_valid() to test the TGT in the current ccache and not the ++TGT constructed from the default realm. ckcnet.c, ckuath.c, 14 Sep 2003. ++ ++Marco Bernardi noticed that IF DIRECTORY could produce a false positive if ++the argument directory had previously been referenced but then removed. This ++is because of the clever isdir() cache that was added to speed up recursion ++through big directory trees. Changed IF DIRECTORY to make a second check ++(definitive but more expensive) if isdir() succeeds, and changed the ++directory-deleting routine, ckmkdir(), to flush the directory cache (UNIX ++only -- this also should be done in K95 but it's not critical). This was ++done by adding a routine, clrdircache() to ckufio.c, which sets prevstat ++to -1 and prevpath[0] to NUL. ckcfn3.c, ckuus6.c, ckufio.c, 18 Sep 2003. ++ ++Marco reported the second fix still didn't work for him (even though it did ++for me). Rather than try to figure out why, I concluded that the directory ++cache is just not safe: a directory found a second ago might have been deleted ++or renamed not only by Kermit but by some other process. Why did I add this ++in the first place? The log says: ++ ++ Some debug logs showed that isdir() is often called twice in a row on the ++ same file. Rather than try to sort out clients, I added a 1-element cache ++ to Unix isdir(). ckufio.c, 24 Apr 2000. ++ ++Experimentation with DIR and DIR /RECURSIVE does not show this happening at ++all. So I #ifdef'd out the directory cache (see #ifdef ISDIRCACHE in ckufio.c; ++ISDIRCACHE is not defined) and backed off the previous changes: ckufio.c, ++ckcfn3.c, ckuus6.c, 28 Sep 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: Replace the compile time ALLOW_KRB_3DES_ENCRYPT with a run-time ++command SET TELNET BUG AUTH-KRB5-DES which defaults to ON: ckctel.[ch], ++ckuus[234].c, ck_crp.c, ckuath.c. 4 Oct 2003. ++ ++Allow DIAL RETRIES to be any positive number, and catch negative ones. ++Also added code to check for atoi() errors (e.g. truncation). At least on ++some platforms (e.g. Solaris) atoi() is supposed to set errno, but it ++doesn't. ckuus3.c, ckucmd.c, 4 Oct 2003. ++ ++Added /DEFAULT: to ASK-class commands (ASK, ASKQ, GETOK): ++ ++ . For popups: no way to send defaults to popup_readtext() or popup_readpass(). ++ . For GUI ASK[Q], pass default to gui_txt_dialog(). ++ . For GUI GETOK, convert "yes" "ok" or "no" default to number for uq_ok(). ++ . For Text GETOK, add default to cmkey(). ++ . For Text ASK[Q], add default to cmtxt(). ++ . For GETC, GETKEY, and READ: no changes. ++ ++GETOK, ASK, and ASKQ with /TIMEOUT: no longer fail when the timer goes off ++if a /DEFAULT was supplied. The GUI functions (uq_blah) don't seem to ++support timeouts. Only the text version has been tested. ckuus[26].c, ++4 Oct 2003. ++ ++From Jeff: add /DEFAULT: for popups. ckuus6.c. 6 Oct 2003. ++ ++Change SET DIAL INTERVAL to be like SET DIAL RETRIES. ckuus[34].c, 6 Oct 2003. ++ ++Added target for HP-UX 10/11 + OpenSSL built with gcc, from Chris Cheney. ++Makefile, 12 Oct 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, 6 Nov 2003: ++ . #ifdef adjustments: ckcftp.c, ckcdeb.h ++ . Fix spurious consumption of first byte(s) on Telnet connection: ckctel.c ++ . Another HP PJL test for scanfile: ckuusx.c. ++ . K95: Recognize DG4xx protected fields in DG2xx emulation: ckuus7.c. ++ . Add SSLeay version display to SHOW AUTH command: ckuus7.c ++ . Improved SET MOUSE CLEAR help text: ckuus2.c. ++ . Improved Kverbs help text: ckuus2.c (+ new IBM-3151 Kverbs). ++ . Some changes to ck_ssl.c, ckuath.c. ++ ++From PeterE, 10 Nov 2003: ++ . Improved HP-UX 10/11 makefile targets for OpenSSL. ++ . #ifdef fix for OpenSSL on HP-UX: ck_ssl.c. ++ ++Another new makefile from PeterE with improved and integrated HP-UX targets. ++12 Nov 2003. ++ ++A couple fixes to the solaris9g+krb5+krb4+openssl+shadow+pam+zlib target ++from Jeff. Added a solaris9g+openssl+shadow+pam+zlib target. makefile, ++21 Nov 2003. ++ ++From Jeff, 30 Nov 2003: ++ . Fix SEND /MOVE-TO: ckuusr.c. ++ . Fix K95 SET TITLE to allow quotes/braces around text: ckuus7.c. ++ . Improved "set term autodownload ?" response: ckuus5.c. ++ . Fix SHOW FEATURES to specify the protocol for encryption: ckuus5.c ++ . Make {SEND, RECEIVE} {MOVE-TO, RENAME-TO} work for XYZMODEM (K95 only). ++ ++From Jeff: 7 Jan 2004: ++ . At one point Frank started to add a timer parameter to the ++ uq_txt() function but he only did it for the non-ANSI ++ compilers. I added it for the ANSI compilers, fixed the ++ prototypes and provided a default value easily changed ++ DEFAULT_UQ_TIMEOUT: ckcker.h, ckuus[36].c, ck_ssl.c, ckcftp.c, ckuath.c. ++ . Fixed SET TERMINAL DEBUG ON (typo in variable name): ckuus7.c. ++ . Fixed BEEP INFORMATION; previously it made no sound, now uses ++ MB_ICONQUESTION. ckuusx.c. ++ ++From Ian Beckwith (Debianization), 7 Jan 2004: ++ . Search dir/ckermit for docs, as well as dir/kermit in cmdini(): ckuus5.c. ++ . New linux+krb5+krb4+openssl+shadow+pam target (kitchen sink minus SRP, ++ which Debian does not distribute): makefile. ++ ? Mangles the DESTDIR support in makefile to install into a staging area: ++ makefile (I didn't take this one yet). ++ ++Updated copyright notices for 2004, all modules. 7 Jan 2004. ++ ++Added INPUT /NOMATCH, allowing INPUT to be used for a fixed amount of time ++without attempting to match any text or patterns, so it's no longer ++necessary to "input 600 STRING_THAT_WILL_NEVER_COME". If /NOMATCH is ++included, INPUT succeeds if the timeout expires, with \v(instatus) = 1 ++(meaning "timed out"); fails upon interruption or i/o error. ckuusr.h, ++ckuus[r24].c, 7 Jan 2004. ++ ++Added SET INPUT SCALE-FACTOR . This scales all INPUT timeouts by the ++given factor, allowing time-sensitive scripts to be adjusted to changing ++conditions such as congested networks or different-speed modems without ++having to change each INPUT-class command. This affects only those timeouts ++that are given in seconds, not as wall-clock times. Although the scale ++factor can have a fractional part, the INPUT timeout is still an integer. ++Added this to SHOW INPUT, and added a \v(inscale) variable for it. ++ckuusr.h, ckuus[r257].c, 7 Jan 2004. ++ ++undef \%a, \fverify(abc,\%a) returns 0, which makes it look as if \%a is a ++string composed of a's, b's, and/or c's, when in fact it contains nothing. ++Changed \fverify() to return -1 in this case. ckuus4.c, 12 Jan 2004. ++ ++\fcode(xxx) returned an empty string if its argument string was empty. This ++makes it unsafe to use in arithmetic or boolean expressions. Changed it to ++return 0 if its argument was missing, null, or empty. ckuus4.c, 12 Jan 2004. ++ ++Updated \verify() and \fcode() help text. ckuus2.c, 12 Jan 2004. ++ ++While setting up IKSD, Ian Beckwith noticed that including the --initfile: ++option caused Kermit to start parsing its own Copyright string as if it were ++the command line, and eventually crash. I couldn't reproduce on Solaris / ++Sparc but I could in Linux / i386 (what Ian is using) -- a change from Jeff ++on 28 Apr 2003 set the command-line arg pointer to a literal empty string in ++prescan() about line 1740 of of ckuus4.c; the pointer is incremented next ++time thru the loop, resulting in random memory being referenced. Fixed by ++setting the pointer to NULL instead of "". ckuus4.c, 12 Jan 2004. ++ ++declare \&a[999999999999999] would dump core on some platforms. atoi() ++or whatever would truncate the dimension to maxint. When we add 1 to the ++result, we get a negative number, which is used as an index, loop test, etc. ++Fixed both dodcl() and dclarray() to check for (n+1 < 0). ckuus[r5].c, ++12 Jan 2004. ++ ++Unix zchki() would fail on /dev/tty, which is unreasonable. This prevented ++FOPEN /READ from reading from the terminal. zchki() already allowed for ++/dev/null, so I added /dev/tty to the list of specials. Ditto for FOPEN ++/WRITE and zchko(). ckufio.c 13 Jan 2004. ++ ++Added untabify() routine to ckclib.[ch], 13 Jan 2004. ++Added FREAD /TRIM and /UNTABIFY. ckuus[27].c, 13 Jan 2004. ++Added \funtabify(). ckuusr.h, ckuus[24].c, 13 Jan 2004. ++ ++Dat Nguyen noticed that (setq u 'p') followed by (u) dumped core. This was ++caused by an over-clever optimization that skipped mallocs for short ++literals, but then went on later to try to free one that hadn't been ++malloc'd. Fixed in dosexp(): ckuus3.c, 14 Jan 2004. ++ ++Catch another copyright date. ckuus5.c, 14 Jan 2004. ++ ++Fixed SWITCH to work even when SET COMMAND DOUBLEQUOTE OFF (from Mark ++Sapiro). ckuus5.c, 15 Jan 2004. ++ ++Changed version to 8.0.211 so scripts can test for recently added features. ++ckcmai.c, 15 Jan 2004. ++ ++Fixed a glitch in K95 "help set port". ckuus2.c, 20 Jan 2004. ++ ++Fix from Jeff: Connections to a TLS-aware protocol which require a reconnect ++upon certificate verification failure could not reconnect if the connection ++was initiated from the command line or via a URL. ckctel.c ckcmai.c ++ckuusr.c ckuus7.c ckuusy.c, 20 Jan 2004. ++ ++From Alex Lewin: makefile target and #ifdef for Mac OS X 10.3 (Panther): ++makefile, ckcnet.c, 7 Feb 2004. ++ ++Added KFLAGS to sco32v507 targets to make PTY and SSH commands work. The ++same flags could probably also be added to earlier OSR5 targets but they ++have not been tested there. makefile, 7 Feb 2004. ++ ++Checked a complaint that "LOCAL &a" did not make array \&a[] local. Indeed ++it did not, and can not. You have to use the full syntax in the LOCAL ++command, "LOCAL \&a[]", or else it doesn't know it's not a macro named &a. ++7 Feb 2004. ++ ++Fixed some confusion in creating IKSD database file and temp-file names. ++I was calling zfnqfp() without remembering that the path member of the ++returned struct included the filename, so to get just the directory name, ++I needed to strip the filename from the right. ckuusy.c, 2 Mar 2004. ++ ++New ckuath.c, ck_ssl.c from Jeff. 2 Mar 2004. ++ ++Updated Jeff's affiliation in VERSION command text. ckuusr.c, 2 Mar 2004. ++ ++Designation changed from Dev.00 to Beta.01. ckcmai.c, 2 Mar 2004. ++ ++Fixed zrename() syslogging -- it had success and failure reversed. ++Beta.02: ckufio.c, 4 Mar 2004. ++ ++Problem: when accessing IKSD via a kermit:// or iksd:// URL, and a user ID ++is given but no password, doxarg() set the password to "" instead of leaving ++it NULL, but all the tests in dourl() are for NULL. Fixed in doxarg(): ++ckuusy.c, 5 Mar 2004. ++ ++The logic in dourl() about which macro to construct (login and connect, ++login and get directory listing, or login and fetch a file) was a bit off, ++so all three cases were not handled. ckcmai.c, 5 Mar 2004. ++ ++Trial Beta builds: ++ . HP-UX B.11.11 PA-RISC ++ . HP-UX B.11.23 IA64 ++ . Tru64 4.0G Alpha ++ . Tru64 5.1B Alpha ++ . Debian 3.0 i386 ++ . Red Hat ES 2.1 i386 ++ . Slackware 9.1 i386 ++ . VMS 7.3-1 Alpha + UCX 5.3 ++ . VMS 7.3-1 Alpha no TCP/IP ++ . VMS 7.3 Alpha MultiNet 4.3 A-X ++ . SCO UnixWare 7.1.4 i386 ++ . SCO OSR5.0.7 i386 ++ . Solaris 9 Sparc ++ ++Fixed compiler warning in doxarg() caused by typo (NULL instead of NUL) in ++the 5 March doxarg() edit. ckuusy.c, 9 Mar 2004. ++ ++IKSD (kermit://) command-line URLs did not work right if the client had ++already preauthenticated with Kerberos or somesuch because they tried to log ++in again with REMOTE LOGIN. The macros constructed in doxarg() needed to ++check \v(authstate) before attempting REMOTE LOGIN. ckcmai.c, 10 Mar 2004. ++ ++Added ckuker.nr to x.sh (ckdaily upload) and updated ckuker.nr with current ++version number and dates. 10 Mar 2004. ++ ++Replaced hardwired references to /usr/local in makefile with $(prefix) ++(which defaults to /usr/local, but can be overridden on the command line), ++suggested by Nelson Beebe for use with Configure. 10 Mar 2004. ++ ++From Nelson Beebe: In the Kermit makefile in the install target commands, ++line 981 reads: ++ ++ cp $(BINARY) $(DESTDIR)$(BINDIR)/kermit || exit 1;\ ++ ++Could you please add this line before it: ++ ++ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(BINDIR)/kermit;\ ++ ++Some sites (mine included) keep multiple versions of software around, ++with hard links between $(prefix)/progname and $(prefix)/progname-x.y.z. ++Failure to remove the $(prefix)/progname at "make install" time then ++replaces the old $(prefix)/progname-x.y.z with the new one, destroying ++an old version that the site wanted to be preserved. makefile, 10 Mar 2004. ++ ++Minor syntax and typo fixes (mostly prototypes): ckcdeb.h, ckcfns.c, ++ckclib.c, ckufio.c, ckuusr.h, ckuusx.c, 10 Mar 2004. (I still have a few ++more to do.) ++ ++Added CC=$(CC) CC2=$(CC2) to many (but not all) makefile targets that ++reference other makefile targets. On some platforms (notably AIX, Solaris, ++SunOS) there are specific targets for different compilers, so I skipped ++those. makefile, 10 Mar 2004. ++ ++Added error checking to kermit:// URL macros, so they don't plow ahead ++after the connection is closed. ckcmai.c, 11 Mar 2004. ++ ++Added FreeBSD 4.9 and 5.1 targets (only the herald is affected). ++makefile, ckuver.h, 11 Mar 2004. ++ ++Added "LIBS=-lcrypt" to bsd44 targets since nowadays crypt is almost always ++unbundled from libc. Also added explanatory notes. makefile, 11 Mar 2004. ++ ++Changed MANDIR to default to $(manroot)/man/man1, and manroot to default ++to $(prefix). More adding of CC=$(CC) clauses: {Free,Net,Open}BSD, 4.4BSD. ++makefile, 11 Mar 2004. ++ ++Miscellaneous cleanups: ckuusx.c, ckcnet.c, ckufio.c, 11 Mar 2004. ++ ++Corrected the check in the linux target to see if /usr/include/crypt.h ++exists, and if so to define HAVE_CRYPT_H, which is used in ckcdeb.h to ++#include to get the prototype for crypt() and prevent bogus ++conversions on its return type on 64-bit platforms (the previous test wasn't ++quite right and the resulting symbol wasn't spelled right). makefile, ++12 Mar 2004. ++ ++From Jeff, 14 Mar 2004: ++ . Initialize localuidbuf[] in tn_snenv(): ckctel.c. ++ . Remove remote-mode checks in hupok() for K95G only (why?): ckuus3.c. ++ . Add help text for new K95-only TYPE /GUI switches: ckuus2.c. ++ . TYPE /GUI parsing, ...: ckuusr.c. ++ . TYPE /GUI action, dotype(): ckuus6.c ++ . Change Jeff's affiliation: most modules. ++ ++20 Mar 2004: Looked into adding long file support, i.e. handling files more ++than 2GB (or 4GB) long. Discovered very quickly this would be a major ++project. Each platform has a different API, or environment, or transition ++plan, or whatever -- a nightmare to handle in portable code. At the very ++least we'll need to convert a lot of Kermit variables from long or unsigned ++long to some new Kermit type, which in turn is #defined or typedef'd ++appropriately for each platform (to off_t or size_t or whatever). Then we ++have to worry about the details of open() vs fopen(); printf() formats (%lld ++vs %Ld vs %"PRId64"...), platforms like HP-UX where you might have to use ++different APIs for different file systems on the same computer, etc. We'll ++need to confront this soon, but let's get a good stable 8.0.211 release out ++first! Meanwhile, for future reference, here are a few articles: ++ ++General: http://freshmeat.net/articles/view/709/ ++Linux: http://www.ece.utexas.edu/~luo/linux_lfs.html ++HP-UX: http://devrsrc1.external.hp.com/STK/partner/lg_files.pdf ++Solaris: http://wwws.sun.com/software/whitepapers/wp-largefiles/largefiles.pdf ++ ++Looked into FTP timeouts. It appears I can just call empty() (which is ++nothing more than a front end for select()) with the desired timeout before ++any kind of network read. If it returns <= 0, we have a timeout. This is ++not quite the same as using alarm() / signal() around a recv() (which could ++get stuck) but alarm() / signal() are not not used in the FTP module and are ++not naturally portable to Windows, but select() is already in use in the FTP ++module for both Unix and Windows. This form of timeout could be used ++portably for both command response and data reads. What about writes to the ++command or data socket? They can get stuck for hours and hours without ++returning too, but the select() approach won't help here -- we need the ++actual send() or recv() to time out, or be wrapped in an alarm()/signal() ++kind of mechanism. But if we can do that for sends, we can also do it for ++receives. Better check with Jeff before I start programming anything. ++20 Mar 2004. ++ ++Later: Decided to postpone the above two projects (ditto IPv6) until after ++8.0.211 is released because both will have major impacts on portability. ++Grumble: all i/o APIs should have been designed from the beginning with a ++timeout parameter. To this day, hardly any have this feature. ++ ++3-4 Apr 2004: More 8.0.211 Beta.02+ test builds: ++ ++ . FreeBSD 3.3 ++ . FreeBSD 4.4 ++ . Linux Debian 2.1 ++ . Linux RH 6.1 ++ . Linux RH 7.1 ++ . Linux RH 7.2 ++ . Linux RH 9 (with 84 different combinations of feature selection) ++ . Linux SuSE 6.4 ++ . Linux SuSE 7.0 ++ . NetBSD 1.4.1 ++ . NetBSD 1.5.2 ++ . OpenBSD 2.5 ++ . OpenBSD 3.0 ++ . QNX 4.25 ++ . SCO UnixWare 2.1.3 ++ . SCO UnixWare 7.1.4 ++ . SCO OpenServer 5.0.7 ++ . SCO XENIX 2.3.4 (no TCP) ++ ++Changes needed: None. ++ ++Problem: SCO XENIX 2.3.4 network build failed in the FTP module with ++header-file syntax and conflicting-definitions trouble. I'm not going to ++try to fix it; 8.0.209 built OK with FTP, so we'll just keep that one ++available. ++ ++Got access to VMS 8.1 on IA64. Building the nonet version of C-Kermit ++required minor modifications to ckvvms.h, ckv[ft]io.c, and ckvcon.c, to ++account for a third architecture. Also to SHOW FEATURES in ckuus5.c. Once ++that was done, the UCX 5.5 version built OK too. Starts OK, makes Telnet ++connection OK, sends files. Has some obvious glitches though -- "stat" ++after a file transfer reports 0 elapsed time (in fact it was 00:09:48) and ++1219174400 cps (when in fact it was 10364). This doesn't happen on the ++Alpha. Btw, the IA64 binary is twice as big as the Alpha one. Changed ++to Beta.03. 5 Apr 2004. ++ ++Fixed the ckdaily script to include the makefile and man page in the Zip ++file (they were not included because the Zip file was intended mainly for ++VMS users, but some Unix users prefer Zip to tar.gz). 6 Apr 2004. ++ ++Traced problems in VMS/IA64 statistics report to rftimer()/gftimer() in ++ckvtio.c, which use sys$ and lib$ calls to figure elapsed time. These work ++on VAX and Alpha but not IA64. Sent a report to the chief engineer of the ++IA64 VMS port; he says it's probably a bug in VMS 8.1 (which is not a real ++release); he'll make sure it's fixed in 8.2. As an experiment, tried ++swapping in the Unix versions of these routines (which call gettimeofday() ++etc). They seem work just fine (it hung a couple times but I think that's ++because the underlying system hung too; trying it later on a new connection, ++it was fine; however I noticed a BIG discrepancy in throughput between ++sending and receiving). Moved definitions for VMS64BIT and VMSI64 to ++ckcdeb.h so all modules can use them and added them to the SHOW FEATURES ++display. Added VMSV80 definition to build procedure. Beta.03+. ckcdeb.h, ++ckcuus5.c, ckcvvms.h, ckvtio.c, ckvker.com, 6 Apr 2004. ++ ++While doing the build-all, I noticed the VMS version did not build with ++Multinet or older UCX versions, always with the same errors -- undeclared ++variables, undefined symbols, all TCP/IP related. This didn't happen a ++couple weeks ago... Somehow the order of #includes was messed up -- ++ckuusr.h depended on symbols that are defined in ckcnet.h, but ckcnet.h ++was being included after ckuusr.h... this was compounded by two missing ++commas in ckvker.com. 11 Apr 2004. ++ ++Removed Beta designation, released as 8.0.211, 10 Apr 2004. ++ ++---8.0.211--- ++ ++I had somehow lost the edit to ckutio.c that changed the UUCP lockfile for ++Mac OS X from /var/spool/uucp to /var/spool/lock. So I slipped it in and ++re-uploaded version 8.0.211. You can tell the difference because SHOW ++VERSIONS has a 17 Apr 2004 for the Communications I/O module. Also the 10.3 ++executable now has a designer banner: "Mac OS X 10.3". makefile, ckuver.h, ++ckutio.c, ckuus[45].c, 17 Apr 2004. ++ ++*********************** +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckermit70.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,17956 @@ ++ ++ [ [1]Contents ] [ [2]C-Kermit ] [ [3]Kermit Home ] ++ ++ Supplement to Using C-Kermit, Second Edition ++ ++For C-Kermit 7.0 ++ ++As of C-Kermit version: 7.0.196 ++This file last updated: 8 February 2000 ++ ++Authors: Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone ++Address: The Kermit Project ++ Columbia University ++ 612 West 115th Street ++ New York NY 10025-7799 ++ USA ++Fax: +1 (212) 662-6442 ++E-Mail: [4]kermit-support@columbia.edu ++Web: [5]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++Or: [6]http://www.kermit-project.org/ ++Or: [7]http://www.columbia.nyc.ny.us/kermit/ ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ NOTICES ++ ++ This document: ++ Copyright © 1997, 2000, Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone. ++ All rights reserved. ++ ++ Kermit 95: ++ Copyright © 1995, 2000, Trustees of Columbia University in the ++ City of New York. All rights reserved. ++ ++ C-Kermit: ++ Copyright © 1985, 2000, ++ Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York. All ++ rights reserved. See the C-Kermit [8]COPYING.TXT file or the ++ copyright text in the [9]ckcmai.c module for disclaimer and ++ permissions. ++ ++ When Kerberos(TM) and/or SRP(TM) (Secure Remote Password) and/or SSL ++ protocol are included: ++ Portions Copyright © 1990, Massachusetts Institute of ++ Technology. ++ Portions Copyright © 1991, 1993 Regents of the University of ++ California. ++ Portions Copyright © 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 by AT&T. ++ Portions Copyright © 1997, Stanford University. ++ Portions Copyright © 1995-1997, Eric Young ++ . ++ ++ For the full text of the third-party copyright notices, see ++ [10]Appendix V. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ WHAT IS IN THIS FILE ++ ++ This file lists changes made to C-Kermit since the second edition of ++ the book [11]Using C-Kermit was published and C-Kermit 6.0 was ++ released in November 1996. Use this file as a supplement to the second ++ edition of Using C-Kermit until the third edition is published some ++ time in 2000. If the "most recent update" shown above is long ago, ++ contact Columbia University to see if there is a newer release. ++ ++ For further information, also see the [12]CKCBWR.TXT ("C-Kermit ++ beware") file for hints, tips, tricks, restrictions, frequently asked ++ questions, etc, plus the system-specific "beware file", e.g. ++ [13]CKUBWR.TXT for UNIX, [14]CKVBWR.TXT for VMS, etc, and also any ++ system-specific update files such as KERMIT95.HTM for Kermit 95 (in ++ the DOCS\MANUAL\ subdirectory of your K95 directory). ++ ++ This Web-based copy of the C-Kermit 7.0 update notes supersedes the ++ plain-text CKERMIT2.TXT file. All changes after 19 January 2000 ++ appear only here in the Web version. If you need an up-to-date ++ plain-text copy, use your Web browser to save this page as plain ++ text. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ABOUT FILENAMES ++ ++ In this document, filenames are generally shown in uppercase, but on ++ file systems with case-sensitive names such as UNIX, OS-9, and AOS/VS, ++ lowercase names are used: [15]ckubwr.txt, [16]ckermit70.txt, etc. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ADDITIONAL FILES ++ ++ Several other files accompany this new Kermit release: ++ ++ SECURITY.TXT ++ Discussion of Kermit's new authentication and encryption ++ features: ++ ++ + [17]Plain-text version ++ + [18]HTML (hypertext) version ++ ++ IKSD.TXT ++ How to install and manage an Internet Kermit Service Daemon. ++ ++ + [19]Plain-text version ++ + [20]HTML (hypertext) version ++ ++ Also see [21]cuiksd.htm for instructions for use. ++ ++ TELNET.TXT ++ A thorough presentation of Kermit's new advanced Telnet ++ features and controls. ++ ++ + [22]Plain-text version ++ + [23]HTML (hypertext) version ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ THE NEW C-KERMIT LICENSE ++ ++ The C-Kermit license was rewritten for version 7.0 to grant automatic ++ permission to packagers of free operating-system distributions to ++ include C-Kermit 7.0. Examples include Linux (GNU/Linux), FreeBSD, ++ NetBSD, etc. The new license is in the [24]COPYING.TXT file, and is ++ also displayed by C-Kermit itself when you give the VERSION or ++ COPYRIGHT command. The new C-Kermit license does not apply to ++ [25]Kermit 95. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ++ ++ Thanks to Jeff Altman, who joined the Kermit Project in 1995, for much ++ of what you see in C-Kermit 7.0, especially in the networking and ++ security areas, and his key role in designing and implementing the ++ Internet Kermit Service Daemon. And special thanks to Lucas Hart for ++ lots of help with the VMS version; to Peter Eichhorn for continuous ++ testing on the full range of HP-UX versions and for a consolidated set ++ of HP-UX makefile targets; and to Colin Allen, Mark Allen, Roger ++ Allen, Ric Anderson, William Bader, Mitch Baker, Mitchell Bass, Nelson ++ Beebe, Gerry Belanger, Jeff Bernsten, Mark Berryman, John Bigg, Volker ++ Borchert, Jonathan Boswell, Tim Boyer, Frederick Bruckman, Kenneth ++ Cochran, Jared Crapo, Bill Delaney, Igor Sobrado Delgado, Clarence ++ Dold, Joe Doupnik, John Dunlap, Max Evarts, Patrick French, Carl ++ Friedberg, Carl Friend, Hirofumi Fujii, Andrew Gabriel, Gabe Garza, ++ Boyd Gerber, David Gerber, George Gilmer, Hunter Goatley, DJ Hagberg, ++ Kevin Handy, Andy Harper, Randolph Herber, Sven Holström, Michal ++ Jaegermann, Graham Jenkins, Dick Jones, Terry Kennedy, Robert D Keys, ++ Nick Kisseberth, Igor Kovalenko, David Lane, Adam Laurie, Jeff ++ Liebermann, Eric Lonvick, Hoi Wan Louis, Arthur Marsh, Gregorie ++ Martin, Peter Mauzey, Dragan Milicic, Todd Miller, Christian Mondrup, ++ Daniel Morato, Dat Nguyen, Herb Peyerl, Jean-Pierre Radley, Steve ++ Rance, Stephen Riehm, Nigel Roles, Larry Rosenman, Jay S Rouman, David ++ Sanderson, John Santos, Michael Schmitz, Steven Schultz, Bob Shair, ++ Richard Shuford, Fred Smith, Michael Sokolov, Jim Spath, Peter Szell, ++ Ted T'so, Brian Tillman, Linus Torvalds, Patrick Volkerding, Martin ++ Vorländer, Steve Walton, Ken Weaverling, John Weekley, Martin ++ Whitaker, Jim Whitby, Matt Willman, Joellen Windsor, Farrell Woods, ++ and many others for binaries, hosting, reviews, suggestions, advice, ++ bug reports, and all the rest over the 3+ year C-Kermit 7.0 ++ development cycle. Thanks to Russ Nelson and the board of the Open ++ Software Initiative ([26]http://www.opensource.org) for their ++ cooperation in developing the new C-Kermit license and to the ++ proprietors of those free UNIX distributions that have incorporated ++ C-Kermit 7.0 for their cooperation and support, especially FreeBSD's ++ Jörg Wunsch. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ NOTE TO KERMIT 95 USERS ++ ++ Kermit 95 and C-Kermit share the same command and scripting language, ++ the same Kermit file-transfer protocol implementation, and much else ++ besides. ++ ++ Like the book [27]Using C-Kermit, this file concentrates on the ++ aspects of C-Kermit that are common to all versions: UNIX, VMS, ++ Windows, OS/2, VOS, AOS/VS, etc. Please refer to your Kermit 95 ++ documentation for information that is specific to Kermit 95. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 corresponds to Kermit 95 1.1.19. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ C-KERMIT VERSIONS AND VERSION NUMBERS ++ ++ "C-Kermit" refers to all the many programs that are compiled in whole ++ or in part from common C-language source code, comprising: ++ ++ * A Kermit file transfer protocol module ++ * A command parser and script execution module ++ * A modem-dialing module ++ * A network support module ++ * A character-set translation module. ++ ++ and several others. These "system-independent" modules are combined ++ with system-dependent modules for each platform to provide the ++ required input/output functions, and also in some cases overlaid with ++ an alternative user interface, such as Macintosh Kermit's ++ point-and-click interface, and in some cases also a terminal emulator, ++ as Kermit 95. ++ ++ The C-Kermit version number started as 1.0, ... 3.0, 4.0, 4.1 and then ++ (because of confusion at the time with Berkeley UNIX 4.2), 4B, 4C, and ++ so on, with the specific edit number in parentheses, for example ++ 4E(072) or 5A(188). This scheme was used through 5A(191), but now we ++ have gone back to the traditional numbering scheme with decimal ++ points: major.minor.edit; for example 7.0.196. Internal version ++ numbers (the \v(version) variable), however, are compatible in ++ C-Kermit 5A upwards. ++ ++ Meanwhile, C-Kermit derivatives for some platforms (Windows, ++ Macintosh) might go through several releases while C-Kermit itself ++ remains the same. These versions have their own platform-specific ++ version numbers, such as Kermit 95 1.1.1, 1.1.2, and so on. ++ ++ C-Kermit Version History: ++ ++ 1.0 1981-1982 Command-line only, 4.2 BSD UNIX only ++ 2.0 (*) (who remembers...) ++ 3.0 May 1984 Command-line only, supports several platforms ++ 4.0-4.1 Feb-Apr 1985 (*) First interactive and modular version ++ 4C(050) May 1985 ++ 4D(060) April 1986 ++ 4E(066) August 1987 Long packets ++ 4E(068) January 1988 ++ 4E(072) January 1989 ++ 4F(095) August 1989 (*) Attribute packets ++ 5A(188) November 1992 Scripting, TCP/IP, sliding windows (1) ++ 5A(189) September 1993 Control-char unprefixing ++ 5A(190) October 1994 Recovery ++ 5A(191) April 1995 OS/2 only ++ 6.0.192 September 1996 Intelligent dialing, autodownload, lots more (2) ++ 6.1.193 1997-98 (*) Development only ++ 6.1.194 June 1998 K95 only - switches, directory recursion, more ++ 7.0.195 August 1999 IKSD + more (CU only as K95 1.1.18-CU) ++ 7.0.196 1 January 2000 Unicode, lots more ++ ++ (*) Never formally released (4.0 was a total rewrite) ++ (1) Using C-Kermit, 1st Edition ++ (2) Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++CONTENTS ++ ++ I. [28]C-KERMIT DOCUMENTATION ++ ++ II. [29]NEW FEATURES ++ ++ (0) [30]INCOMPATIBILITIES WITH PREVIOUS RELEASES ++ (1) [31]PROGRAM AND FILE MANAGEMENT AND COMMANDS ++ 1.0. [32]Bug fixes ++ 1.1. [33]Command Continuation ++ 1.2. [34]Editor Interface ++ 1.3. [35]Web Browser and FTP Interface ++ 1.4. [36]Command Editing ++ 1.5. [37]Command Switches ++ 1.5.1. [38]General Switch Syntax ++ 1.5.2. [39]Order and Effect of Switches ++ 1.5.3. [40]Distinguishing Switches from Other Fields ++ 1.5.4. [41]Standard File Selection Switches ++ 1.5.5. [42]Setting Preferences for Different Commands ++ 1.6. [43]Dates and Times ++ 1.7. [44]Partial Completion of Keywords ++ 1.8. [45]Command Recall ++ 1.9. [46]EXIT Messages ++ 1.10. [47]Managing Keyboard Interruptions ++ 1.11. [48]Taming the Wild Backslash -- Part Deux ++ 1.11.1. [49]Background ++ 1.11.2. [50]Kermit's Quoting Rules ++ 1.11.3. [51]Passing DOS Filenames from Kermit to Shell Commands ++ 1.11.4. [52]Using Variables to Hold DOS Filenames ++ 1.11.5. [53]Passing DOS Filenames as Parameters to Macros ++ 1.11.6. [54]Passing DOS File Names from Macro Parameters to the ++DOS Shell ++ 1.11.7. [55]Passing DOS Filenames to Kermit from the Shell ++ 1.12. [56]Debugging ++ 1.13. [57]Logs ++ 1.14. [58]Automatic File-Transfer Packet Recognition at the Command Pr ++ompt ++ 1.15. [59]The TYPE Command ++ 1.16. [60]The RESET Command ++ 1.17. [61]The COPY and RENAME Commands ++ 1.18. [62]The MANUAL Command ++ 1.19. [63]String and Filename Matching Patterns ++ 1.20. [64]Multiple Commands on One Line ++ 1.21. [65]What Do I Have? ++ 1.22. [66]Generalized File Input and Output ++ 1.22.1. [67]Why Another I/O System? ++ 1.22.2. [68]The FILE Command ++ 1.22.3. [69]FILE Command Examples ++ 1.22.4. [70]Channel Numbers ++ 1.22.5. [71]FILE Command Error Codes ++ 1.22.6. [72]File I/O Variables ++ 1.22.7. [73]File I/O Functions ++ 1.22.8. [74]File I/O Function Examples ++ 1.23. [75]The EXEC Command ++ 1.24. [76]Getting Keyword Lists with '?' ++ (2) [77]MAKING AND USING CONNECTIONS ++ 2.0. [78]SET LINE and SET HOST Command Switches ++ 2.1. [79]Dialing ++ 2.1.1. [80]The Dial Result Message ++ 2.1.2. [81]Long-Distance Dialing Changes ++ 2.1.3. [82]Forcing Long-Distance Dialing ++ 2.1.4. [83]Exchange-Specific Dialing Decisions ++ 2.1.5. [84]Cautions about Cheapest-First Dialing ++ 2.1.6. [85]Blind Dialing (Dialing with No Dialtone) ++ 2.1.7. [86]Trimming the Dialing Dialog ++ 2.1.8. [87]Controlling the Dialing Speed ++ 2.1.9. [88]Pretesting Phone Number Conversions ++ 2.1.10. [89]Greater Control over Partial Dialing ++ 2.1.11. [90]New DIAL-related Variables and Functions ++ 2.1.12. [91]Increased Flexibility of PBX Dialing ++ 2.1.13. [92]The DIAL macro - Last-Minute Phone Number Conversions ++ 2.1.14. [93]Automatic Tone/Pulse Dialing Selection ++ 2.1.15. [94]Dial-Modifier Variables ++ 2.1.16. [95]Giving Multiple Numbers to the DIAL Command ++ 2.2. [96]Modems ++ 2.2.1. [97]New Modem Types ++ 2.2.2. [98]New Modem Controls ++ 2.3. [99]TELNET and RLOGIN ++ 2.3.0. [100]Bug Fixes ++ 2.3.1. [101]Telnet Binary Mode Bug Adjustments ++ 2.3.2. [102]VMS UCX Telnet Port Bug Adjustment ++ 2.3.3. [103]Telnet New Environment Option ++ 2.3.4. [104]Telnet Location Option ++ 2.3.5. [105]Connecting to Raw TCP Sockets ++ 2.3.6. [106]Incoming TCP Connections ++ 2.4. [107]The EIGHTBIT Command ++ 2.5. [108]The Services Directory ++ 2.6. [109]Closing Connections ++ 2.7. [110]Using C-Kermit with External Communication Programs ++ 2.7.0. [111]C-Kermit over tn3270 and tn5250 ++ 2.7.1. [112]C-Kermit over Telnet ++ 2.7.2. [113]C-Kermit over Rlogin ++ 2.7.3. [114]C-Kermit over Serial Communication Programs ++ 2.7.4. [115]C-Kermit over Secure Network Clients ++ 2.7.4.1. [116]SSH ++ 2.7.4.2. [117]SSL ++ 2.7.4.3. [118]SRP ++ 2.7.4.4. [119]SOCKS ++ 2.7.4.5. [120]Kerberos and SRP ++ 2.8. [121]Scripting Local Programs ++ 2.9. [122]X.25 Networking ++ 2.9.1. [123]IBM AIXLink/X.25 Network Provider Interface for AIX ++ 2.9.2. [124]HP-UX X.25 ++ 2.10. [125]Additional Serial Port Controls ++ 2.11. [126]Getting Access to the Dialout Device ++ 2.12. [127]The Connection Log ++ 2.13. [128]Automatic Connection-Specific Flow Control Selection ++ 2.14. [129]Trapping Connection Establishment and Loss ++ 2.15. [130]Contacting Web Servers with the HTTP Command ++ (3) [131]TERMINAL CONNECTION ++ 3.1. [132]CONNECT Command Switches ++ 3.2. [133]Triggers ++ 3.3. [134]Transparent Printing ++ 3.4. [135]Binary and Text Session Logs ++ (4) [136]FILE TRANSFER AND MANAGEMENT ++ 4.0. [137]Bug Fixes, Minor Changes, and Clarifications ++ 4.1. [138]File-Transfer Filename Templates ++ 4.1.1. [139]Templates in the As-Name ++ 4.1.2. [140]Templates on the Command Line ++ 4.1.3. [141]Post-Transfer Renaming ++ 4.2. [142]File-Transfer Pipes and Filters ++ 4.2.1. [143]Introduction ++ 4.2.1.1. [144]Terminology ++ 4.2.1.2. [145]Notation ++ 4.2.1.3. [146]Security ++ 4.2.2. [147]Commands for Transferring from and to Pipes ++ 4.2.2.1. [148]Sending from a Command ++ 4.2.2.2. [149]Receiving to a Command ++ 4.2.3. [150]Using File-Transfer Filters ++ 4.2.3.1. [151]The SEND Filter ++ 4.2.3.2. [152]The RECEIVE Filter ++ 4.2.4. [153]Implicit Use of Pipes ++ 4.2.5. [154]Success and Failure of Piped Commands ++ 4.2.6. [155]Cautions about Using Pipes to Transfer Directory Trees ++ 4.2.7. [156]Pipes and Encryption ++ 4.2.8. [157]Commands and Functions Related to Pipes ++ 4.2.8.1. [158]The OPEN !READ and OPEN !WRITE Commands ++ 4.2.8.2. [159]The REDIRECT Command ++ 4.2.8.3. [160]Receiving Mail and Print Jobs ++ 4.2.8.4. [161]Pipe-Related Functions ++ 4.3. [162]Automatic Per-File Text/Binary Mode Switching ++ 4.3.1. [163]Exceptions ++ 4.3.2. [164]Overview ++ 4.3.3. [165]Commands ++ 4.3.4. [166]Examples ++ 4.4. [167]File Permissions ++ 4.4.1. [168]When ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION is OFF ++ 4.4.1.1. [169]Unix ++ 4.4.1.2. [170]VMS ++ 4.4.2. [171]When ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION is ON ++ 4.4.2.1. [172]System-Specific Permissions ++ 4.4.2.1.1. [173]UNIX ++ 4.4.2.1.2. [174]VMS ++ 4.4.2.2. [175]System-Independent Permissions ++ 4.5. [176]File Management Commands ++ 4.5.1. [177]The DIRECTORY Command ++ 4.5.2. [178]The CD and BACK Commands ++ 4.5.2.1. [179]Parsing Improvements ++ 4.5.2.2. [180]The CDPATH ++ 4.5.3. [181]Creating and Removing Directories ++ 4.5.4. [182]The DELETE and PURGE Commands ++ 4.6. [183]Starting the Remote Kermit Server Automatically ++ 4.7. [184]File-Transfer Command Switches ++ 4.7.1. [185]SEND Command Switches ++ 4.7.2. [186]GET Command Switches ++ 4.7.3. [187]RECEIVE Command Switches ++ 4.8. [188]Minor Kermit Protocol Improvements ++ 4.8.1. [189]Multiple Attribute Packets ++ 4.8.2. [190]Very Short Packets ++ 4.9. [191]Wildcard / File Group Expansion ++ 4.9.1. [192]In UNIX C-Kermit ++ 4.9.2. [193]In Kermit 95 ++ 4.9.3. [194]In VMS, AOS/VS, OS-9, VOS, etc. ++ 4.10. [195]Additional Pathname Controls ++ 4.11. [196]Recursive SEND and GET: Transferring Directory Trees ++ 4.11.1. [197]Command-Line Options ++ 4.11.2. [198]The SEND /RECURSIVE Command ++ 4.11.3. [199]The GET /RECURSIVE Command ++ 4.11.4. [200]New and Changed File Functions ++ 4.11.5. [201]Moving Directory Trees Between Like Systems ++ 4.11.6. [202]Moving Directory Trees Between Unlike Systems ++ 4.12. [203]Where Did My File Go? ++ 4.13. [204]File Output Buffer Control ++ 4.14. [205]Improved Responsiveness ++ 4.15. [206]Doubling and Ignoring Characters for Transparency ++ 4.16. [207]New File-Transfer Display Formats ++ 4.17. [208]New Transaction Log Formats ++ 4.17.1. [209]The BRIEF Format ++ 4.17.2. [210]The FTP Format ++ 4.18. [211]Unprefixing NUL ++ 4.19. [212]Clear-Channel Protocol ++ 4.20. [213]Streaming Protocol ++ 4.20.1. [214]Commands for Streaming ++ 4.20.2. [215]Examples of Streaming ++ 4.20.2.1. [216]Streaming on Socket-to-Socket Connections ++ 4.20.2.2. [217]Streaming on Telnet Connections ++ 4.20.2.3. [218]Streaming with Limited Packet Length ++ 4.20.2.4. [219]Streaming on Dialup Connections ++ 4.20.2.5. [220]Streaming on X.25 Connections ++ 4.20.3. [221]Streaming - Preliminary Conclusions ++ 4.21. [222]The TRANSMIT Command ++ 4.22. [223]Coping with Faulty Kermit Implementations ++ 4.22.1. [224]Failure to Accept Modern Negotiation Strings ++ 4.22.2. [225]Failure to Negotiate 8th-bit Prefixing ++ 4.22.3. [226]Corrupt Files ++ 4.22.4. [227]Spurious Cancellations ++ 4.22.5. [228]Spurious Refusals ++ 4.22.6. [229]Failures during the Data Transfer Phase ++ 4.22.7. [230]Fractured Filenames ++ 4.22.8. [231]Bad File Dates ++ 4.23. [232]File Transfer Recovery ++ 4.24. [233]FILE COLLISION UPDATE Clarification ++ 4.25. [234]Autodownload Improvements ++ (5) [235]CLIENT/SERVER ++ 5.0. [236]Hints ++ 5.1. [237]New Command-Line Options ++ 5.2. [238]New Client Commands ++ 5.3. [239]New Server Capabilities ++ 5.3.1. [240]Creating and Removing Directories ++ 5.3.2. [241]Directory Listings ++ 5.4. [242]Syntax for Remote Filenames with Embedded Spaces ++ 5.5. [243]Automatic Orientation Messages upon Directory Change ++ 5.6. [244]New Server Controls ++ 5.7. [245]Timeouts during REMOTE HOST Command Execution ++ (6) [246]INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SETS ++ 6.0. [247]ISO 8859-15 Latin Alphabet 9 ++ 6.1. [248]The HP-Roman8 Character Set ++ 6.2. [249]Greek Character Sets ++ 6.3. [250]Additional Latin-2 Character Sets ++ 6.4. [251]Additional Cyrillic Character Sets ++ 6.5. [252]Automatic Character-Set Switching ++ 6.6. [253]Unicode ++ 6.6.1. [254]Overview of Unicode ++ 6.6.2. [255]UCS Byte Order ++ 6.6.2. [256]UCS Transformation Formats ++ 6.6.3. [257]Conformance Levels ++ 6.6.4. [258]Relationship of Unicode with Kermit's Other Character Sets ++ 6.6.5. [259]Kermit's Unicode Features ++ 6.6.5.1. [260]File Transfer ++ 6.6.5.2. [261]The TRANSLATE Command ++ 6.6.5.3. [262]Terminal Connection ++ 6.6.5.4. [263]The TRANSMIT Command ++ 6.6.5.5. [264]Summary of Kermit Unicode Commands ++ 6.7. [265]Client/Server Character-Set Switching ++ (7) [266]SCRIPT PROGRAMMING ++ 7.0. [267]Bug Fixes ++ 7.1. [268]The INPUT Command ++ 7.1.1. [269]INPUT Timeouts ++ 7.1.2. [270]New INPUT Controls ++ 7.1.3. [271]INPUT with Pattern Matching ++ 7.1.4. [272]The INPUT Match Result ++ 7.2. [273]New or Improved Built-In Variables ++ 7.3. [274]New or Improved Built-In Functions ++ 7.4. [275]New IF Conditions ++ 7.5. [276]Using More than Ten Macro Arguments ++ 7.6. [277]Clarification of Function Call Syntax ++ 7.7. [278]Autodownload during INPUT Command Execution ++ 7.8. [279]Built-in Help for Functions. ++ 7.9. [280]Variable Assignments ++ 7.9.1. [281]Assignment Operators ++ 7.9.2. [282]New Assignment Commands ++ 7.10. [283]Arrays ++ 7.10.1. [284]Array Initializers ++ 7.10.2. [285]Turning a String into an Array of Words ++ 7.10.3. [286]Arrays of Filenames ++ 7.10.4. [287]Automatic Arrays ++ 7.10.5. [288]Sorting Arrays ++ 7.10.6. [289]Displaying Arrays ++ 7.10.7. [290]Other Array Operations ++ 7.10.8. [291]Hints for Using Arrays ++ 7.10.9. [292]Do-It-Yourself Arrays ++ 7.10.10. [293]Associative Arrays ++ 7.11. [294]OUTPUT Command Improvements ++ 7.12. [295]Function and Variable Diagnostics ++ 7.13. [296]Return Value of Macros ++ 7.14. [297]The ASSERT, FAIL, and SUCCEED Commands. ++ 7.15. [298]Using Alarms ++ 7.16. [299]Passing Arguments to Command Files ++ 7.17. [300]Dialogs with Timed Responses ++ 7.18. [301]Increased Flexibility of SWITCH Case Labels ++ 7.19. "[302]Kerbang" Scripts ++ 7.20. [303]IF and XIF Statement Syntax ++ 7.20.1. [304]The IF/XIF Distinction ++ 7.20.2. [305]Boolean Expressions (The IF/WHILE Condition) ++ 7.21. [306]Screen Formatting and Cursor Control ++ 7.22. [307]Evaluating Arithmetic Expressions ++ 7.23. [308]Floating-Point Arithmetic ++ 7.24. [309]Tracing Script Execution ++ 7.25. [310]Compact Substring Notation ++ 7.26. [311]New WAIT Command Options ++ 7.26.1. [312]Waiting for Modem Signals ++ 7.26.2. [313]Waiting for File Events ++ 7.27. [314]Relaxed FOR and SWITCH Syntax ++ (8) [315]USING OTHER FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOLS ++ (9) [316]COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS ++ 9.0. [317]Extended-Format Command-Line Options ++ 9.1. [318]Command Line Personalities ++ 9.2. [319]Built-in Help for Command Line Options ++ 9.3. [320]New Command-Line Options ++ (10) [321]C-KERMIT AND G-KERMIT ++ ++III. [322]APPENDICES ++ ++III.1. [323]Character Set Tables ++III.1.1. [324]The Hewlett Packard Roman8 Character Set ++III.1.2. [325]Greek Character Sets ++III.1.2.1. [326]The ISO 8859-7 Latin / Greek Alphabet ++III.1.2.2. [327]The ELOT 927 Character Set ++III.1.2.3. [328]PC Code Page 869 ++III.2. [329]Updated Country Codes ++ ++IV. [330]ERRATA & CORRIGENDA: Corrections to "Using C-Kermit" 2nd Edition. ++V. [331]ADDITIONAL COPYRIGHT NOTICES ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++I. C-KERMIT DOCUMENTATION ++ ++ The user manual for C-Kermit is: ++ ++ Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, [332]Using C-Kermit, Second ++ Edition, Digital Press / Butterworth-Heinemann, Woburn, MA, 1997, ++ 622 pages, ISBN 1-55558-164-1. ++ ++ [333]CLICK HERE for reviews. ++ ++ The present document is a supplement to Using C-Kermit 2nd Ed, not a ++ replacement for it. ++ ++ US single-copy price: $52.95; quantity discounts available. Available ++ in bookstores or directly from Columbia University: ++ ++ The Kermit Project ++ Columbia University ++ 612 West 115th Street ++ New York NY 10025-7799 ++ USA ++ Telephone: +1 (212) 854-3703 ++ Fax: +1 (212) 662-6442 ++ ++ Domestic and overseas orders accepted. Price: US $44.95 (US, Canada, ++ and Mexico). Shipping: $4.00 within the USA; $15.00 to all other ++ countries. Orders may be paid by MasterCard or Visa, or prepaid by ++ check in US dollars. Add $65 bank fee for checks not drawn on a US ++ bank. Do not include sales tax. Inquire about quantity discounts. ++ ++ You can also order by phone from the publisher, Digital Press / ++ [334]Butterworth-Heinemann, with MasterCard, Visa, or American ++ Express: ++ ++ +1 800 366-2665 (Woburn, Massachusetts office for USA & Canada) ++ +44 1865 314627 (Oxford, England distribution centre for UK & Europe) ++ +61 03 9245 7111 (Melbourne, Vic, office for Australia & NZ) ++ +65 356-1968 (Singapore office for Asia) ++ +27 (31) 2683111 (Durban office for South Africa) ++ ++ A [335]German-language edition of the First Edition is also available: ++ ++ Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, C-Kermit - Einführung und ++ Referenz, Verlag Heinz Heise, Hannover, Germany (1994). ISBN ++ 3-88229-023-4. Deutsch von Gisbert W. Selke. Price: DM 88,00. ++ Verlag Heinz Heise GmbH & Co. KG, Helstorfer Strasse 7, D-30625 ++ Hannover. Tel. +49 (05 11) 53 52-0, Fax. +49 (05 11) 53 52-1 29. ++ ++ The [336]Kermit file transfer protocol is specified in: ++ ++ Frank da Cruz, Kermit, A File Transfer Protocol, Digital Press, ++ Bedford, MA, 1987, 379 pages, ISBN 0-932376-88-6. US single-copy ++ price: $39.95. Availability as above. ++ ++ News and articles about Kermit software and protocol are published ++ periodically in the journal, [337]Kermit News. Subscriptions are free; ++ contact Columbia University at the address above. ++ ++ Online news about Kermit is published in the ++ [338]comp.protocols.kermit.announce and ++ [339]comp.protocols.kermit.misc newsgroups. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++II. NEW FEATURES ++ ++ Support for the Bell Labs Plan 9 operating system was added to version ++ 6.0 too late to be mentioned in the book (although it does appear on ++ the cover). ++ ++ Specific changes and additions are grouped together by major topic, ++ roughly corresponding to the chapters of [340]Using C-Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 0. INCOMPATIBILITIES WITH PREVIOUS RELEASES ++ ++ 1. C-Kermit 7.0 uses FAST Kermit protocol settings by default. This ++ includes "unprefixing" of certain control characters. Because of ++ this, file transfers that worked with previous releases might not ++ work in the new release (but it is more likely that they will ++ work, and much faster). If a transfer fails, you'll get a ++ context-sensitive hint suggesting possible causes and cures. ++ Usually SET PREFIXING ALL does the trick. ++ 2. C-Kermit 7.0 transfers files in BINARY mode by default. To restore ++ the previous behavior, put SET FILE TYPE TEXT in your C-Kermit ++ initialization file. ++ 3. No matter whether FILE TYPE is BINARY or TEXT by default, C-Kermit ++ 7.0 now switches between text and binary mode automatically on a ++ per-file basis according to various criteria, including (a) which ++ kind of platform is on the other end of the connection (if known), ++ (b) the version of Kermit on the other end, and (c) the file's ++ name (see [341]Section 4, especially [342]4.3). To disable this ++ automatic switching and restore the earlier behavior, put SET ++ TRANSFER MODE MANUAL in your C-Kermit initialization file. To ++ disable automatic switching for a particular transfer, include a ++ /TEXT or /BINARY switch with your SEND or GET command. ++ 4. The RESEND and REGET commands automatically switch to binary mode; ++ previously if RESEND or REGET were attempted when FILE TYPE was ++ TEXT, these commands would fail immediately, with a message ++ telling you they work only when the FILE TYPE is BINARY. Now they ++ simply do this for you. See [343]Section 4.23 for additional ++ (important) information. ++ 5. SET PREFIXING CAUTIOUS and MINIMAL now both prefix linefeed (10 ++ and 138) in case rlogin, ssh, or cu are "in the middle", since ++ otherwise ~ might appear in Kermit packets, and this would ++ cause rlogin, ssh, or cu to disconnect, suspend,escape back, or ++ otherwise wreck the file transfer. Xon and Xoff are now always ++ prefixed too, even when Xon/Xoff flow control is not in effect, ++ since unprefixing them has proven dangerous on TCP/IP connections. ++ 6. In UNIX, VMS, Windows, and OS/2, the DIRECTORY command is built ++ into C-Kermit itself rather than implemented by running an ++ external command or program. The built-in command might not behave ++ the way the platform-specific external one did, but many options ++ are available for customization. Of course the underlying ++ platform-specific command can still be accessed with "!", "@", or ++ "RUN" wherever the installation does not forbid. In UNIX, the "ls" ++ command can be accessed directly as "ls" in C-Kermit. See ++ [344]Section 4.5.1 for details. ++ 7. SEND ? prints a list of switches rather than a list of filenames. ++ If you want to see a list of filenames, use a (system-dependent) ++ construction such as SEND ./? (for UNIX, Windows, or OS/2), SEND ++ []? (VMS), etc. See [345]Sections 1.5 and [346]4.7.1. ++ 8. In UNIX, OS-9, and Kermit 95, the wildcard characters in previous ++ versions were * and ?. In C-Kermit 7.0 they are *, ?, [, ], {, and ++ }, with dash used inside []'s to denote ranges and comma used ++ inside {} to separate list elements. If you need to include any of ++ these characters literally in a filename, precede each one with ++ backslash (\). See [347]Section 4.9. ++ 9. SET QUIET { ON, OFF } is now on the command stack, just like SET ++ INPUT CASE, SET COUNT, SET MACRO ERROR, etc, as described on p.458 ++ of [348]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition. This allows any macro or ++ command file to SET QUIET ON or OFF without worrying about saving ++ and restoring the global QUIET value. For example, this lets you ++ write a script that tries SET LINE on lots of devices until it ++ finds one free without spewing out loads of error messages, and ++ also without disturbing the global QUIET setting, whatever it was. ++ 10. Because of the new "." operator (which introduces assignments), ++ macros whose names begin with "." can not be invoked "by name". ++ However, they still can be invoked with DO. ++ 11. The syntax of the EVALUATE command has changed. See [349]Section ++ 7.9.2. To restore the previous syntax, use SET EVALUATE OLD. ++ 12. The \v(directory) variable now includes the trailing directory ++ separator; in previous releases it did not. This is to allow ++ constructions such as: ++ cd \v(dir)data.tmp ++ to work across platforms that might have different directory ++ notation, such as UNIX, Windows, and VMS. ++ 13. Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the FLOW-CONTROL setting was global and ++ sticky. In C-Kermit 7.0, there is an array of default flow-control ++ values for each kind of connection, that are applied automatically ++ at SET LINE/PORT/HOST time. Thus a SET FLOW command given before ++ SET LINE/PORT/HOST is likely to be undone. Therefore SET FLOW can ++ be guaranteed to have the desired effect only if given after the ++ SET LINE/PORT/HOST command. ++ 14. Character-set translation works differently in the TRANSMIT ++ command when (a) the file character-set is not the same as the ++ local end of the terminal character-set, or (b) when the terminal ++ character-set is TRANSPARENT. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1. PROGRAM AND FILE MANAGEMENT AND COMMANDS ++ ++ 1.0. Bug Fixes ++ ++ The following patches were issued to correct bugs in C-Kermit 6.0. ++ These are described in detail in the 6.0 PATCHES file. All of these ++ fixes have been incorporated in C-Kermit 6.1 (never released except as ++ K95 1.1.16-17) and 7.0. ++ ++ 0001 All UNIX C-Kermit mishandles timestamps on files before 1970 ++ 0002 Solaris 2.5++ Compilation error on Solaris 2.5 with Pro C ++ 0003 All VMS CKERMIT.INI Fix for VMS ++ 0004 VMS/VAX/UCX 2.0 C-Kermit 6.0 can't TELNET on VAX/VMS with UCX 2.0 ++ 0005 All C-Kermit Might Send Packets Outside Window ++ 0006 All MOVE from SEND-LIST does not delete original files ++ 0007 Solaris 2.5++ Higher serial speeds on Solaris 2.5 ++ 0008 All C-Kermit application file name can't contain spaces ++ 0009 AT&T 7300 UNIXPC setuid and hardware flow-control problems ++ 0010 Linux on Alpha Patch to make ckutio.c compile on Linux/Alpha ++ 0011 OS-9/68000 2.4 Patch to make ck9con.c compile on OS-9/68000 2.4 ++ 0012 MW Coherent 4.2 Patches for successful build on Coherent 4.2 ++ 0013 SINIX-Y 5.43 "delay" variable conflicts with ++ 0014 VMS/VAX/CMU-IP Subject: Patches for VAX/VMS 5.x + CMU-IP ++ 0015 All XECHO doesn't flush its output ++ 0016 VMS CD and other directory operations might not work ++ 0017 Linux 1.2.x++ Use standard POSIX interface for high serial speeds ++ 0018 UNIX SET WILDCARD-EXPANSION SHELL dumps core ++ 0019 All Hayes V.34 modem init string problem ++ 0020 All READ command does not fail if file not open ++ 0021 All Problems with long function arguments ++ 0022 All Certain \function()s can misbehave ++ 0023 All X MOD 0 crashes program ++ 0024 All Internal bulletproofing for lower() function ++ 0025 OpenBSD Real OpenBSD support for C-Kermit 6.0 ++ 0026 All Incorrect checks for macro/command-file nesting depth ++ 0027 All ANSWER doesn't automatically CONNECT ++ 0028 All Overzealous EXIT warning ++ 0029 All OUTPUT doesn't echo when DUPLEX is HALF ++ 0030 All Minor problems with REMOTE DIRECTORY/DELETE/etc ++ 0031 All CHECK command broken ++ 0032 All Problem with SET TRANSMIT ECHO ++ 0033 UNIX, VMS, etc HELP SET SERVER says too much ++ 0034 All READ and !READ too picky about line terminators ++ 0035 All END from inside SWITCH doesn't work ++ 0036 All Problem telnetting to multihomed hosts ++ 0037 All Redirection failures in REMOTE xxx > file ++ ++ REDIRECT was missing in many UNIX C-Kermit implementations; in version ++ 7.0, it should be available in all of them. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.1. Command Continuation ++ ++ Comments that start with ";" or "#" can no longer be continued. In: ++ ++ ; this is a comment - ++ echo blah ++ ++ the ECHO command will execute, rather than being taken as a ++ continuation of the preceding comment line. This allows easy ++ "commenting out" of commands from macro definitions. ++ ++ However, the text of the COMMENT command can still be continued onto ++ subsequent lines: ++ ++ comment this is a comment - ++ echo blah ++ ++ As of version 6.0, backslash is no longer a valid continuation ++ character. Only hyphen should be used for command continuation. This ++ is to make it possible to issue commands like "cd a:\" on DOS-like ++ systems. ++ ++ As of version 7.0: ++ ++ * You can quote a final dash to prevent it from being a continuation ++ character: ++ echo foo\- ++ This prints "foo-". The command is not continued. ++ * You can enter commands such as: ++ echo foo - ; this is a comment ++ interactively and they are properly treated as continued commands. ++ Previously this worked only in command files. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.2. Editor Interface ++ ++ SET EDITOR name [ options ] ++ Lets you specify a text-editing program. The name can be a ++ fully specified pathname like /usr/local/bin/emacs19/emacs, or ++ it can be the name of any program in your PATH, e.g. "set ++ editor emacs". In VMS, it must be a DCL command like "edit", ++ "edit/tpu", "emacs", etc. If an environment variable EDITOR is ++ defined when Kermit starts, its value is the default editor. ++ You can also specify options to be included on the editor ++ command line. Returns to Kermit when the editor exits. ++ ++ EDIT [ filename ] ++ If the EDIT command is given without a filename, then if a ++ previous filename had been given to an EDIT command, it is ++ used; if not, the editor is started without a file. If a ++ filename is given, the editor is started on that file, and the ++ filename is remembered for subsequent EDIT commands. ++ ++ SHOW EDITOR ++ Displays the full pathname of your text editor, if any, along ++ with any command line options, and the file most recently ++ edited (and therefore the default filename for your next EDIT ++ command). ++ ++ Related variables: \v(editor), \v(editopts), \v(editfile). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.3. Web Browser and FTP Interface ++ ++ C-Kermit includes an FTP command, which simply runs the FTP program; ++ C-Kermit does not include any built-in support for Internet File ++ Transfer Protocol, nor any method for interacting directly with an FTP ++ server. In version 7.0, however, C-Kermit lets you specify your FTP ++ client: ++ ++ SET FTP-CLIENT [ name [ options ] ] ++ The name is the name of the FTP executable. In UNIX, Windows, ++ or OS/2, it can be the filename of any executable program in ++ your PATH (e.g. "ftp.exe" in Windows, "ftp" in UNIX); elsewhere ++ (or if you do not have a PATH definition), it must be the fully ++ specified pathname of the FTP program. If the name contains any ++ spaces, enclose it braces. Include any options after the ++ filename; these depend the particular ftp client. ++ ++ The Web browser interface is covered in the following subsections. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.3.1. Invoking your Browser from C-Kermit ++ ++ BROWSE [ url ] ++ Starts your preferred Web browser on the URL, if one is given, ++ otherwise on the most recently given URL, if any. Returns to ++ Kermit when the browser exits. ++ ++ SET BROWSER [ name [ options ] ] ++ Use this command to specify the name of your Web browser ++ program, for example: "set browser lynx". The name must be in ++ your PATH, or else it must be a fully specified filename; in ++ VMS it must be a DCL command. ++ ++ SHOW BROWSER ++ Displays the current browser, options, and most recent URL. ++ ++ Related variables: \v(browser), \v(browsopts), \v(browsurl). ++ ++ Also see [350]Section 2.15: Contacting Web Servers with the HTTP ++ Command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.3.2. Invoking C-Kermit from your Browser ++ ++ The method for doing this depends, of course, on your browser. Here ++ are some examples: ++ ++ Netscape on UNIX (X-based) ++ In the Options->Applications section, set your Telnet ++ application to: ++ ++ xterm -e /usr/local/bin/kermit/kermit -J %h %p ++ ++ (replace "/usr/local/bin/kermit/kermit" by C-Kermit's actual ++ pathname). -J is C-Kermit's command-line option to "be like ++ Telnet"; %h and %p are Netscape placeholders for hostname and ++ port. ++ ++ Lynx on UNIX ++ As far as we know, this can be done only at compile time. Add ++ the following line to the Lynx userdefs.h file before building ++ the Lynx binary: ++ ++ #define TELNET_COMMAND "/opt/bin/kermit -J" ++ ++ And then add lines like the following to the Lynx.cfg file: ++ ++ DOWNLOADER:Kermit binary download:/opt/bin/kermit -i -V -s %s -a %s:TRUE ++ DOWNLOADER:Kermit text download:/opt/bin/kermit -s %s -a %s:TRUE ++ ++ UPLOADER:Kermit binary upload:/opt/bin/kermit -i -r -a %s:TRUE ++ UPLOADER:Kermit text upload:/opt/bin/kermit -r -a %s:TRUE ++ UPLOADER:Kermit text get:/opt/bin/kermit -g %s:TRUE ++ UPLOADER:Kermit binary get:/opt/bin/kermit -ig %s:TRUE ++ ++ But none of the above is necessary if you make C-Kermit your default ++ Telnet client, which you can do by making a symlink called 'telnet' to ++ the C-Kermit 7.0 binary. See [351]Section 9.1 for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.4. Command Editing ++ ++ Ctrl-W ("Word delete") was changed in 7.0 to delete back to the ++ previous non-alphanumeric, rather than all the way back to the ++ previous space. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.5. Command Switches ++ ++ As of version 7.0, C-Kermit's command parser supports a new type of ++ field, called a "switch". This is an optional command modifier. ++ ++ 1.5.1. General Switch Syntax ++ ++ A switch is a keyword beginning with a slash (/). If it takes a value, ++ then the value is appended to it (with no intervening spaces), ++ separated by a colon (:) or equal sign (=). Depending on the switch, ++ the value may be a number, a keyword, a filename, a date/time, etc. ++ Examples: ++ ++ send oofa.txt ; No switches ++ send /binary oofa.zip ; A switch without a value ++ send /protocol:zmodem oofa.zip ; A switch with a value (:) ++ send /protocol=zmodem oofa.zip ; A switch with a value (=) ++ send /text /delete /as-name:x.x oofa.txt ; Several switches ++ ++ Like other command fields, switches are separated from other fields, ++ and from each other, by whitespace, as shown in the examples just ++ above. You can not put them together like so: ++ ++ send/text/delete/as-name:x.x oofa.txt ++ ++ (as you might do in VMS or DOS, or as we might once have done in ++ TOPS-10 or TOPS0-20, or PIP). This is primarily due to ambiguity ++ between "/" as switch introducer versus "/" as UNIX directory ++ separator; e.g. in: ++ ++ send /delete/as-name:foo/text oofa.txt ++ ++ Does "foo/text" mean the filename is "foo" and the transfer is to be ++ in text mode, or does it mean the filename is "foo/text"? Therefore we ++ require whitespace between switches to resolve the ambiguity. (That's ++ only one of several possible ambiguities -- it is also conceivable ++ that a file called "text" exists in the path "/delete/as-name:foo/"). ++ ++ In general, if a switch can take a value, but you omit it, then either ++ a reasonable default value is supplied, or an error message is ++ printed: ++ ++ send /print:-Plaserwriter oofa.txt ; Value included = print options ++ send /print oofa.txt ; Value omitted, OK ++ send /mail:kermit@columbia.edu oofa.txt ; Value included = address ++ send /mail oofa.txt ; Not OK - address required ++ ?Address required ++ ++ Context-sensitive help (?) and completion (Esc or Tab) are available ++ in the normal manner: ++ ++ C-Kermit> send /pr? Switch, one of the following: ++ /print /protocol ++ C-Kermit> send /protocol:? File-transfer protocol, ++ one of the following: ++ kermit xmodem ymodem ymodem-g zmodem ++ C-Kermit> send /protocol:kermit ++ ++ If a switch takes a value and you use completion on it, a colon (:) is ++ printed at the end of its name to indicate this. If it does not take a ++ value, a space is printed. ++ ++ Also, if you type ? in a switch field, switches that take values are ++ shown with a trailing colon; those that don't take values are shown ++ without one. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.5.2. Order and Effect of Switches ++ ++ The order of switches should not matter, except that they are ++ evaluated from left to right, so if you give two switches with ++ opposite effects, the rightmost one is used: ++ ++ send /text /binary oofa.zip ; Sends oofa.zip in binary mode. ++ ++ Like other command fields, switches have no effect whatsoever until ++ the command is entered (by pressing the Return or Enter key). Even ++ then, switches affect only the command with which they are included; ++ they do not have global effect or side effects. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.5.3. Distinguishing Switches from Other Fields ++ ++ All switches are optional. A command that uses switches lets you give ++ any number of them, including none at all. Example: ++ ++ send /binary oofa.zip ++ send /bin /delete oofa.zip ++ send /bin /as-name:mupeen.zip oofa.zip ++ send oofa.zip ++ ++ But how does Kermit know when the first "non-switch" is given? It has ++ been told to look for both a switch and for something else, the data ++ type of the next field (filename, number, etc). In most cases, this ++ works well. But conflicts are not impossible. Suppose, for example, in ++ UNIX there was a file named "text" in the top-level directory. The ++ command to send it would be: ++ ++ send /text ++ ++ But C-Kermit would think this was the "/text" switch. To resolve the ++ conflict, use braces: ++ ++ send {/text} ++ ++ or other circumlocutions such as "send //text", "send /./text", etc. ++ ++ The opposite problem can occur if you give an illegal switch that ++ happens to match a directory name. For example: ++ ++ send /f oofa.txt ++ ++ There is no "/f" switch (there are several switches that begin with ++ "/f", so "/f" is ambiguous). Now suppose there is an "f" directory in ++ the root directory; then this command would be interpreted as: ++ ++ Send all the files in the "/f" directory, giving each one an ++ as-name of "oofa.txt". ++ ++ This could be a mistake, or it could be exactly what you intended; ++ C-Kermit has no way of telling the difference. To avoid situations ++ like this, spell switches out in full until you are comfortable enough ++ with them to know the minimum abbreviation for each one. Hint: use ? ++ and completion while typing switches to obtain the necessary feedback. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.5.4. Standard File Selection Switches ++ ++ The following switches are used on different file-oriented commands ++ (such as SEND, DIRECTORY, DELETE, PURGE) to refine the selection of ++ files that match the given specification. ++ ++ /AFTER:date-time ++ Select only those files having a date-time later than the one ++ given. See [352]Section 1.6 for date-time formats. Synonym: ++ /SINCE. ++ ++ /NOT-AFTER:date-time ++ Select only those files having a date-time not later than (i.e. ++ earlier or equal to) the one given. Synonym: /NOT-SINCE. ++ ++ /BEFORE:date-time ++ Select only those files having a date-time earlier than the one ++ given. ++ ++ /NOT-BEFORE:date-time ++ Select only those files having a date-time not earlier than ++ (i.e. later or equal to) the one given. ++ ++ /DOTFILES ++ UNIX and OS-9 only: The filespec is allowed to match files ++ whose names start with (dot) period. Normally these files are ++ not shown. ++ ++ /NODOTFILES ++ (UNIX and OS-9 only) Don't show files whose names start with ++ dot (period). This is the opposite of /DOTFILES, and is the ++ default. Note that when a directory name starts with a period, ++ the directory and (in recursive operations) all its ++ subdirectories are skipped. ++ ++ /LARGER-THAN:number ++ Only select files larger than the given number of bytes. ++ ++ /SMALLER-THAN:number ++ Only select files smaller than the given number of bytes. ++ ++ /EXCEPT:pattern ++ Specifies that any files whose names match the pattern, which ++ can be a regular filename, or may contain "*" and/or "?" ++ metacharacters (wildcards), are not to be selected. Example: ++ ++ send /except:*.log *.* ++ ++ sends all files in the current directory except those with a ++ filetype of ".log". Another: ++ ++ send /except:*.~*~ *.* ++ ++ sends all files except the ones that look like Kermit or EMACS ++ backup files (such as "oofa.txt.~17~") (of course you can also ++ use the /NOBACKUP switch for this). ++ ++ The pattern matcher is the same one used by IF MATCH string ++ pattern ([353]Section 7.4), so you can test your patterns using ++ IF MATCH. If you need to match a literal * or ? (etc), precede ++ it by a backslash (\). If the pattern contains any spaces, it ++ must be enclosed in braces: ++ ++ send /except:{Foo bar} *.* ++ ++ The pattern can also be a list of up to 8 patterns. In this ++ case, the entire pattern must be enclosed in braces, and each ++ sub-pattern must also be enclosed in braces; this eliminates ++ the need for designating a separator character, which is likely ++ to also be a legal filename character on some platform or ++ other, and therefore a source of confusion. You may include ++ spaces between the subpatterns but they are not necessary. The ++ following two commands are equivalent: ++ ++ send /except:{{ck*.o} {ck*.c}} ck*.? ++ send /except:{{ck*.o}{ck*.c}} ck*.? ++ ++ If a pattern is to include a literal brace character, precede ++ it with "\". Also note the apparent conflict of this list ++ format and the string-list format described in [354]Section ++ 4.9.1. In case you want to include a wildcard string-list with ++ braces on its outer ends as an /EXCEPT: argument, do it like ++ this: ++ ++ send /except:{{{ckuusr.c,ckuus2.c,ckuus6.c}}} ckuus*.c ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.5.5. Setting Preferences for Different Commands ++ ++ Certain oft-used commands offer lots of switches because different ++ people have different requirements or preferences. For example, some ++ people want to be able to delete files without having to watch a list ++ of the deleted files scroll past, while others want to be prompted for ++ permission to delete each file. Different people prefer different ++ directory-listing styles. And so on. Such commands can be tailored ++ with the SET OPTIONS command: ++ ++ SET OPTIONS command [ switch [ switch [ ... ] ] ] ++ Sets each switch as the default for the given command, ++ replacing the "factory default". Of course you can also ++ override any defaults established by the SET OPTIONS command by ++ including the relevant switches in the affected command any ++ time you issue it. ++ ++ SHOW OPTIONS ++ Lists the commands that allows option-setting, and the options ++ currently in effect, if any, for each. Switches that have ++ synonyms are shown under their primary name; for example. /LOG ++ and /VERBOSE are shown as /LIST. ++ ++ Commands for which options may be set include DIRECTORY, DELETE, ++ PURGE, and TYPE. Examples: ++ ++ SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY /PAGE /NOBACKUP /HEADING /SORT:DATE /REVERSE ++ SET OPTIONS DELETE /LIST /NOHEADING /NOPAGE /NOASK /NODOTFILES ++ SET OPTIONS TYPE /PAGE ++ ++ Not necessarily all of a command's switches can be set as options. For ++ example, file selection switches, since these would normally be ++ different for each command. ++ ++ Put the desired SET OPTIONS commands in your C-Kermit customization ++ file for each command whose default switches you want to change every ++ time you run C-Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.6. Dates and Times ++ ++ Some commands and switches take date-time values, such as: ++ ++ send /after:{8-Feb-2000 10:28:01} ++ ++ Various date-time formats are acceptable. The rules for the date are: ++ ++ * The year must have 4 digits. ++ * If the year comes first, the second field is the month. ++ * The day, month, and year may be separated by spaces, /, -, or ++ underscore. ++ * The month may be numeric (1 = January) or spelled out or ++ abbreviated in English. ++ ++ If the date-time string contains any spaces, it must be enclosed in ++ braces. Examples of legal dates: ++ ++ Interpretation: ++ 2000-Feb-8 8 February 2000 ++ {2000 Feb 8} 8 February 2000 ++ 2000/Feb/8 8 February 2000 ++ 2000_Feb_8 8 February 2000 ++ 2000-2-8 8 February 2000 ++ 2000-02-08 8 February 2000 ++ 8-Feb-2000 8 February 2000 ++ 08-Feb-2000 8 February 2000 ++ 12/25/2000 25 December 2000 ++ 25/12/2000 25 December 2000 ++ ++ The last two examples show that when the year comes last, and the ++ month is given numerically, the order of the day and month doesn't ++ matter as long as the day is 13 or greater (mm/dd/yyyy is commonly ++ used in the USA, whereas dd/mm/yyyy is the norm in Europe). However: ++ ++ 08/02/2000 Is ambiguous and therefore not accepted. ++ ++ If a date is given, the time is optional and defaults to 00:00:00. If ++ the time is given with a date, it must follow the date, separated by ++ space, /, -, or underscore, and with hours, minutes, and seconds ++ separated by colon (:). Example: ++ ++ 2000-Feb-8 10:28:01 Represents 8 February 2000, 10:28:01am ++ ++ If a date is not given, the current date is used and a time is ++ required. ++ ++ Time format is hh:mm:ss or hh:mm or hh in 24-hour format, or followed ++ by "am" or "pm" (or "AM" or "PM") to indicate morning or afternoon. ++ Examples of times that are acceptable: ++ ++ Interpretation: ++ 3:23:56 3:23:56am ++ 3:23:56am 3:23:56am ++ 3:23:56pm 3:23:56pm = 15:23:56 ++ 15:23:56 3:23:56pm = 15:23:56 ++ 3:23pm 3:23:00pm = 15:23:00 ++ 3:23PM 3:23:00pm = 15:23:00 ++ 3pm 3:00:00pm = 15:00:00 ++ ++ Examples of legal date-times: ++ ++ send /after:{8 Feb 2000 10:28:01} ++ send /after:8_Feb_2000_10:28:01 ++ send /after:8-Feb-2000/10:28:01 ++ send /after:2000/02/08/10:28:01 ++ send /after:2000/02/08_10:28:01 ++ send /after:2000/02/08_10:28:01am ++ send /after:2000/02/08_10:28:01pm ++ send /after:2000/02/08_10:28pm ++ send /after:2000/02/08_10pm ++ send /after:10:00:00pm ++ send /after:10:00pm ++ send /after:10pm ++ send /after:22 ++ ++ Finally, there is a special all-numeric format you can use: ++ ++ yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss ++ ++ For example: ++ ++ 20000208 10:28:01 ++ ++ This is Kermit's standard date-time format (based on ISO 8601), and is ++ accepted (among other formats) by any command or switch that requires ++ a date-time, and is output by any function whose result is a calendar ++ date-time. ++ ++ There are no optional parts to this format and it must be exactly 17 ++ characters long, punctuated as shown (except you can substitute ++ underscore for space in contexts where a single "word" is required). ++ The time is in 24-hour format (23:00:00 is 11:00pm). This is the ++ format returned by \fdate(filename), so you can also use constructions ++ like this: ++ ++ send /after:\fdate(oofa.txt) ++ ++ which means "all files newer than oofa.txt". ++ ++ Besides explicit dates, you can also use the any of the following ++ shortcuts: ++ ++ TODAY ++ Stands for the current date at 00:00:00. ++ ++ TODAY 12:34:56 ++ Stands for the current date at the given time. ++ ++ YESTERDAY ++ Stands for yesterday's date at 00:00:00. A time may also be ++ given. ++ ++ TOMORROW ++ Stands for tomorrow's date at 00:00:00. A time may also be ++ given. ++ ++ + number { DAYS, WEEKS, MONTHS, YEARS } [ time ] ++ Is replaced by the future date indicated, relative to the ++ current date. If the time is omitted, 00:00:00 is used. ++ Examples: +3days, +2weeks, +1year, +37months. ++ ++ - number { DAYS, WEEKS, MONTHS, YEARS } [ time ] ++ ++ Is replaced by the past date indicated, relative to the current ++ date. If the time is omitted, 00:00:00 is used. ++ ++ The time can be separated from the date shortcut by any of the same ++ separators that are allowed for explicit date-times: space, hyphen, ++ slash, period, or underscore. In switches and other space-delimited ++ fields, use non-spaces to separate date/time fields, or enclose the ++ date-time in braces, e.g.: ++ ++ purge /before:-4days_12:00:00 ++ purge /before:{- 4 days 12:00:00} ++ ++ Of course you can also use variables: ++ ++ define \%n 43 ++ purge /before:-\%ndays_12:00:00 ++ ++ Shortcut names can be abbreviated to any length that still ++ distinguishes them from any other name that can appear in the same ++ context, e.g. "TOD" for today, "Y" for yesterday. Also, the special ++ abbreviation "wks" is accepted for WEEKS, and "yrs" for "YEARS". ++ ++ (To see how to specify dates relative to a specific date, rather than ++ the current one, see the [355]\fmjd() function description below.) ++ ++ You can check date formats with the DATE command. DATE by itself ++ prints the current date and time in standard format: yyyymmdd ++ hh:mm:ss. DATE followed by a date and/or time (including shortcuts) ++ converts it to standard format if it can understand it, otherwise it ++ prints an error message. ++ ++ The following variables and functions deal with dates and times; any ++ function argument designated as "date-time" can be in any of the ++ formats described above. ++ ++ \v(day) ++ The first three letters of the English word for the current day ++ of the week, e.g. "Wed". ++ ++ \fday(date-time) ++ The first three letters of the English word for day of the week ++ of the given date. If a time is included, it is ignored. ++ Example: \fday(8 Feb 1988) = "Mon". ++ ++ \v(nday) ++ The numeric day of the week: 0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, ..., 6 = ++ Saturday. ++ ++ \fnday(date-time) ++ The numeric day of the week for the given date. If a time is ++ included, it is ignored. Example: \fnday(8 Feb 1988) = "1". ++ ++ \v(date) ++ The current date as dd mmm yyyy, e.g. "08 Feb 2000" (as in this ++ example, a leading zero is supplied for day-of-month less than ++ 10). ++ ++ \v(ndate) ++ The current date in numeric format: yyyymmdd, e.g. "20000208". ++ ++ \v(time) ++ The current time as hh:mm:ss, e.g. "15:27:14". ++ ++ \ftime(time) ++ The given free-format date and/or time (e.g. "3pm") returns the ++ time (without the date) converted to hh:mm:ss 24-hour format, ++ e.g. "15:00:00" (the date, if given, is ignored). ++ ++ \v(ntime) ++ The current time as seconds since midnight, e.g. "55634". ++ ++ \v(tftime) ++ The elapsed time of the most recent file-transfer operation in ++ seconds. ++ ++ \v(intime) ++ The elapsed time for the most recent INPUT command to complete, ++ in milliseconds. ++ ++ \fntime(time) ++ The given free-format date and/or time is converted to seconds ++ since midnight (the date, if given, is ignored). This function ++ replaces \ftod2secs(), which is now a synonym for \fntime(). ++ Unlike \ftod2secs(), \fntime() allows a date to be included, ++ and it allows the time to be in free format (like 3pm), and it ++ allows the amount of time to be more than 24 hours. E.g. ++ \fntime(48:00:00) = 172800. Example of use: ++ ++ set alarm \fntime(48:00:00) ; set alarm 48 hours from now. ++ ++ \fn2time(seconds) ++ The given number of seconds is converted to hh:mm:ss format. ++ ++ \fdate(filename) ++ Returns the modification date-time of the given file in ++ standard format: yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss. ++ ++ \fcvtdate(date-time) ++ Converts a free-format date and/or time to Kermit standard ++ format: yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss. If no argument is given, returns the ++ current date-time in standard format. If a date is given but no ++ time, the converted date is returned without a time. If a time ++ is given with no date, the current date is supplied. Examples: ++ ++ \fcvtdate(4 Jul 2000 2:21:17pm) = 20000704 14:21:17 ++ \fcvtdate() = 20000704 14:21:17 (on 4 Jul 2000 at 2:21:17pm). ++ \fcvtd(4 Jul 2000) = 20000704 ++ \fcvtd(6pm) = 20000704 18:00:00 (on 4 Jul 2000 at 6:00pm). ++ ++ \fdayofyear(date-time) ++ \fdoy(date-time) ++ Converts a free-format date and/or time to yyyyddd, where ddd ++ is the 3-digit day of the year, and 1 January is Day 1. If a ++ time is included with the date, it is returned in standard ++ format. If a date is included but no time, the date is returned ++ without a time. If a time is given with no date, the time is ++ converted and the current date is supplied. If no argument is ++ given, the current date-time is returned. Synonym: \fdoy(). ++ Examples: ++ ++ \fddayofyear(4 Jul 2000 2:21:17pm) = 2000185 14:21:17 ++ \fdoy() = 2000185 14:21:17 (on 4 Jul 2000 at 2:21:17pm). ++ \fdoy(4 Jul 2000) = 2000185 ++ \fdoy(6pm) = 2000185 18:00:00 (on 4 Jul 2000 at 6:00pm). ++ ++ Note: The yyyyddd day-of-year format is often erroneously referred to ++ as a Julian date. However, a true Julian date is a simple counting ++ number, the number of days since a certain fixed day in the past. ++ [356]See \fmjd() below. ++ ++ \fdoy2date(date-time) ++ Converts a date or date-time in day-of-year format to a ++ standard format date. A yyyyddd-format date must be supplied; ++ time is optional. The given date is converted to yyyymmdd ++ format. If a time is given, it is converted to 24-hour format. ++ Examples: ++ ++ \fdoy2date(2000185) = 20000704 ++ \fdoy2(2000185 3pm) = 20000704 15:00:00 ++ ++ \fmjd(date-time) ++ Converts free-format date and/or time to a Modified Julian Date ++ (MJD), the number of days since 17 Nov 1858 00:00:00. If a time ++ is given, it is ignored. Examples: ++ ++ \fmjd(4 Jul 2000) = 50998 ++ \fmjd(17 Nov 1858) = 0 ++ \fmjd(16 Nov 1858) = -1 ++ ++ \fmjd2date(mjd) ++ Converts an MJD (integer) to standard date format, yyyymmdd: ++ ++ \fmjd2(50998) = 4 Jul 1998 ++ \fmjd2(0) = 17 Nov 1858 ++ \fmjd2(-1) = 16 Nov 1858 ++ \fmjd2(-365) = 17 Nov 1857 ++ ++ MJDs are normal integers and, unlike DOYs, may be added, subtracted, ++ etc, with each other or with other integers, to obtain meaningful ++ results. For example, to find out the date 212 days ago: ++ ++ echo \fmjd2date(\fmjd()-212) ++ ++ Constructions such as this can be used in any command where a ++ date-time is required, e.g.: ++ ++ send /after:\fmjd2date(\fmjd()-212) ++ ++ to send all files that are not older than 212 days (this is equivalent ++ to "send /after:-212days"). ++ ++ MJDs also have other regularities not exhibited by other date formats. ++ For example, \fmodulus(\fmjd(any-date),7) gives the day of the week ++ for any date (where 4=Sun, 5=Mon, ..., 3=Sat). (However, it is easier ++ to use \fnday() for this purpose, and it gives the more conventional ++ result of 0=Sun, 1=Mon, ..., 6=Sat). ++ ++ Note that if MJDs are to be compared, they must be compared ++ numerically (IF <, =, >) and not lexically (IF LLT, EQUAL, LGT), ++ whereas DOYs must be compared lexically if they include a time (which ++ contains ":" characters); however, if DOYs do not include a time, they ++ may also be compared numerically. ++ ++ In any case, lexical comparison of DOYs always produces the ++ appropriate result, as does numeric comparison of MJDs. ++ ++ The same comments apply to sorting. Also note that DOYs are fixed ++ length, but MJDs can vary in length. However, all MJDs between 3 April ++ 1886 and 30 Aug 2132 are 5 decimal digits long. (MJDs become 6 digits ++ long on 31 Aug 2132, and 7 digits long on 13 Oct 4596). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.7. Partial Completion of Keywords ++ ++ Partial completion of keywords was added in C-Kermit 7.0. In prior ++ versions, if completion was attempted (by pressing the Esc or Tab key) ++ on a string that matched different keywords, you'd just get a beep. ++ Now Kermit completes up to the first character where the possibly ++ matching keywords differ and then beeps. For example: ++ ++ C-Kermit> send /n ++ ++ which matches /NOT-BEFORE and /NOT-AFTER, now completes up to the ++ dash: ++ ++ C-Kermit> send /not- ++ ++ Partial completion works for filenames too (as it has for some years). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.8. Command Recall ++ ++ C-Kermit has had a command history buffer for some time, which could ++ be scrolled interactively using control characters or (in Kermit 95 ++ only) arrow keys. Version 7.0 adds a REDO command that allows the most ++ recent command matching a given pattern to be re-executed: ++ ++ { REDO, RR, ^ } [ pattern ] ++ Search the command history list for the most recent command ++ that matches the given pattern, and if one is found, execute it ++ again. ++ ++ The pattern can be a simple string (like "send"), in which case the ++ last SEND command is re-executed. Or it can contain wildcard ++ characters "*" and/or "?", which match any string and any single ++ character, respectively (note that "?" must be preceded by backslash ++ to override its normal function of giving help), and in most C-Kermit ++ versions may also include [] character lists and {} string lists (see ++ [357]Section 4.9). ++ ++ The match works by appending "*" to the end of the given pattern (if ++ you didn't put one there yourself). Thus "redo *oofa" becomes "redo ++ *oofa*" and therefore matches the most recent command that contains ++ "oofa" anywhere within the command. If you want to inhibit the ++ application of the trailing "*", e.g. to force matching a string at ++ the end of a command, enclose the pattern in braces: ++ ++ redo {*oofa} ++ ++ matches the most recent command that ends with "oofa". ++ ++ REDO commands themselves are not entered into the command history ++ list. If no pattern is given, the previous (non-REDO) command is ++ re-executed. The REDOne command is reinserted at the end of the ++ command history buffer, so the command scrollback character (Ctrl-P, ++ Ctrl-B, or Uparrow) can retrieve it. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo foo ++ foo ++ C-Kermit> show alarm ++ (no alarm set) ++ C-Kermit> echo blah ++ blah ++ C-Kermit> redo ; Most recent command ++ blah ++ C-Kermit> redo s ; Most recent command starting with "s" ++ (no alarm set) ++ C-Kermit> redo echo f ; Most recent command starting with "echo f" ++ foo ++ C-Kermit> redo *foo ; Most recent command that has "foo" in it ++ foo ++ C-Kermit> ; Scroll back ++ C-Kermit> echo foo ; The REDOne command is there ++ C-Kermit> redo {*foo} ; Most recent command that ends with "foo" ++ foo ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Since REDO, REDIAL, and REDIRECT all start the same way, and RED is ++ the designated non-unique abbreviation for REDIAL, REDO must be ++ spelled out in full. For convenience, RR is included as an invisible ++ easy-to-type synonym for REDO. You can also use the "^" character for ++ this: ++ ++ C-Kermit> ^ ; Most recent command ++ C-Kermit> ^ s ; Most recent command starting with "s" ++ C-Kermit> ^s ; Ditto (space not required after "^"). ++ C-Kermit> ^*foo ; Most recent command that has "foo" in it. ++ C-Kermit> ^{*foo} ; Most recent command ends with "foo". ++ ++ Unlike the manual command-history-scrolling keys, the REDO command can ++ be used in a script, but it's not recommended (since the command to be ++ REDOne might not be found, so if the REDO command fails, you can't ++ tell whether it was because REDO failed to find the requested command, ++ or because the command was found but it failed). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.9. EXIT Messages ++ ++ The EXIT and QUIT commands now accept an optional message to be ++ printed. This makes the syntax of EXIT and QUIT just like END and ++ STOP: ++ ++ { EXIT, QUIT, END, STOP } [ status-code [ message ] ] ++ ++ where status-code is a number (0 indicating success, nonzero ++ indicating failure). This is handy in scripts that are never supposed ++ to enter interactive mode: ++ ++ dial 7654321 ++ if fail exit 1 Can't make connection - try again later. ++ ++ Previously this could only be done in two steps: ++ ++ dial 7654321 ++ xif fail { echo Can't make connection - try again later, exit 1 } ++ ++ A status code must be included in order to specify a message. In the ++ case of EXIT and QUIT, the default status code is contained in the ++ variable \v(exitstatus), and is set automatically by various events ++ (file transfer failures, etc; it can also be set explicitly with the ++ SET EXIT STATUS command). If you want to give an EXIT or QUIT command ++ with a message, but without changing the exit status from what it ++ normally would have been, use the \v(exitstatus) variable, e.g.: ++ ++ exit \v(existatus) Goodbye from \v(cmdfile). ++ ++ The EXIT status is returned to the system shell or whatever other ++ process invoked C-Kermit, e.g. in UNIX: ++ ++ C-Kermit> exit 97 bye bye ++ bye bye ++ $ echo $? ++ 97 ++ $ ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.10. Managing Keyboard Interruptions ++ ++ When C-Kermit is in command or file-transfer mode (as opposed to ++ CONNECT mode), it can be interrupted with Ctrl-C. Version 7.0 adds the ++ ability to disarm the Ctrl-C interrupt: ++ ++ SET COMMAND INTERRUPT { ON, OFF } ++ COMMAND INTERRUPT is ON by default, meaning the Ctrl-C can be ++ used to interrupt a command or a file transfer in progress. Use ++ OFF to disable these interruptions, and use it with great ++ caution for obvious reasons. ++ ++ SET TRANSFER INTERRUPT { ON, OFF } ++ This can be used to disable keyboard interruption of file ++ transfer when C-Kermit is in local mode, or to re-enable it ++ after it has been disabled. This applies to the X, Z, E, and ++ similar keys as well as to the system interrupt character, ++ usually Ctrl-C. This is distinct from SET TRANSFER ++ CANCELLATION, which tells whether packet mode can be exited by ++ sending a special sequence of characters. ++ ++ Several other commands can be interrupted by pressing any key while ++ they are active. Version 7.0 adds the ability to disable this form of ++ interruption also: ++ ++ SET INPUT CANCELLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Whether an INPUT command in progress can be interrupted by ++ pressing a key. Normally ON. Setting INPUT CANCELLATION OFF ++ makes INPUT commands uninterruptible except by Ctrl-C (unless ++ COMMAND INTERRUPTION is also OFF). ++ ++ SET SLEEP CANCELLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Whether a SLEEP, PAUSE, or WAIT command in progress can be ++ interrupted by pressing a key. Normally ON. Setting SLEEP ++ CANCELLATION OFF makes these commands uninterruptible except by ++ Ctrl-C (unless COMMAND INTERRUPTION is also OFF). Synonyms: SET ++ PAUSE CANCELLATION, SET WAIT CANCELLATION. ++ ++ So to make certain a script is not interruptible by the user, include ++ these commands: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER INTERRUPT OFF ++ SET SLEEP CANCELLATION OFF ++ SET INPUT CANCELLATION OFF ++ SET COMMAND INTERRUPTION OFF ++ ++ Make sure to turn them back on afterwards if interruption is to be ++ re-enabled. ++ ++ When a PAUSE, SLEEP, WAIT, or INPUT command is interrupted from the ++ keyboard, the new variable \v(kbchar) contains a copy of the (first) ++ character that was typed and caused the interruption, provided it was ++ not the command interrupt character (usually Ctrl-C). If these ++ commands complete successfully or time out without a keyboard ++ interruption, the \v(kbchar) variable is empty. ++ ++ The \v(kbchar) variable (like any other variable) can be tested with: ++ ++ if defined \v(kbchar) command ++ ++ The command is executed if the variable is not empty. ++ ++ The \v(kbchar) variable can be reset with WAIT 0 (PAUSE 0, SLEEP 0, ++ etc). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11. Taming The Wild Backslash -- Part Deux ++ ++ [358]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition, contains a brief section, "Taming ++ the Wild Backslash", on page 48, which subsequent experience has shown ++ to be inadequate for Kermit users intent on writing scripts that deal ++ with Windows, DOS, and OS/2 filenames, in which backslash (\) is used ++ as the directory separator. This section fills in the blanks. ++ ++ 1.11.1. Background ++ ++ The Kermit command language shares a certain unavoidable but annoying ++ characteristic with most other command languages that are capable of ++ string replacement, namely the necessity to "quote" certain characters ++ when you want them to be taken literally. This is a consequence of the ++ facts that: ++ ++ 1. One or more characters must be set aside to denote replacement, ++ rather than acting as literal text. ++ 2. We have only 96 printable characters to work with in ASCII, which ++ is still the only universally portable character set. ++ 3. There is no single printable character that is unused everywhere. ++ 4. Variables are not restricted to certain contexts, as they are in ++ formal programming languages like C and Fortran, but can appear ++ anywhere at all within a command, and therefore require special ++ syntax. ++ ++ Thus there can be conflicts. To illustrate, the standard UNIX shell ++ uses dollar sign ($) to introduce variables. So the shell command: ++ ++ echo $TERM ++ ++ displays the value of the TERM variable, e.g. vt320. But suppose you ++ want to display a real dollar sign: ++ ++ echo The price is $10.20 ++ ++ This causes the shell to evaluate the variable "$1", which might or ++ might not exist, and substitute its value, e.g.: ++ ++ The price is 0.20 ++ ++ (in this case the $1 variable had no value.) This is probably not what ++ you wanted. To force the dollar sign to be taken literally, you must ++ apply a "quoting rule", such as "precede a character by backslash (\) ++ to force the shell to take the character literally": ++ ++ echo The price is \$10.20 ++ The price is $10.20 ++ ++ But now suppose you want the backslash AND the dollar sign to be taken ++ literally: ++ ++ echo The price is \\$10.20 ++ ++ This doesn't work, since the first backslash quotes the second one, ++ thereby leaving the dollar sign unquoted again: ++ ++ The price is \0.20 ++ ++ Quoting the dollar sign requires addition of a third backslash: ++ ++ echo The price is \\\$10.20 ++ The price is \$10.20 ++ ++ The first backslash quotes the second one, and the third backslash ++ quotes the dollar sign. ++ ++ Every command language -- all UNIX shells, VMS DCL, DOS Batch, AOS/VS ++ CLI, etc etc -- has similar rules. UNIX shell rules are probably the ++ most complicated, since many printable characters -- not just one -- ++ are special there: dollar sign, single quote, double quote, backslash, ++ asterisk, accent grave, number sign, ampersand, question mark, ++ parentheses, brackets, braces, etc -- practically every ++ non-alphanumeric character needs some form of quoting if it is to be ++ taken literally. And to add to the confusion, the UNIX shell offers ++ many forms of quoting, and many alternative UNIX shells are available, ++ each using slightly different syntax. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.2. Kermit's Quoting Rules ++ ++ Kermit's basic quoting rules are simple by comparison (there are, of ++ course, additional syntax requirements for macro definitions, command ++ blocks, function calls, etc, but they are not relevant here). ++ ++ The following characters are special in Kermit commands: ++ ++ Backslash (\) ++ Introduces a variable, or the numeric representation of a ++ special character, or a function, or other item for ++ substitution. If the backslash is followed by a digit or by any ++ of the following characters: ++ ++ x, o, d, m, s, f, v, $, %, &, :, { ++ ++ this indicates a special substitution item; otherwise the ++ following character is to be taken literally (exceptions: \ at ++ end of line is taken literally; \n, \b, and \n are special ++ items in the OUTPUT command only). ++ ++ Semicolon (;) ++ (Only when at the beginning of a line or preceded by at least ++ one space or tab) Introduces a comment. ++ ++ Number sign (#) ++ (Only when at the beginning of a line or preceded by at least ++ one space or tab) Just like semicolon; introduces a comment. ++ ++ Question mark (?) ++ (Only at the command prompt - not in command files or macros) ++ Requests context-sensitive help. ++ ++ To force Kermit to take any of these characters literally, simply ++ precede it by a backslash (\). ++ ++ Sounds easy! And it is, except when backslash also has a special ++ meaning to the underlying operating system, as it does in DOS, ++ Windows, and OS/2, where it serves as the directory separator in ++ filenames such as: ++ ++ D:\K95\KEYMAPS\READ.ME ++ ++ Using our rule, we would need to refer to this file in Kermit commands ++ as follows: ++ ++ D:\\K95\\KEYMAPS\\READ.ME ++ ++ But this would not be obvious to new users of Kermit software on DOS, ++ Windows, or OS/2, and it would be annoying to seasoned ones. Thus ++ MS-DOS Kermit and Kermit 95 go to rather extreme lengths to allow the ++ more natural notation, as in: ++ ++ send d:\k95\keymaps\read.me ++ ++ The reason this is tricky is that we also need to allow for variables ++ and other expressions introduced by backslash in the same command. For ++ example, suppose \%a is a variable whose value is "oofa" (without the ++ quotes). What does the following command do? ++ ++ send d:\%a ++ ++ Does it send the file named "oofa" in the current directory of the D: ++ disk, or does it send a file named "%a" in the root directory of the ++ D: disk? This is the kind of trouble we get into when we attempt to ++ bend the rules in the interest of user friendliness. (The answer is: ++ if the variable \%a has definition that is the name of an existing ++ file, that file is sent; if a file d:\%a exists, it is sent; otherwise ++ if both conditions are true, the variable takes precedence, and the ++ literal filename can be forced by quoting: \\%a.) ++ ++ In Kermit 95 (but not MS-DOS Kermit), we also bend the rules another ++ way by allowing you to use forward slash (/) rather than backslash (\) ++ as the directory separator: ++ ++ send d:/k95/keymaps/read.me ++ ++ This looks more natural to UNIX users, and in fact is perfectly ++ acceptable to the Windows 95/98/NT and OS/2 operating systems on the ++ API level. BUT (there is always a "but") the Microsoft shell, ++ COMMAND.COM, for Windows 95/98 and NT does not allow this notation, ++ and therefore it can not be used in any Kermit command -- such as RUN ++ -- that invokes the Windows command shell AND your command shell is ++ COMMAND.COM or any other shell that does not allow forward slash as ++ directory separator (some alternative shells do allow this). ++ ++ NOTE: There exists a wide variety of alternative shells from third ++ parties that do not have this restriction. If you are using a shell ++ that accepts forward slash as a directory separator, you can stop ++ reading right now -- UNLESS (there is always an "unless") you want ++ your scripts to be portable to systems that have other shells. Also ++ note that some Windows shells might actually REQUIRE forward ++ slashes (instead of backslashes) as directory separators; we do not ++ treat this situation below, but the treatment is obvious -- use ++ slash rather backslash as the directory separator. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.3. Passing DOS Filenames from Kermit to Shell Commands ++ ++ The following Kermit commands invoke the system command shell: ++ ++ RUN (and its synonyms ! and @) ++ REDIRECT ++ PIPE ++ ++ Each of these commands takes a shell command as an operand. These ++ shell commands are not, and can not be, parsed by Kermit since Kermit ++ does not know the syntax of shell commands, and so can't tell the ++ difference between a keyword, a filename, a variable, a switch, or ++ other item. Therefore the rules can not be bent since Kermit doesn't ++ know where or how to bend them. To illustrate (using the regular ++ Windows shell): ++ ++ run c:\\windows\\command\\chkdsk.exe ++ ++ works OK, but: ++ ++ run c:/windows/command/chkdsk.exe ++ ++ is not accepted by COMMAND.COM. But: ++ ++ run c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ ++ results in Kermit applying its quoting rules before sending the text ++ to the shell. Since "w" and "c" are not in the list of backslash-item ++ codes, the backslash means "take the following character literally". ++ Thus, by the time this filename gets to the Windows shell, it has ++ become: ++ ++ c:windowscommandchkdsk.exe ++ ++ which is probably not what you wanted. (If "w" and "c" were in the ++ list, the results could be even stranger.) Even more confusing is the ++ case where a directory or filename starts with one or more digits: ++ ++ run c:\123\lotus.exe ++ ++ in which "\123" is the Kermit notation for ASCII character 123, which ++ happens to be left brace ({), resulting in "c:{lotus.exe". ++ ++ So when passing filenames to a Windows shell, always use double ++ backslashes as directory separators, to ensure that the shell gets ++ single backslashes: ++ ++ run c:\\windows\\command\\chkdsk.exe ++ run c:\\123\\lotus.exe ++ ++ Similar problems might occur with the built-in EDIT, BROWSE, and FTP ++ commands. These commands result in Kermit building a shell command ++ internally to invoke the associated helper program; the form of this ++ command might conflict with the form demanded by certain alternative ++ shells. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.4. Using Variables to Hold DOS Filenames ++ ++ Now to the next level. Suppose you want to write a script in which ++ filenames are parameters, and therefore are stored in variables. ++ Example: ++ ++ define \%f c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ ... ++ run \%f ++ ++ Obviously this won't work for the reasons just noted; the RUN command ++ requires directory separators be coded as double backslashes: ++ ++ define \%f c:\\windows\\command\\chkdsk.exe ++ ... ++ run \%f ++ ++ This will work; no surprises here. However, if you had used ASSIGN ++ rather than DEFINE, you might have been surprised after all; review ++ pages 348-349 of [359]Using C-Kermit (2nd Ed) for the difference ++ between DEFINE and ASSIGN. ++ ++ We have said that any Kermit 95 or MS-DOS Kermit command that parses ++ filenames itself -- SEND, for example -- does not require double ++ backslashes since it knows it is parsing a filename. So since the ++ following works: ++ ++ send c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ ++ Should the following also work? ++ ++ define \%f c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ ... ++ send \%f ++ ++ Answer: No. Why? Because \%f is evaluated "recursively", to allow for ++ the possibility that its definition contains further variable ++ references. This is true of all "backslash-percent-letter" (or -digit) ++ variables, and also for array references. So \%f becomes ++ c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe, which becomes ++ c:windowscommandchkdsk.exe. ++ ++ The trick here is to use the "other" kind of variable, that is ++ evaluated only "one level deep" rather than recursively: ++ ++ define filename c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ ... ++ send \m(filename) ++ ++ Similarly if you want to prompt the user for a filename: ++ ++ ask filename { Please type a filename: } ++ Please type a filename: c:\windows\command\chkdsk.exe ++ send \m(filename) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.5. Passing DOS Filenames as Parameters to Macros ++ ++ Suppose you want to pass a DOS filename containing backslashes as a ++ parameter to a Kermit macro. This raises two issues: ++ ++ 1. Parameters to macros are "just text" and so are fully evaluated ++ before they are passed to the macro. ++ 2. Once inside the macro, the formal parameters \%1, \%2, ... \%9 are ++ the type of variable that is evaluated recursively. ++ ++ Thus a DOS filename is ruined once in the act of parsing the macro ++ invocation, and again when referring to it from within the macro. To ++ illustrate, suppose "test" is a macro. Then in the invocation: ++ ++ test c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ "c:mydirblah.txt" is assigned to \%1. However, if we double the ++ backslashes: ++ ++ test c:\\mydir\\blah.txt ++ ++ "c:\mydir\blah.txt" is assigned to \%1. But then when you refer to \%1 ++ in the macro, it is evaluated recursively, resulting in ++ "c:mydirblah.txt". To illustrate: ++ ++ define test echo \%1 ++ test c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ c:mydirblah.txt ++ test c:\\mydir\\blah.txt ++ c:mydirblah.txt ++ test c:\\\\mydir\\\\blah.txt ++ c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ Let's address each part of the problem separately. First, inside the ++ macro. You can use the \fcontents() function to force a ++ backslash-percent variable (such as a macro argument) to be evaluated ++ one level deep instead of recursively, for example: ++ ++ define test echo { The filename is "\fcontents(\%1)"} ++ ++ test c:\mydir\blah.txt ; We don't expect this to work ++ The filename is "c:mydirblah.txt" ; and it doesn't. ++ test c:\\mydir\\blah.txt ; But this does... ++ The filename is "c:\mydir\blah.txt" ++ ++ Thus if the filename arrives inside the macro with single backslashes, ++ the backslashes are preserved if you always refer to the parameter ++ through the \fcontents() function. ++ ++ Now how to ensure that backslashes are not stripped or misinterpreted ++ when passing a filename to a macro? This brings us back to what we ++ learned in earlier sections: ++ ++ 1. If it is a literal filename, either double the backslashes, or (if ++ the filename is to be used only within Kermit itself and not ++ passed to a DOS shell, or it is to be passed to an alternative ++ shell that accepts forward slash as a directory separator), use ++ forward slash instead of backslash as the directory separator. ++ 2. If it is a variable that contains a filename, make sure you use a ++ macro-style variable name, rather than a ++ backslash-percent-character name. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ define test echo \fcontents(\%1) ++ define filename c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ test c:\\mydir\\blah.txt ; Literal filename with double backslashes ++ c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ test c:/mydir/blah.txt ; Literal filename with forward slashes ++ c:/mydir/blah.txt ++ ++ test \m(filename) ; Variable ++ c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ But what if you don't like these rules and you still want to pass a ++ literal filename containing single backslashes to a macro? This is ++ possible too, but a bit tricky: turn command quoting off before ++ invoking the macro, and then turn it back on inside the macro. ++ Example: ++ ++ define test set command quoting on, echo \fcontents(\%1) ++ ++ set command quoting off ++ test c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ c:\mydir\blah.txt ++ ++ Upon return from the macro, command quoting is back on (since the ++ macro turned it on). ++ ++ Obviously this trick can not be used if the filename is stored in a ++ variable, since it prevents the variable from being evaluated. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.6. Passing DOS File Names from Macro Parameters to the DOS Shell ++ ++ Now suppose you need to pass a DOS filename to a macro, and the macro ++ needs to pass it, in turn, to the Windows shell via (say) Kermit's RUN ++ command. This works too: ++ ++ define xrun run \fcontents(\%1) ++ xrun c:\\windows\\command\\chkdsk.exe ++ ++ (or you can use the SET COMMAND QUOTING OFF / ON technique described ++ above to avoid the double backslashes.) But.. ++ ++ xrun c:/windows/command/chkdsk.exe ++ ++ does not work if the Windows shell does not recognize "/" as a ++ directory separator. If there is a chance that a filename might be ++ passed to the macro in this form, the macro will need to convert it to ++ a form acceptable to the shell: ++ ++ define xrun run \freplace(\fcontents(\%1),/,\\) ++ ++ Here we replace all occurrences (if any) of "/" in the argument with ++ "\" prior to issuing the RUN command. Of course, in order to specify ++ "\" as a literal character in the \freplace() argument list, we have ++ to double it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.11.7. Passing DOS Filenames to Kermit from the Shell ++ ++ As noted in the manual, the \&@[] array contains Kermit's command-line ++ arguments. Suppose one of these arguments, say \&@[3], is a DOS ++ filename such as C:\FOO\BAR\BAZ\OOFA.TXT. (Note: In C-Kermit 7.0 and ++ K95 1.1.18 and later, command-line arguments after "=" or "--" are ++ also available in the top-level \%1..9 variables; see [360]Section ++ 7.5.) ++ ++ Of course you can eliminate any problems by using forward slashes ++ rather than backslashes in the filename, but sometimes this is not ++ possible, as when the Kermit command line is being generated by ++ another program than can only generate "native" format DOS filenames. ++ ++ As noted in the manual, "\%x" variables and \&x[] arrays are always ++ evaluated "all the way" (recursively). If the contents of one of these ++ variables contains backslashes, this causes another level of ++ evaluation. ++ ++ There is another kind of variable, which is evaluated only "one level ++ deep". You can use this to prevent interpretation of the backslashes ++ in the filenames. Example: ++ ++ assign filename \fcontents(\&@[3]) ; Transfer contents ++ ... ++ send \m(filename) ++ ++ Or, more simply: ++ ++ send \fcontents(\&@[3]) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.12. Debugging ++ ++ The debug log is produced when you give a "log debug" command. This is ++ normally done at the request of the Kermit help desk, for forwarding ++ to the Kermit developers for analysis as a last resort in ++ troubleshooting problems. (Last resort because it can grow quite huge ++ in a very short time.) In cases where timing information is critical ++ to understanding a problem, you can tell C-Kermit to put a timestamp ++ on each debug log line by giving the command: ++ ++ SET DEBUG TIMESTAMP ON ++ ++ At any time before or after activating the debug log (SET DEBUG ++ TIMESTAMP OFF turns off timestamping). Timestamps can be turned off ++ and on as desired while logging. Obviously, they increase the size and ++ growth rate of the log significantly, and so should be used sparingly. ++ Timestamps are of the form hh:mm:ss.xxx, where .xxx is thousands of a ++ second (but is included only on platforms that include this feature). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.13. Logs ++ ++ In UNIX C-Kermit and in K-95, you can now direct any log to a pipe. ++ This not only lets you send your logs to places other than disk files, ++ but also lets you customize them to any desired degree. ++ ++ LOG { DEBUG, PACKETS, SESSION, TRANSACTION, CONNECTION } { file, pipe ++ } ... ++ A "pipe" is the name of a command, preceded by a vertical bar. ++ If the pipe contains any spaces, it must be enclosed in braces. ++ ++ Here are some examples for UNIX (always remember the importance of ++ getting the UNIX shell quoting rules right): ++ ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS |lpr ++ This sends the transaction log to the default UNIX printer, ++ rather than to a file (use "lp" rather than "lpr" if ++ necessary). ++ ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS {| myfilter > t.log} ++ For those who don't like the format of the transaction log, or ++ want to extract certain information from it; write your own ++ output filter. ++ ++ LOG SESSION {| lpr -Plaserwriter} ++ This sends the session log to a specific UNIX printer, rather ++ than to a file. Note the braces around the pipeline. These are ++ required because it contains spaces. ++ ++ LOG DEBUG {| tail -100 > debug.log} ++ This causes the debug log file to contain only the final 100 ++ lines. Suppose C-Kermit crashes under some unpredictable ++ circumstances, and you need a debug log to catch it in the act. ++ But the debug log can grow to huge proportions very quickly, ++ possibly filling up the disk. Piping the debug log through ++ "tail" results in keeping only the last 100 lines (or other ++ number of your choice). ++ ++ LOG DEBUG {| grep "^TELNET" > debug.log} ++ This one shows how to log only Telnet negotiations. Piping the ++ debug log through grep or egrep lets you log only specific ++ information, rather than everything. "man grep" for further ++ info. ++ ++ LOG DEBUG {| gzip -c > debug.log.gz} ++ Creates a full debug log, but compressed by gzip to save space. ++ ++ LOG PACKETS {| tr "\\01" "X" | cut -c9- > packet.log} ++ This one writes the regular packet log, but translates the ++ Ctrl-A that starts each packet to the letter "X" and removes ++ the s-nn-nn- notation from the beginning of each line. Note the ++ double backslash (normal Kermit quoting rules). "man tr" and ++ "man cut" for further info. ++ ++ See [361]Section 2.12 for information about the new connection log. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.14. Automatic File-Transfer Packet Recognition at the Command Prompt ++ ++ Beginning in version 7.0, C-Kermit can recognize Kermit (and in some ++ cases also Zmodem) file-transfer packets while at its command prompt. ++ This is convenient (for example), if you escaped back from a remote ++ Kermit program and told the local Kermit program to send a file, but ++ forgot to tell the remote Kermit program to receive it (and the local ++ Kermit did not have the "send a Kermit receive command" feature ++ available). This feature is controlled by the following command: ++ ++ SET COMMAND AUTODOWNLOAD { ON, OFF } ++ When ON, which is the default, the command parser recognizes ++ Kermit packets when Kermit is in remote mode. An S packet makes ++ it go into receive mode, an I packet makes it go into server ++ mode. When OFF, packet recognition is disabled and the behavior ++ when a packet is received at the command prompt is as it was in ++ C-Kermit 6.1 and earlier (namely to print an error message). ++ ++ COMMAND AUTODOWNLOAD is the command-mode equivalent of TERMINAL ++ AUTODOWNLOAD, which is effective during CONNECT mode. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.15. The TYPE Command ++ ++ The TYPE command now accepts a selection of optional switches ++ ([362]Section 1.5), and also sets several variables. ++ ++ Syntax: TYPE [ switches... ] filename ++ ++ Variables: ++ ++ \v(ty_ln) ++ Line number of current line (during TYPE command; see /PREFIX) ++ ++ \v(ty_lc) ++ Line count of file most recently TYPEd. ++ ++ \v(ty_mc) ++ Match count of file most recently TYPEd (see /MATCH). ++ ++ Switches: ++ ++ /PAGE ++ If /PAGE is included, Kermit pauses at the end of each ++ screenful and issues a "more?" prompt. You may press the space ++ bar to view the next page (screenful), or press "q" or "n" to ++ return to the C-Kermit prompt. If this switch is given, it ++ overrides the COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING setting for this command ++ only. If it is not given, paging is according to COMMAND ++ MORE-PROMPTING. ++ ++ /NOPAGE ++ Do not pause at the end of each screenful; show the whole file ++ (or all selected lines) at once. If this switch is given, it ++ overrides the COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING setting for this command ++ only. If it is not given, paging is according to COMMAND ++ MORE-PROMPTING. ++ ++ /HEAD[:n] ++ Only show the first n lines of the file (where n is a number). ++ If n is omitted, 10 is used. ++ ++ /TAIL[:n] ++ Only show the last n lines of the file (where n is a number). ++ If nis omitted, 10 is used. Note: /HEAD and /TAIL can't be ++ combined; if you give both switches, only the most recent one ++ is used. ++ ++ /MATCH:pattern ++ Only type lines from the file that match the given pattern (see ++ [363]Section 4.9.1 for pattern notation). UNIX users familiar ++ with grep should note a significant difference: there is no ++ implied "*" at the beginning and end of the pattern. Thus: ++ ++ TYPE /MATCH:foo Lists lines whose entire contents are "foo". ++ TYPE /MATCH:foo* Lists lines that start with "foo". ++ TYPE /MATCH:*foo Lists lines that end with "foo". ++ TYPE /MATCH:*foo* Lists lines that have "foo" anywhere in them. ++ ++ /HEAD and /TAIL apply after /MATCH, so "type /tail:20 ++ /match:x*" shows the last 20 lines in the file that start with ++ "x". ++ ++ /PREFIX:string ++ Print the given string at the beginning of each line. The ++ string may be a constant, a variable, or a quoted variable. If ++ it's an unquoted variable, its value at the time the TYPE ++ command was given is used as a constant. If it is a quoted ++ variable, it is re-evaluated for each line; a useful variable ++ for this context is \v(ty_ln) (the line number of the current ++ line being typed). If the prefix is to include spaces, it must ++ be enclosed in braces. Examples: ++ ++ type /prefix:{oofa.txt: } /match:*thing* oofa.txt ++ Prints all lines in oofa.txt that contain "thing" with ++ the filename itself as the prefix (similar to UNIX grep). ++ ++ type /prefix:{\v(time). } oofa.txt ++ Prefixes each line of oofa.txt with the time at which the ++ TYPE command was given (one backslash) ++ ++ type /prefix:{\\v(time). } oofa.txt ++ Prefixes each line of oofa.txt with the time at which ++ that line is being typed (two backslashes). ++ ++ type /prefix:{\\v(ty_ln). } oofa.txt ++ Prefixes each line of oofa.txt with its line number. ++ ++ type /prefix:{\\flpad(\\v(ty_ln),4). } oofa.txt ++ Same as the previous example, except the line number is ++ right-adjusted in a 4-column field. ++ ++ /WIDTH[:n] ++ Truncates each line at column n (which must be a number) prior ++ to printing it. This option can be used for long lines when you ++ don't want them to wrap. If nis omitted, your current screen ++ width is used. ++ ++ /COUNT ++ Counts lines and -- if /MATCH was included, matches -- but does ++ not print any lines from the file. The line and match count is ++ shown at the end, and the variables \v(ty_lc) and \v(ty_lm) are ++ set accordingly. ++ ++ SET OPTIONS TYPE { /PAGE, /NOPAGE, /WIDTH:n } ++ Sets the paging default for TYPE commands, which can be ++ overridden in any particular TYPE command by including the ++ desired switch. ++ ++ If a TYPE command is given with no switch, and no SET OPTIONS TYPE ++ selection is in effect, paging is according to your COMMAND ++ MORE-PROMPTING setting (SHOW COMMAND). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.16. The RESET Command ++ ++ The RESET command, added in 7.0, closes all open files and logs, but ++ does not affect the open connection (if any). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.17. The COPY and RENAME Commands ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, in the UNIX version only, the COPY and RENAME ++ commands are built in and do not call the underlying platform's COPY ++ or RENAME command. This allows them to work in "NOPUSH" versions and ++ other circumstances where it can't access system commands, and it ++ allows file copying and renaming to be done portably in scripts. The ++ characteristics of the built-in COPY or RENAME include: ++ * It fails if the source file is a directory or is wild or lacks ++ read access. ++ * It fails if the source file is the destination file. ++ * It allows the destination file to be a directory, in which case ++ the source file is copied (or renamed) into it with the same name. ++ * It overwrites an existing destination file if its permission ++ allows. ++ * It sets the new file's permission according to umask but also ++ carries forward the source file's execute permission bits if the ++ destination file did not already exist. ++ * It fails if interrupted by Ctrl-C. ++ * Upon error, it prints an appropriate message. ++ * It returns standardized error codes that can be tested by IF ++ SUCCESS / FAIL. ++ ++ These commands now also accept the following switches: ++ ++ /LIST (/LOG, /VERBOSE) = Print "file1 => file2 (OK)" (or error message). ++ /NOLIST (/NOLOG, /QUIET) = Don't print anything (except error messages). ++ ++ /NOLIST is the default. ++ ++ The same built-in code is used by the UNIX C-Kermit server to execute ++ REMOTE COPY commands (except in this case no switches are available). ++ ++ The COPY command also accepts the following additional switches. When ++ any of these are given (and they can be used in any combination except ++ /SWAP and /APPEND), some of the checks listed above are relaxed, and ++ thus it might be possible to get into trouble in certain cases, e.g. ++ when the source and target files are the same file: ++ ++ /APPEND = Append source file to destination file. ++ /SWAP-BYTES = Swap bytes (see [364]Section 6.6.5). ++ /FROMB64 = Decode the source file from Base64 encoding. ++ /TOB64 = Encode the target file in Base64. ++ ++ Base64 is the encoding commonly used for enclosures in Internet email. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.18. The MANUAL Command ++ ++ The MANUAL command can be used to access the appropriate Kermit manual ++ or other manual. The general syntax is: ++ ++ MANUAL [ string ] ++ If the string is omitted, C-Kermit asks the underlying system ++ to access the C-Kermit manual using whatever method is ++ appropriate for the system. ++ ++ The specific action depends on the system. In UNIX, a "man" command is ++ issued; "kermit" is the default argument but other manual topics may ++ be specified. If the "man" command allows index or string searching, ++ the appropriate syntax may be included. ++ ++ In Kermit 95, the MANUAL command brings up the HTML online K95 manual. ++ ++ In VMS and elsewhere, "man" is simply translated to "help", with a ++ default argument of "kermit"; other and/or additional arguments may be ++ included according to the definition of the system's "help" command. ++ ++ Correct operation of the "man" command in C-Kermit depends on the ++ appropriate man page or help topic having been installed in the right ++ place with the right permissions and format. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.19. String and Filename Matching Patterns ++ ++ A pattern is a string that includes special notation for matching ++ classes or sequences of characters. C-Kermit 7.0 / K95 1.1.19 supports ++ patterns in several places: ++ ++ * Filenames ([365]Section 4.9) ++ * SWITCH case labels ([366]Section 7.18) ++ * The new IF MATCH statement ([367]Section 7.4) ++ * TYPE /MATCH ([368]Section 1.15) ++ * SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS and BINARY-PATTERNS ([369]Section 4.3) ++ * The \fsearch() and \farraylook() functions ([370]Sections 7.3 and ++ [371]7.10.7) ++ * The \fpattern() function used with [M,RE]INPUT ([372]Section 7.1) ++ ++ Patterns are also called wildcards, especially when used for filename ++ matching. C-Kermit's pattern syntax is explained in [373]Section ++ 4.9.1, and also by the HELP WILDCARDS command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.20. Multiple Commands on One Line ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, commands can be grouped together on one line by ++ separating the commands with commas and enclosing the list in braces. ++ For example: ++ ++ C-Kermit> { echo One, echo Two, echo Three } ++ C-Kermit> do { echo One, echo Two, echo Three } ++ ++ Command lists can be nested: ++ ++ [ do ] { echo One, echo Two, if true { echo A, echo B}, echo Three } ++ ++ and the END command works as it does in macros: ++ ++ [ do ] { echo One, echo Two, if true end, echo Three } ++ ++ The "one line" stricture is, of course, pliant to line-continuation ++ conventions, namely that lines ending in hyphen (-) or left brace ({) ++ are to be continued. Thus the first example can also be rendered: ++ ++ [ do ] { ++ echo One ++ echo Two ++ echo Three ++ } ++ ++ (the "do" is optional). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.21. What Do I Have? ++ ++ C-Kermit can be built for hundreds of different platforms with ++ practically countless configuration options. Certain commands might ++ not be available in certain configurations, etc. Even on the same ++ platform, different builds are possible: "maximum functionality", ++ "minimum size", "maximum performance", and so on. You can find out a ++ lot about the configuration of your C-Kermit program with the SHOW ++ FEATURES command. Of course, a lot of what it says, especially in the ++ bottom part, might seem like gibberish, but can be deciphered with a ++ Rosetta Stone (such as the C-Kermit source or the [374]ckccfg.txt ++ file). In any case, the output from SHOW FEATURES might easily explain ++ why some expected feature is missing, or some buffer is smaller than ++ expected. Here's a sample of the bottom section for the SunOS version: ++ ++C-Kermit 7.0.196, 1 Jan 2000 ++ ++Major optional features included: ++ Network support (type SHOW NET for further info) ++ Telnet Kermit Option ++ Hardware flow control ++ External XYZMODEM protocol support ++ Latin-1 (West European) character-set translation ++ Latin-2 (East European) character-set translation ++ Cyrillic (Russian, Ukrainian, etc) character-set translation ++ Greek character-set translation ++ Hebrew character-set translation ++ Japanese character-set translation ++ Unicode character-set translation ++ Pseudoterminal control ++ REDIRECT command ++ RESEND command ++ Fullscreen file transfer display ++ Control-character unprefixing ++ Streaming ++ Autodownload ++ ++Major optional features not included: ++ No Kerberos(TM) authentication ++ No SRP(TM) (Secure Remote Password) protocol ++ No Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol ++ No Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol ++ No encryption ++ No X Windows forwarding ++ ++Host info: ++ Machine: sun4m ++ Model: (unknown) ++ OS: SunOS ++ OS Release: 4.1.3_U1 ++ OS Version: 4 ++ ++Target: sunos41gsc ++GCC version: 2.7.2 ++Compiled Dec 31 1999 10:38:54, options: ++ __GNUC__ __STDC__ _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL _SC_JOB_CONTROL ARRAYREFLEN=1024 BIGBUFOK ++ BROWSER BSD4 CK_ANSIC CK_APC CK_AUTODL CK_CURSES CK_DNS_SRV CK_ENVIRONMENT ++ CK_FAST CK_LOGIN CK_MKDIR CK_NAWS CK_PCT_BAR CK_PERMS CK_RECALL CK_RTSCTS ++ CK_SPEED CK_TIMERS CK_TMPDIR CK_TTGWSIZ CK_TTYFD CK_WREFRESH CKEXEC ++ CKFLOAT=double CKGHNLHOST ckmaxfiles=64 CKMAXOPEN=64 CKMAXPATH=1023 CKREALPATH ++ CKREGEX CKSYSLOG CKTUNING CMDBL=32763 CMDDEP=64 CONGSPD DCMDBUF DIRENT DYNAMIC ++ FNFLOAT FORDEPTH=32 GFTIMER HADDRLIST HDBUUCP IFDEBUG IKS_OPTION IKSDB ++ IKSDCONF INBUFSIZE=32768 INPBUFSIZ=4096 MAC_MAX=16384 MACLEVEL=128 MAXDDIR=32 ++ MAXDNUMS=4095 MAXGETPATH=128 MAXTAKE=54 MAXWLD=102400 MSENDMAX=1024 NETCMD ++ NETCONN NETPTY NOKVERBS NOSETBUF OBUFSIZE=32768 PARSENSE PATTERNS PIPESEND ++ RENAME RLOGCODE SAVEDUID SELECT SIG_V SOL_SOCKET sparc STREAMING sun SUNOS4 ++ SYSTIMEH TCPSOCKET TIMEH TLOG TNCODE TTLEBUF TTSPDLIST UIDBUFLEN=256 UNIX ++ UNPREFIXZERO USE_LSTAT USE_MEMCPY VNAML=4096 WHATAMI XFRCAN Z_MAXCHAN=46 ++ z_maxchan=46 ZXREWIND ++ ++ byte order: big endian ++ ++ sizeofs: int=4 long=4 short=2 char=1 char*=4 float=4 double=8 ++ ++ floating-point: precision=16 rounding=1 ++ ++ Without going into detail about what all the notation means, notice a ++ couple things: ++ ++ * The Options section shows symbols ("macros") in effect during ++ compilation, together with their values (for those that have ++ values). The options are listed in alphabetical order to make any ++ particular option easier to find. ++ * MAXWLD is the maximum number of files that a wildcard can expand ++ to. ++ * Anything starting with "NO" is a feature (or something other than ++ a feature) that has been deliberately "compiled out", or omitted. ++ * Important items for script writers include: CMDBL=32763 (the size ++ of the command buffer and therefore the maximum length for a macro ++ or variable definition; CMDDEP=64 (the limit on recursion depth); ++ FORDEPTH=32 (the nesting limit on FOR loops); INBUFSIZE=32768 (the ++ size of the INPUT command circular buffer); MAC_MAX=16384 (the ++ maximum number of macros), etc. ++ ++ See the [375]ckccfg.txt file for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22. Generalized File Input and Output ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds a new generalized I/O system for stream files, ++ augmenting (and to some extent, overlapping with) the older OPEN, ++ READ, WRITE, and CLOSE commands. In the new file i/o system, which can ++ be used simultaneously with the old one, all commands are grouped ++ together under the new FILE keyword, and some related functions and ++ variables are added. ++ ++ 1.22.1. Why Another I/O System? ++ ++ The well-known LOG, OPEN, READ, WRITE, and CLOSE commands have the ++ following restrictions: ++ ++ 1. Only one READ file and one WRITE file can be open at a time. ++ 2. The READ and WRITE commands are strictly line oriented. ++ 3. These commands can not be used with binary files. ++ 4. They do not support read/write access or random access. ++ 5. The syntax is a bit counterintuitive for programmers. ++ ++ The new file i/o system allows multiple files to be open at once, in ++ any desired combination of modes (read/write/append) supported by the ++ operating system, for line, block (record), or character i/o, for ++ sequential or random access, using consistent syntax and conventions. ++ ++ The new system, however, does not replace the old one, since the old ++ system still must be used for: ++ ++ 1. The session, packet, debug, transaction, and connection logs. ++ 2. Reading and writing commands rather than files. ++ 3. Existing scripts. ++ ++ The new system works only with regular files, not with commands or ++ pipes or mailboxes or pseudoterminals. No special provisions are made ++ in the FILE commands for handling devices or network connections, nor ++ for preventing you from trying to open them; if the underlying ++ operating system treats them like regular stream disk files, the FILE ++ commands (except, of course SEEK, REWIND, and COUNT) might work with ++ them. (In C programming terms, the FILE commands are, at present, ++ nothing more than a front end to fopen() / fread() / fwrite() / ++ fclose() and friends, which are a portable API to sequential files, ++ but this might change in the future for platforms like VMS and VOS ++ that have more complicated file systems.) ++ ++ Definitions: ++ ++ Channel ++ A number assigned to a file when it is opened, by which it must ++ be referred to in all input/output operations. ++ ++ Read/Write Pointer ++ The current position in an open file, expressed as the 0-based ++ byte count from the beginning. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.2. The FILE Command ++ ++ FILE keyword [ switches ] channel [ data ] ++ The keyword specifies the function: FILE OPEN, FILE READ, FILE ++ WRITE, FILE CLOSE, etc. For convenience (and for familiarity to ++ C programmers), the two-word FILE commands can be shortened to ++ the single words FOPEN, FREAD, FWRITE, FCLOSE, and so on. ++ Switches are optional, and modify or amplify the requested file ++ function. ++ ++ As in C, Fortran, and other programming languages, open files are ++ referred to by "channels", integers such as 0, 1, 2, 3, and so on. A ++ channel number is assigned when you open a file. The number of ++ available channels depends on the underlying operating system, and can ++ be seen in the variable: ++ ++ \v(f_max) ++ ++ or by giving the FILE LIST (FLIST) command. Channels are discussed in ++ greater detail in [376]Section 1.22.4. ++ ++ FILE command errors can be caught with IF FAIL after the FILE command. ++ In addition, the \v(f_error) variable is set to the completion code of ++ the command: 0 if no error, or a negative number if there was an ++ error. The error codes are listed in [377]Section 1.22.5. ++ ++ The command to open a file is: ++ ++ FILE OPEN [ switches ] variable filename ++ Opens a file for the type of access specified by the switches, ++ or for read-only access if no switches are given. Upon success, ++ a channel number is assigned to this file and stored in the ++ given variable so you can refer to the open file in subsequent ++ i/o commands. If the file can not be opened, the FILE OPEN ++ command fails. Synonym: FOPEN. ++ ++ The FILE OPEN switches are: ++ ++ /READ ++ Open the file for read access. If no switches are given, /READ ++ is assumed. If the file does not exist or can't be opened for ++ read access, the FILE OPEN command fails. ++ ++ /WRITE ++ Allow writing. If a file of the same name already exists, it is ++ overwritten unless /READ or /APPEND is also included. If a file ++ of the given name does not exist, it is created. ++ ++ /APPEND ++ Equivalent to /WRITE, except that if the file exists, it is not ++ destroyed. The read/write pointer is set to the end of the ++ file, so unless you change it with FILE SEEK or REWIND (see ++ below), the first FILE WRITE command adds to the end of the ++ file, preserving what was there already. If /WRITE is also ++ given, it is ignored. ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Open the file in "binary" mode, rather than text mode. This ++ switch is meaningless (but still can be used) in UNIX. In VMS, ++ Windows, and OS/2, it inhibits end-of-line processing and ++ conversion, and so should be used for binary files and/or files ++ that are to be accessed in record or character mode rather than ++ line by line. ++ ++ The variable for the channel number can be any kind of variable: the ++ \%x kind, a macro name, or an array element. But it must be a ++ variable, not a number -- C-Kermit assigns the channel number; you ++ can't tell it what number to use. ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ FILE OPEN \%c oofa.txt ; Open oofa.txt for reading. ++ IF FAIL exit 1 Can't open oofa.txt ; Always check to see if it worked. ++ ECHO oofa.txt: channel = \%c ++ ++ If the file oofa.txt is opened successfully, a channel number is ++ assigned to the variable \%c. Here's another example using a macro ++ name for the channel number: ++ ++ FILE OPEN channel oofa.txt ; Open oofa.txt for reading. ++ IF SUCCESS ECHO oofa.txt: channel = \m(channel) ++ ++ Switches can be combined when it makes sense and the underlying ++ operating system allows it. For example, to open a file in binary mode ++ for reading and writing (sometimes called "update"): ++ ++ FILE OPEN /READ /WRITE /BINARY \%c budget.db ++ ++ Some combinations might be allowed, others not. For example /READ ++ /APPEND will usually not be allowed. /WRITE /APPEND is treated as ++ /APPEND. ++ ++ A major advantage of the new system over the older one is that you can ++ have multiple files open at once. Suppose, for example, that you want ++ to open all the files in a certain directory at once: ++ ++ .\%n := \ffiles(/usr/olga*,&f) ; Get file list into array. ++ if ( > \%n \v(f_max) ) { ; Make sure there aren't too many. ++ exit 1 {\v(dir): \%n = Too many files} ++ } ++ declare \&c[\%n] ; Make array for channel numbers. ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ; Loop to open every file... ++ file open \&c[\%i] \&f[\%i] ; Try to open this one ++ if fail exit 1 Open error: \&f[\%i] ; Check for failure ++ } ++ ++ If this loop completes successfully, the \&c[] array will contain \%n ++ channel numbers of open files in elements 1 through \%n. ++ ++ Any file that you open with FILE OPEN stays open until Kermit exits, ++ or you close it explicitly. The command to close a file is: ++ ++ FILE CLOSE { ALL, channel } ++ If a channel number is given and the channel refers to an open ++ file, the file is closed and the channel is freed for reuse; if ++ the channel does not refer to an open file, an error message is ++ printed and the command fails. If ALL is specified instead of a ++ specific channel, all files opened with FILE OPEN are closed ++ and if all open files were closed successfully (even if no ++ files were open), the command succeeds; if any open file could ++ not be closed, the command fails; however, all open files that ++ could be closed are still closed. Synonym: FCLOSE. ++ ++ FILE CLOSE might fail because, for example, the disk filled up or a ++ quota was exceeded. Example: ++ ++ fopen /write \%c new.txt ; Open new.txt for writing. ++ if fail exit 1 ; Check for error. ++ fclose \%c ; Close the file we just opened. ++ ++ This creates a 0-length file called new.txt. ++ ++ Note that FILE OPEN /WRITE (without /READ or /APPEND) always creates a ++ new file, and therefore destroys any file with the same name that ++ might already exist (assuming you have permission to delete it). To ++ avoid overwriting existing files, simply check first: ++ ++ if exist new.txt exit 1 {Fatal - new.txt already exists} ++ fopen /write \%c new.txt ++ if fail ... ++ ++ The next two commands give information about open files: ++ ++ FILE STATUS channel ++ Tells the name of the file, if any, open on the given channel ++ and the switches it was opened with. The read/write pointer is ++ also shown; this is where the next read or write will occur; ++ "[EOF]" is shown if the current position in the open file is ++ the end -- i.e. the next read will fail if the file was opened ++ in /READ mode; the next write will add material to the end. The ++ current line number (0-based) is also shown if known. The FILE ++ STATUS command succeeds if the channel is open, and fails if ++ there is no open file on the given channel, or if the channel ++ number is invalid or out of range. Synonym: FSTATUS. ++ ++ FILE LIST ++ Lists the channel number and name of each open file, along with ++ its OPEN modes (R, W, A, B, RW, etc) and its current read/write ++ pointer or "[EOF]" if it is at the end. Also tells the number ++ of files currently opened with FILE OPEN, plus the maximum ++ number of open files allowed by the system and the maximum ++ number allowed for FILE OPEN. Synonym: FLIST. ++ ++ Next come the commands for reading and writing files: ++ ++ FILE READ [ switches ] channel [ variable ] ++ Reads data from the file on the given channel number into the ++ variable, if one was given; if no variable was given, the ++ result is printed on the screen. IMPORTANT: The variable should ++ normally be a macro name rather than a \%x or \&x[] variable if ++ you want backslash characters in the file to be taken literally ++ (see pp.408-412 of [378]Using C-Kermit for an explanation; you ++ can also read into a \%x or \&x[] variable, but then you must ++ remember to protect future references to by \fcontents() if you ++ don't want C-Kermit to process any backslashes it might ++ contain). The desired amount of data (according to the ++ switches) is read from the file at the current read/write ++ pointer, and upon completion the read/write position is updated ++ to first byte after the data that was read, no matter what ++ switches were given. Synonym: FREAD. ++ ++ FILE WRITE [ switches ] channel text ++ Writes the given text to the file on the given channel number. ++ The text, of course, can be literal text or a variable, or any ++ combination. If the text might contain leading or trailing ++ spaces, it must be enclosed in braces if you want to preserve ++ them. Synonym: FWRITE. ++ ++ Before proceeding, a caution about the NUL character. C-Kermit is so ++ named because it is a Kermit program written in the C language. In C, ++ character strings are represented as a sequence of non-NUL bytes ++ terminated by a NUL byte (a byte in which all bits are 0). Thus a C ++ string can not contain NUL bytes; it always ends with the first NUL ++ byte. C-Kermit variables are implemented as C strings and therefore ++ can't contain NUL bytes either, so the FILE READ and FILE WRITE ++ commands do not handle files or strings that contain NUL bytes, except ++ when the /CHARACTER switch is included with the FILE READ or WRITE ++ command, or when /LPAD:0 or /RPAD:0 is given with the FILE WRITE ++ command; these switches are explained below. ++ ++ Also note that Kermit can not be used read or write binary numbers in ++ the machine's internal format (integer or floating-point); in general, ++ numbers can be processed only when represented as numeric or ++ floating-point strings. ++ ++ FILE READ switches are: ++ ++ /LINE ++ Specifies that a line of text is to be read. A line is defined ++ according to the underlying operating system's text-file ++ format. For example, in UNIX a line is a sequence of characters ++ up to and including a linefeed, or the end of the file, which ++ ever comes first. The line terminator (if any) is removed ++ before assigning the text to the variable. If no switches are ++ included with the FILE READ command, /LINE is assumed. Normally ++ this switch should not be used with files opened in /BINARY ++ mode (but nothing prevents it either). ++ ++ /SIZE:number ++ Specifies that the given number of bytes (characters) is to be ++ read. The actual number of bytes returned will be less if the ++ end of file is reached (or a NUL byte is encountered). For ++ example, if a file is 514 bytes long, FILE READ /SIZE:512 ++ returns 512 bytes the first time and 2 bytes the second time. ++ FILE READ /SIZE provides a kind of "record i/o" for files that ++ do not necessarily contain lines. The resulting block of ++ characters is assigned to the variable without any editing. ++ Synonym: /BLOCK. ++ ++ /CHARACTER ++ Equivalent to /SIZE:1. If FILE READ /CHAR succeeds but the ++ variable is empty, this indicates a NUL byte was read. Synonym: ++ BYTE. ++ ++ FILE WRITE switches are: ++ ++ /LINE ++ Specifies that an appropriate line terminator is to be added to ++ the end of the text. If no switches are included, /LINE is ++ assumed. ++ ++ /SIZE:number ++ Specifies that the given number of bytes (characters) is to be ++ written. If the given text is longer than the requested size, ++ it is truncated; if is shorter, it is padded according /LPAD ++ and /RPAD switches. Synonym: /BLOCK. ++ ++ /LPAD[:value] ++ If /SIZE was given, but the text is shorter than the requested ++ size, the text is padded on the left with sufficient copies of ++ the character whose ASCII value is given to write the given ++ length. If no value is specified, 32 (the code for Space) is ++ used. The value can also be 0 to write the indicated number of ++ NUL bytes. If /SIZE was not given, this switch is ignored. ++ ++ /RPAD[:value] ++ Like LPAD, but pads on the right. ++ ++ /CHARACTER ++ Specifies that one character should be written. If the text is ++ empty or not given, a NUL character is written; otherwise the ++ first character of text is given. Synonym: /BYTE. ++ ++ /STRING ++ Specifies that the text is to be written as-is, with no ++ terminator added. ++ ++ Here's an example in which we copy a text file line by line: ++ ++ file open /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open input file ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open input file ; Check that it's open ++ file open /write \%d new.txt ; Open output file ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open output file ; Check ++ while true { ; Loop to copy lines ++ file read /line \%c line ; Read a line ++ if fail break ; Assume failure = end of file ++ file write /line \%d {\m(line)} ; Write the line to output file ++ if fail exit 1 Write failure ; Failure here is fatal ++ } ++ file close \%c ; Close the two files ++ file close \%d ++ ++ Note that since /LINE is the default for both FILE READ and FILE ++ WRITE, it can be omitted as in the following example, where we also ++ use the short names for the FILE commands. ++ ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open input file ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open input file ; Check that it's open ++ fopen /write \%d new.txt ; Open output file ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open output file ; Check ++ while true { ; Loop to copy lines ++ fread \%c line ; Read a line ++ if fail break ; Assume failure = end of file ++ fwrite \%d {\m(line)} ; Write the line to output file ++ if fail exit 1 Write failure ; Failure here is fatal ++ } ++ fclose \%c ; Close the two files ++ fclose \%d ++ ++ Here's the same example using "record i/o" (the open and close ++ sequences are are omitted since they are the same as above). The ++ result is the same, but execution is much faster: ++ ++ while true { ; Loop to copy blocks ++ fread /size:512 \%c block ; Read a block into \%a ++ if fail break ; Assume failure = end of file ++ fwrite /string \%d {\m(block)} ; Write the block to output file ++ if fail exit 1 Write failure ; Failure here is fatal ++ } ++ ++ Although record i/o is faster, it should not be used in line-oriented ++ applications, since it returns arbitrary chunks of the file to your ++ script, rather than lines. In this example, FWRITE /STRING is used ++ rather than FWRITE /SIZE:512 to avoid the last output block being ++ padded beyond the original file's length. ++ ++ A file can also be copied character by character, but this is much ++ slower than line i/o and VERY much slower than block i/o: ++ ++ while true { ; Loop to copy blocks ++ fread /char \%c c ; Read a character into c ++ if fail break ; Assume failure = end of file ++ fwrite /char \%d {\m(c)} ; Write character to output file ++ if fail exit 1 Write failure ; Failure is fatal ++ } ++ ++ Although character i/o is slow, it is the only way to process files ++ that contain NUL characters (i.e. bytes composed of only zero bits). ++ In the example above, when "fread /char \%c c" returns a NUL, the c ++ variable is empty. But since the FREAD /CHAR command did not fail, we ++ know the result was really a NUL. FWRITE /CHAR, when given an empty ++ variable (or no variable at all) writes a NUL. Thus the loop above ++ will copy any file at all (very slowly). In non-copying applications, ++ NULs are detected like this: ++ ++ fread /char \%c c ++ if fail (do something) ++ if not def c (a NUL byte was read) ++ ++ Finally some advanced file operations: ++ ++ FILE FLUSH channel ++ For output files only: commits all previous writes to disk, in ++ case the computer was buffering them. Synonym: FFLUSH. ++ ++ FILE COUNT [ { /BYTES, /LINES, /LIST, /NOLIST } ] channel ++ By default, or if the /BYTES switch is given, counts the bytes ++ in the file, if any, open on the given channel. If the /LINES ++ switch is given, counts lines in the file. If the /LIST switch ++ is given, the result is printed. If the /NOLIST switch is ++ given, the result is not printed. /QUIET is a synonym for ++ /NOLIST. If neither /LIST nor /NOLIST is given, the result is ++ printed if the command is given at top level, i.e. not from a ++ command file or macro. In all cases, the result of the most ++ recent FILE COUNT command is stored in the variable ++ \v(f_count). Note that FILE COUNT /LINE works (and can only ++ work) by reading the entire file; expect it to take some time ++ if the file is large. Synonym: FCOUNT. ++ ++ FILE REWIND channel ++ Moves the read/write pointer to the beginning of the file. ++ Equivalent to FILE SEEK channel 0. Synonym: FREWIND. ++ ++ FILE SEEK [ switches ] channel { [{+,-}]number, LAST, EOF } ++ Moves the read/write pointer for the file on this channel to ++ the given position, which may be a byte (character) number or a ++ line number, expressed in either absolute or relative terms. ++ Switches: ++ ++ /BYTE ++ The number given is a byte number. Synonym: /CHARACTER. ++ ++ /LINE ++ The number given is a line number. ++ ++ /ABSOLUTE ++ The number given is absolute. ++ ++ /RELATIVE ++ The number given is relative to the current position. ++ ++ By default, or if the /BYTE switch is given, the number is a ++ byte number (0 = first byte). If /LINE is given, the number is ++ a line number (0 = first line). EOF means to move to the end of ++ the file. LAST means to move to the last line or character of ++ the file, depending on whether it's a line or character seek. ++ ++ If neither the /RELATIVE nor the /ABSOLUTE switch is given, ++ then if a signed number is given, the motion is relative to the ++ current position. An expression that evaluates to a negative ++ number is not considered signed for this purpose; that is, a ++ sign (+ or -) must be included as the first character of the ++ number in the command itself to force a relative seek (in the ++ absence of /RELATIVE or /ABSOLUTE). ++ ++ If the number has no sign, or if the /ABSOLUTE switch is given, ++ the number represents an absolute position (relative to the ++ beginning of the file). Subsequent FILE READs or WRITEs will ++ take place at the new position. ++ ++ If the read/write pointer is placed after the end of the file, ++ a subsequent FILE READ will fail, but a FILE WRITE will succeed ++ (possibly creating a file with "holes"). If a FILE SEEK /BYTE ++ command is given, the current line becomes unknown (unless the ++ position is 0) and subsequent FILE SEEK /RELATIVE /LINE ++ commands will fail until the next non-relative FILE SEEK /LINE ++ command is given. Synonym: FSEEK. ++ ++ An absolute FILE SEEK to a negative position fails silently, as does a ++ relative seek to a position before the beginning of the file. ++ ++ A caution about relative SEEKs: remember that the number is relative ++ to the current position. Whenever you read or write, this changes the ++ position. In each of the following examples, assume the file open on ++ channel \%c is positioned at line n (the FREAD target variable is ++ omitted for lack of space): ++ ++ { FREAD \%c, FSEEK /LINE \%c -1, FREAD \%c } <-- Reads line n twice ++ { FREAD \%c, FSEEK /LINE \%c +0, FREAD \%c } <-- Reads lines n and n+1 ++ { FREAD \%c, FSEEK /LINE \%c +1, FREAD \%c } <-- Reads lines n and n+2 ++ { FREAD \%c, FSEEK /LINE \%c -2, FREAD \%c } <-- Reads lines n and n-1 ++ { FREAD \%c, FSEEK /LINE \%c -3, FREAD \%c } <-- Reads lines n and n-2 ++ ++ Another caution: Using FSEEK and FREAD /SIZE to repeatedly read the ++ same disk block (e.g. when sampling a database record that is ++ frequently updated) might not give you updated disk blocks due to the ++ internal buffering and caching of the C library (this probably varies ++ from one platform/compiler combination to another). If necessary you ++ can force a fresh disk read with a close/open sequence: ++ ++ FCLOS \%c ++ FOPEN \%c samefilename ++ FSEEK \%c samespot ++ FREAD /SIZE:howmanybytes \%c variable ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.3. FILE Command Examples ++ ++ To read the last 10 lines of a text file into an array: ++ ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open the file ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open oofa.txt ; Always check for failure ++ dcl \&a[10] ; Declare a 10-element array ++ fcount /line \%c ; Count lines in the file ++ fseek /line \%c \v(f_count)-10 ; Seek to 10 lines from the end ++ if fail exit 1 Can't seek ; Check for failure ++ for \%i 1 10 1 { fread \%c \&a[\%i] } ; Read the last 10 lines ++ fclose \%c ; Close the file ++ ++ Note that blank lines show up as empty (undefined) array elements, for ++ example if you give a "show array a" command at this point. This is ++ normal. You can still use these elements; e.g.: ++ ++ for \%i 1 10 1 { echo \%i. \&a[\%i] } ; Display the 10 lines ++ ++ Here is how to read the last line of a file (already open on channel ++ \%c): ++ ++ fseek /line \%c last ; Seek directly to last line ++ ++ Alternatively: ++ ++ fseek /line \%c eof ; Seek to end of file ++ fseek /line \%c -1 ; Seek to beginning of last line ++ ++ Alternatively: ++ ++ fcount /line \%c ; Count the file's lines ++ fseek /line \%c \v(f_count)-1 ; Seek to last line ++ fread \%c ; Read it ++ ++ To read every other line from the file (using relative SEEK), skipping ++ the first line: ++ ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open the file ++ while ( success ) { ; Loop through lines ++ fseek /line \%c +1 ; Skip a line ++ if success fread \%c ; Read & display a line ++ } ++ fclose \%c ; Close the file ++ ++ Here is how to read the lines of a file in reverse order: ++ ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open ++ if fail exit 1 ; Check ++ fseek /line \%c last ; Seek to last line ++ while success { ; Loop ++ fread \%c ; Read line ++ fseek /line \%c -2 ; Seek backwards two lines ++ } ++ fclose \%c ; Close the file ++ ++ The loop works because a relative SEEK outside the file fails. ++ ++ It is also possible to use block i/o to manage random-access files ++ with fixed-length records (as long as they don't contain NUL ++ characters). Suppose, for example, you have a file of "card image" ++ records with fixed-field information about customers, such as: ++ ++ Name: Columns 1-32 (column numbers are 1-based) ++ Address: Columns 33-72 ++ Balance: Columns 73-80 ++ ++ The records are indexed by customer number, starting with 0. There are ++ no line terminators separating them. Therefore the record for customer ++ number n starts at position nx 80 (\%n*80). ++ ++ Now suppose we received a payment from customer number 173 and want to ++ update the balance: ++ ++ .\%n = 173 ; Customer (record) number ++ .\%a = 12.72 ; Amount ++ fopen /read /write \%c customer.db ; Open the file ++ if fail stop 1 OPEN FAILED: \f_errmsg() ; Check ++ fseek /byte \%c 80*\%n ; Seek to record ++ fread /size:80 \%c r ; Read the record ++ if fail stop 1 READ FAILED: \f_errmsg() ; Check (IMPORTANT) ++ .\%b := \fright(\m(r),8) ; Extract the balance ++ .\%b := \ffpadd(\%b,\%a,2) ; Add the new payment ++ if fail stop 1 ARITHMETIC ERROR: \%b/\%a ; Catch bad records ++ .r := {\fleft(\m(r),72)\flpad(\%b,8)} ; Update the record ++ fseek /byte \%c 80*\%n ; Reposition to same spot ++ fwrite /size:80 \%c {\m(r)} ; Replace the record ++ if fail stop 1 WRITE FAILED: \f_errmsg() ; Check ++ fclose \%c ; Close the file ++ ++ REMEMBER: Using FILE SEEK to move beyond the end of file can result in ++ a file with holes when writing; when reading, an end-of-file error ++ will occur -- be sure to check for it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.4. Channel Numbers ++ ++ C-Kermit's channel numbers are integers from 0 to some ++ platform-dependent limit, such as 46 or 1985 (the value of \v(f_max)). ++ This is the limit placed by the operating system on the number of ++ files that may be opened by one process or user or job, minus the ++ standard input, output, and error files, and minus the number of files ++ reserved by C-Kermit for logs, OPEN READ and WRITE, and file transfer ++ (and maybe some command files -- the \v(f_max) number can't be exact). ++ ++ Although you must include a variable in the FILE OPEN command, to ++ which the channel number is assigned, you don't have to use a variable ++ in the other FILE commands if you know what the number is -- you can ++ just put the number. This saves you a few keystrokes when typing ++ commands at the prompt: ++ ++ fopen \%c oofa.txt ++ flist ++ 0. /usr/olga.oofa.txt (R) 0 ++ ++ This tells the channel number is 0 (the number on the left is the ++ channel file's channel number). Of course you can also find it by ++ echoing the variable: ++ ++ echo \%c ++ 0 ++ ++ Or with "fstatus \%c". Now you can type commands like: ++ ++ fread 0 ++ ++ to read a line from the file. Obviously, however, using digits rather ++ than a variable for the channel number would be poor practice in a ++ script. ++ ++ If in commands like: ++ ++ fread \%c \%a ++ ++ you have trouble remembering which variable is which, note that the ++ channel number is, indeed, a number. Anywhere C-Kermit accepts a ++ number it can also accept an expression, so you can put parentheses ++ around the channel number to remind you it's the channel number and ++ not the variable into which data is to be read: ++ ++ fread (\%c) \%a ++ ++ Normally channel numbers are assigned sequentially as 0, 1, 2, ... up ++ to the limit. However, once you start closing files, there can be ++ holes in the sequence. New channels are assigned to fill in the holes. ++ Thus you can't depend on channel numbers being in any particular ++ sequence. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.5. FILE Command Errors ++ ++ Each FILE command sets the variable \v(f_error) to one of the ++ following values: ++ ++ 0 = No error ++ -1 = System error ++ -2 = Attempt to read after end of file ++ -3 = Channel not open ++ -4 = Channel number out of range (negative or too large) ++ -5 = Numeric argument (size, ...) out of range ++ -6 = File not found ++ -7 = Bad or missing filename ++ -8 = Too many files are already open (FILE OPEN only) ++ -9 = Forbidden operation (e.g. write to a read-only file) ++ -10 = Access denied ++ -11 = Illegal combination of OPEN modes (FILE OPEN only) ++ -12 = Buffer overflow ++ -13 = Current line number unknown (for relative line seeks) ++ -14 through -98: Reserved. ++ -99 = Requested operation not implemented in this version of C-Kermit ++ -999 = Unknown error ++ ++ When \v(f_error) is -1, this means the FILE command failed because ++ because of a system error, in which case you can examine the following ++ variables: ++ ++ \v(errno) = System error number. ++ \v(errstring) = Error message corresponding to \v(errno). ++ ++ A special function is available for translating the \v(f_error) code ++ to an error message string: ++ ++\f_errmsg([code]) ++ If the code is -1, returns error message of the most recent system ++ error; otherwise if the code is a valid \v(f_error) value, the associated ++ message is returned. If the code is omitted, the status message ++ corresponding to the current \v(f_error) value is returned. ++ ++ A FILE command that fails prints the appropriate error message ++ automatically, except when the command is READ or SEEK and the error ++ is -2 (end of file); in that case, the command still fails, but does ++ not print a message. This allows constructions such as: ++ ++ fopen \%c oofa.txt ++ while success { fread \%c } ++ fclose \%c ++ ++ to work as expected, i.e. without an annoying message when the end of ++ file is reached. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.6. File I/O Variables ++ ++ The variables associated with the file i/o package are: ++ ++ \v(f_count) ++ Result of the most recent FILE COUNT (FCOUNT) command. ++ ++ \v(f_error) ++ Numeric error code of most recent FILE command (0 = no error). ++ ++ \v(f_max) ++ Maximum number of files open simultaneously. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.7. File I/O Functions ++ ++ Some of the FILE commands can also be issued as function calls, which ++ makes script writing a bit more convenient, especially for C ++ programmers. Also, several functions are provided that do not have ++ command equivalents. Each of these functions takes a channel number as ++ the first argument. These functions do not work for OPEN { READ, ++ !READ, WRITE, !WRITE, and APPEND } files. ++ ++ \f_status(channel) ++ Returns 0 if the channel is not open, otherwise a number ++ between 1 and 15 which is the sum of the OPEN modes: ++ ++ 1 = /READ ++ 2 = /WRITE ++ 4 = /APPEND ++ 8 = /BINARY ++ ++ The remaining functions work only for open channels. Each of these ++ functions can fail for the applicable reasons listed in [379]Section ++ 1.22.5. For instructions on handling function errors, see [380]Section ++ 7.12. ++ ++ \f_pos(channel) ++ Returns the file's current read/write pointer (0-based). There ++ is no FILE command equivalent. ++ ++ \f_line(channel) ++ Returns the file's current line number (0-based), if known, ++ otherwise -1. There is no FILE command equivalent. The line ++ number is known as long as no character or block i/o has been ++ done on the channel. ++ ++ \f_handle(channel) ++ Returns the "file handle" of the file. That is, it translates ++ the portable C-Kermit channel number into a system-specific ++ file handle or number that can be passed to other programs on ++ the same platform. In UNIX this is a file descriptor. There is ++ no FILE command equivalent. ++ ++ \f_eof(channel) ++ Returns 1 if the read/write pointer of the file on the given ++ channel is at the end of the file, 0 otherwise. Convenient in ++ WHILE statements, e.g.: ++ ++ while not \f_eof(\%c) { fread \%c } ++ ++ \f_getchar(channel) ++ Equivalent to FREAD /CHAR. Returns the character actually read. ++ If \f_getchar() does not fail but the return value is empty, ++ this means a NULL character was read. ++ ++ \f_getline(channel) ++ Equivalent to FREAD /LINE. Returns the line actually read, but ++ with the line terminator stripped. If \f_getline() does not ++ fail but the return value is empty, this normally means an ++ empty line was read. ++ ++ \f_getblock(channel,n) ++ Equivalent to FREAD /SIZE:n. Returns the block of characters ++ actually read. If the returned block is smaller than n, it ++ indicates either that the end of file was reached or a NUL ++ character is in the block. ++ ++ \f_putchar(channel,c) ++ Equivalent to FWRITE /CHARACTER. Writes the character c. If c ++ contains more than one character, only the first is written. If ++ c is empty a NUL is written. Returns the number of characters ++ written on success, or a negative error code upon failure. ++ ++ \f_putline(channel,string) ++ Equivalent to FWRITE /LINE. Writes the string and adds the ++ appropriate line termination character or sequence. If the ++ string is empty or omitted, an empty line is written. Returns ++ the number of characters written on success, or a negative ++ error code upon failure. ++ ++ \f_putblock(channel,string) ++ Equivalent to FWRITE /STRING. Writes the string as given. If ++ the string is empty or omitted, nothing is written. Returns the ++ number of characters written on success, or a negative error ++ code upon failure. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.22.8. File I/O Function Examples ++ ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open our favorite file for reading ++ if failure exit 1 ; Check that it's open ++ while not \f_eof(\%c) { ; Loop until EOF ++ .line := \f_getline(\%c) ; Get a line ++ if success echo {\m(line)} ; Echo it ++ } ++ if not \f_eof(\%c) { ; Check reason for loop exit ++ exit 1 File Error: \f_errmsg() ; If not EOF say so. ++ } ++ ++ frewind \%c ; Rewind the file ++ while not \f_eof(\%c) { ; Same thing but with block i/o ++ .block := \f_getblock(\%c,256) ; (much faster than line i/o) ++ if success xecho {\m(block)} ++ } ++ ++ frewind \%c ; Rewind again ++ while not \f_eof(\%c) { ; Same deal but with character i/o ++ .c := \f_getchar(\%c) ; (much slower than line i/o) ++ if success xecho {\m(c)} ++ } ++ close \%c ++ ++ To close all open files (equivalent to FCLOSE ALL): ++ ++ for \%i 0 \v(f_max)-1 1 { ++ if \f_status(\%i) fclose \%i ++ } ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.23. The EXEC Command ++ ++ The EXEC command is available only in UNIX. ++ ++ EXEC [ /REDIRECT ] command [ arg1 [ arg2 [ ... ] ] ++ Runs the given command with the arguments in such a way that ++ the command replaces C-Kermit in memory, and C-Kermit ceases to ++ execute. EXEC is like RUN, except instead of returning to ++ C-Kermit when finished, the command returns to whatever process ++ invoked Kermit. ++ ++ In the normal case, no files are closed, so the EXEC'd command ++ inherits the open files, read/write pointers, working directory, ++ process ID, user ID (unless command is SUID), group ID (unless command ++ is SGID), groups, etc. (In UNIX, the EXEC command is simply a front ++ end for execvp().) ++ ++ If the /REDIRECT switch is included, then if a connection is open (SET ++ LINE or SET HOST), it becomes the standard input and output of the ++ EXEC'd program. If no connection is open, the /REDIRECT switch has no ++ effect. For example to use C-Kermit for PPP dialing in Linux: ++ ++ set modem type usr ; Specify the kind of modem you have ++ set line /dev/ttyS1 ; Specify the device it's connected to ++ set speed 57600 ; and the speed ++ set flow rts/cts ; and flow control. ++ set dial retries 100 ; Try the dial sequence up to 100 times. ++ dial {{9-212-555-1212}{9-212-555-1213}{9-212-555-1214}{9-212-555-1215}} ++ if fail exit 1 ++ for \%i 1 16 1 { ; Try up to 16 times to get login prompt ++ input 10 Login: ; Wait 10 sec for it to appear ++ if success break ; Got it - proceed... ++ output \13 ; Send a carriage return and try again ++ } ++ if ( > \%i 16 ) stop 1 NO LOGIN PROMPT ++ lineout \(myuserid) ; Send user ID ++ input 30 assword: ; Wait for Password prompt ++ if fail stop 1 NO PASSWORD PROMPT ++ lineout \m(mypassword) ; Send the password. ++ exec /redirect pppd ; Replace ourselves with pppd. ++ ++ In this example we assume that the script has already set up the ++ myuserid and mypassword variables -- normally the password should be ++ prompted for, rather than stored on disk. Notice the advantages over ++ the well-known "chat script": ++ * You don't have to control the modem itself with AT commands; ++ Kermit's DIAL command does this for you. ++ * You can have Kermit automatically redial as many times as you want ++ until it gets a connection (if this is legal in your country). ++ * You can have Kermit fetch the number or numbers from a dialing ++ directory. ++ * You can have Kermit cycle through a list of phone numbers (this is ++ new in C-Kermit 7.0; see [381]Section 2.1.16) without having to ++ enter the numbers in a dialing directory. ++ * Dialing is location-independent; you can use the same script to ++ dial from different areas or countries. ++ * Once the connection is made, the full power of Kermit's script ++ language is available to manage the dialog with the terminal ++ server or other device that answers the phone call. ++ ++ NOTE: PPP and SLIP dialing are not available in Windows 95/98/NT/2000, ++ whose APIs do not provide a method for an application to hand over a ++ connection to the PPP or SLIP driver. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1.24. Getting Keyword Lists with '?' ++ ++ Suppose you type "te" at the C-Kermit> 6.0 prompt and then Esc or Tab ++ to request keyword completion. Kermit beeps, indicating that more than ++ one command starts with "te". But if you type '?' to see what they ++ are, Kermit shows only "telnet". So why the beep? Because of invisible ++ keywords like "telopt", "terminal", and "text". Lots of keywords are ++ invisible because they are either synonyms for other keywords or else ++ esoteric options to be used only in special circumstances, so we don't ++ want them cluttering up the menus. ++ ++ But then there is no way for you to discover them. So in C-Kermit 7.0, ++ if you type '?' AFTER the beginning of a keyword field, then invisible ++ keywords are shown too: ++ ++ C-Kermit> te ++ C-Kermit> te? Command, one of the following: ++ telnet telopt terminal text ++ C-Kermit>te ++ ++ But if '?' is typed at the beginning of a field, only visible keywords ++ are shown, as before (so, in this example, if '?' is typed at the ++ C-Kermit> prompt, "telnet" is the only command shown that starts with ++ "te"). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2. MAKING AND USING CONNECTIONS The SET LINE, SET HOST, and SET PORT (a ++ synonym for SET LINE) commands have new synonyms, in which the word SET is ++ replaced by the word OPEN: OPEN LINE, etc. There is no new functionality ++ here, but OPEN is a better verb, since SET generally takes no action, whereas ++ these commands actually try to open a connection. Furthermore, there is the ++ symmetry with CLOSE. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.0. SET LINE and SET HOST Command SwitchesThe SET LINE (SET PORT) and SET ++ HOST commands now allow switches before the device or host name, in most ++ cases, and under certain circumstances, also at the end. The new syntax is ++ backwards compatible with the previous syntax; thus SET LINE, SET PORT, and ++ SET HOST commands in command files written for C-Kermit 6.0 or earlier still ++ work. The expanded syntax is: ++ ++ { OPEN, SET } { LINE, PORT, HOST } [ switches ] device-or-address [ switches ++ ] ++ ++ The first group of switches is: ++ ++ /NETWORK-TYPE:{TCP/IP,X.25,PIPE,PTY...} ++ When more than one network type is available, this lets you ++ specify the type of network to use for this connection without ++ affecting your global SET NETWORK TYPE. See [382]Section 2.7 ++ about pipes and ptys. ++ ++ /USERID:[string] ++ This switch is equivalent to SET LOGIN USERID. If a string is ++ given, it sent to host during Telnet negotiations; if this ++ switch is given but the string is omitted, no user ID is sent ++ to the host. If this switch is not given, your current LOGIN ++ USERID (\v(userid) value), if any, is sent. Unlike most other ++ switches, this one is "sticky", since the value must persist ++ throughout the session in case the server requests the ID ++ string at a later time. ++ ++ /CONNECT ++ Enter CONNECT mode immediately and automatically after the ++ device or connection is open. On serial devices, however, when ++ CARRIER-WATCH is not OFF, wait up to 1 second for the Carrier ++ Detect signal to appear before trying to connect, to give the ++ device time to react DTR, which might have been off prior to ++ opening the device. ++ ++ /SERVER ++ Enter server mode immediately and automatically after the ++ device or connection is open. Treatment of carrier is the same ++ as for /CONNECT. ++ ++ /WAIT ++ /NOWAIT ++ For Telnet connections only: Like SET TELNET WAIT { ON, OFF }, ++ but applies only to this connection, and in fact applies only ++ when OPENing this connection (which is usually the only place ++ it matters). Typically you would use TELNET /NOWAIT to make a ++ connection to a misbehaving Telnet server that does not reply ++ to negotiations as required by the Telnet protocol definition. ++ ++ Note: /CONNECT and /SERVER switches are not available in the RLOGIN ++ and TELNET commands, since these commands already include an implicit ++ /CONNECT and preclude automatic entry into server mode. ++ ++ The /CONNECT and /SERVER switches are especially useful with "set host ++ *" connections. For example, suppose you want to start a Kermit server ++ on socket 3000 of your TCP host. Normally you would have to give the ++ command: ++ ++ set host * 3000 ++ ++ and then wait for a connection to come in, and only then could you ++ give the SERVER command (or else define a macro to do this, and then ++ execute the macro). Now you can do it in one step: ++ ++ set host /server * 3000 ++ ++ This tells C-Kermit to wait for the connection and then enter server ++ mode once it comes in, no matter how long it takes. Similarly, "set ++ host /conn *" can be used to wait for a "chat" connection to come in. ++ ++ Another set of switches is available in VMS only, for use only with ++ SET LINE: ++ ++ /SHARE ++ Allows the SET LINE device to be opened in shared mode. ++ Normally it makes no sense to open a serial device in shared ++ mode, but it's necessary when C-Kermit is running in an ++ environment such as DECIntact, that opens your job's ++ controlling terminal in such a way that C-Kermit can't open it ++ too, unless it enables SHARE privilege. Note: SHARE privilege ++ is required. ++ ++ /NOSHARE ++ Requires that the SET LINE device not be in use by any other ++ process in order for it to be successfully opened by C-Kermit. ++ If neither /SHARE nor /NOSHARE is specified, /NOSHARE is used. ++ ++ The second group of switches is: ++ ++ /NO-TELNET-INIT ++ Do not send initial Telnet negotiations even if this is a ++ Telnet port. ++ ++ /RAW-SOCKET ++ This is a connection to a raw TCP socket ([383]Section 2.3.5). ++ ++ /RLOGIN ++ Use Rlogin protocol even if this is not an Rlogin port. ++ ++ /TELNET ++ Send initial Telnet negotiations even if this is not a Telnet ++ port. ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0 and K95 1.1.19, the TELNET command includes an ++ implicit /TELNET switch. So if you TELNET to a non-TELNET port, Kermit ++ sends initial Telnet negotiations. This makes sense, since that's what ++ "telnet" means. ++ ++ If you want to make a connection to a non-Telnet port without sending ++ initial Telnet negotiations, use: ++ ++ set host [ /connect ] name-or-address port ++ ++ or: ++ ++ telnet name-or-address port /no-telnet-init ++ ++ Additional switches might be added in the future; type "set host ?" or ++ "set line ?" to see a current list. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1. Dialing ++ ++ Automatic redialing is illegal or restricted in many countries, so ++ until C-Kermit 7.0, it was disabled by default, i.e. until a SET DIAL ++ RETRIES command was given. In C-Kermit 7.0, if no SET DIAL RETRIES ++ command has been given, a default is picked dynamically at DIAL time ++ based on the calling country code, if known. At this writing, the only ++ country code known to have no restrictions on automatic redialing is ++ 1. So in this case a limit of 10 is chosen; otherwise 1. If you have ++ not given an explicit SET DIAL RETRIES command, SHOW DIAL shows the ++ value as "(auto)", and then the value actually used is shown when you ++ give the DIAL command. ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, automatic redialing is automatically canceled if ++ the call could not be placed because no dialtone was detected. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.1. The Dial Result Message ++ ++ If DIAL DISPLAY is not ON, the "Call complete" message now shows the ++ modem's call result message, for example: ++ ++ Dialing: ... ++ Call complete: "CONNECT 31200/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS" ++ ++ The exact format and contents of this message, of course, depends on ++ the make, model, and configuration of your modem, so use your modem ++ manual to interpret it. The call result message is also available in ++ C-Kermit's \v(dialresult) variable. ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo \v(dialresult) ++ CONNECT 31200/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS ++ C-Kermit> echo Speed = \fword(\v(dialresult),2) ++ Speed = 31200 ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Suppose your modem reports the modulation speed as shown above and you ++ want to ensure your call is completed at (say) 24000 bps or more. You ++ can use a little macro to do the job: ++ ++define HSDIAL { ; High Speed DIAL ++ local \%s ++ if < \v(argc) 1 if not def \v(dialnumber) end 1 Usage: \%0 number ++ set dial retries 100 ++ set dial interval 1 ++ while true { ++ dial \%* ++ if fail end 1 DIAL failed. ++ asg \%s \fword(\v(dialresult),2) ++ if def \%s if numeric \%s if not < \%s 24000 break ++ } ++} ++ ++ (See [384]Section 7.5 about the \%* variable.) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.2. Long-Distance Dialing Changes ++ ++ Due to the glut of cell phones, pagers, fax machines, ISPs, etc, area ++ codes and dialing rules are changing all the time. In the North ++ American Numbering Plan (NANP) countries (USA, Canada, etc), area ++ codes are split or overlayed with increasing frequency, and 10- and ++ 11-digit dialing is gradually becoming the norm for local calls. ++ Changes are occurring In Europe, too, partly for these reasons and ++ partly because of some new EC rules. ++ ++ In France, effective 18 October 1996, all calls, even local ones, must ++ be dialed with an area code. French area codes are presently 1-digit ++ numbers, 1-6, and the long-distance dialing prefix is 0. All calls ++ within France are considered long distance and begin with 01, 02, ..., ++ 06. ++ ++ Effective 1 May 1997, all calls within the US state of Maryland, even ++ local ones, must be dialed with an area code but without the ++ long-distance prefix -- this is the now widely-known North American ++ phenomenon of "ten digit dialing". The same is happening elsewhere -- ++ many cities in Florida adopted 10-digit dialing in 1998. ++ ++ In Italy beginning 19 June 1998, all calls to fixed (as opposed to ++ mobile) numbers must be prefixed by 0. When calling into Italy from ++ outside, the 0 must follow the country code (39). Calls to cell ++ phones, however, must be placed without the 0. Then on 29 December ++ 2000, the 0 will become a 4 (for calling fixed numbers) and a prefix ++ of 3 must used for calling mobile phones. More info at: ++ http://www.telecomitalia.it/npnn/. ++ ++ In Spain, effective 4 April 1998, with hard cutover on 18 July 1998, ++ all calls within the country must be dialed with 9 digits, and all ++ calls from outside Spain must also be dialed with 9 digits (after the ++ country code, 34). The new 9-digit numbers all begin with "9". More ++ info at: [385]http://www.telefonica.es/cambiodenumeracion/ ++ ++ Several new dialing features and commands have been added in version ++ 6.1 and 7.0 to address these changes. ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0 and Kermit 95 1.1.11 and earlier handle the French ++ situation via a reasonable subterfuge (setting the local area code to ++ a nonexistent one), but did not handle "ten-digit dialing" well at ++ all; the recommended technique was to change the long-distance dialing ++ prefix to nothing, but this defeated Kermit's "list numbers for one ++ name" feature when the numbers were in different locations. For ++ example: ++ ++ set dial ld-prefix ++ dial onlineservice ++ ++ where "onlineservice" is a dialing directory entry name corresponding ++ to entries that are in (say) Maryland as well as other states, would ++ not correctly dial the numbers not in Maryland. ++ ++ A new command lets you specify a list of area codes to be considered ++ local, except that the area code must be dialed: ++ ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES [ areacode [ areacode [ areacode [ ... ] ] ] ] ++ The list may include up to 32 area codes. If a number is called ++ whose area code is in this list, it is dialed WITHOUT the ++ long-distance prefix, but WITH the area code. ++ ++ So in Maryland, which (last time we looked) has two area codes, 410 ++ and 301, the setup would be: ++ ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES 410 301 ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ SET DIAL LD-PREFIX 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 301 ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES 410 301 <-- Area codes in 10-digit dialing region ++ DIAL +1 (301) 765-4321 <-- Dials 3017654321 (local with area code) ++ DIAL +1 (410) 765-4321 <-- Dials 4107654321 (local with area code) ++ DIAL +1 (212) 765-4321 <-- Dials 12127654321 (long distance) ++ ++ The SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES command does not replace the SET DIAL ++ AREA-CODE command. The latter specifies the area code you are dialing ++ from. If the called number is in the same area code, then the area ++ code is dialed if it is also in the LC-AREA-CODES list, and it is not ++ dialed otherwise. So if "301" had not appeared in the LC-AREA-CODES ++ list in the previous example: ++ ++ SET DIAL LD-PREFIX 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 301 ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES 410 <-- Area codes in 10-digit dialing region ++ DIAL +1 (301) 765-4321 <-- Dials 7654321 (local) ++ DIAL +1 (410) 765-4321 <-- Dials 4107654321 (local with area code) ++ DIAL +1 (212) 765-4321 <-- Dials 12127654321 (long distance) ++ ++ The new Kermit versions also add a Local Call Prefix and Local Call ++ Suffix, in case you have any need for it. These are added to the ++ beginning and of local phone numbers (i.e. numbers that are not ++ long-distance or international). Examples: ++ ++ SET DIAL LD-PREFIX 1 ++ SET DIAL LC-PREFIX 9 ++ SET DIAL LC-SUFFIX * ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES 410 <-- Area codes in 10-digit dialing region ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 301 ++ DIAL +1 (301) 765-4321 <-- Dials 97654321* (local) ++ DIAL +1 (410) 765-4321 <-- Dials 94107654321* (local with area code) ++ DIAL +1 (212) 765-4321 <-- Dials 12127654321 (long distance) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.3. Forcing Long-Distance Dialing ++ ++ Suppose a number is in your country and area, but for some reason you ++ need to dial it long-distance anyway (as is always the case in ++ France). There have always been various ways to handle this: ++ ++ 1. Temporarily set your area code to a different (or nonexistent or ++ impossible) one (but this required knowledge of which area codes ++ were nonexistent or impossible in each country). ++ 2. Dial the number literally instead of using the portable format, ++ but this defeats the purpose of the portable dialing directory. ++ ++ Now there is also a new command that, very simply, can force ++ long-distance dialing: ++ ++ SET DIAL FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE { ON, OFF } ++ If a call is placed to a portable phone number within the same ++ country code as the calling number, it is dialed with the ++ long-distance prefix and the area code if FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE ++ is ON. If OFF, the regular rules and procedures apply. ++ ++ Example (France): ++ ++ SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 33 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 6 ++ SET DIAL FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE ON ++ ++ (In fact, SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 33 automatically sets DIAL ++ FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE ON...) ++ ++ Example (USA, for a certain type of reverse-charge calling in which ++ the called number must always be fully specified): ++ ++ SET DIAL PREFIX 18002666328$ ; 1-800-COLLECT ++ SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 212 ++ SET DIAL FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE ON ++ ++ Example (Toronto, where calls to exchange 976 within area code 416 ++ must be dialed as long distance, even when you are dialing from area ++ code 416): ++ ++ SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 416 ++ SET DIAL FORCE-LONG-DISTANCE ON ++ DIAL +1 (416) 976-xxxx ++ ++ If dialing methods were consistent and sensible, of course it would be ++ possible to always dial every domestic call as if it were long ++ distance. But in many locations this doesn't work or if it does, it ++ costs extra. The following macro can be used for dialing any given ++ number with forced long-distance format: ++ ++ define LDIAL { ++ local \%x ++ set dial force-long-distance on ++ dial \%* ++ asg \%x \v(success) ++ set dial force-long-distance off ++ end \%x ++ } ++ ++ (See [386]Section 7.5 about the \%* variable.) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.4. Exchange-Specific Dialing Decisions ++ ++ This applies mainly to the North American Numbering Plan (NANP). Refer ++ to the section "Alternative notations" in [387]Using C-Kermit 2nd ++ Edition, pages 106-107, and the story about Toronto on page 110. Using ++ the new LC-AREA-CODES list, we can address the problem by treating the ++ exchange as part of the area code: ++ ++ SET DIAL LD-PREFIX 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 416 ++ SET DIAL LC-AREA-CODES 905276 ++ DIAL +1 416 765 4321 <-- 7654321 (local) ++ DIAL +1 905 276 4321 <-- 9052764321 (local with area code) ++ DIAL +1 905 528 4321 <-- 19055284321 (long distance) ++ ++ The same technique can be used in Massachusetts (story at top of page ++ 111) and in any other place where dialing to some exchanges within a ++ particular area code is local, but to others in the same area code is ++ long distance. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.5. Cautions about Cheapest-First Dialing ++ ++ Kermit does not maintain a knowledge base of telephony information; it ++ only provides the tools to let you enter a phone number in a standard ++ format and dial it correctly from any location in most cases. ++ ++ In particular, Kermit does not differentiate the charging method from ++ the dialing method. If a call that is DIALED as long-distance (e.g. ++ from 212 to 718 in country code 1) is not CHARGED as long distance, we ++ have no way of knowing that without keeping a matrix of charging ++ information for every area-code combination within every country, and ++ any such matrix would be obsolete five minutes after it was ++ constructed. Thus, "cheapest-first" sorting is only as reliable as our ++ assumption that the charging method follows the dialing method. A good ++ illustration would be certain online services that have toll-free ++ dialup numbers which they charge you a premium (in your online service ++ bill) for using. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.6. Blind Dialing (Dialing with No Dialtone) ++ ++ C-Kermit's init string for Hayes-like modems generally includes an X4 ++ command to enable as many result codes as possible, so that Kermit can ++ react appropriately to different failure reasons. One of the result ++ codes that X4 enables is "NO DIALTONE". A perhaps not obvious side ++ effect of enabling this result code that the modem must hear dialtone ++ before it will dial. ++ ++ It is becoming increasingly necessary to force a modem to dial even ++ though it does not hear a dialtone on the phone line; for example, ++ with PBXs that have strange dialtones, or with phone systems in ++ different countries, or with ISDN phones, etc. This is called "blind ++ dialing". ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 has two new commands to cope with this situation: ++ ++ SET DIAL IGNORE-DIALTONE { ON, OFF } ++ OFF (the default) means to tell the modem to wait for dialtone ++ before dialing. ON means to enable "blind dialing", i.e. tell ++ the modem NOT to wait for dialtone before dialing. Generally ++ this is accomplished by sending ATX3 to the modem just prior to ++ dialing. SET MODEM TYPE xxx and then SHOW MODEM displays ++ Kermit's built-in "ignore dialtone" command. ++ ++ SET DIAL COMMAND IGNORE-DIALTONE text ++ This lets you change the built-in ignore-dialtone command (such ++ as ATX3) to whatever you choose, in case the built-in one does ++ not work, or another command works better. ++ ++ Notes: ++ 1. The ignore-dialtone command is not sent unless SET DIAL ++ IGNORE-DIALTONE is ON. ++ 2. The ATX3 command generally disables not only NO DIALTONE, but also ++ BUSY. So this will prevent Kermit from detecting when the line is ++ busy. This is a property of the modem, not of Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.7. Trimming the Dialing Dialog ++ ++ The command: ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND action [ command ] ++ ++ is used to override Kermit's built-in modem commands for each action, ++ for each kind of modem in its internal database. If you include a ++ command, this is used instead of the built-in one. If you omit the ++ command, this restores the original built-in command. ++ ++ If you want to omit the command altogether, so Kermit doesn't send the ++ command at all, or wait for a response, use: ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND action {} ++ ++ That is, specify a pair of empty braces as the command, for example: ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND ERROR-CORRECTION ON {} ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.8. Controlling the Dialing Speed ++ ++ The rate at which characters are sent to the modem during dialing is ++ normally controlled by the built-in modem database. You might want to ++ override this if Kermit seems to be dialing too slowly, or it is ++ sending characters to the modem faster than the modem handle them. A ++ new command was added for this in C-Kermit 7.0: ++ ++ SET DIAL PACING number ++ Specifies the number of milliseconds (thousandths of seconds) ++ to pause between each character when sending commands to the ++ modem during DIAL or ANSWER command execution. 0 means no pause ++ at all, -1 (the default) or any other negative number means to ++ use the value from the database. Any number greater than 0 is ++ the number of milliseconds to pause. ++ ++ HINT: You might also need to control the rate at which the modem ++ generates Touch Tones during dialing, for example when sending a ++ numeric page. There are two ways to do this. One way is to insert ++ pause characters into the dialing string. For modems that use the AT ++ command set, the pause character is comma (,) and causes a 2-second ++ pause. On most modems, you can use the S8 register to change the pause ++ interval caused by comma in the dialing string. The other way is to ++ set your modem's tone generation interval, if it has a command for ++ that. Most AT-command-set modems use S11 for this; the value is in ++ milliseconds. For example on USR modems: ++ ++ ATS11=200 ++ ++ selects an interval of 200 milliseconds to separate each dialing tone. ++ ++ Hint: To add S-Register settings or other commands to your dialing ++ procedure, use the new SET MODEM COMMAND PREDIAL-INIT command ++ ([388]Section 2.2.2). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.9. Pretesting Phone Number Conversions ++ ++ The LOOKUP command now accepts telephone numbers as well as ++ directory-entry names, for example: ++ ++ LOOKUP +1 (212) 7654321 ++ ++ When given a phone number, LOOKUP prints the result of converting the ++ phone number for dialing under the current dialing rules. For example, ++ if my country code is 1 and my area code is 212, and I am dialing out ++ from a PBX whose outside-line prefix is "93,": ++ ++ C-Kermit> lookup +1 (212) 7654321 ++ +1 (212) 7654321 => 93,7654321 ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ You can also use the \fdialconvert(phone-number) function ++ ([389]Section 2.1.11) to do this programmatically: ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo "\fdialconvert(+1 (212) 7654321)" ++ "93,7654321" ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ So the new LOOKUP behaves as follows: ++ ++ LOOKUP portable-format-phone-number ++ Displays how the number would actually be dialed Sets FAILURE ++ if there was a conversion error, otherwise SUCCESS. ++ ++ LOOKUP literal-format-phone-number ++ Displays the same literal-format-phone-number Always sets ++ SUCCESS. ++ ++ LOOKUP dialing-directory-name ++ Displays all matching entries and converts portable phone ++ numbers. Sets SUCCESS if at least one entry was found, ++ otherwise FAILURE. ++ ++ LOOKUP =anything ++ Displays "=anything" and sets SUCCESS. ++ ++ There is, at present, no programmatic way to fetch numbers from the ++ dialing directory. This will be considered for a future release. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.10. Greater Control over Partial Dialing ++ ++ The following rules now apply to partial dialing: ++ ++ * Phone number transformations based on country and area code, ++ application of prefixes, etc, are performed only on the first ++ PDIAL. ++ * Each PDIAL argument is looked up in the dialing directory, so it ++ is possible have directory entries for pieces of phone numbers or ++ other information. ++ * Suffixes are not applied automatically, since there is no way for ++ C-Kermit to know in which PDIAL segment you want them to be ++ applied. ++ ++ However, the suffix that *would* have been applied, based on the ++ dialing rules that were invoked when processing the first PDIAL ++ command, is stored in the variable: ++ ++ \v(dialsuffix) ++ ++ which you can include in any subsequent PDIAL or DIAL commands. ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ pdial {\m(my_long_distance_pager_number_part_1)} ++ pdial {\m(my_long_distance_pager_number_part_2)} ++ pdial {\v(dialsuffix)} ++ pdial {\m(my_long_distance_pager_number_part_3)} ++ pdial {@\m(numeric_pager_code)#} ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.11. New DIAL-related Variables and Functions ++ ++ \fdialconvert(s) ++ s is a phone number in either literal or portable format (not a ++ dialing directory entry name). The function returns the dial ++ string that would actually be used by the DIAL command when ++ dialing from the current location, after processing country ++ code, area code, and other SET DIAL values, and should be the ++ same as the result of LOOKUP when given a telephone number. ++ ++ \v(dialsuffix) ++ Contains the suffix, if any, that was applied in the most ++ recent DIAL command, or the suffix that would have been applied ++ in the most recent PDIAL command. Use this variable to send the ++ dial suffix at any desired point in a PDIAL sequence. ++ ++ \v(dialtype) ++ A number indicating the type of call that was most recently ++ placed. Can be used after a normal DIAL command, or after the ++ first PDIAL command in a PDIAL sequence. Values are: ++ ++ -2: Unknown because TAPI handled the phone number translation. ++ -1: Unknown because some kind of error occured. ++ 0: Internal within PBX. ++ 1: Toll-free. ++ 2: Local within calling area. ++ 3: Unknown (e.g. because a literal-format phone number was given). ++ 4: Long distance within country. ++ 5: International ++ ++ \v(dialcount) ++ The current value of the DIAL retry counter, for use in a DIAL ++ macro ([390]Section 2.1.13). ++ ++ \v(d$px) ++ PBX Exchange (see [391]Section 2.1.12). ++ ++ Other dial-related variables, already documented in [392]Using ++ C-Kermit (or other sections of this document, e.g. [393]Section ++ 2.1.1), include \v(dialnumber), \v(dialstatus), etc. A convenient way ++ to display all of them is: ++ ++ show variable dial ; hint: abbreviate "sho var dial" ++ ++ This shows the values of all the variables whose names start with ++ "dial". Also "show variable d$" (to show the \v(d$...) variables). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.12. Increased Flexibility of PBX Dialing ++ ++ Refer to [394]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition, pages 107-108. Recall that ++ three commands are needed to configure C-Kermit for dialing from a ++ PBX: ++ ++ SET DIAL PBX-EXCHANGE number ++ SET DIAL PBX-INSIDE-PREFIX number ++ SET DIAL PBX-OUTSIDE-PREFIX number ++ ++ Unfortunately, this model does not accommodate PBXs that have more ++ than one exchange. For example our PBX at Columbia University (which ++ must handle more than 10,000 phones) has 853-xxxx and 854-xxxx ++ exchanges. ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 7.0, the SET DIAL PBX-EXCHANGE command accepts a ++ list of exchanges, e.g.: ++ ++ SET DIAL PBX-EXCHANGE 853 854 ++ ++ (multiple exchanges are separated by spaces, not commas). ++ ++ So now when dialing a portable-format number that has the same country ++ and area codes as those of your dialing location, C-Kermit compares ++ the exchange of the dialed number with each number in the PBX Exchange ++ list (rather than with a single PBX Exchange number, as it did ++ formerly) to determine whether this is an internal PBX number or an ++ external call. If it is an external call, then the PBX Outside Prefix ++ is applied, and then the normal dialing rules for local or ++ long-distance calls. ++ ++ If it is an inside call, the exchange is replaced by the PBX Inside ++ Prefix. But if the PBX has more than one exchange, a single fixed PBX ++ Inside Prefix is probably not sufficient. For example, at Columbia ++ University, we must dial 3-xxxx for an internal call to 853-xxxx, but ++ 4-xxxx for a call to 854-xxxx. That is, the inside prefix is the final ++ digit of the exchange we are dialing. For this reason, C-Kermit 7.0 ++ provides a method to determine the inside prefix dynamically at ++ dialing time, consisting of a new variable and new syntax for the SET ++ DIAL PBX-INSIDE-PREFIX command: ++ ++ \v(d$px) ++ This variable contains the exchange that was matched when a PBX ++ internal call was detected. For example, if the PBX exchange ++ list is "853 854" and a call is placed to +1 (212) 854-9999, ++ \v(d$px) is set to 854. ++ ++ SET DIAL PBX-INSIDE-PREFIX \fxxx(...) ++ If the PBX Inside Prefix is defined to be a function, its ++ evaluation is deferred until dialing time. Normally, this would ++ be a string function having \v(d$px) as an operand. Of course, ++ you can still specify a constant string, as before. ++ ++ So given the following setup: ++ ++ SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 1 ++ SET DIAL AREA-CODE 212 ++ SET DIAL PBX-OUTSIDE-PREFIX 93, ++ SET DIAL PBX-EXCHANGE 853 854 ++ SET DIAL PBX-INSIDE-PREFIX \fright(\v(d$px),1) ++ ++ The following numbers give the results indicated: ++ ++ Number Result ++ +1 (212) 854-9876 4-9876 ++ +1 (212) 853-1234 3-1234 ++ +1 (212) 765-4321 93,765-4321 ++ +1 (333) 765-4321 93,1333765-4321 ++ ++ Furthermore, the K_PBX_XCH environment variable may now be set to a ++ list of exchanges to automatically initialize C-Kermit's PBX exchange ++ list, for example (in UNIX ksh or bash): ++ ++ export K_PBX_XCH="853 854" ++ ++ (Quotes required because of the space.) Of course, this variable can ++ also be set to a single exchange, as before: ++ ++ export K_PBX_XCH=853 ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.13. The DIAL macro - Last-Minute Phone Number Conversions ++ ++ After a DIAL or LOOKUP command is given, a list of phone numbers is ++ assembled from the dialing directory (if any), with all ++ location-dependent conversion rules applied as described in Chapter 5 ++ of [395]Using C-Kermit. ++ ++ However, additional conversions might still be required at the last ++ minute based on local or ephemeral conditions. So that you can have ++ the final word on the exact format of the dial string, C-Kermit 7.0 ++ lets you pass the converted string through a macro of your own design ++ for final processing before dialing. The relevant command is: ++ ++ SET DIAL MACRO [ name ] ++ Specifies the name of a macro to be run on each phone number ++ after all built-in conversions have been applied, just before ++ the number is dialed. If no name is given, no macro is run. The ++ phone number, as it would have been dialed if there were no ++ dial macro, is passed to the macro. ++ ++ The dial macro can do anything at all (except start a file transfer). ++ However, the normal use for the macro would be to modify the phone ++ number. For this reason the phone number is passed to the macro as ++ argument number 1 (\%1). To cause a modified number to be dialed, the ++ macro should terminate with a RETURN statement specifying a return ++ value. To leave the number alone, the macro should simply end. ++ Example: ++ ++ define xxx return 10108889999$\%1 ++ set dial macro xxx ++ dial xyzcorp ++ ++ This defines a DIAL MACRO called xxx, which puts an access code on the ++ front of the number. Another example might be: ++ ++ def xxx if equal "\v(modem)" "hayes-1200" return \freplace(\%1,$,{,,,,,}) ++ set dial macro xxx ++ dial xyzcorp ++ ++ which replaces any dollar-sign in the dial string by a series of five ++ commas, e.g. because this particular modem does not support the "wait ++ for bong" feature (remember that commas that are to be included ++ literally in function arguments must be enclosed in braces to ++ distinguish them from the commas that separate the arguments) and when ++ the IF condition is not satisfied, the macro does not return a value, ++ and so the number is not modified. Then when a DIAL command is given ++ referencing a dialing directory entry, "xyzcorp". The macro is ++ automatically applied to each matching number. ++ ++ Numerous dial-, modem-, communications-, and time-related variables ++ are available for decision making your dial macro. Type SHOW VARIABLES ++ for a list. Of particular interest is the \v(dialcount) variable, ++ which tells how many times the DIAL command gone through its retry ++ loop: 1 on the first try, 2 on the second, 3 on the third, and so on, ++ and the \v(dialresult) and \v(dialstatus) variables. ++ ++ Here are some other applications for the DIAL MACRO (from users): ++ ++ * Phone numbers in the dialing directory are formatted with '-' for ++ readability, but some modems don't like the hyphens, so the DIAL ++ macro is used to remove them before dialing; e.g ++ 0090-123-456-78-99 becomes 00901234567899: "def xxx return ++ \freplace(\%1,-)". ++ * To set some specific modem (or other) options depending on the ++ called customer or telephone number. ++ * Choosing the most appropriate provider based on (e.g.) time of ++ day, or cycling through a list of providers in case some providers ++ might be busy. ++ ++ To illustrate the final item, suppose you have a choice among many ++ phone service providers; the provider is chosen by dialing an access ++ code before the number. Different providers might be better (e.g. ++ cheaper) for certain times of day or days of the week, or for dialing ++ certain locations; you can use the DIAL macro to add the access for ++ the most desirable provider. ++ ++ Similarly, when the same number might be reached through multiple ++ providers, it's possible that one provider might not be able to ++ complete the call, but another one can. In that case, you can use the ++ DIAL macro to switch providers each time through the DIAL loop -- ++ that's where the \v(dialcount) variable comes in handy. ++ ++ The following command can be used to debug the DIAL macro: ++ ++ SET DIAL TEST { ON, OFF } ++ Normally OFF, so the DIAL command actually dials. When ON, the ++ DIAL command performs all lookups and number conversions, and ++ then goes through the number list and retry loop, but instead ++ of actually dialing, lists the numbers it would have called if ++ none of the DIAL attempts succeeded (or more precisely, every ++ number was always busy). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.14. Automatic Tone/Pulse Dialing Selection ++ ++ SET DIAL METHOD { AUTO, DEFAULT, PULSE, TONE } ++ Chooses the dialing method for subsequent calls. ++ ++ Prior to version 7.0, C-Kermit's DIAL METHOD was DEFAULT by default, ++ meaning it does not specify a dialing method to the modem, but relies ++ on the modem to have an appropriate default dialing method set. So, ++ for example, when using Hayes compatible modems, the dial string would ++ be something like ATD7654321, rather than ATDT7654321 or ATDP7654321. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0 and K95 1.1.19, the dial method can be set from the ++ environment variable: ++ ++ K_DIAL_METHOD ++ ++ when Kermit starts. The values can be TONE, PULSE, or DEFAULT, e.g. ++ (UNIX): ++ ++ set K_DIAL_METHOD=TONE; export K_DIAL_METHOD ++ ++ In the absence of a K_DIAL_METHOD definition, the new default SET DIAL ++ METHOD is AUTO rather than DEFAULT. When DIAL METHOD is AUTO and the ++ local country code is known, then if tone dialing is universally ++ available in the corresponding area, tone dialing is used; if dialing ++ from a location where pulse dialing is mandatory, pulse dialing is ++ used. ++ ++ The "tone country" and "pulse country" lists are preloaded according ++ to our knowledge at the time of release. You can see their contents in ++ the SHOW DIAL listing. You can change the lists with: ++ ++ SET DIAL TONE-COUNTRIES [ cc [ cc [ ... ] ] ] ++ Replaces the current TONE-COUNTRIES list with the one given. ++ Each cc is a country code; separate them with spaces (not ++ commas). Example: ++ ++ set dial tone-countries 1 358 44 46 49 ++ ++ If no country codes are given, the current list, if any, is ++ removed, in which case SET DIAL METHOD AUTO is equivalent to ++ SET DIAL METHOD DEFAULT. ++ ++ SET DIAL PULSE-COUNTRIES [ cc [ cc [ ... ] ] ] ++ Replaces the current PULSE-COUNTRIES list with the one give. ++ Syntax and operation is like SET DIAL TONE-COUNTRIES. ++ ++ If the same country code appears in both lists, Pulse takes ++ precedence. ++ ++ The SET DIAL TONE- and PULSE-COUNTRIES commands perform no ++ verification whatsoever on the cc's, since almost any syntax might be ++ legal in some settings. Furthermore, there is no facility to edit the ++ lists; you can only replace the whole list. However, since the only ++ purpose of these lists is to establish a basis for picking tone or ++ pulse dialing automatically, all you need to override the effect of ++ the list is to set a specific dialing method with SET DIAL METHOD TONE ++ or SET DIAL METHOD PULSE. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.15. Dial-Modifier Variables ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, dial modifiers are available in the following ++ variables: ++ ++ \v(dm_lp) Long pause ++ \v(dm_sp) Short pause ++ \v(dm_pd) Pulse dial ++ \v(dm_td) Tone dial ++ \v(dm_wa) Wait for answer ++ \v(dm_wd) Wait for dialtone ++ \v(dm_rc) Return to command mode ++ ++ You can use these in your dial strings in place of hardwired modifiers ++ like "@", ",", etc, for increased portability of scripts. Example: ++ ++ C-Kermit>set modem type usrobotics ++ C-Kermit>sho variables dm ++ \v(dm_lp) = , ++ \v(dm_sp) = / ++ \v(dm_pd) = P ++ \v(dm_td) = T ++ \v(dm_wa) = @ ++ \v(dm_wd) = W ++ \v(dm_rc) = ; ++ C-Kermit>exit ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.1.16. Giving Multiple Numbers to the DIAL Command ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the only way to give a DIAL command a list of ++ phone numbers to try until one answers was to create a dialing ++ directory that had multiple entries under the same name, and then use ++ that entry name in the DIAL command. Now a list of numbers can be ++ given to the DIAL command directly in the following format: ++ ++ dial {{number1}{number2}{number3}...} ++ ++ This is the same list format used by SEND /EXCEPT: and other commands ++ that allow a list where normally a single item is given. Restrictions ++ on this form of the DIAL command are: ++ ++ * The first two braces must be adjacent; spacing is optional ++ thereafter. ++ * Each number must be an actual number to dial, not a dialing ++ directory entry. ++ * Dialing directory entries may not contain number lists in this ++ format. ++ ++ In all other respects, the numbers are treated as if they had been ++ fetched from the dialing directory; they can be in literal or portable ++ format, etc. Example: ++ ++ dial {{7654321} {+1 (212) 5551212} { 1-212-5556789 }} ++ ++ The list can be any length at all, within reason. ++ ++ This feature is especially handy for use with the K95 Dialer, allowing ++ a list of phone numbers to be specified in the Telephone Number box ++ without having to set up or reference a separate dialing directory. ++ ++ You can also use it to add commonly-dialed sequences as variables in ++ your C-Kermit customization file, e.g.: ++ ++ define work {{7654321}{7654322}{7654323}} ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ dial {\m(work)} ++ ++ (the variable name must be enclosed in braces). ++ ++ Or more simply: ++ ++ define work dial {{7654321}{7654322}{7654323}} ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ work ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.2. Modems ++ ++ 2.2.1. New Modem Types ++ ++ Since C-Kermit 6.0: ++ ++ atlas-newcom-33600ifxC Atlas/Newcom 33600 ++ att-keepintouch AT&T KeepinTouch PCMCIA V.32bis Card Modem ++ att-1900-stu-iii AT&T Secure Data STU-III Model 1900 ++ att-1910-stu-iii AT&T Secure Data STU-III Model 1910 ++ bestdata Best Data ++ cardinal Cardinal V.34 MVP288X series. ++ compaq Compaq Data+Fax (e.g. in Presario) ++ fujitsu Fujitsu Fax/Modem Adapter ++ generic-high-speed Any modern error-correcting data-compressing modem ++ itu-t-v25ter/v250 ITU-T (CCITT) V.25ter (V.250) standard command set ++ megahertz-att-v34 Megahertz AT&T V.34 ++ megahertz-xjack Megahertz X-Jack ++ motorola-codex Motorola Codex 326X Series ++ motorola-montana Motorola Montana ++ mt5634zpx Multitech MT5634ZPX ++ rockwell-v90 Rockwell V.90 56K ++ rolm-244pc Siemens/Rolm 244PC (AT command set) ++ rolm-600-series Siemens/Rolm 600 Series (AT command set) ++ spirit-ii QuickComm Spirit II ++ suprasonic SupraSonic V288+ ++ supra-express-v90 Supra Express V.90 ++ ++ One of the new types, "generic-high-speed" needs a bit of explanation. ++ This type was added to easily handle other types that are not ++ explicitly covered, without going through the bother of adding a ++ complete user-defined modem type. This one works for modern modems ++ that use the AT command set, on the assumption that all the default ++ ("factory") settings of the modem (a) are appropriate for Kermit, (b) ++ include error correction, data compression, and speed buffering; and ++ (c) are recallable with the command AT&F. ++ ++ If the command to recall your modem's profile is not AT&F, use the SET ++ MODEM COMMAND INIT-STRING command to specify the appropriate modem ++ command. The default init-string is AT&F\13 (that is, AT, ampersand, ++ F, and then carriage return); a survey of about 20 modern modem types ++ shows they all support this, but they might mean different things by ++ it. For example, the USR Sportster or Courier needs AT&F1 (not AT&F, ++ which is equivalent to AT&F0, which recalls an inappropriate profile), ++ so for USR modems: ++ ++ set modem type generic-high-speed ++ set modem command init AT&F1\13 ++ ++ Of course, USR modems already have their own built-in modem type. But ++ if you use this one instead, it will dial faster because it has fewer ++ commands to give to the modem; in that sense "&F1" is like a macro ++ that bundles numerous commands into a single one. See your modem ++ manual for details about factory profiles and commands to recall them. ++ ++ WARNING: Do not use the generic-high-speed modem type in operating ++ systems like VMS where hardware flow control is not available, at ++ least not unless you change the init string from AT&F\13 to something ++ else that enables local Xon/Xoff or other appropriate type of flow ++ control. ++ ++ Also see [396]Section 2.1.7 for additional hints about making dialing ++ go faster. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.2.2. New Modem Controls ++ ++ SET MODEM CAPABILITIES list ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, this command automatically turns MODEM ++ SPEED-MATCHING OFF if SB (Speed Buffering) is in the list, and ++ turns it ON if SB is absent. ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND PREDIAL-INIT [ text ] ++ Commands to be sent to the modem just prior to dialing. ++ Normally none. ++ ++ SET MODEM SPEAKER { ON, OFF } ++ Determines whether modem speaker is on or off while call is ++ being placed. ON by default. Note: This command does not ++ provide fine-grained control over when the speaker is on or ++ off. Normally, ON means while the call is being placed, until ++ the point at which carrier is successfully established. If your ++ modem has a different speaker option that you want to choose, ++ then use the SET MODEM COMMAND SPEAKER ON text command to ++ specify this option. ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND SPEAKER { ON, OFF } [ text ] ++ Specify or override the commands to turn your modem's speaker ++ on and off. ++ ++ SET MODEM VOLUME { LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH } ++ When MODEM SPEAKER is on, select volume. Note: In some modems, ++ especially internal ones, these commands have no effect; this ++ is a limitation of the particular modem, not of Kermit. ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND VOLUME { LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH } [ text ] ++ Specify or override the commands to set your modem's speaker ++ volume. ++ ++ SET MODEM COMMAND IGNORE-DIALTONE [ text ] ++ The command to enable blind dialing ([397]Section 2.1.6). ++ ++ SET MODEM ESCAPE-CHARACTER code ++ Has been augmented to allow codes of 0 or less: < 0 means the ++ escape mechanism is disabled. = 0 means to use (restore) the ++ default value from the modem database. > 0 and < 128 is a ++ literal value to be used instead of the default one. > 127 ++ means the escape mechanism is disabled. This affects "modem ++ hangup". When the escape mechanism is disabled, but SET MODEM ++ HANGUP-METHOD is MODEM-COMMAND, it sends the hangup command ++ immediately, without the +++ business first. This ++ is useful (for example) when sending lots of numeric pages, a ++ process in which never we go online, and so never need to ++ escape back. Eliminating the unnecessary pauses and escape ++ sequence allows a lot more pages to be sent per unit time. ++ ++ Recall that C-Kermit can dial modems to which it is connected via ++ TCP/IP (Telnet or Rlogin) as described on page 126 of [398]Using ++ C-Kermit, 2nd Ed. In this case the MODEM HANGUP-METHOD should be ++ MODEM-COMMAND, since RS-232 signals don't work over TCP/IP ++ connections. As noted in the manual, such connections are set up by ++ the following sequence: ++ ++ set host host [ port ] ++ set modem type name ++ dial number ++ ++ But this can cause complications when you use Kermit to switch between ++ serial and TCP/IP connections. In the following sequence: ++ ++ set host name ++ set modem type name ++ set port name ++ ++ the first two commands obey the rules for dialing out over Telnet. ++ However, the SET PORT command requires that Kermit close its current ++ (Telnet) connection before it can open the serial port (since Kermit ++ can only have one connection open at a time). But since a modem type ++ was set after the "set host" command was given, Kermit assumes it is a ++ Telnet dialout connection and so sends the modem's hangup sequence is ++ sent to the Telnet host. To avoid this, close the network connection ++ explicitly before opening the serial one: ++ ++ set host name ++ close ++ set modem type name ++ set port name ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.3. TELNET and RLOGIN ++ ++ For additional background, please also read the [399]TELNET.TXT file, ++ also available on the Web in [400]HTML format. ++ ++ Cautions: ++ ++ * If making a Telnet connection with C-Kermit takes a very long ++ time, like over a minute, whereas the system Telnet program makes ++ the same connection immediately, try including the /NOWAIT switch: ++ C-Kermit> telnet /nowait hostname ++ See [401]TELNET.TXT or [402]TELNET.HTM for details. If it also ++ takes a very long time to make a Telnet connection with system ++ Telnet, then the delay is most likely caused by reverse DNS ++ lookups when your host is not properly registered in DNS. ++ * When supplying numeric IP addresses to C-Kermit or to any other ++ application (regular Telnet, Rlogin, etc), do not include leading ++ 0's in any fields unless you intend for those fields to be ++ interpreted as octal (or hex) numbers. The description of the ++ Internet address interpreter (the sockets library inet_addr() ++ routine) includes these words: ++ ++ All numbers supplied as "parts" in a "." notation may be decimal, ++ octal, or hexadecimal, as specified in the C language (that is, a ++ leading 0x or 0X implies hexadecimal; otherwise, a leading 0 ++ implies octal; otherwise, the number is interpreted as decimal). ++ To illustrate, 128.59.39.2 and 128.059.039.002 are not the same ++ host! Even though most of the fields contain non-octal digits. ++ Using system Telnet (not Kermit): ++ $ telnet 128.059.039.002 ++ Trying 128.49.33.2 ... ++ Of course the same thing happens with Kermit because it uses (as ++ it must) the same system service for resolving network addresses ++ that Telnet, FTP, and all other TCP/IP applications use. ++ * The RLOGIN section on page 123 does not make it clear that you can ++ use the SET TELNET TERMINAL-TYPE command to govern the terminal ++ type that is reported by C-Kermit to the RLOGIN server. ++ * Note that the SET TCP commands described on pages 122-123 might be ++ absent; some platforms that support TCP/IP do not support these ++ particular controls. ++ ++ New commands: ++ ++ TELOPT { AO, AYT, BREAK, CANCEL, EC, EL, EOF, EOR, GA, IP, DMARK, ++ DO, DONT, NOP, SB, SE, SUSP, WILL, WONT } ++ This command was available previously, but supported only DO, ++ DONT, WILL, and WONT. Now it lets you send all the Telnet ++ protocol commands. Note that certain commands do not require a ++ response, and therefore can be used as nondestructive "probes" ++ to see if the Telnet session is still open; e.g.: ++ ++ set host xyzcorp.com ++ ... ++ telopt nop ++ if fail stop 1 Connection lost ++ ++ SET TCP ADDRESS [ ip-address ] ++ Specifies the IP address of the computer that C-Kermit is ++ running on. Normally this is not necessary. The exception would ++ be if your machine has multiple network adapters (physical or ++ virtual) with a different address for each adapter AND you want ++ C-Kermit to use a specific address when making outgoing ++ connections or accepting incoming connections. ++ ++ SET TCP DNS-SERVICE-RECORDS { ON, OFF } ++ Tells C-Kermit whether to try to use DNS SRV records to ++ determine the host and port number upon which to find an ++ advertised service. For example, if a host wants regular Telnet ++ connections redirected to some port other than 23, this feature ++ allows C-Kermit to ask the host which port it should use. Since ++ not all domain servers are set up to answer such requests, this ++ feature is OFF by default. ++ ++ SET TCP REVERSE-DNS-LOOKUP { ON, OFF, AUTO } ++ Tells Kermit whether to perform a reverse DNS lookup on TCP/IP ++ connections. This allows Kermit to determine the actual ++ hostname of the host it is connected to, which is useful for ++ connections to host pools, and is required for Kerberos ++ connections to host pools and for incoming connections. If the ++ other host does not have a DNS entry, the reverse lookup could ++ take a long time (minutes) to fail, but the connection will ++ still be made. Turn this option OFF for speedier connections if ++ you do not need to know exactly which host you are connected to ++ and you are not using Kerberos. AUTO, the default, means the ++ lookup is done on hostnames, but not on numeric IP addresses. ++ ++ SET TELNET WAIT-FOR-NEGOTIATIONS { ON, OFF } ++ Each Telnet option must be fully negotiated either On or Off ++ before the session can continue. This is especially true with ++ options that require sub-negotiations such as Authentication, ++ Encryption, and Kermit; for proper support of these options ++ Kermit must wait for the negotiations to complete. Of course, ++ Kermit has no way of knowing whether a reply is delayed or not ++ coming at all, and so will wait a minute or more for required ++ replies before continuing the session. If you know that ++ Kermit's Telnet partner will not be sending the required ++ replies, you can set this option of OFF to avoid the long ++ timeouts. Or you can instruct Kermit to REFUSE specific options ++ with the SET TELOPT command. ++ ++ SET TELOPT [ { /CLIENT, /SERVER } ] option ++ { ACCEPTED, REFUSED, REQUESTED, REQUIRED } ++ [ { ACCEPTED, REFUSED, REQUESTED, REQUIRED } ] ++ SET TELOPT lets you specify policy requirements for Kermit's ++ handling of Telnet option negotiations. Setting an option is ++ REQUIRED causes Kermit to offer the option to the peer and ++ disconnect if the option is refused. REQUESTED causes Kermit to ++ offer an option to the peer. ACCEPTED results in no offer but ++ Kermit will attempt to negotiate the option if it is requested. ++ REFUSED instructs Kermit to refuse the option if it is ++ requested by the peer. ++ ++ Some options are negotiated in two directions and accept ++ separate policies for each direction; the first keyword applies ++ to Kermit itself, the second applies to Kermit's Telnet ++ partner; if the second keyword is omitted, an appropriate ++ (option-specific) default is applied. You can also include a ++ /CLIENT or /SERVER switch to indicate whether the given ++ policies apply when Kermit is the Telnet client or the Telnet ++ server; if no switch is given, the command applies to the ++ client. ++ ++ Note that some of Kermit's Telnet partners fail to refuse ++ options that they do not recognize and instead do not respond ++ at all. In this case it is possible to use SET TELOPT to ++ instruct Kermit to REFUSE the option before connecting to the ++ problem host, thus skipping the problematic negotiation. ++ ++ Use SHOW TELOPT to view current Telnet Option negotiation ++ settings. SHOW TELNET displays current Telnet settings. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.3.0. Bug Fixes ++ ++ If "set host nonexistent-host" was given (and it properly failed), ++ followed by certain commands like SEND, the original line and modem ++ type were not restored and C-Kermit thought that it still had a ++ network hostname; fixed in 7.0. ++ ++ 2.3.1. Telnet Binary Mode Bug Adjustments ++ ++ SET TELNET BUG BINARY-ME-MEANS-U-TOO { ON, OFF } was added to edit 192 ++ after the book was printed. Also SET TELNET BUG BINARY-U-MEANS-ME-TOO. ++ The default for both is OFF. ON should be used when communicating with ++ a Telnet partner (client or server) that mistakenly believes that ++ telling C-Kermit to enter Telnet binary mode also means that it, too, ++ is in binary mode, contrary to the Telnet specification, which says ++ that binary mode must be negotiated in each direction separately. ++ ++ 2.3.2. VMS UCX Telnet Port Bug Adjustment ++ ++ A new command, SET TCP UCX-PORT-BUG, was added for VMS versions with ++ UCX (DEC TCP/IP), applying only to early versions of UCX, like 2.2 or ++ earlier. If you try to use VMS C-Kermit to make a Telnet connection ++ using a port name (like "telnet", which is used by default), the ++ underlying UCX getservbyname() function might return the service ++ number with its bytes swapped and the connection will fail. If "telnet ++ hostname 23" works, then your version of UCX has this bug and you can ++ put "set tcp ucx-port-bug on" in your CKERMIT.INI file to get around ++ it. ++ ++ 2.3.3. Telnet New Environment Option ++ ++ The TELNET NEW-ENVIRONMENT option ([403]RFC 1572) is supported as 7.0. ++ This option allows the C-Kermit Telnet client to send certain ++ well-known variables to the Telnet server, including USER, PRINTER, ++ DISPLAY, and several others. This feature is enabled by default in ++ Windows and OS/2, disabled by default elsewhere. The command to enable ++ and disable it is: ++ ++ SET TELNET ENVIRONMENT { ON, OFF } ++ ++ When ON, and you Telnet to another computer, you might (or might not) ++ notice that the "login:" or "Username:" prompt does not appear -- ++ that's because your username was sent ahead, in which case the remote ++ system might prompt you only for your password (similar to Rlogin). ++ Use "set telnet environment off" to defeat this feature, particularly ++ in scripts where the dialog must be predictable. You can also use this ++ command to specify or override specific well-known environment ++ variable values: ++ ++ SET TELNET ENVIRONMENT { ACCT,DISPLAY,JOB,PRINTER,SYSTEMTYPE,USER } [ text ] ++ ++ 2.3.4. Telnet Location Option ++ ++ The TELNET LOCATION option ([404]RFC 779) is supported in 7.0. This ++ option allows the C-Kermit Telnet client to send a location string to ++ the server if the server indicates its willingness to accept one. If ++ an environment variable named LOCATION exists at the time C-Kermit ++ starts, its value is used as the location string. If you want to ++ change it, use: ++ ++ SET TELNET LOCATION text ++ ++ If you omit the text from this command, the Telnet location feature is ++ disabled. ++ ++ SET TELNET ENVIRONMENT DISPLAY is used to set the DISPLAY variable ++ that is sent to the host, as well as the the XDISPLAY location. ++ ++ 2.3.5. Connecting to Raw TCP Sockets ++ ++ The SET HOST and TELNET commands now accept an optional switch, ++ /RAW-SOCKET, at the end, only if you first give a host and a port. ++ Example: ++ ++ set host xyzcorp.com 23 /raw-socket ++ set host 128.49.39.2:2000 /raw-socket ++ telnet xyzcorp.com 3000 /raw ++ ++ Without this switch, C-Kermit behaves as a Telnet client when (a) the ++ port is 23 or 1649, or (b) the port is not 513 and the server sent ++ what appeared to be Telnet negotiations -- that is, messages starting ++ with 0xFF (IAC). With this switch, Kermit should treat all incoming ++ bytes as raw data, and will not engage in any Telnet negotiations or ++ NVT CRLF manipulations. This allows transparent operation through ++ (e.g.) raw TCP ports on Cisco terminal servers, through the 'modemd' ++ modem server, etc. ++ ++ 2.3.6. Incoming TCP Connections ++ ++ Accomplished via SET HOST * port, were introduced in C-Kermit 6.0, but ++ for UNIX only. In Version 7.0, they are also available for VMS. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.4. The EIGHTBIT Command ++ ++ EIGHTBIT is simply a shorthand for: SET PARITY NONE, SET TERMINAL ++ BYTESIZE 8, SET COMMAND BYTESIZE 8; that is, a way to set up an 8-bit ++ clean connection in a single command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.5. The Services Directory ++ ++ Chapter 7 of [405]Using C-Kermit does not mention the ULOGIN macro, ++ which is used by our sample services directory, CKERMIT.KND. Unlike ++ UNIXLOGIN, VMSLOGIN, etc, this one is for use with systems that ++ require a user ID but no password. Therefore it doesn't prompt for a ++ password or wait for a password prompt from the remote service. ++ ++ In version 7.0, the CALL macro was changed to not execute a SET MODEM ++ TYPE command if the given modem type was the same as the current one; ++ otherwise the new SET MODEM TYPE command would overwrite any ++ customizations that the user had made to the modem settings. Ditto for ++ SET LINE / SET PORT and SET SPEED. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.6. Closing Connections ++ ++ Until version 7.0, there was never an obvious and general way to close ++ a connection. If a serial connection was open, it could be closed by ++ "set line" or "set port" (giving no device name); if a network ++ connection was open, it could be closed by "set host" (no host name). ++ ++ In version 7.0, a new command closes the connection in an obvious and ++ straightforward way, no matter what the connection type: ++ ++ CLOSE [ CONNECTION ] ++ ++ The CLOSE command was already present, and required an operand such as ++ DEBUG-LOG, WRITE-FILE, etc, and so could never be given by itself. The ++ new CONNECTION operand is now the default operand for CLOSE, so CLOSE ++ by itself closes the connection, if one is open, just as you would ++ expect, especially if you are a Telnet or Ftp user. ++ ++ Also see the description of the new SET CLOSE-ON-DISCONNECT command in ++ [406]Section 2.10. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7. Using C-Kermit with External Communication Programs ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 includes a new ability to create and conduct sessions ++ through other communications programs. Two methods are available: ++ ++ 1. Pty (pseudoterminal): The external program is run on a ++ "pseudoterminal", which is controlled by Kermit. This method works ++ with practically any external program, but it is not portable. At ++ this writing, it works only on some (not all) UNIX versions, and ++ not on any non-UNIX platforms. ++ 2. Pipe: The external program's standard input and output are ++ redirected through a "pipe" controlled by Kermit. This method is ++ relatively portable -- it should work across all UNIX versions, ++ and it also works in Windows and OS/2 -- but it is effective only ++ when the external program actually uses standard i/o (and many ++ don't). ++ ++ The two methods are started differently but are used the same way ++ thereafter. ++ ++ The purpose of this feature is to let you use C-Kermit services like ++ file transfer, character-set translation, scripting, automatic ++ dialing, etc, on connections that Kermit can't otherwise make itself. ++ ++ This feature is the opposite of the REDIRECT feature, in which ++ C-Kermit makes the connection, and redirects an external (local) ++ command or program over this connection. In a pty or pipe connection, ++ C-Kermit runs and controls a local command or program, which makes the ++ connection. (The same method can be used to simply to control a local ++ program without making a connection; see [407]Section 2.8.) ++ ++ To find out if your version of Kermit includes PTY support, type "show ++ features" and look for NETPTY in the alphabetical list of options. For ++ pipes, look for NETCMD. ++ ++ The commands are: ++ ++ SET NETWORK TYPE PTY or SET NETWORK TYPE PIPE ++ SET HOST command ++ where command is any interactive command. If the command does ++ not use standard i/o, you must use SET NETWORK TYPE PTY. ++ ++ Notes: ++ ++ * COMMAND is an invisible synonym for PIPE. ++ * The command and its arguments are case-sensitive in UNIX. ++ ++ The SET NETWORK TYPE, SET HOST sequence sets the given network type ++ for all subsequent SET HOST commands until another SET NETWORK TYPE ++ command is given to change it. ++ ++ You can also use the new /NETWORK-TYPE:PTY or /NETWORK-TYPE:PIPE (or ++ simply /PIPE or /PTY) switches on the SET HOST command itself: ++ ++ SET HOST /NETWORK-TYPE:PIPE command ; These two are the same ++ SET HOST /PIPE command ++ ++ SET HOST /NETWORK-TYPE:PTY command ; Ditto ++ SET HOST /PTY command ++ ++ These are like SET NETWORK TYPE followed by SET HOST, except they ++ apply only to the connection being made and do not change the global ++ network type setting (see [408]Section 1.5 about the difference ++ between switches and SET commands). ++ ++ Include any command-line options with the command that might be ++ needed, as in this example where C-Kermit uses another copy of itself ++ as the communications program: ++ ++ SET HOST /PIPE /CONNECT kermit -YQJ xyzcorp.com ++ ++ As usual, if you include the /CONNECT switch, SET HOST enters CONNECT ++ mode immediately upon successful execution of the given command. ++ Therefore new commands are available as a shorthand for SET HOST ++ /CONNECT /PTY and /PIPE: ++ ++ PTY [ command ] ++ PIPE [ command ] ++ The PTY and PIPE commands work like the TELNET and RLOGIN ++ commands: they set up the connection (in this case, using the ++ given command) and then enter CONNECT mode automatically (if ++ the PIPE or PTY command is given without a command, it ++ continues the current session if one is active; otherwise it ++ gives an error message). ++ ++ The PIPE command is named after the mechanism by which C-Kermit ++ communicates with the command: UNIX pipes. C-Kermit's i/o is "piped" ++ through the given command. Here is a typical example: ++ ++ PIPE rlogin -8 xyzcorp.com ++ ++ This is equivalent to: ++ ++ SET HOST /PIPE rlogin -8 xyzcorp.com ++ CONNECT ++ ++ and to: ++ ++ SET HOST /PIPE /CONNECT rlogin -8 xyzcorp.com ++ ++ IMPORTANT: ++ If you are writing a script, do not use the PIPE, PTY, TELNET, ++ or RLOGIN command unless you really want C-Kermit to enter ++ CONNECT mode at that point. Normally SET HOST is used in ++ scripts to allow the login and other dialogs to be controlled ++ by the script itself, rather than by an actively participating ++ human at the keyboard. ++ ++ Throughput of pty and pipe connections is limited by the performance ++ of the chosen command or program and by the interprocess communication ++ (IPC) method used and/or buffering capacity of the pipe or pty, which ++ in turn depends on the underlying operating system. ++ ++ In one trial (on SunOS 4.1.3), we observed file transfer rates over an ++ rlogin connection proceeding at 200Kcps for downloads, but only 10Kcps ++ for uploads on the same connection with the same settings (similar ++ disparities were noted in HP-UX). Examination of the logs revealed ++ that a write to the pipe could take as long as 5 seconds, whereas ++ reads were practically instantaneous. On the other hand, using Telnet ++ as the external program rather than rlogin, downloads and uploads were ++ better matched at about 177K each. ++ ++ Most external communication programs, like C-Kermit itself, have ++ escape characters or sequences. Normally these begin with (or consist ++ entirely of) a control character. You must be sure that this control ++ character is not "unprefixed" when uploading files, otherwise the ++ external program will "escape back" to its prompt, or close the ++ connection, or take some other unwanted action. When in CONNECT mode, ++ observe the program's normal interaction rules. Of course C-Kermit's ++ own escape character (normally Ctrl-\) is active too, unless you have ++ taken some action to disable it. ++ ++ On PTY connections, the underlying PTY driver is not guaranteed to be ++ transparent to control characters -- for example, it might expand ++ tabs, translate carriage returns, generate signals if it sees an ++ interrupt character, and so on. Similar things might happen on a PIPE ++ connection. For this reason, if you plan to transfer files over a PTY ++ or PIPE connection, tell the file sender to: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ++ This causes all control characters to be prefixed and ++ transmitted as printable ASCII characters. ++ ++ If the external connection program is not 8-bit clean, you should ++ also: ++ ++ SET PARITY SPACE ++ This causes 8-bit data to be encoded in 7 bits using single ++ and/or locking shifts. ++ ++ And if it does not make a reliable connection (such as those made by ++ Telnet, Rlogin, Ssh, etc), you should: ++ ++ SET STREAMING OFF ++ This forces C-Kermit to treat the connection as unreliable and ++ to engage in its normal ACK/NAK protocol for error detection ++ and correction, rather than "streaming" its packets, as it ++ normally does on a network connection ([409]Section 4.20). ++ ++ In some cases, buffer sizes might be restricted, so you might also ++ need to reduce the Kermit packet length to fit; this is a ++ trial-and-error affair. For example, if transfers always fail with ++ 4000-byte packets, try 2000. If that fails too, try 1000, and so on. ++ The commands are: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PACKET-LENGTH number ++ This tells the file receiver to tell the file sender the ++ longest packet length it can accept. ++ ++ SET SEND PACKET-LENGTH number ++ This tells the file sender not to send packets longer than the ++ given length, even if the receiver says longer ones are OK. Of ++ course, if the receiver's length is shorter, the shorter length ++ is used. ++ ++ If none of this seems to help, try falling back to the bare minimum, ++ lowest-common-denominator protocol settings: ++ ++ ROBUST ++ No sliding windows, no streaming, no control-character ++ unprefixing, packet length 90. ++ ++ And then work your way back up by trial and error to get greater ++ throughput. ++ ++ Note that when starting a PIPE connection, and the connection program ++ (such as telnet or rlogin) prints some greeting or information ++ messages before starting the connection, these are quite likely to be ++ printed with a stairstep effect (linefeed without carriage return). ++ This is because the program is not connected with the UNIX terminal ++ driver; there's not much Kermit can do about it. Once the connection ++ is made, everything should go back to normal. This shouldn't happen on ++ a PTY connection because a PTY is, indeed, a terminal. ++ ++ On a similar note, some connection programs (like Solaris 2.5 rlogin) ++ might print lots of error messages like "ioctl TIOCGETP: invalid ++ argument" when used through a pipe. They are annoying but usually ++ harmless. If you want to avoid these messages, and your shell allows ++ redirection of stderr, you can redirect stderr in your pipe command, ++ as in this example where the user's shell is bash: ++ ++ PIPE rlogin xyzcorp.com 2> /dev/null ++ ++ Or use PTY rather than PIPE, since PTY is available on Solaris. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.0. C-Kermit over tn3270 and tn5250 ++ ++ Now you can make a connection from C-Kermit "directly" to an IBM ++ mainframe and transfer files with it, assuming it has Kermit-370 ++ installed. Because tn3270 is neither 8-bit clean nor transparent to ++ control characters, you must give these commands: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ; Prefix all control characters ++ SET PARITY SPACE ; Telnet connections are usually not 8-bit clean ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ SET HOST /PTY /CONNECT tn3270 abccorp.com ++ ++ or simply: ++ ++ pty tn3270 abccorp.com ++ ++ SET HOST /PIPE does not work in this case, at least not for file ++ transfer. File transfer does work, however, with SET HOST /PTY, ++ provided you use the default packet length of 90 bytes; anything ++ longer seems to kill the session. ++ ++ You can also make connections to IBM AS/400 computers if you have a ++ tn5250 program installed: ++ ++ pty tn5250 hostname ++ ++ In this case, however, file transfer is probably not in the cards ++ since nobody has ever succeeded in writing a Kermit program for the ++ AS/400. Hint: ++ ++ define tn3270 { ++ check pty ++ if fail end 1 Sorry - no PTY support... ++ pty tn3270 \%* ++ } ++ ++ Similarly for tn5250. Note that CHECK PTY and CHECK PIPE can be used ++ in macros and scripts to test whether PTY or PIPE support is ++ available. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.1. C-Kermit over Telnet ++ ++ Although C-Kermit includes its own Telnet implementation, you might ++ need to use an external Telnet program to make certain connections; ++ perhaps because it has access or security features not available in ++ C-Kermit itself. As noted above, the only precautions necessary are ++ usually: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ; Prefix all control characters ++ SET PARITY SPACE ; Telnet connections might not be 8-bit clean ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ SET HOST /PTY (or /PIPE) /CONNECT telnet abccorp.com ++ ++ or, equivalently: ++ ++ PTY (or PIPE) telnet abccorp.com ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.2. C-Kermit over Rlogin ++ ++ C-Kermit includes its own Rlogin client, but this can normally be used ++ only if you are root, since the rlogin TCP port is privileged. But ++ ptys and pipes let you make rlogin connections with C-Kermit through ++ your computer's external rlogin program, which is normally installed ++ as a privileged program: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ SET HOST /PTY (or /PIPE) /CONNECT rlogin -8 abccorp.com ++ ++ or, equivalently: ++ ++ PTY (or PIPE) rlogin -8 abccorp.com ++ ++ The "-8" option to rlogin enables transmission of 8-bit data. If this ++ is not available, then include SET PARITY SPACE if you intend to ++ transfer files. ++ ++ Note that the normal escape sequence for rlogin is Carriage Return ++ followed by Tilde (~), but only when the tilde is followed by certain ++ other characters; the exact behavior depends on your rlogin client, so ++ read its documentation. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.3. C-Kermit over Serial Communication Programs ++ ++ Ptys and pipes also let you use programs that make serial connections, ++ such as cu or tip. For example, C-Kermit can be used through cu to ++ make connections that otherwise might not be allowed, e.g. because ++ C-Kermit is not installed with the required write permissions to the ++ dialout device and the UUCP lockfile directory. ++ ++ Suppose your UUCP Devices file contains an entry for a serial device ++ tty04 to be used for direct connections, but this device is protected ++ against you (and Kermit when you run it). In this case you can: ++ ++ SET CONTROL PREFIX ALL ++ PTY (or PIPE) cu -l tty04 ++ ++ (Similarly for dialout devices, except then you also need to include ++ the phone number in the "cu" command.) ++ ++ As with other communication programs, watch out for cu's escape ++ sequence, which is the same as the rlogin program's: Carriage Return ++ followed by Tilde (followed by another character to specify an action, ++ like "." for closing the connection and exiting from cu). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4. C-Kermit over Secure Network Clients ++ ++ DISCLAIMER: There are laws in the USA and other countries regarding ++ use, import, and/or export of encryption and/or decryption or other ++ forms of security software, algorithms, technology, and ++ intellectual property. The Kermit Project attempts to follow all ++ known statutes, and neither intends nor suggests that Kermit ++ software can or should be used in any way, in any location, that ++ circumvents any regulations, laws, treaties, covenants, or other ++ legitimate canons or instruments of law, international relations, ++ trade, ethics, or propriety. ++ ++ For secure connections or connections through firewalls, C-Kermit 7.0 ++ can be a Kerberos, SRP, and/or SOCKS client when built with the ++ appropriate options and libraries. But other application-level ++ security acronyms and methods -- SSH, SSL, SRP, TLS -- pop up at an ++ alarming rate and are (a) impossible to keep up with, (b) usually ++ mutually incompatible, and (c) have restrictions on export or ++ redistribution and so cannot be included in C-Kermit itself. ++ ++ However, if you have a secure text-based Telnet (or other) client that ++ employs one of these security methods, you can use C-Kermit "through" ++ it via a pty or pipe. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4.1. SSH ++ ++ C-Kermit does not and can not incorporate SSH due to licensing, ++ patent, and USA export law restrictions. ++ ++ The UNIX SSH client does not use standard input/output, and therefore ++ can be used only by Kermit's PTY interface, if one is present. The ++ cautions about file transfer, etc, are the same as for Rlogin. ++ Example: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ++ PTY ssh XYZCORP.COM ++ ++ Or, for a scripted session: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ++ SET HOST /PTY ssh XYZCORP.COM ++ ++ Hint: ++ ++ define ssh { ++ check pty ++ if fail end 1 Sorry - no PTY support... ++ pty ssh \%* ++ } ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4.2. SSL ++ ++ Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is another TCP/IP security overlay, this ++ one designed by and for Netscape. An SSL Telnet client is available ++ for UNIX from the University of Queensland. More info at: ++ ++ [410]http://www.psy.uq.oz.au/~ftp/Crypto/ ++ ++ Interoperability with C-Kermit is unknown. C-Kermit also includes its ++ own built-in SSL/TLS support, but it is not exportable; [411]CLICK ++ HERE file for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4.3. SRP ++ ++ SRP(TM) is Stanford University's Secure Remote Password protocol. An ++ SRP Telnet client is available from Stanford: ++ ++ [412]http://srp.stanford.edu/srp/ ++ ++ Stanford's SRP Telnet client for UNIX has been tested on SunOS and ++ works fine with C-Kermit, as described in [413]Section 2.7.1, e.g. ++ ++ SET PREFIX ALL ++ PTY (or PIPE) srp-telnet xenon.stanford.edu ++ ++ C-Kermit itself can be built as an SRP Telnet client on systems that ++ have libsrp.a installed; the C-Kermit support code, however, may not ++ be exported outside the USA or Canada. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4.4. SOCKS ++ ++ C-Kermit can be built as a SOCKS-aware client on systems that have a ++ SOCKS library. See section 8.1.1 of the [414]ckccfg.txt file. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 can also be run over SOCKSified Telnet or rlogin clients ++ with SET NETWORK TYPE COMMAND. Suppose the Telnet program on your ++ system is SOCKS enabled but C-Kermit is not. Make Kermit connections ++ like this: ++ ++ SET PREFIX ALL ++ PTY (or PIPE) telnet zzz.com ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.7.4.5. Kerberos ++ ++ UNIX C-Kermit can be built with MIT Kerberos IV or V authentication ++ and encryption. Instructions are available in a [415]separate ++ document. Additional modules are required that can not be exported ++ from the USA to any country except Canada, by US law. ++ ++ If you have Kerberos installed but you don't have a Kerberized version ++ of C-Kermit, you can use ktelnet as C-Kermit's external communications ++ program to make secure connections without giving up C-Kermit's ++ services: ++ ++ SET PREFIX ALL ++ PTY (or PIPE) ktelnet cia.gov ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.8. Scripting Local Programs ++ ++ If your version of Kermit has PTY support built in, then any ++ text-based program can be invoked with SET HOST /PTY or equivalent ++ command and controlled using the normal sequence of OUTPUT, INPUT, IF ++ SUCCESS commands (this is the same service that is provided by the ++ 'expect' program, but controlled by the Kermit script language rather ++ than Tcl). ++ ++ When PTY service is not available, then any program that uses standard ++ input and output can be invoked with SET HOST /PIPE. ++ ++ Here's an example in which we start an external Kermit program, wait ++ for its prompt, give it a VERSION command, and then extract the ++ numeric version number from its response: ++ ++ set host /pty kermit -Y ++ if fail stop 1 {Can't start external command} ++ input 10 C-Kermit> ++ if fail stop 1 {No C-Kermit> prompt} ++ output version\13 ++ input 10 {Numeric: } ++ if fail stop 1 {No match for "Numeric:"} ++ clear input ++ input 10 \10 ++ echo VERSION = "\fsubstr(\v(input),1,6)" ++ output exit\13 ++ ++ This technique could be used to control any other interactive program, ++ even those that do screen formatting (like Emacs or Vi), if you can ++ figure out the sequence of events. If your Kermit program doesn't have ++ PTY support, then the commands are restricted to those using standard ++ i/o, including certain shells, interactive text-mode "hardcopy" ++ editors like ex, and so on. ++ ++ If you are using the PTY interface, you should be aware that it runs ++ the given program or command directly on the pty, without any ++ intervening shell to interpret metacharacters, redirectors, etc. If ++ you need this sort of thing, include the appropriate shell invocation ++ as part of your command; for example: ++ ++ pty echo * ++ ++ just echoes "*"; whereas: ++ ++ pty ksh -c "echo *" ++ ++ echoes all the filenames that ksh finds matching "*". ++ ++ Similarly for redirection: ++ ++ set host /pty ksh -c "cat > foo" ; Note: use shell quoting rules here ++ set transmit eof \4 ++ transmit bar ++ ++ And for that matter, for built-in shell commands: ++ ++ set host /pty ksh -c "for i in *; do echo $i; done" ++ ++ The PIPE interface, on the other hand, invokes the shell ++ automatically, so: ++ ++ pipe echo * ++ ++ prints filenames, not "*". ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.9. X.25 Networking ++ ++ X.25 networking is documented in [416]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition. ++ When the book was published, X.25 was available only in SunOS, ++ Solaris, and Stratus VOS. Unlike TCP/IP, X.25 APIs are not ++ standardized; each vendor's X.25 libraries and services (if they have ++ them at all) are unique. ++ ++ This section describes new additions. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.9.1. IBM AIXLink/X.25 Network Provider Interface for AIX ++ ++ Support for X.25 was added via IBM's Network Provider Interface (NPI), ++ AIXLink/X.25 1.1, to the AIX 4.x version of C-Kermit 7.0. ++ Unfortunately, AIXLink/X.25 is a rather bare-bones facility, lacking ++ in particular any form of PAD support (X.3, X.28, X.29). Thus, the AIX ++ version of C-Kermit, when built to include X.25 networking, has ++ neither a PAD command, nor a SET PAD command. The same is true for the ++ underlying AIX system: no PAD support. Thus it is not possible to have ++ an interactive shell session over an X.25 connection into an AIX ++ system (as far as we know), even from X.25-capable Kermit versions ++ (such as Solaris or VOS) that do include PAD support. ++ ++ Thus the X.25 capabilities in AIX C-Kermit are limited to peer-to-peer ++ connections, e.g. from a C-Kermit client to a C-Kermit server. Unlike ++ the Solaris, SunOS, and VOS versions, the AIX version can accept ++ incoming X.25 connections: ++ ++ set network type x.25 ++ if fail stop 1 Sorry - no X.25 support ++ ; Put any desired DISABLE or ENABLE or SET commands here. ++ set host /server * ++ if fail stop 1 X.25 "set host *" failed ++ ++ And then access it from the client as follows: ++ ++ set network type x.25 ++ if fail stop 1 Sorry - no X.25 support ++ set host xxxxxxx ; Specify the X.25/X.121 address ++ if fail stop 1 Can't open connection ++ ++ And at this point the client can use the full range of client ++ commands: SEND, GET, REMOTE xxx, FINISH, BYE. ++ ++ The AIX version also adds two new variables: ++ ++ \v(x25local_nua) ++ The local X.25 address. ++ ++ \v(x25remote_nua) ++ The X.25 address of the host on the other end of the ++ connection. ++ ++ C-Kermit's AIX X.25 client has not been tested against anything other ++ than a C-Kermit X.25 server on AIX. It is not known if it will ++ interoperate with C-Kermit servers on Solaris, SunOS, or VOS. ++ ++ To make an X.25 connection from AIX C-Kermit, you must: ++ ++ set x25 call-user-data xxxx ++ ++ where xxxx can be any even-length string of hexadecimal digits, e.g. ++ 123ABC. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.9.2. HP-UX X.25 ++ ++ Although C-Kermit presently does not include built-in support for ++ HP-UX X.25, it can still be used to make X.25 connections as follows: ++ start Kermit and tell it to: ++ ++ set prefixing all ++ set parity space ++ pty padem address ++ ++ This should work in HP-UX 9.00 and later (see [417]Section 2.7). If ++ you have an earlier HP-UX version, or the PTY interface doesn't work ++ or isn't available, try: ++ ++ set prefixing all ++ set parity space ++ pipe padem address ++ ++ Failing that, use Kermit to telnet to localhost and then after logging ++ back in, start padem as you would normally do to connect over X.25. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.10. Additional Serial Port Controls ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds the following commands for greater control over ++ serial ports. These commands are available only in C-Kermit versions ++ whose underlying operating systems provide the corresponding services ++ (such as POSIX and UNIX System V), and even then their successful ++ operation depends on the capabilities of the specific device and ++ driver. ++ ++ SET DISCONNECT { ON, OFF } ++ On a SET LINE or SET PORT connection with SET CARRIER ON or ++ AUTO, if the carrier signal drops during the connection, ++ indicating that the connection has been lost, and C-Kermit ++ notices it, this setting governs what happens next. With SET ++ DISCONNECT OFF, which is consistent with previous behavior, and ++ therefore the default, C-Kermit continues to keep the device ++ open and allocated. With SET DISCONNECT ON, C-Kermit ++ automatically closes and releases the device when it senses a ++ carrier on-to-off transition, thus allowing others to use it. ++ However, it remains the default device for i/o (DIAL, REDIAL, ++ INPUT, SEND, CONNECT, etc), so if a subsequent i/o command is ++ given, the device is reopened if it is still available. When it ++ has been automatically closed in this manner, SHOW ++ COMMUNICATIONS puts "(closed)" after its name, and in UNIX, the ++ lockfile disappears -- both from SHOW COMM and from the ++ lockfile directory itself. Synonym: SET CLOSE-ON-DISCONNECT. ++ ++ SET EXIT ON-DISCONNECT { ON, OFF } ++ Like DISCONNECT, but makes the program exit if a connection ++ drops. ++ ++ Note that SET CLOSE-ON-DISCONNECT and SET EXIT ON-DISCONNECT apply ++ only to connections that drop; they do not apply to connections that ++ can't be made in the first place. For example, they have no effect ++ when a SET LINE, SET HOST, TELNET, or DIAL command fails. ++ ++ HANGUP ++ If [CLOSE-ON-]DISCONNECT is ON, and the HANGUP command is given ++ on a serial device, and the carrier signal is no longer present ++ after the HANGUP command, the device is closed and released. ++ ++ SET PARITY HARDWARE { EVEN, ODD } ++ Unlike SET PARITY { EVEN, ODD, MARK, SPACE }, which selects 7 ++ data bits plus the indicated kind of parity (to be done in ++ software by Kermit itself), SET PARITY HARDWARE selects 8 data ++ bits plus even or odd parity, to be done by the underlying ++ hardware, operating system, or device driver. This command is ++ effective only with a SET LINE or SET PORT device. That is, it ++ has no effect in remote mode, nor on network connections. There ++ is presently no method for selecting 8 data bits plus mark or ++ space parity. If hardware parity is in effect, the variable ++ \v(hwparity) is set to "even" or "odd". Note: some platforms ++ might also support settings of SPACE, MARK, or NONE. ++ ++ SET STOP-BITS { 1, 2 } ++ This tells the number of 1-bits to insert after an outbound ++ character's data and parity bits, to separate it from the next ++ character. Normally 1. Choosing 2 stop bits should do no harm, ++ but will slow down serial transmission by approximately 10 ++ percent. Historically, 2 stop bits were used with Teletypes (at ++ 110 bps or below) for print-head recovery time. There is ++ presently no method for choosing any number of stop bits ++ besides 1 and 2. ++ ++ SET SERIAL [ dps ] ++ dps stands for Data-bits, Parity, Stop-bits. This is the ++ notation familiar to many people for serial port configuration: ++ 7E1, 8N1, 7O2, etc. The data bits number also becomes the ++ TERMINAL BYTESIZE setting. The second character is E for Even, ++ O for Odd, M for Mark, S for Space, or N for None. The list of ++ available options depends on the capabilities of the specific ++ platform. If dps is omitted, 8N1 is used. Type "set serial ?" ++ for a list of available choices. Examples: ++ ++ SET SERIAL 7E1 ++ Equivalent to SET PARITY EVEN, SET STOP-BITS 1, SET TERM ++ BYTE 7. ++ ++ SET SERIAL 8N1 ++ Equivalent to SET PARITY NONE, SET STOP-BITS 1, SET TERM ++ BYTE 8. ++ ++ SET SERIAL 7E2 ++ Equivalent to SET PARITY EVEN and SET STOP-BITS 2, SET ++ TERM BYTE 7. ++ ++ SET SERIAL 8E2 ++ Same as SET PARITY HARDWARE EVEN, SET STOP-BITS 2, SET ++ TERM BYTE 8. ++ ++ SET SERIAL ++ Same as SET PARITY NONE and SET STOP-BITS 1, SET TERM ++ BYTE 8. ++ ++ Notes: ++ ++ * The SET SERIAL xx2 options are available only in Kermit versions ++ where the SET PARITY HARDWARE command is also available. (SHOW ++ FEATURES includes "HWPARITY" in its options list.) ++ * The SET SERIAL 7xx and 8N1 options affect the software parity ++ setting, even for network connections. ++ * As noted in the manual, selecting 8 data bits does not give you ++ 8-bit terminal sessions in CONNECT mode unless you also SET ++ TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8. The default terminal bytesize remains 7, to ++ protect against the situation where the remote host is generating ++ parity but you don't know about it. If the terminal bytesize was 8 ++ by default and you CONNECTed to such a host, you would see only ++ garbage on your screen. ++ * If you do not give a SET STOP-BITS or SET SET SERIAL command, ++ C-Kermit does not attempt to set the device's stop bits; instead, ++ it uses whatever setting the device uses when not given explicit ++ instructions about stop bits. ++ ++ SHOW COMMUNICATIONS displays the current settings. Stop bits and ++ hardware parity are shown only for SET PORT / SET LINE (serial) ++ devices, since they do not apply to network connections or to remote ++ mode. STOP-BITS is shown as "(default)" if you have not given an ++ explicit SET STOP-BITS or SET SERIAL command. ++ ++ The \v(serial) variable shows the SET SERIAL setting (8N1, 7E1, etc). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.11. Getting Access to the Dialout Device ++ ++ This section is for UNIX only; note the special words about QNX at ++ the end. Also see [418]Section 2.0 for SET LINE switches, ++ particularly the /SHARE switch for VMS only. ++ ++ C-Kermit does its best to obey the UUCP lockfile conventions of each ++ platform (machine, operating system, OS version) where it runs, if ++ that platform uses UUCP. ++ ++ But simply obeying the conventions is often not good enough, due to ++ the increasing likelihood that a particular serial device might have ++ more than one name (e.g. /dev/tty00 and /dev/term/00 are the same ++ device in Unixware 7; /dev/cua and /dev/cufa are the same device in ++ NeXTSTEP), plus the increasingly widespread use of symlinks for device ++ names, such as /dev/modem. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 goes to greater lengths than previous versions to ++ successfully interlock with other communications program (and other ++ instances of Kermit itself); for example, by: ++ ++ * Creation of dual lockfiles whenever a symlink is used; one for the ++ link name and one for the real name. ++ * Creation of dual lockfiles in HP-UX according to HP rules. ++ * Creation of dual uppercase/lowercase lockfile names in SCO ++ UNIX/ODT/OSR5. ++ * The use of ttylock() in versions of AIX where it works. ++ * The use, wherever possible, of lockfile names based on ++ inode/major/minor device number rather than device name. ++ ++ See the [419]ckuins.txt and [420]ckubwr.txt files for details. ++ ++ QNX is almost unique among UNIX varieties in having no UUCP programs ++ nor UUCP-oriented dialout-device locking conventions. QNX does, ++ however, allow a program to get the device open count. This can not be ++ a reliable form of locking unless all applications do it (and they ++ don't), so by default, Kermit uses this information only for printing ++ a warning message such as: ++ ++ C-Kermit>set line /dev/ser1 ++ WARNING - "/dev/ser1" looks busy... ++ ++ However, if you want to use it as a lock, you can do so with: ++ ++ SET QNX-PORT-LOCK { ON, OFF } ++ ++ QNX-PORT-LOCK is OFF by default; if you set in ON, C-Kermit fails to ++ open any dialout device when its open count indicates that another ++ process has it open. SHOW COMM (in QNX only) displays the setting, and ++ if you have a port open, it also shows the current open count (with ++ C-Kermit's own access always counting as 1). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.12. The Connection Log ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds the ability to log connections, so you can see where ++ you've been and have a record of calls you've made. A connection is ++ defined as any communications session that is begun by SET LINE, SET ++ PORT, DIAL, SET HOST, TELNET, or RLOGIN. Connections are not logged ++ unless you request it; the command is: ++ ++ LOG CX [ filename [ { NEW, APPEND } ] ] ++ Enables logging of connections in the given file. If the ++ trailing { NEW, APPEND } keyword is omitted, the file is opened ++ for appending; i.e. new records are written to the end. If NEW ++ is specified, a new file is created; if a file of the same name ++ already existed, it is overwritten. If the filename is omitted, ++ CX.LOG in your home (login) directory is used (note: ++ uppercase). To accept all defaults, just use "log connections" ++ (or "l c" for short). Synonym: LOG CONNECTIONS. ++ ++ CLOSE CX-LOG ++ This closes the connection log if it was open. (Note, the CLOSE ++ CONNECTION command closes the connection itself). ++ ++ SHOW CX ++ This shows your current connection, if any, including the ++ elapsed time (since you opened it). Synonym: SHOW CONNECTION. ++ ++ \v(cx_time) ++ This variable shows the elapsed time of your current ++ connection, or if there is no current connection, of your most ++ recent connection, of if there have been no connections, 0. ++ ++ The connection contains one line per connection, of the form: ++ ++ yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss username pid p=v [ p=v [ ... ] ] ++ ++ where the timestamp (in columns 1-18) shows when the connection was ++ made; username is the login identity of the person who made the ++ connection; pid is Kermit's process ID when it made the connection. ++ The p's are parameters that depend on the type of connection, and the ++ v's are their values: ++ ++ T = Connection Type (TCP, SERIAL, DIAL, DECNET, etc). ++ H = The name of the Host from which the connection was made. ++ N = Destination phone Number or Network host name or address. ++ D = Serial connections only: Device name. ++ O = Dialed calls only: Originating country code & area code if known. ++ E = Elapsed time in hh:mm:ss format (or hhh:mm:ss, etc). ++ ++ If you always want to keep a connection log, simply add: ++ ++ log connections ++ ++ to your C-Kermit customization file. Note, however, that if you make a ++ lot of connections, your CX.LOG will grow and grow. You can handle ++ this by adding a "logrotate" procedure like the following to your ++ customization file, before the "log connections" command: ++ ++ define LOGROTATE { ; Define LOGROTATE macro ++ local \%i \%m \%d \%n \%f MAX ++ def MAX 4 ; How many months to keep ++ if not def \%1 - ; No argument given ++ end 1 \%0: No filename given ++ if not = 1 \ffiles(\%1) - ; Exactly 1 file must match ++ end 1 \%0: \%1 - File not found ++ .\%d := \fsubstr(\fdate(\%1),1,6) ; Arg OK - get file year & month ++ if = \%d - ; Compare file year & month ++ \fsubstr(\v(ndate),1,6) - ; with current year & month ++ end 0 ; Same year & month - done ++ rename \%1 \%1.\%d ; Different - rename file ++ .\%n := \ffiles(\%1.*) ; How many old files ++ if < \%n \m(MAX) end 0 ; Not enough to rotate ++ .\%m := \%1.999999 ; Initial compare string ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ; Loop thru old logs ++ .\%f := \fnextfile() ; Get next file name ++ if llt \%f \%m .\%m := \%f ; If this one older remember it ++ } ++ delete \%m ; Delete the oldest one ++ } ++ log connections ; Now open the (possibly new) log ++ logrotate \v(home)CX.LOG ; Run the LOGROTATE macro ++ ++ As you can see, this compares the yyyymm portion of the modification ++ date (\fdate()) of the given file (\%1) with the current yyyymm. If ++ they differ, the current file has the yyyymm suffix (from its most ++ recent modification date) appended to its name. Then we search through ++ all other such files, find the oldest one, and delete it. Thus the ++ current log, plus the logs from the most recent four months, are kept. ++ This is all done automatically every time you start C-Kermit. ++ ++ On multiuser systems, it is possible to keep a single, shared, ++ system-wide connection log, but this is not recommended since (a) it ++ requires you keep a publicly write-accessible logfile (a glaring ++ target for mischief), and (b) it would require each user to log to ++ that file and not disable logging. A better method for logging ++ connections, in UNIX at least, is syslogging (see [421]ckuins.txt ++ Section 15 and [422]Section 4.2 of the [423]IKSD Administration Guide ++ for details). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.13. Automatic Connection-Specific Flow Control Selection ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 7.0, the appropriate flow-control method for ++ each connection type is kept in a table, for example: ++ ++ Remote: NONE ++ Modem: RTS/CTS ++ Direct-Serial: NONE ++ TCPIP: NONE ++ ++ The size of the table and values for each connection type can vary ++ from platform to platform. Type "set flow ?" for a list of available ++ flow-control types. ++ ++ The table is used to automatically select the appropriate kind of flow ++ control whenever you make a connection. You can display the table ++ with: ++ ++ SHOW FLOW-CONTROL ++ ++ The defaults are as follows: ++ ++ Remote: ++ NONE or XON/XOFF. This is because C-Kermit is not allowed to ++ find out what type of connection the incoming user has (*). No ++ kind of flow control will work on every kind of connection, ++ including (unexpectedly) KEEP, which we would have liked to ++ use, but not turning off flow control at the remote end during ++ file transfer on TCP/IP connections is fatal to the transfer ++ (except in VMS and HP-UX, where it must be set to Xon/Xoff!) ++ Therefore if you are dialing in to a serial port on a server ++ (UNIX or VMS) where C-Kermit is running, you will need to tell ++ C-Kermit to "set flow keep" before transferring files (assuming ++ the modem and port are configured correctly by the system ++ administrator; otherwise you'll need to give a specific kind of ++ flow control, e.g. "set flow xon/xoff"), so in this case ++ C-Kermit will not disable flow control, as it must do when you ++ are coming via Telnet (directly or through a terminal server, ++ except on VMS and HP-UX). ++ ++ Modem: ++ This applies when you dial out with a modem. In this case, the ++ MODEM FLOW-CONTROL setting takes affect after the SET FLOW ++ setting, so it can pick the most appropriate flow control for ++ the combination of the particular modem and the ++ computer/port/driver that is dialing. ++ ++ Direct-Serial: ++ The default here is NONE because C-Kermit has no way of knowing ++ what kind of flow control, if any, is or can be done by the ++ device at the other end of the connection. RTS/CTS would be a ++ bad choice here, because if the CTS signal is not asserted, the ++ connection will hang. And since direct connections are often ++ made with 3-wire cables, there is a good chance the CTS signal ++ will not be received. ++ ++ TCPIP: ++ NONE, since TCP and IP provide their own flow control ++ transparently to the application, except in VMS, where Xon/Xoff ++ is the default due to the requirements of the VMS TCP/IP ++ products. ++ ++ Other networks: ++ NONE, since networks should provide their flow control ++ transparently to the application. ++ ++ (*) This is possibly the worst feature of UNIX, VMS, and other ++ platforms where C-Kermit runs. If C-Kermit was able to ask the ++ operating system what kind of connection it had to the user, it could ++ set up many things for you automatically. ++ ++ You can modify the default-flow-control table with: ++ ++ SET FLOW-CONTROL /xxx { NONE, KEEP, RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF, ... } ++ ++ where "xxx" is the connection type, e.g. ++ ++ SET FLOW /REMOTE NONE ++ SET FLOW /DIRECT RTS/CTS ++ ++ If you leave out the switch, SET FLOW works as before, choosing the ++ flow control method to be used on the current connection: ++ ++ SET FLOW XON/XOFF ++ ++ Thus, whenever you make a connection with SET PORT, SET LINE, DIAL, ++ SET HOST, TELNET, RLOGIN, etc, an appropriate form of flow control is ++ selected automatically. You can override the automatic selection with ++ a subsequent SET FLOW command, such as SET FLOW NONE (no switch ++ included). ++ ++ The flow control is changed automatically too when you give a SET ++ MODEM TYPE command. For example, suppose your operating system (say ++ Linux) supports hardware flow control (RTS/CTS). Now suppose you give ++ the following commands: ++ ++ set line /dev/ttyS2 ; Automatically sets flow to NONE ++ set modem type usr ; Automatically sets flow to RTS/CTS ++ set modem type rolm ; Doesn't support RTS/CTS so now flow is XON/XOFF ++ ++ IMPORTANT: This new feature tends to make the order of SET LINE/HOST ++ and SET FLOW commands matter, where it didn't before. For example, in ++ VMS: ++ ++ SET FLOW KEEP ++ SET LINE TTA0: ++ ++ the SET LINE undoes the SET FLOW KEEP command; the sequence now must ++ be: ++ ++ SET FLOW /DIRECT KEEP ++ SET LINE TTA0: ++ ++ or: ++ ++ SET LINE TTA0: ++ SET FLOW KEEP ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.14. Trapping Connection Establishment and Loss ++ ++ If you define a macro called ON_OPEN, it is executed any time that a ++ SET LINE, SET PORT, SET HOST, TELNET, RLOGIN or similar command ++ succeeds in opening a connection. The argument is the host or device ++ name (as shown by SHOW COMMUNICATIONS, and the same as \v(line)). This ++ macro can be used for all sorts of things, like automatically setting ++ connection- or host-specific parameters when the connection is opened. ++ Example: ++ ++ def ON_OPEN { ++ switch \%1 { ++ :abccorp.com, set reliable off, break ++ :xyzcorp.com, set receive packet-length 1000, break ++ etc etc... ++ } ++ } ++ ++ If you define a macro called ON_CLOSE, it will be executed any time ++ that a SET LINE, SET PORT, SET HOST, TELNET, RLOGIN or any other kind ++ of connection that C-Kermit has made is closed, either by the remote ++ or by a local CLOSE, HANGUP, or EXIT command or other local action, ++ such as when a new connection is opened before an old one was ++ explicitly closed. ++ ++ As soon as C-Kermit notices the connection has been closed, the ++ ON_CLOSE macro is invoked at (a) the top of the command parsing loop, ++ or (b) when a connection is closed implicitly by a command such as SET ++ LINE that closes any open connection prior to making a new connection, ++ or (c) when C-Kermit closes an open connection in the act of exiting. ++ ++ The ON_CLOSE macro was inspired by the neverending quest to unite ++ Kermit and SSH. In this case using the "tunnel" mechanism: ++ ++ def TUNNEL { ; \%1 = host to tunnel to ++ local \%p ++ if not def \%1 stop 1 ++ assign tunnelhost \%1 ; Make global copy ++ undef on_close ++ set macro error off ++ close connection ; Ignore any error ++ open !read tunnel start \%1 ++ read \%p ; Get port number ++ if fail stop 1 Tunnel failure: \%1 ++ close read ++ if fail stop 1 Tunnel failure: \%1 ; See [424]Section 4.2.8.1 ++ assign on_close { ; Set up close handler ++ echo Closing tunnel: \m(tunnelhost) ++ !tunnel stop \m(tunnelhost) ++ undef on_close ++ } ++ set host localhost:\%p /telnet ++ if success end 0 ++ undef on_close ++ stop 1 Connection failure: \%1 ++ } ++ ++ In this case, when the connection stops, we also need to shut down the ++ tunnel, even if it is at a later time after TUNNEL has finished ++ executing. This way we can escape back, reconnect, transfer files, and ++ so on until the connection is broken by logging out from the remote, ++ or by explicitly closing it, or by EXITing from C-Kermit, at which ++ time the tunnel is shut down. ++ ++ When the connection is closed, no matter how, the ON_CLOSE macro ++ executes and then undefines (destroys) itself, since we don't want to ++ be closing tunnels in the future when we close subsequent connections. ++ ++ Other such tricks can be imagined, including ending ON_CLOSE with a ++ STOP command to force the command stack to be peeled all the way back ++ to the top, for example in a deeply nested script that depends on the ++ connection being open: ++ ++ def on_close { stop 1 CONNECTION LOST } ++ ++ When C-Kermit invokes the ON_CLOSE macro, it supplies one argument ++ (\%1): the reason the connection was closed as a number, one of the ++ following: ++ ++ 2 - Fatal failure to negotiate a required item on a network connection. ++ 1 - Closed by C-Kermit command. ++ 0 - All others (normally closed by remote). ++ ++ which may be used for any purpose; for example, to add a comment to ++ the connection log: ++ ++ def on_close { ++ local \%m ++ if not open cx end 0 ++ switch \%1 { ++ :0, .\%m = Closed by remote, break ++ :1, .\%m = Closed by me, break ++ :2, .\%m = Network protocol negotiation failure, break ++ } ++ if def \%m writeln cx {# \%m} ++ } ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.15. Contacting Web Servers with the HTTP Command ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 (at this writing, the UNIX version only) supports direct ++ contact and interaction with Web servers via HTTP 1.0 protocol. To ++ make a connection, use Kermit's normal method for making a TCP/IP ++ connection, but specify the HTTP port: ++ ++ SET HOST host http [ switches ] ++ ++ where host is the IP hostname or address, and http is the name of the ++ TCP port for the Web server. Relevant switches include: ++ ++ /RAW ++ Treat the connection as a transparent binary pipe. This switch ++ may be required if a port other than 'http' is used. ++ ++ /SSL ++ Make an secure private connection with SSL (only if SSL support ++ is included in your version of Kermit). In this case the port ++ name might need to be https rather than http, e.g. "set host ++ secureserver.xyxcorp.com https /ssl". ++ ++ /TLS ++ Make an secure private connection with TLS (only if TLS support ++ is included in your version of Kermit). In this case the port ++ name would be https rather than http. ++ ++ Then you can issue an HTTP command. In most cases, the server closes ++ the connection when the command is complete. Example: ++ ++ SET HOST www.columbia.edu http ++ IF FAIL EXIT 1 Can't contact server ++ HTTP GET kermit/index.html ++ ++ At this point the connection is closed, since that's how HTTP 1.0 ++ works. If you want to perform additional operations, you must ++ establish a new connection with another SET HOST command. ++ ++ The HTTP command acts as a client to the Web server, except instead of ++ displaying the results like a Web browser would, it stores them. Any ++ HTTP command can (but need not) include any or all of the following ++ switches: ++ ++ /AGENT:user-agent ++ Identifies the client to the server; "C-Kermit" or "Kermit-95" ++ by default. ++ ++ /HEADER:header-line ++ Used for specifying any optional headers. A list of headers is ++ provided using braces for grouping: ++ ++ /HEADER:{{tag:value}{tag:value}...} ++ ++ For a listing of valid tag value and value formats see [425]RFC ++ 1945: Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.0. A maximum of ++ eight headers may be specified. ++ ++ /USER:name ++ In case a page requires a username for access. ++ ++ /PASSWORD:password ++ In case a page requires a password for access. ++ ++ /ARRAY:arrayname ++ Tells Kermit to store the response headers in the given array, ++ one line per element. The array need not be declared in ++ advance. Example: ++ ++ C-Kermit? http /array:c get kermit/index.html ++ C-Kermit? show array c ++ Dimension = 9 ++ 1. Date: Fri, 26 Nov 1999 23:12:22 GMT ++ 2. Server: Apache/1.3.4 (Unix) ++ 3. Last-Modified: Mon, 06 Sep 1999 22:35:58 GMT ++ 4. ETag: "bc049-f72-37d441ce" ++ 5. Accept-Ranges: bytes ++ 6. Content-Length: 3954 ++ 7. Connection: close ++ 8. Content-Type: text/html ++ ++ As you can see, the header lines are like MIME e-mail header lines: ++ identifier, colon, value. The /ARRAY switch is the only method ++ available to a script to process the server responses for a POST or ++ PUT command. ++ ++ The HTTP commands are: ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] GET remote-filename [ local-filename ] ++ Retrieves the named file. If a local-filename is given, the ++ file is stored locally under that name; otherwise it is stored ++ with its own name. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] HEAD remote-filename local-filename ++ Like GET except without actually getting the file; instead it ++ gets only the headers, storing them into the given file, whose ++ name must be given, one line per header item, as shown above in ++ the /ARRAY: switch description. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] INDEX remote-directory [ local-filename ] ++ Retrieves the file listing for the given server directory. ++ NOTE: This command is not supported by most Web servers. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] POST [ /MIME-TYPE:type ] local-file remote-file ++ Used to send a response as if it were sent from a form. The ++ data to be posted must be read from a file. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] PUT [ /MIME-TYPE:type ] local-file remote-file ++ Uploads a local file to a server file. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] DELETE remote-filename ++ Instructs the server to delete the specified filename. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3. TERMINAL CONNECTION ++ ++ 3.1. CONNECT Command Switches ++ ++ The following switches (see [426]Section 1.5) were added to the ++ CONNECT command in 7.0: ++ ++ /QUIETLY ++ Don't print the "Connecting to..." or "Back at..." messages. CQ ++ is an invisible command synonym for CONNECT /QUIETLY. ++ ++ /TRIGGER:string ++ Specify a trigger or triggers ([427]Section 3.2) effective for ++ this CONNECT command only, temporarily overriding any current ++ SET TERMINAL TRIGGER values ([428]Section 3.2). ++ ++ Note: Other switches might also be available; type "connect ?" for a ++ list, "help connect" for a description of each. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2. Triggers ++ ++ Triggers were added for UNIX, VMS, AOS/VS, and K95 in C-Kermit 7.0. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL TRIGGER string ++ Tells C-Kermit to look for the given string during all ++ subsequent CONNECT sessions, and if seen, to return to command ++ mode automatically, as if you had escaped back manually. If the ++ string includes any spaces, you must enclose it in braces. ++ Example: ++ ++ set terminal trigger {NO CARRIER} ++ ++ Comparisons are made after character-set translation. ++ ++ If a string is to include a literal brace character, precede it with a ++ backslash: ++ ++ ; My modem always makes this noise when the connection is lost: ++ set terminal trigger |||ppp\{\{\{\{UUUUUUU ++ ++ If you want Kermit to look for more than one string simultaneously, ++ use the following syntax: ++ ++ set terminal trigger {{string1}{string2}...{stringn}} ++ ++ In this case, C-Kermit will return to command mode automatically if ++ any of the given strings is encountered. Up to 8 strings may be ++ specified. ++ ++ If the most recent return to command mode was caused by a trigger, the ++ new variable, \v(trigger), shows the trigger value; otherwise ++ \v(trigger) is empty. ++ ++ The SHOW TRIGGER command displays the SET TERMINAL TRIGGER values as ++ well as the \v(trigger) value. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3. Transparent Printing ++ ++ As noted in the manual, C-Kermit's CONNECT command on UNIX is not a ++ terminal emulator, but rather a "semitransparent pipe" between the ++ terminal or emulator you are using to access C-Kermit, and the remote ++ host to which C-Kermit is connected. The "semitransparent" qualifier ++ is because of character-set translation as well as several actions ++ taken by the emulator in response to the characters or strings that ++ pass through it, such as APCs, Kermit packets (autodownload), ++ triggers, etc. ++ ++ The UNIX version of C-Kermit 7.0 adds another such action: Transparent ++ printing, also called Controller printing (as distinct from Autoprint ++ or line or screen print). It is intended mainly for use on UNIX ++ workstation consoles (as opposed to remote logins), but with some care ++ can also be used when accessing C-Kermit remotely. ++ ++ Transparent printing is related to APC by sharing C-Kermit's built-in ++ ANSI escape-sequence parser to detect "printer on" and "printer off" ++ sequences from the host. When the printer-on sequence is received, all ++ subsequent arriving characters -- including NUL, control characters, ++ and escape sequences -- are sent to the SET PRINTER device instead of ++ to your screen until the printer-off sequence is received, or you ++ escape back, whichever happens first. These bytes are not translated ++ or modified or filtered in any way by Kermit (except for possibly ++ stripping of the 8th bit, as noted below), but if filtering or ++ translation is desired, this can be accomplished by your SET PRINTER ++ selection (e.g. by choosing a pipeline of filters). ++ ++ By default, your SET PRINTER device is your default UNIX printer, but ++ it can also be a file, a command, or the null device (which causes all ++ printer material to be discarded). See [429]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed., ++ p.41 for details. ++ ++ Transparent printing is controlled by the command: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL PRINT { ON, OFF } ++ When ON, transparent-print sequences are obeyed, and printing ++ occurs on the system where C-Kermit is running. When OFF, ++ transparent print sequences are ignored and passed through to ++ your actual terminal or emulator, along with the data they ++ enclose. OFF is the default, for compatibility with earlier ++ C-Kermit releases. As noted in the manual, when the current SET ++ PRINTER device is a file, transparent-print material is ++ appended to it; the file is not overwritten. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE { 7, 8 } ++ SET PARITY { EVEN, ODD, MARK, SPACE, NONE } ++ If the terminal bytesize is 7, or PARITY is not NONE, the 8th ++ bit of each byte is stripped prior to printing. ++ ++ The transparent-print escape sequences are: ++ ++ [5i ++ Printer On. Send all subsequent incoming bytes to the printer ++ without any kind of filtering, translation, or alteration. ++ Note: stands for ASCII character number 27 (decimal), ++ Escape. ++ ++ [4i ++ Printer Off. Resume displaying incoming bytes on the screen. ++ ++ These are the same sequences used by DEC VT100 and higher terminals ++ and other ANSI X3.64 and ISO 6429 compatible terminals. There is no ++ provision for selecting other printer-control sequences. ++ ++ Restrictions: ++ ++ 1. You must SET TERM TRANSPARENT-PRINT ON before you can use this ++ feature. ++ 2. Only the 7-bit forms of the escape sequences are supported. The ++ 8-bit CSI C1 control is not recognized. ++ 3. Autoprint is not supported, since this requires a full-fledged ++ terminal emulator with direct access to the screen. ++ 4. The start-print and stop-print sequences pass through to the ++ screen (there is no way to avoid this without causing unacceptable ++ delays or deadlocks in CONNECT mode). Thus if your terminal or ++ emulator also supports transparent printing via these same ++ sequences, an empty file will be sent to its printer. Normally ++ this has no effect. ++ ++ Point (4) is similar to the situation with autodownload and APC -- ++ when you have several Kermit clients in a chain, you should take care ++ that these features are enabled in only one of them. ++ ++ Example 1: ++ ++ set printer {|lpr -Plaser} ; Specify the printer (if not default). ++ set term print on ; Enable transparent printing. ++ set term byte 8 ; Enable 8-bit characters. ++ connect ; Enter CONNECT mode. ++ ++ Example 2: ++ ++ set printer /home/users/olga/printer.log ; Send printer material to a file. ++ ++ Example 3: ++ ++ set printer {| grep -v ^Received | lpr} ; Filter out some lines ++ ++ Then use "pcprint" or "vtprint" commands on the host to initiate ++ transparent print operations. See [430]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed., p.406 ++ for details. ++ ++ Here is a sample "pcprint" shell script for UNIX: ++ ++ #!/bin/sh ++ echo -n '[5i' ++ if [ $# -eq 0 ]; then ++ cat ++ else ++ cat $* ++ fi ++ echo -n '[4i' ++ # (end) ++ ++ (Replace "" by the actual ASCII Escape character and "" by ++ the ASCII Formfeed character). ++ ++ If you always want transparent printing enabled, put "set term print ++ on" in your C-Kermit customization file (~/.mykermrc in UNIX). The ++ "set term bytesize" selection, however, is a property of each separate ++ connection. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.4. Binary and Text Session Logs ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 corrects an oversight in earlier releases, in which ++ binary session logs (SET SESSION-LOG BINARY) translated character sets ++ and performed various formatting transformations (e.g. "newline mode") ++ before writing characters to the session log. In C-Kermit 7.0, ++ binary-mode session logging writes characters as they come in, before ++ anything (other that parity-bit stripping) is done to them. Text-mode ++ session logging records the characters after processing. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4. FILE TRANSFER ++ ++ Every file is transferred either in text mode (which implies ++ record-format and character-set translation) or binary mode (in which ++ each byte is sent literally without any kind of conversion). The mode ++ in which a file is transferred is controlled by (a) the default mode, ++ in the absence of any other indications; (b) the SET FILE TYPE ++ command; (c) various automatic mechanisms based on client/server ++ negotiations, directory information or filename patterns, etc. ++ ++ The default FILE TYPE was changed from TEXT to BINARY in C-Kermit 7.0 ++ because: ++ ++ * Transferring a text file in binary mode does less damage than ++ transferring a binary file in text mode. ++ * Only binary-mode transfers can be recovered from the point of ++ failure. ++ * The automatic transfer-mode mechanisms switch to text mode on a ++ per-file basis anyway, so only those files that are not covered by ++ the automatic mechanisms are affected. ++ * All file transfers on the Web are done in binary mode, so people ++ are accustomed to it and expect it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0. BUG FIXES, MINOR CHANGES, AND CLARIFICATIONS ++ ++ 4.0.0. Filenames with Spaces ++ ++ Filenames that contain spaces are a major nuisance to a program like ++ Kermit, whose command language is line- and word-oriented, in which ++ words are separated by spaces and a filename is assumed to be a ++ "word". In general (unless noted otherwise in the description of a ++ particular command), there is only one way to refer to such files in ++ Kermit commands, and that is to enclose the name in braces: ++ ++ send {this file} ++ ++ Tells Kermit to send the file whose name is "this file" (two words, no ++ quotes). Of course, various circumlocutions are also possible, such ++ as: ++ ++ define \%a this file ++ send \%a ++ ++ BUT, perhaps contrary to expectation, you can't use "\32" to represent ++ the space: ++ ++ send this\32file ++ ++ does not work. Why? Because the Kermit parser, which must work on many ++ operating systems including Windows, has no way of knowing what you ++ mean by "this\32file". Do you mean a file whose name is "this file" in ++ the current directory? Or do you mean a file whose name is "32file" in ++ the "this" subdirectory of the current directory? Guessing won't do ++ here; Kermit must behave consistently and deterministically in all ++ cases on all platforms. ++ ++ Note that you can't use Esc or Tab within {...} for filename ++ completion, or question mark to get a filename list. However, you can ++ include wildcards; for example: ++ ++ send {* *} ++ ++ sends all files whose name contains a space. ++ ++ All things considered, it is best to avoid spaces in file and ++ directory names if you can. Also see [431]Section 5.4 on this topic. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.1. Packet out of Window ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0 could send packets "out of window" if the window size was ++ greater than 1 and ACKs had arrived out of order. Fixed in 6.1. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.2. MOVE after ADD SEND-LIST ++ ++ ADD SEND-LIST followed by MOVE did not delete original files; fixed in ++ 6.1. Carrier loss was not detected during transfer; in 7.0 C-Kermit ++ checks for this (but results can not be guaranteed). In any case, the ++ protocol will eventually time out if the connection is lost. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.3. GET and RECEIVE As-Names ++ ++ In 5A(190) through 6.0.192, the GET and RECEIVE as-name did not ++ properly override the RECEIVE PATHNAMES setting. In 7.0 it does. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.4. New Brief Statistics Listing ++ ++ Version 7.0 adds a /BRIEF switch to the STATISTICS command, to display ++ a short file-transfer statistics report. /BRIEF is now the default. ++ Use /VERBOSE to see the full display, which is about 25 lines long. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.5. Improved FAST Command ++ ++ The preinstalled definition of the FAST macro did not take enough ++ factors into account. Now it sets packet lengths and window sizes ++ appropriate to the configuration. Furthermore, in IRIX only, it might ++ restrict the SEND packet length to 4000, to work around a bug in the ++ IRIX Telnet server, depending on the IRIX version (see ++ [432]ckubwr.txt, IRIX section). To see the built-in definition of the ++ FAST macro, type "show macro fast". To change it, simply define it to ++ be whatever you want -- it's just a macro, like any other. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.6. The SET SEND BACKUP Command ++ ++ Version 7.0 adds SET SEND BACKUP { ON, OFF }. This tells whether ++ backup files should be sent. Backup files are the ones created by ++ Kermit (and EMACS, and possibly other applications) to preserve old ++ copies of files when creating new ones with the same name. Kermit does ++ this when receiving a file and its FILE COLLISION setting is BACKUP ++ (or RENAME, in which case it the new file gets the backup name). On ++ most platforms, the backup name is formed by adding: ++ ++ .~n~ ++ ++ to the end of the filename, where "n" is a number. For example, if the ++ original file is oofa.txt, a backup file might be called: ++ ++ oofa.txt.~1~ ++ ++ (or oofa.txt.~2~, etc). If you SET SEND BACKUP OFF, this tells Kermit ++ not to send files that have backup names. Normally, SET SEND BACKUP is ++ ON (as shown by SHOW PROTOCOL), and backup files are sent if their ++ names match the SEND file specification. ++ ++ Also see PURGE, SET FILE COLLISION, SEND /NOBACKUP, DIRECTORY ++ /[NO]BACKUP. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.7. The SET { SEND, RECEIVE } VERSION-NUMBERS Command ++ ++ VMS Only. Normally when sending files, VMS C-Kermit strips the version ++ number. For example, if the file is FOO.BAR;34, the name is sent as ++ FOO.BAR (without the ";34"). If you want to keep version numbers on ++ when sending files, use SET SEND VERSION-NUMBERS ON. The effect ++ depends on the receiver. ++ ++ Normally when receiving files, and an incoming filename includes a ++ VMS-style version number (such as FOO.BAR;34) VMS C-Kermit strips it ++ before trying to create the new file; this way the new file receives ++ the next highest version number in the customary manner for VMS. If ++ you want version numbers on incoming filenames to be used in creating ++ the new files, use SET RECEIVE VERSION-NUMBERS ON. ++ ++ Normally these commands would be effective only when VMS C-Kermit is ++ exchanging files with a non-VMS Kermit program, since VMS-to-VMS ++ transfers use labeled mode unless you have gone out of your way to ++ defeat it. ++ ++ Example: You want to send all versions of all files in the current ++ directory from a VMS C-Kermit client to a UNIX C-Kermit server. Use: ++ ++ set send version-numbers on ++ send *.*;* ++ ++ The resulting Unix files will have VMS-style version numbers as part ++ of their name, for example "foo.bar;1", "foo.bar;2", etc. ++ ++ Now suppose you want to send these files from Unix to another VMS ++ system and preserve the version numbers. Again we have a Unix C-Kermit ++ server and VMS C-Kermit client. Give these commands to the client: ++ ++ set receive version-numbers on ++ get * ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.8. The SET { SEND, RECEIVE } { MOVE-TO, RENAME-TO } Commands ++ ++ These commands are persistent global versions of the /MOVE-TO: and ++ /RENAME-TO: switches of the SEND, GET, and RECEIVE commands. They ++ should normally be used only when setting up a dedicated ++ transaction-processing application, in which each file is to be moved ++ or renamed immediately after, and only if, it is transferred ++ successfully, so that (for example) an independent, concurrent process ++ can notice when new files appear and process them immediately without ++ having to guess whether they are complete. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.0.9. SET FILE INCOMPLETE AUTO ++ ++ SET FILE INCOMPLETE { KEEP, DISCARD }, which tells whether to keep or ++ discard incompletely received files, has a new option, AUTO, which is ++ also the default. It means KEEP the incomplete file if the transfer is ++ in binary mode, otherwise DISCARD it. This reduces the chances that a ++ subsequent recovery operation (RESEND, REGET, etc) could produce a ++ corrupt file, since recovery works only for binary-mode transfers. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.1. FILE-TRANSFER FILENAME TEMPLATES ++ ++ File-transfer filename templates allow files to be renamed ++ automatically by the file sender, the receiver, or both, during ++ transfer of groups of files. ++ ++ 4.1.1. Templates in the As-Name ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 6.1 and Kermit 95 1.1.12 the only options that could ++ be used to affect the names of files being transferred were SET ++ FILENAMES { LITERAL, CONVERTED } and SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PATHNAMES { ++ ON, OFF }, plus the "as-name" feature of the SEND (MOVE, etc) and ++ RECEIVE commands. ++ ++ Previously, the as-name could be used only for a single file. For ++ example: ++ ++ SEND FOO BAR ++ ++ would send the file FOO under the name BAR, but: ++ ++ SEND *.TXT anything ++ ++ was not allowed, since it would give the same name to each file that ++ was sent. When receiving: ++ ++ RECEIVE FOO ++ ++ would rename the first incoming file to FOO before storing it on the ++ disk, but subsequent files would not be renamed to FOO, since this ++ would result in overwriting the same file repeatedly. Instead, they ++ were stored under the names they arrived with. ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 6.1 and Kermit 95 1.1.12, it is possible to ++ specify as-names in SEND, RECEIVE, and related commands even for file ++ groups. This is accomplished by using replacement variables in the ++ as-name, along with optional material such character-string functions ++ and/or constant strings. An as-name containing replacement variables ++ is called a filename template. ++ ++ The key to filename templates is the new variable: ++ ++ \v(filename) ++ ++ During file transfer it is replaced by the name of each file currently ++ being transferred (after transfer, it is the name of the last file ++ transferred). ++ ++ So, for example: ++ ++ send *.txt \v(filename).new ++ ++ sends each file with its own name, but with ".new" appended to it. Of ++ course if the name already contains periods, this could confuse the ++ file receiver, so you can also achieve fancier effects with ++ constructions like: ++ ++ send *.txt \freplace(\v(filename),.,_).new ++ ++ which replaces all periods in the original filename by underscores, ++ and then appends ".new" to the result. So, for example, oofa.txt would ++ be sent as oofa_txt.new. ++ ++ Another new variable that is useful in this regard is \v(filenumber), ++ which is the ordinal number of the current file in the file group, so ++ you can also: ++ ++ send *.txt FILE\flpad(\v(filenum),2,0) ++ ++ resulting in a series of files called FILE00, FILE01, FILE02, etc. (At ++ the end of the transfer, \v(filenum) tells the number of files that ++ were transferred). ++ ++ If you specify a constant as-name when sending a file group: ++ ++ send *.txt thisnameonly ++ ++ Kermit complains and asks you to include replacement variables in the ++ as-name. You should generally use \v(filename) or \v(filenumber) for ++ this purpose, since other variables (with the possible exception of ++ date/time related variables) do not change from one file to the next. ++ But Kermit accepts any as-name at all that contains any kind of ++ variables for file group, even if the variable will not change. So: ++ ++ send *.txt \%a ++ ++ is accepted, but all files are sent with the same name (the value of ++ \%a, if it has one and it is constant). If the variable has no value ++ at all, the files are sent under their own names. ++ ++ Of course, the value of \%a in the previous example need not be ++ constant: ++ ++ define \%a FILE\flpad(\v(filenum),2,0)_at_\v(time) ++ send *.txt \%a ++ ++ The RECEIVE command, when given without an as-name, behaves as always, ++ storing all incoming files under the names they arrive with, subject ++ to SET FILE NAME and SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES modifications ([433]Section ++ 4.10). ++ ++ However, when an as-name is given in the RECEIVE command, it is ++ applied to all incoming files rather than to just the first. If it ++ does not contain replacement variables, then the current FILE ++ COLLISION setting governs the result. For example: ++ ++ receive foo ++ ++ will result in incoming files named foo, foo.~1~, foo.~2~, and so on, ++ with the default FILE COLLISION setting of BACKUP. If it does contain ++ replacement variables, of course they are used. ++ ++ When receiving files, the \v(filename) variable refers to the name ++ that was received in the incoming file-header packet, BEFORE any ++ processing by SET FILE NAMES or SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES. Since the ++ filenames in file-header packets are usually in uppercase, you would ++ need to convert them explicitly if you want them in lowercase, e.g.: ++ ++ receive \flower(\v(filename)).new ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.1.2. Templates on the Command Line ++ ++ On the command-line, use templates as shown above as the -a option ++ argument, bearing in mind the propensity of UNIX and perhaps other ++ shells to treat backslash as a shell escape character. So in UNIX (for ++ example): ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.* -a x.\\v(filenum) ++ ++ By the way, this represents a change from 6.0 and earlier releases in ++ which the as-name (-a argument or otherwise) was not evaluated by the ++ command parser. Thus, for example, in VMS (where the shell does not ++ care about backslashes), it was possible to: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.txt -a c:\tmp\oofa.txt ++ ++ Now backslashes in the as-name must be quoted not only for the shell ++ (if necessary) but also for Kermit itself: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.txt -a c:\\tmp\\oofa.txt ; Kermit only ++ kermit -s oofa.txt -a c:\\\\tmp\\\\oofa.txt ; Shell and Kermit ++ ++ You can also use the \fliteral() function for this: ++ ++ kermit -s oofa.txt -a \fliteral(c:\tmp\oofa.txt) ; Kermit only ++ kermit -s oofa.txt -a \\fliteral(c:\\tmp\\oofa.txt) ; Shell and Kermit ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.1.3. Post-Transfer Renaming ++ ++ Filename templates are now also useful in SET { SEND, RECEIVE } ++ RENAME-TO and in the /RENAME-TO: switch, that can be given to the ++ SEND, GET, or RECEIVE commands; this is similar to an as-name, but is ++ effective on a per-file basis if and only if the file was transferred ++ successfully. ++ ++ MOVE-TO and RENAME-TO address a requirement commonly stated for ++ transaction processing and similar systems. Suppose, for example, a ++ central system "X" accepts connections from multiple clients ++ simultaneously; a process on X waits for a file to appear and then ++ processes the file. This process must have a way of knowing when the ++ file has been completely and successfully transferred before it starts ++ to process it. This can be accomplished easily using C-Kermit's SET { ++ SEND, RECEIVE } { MOVE-TO, RENAME-TO } command or /MOVE-TO: or ++ /RENAME-TO: switches, described in [434]Sections 4.7.1 through ++ [435]4.7.3. ++ ++ Here's an example for the client side, in which files to be sent are ++ placed in a certain directory (/usr/olga/tosend in this example) by ++ another process when they are ready to go. This might be in a hospital ++ or big doctor's office, where medical insurance claims are entered at ++ a number of workstations, and then deposited in the "tosend" ++ directory, from which they are sent to a claims clearinghouse. We ++ assume the connection is already made and a Kermit server is on the ++ other end. ++ ++ local srcdir findir ; Declare local (automatic) variables ++ assign srcdir /usr/olga/tosend ; Local source directory (files to send) ++ assign findir /usr/olga/sent ; Where to move files after they are sent ++ log transactions ; Keep a log of transfers ++ cd \m(srcdir) ; Change to the source directory ++ while true { ; Loop forever... ++ send /move-to:\m(findir) * ; Send all files ++ sleep 60 ; Sleep a minute ++ } ; Go back and do it again ++ ++ Note how simple this is. Once each file is sent, it is moved so it ++ won't be sent again (you could also use SEND /RENAME-TO: or even SEND ++ /DELETE). If a transfer fails, the file is not moved and so we try ++ again to send it next time around. If there are no files to send, the ++ SEND command does nothing but a message is printed; you can avoid the ++ message by checking first to see if any files are in the directory: ++ ++ while true { ; Loop forever... ++ if > \ffiles(*) 0 - ; If there are any files ++ send /move-to:\m(findir) * ; send them. ++ sleep 60 ; Sleep a minute. ++ } ; Go back and do it again. ++ ++ It's even simpler on the server side (here again we assume the ++ connection is already in place): ++ ++ local rcvdir findir ; Declare local (automatic) variables ++ assign rcvdir /usr/ivan/tmp ; Temporary receiving directory ++ assign findir /usr/ivan/new ; Where to move files after reception ++ log transactions ; Keep a log of transfers ++ cd \m(rcvdir) ; Change to the source directory ++ set receive move-to \m(findir) ; Declare move-to directory. ++ server ; Enter server mode. ++ ++ A separate process (e.g. the medical claim-form decoder) can look for ++ files appearing in the /usr/ivan/new directory and process them with ++ every confidence that they have been completely received. ++ ++ Note that the use of MOVE-TO can result in moved files overwriting one ++ another (the application would normally avoid this by assigning each ++ transaction a unique, e.g. based on customer number and claim number). ++ But if filename collisions are a possibility in your application, ++ RENAME-TO might be a better choice; you can use any variables you like ++ in the template to ensure uniqueness of the RENAME-TO filename; for ++ example: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE RENAME-TO \v(filename)_\v(ndate)_\v(ntime)_\v(userid)_\v(pid) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2. FILE-TRANSFER PIPES AND FILTERS ++ ++ 4.2.1. INTRODUCTION ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 6.1 and Kermit 95 1.1.12, it is possible to send ++ from a command, or "pipe", as well as from a file, and to receive to a ++ pipe or command. In a typical example, we might want to transfer an ++ entire directory tree from one UNIX system to another (but without ++ using the methods described in [436]Sections 4.3 , [437]4.10, ++ [438]4.11, and [439]4.15). We could do this in multiple steps as ++ follows: ++ ++ 1. Create a tar archive of the desired directory tree ++ 2. Compress the tar archive ++ 3. Transfer it in binary mode to the other computer ++ 4. Decompress it ++ 5. Extract the directory tree from the tar archive ++ ++ But this is inconvenient and it requires a temporary file, which might ++ be larger than we have room for. ++ ++ The new pipe-transfer feature lets you do such things in a single ++ step, and without intermediate files. ++ ++ Additional new features, also discussed here, let you specify pre- and ++ post- processing filters for outbound and incoming files, and give you ++ a way to insert the output from shell or system commands into C-Kermit ++ commands. ++ ++ The file-transfer related features are available only with Kermit ++ protocol, not with any external protocols, nor with K95's built-in ++ XYZMODEM protocols (because XYZMODEM recovers from transmission errors ++ by rewinding the source file, and you can't rewind a pipe). ++ ++ This section begins by discussing the simple and straightforward use ++ of these features in UNIX, in which pipes and input/output redirection ++ are a fundamental component and therefore "just work", and then goes ++ on to discuss their operation in Windows and OS/2, where matters are ++ much more complicated. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.1.1. TERMINOLOGY ++ ++ Standard Input ++ This is a precise technical term denoting the normal source of ++ input for a command or program, which is the keyboard of your ++ terminal by default, but which can be redirected to a file or ++ pipe. ++ ++ Stdin ++ Abbreviation for Standard Input. ++ ++ Standard Output ++ A precise technical term denoting the normal destination for ++ output from a command or program, which is your terminal screen ++ by default, but which can be redirected to a file. ++ ++ Stdout ++ Abbreviation for Standard Output. ++ ++ Stdio ++ Abbreviation for Standard Input / Standard Output. ++ ++ I/O ++ Abbreviation for Input / Output. ++ ++ Shell ++ Text-based system command processor, such as the UNIX shell, ++ DOS COMMAND.COM, etc. ++ ++ Pipe ++ A mechanism by which the standard output of one program is sent ++ to the standard input of another. ++ ++ Pipeline ++ A series of programs connected by pipes. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.1.2. NOTATION ++ ++ In command descriptions, "command" is replaced by a shell or system ++ command or pipeline. The command names specified in these commands are ++ interpreted by your shell, just as if you were typing them at the ++ shell prompt, and so if they are in your PATH, they will be found in ++ the expected manner. Therefore you don't have to specify complete ++ pathnames for commands that are programs (but it shouldn't hurt if you ++ do). ++ ++ The normal notation for I/O redirection is as follows: ++ ++ < Read Stdin from the given file. ++ > Send Stdout to the given file. ++ | Send Stdout from the command on the left to the command on the right. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ sort < foo > bar ++ Sorts the lines in file "foo" and writes the results to file ++ "bar" ++ ++ grep -c "some text" *.txt | grep -v ":0" | sort | pr -3 | lpr ++ This is a command pipeline composed of 5 commands: ++ ++ grep -c "some text" *.txt ++ Looks in all files whose names end with ".txt" for the string ++ "some text" and writes to Stdout the names of each file ++ followed by a colon and the number of occurrences in each. ++ ++ grep -v ":0" ++ Prints to Stdout the lines from Stdin that do NOT contain the ++ string ":0", in this case, it removes the names of files that ++ do not contain "some text". ++ ++ sort ++ Sorts the lines from Stdin alphabetically to Stdout. ++ ++ pr -3 ++ Arranges the lines from Stdin in three columns. ++ ++ lpr ++ Prints its Stdin on the default printer. ++ ++ Note that the Kermit features described here work only with commands ++ that use Stdio. If you attempt to use them with commands whose input ++ and output can not be redirected, Kermit will most likely get stuck. ++ Kermit has no way of telling how an external command works, nor what ++ the syntax of the shell is, so it's up to you to make sure you use ++ these features only with redirectable commands. ++ ++ The quoting rules of your shell apply to the command. Thus in UNIX, ++ where C-Kermit tries to use your preferred shell for running commands, ++ shell "metacharacters" within commands must be escaped if they are to ++ be taken literally, using the methods normal for your shell. For ++ example, the UNIX tr (translate) command must have its arguments in ++ quotes: ++ ++ tr "[a-z]" "[A-Z]" ++ ++ otherwise the shell is likely to replace them by all filenames that ++ match, which is probably not what you want. This is also true when ++ using your shell directly, and has nothing to do with Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.1.3. SECURITY ++ ++ Some sites might not wish to allow access to system commands or ++ external programs from within Kermit. Such access, including all the ++ features described here, can be disabled in various ways: ++ ++ 1. When building from source code, include -DNOPUSH among the CFLAGS. ++ 2. At runtime, give the NOPUSH command. ++ 3. For server mode, give the DISABLE HOST command. ++ 4. Implicit use of pipes can be disabled as described in [440]Section ++ 4.2.4. ++ ++ Note: 3 and 4 are not necessary if you have done 1 or 2. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.2. Commands for Transferring from and to Pipes ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND sends data from a command or command pipeline, and ++ RECEIVE /COMMENT writes data to a command or pipeline. The GET ++ /COMMAND command asks a server to send material, and then writes the ++ incoming material to a command or pipeline. These features, along with ++ switches (like "/COMMAND", described in [441]Section 4.7) are new to ++ C-Kermit 6.1. The following synonyms are also provided: ++ ++ CSEND = SEND /COMMAND ++ CRECEIVE = RECEIVE /COMMAND ++ CGET = GET /COMMAND ++ ++ None of these commands can be used if a SEND or RECEIVE FILTER ++ (respectively, [442]Section 4.2.3) is in effect, or if a NOPUSH ++ command ([443]Section 4.2.1.3) has been given, or if the current ++ protocol is not Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.2.1. Sending from a Command ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND command [ as-name ] ++ SEND /AS-NAME:as-name /COMMAND command ++ CSEND command [ as-name ] ++ These three forms are the same. They work like the SEND ++ command, but instead of sending a file, it sends the standard ++ output of the given command, either under the command's own ++ name, or else with the given as-name. If the command contains ++ spaces, it must be enclosed in braces. Braces should also be ++ used for the as-name if it contains spaces. If braces are ++ included around either the command or the as-name, they are ++ removed after parsing but before use. As with SEND, the ++ transfer is in text or binary mode according the current FILE ++ TYPE setting, unless you override the global transfer mode by ++ including a /TEXT or /BINARY switch. The command must require ++ no input. ++ ++ When sending from a command or pipeline, C-Kermit has no way of ++ knowing in advance how much data will be sent, and so it can not send ++ the size to the other Kermit in the Attribute packet, and so the ++ receiving Kermit has no way of displaying "percent done" or a progress ++ bar (thermometer). ++ ++ Examples that make sense in text mode (illustrated by common UNIX ++ commands): ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND finger ++ CSEND finger ++ sends the current "finger" listing (who's logged in) under the ++ name "finger". The two forms "send /command" and "csend" are ++ equivalent; we won't bother showing them both in the rest of ++ the examples. ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{finger} ++ CSEND {finger} ++ Same as previous example (braces are removed from "{finger}"). ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{ finger } ++ CSEND { finger } ++ Same as previous example, but note that the spaces are kept. ++ This does not prevent the shell from running the "finger" ++ program, but its output is sent under the name " finger " (with ++ a leading and trailing space). ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:finger /AS-NAME:userlist ++ CSEND finger userlist ++ sends the current finger listing under the name "userlist". ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{finger | sort -r} /AS-NAME:userlist ++ CSEND {finger | sort -r} userlist ++ sends the current finger listing, sorted in reverse order, ++ under the name "userlist". The braces are needed to distinguish ++ the command from the as-name. ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{finger | sort -r} /AS-NAME:{userlist} ++ CSEND {finger | sort -r} {userlist} ++ Same as previous example (braces are removed from ++ "{userlist}"). ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{finger | sort -r} ++ /AS-NAME:{\freplace(\v(filename),\32,_)} ++ ++ CSEND {finger | sort -r} {\freplace(\v(filename),\32,_)} ++ Like the previous example, but sends the output of the command ++ under the name of the command, but with all spaces (\32) ++ replaced by underscores, so the as-name is "finger_|_sort_-r". ++ ++ Examples that make sense in binary mode (three equivalent forms are ++ shown): ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND /BINARY {tar cf - . | gzip -c} mydir.tar.gz ++ SEND /COMMAND /BINARY /AS-NAME:mydir.tar.gz {tar cf - . | gzip -c} ++ CSEND /BINARY {tar cf - . | gzip -c} mydir.tar.gz ++ Makes a tar archive of the current directory, compresses it ++ with the GNU gzip program, and sends it as "mydir.tar.gz". The ++ other Kermit can, of course, just store it as a file, or it can ++ use CRECEIVE to uncompress and dearchive it as part of the ++ transfer process. ++ ++ When using a "pipeline" of commands in the command field, obviously, ++ the first command must not require any input, and the last command ++ should produce some output, and all intermediate commands should get ++ some input and produce some output. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.2.2. Receiving to a Command ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND command ++ CRECEIVE command ++ This is like RECEIVE, except incoming material is written to ++ the standard input of the given command, in text or binary mode ++ according to the normal rules for file reception. Be sure to ++ include a redirector to a file (if the command normally writes ++ to standard output), or the output of the command won't go ++ anywhere. The command may contain spaces; braces are not ++ needed, but they are removed if used. ++ ++ WARNING: C-Kermit has no way of knowing anything about the command, or ++ even whether it is a command. Thus this command will always cause ++ C-Kermit to enter protocol mode, as long as some text is specified in ++ the command field. However, if the text does not correspond to a ++ command, the transfer will eventually fail with a message such as ++ "Error writing data" or "Failure to close file". ++ ++ Examples for text mode (in UNIX): ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND sort -r > reverse.txt ++ CRECEIVE sort -r > reverse.txt ++ The text that is received is sorted in reverse order and stored ++ in the file "reverse.txt". The two forms shown are equivalent. ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND {sort -r > reverse.txt} ++ CRECEIVE {sort -r > reverse.txt} ++ The same as the previous example; if braces are included, they ++ are simply removed. ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND {sort -r > \flower(\v(filename)).reverse} ++ CRECEIVE {sort -r > \flower(\v(filename)).reverse} ++ Same but stores result under the incoming filename, lowercased, ++ and with ".reverse" appended to it. ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND sort ++ CRECEIVE sort ++ Does nothing useful, since the output of sort has nowhere to ++ go. ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND sort -r | pr -3 | lpr -Plaserjet ++ CRECEIVE sort -r | pr -3 | lpr -Plaserjet ++ The text that is received is sorted in reverse order, arranged ++ into three columns, and sent to the "laserjet" printer. ++ ++ Examples for binary mode: ++ ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND:{gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ CRECEIVE {gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ Assuming the data that is received is a compressed tar archive, ++ uncompresses the archive and passes it to tar for extraction. ++ In this case the braces are needed because otherwise the final ++ "-" would be taken as a command continuation character (see ++ [444]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition, p.33). ++ ++ GET /COMMAND remote-file command ++ GET /COMMAND /AS-NAME:command remote-file ++ CGET remote-file command ++ This command tells the Kermit client to send a GET request for ++ the given remote file to a Kermit server. Unlike GET, however, ++ the incoming material is written to a command, rather than to a ++ file. If the remote-file or the command contain spaces, they ++ must be enclosed in braces. The same cautions about the command ++ apply as for CRECEIVE. ++ ++ Examples (for UNIX): ++ ++ GET /COMMAND oofa.txt sort -r > oofa.new ++ GET /COMMAND {oofa.txt} {sort -r > oofa.new} ++ CGET oofa.txt sort -r > oofa.new ++ CGET {oofa.txt} {sort -r > oofa.new} ++ These four are equivalent. Each of them requests the server to ++ send its "oofa.txt" file, and as it arrives, it is sorted in ++ reverse order and written to "oofa.new". ++ ++ GET /COMMAND {profile exec a} lpr ++ GET /COMMAND {profile exec a} {lpr} ++ GET /COMMAND /AS-NAME:lpr {profile exec a} ++ GET /COMMAND /AS-NAME:{lpr} {profile exec a} ++ GET /COMMAND /AS:lpr {profile exec a} ++ CGET {profile exec a} lpr ++ CGET {profile exec a} {lpr} ++ Here the remote filename contains spaces so it MUST be enclosed ++ in braces. As it arrives it is sent to the lpr program for ++ printing. Braces are optional around "lpr" since it contains no ++ spaces. ++ ++ GET /COMMAND *.txt {cat >> new.txt} ++ GET /AS-NAME:{cat >> new.txt} /COMMAND *.txt ++ CGET *.txt {cat >> new.txt} ++ This gets all the ".txt" files from the server and concatenates ++ them all into a single "new.txt" file on the client. ++ ++ GET /COMMAND *.txt {echo \v(filename)>>new.txt;cat>>new.txt} ++ CGET *.txt {echo \v(filename)>>new.txt;cat>>new.txt} ++ As above, but inserts each file's name before its contents. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.3. Using File-Transfer Filters ++ ++ The commands described in [445]Section 4.2.2 let you send the output ++ of a command, or receive data into a command. But what if you want to ++ specify preprocessing for files that you send, or postprocessing of ++ files that you receive, even when multiple files are involved? For ++ this you need a way to specify send and receive filters. The commands ++ are SET SEND FILTER and SET RECEIVE FILTER; SHOW PROTOCOL displays the ++ current settings. ++ ++ 4.2.3.1. The SEND Filter ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER [ command ] ++ This command specifies a command to be run on any file that you ++ SEND (or MOVE, MSEND, etc). It also applies to files sent when ++ in server mode, in response to GET commands, but not to the ++ results of REMOTE commands like REMOTE DIRECTORY, REMOTE TYPE, ++ REMOTE HOST, etc. The command may be, but need not be, enclosed ++ in braces; if it is, the braces are stripped before use. The ++ output of this command is sent, rather than the file itself. ++ The current FILE TYPE setting (TEXT or BINARY) applies to the ++ output of the command. The command must contain at least one ++ instance of \v(filename), for which the name of the actual file ++ is substituted. If the command is omitted, the send filter is ++ removed and files are sent in the normal manner. ++ ++ The SET SEND FILTER sets up a "global" filter -- that is, one that ++ applies to all subsequent file-sending commands until you change or ++ remove it. You can also specify a "local" filter to be used in a ++ specific file-sending command by using the /FILTER switch (see ++ [446]Section 1.5); for example: ++ ++ SEND /FILTER:command [ other-switches ] filename ++ ++ Besides \v(filename), you can include any other script programming ++ notation in the send filter: variable names, array references, calls ++ to built-in string or other functions, and so on. These are evaluated ++ during file transfer, NOT during parsing, and they are evaluated ++ separately for each file. ++ ++ When the SEND or MOVE (SEND /DELETE) command is used with a send ++ filter, the output from the filter is sent under the file's original ++ name unless you specify an "as-name" or template. The Attribute packet ++ (if any) contains the original file's attributes (size, creation date, ++ etc). So (for example) if the filter changes the file's size, the ++ progress thermometer might be wrong. (We can't send the size of the ++ output from the filter, because it is not known until the transfer is ++ finished.) If you prefer that the size not be sent, use "set ++ attributes size off". ++ ++ You can not use send filters with RESEND (SEND /RECOVER) or PSEND ++ (SEND /START). ++ ++ Examples for text mode: ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER sort -r \v(filename) ; Braces may be omitted ++ SET SEND FILTER {sort -r \v(filename)} ; Braces may be included ++ SEND *.txt ++ This sends every file in the current directory whose name ends ++ with ".txt" under its own name, but with its lines sorted in ++ reverse order. ++ ++ SEND /FILTER:{sort -r \v(filename)} *.txt ++ Same as above, but the filter applies only to this SEND ++ command. Braces are required in this case. ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER {sort -r \v(filename)} ++ SEND oofa.txt reverse.txt ++ Sends the oofa.txt file with its lines sorted in reverse order ++ under the name "reverse.txt". ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER {sort -r \v(filename)} ++ SEND oofa.* \v(filename).reverse ++ Sends all the oofa.* files with their lines sorted in reverse ++ order; each file is sent under its own name but with ".reverse" ++ appended to it. ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER {tr "[a-z]" "[A-Z]" < \v(filename)} ++ SEND *.txt ++ Sends all ".txt" files under their own names, but uppercasing ++ their contents. ++ ++ Note that the SEND FILTER applies not only to files that are sent with ++ SEND, MOVE, MSEND, etc, but also to files sent by the C-Kermit server ++ in response to GET requests. ++ ++ Examples for binary mode: ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER {gzip -c \v(filename)} ++ SEND /BINARY oofa.txt oofa.txt.gz ++ Sends the oofa.txt file, compressed by gzip, as oofa.txt.gz. ++ ++ SEND /BINARY /FILTER:{gzip -c \v(filename)} oofa.txt oofa.txt.gz ++ As above, but the filter applies only to this SEND command. ++ ++ SET SEND FILTER {gzip -c \v(filename)} ++ SEND /BINARY oofa.* \fupper(\replace(\v(filename),.,_)).GZ ++ Sends all the oofa.* files, compressed by gzip, each under its ++ own name, but with the name uppercased, all periods within the ++ name converted to underscores, and ".GZ" appended to it. So, ++ for example, "oofa.txt" is sent as "OOFA_TXT.GZ". ++ ++ In the gzip examples, note that the amount of data that is sent is ++ normally less than the original file size because gzip compresses the ++ file. But Kermit sends the original file size ahead in the attribute ++ packet anyway (unless you tell it not too). Thus the transfer will ++ probably appear to terminate early, e.g. when the receiver's ++ file-transfer display thermometer is only at 40%. If this annoys you, ++ tell Kermit to "set attribute length off". On the other hand, you can ++ use the final position of the thermometer as a measure of the ++ effectiveness of compression. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.3.2. The RECEIVE Filter ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER [ command ] ++ This command specifies that the given command will be run on ++ any file that is received before it is written to disk. The ++ command may be, but need not be, enclosed in braces; if it is ++ the braces are stripped before use. The following two commands ++ are equivalent: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER sort -r > \v(filename) ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER {sort -r > \v(filename)} ++ ++ The RECEIVE filter command may contain a "\v(filename)" sequence to be ++ replaced by the incoming filename from the file header packet, but it ++ is not required. However you must use it whenever your filter would ++ normally write to Stdout, otherwise its output will be lost. ++ ++ The RECEIVE filter command may contain one or more "\v(filename)" ++ sequence to be replaced by the incoming filename from the file header ++ packet, but it is not required. However you must use it whenever your ++ filter would normally write to Stdout, otherwise its output will be ++ lost. ++ ++ RECEIVE /FILTER:command and GET /FILTER:command can also be used to ++ specify a filter to be used for only one file-transfer operation. ++ ++ UNIX examples for text mode: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER lpr ++ RECEIVE ++ All the files that are received are sent to the default UNIX ++ print spooler. ++ ++ RECEIVE /FILTER:lpr ++ Same as above, except the lpr filter is used only with this ++ RECEIVE command. ++ ++ RECEIVE lpr ++ This is probably not what you want; it creates a file called ++ lpr. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER {sort -r > \v(filename)} ++ RECEIVE ++ Stores each incoming file with its lines sorted in reverse ++ order, under its own name. ++ ++ RECEIVE /FILTER:{sort -r > \v(filename)} ++ As above, but the filter is used only for this RECEIVE command. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER sort -r > \v(filename) ++ RECEIVE reverse.txt ++ Stores each incoming file with its lines sorted in reverse ++ order, under the name "reverse.txt". The actual result depends ++ on the FILE COLLISION setting. If it is OVERWRITE and multiple ++ files arrive, then each incoming file destroys the previous ++ one. If it is BACKUP (the default), filename conflicts are ++ resolve by adding "version numbers" to the filenames: ++ reverse.txt, reverse.txt.~1~, reverse.txt.~2~, etc. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER sort -r > \v(filename) ++ RECEIVE \v(filename).reverse ++ Stores each incoming file with its lines sorted in reverse ++ order, under the name it arrived with, but with ".reverse" ++ appended to it. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER sort -r > \v(filename) ++ RECEIVE \flower(\v(filename)).reverse ++ Like the previous example, but ensures that the filename is ++ lowercase. ++ ++ Examples for binary mode: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER gunzip -c > \v(filename) ++ RECEIVE ++ This receives one or more presumably compressed file and ++ uncompresses each one into a file having the same name it was ++ sent with. For example, if the file is sent with the name ++ OOFA.TXT.GZ, it is stored with that name, even after ++ decompression. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE FILTER gunzip -c > \v(filename) ++ RECEIVE \flower(\fsubstring(\v(filename),1,\flength(\v(filename))-3)) ++ Like the previous example, but the resulting filename has its ++ rightmost three characters removed from it and the remainder is ++ lowercased. So if the incoming filename is OOFA.TXT.GZ, it is ++ stored as oofa.txt after decompression. ++ ++ Of course you don't want to type such long hideous commands, so we ++ have also introduced several new functions: ++ ++ \fstripx(string[,character]) ++ This function removes the rightmost segment of the string that ++ starts with the given character. If no character is given, ++ period (.) is used. Thus it is most conveniently used for ++ stripping the extension from a filename (or the decimal portion ++ from a floating-point number written in US/UK style). Examples: ++ ++ \fstripx(OOFA.TXT.GZ) => OOFA.TXT ++ \fstripx(OOFA.TXT.GZ,.) => OOFA.TXT ++ \fstripx(OOFA.TXT.GZ,X) => OOFA.T ++ \fstripx(\fstripx(OOFA.TXT.GZ)) => OOFA ++ \fstripx($100.00) => $100 ++ ++ \fstripn(string,number) ++ Removes the rightmost number characters from the string. ++ Examples: ++ ++ \fstripn(OOFA.TXT.GZ) => OOFA.TXT.GZ ++ \fstripn(OOFA.TXT.GZ,3) => OOFA.TXT ++ \fstripn(OOFA.TXT.GZ,7) => OOFA ++ ++ \fstripb(string[,c1[,c2]]) ++ Strips enclosing matching braces, brackets, parentheses, or ++ quotes from the string. The second argument, c1, specifies ++ which kind of enclosure to look for; if not specified, any ++ enclosing (), [], <>, {}, "", '', or `' are removed. If c1 is ++ specified and c2 is not, then if c1 is an opening brace, ++ bracket, or parenthesis, the matching closing one is supplied ++ automatically as c2. If both c1 and c2 are specified, then to ++ be stripped the string must begin with c1 and end with c2. If ++ the string is not enclosed in the indicated manner, the result ++ is the original string. Examples: ++ ++ \fstripb("abc") => abc ++ \fstripb([abc]) => abc ++ \fstripb([abc) => [abc ++ \fstripb() => abc ++ \fstripb(,[) => ++ \fstripb((abc)) => abc ++ \fstripb((abc),[) => (abc) ++ \fstripb((abc),{(}) => abc ++ \fstripb(+abc+) => +abc+ ++ \fstripb(+abc+,+) => abc ++ \fstripb(+abc+,+,^) => +abc+ ++ \fstripb(+abc^,+,^) => abc ++ \fstripb('abc') => abc ++ \fstripb(`abc') => abc ++ \fstripb(``abc'') => `abc' ++ \fstripb(\fstripb(``abc'')) => abc ++ ++ Notice the special syntax required for including a literal ++ parenthesis in the argument list. As the last two examples ++ illustrate, \fstripb() strips only one level at at a time; ++ nesting can be used to strip a small fixed number of levels; ++ loops can be used to strip larger or indeterminate numbers of ++ levels. ++ ++ \flop(string[,char]) ++ Removes the leftmost segment of the string that ends with the ++ given character. If no character is given, period (.) is used. ++ Examples: ++ ++ \flop(OOFA.TXT.GZ) => TXT.GZ ++ \flop(OOFA.TXT.GZ,.) => TXT.GZ ++ \flop(OOFA.TXT.GZ,X) => T.GZ ++ ++ To remove the leftmost number characters, just use ++ \fsubstring(s,number+1). To return the rightmost number ++ characters, use \fright(s,number). ++ ++ So the hideous example: ++ ++ receive \flower(\fsubstring(\v(filename),1,\flength(\v(filename))-3)) ++ ++ can now be written as: ++ ++ receive \flower(\fstripx(\v(filename))) ++ ++ That is, the filename stripped of its extension and then lowercased. ++ This is not only shorter and less hideous, but also does not depend on ++ the length of the extension being 3. ++ ++ Note that when a receive filter is in effect, this overrides your FILE ++ COLLISION setting, since Kermit has no way of knowing what the final ++ destination filename will be (because it does not know, and can not be ++ expected to know, the syntax of every version of every command shell ++ on every platform on the planet). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.4. Implicit Use of Pipes ++ ++ If you wish, C-Kermit can also examine incoming filenames to see if ++ they start with "!", and if so, the subsequent text is treated as a ++ command to read from or write to. For example, if a Kermit client is ++ given the following command: ++ ++ get {!finger | sort} ++ ++ the server on the other end, if it supports this feature, will run the ++ "finger" program, pipe its standard output to the "sort" program, and ++ send sort's standard output back to you. Similarly, if you: ++ ++ send oofa.txt !sort -r > oofa.new ++ ++ or, equivalently: ++ ++ send oofa.txt {!sort -r > oofa.new} ++ ++ or: ++ ++ send /as-name:{!sort -r > oofa.new} oofa.txt ++ ++ this has the receiver send the contents of the incoming oofa.txt file ++ to the sort program, which sorts the text in reverse order and stores ++ the result in oofa.new. ++ ++ This use of the exclamation mark should be familiar to UNIX users as ++ the "bang" feature that lets you run an external application or ++ command from within another application. ++ ++ Kermit's "bang" feature is disabled by default, since it is not ++ unheard for filenames to actually begin with "!". So if you want to ++ use this feature, you must enable it with the following command: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER PIPES { ON, OFF } ++ ON enables the recognition of "!" notation in incoming ++ filenames during file transfer as an indicator that the ++ remaining text is the name of a command. OFF, the default, ++ disables this feature and uses the text as a filename in the ++ normal fashion. This command does NOT affect SEND /COMMAND, GET ++ /COMMAND, CSEND, etc. ++ ++ So using a combination of CSEND (SEND /COMMAND) and the "bang" ++ feature, you can transfer a directory tree all in one command ++ (assuming the remote Kermit supports pipe transfers and has them ++ enabled): ++ ++ CSEND {tar cf - . | gzip -c} {!gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ or: ++ ++ SEND /COMMAND:{tar cf - . | gzip -c} /as:{!gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ Pay close attention to the syntax. Braces are needed around the ++ command because it contains spaces; braces are needed around the ++ as-name because it ends with "-". The as-name must begin with "!" or ++ receiving Kermit will not recognize it as a command. The CSEND command ++ must NOT begin with "!" unless you are running a command whose name ++ really does start that character. ++ ++ Similarly, you have a Kermit server send a directory tree to be ++ unpacked on the client end: ++ ++ CGET {!tar cf - . | gzip -c} {gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ or: ++ ++ GET /COMMAND {!tar cf - . | gzip -c} /as:{gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ Notice how, in this case, the bang is required in the remote command, ++ to distinguish it from a filename, but not in the local command, since ++ by definition of CGET (or GET /COMMAND), it is known to be a command. ++ ++ SEND and RECEIVE FILTERs supersede the bang feature. For example, if a ++ file arrives under the name "!gunzip -c | tar xf -", but the receiving ++ Kermit also has been given a command like: ++ ++ set receive filter sort -r > \v(filename) ++ ++ then the incoming data will be sorted rather than gunzipped. ++ ++ Finally, if SET TRANSFER PIPES is ON (and in this case, this must be ++ done in your C-Kermit initialization file), you can send from a pipe ++ on the C-Kermit command line: ++ ++ kermit -s "!finger | sort -r" -a userlist ++ ++ In this case the "filename" contains spaces and so must be quoting ++ using your shell's quoting rules. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.5. Success and Failure of Piped Commands ++ ++ Commands or programs started by Kermit as a result of CSEND or ++ CRECEIVE commands, CGET, SEND /COMMAND, REDIRECT commands (see ++ [447]Section 4.2.8.2), implicit use of pipes, RUN commands, and so ++ forth, should return their exit status codes to the Kermit command ++ that caused them to be run, and therefore IF SUCCESS and IF FAILURE ++ tests after these commands should work as expected. For example: ++ ++ CSEND blah < filename ++ ++ should fail if there is no command called "blah" or if there is no ++ file called "filename". However, this is not foolproof and sometimes ++ C-Kermit might think a command succeeded when it failed, or vice ++ versa. This is most likely to happen when the highly system-dependent ++ methods that Kermit must use to determine a command's exit status code ++ do not supply the right information. ++ ++ It can also happen because some commands might define success and ++ failure differently from what you expect, or because you are using a ++ pipeline composed of many commands, and one of them fails to pass ++ failing exit status codes up the chain. The most likely culprit is the ++ shell itself, which in most cases must be interposed between Kermit ++ and any external program to be run. ++ ++ In any case, you can examine the following variable to find out the ++ exit status code returned to Kermit by the process most recently run ++ by any command that runs external commands or programs, including ++ CSEND, CRECEIVE, REDIRECT, RUN, etc: ++ ++ \v(pexitstat) ++ ++ In UNIX, Windows and OS/2, the value should be -2 if no command has ++ been run yet, 0 if the most recent command succeeded, -1, -3, or -4 if ++ there was an internal error, and a positive number returned by the ++ command itself if the command failed. If the number is in the range ++ 1-127, this is the program's exit status code. If it is 128 or ++ greater, this is supposed to indicate that the command or program was ++ interrupted or terminated from outside itself. ++ ++ In Windows 95 and 98, the return values of the default shell are ++ unreliable; various third-party shells can be used to work around this ++ deficiency. ++ ++ In VMS, it is the actual exit status code of the command that was run. ++ This is an odd number if the command succeeded, and an even number if ++ it failed. You can see the associated message as follows: ++ ++ run write sys$output f$message(\v(pexitstat)) ++ ++ Or, more conveniently, use the new Kermit function: ++ ++ echo \ferrstring(\v(pexitstat)) ++ ++ which converts a system error code (number) to the corresponding ++ message. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.6. Cautions about Using Pipes to Transfer Directory Trees ++ ++ Although utilities such as tar and zip/unzip might be available on ++ different platforms (such as UNIX and Windows), this does not ++ necessarily mean you can use them successfully to transfer directory ++ trees between unlike platforms. For example: ++ ++ CSEND {tar cf - . | gzip -c} {!gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ when used from UNIX to Windows will have satisfactory results for ++ binary files, but not for text files. UNIX text files have lines ++ ending with Linefeed (LF) only, whereas Windows text files have lines ++ ending in Carriage Return and Linefeed (CRLF). Thus any text files ++ that were in the archive formed by the first tar command will be ++ unpacked by the second tar command in their original form, and will ++ display and print incorrectly in Windows (except in applications that ++ have been explicitly coded to handle UNIX-format text files). On the ++ other hand if you told gzip to use "text mode" to do record format ++ conversion (assuming there was a way to tell it, as there is with most ++ "zip" programs), this would destroy any binary files in the archive. ++ ++ Furthermore, if the archive contains text files that are written in ++ languages other than English, the "special" (accented and/or ++ non-Roman) characters are NOT translated, and are therefore likely ++ show up as gibberish on the target system. For example, West European ++ languages are usually encoded in ISO Latin Alphabet 1 in UNIX, but in ++ PC code page 850 on the PC. Capital A with acute accent is code point ++ 193 (decimal) Latin-1, but 181 in CP850. So A-acute in the UNIX file ++ becomes Middle Box Bottom on the PC, and similarly for all the other ++ special characters, and for all other languages -- Greek, Russian, ++ Hebrew, Japanese, etc. ++ ++ So when transferring text files between unlike platforms, you should ++ use direct Kermit file transfers so Kermit can apply the needed ++ record-format and character-set transformations. Use pipelines ++ containing archivers like tar or zip only if all the files are binary ++ or the two systems use the same record format and character set for ++ text files. ++ ++ Also see [448]Sections 4.3, [449]4.10, [450]4.11, and [451]4.15 for ++ how to transfer directory trees between both like and unlike systems ++ directly with Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.7. Pipes and Encryption ++ ++ Of course pipelines could be used for encrypted file transfers, ++ assuming proper precautions could be taken concerning the transmission ++ of the key. But there is rarely a good way to do this. To illustrate ++ using UNIX crypt: ++ ++ csend {crypt key < filename} {!crypt key > filename} ++ ++ Or, more ambitiously: ++ ++ csend {tar cf - . | gzip -c | crypt key} {!crypt key | gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ transmits the key in the file header packet as part of the ++ (clear-text) remote command, defeating the entire purpose of ++ encrypting the file data. ++ ++ But if you are connected in terminal mode to the remote computer and ++ type: ++ ++ creceive {crypt key > filename} ++ ++ at the remote Kermit prompt, you have also transmitted the key in ++ clear text over the communications link. ++ ++ At present, the only secure way to use CSEND and CRECEIVE with an ++ encryption filter is to have a human operator at both ends, so the key ++ does not have to be transmitted. ++ ++ Theoretically it would be possible to use PGP software (Pretty Good ++ Privacy, by Phil Zimmerman, Phil's Pretty Good Software) to avoid key ++ transmission (since PGP uses separate public and private key and "lets ++ you communicate securely with people you've never met, with no secure ++ channels needed for prior exchange of keys"), but the specific method ++ has yet to be worked out. ++ ++ HINT: See the PGP User's Guide, e.g. at: ++ [452]http://www.telstra.com.au/docs/PGP/ ++ Especially the topic "Using PGP as a UNIX-Style Filter": ++ [453]http://www.telstra.com.au/docs/PGP/pgpdoc2/pgpdoc2_17.html ++ ++ In any case, better and more convenient security options are now ++ available: Kerberos authentication and encryption ([454]CLICK HERE for ++ details) and the new ability to run C-Kermit "though" other ++ communication programs, described in [455]Section 2.7. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.8. Commands and Functions Related to Pipes ++ ++ 4.2.8.1. The OPEN !READ and OPEN !WRITE Commands ++ ++ These are described in [456]Using C-Kermit, and are generally useful ++ with reading output from commands that produce more than one line on ++ their standard output, or writing multiple lines into commands that ++ accept them on their standard input. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0 CLOSE !READ is accepted as a synonym for CLOSE READ, ++ and CLOSE !WRITE for CLOSE WRITE. ++ ++ Testing the success and failure of these commands, however, can be a ++ bit tricky. Consider: ++ ++ open !read lalaskjfsldkfjsldkfj ++ ++ (where "lalaskjfsldkfjsldkfj" is neither a valid command nor the name ++ of a program or script that can be run). OPEN !READ, in UNIX at least, ++ translates this into execl(shellpath,shellname,"-c",command). This ++ means it starts your preferred shell (e.g. from the SHELL environment ++ variable) and asks it to execute the given command. It must be this ++ way, because your command can be a either an internal shell command ++ (which only your shell can execute) or an external command, which only ++ your shell knows how to find (it knows your PATH and interprets, etc). ++ Therefore unless OPEN !READ can't start your shell, it always ++ succeeds. ++ ++ Continuing with the nonexistent-command example: ++ ++ C-Kermit> open !read lalaskjfsldkfjsldkfj ++ C-Kermit> status ++ SUCCESS ++ C-Kermit> read line ++ C-Kermit> status ++ SUCCESS ++ C-Kermit> echo "\m(line)" ++ "bash: lalaskjfsldkfjsldkfj: command not found" ++ C-Kermit> close read ++ C-Kermit> status ++ FAILURE ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ In other words, the failure can not be detected on OPEN, since the ++ OPEN command succeeds if it can start your shell. It can't be detected ++ on READ, since all this does is read output from the shell, which in ++ this case happens to be an error message. However, failure IS detected ++ upon close, since this is the occasion upon which the shell gives ++ Kermit its exit status code. ++ ++ For an illustration of this situation, see [457]Section 2.14. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.8.2. The REDIRECT Command ++ ++ A second method of I/O redirection is offered by the REDIRECT command. ++ This is a rather advanced and tricky feature that is presently ++ supported only in UNIX C-Kermit, in OS-9 C-Kermit, and in Kermit 95. ++ Syntax: ++ ++ REDIRECT command ++ Runs the given command, sending its standard output to the ++ current communications channel (SET LINE, SET PORT, or SET HOST ++ connection), and reading its standard input from the same ++ connection. Works only in local mode -- i.e. a connection is ++ required -- and then only if the given command uses Standard ++ I/O. ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ redirect finger ++ ++ runs the local "finger" command and sends its output over the ++ connection as plain text, where presumably there is a process set up ++ to read it. Another example: ++ ++ redirect finger | sort -r ++ ++ shows the use of a pipeline. ++ ++ Note: REDIRECT differs from CSEND/CRECEIVE in two important ways: (1) ++ it does not use the Kermit protocol, and (2) it uses a bidirectional ++ pipe rather than a one-way pipe. ++ ++ The primary use of the REDIRECT command is to run external protocols, ++ such as sz/rz in UNIX for ZMODEM, when they work over Standard I/O(*). ++ Example: ++ ++ set host xyzcorp.com ++ (login, etc) ++ redirect sz oofa.zip ++ ++ lets you make a Telnet connection with C-Kermit and then do a ZMODEM ++ transfer over it. ZMODEM protocol messages go both ways over the same ++ connection simultaneously. ++ ++ It is possible to use C-Kermit on UNIX as your PPP dialer and then to ++ REDIRECT the connection to the PPP software, but C-Kermit 7.0 offers a ++ better approach to PPP dialing in its new EXEC command ([458]Section ++ 1.23). ++ ++ In theory, you can also redirect an interactive process. For example, ++ suppose you tell Kermit 95 to wait for an incoming TCP/IP connection: ++ ++ set host * 3000 ++ ++ and then tell C-Kermit on UNIX to: ++ ++ set host kermit95hostname 3000 ++ redirect ksh ++ ++ and then tell Kermit 95 to CONNECT: now you are talking to the UNIX ++ K-shell; you can give commands (pwd, ls, etc) and see the results. In ++ practice, the K-shell's terminal modes are messed up because (a) it is ++ not going through the Unix terminal driver, and (b) it is "smart" and ++ knows it is being redirected, and so acts in a decidedly inhospitable ++ manner (other applications like EMACS, vi, etc, simply refuse to run ++ if their standard i/o has been redirected). ++ ++ (*) The publicly-distributed sz/rz programs do not work as clients. ++ However, Omen Technology does offer an up-to-date redirectable ++ client XYZMODEM program called crzsz. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.8.3. Receiving Mail and Print Jobs ++ ++ As of 7.0, and in UNIX only, files that are sent to C-Kermit as mail ++ (when the other Kermit uses a MAIL or SEND /MAIL command) or to be ++ printed (via REMOTE PRINT or SEND /PRINT) are now piped directly to ++ the mail or print program, rather than written to temporary files and ++ then mailed or printed and then deleted. This has the advantages of ++ (a) not requiring a temporary file, and (b) allowing mail to have a ++ proper subject in place of the filename. Temporary files were bad not ++ only because they required (a) space, and (b) writeability of the ++ current directory, but also because using them could result in wiping ++ out an existing file. See [459]Section 4.7 for more about SEND /MAIL ++ and SEND /PRINT. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.2.8.4. Pipe-Related Functions ++ ++ The \fcommand(command) function runs the given shell or system command ++ and returns the command's standard output as its value (with any ++ newline characters stripped from the end), unless the result is too ++ long, in which case it returns the empty string. The maximum length ++ for the result is at least 1022 bytes, and it might be longer on some ++ platforms. Examples (UNIX): ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo "\fcommand(date)" ++ "Fri Apr 18 13:31:42 1997" ++ C-Kermit> echo "\fcommand(finger | wc -l)" ; how many users logged in? ++ " 83" ++ C-Kermit> evaluate \fcommand(finger | wc -l) * 2 ++ 166 ++ C-Kermit> echo Welcome to \fcommand(tty) on \fcommand(date) ++ Welcome to /dev/ttyre on Fri Apr 18 13:31:42 1997 ++ C-Kermit> echo "\fcommand(ls oofa.*)" ++ "oofa.c ++ oofa.h ++ oofa.o" ++ C-Kermit> cd /directory-with-thousands-of-files ++ C-Kermit> echo "\fcommand(ls -l)" ; This would be too long ++ "" ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ If a command's output would be too long, you can use the other, more ++ laborious method of reading from a command: OPEN !READ command, READ ++ each line, CLOSE !READ. ++ ++ The \frawcommand(command) function is identical to \fcommand(command), ++ except it does not remove trailing newline characters: ++ ++ C-Kermit> echo "\frawcommand(date)" ++ "Fri Apr 18 13:31:42 1997 ++ " ++ C-Kermit> echo "\frawcommand(ls oofa.*)" ++ "oofa.c ++ oofa.h ++ oofa.o ++ " ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Use \frawcommand() if you want to retain the final line terminators, ++ or if the command's output is "binary". But remember that if the ++ result of this (or any other) function contains any NUL (ASCII code 0) ++ characters, the first NUL will terminate the result string because ++ this is how C strings work (it's "C-Kermit", remember?). ++ ++ These functions are useful not only locally, but also in the ++ client/server arena. If you need to get the results from a system ++ command on the server end into a variable on the client end, just do: ++ ++ [ remote ] query kermit command(date) ++ ++ The result is in the local \v(query) variable; see [460]Using ++ C-Kermit, 2nd Ed., pp.359-360 for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3. Automatic Per-File Text/Binary Mode Switching ++ ++ When transferring files between like systems (e.g. UNIX-to-UNIX), ++ binary mode can be used for all files unless character-set translation ++ is needed, and in fact Kermit programs of recent vintage recognize ++ each others' platforms and switch to binary mode automatically when it ++ is appropriate (e.g. DOS to OS/2, or UNIX to UNIX). (Exception: ++ LABELED mode is chosen for VMS-to-VMS and OS/2-to-OS/2 transfers so ++ complex file formats can be preserved.) ++ ++ On a client/server connection between like systems, the transfer mode ++ is currently determined by the file sender, rather than always by the ++ client. If the client is sending, it controls the transfer mode. If a ++ GET command is sent to the server, the server sends all files in ++ binary mode if its TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET is TRANSPARENT; otherwise it ++ uses text mode for text files (according to its text-pattern list) and ++ binary mode for binary files. Of course, the client can control the ++ server's transfer character-set with the REMOTE SET TRANSFER ++ CHARACTER-SET command. ++ ++ When transferring files between unlike systems, however, (e.g. ++ UNIX-to-DOS), some files (such as executable program images) must be ++ transferred in binary mode but others (such as plain-text files) must ++ be transferred in text mode so their record format and character sets ++ can be appropriately converted. If a binary file is transferred in ++ text mode, it is ruined. If a text file is transferred in binary mode, ++ then at the very least, its format can be incorrect; at worst it is ++ also corrupted because its character set was not converted (in extreme ++ cases the corruption is total, e.g. because one system is ASCII-based ++ and the other EBCDIC). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3.1. Exceptions ++ ++ VMS C-Kermit, when sending files to a non-VMS system, switches to text ++ or binary mode automatically for each file, based on the record format ++ in the file's directory entry; thus the mechanisms described in this ++ section do not apply to VMS C-Kermit, yet the effect is the same: ++ automatic text/binary mode switching when VMS C-Kermit is sending ++ files. See the VMS Appendix of [461]Using C-Kermit for details. ++ ++ Kermit versions that support LABELED or IMAGE transfer mode are ++ likewise not affected by this feature when one of those modes is ++ selected (normally used only when transferring between like systems). ++ ++ Kermit versions that support file-transfer pipes and filters are not ++ affected by this feature when pipes or filters are used, since the ++ output of a pipe or filter (such as gzip) is likely to require ++ transfer in a different mode than the original file. ++ ++ Finally, SEND /TEXT or SEND /BINARY will force files to be sent in the ++ indicated mode, overriding all automatic transfer-mode-choosing ++ mechanisms. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3.2. Overview ++ ++ Suppose you give C-Kermit a command like: ++ ++ SEND *.* ++ ++ And suppose the pattern *.* matches a mixture of text files (such as ++ program source code) and binary files (such os object modules or ++ executable programs). ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0 and earlier (except on VMS) send all files in the same ++ mode: whatever you said in your most recent SET FILE TYPE command, or ++ else whatever mode was chosen automatically according to the rules on ++ page 236 of Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed. ++ ++ But when text and binary files are mixed in the same group, and the ++ files are being transferred to an unlike system (e.g. UNIX to IBM ++ Mainframe), this results in corruption of either all the text files or ++ all the binary files. ++ ++ Stream-oriented file systems such as in UNIX and DOS do not record any ++ information about the file to tell us whether the file should be ++ transferred in binary or text mode, making it impossible to select the ++ transfer mode for each file in a group automatically with any ++ certainty. ++ ++ However, we can use some fairly-well established file naming ++ conventions for this purpose. C-Kermit 7.0 lets you provide lists of ++ filename patterns that are used to separately determine the file type ++ for each individual file being transfered. A pattern is a string, ++ possibly containing the special characters "*" (asterisk, which ++ matches any string of zero of more characters) and/or "?" (question ++ mark, which matches any single character). For example "a*b" matches ++ all files whose names start with "a" and end with "b", such as "ab", ++ "arb", "ababababab", etc, but not "abba". And "a?b" matches any file ++ whose name starts with "a", ends with "b", and is exactly 3 characters ++ long. ++ ++ NOTE: When typing commands at the C-Kermit prompt, you must prefix ++ "?" with \ to override its normal function of giving help. ++ ++ (Also see [462]Section 4.9 for additional pattern-matching notations ++ that might be available in your version of C-Kermit.) ++ ++ When you have specified filename recognition patterns, C-Kermit can ++ transfer the ones whose names match any of the binary-mode patterns in ++ binary mode, and those with names that match any of the text-mode ++ patterns in text mode, and those whose names match neither in the ++ prevailing mode you have chosen, or that was chosen automatically via ++ peer recognition. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3.3. Commands ++ ++ SET FILE PATTERNS { ON, OFF, AUTO } ++ This tells Kermit whether to do per-file filename ++ pattern-matching to determine text or binary mode. The normal ++ and default setting is AUTO, which means to use pattern lists ++ to switch transfer mode only when it is certain that the other ++ Kermit program supports automatic notification of transfer mode ++ (via Attribute packets) on a per-file basis (this information ++ is obtained automatically during protocol startup negotiation). ++ ON means to always determine the transfer mode from the ++ filename and pattern list when sending files. Use OFF to ++ disable this feature (without resetting your pattern lists). ++ Also note that if you have selected LABELED file transfer (SET ++ FILE TYPE LABELED), this takes precedence over ++ filename-matching patterns and all files are sent in labeled ++ mode. ++ ++ SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL ++ Disables the use of filename patterns, no matter what the FILE ++ PATTERNS setting. ++ ++ REMOTE SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL ++ Client command to disable automatic transfer mode, and ++ therefore also filename patterns, in the server. Synonym: ++ REMOTE SET XFER MODE MANUAL. ++ ++ { GET, SEND, etc } { /BINARY, /TEXT } ++ Including a /BINARY or /TEXT (or, where supported, /IMAGE or ++ /LABELED) switch with a file-transfer command changes the ++ transfer mode to manual for that command only, and therefore ++ disables patterns that that command. ++ ++ SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ A list of zero or more patterns, separated by spaces (not ++ commas). Letters in a pattern are case-sensitive if the ++ underlying filenames are case sensitive (as in UNIX), and ++ case-insensitive otherwise (as in Windows). If a file's name is ++ matched by any pattern in the list and SET FILE PATTERNS is ON, ++ the file is sent in binary mode. Examples: ++ ++ SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS *.gz *.Z *.tar *.zip *.o *.so *.a *.out ; UNIX ++ SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS *.EXE *.ZIP *.OBJ *.COM ; DOS or OS/2 or Windows ++ ++ If a pattern contains spaces, enclose it in braces. ++ ++ SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ Like SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS, but the patterns choose text ++ files rather than binary ones. Examples: ++ ++ SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS *.TXT *.KSC *.HTM* *.BAT ; DOS, Windows, OS/2 ++ ++ ADD BINARY-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ Adds one or more patterns to the BINARY-PATTERN list. ++ ++ ADD TEXT-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ Adds one or more patterns to the TEXT-PATTERN list. ++ ++ REMOVE BINARY-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ Removes one or more patterns from the BINARY-PATTERN list. The ++ given patterns are matched with the ones in the BINARY-PATTERNS ++ list with case sensitivity if the underlying file system has ++ case-sensitive names (as do UNIX and OS-9), otherwise with case ++ independence. ++ ++ REMOVE TEXT-PATTERNS [ pattern [ pattern [ pattern ... ] ] ] ++ Removes one or more patterns from the TEXT-PATTERN list. ++ ++ SHOW PATTERNS ++ Displays the current pattern selections. ++ ++ Whenever you give a SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS or SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS ++ command, the previous list is replaced. If you give one of these ++ commands without a pattern list, the previous list is removed. ++ ++ When patterns are active and files are being sent, text patterns (if ++ any) are applied first (but only if not RESENDing and not sending in ++ LABELED mode), then binary patterns, so if the same pattern appears in ++ both lists, binary mode is chosen. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.3.4. Examples ++ ++ Here's an example that might be used when sending files from UNIX: ++ ++ set file type binary ++ set file text-patterns *.c *.h *.w *.txt makefile ++ set file binary-patterns *.o ++ msend makefile wermit wart ck*.[cwho] ck*.txt ++ ++ Note that "wermit" and "wart" do not match any patterns so they are ++ sent in the prevailing mode, which is binary. Also note the use of ++ "makefile" as a pattern that does not contain any wildcard characters ++ (there is no other convention to distinguish among "wermit" and ++ "wart", which are binary executables, and "makefile", which is a text ++ file, purely by their names). ++ ++ Most C-Kermit implementations have a default pattern list built in, ++ which includes patterns that are almost certain to succeed in picking ++ the right transfer mode. Others are omitted due to ambiguity. For ++ example ".hlp", and ".ini" are generally binary types in Windows but ++ text types everywhere else. ++ ++ NOTE: ".doc", used for decades to denote plain-text documentation ++ files, now more often than not denotes a Microsoft Word Document, ++ so ".doc" is now considered a binary type since it does less harm ++ to transfer a plain-text document in binary mode than it does to ++ transfer an MS Word file in text mode (except when IBM mainframes ++ are involved!) ++ ++ ANOTHER NOTE: ".com" files are binary in DOS-like operating ++ systems, but they are text (DCL command procedures) in VMS. VMS ++ C-Kermit sends .COM files in text mode; K95 sends them in binary ++ mode. If you download a .COM file from VMS to DOS or Windows, and ++ then upload it to another VMS system, be sure to use SEND /TEXT to ++ preserve its textness. ++ ++ You can see the default pattern list by starting C-Kermit without its ++ initialization file (e.g. "kermit -Y") and using the SHOW PATTERNS ++ command. If you will be depending on this feature, be sure to examine ++ the list carefully in conjunction with the applications that you use. ++ ++ The default pattern list does not take "backup files" into account ++ because (a) people usually don't want to transfer them; and (b) it ++ would make the pattern lists more than twice as long. For example, we ++ would need to include both *.txt and *.txt.~[0-9]*~ for ".txt" files, ++ and similarly for all the others. Instead, you can use SEND /NOBACKUP ++ (or SET SEND BACKUP OFF) to skip over all backup files. ++ ++ Put your most commonly-used safe pattern declarations in your C-Kermit ++ customization file (ckermod.ini, .mykermrc, k95custom.ini, etc). ++ ++ As noted, SET FILE PATTERNS is ON by default. Sometimes, however, it ++ is desirable, or necessary, to force files to be sent in a particular ++ mode, and often this must be done from the command line (e.g. when ++ using Kermit as a download helper in a Web browser like Lynx). The -V ++ command-line options is equivalent to SET FILE PATTERNS OFF and SET ++ TRANSFER MODE MANUAL. Example: ++ ++ kermit -Vis oofa.txt ++ ++ forces oofa.txt to be sent in binary mode, even though ".txt" might ++ match a text pattern. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4. File Permissions ++ ++ "Permissions" refers to a code associated with a file that specifies ++ who is allowed to access it, and in what manner. For example, the ++ owner, the members of one or more groups, the system administrator, ++ and everybody else, might be allowed various combinations of Read, ++ Write, Append, Execute, or Listing access. ++ ++ The permission code goes by different names on different platforms. In ++ UNIX, it might be called the filemode. In VMS, it is called the file ++ protection (or protection mask). ++ ++ The comments in this section presently apply only to the UNIX and VMS ++ versions of C-Kermit, to which these features were added in version ++ 7.0; the DOS, Windows, and OS/2 file systems embody no notions of ++ protection, and so MS-DOS Kermit and Kermit 95 do not send file ++ permissions, and ignore them when received. ++ ++ The permissions for a received file are determined by a combination of ++ the file transfer mode (VMS-to-VMS transfers only), whether a file of ++ the same name exists already, whether permissions of the file are ++ received in the file attribute packet, and the setting of ATTRIBUTES ++ PROTECTION. ++ ++ The default for ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION is ON. If no attributes are ++ received, the effect is the same as if attributes PROTECTION were OFF. ++ ++ For VMS-to-VMS transfers, the default LABELED mode simply copies the ++ protection code from source to destination. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4.1. When ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION is OFF ++ ++ If no file of the same name exists, system defaults determine the ++ permissions of the new file. Otherwise, the actions taken depend on ++ the current FILE COLLISION setting: BACKUP, OVERWRITE, RENAME, etc, as ++ documented in [463]Using C-Kermit. But now the new file (if it is ++ created at all) automatically inherits the permissions (mode bits) of ++ the existing file in a way that is appropriate for the platform. ++ ++ 4.4.1.1. Unix ++ ++ All mode bits are inherited except the directory bit, since the ++ incoming file can not possibly be a directory. (In any case, it is not ++ possible to receive a file that has the same name as an existing ++ directory unless FILE COLLISION is set to RENAME). ++ ++ 4.4.1.2. VMS ++ ++ Files with the same name as an existing file, transferred in modes ++ other than LABELED between VMS systems, inherit the protection of the ++ prior version. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4.2 When ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION is ON ++ ++ File permissions can be conveyed as part of the file transfer process, ++ in accordance with the Kermit protocol definition. If the file sender ++ puts system-dependent and/or system-independent versions of the file ++ protection (permissions) into the Attribute (A) packet, the file ++ receiver can set the new file's permissions from them. Otherwise, the ++ permissions are set the same as for ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION OFF. ++ ++ When the incoming A packet contains system-dependent permissions, the ++ file receiver checks to see if the sender has the same system ID (e.g. ++ both the sending and receiving systems are UNIX, or both are VMS); if ++ so, it decodes and uses the system-dependent permissions; otherwise it ++ uses the generic ones (if any) and applies them to the owner field, ++ setting the other fields appropriately as described in the following ++ sections. ++ ++ Setting the incoming file's protection from the A packet is controlled ++ by SET ATTRIBUTES PROTECTION (or PERMISSION), which is ON by default, ++ and its status is displayed by SHOW ATTRIBUTES. ++ ++ The main benefit of this feature is to not have to "chmod +x" an ++ executable file after transfer from UNIX to UNIX. Its cross-platform ++ benefits are less evident, perhaps to retain the status of the Unix ++ 'x' bit on a VMS system, for subsequent transfer back to a Unix ++ system. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4.2.1. System-Specific Permissions ++ ++ System-specific file permissions are used when the two Kermit programs ++ recognize each other as running on the same type of system. For ++ example, both are running under some form of UNIX (it doesn't matter ++ which UNIX variation -- HP-UX, Solaris, AIX, etc -- all use the same ++ scheme for file permissions); or both are running under VMS (even if ++ one is on an Alpha and the other on a VAX, and/or one is old and the ++ other is new). ++ ++ 4.4.2.1.1. UNIX ++ ++ UNIX supports three categories of users, File Owner, Group, and World, ++ and three types of file access permission: Read, Write, and Execute. ++ Thus, a UNIX file's permissions are expressed in 9 bits. ++ ++ The system-dependent permission string for UNIX is a 3-digit octal ++ string, the low-order 9 bits of the st_mode member of the stat struct; ++ we deliberately chop off the "file format" bits because they are not ++ permissions, nor do we convey the setuid/setgid bits, lock bit, sticky ++ bit, etc. ++ ++ 4.4.2.1.2. VMS ++ ++ VMS supports four categories of users, System, File Owner, Group, and ++ World, and four types of file access permission: Read, Write, Execute, ++ and Delete. Thus, a VMS file's permissions are expressed in 16 bits. ++ ++ The system-dependent protection string for VMS is a 4-digit ++ hexadecimal string, corresponding to the internal-format protection ++ word of the file (RWED for each of World,Group,Owner,System). A new ++ file normally gets all 16 protection bits from the original file of ++ the same name. ++ ++ Note: VMS-to-VMS transfers take place in LABELED mode when the two ++ C-Kermits recognize each other's platform as VMS (unless you have ++ disabled LABELED-mode transfers). In this case, all of a file's ++ attributes are preserved in the transfer and the protection mask (and ++ other information) is taken from the file's internal information, and ++ this takes precedence over any information in the Attribute packets. ++ You can defeat the automatic switching into LABELED mode (if you want ++ to) with SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.4.2.2. System-Independent Permissions ++ ++ The system-independent ("generic") protection is used when the system ++ IDs of the two Kermit programs do not agree (e.g. one is UNIX, the ++ other is VMS). The generic protection attribute includes the following ++ permissions (not all are applicable to every file system): Read, ++ Write, Append, Execute, Delete, Search. The generic permissions are ++ derived from the owner permissions of the source file, thus, a Unix ++ 'w' permission becomes VMS Write,Delete. ++ ++ The Owner field of the new file's permissions is set from the incoming ++ generic protection attribute. ++ ++ In UNIX, the Group and World permissions are set according to your ++ umask, except that execute permission is NOT set in these fields if it ++ was not also set in the generic protection (and consequently, is set ++ in the Owner field). ++ ++ In VMS, the System, Group, and World permissions are set according to ++ the process default file permission (as shown in VMS by SHOW ++ PROTECTION), except that no permissions are allowed in these fields ++ that are not included in the generic permissions. ++ ++ Note that the VMS and UNIX interpretations of Execute permission are ++ not identical. In UNIX, a file (binary executable, shell script, etc) ++ may not be executed unless it has Execute permission, and normally ++ files that are not intended for execution do not have Execute ++ permission. In VMS, Read permission implicitly supplies Execute ++ capability. Generally files that have Read permission also have ++ explicit Execute permission, but files (binary executables, DCL ++ command procedures) that have Read permission and not Execute ++ permission can still be executed. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5. File Management Commands ++ ++ 4.5.1. The DIRECTORY Command ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the DIRECTORY command always ran an external ++ system command (such as "ls" on UNIX) or program to product the ++ directory listing. This had certain advantages, mostly that you could ++ include system-dependent options for customized listings, e.g. on ++ UNIX: ++ ++ dir -lt c* | more ++ ++ or in VMS: ++ ++ directory /size/date/protection/except=*.obj oofa.*;0 ++ ++ This approach, however, carries some disadvantages: C-Kermit can't ++ return SUCCESS or FAILURE status for (e.g.) "dir foo" according to ++ whether the file "foo" exists; and it runs an inferior process, which ++ might be a problem in some environments for resource and/or security ++ reasons, and won't work at all in a "nopush" environment (e.g. one in ++ which C-Kermit is configured to forbid access to exterior commands and ++ programs, e.g. in a VMS "captive account"). ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0 on VMS and UNIX, and in K95 1.1.19 and later, the ++ DIRECTORY command is internal to Kermit. It can be run in a "nopush" ++ environment and returns SUCCESS or FAILURE status appropriately. In ++ UNIX it prints all dates and times in a consistent way (unlike ls). In ++ VMS it prints precise file sizes, rather than "blocks". It offers ++ several formatting and other options, but it is not necessarily more ++ flexible than the corresponding external commands or programs (the ++ UNIX "ls" program, the VMS "directory" command). The syntax is: ++ ++ DIRECTORY [ switch [ switch [ ... ] ] ] [ filespec ] ++ ++ If no filespec is given, all files in the current directory are ++ listed. ++ ++ Optional switches include all the standard file-selection switches ++ presented in [464]Section 1.5.4, plus: ++ ++ /ALL ++ Show both regular files and directories; this is the default. ++ ++ /ARRAY:x ++ Instead of displaying a directory listing, put the files that ++ would have been shown (based on the filespec and other ++ selection switches) in the given array. The array need not (and ++ should not) be predeclared; if the array already exists, it is ++ destroyed and reused. The array name can be a single letter, ++ like "a", or any fuller form, such as "&a", "\&a", "\&a[]", ++ etc. If the /ARRAY switch is included, the following other ++ switches are ignored: /BRIEF, /VERBOSE, /HEADING, /PAGE, ++ /ENGLISHDATE, /ISODATE, /XFERMODE, /MESSAGE, /SORT, /REVERSE, ++ /ASCENDING. In other words, only file selection switches are ++ meaningful with /ARRAY: /FILES, /DIRECTORIES, /ALL, /DOTFILES, ++ /NOBACKUP, /RECURSIVE, /SMALLER, /LARGER, /AFTER, /BEFORE, ++ /EXCEPT, etc. The resulting array has the number of files (n) ++ as its 0th element, and the filenames in elements 1 through n ++ Example: ++ ++ dir /array:&a /files /nobackup /after:19990101 /larger:10000 [ab]* ++ show array &a ++ ++ /FILES ++ Only show regular files. ++ ++ /DIRECTORIES ++ Only show directories. ++ ++ /BACKUP ++ In UNIX, OS-9, K-95, and other versions that support SET FILE ++ COLLISION BACKUP and create backup files by appending .~n~ to ++ the filename (where "n" is a number), /BACKUP means to include ++ these files in directory listings. This is the default. ++ ++ /NOBACKUP ++ This is the opposite of /BACKUP: that is, do not include backup ++ files in the listing. ++ ++ /BRIEF ++ List filenames only; use a compact format, as many filenames as ++ will fit across the screen (based on the longest name). A brief ++ listing is always sorted alphabetically. ++ ++ /VERBOSE ++ List one file per line, and include date, size, and (in UNIX ++ only) permissions of each file. This is the opposite of /BRIEF, ++ and is the default. ++ ++ /PAGE ++ Pause at the end of each screenful and give a "more?" prompt, ++ even if SET COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING is OFF. ++ ++ /NOPAGE ++ Don't pause at the end of each screenful and give a "more?" ++ prompt, even if SET COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING is ON. If neither ++ /PAGE or /NOPAGE is given, paging is according to the ++ prevailing COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING setting (which can be ++ displayed with SHOW COMMAND). ++ ++ /ENGLISHDATE ++ Show dates in dd-mmm-yyyy format; mmm is the first three ++ letters of the English month name. ++ ++ /ISODATE ++ Show dates in yyyy-mm-dd format; mm is the month number, 1-12. ++ This is the opposite of /ENGLISHDATE, and is the default. ++ ++ /HEADINGS ++ Print a heading before the listing and a summary at the end. ++ ++ /NOHEADINGS ++ Don't print a heading before the listing or a summary at the ++ end. This is the opposite of /HEADINGS, and is the default. ++ ++ /XFERMODE ++ Only in Kermit programs that support SET FILE PATTERNS. If this ++ switch is included, and the filename matches any FILE ++ BINARY-PATTERN ([465]Section 4.3), "(B)" is printed after the ++ filename; otherwise, if it matches a FILE TEXT-PATTERN, "(T)" ++ is printed. ++ ++ /NOXFERMODE ++ Don't display transfer-mode indicators. This is the opposite of ++ /XFERMODE and is the default. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ Show files not only in the given directory, but also in its ++ subdirectories (if any), their subdirectories, etc. ++ ++ /NORECURSIVE ++ Don't show files in subdirectories. This is the opposite of ++ /RECURSIVE, and is the default. ++ ++ /MESSAGE:text ++ This lets you specify a short text string to be appended to the ++ end of each directory listing line (a space is supplied ++ automatically). If the text contains any spaces, enclose it in ++ braces, e.g. /MESSAGE:{two words}. ++ ++ /NOMESSAGE ++ Don't append any message to the end of each directory listing ++ line (default). ++ ++ /SORT:[{NAME,SIZE,DATE}] ++ Sort the listing by name, size, or date. If the /SORT switch is ++ given but the "sort-by" keyword is omitted, the listing is ++ sorted by name. /SORT:NAME /ASCENDING (alphabetic sort by name) ++ is the default. ++ ++ /NOSORT ++ Don't sort the listing. Files are listed in whatever order they ++ are supplied by the operating system, e.g. inode order in UNIX. ++ ++ /REVERSE ++ If the /SORT switch is given, reverse the order of the sort. ++ Synonym: /DESCENDING. ++ ++ /ASCENDING ++ If the /SORT switch is given, sort the listing in normal order. ++ This is the opposite of /REVERSE and is the default. ++ ++ Note that most of the DIRECTORY-specific switches come in pairs, in ++ which one member of a pair (e.g. /NOHEADINGS) is the opposite of the ++ other (e.g. /HEADINGS). ++ ++ If you always want to use certain options, you can set them with the ++ SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY command ([466]Section 1.5.5). Use SHOW OPTIONS ++ to list the options currently in effect. To make the desired options ++ apply every time you run C-Kermit, put a SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY command ++ in your C-Kermit customization file, specifying the desired options. ++ Options set in this manner apply to every subsequent DIRECTORY ++ command. Of course, if you include switches in a DIRECTORY command, ++ these override any defaults, built-in or custom. Example: ++ ++ DIRECTORY ; Use "factory defaults" ++ SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY /SORT:SIZE /REVERSE /HEADINGS ; Customize defaults ++ DIRECTORY ; Use customized defaults ++ DIR /SORT:NAME ; Override customized default SORT key ++ SET OPT DIR /RECURS ; Add /RECURSIVE to customized defaults ++ DIR /ASCEND ; Override customized default SORT order ++ ++ Notes: ++ ++ * Only a single sort key is supported; there is presently no way to ++ have multiple sort keys. ++ * If the /BRIEF switch is given, all other switches (except ++ /[NO]RECURSIVE, /[NO]DOTFILES, /DIRECTORIES, /FILES, and /ALL) are ++ ignored. ++ * /SORT:anything gives incorrect results if any files have lengths ++ greater than 10 digits (i.e. that are more than 9999999999 bytes ++ long, i.e. if they are 10GB or more in size) because the overlong ++ length field causes the date and name fields to be misaligned. ++ * /SORT:NAME is redundant in VMS since VMS returns filenames in ++ alphabetic order anyway. ++ * /SORT:NAME ignores alphabetic case on platforms where case does ++ not matter in filenames, but this works only for unaccented Roman ++ letters A-Z. ++ * /SORT:NAME is currently based on code values, and so works fine ++ for ASCII, but will probably produce unexpected results for files ++ with non-ASCII or 8-bit characters in their names. (Locale-based ++ sorting raises rather significant issues of portability, size, ++ performance, etc.) ++ * /SORT:DATE works right only for ISO-format dates, not English ++ ones. ++ * /SORT:SIZE sorts the size field lexically. On some platforms (e.g. ++ Windows), the size of a directory file is listed as "

" rather ++ than as a number; in this case, the "" files are gathered at ++ the end (or beginning, depending on the sort order) of the ++ listing. ++ * /RECURSIVE is accepted but ignored in AOS/VS. Use the normal ++ system-specific filespec notation, e.g. "dir #.txt". ++ * /RECURSIVE has no affect when a full, absolute pathname is given; ++ e.g. "dir /recursive /tmp/foo" (where "foo" is a regular file) ++ only shows the "/tmp/foo" file. If you want to see all "foo" files ++ in the /tmp tree, do "cd /tmp" and then "dir /recursive foo". ++ * If a file size of -1 is shown, or date-time of 0000-00-00 ++ 00:00:00, this means the file was located, but access to ++ information about the file was denied to C-Kermit. ++ * In VMS, if FOO.DIR;1 is a directory within your current directory, ++ "directory foo" and "directory [.foo]" list the files in the ++ [.FOO] subdirectory, but "directory foo.dir" lists the directory ++ file itself; similarly for "*.dir" versus "[.*]", etc. ++ * In UNIX, if "foo" is a directory within your current directory, ++ "directory foo" lists the files in the foo directory. If you want ++ to list the foo directory file itself, put an asterisk at the end: ++ "dir foo*". ++ ++ Hint: How to find the biggest files in a directory tree: ++ ++ cd xxx ; (root of tree) ++ directory /sort:size /recursive /reverse /dotfiles /page ++ ++ Another hint: If you often use several different directory-listing ++ formats, define macro shortcuts for them: ++ ++ DEFINE WD DIRECTORY /SORT:DATE /REVERSE \%* ; Reverse chronological order ++ DEFINE SD DIRECTORY /SORT:SIZE /REVERSE \%* ; Reverse order of size ++ DEFINE ND DIRECTORY /SORT:NAME /ASCEND \%* ; Alphabetical by name ++ DEFINE DL DIR /DIR /SORT:NAME /ASCEND \%* ; Alphabetical directory list ++ ++ Put these definitions in your C-Kermit customization file. Note that ++ "\%*" ([467]Section 7.5) in these definitions lets you include other ++ switches in your macro invocations, e.g.: ++ ++ wd /headings *.txt ++ ++ Of course you can still access your external directory listing program ++ by using RUN or "!", e.g. in VMS: ++ ++ run directory /size/date/protection/except=*.obj oofa.*;0 ++ ++ or: ++ ++ !dir /size/date/prot/exc=*.obj oofa.*;0 ++ ++ In UNIX, use "!ls" or just "ls" (which is a special synonym for ++ "!ls"). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5.2. The CD and BACK Commands ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, the CD command has a new friend, the BACK command. ++ BACK means "CD to my previous current directory". A second BACK brings ++ you back to where you were before the first one; thus successive BACK ++ commands switch back and forth between two directories. ++ ++ 4.5.2.1. Parsing Improvements ++ ++ The CD command, as well as other commands that parse a directory name, ++ were changed in 7.0 to provide all the expected functions: completion ++ on Tab or Esc, directory-name lists on ?, etc. Other affected commands ++ include SET SERVER GET-PATH, SET TEMP-DIRECTORY, SET FILE ++ DOWNLOAD-DIRECTORY, and SPACE. CD and REMOTE CD also now work with ++ logical names. ++ ++ In VMS, the situation is a bit complicated since a directory name can ++ look like "DEV:", "[FOO.BAR]", "DEV:[FOO.BAR]", "[FOO]BAR.DIR;1", etc. ++ Completion and ?-help might not always work, but they do in many ++ cases. Examples: ++ ++ cd ? Lists all subdirectories of the current directory ++ cd []? Ditto ++ cd k? Ditto, but only those starting with K ++ cd [foo]? Lists all subdirectories of the [FOO] directory ++ cd [-]? Lists all subdirectories of the superior directory ++ cd [--]? Lists all subdirectories of the directory 2 levels up ++ cd [...]? Lists all directories below the current one ++ cd [foo.? Does not work. ++ ++ C-Kermit allows all of the following in VMS: ++ ++ cd bar CD to subdirectory BAR of the current directory ++ cd .bar Ditto ++ cd [.bar] Ditto ++ cd bar.dir etc... ++ cd bar.dir; ++ cd bar.dir;1 ++ cd [foo.bar] ++ cd bar.baz This can go more than 1 level deep... ++ cd dir: (where logical name DIR is defined as [FOO.BAR]) ++ ++ As well as the following: ++ ++ cd .. Go up one level as in UNIX ++ cd . The current directory ++ cd My login directory ++ ++ Note that "cd -" (go up one level) does not work as expected, because ++ "-" is Kermit's command continuation character. However, "cd [-]", and ++ " ++ cd {-}" have the desired effect (and so does "cd ..", which is easier ++ to type). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5.2.2. The CDPATH ++ ++ The CD command in the UNIX, Windows, OS/2, and VMS versions of ++ C-Kermit, as of version 6.1 / 1.1.12, searches the CDPATH for the ++ given directory, if it is not absolute and if a CDPATH environment ++ variable is defined. Example (in UNIX ksh or bash): ++ ++ $ export CDPATH=$HOME:$HOME/kermit:/tmp ++ ++ Now if you give a "cd xxx" command, no matter what your current ++ directory is, if the "xxx" directory is not a subdirectory of your ++ current directory, then the xxx subdirectory of your home directory is ++ used or if that does not exist, then the xxx subdirectory of the ++ kermit subdirectory of your home directory is used or if that does not ++ exist, then /tmp/xxx is used. This is how the ksh "cd" command works, ++ and now the C-Kermit CD command works the same way. ++ ++ In VMS, you can define CDPATH to be a list of directories that contain ++ actual directory delimiters, and/or logical names representing ++ directories, using commas to separate them, e.g.: ++ ++ $ define cdpath [HOME],[SOMEOTHERDIR],[HOME.MISC] ++ $ define cdpath SYS$LOGIN:,DISK1:[HOME],DISK2:[SCRATCH.IVAN] ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ $ define cdpath SYS$LOGIN:,[IVAN],[OLAF],[OLGA.MISC] ++ $ kermit ++ DISK1:[OLGA] C-Kermit> cd blah ++ ++ tries the BLAH subdirectory of the user's login directory, then ++ [OLGA.BLAH], [IVAN.BLAH], [OLAF.BLAH], and [OLGA.MISC.BLAH], in that ++ order, using the first one it finds, failing if it finds none. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, you may also set the CDPATH from the Kermit prompt: ++ ++ SET CD PATH path ++ Allows the CD PATH to be set from within C-Kermit. ++ ++ SHOW CD shows the CD path and all other information relevant to the CD ++ command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5.2.3. CD Messages ++ ++ Whenever you change directory, you can have C-Kermit display a "Read ++ Me" file from the new directory automatically. The commands are: ++ ++ SET CD MESSAGE { ON, OFF, FILE list } ++ ON enables this feature; OFF (the default) disables it. File ++ lets you specify the name of the "Read Me" file. A list of ++ names to look for can be given in the following format: ++ ++ {{name1}{name2}{name3}{...}} ++ ++ e.g.: ++ ++ SET SERVER CD-MESSAGE FILE {{./.readme}{README.TXT}{READ.ME}} ++ ++ The default list of CD-message files is system dependent. ++ ++ SHOW CD shows your current directory, previous directory, CD path, and ++ CD message info. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5.3. Creating and Removing Directories ++ ++ The MKDIR command now allows you to create multiple directories at ++ once: ++ ++ C-Kermit> mkdir a/b/c/d ++ ++ creates the directory a in the current directory (if it doesn't exist ++ already), and then creates subdirectory b in the a directory (if it ++ didn't exist already), and so on. ++ ++ If you use MKDIR to try to create a directory that already exists, ++ C-Kermit will print a warning ("?Directory already exists"), but the ++ MKDIR command will still succeed. If you want to avoid the warning ++ message, use IF DIRECTORY first to check if the directory already ++ exists. ++ ++ The RMDIR command, however, will not remove more than one directory, ++ nor will it remove a directory that contains any files. (There is, as ++ yet, no RMDIR /RECURSIVE command, although one might be added later.) ++ ++ In VMS, these commands (like CD) are more forgiving of your syntax ++ than is the DCL command shell; "mkdir oofa" is equivalent to "mkdir ++ [.oofa]" and so on. Also in VMS, you'll find that C-Kermit's RMDIR ++ command is easier than deleting a directory in DCL, since it ++ automatically first gives it owner delete permission if you are the ++ owner. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.5.4. The DELETE and PURGE Commands ++ ++ The DELETE command now offers a selection of switches, and has a new ++ companion, the PURGE command. First, DELETE: ++ ++ DELETE [ switches... ] filespec ++ Deletes the file or files that match the filespec, which may ++ contain wildcards ([468]Section 4.9). ++ ++ Optional switches include the standard file-selection switches ++ presented in [469]Section 1.5.4, plus: ++ ++ /ASK ++ Before deleting each file, ask permission interactively. ++ Answers are Yes or OK (delete the file), No (don't delete it), ++ or Quit (stop executing the DELETE command). ++ ++ /NOASK ++ Don't ask permission to delete each file. ++ ++ /LIST ++ List each file and show whether it was deleted. Synonyms: /LOG, ++ /VERBOSE. ++ ++ /NOLIST ++ Don't list files while deleting them. Synonyms: /NOLOG, /QUIET. ++ ++ /HEADING ++ Print a heading and summary line. ++ ++ /NOHEADING ++ Don't print a heading and summary line. ++ ++ /PAGE ++ When listing, pause at the end of each screenful and give the ++ "More?" prompt. If you reply "n" (no), the DELETE command ++ terminates. ++ ++ /SIMULATE ++ Do everything implied by the given switches and filespec, ++ except do not actually delete any files. This lets you preview ++ which files would be deleted; implies /LIST. ++ ++ Now the PURGE command: ++ ++ PURGE [ switches... ] [ filespec ] ++ (VMS only) Runs the DCL PURGE command. Switches and filespec, ++ if any, are passed directly to DCL without parsing or ++ verification. Deletes excess versions of the given (or all) ++ files. The rest of this section does not apply to VMS. ++ ++ PURGE [ switches... ] [ filespec ] ++ (UNIX only) Deletes "backup files" that match the filespec, ++ which may contain wildcards ([470]Section 4.9). If no filespec ++ is given, all backup files in the current directory are ++ selected (subject to modification by any switches). Do not ++ include backup notation in the filespec. ++ ++ Explanation: ++ ++ To avoid destroying preexisting files when a new file arrives that has ++ the same name, C-Kermit backs up the old file by appending a "backup ++ number" to its name. In UNIX, the backup suffix consists of a period, ++ a tilde, a number, and another tilde. For example, if a file called ++ oofa.txt exists and a new oofa.txt file arrives, the original is ++ renamed to oofa.txt.~1~. If another oofa.txt file arrives, the ++ existing one is renamed to oofa.txt.~2~. And so on. This system is ++ compatible with the one used by EMACS. Thus over time, if you receive ++ a lot of files with C-Kermit or edit them with EMACS, backup files can ++ build up. The new PURGE command lets you clean out accumulated backup ++ files: ++ ++ Optional switches include the standard file-selection switches ++ presented in [471]Section 1.5.4, plus all the switches listed above ++ for the DELETE command, plus: ++ ++ /KEEP:n ++ Retains the n most recent (highest-numbered) backup files for ++ each file. For example, if oofa.txt, oofa.txt.~1~, ++ oofa.txt.~2~, oofa.txt.~10~, oofa.txt.~12~, and oofa.txt.~100~ ++ exist, "purge /keep:2 oofa.txt" deletes oofa.txt.~1~, ++ oofa.txt.~2~, and oofa.txt.~10~, and keeps oofa.txt, ++ oofa.txt.~12~, and oofa.txt.~100~. If /KEEP is given without a ++ number, one (the highest numbered) backup file is kept. ++ ++ CAUTION: The PURGE command should be used only when *.~*~ files truly ++ are backup files. This is the case for EMACS, and it is the DEFAULT ++ for C-Kermit. However, if C-Kermit's FILE COLLISION has been set to ++ RENAME, newly received files will look like backup files. In that ++ case, don't use the PURGE command or you'll be removing new files ++ rather than old ones. (Use SHOW FILE to find the FILE COLLISION ++ setting.) ++ ++ The PURGE command is presently available only in UNIX. The command ++ succeeds if it deleted any files, or if it deleted no files but there ++ were no errors. It fails if it deleted no files and there were errors ++ (i.e. deletion was attempted but failed). In VMS, backup file versions ++ are handled automatically by the OS, and a PURGE command can be used ++ at the VMS prompt to clean them up. ++ ++ If you want certain switches to be supplied automatically with each ++ DELETE or PURGE command, you can set them with SET OPTIONS ++ ([472]Section 1.5.5) and you can display any such settings with SHOW ++ OPTIONS. Of course you can override them on a per-command basis by ++ including switches in your PURGE or DELETE command. ++ ++ Also see SET FILE COLLISION, SHOW FILE, SEND /NOBACKUP, SET SEND ++ BACKUP, and DIRECTORY /[NO]BACKUP. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.6. Starting the Remote Kermit Server Automatically ++ ++ As noted on pages 275-276 of [473]Using C-Kermit 2nd edition, you can ++ have Kermit send "kermit receive" commands automatically when it is in ++ local mode and you give a SEND or similar command, to start the remote ++ Kermit receiver in case it is not already started. The "kermit ++ receive" commands are specified by: ++ ++ SET PROTOCOL KERMIT binary-receive-command text-receive-command ++ ++ As of version 7.0, a Kermit protocol option has been added to send a ++ string to the host in advance of any Kermit packets when you give a ++ GET-class or REMOTE command. This will switch the remote C-Kermit into ++ the appropriate mode or, if the remote system is at a system command ++ (shell) prompt, execute the string on the remote system. The new ++ syntax of the SET PROTOCOL KERMIT command is: ++ ++ SET PROTOCOL KERMIT [ s1 [ s2 [ s3 ] ] ] ++ ++ where: ++ ++ Default Meaning ++ s1 {kermit -ir} Remote "kermit receive in binary mode" command. ++ s2 {kermit -r} Remote "kermit receive in text mode" command. ++ s3 {kermit -x} Remote "start kermit server" command. ++ ++ NOTE: If the remote Kermit is 6.0, the following are recommended for ++ fast startup and high-performance file transfer (see Appendix I in ++ [474]Using C-Kermit, second Edition, for command-line options): ++ ++ s1 kermit -YQir (Kermit receive binary, skip init file, fast.) ++ s2 kermit -YQTr (Kermit receive text, skip init file, fast.) ++ s3 kermit -YQx (Kermit server, skip init file, fast.) ++ ++ If the remote is C-Kermit 7.0 or later, change the -x option (enter ++ server mode) to -O (uppercase letter O), which means "enter server ++ mode for One transaction only); this way, it is not stuck in server ++ after the transfer. Also note that the Q is redundant in version 7.0, ++ since fast Kermit protocol settings are now the default. ++ ++ Note that in case the C-Kermit executable is called "wermit" or ++ "ckermit" you can change "kermit" in the strings above to "wermit" or ++ "ckermit" and C-Kermit 7.0 or later will recognize these as synonyms ++ for "kermit", in case it is at its command prompt when one of these ++ strings is sent to it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.7. File-Transfer Command Switches ++ ++ Over the years, various new methods of transferring a file have ++ accumulated, until we had, in addition to the SEND command, also MOVE ++ (send and then delete), MAIL (send as email), REMOTE PRINT (send to be ++ printed), CSEND (send the output of a command), PSEND (send a part of ++ a file), BSEND (send in binary mode), RESEND (resume an interrupted ++ SEND), etc etc. Similarly: GET, REGET, CGET, RETRIEVE, and so on. ++ ++ Not only is it confusing to have different names for these commands, ++ many of which are not real words, but this also does not allow all ++ combinations, like "send a file as mail, then delete it". ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, the SEND, GET, and RECEIVE commands were restructured ++ to accept modifier switches (switches are explained in [475]Section ++ 1.5). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.7.1. SEND Command Switches ++ ++ Without switches, the SEND command still works exactly as before: ++ ++ send oofa.txt ; send a single file ++ send oofa.* ; send multiple files ++ send oofa.txt x.x ; send oofa.txt as x.x (tell receiver its name is x.x) ++ send ; send from SEND-LIST ++ ++ But now the following modifier switches may be included between "send" ++ and the filename. Zero, one, two, or more switches may be included in ++ any combination that makes sense. Switch names (such as /BINARY) can ++ be abbreviated, just like any other keywords. Most of these switches ++ work only when using Kermit protocol (/TEXT and /BINARY are the ++ exceptions). ++ ++ /AFTER:date-time ++ Specifies that only those files modified (or, in VMS, created) ++ after the given date-time (see [476]Section 1.6) are to be ++ sent. Examples: ++ ++ send /text /after:{2-Feb-1997 10:28:30} *.txt ++ send /text /after:\fdate(oofa.txt) *.txt ++ ++ Synonym: /SINCE. ++ ++ /ARRAY:arrayname ++ Specifies that instead of sending a file, C-Kermit is to send ++ the contents of the given array. Since an array does not have a ++ filename, you should include an /AS-NAME switch to specify the ++ name under which the array is to be sent (if you do not, the ++ name "_array_x_" is used, where 'x' is replaced by the array ++ designator). See [477]section 7.10 for array-name syntax. As ++ noted in that section, you can also include a range to have a ++ segment of the array sent, rather than the whole thing; for ++ example: "send /array:&a[100:199]". It is strongly recommended ++ that you accompany the /ARRAY switch with a /TEXT or /BINARY ++ switch to force the desired transfer mode, since otherwise the ++ various automatic mechanisms might switch to binary mode when ++ you really wanted text, or vice versa. In text mode a line ++ terminator is added to the end of each array element, but not ++ in binary mode. For details and examples see [478]Section ++ 7.10.11. ++ ++ /AS-NAME:text ++ Specifies "text" as the name to send the file under. You can ++ also still specify the as-name as the second filename on the ++ SEND command line. The following two commands are equivalent: ++ ++ send oofa.txt oofa.new ++ send /as:oofa.new oofa.txt ++ ++ /BEFORE:date-time ++ Specifies that only those files modified (or, in VMS, created) ++ before the given date-time ([479]Section 1.6) are to be sent. ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Performs this transfer in binary mode without affecting the ++ global transfer mode, overriding not only the FILE TYPE and ++ TRANSFER MODE settings, but also the FILE PATTERN setting, but ++ for this SEND command only. In other words, SEND /BINARY means ++ what it says: send the file in binary mode, regardless of any ++ other settings. Example: ++ ++ set file type text ; Set global transfer mode to text ++ send /binary oofa.zip ; Send a file in binary ++ send oofa.txt ; This one is sent in text mode ++ ++ /COMMAND ++ SEND /COMMAND is equivalent to CSEND ([480]Section 4.2.2) -- it ++ says to send the output from a command, rather than the ++ contents of a file. The first "filename" on the SEND command ++ line is interpreted as the name of a command; the second (if ++ any) is the as-name. Examples: ++ ++ send /command {grep Sunday oofa.txt} sunday.txt ++ send /as-name:sunday.txt /command {grep Sunday oofa.txt} ++ send /bin /command {tar cf - . | gzip -c} {!gunzip -c | tar xf -} ++ ++ /DELETE ++ Deletes the file (or each file in the group) after it has been ++ sent successfully (but does not delete it if it was not sent ++ successfully). SEND /DELETE is equivalent to MOVE. Has no ++ effect when used with /COMMAND. Example: ++ ++ send /delete *.log ++ ++ /DOTFILES ++ (UNIX and OS-9 only) Normally files whose names begin with "." ++ are skipped when matching wildcards that do not also beging ++ with ".". Include /DOTFILES to force these files to be included ++ too. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ Descend the through the directory tree when locating files to ++ send. Automatically sets /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE. Explained in ++ [481]Section 4.11 . ++ ++ /EXCEPT:pattern ++ See [482]Section 1.5.4. ++ ++ /NOBACKUP ++ This means to skip backup files when sending, even if they ++ match the SEND file specification. This is equivalent to using ++ SEND /EXCEPT and including *.~[0-9]*~ in the exception list (or ++ *.~*~ if Kermit was built without pattern-matching support; see ++ [483]Section 4.9.1). Including this switch is equivalent to ++ giving SET SEND BACKUP OFF ([484]Section 4.0.6) prior to SEND, ++ except its effect is local to the SEND command with which it ++ was given. ++ ++ /NODOTFILES ++ The opposite of /DOTFILES (q.v.) ++ ++ /FILENAMES:{CONVERTED,LITERAL} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET FILE NAMES ++ setting for this transfer only. ++ ++ /FILTER:command ++ This specifies a filter to pass the file through before sending ++ it. See the [485]section on file-transfer pipes and filters. ++ The /FILTER switch applies only to the file-transfer command it ++ is given with; it does not affect the global SEND FILTER ++ setting, if any. ++ ++ /IMAGE ++ VMS: Sends in image mode. Non-VMS: same as /BINARY. ++ ++ /LABELED ++ VMS and OS/2 only: Sends in labeled mode. ++ ++ /LARGER-THAN:number ++ Specifies that only those files that are longer than the given ++ number of bytes are to be sent. ++ ++ /LISTFILE:filename ++ Specifies that the files to be sent are listed in a file with ++ the given filename. The file contains one filename per line. ++ These filenames are not checked in any way; each filename is ++ taken and does not use or depend on any Kermit-specific syntax. ++ In particular, backslashes are not treated specially, leading ++ and trailing spaces are not stripped, etc. However, if a ++ filename contains wildcards, they are expanded. Example: If a ++ file named files.txt contains the following lines: ++ ++ blah.txt ++ oofa* ++ x.x ++ ++ (but without leading or trailing spaces), then the C-Kermit ++ command "send /listfile:files.txt" will send the files ++ blah.txt, x.x, and all files whose names start with "oofa", ++ assuming the files exist and are readable. The /LISTFILE ++ switch, can, of course, be used with other switches when it ++ makes sense, for example, /EXCEPT, /BINARY, /AFTER, /SMALLER, ++ /MOVE-TO, /DELETE, /AS-NAME with a template, etc. ++ ++ /MAIL:address ++ Sends the file as e-mail to the given address or addresses. ++ "send /mail:address filename" is equivalent to "mail filename ++ address". You can include multiple addresses separated by ++ commas. Examples: ++ ++ send /mail:kermit-support@columbia.edu packet.log ++ send /mail:cmg,fdc,jrd oofa.txt ++ ++ As with any switch argument, if the address or address list ++ contains any spaces, you must enclose it in braces. The format ++ of the addresses must agree with that understood by the ++ mail-sending program on the receiver's computer. ++ ++ /MOVE-TO:directory-name ++ Specifies that after each (or the only) source file is sent ++ successfully, and ONLY if it is sent successfully, it should be ++ moved to the named directory. If the directory name contains ++ spaces, enclose it in braces. If the directory does not exist, ++ it is created if possible; if it can't be created, the command ++ fails and an error message is printed. Example: ++ ++ send /text /move-to:/users/olga/backup/ *.txt ++ ++ /NOT-AFTER:date-time ++ Specifies that only those files modified at or before the given ++ date and time are to be sent. ++ ++ /NOT-BEFORE:date-time ++ Specifies that only those files modified at or after the given ++ date and time are to be sent. ++ ++ /PATHNAMES:{OFF,ABSOLUTE,RELATIVE} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET SEND ++ PATHNAMES setting for this transfer only. /PATHNAMES:ABSOLUTE ++ or RELATIVE also sets /FILENAMES:LITERAL (also for this ++ transfer only) since pathnames are not sent otherwise. ++ ++ /RENAME-TO:text ++ Specifies that after the (or each) source file is sent ++ successfully, and ONLY if it is sent successfully, it should be ++ renamed to the name given. If the name contains spaces, enclose ++ it in braces. If a file group is being sent, then the "text" ++ must contain a variable reference such as \v(filename) (see ++ [486]Section 4.1). Example: ++ ++ send /rename-to:ok_\v(filename) *.* ++ ++ This sends each file in the current directory and if it was ++ sent successfully, changes its name to begin with "ok_". ++ ++ /SMALLER-THAN:number ++ Specifies that only those files that are smaller than the given ++ number of bytes are to be sent. ++ ++ /SUBJECT:text ++ Subject for email. Actually, this is just a synonym for ++ /AS-NAME. If the text includes spaces, you must enclose it in ++ braces. If you don't specify a subject (or as-name), the name ++ of the file is used as the subject. Example: ++ ++ send /mail:kermit-support@columbia.edu /subj:{As requested} packet.log ++ ++ /PRINT:options ++ Sends the file to be printed, optionally specifying options for ++ the printer. Equivalent to REMOTE PRINT filename options. ++ Examples: ++ ++ send /print oofa.txt ; No options. ++ send /print:/copies=3 oofa.txt ; "/copies=3" is a VMS PRINT switch. ++ send /print:-#3 oofa.txt ; "-#3" is a UNIX lpr switch. ++ ++ /PROTOCOL:name ++ Uses the given protocol to send the file (Kermit, Zmodem, etc) ++ for this transfer without changing global protocol. Only ++ available in Kermit 95, UNIX, and OS-9. Example: ++ ++ set protocol kermit ; Set global protocol ++ send /proto:zmodem /bin oofa.zip ; Send just this file with Zmodem ++ send oofa.txt ; This file is sent with Kermit ++ ++ /QUIET ++ When sending in local mode, this suppresses the file-transfer ++ display. ++ ++ /RECOVER ++ Used to recover from a previously interrupted transfer; SEND ++ /RECOVER is equivalent to RESEND. Recovery only works in binary ++ mode; SEND /RECOVER and RESEND include an implied /BINARY ++ switch. Even then, recovery will successful only if (a) the ++ original (interrupted) transfer was also in binary mode, or (b) ++ if it was in text mode, the two Kermit programs run on ++ platforms where text-mode transfers are not length-changing. ++ ++ /STARTING:number ++ Starts sending the file from the given byte position. SEND ++ /STARTING:n filename is equivalent to PSEND filename n. ++ ++ /TEXT ++ Performs this transfer in text mode without affecting the ++ global transfer mode, overriding not only the FILE TYPE and ++ TRANSFER MODE settings, but also the FILE PATTERN setting, for ++ this SEND command only. In other words, SEND /TEXT really send ++ the file in text mode, regardless of any other settings or ++ negotiations. ++ ++ About mail... Refer to [487]Section 4.7.1. The same rules apply as for ++ file transfer. If you are mailing multiple files, you can't use an ++ as-name (in this case, a subject) unless it contains replacement ++ variables like \v(filenum). For example, if you: ++ ++ send /mail:somebody@xyz.com *.txt ++ ++ Then each file will arrive as a separate email message with its name ++ as the subject. But if you: ++ ++ send /mail:somebody@xyz.com /subject:{Here is a file} *.txt ++ ++ Then each file message will have the same subject, which is probably ++ not what you want. You can get around this with constructions like: ++ ++ send /mail:somebody@xyz.com /subject:{Here is \v(filename)} *.txt ++ ++ which embed the filename in the subject. ++ ++ The MOVE, CSEND, MAIL, and RESEND commands now also accept the same ++ switches. And the switches are also operative when sending from a ++ SEND-LIST (see [488]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed, pp.191-192), so, for ++ example, it is now possible to SEND /PRINT or SEND /MAIL from a ++ SEND-LIST. ++ ++ The MSEND and MMOVE commands also take switches, but not all of them. ++ With these commands, which take an arbitrary list of filespecs, you ++ can use /BINARY, /DELETE, /MAIL, /PRINT, /PROTOCOL, /QUIET, /RECOVER, ++ and /TEXT (and /IMAGE or /LABELED, depending on the platform). MMOVE ++ is equivalent to MSEND /DELETE. (If you want to send a group of files, ++ but in mixed transfer modes with per-file as-names, use ADD SEND-LIST ++ and then SEND.) ++ ++ The MSEND/MMOVE switches come before the filenames, and apply to all ++ of them: ++ ++ msend /print /text *.log oofa.txt /etc/motd ++ ++ If you type any of these commands (SEND, CSEND, MSEND, etc) followed ++ by a question mark (?), you will see a list of the switches you can ++ use. If you want to see a list of filenames, you'll need to type ++ something like "send ./?" (UNIX, OS/2, Windows, etc), or "send []?" ++ (VMS), etc. Of course, you can also type pieces of a filename ++ (anything that does not start with "/") and then "?" to get a list of ++ filenames that start that way; e.g. "send x.?" still works as before. ++ ++ In UNIX, where "/" is also the directory separator, there is usually ++ no ambiguity between a fully-specified pathname and a switch, except ++ when a file in the root directory has the same name as a switch (as ++ noted in [489]Section 1.5): ++ ++ send /etc/motd ; Works as expected ++ send /command ; ??? ++ ++ The second example interprets "/command" as a switch, not a filename. ++ To send a file actually called "command" in the root directory, use: ++ ++ send {/command} ++ ++ or other system-dependent forms such as //command, /./command, ++ c:/command, etc, or cd to / and then "send command". ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.7.2. GET Command Switches ++ ++ Without switches, the GET command still works about the same as ++ before: ++ ++ get oofa.txt ; GET a single file ++ get oofa.* ; GET multiple files ++ ++ However, the mechanism for including an "as-name" has changed. ++ Previously, in order to include an as-name, you were required to use ++ the "multiline" form of GET: ++ ++ get ++ remote-filespec ++ local-name ++ ++ This was because the remote filespec might contain spaces, and so ++ there would be no good way of telling where it ended and where the ++ local name began, e.g: ++ ++ get profile exec a foo ++ ++ But now since we can use {braces} for grouping, we don't need the ++ multiline GET form any more, and in fact, support for it has been ++ removed. If you give a GET command by itself on a line, it fails and ++ an error message is printed. The new form is: ++ ++ GET [ switches... ] remote-name [ local-name ] ++ Ask the server to send the file whose name is remote-name. If ++ the optional local-name is given, store it locally under this ++ name. If the remote-name or local-name contains spaces, they ++ must be enclosed in braces: ++ ++ get {profile exec a} foo ++ get oofa.txt {~/My Files/Oofa text} ++ ++ If you want to give a list of remote file specifications, use the MGET ++ command: ++ ++ MGET [ switches... ] remote-name [ remote-name [ remote-name ... ] ] ++ Ask the server to send the files whose names are given. ++ ++ Now you can also include modifier switches between GET or MGET and the ++ remote-name; most of the same switches as SEND: ++ ++ /AS-NAME:text ++ Specifies "text" as the name to store the incoming file under. ++ (This switch is not available for MGET.) You can also still ++ specify the as-name as the second filename on the GET command ++ line. The following two commands are equivalent: ++ ++ get oofa.txt oofa.new ++ get /as:oofa.new oofa.txt ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Tells the server to send the given file(s) in binary mode ++ without affecting the global transfer mode. Example: ++ ++ set file type text ; Set global transfer mode to text ++ get /binary oofa.zip ; get a file in binary mode ++ get oofa.txt ; This one is transferred in text mode ++ ++ Or, perhaps more to the point: ++ ++ get /binary foo.txt ; where "*.txt" is a text-pattern ++ ++ This has the expected effect only if the server is C-Kermit 7.0 ++ or later or K95 1.1.19 or later. ++ ++ /COMMAND ++ GET /COMMAND is equivalent to CGET ([490]Section 4.2.2) -- it ++ says to receive the file into the standard input of a command, ++ rather than saving it on disk. The /AS-NAME or the second ++ "filename" on the GET command line is interpreted as the name ++ of a command. Examples: ++ ++ get /command sunday.txt {grep Sunday oofa.txt} ++ get /command /as-name:{grep Sunday oofa.txt} sunday.txt ++ get /bin /command {!gunzip -c | tar xf -} {tar cf - . | gzip -c} ++ ++ /DELETE ++ Asks the Kermit server to delete the file (or each file in the ++ group) after it has been transferred successfully (but not to ++ delete it if it was not sent successfully). GET /DELETE is ++ equivalent to RETRIEVE. Example: ++ ++ get /delete *.log ++ ++ /EXCEPT:pattern ++ Specifies that any files whose names match the pattern, which ++ can be a regular filename, or may contain "*" and/or "?" ++ metacharacters, are to be refused upon arrival. To specify ++ multiple patterns (up to 8), use outer braces around the group, ++ and inner braces around each pattern: ++ ++ /EXCEPT:{{pattern1}{pattern2}...} ++ ++ See the description of SEND /EXCEPT in [491]Section 4.7.1 for ++ examples, etc. Refusal is accomplished using the Attribute ++ Rejection mechanism (reason "name"), which works only when ++ Attribute packets have been successfully negotiated. ++ ++ /FILENAMES:{CONVERTED,LITERAL} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET FILE NAMES ++ setting for this transfer only. ++ ++ /FILTER:command ++ This specifies a filter to pass the incoming file through ++ before writing to disk. See the [492]section on file-transfer ++ pipes and filters. The /FILTER switch applies only to the ++ file-transfer command it is given with; it does not affect the ++ global RECEIVE FILTER setting, if any. ++ ++ /IMAGE ++ VMS: Transfer in image mode. Non-VMS: same as /BINARY. ++ ++ /LABELED ++ VMS and OS/2 only: Specifies labeled transfer mode. ++ ++ /MOVE-TO:directory ++ This tells C-Kermit to move each file that is successfully ++ received to the given directory. Files that are not ++ successfully received are not moved. By default, files are not ++ moved. ++ ++ /PATHNAMES:{OFF,ABSOLUTE,RELATIVE,AUTO} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET RECEIVE ++ PATHNAMES setting for this transfer only. /PATHNAMES:ABSOLUTE ++ or RELATIVE also sets /FILENAMES:LITERAL (also for this ++ transfer only) since incoming pathnames would not be treated as ++ pathnames otherwise. See [493]Section 4.10. ++ ++ /QUIET ++ When sending in local mode, this suppresses the file-transfer ++ display. ++ ++ /RECOVER ++ Used to recover from a previously interrupted transfer; GET ++ /RECOVER is equivalent to REGET. Recovery only works in binary ++ mode; SEND /RECOVER and RESEND include an implied /BINARY ++ switch. Even then, recovery will successful only if (a) the ++ original (interrupted) transfer was also in binary mode, or (b) ++ if it was in text mode, the two Kermit programs run on ++ platforms where text-mode transfers are not length-changing. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ Tells the server that the GET file specification applies ++ recursively. This switch also automatically sets ++ /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE in both the server AND the client. When ++ used in conjunction with /DELETE, this "moves" a directory tree ++ from the server's computer to the client's computer (except ++ that only regular files are deleted from the server's computer, ++ not directories; thus the original directories will be left, ++ but will contain no files). Note that all servers that support ++ /RECURSIVE do not necessarily do so in combination with other ++ switches, such as /RECOVER. (Servers that do include C-Kermit ++ 7.0 and later, K95 1.1.19 and later.) ++ ++ /RENAME-TO:string ++ This tells C-Kermit to rename each file that is successfully ++ received to the given string. Files that are not successfully ++ received are not renamed. By default, files are not renamed. ++ The string can be a literal string, which is appropriate when ++ only one file is being received, or it can contain one or more ++ variables that are to be evaluated at the time each file is ++ received, such as \v(filename), \v(filenumber), \v(ntime), ++ \v(pid), \v(user), etc. WARNING: if you give a literal string ++ and more than one file arrives, each incoming file will be ++ given the same name (but SET FILE COLLISION BACKUP or RENAME ++ can be used to keep the incoming files from overwriting each ++ other). ++ ++ /TEXT ++ Tells the server to perform this transfer in text mode without ++ affecting its global transfer mode. See /BINARY for additional ++ info. ++ ++ The /MAIL and /PRINT options are not available (as they are for SEND), ++ but you can use /COMMAND to achieve the same effect, as in these UNIX ++ examples: ++ ++ get /command oofa.txt {mail kermit@columbia.edu} ++ get /command oofa.txt lpr ++ ++ In OS/2 or Windows, you can GET and print like this: ++ ++ get oofa.txt prn ++ ++ The CGET, REGET, RETRIEVE commands also accept the same switches as ++ GET. CGET automatically sets /COMMAND; REGET automatically sets ++ /RECOVER and /BINARY, and RETRIEVE automatically sets /DELETE. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.7.3. RECEIVE Command Switches ++ ++ Without switches, the RECEIVE command still works as before: ++ ++ receive ; Receives files under their own names ++ receive /tmp ; Ditto, but into the /tmp directory ++ r ; Same as "receive" ++ receive foo.txt ; Receives a file and renames to foo.txt ++ ++ Now you can also include modifier switches may be included between ++ "receive" and the as-name; most of the same switches as GET: ++ ++ /AS-NAME:text ++ Specifies "text" as the name to store the incoming file under. ++ You can also still specify the as-name as a filename on the ++ command line. The following two commands are equivalent: ++ ++ r oofa.new ++ r /as:oofa.new ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Performs this transfer in binary mode without affecting the ++ global transfer mode. NOTE: This does not override the incoming ++ filetype (as it does with GET), so this switch is useful only ++ if ATTRIBUTE TYPE is OFF, or if the other Kermit does not send ++ a TYPE (text or binary) attribute. In any case, it has no ++ affect whatsoever on the file sender. ++ ++ /COMMAND ++ RECEIVE /COMMAND is equivalent to CRECEIVE ([494]Section 4.2.2) ++ -- it says to receive the file into the standard input of a ++ command, rather than saving it on disk. The /AS-NAME or the ++ "filename" on the RECEIVE command line is interpreted as the ++ name of a command. ++ ++ r /command {grep Sunday oofa.txt} ++ r /command /as-name:{grep Sunday oofa.txt} ++ r /bin /command {tar cf - . | gzip -c} ++ ++ /EXCEPT:pattern ++ Specifies that any files whose names match the pattern, which ++ can be a regular filename, or may contain "*" and/or "?" ++ metacharacters, are to be refused upon arrival. To specify ++ multiple patterns (up to 8), use outer braces around the group, ++ and inner braces around each pattern: ++ ++ /EXCEPT:{{pattern1}{pattern2}...} ++ ++ See the description of SEND /EXCEPT in [495]Section 4.7.1 for ++ examples, etc. Refusal is accomplished using the Attribute ++ Rejection mechanism (reason "name"), which works only when ++ Attribute packets have been successfully negotiated. ++ ++ /FILENAMES:{CONVERTED,LITERAL} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET FILE NAMES ++ setting for this transfer only. ++ ++ /FILTER:command ++ This specifies a filter to pass the incoming file through ++ before writing to disk. See the [496]section on file-transfer ++ pipes and filters. The /FILTER switch applies only to the ++ file-transfer command it is given with; it does not affect the ++ global RECEIVE FILTER setting, if any. ++ ++ /IMAGE ++ VMS: Transfer in image mode. Non-VMS: same as /BINARY. See ++ comments under RECEIVE /BINARY. ++ ++ /LABELED ++ VMS and OS/2 only: Specifies labeled transfer mode. See ++ comments under RECEIVE /BINARY. ++ ++ /MOVE-TO:directory ++ This tells C-Kermit to move each file that is successfully ++ received to the given directory. Files that are not ++ successfully received are not moved. By default, files are not ++ moved. ++ ++ /PATHNAMES:{ABSOLUTE,RELATIVE,OFF,AUTO} ++ Use this switch to override the current global SET RECEIVE ++ PATHNAMES setting for this transfer only. See [497]Section ++ 4.10. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ When used with the RECEIVE command, /RECURSIVE is simply a ++ synonym for /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE. ++ ++ /RENAME-TO:string ++ This tells C-Kermit to rename each file that is successfully ++ received to the given string. Files that are not successfully ++ received are not renamed. By default, files are not renamed. ++ The string can be a literal string, which is appropriate when ++ only one file is being received, or it can contain one or more ++ variables that are to be evaluated at the time each file is ++ received, such as \v(filename), \v(filenumber), \v(ntime), ++ \v(pid), \v(user), etc. WARNING: if you give a literal string ++ and more than one file arrives, each incoming file will be ++ given the same name (but SET FILE COLLISION BACKUP or RENAME ++ can be used to keep the incoming files from overwriting each ++ other). ++ ++ /QUIET ++ When receiving in local mode, this suppresses the file-transfer ++ display. ++ ++ /TEXT ++ Receives in text mode without affecting the global transfer ++ mode. See comments under RECEIVE /BINARY. ++ ++ The /MAIL and /PRINT options are not available, but you can use ++ /COMMAND to achieve the same effect, as in these UNIX examples: ++ ++ r /command {mail kermit@columbia.edu} ++ r /command lpr ++ ++ In OS/2 or Windows, you can RECEIVE and print like this: ++ ++ receive prn ++ ++ The CRECEIVE command now also accepts the same switches. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.8. Minor Kermit Protocol Improvements ++ ++ 4.8.1. Multiple Attribute Packets ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 now sends more than one Attribute packet if a file's ++ attributes do not fit into a single packet of the negotiated length. ++ If a particular attribute (such as file creation date-time) does not ++ fit within the negotiated length (which will only happen when the ++ negotiated length is around 20 or less), that attribute is not sent at ++ all. ++ ++ 4.8.2. Very Short Packets ++ ++ There are certain situations where extremely short packets must be ++ used; 20 or 30 bytes at most. This can happen when one or more devices ++ along the communication path have very small buffers and lack an ++ effective means of flow control. Examples are sometimes cited ++ involving radio modems. ++ ++ When the maximum packet length is shorter than certain packets that ++ would be sent, those packets are either truncated or else broken up ++ into multiple packets. Specifically: ++ ++ 1. Parameter negotiation packets (I, S, and their ACKs) are truncated ++ to the negotiated length. Any parameters that do not fit are reset ++ to their default values. There is no provision in the Kermit ++ protocol for fragmentation and reassembly of parameter strings. ++ 2. File header packets (containing the filename) are simply ++ truncated. There is no provision in the Kermit protocol for ++ fragmentation and reassembly of filenames. ++ 3. Attribute packets are fragmented and reassembled as described in ++ 4.8.1 without loss of data, except in case a field will not fit at ++ all in the negotiated length (the longest attribute is usually the ++ date and time of file creation/modification) because of the rule ++ that attributes may not be broken across packets. ++ 4. Data packets and other packets are unaffected -- they can be as ++ short as they need to be, within reason. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.9. Wildcard / File Group Expansion ++ ++ "Wildcard" refers to the notation used in filenames to specify a group ++ of files by pattern matching. ++ ++ 4.9.1. In UNIX C-Kermit ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, C-Kermit was capable of expanding wildcard ++ strings containing only the "metacharacters" '*' and '?': ++ ++ * ++ Matches any sequence of zero or more characters. For example: ++ "ck*.c" matches all files whose names start with "ck" and end ++ with ".c", including "ck.c". ++ ++ ? ++ Matches any single character. For example, "ck?.c" matches all ++ files whose names are exactly 5 characters long and start with ++ "ck" and end with ".c". When typing commands at the prompt, you ++ must precede any question mark to be used for matching by a ++ backslash (\) to override the normal function of question mark, ++ which is providing menus and file lists. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds the additional features that users of ksh, csh, and ++ bash are accustomed to: ++ ++ [abc] ++ Square brackets enclosing a list of characters matches any ++ single character in the list. Example: ckuusr.[ch] matches ++ ckuusr.c and ckuusr.h. ++ ++ [a-z] ++ Square brackets enclosing a range of characters; the hyphen ++ separates the low and high elements of the range. For example, ++ [a-z] matches any character from a to z. ++ ++ [acdm-z] ++ Lists and ranges may be combined. This example matches a, c, d, ++ or m through z. ++ ++ {string1,string2,...} ++ Braces enclose a list of strings to be matched. For example: ++ ck{ufio,vcon,cmai}.c matches ckufio.c, ckvcon.c, or ckcmai.c. ++ The strings may themselves contain metacharacters, bracket ++ lists, or indeed, other lists of strings, but (when matching ++ filenames) they may not contain directory separators. ++ ++ Thus, the metacharacters in filenames (and in any other field ++ that can be a pattern, such as the IF MATCH pattern, SEND or ++ GET exception lists, etc) are: ++ ++ * ? [ { ++ ++ And within braces only, comma (,) is a metacharacter. ++ ++ To include a metacharacter in a pattern literally, precede it with a ++ backslash '\' (or two if you are passing the pattern to a macro). ++ Examples: ++ ++ send a*b ; Send all files whose names start with 'a' and end with 'b'. ++ send a?b ; Ditto, but the name must be exactly three characters long. ++ send a[a-z]b ; Ditto, but the second character must be a lowercase letter. ++ send a[x\-z]b ; Ditto, except the second character must be 'x', '-', or 'y'. ++ send a[ghi]b ; Ditto, except the second character must be 'g', 'h', or 'i'. ++ send a[?*]b ; Ditto, except the second character must be '?' or '*'. ++ send a[\?\*]b ; Same as previous. ++ send *?[a-z]* ; All files with names containing at least one character ++ ; that is followed by a lowercase letter. ++ ++ Or, more practically: ++ ++ send ck[cuw]*.[cwh] ; Send the UNIX C-Kermit source files. ++ ++ To refer to the C-Kermit sources files and makefile all in one ++ filespec: ++ ++ {{makefile,ck[cuw]*.[cwh]}} ++ ++ (NOTE: if the entire pattern is a {stringlist}, you must enclose it it ++ TWO pairs of braces, since the SEND command strips the outer brace ++ pair, because of the "enclose in braces if the filename contains ++ spaces" rule). ++ ++ If the makefile is called ckuker.mak: ++ ++ ck[cuw]*.{[cwh],mak} ++ ++ (NOTE: double braces are not needed here since the pattern does not ++ both begin and end with a brace.) ++ ++ To add in all the C-Kermit text files: ++ ++ ck[cuw]*.{[cwh],mak,txt} ++ ++ All of these features can be used anywhere you would type a filename ++ that is allowed to contain wildcards. ++ ++ When you are typing at the command prompt, an extra level of quoting ++ is required for the '?' character to defeat its regular function of ++ producing a list of files that match what you have typed so far, for ++ example: ++ ++ send ck[cu]? ++ ++ lists all the files whose names start with ckc and cku. If you quote ++ the question mark, it is used as a pattern-matching character, for ++ example: ++ ++ send ck\?[ft]io.c ++ ++ sends all the file and communications i/o modules for all the ++ platforms: ckufio.c, ckutio.c, ckvfio.c, ckvtio.c, etc. ++ ++ If, however, a filename actually contains a question mark and you need ++ to refer to it on the command line, you must use three (3) ++ backslashes. For example, if the file is actually called ck?fio.c, you ++ would use: ++ ++ send ck\\\?fio.c ++ ++ Further notes on quoting: ++ ++ * A single backslash is sufficient for quoting a special character ++ at the command prompt or in a command file. However, when passing ++ patterns to macros you'll need double backslashes, and when ++ referring to these patterns within the macro, you'll need to use ++ \fcontents(\%1) (see [498]Section 1.11.5). You should enclose ++ macro argument references in braces in case grouped arguments were ++ passed. Example: ++ define ismatch { ++ if match {\fcont(\%1)} {\fcont(\%2)} { ++ end 0 MATCH ++ } else { ++ end 1 NO MATCH ++ } ++ } ++ ismatch ab*yz a*\\**z ; Backslash must be doubled ++ ismatch {abc def xyz} *b*e*y* ; Braces must be used for grouping ++ * Watch out for possible conflicts between {} in filename patterns ++ and {} used for grouping multiple words into a single field, when ++ the pattern has outer braces. For example, in: ++ if match {abc xyz} {a* *z} echo THEY MATCH ++ braces must be used to group "abc xyz" into a single string. ++ Kermit strips off the braces before comparing the string with the ++ pattern. Therefore: ++ if match makefile {makefile,Makefile} echo THEY MATCH ++ does not work, but: ++ if match makefile {{makefile,Makefile}} echo THEY MATCH ++ does. ++ * If you use a pattern that has outer braces, like {*.txt,*.doc}, in ++ a field that accepts a pattern list (like SEND /EXCEPT:xxx), ++ you'll need to add two extra sets of outer braces: ++ send /except:{{{*.txt,*.doc}}} *.* ++ ++ C-Kermit's new pattern matching capabilities are also used when ++ C-Kermit is in server mode, so now you can send requests such as: ++ ++ get ck[cuw]*.[cwh] ++ ++ to a C-Kermit server without having to tell it to SET WILD SHELL ++ first. Previously this would have required: ++ ++ mget ckc*.c ckc*.w ckc*.h cku*.c cku*.w cku*.h ckw*.c ckw*.w ckw*.h ++ ++ The new pattern matching features make SET WILD SHELL redundant, and ++ barring any objections, it will eventually be phased out. (One ++ possible reason for retaining it would be as an escape mechanism when ++ Kermit does not understand the underlying file system.) ++ ++ By the way, patterns such as these are sometimes referred to as ++ "regular expressions", but they are not quite the same. In a true ++ regular expression (for example), "*" means "zero or more repetitions ++ of the previous item", so (for example), "([0-9]*)" would match zero ++ or more digits in parentheses. In Kermit (and in most shells), this ++ matches one digit followed by zero or more characters, within ++ parentheses. Here are some hints: ++ ++ * Although you can't match any sequence of digits (or letters, etc), ++ you can match (say) 1, 2, or 3 of them in row. For example, the ++ following pattern matches Kermit backup files (with backup numbers ++ from 1 to 999): ++ *.~{[1-9],[1-9][0-9],[1-9][0-9][0-9]}~ ++ * There is presently no NOT operator, so no way to match any ++ character or string EXCEPT the one(s) shown. ++ ++ In other wildcarding news... ++ ++ * You may now "send xxx" where "xxx" is a directory name, and this ++ will send all the files from the directory xxx, as if you had ++ typed "send xxx/*". You can also use the special shorthand "send ++ ." to send all the files from the current directory. ++ * To easily skip over backup files (the ones whose names end like ++ .~22~) when sending, you can use SEND /NOBACKUP (see [499]Section ++ 4.0.6 for details). ++ * When choosing Kermit to expand wildcards, rather than the shell, ++ you can choose whether "dot files" -- files whose names begin with ++ ".", which are normally "invisible" -- should be matched: ++ SET WILD KERMIT /NO-MATCH-DOT-FILES (this is the default) ++ SET WILD KERMIT /MATCH-DOT-FILES (this allows matching of "." files) ++ or include the /DOTFILES or /NODOTFILES switch on the command you ++ are using, such as SEND or DIRECTORY. ++ * Commands such as DIRECTORY and SEND allow recursive directory ++ traversal. There are also new functions for this to use in ++ scripts. See [500]Section 4.11 for details. ++ ++ When building file lists in UNIX, C-Kermit follows symbolic links. ++ Because of this, you might encounter any or all of the following ++ phenomena: ++ ++ * Multiple copies of the same file; e.g. one from its real directory ++ and others from links to its real directory, if both the real ++ directory and the links to it are in the wildcard expansion list. ++ * A command might unexpectedly "hang" for a long time because an NFS ++ link might not be responding, or the directory you are looking at ++ contains a link to a huge directory tree (example: "directory ++ /recursive /etc" when /etc/spool is a symlink to /var/spool, which ++ is a large organization's incoming email directory, containing ++ tens of thousands of subdirectories). ++ ++ The size of the file list that Kermit can build is limited in most ++ C-Kermit implementations. The limit, if any, depends on the ++ implementation. Use the SHOW FEATURES command and look in the ++ alphabetized options list for MAXWLD to see the value. ++ ++ 4.9.2. In Kermit 95 ++ ++ Kermit 95 1.1.19 and later uses the same pattern matching syntax as in ++ UNIX, but (as always) you will encounter numerous difficulties if you ++ use backslash (\) as the directory separator. In any command where K95 ++ parses filenames itself (that is, practically any file-oriented ++ command except RUN), you can use forward slash (/) as the directory ++ separator to avoid all the nasty conflicts. ++ ++ 4.9.3. In VMS, AOS/VS, OS-9, VOS, etc. ++ ++ Platforms other than UNIX, Windows 95/98/NT, and OS/2 have their own ++ filename matching capabilities that are, in general, different from ++ Kermit's built-in ones and in any case might conflict with them. For ++ example, [] encloses directory names in VMS. ++ ++ Nevertheless you can still use all the pattern-matching capabilities ++ described in [501]Section 4.9.1 by loading a file list into an array ++ (e.g. with \ffiles(*,&a), see [502]Section 4.11.3) and then using IF ++ MATCH on the members. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.10. Additional Pathname Controls ++ ++ In version 6.0 and earlier, C-Kermit's SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PATHNAMES ++ command had only ON and OFF as options. In version 7.0, there are more ++ choices: ++ ++ SET SEND PATHNAMES OFF ++ When sending a file, strip all disk/directory information from ++ the name. Example: "send /usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt" sends the ++ file as "oofa.txt". This applies to actual filenames, not to ++ any as-name you might specify. ++ ++ SET SEND PATHNAMES RELATIVE ++ When sending a file, leave the pathname on as given. For ++ example, if your current directory is /usr/olga, "send ++ letters/oofa.txt" sends the file as "letters/oofa.txt", not ++ "/usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt" or "letters.txt". ++ ++ SET SEND PATHNAMES ABSOLUTE ++ When sending a file, convert its name to the full, absolute ++ local pathname. For example, if your current directory is ++ /usr/olga, "send letters/oofa.txt" sends the file as ++ "/usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt". NOTE: Even with this setting, ++ device and/or node names are not included. For example, in VMS, ++ any node or device name is stripped; in Windows or OS/2, any ++ disk letter is stripped. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES OFF ++ When receiving a file, strip all disk/directory information ++ from the name before attempting to store it. This applies to ++ incoming filename, not to any as-name you might specify. ++ Example: If a file arrives under the name ++ "/usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt" it is stored simply as "oofa.txt" ++ in your download directory or, if no download directory has ++ been specified, in your current directory. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES RELATIVE ++ When receiving a file, leave the pathname on as it appears in ++ the incoming name, but if the incoming name appears to be ++ absolute, make it relative to your current or download ++ directory. Examples: ++ ++ + "oofa.txt" is stored as "oofa.txt". ++ + "letters/oofa.txt" is stored as "letters/oofa.txt"; the ++ "letters" subdirectory is created if it does not already ++ exist. ++ + "/usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt" is stored as ++ "usr/olga/letters/oofa.txt" in your current or download ++ directory, and the "usr", "usr/olga", etc, directories are ++ created if they do not exist. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES ABSOLUTE ++ The incoming filename is used as given. Thus it cannot be ++ stored unless the given path (if any) already exists or can be ++ created. In this case, node, device, or disk designations are ++ NOT stripped, since they most likely were given explicitly by ++ the user as an as-name, meant to be used as given. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PATHNAMES AUTO ++ This is the default, and means RELATIVE if the sender tells me ++ it is a recursive transfer, OFF otherwise. ++ ++ Set FILE NAMES CONVERTED now also affects pathnames too. When ++ PATHNAMES are RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE and FILE NAMES are CONVERTED, the ++ file sender converts its native directory-name format to UNIX format, ++ and the file receiver converts from UNIX format to its native one; ++ thus UNIX format is the common intermediate representation for ++ directory hierarchies, as it is in the ZIP/UNZIP programs (which is ++ why ZIP archives are transportable among, UNIX, DOS, and VMS). ++ ++ Here's an example in which a file is sent from Windows to UNIX with ++ relative pathnames and FILE NAMES CONVERTED: ++ ++ Source name Intermediate name Destination Name ++ C:\K95\TMP\OOFA.TXT K95/TMP/OOFA.TXT k95/tmp/oofa.txt ++ ++ In a more complicated example, we send the same file from Windows to ++ VMS: ++ ++ Source name Intermediate name Destination Name ++ C:\K95\TMP\OOFA.TXT K95/TMP/OOFA.TXT [.K95.TMP]OOFA.TXT ++ ++ (Note that disk letters and device designations are always stripped ++ when pathnames are relative). ++ ++ As you can imagine, as more and more directory formats are considered, ++ this approach keeps matters simple: on each platform, Kermit must know ++ only its own local format and the common intermediate one. In most ++ cases, the receiver can detect which format is used automatically. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11. Recursive SEND and GET: Transferring Directory Trees ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 in selected versions (UNIX, VMS, VOS, AOS/VS, Windows, ++ and OS/2 at this writing) now permits the SEND command to traverse ++ directories "recursively" if you ask it to; that is, to send files ++ from the current or specified directory and all of its subdirectories ++ too, and their subdirectories, etc. (Some other commands can do this ++ too, including DIRECTORY.) ++ ++ This feature is new to UNIX, Windows, VOS, and OS/2. VMS and AOS/VS ++ have always included "wildcard" or "template" characters that allow ++ this, and in this case, recursive directory traversal could happen ++ behind Kermit's back, i.e. Kermit does not have to do it itself (in ++ VMS, the notation is "[...]" or "[directory...]"; in AOS/VS is "#"). ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, however, SEND /RECURSIVE is supported by C-Kermit ++ itself for VMS. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.1. Command-Line Options ++ ++ To descend a directory tree when sending files, use the -L ++ command-line option to indicate that the send operation is to be ++ recursive, and include a name or pattern to be sent. When giving a ++ pattern, you should enclose it in quotes to prevent the shell from ++ expanding it. Examples: ++ ++ $ kermit -Ls "/usr/olga/*" # send all of Olga's files in all her directories ++ $ kermit -Ls foo.txt # send all foo.txt files in this directory tree ++ $ kermit -Ls "*.txt" # send all .txt files in this directory tree ++ $ kermit -Ls "letters/*" # send all files in the letters directory tree ++ $ kermit -Ls letters # send all files in the letters directory tree ++ $ kermit -Ls "*" # send all files in this directory tree ++ $ kermit -Ls . # UNIX only: send all files in this directory tree ++ $ kermit -s . # UNIX only: a filename of . implies -L ++ ++ If you let the shell expand wildcards, Kermit only sends files whose ++ names match files in the current or given directory, because the shell ++ replaces an unquoted wildcard expression with the list of matching ++ files -- and the shell does not build recursive lists. Note that the ++ "." notation for the tree rooted at the current directory is allowed ++ only in UNIX, since in Windows and OS/2, it means "*.*" ++ (nonrecursive). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.2. The SEND /RECURSIVE Command ++ ++ If you include the /RECURSIVE switch in a SEND (or MOVE, or similar) ++ command, it means to descend the current or specified directory tree ++ searching for files whose names match the given name or pattern. Since ++ this is not terribly useful unless you also include pathnames with the ++ outbound files, the /RECURSIVE switch also includes an implicit ++ /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE switch (which you can undo by including an ++ explicit /PATHNAMES switch after the /RECURSIVE switch). ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE * ++ Sends all of the files in the current directory and all the ++ files in all of its subdirectories, and all of their ++ subdirectories, etc, including their relative pathnames. Empty ++ directories are not sent. ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE /PATHNAMES:ABSOLUTE * ++ Sends all of the files in the current directory and all the ++ files in all of its subdirectories, and all of their ++ subdirectories, etc, including their absolute pathnames. ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE /PATHNAMES:OFF * ++ Sends all of the files in the current directory and all the ++ files in all of its subdirectories, and all of their ++ subdirectories, etc, without pathnames. ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE /usr/olga/* ++ Sends all of the files in the /usr/olga directory and all the ++ files in all of its subdirectories, and all of their ++ subdirectories, etc. ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE /usr/olga (or /usr/olga/) ++ Same as above. If the name is a directory name (with or without ++ a trailing slash), its files are sent, and those of its ++ subdirectories, and their subdirectories, etc (see [503]Section ++ 4.9). ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE /TEXT /usr/olga/*.txt ++ As above, but only files whose names end with ".txt" are sent, ++ and they are sent in text mode (as they would be by default ++ anyway if SET FILE PATTERNS is ON or AUTO). ++ ++ SEND . ++ UNIX only: Send all the files in the current directory. ++ ++ SEND /RECURSIVE . ++ UNIX only: Sends all of the files in the current directory and ++ all of its subdirectories, etc ([504]Section 4.9). ++ ++ The /RECURSIVE switch is different from most other switches in that ++ its effect is immediate (but still local to the command in which it is ++ given), because it determines how filenames are to be parsed. For ++ example, "send *.txt" fails with a parse error ("No files match") if ++ there are no *.txt files in the current directory, but "send ++ /recursive *.txt" succeeds if there are ".txt" files anywhere in the ++ tree rooted at the current directory. ++ ++ The /RECURSIVE switch also affects the file lists displayed if you ++ type "?" in a filename field. "send ./?" lists the regular files in ++ the current directory, but "send /recursive ./?" lists the entire ++ directory tree rooted at the current directory. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.3. The GET /RECURSIVE Command ++ ++ In a client/server setting, the client can also request a recursive ++ transfer with: ++ ++ GET /RECURSIVE [ other switches ] remote-filespec [ local-spec ] ++ ++ In which remote file specification can be a directory name, a ++ filename, a wildcard, or any combination. If the local-spec is not ++ given (and PATHNAMES are RELATIVE), incoming files and directories go ++ into the current local directory. If local-spec is given and is a ++ directory, it becomes the root of the tree into which the incoming ++ files and directories are placed. If local-spec has the syntax of a ++ directory name (e.g. in UNIX it ends with /), C-Kermit creates the ++ directory and then places the incoming files into it. If local-spec is ++ a filename (not recommended), then all incoming files are stored with ++ that name with collisions handled according to the FILE COLLISION ++ setting. ++ ++ Again, the normal method for transferring directory trees uses ++ relative pathnames, and this is the default when the sender has been ++ given the /RECURSIVE switch. The action at the receiver depends on its ++ RECEIVE PATHNAMES setting. The default is AUTO, meaning that if the ++ sender tells it to expect a recursive transfer, then it should ++ automatically switch to relative pathnames for this transfer only; ++ otherwise it obeys the RECEIVE PATHNAMES setting of OFF, ABSOLUTE, or ++ RELATIVE. ++ ++ What happens if a file arrives that has an absolute pathname, when the ++ receiver has been told to use only relative pathnames? As a security ++ precaution, in this case the receiver treats the name as if it was ++ relative. For example, if a file arrives as: ++ ++ /usr/olga/oofa.txt ++ ++ The receiver creates a "usr" subdirectory in its current directory, ++ and then an "olga" subdirectory under the "usr" subdirectory in which ++ to store the incoming file. ++ ++ Suppose, however there is a sequence of directories: ++ ++ /usr/olga/a/b/c/d/ ++ ++ in which "a" contains nothing but a subdirectory "b", which in turn ++ contains nothing but a subdirectory "c", which in turn contains ++ nothing but a subdirectory "d", which contains nothing at all. Thus ++ there are no files in the "/usr/olga/a/" tree, and so it is not sent, ++ and therefore it is not reproduced on the target computer. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.4. New and Changed File Functions ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds the following functions: ++ ++ \ffiles(pattern[,&a]) ++ This function has been changed to match only regular files in ++ the current or given directory, and to take an optional array ++ name as a second argument (explained below). ++ ++ \fdirectories(pattern[,&a]) ++ Returns the number of directories that match the given pattern. ++ If the pattern does not include a directory, then the search is ++ performed in the current directory. ++ ++ \frfiles(pattern[,&a]) ++ Returns the number of files in the current or given directory ++ and all of its subdirectories, and their subdirectories, etc, ++ that match the given pattern. Warning -- this one can take ++ quite some time if performed at the root of a large directory ++ tree. ++ ++ \frdirectories(pattern[,&a]) ++ Returns the number of directories in the current or given ++ directory and all of its subdirectories, and their ++ subdirectories, etc, that match the given pattern. ++ ++ Each of these functions builds up a list of files to be returned by ++ the \fnextfile() function, just as \ffiles() always has done. (This ++ can also be done with the /ARRAY switch of the DIRECTORY command; see ++ [505]Sections 4.5.1 and [506]7.10). ++ ++ Each of these functions can be given an array name as an optional ++ second argument. If an array name is supplied, the array will contain ++ the number of files as its 0th element, and the filenames in elements ++ 1 through last. If the array already existed, its previous contents ++ are lost. For example, if the current directory contains two files, ++ oofa.txt and foo.bar, then "\ffiles(*,&a)" creates an array \&a[] with ++ a dimension of 2, containing the following elements: ++ ++ \&a[0] = 2 ++ \&a[1] = oofa.txt ++ \&a[2] = foo.bar ++ ++ If no files match the specification given in the first argument, the ++ array gets a dimension of 0, which is the same as undeclaring the ++ array. ++ ++ Note that the order in which the array is filled (and in which ++ \fnextfile() returns filenames) is indeterminate (but see [507]Section ++ 7.10.5). ++ ++ Here's an example that builds and prints a list of all the file whose ++ names end in .txt in the current directory and all its descendents: ++ ++ asg \%n \frfiles(*.txt) ++ declare \&a[\%n] ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ++ asg \&a[\%i] \fnextfile() ++ echo \flpad(\%i,4). "\&a[\%i]" ++ } ++ ++ Alternatively, using the array method, and then printing the filenames ++ in alphabetic order (see [508]Section 7.10.3 and [509]7.10.5): ++ ++ asg \%n \frfiles(*.txt,&a) ++ sort &a ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ++ echo \flpad(\%i,4). "\&a[\%i]" ++ } ++ ++ Or even more simply: ++ ++ asg \%n \frfiles(*.txt,&a) ++ sort &a ++ show array &a ++ ++ As noted elsewhere, the file lists built by \ffiles(), \frfiles(), ++ etc, are now "safe" in the sense that SEND and other file-related ++ commands can reference \fnextfile() without resetting the list: ++ ++ set send pathnames relative ++ for \%i 1 \frfiles(*.txt) 1 { ++ asg \%a \fnextfile() ++ echo Sending \%a... ++ send \%a ++ if fail break ++ } ++ ++ Copying to an array (as shown on p.398 of [510]Using C-Kermit 2nd Ed) ++ is no longer necessary. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.5. Moving Directory Trees Between Like Systems ++ ++ 4.11.5.1. UNIX to UNIX ++ ++ Transferring a directory tree from one computer to another replicates ++ the file sender's arrangement of files and directories on the file ++ receiver's computer. Normally this is done using relative pathnames, ++ since the user IDs might not be identical on the two computers. Let's ++ say both computers are UNIX based, running C-Kermit 7.0 or later. On ++ the sending computer (leaving out the connection details, etc): ++ ++ C-Kermit> cd /usr/olga ++ C-Kermit> send /recursive . ++ ++ The /RECURSIVE switch tells C-Kermit to descend through the directory ++ tree and to include relative pathnames on outbound filenames. ++ ++ On the receiving computer: ++ ++ C-Kermit> mkdir olgas-files ; Make a new directory. ++ C-Kermit> cd olgas-files ; CD to it. ++ C-Kermit> receive /recursive ; = /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE ++ ++ Each Kermit program recognizes that the other is running under UNIX ++ and switches to binary mode and literal filenames automatically. ++ Directories are automatically created on the receiving system as ++ needed. File dates and permissions are automatically reproduced from ++ source to destination. ++ ++ 4.11.5.2. VMS to VMS ++ ++ To send recursively from VMS, simply include the /RECURSIVE switch, ++ for example at the sender: ++ ++ $ kermit ++ C-Kermit> cd [olga] ++ C-Kermit> send /recursive *.*;0 ++ ++ And at the receiver: ++ ++ C-Kermit> cd [.olga] ++ C-Kermit> receive /recursive ++ ++ The notation "..." within directory brackets in VMS means "this ++ directory and all directories below it"; the /RECURSIVE switch, when ++ given to the sender, implies the use of "..." in the file ++ specification so you don't have to include "..."; but it makes no ++ difference if you do: ++ ++ $ kermit ++ C-Kermit> send /recursive [olga...]*.*;0 ++ ++ And at the receiver: ++ ++ C-Kermit> cd [.olga] ++ C-Kermit> receive /recursive ++ ++ In either case, since both systems recognize each other as VMS, they ++ switch into LABELED transfer mode automatically. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.11.6. Moving Directory Trees Between Unlike Systems ++ ++ There are several difficulties with recursive transfers between unlike ++ systems: ++ ++ * File formats can be different, especially text files character ++ sets and record formats. This can now be handled by using SET FILE ++ PATTERN, SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS, and SET FILE BINARY-PATTERNS ++ ([511]Section 4.3). ++ * File naming conventions are different. For example, one system ++ might allow (and use) longer filenames than the other. You can ++ tell Kermit how to handle file names with the normal "set file ++ names" and "set file collision" mechanisms. Most modern Kermits ++ are fairly tolerant of illegal filenames and should not fail ++ simply because of an incoming filename; rather, it will do its ++ best to convert it to a recognizable and unique legal filename. ++ * Directory notations can be different, e.g. backslashes instead of ++ slashes, brackets, parentheses, spaces, etc. But this is now ++ handled by converting pathnames to a standard format during ++ transfer ([512]Section 4.10). ++ ++ So now, for the first time, it is possible to send directory trees ++ among any combination of UNIX, DOS, Windows, OS/2, VMS, AOS/VS, etc. ++ Here's an example sending files from an HP-UX system (where text files ++ are encoded in the HP Roman8 character set) to a PC with K95 (where ++ text files are encoded in CP850): ++ ++ Sender: ++ cd xxx ; CD to root of source tree ++ set file type binary ; Default transfer mode ++ set file character-set hp-roman8 ; Local character set for text files ++ set xfer character-set latin1 ; Transfer character set ++ set file patterns on ; Enable automatic file-type switching... ++ set file binary-patterns *.Z *.gz *.o ; based on these patterns... ++ set file text-patterns *.txt *.c *.h ; for binary and text files. ++ send /recursive * ; Send all the file in this directory tree ++ ++ Receiver: ++ cd yyy ; CD to root of destination tree ++ set file character-set cp850 ; Local character set for text files ++ receive /pathnames:relative ; Receive with pathnames ++ ++ Notes: ++ * Replace "xxx" and "yyy" with the desired directories. ++ * Replace the file character sets appropriately. ++ * Change the patterns as needed (or just use the built-in default ++ lists). ++ * SEND /RECURSIVE also implies /PATHNAMES:RELATIVE. ++ * The file sender tells the file receiver the transfer mode of each ++ file. ++ * The file sender tells the file receiver the transfer character ++ set. ++ * By default, destination file dates will be the same as on the ++ source. ++ * Many of the settings shown might already be set by default. ++ * See [513]Sections 4.3, [514]4.10, and [515]4.15 for additional ++ explanation. ++ ++ If you are refreshing an existing directory on the destination ++ computer, use "set file collision update" or other appropriate file ++ collision option to handle filename collisions. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.12. Where Did My File Go? ++ ++ Now that Kermit can be started by clicking on desktop icons (thus ++ obscuring the concept of "current directory"), and can have a download ++ directory, and can create directories for incoming files on the fly, ++ etc, sometimes it is easy to lose a file after transfer. Of course, if ++ you keep a transaction log: ++ ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS ++ ++ it will record the fate and final resting place of each file. But in ++ case you did not keep a log, the new command: ++ ++ WHERE ++ ++ added in C-Kermit 7.0, gives you as much information as it has about ++ the location of the last files transferred, including the pathname ++ reported by the receiving Kermit, if any, when C-Kermit is the sender. ++ This information was also added to SHOW FILE in somewhat less detail. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.13. File Output Buffer Control ++ ++ (UNIX only). The new command SET FILE OUTPUT lets you control how ++ incoming files are written to disk: ++ ++ SET FILE OUTPUT BUFFERED [ size ] ++ Chooses buffered file output; this is the default. UNIX does ++ its normal sort of disk buffering. The optional size specifies ++ Kermit's own file output buffer size, and therefore the ++ frequency of disk accesses (write() system calls) -- the bigger ++ the size, the fewer the disk accesses. ++ ++ SET FILE OUTPUT UNBUFFERED [ size ] ++ This forces each file output write() call to actually commit ++ the data to disk immediately. Choosing this option will usually ++ slow file reception down. ++ ++ SET FILE OUTPUT BLOCKING ++ Write() calls should not return until they are complete. This ++ is the normal setting, and it lets Kermit detect disk-write ++ errors immediately. ++ ++ SET FILE OUTPUT NONBLOCKING ++ Write() calls should return immediately. This can speed up file ++ reception, but also delay the detection of disk-write errors. ++ ++ Experimentation with these parameters should be harmless, and might ++ (or might not) have a perceptible, even dramatic, effect on ++ performance. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.14. Improved Responsiveness ++ ++ In version 7.0, C-Kermit's file-transfer protocol engine has been ++ tuned for additional speed and responsiveness. ++ ++ * Binary-mode transfers over 8-bit connections, a very common case, ++ are now handled in a special way that minimizes overhead. ++ * SET TRANSFER CRC-CALCULATION is now OFF by default, rather than ++ ON. (This affects only the overall per-transfer CRC, \v(crc16), ++ not the per-packet CRCs) ++ * Connection loss during file transfer is now detected immediately ++ in most cases on Internet connections and on serial connections ++ when CARRIER-WATCH is not set to OFF. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.15. Doubling and Ignoring Characters for Transparency ++ ++ The following commands were added in 7.0, primarily to allow ++ successful file transfer through ARPAnet TACs and with Honeywell DPS6 ++ systems, but can be used in any setting where they might be needed: ++ ++ SET SEND DOUBLE-CHAR { [ char [ char [ ... ] ] ], NONE } ++ Tells C-Kermit to double the specified characters (use decimal ++ notation) in packets that it sends. For example, if you are ++ sending files through a device that uses @ as an escape ++ character, but allows you to send a single copy of @ through by ++ doubling it, use "set send double 64". ++ ++ SET RECEIVE IGNORE-CHAR [ char [ char [ ... ] ] ] ++ Tells C-Kermit to ignore the specified character(s) in incoming ++ packets. Use this, for example, when something between the ++ sender and receiver is inserting linefeeds for wrapping, NULs ++ for padding, etc. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.16. New File-Transfer Display Formats ++ ++ SET TRANSFER DISPLAY { BRIEF, CRT, FULLSCREEN, NONE, SERIAL } ++ Selects the file-transfer display format. ++ ++ BRIEF is the new one. This writes one line to the screen per file, ++ showing the file's name, transfer mode, size, the status of the ++ transfer, and when the transfer is successful, the effective data rate ++ in characters per second (CPS). Example: ++ ++ SEND ckcfn3.o (binary) (59216 bytes): OK (0.104 sec, 570206 cps) ++ SEND ckcfns.o (binary) (114436 bytes): OK (0.148 sec, 772006 cps) ++ SEND ckcmai.c (text) (79147 bytes): OK (0.180 sec, 438543 cps) ++ SEND ckcmai.o (binary) (35396 bytes): OK (0.060 sec, 587494 cps) ++ SEND ckcnet.o (binary) (62772 bytes): REFUSED ++ SEND ckcpro.o (binary) (121448 bytes): OK (0.173 sec, 703928 cps) ++ SEND ckcpro.w (text) (63687 bytes): OK (0.141 sec, 453059 cps) ++ SEND makefile (text) (186636 bytes): OK (0.444 sec, 420471 cps) ++ SEND wermit (binary) (1064960 bytes): OK (2.207 sec, 482477 cps) ++ ++ Note that transfer times are now obtained in fractional seconds, ++ rather than whole seconds, so the CPS figures are more accurate (the ++ display shows 3 decimal places, but internally the figure is generally ++ precise to the microsecond). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.17. New Transaction Log Formats ++ ++ The new command: ++ ++ SET TRANSACTION-LOG { VERBOSE, FTP, BRIEF [ separator ] } ++ ++ lets you choose the format of the transaction log. VERBOSE (the ++ default) indicates the traditional format described in the book. BRIEF ++ and FTP are new. This command must be given prior to the LOG ++ TRANSACTION command if a non-VERBOSE type is desired. ++ ++ 4.17.1. The BRIEF Format ++ ++ BRIEF chooses a one-line per file format suitable for direct ++ importation into databases like Informix, Oracle, or Sybase, in which: ++ ++ * Each record has 8 fields. ++ * Fields are separated by a non-alphanumeric separator character. ++ * The default separator character is comma (,). ++ * Any field containing the separator character is enclosed in ++ doublequotes. ++ * The final field is enclosed in doublequotes. ++ ++ The fields are: ++ ++ 1. Date in yyyymmdd format ++ 2. Time in hh:mm:ss format ++ 3. Action: SEND or RECV ++ 4. The local filename ++ 5. The size of the file ++ 6. The transfer mode (text, binary, image, labeled) ++ 7. The status of the transfer: OK or FAILED ++ 8. Additional status-dependent info, in doublequotes. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ 20000208,12:08:52,RECV,/u/olga/oofa.txt,5246,text,OK,"0.284sec 18443cps" ++ 20000208,12:09:31,SEND,/u/olga/oofa.exe,32768,binary,OK,"1.243sec 26362cps" ++ 20000208,12:10:02,SEND,"/u/olga/a,b",10130,text,FAILED,"Refused: date" ++ ++ Note how the filename is enclosed in doublequotes in the final ++ example, because it contains a comma. ++ ++ To obtain BRIEF format, you must give the SET TRANSACTION-LOG BRIEF ++ command before the LOG TRANSACTIONS command. (If you give them in the ++ opposite order, a heading is written to the log by the LOG command.) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.17.2. The FTP Format ++ ++ SET TRANSACTION-LOG FTP (available only in UNIX) chooses a format that ++ is compatible with the WU-FTPD (Washington University FTP daemon) log, ++ and so can be processed by any software that processes the WU-FTPD ++ log. It logs only transfers in and out, both successful and failed ++ (but success or failure is not indicated, due to lack of a field in ++ the WU-FTPD log format for this purpose). Non-transfer events are not ++ recorded. ++ ++ Unlike other logs, the FTP-format transaction log is opened in append ++ mode by default. This allows you to easily keep a record of all your ++ kermit transfers, and it also allows the same log to be shared by ++ multiple simultaneous Kermit processes or (permissions permitting) ++ users. You can, of course, force creation of a new logfile by ++ specifying the NEW keyword after the filename, e.g. ++ ++ log transactions oofa.log new ++ ++ All records in the FTP-style log are in a consistent format. The first ++ field is fixed-length and contains spaces; subsequent fields are ++ variable length, contain no spaces, and are separated by one or more ++ spaces. The fields are: ++ ++ Timestamp ++ This is an asctime-style timestamp, example: "Wed Sep 16 ++ 20:19:05 1999" It is always exactly 24 characters long, and the ++ subfields are always in fixed positions. ++ ++ Elapsed time ++ The whole number of seconds required to transfer the file, as a ++ string of decimal digits, e.g. "24". ++ ++ Connection ++ The name of the network host to which C-Kermit is connected, or ++ the name of the serial device through which it has dialed (or ++ has a direct connection), or "/dev/tty" for transfers in remote ++ mode. ++ ++ Bytes transferred ++ The number of bytes transferred, decimal digits, e.g. ++ "1537904". ++ ++ Filename ++ The name of the file that was transferred, e.g. ++ "/pub/ftp/kermit/a/README.TXT". If the filename contains any ++ spaces or control characters, each such character is replaced ++ by an underscore ('_') character. ++ ++ Mode ++ The letter 'b' if the file was transferred in binary mode, or ++ 'a' if it was transferred in text (ASCII) mode. ++ ++ Options ++ This field always contains an underscore ('_') character. ++ ++ Direction ++ The letter 'o' if the file was transferred Out, and 'i' if the ++ file was transferred In. ++ ++ User class ++ The letter 'r' indicates the file was transferred by a Real ++ user. ++ ++ User identification ++ The ID of the user who transferred the file. ++ ++ Server identification ++ The string "kermit". This distinguishes a Kermit transfer log ++ record from a WU-FTPD record, which contains "ftp" in this ++ field. ++ ++ Authentication class ++ The digit '1' if we know the user's ID on the client system, ++ otherwise '0'. Currently, always '0'. ++ ++ Authenticated user ++ If the authentication class is '1', this is the user's ID on ++ the client system. Otherwise it is an asterisk ('*'). Currently ++ it is always an asterisk. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ Thu Oct 22 17:42:48 1998 0 * 94 /usr/olga/new.x a _ i r olga kermit 0 * ++ Thu Oct 22 17:51:29 1998 1 * 147899 /usr/olga/test.c a _ o r olga kermit 0 * ++ Thu Oct 22 17:51:44 1998 1 * 235 /usr/olga/test.o b _ i r olga kermit 0 * ++ Fri Oct 23 12:10:25 1998 0 * 235 /usr/olga/x.ksc a _ o r olga kermit 0 * ++ ++ Note that an ftp-format transaction log can also be selected on the ++ Kermit command line as follows: ++ ++ kermit --xferfile:filespec ++ ++ This is equivalent to: ++ ++ SET TRANSACTION-LOG FTP ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS filespec APPEND ++ ++ Conceivably it could be possible to have a system-wide shared Kermit ++ log, except that UNIX lacks any notion of an append-only file; thus ++ any user who could append to the log could also delete it (or alter ++ it). This problem could be worked around using setuid/setgid tricks, ++ but these would most likely interfere with the other setuid/setgid ++ tricks C-Kermit must use for getting at dialout devices and UUCP ++ logfiles. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.18. Unprefixing NUL ++ ++ As of 6.1.193 Alpha.10, C-Kermit can finally send and receive ++ file-transfer packets in which NUL (ASCII 0) is unprefixed (no more ++ NUL-terminated packets!). NUL is, of course, extremely prevalent in ++ binary files such as executables, and this has been a significant ++ source of packet overhead. For example, when transferring itself (the ++ SunOS C-Kermit executable) with minimal prefixing and 9000-byte ++ packets, we see: ++ ++ File size: 1064960 ++ Packet chars with 0 prefixed: 1199629 overhead = 12.65% ++ Packet chars with 0 unprefixed: 1062393 overhead = -0.03% ++ ++ Transfer rates go up accordingly, not only because of the reduced ++ amount of i/o, but also because less computation is required on each ++ end. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.19. Clear-Channel Protocol ++ ++ Now that C-Kermit itself is capable of sending and receiving any byte ++ at all on a clear channel ([516]Section 4.18), it is, for the first ++ time, in a position to negotiate a clear channel with the other ++ Kermit, giving it permission (but not requiring it) to unprefix any ++ and all characters that it knows are safe. In general this means all ++ but the Kermit start-of-packet character (normally Ctrl-A), Carriage ++ Return (not only Kermit's end-of-packet character, but also treated ++ specially on Telnet NVT links), and IAC (255, also special to Telnet). ++ ++ By default, C-Kermit will say it has a clear channel only if it has ++ opened a TCP socket. Since the Kermit program on the far end of a ++ TCP/IP connection generally does not know it has a TCP/IP connection, ++ it will not announce a clear channel unless it has been told to do so. ++ The command is: ++ ++ SET CLEAR-CHANNEL { ON, OFF, AUTO } ++ ++ AUTO is the default, meaning that the clear-channel status is ++ determined automatically from the type of connection. ON means to ++ announce a clear channel, OFF means not to announce it. Use SHOW ++ STREAMING ([517]Section 4.20) to see the current CLEAR-CHANNEL status. ++ Synonym: SET CLEARCHANNEL. ++ ++ CLEAR-CHANNEL is also set if you start C-Kermit with the -I switch ++ (see [518]Section 4.20). ++ ++ Whenever a clear channel is negotiated, the resulting ++ control-character unprefixing is "sticky"; that is, it remains in ++ effect after the transfer so you can use SHOW CONTROL to see what was ++ negotiated. ++ ++ You can also see whether a clear channel was negotiated in the ++ STATISTICS /VERBOSE Display. ++ ++ The advantage of the clear channel feature is that it can make file ++ transfers go faster automatically. The disadvantage would be ++ file-transfer failures if the channel is not truly clear, for example ++ if C-Kermit made a Telnet connection to a terminal server, and then ++ dialed out from there; or if C-Kermit made an Rlogin connection to ++ host and then made a Telnet connection from there to another host. If ++ a file transfer fails on a TCP/IP connection, use SHOW CONTROL to ++ check whether control characters became unprefixed as a result of ++ protocol negotiations, and/or SHOW STREAMING ([519]Section 4.20) to ++ see if "clear-channel" was negotiated. If this happened, use SET ++ CLEAR-CHANNEL OFF and SET PREFIXING CAUTIOUS (or whatever) to prevent ++ it from happening again. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20. Streaming Protocol ++ ++ A new Kermit protocol option called "streaming" was added in C-Kermit ++ 7.0. The idea is that if the two Kermit partners have a reliable ++ transport (such as TCP/IP or X.25) between them, then there is no need ++ to send ACKs for Data packets, or NAKs, since a reliable transport ++ will, by definition, deliver all packets in order and undamaged. On ++ such a connection, streaming cuts down not only on Kermit program ++ overhead (switching back and forth between reading and sending ++ packets), but also tends to make the underlying transport use itself ++ more efficiently (e.g. by defeating the Nagle algorithm and/or Delayed ++ ACK stratagem of the TCP layer). Furthermore, it allows transfers to ++ work smoothly on extremely slow network congestions that would ++ otherwise cause timeouts and retransmissions, and even failure when ++ the retry limit was exceeded. ++ ++ The trick is knowing when we can stream: ++ ++ 1. If C-Kermit has opened a TCP socket or X.25 connection, it offers ++ stream. ++ 2. If C-Kermit has been started with the -I (uppercase) option, or if ++ it has been told to SET RELIABLE ON, it offers to stream. ++ 3. If C-Kermit is in remote mode, and has been told to SET RELIABLE ++ AUTO (or ON), it always offers to stream, and also always agrees ++ to stream, if the other Kermit offers. Unless you take explicit ++ actions to override the defaults, this allows the local Kermit ++ (the one that made the connection, and so knows whether it's ++ reliable) to control streaming. ++ ++ (Note that an offer to stream also results in a Clear-Channel ++ announcement if CLEAR-CHANNEL is set to AUTO; see [520]Section 4.19.) ++ ++ When BOTH Kermits offer to stream, then they stream; otherwise they ++ don't. Thus streaming-capable Kermit programs interoperate ++ automatically and transparently with nonstreaming ones. If the two ++ Kermits do agree to stream, you'll see the word "STREAMING" on the ++ fullscreen file-transfer display in the Window Slots field. You can ++ also find out afterwards with the STATISTICS or SHOW STREAMING ++ commands. ++ ++ WARNING: Automatic choice of streaming is based on the assumption ++ of a "direct" end-to-end network connection; for example, a Telnet ++ or Rlogin connection from host A to host B, and transferring files ++ between A and B. However, if your connection has additional ++ components -- something "in the middle" (B) that you have made a ++ network connection to, which makes a separate connection to the ++ destination host (C), then you don't really have a reliable ++ connection, but C-Kermit has no way of knowing this; transferring ++ files between A and C will probably fail. In such cases, you'll ++ need to tell the *local* C-Kermit to "set reliable off" before ++ transferring files (it does no good to give this command to the ++ remote Kermit since the local one controls the RELIABLE setting). ++ ++ Streaming is like using an infinite window size, with no timeouts and ++ no tolerance for transmission errors (since there shouldn't be any). ++ It relies on the underlying transport for flow control, error ++ correction, timeouts, and retransmission. Thus it is very suitable for ++ use on TCP/IP connections, especially slow or bursty ones, since ++ Kermit's packet timeouts won't interfere with the transfer -- each ++ packet takes as long to reach its destination as it takes TCP to ++ deliver it. If TCP can't deliver the packet within its own timeout ++ period (over which Kermit has no control), it signals a fatal error. ++ Just like FTP. ++ ++ Streaming goes much faster than non-streaming when a relatively small ++ packet length is used, and it tends to go faster than non-streaming ++ with even the longest packet lengths. The Kermit window size is ++ irrelevant to streaming protocol, but still might affect performance ++ in small ways since it can result in different paths through the code. ++ ++ The definition of "reliable transport" does not necessarily demand ++ 8-bit and control-character transparency. Streaming can work with ++ parity and/or control-character prefixing just as well (but not as ++ fast) as without them; in such cases you can leave RELIABLE set to ON, ++ but set CLEARCHANNEL and/or PARITY appropriately. ++ ++ Maximum performance -- comparable to and often exceeding FTP -- is ++ achieved on socket-to-socket connections (in which the considerable ++ overhead of the terminal driver and Telnet or Rlogin server is ++ eliminated) with long packets and the new "brief" file-transfer ++ display ([521]Section 4.16). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.1. Commands for Streaming ++ ++ SET RELIABLE { ON, OFF, AUTO } ++ SET RELIABLE ON tells Kermit that it has a reliable transport. ++ SET RELIABLE OFF tells Kermit the transport is not reliable. ++ SET RELIABLE AUTO tells Kermit that it should SET RELIABLE ON ++ whenever it makes a reliable connection (e.g. TELNET or SET ++ HOST on a TCP/IP or X.25 network), and when in remote mode it ++ should believe the transport is reliable if the other Kermit ++ says it is during Kermit protocol negotiation. ++ ++ AUTO is the default; the Kermit program that makes the connection ++ knows whether it is reliable, and tells the remote Kermit. ++ ++ The RELIABLE setting has several effects, including: ++ ++ * It can affect the timeouts used during normal ACK/NAK protocol. ++ * It can affect the clear-channel announcement. ++ * It can affect streaming. ++ ++ If you TELNET or SET HOST somewhere, this includes an implicit SET ++ RELIABLE ON command. The -I command-line option is equivalent to SET ++ RELIABLE ON. ++ ++ Since SET RELIABLE ON (and -I) also implies SET CLEAR CHANNEL ON, you ++ might find that in certain cases you need to tell Kermit that even ++ though the connection is reliable, it doesn't have a clear channel ++ after all: ++ ++ SET CLEAR-CHANNEL OFF ++ SET PREFIXING CAUTIOUS ; or whatever... ++ ++ You can control streaming without affecting the other items with: ++ ++ SET STREAMING { ON, OFF, AUTO } ++ ++ AUTO is the default, meaning streaming will occur if Kermit has made a ++ TCP/IP connection or if RELIABLE is ON (or it was started with the -I ++ command line option). OFF means don't stream; ON means offer to stream ++ no matter what. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.2. Examples of Streaming ++ ++ Here we look at the use and behavior of streaming on several different ++ kinds of connections, and compare its performance with non-streaming ++ transfers. ++ ++ 4.20.2.1. Streaming on Socket-to-Socket Connections ++ ++ Here we get streaming automatically when both Kermit programs are ++ capable of it, since they both make socket connections. For example, ++ on the far end: ++ ++ C-Kermit> set host * 3000 ++ C-Kermit> server ++ ++ and on the near end: ++ ++ C-Kermit> set host foo.bar.xyz.com 3000 ++ (now give SEND and GET command) ++ ++ All subsequent file transfers use streaming automatically. ++ ++ Here are the results from 84 trials, run on a production network, ++ disk-to-disk, in which a 1-MB binary file (the SunOS C-Kermit Sparc ++ executable) was sent from a Sun Sparc-10 with SunOS 4.1.3 to an IBM ++ Power Server 850 with AIX 4.1, socket-to-socket, over a 10Mbps 10BaseT ++ Ethernet, using minimal control-character unprefixing, window sizes ++ from 10 to 32, and packet sizes from 1450 to 9010: ++ ++ Streaming Nonstreaming ++ Max CPS 748955 683354 ++ Min CPS 221522 172491 ++ Mean CPS 646134 558680 ++ Median CPS 678043 595874 ++ Std Dev 101424 111493 ++ ++ Correlations: ++ ++ CPS and window size: -0.036 ++ CPS and packet length: 0.254 ++ CPS and streaming: 0.382 ++ ++ Note that the relationship between streaming and throughput is ++ significantly stronger than that between CPS and window size or packet ++ length. ++ ++ Also note that this and all other performance measurements in this ++ section are snapshots in time; the results could be much different at ++ other times when the load on the systems and/or the network is higher ++ or lower. ++ ++ In a similar socket-to-socket trial, but this time over a wide-area ++ TCP/IP connection (from New York City to Logan, Utah, about 2000 ++ miles), the following results were obtained: ++ ++ Streaming Nonstreaming ++ Max CPS 338226 318203 ++ Min CPS 191659 132314 ++ Mean CPS 293744 259240 ++ Median CPS 300845 273271 ++ Std Dev 41914 52351 ++ ++ Correlations: ++ ++ CPS and window size: 0.164 ++ CPS and packet length: 0.123 ++ CPS and streaming: 0.346 ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.2.2. Streaming on Telnet Connections ++ ++ In this case the local copy of Kermit is told to TELNET or SET HOST, ++ and so it knows it has a reliable connection and -- unless it has been ++ told not to -- will offer to stream, and the other Kermit program, ++ since it has STREAMING set to AUTO, agrees. ++ ++ Since we have a reliable connection, we'll also get control-character ++ unprefixing automatically because of the new clear-channel protocol ++ ([522]Section 4.19). ++ ++ Any errors that occur during streaming are fatal to the transfer. The ++ message is "Transmission error on reliable link". Should this happen: ++ ++ 1. Check the remote Kermit's flow control setting (SHOW ++ COMMUNICATIONS). If it is NONE, change it to XON/XOFF, or vice ++ versa. If it is XON/XOFF (or you just changed it to XOFF/XOFF), ++ make sure the file sender is prefixing the XON and XOFF ++ characters. In the most drastic case, use "set prefix all" to ++ force prefixing of all control characters. ++ 2. The remote Telnet server might chop off the 8th bit. In that case, ++ tell C-Kermit to "set parity space". Or, you might be able to ++ force the Telnet to allow eight-bit data by telling C-Kermit to ++ "set telopt binary request accept" -- that is, request the Telnet ++ server to enter binary mode, and accept binary-mode bids from the ++ server. ++ 3. The remote Telnet server might have a buffering limitation. If a ++ and b don't cure the problem, tell the file receiver to "set ++ receive packet-length 1000" (or other number -- use the largest ++ one that works). This too, is no different from the non-streaming ++ case (more about this in [523]Section 4.20.2.3). ++ ++ And remember you can continue interrupted binary-mode transfers where ++ they left off with the RESEND (= SEND /RECOVER) command. ++ ++ Here are the figures for the same 84 trials between the same Sun and ++ IBM hosts as in 4.20.2.1, on the same network, but over a Telnet ++ connection rather than socket-to-socket: ++ ++ Streaming Nonstreaming ++ Max CPS 350088 322523 ++ Min CPS 95547 173152 ++ Mean CPS 321372 281830 ++ Median CPS 342604 291469 ++ Std Dev 40503 29948 ++ ++ Correlations: ++ ++ CPS and window size: 0.001 ++ CPS and packet length: 0.152 ++ CPS and streaming: 0.128 ++ ++ Here the effect is not as emphatic as in the socket-to-socket case, ++ yet on the whole streaming tends to be beneficial. ++ ++ Additional measurements on HP-UX using C-Kermit 7.0 Beta.06: ++ ++ Windowing Streaming ++ HP-UX 8->8 not tested 14Kcps ++ HP-UX 8->9 not tested 76Kcps ++ HP-UX 8->10 36Kcps 66Kcps ++ HP-UX 9->9 not tested 190Kcps ++ HP-UX 9->10 160Kcps 378Kcps ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.2.3. Streaming with Limited Packet Length ++ ++ The IRIX telnet server (at least the ones observed in IRIX 5.3 and ++ 6.2) does not allow Kermit to send packets longer than 4096 bytes. ++ Thus when sending from IRIX C-Kermit when it is on the remote end of a ++ Telnet connection, the packet length must be 4K or less. Trials in ++ this case (in which packet lengths range from 1450 to 4000) show a ++ strong advantage for streaming, which would be evident in any other ++ case where the packet length is restricted, and stronger the shorter ++ the maximum packet length. ++ ++ Streaming Nonstreaming ++ Max CPS 426187 366870 ++ Min CPS 407500 276517 ++ Mean CPS 415226 339168 ++ Median CPS 414139 343803 ++ Std Dev 6094 25851 ++ ++ Correlations: ++ ++ CPS and window size: 0.116 ++ CPS and packet length: 0.241 ++ CPS and streaming: 0.901 ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.2.4. Streaming on Dialup Connections ++ ++ Here "dialup" refers to a "direct" dialup connection, not a SLIP or ++ PPP connection, which is only a particular kind of TCP/IP connection. ++ ++ Attempt this at your own risk, and then only if (a) you have ++ error-correcting modems, and (b) the connections between the modems ++ and computers are also error-free, perfectly flow-controlled, and free ++ of interrupt conflicts. Streaming can be used effectively and to ++ fairly good advantage on such connections, but remember that the ++ transfer is fatal if even one error is detected (also remember that ++ should a binary-mode transfer fail, it can be recovered from the point ++ of failure with RESEND). ++ ++ To use streaming on an unreliable connection, you must tell both ++ Kermits that the connection is reliable: ++ ++ kermit -I ++ ++ or: ++ ++ C-Kermit> set reliable on ++ ++ In this case, it will probably be necessary to prefix some control ++ characters, for example if your connection is through a terminal ++ server that has an escape character. Most Cisco terminal servers, for ++ example, require Ctrl-^ (30, as well as its high-bit equivalent, 158) ++ to be prefixed. To unprefix these, you'll need to defeat the "clear ++ channel" feature: ++ ++ C-Kermit> set reliable on ++ C-Kermit> set clear-channel off ++ C-Kermit> set prefixing none ++ C-Kermit> set control prefix 1 13 30 158 ; and whatever else is necessary ++ ++ Dialup trials were done using fixed large window and packet sizes. ++ They compare uploading and downloading of two common types of files, ++ with and without streaming. Configuration: ++ ++ HP-9000/715/33 -- 57600bps, RTS/CTS -- USR Courier V.34 -- ++ V.34+V.42, 31200bps -- USR V.34+ Rackmount -- 57600bps, RTS/CTS -- ++ Cisco terminal server -- Solaris 2.5.1. Packet size = 8000, Window ++ Size = 30, Control Character Unprefixing Minimal (but including the ++ Cisco escape character). ++ ++ Since this is not a truly reliable connection, a few trials failed ++ when a bad packet was received (most likely due to UART overruns); the ++ failure was graceful and immediate, and the message was informative. ++ The results of ten successful trials uploading and downloading the two ++ files with and without streaming are: ++ ++ Streaming.. ++ Off On ++ Upload 5194 5565 txt (= C source code, 78K) ++ 3135 3406 gz (= gzip file, compressed, 85K) ++ Download 5194 5565 txt ++ 3041 3406 gz ++ ++ Each CPS figure is the mean of 10 results. ++ ++ A brief test was also performed on a LAT-based dialout connection from ++ a VAX 3100 with VMS 5.5 to a USR Courier V.34 connected to a DECserver ++ 700 at 19200 bps. The 1-MB Sparc executable downloaded from a Sun to ++ the VAX at 1100cps without streaming and 1900cps with streaming, using ++ 8000-byte packets, 30 window slots, and minimal prefixing in both ++ cases. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.2.5. Streaming on X.25 Connections ++ ++ We have only limited access to X.25 networks. One trial was performed ++ in which the 1MB Solaris 2.4 Sparc executable was transferred over a ++ SunLink X.25 connection; nothing is known about the actual physical ++ connection. With a packet length of 8000 and a window size of 30, the ++ file transferred at 6400 cps (using a maximum of 6 window slots). With ++ the same packet length, but with streaming, it transferred without ++ mishap at 6710 cps, about 5% faster. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.20.3. Streaming - Preliminary Conclusions ++ ++ The results vary with the particular connection, but are good overall. ++ Although numerous lower-level tricks can be used to improve ++ performance on specific platforms or connection methods, streaming ++ occurs at a high, system-independent level of the Kermit protocol and ++ therefore can apply to all types of platforms and (reliable) ++ connections transparently. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.21. The TRANSMIT Command ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the TRANSMIT command transmitted in text or ++ binary mode according to SET FILE TYPE { TEXT, BINARY }. But now that ++ binary mode is likely to be the default for protocol transfers, it is ++ evident that this not also an appropriate default for TRANSMIT, since ++ binary-mode TRANSMIT is a rather specialized and tricky operation. ++ Therefore, TRANSMIT defaults to text mode always, regardless of the ++ FILE TYPE setting. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 expands the capabilities of the TRANSMIT command by ++ adding the following switches (see [524]Section 1.5). The new syntax ++ is: ++ ++ TRANSMIT [ switches... ] filename ++ ++ Zero or more switches may be included: ++ ++ /PIPE ++ When /PIPE is included, "filename" is interpreted as a system ++ command or program whose output is to be sent. Synonym: ++ /COMMAND. Example: ++ ++ transmit /pipe finger ++ ++ You may enclose the command in braces, but you don't have to: ++ ++ xmit /pipe {ls -l | sort -r +0.22 -0.32 | head} ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Transmits the file (or pipe output) in binary mode. ++ ++ /TEXT ++ Transmits the file (or pipe output) in line-oriented text mode. ++ Current FILE CHARACTER-SET and TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET ++ selections govern translation. Default. ++ ++ /TRANSPARENT ++ Specifies text mode without character-set translation, no ++ matter what the FILE and TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET selections are. ++ ++ /NOWAIT ++ This is equivalent to SET TRANSMIT PROMPT 0, but for this ++ TRANSMIT command only. Applies only to text mode; it means to ++ not wait for any kind of echo or turnaround character after ++ sending a line before sending the next line. (Normally Kermit ++ waits for a linefeed.) ++ ++ When TRANSMIT ECHO is ON, C-Kermit tries to read back the echo of each ++ character that is sent. Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, 1 second was allowed ++ for each echo to appear; if it didn't show up in a second, the ++ TRANSMIT command would fail. Similarly for the TRANSMIT PROMPT ++ character. However, with today's congested Internet connections, etc, ++ more time is often needed: ++ ++ SET TRANSMIT TIMEOUT number ++ Specifies the number of seconds to wait for an echo or the prompt ++ character when TRANSMIT PROMPT is nonzero; the default wait is 1 ++ second. If you specify 0, the wait is indefinite. When a timeout ++ interval of 0 is specified, and a desired echo or prompt does not show ++ up, the TRANSMIT command will not terminate until or unless you ++ interrupt it with Ctrl-C; use SET TRANSMIT TIMEOUT 0 with caution. ++ ++ Note: to blast a file out the communications connection without any ++ kind of synchronization or timeouts or other manner of checking, use: ++ ++ SET TRANSMIT ECHO OFF ++ SET TRANSMIT PROMPT 0 (or include the /NOWAIT switch) ++ SET TRANSMIT PAUSE 0 ++ TRANSMIT [ switches ] filename ++ ++ In this case, text-file transmission is not-line oriented and large ++ blocks can be sent, resulting in a significant performance improvement ++ over line-at-at-time transmission. Successful operation depends (even ++ more than usual for the TRANSMIT command!) on a clean connection with ++ effective flow control. ++ ++ For details on TRANSMIT and character sets, see [525]Section 6.6.5.4. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22. Coping with Faulty Kermit Implementations ++ ++ Kermit protocol has been implemented in quite a few third-party ++ commercial, shareware, and freeware software packages, with varying ++ degrees of success. In most cases operation is satisfactory but slow ++ -- only the bare minimum subset of the protocol is available -- short ++ packets, no sliding windows, no attributes, etc. In other cases, the ++ implementation is incorrect, resulting in failures at the initial ++ negotiation stage or corrupted files. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and Kermit 95 1.1.19 include some new defense mechanisms ++ to help cope with the most common situations. However, bear in mind ++ there is only so much we can do in such cases -- the responsibility ++ for fixing the problem lies with the maker of the faulty software. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.1. Failure to Accept Modern Negotiation Strings ++ ++ The published Kermit protocol specification states that new fields can ++ be added to the parameter negotiation string. These are to be ignored ++ by any Kermit implementation that does not understand them; this is ++ what makes the Kermit protocol extensible. Unfortunately, some Kermit ++ implementations become confused (or worse) when receiving a ++ negotiation string longer than the one they expect. You can try ++ working around such problems by telling Kermit to shorten its ++ negotiation string (and thus disable the corresponding new features): ++ ++ SET SEND NEGOTIATION-STRING-MAX-LENGTH number ++ ++ Try a number like 10. If that doesn't work, try 9, 8, 7, 6, and so on. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.2. Failure to Negotiate 8th-bit Prefixing ++ ++ The published Kermit protocol specification states that 8th-bit ++ prefixing (which allows transfer of 8-bit data over a 7-bit ++ connection) occurs if the file sender puts a valid prefix character ++ (normally "&") in the 8th-bit-prefix field of the negotiation string, ++ and the receiver puts either a letter "Y" or the same prefix ++ character. At least one faulty Kermit implementation exists that does ++ not accept the letter "Y". To force C-Kermit / K-95 to reply with the ++ other Kermit's prefix character rather than a "Y", give the following ++ (invisible) command: ++ ++ SET Q8FLAG ON ++ ++ Use SET Q8FLAG OFF to restore the normal behavior. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.3. Corrupt Files ++ ++ Refer to [526]Section 4.22.2. Some Kermit implementations mistakenly ++ interpret the "Y" as a prefix character. Then, whenever a letter Y ++ appears in the data, the Y and the character that follows it are ++ replaced by a garbage character. At this writing, we are not sure if ++ there is any solution, but try "set send negotiation-string-max-length ++ 6" and/or "set q8flag on". ++ ++ File corruption can also occur when control characters within the file ++ data are sent without prefixing, as at least some are by default in ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and K-95. Some Kermit implementations do not handle ++ incoming "bare" control characters. To work around, "set prefixing ++ all". ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.4. Spurious Cancellations ++ ++ The Kermit protocol specification states that if an ACK to a Data ++ packet contains X in its data field, the transfer of the current file ++ is canceled, and if it contains a Z, the entire transfer is canceled. ++ At least one overzealous Kermit implementation applies this rule to ++ non-Data packets as well, the typical symptom being that any attempt ++ to transfer a file whose name begins with X or Z results in ++ cancellation. This is because the file receiver typically sends back ++ the name under which it stored the file (which might not be the same ++ as the name it was sent with) in the ACK to the File Header packet. ++ This is information only and should not cause cancellation. To work ++ around the problem, use: ++ ++ SET F-ACK-BUG { ON, OFF } ++ ++ ON tells Kermit not to send back the filename in the ACK to the file ++ header packet as it normally would do (OFF puts Kermit back to normal ++ after using ON). ++ ++ A variation on the this bug occurs in an obscure Kermit program for ++ MUMPS: When this Kermit program sends a file called (say) FOO.BAR, it ++ requires that the ACK to its F packet contain exactly the same name, ++ FOO.BAR. However, C-Kermit likes to send back the full pathname, ++ causing the MUMPS Kermit to fail. SET F-ACK-BUG ON doesn't help here. ++ So a separate command has been added to handle this situation: ++ ++ SET F-ACK-PATH { ON, OFF } ++ ++ Normally it is ON (regardless of the SET SEND PATHNAMES setting). Use ++ SET F-ACK-PATH OFF to instruct Kermit to send back only the filename ++ without the path in the ACK to the F packet. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.5. Spurious Refusals ++ ++ Some Kermit implementations, notably PDP-11 Kermit 3.60 and earlier, ++ have bugs in their handling of Attribute packets that can cause ++ unwarranted refusal of incoming files, e.g. based on date or size. ++ This can be worked around by telling one or both of the Kermit ++ partners to: ++ ++ SET ATTRIBUTES OFF ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.6. Failures during the Data Transfer Phase ++ ++ This can be caused by control-character unprefixing ([527]Section ++ 4.22.3 ), and fixed by: ++ ++ SET PREFIXING ALL ++ ++ It can also have numerous other causes, explained in Chapter 10 of ++ [528]Using C-Kermit: the connection is not 8-bit transparent (so use ++ "set parity space" or somesuch), inadequate flow control, etc. Consult ++ the manual. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.7. Fractured Filenames ++ ++ At least one well-known PC-based communications package negotiates ++ data compression, which (according to the protocol specification) ++ applies to both the filename and the file data, but then fails to ++ decompress the filename. Example: C-Kermit sends a file called ++ R000101.DAT (where 000101 might be non-Y2K-wise YYMMDD notation), and ++ the package in question stores the files as R~#0101.DAT. Workaround: ++ Tell C-Kermit to SET REPEAT COUNTS OFF. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.22.8. Bad File Dates ++ ++ At least one well-known PC-based communications package negotiates the ++ passing of file timestamps from sender to receiver, but when it is ++ sending files, it always gives them a timestamp of 1 February 1970. ++ Workaround: tell C-Kermit to SET ATTRIBUTE DATE OFF. You don't get the ++ file's real date, but you also don't get 1 Feb 1970; instead the file ++ gets the current date and time. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.23. File Transfer Recovery ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, RESEND (SEND /RECOVER) and REGET (GET /RECOVER) ++ refused to work if FILE TYPE was not BINARY or the /BINARY switch was ++ not included. Now these commands include an implied /BINARY switch, ++ meaning they set the file type to binary for the duration of the ++ command automatically. ++ ++ In the client/server arrangement, this also forces the server into ++ binary mode (if it is C-Kermit 7.0 or greater, or K95 1.1.19 or ++ greater) so the recovery operation proceeds, just as you asked and ++ expected. ++ ++ BUT... Just as before, the results are correct only under the ++ following conditions: ++ ++ * If the prior interrupted transfer was also in binary mode; or: ++ * If the prior transfer was in text mode and the other computer was ++ a "like platform" (e.g. UNIX-to-UNIX, Windows-to-Windows, ++ DOS-to-Windows) AND there was no character-set translation (i.e. ++ TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET was TRANSPARENT). ++ ++ Note that these circumstances are more likely to obtain in C-Kermit ++ 7.0, in which: ++ ++ * The default FILE TYPE in C-Kermit 7.0 is BINARY. ++ * The default FILE INCOMPLETE setting is AUTO, which means KEEP if ++ the transfer is in binary mode, DISCARD otherwise. ++ * C-Kermit 7.0, Kermit 95 1.1.17, and MS-DOS Kermit 3.15 and later ++ can recognize "like platforms" and switch into binary mode ++ automatically. Transfers between like platforms are always binary ++ unless character-set translation has been requested, and then is ++ still binary for all files whose names match a binary pattern, ++ unless the automatic mechanisms have been disabled (with a /TEXT ++ switch, or with SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL). ++ * SEND /BINARY and GET /BINARY always force binary-mode transfers, ++ even when FILE TYPE is TEXT, even when TRANSFER MODE is AUTOMATIC, ++ even when PATTERNS are ON and the file's name matches a text ++ pattern. ++ ++ But also note that the automatic client/server transfer-mode ++ adjustments do not work with versions of C-Kermit prior to 7.0 or K95 ++ prior to 1.1.16. ++ ++ If the prior transfer was in text mode: ++ ++ * If text-mode transfers between the two platforms are ++ "length-changing" (as they are between UNIX -- which terminates ++ text lines with LF -- and DOS or Windows -- which terminates text ++ lines with CRLF), the recovered file will be corrupt. ++ * If text-mode transfers between the two platforms are not ++ length-changing, but character-set translation was active in the ++ prior transfer, the result will be a file in which the first part ++ has translated characters and the second part does not. ++ ++ But in C-Kermit 7.0 and K95 1.1.19 and later, incompletely transferred ++ text files are not kept unless you change the default. But if you have ++ done this, and you have an incompletely transferred text file, you'll ++ need to: ++ ++ * Transfer the whole file again in text mode, or: ++ * Use SEND /STARTING-AT: to recover the transfer at the correct ++ point; but you have to find out what that point is, as described ++ in the manual. ++ ++ Kermit has no way of knowing whether the previous transfer was in text ++ or binary mode so it is your responsibility to choose the appropriate ++ recovery method. ++ ++ If you use C-Kermit to maintain parallel directories on different ++ computers, using SET FILE COLLISION to transfer only those files that ++ changed since last time, and the files are big enough (or the ++ connection slow enough) to require SEND /RECOVER to resume interrupted ++ transfers, you should remember that SEND /RECOVER (RESEND) overrides ++ all FILE COLLISION settings. Therefore you should use SEND /RECOVER ++ (RESEND) only on the file that was interrupted, not the file group. ++ For example, if the original transfer was initiated with: ++ ++ SEND * ++ ++ and was interrupted, then after reestablishing your connection and ++ starting the Kermit receiver with SET FILE COLLISION UPDATE on the ++ remote end, use the following sequence at the sender to resume the ++ transfer: ++ ++ SEND /RECOVER name-of-interrupted-file ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ SEND * ++ ++ (In C-Kermit 7.0 and later, \v(filename) contains the name of the file ++ most recently transferred, as long you have not EXITed from Kermit or ++ changed directory, etc. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.24. FILE COLLISION UPDATE Clarification ++ ++ In UNIX, file modification dates are used when comparing the file date ++ with the date in the attribute packet. In VMS, however, the file ++ creation date is used. These two policies reflect the preferences of ++ the two user communities. ++ ++ Also, remember that the file date/time given in the attribute packet ++ is the local time at the file sender. At present, no timezone ++ conversions are defined in or performed by the Kermit protocol. This ++ is primarily because this feature was designed at a time when many of ++ the systems where Kermit runs had no concept of timezone, and ++ therefore would be unable to convert (say, to/from GMT or UTC or Zulu ++ time). ++ ++ As a consequence, some unexpected results might occur when ++ transferring files across timezones; e.g. commands on the target ++ system that are sensitive to file dates might work (UNIX "make", ++ backups, etc). ++ ++ Timezone handling is deferred for a future release. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.25. Autodownload Improvements ++ ++ Refer to pages 164-165 of [529]Using C-Kermit about the hazards of ++ autodownload when C-Kermit is "in the middle". As of C-Kermit 7.0, no ++ more hazards. If C-Kermit has TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD ON and it detects ++ a packet of the current protocol type (Kermit or Zmodem), it "erases" ++ the visual aspect of the packet that would be seen by the terminal ++ (or, more to the point, the emulator, such as K95). This way, only ++ C-Kermit goes into RECEIVE mode, and not also the terminal emulator ++ through which C-Kermit is accessed. And therefore, it is no longer ++ necessary to SET TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD OFF to prevent multiple Kermits ++ from going into receive mode at once, but of course it is still ++ necessary to ensure that, when you have multiple Kermits in a chain, ++ that the desired one receives the autodownload. ++ ++ The defaults have not been changed; Kermit 95 still has autodownload ++ ON by default, and C-Kermit has it OFF by default. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5. CLIENT/SERVER ++ ++ 5.0. Hints ++ ++ If you use SET SERVER GET-PATH to set up your server, and the GET-PATH ++ does not include the server's current directory, clients can become ++ quite confused. For example, "remote dir oofa.txt" shows a file named ++ oofa.txt, but "get oofa.txt" fails. In this situation, you should ++ either DISABLE DIR or make your GET-PATH include the current ++ directory. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.1. New Command-Line Options ++ ++ The -G command-line option is like -g (GET), except the incoming file ++ is sent to standard output rather than written to disk. ++ ++ The -I option ("Internet") is used to tell a remote C-Kermit program ++ that you are coming in via Internet Telnet or Rlogin and therefore ++ have a reliable connection. The -I option is equivalent to SET ++ RELIABLE ON and SET FLOW NONE. ++ ++ The -O option ("Only One") tells C-Kermit to enter server mode but ++ then exit after the first client operation. ++ ++ See [530]Section 9.3 for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.2. New Client Commands ++ ++ BYE and FINISH no longer try to do anything if a connection is not ++ active. Thus a sequence like "hangup" followed by "bye" or "finish" ++ will no longer get stuck in a long timeout-and-retransmission cycle, ++ nor will it try to open a new connection. ++ ++ REMOTE EXIT ++ Similar to FINISH, except it ensures that the Kermit server ++ program exits back to the operating system or shell prompt. ++ (FINISH would return it to its interactive prompt if it was ++ started in interactive mode, and would cause it to exit if it ++ entered server mode via command-line option.) When C-Kermit is ++ to be the server, you can use { ENABLE, DISABLE } EXIT to ++ control the client's access to this feature. ++ ++ REMOTE MKDIR directory-name ++ Tells the client to ask the server to create a directory with ++ the given name, which can be absolute or relative. The syntax ++ of the directory name depends on the Kermit server (see ++ [531]next section); in all cases, it can be in the syntax of ++ the system where the server is running (UNIX, VMS, DOS, etc) ++ but newer servers also accept UNIX syntax, no matter what the ++ underlying platform. The server will not execute this command ++ if (a) it does not understand it, (b) a DISABLE MKDIR command ++ has been given, or (c) a DISABLE CWD command has been given; ++ otherwise, the command is executed, but will fail if the ++ directory can not be created, in which cases most servers will ++ attempt to return a message giving the reason for failure. The ++ REMOTE MKDIR command succeeds if the remote directory is ++ created, or if it already exists and therefore does not need to ++ be created, and fails otherwise. ++ ++ REMOTE RMDIR directory-name ++ Tells the client to ask the server to remove (delete) a ++ directory with the given name. The same considerations apply as ++ for REMOTE MKDIR. ++ ++ REMOTE SET FILE INCOMPLETE { DISCARD, KEEP, AUTO } ++ Previously this was only available in its earlier form, REMOTE ++ SET INCOMPLETE (no FILE). The earlier form is still available, ++ but invisible. Also, AUTO was added, meaning KEEP if in binary ++ mode, DISCARD otherwise. ++ ++ REMOTE SET TRANSFER MODE { AUTOMATIC, MANUAL } ++ Tells the client to ask the server to set the given ++ file-transfer mode. Automatic means (roughly): if the client ++ and the server are running on the same kind of computer (e.g. ++ both are on UNIX), then use binary mode automatically; if the ++ system types are different, use some other method to ++ automatically determine text or binary mode, such as filename ++ pattern matching. MANUAL means, in this context, obey the ++ client's FILE TYPE setting (TEXT or BINARY). Synonym: REMOTE ++ SET XFER MODE. ++ ++ [ REMOTE ] QUERY KERMIT function(args...) ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the arguments were not evaluated ++ locally. Thus it was not possible to have the server run the ++ function with client-side variables as arguments. Now: ++ ++ define \%a oofa.* ++ remote query kermit files(\%a) ; Client's \%a ++ remote query kermit files(\\%a) ; Server's \%a ++ ++ [ REMOTE ] LOGIN [ user [ password ] ] ++ LOGIN is now a synonym for REMOTE LOGIN. ++ ++ LOGOUT ++ This command, when given in local mode, is equivalent to REMOTE ++ LOGOUT. When given at the IKSD prompt, it logs out the IKSD. ++ When given at the C-Kermit prompt when it has no connection, it ++ does nothing. ++ ++ Note that in C-Kermit 7.0, the REMOTE (or R) prefix is not required ++ for QUERY, since there is no local QUERY command. The new top-level ++ QUERY command does exactly what REMOTE QUERY (RQUERY) does. ++ ++ All REMOTE commands now have single-word shortcuts: ++ ++ Shortcut Full Form ++ RASG REMOTE ASSIGN ++ RCD REMOTE CD ++ RCOPY REMOTE COPY ++ RDEL REMOTE DELETE ++ RDIR REMOTE DIRECTORY ++ REXIT REMOTE EXIT ++ RHELP REMOTE HELP ++ RHOST REMOTE HOST ++ RPWD REMOTE PWD ++ RSET REMOTE SET ++ etc. ++ ++ The R prefix is not applied to LOGIN because there is already an ++ RLOGIN command with a different meaning. It is not applied to LOGOUT ++ either, since LOGOUT knows what to do in each case, and for symmetry ++ with LOGIN. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.2.1. Remote Procedure Definitions and Calls ++ ++ This is nothing new, but it might not be obvious... REMOTE ASSIGN and ++ REMOTE QUERY may be used to achieve remote procedure execution. The ++ remote procedure can be defined locally or remotely. ++ ++ A remote procedure call is accomplished as noted in the previous ++ section: ++ ++ [ remote ] query kermit function-name(args...) ++ ++ This invokes any function that is built in to the Kermit server, e.g.: ++ ++ [ remote ] query kermit size(foo.bar) ++ ++ returns the size of the remote file, foo.bar. ++ ++ Now note that C-Kermit includes an \fexecute() function, allowing it ++ to execute any macro as if it were a built-in function. So suppose ++ MYMACRO is the name of a macro defined in the server. You can execute ++ it from the client as follows (the redundant "remote" prefix is ++ omitted in the remaining examples): ++ ++ query kermit execute(mymacro arg1 arg2...) ++ ++ The return value, if any, is the value of the RETURN command that ++ terminated execution of the macro, for example: ++ ++ define addtwonumbers return \feval(\%1+\%2) ++ ++ The client invocation would be: ++ ++ query kermit execute(addtwonumbers 3 4) ++ 7 ++ ++ The result ("7" in this case) is also assigned to the client's ++ \v(query) variable. ++ ++ To execute a remote system command or command procedure (shell script, ++ etc) use: ++ ++ query kermit command(name args...) ++ ++ Finally, suppose you want the client to send a macro to the server to ++ be executed on the server end. This is done as follows: ++ ++ remote assign macroname definition ++ query kermit execute(macroname arg1 arg2...) ++ ++ Quoting is required if the definition contains formal parameters. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.3. New Server Capabilities ++ ++ 5.3.1. Creating and Removing Directories ++ ++ The C-Kermit 7.0 server responds to REMOTE MKDIR and REMOTE RMDIR ++ commands. The directory name may be in either the native format of the ++ server's computer, or in UNIX format. For example, a server running on ++ VMS with a current directory of [IVAN] can accept commands from the ++ client like: ++ ++ remote mkdir olga ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (nonspecific format) ++ remote mkdir .olga ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (VMS format without brackets) ++ remote mkdir olga/ ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (UNIX relative format) ++ remote mkdir /ivan/olga ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (UNIX absolute format) ++ remote mkdir [ivan.olga] ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (VMS absolute format) ++ remote mkdir [.olga] ; Makes [IVAN.OLGA] (VMS relative format) ++ ++ 5.3.1.1. Creating Directories ++ ++ If a directory name is given that contains more than one segment that ++ does not exist, the server attempts to create all the segments. For ++ example, if the client says: ++ ++ REMOTE MKDIR letters/angry ++ ++ a "letters" subdirectory is created in the server's current directory ++ if it does not already exist, and then an "angry" subdirectory is ++ created beneath it, if it does not already have one. This can repeated ++ to any reasonable depth: ++ ++ REMOTE MKDIR a/b/c/d/e/f/g/h/i/j/k/l/m/n/o/p/q/r/s/t/u/v/w/z/y/z ++ ++ 5.3.1.2. Removing Directories ++ ++ When attempting to execute a REMOTE RMDIR, the server can remove only ++ a single directory, not an entire sequence or tree. The system service ++ that is called to remove the directory generally requires not only ++ that the server process has write delete access, but also that the ++ directory contain no files. ++ ++ In the future, a REMOTE RMDIR /RECURSIVE command (and the accompanying ++ protocol) might be added. For now, use the equivalent REMOTE HOST ++ command(s), if any. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.3.2. Directory Listings ++ ++ Directory listings are generated by C-Kermit itself, rather than by ++ running the underlying system's directory command. Some control over ++ the listing format can be obtained with the SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY ++ command ([532]Section 4.5.1). The following options affect listings ++ sent by the server: /[NO]HEADING, /[NO]DOTFILES, and /[NO]BACKUP. In ++ UNIX and VMS, the listing is always sorted by filename. There is, at ++ present, no protocol defined for the client to request listing options ++ of the server; this might be added in the future. ++ ++ The server's directory listings are in the following format: ++ ++ Protection or permissions: ++ In UNIX and OS-9, this is a 10-character field, left adjusted. ++ In VMS it is a 22-character field, left-adjusted. In each case, ++ the protection / permission codes are shown in the server ++ platform's native format. In other operating systems, this ++ field is not shown. ++ ++ Size in bytes: ++ This is always a 10-character field. The file's size is shown ++ as a decimal number, right adjusted in the field. If the file ++ is a directory and its size can not be obtained, the size is ++ shown as "". Two blanks follow this field. ++ ++ Date: ++ Always in yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss numeric format, and therefore 19 ++ characters long. If the file's date/time can't be obtained, ++ zeros (0) are shown for all the digits. This field is followed ++ by two blanks. ++ ++ Filename: ++ This field extends to the end of the line. Filenames are shown ++ relative to the server's current directory. In UNIX, symbolic ++ links are shown as they are in an "ls -l" listing as "linkname ++ -> filename". ++ ++ In UNIX and VMS, listings are returned by the server in alphabetical ++ order of filename. There are presently no other sort or selection ++ options. ++ ++ However, since these are fixed-field listings, all fields can be used ++ as sort keys by external sort programs. Note, in particular, that the ++ format used for the date allows a normal lexical on that field to ++ achieve the date ordering. For example, let's assume we have a UNIX ++ client and a UNIX server. In this case, the server's listing has the ++ date in columns 22-40, and thus could be sorted by the UNIX sort ++ program using "sort +0.22 -0.40" or in reverse order by "sort +0.22 ++ -0.40r". ++ ++ Since the UNIX client can pipe responses to REMOTE commands through ++ filters, any desired sorting can be accomplished this way, for ++ example: ++ ++C-Kermit> remote directory | sort +0.22 -0.40 ++ ++ You can also sort by size: ++ ++ C-Kermit> remote directory | sort +0.11 -0.19 ++ ++ You can use sort options to select reverse or ascending order. "man ++ sort" (in UNIX) for more information. And of course, you can pipe ++ these listings through any other filter of your choice, such as grep ++ to skip unwanted lines. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.4. Syntax for Remote Filenames with Embedded Spaces ++ ++ C-Kermit and K95, when in server mode, assume that any spaces in the ++ file specification in an incoming GET command are filename separators. ++ Thus if the client gives a command like: ++ ++ get {oofa.txt oofa.bin} ++ ++ or, equivalently: ++ ++ mget oofa.txt oofa.bin ++ ++ the server tries to send the two files, oofa.txt and oofa.bin. But ++ what if you want the server to send you a file named, say: ++ ++ D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL ++ ++ How does the server know this is supposed to be one file and not ++ seven? In this case, you need to the send file name to the server ++ enclosed in either curly braces: ++ ++ {D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL} ++ ++ or ASCII doublequotes: ++ ++ "D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL" ++ ++ The method for doing this depends on your client. If your client is ++ C-Kermit 7.0, any recent version of Kermit 95, or MS-DOS Kermit 3.16, ++ then you have to enclose the name in braces just so the client can ++ parse it, so to send braces or doublequotes to the server, you must ++ put them inside the first, outside pair of braces. And you also need ++ to double the backslashes to prevent them from being interpreted: ++ ++ get {{D:\\HP OfficeJet 500\\Images\\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL}} ++ get {"D:\\HP OfficeJet 500\\Images\\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL"} ++ ++ To get around the requirement to double backslashes in literal ++ filenames, of course you can also use: ++ ++ set command quoting off ++ get {{D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL}} ++ get {"D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL"} ++ set command quoting on ++ ++ If you are giving a "kermit" command to the UNIX shell, you have to ++ observe the shell's quoting rules, something like this: ++ ++ kermit -ig "{D:\HP OfficeJet 500\Images\My Pretty Picture Dot PCL}" ++ ++ Here, the quotes go on the outside so UNIX will pass the entire ++ filename, spaces, braces, and all, as a single argument to Kermit, and ++ the backslashes are not doubled because (a) the UNIX shell ignores ++ them since they are in a quoted string, and (b) Kermit ignores them ++ since the interactive command parser is not activated in this case. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.5. Automatic Orientation Messages upon Directory Change ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0, when acting as a server, can send an orientation message ++ to the client whenever the server directory changes. For example, when ++ the client gives a REMOTE CD command, the server sends the contents of ++ the new directory's "Read Me" file to the client's screen. The ++ following commands govern this feature: ++ ++ SET SERVER CD-MESSAGE FILE name ++ Given to the servr, allows the message-file name to be ++ specified at runtime. A list of names to look for can be given ++ in the following format: ++ ++ {{name1}{name2}{name3}{...}} ++ ++ e.g. SET SERVER CD-MESSAGE FILE ++ {{./.readme}{README.TXT}{READ.ME}} ++ ++ REMOTE SET SERVER CD-MESSAGE { ON, OFF } ++ Given to the client, lets the client control whether the server ++ sends automatic CD messages. ++ ++ SHOW SERVER ++ Given to server, includes CD-Message status. ++ ++ The default CD message file name is system dependent. SHOW CD or SHOW ++ SERVER displays the list. Also see [533]Section 4.5.2. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.6. New Server Controls ++ ++ DISABLE ENABLE ++ Allows the server to configured such that DISABLEd features can ++ not be re-enabled by any means -- e.g. if the client is somehow ++ able to get the server into command mode. Once DISABLEd, ENABLE ++ can not be re-ENABLEd. ++ ++ SET SERVER IDLE-TIMEOUT seconds ++ This was available previously in Kermit 95 only. Now it can be ++ used in C-Kermit also to specify a maximum number of seconds ++ the server is allowed to be idle before exiting server mode. 0 ++ seconds means no idle timeout. In C-Kermit (but not K-95), SET ++ SERVER TIMEOUT and SET SERVER IDLE-TIMEOUT are mutually ++ exclusive -- you can have one or the other (or neither), but ++ not both. (Server timeouts are for the benefit of primitive ++ Kermit clients that are not capable of timing out on their own; ++ to our knowledge, no such clients are still in circulation.) ++ ++ SET SERVER KEEPALIVE { ON, OFF } ++ (See next section). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5.7. Timeouts during REMOTE HOST Command Execution ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the C-Kermit server would block waiting for ++ output from a system command invoked via REMOTE HOST from the client. ++ If the system command took a long time to execute, the client would ++ time out and send NAK packets. If the command took too long, the ++ client would reach its retry limit and give up. Even if it didn't, the ++ NAKs would cause unnecessary retransmissions. ++ ++ In version 7.0, the C-Kermit server (VMS and select()-capable UNIX ++ versions only), sends "keepalive packets" (empty data packets) once ++ per second while waiting for the system command to complete. This ++ procedure should be entirely transparent to the Kermit client, and ++ should prevent the unwanted timeouts and NAKs. When C-Kermit 7.0 ++ itself (or K95 1.1.19) is the client, it prints dots to show the ++ keepalive packets. ++ ++ The keepalive feature can be turned off and on with: ++ ++ SET SERVER KEEPALIVE { ON, OFF } ++ ++ Normally it should be on. Turn it off it if causes trouble with the ++ client, or if it seems to slow down the server (as it might on some ++ platforms under certain circumstances). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6. INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SETS ++ ++ Support for several new single-byte character sets was added in ++ C-Kermit 7.0. Unicode / ISO 10646 is not yet supported, but is a high ++ priority for forthcoming releases. ++ ++ 6.0. ISO 8859-15 Latin Alphabet 9 ++ ++ To accommodate the Euro currency symbol, and to correct several other ++ longstanding problems with ISO Latin Alphabet 1, ISO 8859-15 Latin ++ Alphabet 9 was issued in May 1998. It is supported by C-Kermit 7.0 as ++ a transfer character set, a file character set, and a terminal ++ character set. Translations that preserve the new characters are ++ available between Latin-9 and several other sets including: ++ ++ PC Code Page 858 (Western European languages, similar to CP850) ++ Windows Code Page 1252 (Western European languages, similar to Latin-1) ++ Windows Code Page 1250 (Eastern European languages, similar to Latin-2) ++ ++ The Latin-9 transfer character set also allows for the OE digraph ++ character, used primarily in French, to be preserved in transfers ++ involving the DEC MCS or NeXT character sets. ++ ++ The Euro character is also present in the Universal Character Set, ++ described in [534]Section 6.6. ++ ++ 6.1. The HP-Roman8 Character Set ++ ++ The HP-Roman8 character set is supported in C-Kermit 6.0 and later but ++ was omitted from Table VII-4 in the 2nd Edition of Using C-Kermit due ++ to lack of space. It is listed in [535]Appendix III. ++ ++ 6.2. Greek Character Sets ++ ++ Greek character sets were added in 6.1: ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET { CP869, ELOT927, GREEK-ISO } ++ SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET { GREEK-ISO } ++ ++ GREEK-ISO is ISO 8859-7, which the same as ELOT 928. ++ ++ The new Greek character sets are listed in [536]Appendix III. ++ ++ 6.3. Additional Latin-2 Character Sets ++ ++ The following have been added as FILE and TERMINAL CHARACTER-SETs: ++ ++ MAZOVIA-PC ++ A PC code page used in Poland, equivalent to CP437, but with 18 ++ substitutions needed for Polish. ++ ++ CP1250 ++ The Windows Latin 2 Code Page. Equivalent to ISO 8859-2, but ++ with different encoding. ++ ++ 6.4. Additional Cyrillic Character Sets ++ ++ The following have been added as FILE and TERMINAL CHARACTER-SETs: ++ ++ BULGARIA-PC ++ This is the Cyrillic PC code page used in Bulgaria, where it is ++ called Code Page 856. It is attributed to a company called ++ DATEC, Inc, but CP856 is not a proper designation, since it ++ refers to a Hebrew Code Page (see the IBM Registry). ++ ++ CP855 ++ This PC Code Page contains all the Cyrillic letters that are ++ also in ISO 8859-5, and is therefore useful for non-Russian ++ Cyrillic text (Ukrainian, Belorussian, etc), unlike CP866, ++ which has a smaller repertoire of Cyrillic letters. ++ ++ CP1251 ++ The Windows Cyrillic Code Page. Equivalent to CP855, but with ++ different encoding. ++ ++ KOI8R ++ An extension to "Old KOI-8" that adds upper and lower case ++ Cyrillic letter Io (looks like Roman E with diaeresis) plus a ++ selection of box-drawing characters to columns 8 through 11, ++ which are vacant in original Old KOI-8. KOI8-R is used for the ++ Russian language. It is specified in [537]RFC 1489. ++ ++ KOI8U ++ A similar extension of Old KOI-8, but for Ukrainian. It is ++ specified in [538]RFC 2319. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.5. Automatic Character-Set Switching ++ ++ Prior to version 7.0, C-Kermit's file character-set always had to be ++ set explicitly. In 7.0 and later, it is set automatically when: ++ ++ 1. This feature is enabled (as it is unless you disable it). ++ 2. An incoming text-mode transfer includes a transfer-character-set ++ announcer and you have not previously given a SET FILE ++ CHARACTER-SET command. In this case, C-Kermit switches to an ++ appropriate file character set. For example, on an HP-UX ++ workstation, an incoming Latin-1 file automatically selects ++ HP-Roman8 for the local copy of the file; in Data General AOS/VS, ++ it would select DG International. ++ 3. You give a SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET command without having ++ previously specified a FILE CHARACTER-SET. An appropriate file ++ character-set is chosen automatically. ++ ++ In addition, when you give a SET FILE CHARACTER-SET command, the ++ appropriate transfer character-set is automatically chosen, to be used ++ when you are sending files (but this does not override the one ++ announced by the sender when you are receiving files). ++ ++ You might not agree about what is "appropriate", so of course you can ++ disable or change all of the above actions. ++ ++ You can disable (or re-enable) the new automatic character-set ++ switching feature in each direction separately: ++ ++ SET RECEIVE CHARACTER-SET-SELECTION { AUTOMATIC, MANUAL } ++ AUTOMATIC is the default, causing the behavior described above ++ when an incoming file arrives. Choose MANUAL to defeat this ++ behavior and force your current FILE CHARACTER-SET setting to ++ be used, no matter what it is. Note that SET RECEIVE ++ CHARACTER-SET MANUAL does not disable recognition of the ++ incoming transfer character-set announcer, and translation from ++ the corresponding character-set to your current file ++ character-set. To disable that, use SET ATTRIBUTE CHARACTER-SET ++ OFF. ++ ++ SET SEND CHARACTER-SET-SELECTION { AUTOMATIC, MANUAL } ++ Again AUTOMATIC is the default, causing the behavior described ++ above when you give a SET { FILE, TRANSFER } CHARACTER-SET ++ command. Use MANUAL to allow you to specify the transfer and ++ file character-sets independently. ++ ++ SHOW CHARACTER-SETS ++ Tells settings of { SEND, RECEIVE } CHARACTER-SET-SELECTION. ++ ++ Normally, however, it is more convenient to leave automatic switching ++ active, and change any associations that are not appropriate for your ++ application, area, or country. The commands are: ++ ++ SHOW ASSOCIATIONS ++ This command lists all the associations in each direction: for ++ each possible transfer character-set, it lists the associated ++ file character-set, and vice versa. These are two separate and ++ independent lists. ++ ++ ASSOCIATE TRANSFER-CHARACTER-SET name1 [ name2 ] ++ Changes the association for the transfer character-set name1 to ++ be the file character-set name2. If name2 is omitted, automatic ++ switching is disabled for this transfer character-set only. ++ ++ ASSOCIATE FILE-CHARACTER-SET name1 [ name2 ] ++ Changes the association for the file character-set name1 to be ++ the transfer character-set name2. If name2 is omitted, ++ automatic switching is disabled for this file character-set ++ only. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6. UNICODE ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds support for Unicode, the Universal Character Set, ++ for: ++ ++ * File Transfer (SEND, RECEIVE, GET, etc) ++ * Terminal connection (CONNECT) ++ * Unguarded file capture (LOG SESSION) ++ * Unguarded file transmission (TRANSMIT) ++ * Local file character-set conversion (TRANSLATE) ++ ++ C-Kermit is not, however, a "Unicode application" in the sense that ++ its commands, messages, or user interface are Unicode. Rather, it is ++ "Unicode aware" in its ability to handle and convert Unicode text in ++ the course of file transfer and terminal connection, and you can also ++ use Kermit to convert local files between Unicode and other character ++ sets. TLA's: ++ ++ BMP - Base Multilingual Plane ++ BOM - Byte Order Mark ++ CJK - Chinese, Japanese, and Korean ++ ISO - International Standards Organization ++ TLA - Three-Letter Acronym ++ UCS - Universal Character Set ++ UTF - UCS Transformation Format ++ ++ Unicode and ISO 10646 are the coordinated and compatible corporate and ++ international standards for the Universal Character Set (UCS). Unlike ++ single-byte and even most multibyte character sets, the UCS can ++ represent all characters in every existing writing system. A flat ++ plain-text file encoded in some form of UCS can contain any mixture of ++ English, Spanish, Italian, German, Hebrew, Arabic, Greek, Russian, ++ Armenian, Georgian, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, Vietnamese, Tibetan, ++ Hindi, Bengali, Tamil, Thai, Ethiopic, and so on, plus scientific and ++ mathematical notation, as well as texts in Runes, Ogham, Glagolitic, ++ and other historic scripts. ++ ++ The UCS already covers these scripts and many more, but it's an ++ evolving standard with efforts underway to accommodate even more ++ languages and writing systems. Support is growing for native UCS use ++ on many platforms and in many applications. The goal of the framers of ++ the UCS is for it to replace ASCII, the ISO Latin Alphabets, ISCII, ++ VISCII, the Chinese, Japanese, and Korean (CJK) multibyte sets, etc, ++ as well as the many private character sets in use today, in other ++ words to become *the* Universal Character Set. ++ ++ Until that time, however, conversions between existing sets and the ++ UCS will be necessary when moving text between platforms and ++ applications. Now Kermit can help. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.1. Overview of Unicode ++ ++ For a more complete picture, please visit: ++ ++ [539]http://www.unicode.org/ ++ ++ and access the various online introductions, FAQs, technical reports, ++ and other information. For greater depth, order the latest version of ++ the published Unicode Standard. The following overview contains a ++ great many oversimplifications and perhaps an opinion or two. ++ ++ At present, the UCS is a 16-bit (2-byte) character set, but with ++ provisions to grow to a 4-byte set. UCS-2 refers to the two-byte set, ++ also called the Base Multilingual Plane (BMP), in which each character ++ has 16 bits, and therefore there are 2^16 = 65536 possible characters. ++ The first 128 characters are the same as US ASCII (C0 control ++ characters and DEL included), the next 32 are the C1 control ++ characters of ISO 6429, and the next 96 are the Right Half of ISO ++ 8859-1 Latin Alphabet 1. The remaining tens of thousands of characters ++ are arranged newly for the UCS, usually (but not always) in sections ++ corresponding to existing standards, such as ISO Latin/Cyrillic, often ++ plus additional characters not appearing in the existing standards due ++ to lack of space (or other reasons). ++ ++ ISO 10646 allows for additional planes, e.g. for Egyptian ++ hieroglyphics or ancient (or other esoteric) CJK characters, but these ++ planes are not yet defined and so we will say nothing more about them ++ here, except that their use will require the 4-byte form of UCS, ++ called UCS-4, in some form (more about "forms" in [540]Section 6.6.2). ++ ++ Unicode and ISO 10646 are constantly under revision, mainly to add new ++ characters. The Unicode revision is denoted by a version number, such ++ as 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, 3.0. The ISO 10646 standard revision is identified ++ by Edition (such as ISO 10646-1 1993), plus reference to any ++ amendments. The first versions of these standards included encodings ++ for Korean Hangul syllables (Jamos); these encodings were changed in ++ version 1.1 of Unicode and by Amendment 5 to ISO 10646-1. The Unicode ++ Technical Committee and the ISO acknowledge that this was a bad thing ++ to do, and promise never change encodings or character names again, ++ since this poses serious problems for conformance and data ++ interchange. ++ ++ A UCS-2 value is customarily written like this: ++ ++ U+xxxx ++ ++ where "xxxx" represents four hexadecimal digits, 0-9 and A-F. For ++ example, U+0041 is "A", U+00C1 is A-acute, U+042F is uppercase ++ Cyrillic "Ya", U+FB4F is Hebrew Ligature Alef Lamed, and U+FFFD is the ++ special character that means "not a character". ++ ++ Most characters from widely-used alphabetic writing systems such as ++ the West European ones, Cyrillic, Greek, Hebrew, Vietnamese, etc, are ++ available in "precomposed" form; for example Uppercase Latin Letter A ++ with Acute Accent is a single character (as it is in Latin-1). ++ However, the UCS also permits composition of a base character with one ++ or more nonspacing diacritics. This means the same character can be ++ represented in more than one way, which can present problems in many ++ application areas, including transfer and character-set conversion of ++ text. ++ ++ Conversion from ASCII or Latin-1 to UCS-2 text is "trivial": simply ++ insert a NUL (0) byte before each ASCII or Latin-1 byte. Converting in ++ the reverse direction (provided the UCS-2 file contains only U+0000 to ++ U+00FF) is equally simple (if we ignore the issue of composition): ++ remove every second (NUL) byte. Conversion of other character sets to ++ and from UCS, however, requires tables or algorithms specific to each ++ set. Nevertheless, the relatively transparent upwards compatibility ++ from ASCII and Latin-1, in which a very large share of the world's ++ textual data is encoded, gives the UCS an entree onto existing ++ platforms. ++ ++ But the 2-byte format and the preponderance of NUL and other control ++ bytes in UCS-2 text pose problems for current applications and ++ transmission methods. And to make matters worse, different hardware ++ platforms store UCS-2 characters in different byte order. Thus a UCS-2 ++ file transferred by FTP (or accessed via NFS, etc) between two ++ computers with different architecture might have its bytes in the ++ wrong order (or worse; see [541]Section 6.6.5.1 ). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.2. UCS Byte Order ++ ++ Consider the number 1. In an 8-bit byte, this would be represented by ++ the following series of 0- and 1-bits: ++ ++ +-----------------+ ++ | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | ++ +-----------------+ ++ ++ Therefore in a 16-bit "word" the representation might be: ++ ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ ++ Now consider the number 256, which is 2 to the 8th power. The binary ++ representation is 100000000 (1 followed by 8 zeros). 256 would go into ++ a 16-bit word like this: ++ ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ ++ When a computer works this way, it is said to be Big Endian, meaning ++ it puts the most significant (biggest) byte first (on the "left") in a ++ 16-bit word, and the least significant byte second (on the right). ++ ++ However, some other computers have the opposite arrangement, called ++ Little Endian, in which 1 is: ++ ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ ++ and 256 is: ++ ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 | ++ +-----------------+-----------------+ ++ ++ Computers such as Sparc, MIPS, PA-RISC, and PowerPC are Big Endian, ++ whereas the PC and the Alpha are Little Endian. Endianness has never ++ been an issue with 7- or 8-bit characters, but it is with UCS ++ characters. It can be a tricky business to share or transfer a UCS-2 ++ file between two different kinds of computers. ++ ++ To alleviate (but not entirely solve) the problem, UCS-2 files are ++ supposed to begin with the Unicode character U+FEFF, Zero-Width ++ No-Break Space (ZWNBS). This is a kind of "no-op" (note: any such ++ assertion must normally be qualified with many "but ifs" and "excepts" ++ which are omitted here in the interest of brevity). If the bytes are ++ reversed the ZWNBS becomes U+FFFE, which is not (and never will be) a ++ defined UCS character. U+FEFF at the beginning of a UCS file is ++ therefore called a Byte Order Mark, or BOM. ++ ++ Any application that creates a UCS-2 (or UTF-16, or UCS-4) file should ++ include a BOM, and any application that reads one should test for a ++ BOM, and if one is found, infer the byte order from it. This is a ++ convention, however -- not a standard or a requirement -- and ++ applications vary in their ability to handle BOMs and "backwards" ++ UCS-2 files. ++ ++ Note that a BOM is useful only at the beginning of a file. If you ++ append one UCS-2 file to another, and both have BOMs, the internal BOM ++ is no longer a BOM. And if the byte orders of the two files differ, ++ then either the first part or the second will be backwards. (Various ++ other undesirable effects might also occur, not discussed here.) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.2. UCS Transformation Formats ++ ++ UCS textual data can be modified in various ways for transmission or ++ storage. Any officially sanctioned method of doing this is called a ++ UCS Transformation Format, or UTF. One such method, called UTF-16, is ++ essentially identical with UCS-2 except that it designates certain ++ code values as "escape sequences" (called surrogate pairs) to access ++ characters in other planes without having to use full UCS-4. We won't ++ discuss UTF-16 further here, since at the moment there are no other ++ planes. Several other UTF's (such as UTF-1, UTF-2, and UTF-7) have ++ fallen into disuse and are not discussed here. The most important ++ transformation format today is UTF-8. ++ ++ UTF-8, so called because it "serializes" UCS-2 data into a stream of ++ 8-bit bytes, is designed to allow the UCS to work with present-day ++ communications gear, computers, and software. The most important ++ properties of UTF-8 are that byte order is constant (no byte swapping) ++ and all (7-bit) ASCII characters represent themselves. Therefore ++ conversion between ASCII and UTF-8 is no conversion at all, and ++ applications or platforms (such as Plan 9 from Bell Labs) that use ++ UTF-8 "for everything" can still run traditional ASCII-only ++ applications and be accessed from them. In particular, unlike UCS-2, ++ ASCII characters are not padded with NUL bytes. But also unlike UCS-2, ++ there is no transparency for Latin-1 or any other non-ASCII character ++ set. Every non-ASCII UCS-2 character is represented by a sequence of 2 ++ or 3 UTF-8 bytes. Thus UTF-8 is more compact than UCS-2 for text ++ containing a preponderance of ABC's (or other ASCII characters), about ++ the same as UCS-2 for other alphabetic scripts (Cyrillic, Roman, ++ Greek, etc), and larger than UCS-2 for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. ++ ++ The UTF-8 uncoding of the UCS has been adopted by the Internet as the ++ preferred character set for new applications, and is gradually being ++ retrofitted into traditional applications like FTP ([542]RFC 2640). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.3. Conformance Levels ++ ++ Although the Unicode and ISO 10646 standards both describe the same ++ character set, these standards differ in many ways, including their ++ stated requirements for conformance and their classification of ++ conformance levels. ++ ++ Kermit has always abided by ISO character-set standards, including ISO ++ character-set designation and invocation methods. In adapting Unicode, ++ therefore, we had to choose from among the available ISO designations ++ which, in turn, correspond with ISO 10646 conformance levels. At ++ present, Kermit claims the lowest conformance level, 1, meaning ++ (roughly) that it does not handle combining forms and it does not ++ handle Korean Hangul Jamos (just as, at present, it does not handle ++ Korean in general). Note that ISO 10646 Conformance Levels 1 and 2 ++ sidestep the issue of the code changes for Korean Hangul by announcing ++ non-support for Hangul regardless of encoding. ++ ++ ISO 10646 Conformance Level 1 is approximately equivalent to Unicode ++ Normalization Form C (described in Unicode Technical Report 15, ++ incorporated into Unicode 3.0). ++ ++ As noted in [543]Section 6.6.2, Kermit does not claim to support ++ UTF-16 at the present time, hence the UCS-2 nomenclature. Kermit ++ treats surrogates just as if they were any other UCS-2 characters, ++ rather than as escapes to other planes, which means that (except when ++ converting between UCS-2 and UTF-8) they are translated to "error" ++ characters, since (a) no other planes are defined yet (and if they ++ were, no other character sets supported by Kermit would encode their ++ characters), and (b) no valid surrogate character corresponds to any ++ other UCS-2 character. ++ ++ A minor yet significant aspect of Unicode 3.0 and some recent ++ perturbation of ISO 10646-1 (probably Amendment 18, "Symbols and Other ++ Characters") is the addition of the Euro Sign at U+20AC. As noted in ++ [544]Section 6.0, Kermit's "Euro compliance" includes conversion ++ between Latin Alphabet 9 and various PC code pages. Text can also be ++ converted between UCS-2 or UTF-8 and any other Euro-compliant ++ character set (Latin-9, CP858, CP1250, CP1252) without loss of the ++ Euro Sign. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.4. Relationship of Unicode with Kermit's Other Character Sets ++ ++ Kermit's character sets are divided into two groups: single-byte sets ++ (such as Roman, Hebrew, Cyrillic, Greek) and multibyte (various ++ Japanese sets). The two groups are distinct since one normally would ++ not expect to convert Kanji ideograms to Roman (or other) letters, or ++ vice versa. ++ ++ Unicode character-set conversion works with both groups, but obviously ++ the result depends on the repertoires of the source and destination ++ character-sets both including the characters in the file. For example, ++ you can translate a Hungarian text file between Latin-2 and Unicode, ++ but not between (say) Unicode and Latin/Greek. By the same token you ++ can convert Japanese text from Shift-JIS or EUC or JIS-7 to Unicode ++ and back, but you can't convert the same file to (say) Latin-1 if it ++ contains Japanese characters. ++ ++ JIS-7 is equivalent to DEC Kanji and ISO-2022-JP except that the ++ latter two do not support halfwidth Katakana. Kermit treats all ++ three of these sets the same way, i.e. as JIS-7. ++ ++ As noted, Kermit presently does not handle combining diacritics, and ++ so will not correctly convert UCS files that use them into a ++ single-byte character set. For example, if a UCS file contains Latin ++ Capital Letter A (U+0041) followed by Combining Acute Accent (U+0301), ++ the result will be a two-character sequence, A followed by another ++ character. This is what is meant by Conformance Level 1. (The ++ situation grows worse with multiple diacritics, since they can occur ++ in any order.) ++ ++ A higher level of conformance is possible, in which "canonical ++ equivalences" are handled via algorithms and databases, at some ++ (perhaps considerable) cost in performance, since a fair amount of ++ additional code must be executed for every character during data ++ transfer (database lookup, sorting of combining sequences into ++ canonical order, etc). This can be added in future releases if there ++ is a need (but in many cases, pre- and postpostprocessing might be a ++ better option). ++ ++ Within these constraints, Kermit converts between the UCS and its ++ other character sets. For example, a mixture of Russian and English ++ (and/or Dutch, or Latin) text can bet converted between the UCS and ++ ISO Latin/Cyrillic or KOI-8. But since Kermit does not presently ++ support Arabic character-set conversion, the new availability of UCS ++ conversion does not mean that Kermit can convert from Arabic UCS text ++ to some other character set, because Kermit does not support any other ++ character set that includes Arabic. Ditto for Thai, Armenian, ++ Georgian, Tibetan, Chinese, Korean, etc. However, Kermit CAN convert ++ Arabic (or any other script) between UCS-2 and UTF-8. ++ ++ Considering Cyrillic more carefully, note that the UCS also contains ++ numerous Cyrillic characters not found in any of the Cyrillic sets ++ (ISO Latin/Cyrillic, KOI8, CP866, etc) that Kermit supports; ++ characters needed for Abkhasian, Yakut, Tatar, Bashkir, Altaic, Old ++ Church Slavonic, etc; UCS text containing any of these historic or ++ "extended" Cyrillic characters can not be converted to any of Kermit's ++ current single-byte Cyrillic sets without loss. The situation is ++ similar for Greek, Hebrew, etc, and even worse for Japanese since ++ Unicode contains thousands of Kanjis that are lacking from the ++ Japanese character sets based on JIS X 0208, such as EUC-JP, JIS-7, ++ and Shift-JIS. ++ ++ In general, when converting from UCS to a single-byte set, there is ++ always the possibility of data loss, just as there is when converting ++ from any larger set to a smaller one. For example, if a UCS file ++ contains Devanagari characters, these characters will be lost when ++ converting to (say) Latin-1, just as Roman vowels with acute accents ++ are lost when converting from Latin-1 (an 8-bit set) to German ISO 646 ++ (a 7-bit set). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5. Kermit's Unicode Features ++ ++ C-Kermit can convert between UCS-2 or UTF-8 and any of its other ++ character sets, and also between UCS-2 and UTF-8. When converting ++ between UCS-2 or UTF-8 and a non-Unicode character set (such as ++ Latin-1), the UCS Line Separator (LS, U+2028) and Paragraph Separator ++ (PS, U+2029) characters are converted to the appropriate line ++ terminator (CR, LF, or CRLF). When converting from a non-Unicode set ++ to UCS-2 or UTF-8, however, line terminators are not converted to LS ++ or PS. This is in accordance with the recommendations of Unicode ++ Technical Report #13. ++ ++ When C-Kermit starts, it tests the native byte order of the computer. ++ You can see the result in the SHOW FEATURES or SHOW FILE display. It's ++ also available in the variable \v(byteorder): 0 means Big Endian, 1 ++ means Little Endian. ++ ++ When UCS-2 is involved in file transfer or translation, the following ++ commands tell C-Kermit what to do about byte order: ++ ++ SET FILE UCS BYTE-ORDER { BIG-ENDIAN, LITTLE-ENDIAN } ++ This is for reading UCS-2 files that don't have a BOM, and also ++ for writing UCS-2 files. If this command is not given, the ++ machine's native byte order is used when writing UCS-2 files, ++ and also when reading UCS-2 files that don't have a BOM. ++ ++ SET FILE UCS BOM { ON, OFF } ++ This setting is used when creating UCS-2 files. A BOM is added ++ at the beginning by default. Use OFF to not add the BOM. This ++ command has no affect when writing files. ++ ++ COPY /SWAP-BYTES sourcefile destinationfile ++ Use this for fixing a UCS-2 file whose bytes are in the wrong ++ order. ++ ++ Use SHOW FILE to display the FILE UCS settings. ++ ++ Please note, again, that C-Kermit's user interface, including its ++ script language, is not internationalized in any way. String ++ comparisons, case conversion, and so on, work only for US ASCII ++ (comparisons for equality work with other sets, but not ++ lexically-greater-or-less-than or caseless comparisons; even ++ comparisons for equality can fail when composed characters or byte ++ order are involved). String functions such as \findex() and ++ \fsubstring() that reference byte positions do just that; they won't ++ work with UTF-8 text that contains any non-ASCII characters, and they ++ will not work with UCS-2 text at all since they use C strings ++ internally, which are NUL-terminated. These are just a few examples to ++ illustrate that neither Unicode nor any other character-set beyond ++ ASCII is supported at the user-interface, command, or scripting level ++ in this version of C-Kermit. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5.1. File Transfer ++ ++ Kermit supports both UCS-2 and UTF-8 as file and transfer character ++ sets in text-mode file transfer. ++ ++ To select UCS-2 or UTF-8 as a file character-set, use: ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET { UCS2, UTF8 } ++ ++ If you want to send a UCS-2 text file (or save an incoming file in ++ UCS-2 format), tell Kermit to: ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET UCS2 ++ ++ and if you want to send a UTF-8 text file (or store an incoming file ++ in UTF-8 format), tell Kermit to: ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET UTF8 ++ ++ When sending UCS-2 files, Kermit determines the byte order from the ++ BOM, if there is one (and if there is a BOM, it is stripped, i.e. not ++ sent). If there is no BOM, the byte order is the one specified in the ++ most recent SET FILE UCS BYTE-ORDER command, if any, otherwise the ++ computer's native byte order is assumed. When storing incoming files ++ as UCS-2, the byte order is according SET FILE UCS BYTE-ORDER, if ++ given, otherwise the native one; a BOM is written according to SET ++ FILE UCS BOM. ++ ++ A transfer character-set should be chosen that includes all of the ++ characters in the source file. So, for example, if you are sending a ++ UCS-2 file containing only German-language text, your transfer ++ character-set can be Latin-1, Latin-2, Latin-9, UCS-2, or UTF-8. But ++ if you are sending a file that contains a combination of Hebrew and ++ Greek, your transfer character-set must be UCS-2 or UTF-8 if you don't ++ want to lose one script or the other. Furthermore, the transfer ++ character-set must be one that is supported by the receiving Kermit ++ program. Since UCS support is new, it is possible that the other ++ Kermit program (if it supports character sets at all) does not support ++ it, but does support single-byte sets such as Latin-1, Latin/Cyrillic, ++ etc. ++ ++ To select UCS-2 or UTF-8 as a transfer character-set, use: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET { UCS2, UTF8 } ++ ++ It is up to the receiving Kermit program to convert the transfer ++ format to its own local format, if necessary. If it does not ++ understand the UTF-8 or UCS-2 transfer character-set, and your file ++ can not be adequately represented by any single-byte transfer ++ character-set (such as Latin-1 or Latin/Cyrillic) then, if UTF-8 ++ format is acceptable on the receiving computer, use UTF-8 as the ++ transfer character-set, with the receiver told to "set unknown-char ++ keep", or with the sender told to "set attribute char off". If you ++ want the file to be stored in UCS-2 format at the receiver, send it it ++ binary mode if the source file is also UCS-2, or else use the ++ TRANSLATE command (next section) to convert it to UCS-2 first, then ++ send it in binary mode. You should not use UCS-2 as a transfer ++ character-set in text-mode transfers to Kermit programs that don't ++ support it, because they are likely to corrupt the result the same way ++ FTP would (see the final paragraph of this section). ++ ++ When UCS-2 is the transfer character set, it always goes into Kermit ++ packets in Big Endian format, with no BOM. As always, the transfer ++ character-set is announced by the sender to the receiver. The ++ announcement for UCS-2 is "I162" (ISO Registration 162 = UCS-2 Level ++ 1) and by definition it is Big Endian (the standards say that when ++ UCS-2 is serialized into bytes, the order must be Big Endian). The ++ announcement for UTF-8 is "I190" (UTF-8 Level 1). ++ ++ When receiving a file whose transfer character-set is UCS-2 or UTF-8, ++ you must choose the appropriate file character set for the result. ++ There is no way Kermit can do this for you automatically, since UCS ++ data can be in any script at all, or any combination. ++ ++ In general, UTF-8 or UCS-2 should be chosen as a transfer ++ character-set if the source file is also encoded in some form of UCS ++ and it contains more than one script. But there are other situations ++ where where UTF-8 or UCS-2 offer advantages. For example, suppose the ++ source file is on a NeXTstation and the destination file is on VMS. ++ Both the NeXT and the DEC Multinational character sets include the ++ French OE digraph, but Latin-1 does not. Therefore French words ++ containing this character might not arrive intact when Latin-1 is the ++ transfer character-set, but will with UTF-8 or UCS-2, since the UCS ++ includes the OE digraph (but so does Latin-9). ++ ++ UCS-2 should be chosen as a transfer character-set only for Japanese ++ text files that contain a large preponderance of Kanji, since in this ++ case (and only this case) UCS-2 (two bytes per Kanji) is more ++ efficient than UTF-8 (three bytes per Kanji). The same will be true ++ for Chinese and Korean when they are supported by Kermit. UCS-2 should ++ never be used as a transfer character-set with a transfer partner that ++ does not support UCS-2 since this can cause file corruption (see last ++ paragraph in this section). ++ ++ Note that Kermit's repeat-count compression is 100% ineffective for ++ UCS-2, and is also ineffective for multibyte characters in UTF-8 and ++ EUC-JP; this is because repeat-compression is a transport-level ++ mechanism that operates on a per-byte basis; it has no knowledge of ++ the distinction between a byte and a character. ++ ++ When C-Kermit starts, it sets up associations ([545]Section 6.5) for ++ incoming files whose transfer character sets are UCS-2 or UTF-8 ++ appropriately for the platform so that the file character-set for the ++ incoming file is UCS-2 in Windows and UTF-8 elsewhere. Otherwise, ++ C-Kermit does not make any default associations for UCS-2 or UTF-8, ++ but of course you may add or change associations to suit your needs ++ and preferences by including the appropriate ASSOCIATE commands in ++ your Kermit startup file. For example, if you are a PC user and deal ++ only with text written in Greek and English, you can: ++ ++ ASSOCIATE TRANSFER-CHARACTER-SET UTF8 CP869 ++ ASSOCIATE TRANSFER-CHARACTER-SET UCS2 CP869 ++ ASSOCIATE FILE-CHARACTER-SET CP869 UTF8 ++ ++ Note that when file transfer involves conversion between a single-byte ++ character set and UCS-2 or UTF-8, the file-transfer thermometer and ++ estimated time left might be inaccurate, since they are based on the ++ source file size, not the transfer encoding. This is purely a cosmetic ++ issue and does not effect the final result. (And is not, strictly ++ speaking, a bug; Kermit protocol presently includes no method for the ++ sender to furnish an "estimated transfer size" to the receiver, and in ++ any case any such guess could be as far off as the file size, given ++ the many other factors that come into play, such as compression and ++ prefixing). ++ ++ A caution about FTP and UCS-2. As noted previously, if you transfer a ++ UCS-2 file with FTP in binary mode between two computers with opposite ++ Endianness, the result will have its bytes in the wrong order. ++ However, if you use FTP to transfer a UCS-2 file in "ascii" (text) ++ mode to ANY computer, even if it is identical to yours, the result ++ will be corrupted because FTP's line-terminator conversions do not ++ account for UCS-2. The same holds when sending from a UCS-aware Kermit ++ program to an older Kermit program in text mode with a transfer ++ character-set of UCS-2. So use UCS-2 as a transfer character-set ONLY ++ with a UCS-2-aware Kermit partner. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5.2. The TRANSLATE Command ++ ++ In Kermit versions that have Unicode support included, TRANSLATE now ++ always goes through Unicode; that is, the source set is converted to ++ UCS-2 and thence to the target set. This is a major improvement, since ++ in prior releases, C-Kermit had to pick the "most appropriate" ++ transfer character-set as the intermediate set, and this would result ++ in the loss of any characters that the source and target sets had in ++ common but were lacking from the intermediate set (for example the OE ++ digraph when translating from NeXT to DEC MCS through Latin-1). This ++ never happens when Unicode is the intermediate set because Unicode is ++ a superset of all other character sets supported by Kermit. A more ++ dramatic example would be translation between Cyrillic PC code page ++ 866 and KOI8-R ([546]Section 6.4); formerly all the line- and ++ box-drawing characters would be lost (since ISO 8859-5 does not have ++ any); now the ones that these two sets have in common are preserved. ++ ++ UCS-2 and UTF-8 are now both supported as source-file and ++ destination-file character sets by C-Kermit's TRANSLATE command, for ++ example: ++ ++ translate oofa.txt ucs2 latin1 oofa-l1.txt ++ ++ translates oofa.txt from UCS-2 to Latin-1, storing the result as ++ oofa-l1.txt. Similarly: ++ ++ translate oofa.txt utf8 latin1 oofa-l1.txt ++ translate oofa.txt latin1 ucs2 oofa-ucs2.txt ++ translate oofa.txt latin1 utf8 oofa-utf8.txt ++ translate oofa.txt ucs2 utf8 oofa-utf8.txt ++ translate oofa.txt utf8 ucs2 oofa-ucs2.txt ++ ++ Treatment of the UCS-2 BOM is exactly the same as for file transfer. ++ Note that if a UCS-2 source file is in the "wrong" byte order and ++ lacks a BOM, and you don't tell Kermit about it with SET FILE UCS ++ BYTE-ORDER, the result of the translation is total gibberish. Recall ++ that you can use COPY /SWAP-BYTES to switch the byte order of an ++ errant UCS-2 file (or any other file for that matter, if you can think ++ of a reason to). Also note that: ++ ++ translate oofa.txt ucs2 ucs2 new.txt ++ ++ Produces a result in the native (or SET FILE UCS) byte-order as long ++ as oofa.txt has a BOM. ++ ++ As a side benefit of the Unicode work, the TRANSLATE command now works ++ for the first time also for all Japanese character sets that Kermit ++ supports. In other words, if you have a Japanese text file in any of ++ the following encodings: ++ ++ EUC-JP ++ Shift-JIS ++ JIS-7 ++ UCS-2 ++ UTF-8 ++ ++ You can use the TRANSLATE command to convert to any other encoding ++ from the same list. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5.3. Terminal Connection ++ ++ The CONNECT command now allows UTF-8 as a local or remote terminal ++ character-set: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } { ..., UTF8 } ++ SET TERMINAL REMOTE-CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } ++ SET TERMINAL LOCAL-CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } ++ ++ (Recall that Kermit's terminal character-set has two "ends" -- the set ++ used on the host to which Kermit is connected, and the set used on the ++ local keyboard and screen.) ++ ++ UCS-2 is not supported as a terminal character-set (either end) since ++ (a) it is not used that way anywhere to our knowledge, and (b) the ++ problems of Endianness and the high likelihood of loss of ++ synchronization make it impractical. (Telecommunications is ++ byte-oriented; if one byte, or any odd number of bytes, is lost ++ because of buffer overruns, circuit resets, etc (or likewise if a ++ burst of noise appears that takes the guise of an odd number of ++ bytes), the byte order of the subsequent data stream will be ++ backwards; unlike UTF-8 and traditional byte-based character sets, ++ UCS-2 is not "self synchronizing".) ++ ++ UTF-8 does not have byte-order or synchronization problems and is ++ growing in popularity as a terminal character set as well as in other ++ application areas. It allows a single terminal session to use multiple ++ scripts (Roman, Cyrillic, Greek, etc) without ISO 2022 character-set ++ switching (which terminal emulators like Kermit 95 can handle but few ++ host applications understand or use), and meshes nicely with the ++ Unicode screen fonts that are beginning to appear. ++ ++ UTF-8 was first used in Plan 9 and soon will be available in Linux. It ++ will probably spread from there (Unicode in some form is, of course, ++ also used in Windows NT, but only internally -- not for access from ++ outside). ++ ++ To use UTF-8 or any other character set that uses 8-bit bytes in your ++ terminal session, be sure to tell C-Kermit to: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8 ++ SET COMMAND BYTESIZE 8 ++ SET PARITY NONE ++ ++ (or use the shortcut command, EIGHTBIT, which does all three at once). ++ ++ In a setup where your local Kermit program uses a single-byte ++ character set such as PC Code Page 850 and the remote host uses UTF-8: ++ ++ SET TERM CHAR UTF8 CP850 ++ ++ or: ++ ++ SET TERM REMOTE CHAR UTF8 ++ SET TERM LOCAL CHAR CP850 ++ ++ all works as expected. UTF-8 text on the remote displays correctly on ++ your screen, and when you type CP850 characters, they are translated ++ to UTF-8 sequences for transmission, and the echo from the host is ++ translated from UTF-8 back to CP850. Telnet negotiations and ++ autodownload take place before any character-set translation and work ++ as before. The session log (if text mode was selected for it) contains ++ only the local terminal character-set. And so on. ++ ++ Kermit merely supplies translations from UTF-8 to your local terminal ++ character-set (this includes treating UTF-8 Line Separator and ++ Paragraph separator as CRLF). However, Kermit does does not, at ++ present, perform "canonicalization" of composed sequences, nor does it ++ automatically execute bidirectionality algorithms for display of ++ mixed-direction text (e.g. Hebrew and English). Such presentation ++ issues, like all others in the terminal-host regime, are left to the ++ host. ++ ++ By the way, C-Kermit also allows UTF-8 to be the local end of the ++ terminal character-set, but so far this code is not tested, since we ++ don't have a UTF-8 console or terminal to work with. However, it can ++ be stated without doubt that C-Kermit's key mapping will not work for ++ UTF-8 values, since (a) the key map is indexed by 8-bit byte values ++ and (b) C-Kermit reads keystrokes a byte at a time (these comments do ++ not apply to K95, which has direct access to the keyboard and can read ++ "wide" keycodes and uses them to index a "wide" keymap). ++ ++ Restrictions: As noted, the CONNECT command does not support UCS-2 as ++ a REMOTE TERMINAL character-set. Neither does it support the Japanese ++ sets EUC-JP, JIS-7, and Shift-JIS. Support for the Japanese sets (and ++ possibly Chinese and Korean too) might be added in a future release. ++ Since the TRANSMIT command (next section) uses the same REMOTE ++ TERMINAL character-sets as the CONNECT command, it has the same ++ restrictions. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5.4. The TRANSMIT Command ++ ++ As described in Chapter 15 of [547]Using C-Kermit and [548]Section ++ 4.21 of this document, the TRANSMIT command can be used to upload a ++ file without protocol, more or less as if you were typing it on your ++ keyboard while connected to the host. When TRANSMITting in text mode, ++ the file's character set is converted to the host's unless you have ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT, or you include the new ++ TRANSMIT switch, /TRANSPARENT. ++ ++ Before C-Kermit 7.0, the file character-set was assumed to be the same ++ as the local end of the terminal character-set, and the TRANSMIT ++ command used the same translations as the CONNECT command, ignoring ++ the file character-set. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, that assumption (a poor one to begin with) can no ++ longer be made, since UCS-2 can be a file character-set but not a ++ terminal character-set. So now the file's character-set is given by ++ your most recent SET FILE CHARACTER-SET command. The host's character ++ set is the remote end of your most recent SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET ++ command: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET remote-set [ local-set ] ++ ++ or: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL REMOTE-CHARACTER-SET remote-set ++ ++ The TRANSMIT command converts each source-file character from the FILE ++ character-set to the REMOTE TERMINAL character-set, and then transmits ++ the translated characters according to your SET TRANSMIT preferences ++ (Chapter 15). ++ ++ If you have SET TRANSMIT ECHO ON, and the host is echoing the ++ transmitted characters, the echos are converted from the remote ++ terminal character-set to the local terminal character-set. ++ ++ [ A picture would help... ] ++ ++ Confused? Let's work through an example. Suppose your local computer ++ is a NeXTstation, on which text files are encoded in the NeXT ++ character set, and that the remote computer is a Data General AViiON, ++ which uses the Data General International character set. Further ++ suppose that you are logged in to the NeXT from a VT220 terminal which ++ uses the DEC Multinational character set. ++ ++ You need to convert the file from NeXT encoding to DG encoding and ++ convert the echoes from DG encoding to DEC encoding. So on the NeXT, ++ tell C-Kermit to: ++ ++ eightbit ++ set file character-set next ++ set term character-set dg-international dec-mcs ++ transmit /text nextdata.txt ++ ++ (This assumes you have some sort of collection process already set up ++ on the Data General, such as a text editor or the venerable "cat > ++ foo". The EIGHTBIT command is equivalent to SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8, ++ SET COMMAND BYTESIZE 8, SET PARITY NONE.) ++ ++ To further complicate matters, suppose your local terminal character ++ set is the same as the remote one, so you don't need terminal ++ character-set translation, but you need to TRANSMIT a file that is in ++ a different character set and you want it translated to the host set. ++ In this case, use SET TERM CHARACTER-SET to actually specify the ++ character set used on each end, rather than specifying TRANSPARENT: ++ ++ eightbit ++ set file character-set ucs2 ++ set term character-set latin1 latin1 ++ transmit /text ucs2data.txt ++ ++ The distinction between: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET xxx yyy ++ ++ (where xxx and yyy are the same set) and: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT ++ ++ is new to C-Kermit 7.0, but affects only the TRANSMIT command. ++ ++ The TRANSMIT command currently does nothing special with UCS-2/UTF-8 ++ Line and Paragraph Separator characters; more experience is required ++ to find out how these behave in a genuine Unicode terminal-host ++ setting. ++ ++ Restrictions: As noted, the TRANSMIT command translates from the FILE ++ character-set to the REMOTE TERMINAL character-set. This rules out ++ translations to any character set that is not supported as a REMOTE ++ TERMINAL character-set, such as UCS-2, EUC-JP, JIS-7, and Shift-JIS. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.6.5.5. Summary of Kermit Unicode Commands ++ ++ Specifying file character-set and byte order: ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET { ..., UCS2, UTF8 } ++ REMOTE SET FILE CHARACTER-SET { ..., UCS2, UTF8 } (See next ++ section) ++ SET FILE UCS BOM { ON, OFF } ++ SET FILE UCS BYTE-ORDER { BIG-ENDIAN, LITTLE-ENDIAN } ++ ++ Specifying the transfer character-set: ++ SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET { ..., UCS-2, UTF-8 } ++ REMOTE SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET { ..., UCS-2, UTF-8 } ++ ++ Specifying the terminal character-set: ++ SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } { ..., UTF8 } ++ SET TERMINAL REMOTE-CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } ++ SET TERMINAL LOCAL-CHARACTER-SET { ..., UTF8 } ++ ++ Displaying settings: ++ SHOW FILE ++ SHOW TRANSFER ++ SHOW TERMINAL ++ SHOW CHARACTER-SETS ++ ++ Commands that use these settings include: ++ SEND, RECEIVE, GET, etc. ++ CONNECT ++ TRANSMIT ++ LOG SESSION ++ ++ Converting files: ++ TRANSLATE infile { ..., UCS-2, UTF-8 } { ..., UCS-2, UTF-8 } ++ outfile ++ COPY /SWAP-BYTES infile outfile ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6.7. Client/Server Character-Set Switching ++ ++ A simple mechanism has been added to allow the client to change the ++ server's FILE CHARACTER-SET: ++ ++ REMOTE SET FILE CHARACTER-SET name ++ The client asks the server to change its file character-set to ++ the one given. The name must match one of the server's file ++ character-set names. For convenience, C-Kermit uses its own ++ file character-set keyword list for parsing this command so you ++ can use ? for help and Tab or Esc for completion. However, ++ since the server might have a different repertoire (or even use ++ different names for the same sets), C-Kermit accepts any string ++ you supply and sends it to the server. The server, if it ++ supports this command (C-Kermit 7.0 and K95 1.1.19 do), sets ++ its file character-set as requested, and also disables ++ automatic character-set switching ([549]Section 6.5). If the ++ server does not support this command or if it does not support ++ the given character set, the REMOTE SET FILE CHARACTER-SET ++ command fails. ++ ++ Here's an example that sends a Japanese text file encoded in Shift-JIS ++ to a server using every combination of Kermit's Japanese-capable file ++ and transfer character sets: ++ ++ dcl \&x[] = euc ucs2 utf8 ; transfer character-sets ++ dcl \&y[] = eu uc ut ; 2-letter abbreviations for them ++ dcl \&f[] = shift euc jis7 ucs2 utf8 ; file character-sets ++ dcl \&g[] = sj eu j7 uc ut ; 2-letter abbreviations ++ ++ set file char shift-jis ; local file character-set is Shift-JIS ++ for \%i 1 \fdim(&x) 1 { ; for each transfer character-set... ++ set xfer char \&x[\%i] ; set it ++ for \%j 1 \fdim(&f) 1 { ; for each remote file character-set... ++ remote set file char \&f[\%j] ; set it ++ if fail exit 1 SERVER REJECTED CHARSET ++ send /text meibo-sj.html meibo-sj-\&y[\%i]-\&g[\%j].txt ; send the fi ++le ++ if fail exit 1 TRANSFER FAILED ++ } ++ } ++ ++ The Kermit-370 server does not support REMOTE SET FILE CHARACTER-SET, ++ but since it supports REMOTE KERMIT commands, you can get the same ++ effect with REMOTE KERMIT SET FILE CHARACTER-SET name. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7. SCRIPT PROGRAMMING ++ ++ (Also see [550]Section 2.8, Scripting Local Programs.) ++ ++ 7.0. Bug Fixes ++ ++ The following script programming bugs were fixed in C-Kermit 7.0: ++ ++ * IF EXIST and IF DIRECTORY were fixed to properly strip braces from ++ around their arguments, so "if directory {C:\Program Files}", etc, ++ would work as expected. However, this means that if the file or ++ directory name is actually enclosed in braces, the braces must be ++ doubled. ++ * The READ command did not fail if the READ file wasn't open; now it ++ does. ++ * The READ command refused to read the last or only line of a file ++ if it did not end with a proper line terminator; now it does. ++ * The END command, when given from within a SWITCH statement, did ++ not exit from the current macro or command file; instead it just ++ terminated the SWITCH. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.1. The INPUT Command ++ ++ 7.1.1. INPUT Timeouts ++ ++ The description of the INPUT command on page 422 fails to mention the ++ following two points about the timeout (which apply to C-Kermit 6.0 ++ and later): ++ ++ 1. "INPUT -1 text" (or "INPUT \%x text", where \%x is any variable ++ whose value is -1 or less) means "wait forever". This form of the ++ INPUT command fails only if it is interrupted, since it will never ++ time out. ++ 2. INPUT 0 performs a nonblocking read of material that has already ++ arrived but has not yet been read, and succeeds immediately if the ++ target string is found, or fails immediately if it is not found. ++ ++ The same points apply to MINPUT. REINPUT ignores its timeout ++ parameter. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.1.2. New INPUT Controls ++ ++ The following new INPUT controls were added in version 7.0: ++ ++ SET INPUT AUTODOWNLOAD { ON, OFF } ++ Explained in [551]Section 7.7. ++ ++ SET INPUT CANCELLATION { ON, OFF } ++ This governs whether an INPUT command can be canceled by ++ "pressing any key" on the keyboard. Normally it can be, in ++ which case the INPUT command fails immediately and \v(instatus) ++ is set to 2, indicating interruption. SET INPUT CANCELLATION ++ OFF disables keyboard cancellations; thus if the search text is ++ not encountered, the INPUT command will run for its entire ++ timeout interval. SET INPUT CANCELLATION OFF does not disable ++ interruption by Ctrl-C, however; every command needs an ++ emergency exit. (If you really want to disable interruption by ++ Ctrl-C, use SET COMMAND INTERRUPTION OFF.) ++ ++ Also see [552]Section 7.2 for any new variables related to INPUT. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.1.3. INPUT with Pattern Matching ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 allows INPUT, MINPUT, and REINPUT targets to be a pattern ++ (explained in [553]Sections 1.19 and [554]4.9). This solves a ++ long-standing problem illustrated by the following scenario: a certain ++ company has a bank of TCP/IP modem servers, with hostnames server1, ++ server2, server3, and so on. Each server's prompt is its name, ++ followed by a colon (:), for example "Server72:". Without INPUT ++ patterns, it would be rather difficult to wait for the prompt. The ++ brute force approach: ++ ++ minput 20 Server1: Server2: Server3: ... (enumerating each one) ++ ++ is subject to failure whenever a new server is added. A more subtle ++ approach: ++ ++ input 20 Server ++ if fail ... ++ input 2 : ++ ++ is liable to false positives, e.g. "Welcome to the XYZ Corp Modem ++ Server. Please read the following message:"... ++ ++ With patterns, you can match the prompt with "Server*:" (which doesn't ++ solve the "false positives" problem, but certainly is more compact ++ than the brute force method), or with more specific patterns such as ++ "Server[1-9]:" and "Server[1-9][0-9]:", or equivalently: ++ ++ Server{[1-9],[1-9][0-9]}: ++ ++ meaning the word "Server" followed by a single digit (1-9) or by two ++ digits representing a number from 1 to 99, followed by a colon. ++ ++ INPUT pattern matching has been added in a way that does not interfere ++ with existing scripts. No new commands or switches are used. The ++ simple rule is: if an INPUT search target is the argument of the (new) ++ \fpattern() function, it is a pattern. Otherwise it is taken ++ literally, as before. For example: ++ ++ input 5 a*b ++ ++ searches for an 'a' followed by an asterisk ('*'), followed by a 'b'. ++ But: ++ ++ input 5 \fpattern(a*b) ++ ++ searches for an 'a' followed by anything at all up to and including ++ the first 'b'. This means that any search target to INPUT, MINPUT, or ++ REINPUT can be a pattern or a literal string, and in particular that ++ MINPUT can accommodate any mixture of patterns and literal strings. ++ ++ In selecting patterns, note that: ++ ++ * A leading '*' is always implied so there is no need to include ++ one. ++ * A trailing '*' is meaningless and ignored. ++ * A '*' by itself matches the first character that arrives. ++ ++ A syntax note: If your pattern is a selection list, meaning a list of ++ alternatives separated by commas and enclosed in braces, then the ++ outer braces will be stripped by various levels of parsers, so you ++ must include three of each: ++ ++ input 10 \fpattern({{{abc,mno,xyz}}}) ++ ++ Note that this is equivalent to: ++ ++ minput 10 abc mno xyz ++ ++ except for the setting of the \v(minput) variable. ++ ++ And a caution: INPUT pattern matching has a limitation that you ++ probably never noticed with literal-string matching, namely that there ++ is a limit on the size of the match. For example, if the pattern is ++ "a*b", the match will succeed if the 'a' and 'b' are not separated by ++ more than (say) 8K bytes, but will fail if they are farther apart than ++ that. In such cases, it better to use two INPUTs (e.g. "input 10 a" ++ and then "input 100 b"). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.1.4. The INPUT Match Result ++ ++ The result of any INPUT, MINPUT, or REINPUT command, no matter whether ++ the search targets are patterns or literal strings, is available in ++ the new \v(inmatch) variable. For example: ++ ++ minput 10 cat \fpattern([dh]og) ++ if success echo MINPUT matched "\v(inmatch)" ++ ++ This is especially useful when a pattern was matched, since it makes ++ the string that matched the pattern available to Kermit; there would ++ be no way to get it otherwise. ++ ++ After an INPUT command, you can view all the INPUT-related variables ++ by typing "show variables in" (abbreviate as "sho var in"), which ++ shows the values of all built-in variables whose names start with ++ "in". ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.2. New or Improved Built-In Variables ++ ++ \v(blockcheck) ++ Current BLOCK-CHECK setting, 1, 2, 3, or 4. 4 is the code for ++ BLANK-FREE-2. ++ ++ \v(byteorder) ++ The machine's byte order: 0 = Big Endian, 1 = Little Endian. ++ ++ \v(cmdbufsize) ++ The length of the command buffer, which is the maximum size for ++ a macro, a command, a variable, or anything else in C-Kermit's ++ script language. ++ ++ \v(ctty) ++ The device name of C-Kermit's controlling (login) terminal. ++ ++ \v(filename) ++ Described in [555]Sections 4.1 and [556]4.2. ++ ++ \v(filenumber) ++ Described in [557]Sections 4.1 and [558]4.2. ++ ++ \v(filespec) ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, contains fully qualified filenames rather ++ than (usually) relative ones. ++ ++ \v(return) ++ Now holds the END n value of the macro that most recently ++ returned, in case END was used rather than RETURN. ++ ++ \v(editor) ++ Pathname of preferred text editor ++ ++ \v(editopts) ++ Command-line options for editor ++ ++ \v(editfile) ++ File most recently edited ++ ++ \v(browser) ++ Pathname of preferred Web browser ++ ++ \v(browsopts) ++ Command-line options for Web browser ++ ++ \v(browsurl) ++ URL most recently given to Web browser ++ ++ \v(dialtype) ++ Type of call most recently placed (see [559]Section 2.1.11). ++ ++ \v(kbchar) ++ The character, if any, that was typed at the keyboard to to ++ interrupt the most recent PAUSE, SLEEP, WAIT, MSLEEP, or INPUT ++ command; empty if the most recent such command was not ++ interrupted from the keyboard. ++ ++ \v(lockdir) ++ UNIX only - The name of the UUCP lockfile directory, if known, ++ otherwise "(unknown)". ++ ++ \v(lockpid) ++ UNIX only - PID of process that owns the communication port ++ that you tried to open with a SET LINE command that failed ++ because the port was in use, otherwise empty. This variable is ++ set with every SET LINE command. ++ ++ \v(cx_time) ++ If no connection (SET HOST, SET LINE, DIAL, TELNET, etc) is ++ active, this is 0. If a connection is active, this is the ++ number of seconds since the connection was made. ++ ++ \v(hwparity) ++ If hardware parity is in effect, this variable gives its value, ++ such as "even" or "odd" (in which case, the \v(parity) variable ++ will be "none"). Otherwise this variable is empty. ++ ++ \v(serial) ++ Current serial port settings in 8N1 format ([560]Section 2.10). ++ ++ \v(errno) ++ In UNIX, the current value of the C runtime errno variable, ++ which is quite volatile (meaning that often an "interesting" ++ error code can be overwritten by some other library call or ++ system service that sets errno before you have a chance to look ++ at it). In VMS, the error code returned by the system or ++ library call that most recently failed (success codes are not ++ saved). Not available in other operating systems. ++ ++ \v(errstring) ++ The UNIX or VMS system error message that corresponds to ++ \v(errno). Not available in all OS's. Also see ++ [561]\ferrstring(). ++ ++ \v(setlinemsg) ++ The error message, if any, from the most recent SET LINE, SET ++ PORT, SET HOST, TELNET, or other connection-making command. ++ This is not necessarily the same as \v(errstring) since these ++ commands might fail without generating a system error code, for ++ example (in UNIX) because a lockfile existed indicating the ++ device was assigned by another user. ++ ++ \v(exitstatus) ++ The exit status C-Kermit would return if it exited now. ++ ++ \v(pexitstat) ++ The exit status of the inferior process most recently invoked ++ by C-Kermit (by RUN, !, REDIRECT, SEND /COMMAND, etc). In VMS, ++ this code can be given to \ferrstring() to get the ++ corresponding error message (in UNIX, program/command return ++ codes are not the same as system error codes). Not available in ++ operating systems other than UNIX and VMS. See [562]Section ++ 4.2.5 for details. ++ ++ \v(inmatch) ++ The incoming string of characters, if any, that matched the ++ most recent INPUT, REINPUT, or MINPUT command. ++ ++ \v(intime) ++ The number of milliseconds (thousandths of seconds) it took for ++ the most recent INPUT command to find its match, or -1 if no ++ INPUT command has been given yet. If the INPUT command timed ++ out, the value is approximately equal to 1000 times the INPUT ++ timeout. If INPUT failed for some other reason, the value is ++ undefined (\v(instatus) gives INPUT completion status). If your ++ version of C-Kermit is built without high-precision ++ floating-point timers, this number will always be a multiple of ++ 1000. ++ ++ \v(inwait) ++ The number of seconds specified as the timeout in the most ++ recent INPUT command. ++ ++ \v(dialsuffix) ++ Dialing suffix for use during PDIAL sequence; see [563]Section ++ 2.1.10. ++ ++ \v(pid) ++ UNIX, VMS, and K95 only. C-Kermit's primary process ID, ++ numeric, decimal. If you want to show it in hex, use ++ \fn2hex(\v(pid)) If you want to show it in octal, use ++ \fn2octal(\v(pid)). ++ ++ \v(printer) ++ Current printer name or SET PRINTER value. ++ ++ \v(p_ctl) ++ Control prefix char \v(p_8bit) 8-bit prefix char (if parity not ++ none) ++ ++ \v(p_rpt) ++ Repeat prefix char (if repeat compression enabled) ++ ++ \v(herald) ++ Kermit's version herald ++ ++ \v(test) ++ Kermit's test version, if any, or 0 if this is not a test ++ version. Typical values for test versions are "Alpha.03" or ++ "Beta.14". ++ ++ \v(sendlist) ++ The number of entries in the SEND-LIST, 0 if none. Note: ++ entries do not necessarily correspond to files, since an entry ++ might contain wildcards. Also note that the value does not go ++ back to 0 after the files in the list are sent. To reset this ++ variable, use CLEAR SEND-LIST. The purpose of this variable is ++ to determine if a SEND command, when given without any ++ filenames, will be legal. Example: ++ ++ xif \v(sendlist) { send } else { send oofa.txt } ++ ++ \v(trigger) ++ If the most recent CONNECT session was terminated automatically ++ by a trigger, this variable contains the trigger value. ++ ++ \v(ty_ln) ++ TYPE line number (during TYPE) ++ ++ \v(ty_lc) ++ TYPE line count (after TYPE) ++ ++ \v(ty_mc) ++ TYPE match count (after TYPE) ++ ++ \v(xferstat) ++ Status of most recent file transfer: ++ ++-1: No transfer yet ++ 0: Succeeded ++ 1: Failed ++ ++ \v(xfermsg) ++ If the most recent file transfer failed, this is the reason. If ++ it succeeded, \v(xfermsg) is an empty string. ++ ++ \v(tftime) ++ Total elapsed time of most recent file transfer operation, in ++ seconds. ++ ++ \v(textdir) ++ Directory that holds (or is supposed to hold) Kermit text files ++ such as installation instructions, release notes, update notes, ++ read-me files, "beware" files, etc. ++ ++ \v(name) ++ The name with which the Kermit program was invoked, e.g. ++ "kermit", "wermit", "k95", "k2", etc (see [564]Section 9.1). ++ ++ \v(osname) ++ Name of operating system on computer where C-Kermit is running, ++ obtained at runtime (from uname or equivalent). ++ ++ \v(osversion) ++ Version of operating system on computer where C-Kermit is ++ running, obtained at runtime (from uname or equivalent). ++ ++ \v(osrelease) ++ Release of operating system on computer where C-Kermit is ++ running, obtained at runtime (from uname or equivalent). ++ ++ \v(model) ++ The specific hardware model of the computer where C-Kermit is ++ running, if known. ++ ++ \v(math_pi) ++ The value of Pi (see [565]Section 7.23) ++ ++ \v(math_e) ++ The value of e (see [566]Section 7.23) ++ ++ \v(math_precision) ++ How many significant digits in a floating-point number. ++ ++ \v(f_count) ++ Result of the most recent FILE COUNT (FCOUNT) command. ++ ++ \v(f_error) ++ Numeric error code of most recent FILE command. ++ ++ \v(f_max) ++ Maximum number of files open simultaneously. ++ ++ The math constants are given in the precision of underlying computer's ++ floating-point arithmetic. ++ ++ Note the distinction between \v(osname), \v(osversion), and ++ \v(platform); the latter refers to the platform for which and/or upon ++ which C-Kermit was built, as opposed to the one on which it is ++ actually running. Also note that each operating system can, and ++ probably will, interpret and fill in the os* variables differently, or ++ not at all. ++ ++ The SHOW VARIABLES command now accepts a variable name, prefix, or ++ pattern: ++ ++ show variables Shows all variables. ++ show variables t Shows all variables that start with "t". ++ show variables *ver* Shows all variables whose names contain "ver". ++ show variables *ver Ditto (an implied "*" is appended). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.3. New or Improved Built-In Functions ++ ++ The following new file-i/o functions are explained in [567]Section ++ 1.22. ++ ++ \f_status(channel) Status of file open on channel ++ \f_pos(channel) Read/write (byte) pointer of given file ++ \f_line(channel) Current line of file ++ \f_handle(channel) Handle of file ++ \f_eof(channel) Whether given file is at EOF ++ \f_getchar(channel) Read a char from given file ++ \f_getline(channel) Read a line from given file ++ \f_getblock(channel,n) Read a block from given file ++ \f_putchar(channel,c) Write a char to given file ++ \f_putline(channel,string) Write a line to given file ++ \f_putblock(channel,string) Write a block to given file ++ ++ The following new date-time-related functions are explained in ++ [568]Section 1.6: ++ ++ \fday() Returns day of week of given date ++ \fnday() Returns numeric day of week of given date ++ \ftime() Returns time portion of given date-time ++ \fntime() Converts time to seconds since midnight ++ \fn2time() Converts seconds since midnight to hh:mm:ss ++ \fcvtdate(date-time) Converts free-format date to yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss ++ \fdayofyear(date-time) Converts date to yyyyddd (day-of-year) format ++ \fdoy(date-time) Synonym for \fdayofyear() ++ \fdoy2date(dayofyear) Converts yyyyddd to yyyymmdd ++ \fmjd(date-time) Converts free-format date to Modified Julian Date ++ \fmjd2date(mjd) Converts modified Julian date to yyyymmdd ++ ++ The new floating-point arithmetic functions are explained in ++ [569]Section 7.23. f1 and f2 are floating-point (real) numbers; d is ++ the number of decimal places to show: ++ ++ \ffpabsolute(f1,d) Absolute value of f1 ++ \ffpadd(f1,f2,d) f1 + f1 ++ \ffpcosine(f1,d) Cosine of f1 ++ \ffpdivide(f1,f2,d) f1 divided by f2 ++ \ffpexp(f1,d) e to the f1 power ++ \ffpint(f1) Integer part of f1 ++ \ffplog10(f1,d) Log base 10 of f1 ++ \ffplogn(f1,d) Natural log of f1 ++ \ffpmaximum(f1,f2,d) Maximum of f1 and f2 ++ \ffpminimum(f1,f2,d) Minimum of f1 and f2 ++ \ffpmodulus(f1,f2,d) Modulus of f1 and f2 ++ \ffpmultiply(f1,f2,d) Product of f1 and f2 ++ \ffpraise(f1,f2,d) Raise f1 to power f2 ++ \ffpround(f1,d) Round f1 to d places ++ \ffpsine(f1,d) Sine of f1 ++ \ffpsqrt(f1,d) Square root of f1 ++ \ffpsubtract(f1,f2,d) f2 - f1 ++ \ffptangent(f1,d) Tangent of f1 ++ ++ Integer number functions: ++ ++ \fabsolute(n) ++ Absolute value of integer n. ++ ++ \frandom(n) ++ Returns a random integer between 0 and n-1. ++ ++ \fradix(s,n1,n2) ++ If the string s is an integer in radix n1, the result is the ++ same number expressed in radix n2, where n1 and n2 may be any ++ number from 2 through 36, expressed as decimal numbers, or ++ variables (etc) that evaluate to decimal numbers. For the ++ source and result, the digits of any radix, r, are the first r ++ characters in the sequence 0-9,a-z (case doesn't matter for the ++ letters). The string s may have a sign, + or -; if it starts ++ with a minus (-) sign, the result also has a minus sign. ++ ++ The \fradix() function does not work with floating-point numbers. It ++ does not reveal the internal storage format of a number; for example, ++ \fradix(-1,10,16) is -1, not something like FFFFFFFFFF. If all three ++ arguments are not given, or if n1 or n2 are not numbers between 2 and ++ 36 inclusive, or s is not a number in radix n1, an error occurs and ++ the empty string is returned. \fradix() also does not offer ++ extended-precision arithmetic; number values are limited to those ++ expressed as a long integer in the architecture of the underlying ++ computer, usually 32 or 64 bits. If you give it an argument whose ++ absolute value is larger than can be held in an unsigned long, the ++ result is -1. ++ ++ The next four are shorthand functions for decimal/hexadecimal and ++ decimal/octal number conversion: ++ ++ \fn2hex(n) ++ Returns the hexadecimal (base 16) representation of the integer ++ n. This is different from \fhexify(s), which treats its ++ argument as a string rather than a number. The result is always ++ left-padded with 0's to make its length even. Examples: ++ ++ \n2hex(0) = "00" \fhexify(0) = "30" ++ \n2hex(255) = "ff" \fhexify(255) = "323535" ++ \n2hex(256) = "0100" \fhexify(256) = "323536" ++ ++ \fhex2n(x) ++ Converts hexadecimal number x to decimal equivalent decimal ++ number. This is the inverse of \fn2hex(). Equivalent to ++ \fradix(s,16,10). ++ ++ \fn2octal(n) ++ Returns the octal (base 8) representation of the number n. ++ Examples: ++ ++ \n2octal(0) = "0" ++ \n2oct(255) = "377" ++ \n2oct(256) = "400" ++ Equivalent to \fradix(n,10,8). ++ ++ \foct2n(n) ++ Returns the decimal representation of the given octal number, ++ n. The inverse of \fn2octal(). Equivalent to \fradix(n,8,10). ++ ++ String functions: ++ ++ \s(name[n:m]) ++ Equivalent to \fsubstring(\m(name),n,m) ([570]Section 7.24). ++ ++ \:(name[n:m]) ++ Equivalent to \fsubstring(name,n,m) (where "name" is any ++ \-quantity) ([571]Section 7.24). ++ ++ \fleft(s,n) ++ The leftmost ncharacters of string s; equivalent to ++ \fsubstring(s,1,n). ++ ++ \fstripx(string,char) ++ Returns the part of the string up to the rightmost occurrence, ++ if any, of the given character. The default character is period ++ (.) Examples: ++ ++ \fstripx(foo/bar,/) = "foo" ++ \fstripx(foo/bar/baz,/) = "foo/bar" ++ \fstripx(autoexec.bat,.) = "autoexec" ++ \fstripx(autoexec.bat) = "autoexec" ++ \fstripx(fstripx(foo/bar/baz,/),/) = "foo" ++ ++ \flop(string,character) ++ Returns the portion of the string starting after the first ++ occurrence of the given character. The default character is ++ period (.) Examples: ++ ++ \flop(autoexec.bat) = "bat" ++ \flop(baz.foo/bar) = "foo/bar" ++ \flop(baz.foo/bar,/) = "bar ++ ++ \fstripn(string,n) ++ Returns the string with ncharacters removed from the end. ++ Example: ++ ++ \fstripn(12345678,3) = "12345" ++ ++ (For more discussion of \fstripx(), \fstripn(), and \flop() see ++ [572]Section 4.2.3). ++ ++ \fb64encode(s) ++ Returns the Base-64 encoding of the string s. ++ ++ \fb64decode(s) ++ Returns the decoding of the Base-64 string s. Fails if s is not ++ a Base-64 string, or if its length is not a multiple of 4. Note ++ that if any of the result bytes are null (0), the result string ++ stops there. There is no way to represent strings that contain ++ null bytes in C-Kermit (the same is true for \funhexify()). ++ ++ \fword(s1,n,s2,s3) ++ Extracts word number nfrom string s1. By default, a "word" is ++ any sequence of ASCII letters or digits; nis 1-based. If nis ++ omitted, "1" is used. Examples: ++ ++ \fword(one two three) = "one" ++ \fword(one two three,1) = "one" ++ \fword(one two three,2) = "two" ++ \fword(one two three,3) = "three" ++ ++ and: ++ ++ \fword(\v(dialresult),2) = "31200" ++ ++ is "31200" if \v(dialresult) is (e.g.) "CONNECT ++ 31200/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS". ++ ++ If you include s2, this replaces the default break set. For ++ example, suppose you have a string \%a whose value is: ++ ++ $150.00 $300.00 $39.95 ++ ++ and you want each dollar amount to be a word; use: ++ ++ \fword(\%a,\%n,{ }) ++ ++ This returns dollar amount number \%n, e.g. "$300.00" for \%n = ++ 2. "{ }" denotes a space (you must enclose it in braces, ++ otherwise it is squeezed out). Note that ASCII control ++ characters are always included in the break set; you don't have ++ to specify them (and you can't not specify them). ++ ++ The optional s3 argument lists characters (even control ++ characters) that normally would be considered separators that ++ you want included in words. So the dollars-and-cents example ++ could also be handled this way: ++ ++ \fword(\%a,\%n,,$.) ++ ++ in other words, use the default separator list, but remove "$" ++ and "." from it so they will be considered part of a word. ++ ++ \fsplit(s1,&a,s2,s3) ++ This is like \fword(), except instead of extracting and ++ returning a particular word from string s1, it counts the words ++ and optionally assigns them to the array whose identifying ++ letter, a-z, is given after the "&" in the second argument, ++ with the first word going into element 1, the second into ++ element 2, and so on. The rules regarding break and include ++ lists (s2 and s3) are exactly the same as for \fword(). ++ \fsplit() returns the number of words that were assigned, which ++ is either the number of words in the string, or the dimension ++ of the array, whichever is less. If the array is not declared, ++ \fsplit() creates it and returns a number which is both the ++ number of words in s1 and the dimension of the new array. ++ Examples: ++ ++ declare \&w[20] ; (Optional.) ++ ... ++ read \%s ; \%s is "This is a sentence with seven words." ++ ... ++ echo "\fsplit(\%s)" ; This would print "7". ++ echo "\fsplit(\%s,&w)" ; Ditto, and also assigns them to array \&w[]. ++ ++ echo "\&w[7]" ; This would print "words". ++ ++ If the line contained fields that were delimited by colon (:), ++ you would use \fsplit(\%s,&w,:). If the fields were delimited ++ by comma, then you would use \fsplit(\%s,&w,{,}); in this case ++ the literal comma must be enclosed in braces to distinguish it ++ from the comma that separates function arguments. To get a word ++ count without loading an array, but still specify break and/or ++ include lists, leave the array argument empty: ++ ++ echo "\fsplit(\%s,,:)" ; Use colon as the separator. ++ ++ WARNINGS: ++ ++ 1. If you use the same array repeatedly, \fsplit() leaves any ++ trailing members undisturbed. For example: ++ dcl \&w[10] ++ \fsplit(1 2 3 4 5,&w) ; Sets \&w[1] thru \&w[5]. ++ \fsplit(a b c,&w) ; Sets \&w[1]-[3] leaving [4]-[5] as they were. ++ 2. If you allow \fsplit to create the array (by not declaring it ++ first), it is dimensioned to the number of elements it was ++ created with: ++ \fsplit(1 2 3,&x) ; Creates an array \&x[] with 3 elements. ++ \fsplit(a b c d e,&x) ; This overflows the array. ++ ++ Thus if you want to use \fsplit() repeatedly on the same array, ++ either dimension it in advance to the maximum expected size ++ (and then some -- more efficient), or else destroy it after ++ each use (to allow for unexpectedly large arguments). Example ++ using a dynamic array: ++ ++ fopen /read \%c some-file ++ if fail ... ++ set function error on ; See [573]Section 7.12 ++ while true { ++ dcl \&w[] ; Destroy \&[w] each time thru the loop ++ fread /line \%c \%a ++ if fail break ++ asg \%x \fsplit(\%a,&w) ++ if fail ... ++ ; (do what you want with \&w[] here...) ++ } ++ fclose \%c ++ ++ \frindex(s1,s2,n) ++ The "n" argument to \frindex() now works consistently (in ++ mirror image) with the corresponding \findex() argument. In ++ each case, the (n-1)-most characters of s2 are ignored in the ++ search; for findex, this means the starting position of the ++ search is n (the default nis 1, and 0 is treated like 1). For ++ \frindex() it means the default starting point is: ++ ++ length(s2) - length(s1) - n (with the same defaults for n). ++ ++ \fsearch(pattern,string[,position]) ++ Exactly like \findex(), except with a pattern (see [574]Section ++ 7.9) rather than a literal string. ++ ++ \frsearch(pattern,string[,position]) ++ Exactly like \frindex(), except with a pattern rather than a ++ literal string. ++ ++ File Functions: ++ ++ \ffiles(), \fnextfile() ++ It is no longer necessary to copy the file list to an array ++ before use, as shown on p.398 of [575]Using C-Kermit 2nd ++ Edition. \ffiles() and friends now make their own safe copies ++ of the file list. Thus constructions like the following are now ++ possible: ++ ++ for \%i 1 \ffiles(*.txt) 1 { send \fnextfile() } ++ ++ The same is true for the new function \frfiles(), ++ \fdirectories(), and \frdirectories(), described in ++ [576]Section 4.11.3. ++ ++ But note that each reference to \fnextfile() still gets you the ++ next file. So "if newer \fnextfile() foo.txt send \fnextfile()" ++ compares one file's age with that of foo.txt, and then sends an ++ entirely different file. If you're going to refer to the same ++ file more than once, assign it to a variable: ++ ++ asg \%f \fnextfile() ++ if newer \%f foo.txt send \%f ++ ++ (note: assign, not define). ++ ++ Also note that \ffiles(), \frfiles(), \fdirectories(), and ++ \frdirectories() all now accept on optional 2nd argument: the ++ name of an array to load with the resulting file or directory ++ list, explained in [577]Section 4.11.3. So you can also load an ++ array with the filelist when you need to refer to the same file ++ more than once: ++ ++ for \%i 1 \ffiles(*,&a) 1 { if newer \&a[\%i] foo.txt send \&a[\%i] } ++ ++ \fpermissions(file) ++ Returns the platform-specific permissions string for the file, ++ such as "-rw-rw-r--" in UNIX or "(RWE,RWE,RE,E)" in VMS. ++ ++ \fdirname(f) ++ Given a file specification f, this function returns the ++ complete pathname of directory the file is in. ++ ++ Array Functions: ++ ++ \fdimension(&a) ++ Returns the dimension declared for the array whose identifying ++ letter, a-z, or special character "_" or "@", is given after ++ the "&" in the argument. If the array is not declared, 0 is ++ returned. Note that when used with the macro argument vector ++ array, \&_[] (see [578]Section 7.5), the value of this function ++ is one less than \v(argc), and when used with the C-Kermit ++ command-line argument vector array, \&@[], it is equal to the ++ \v(args) variable. Examples: ++ ++ echo \fdimension(&a) ; Not declared. ++ 0 ++ declare \&a[12] ; Now it's declared. ++ echo \fdim(&a) ++ 12 ++ ++ \farraylook(pattern,arrayname) ++ Looks in the given array for the pattern and returns the index ++ of the first element that matches, if any, or -1 if none match. ++ The arrayname can include a range specifier to restrict to ++ search to a segment of the array, e.g. ++ \farraylook(*xyz*,&a[32:63]). For greater detail see ++ [579]Section 7.10.7. ++ ++ \ftablelook(keyword,arrayname[,delimiter]) ++ Looks in the given "table", which must be sorted, for the given ++ keyword. Returns the index of the table element that uniquely ++ matches the given keyword, or -1 if none match, or -2 if more ++ than 1 match. For greater detail see [580]Section 7.10.7. ++ ++ Other new functions: ++ ++ \fip2hex(s) ++ Converts a dotted decimal IP address to an 8-digit hexadecimal ++ number. \fip2hex(128.59.39.2) = 803b2702. ++ ++ \fhex2ip(x) ++ Converts an 8-digit hexadecimal IP address to dotted decimal ++ form, e.g. \fhex2ip(803b2702) = 128.59.39.2. The inverse of ++ \fip2hex(). ++ ++ \fcommand() ++ \frawcommand() ++ These run an external command and return its output; see ++ [581]Section 4.2.8.4. ++ ++ \fdialconvert(s) ++ s is a phone number in either literal or portable format (not a ++ dialing directory entry name). The function returns the dial ++ string that would actually be used when dialing from the ++ current location (after processing country code, area code, and ++ other SET DIAL values). ++ ++ \ferrstring(n) ++ Returns the system error message associated with the (numeric) ++ error code n. UNIX and VMS only. Use in conjunction with ++ \v(errno) or \v(pexitstat). See [582]Section 4.2.5 for a usage ++ example. Note: This function doesn't work in Windows because ++ there is not a consistent error-code-to-message mapping; error ++ code "x" means something completely different depending on ++ whether it comes from the C runtime library, Winsock, a ++ Windows-32 API, TAPI, etc, ++ ++ \fpattern(s) ++ Used in INPUT, REINPUT, and MINPUT commands to denote search ++ strings that are to be treated as patterns rather than ++ literally. ++ ++ Also see [583]Section 7.8 on built-in help for functions. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.4. New IF Conditions ++ ++ IF AVAILABLE feature command ++ Executes the command if the given feature is available. ++ Presently used only to determine if specific authentication and ++ encryption options are available. Type "if available ?" to see ++ which features may be tested. ++ ++ IF FLOAT f1 command ++ Executes command if f1 is a legal floating point number (which ++ includes integers). Use this to preverify arguments for the ++ \ffp...() floating-point arithmetic functions, e.g. "if float ++ \%1 echo \ffpint(\%1)". ++ ++ IF == n1 n2 command ++ Synonym for "if =" (numeric equality). Note that as of C-Kermit ++ 7.0, this and all other numeric comparison operators also work ++ for floating-point numbers. ++ ++ IF != n1 n2 command ++ Executes the command if n1 and n2 are both numbers or variables ++ containing numbers and the value of n1 is not equal to the ++ value of n2. This is equivalent to "if not = n1 n2". ++ ++ IF <= n1 n2 command ++ Executes the command if n1 and n2 are both numbers or variables ++ containing numbers and the value of n1 is less than or equal to ++ the value of n2. This is equivalent to "if not > n1 n2". ++ ++ IF >= n1 n2 command ++ Executes the command if n1 and n2 are both numbers or variables ++ containing numbers and the value of n1 is greater than or equal ++ to the value of n2. Equivalent to "if not < n1 n2". ++ ++ IF COMMAND word command ++ Executes the command if word is a built-in C-Kermit command. ++ Example: ++ ++ if not command copy define { copy run copy \%1 \%2 }". ++ ++ This defines a COPY macro that runs an external COPY command if ++ COPY is not already a built-in command. ++ ++ IF LOCAL command ++ Executes the command if Kermit is in local mode, i.e. if it has ++ a SET LINE, SET PORT, or SET HOST (TELNET, RLOGIN, etc) device ++ or connection open. Does not execute the command if in remote ++ mode. ++ ++ IF MATCH string pattern command ++ Executes the command if the string matches the pattern. For a ++ description of the syntax for the pattern, see [584]Section ++ 4.9.1. If you want to test if the string contains pattern, use ++ IF \fsearch(pattern,string). ++ ++ IF OPEN { DEBUG-LOG, SESSION-LOG, TRANSACTION-LOG, ... } command ++ Executes the command if the given file is open, fails if it is ++ not open. Type IF OPEN ? for a complete list of files that can ++ be checked (all the files that can be opened with the OPEN or ++ LOG commands). ++ ++ IF QUIET command ++ Executes the command if SET QUIET is ON, and does not execute ++ it if SET QUIET is OFF. Example: IF NOT QUIET ECHO { This is a ++ message.}. ++ ++ IF READABLE name ++ Succeeds if name is the name of an existing file or directory ++ that is readable. ++ ++ IF WRITEABLE name ++ Succeeds if name is the name of an existing file or directory ++ that is writeable, e.g.: ++ ++ if not writeable \v(lockdir) echo Please read installation instructions! ++ ++ IF FLAG command ++ This tests a user-settable condition, which can mean anything ++ you like. SET FLAG ON causes subsequent IF FLAG commands to ++ succeed; SET FLAG OFF causes them to fail. One way to use it ++ would be for debugging your scripts; precede any debugging ++ statements with IF FLAG. Then SET FLAG on to debug your script, ++ SET FLAG OFF to run it without debugging. Another common use is ++ for causing an inner loop to cause an outer loop to exit. ++ ++ IF C-KERMIT command ++ C-Kermit, but not Kermit 95 or MS-DOS Kermit, executes the ++ command. ++ ++ IF K-95 command ++ Kermit 95, but not C-Kermit or MS-DOS Kermit, executes the ++ command. ++ ++ IF MS-KERMIT command ++ MS-DOS Kermit, but not C-Kermit or Kermit 95, executes the ++ command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.5. Using More than Ten Macro Arguments ++ ++ The \v(argc) variable now gives the actual number of arguments, even ++ if the number is greater than 9: ++ ++ C-Kermit> define xx echo \v(argc) ++ C-Kermit> xx a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ++ 27 ++ ++ Remember that \v(argc) includes the name of the macro itself, so it is ++ always at least 1, and is always 1 greater than the actual number of ++ arguments. As in versions 6.0 and earlier, if more than 9 arguments ++ are given, only the first nine are assigned to the variables \%1..\%9. ++ ++ The \&_[] array, discussed on page 353 of [585]Using C-Kermit, 2nd ed, ++ now holds all the arguments, up to some implementation-dependent limit ++ (64 or greater), rather than only the first 9. To illustrate: the ++ following macro tells the number of arguments it was called with and ++ then prints them: ++ ++ define show_all_args { ++ local \%i ++ echo \&_[0] - Number of arguments: \feval(\v(argc)-1) ++ for \%i 1 \v(argc)-1 1 { echo \flpad(\%i,3). "\&_[\%i]" } ++ } ++ ++ Within a macro \&_[0], like \%0, contains the name of the macro. ++ ++ At top level, the \&_[] array is filled as follows: ++ ++ * If the first argument on the C-Kermit command line was a filename, ++ or C-Kermit was invoked from a "Kerbang" script ([586]Section ++ 7.19), element 0 contains the filename, and elements 1 through ++ \v(argc)-1 hold the remaining command-line arguments. ++ * Otherwise the program name goes in element 0, and elements 1 ++ through \v(argc)-1 hold any arguments that were included after ++ "--" or "=" ++ ++ The new \%* variable, when used within a macro, is replaced by the ++ text that followed the macro name in the macro invocation. If no ++ arguments were given, \%* is replaced by the empty string. Examples: ++ ++ C-Kermit> define xx echo [\%*] ++ C-Kermit> define \%a oofa ++ C-Kermit> xx ++ [] ++ C-Kermit> xx \%a ++ [oofa] ++ C-Kermit> xx a ++ [a] ++ C-Kermit> xx a b ++ [a b] ++ C-Kermit> xx a b c ++ [a b c] ++ C-Kermit> xx a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ++ [a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z] ++ ++ Note that \%* can not be used at top level, since Kermit does not have ++ access to the raw command line (only to its elements separately, after ++ they have been processed by the shell and the C library). ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 also adds a SHIFT command: ++ ++ SHIFT [ number ] ++ Shifts the macro arguments (except argument 0) the given number ++ of places to the left and adjusts \v(argc) accordingly. The ++ default number is 1. ++ ++ To illustrate, suppose macro XXX is invoked as follows: ++ ++ xxx arg1 arg2 arg3 ++ ++ Then inside XXX, \%1 is "arg1", \%2 is "arg2", and \%3 is "arg3". ++ After a SHIFT command is given inside XXX, then \%1 is "arg2", \%2 is ++ "arg3", and \%3 is empty. \%0 (the name of the macro) remains ++ unchanged. ++ ++ If more than 9 arguments were given, then arguments are shifted into ++ the \%1..9 variables from the argument vector array. ++ ++ At top level, the SHIFT command operates on the \&_[] array and \%1..9 ++ variables; the \&@[] array is not affected. See [587]Section 7.16 for ++ details. ++ ++ The \%* variable is not affected by the SHIFT command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.6. Clarification of Function Call Syntax ++ ++ Spaces are normally stripped from the front and back of each function ++ argument; to prevent this enclose the argument in braces: ++ ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,{ }) ++ ++ However, function calls that contain spaces can make trouble when the ++ function is to be used in a "word" field, since space separates words. ++ For example: ++ ++ for \%i 1 \fsplit(\%a,&a,{ }) 1 { ++ echo \%i. "\&a[\%i]" ++ } ++ ++ In most cases, the trouble can be averted by enclosing the function ++ reference in braces: ++ ++ for \%i 1 {\fsplit(\%a,&a,{ })} 1 { ++ echo \%i. "\&a[\%i]" ++ } ++ ++ or by replacing spaces with \32 (the ASCII code for space): ++ ++ for \%i 1 \fsplit(\%a,&a,\32) 1 { ++ echo \%i. "\&a[\%i]" ++ } ++ ++ Braces are also used in function calls to indicate grouping. For ++ example: ++ ++ \fsubstring(abcd,2,2) = "bc" ++ ++ But suppose "abcd" needed to contain a comma: ++ ++ \fsubstring(ab,cd,2,2) ++ ++ This would cause an error, since "cd" appears to be the second ++ argument, when really you want the first "2" to be the second ++ argument. Braces to the rescue: ++ ++ \fsubstring({ab,cd},2,2) = "b," ++ ++ Similarly, leading and trailing spaces are stripped from each ++ argument, so: ++ ++ \fsubstring( abcd ,2,2) = "bc" ++ ++ but braces preserve them: ++ ++ \fsubstring({ abcd },2,2) = "ab" ++ ++ Given these special uses for braces, there is no way to pass literal ++ braces to the function itself. For example: ++ ++ \fsubstring(ab{cd,2,2) ++ ++ causes an error. ++ ++ So if you need a function to include braces, define a variable ++ containing the string that has braces. Example: ++ ++ define \%a ab{cd ++ \fsubstring(\%a,2,2) = "b{" ++ ++ If the string is to start with a leading brace and end with a closing ++ brace, then double braces must appear around the string (which itself ++ is enclosed in braces): ++ ++ define \%a {{{foo}}} ++ \fsubstring(\%a) = "{foo}" ++ ++ This also works for any other kind of string: ++ ++ define \%a {{ab{cd}} ++ echo \fsubstring(\%a) = "ab{cd" ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.7. Autodownload during INPUT Command Execution ++ ++ As of 6.1 / 1.1.12, C-Kermit can be told to look for incoming Kermit ++ (or Zmodem) packets during execution of an INPUT command. By default ++ (for consistency with earlier releases), this is not done. You can ++ enable this feature with: ++ ++ SET INPUT AUTODOWNLOAD ON ++ ++ (and disable it again with OFF.) ++ ++ One possible use for this feature is as a server mode with a time ++ limit: ++ ++ INPUT 3600 secret-string-to-end-the-INPUT-command ++ ++ In this example, any GET, SEND, or REMOTE commands received within one ++ hour (3600 seconds) of when the INPUT command was issued will be ++ executed. Here's another example, in which we want to stay open until ++ 11:30pm, or until interrupted by seven consecutive Ctrl-C (\3) ++ characters: ++ ++ INPUT 23:30:00 \3\3\3\3\3\3\3 ++ ++ The INPUT AUTODOWNLOAD setting is displayed by SHOW SCRIPTS or SHOW ++ INPUT. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.8. Built-in Help for Functions. ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 7.0, you may obtain a description of the calling ++ conventions and return values of any built-in function, such as ++ \fsubstring(), with the new HELP FUNCTION command; give the function's ++ name without the leading "\f", e.g. "help func substring". You can use ++ ?, completion, and abbreviation in the normal manner. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.9. Variable Assignments ++ ++ 7.9.1. Assignment Operators ++ ++ Programmers accustomed to languages such as C or Fortran might find ++ Kermit's method of assigning values to variables unnatural or awkward. ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 7.0, you can use the following alternative ++ notation: ++ ++ .name = value is equivalent to DEFINE name value ++ .name := value is equivalent to ASSIGN name value ++ .name ::= value is equivalent to ASSIGN name \feval(value) ++ ++ When the command begins with a period (.), this indicates an ++ assignment. The name can be a macro name, a \%{digit,letter} variable, ++ or an array element. There can be space(s) between "." and the name. ++ Examples: ++ ++ .\%a = This is a string ; Same as "define \%a This is a string" ++ echo \%a ++ This is a string ++ ++ .xxx = \%a ; Same as "define xxx \%a" ++ echo \m(xxx) ++ \%a ++ ++ .xxx := \%a ; Same as "assign xxx \%a" ++ echo \m(xxx) ++ This is a string ++ ++ declare \&a[2] ; Use with arrays... ++ define \%i 2 ++ .\&a[1] = first ++ .\&a[\%i] = second ++ ++ The following sequence illustrates the differences among three levels ++ of evaluation: ++ ++ .\%x = 2 ; Define a variable to have a numeric value ++ .\%y = (3 + \%x) ; Define another variable as an arithmetic expression ++ ++ .xxx = 4 * \%y ; "=" simply copies the right-hand side. ++ echo \m(xxx) ++ 4 * \%y ++ ++ .xxx := 4 * \%y ; ":=" evaluates the variables first, then copies. ++ echo \m(xxx) ++ 4 * (3 + 2) ++ ++ .xxx ::= 4 * \%y ; "::=" evaluates the expression, then copies. ++ echo \m(xxx) ++ 20 ++ ++ You can also use this syntax to clear (undefine) a variable: ++ ++ .\%a = oofa ; Define the variable ++ echo "\%a" ++ "oofa" ++ .\%a ; Clear the variable ++ echo "\%a" ++ "" ++ ++ Extra credit: Can you guess what happens below when the file "abc" ++ does not exist? ++ ++ fopen /read \%c abc ++ if fail ... ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.9.2. New Assignment Commands ++ ++ Recall the DEFINE and ASSIGN commands, and their hidden counterparts, ++ _DEFINE and _ASSIGN. The former take the variable name literally, the ++ latter evaluate the variable-name field to form the variable name ++ dynamically. Examples: ++ ++ DEFINE \%x foo ; Sets the value of the variable \%x to "foo". ++ DEFINE \%a \%x ; Sets the value of the variable \%a to "\%x". ++ _DEFINE x_\%a \%x ; Sets the value of the variable x_foo to "\%x". ++ ASSIGN \%a \%x ; Sets the value of the variable \%a to the "foo". ++ _ASSIGN x_\%a \%x ; Sets the value of the variable x_foo to "foo". ++ ++ This concept has been carried over to the remaining ++ variable-assignment commands: EVALUATE, INCREMENT, and DECREMENT: ++ ++ EVALUATE variablename expression ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and assigns its value to ++ the variable whose name is given. Example: "eval \%a 1+1" ++ assigns "2" to \%a. ++ ++ _EVALUATE metaname expression ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and assigns its value to ++ the variable whose name is computed from the given metaname. ++ Example: "eval foo<\%a>::\%1 \%2 * (\%3 + \%4)" assigns the ++ value of "\%2 * (\%3 + \%4)" to the variable whose name is ++ computed from "foo<\%a>::\%1". ++ ++ INCREMENT variablename [ expression ] ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and adds its value to the ++ value of the variable whose name is given. Example: "increment ++ \%a". ++ ++ _INCREMENT metaname [ expression ] ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and adds its value to the ++ value of the variable whose name is computed from the given ++ metaname. Example: "_increment Words::\%1.count[\%2]". ++ ++ DECREMENT variablename [ expression ] ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and subtracts its value ++ from the value of the variable whose name is given. ++ ++ _DECREMENT metaname [ expression ] ++ Evaluates the arithmetic expression and subtracts its value ++ from the value of the variable whose name is computed from the ++ given metaname. ++ ++ WARNING: The syntax of the EVALUATE command has changed since C-Kermit ++ 6.0 and K95 1.1.17. Previously, it did not include a variable name, ++ only an expression. To restore the old behavior, use SET EVALUATE OLD. ++ To return to the new behavior after restoring the old behavior, use ++ SET EVALUATE NEW. ++ ++ NOTE: There are no analogs to the "_" commands for the operators ++ described in [588]Section 7.9.1; those operators can not be used to ++ assign values to variables whose names must be computed. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10. Arrays ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds lots of new array-related features, and groups them ++ together under the NEW ARRAY command: ++ ++ ARRAY { CLEAR, COPY, DECLARE, DESTROY, RESIZE, SHOW, SORT } ++ ++ In each of the ARRAY commands, wherever an array name is expected, ++ "short forms" may be used. For example, all of the following are ++ acceptable: ++ ++ array show \&a[] (or SHOW ARRAY...) ++ array show &a[] ++ array show a[] ++ array show &a ++ array show a ++ ++ In addition, ranges are accepted in the ARRAY COPY, ARRAY CLEAR, ARRAY ++ SET, ARRAY SHOW, and ARRAY SORT commands: ++ ++ array clear \&a[16] ; Clears 16 thru end ++ array clear &a[16] ; Ditto ++ array clear a[16] ; Ditto ++ ++ array clear \&a[16:32] ; Clears 16 thru 32 ++ array clear &a[16:32] ; Ditto ++ array clear a[16:32] ; Ditto ++ ++ When using array names as function arguments, you must omit the "\" ++ and you must include the "&". You may optionally include empty ++ brackets. Examples: ++ ++ \fsplit(\%a,a) ; Bad ++ \fsplit(\%a,\&a) ; Bad ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a[3]) ; Bad ++ ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a) ; Good ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a[]) ; Good ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.1. Array Initializers ++ ++ Beginning in C-Kermit 7.0, you may initialize an array -- in whole or ++ in part -- in its declaration: ++ ++ [ ARRAY ] DECLARE array-name[size] [ = ] [ value1 [ value2 [...] ] ] ++ ++ For compatibility with versions 5A and 6.0, the ARRAY keyword is ++ optional. DECLARE can also be spelled DCL. ++ ++ Initializers are (a) optional, (b) start with element 1, (c) must be ++ enclosed in braces if they contain spaces, and (d) are evaluated ++ according to normal rules by the DECLARE command prior to assignment. ++ Thus the assignments made here are the same as those made by the ++ ASSIGN command. This allows you to initialize array elements from the ++ values of other variables. If you actually want to initialize an array ++ element to variable's name, as opposed to its value, use double ++ backslashes (as in "\\&a", "\\v(time)", etc). ++ ++ The size (dimension) of the array is optional. If the size is omitted, ++ as in "\&a[]", then the array sizes itself to the number of ++ initializers; if there are no initializers the array is not declared ++ or, if it was declared previously, it is destroyed. If a size is ++ given, any extra elements in the initialization list are discarded and ++ ignored. ++ ++ NOTE: Unlike in C, the list of initializers is NOT enclosed in braces. ++ Instead, braces are used to group multiple words together. So: ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] = { one two three } ++ ++ would create an array with two elements (0 and 1), with element 1 ++ having the value " one two three ". ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[16] ++ Declares the array \&a with 17 elements (0 through 16), in ++ which all elements are initially empty. If the array \&a[] ++ existed before, the earlier copy is destroyed. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE &a[16] ++ ARRAY DECLARE a[16] ++ ARRAY DCL \&a[16] ++ ARRAY DCL &a[16] ++ ARRAY DCL a[16] ++ DECLARE \&a[16] ++ DECLARE &a[16] ++ DECLARE a[16] ++ DCL \&a[16] ++ DCL &a[16] ++ DCL a[16] ++ All of the above are the same as the first example. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[16] = alpha beta {gamma delta} ++ Declares the array \&a with 17 elements (0 through 16), ++ initializing \&a[1] to "alpha", \&a[2] to "beta", and \&a[3] to ++ "gamma delta". The remaining elements are empty. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] = alpha beta {gamma delta} ++ Same as the previous example, but the array is automatically ++ dimensioned to 3. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[3] = alpha beta {gamma delta} epsilon zeta ++ Too many initializers; only the first three are kept. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[0] ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] ++ ARRAY DECLARE &a[] ++ ARRAY DECLARE &a ++ ARRAY DECLARE a ++ DECLARE \&[0] ++ DECLARE a ++ DCL a ++ All of these are equivalent. Each destroys \&a[] if it exists. ++ Declaring an array with a dimension of 0 is the same as ARRAY ++ DESTROY arrayname. ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] = \%1 \%2 \%3 ++ Declares the array \&a with 3 elements (0 through 3), ++ initializing \&a[1] to the value of \%1, \&a[2] to the value of ++ \%2, and \&a[3] to the value of \%3. In this case, any ++ reference to one of these array elements is replaced by the ++ value of the corresponding \%n variable at the time the ++ declaration was executed (immediate evaluation; the array ++ element's value does not change if the initializer variable's ++ value changes). ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] = \\%1 \\%2 \\%3 ++ Declares the array \&a with 3 elements (0 through 3), ++ initializing \&a[1] to the string "\%1", \&a[2] to "\%2", and ++ \&a[3] to "\%3". In this case any reference to one of these ++ array elements is replaced by the CURRENT value of the ++ corresponding \%n variable (deferred evaluation -- the array ++ element's value follows the value of the initializer variable). ++ ++ The equal sign (=) preceding the initializer list is optional, but is ++ recommended for clarity. If you need to initialize element 1 to a ++ literal equal sign, use two of them, separated by a space, as in this ++ example: ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] = = + - * / ++ ++ Remember, element 0 is not initialized by the DECLARE command. To ++ initialize element 0, use a regular DEFINE or ASSIGN command: ++ ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[] one two three four five six seven eight nine ++ DEFINE \&a[0] zero ++ ++ Finally, remember that every command level has its own local array, ++ \&_[], containing all the macro arguments (\%0, \%1, ...) for that ++ level. See [589]Section 7.5 for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.2. Turning a String into an Array of Words ++ ++ The \fsplit(s1,&a,s2,s3) function assigns the words of string s1 to ++ successive elements of the array (beginning with element 1) whose ++ identifying letter, a-z, is given after the "&" in the second ++ argument, using break and include characters given in s2 and s3. See ++ [590]Section 7.3 for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.3. Arrays of Filenames ++ ++ See [591]Section 4.11.3 for news about how \ffiles() and related ++ functions can assign a list of filenames to an array. To recapitulate ++ briefly here: ++ ++ \ffiles(*,&a) ++ ++ assigns all files that match the first argument to the array denoted ++ by the second argument. If the array has not been declared, it is ++ declared automatically, with exactly the number of elements needed to ++ hold the file list; if it was previously declared, it is destroyed and ++ reused. The filenames are assigned starting at array element 1. ++ Element 0 holds the number of files in the list. ++ ++ The DIRECTORY command ([592]Section 4.5.1) can also create filename ++ arrays if you give it the /ARRAY: switch; this allows selection ++ criteria beyond whether the filename matches the given pattern. ++ ++ All functions and commands that create filename arrays store the ++ number of filenames, n, as element 0 of the array, and the filenames ++ as elements 1 through n. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.4. Automatic Arrays ++ ++ In a command file or macro, you can now have local (automatic) arrays. ++ Just give the name followed by empty subscript brackets (no spaces ++ inside the brackets please) in a LOCAL command, and then declare the ++ array: ++ ++ LOCAL \%a \&a[] oofa ++ ARRAY DECLARE \&a[32] = value1 value2 value3 ... ++ ++ This declares the scalar variable \%a, the array \&a[], and the macro ++ name "oofa" to be local, and then declares the new local copy of \&a[] ++ with 32 elements, perhaps assigning some initial values. When C-Kermit ++ exits from the command file or macro containing these command, the ++ previous \&a[] array is restored (and if there was no \&a[] at any ++ higher level, this will still be true). The process can be repeated to ++ any level. Thus it is now safe to write scripts or macros containing ++ arrays without danger of interfering with global arrays of the same ++ name. ++ ++ Just as scalars are inherited by lower command levels, so are arrays. ++ So, for example, if \&a[] is declared at top level, all lower levels ++ will see it unless they include a "local \&a[]" statement, in which ++ case all levels at and beneath the level where the LOCAL statement was ++ executed will see the local copy. This too can be repeated to any ++ level. ++ ++ On the other hand, if you DECLARE an array at a lower command level ++ without also making it LOCAL, this replaces the copy that was declared ++ at the lowest command level above this one. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.5. Sorting Arrays ++ ++ Although arrays can be sorted using FOR loops as shown on page 383 of ++ Using C-Kermit, 2nd Ed., this involves quite a bit of repetitive ++ interpretation by the command parser, and so can be slow for large ++ arrays. For this reason, C-Kermit 7.0 adds a built-in SORT command: ++ ++ ARRAY SORT [ switches ] array [ array2 ] ++ Sorts the given array in place. Sorting is strictly lexical ++ (string based). The array name can be given fully, e.g. ++ "\&a[]", or the "\" and/or "&" and/or brackets can be omitted, ++ e.g. "array sort \&a[]", "sort &a", "sort a". Also, a range can ++ be indicated in the brackets as noted in [593]Section 7.10, to ++ restrict the sort to a range of elements (equivalent to the ++ /RANGE switch, described just below), e.g. "array sort ++ &a[20:30]". ++ ++ A second array may be specified. If it is, and if it is at least as ++ big as the first array, it is sorted according to the first array. For ++ a sample application, see [594]Section 7.10.10. ++ ++ See [595]Section 1.5 for an explanation of switches. The optional ++ switches are: ++ ++ /CASE:{ON,OFF} ++ /CASE:ON means that alphabetic case is significant in ++ comparisons; uppercase letters are sorted before lowercase ++ ones. /CASE:OFF means case is ignored, e.g. "A" is the same as ++ "a". If this switch is not given, sorting is according the ++ current SET CASE setting. ++ ++ /KEY:n ++ Comparison begins at position n(1-based) in each string. If no ++ key is given, the entire strings are compared. Only one key can ++ be given. If an array element is shorter than the key value, n, ++ that element is considered empty for comparison purposes, and ++ therefore lexically less than any element at least ncharacters ++ long. ++ ++ /NUMERIC ++ If this switch is included, it means sorting should be numeric, ++ rather than lexical. The sort key is the string starting at the ++ key position, skipping any leading blanks or tabs, and then as ++ much of the string from that point on that fits the definition ++ of "numeric", terminating at the first character that does not ++ qualify. A numeric string has an optional sign (+ or -) ++ followed by one or more digits, and (if your version of Kermit ++ was built with floating-point support; see [596]Section 7.23 ) ++ zero or one decimal point (period). If both /CASE and /NUMERIC ++ are given, /NUMERIC takes precedence. ++ ++ /RANGE:n[:m] ++ Sort elements nthrough m of the array. By default, the entire ++ array from element 1 to its dimensioned size is sorted, which ++ might produce surprising results if the array is not full; see ++ example in [597]Section 7.10.7. If ":m" is omitted from the ++ range, the dimensioned size is used. Thus, to sort an entire ++ array, \&a[], including its 0th element, use "sort /range:0 ++ &a". You can also sort any desired section of an array, e.g. ++ "sort /range:10:20 &a" or "sort /range:\%i:\%j-1 &b". As noted ++ above, you can also specify a range in the array-name brackets. ++ If you specify a range in the array-name brackets AND with a ++ /RANGE switch, the ones in the brackets take precedence. ++ ++ /REVERSE ++ Sort in reverse order. If this switch is not given, the array ++ is sorted in ascending order. ++ ++ Remember that numeric switch arguments can be numbers, arithmetic ++ expressions, or variables whose values are numbers or expressions, as ++ illustrated in the /RANGE examples above. ++ ++ A typical sorting application might be to list students' test scores ++ in descending order. Suppose you had the following records: ++ ++ olaf 65 ++ olga 98 ++ ivan 83 ++ xena 100 ++ ++ (and so on) stored in array \&s[] (e.g. by reading them from a file as ++ illustrated in [598]section 7.10.7). In these records, the student's ++ name is in columns 1-9 and the score in 10-12. So to rearrange the ++ list in descending order of score: ++ ++ sort /key:10 /reverse &s ++ ++ Then to list your top five students: ++ ++ for \%i 1 5 1 { echo \&s[\%i] } ++ ++ Or more simply (see next section): ++ ++ show array a[1:5] ++ ++ To illustrate the difference between a lexical and a numeric sort, ++ suppose you have the following records (the lines that are numbered, ++ starting at column 1) in array \&a[]: ++ ++ Column 1 2 ++ 12345678901234567890 ++ ++ 1. Ivan 10.0 2. Olaf 9.95 3. Olga 101.5 ++ ++ ARRAY SORT /KEY:10 &a[] would order them 3,1,2, but ARRAY SORT /KEY:10 ++ /NUMERIC &a[] would order them 2,1,3. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.6. Displaying Arrays ++ ++ The SHOW ARRAY command (or ARRAY SHOW) now accepts an optional ++ array-name argument: ++ ++ SHOW ARRAY \&a[] ++ ++ (you can leave off the \, the \&, and/or the []'s if you like; "show ++ array a" is equivalent to "show array \&a[]"). When an array is ++ specified, its dimension is shown and all defined (non-empty) elements ++ are listed. ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ assign \%n \ffiles(*,&a) ; Fill an array with filenames ([599]Section 4.11.3 ++) ++ show array \&a[] ; Show the array we just read ++ array show \&a[] ; Same as previous ++ array sort \&a[] ; Sort the array ++ array show \&a[] ; Show it after sorting ++ array show \&a ; Show it again ++ array show &a ; Show it again ++ array show a ; Show it again ++ ++ (The final four commands demonstrate the alternative forms that are ++ accepted for the array name.) ++ ++ If you SHOW ARRAY without giving an array name, all defined arrays are ++ listed by name and dimension, but their contents are not shown. ++ ++ You can also show a piece of an array by including a subscript or ++ range within the array brackets: ++ ++ array show \&a[5] ; Shows \&a[5] ++ array show &a[3:8] ; Shows \&a[3] through \&a[8] ++ array show a[:\%n-1] ; Shows \&a[0] through \&a[\%n-1] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.7. Other Array Operations ++ ++ ARRAY DESTROY arrayname ++ Destroys and undeclares the named array. Subscripts or ranges ++ are not accepted in this command. ++ ++ ARRAY COPY array1 array2 ++ Copies the first array to the second array. If the target array ++ has not been declared, it is created automatically with the ++ same size as the first. If it has been declared, it will be ++ used as declared; if the source array is larger, only as much ++ of it as will fit is copied to the target array. Syntax for ++ array1 and array2 is as in ARRAY SHOW (SHOW ARRAY). Example: ++ ++ .\%n := \ffiles(*,&a) ; Create and load array A with a file list. ++ array copy &a &b ; Copy array A to array B. ++ ++ The ARRAY COPY command also lets you copy pieces of arrays by ++ including range specifiers, as in these examples: ++ ++ ARRAY COPY \&a[4:27] \&b ++ This copies \&a[] elements 4-27 to \&b[] elements 1-23, ++ creating \&b[] if necessary or, if \&b[] is already ++ declared, stopping early if its size is less than 23. ++ ++ ARRAY COPY \&a[4:27] \&b[12] ++ This copies \&a[] elements 4-27 to \&b[] elements 12-35, ++ creating \&b[] if necessary or, if \&b[] is already ++ declared, stopping early if its size is less than 35. ++ ++ ARRAY COPY \&a[4:27] \&b[12:14] ++ This copies \&a[] elements 4-6 to \&b[] elements 12-14, ++ creating \&b[] if necessary or, if \&b[] is already ++ declared, stopping early if its size is less than 14. ++ ++ ARRAY COPY \&a[17] \&b ++ This copies all the elements of \&a[] starting with 17 ++ until the last to \&b[], creating \&b[] if necessary or, ++ if \&b[] is already declared, stopping early if \&b[] is ++ not big enough. ++ ++ ARRAY CLEAR arrayname ++ Sets all the elements of the array to the empty value. You may ++ also include a range specifier to clear only a selected portion ++ of the array; for example "array clear \&a[37:214]". If the ++ range is out of bounds, only the part of the array that is in ++ bounds is cleared. ++ ++ ARRAY SET arrayname [ value ] ++ Sets all the elements of the array to the given value. If no ++ value is given, the array is cleared. You may also include a ++ range specifier to set only a selected portion of the array; ++ for example "array set \&a[1:9] -1". If the range is out of ++ bounds, only the part of the array that is in bounds is set. ++ ++ ARRAY RESIZE arrayname size ++ Resizes the given array. If the size is greater than the ++ array's current dimension, new empty elements are added to the ++ end. If the size is less than the current dimension, the extra ++ elements are discarded. Note: If you have stored the array size ++ in element 0, ARRAY RESIZE does not change this value. ++ Alternative notation: ARRAY RESIZE arrayname[size]. For a ++ practical example, see [600]Section 7.10.11. ++ ++ \farraylook(pattern,arrayname) ++ This function returns the index of the first element of the ++ given array that matches the given pattern (for details about ++ pattern syntax, see [601]section 4.9). The array name can ++ include a range specification to restrict the search to a given ++ segment of the array. If no elements match the pattern, -1 is ++ returned. ++ ++ \ftablelook(keyword,arrayname[,delimiter]) ++ Looks in the given "table", which must be sorted, for the given ++ keyword. The keyword need not be spelled out in full. ++ Pattern-matching characters should not be included as part of ++ the keyword. The function returns the index of the table ++ element that uniquely matches the given keyword, or -1 if none ++ match, or -2 if more than 1 match. ++ ++ A "table" is an array that is sorted in lexical order; each of its ++ elements may contain multiple fields, delimited by the given delimiter ++ character or, if no delimiter is specified, a colon (:). ++ ++ The \farraylook() function does exactly what you tell it. If you give ++ it a pattern that does not include wildcard characters (such as *, ?, ++ etc), it requires an exact match. For example: ++ ++ \farraylook(oofa,&a) ++ ++ searches for the first element of \&a[] whose value is "oofa". But: ++ ++ \farraylook(oofa*,&a) ++ ++ finds the first element whose value starts with "oofa", and; ++ ++ \farraylook(*oofa,&a) ++ ++ finds the first element whose value ends with "oofa", and; ++ ++ \farraylook(*oofa*,&a) ++ ++ finds the first element whose value contains "oofa". ++ ++ Here's a simple demonstration of looking up patterns in arrays: ++ ++ local \&a[] \%x \%n ++ declare \&a[] = zero one two three four five six seven eight nine ten ++ while true { ++ .\%x = 1 ++ .\%n = 0 ++ ask \%a { Pattern? } ++ if not def \%a exit 0 Done. ++ while <= \%x \fdim(&a) { ++ .\%x := \farraylook(\%a,&a[\%x]) ++ if ( < \%x 0 ) break ++ echo \flpad(\%x,3). \&a[\%x] ++ increment \%x ++ increment \%n ++ } ++ if ( < \%n 1 ) echo Pattern not found - "\%a" ++ } ++ ++ The array need not be sorted. When a pattern is given, a search is ++ performed; if there is a match, the matching element's index and the ++ element itself are printed, and the search begins again at the next ++ element. Thus each matching element is printed. If none match, the ++ "Pattern not found" message is printed. The process repeats for as ++ many patterns as the user wants to type, and terminates when the user ++ types an empty pattern. ++ ++ Now let's build a little command parser, consisting of a keyword ++ table, and a loop to look up the user's commands in it with ++ \ftablelook(). In this case the array elements have "fields" separated ++ by colon (:) -- a keyword and a value. Keyword tables must be sorted ++ if \tablelook() is to work right, so after declaring and initializing ++ the table array, we sort it. ++ ++ local \&k[] \%a \%i \%n ++ ++ array declare \&k[] = drive:9 do:8 discuss:7 live:6 spend:5 help:4 quit:0 ++ ++ array sort &k ; Make sure array is sorted ++ echo Type "help" for help. ; Print greeting & instructions ++ ++ while true { ; Loop to get commands ++ undefine \%a ++ while not defined \%a { ; Get a command ++ ask \%a { Command? } ++ } ++ .\%n := \ftablelook(\%a,&k) ; Look up the command ++ switch \%n { ; Handle errors ++ :-1, echo Not found - "\%a" ; Doesn't match ++ continue ++ :-2, echo Ambiguous - "\%a" ; Matches too many ++ continue ++ } ++ switch \fword(\&k[\%n],2) { ; Dispatch according to value ++ :9, echo Driving..., break ++ :8, echo Doing..., break ++ :7, echo Discussing..., break ++ :6, echo Living..., break ++ :5, echo Spending..., break ++ :4, echo { Commands (may be abbreviated):} ++ for \%i 1 \fdim(&k) 1 { ++ echo { \%i. \fword(\&k[\%i],1) } ++ } ++ break ++ :0, exit 0 Bye! ++ :default, stop 1 Internal error ++ } ++ } ++ ++ In this example, keywords are "drive", "do", "discuss", etc, and their ++ values are unique numbers (values need not be numbers, and there need ++ not be only one value -- there can be 0, 1, 2, or more of them). The ++ user types a command, which can be the whole word (like "help") or any ++ abbreviation (like "hel", "he", or just "h"). If this does not match ++ any keywords, \ftablelook() returns -1; if it matches more than one ++ (as would "d"), it returns -2. Otherwise the array index is returned, ++ 1 or higher. ++ ++ Given the array index \%n, we can get the table values as follows: ++ ++ \fword(\&k[\%n],1) is the keyword (first field) ++ \fword(\&k[\%n],2) is the value (second field, in this case a number) ++ ++ In our example, we use the value (number) as the SWITCH variable. As ++ noted, \fablelook() expects the array elements to contain multiple ++ fields separated by colon (:) (or other character that you specify, ++ e.g. \ftablelook(\%a,&a,^)) and when matching the keyword, ignores the ++ first delimiter and everything after it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.8. Hints for Using Arrays ++ ++ C programmers are accustomed to out-of-bounds array references causing ++ core dumps or worse. In C-Kermit: ++ ++ * A reference to an an out-of-bounds array element returns the empty ++ string. ++ * An attempt to set the value of an array element that is out of ++ bounds or that has not been declared simply fails. ++ ++ C programmers expect an array of size nto have elements 0 through n-1. ++ Fortran programmers expect the same array to have elements 1 through ++ n. C-Kermit accommodates both styles; when you declare an array of ++ size n, it has n=1 elements, 0 through n, and you can use the array in ++ your accustomed manner, 0-based or 1-based. ++ ++ However, note that C-Kermit has certain biases towards 1-based arrays: ++ ++ * Assignment of file lists starts with element 1 ([602]Section ++ 7.10.3). ++ * Assignment by \fsplit() starts with element 1 ([603]Section 7.3). ++ * Array initialization skips the 0th element. To initialize a ++ 0-based array, use something like this: ++ declare \&a[3] = one two three ++ .\&a[0] = zero ++ * The ARRAY SORT command skips the 0th element unless you include ++ /RANGE:0 ++ * The SHIFT command ignores element 0 of the \&_[] array. ++ ++ The distinction between an array's dimensioned size and the number of ++ elements in the array is important when sorting. To illustrate: ++ ++ declare \&a[100] ; Declare array &a with 100 elements ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ; Open a file ++ if fail... ++ for \%i 1 \fdim(&a) 1 { ; Read the file into the array ++ fread \%c \&a[\%i] ++ if fail break ++ } ++ fclose \%c ++ if > \%i \fdim(&a) end 1 File has too many lines for array. ++ .\%n ::= \%i - 1 ++ echo File has \%n line(s). ++ ++ Let's say the file had 95 lines. This leaves elements 96-100 of the ++ array empty. Now suppose you sort the array and write out the result: ++ ++ sort &a ; Sort the whole array ++ fopen /write \%o oofa.txt.sorted ; Open an output file ++ if fail ... ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ; Write out 95 records ++ fwrite /line \%o \&a[\%i] ++ if fail end 1 Write error ++ } ++ close write ++ ++ You might be surprised at the contents of "oofa.txt.sorted" -- five ++ empty elements, 96-100, floated to the top of the array in the sort, ++ and since your write loop only had 95 iterations, the final 5 lines of ++ the sorted file are lost. ++ ++ Therefore, when dealing with partially filled arrays -- especially ++ when sorting them -- remember to specify the number of elements. A ++ handy way of recording an array's "true" size is to put it in the 0th ++ element. That way, it "travels with the array". To illustrate ++ (continuing the previous example at the "close read" statement): ++ ++ close read ++ if > \%i \fdim(&a) end 1 File has too many lines for array. ++ .\&a[0] ::= \%i - 1 ; Assign number of lines to \&a[0]. ++ echo File has \&a[0] line(s). ++ sort /range:1:\&a[0] &a ++ open write oofa.txt.sorted ++ if fail ... ++ for \%i 1 \&a[0] 1 { ++ writeln file \&a[\%j] ++ if fail end 1 Write error ++ } ++ close write ++ ++ Note the SORT switch, /RANGE:1:\&a[0]. This keeps the sort 1-based, ++ and uses element 0 of the array as its size indicator. ++ ++ Finally, note that even though some commands or functions might put a ++ size in array element 0, no built-in functions or commands depend on a ++ size actually being there. Thus you are perfectly free to replace the ++ size with something else and treat the array as 0-based. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.9. Do-It-Yourself Arrays ++ ++ Kermit's \&x[] arrays are nice because of the accompanying built-in ++ functionality -- ARRAY commands, built-in functions that load and ++ search arrays, automatic evaluation of arithmetic expressions within ++ the subscript brackets, and so on. Yet they also have certain ++ limitations: ++ ++ 1. Except when created by dynamic loading (e.g. by \ffiles()) they ++ must be declared and dimensioned in advance. ++ 2. Indices must be numeric, positive, and in range. ++ 3. There can be only one dimension. Matrices or other ++ higher-dimensioned arrays are not available. ++ ++ But none of this is to say you can't invent any kind of data structure ++ you like. In [604]Section 7.9.2 you can see some examples. Here's ++ another (courtesy of Dat Thuc Nguyen), in which a pair of matrices is ++ created and then added: no dimensioning necessary. ++ ++ .row = 4 ++ .col = 9 ++ ++ ; MACRO TO PRINT A MATRIX ++ define PMATRIX { ++ echo Matrix \%1: ++ for \%r 1 \m(row) 1 { ++ for \%c 1 \m(col) 1 { ++ xecho \flpad(\m(\%1[\%r][\%c]),4) ++ } ++ echo ++ } ++ echo ++ } ++ ; CREATE MATRICES A AND B ++ for \%r 1 \m(row) 1 { ++ for \%c 1 \m(col) 1 { ++ _eval A[\%r][\%c] \%r + \%c ++ _eval B[\%r][\%c] \%r * \%c ++ } ++ } ++ ; CREATE MATRIX C = SUM OF MATRIX A AND MATRIX B ++ for \%r 1 \m(row) 1 { ++ for \%c 1 \m(col) 1 { ++ _eval C[\%r][\%c] \m(A[\%r][\%c]) + \m(B[\%r][\%c]) ++ } ++ } ++ pmatrix A ; Print Matrix A ++ pmatrix B ; Print Matrix B ++ pmatrix C ; Print Matrix C ++ ++ In the example, we use matrix-like notation to create macros with ++ names like "A[1][1]", "B[3][7]", and so on. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.10. Associative Arrays ++ ++ An associative array is a special kind of Do-It-Yourself array. It ++ differs from a regular array in that its indices need not be numbers ++ -- they can be anything at all -- words, filenames, names of months, ++ any character string at all, and that it doesn't have to be (and in ++ fact can't be) declared. An associative array element is simply a ++ macro whose name ends with an index enclosed in angle brackets, for ++ example: ++ ++ file ++ ++ More formally: ++ ++ basename ++ ++ An associative array is a collection of all associative array elements ++ that have the same basename. Any number of associative arrays, each ++ with any number of elements, can exist at the same time. ++ ++ An associative array element can be assigned a value, such as "1", ++ just like any other macro: ++ ++ define file 1 ; Give "file" the value "1". ++ ++ or: ++ ++ assign file \%a ; Give it the value of the variable \%a. ++ ++ However, since an associative array element is a macro, it may not ++ have an empty (null) value, since assigning an empty value to a macro ++ undefines the macro. ++ ++ You can refer to the value of an associative array element using the ++ familiar notation for macro values: ++ ++ echo \m(file) ; Echo the value of "file". ++ ++ Associative arrays are most useful, however, when the value of the ++ index is a variable. In that case, you must use the "hidden" forms of ++ the DEFINE or ASSIGN commands that evaluate the macro name before ++ making the assignment (see [605]Using C-Kermit, page 457). Example: ++ ++ define \%f oofa.txt ++ _define file<\%f> 1 ++ echo file<\%f> = \m(file<\%f>) ++ ++ prints: ++ ++ file = 1 ++ ++ and then: ++ ++ _increment file<\%f> ++ echo file<\%f> = \m(file<\%f>) ++ ++ prints: ++ ++ file = 2 ++ ++ What are associative arrays good for? The classic example is "word ++ counts": finding the number of times each word is used in a text ++ without knowing in advance what the words are. Without associative ++ arrays, your program would have to build a table of some kind, and ++ every time a word was encountered, look it up in the table to find its ++ position and counter, or add it to the table if it wasn't found -- a ++ time-consuming and laborious process. Associative arrays, however, let ++ you use the word itself as the table index and therefore sidestep all ++ the table building and lookups. ++ ++ Let's work through a practical example. Suppose you have a ++ file-transfer log in which each line is composed of a number of ++ blank-separated fields, and the 9th field is a filename (which happens ++ to be the format of certain FTP server logs, as well as of C-Kermit's ++ new FTP-format transaction log, described in [606]Section 4.17.2), for ++ example: ++ ++ Wed Jul 14 09:35:31 1999 22 xx.mit.edu 13412 /pub/ftp/mm/intro.txt .... ++ ++ and you want to find out how many times each file was transferred. The ++ following code builds an associative array, file<>, containing the ++ counts for each file: ++ ++ local name line max \%c \%n ; Declare local variables ++ fopen /read \%c /var/log/ftpd.log ; Open the log file ([607]Section 1.22) ++ if fail exit 1 Can't open log ; Check ++ while true { ; Loop for each record ++ fread /line \%c line ; Read a line ++ if fail break ; Check for end of file ++ .name := \fword(\m(line),9,{ }) ; Get 9th field = filename (Sec 7.3) ++ _increment file<\m(name)> ; Increment its counter (Sec 7.9.2) ++ } ++ fclose \%c ; Close file when done. ++ ++ Note that _INCREMENT (and INCREMENT, and [_]DECREMENT) treat an empty ++ (i.e. nonexistent) variable as having a value of 0, and therefore ++ creates the variable with a value of 1. ++ ++ At this point, if you told Kermit to "show macro file<", it would list ++ the associative array. But since you don't necessarily know the names ++ of the files in the array, or even how many elements are in the array, ++ how can you use it in a script program? ++ ++ The idea of creating macro names that include character-string indices ++ enclosed in angle brackets is perfectly arbitrary and doesn't depend ++ on any Kermit features that weren't already there -- we could just as ++ easily have used some other notation, such as "file[index]", ++ "file:index", or "file.index", and the code above would have worked ++ just as well (with the corresponding syntax adjustments). But to be ++ able to use an associative array in a program after the array is ++ built, we need a method of accessing all its elements without knowing ++ in advance what they are. That's where the chosen notation comes in. ++ ++ First of all, any macro name that ends with "" (where "xxx" is ++ any string) is case sensitive, unlike all other macro names, which are ++ case independent. To illustrate, "file" and "file" ++ are two distinct macros, whereas "OOFA", "Oofa", and "oofa", when used ++ as macro names, are all the same. ++ ++ Second, the new \faaconvert() function converts an associative array ++ (that is, all macros with names of the form "base" that have ++ the same "base" part) into a pair of regular arrays and returns the ++ number of elements: ++ ++ \faaconvert(name,&a[,&b]) ++ ++ "name" is the name of the associative array, without the angle ++ brackets or index ("file" in our example). ++ ++ The second argument is the name of a regular array in which to store ++ the indices of the associative array (filenames in our example); if an ++ array of this name already exists, it is destroyed unless the array is ++ LOCAL. The third argument is the name of another regular array in ++ which to store the values (the counts in our example), with the same ++ rules about array name collisions. If you care only about the indices ++ and not the values, you can omit the third argument to \faaconvert(). ++ In any case, the associative array is converted, not copied: its ++ elements are moved to the specified regular arrays, so after ++ conversion the original associative array is gone. ++ ++ As with other array-loading functions, \faaconvert() sets element 0 of ++ each array to the number of elements in the array. ++ ++ To continue our example: ++ ++ .max := 0 ; Maximum count ++ .\%n := \faaconvert(file,&a,&b) ; Convert ++ for \%i 1 \%n 1 { ; Loop through values ++ echo \flpad(\%i,3). \&a[\%i]: \&b[\%i] ; Echo this pair ++ if ( > \&b[\%i] \m(max) ) { ; Check for new maximum ++ .name := \&a[\%i] ++ .max := \&b[\%i] ++ } ++ } ++ echo Most popular file: \m(name), accesses: \m(max) ++ ++ This lists the files and counts and then announces which file has the ++ highest count. ++ ++ Now suppose you want to sort the array pair created from an ++ associative array. In our example, \&a[] contains filenames, and \&b[] ++ contains the associated counts. Here we take advantage of the ARRAY ++ SORT command's ability to sort a second array according to the first ++ one: ++ ++ array sort /reverse /numeric &b &a ; Descending sort by count ++ ++ Now to see the top five files and their counts: ++ ++ echo The top 5 files are: ++ for \%i 1 5 1 { ; Loop through top 5 values ++ echo \flpad(\%i,3). \&a[\%i]: \&b[\%i] ; Echo this pair ++ } ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.10.11. Transferring Array Contents to Other Computers ++ ++ The SEND /ARRAY:arrayname command ([608]Section 4.7.1) allows you to ++ send the contents of any array, or any contiguous segment of it, in ++ either text or binary mode to another computer, using Kermit protocol. ++ When used in conjunction with C-Kermit's other features (the array ++ features described in this section; the file i/o package from ++ [609]Section 1.22; its decision-making, pattern-matching, and string ++ manipulation capabilities, and so on) the possibilities are endless: ++ extracts of large files, remote database queries, ..., all without ++ recourse to system-dependent mechanisms such UNIX pipes and filters, ++ thus ensuring cross-platform portability of scripts that use these ++ features. ++ ++ When sending an array in text mode, Kermit appends a line terminator ++ to each array element, even empty ones, and it also converts the ++ character set from your current FILE character-set to your current ++ TRANSFER character-set, if any. No conversions are made or line ++ terminations added in binary mode. For example, the following array: ++ ++ dcl \&a[] = One Two Three Four Five Six ++ ++ is sent as six lines, one word per line, in text mode, and as the bare ++ unterminated string "OneTwoThreeFourFiveSix" in binary mode. ++ ++ You should always include a /TEXT or /BINARY switch in any SEND /ARRAY ++ command to force the desired transfer mode, otherwise you're likely to ++ be surprised by the effects described in [610]Section 4.3. ++ ++ Here are some examples: ++ ++ send /text /array:\&a[] ++ Sends the entire contents of the array \&a[] in text mode. ++ Since an as-name is not included, the receiver is told the ++ filename is _array_a_. ++ ++ send /text /array:&a[] ++ send /text /array:a[] ++ send /text /array:&a ++ send /text /array:a ++ These are all equivalent to the previous example. ++ ++ send /text /array:&a /as-name:foo.bar ++ As above, but the array is sent under the name foo.bar. ++ ++ send /text /array:&a[100:199] /as:foo.bar ++ As above, but only the elements from 100 through 199 are sent. ++ ++ In text-mode transfers, character sets are translated according to ++ your current settings, just as for text files. In binary mode, of ++ course, there is no character-set translation or other conversion of ++ any kind. But remember that array elements can not contain the NUL ++ (ASCII 0) character, since they are implemented as NUL-terminated ++ strings. ++ ++ Here's an example that shows how to send all the lines (up to 1000 of ++ them) from a file animals.txt that contain the words "cat", "dog", or ++ "hog" (see [611]Section 4.9 about pattern matching): ++ ++ declare \&a[1000] ++ fopen /read \%c animals.txt ++ if fail exit 1 ++ .\%i = 0 ++ while true { ++ fread \%c line ++ if fail break ++ if match {\m(line)} {*{cat,[dh]og}*} { ++ increment \%i ++ if ( > \%i \fdim(&a) ) break ++ .\&a[\%i] := \m(line) ++ } ++ } ++ fclose \%c ++ send /array:a[1:\%i] /text ++ ++ Note that we are careful to send only the part of the array that was ++ filled, not the entire array, because there are likely to be lots of ++ unused elements at the end, and these would be sent as blank lines ++ otherwise. ++ ++ This example raises an interesting question: what if we want to send ++ ALL the matching lines, even if there are more than 1000 of them, but ++ we don't know the number in advance? Clearly the problem is limited by ++ Kermit's (and the computer's) memory. If there are a thousand trillion ++ matching lines, they most likely will not fit in memory, and in this ++ case the only solution is to write them first to a temporary file on ++ mass storage and then send the temporary file and delete it ++ afterwards. ++ ++ However, when the selection is likely to fit in memory, the ++ once-familiar technique of initial allocation with extents can be ++ used: ++ ++ if match {\m(line)} {*{cat,[dh]og}*} { ++ increment \%i ++ if ( > \%i \fdim(&a) ) { ++ array resize a \fdim(&a)+100 ++ if fail stop 1 MEMORY FULL ++ echo NEW DIMENSION: \fdim(&a) ++ } ++ .\&a[\%i] := \m(line) ++ } ++ ++ This grows the array in chunks of 100 as needed. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.11. OUTPUT Command Improvements ++ ++ LINEOUT [ text ] ++ This command is exactly like OUTPUT, except it supplies a ++ carriage return at the end of the text. "lineout exit" is ++ exactly the same as "output exit\13". ++ ++ SET OUTPUT SPECIAL-ESCAPES { ON, OFF } ++ This command lets you tell C-Kermit whether to process \N, \L, ++ and \B specially in an OUTPUT command, as distinct from other \ ++ sequences (such as \%a, \13, \v(time), etc). Normally the ++ special escapes are handled. Use SET OUTPUT SPECIAL-ESCAPES OFF ++ to disable them. ++ ++ Disabling special escapes is necessary in situations when you need to ++ transmit lines of data and you have no control over what is in the ++ lines. For example, a file oofa.txt that contains: ++ ++ This is a file ++ It has \%a variables in it ++ And it has \B in it. ++ And it has \L in it. ++ And it has \N in it. ++ And this is the last line. ++ ++ can be sent like this: ++ ++ local line ++ set output special-escapes off ++ fopen /read \%c oofa.txt ++ if fail stop 1 Can't open oofa.txt ++ while success { ++ fread \%c line ++ if fail break ++ ; Add filtering or processing commands here... ++ output \m(line)\13 ++ } ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.12. Function and Variable Diagnostics ++ ++ In C-Kermit 6.0 and earlier, the only diagnostic returned by a failing ++ function call was an empty value, which (a) could not be distinguished ++ from an empty value returned by a successful function call; (b) did ++ not give any indication of the cause of failure; and (c) did not cause ++ the enclosing statement to fail. C-Kermit 7.0 corrects these ++ deficiencies. ++ ++ SET FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS { ON, OFF } ++ when ON, allows built-in functions to return diagnostic ++ messages when improperly referenced, instead of an empty ++ string. FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS are ON by default. When OFF, ++ improperly referenced functions continue to return an empty ++ string. This command also affects built-in variables; in this ++ case, an error message is returned only if the variable does ++ not exist. When FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS are ON, the error message ++ is also printed. ++ ++ For variables, the only message is: ++ ++ ++ ++ where "name" is the name of the nonexistent variable. ++ ++ For functions, the diagnostic message is: ++ ++ ++ ++ where "message" is replaced by a message, and "name" is replaced by ++ the function name, e.g. . Messages ++ include: ++ ++ ARG_BAD_ARRAY An argument contains a malformed array reference. ++ ARG_BAD_DATE An argument contains a malformed date and/or time. ++ ARG_BAD_PHONENUM An argument contains a malformed telephone number. ++ ARG_BAD_VARIABLE An argument contains a malformed \%x variable. ++ ARG_INCOMPLETE An argument is incomplete (e.g. a broken Base64 string). ++ ARG_EVAL_FAILURE An argument could not be evaluated (internal error). ++ ARG_NOT_ARRAY An argument references an array that is not declared. ++ ARG_NOT_NUMERIC An argument that must be integer contains non-digits. ++ ARG_NOT_FLOAT An argument has bad floating-point number format. ++ ARG_NOT_VARIABLE An argument that must be a variable is not a variable. ++ ARG_OUT_OF_RANGE An argument's numeric value is too big or too small, ++ or an argument contains illegal characters (e.g. a hex ++ or Base-64 string). ++ ARG_TOO_LONG An argument's value is too long. ++ ARRAY_FAILURE Failure to create an array. ++ DIVIDE_BY_ZERO Execution of the function would cause division by zero. ++ FLOATING_POINT_OP Execution error in a floating-point operation. ++ FILE_NOT_FOUND Filename argument names a file that can't be found. ++ FILE_NOT_READABLE Filename argument is not a regular file. ++ FILE_NOT_ACCESSIBLE Filename argument names a file that is read-protected. ++ FILE_ERROR Other error with filename argument. ++ FILE_NOT_OPEN A file function was given a channel that is not open. ++ FILE_ERROR_-n A file function got error -n ([612]Section 1.22). ++ LOOKUP_FAILURE Error looking up function (shouldn't happen). ++ MALLOC_FAILURE Failure to allocate needed memory (shouldn't happen). ++ NAME_AMBIGUOUS The function is not uniquely identified. ++ MISSING_ARG A required argument is missing. ++ NO_SUCH_FUNCTION An argument references a function that is not defined. ++ NO_SUCH_MACRO An argument references a macro that is not defined. ++ RESULT_TOO_LONG The result of a function is too long. ++ UNKNOWN_FUNCTION Internal error locating function (shouldn't happen). ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ assign \%m \fmod() ++ ? ++ echo "\fcontents(\%m)" ++ "" ++ echo \fmod(3,x) ++ ? ++ echo \fmod(3,4-2*2) ++ ? ++ ++ Notice the use of \fcontents() in echoing the value of a variable that ++ contains a returned error message. That's because the error message ++ includes the name of the variable or function that failed, so you must ++ use \fcontents() to prevent it from being evaluated again -- otherwise ++ the same error will occur. ++ ++ The handling of function and variable errors is controlled by: ++ ++ SET FUNCTION ERROR { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether invalid function calls or variable references ++ should cause command errors. FUNCTION ERROR is ON by default. ++ When ON, and an error is diagnosed in a built-in function or ++ variable, the command that includes the function call or ++ variable reference fails. The failing command can be handled in ++ the normal way with IF FAILURE / IF SUCCESS, SET TAKE ERROR, or ++ SET MACRO ERROR. ++ ++ When FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS is OFF, there is no error message. ++ ++ SHOW SCRIPTS displays the current FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS and ERROR ++ settings. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.13. Return Value of Macros ++ ++ In C-Kermit 5A and 6.0, there are two ways to return one level from a ++ macro: RETURN value and END number text. When RETURN is used, the ++ value, which can be a number or a text string, is assigned to ++ \v(return). When END was used, however, \v(return) was not set. ++ SUCCESS/FAILURE was set according to whether the number was zero, and ++ the text was printed, but the actual value of the number was lost. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, the END number is available in the \v(return) ++ variable. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.14. The ASSERT, FAIL, and SUCCEED Commands. ++ ++ The ASSERT command is just like the IF command, but without a command ++ to execute. It simply succeeds or fails, and this can be tested by a ++ subsequent IF SUCCESS or IF FAILURE command. Example: ++ ++ ASSERT = 1 1 ++ IF SUCCESS echo 1 = 1. ++ ++ The FAIL command does nothing, but always fails. The SUCCEED command ++ does nothing, but always succeeds. ++ ++ These commands are handy in debugging scripts when you want to induce ++ a failure (or success) that normally would not occur, e.g. for testing ++ blocks of code that normally are not executed. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.15. Using Alarms ++ ++ Alarms may be set in two ways: ++ ++ SET ALARM number ++ Sets an alarm for the given number of seconds "from now", i.e. ++ in the future, relative to when the SET ALARM command was ++ given. Examples: ++ ++ set alarm 60 ; 60 seconds from now ++ set alarm +60 ; The same as "60" ++ set alarm -60 ; Not legal - you can't set an alarm in the past. ++ set alarm 60*60 ; 60 minutes from now. ++ set alarm \%a+10 ; You can use variables, etc. ++ ++ SET ALARM hh:mm:ss ++ Sets an alarm for the specified time. If the given time is ++ earlier than the current time, the alarm is set for the given ++ time in the next day. You may give the time in various formats: ++ ++ set alarm 15:00:00 ; 3:00:00pm ++ set alarm 3:00:00pm ; 3:00:00pm ++ set alarm 3:00pm ; 3:00:00pm ++ set alarm 3pm ; 3:00:00pm ++ ++ SHOW ALARM ++ Displays the current alarm, if any, in standard date-time ++ format (see [613]Section 1.6): yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss. ++ ++ IF ALARM command ++ Executes the command if an alarm has been set and the alarm ++ time has passed. ++ ++ IF ALARM { command-list } [ ELSE { command-list } ] ++ Executes the command-list if an alarm has been set and the ++ alarm time has passed. Otherwise, if an ELSE part is given, its ++ command-list is executed. ++ ++ CLEAR ALARM ++ Clears the alarm. ++ ++ Only one alarm may be set at a time. ++ ++ Example: Suppose you have a script that is always running, and that ++ transfers files periodically, and that keeps a transaction log. ++ Suppose you want to start a new transaction log each day: ++ ++ log transactions \v(date).log ++ set alarm 00:00:00 ; Set an alarm for midnight ++ while true { ; Main script loop ++ xif alarm { ; If the alarm time is past... ++ close transactions ; Close current log ++ log transactions \v(date).log ; Start new one ++ pause 1 ; To make sure 00:00:00 is past ++ set alarm 00:00:00 ; Set a new alarm ++ } ++ ; put the rest of the script here... ++ } ++ ++ Note that IF ALARM -- no matter whether it succeeds or fails -- does ++ NOT clear an expired alarm. Thus, once an alarm has expired, every IF ++ ALARM will succeed until the alarm is cleared (with the CLEAR ALARM ++ command) or reset with a new SET ALARM command. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.16. Passing Arguments to Command Files ++ ++ Beginning in version 7.0, C-Kermit accepts arguments on the TAKE ++ command line, for example: ++ ++ C-Kermit> take oofa.ksc one two {this is three} four ++ ++ This automatically sets the variables \%1 through \%9 to the ++ arguments, and \%0 to the name of the file, in this case: ++ ++ \%0 = /usr/olga/oofa.ksc ++ \%1 = one ++ \%2 = two ++ \%3 = this is three ++ \%4 = four ++ ++ and \%5..\%9 are undefined (empty). Arguments past the ninth are ++ available in the \&_[] argument-vector array ( [614]Section 7.5). ++ ++ The variables are those at the current macro level. Thus, if the TAKE ++ command is executed from within a macro, the macro's arguments are ++ replaced by those given on the TAKE command line (but only if at least ++ one argument is given). The command shown above is exactly equivalent ++ to: ++ ++ assign \%0 /usr/olga/oofa.ksc ++ assign \%1 one ++ assign \%2 two ++ assign \%3 this is three ++ assign \%4 four ++ assign \%5 ++ assign \%6 ++ assign \%7 ++ assign \%8 ++ assign \%9 ++ take oofa.ksc ++ ++ Remember, the variables \%0..\%9 are on the macro call stack, and ++ command files are independent of the macro stack. Thus, if a command ++ file TAKEs another command file and passes arguments to it, the ++ variables are changed from that point on for both files, and so forth ++ for all levels of nested command files without intervening macro ++ invocations. ++ ++ It would have been possible to change C-Kermit to use the overall ++ command stack, rather than the macro stack, for arguments -- this ++ would have made TAKE work exactly like DO, which is "nicer", but it ++ would also have broken countless existing scripts. However, the new ++ SHIFT command ([615]Section 7.5) makes it possible to create an ++ alternative TAKE command that does indeed save and restore the ++ argument variables at its own level around execution of a command ++ file: ++ ++ define mtake { ++ local \%f ++ assign \%f \fcontents(\%1) ++ shift ++ take \%f ++ } ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 also supports a new, easier way to pass arguments to ++ scripts from the system command line: ++ ++ kermit filename arg1 arg2 arg3 ... ++ ++ in which arg1, arg2, arg3 (etc) are arguments for the script (whose ++ filename is given), and are assigned to \%1, \%2, ... \%9. The ++ filename is assigned to \%0. This applies equally to "Kerbang" scripts ++ in UNIX ([616]Section 7.19). For example, suppose you have a file ++ called "showargs" containing the following lines: ++ ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ echo Hello from \%0 ++ show args ++ exit ++ ++ (except not indented, since the "#!" line must be on the left margin). ++ If you give this file execute permission: ++ ++ chmod +x showargs ++ ++ then you can run it exactly as you would run a UNIX shell script, ++ e.g.: ++ ++ $ showargs one two three ++ Hello from /usr/olga/showargs ++ Top-level arguments (\v(argc) = 4): ++ \&_[0] = /usr/olga/showargs ++ \&_[1] = one ++ \&_[2] = two ++ \&_[3] = three ++ ++ Furthermore, the \&_[] array now contains the filename, if one was ++ given as the first command line argument, or it is a "Kerbang" script, ++ in element 0. ++ ++ Otherwise element 0 is program name, and elements 1 through \v(argc)-1 ++ contain the command-line arguments, if any, that appear after "--" or ++ "=", if any. This array is saved and restored around macro calls; ++ recall that inside macros it contains the macro argument vector ++ (allowing you to access arguments programmatically, and to have more ++ than 9 of them). ++ ++ At top level, notice the difference between the \&@[] and \&_[] ++ arrays. The former includes C-Kermit options; the latter omits them. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.17. Dialogs with Timed Responses ++ ++ The ASK, ASKQ, GETOK, and GETC commands (let's call them the ++ "ASK-class commands") let you write scripts that carry on dialogs with ++ the user, asking them for text, a Yes/No answer, or a character, ++ respectively. Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, these questions would always wait ++ forever for an answer. In C-Kermit 7.0, you may specify a time limit ++ for them with the new command: ++ ++ SET ASK-TIMER number ++ Sets a time-limit on ASK-CLASS commands to the given number of ++ seconds. If the number is 0 or less, there is no time limit and ++ these commands wait forever for a response. Any timer that is ++ established by this command remains in effect for all future ++ ASK-class commands until another SET ASK-TIMER command is given ++ (e.g. with a value of 0 to disable ASK timeouts). ++ ++ IF ASKTIMEOUT command ++ An ASK-class command that times out returns a failure status. ++ You can test explicitly for a timeout with: ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.18. Increased Flexibility of SWITCH Case Labels ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0 / K95 1.1.19, the case labels in SWITCH ++ statements were string constants. ++ ++ Now case labels can be variables, function calls, or any mixture of ++ these with each other and/or with regular characters. ++ ++ Furthermore, after the case label is evaluated, it is treated not as a ++ string constant, but as a pattern against which the SWITCH variable is ++ matched ([617]Section 4.9.1). ++ ++ This introduces a possible incompatibility with previous releases, ++ since the following characters in case labels are no longer taken ++ literally: ++ ++ \ * ? [ { ++ ++ Any scripts that previously included any of these characters in case ++ labels must now quote them with backslash (\). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.19. "Kerbang" Scripts ++ ++ In UNIX only, Kermit scripts can be stored in files and run ++ "directly", without starting Kermit first (as noted on page 467 of the ++ manual), just as a shell script can be "run" as if it were a program. ++ This section amplifies on that idea a bit, and presents some new ++ aspects of version 7.0 that make it easier to write and run Kermit ++ scripts directly. ++ ++ NOTE: On non-UNIX platforms, such as VMS or Windows, Kerbang ++ scripts can be run as "kermit + scriptfilename arg1 arg2 arg3 ...". ++ Windows 95/98/NT file associations do not allow for the passing of ++ parameters. In VMS, however, you can achieve the Kerbang effect by ++ defining a symbol, as in this example: ++ ++ $ autotelnet :== "$SYS$TOOLS:KERMIT.EXE + AUTOTELNET.KSC" ++ ++ and then running the script like any other command: ++ ++ $ autotelnet xyzcorp.com myuserid ++ ++ See [618]Section 9.3 for an explanation of the "+" symbol. ++ ++ UNIX shell scripts can specify which shell should run them by ++ including a "shebang" line at the top, e.g.: ++ ++ #!/bin/sh ++ ++ (but not indented; the shebang line must be on the left margin). The ++ term "shebang" is a contraction of "shell" and "bang". "Bang" is a ++ slang word for the exclamation mark ("!"); "shebang" itself is an ++ American slang word used in in the phrase "the whole shebang". ++ ++ We can run Kermit scripts directly too, by including a "shebang" line ++ that names Kermit as the "shell"; thus we call these "Kerbang" ++ scripts. This mechanism has been considerably simplified in C-Kermit ++ 7.0 to facilitate C-Kermit's use a scripting tool just like any of the ++ UNIX shells or scripting languages. The rules are the same as for ++ shell scripts: ++ ++ 1. The first line of the Kermit script must begin with "#!" ++ immediately followed by the full pathname of the program that will ++ execute the script (in this case, C-Kermit rather than a UNIX ++ shell), followed by any Kermit command-line options. To suppress ++ execution of the C-Kermit initialization file and to make command ++ line arguments available to the script, the final option should be ++ "+": ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ Some users have reported that in some circumstances a space might ++ be necessary after the plus sign; this depends on your shell -- it ++ has nothing to do with Kermit. In most cases, no space is needed. ++ 2. The file must have execute permission (granted via "chmod +x ++ filename"). ++ ++ When C-Kermit is invoked from a Kerbang script (or from the system ++ prompt with a "+" command-line argument, which amounts to the same ++ thing), the following special rules apply: ++ ++ 1. The C-Kermit initialization file is NOT executed automatically. If ++ you want it to be executed, include a TAKE command for it in the ++ script, e.g. "take \v(home).kermrc". (In previous releases, the ++ initialization file was always executed, with no way to prevent it ++ except for the user to include Kermit-specific command line ++ options which had nothing to do with the script). Many scripts ++ have no need for the standard Kermit initialization file, which is ++ quite lengthy and not only delays startup of the script, but also ++ spews forth numerous messages that are most likely unrelated to ++ the script. ++ 2. If the initialization file is not executed, neither is your ++ customization file, since the initialization file is the command ++ file from which the customization file is TAKEn. Again, you can ++ include a TAKE command for the initialization file if desired, or ++ for the customization file by itself, or for any other file. ++ 3. C-Kermit does not process command-line arguments at all. Instead, ++ it passes all words on the command line after the "+" to the ++ script as \%0 (the script name), \%1..\%9 (the first nine ++ arguments), as well as in the argument vector array \&_[]. The ++ variable \v(argc) is set to the total number of "words" (as passed ++ by the shell to Kermit) including the script name. Quoting and ++ grouping rules are those of the shell. ++ 4. At any point where the script terminates, it must include an EXIT ++ command if you want it to exit back to the shell; otherwise ++ C-Kermit enters interactive prompting mode when the script ++ terminates. The EXIT command can include a numeric status to be ++ returned to the shell (0, 1, etc), plus an optional message. ++ ++ Here is a simple Kerbang script that prints its arguments: ++ ++ #/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ echo Hello from \%0 ++ for \%i 0 \v(argc)-1 1 { ++ echo \%i. "\&_[\%i]" ++ } ++ exit 0 ++ ++ Save this file as (say) "showargs", then give it execute permission ++ and run it (the \&_[] array is the same as \%0..\%9, but allows you to ++ refer to argument variables programmatically; see [619]Section 7.5). ++ (Yes, you could substitute SHOW ARGUMENTS for the loop.) ++ ++ $ chmod +x showargs ++ $ ./showargs one "this is two" three ++ ++ The script displays its arguments: ++ ++ Hello from /usr/olga/showargs ++ 0. "/usr/olga/showargs" ++ 1. "one" ++ 2. "this is two" ++ 3. "three" ++ $ ++ ++ Notice that no banners or greetings are printed and that startup is ++ instantaneous, just like a shell script. Also notice that grouping of ++ arguments is determined by *shell* quoting rules, not Kermit ones, ++ since the command line is parsed by the shell before Kermit ever sees ++ it. ++ ++ Of course you can put any commands at all into a Kerbang script. It ++ can read and write files, make connections, transfer files, anything ++ that Kermit can do -- because it *is* Kermit. And of course, Kerbang ++ scripts can also be executed from the Kermit prompt (or from another ++ script) with a TAKE command; the Kerbang line is ignored since it ++ starts with "#", which is a comment introducer to Kermit just as it is ++ to the UNIX shell. In VMS and other non-UNIX platforms, the Kerbang ++ line has no effect and can be omitted. ++ ++ It might be desireable for a script to know whether it has been ++ invoked directly from the shell (as a Kerbang script) or by a TAKE ++ command given to the Kermit prompt or in a Kermit command file or ++ macro. This can be done as in this example: ++ ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ assign \%m \fbasename(\%0) ++ define usage { exit 1 {usage: \%m phonenumber message} } ++ define apage { (definition of APAGE...) } ; (See [620]book pp.454-456) ++ xif equal "\%0" "\v(cmdfil)" { ++ if not def \%1 usage ++ if not def \%2 usage ++ apage {\%1} {\%2} ++ exit \v(status) ++ } ++ ++ In a Kerbang script, \%0 and \v(cmdfile) are the same; both of them ++ are the name of the script. When a script is invoked by a Kermit TAKE ++ command, \%0 is the name of the Kermit program, but \v(cmdfile) is the ++ name of the script. In the example above, a macro called APAGE is ++ defined. If the script was invoked directly, the APAGE macro is also ++ executed. Otherwise, it is available for subsequent and perhaps ++ repeated use later in the Kermit session. ++ ++ An especially handy use for Kerbang scripts is to have the ++ initialization file itself be one. Since the standard initialization ++ file is rather long and time-consuming to execute, it is often ++ overkill if you want to start Kermit just to transfer a file. Of ++ course there are command-line switches to suppress initialization-file ++ execution, etc, but another approach is to "run" the initialization ++ file when you want its features (notably the services directory), and ++ run C-Kermit directly when you don't. A setup like this requires that ++ (a) the C-Kermit initialization file is configured as a Kerbang script ++ (has #!/path.../kermit as first line), has execute permission, and is ++ in your PATH; and (b) that you don't have a .kermrc file in your login ++ directory. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.20. IF and XIF Statement Syntax ++ ++ The IF command has been improved in two significant ways in C-Kermit ++ 7.0, described in the following subsections. All changes are backwards ++ compatible. ++ ++ 7.20.1. The IF/XIF Distinction ++ ++ The distinction between IF and XIF is no longer important as of ++ C-Kermit 7.0. You should be able to use IF in all cases (and of ++ course, also XIF for backwards compatibility). In the past, IF was ++ used for single-command THEN parts, followed optionally by a separate ++ ELSE command: ++ ++ IF condition command1 ; THEN part ++ ELSE command2 ; ELSE part ++ ++ whereas XIF was required if either part had multiple commands: ++ ++ XIF condition { command, command, ... } ELSE { command, command, ... } ++ ++ The syntactic differences were primarily that IF / ELSE was two ++ commands on two separate lines, whereas XIF was one command on one ++ line, and that XIF allowed (and in fact required) braces around its ++ command lists, whereas IF did not allow them. ++ ++ Furthermore, the chaining or nesting of parts and conditions was ++ inconsistent. For example, the IF command could be used like this: ++ ++ IF condition command ++ ELSE IF condition command ++ ELSE IF condition command ++ ELSE IF condition command ++ ... ++ ++ but XIF could not. C-Kermit 7.0 accepts the old syntax and executes it ++ the same as previous versions, but also accepts a new unified and more ++ convenient syntax: ++ ++ IF condition command-list [ ELSE command-list ] ++ ++ or: ++ ++IF condition command-list ++ELSE command-list ++ ++ in which the ELSE part is optional, and where command-list can be a ++ single command (with or without braces around it) or a list of ++ commands enclosed in braces. Examples: ++ ++ Example 1: ++ ++ IF condition { command1, command2 } ELSE { command3, command4 } ++ ++ Example 2 (same as Example 1): ++ ++ IF condition { ++ command1 ++ command2 ++ } ELSE { ++ command3 ++ command4 ++ } ++ ++ Example 3 (same as 1 and 2): ++ ++ IF condition { ++ command1 ++ command2 ++ } ++ ELSE { command3, command4 } ++ ++ Example 4 (same as 1-3): ++ ++ IF condition { ++ command1 ++ command2 ++ } ++ ELSE { ++ command3 ++ command4 ++ } ++ ++ Example 5 (ELSE can be followed by another command): ++ ++ IF condition { ++ command1 ++ command2 ++ } ELSE IF condition { ++ command3 ++ command4 ++ } ELSE { ++ command5 ++ command6 ++ } ++ ++ Example 5 suggests other possibilities: ++ ++ IF condition { ++ command1 ++ command2 ++ } ELSE FOR variable initial final increment { ++ command3 ++ command4 ++ } ++ ++ And this too is possible, except for some non-obvious quoting ++ considerations: ++ ++ dcl \&a[6] = one two three four five six ++ ++ IF < \%n 3 { ++ echo \\%n is too small: \%n ++ } ELSE FOR \\%i 1 \\%n 1 { ++ echo \\%i. \\&a[\\%i] ++ } ++ ++ (The loop variable must be quoted in this context to prevent premature ++ evaluation.) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.20.2. Boolean Expressions (The IF/WHILE Condition) ++ ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the IF and WHILE commands accepted only a ++ single Boolean ("true or false") assertion, e.g. "if > \%m 0 command" ++ or "if exist filename command". There was no way to form Boolean ++ expressions and, in particular, nothing that approached a Boolean OR ++ function (AND could be simulated by concatenating IF statements: "if ++ condition1 if condition2.."). ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 (and K95 1.1.19) allow grouping of Boolean assertions ++ using parentheses and combining them using AND (or &&) and OR (or ||). ++ Each of these operators -- including the parentheses -- is a field and ++ must be set off by spaces. AND has higher precedence than OR, NOT has ++ higher precedence than AND, but parentheses can be used to force any ++ desired order of evaluation. The old syntax is still accepted. ++ ++ Here are some examples: ++ ++ define \%z 0 ; Define some variables ++ define \%n 1 ; for use in the examples. ++ ++ if > \%n \%z echo \%n is greater. ; Original format - still accepted. ++ if ( > \%n \%z ) echo \%n is greater. ; Parentheses may be used in 7.0. ++ if ( > \%n \%z && not = \%z 0 ) ... ; Two assertions combined with AND. ++ if ( > \%n \%z and not = \%z 0 ) ... ; Same as previous ("and" = "&&"). ++ if ( > \%n \%z || not = \%z 0 ) ... ; Two assertions combined with OR. ++ if ( > \%n \%z or not = \%z 0 ) ... ; Same as previous ("or" = "||"). ++ if ( > \%n \%z || != \%z 0 ) ... ; Ditto ("!=" = "not ="). ++ while ( 1 ) { ... } ; Just like C. ++ ++ Notice the spaces around all operators including the parentheses -- ++ these are required. The following examples show how parentheses can be ++ used to alter the precedence of the AND and OR operators: ++ ++ if ( false || false && false || true ) ,.. ; True ++ if ( false || ( false && false ) || true ) ... ; Same as previous ++ if ( ( false || false ) && ( false || true ) ) ... ; False ++ ++ Similarly for NOT: ++ ++ if ( not true && false ) ... ; False (NOT binds to TRUE only) ++ if ( ( not true ) && false ) ... ; Same as previous ++ if ( not ( true && false ) ) ... ; True (NOT binds to (TRUE && FALSE)) ++ ++ Notes: ++ ++ 1. The syntax of the Boolean expression itself has not changed; each ++ expression begins with a keyword or token such as "EXIST", ">", or ++ "=", etc; operators such as "<", "=", and ">" do not go between ++ their operands but precede them as before; this might be called ++ "reverse reverse Polish notation"; it allows deterministic ++ on-the-fly parsing of these expressions at the C-Kermit> prompt as ++ well as in scripts, and allows ?-help to be given for each item ++ when IF or WHILE commands are typed at the prompt. ++ 2. Parentheses are required when there is more than one Boolean ++ assertion. ++ 3. Parentheses are not required, but are allowed, when there is only ++ one Boolean assertion. ++ 4. Evaluation of Boolean assertions occurs left to right, but the ++ resulting Boolean expression is evaluated afterwards according to ++ the rules of precedence. All Boolean assertions are always ++ evaluated; there is no "early stopping" property and therefore no ++ question about when or if side effects will occur -- if any ++ Boolean assertion has side effects, they will always occur. ++ ++ Constructions of arbitrary complexity are possible, within reason. ++ ++ Also see [621]Section 7.4 for new IF / WHILE conditions. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.21. Screen Formatting and Cursor Control ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds a simple way to create formatted screens, the SCREEN ++ command: ++ ++ SCREEN { CLEAR, CLEOL, MOVE-TO row [ column ] } ++ Performs screen-formatting actions. Correct operation of these ++ commands depends on proper terminal setup on both ends of the ++ connection -- mainly that the host terminal type is set to ++ agree with the kind of terminal or the emulation you are ++ viewing C-Kermit through. The UNIX version uses terminfo or ++ termcap (not curses); the VMS version uses SMG; K-95 uses its ++ built in screen manager. ++ ++ SCREEN CLEAR ++ Moves the cursor to home position and clears the entire screen. ++ Synonyms: CLEAR COMMAND-SCREEN ALL (K-95 only), CLS, CLEAR ++ SCREEN. ++ ++ SCREEN CLEOL ++ Clears from the current cursor position to the end of the line. ++ Synonym: CLEAR COMMAND-SCREEN EOL (K-95 only) ++ ++ SCREEN MOVE-TO row column ++ Moves the cursor to the indicated row and column. The row and ++ column numbers are 1-based, so on a 24x80 screen the home ++ position is 1 1 and the lower right corner is 24 80. If a row ++ or column number is given that too large for what Kermit or the ++ operating system thinks is your screen size, the appropriate ++ number is substituted. ++ ++ These escape sequences used by these commands depends on the platform. ++ In UNIX, your TERM environment variable is used to query the ++ terminfo/termcap database; if the query fails, ANSI/VT100 sequences ++ are used. In VMS, the SMG library is used, which sends sequences based ++ on your VMS terminal type. K95 does its own screen control. On other ++ platforms (such as AOS/VS, VOS, etc), screen formatting is not ++ supported, and the SCREEN command does nothing. ++ ++ The three SCREEN actions can be used in scripts to produce menus, ++ formatted screens, dynamic displays, etc. Related variables include: ++ ++ \v(terminal) The type terminal C-Kermit thinks you have. ++ \v(rows) The number of rows C-Kermit thinks your terminal has. ++ \v(columns) The number of columns C-Kermit thinks your terminal has. ++ ++ And functions: ++ ++ \fscrncurx() The current X coordinate of the cursor (K-95 only). ++ \fscrncury() The current Y coordinate of the cursor (K-95 only). ++ \fscrnstr(x,y,n) The string of length nat position (x,y) (K-95 only). ++ ++ And commands: ++ ++ ECHO string Writes string + CRLF at the current cursor position. ++ XECHO string Writes string at current cursor position; CRLF not supplied. ++ GETC v prompt Issues prompt, reads one character into variable v, no echo. ++ ++ And special characters: ++ ++ Ctrl-L At the C-Kermit> command prompt, or in a C-Kermit command, ++ works like Return or Enter, but also clears the screen ++ ++ Example 1: A macro that prints a message \%1 at cursor position ++ (\%2,\%3): ++ ++ define MSG { ++ if not def \%3 def \%3 0 ; Default column to 0 ++ if > \v(argc) 2 screen move \%2 \%3 ; Move to given row/col (if any) ++ screen cleol ; Clear to end of line ++ if def \%1 xecho \fcontents(\%1) ; Print message (if any) ++ } ++ ++ Example 2: A macro put the cursor on the bottom screen line, left ++ margin: ++ ++ define BOT { ++ screen move \v(rows) 0 ++ } ++ ++ Example 3: A macro to center message \%1 on line \%2. ++ ++ define CENTER { ++ if not def \%2 def \%2 1 ++ .\%x ::= (\v(cols)-\flen(\%1))/2 ++ msg {\%1} {\%2} {\%x} ++ } ++ ++ Example 4: A simple menu (building on Examples 1-3): ++ ++ def \%c 0 ; Menu choice variable ++ screen clear ; Clear the screen ++ center {Welcome to This Menu} 2 ; Display the menu ++ msg {Choices:} 4 ++ msg { 1. File} 6 ++ msg { 2. Edit} 7 ++ msg { 3. Exit} 8 ++ while ( != \%c 3 ) { ; Read and verify choice ++ while true { ; Keep trying till we get a good one ++ screen move 10 ; Move to line 10 ++ screen cleol ; Clear this line ++ getc \%c {Your choice: } ; Prompt and get and echo 1 character ++ xecho \%c ++ if ( not numeric \%c ) { msg {Not numeric - "\%c"} 12, continue } ++ if ( >= \%c 1 && <= \%c 3 ) break ++ msg {Out of range - "\%c"} 12 ++ } ++ switch \%c { ; Valid choice - execute it. ++ :1, msg {Filing... } 12, break ++ :2, msg {Editing...} 12, break ++ :3, msg {Exiting...} 12, break ++ } ++ } ++ echo Bye ; Exit chosen - say goodbye. ++ bot ; Leave cursor at screen bottom. ++ exit ; And exit. ++ ++ Similar scripts can work over the communication connection; substitute ++ INPUT and OUTPUT for GETC and ECHO/XECHO. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.22. Evaluating Arithmetic Expressions ++ ++ A new arithmetic operator was added to the list recognized by the ++ EVALUATE command, the \feval() function, and which can also be used ++ anywhere else arithmetic expressions are accepted (numeric command ++ fields, array subscripts, etc): ++ ++ Prefix "!" ++ This operator inverts the "truth value" of the number or ++ arithmetic expression that follows. If the value of the operand ++ is 0, the result is 1. If the value is nonzero, the result is ++ 0. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ set eval old ++ evaluate 0 ++ 0 ++ ++ evaluate !0 ++ 1 ++ ++ evaluate !3 ++ 0 ++ ++ evaluate !(-3) ++ 0 ++ ++ .\%a = 1 ++ .\%b = 0 ++ evaluate !(\%a|\%b) ++ 0 ++ ++ evaluate !(\%a&\%b) ++ 1 ++ ++ evaluate !(!(\%a&\%b)) ++ 0 ++ ++ Note the distinction between Prefix ! (invert truth value) and Suffix ++ ! (factorial). Also the distinction between Prefix ! and Prefix ~ ++ (which inverts all the bits in its operand). Also note that prefix ++ operators (!, -, and ~) can not be adjacent unless you use parentheses ++ to separate them, as shown in the final example above. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.23. Floating-Point Arithmetic ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds limited support for floating-point numbers (numbers ++ that have fractional parts, like 3.141592653). This support is ++ provided through a small repertoire of functions and in Boolean ++ expressions that compare numbers, but does not apply to number parsing ++ in general, or to expression evaluation, array subscripts, the ++ INCREMENT and DECREMENT commands, or in any context other than those ++ listed in this section. ++ ++ A floating point number has an optional sign (+ or -), followed by a ++ series of decimal digits containing either zero or one period (.) ++ character, which is the decimal point. The use of comma or any other ++ character besides period as a decimal point is not supported. ++ Scientific notation is not supported either. Examples of legal ++ floating-point numbers: ++ ++ 0 Integers can be used ++ 1 Ditto ++ 2. A decimal point without decimal digits ++ 3.0 A decimal point with decimal digits ++ 3.141592653 Ditto ++ -4.0 A negative sign can be included ++ +5.0 A positive sign can be included ++ ++ Examples of notations that are not accepted: ++ ++ 1,000,000 Separators can not be used ++ 1.000.000 Ditto (or multiple decimal points) ++ 6.022137E23 No scientific notation ++ 6.62606868e-34 Ditto ++ 12.5+6.25 No "bare" expressions ++ ++ You can use IF FLOAT test a string or variable to see if it's in ++ acceptable floating-point format. Example: ++ ++ ask \%f { Type a number: } ++ if not def \%f .\%f = 0.0 ++ if not float \%f stop 1 Invalid floating-point number: "\%f" ++ ++ C-Kermit's floating-point support, like its support for whole numbers ++ (integers), relies on the capabilities of the underlying computer. ++ Your computer has only a limited amount of precision for numbers, ++ depending on its architecture. Thus floating-point numbers that have ++ too many digits will not be accurate; adding a very small number to a ++ very large one might have no effect at all; and so on. For details, ++ read a text on numerical analysis. Example: ++ ++ .\%a = 11111111111111111111 ; A long number ++ .\%b = 22222222222222222222 ; Another one ++ echo \ffpadd(\%a,\%b) ; Add them - the result should be all 3's ++ 33333333333333330000.0 ; See the result ++ ++ In this example, the computer has 16 digits of precision; after that, ++ the (low-order) digits are set to 0, since the computer doesn't know ++ what they really are. In fact, the computer returns random digits, but ++ Kermit sets all digits beyond the computer's precision to 0. ++ ++ C-Kermit's floating-point functions have names of the form ++ "\ffpxxx(args)" ("\f" for function, "fp" for floating-point), where ++ "xxx" is replaced by the name of the function, such as "sqrt", and ++ "args" is the argument list, consisting of one or two floating-point ++ numbers (depending on the function), and an optional "d" argument that ++ says now many decimal places should be shown in the result. Example: ++ ++ \ffpdiv(10,3,1) returns "3.3" ++ \ffpdiv(10,3,2) returns "3.33" ++ \ffpdiv(10,3,3) returns "3.333" ++ ++ and so on, up to the precision of the computer. If the decimal-places ++ argument is less than zero, the fractional part of the result is ++ truncated: ++ ++ \ffpdiv(10,3,-1) returns "3". ++ ++ If the decimal-places argument is 0, or is omitted, C-Kermit returns ++ as many decimal places as are meaningful in the computer's ++ floating-point precision, truncating any extraneous trailing 0's: ++ ++ \ffpdiv(10,8) returns "1.25". ++ \ffpdiv(10,4) returns "2.5". ++ \ffpdiv(10,2) returns "5.0". ++ \ffpdiv(10,3) returns "3.333333333333333" (for 16-digit precision). ++ ++ There is no way to request that a floating-point function return a ++ decimal point but no decimal places. However, this is easy enough to ++ accomplish in other ways, for example by supplying it outside the ++ function call: ++ ++ echo \ffpadd(\%a,\%b,-1). ++ ++ Kermit's floating-point functions always round the result for the ++ requested number of decimal places when the "d" argument is given and ++ has a value greater than 0 (see the description of \ffpround() just ++ below). ++ ++ Floating-point arguments can be constants in floating-point format or ++ variables whose values are floating-point numbers. If a floating-point ++ argument is omitted, or is a variable with no value, 0.0 is supplied ++ automatically. Example: ++ ++ def \%x 999.999 ++ undef \%y ++ echo \ffpmin(\%x,\%y) ++ 0.0 ++ ++ Or equivalently: ++ ++ echo \ffpmin(999.999) ++ 0.0 ++ ++ The floating-point functions are: ++ ++ \ffpround(f1,d) ++ Returns f1 rounded to d decimal places. For this function only, ++ d = 0 (or d omitted) has a special meaning: return the integer ++ part of f1 rounded according to the fractional part. Examples: ++ ++ \ffpround(2.74653,-1) returns "2" (fraction truncated, no rounding). ++ \ffpround(2.74653,0) returns "3" (integer part is rounded). ++ \ffpround(2.74653) returns "3" (d omitted same as d = 0). ++ \ffpround(2.74653,1) returns "2.7". ++ \ffpround(2.74653,2) returns "2.75". ++ \ffpround(2.74653,3) returns "2.747". ++ \ffpround(2.74653,4) returns "2.7465", etc. ++ ++ \ffpadd(f1,f2,d) ++ Returns the sum of f1 and f2. ++ ++ \ffpsubtract(f1,f2,d) ++ Subtracts f2 from f1 and returns the result. ++ ++ \ffpmultiply(f1,f2,d) ++ Returns the product of f1 and f2. ++ ++ \ffpdivide(f1,f2,d) ++ If f2 is not 0, divides f1 by f2 and returns the quotient. ++ If f2 is 0, a DIVIDE_BY_ZERO error occurs. ++ ++ \ffpraise(f1,f2,d) ++ If f1 = 0 and f2 <= 0, or if f1 < 0 and f2 has a fractional ++ part, an ARG_OUT_OF_RANGE error occurs; otherwise f1 raised to ++ the f2 power is returned. ++ ++ \ffpsqrt(f1,d) ++ If f1 >= 0, returns the square root of f1; otherwise ++ ARG_OUT_OF_RANGE. ++ ++ \ffpabsolute(f1,d) ++ Returns the absolute value of f1 (i.e. f1 without a sign). This ++ is the floating-point analog of \fabsolute(n1). ++ ++ \ffpint(f1) ++ Returns the integer part of f1. Equivalent to \ffpround(f1,-1). ++ ++ \ffpexp(f1,d) ++ The base of natural logarithms, e (2.718282...), raised to the ++ f1 power. ++ ++ \ffplogn(f1,d) ++ The natural logarithm of f1 (the power to which e must be ++ raised to obtain f1). ++ ++ \ffplog10(f1,d) ++ The base-10 logarithm of f1 (the power to which 10 must be ++ raised to obtain f1). ++ ++ \ffpmodulus(f1,f2,d) ++ If f2 is not 0, the remainder after dividing f1 by f2. ++ If f2 is 0, a DIVIDE_BY_ZERO error occurs. ++ This is the floating-point analog of \fmod(n1,n2). ++ ++ \ffpmaximum(f1,f2,d) ++ Returns the maximum of f1 and f2. This is the floating-point ++ analog of \fmax(n1,n2). ++ ++ \ffpminimum(f1,f2,d) ++ Returns the minimum of f1 and f2. This is the floating-point ++ analog of \fmin(n1,n2). ++ ++ \ffpsine(f1,d) ++ Returns the sine of f1 radians. ++ ++ \ffpcosine(f1,d) ++ Returns the cosine of f1 radians. ++ ++ \ffptangent(f1,d) ++ Returns the tangent of f1 radians. ++ ++ Note that all of these functions can be used with integer arguments. ++ If you want an integer result, specify d = -1 (to truncate) or feed ++ the result to \ffpround(xxx,0) (to round). ++ ++ Floating-point numbers (or variables or functions that return them) ++ can be used in Boolean expressions (see [622]Section 7.20.2) that ++ compare numbers: ++ ++ = x y ++ != x y ++ < x y ++ > x y ++ <= x y ++ >= x y ++ ++ In these examples, x and y can be either integers or floating-point ++ numbers in any combination. In an arithmetic comparison of an integer ++ and a floating-point number, the integer is converted to ++ floating-point before the comparison is made. Examples: ++ ++ .\%t = 3.000000000 ++ .\%f = 3.141592653 ++ .\%i = 3 ++ ++ if > \%f \%i echo Pi is greater. ++ if = \%t \%i echo "\%i" = "\%t". ++ ++ A floating-point number can also be used in: ++ ++ IF number command ++ ++ where the command is executed if the number is nonzero. If the number ++ is floating-point, the command is not executed if the number is 0.0, ++ and is executed otherwise. ++ ++ Floating-point numbers can be sorted using ARRAY SORT /NUMERIC (see ++ [623]Section 7.10.5 ). ++ ++ Two floating-point constants are provided: ++ ++ \v(math_pi) = Pi (3.141592653...) ++ \v(math_e) = e, the base of natural logarithms (2.71828...) ++ ++ These are given to the computer's precision, e.g. 16 digits. This ++ number itself is available in a variable: ++ ++ \v(math_precision) ++ How many significant digits in a floating-point number. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.24. Tracing Script Execution ++ ++ The TRACE command is handy for debugging scripts. ++ ++ TRACE [ { /ON, /OFF } ] [ { ASSIGNMENTS, COMMAND-LEVEL, ALL } ] ++ Selects tracing of the given object. ++ ++ Optional switches are /ON and /OFF. If no switch is given, /ON is ++ implied. The trace objects are ASSIGNMENTS, COMMAND-LEVEL, and ALL. ++ The default object is ALL, meaning to select all trace objects ++ (besides ALL). Thus TRACE by itself selects tracing of everything, as ++ does TRACE /ON, and TRACE /OFF turns off all tracing. ++ ++ When tracing of ASSIGNMENTS is on, every time the value of any ++ user-defined variable or macro changes, C-Kermit prints one of the ++ following: ++ ++ >>> name: "value" ++ The name of the variable or macro followed by the new value in ++ quotes. This includes implicit macro-parameter assignments ++ during macro invocation. ++ ++ >>> name: (undef) ++ This indicates that the variable or macro has been undefined. ++ ++ <<< name: "value" ++ For RETURN statements: the name of the macro and the return ++ value. ++ ++ <<< name: (null) ++ For RETURN statements that include no value or an empty value. ++ ++ When tracing of COMMAND-LEVEL is on, C-Kermit prints: ++ ++ [n] +F: "name" ++ Whenever a command file is entered, where "n" is the command ++ level (0 = top); the name of the command file is shown in ++ quotes. ++ ++ [n] +M: "name" ++ Whenever a macro is entered; "n" is the command level. The name ++ of the macro is shown in quotes. ++ ++ [n] -F: "name" ++ Whenever a command file is reentered from below, when a macro ++ or command file that it has invoked has returned. ++ ++ [n] -M: "name" ++ Whenever a macro is reentered from below. ++ ++ For other debugging tools, see SHOW ARGS, SHOW STACK, SET TAKE, SET ++ MACRO, and of course, ECHO. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.25. Compact Substring Notation ++ ++ It is often desirable to extract a substring from a string which is ++ stored in a variable, and for this we have the \fsubstring() function, ++ which is used like this: ++ ++ define \%a 1234567890 ++ echo \fsubstring(\%a,3,4) ; substring from 3rd character length 4 ++ 3456 ++ ++ or like this with macro-named variables: ++ ++ define string 1234567890 ++ echo \fsubstring(\m(string),3,4) ++ 3456 ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 adds a pair of alternative compact notations: ++ ++\:(variablename[start:length]) <-- Substring of variable's value ++\s(macroname[start:length]) <-- Substring of macro's definition ++ ++ These are exactly equivalent to using \fsubstring(), except more ++ compact to write and also faster since evaluation is in one step ++ instead of two. ++ ++ The "\:()" notation can be used with any Kermit variable, that is, ++ almost anything that starts with a backslash: ++ ++ \:(\%a[2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(\%a,2,6) ++ \:(\&x[1][2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(\&x[1],2,6) ++ \:(\m(foo)[2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(\m(foo),2,6) ++ \:(\v(time)[2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(\v(time),2,6) ++ \:(\$(TERM)[2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(\$(TERM),2,6) ++ \:(ABCDEFGH[2:6]) <-- equivalent to \fsubstring(ABCDEFGH,2,6) ++ ++ Whatever appears between the left parenthesis and the left bracket is ++ evaluated and then the indicated substring of the result is returned. ++ ++ The "\s()" notation is the same, except after evaluating the variable, ++ the result is treated as a macro name and is looked up in the macro ++ table. Then the indicated substring of the macro definition is ++ returned. Example: ++ ++ define testing abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ++ define \%a testing ++ ++ \s(testing[2:6]) --> bcdefg ++ \:(testing[2:6]) --> esting ++ \:(\%a[2:6]) --> esting ++ \s(\%a[2:6]) --> bcdefg ++ ++ Note that the following two examples are equivalent: ++ ++ \:(\m(foo)[2:6]) ++ \s(foo[2:6]) ++ ++ The first number in the brackets is the 1-based starting position. If ++ it is omitted, or less than 1, it is treated as 1. If it is greater ++ than the length of the string, an empty string is returned. ++ ++ The second number is the length of the desired substring. If the ++ second number is omitted, is less than 0, or would be past the end of ++ the string, then "through the end of the string" is assumed. If it is ++ 0, the empty string is returned. ++ ++ If the brackets are empty or omitted, the original string is returned. ++ ++ The starting position and length need not be literal numbers; they can ++ also be variables, functions, arithmetic expressions, or even other ++ \s() or \:() quantities; anything that evaluates to a number, for ++ example: ++ ++ \s(block[1025:\fhex2n(\s(block[\%b:\%n+4]))/2]) ++ ++ Syntactically, \m(name) and \s(name) differ only in that the sequence ++ [*] at the end of the name (where * is any sequence of 0 or more ++ characters) is treated as substring notation in \s(name), but is ++ considered part of the name in \m(name) (to see why, see [624]Section ++ 7.10.9). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.26. New WAIT Command Options ++ ++ The WAIT command has been extended to allow waiting for different ++ kinds of things (formerly it only waited for modem signals). Now it ++ also can wait for file events. ++ ++ 7.26.1. Waiting for Modem Signals ++ ++ The previous syntax: ++ ++ WAIT time { CD, DSR, RTS, RI, ... } ++ ++ has changed to: ++ ++ WAIT time MODEM-SIGNALS { CD, DSR, RTS, RI, ... } ++ ++ However, the previous syntax is still accepted. The behavior is the ++ same in either case. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.26.2. Waiting for File Events ++ ++ The new WAIT option: ++ ++ WAIT time FILE { CREATION, DELETION, MODIFICATION } filename ++ ++ lets you tell Kermit to wait the given amount of time (or until the ++ given time of day) for a file whose name is filename to be created, ++ deleted, or modified, respectively. The filename may not contain ++ wildcards. If the specified event does not occur within the time ++ limit, or if WAIT CANCELLATION is ON and you interrupt from the ++ keyboard before the time is up, the WAIT command fails. If the event ++ is MODIFICATION and the file does not exist, the command fails. ++ Otherwise, if the given event occurs within the time limit, the ++ command succeeds. Examples: ++ ++ WAIT 600 FILE DELETION oofa.tmp ++ Wait up to 10 minutes for file oofa.tmp to disappear. ++ ++ WAIT 23:59:59 FILE MOD orders.db ++ Wait until just before midnight for the orders.db file to be ++ changed. ++ ++ Example: Suppose you want to have the current copy of /etc/motd on ++ your screen at all times, and you want to hear a bell whenever it ++ changes: ++ ++ def \%f /etc/motd ; The file of interest. ++ while 1 { ; Loop forever... ++ cls ; Clear the screen. ++ echo \%f: \v(date) \v(time)... ; Print 2-line heading... ++ echo ++ if ( not exist \%f ) { ; If file doesn't exist, ++ echo \%f does not exist... ; print message, ++ wait 600 file creat \%f ; and wait for it to appear. ++ continue ++ } ++ beep ; Something new - beep. ++ type /head:\v(rows-2) \%f ; Display the file ++ if fail exit 1 \%f: \ferrstring() ; (checking for errors). ++ wait 999 file mod \%f ; Wait for it to change. ++ } ++ ++ This notices when the file is created, deleted, or modified, and acts ++ only then (or when you interrupt it with); the time shown in the ++ heading is the time of the most recent event (including when the ++ program started). ++ ++ See [625]Section 1.10, where the \v(kbchar) variable is explained. ++ This lets you modify a loop like the one above to also accept ++ single-character commands, which interrupt the WAIT, and dispatch ++ accordingly. For example: ++ ++ wait 999 file mod \%f ; Wait for the file to change. ++ if defined \v(kbchar) { ; Interrupted from keyboard? ++ switch \v(kbchar) { ; Handle the keystroke... ++ :q, exit ; Q to Quit ++ :h, echo blah blah, break ; H for Help ++ :default, beep, continue ; Anything else beep and ignore ++ } ++ } ++ ++ This lets you write event-driven applications that wait for up to ++ three events at once: a file or modem event, a timeout, and a ++ keystroke. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7.27. Relaxed FOR and SWITCH Syntax ++ ++ For consistency with the extended IF and WHILE syntax, the FOR and ++ SWITCH control lists may (but need not be) enclosed in parentheses: ++ ++ FOR ( \%i 1 \%n 1 ) { command-list... } ++ SWITCH ( \%c ) { command-list... } ++ ++ In the FOR command, the increment item can be omitted if the control ++ list is enclosed in parentheses, in which case the increment defaults ++ appropriately to 1 or -1, depending on the values of the first two ++ variables. ++ ++ As with IF, the parentheses around the FOR-command control list must ++ be set off by spaces (in the SWITCH command, the spaces are not ++ required since the SWITCH expression is a single arithmetic ++ expression). ++ ++ Also, outer braces around the command list are supplied automatically ++ if you omit them, e.g.: ++ ++ FOR ( \%i 1 %n 1 ) echo \%i ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8. USING OTHER FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOLS ++ ++ In C-Kermit 7.0, alternative protocols can be selected using switches. ++ Switches are described in [626]Section 1.5; the use of ++ protocol-selection switches is described in [627]Section 4.7.1. ++ Example: ++ ++ send /binary /protocol:zmodem x.tar.gz ++ ++ Note that file transfer recovery works only with Kermit and Zmodem ++ protocols. With Zmodem, recovery can be initiated only by the sender. ++ ++ Only pre-1988 versions of the publicly-distributed sz/rz programs use ++ Standard I/O; those released later than that do not use Standard I/O ++ and therefore do not work with REDIRECT. However, Omen Technology does ++ offer an up-to-date redirectable version called crzsz, which must be ++ licensed for use: ++ ++ "Unix Crz and Csz support XMODEM, YMODEM, and ZMODEM transfers when ++ called by dial-out programs such as Kermit and certain versions of ++ cu(1). They are clients designed for this use. ++ ++ "Crz and Csz are Copyrighted shareware programs. Use of these ++ programs beyond a brief evaluation period requires registration. ++ Please print the "mailer.rz" file, fill out the form and return ++ same with your registration." ++ ++ To use the crzsz programs as your external XYZMODEM programs in ++ C-Kermit, follow the instructions in the book, but put a "c" before ++ each command, e.g.: ++ ++ set protocol zmodem {csz %s} {csz -a %s} crz crz crz crz ++ ++ To use Zmodem protocol over Telnet or other non-transparent ++ connections, you might need to add the -e (Escape) option: ++ ++ set protocol zmodem {csz -e %s} {csz -e -a %s} crz crz crz crz ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9. COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS ++ ++ 9.0. Extended-Format Command-Line Options ++ ++ Standard UNIX command line options are a single letter. C-Kermit has ++ run out of letters, so new options are in a new extended format: ++ ++ --word[:arg] ++ ++ where a keyword (rather than a single letter) specifies the function, ++ and if an argument is to be included, it is separated by a colon (or ++ equal sign). Most of the new extended-format command-line options are ++ only for use with the Internet Kermit Service Daemon; see the ++ [628]IKSD Administration Guide for details. However, several of them ++ are also general in nature: ++ ++ --nointerrupts ++ Disables keyboard interrupts that are normally enabled, which ++ are usually Ctrl-C (to interrupt a command) and Ctrl-Z (UNIX ++ only, to suspend C-Kermit). ++ ++ --help ++ Lists the extended command-line options that are available in ++ your version of C-Kermit. If any options seem to be missing, ++ that is because your copy of C-Kermit was built with ++ compile-time options to deselect them. ++ ++ --helpfile:filename ++ Specifies the name of a file to be displayed if the user types ++ HELP (not followed by a specific command or topic), in place of ++ the built-in top-level help text. The file need not fit on one ++ screen; more-prompting is used if the file is more than one ++ screen long if COMMAND MORE-PROMPTING is ON, as it is by ++ default. ++ ++ --bannerfile:filename ++ The name of a file containing a message to be printed after the ++ user logs in, in place of the normal message (Copyright notice, ++ "Type HELP or ? for help", "Default transfer mode is...", etc). ++ ++ --cdmessage:{on,off,0,1,2} ++ For use in the Server-Side Server configuration; whenever the ++ client tells the server to change directory, the server sends ++ the contents of a "read me" file to the client's screen. This ++ feature is On by default, and operates only in client/server ++ mode when ON or 1. If set to 2 or higher, it also operates when ++ the CD command is given at the IKSD> prompt. Synonym: --cdmsg. ++ ++ --cdfile:filename ++ When cdmessage is on, this is the name of the "read me" file to ++ be sent. Normally you would specify a relative (not absolute) ++ name, since the file is opened using the literal name you ++ specified, after changing to the new directory. Example: ++ ++ --cdfile:READ.ME ++ ++ You can also give a list of up to 8 filenames by (a) enclosing ++ each filename in braces, and (b) enclosing the entire list in ++ braces. Example: ++ --cdfile:{{./.readme}{READ.ME}{aaareadme.txt}{README}{read-this ++ -first}} When a list is given, it is searched from left to ++ right and the first file found is displayed. The default list ++ for UNIX is: ++ ++ {{./.readme}{README.TXT}{READ.ME}} ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.1. Command Line Personalities ++ ++ Beginning in version 7.0, if the C-Kermit binary is renamed to ++ "telnet" (or TELNET.EXE, telnet.pr, etc, depending on the platform), ++ it accepts the Telnet command line: ++ ++ telnet [ host [ port ] ] ++ ++ In Unix, you can achieve the same effect with a symlink: ++ ++ cd /usr/bin ++ mv telnet oldtelnet ++ ln -ls /usr/local/bin/kermit telnet ++ ++ When installed in this manner, C-Kermit always reads its ++ initialization file. If no host (and therefore no port) is given, ++ C-Kermit starts in interactive prompting mode. If a host is given as ++ the first command-line argument, C-Kermit makes a connection to it. ++ The host argument can be an IP host name or address, or the name of a ++ TCP/IP entry in your C-Kermit network directory. ++ ++ If a port is given, it is used. If a port is not given, then if the ++ hostname was found in your network directory and port was also listed ++ there, then that port is used. Otherwise port 23 (the Telnet port) is ++ used. ++ ++ When C-Kermit is called "telnet" and it is invoked with a hostname on ++ the command line, it exits automatically when the connection is ++ closed. While the connection is open, however, you may escape back and ++ forth as many times as you like, transfer files, etc. ++ ++ An rlogin personality is also available, but it is less useful, at ++ least in UNIX and VMS, where the Rlogin TCP port is privileged. ++ ++ The new variable \v(name) indicates the name with which C-Kermit was ++ invoked ("kermit", "wermit", "k95", "telnet", etc). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.2. Built-in Help for Command Line Options ++ ++ "kermit -h", given from the system prompt, lists as many command-line ++ options as will fit on a standard 24x80 screen. For more comprehensive ++ help, use the interactive HELP OPTIONS command that was added in ++ C-Kermit 7.0: ++ ++ HELP OPTIONS ++ Explains how command-line options work, their syntax, etc. ++ ++ HELP OPTIONS ALL ++ Lists all command-line options and gives brief help about each one. ++ ++ HELP OPTION x ++ Gives brief help about option "x". ++ ++ HELP EXTENDED-OPTIONS ++ Lists the available extended-format command-line options. ++ ++ HELP EXTENDED-OPTION xxx ++ Gives help for the specified extended option. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.3. New Command-Line Options ++ ++ Command-line options added since C-Kermit 6.0 are: ++ ++ + ++ (plus sign by itself): The next argument is the name of a ++ script to execute; all subsequent arguments are ignored by ++ C-Kermit itself, but passed to the script as top-level copies ++ of \%1, \%2, etc; the \&_[] is also set accordingly. \%0 and ++ \&_[0] become the name of the script file, rather than the ++ pathname of the C-Kermit program, which is its normal value. ++ Primarily for use in the top line of "Kerbang" scripts in UNIX ++ (see [629]Section 7.19). Example from UNIX command line: ++ ++ $ kermit [ regular kermit args ] + filename ++ ++ Sample first line of Kerbang script: ++ ++ #!/usr/local/bin/kermit + ++ ++ -- ++ (two hyphens surrounded by whitespace) Equivalent to "=", for ++ compatibility with UNIX getopt(1,3). ++ ++ -G ++ GET (like -g), but send the incoming file to standard output. ++ Example: "kermit -G oofa.txt | lpr" retrieves a file from your ++ local computer (providing it is running a Kermit program that ++ supports the autodownload feature and has it enabled) and ++ prints it. ++ ++ -O ++ equivalent to -x (start up in server mode), but exits after the ++ first client command has been executed (mnemonic: O = Only ++ One). This one is handy replacing "kermit -x" in the ++ "automatically start Kermit on the other end" string: ++ ++ set protocol kermit {kermit -ir} {kermit -r} {kermit -x} ++ ++ since -x leaves the remote Kermit in server mode after the ++ transfer, which can be confusing, whereas -O makes it go away ++ automatically after the transfer. ++ ++ -L ++ Recursive, when used in combination with -s (mnemonic: L = ++ Levels). In UNIX or other environments where the shell expands ++ wildcards itself, the -s argument, if it contains wildcards, ++ must be quoted to prevent this, e.g.: ++ ++ kermit -L -s "*.c" ++ ++ In UNIX only, "kermit -L -s ." means to send the current ++ directory tree. See [630]Sections 4.10 and [631]4.11 about ++ recursive file transfer. ++ ++ -V ++ Equivalent to SET FILE PATTERNS OFF ([632]Section 4.3) and SET ++ TRANSFER MODE MANUAL. In other words, take the FILE TYPE ++ setting literally. For example, "kermit -VT oofa.bin" means ++ send the file in Text mode, no matter what its name is and no ++ matter whether a kindred spirit is recognized at the other end ++ of the connection. ++ ++ -0 ++ (digit zero) means "be 100% transparent in CONNECT mode". This ++ is equivalent to the following series of commands: SET PARITY ++ NONE, SET COMMAND BYTESIZE 8, SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8, SET FLOW ++ NONE, SET TERM ESCAPE DISABLED, SET TERM CHAR TRANSPARENT, SET ++ TERM AUTODOWNLOAD OFF, SET TERM APC OFF, SET TELOPT KERMIT ++ REFUSE REFUSE. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 10. C-KERMIT AND G-KERMIT ++ ++ Every multifunctioned and long-lived software program grows in ++ complexity and size over time to meet the needs and requests of its ++ users and the demands of the underlying technology as it changes. ++ ++ Eventually users begin to notice how big the application has grown, ++ how much disk space it occupies, how long it takes to load, and they ++ start to long for the good old days when it was lean and mean. Not ++ long after that they begin asking for a "light" version that only does ++ the basics with no frills. ++ ++ And so it is with C-Kermit. A "light" version of Kermit was released ++ (for UNIX only) in December 1999 under the GNU General Public License; ++ thus it is called G-Kermit (for GNU Kermit). All it does is send and ++ receive files, period. You can find it at: ++ ++ [633]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ ++ Where the C-Kermit 7.0 binary might be anywhere from 1 to 3 million ++ bytes in size, the G-Kermit binary ranges from 30K to 100K, depending ++ on the underlying architecture (RISC vs CISC, etc). ++ ++ G-Kermit and C-Kermit may reside side-by-side on the same computer. ++ G-Kermit does not make connections; it does not have a script ++ language; it does not translate character sets. G-Kermit may be used ++ instead of C-Kermit when: ++ ++ * It is on the remote end. ++ * Files are to be transferred in binary mode or in text mode without ++ character-set translation. ++ * File timestamps don't need to be preserved. ++ ++ In such cases G-Kermit might be preferred since it generally starts up ++ faster, and yet transfers files just as fast on most (but not ++ necessarily all) kinds of connections; for example, it supports ++ streaming ([634]Section 4.20). ++ ++ G-Kermit is also handy for bootstrapping. It is easier to load on a ++ new computer than C-Kermit -- it fits on a floppy diskette with plenty ++ of room to spare. Thus if you have (say) an old PC running (say) SCO ++ Xenix and no network connection, you can download the Xenix version of ++ G-Kermit to (say) a DOS or Windows PC, copy it to diskette, read the ++ diskette on Xenix with "dosread", and then use G-Kermit to receive ++ C-Kermit (which does not fit on a diskette). If diskettes aren't an ++ option, other bootstrapping methods are possible too -- see the ++ [635]G-Kermit web page for details. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++III. APPENDICES ++ ++ III.1. Character Set Tables ++ ++ III.1.1. The Hewlett Packard Roman8 Character Set ++ ++dec col/row oct hex description ++160 10/00 240 A0 (Undefined) ++161 10/01 241 A1 A grave ++162 10/02 242 A2 A circumflex ++163 10/03 243 A3 E grave ++164 10/04 244 A4 E circumflex ++165 10/05 245 A5 E diaeresis ++166 10/06 246 A6 I circumflex ++167 10/07 247 A7 I diaeresis ++168 10/08 250 A8 Acute accent ++169 10/09 251 A9 Grave accent ++170 10/10 252 AA Circumflex accent ++171 10/11 253 AB Diaeresis ++172 10/12 254 AC Tilde accent ++173 10/13 255 AD U grave ++174 10/14 256 AE U circumflex ++175 10/15 257 AF Lira symbol ++176 11/00 260 B0 Top bar (macron) ++177 11/01 261 B1 Y acute ++178 11/02 262 B2 y acute ++179 11/03 263 B3 Degree Sign ++180 11/04 264 B4 C cedilla ++181 11/05 265 B5 c cedilla ++182 11/06 266 B6 N tilde ++183 11/07 267 B7 n tilde ++184 11/08 270 B8 Inverted exclamation mark ++185 11/09 271 B9 Inverted question mark ++186 11/10 272 BA Currency symbol ++187 11/11 273 BB Pound sterling symbol ++188 11/12 274 BC Yen symbol ++189 11/13 275 BD Paragraph ++190 11/14 276 BE Florin (Guilder) symbol ++191 11/15 277 BF Cent symbol ++192 12/00 300 C0 a circumflex ++193 12/01 301 C1 e circumflex ++194 12/02 302 C2 o circumflex ++195 12/03 303 C3 u circumflex ++196 12/04 304 C4 a acute ++197 12/05 305 C5 e acute ++198 12/06 306 C6 o acute ++199 12/07 307 C7 u acute ++200 12/08 310 C8 a grave ++201 12/09 311 C9 e grave ++202 12/10 312 CA o grave ++203 12/11 313 CB u grave ++204 12/12 314 CC a diaeresis ++205 12/13 315 CD e diaeresis ++206 12/14 316 CE o diaeresis ++207 12/15 317 CF u diaeresis ++208 13/00 320 D0 A ring ++209 13/01 321 D1 i circumflex ++210 13/02 322 D2 O with stroke ++211 13/03 323 D3 AE digraph ++212 13/04 324 D4 a ring ++213 13/05 325 D5 i acute ++214 13/06 326 D6 o with stroke ++215 13/07 327 D7 ae digraph ++216 13/08 330 D8 A diaeresis ++217 13/09 331 D9 i grave ++218 13/10 332 DA O diaeresis ++219 13/11 333 DB U diaeresis ++220 13/12 334 DC E acute ++221 13/13 335 DD i diaeresis ++222 13/14 336 DE German sharp s ++223 13/15 337 DF O circumflex ++224 14/00 340 E0 A acute ++225 14/01 341 E1 A tilde ++226 14/02 342 E2 a tilde ++227 14/03 343 E3 Icelandic Eth ++228 14/04 344 E4 Icelandic eth ++229 14/05 345 E5 I acute ++230 14/06 346 E6 I grave ++231 14/07 347 E7 O acute ++232 14/08 350 E8 O grave ++233 14/09 351 E9 O tilde ++234 14/10 352 EA o tilde ++235 14/11 353 EB S caron ++236 14/12 354 EC s caron ++237 14/13 355 ED U acute ++238 14/14 356 EE Y diaeresis ++239 14/15 357 EF y diaeresis ++240 15/00 360 F0 Icelandic Thorn ++241 15/01 361 F1 Icelandic thorn ++242 15/02 362 F2 Middle dot ++243 15/03 363 F3 Greek mu ++244 15/04 364 F4 Pilcrow sign ++245 15/05 365 F5 Fraction 3/4 ++246 15/06 366 F6 Long dash, horizontal bar ++247 15/07 367 F7 Fraction 1/4 ++248 15/08 370 F8 Fraction 1/2 ++249 15/09 371 F9 Feminine ordinal ++250 15/10 372 FA Masculine ordinal ++251 15/11 373 FB Left guillemot ++252 15/12 374 FC Solid box ++253 15/13 375 FD Right guillemot ++254 15/14 376 FE Plus or minus sign ++255 15/15 377 FF (Undefined) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ III.1.2. Greek Character Sets ++ ++ III.1.2.1. The ISO 8859-7 Latin / Greek Alphabet = ELOT 928 ++ ++dec col/row oct hex description ++160 10/00 240 A0 No-break space ++161 10/01 241 A1 Left single quotation mark ++162 10/02 242 A2 right single quotation mark ++163 10/03 243 A3 Pound sign ++164 10/04 244 A4 (UNUSED) ++165 10/05 245 A5 (UNUSED) ++166 10/06 246 A6 Broken bar ++167 10/07 247 A7 Paragraph sign ++168 10/08 250 A8 Diaeresis (Dialytika) ++169 10/09 251 A9 Copyright sign ++170 10/10 252 AA (UNUSED) ++171 10/11 253 AB Left angle quotation ++172 10/12 254 AC Not sign ++173 10/13 255 AD Soft hyphen ++174 10/14 256 AE (UNUSED) ++175 10/15 257 AF Horizontal bar (Parenthetiki pavla) ++176 11/00 260 B0 Degree sign ++177 11/01 261 B1 Plus-minus sign ++178 11/02 262 B2 Superscript two ++179 11/03 263 B3 Superscript three ++180 11/04 264 B4 Accent (tonos) ++181 11/05 265 B5 Diaeresis and accent (Dialytika and Tonos) ++182 11/06 266 B6 Alpha with accent ++183 11/07 267 B7 Middle dot (Ano Teleia) ++184 11/08 270 B8 Epsilon with accent ++185 11/09 271 B9 Eta with accent ++186 11/10 272 BA Iota with accent ++187 11/11 273 BB Right angle quotation ++188 11/12 274 BC Omicron with accent ++189 11/13 275 BD One half ++190 11/14 276 BE Upsilon with accent ++191 11/15 277 BF Omega with accent ++192 12/00 300 C0 iota with diaeresis and accent ++193 12/01 301 C1 Alpha ++194 12/02 302 C2 Beta ++195 12/03 303 C3 Gamma ++196 12/04 304 C4 Delta ++197 12/05 305 C5 Epsilon ++198 12/06 306 C6 Zeta ++199 12/07 307 C7 Eta ++200 12/08 310 C8 Theta ++201 12/09 311 C9 Iota ++202 12/10 312 CA Kappa ++203 12/11 313 CB Lamda ++204 12/12 314 CC Mu ++205 12/13 315 CD Nu ++206 12/14 316 CE Ksi ++207 12/15 317 CF Omicron ++208 13/00 320 D0 Pi ++209 13/01 321 D1 Rho ++210 13/02 322 D2 (UNUSED) ++211 13/03 323 D3 Sigma ++212 13/04 324 D4 Tau ++213 13/05 325 D5 Upsilon ++214 13/06 326 D6 Phi ++215 13/07 327 D7 Khi ++216 13/08 330 D8 Psi ++217 13/09 331 D9 Omega ++218 13/10 332 DA Iota with diaeresis ++219 13/11 333 DB Upsilon with diaeresis ++220 13/12 334 DC alpha with accent ++221 13/13 335 DD epsilon with accent ++222 13/14 336 DE eta with accent ++223 13/15 337 DF iota with accent ++224 14/00 340 E0 upsilon with diaeresis and accent ++225 14/01 341 E1 alpha ++226 14/02 342 E2 beta ++227 14/03 343 E3 gamma ++228 14/04 344 E4 delta ++229 14/05 345 E5 epsilon ++230 14/06 346 E6 zeta ++231 14/07 347 E7 eta ++232 14/08 350 E8 theta ++233 14/09 351 E9 iota ++234 14/10 352 EA kappa ++235 14/11 353 EB lamda ++236 14/12 354 EC mu ++237 14/13 355 ED nu ++238 14/14 356 EE ksi ++239 14/15 357 EF omicron ++240 15/00 360 F0 pi ++241 15/01 361 F1 rho ++242 15/02 362 F2 terminal sigma ++243 15/03 363 F3 sigma ++244 15/04 364 F4 tau ++245 15/05 365 F5 upsilon ++246 15/06 366 F6 phi ++247 15/07 367 F7 khi ++248 15/08 370 F8 psi ++249 15/09 371 F9 omega ++250 15/10 372 FA iota with diaeresis ++251 15/11 373 FB upsilon with diaeresis ++252 15/12 374 FC omicron with diaeresis ++253 15/13 375 FD upsilon with accent ++254 15/14 376 FE omega with accent ++255 15/15 377 FF (UNUSED) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ III.1.2.2. The ELOT 927 Character Set ++ ++dec col/row oct hex description ++ 32 02/00 40 20 SPACE ++ 33 02/01 41 21 EXCLAMATION MARK ++ 34 02/02 42 22 QUOTATION MARK ++ 35 02/03 43 23 NUMBER SIGN ++ 36 02/04 44 24 DOLLAR SIGN ++ 37 02/05 45 25 PERCENT SIGN ++ 38 02/06 46 26 AMPERSAND ++ 39 02/07 47 27 APOSTROPHE ++ 40 02/08 50 28 LEFT PARENTHESIS ++ 41 02/09 51 29 RIGHT PARENTHESIS ++ 42 02/10 52 2A ASTERISK ++ 43 02/11 53 2B PLUS SIGN ++ 44 02/12 54 2C COMMA ++ 45 02/13 55 2D HYPHEN, MINUS SIGN ++ 46 02/14 56 2E PERIOD, FULL STOP ++ 47 02/15 57 2F SOLIDUS, SLASH ++ 48 03/00 60 30 DIGIT ZERO ++ 49 03/01 61 31 DIGIT ONE ++ 50 03/02 62 32 DIGIT TWO ++ 51 03/03 63 33 DIGIT THREE ++ 52 03/04 64 34 DIGIT FOUR ++ 53 03/05 65 35 DIGIT FIVE ++ 54 03/06 66 36 DIGIT SIX ++ 55 03/07 67 37 DIGIT SEVEN ++ 56 03/08 70 38 DIGIT EIGHT ++ 57 03/09 71 39 DIGIT NINE ++ 58 03/10 72 3A COLON ++ 59 03/11 73 3B SEMICOLON ++ 60 03/12 74 3C LESS-THAN SIGN, LEFT ANGLE BRACKET ++ 61 03/13 75 3D EQUALS SIGN ++ 62 03/14 76 3E GREATER-THAN SIGN, RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET ++ 63 03/15 77 3F QUESTION MARK ++ 64 04/00 100 40 COMMERCIAL AT SIGN ++ 65 04/01 101 41 CAPITAL LETTER A ++ 66 04/02 102 42 CAPITAL LETTER B ++ 67 04/03 103 43 CAPITAL LETTER C ++ 68 04/04 104 44 CAPITAL LETTER D ++ 69 04/05 105 45 CAPITAL LETTER E ++ 70 04/06 106 46 CAPITAL LETTER F ++ 71 04/07 107 47 CAPITAL LETTER G ++ 72 04/08 110 48 CAPITAL LETTER H ++ 73 04/09 111 49 CAPITAL LETTER I ++ 74 04/10 112 4A CAPITAL LETTER J ++ 75 04/11 113 4B CAPITAL LETTER K ++ 76 04/12 114 4C CAPITAL LETTER L ++ 77 04/13 115 4D CAPITAL LETTER M ++ 78 04/14 116 4E CAPITAL LETTER N ++ 79 04/15 117 4F CAPITAL LETTER O ++ 80 05/00 120 50 CAPITAL LETTER P ++ 81 05/01 121 51 CAPITAL LETTER Q ++ 82 05/02 122 52 CAPITAL LETTER R ++ 83 05/03 123 53 CAPITAL LETTER S ++ 84 05/04 124 54 CAPITAL LETTER T ++ 85 05/05 125 55 CAPITAL LETTER U ++ 86 05/06 126 56 CAPITAL LETTER V ++ 87 05/07 127 57 CAPITAL LETTER W ++ 88 05/08 130 58 CAPITAL LETTER X ++ 89 05/09 131 59 CAPITAL LETTER Y ++ 90 05/10 132 5A CAPITAL LETTER Z ++ 91 05/11 133 5B LEFT SQUARE BRACKET ++ 92 05/12 134 5C REVERSE SOLIDUS, BACKSLASH ++ 93 05/13 135 5D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET ++ 94 05/14 136 5E CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT ++ 95 05/15 137 5F UNDERSCORE ++ 96 06/00 140 60 ACCENT GRAVE ++ 97 06/01 141 61 GREEK LETTER ALPHA ++ 98 06/02 142 62 GREEK LETTER BETA ++ 99 06/03 143 63 GREEK LETTER GAMMA ++100 06/04 144 64 GREEK LETTER DELTA ++101 06/05 145 65 GREEK LETTER EPSILON ++102 06/06 146 66 GREEK LETTER ZETA ++103 06/07 147 67 GREEK LETTER ETA ++104 06/08 150 68 GREEK LETTER THETA ++105 06/09 151 69 GREEK LETTER IOTA ++106 06/10 152 6A GREEK LETTER KAPPA ++107 06/11 153 6B GREEK LETTER LAMDA ++108 06/12 154 6C GREEK LETTER MU ++109 06/13 155 6D GREEK LETTER NU ++110 06/14 156 6E GREEK LETTER KSI ++111 06/15 157 6F GREEK LETTER OMICRON ++112 07/00 160 70 GREEK LETTER PI ++113 07/01 161 71 GREEK LETTER RHO ++114 07/02 162 72 GREEK LETTER SIGMA ++115 07/03 163 73 GREEK LETTER TAU ++116 07/04 164 74 GREEK LETTER UPSILON ++117 07/05 165 75 GREEK LETTER FI ++118 07/06 166 76 GREEK LETTER XI ++119 07/07 167 77 GREEK LETTER PSI ++120 07/08 170 78 GREEK LETTER OMEGA ++121 07/09 171 79 SPACE ++122 07/10 172 7A SPACE ++123 07/11 173 7B LEFT CURLY BRACKET, LEFT BRACE ++124 07/12 174 7C VERTICAL LINE, VERTICAL BAR ++125 07/13 175 7D RIGHT CURLY BRACKET, RIGHT BRACE ++126 07/14 176 7E TILDE ++127 07/15 177 7F RUBOUT, DELETE ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ III.1.2.3. PC Code Page 869 ++ ++ (to be filled in...) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ III.2. Updated Country Codes ++ ++ Date: Mon, 7 Apr 1997 23:23:49 EDT ++ From: Dave Leibold ++ Newsgroups: comp.dcom.telecom ++ Subject: Ex-USSR Country Codes Profile ++ Organization: TELECOM Digest ++ ++ Ex-USSR Country Codes Profile ++ 4 April 1997 ++ ++ Below is a summary of the country codes that have formed in the wake ++ of the USSR dissolution, along with some updated findings and reports. ++ Additional or corrected information on any of these nations would be ++ welcome (c/o dleibold@else.net). ++ * Kyrgyz Republic country code 996 will take effect, at least in ++ Canada, effective 1 May 1997, according to CRTC Telecom Order ++ 97-464, based on Stentor Tariff Notice 433. There is no indication ++ whether there will be a permissive dialing period involved or for ++ how long such a permissive operation would remain. ++ * Country code 992 was reported as a recent assignment for ++ Tajikistan, which will be moving from country code 7 at some ++ unknown time. ++ * Uzbekistan has its own country code assignment, but I have no ++ information if this is in service yet or what implementation dates ++ have been set. ++ * Kazakstan does not have a known separate country code assignment ++ at present. It remains in country code 7 for the time being. ++ * Russia seems destined to keep country code 7. ++ * Recent news reports speak of some agreements forming between ++ Russia and Belarus. While there is no outright reunification yet, ++ there is expected to be much closer ties between the two nations. ++ Whether this will lead to a reunification of telephone codes ++ remains to be seen. ++ ++ In the table, "Effective" means the date at which the country code ++ began service (which could vary according to the nation). "Mandatory" ++ means the date at which the country code 7 is invalid for calls to ++ that nation. There are a number of question marks since exact dates ++ have not been collected in all cases. ++ ++CC Nation Effective Mandatory Notes ++ ++370 Lithuania 1993? ??? Announced Jan 1993 ++371 Latvia 1993? ??? ++372 Estonia 1 Feb 1993? March 1993? ++373 Moldova 1993? ??? Announced Jan 1993 ++374 Armenia 1 May 1995 1 July 1995 Announced Jan 1995 (ITU) ++375 Belarus 16 Apr 1995 1997? ++380 Ukraine 16 Apr 1995 Oct 1995? ++7 Kazakstan (no known changes) ++7 Russia (presumably not changing) ++992 Tajikistan ??? ??? Announced 1996-7? ++993 Turkmenistan 3 Jan 1997 3 Apr 1997 Canada as of 29 Nov 1996 ++994 Azerbaijan Sept 1994? ??? Announced 1992 ++995 Georgia 1994? ??? ref: Telecom Digest Oct 1994 ++996 Kyrgyz Republic 1 May 1997 ??? ref: Stentor Canada/CRTC ++998 Uzbekistan ??? ??? Announced 1996? (ITU) ++ ++ Details courtesy Toby Nixon, ITU, Stentor (Canada), CRTC (Canada), ++ TELECOM Digest (including information collected for the country code ++ listings). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++IV. ERRATA & CORRIGENDA ++ ++ The following errors in [636]Using C-Kermit, Second Edition, first ++ printing, have been noted. ++ ++ First, some missing acknowledgements for C-Kermit 6.0: JE Jones of ++ Microware for help with OS-9, Nigel Roles for his help with Plan 9, ++ Lucas Hart for help with VMS and Digital UNIX, Igor Kovalenko for his ++ help with QNX. And later, to Susan Kleinmann for her help with Debian ++ Linux packaging; Patrick Volkerding for his help with Slackware Linux ++ packaging; Jim Knoble for his help with Red Hat Linux packaging; and ++ to dozens of others for sending individual C-Kermit binaries for ++ varied and diverse platforms. ++ ++ Thanks to James Spath for both binaries and reporting many of the ++ typos noted below. Also to Dat Thuc Nguyen for spotting several typos. ++ ++PAGE REMARKS ++COVER "COS" is a misprint. There is no COS. Pretend it says "SCO" or "VOS". ++ (This is fixed in the second printing.) ++ xxi Second line: Fred Smith's affiliation should be Computrition. ++ 83 Change "commands other" to "commands as other" (1st paragraph) ++ 87 Change "The the" to "The" (2nd paragraph) ++ 92 "set modem-type user-defined supra" should be "set modem type ..." ++ 95 Change "VI" to "vi" (1st paragraph) ++ 96 Change "it it" to "it is" (1st paragraph) ++ 97 Change "advantage a literal" to "advantage of a literal" (2nd ++ paragraph) ++102 The call-waiting example would be better as SET DIAL PREFIX *70W ++ (rather than "*70,") because the former will not cause an incorrect ++ call to be placed with pulse dialing. ++123 Third paragraph from bottom: "..otherwise if a your local username.." ++ should be "..otherwise your local username..". ++160 Delete the "it" between "and" and "to" (2nd paragraph) ++185 In "When TRANSFER DISPLAY is OFF, C-Kermit skips the display...", ++ "OFF" should be "NONE". ++187 The last paragraph says the "A command" is ignored, should be "S". ++194 Change "it known" to "it is known" (4th paragraph). ++235 In C-Kermit 7.0, the syntax of the GET command changed. MGET now ++ must be used to get a list of files and there is no more multiline ++ GET command. ++268 Last paragraph: "effect" should be "affect". ++275 In the SET PROTOCOL KERMIT description, the following sentence is ++ incorrect and should be removed: 'If you omit the commands, the ++ default ones are restored: "kermit -ir" and "kermit -r" respectively". ++ The correct information is given at the bottom of page 281. ++279 9th line. The decimal value of ST is 156, not 155. ++295 In the stepping stones, skip ahead to Chapter 17 on p. 327. ++298 Table 16-2, Portuguese entry. Column 4/00 should show section sign, ++ not acute accent. ++316 Other languages written in the Hebrew alphabet include Karaim (a Turkic ++ language spoken in Lithuania and Poland), Judeo-Kurdish, and Judeo- ++ Georgian. ++332 UNDEFINE definition, change "This just" to "This is just". ++344 It might be necessary to set the modem's pulse generation rate when ++ sending numeric pages; most Hayes compatible modems use the S11 ++ register for this. ++350 Delete "is" from between "It" and "ceases" (4th paragraph) ++351 Top - both occurrences of "print \%a" should be "echo \%a". ++364 \v(input) and \v(query) out of alphabetical order. ++378 In the MYSEND macro, "if not \m(rc) goto bad" should be: ++ "if \m(rc) goto bad" (remove the "not"). ++382-383 It should be stated that the loop control variable must be of the \%a ++ type, or else an array element; macro names can not be used for this. ++383 In line 3, "\%f[\%i]" should be "\&f[\%i]". ++383 In the sort example, it should be stated that the array is 1-based. ++387 Change "You can list" to "You can get a list" (5th paragraph) ++393 \Fverify() description. The 3rd sentence could be stated more clearly ++ as "If all characters in string2 are also in string1, 0 is returned." ++398 Copying \ffiles() results to an array before is not required as of ++ C-Kermit 7.0 (see [637]Section 7.3). ++403 In "(\%a + 3) * (\%b 5)", a minus sign is missing between b and 5. ++407 C-Kermit 7.0 no longer supports multiline GET. Change ++ "get, \%1, \%2" to "get {\%1} {\%2}" or "get /as:{\%2} {\%1}". ++409 READ example while loop should be: ++ while success { echo \m(line), read line } ++409 "WRITE file" should be "WRITE keyword" (you can't put a filename there) ++ (The same applies to WRITE-LINE / WRITELN). ++414 \Funhexify() missing from Table 18-3. ++425 MINPUT definition, change 2nd "text2" to "text3". ++436 Several lines are missing from the UNIXLOGIN macro listing. ++ After the "xif fail" block, insert: ++ ++ out \%1\13 ; Send username, carriage return ++ inp 5 Password: ; Wait 5 sec for this prompt ++ if fail end 1 No password prompt ++ pause ; Wait a sec ++ out \%2\13 ; Send password ++ ++440 Change "set terminal byteszie" to "set terminal bytesize". ++ Change "input Password:" to "input 10 Password". ++448 Franchise script: "access line" should be "access \m(line)". ++453 There are two incorrectly coded IF statements in the DELIVER macro ++ definition. Replace both occurrences of "if > \%1 \%3 {" with ++ "xif > \%i \%3 {" (replace "if" by "xif" and "\%1" with "\%i"). ++453 "the the" (last paragraph) should be "the". ++454 EOT (last paragraph) is End of Transmission, not End of Text. ++457 _DEFINE definition: "name constructed" should be "name is constructed". ++457 "macro for and" (last paragraph) should be "macro and". ++459 Should explain that \v(user) is a legal abbreviation of \v(userid). ++480 Figure II-2 is backwards; the least-significant bit is transmitted ++ first, then up to the highest, and the parity bit last. ++534 The VMS Appendix section on Odd Record Lengths no longer applies; ++ C-Kermit 7.0 handles odd record lengths as well as even ones. ++559 Table VIII-3, Portuguese entry. Column 4/00 should show section sign, ++ not acute accent. ++560-563 HP-Roman8 missing from Table VII-4; there wasn't room to squeeze it in. ++ It is listed in section II(6). ++565 "d stroke" in Table VII-5 has the wrong appearance; the stem should ++ be upright. The letter shown in the table is actually a lowercase ++ Icelandic eth, which has a curved stem. ++601-604 BeBox, BeOS, Plan 9, and probably others not listed in trademarks. ++604 The words "SCRIBE TEXT FORMATTER" appear at the end of the last ++ sentence of the first paragraph of the Colophon. They should have ++ been in the Index. ++Index: Missing entries: SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PATHNAMES, Call waiting, ... ++ \F() Page 605, add also 413-414 ++ \Fbreak 389 ++ \Fcapitalize 390 ++ \Fchecksum 414 ++ \Fcrc16 414 ++ \Fexecute 414 ++ \Fhexify 390 ++ \Fltrim 391 ++ \Frepeat 392 ++ \Fspawn 392 ++ \Ftod2secs 399 ++ \v() built_in Page 606, add also 361-364 ++ \v(_line) 354, 361 ++ \v(apcactive) 361 ++ \v(charset) 362 ++ \v(cpu) 362 ++ \v(crc16) 357, 362 ++ \v(d$xxx) add page 362 ++ \v(dialnumber) 362 ++ \v(dialresult) 362 ++ \v(errno) 362 ++ \v(errstring) 362 ++ \v(exedir) 362 ++ \v(inidir) 363 ++ \v(ipaddress) 363 ++ \v(keyboard) 363 ++ \v(macro) 363 ++ \v(minput) 363 ++ \v(m_xxx) 94, 363 ++ \v(password) 364 ++ \v(query) 364 ++ \v(prompt) 364 ++ \v(speed) 356, 364 ++ \v(startup) 364 ++ \v(status) 364 ++ \v(sysid) 364 ++ \v(system) 364 ++ \v(fsize) at lower half page 606 should read \v(tfsize) ++ \v(xversion) 364 ++ BEEP Command 40 ++ SET FLOW 62, 212 ++ ++ Figure II-5 on page 493. The pin assignments of the Mini Din-8 ++ connector are not described anywhere. As noted in the text, these tend ++ to vary from vendor to vendor. One common arrangement is: ++ ++ 1. HSKout (Handshake out -- definition depends on software) ++ 2. HSKin (Handshake in or external clock) ++ 3. TxD- ++ 4. Not used ++ 5. RxD- ++ 6. TxD+ ++ 7. Not used ++ 8. RxD+ ++ ++ Note the "balanced pairs" for Receive Data (RxD) and Transmit Data ++ (TxD), and the utter lack of modem signals. These connectors follow ++ the RS-423 standard, rather than RS-232. In some arrangements, Pin 1 ++ is used for DTR and Pin 2 for CD; in others Pin 1 is RTS and Pin 2 is ++ CTS. ++ ++ Please send reports of other errors to the authors, as well as ++ suggestions for improvements, additional index entries, and any other ++ comments: ++ ++ [638]kermit@columbia.edu ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++APPENDIX V. ADDITIONAL COPYRIGHT NOTICES ++ ++ The following copyrights cover some of the source code used in the ++ development of C-Kermit, Kermit 95, or Kermit 95 support libraries. ++ ++/*****************************************************************************/ ++/* */ ++/* Copyright (c) 1995 by Oy Online Solutions Ltd. */ ++/* */ ++/* Distribution of this source code is strictly forbbidden. Use of this */ ++/* source code is granted to the University of Columbia C-Kermit project */ ++/* to be distributed in binary format only. Please familiarize yourself */ ++/* with the accompanying LICENSE.P file. */ ++/* */ ++/*****************************************************************************/ ++ ++ used for Xmodem, Ymodem, and Zmodem protocol in Kermit 95 (p95.dll, ++ p2.dll) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ Copyright (c) 1997 Stanford University ++ ++ The use of this software for revenue-generating purposes may require a ++ license from the owners of the underlying intellectual property. ++ Specifically, the SRP-3 protocol may not be used for ++ revenue-generating purposes without a license. ++ ++ Within that constraint, permission to use, copy, modify, and ++ distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose is ++ hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notices ++ and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and ++ related documentation. ++ ++ THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ++ EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY ++ WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ++ ++ IN NO EVENT SHALL STANFORD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, ++ INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES ++ WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ++ ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ++ ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS ++ SOFTWARE. ++ ++ Used for Secure Remote Password (TM) protocol (SRP) in C-Kermit, ++ Kermit 95 (k95.exe, k2.exe, k95crypt.dll, k2crypt.dll) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ Copyright 1990 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All ++ Rights Reserved. ++ ++ Export of this software from the United States of America may require ++ a specific license from the United States Government. It is the ++ responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to ++ obtain such a license before exporting. ++ ++ WITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and ++ distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and ++ without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright ++ notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and ++ this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that ++ the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining ++ to distribution of the software without specific, written prior ++ permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of ++ this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express ++ or implied warranty. ++ ++ Used for Telnet Authentication Option, Telnet Encryption Option, and ++ Kerberos (TM) authentication in C-Kermit, Kermit 95 (k95.exe, k2.exe, ++ k95crypt.dll, k2crypt.dll) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. ++ All rights reserved. ++ ++ Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without ++ modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are ++ met: ++ 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright ++ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. ++ 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright ++ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in ++ the documentation and/or other materials provided with the ++ distribution. ++ 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this ++ software must display the following acknowledgement: ++ ++ This product includes software developed by the University of ++ California, Berkeley and its contributors. ++ 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its ++ contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived ++ from this software without specific prior written permission. ++ ++ THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' ++ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ++ THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR ++ PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS ++ BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR ++ CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF ++ SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR ++ BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ++ WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ++ OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN ++ IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ++ ++ Used for Telnet Authentication Option, Telnet Encryption Option, and ++ Kerberos (TM) authentication in C-Kermit, Kermit 95 (k95.exe, k2.exe, ++ k95crypt.dll, k2crypt.dll) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ Copyright (C) 1995-1997 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights ++ reserved. ++ ++ This package is an DES implementation written by Eric Young ++ (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform ++ with MIT's libdes. ++ ++ This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as ++ the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions ++ apply to all code found in this distribution. ++ ++ Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in ++ the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, ++ Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of that the SSL ++ library. This can be in the form of a textual message at program ++ startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the ++ package. ++ ++ Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without ++ modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are ++ met: ++ 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, ++ this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. ++ 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright ++ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in ++ the documentation and/or other materials provided with the ++ distribution. ++ 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this ++ software must display the following acknowledgement: This product ++ includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) ++ ++ THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR ++ IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED ++ WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE ++ DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ++ ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL ++ DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE ++ GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS ++ INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER ++ IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR ++ OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ++ ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ++ ++ The license and distribution terms for any publically available ++ version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code ++ cannot simply be copied and put under another distrubution license ++ [including the GNU Public License.] ++ ++ The reason behind this being stated in this direct manner is past ++ experience in code simply being copied and the attribution removed ++ from it and then being distributed as part of other packages. This ++ implementation was a non-trivial and unpaid effort. ++ ++ Used DES encryption in Kermit 95 (k95crypt.dll, k2crypt.dll) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ * This is version 1.1 of CryptoLib ++ * ++ * The authors of this software are Jack Lacy, Don Mitchell and Matt Blaze ++ * Copyright (c) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 by AT&T. ++ * Permission to use, copy, and modify this software without fee ++ * is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in ++ * all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or ++ * modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting ++ * documentation for such software. ++ * ++ * NOTE: ++ * Some of the algorithms in cryptolib may be covered by patents. ++ * It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that any required ++ * licenses are obtained. ++ * ++ * ++ * SOME PARTS OF CRYPTOLIB MAY BE RESTRICTED UNDER UNITED STATES EXPORT ++ * REGULATIONS. ++ * ++ * ++ * THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ++ * WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHORS NOR AT&T MAKE ANY ++ * REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY ++ * OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ++ ++ Used for Big Number library in Kermit 95 (k95crypt.dll, k2crypt.dll). ++ ++ [ [639]Top ] [ [640]C-Kermit ] [ [641]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CKERMIT70.HTM / The Kermit Project / Columbia University / 8 Feb 2000 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#contents ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.htm ++ 4. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 6. http://www.kermit-project.org/ ++ 7. http://www.columbia.nyc.ny.us/kermit/ ++ 8. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/COPYING.TXT ++ 9. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckcmai.c ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xv ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 12. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckcbwr.txt ++ 13. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckubwr.txt ++ 14. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckvbwr.txt ++ 15. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckubwr.txt ++ 16. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckermit70.txt ++ 17. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/security.txt ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 19. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/iksd.txt ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.htm ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/cuiksd.htm ++ 22. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/telnet.txt ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.htm ++ 24. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/COPYING.TXT ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 26. http://www.opensource.org/ ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xi ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xii ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x0 ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1 ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.0 ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.1 ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.2 ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.3 ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.4 ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.1 ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.2 ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.3 ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.4 ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.5 ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.7 ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.8 ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.9 ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.10 ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11 ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.1 ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.2 ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.3 ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.4 ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.5 ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.6 ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.7 ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.12 ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.13 ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.14 ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.15 ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.16 ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.17 ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.18 ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.19 ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.20 ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.21 ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22 ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.1 ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.2 ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.3 ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.4 ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.5 ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.6 ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.7 ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.8 ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.23 ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.24 ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2 ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.0 ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1 ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.1 ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.2 ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.3 ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.4 ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.5 ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.6 ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.7 ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.8 ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.9 ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.10 ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.11 ++ 91. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.12 ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.13 ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.14 ++ 94. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.15 ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.16 ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.2 ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.2.1 ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.2.2 ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3 ++ 100. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.0 ++ 101. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.1 ++ 102. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.2 ++ 103. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.3 ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.4 ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.5 ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.6 ++ 107. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.4 ++ 108. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.5 ++ 109. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.6 ++ 110. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7 ++ 111. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.0 ++ 112. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.1 ++ 113. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.2 ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.3 ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4 ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4.1 ++ 117. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4.2 ++ 118. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4.3 ++ 119. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4.4 ++ 120. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.4.5 ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.8 ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.9 ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.9.1 ++ 124. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.9.2 ++ 125. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.10 ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.11 ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.12 ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.13 ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.14 ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.15 ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3 ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.1 ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.2 ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.3 ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.4 ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4 ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.0 ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1 ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1.1 ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1.2 ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1.3 ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.1 ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.1.1 ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.1.2 ++ 146. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.1.3 ++ 147. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2 ++ 148. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2.1 ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2.2 ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.3 ++ 151. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.3.1 ++ 152. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.3.2 ++ 153. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.4 ++ 154. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.5 ++ 155. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.6 ++ 156. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.7 ++ 157. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8 ++ 158. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.1 ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.2 ++ 160. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.3 ++ 161. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.4 ++ 162. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 163. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3.1 ++ 164. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3.2 ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3.3 ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3.4 ++ 167. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4 ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.1 ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.1.1 ++ 170. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.1.2 ++ 171. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.2 ++ 172. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.2.1 ++ 173. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.2.1.1 ++ 174. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.2.1.2 ++ 175. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.4.2.2 ++ 176. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5 ++ 177. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.1 ++ 178. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.2 ++ 179. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.2.1 ++ 180. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.2.2 ++ 181. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.3 ++ 182. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.4 ++ 183. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.6 ++ 184. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7 ++ 185. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 186. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.2 ++ 187. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.3 ++ 188. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.8 ++ 189. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.8.1 ++ 190. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.8.2 ++ 191. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 192. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 193. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.2 ++ 194. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.3 ++ 195. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 196. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 197. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.1 ++ 198. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.2 ++ 199. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 200. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.4 ++ 201. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.5 ++ 202. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.6 ++ 203. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.12 ++ 204. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.13 ++ 205. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.14 ++ 206. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.15 ++ 207. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.16 ++ 208. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.17 ++ 209. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.17.1 ++ 210. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.17.2 ++ 211. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.18 ++ 212. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.19 ++ 213. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 214. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.1 ++ 215. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2 ++ 216. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.1 ++ 217. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.2 ++ 218. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.3 ++ 219. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.4 ++ 220. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.5 ++ 221. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.3 ++ 222. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.21 ++ 223. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22 ++ 224. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.1 ++ 225. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.2 ++ 226. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.3 ++ 227. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.4 ++ 228. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.5 ++ 229. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.6 ++ 230. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.7 ++ 231. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.8 ++ 232. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.23 ++ 233. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.24 ++ 234. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.25 ++ 235. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5 ++ 236. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.0 ++ 237. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.1 ++ 238. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.2 ++ 239. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.3 ++ 240. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.3.1 ++ 241. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.3.2 ++ 242. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.4 ++ 243. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.5 ++ 244. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.6 ++ 245. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.7 ++ 246. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6 ++ 247. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.0 ++ 248. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.1 ++ 249. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.2 ++ 250. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.3 ++ 251. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.4 ++ 252. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.5 ++ 253. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6 ++ 254. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.1 ++ 255. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.2 ++ 256. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.2 ++ 257. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.3 ++ 258. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.4 ++ 259. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5 ++ 260. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.1 ++ 261. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.2 ++ 262. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.3 ++ 263. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.4 ++ 264. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.5 ++ 265. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.7 ++ 266. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7 ++ 267. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.0 ++ 268. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1 ++ 269. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1.1 ++ 270. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1.2 ++ 271. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1.3 ++ 272. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1.4 ++ 273. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.2 ++ 274. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.3 ++ 275. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.4 ++ 276. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 277. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.6 ++ 278. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.7 ++ 279. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.8 ++ 280. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9 ++ 281. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9.1 ++ 282. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9.2 ++ 283. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10 ++ 284. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.1 ++ 285. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.2 ++ 286. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.3 ++ 287. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.4 ++ 288. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.5 ++ 289. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.6 ++ 290. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 291. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.8 ++ 292. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.9 ++ 293. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.10 ++ 294. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.11 ++ 295. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.12 ++ 296. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.13 ++ 297. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.14 ++ 298. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.15 ++ 299. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.16 ++ 300. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.17 ++ 301. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.18 ++ 302. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.19 ++ 303. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.20 ++ 304. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.20.1 ++ 305. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.20.2 ++ 306. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.21 ++ 307. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.22 ++ 308. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.23 ++ 309. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.24 ++ 310. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.25 ++ 311. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.26 ++ 312. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.26.1 ++ 313. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.26.2 ++ 314. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.27 ++ 315. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x8 ++ 316. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9 ++ 317. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.0 ++ 318. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.1 ++ 319. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.2 ++ 320. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.3 ++ 321. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x10 ++ 322. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii ++ 323. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1 ++ 324. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1.1 ++ 325. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1.2 ++ 326. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1.2.1 ++ 327. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1.2.2 ++ 328. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.1.2.3 ++ 329. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii.2 ++ 330. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiv ++ 331. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xv ++ 332. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 333. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckbreviews.html ++ 334. http://www.bhusa.com/ ++ 335. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/manuals.html#ckde ++ 336. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/manuals.html#ktb ++ 337. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/news.html ++ 338. news:comp.protocols.kermit.announce ++ 339. news:comp.protocols.kermit.misc ++ 340. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 341. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4 ++ 342. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 343. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.23 ++ 344. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.1 ++ 345. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 346. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 347. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9. ++ 348. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 349. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9.2 ++ 350. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.15 ++ 351. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.1 ++ 352. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 353. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.4 ++ 354. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 355. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#mjd ++ 356. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#mjd ++ 357. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 358. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 359. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 360. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 361. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.12 ++ 362. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 363. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 364. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5 ++ 365. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 366. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.18 ++ 367. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.4 ++ 368. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.15 ++ 369. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 370. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.3 ++ 371. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 372. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.1 ++ 373. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 374. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckccfg.txt ++ 375. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckccfg.txt ++ 376. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.4 ++ 377. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.5 ++ 378. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 379. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22.5 ++ 380. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.12 ++ 381. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.16 ++ 382. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7 ++ 383. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.3.5 ++ 384. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 385. http://www.telefonica.es/cambiodenumeracion/ ++ 386. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 387. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 388. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.2.2 ++ 389. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.11 ++ 390. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.13 ++ 391. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.12 ++ 392. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 393. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.1 ++ 394. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 395. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 396. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.7 ++ 397. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.6 ++ 398. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 399. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/telnet.txt ++ 400. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.htm ++ 401. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/telnet.txt ++ 402. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.htm ++ 403. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1572.txt ++ 404. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc779.txt ++ 405. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 406. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.10 ++ 407. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.8 ++ 408. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 409. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 410. http://www.psy.uq.oz.au/~ftp/Crypto/ ++ 411. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 412. http://srp.stanford.edu/srp/ ++ 413. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7.1, ++ 414. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckccfg.txt ++ 415. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 416. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 417. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7 ++ 418. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.0 ++ 419. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckuins.txt ++ 420. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckubwr.txt ++ 421. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckuins.txt ++ 422. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html#x4.2 ++ 423. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 424. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.1 ++ 425. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1945.txt ++ 426. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 427. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.2 ++ 428. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x3.2 ++ 429. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 430. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 431. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.4 ++ 432. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckubwr.txt ++ 433. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 434. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 435. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.3 ++ 436. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 437. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 438. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 439. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.15 ++ 440. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.4 ++ 441. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7 ++ 442. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.3 ++ 443. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.1.3 ++ 444. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 445. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2 ++ 446. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 447. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.2 ++ 448. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 449. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 450. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 451. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.15 ++ 452. http://www.telstra.com.au/docs/PGP/ ++ 453. http://www.telstra.com.au/docs/PGP/pgpdoc2/pgpdoc2_17.html ++ 454. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 455. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.7 ++ 456. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 457. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.14 ++ 458. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.23 ++ 459. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7 ++ 460. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 461. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 462. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 463. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 464. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.4 ++ 465. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 466. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.5 ++ 467. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 468. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 469. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.4 ++ 470. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 471. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.4 ++ 472. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.5 ++ 473. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 474. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 475. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 476. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 477. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10 ++ 478. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.11 ++ 479. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 480. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2 ++ 481. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 482. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5.4 ++ 483. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 484. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.0.6 ++ 485. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 486. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1 ++ 487. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 488. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 489. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 490. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2 ++ 491. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 492. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 493. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 494. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.2 ++ 495. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 496. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 497. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 498. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.11.5 ++ 499. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.0.6 ++ 500. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 501. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 502. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 503. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 504. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 505. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.1 ++ 506. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10 ++ 507. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.5 ++ 508. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.3 ++ 509. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.5 ++ 510. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 511. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 512. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 513. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 514. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 515. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.15 ++ 516. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.18 ++ 517. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 518. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 519. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 520. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.19 ++ 521. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.16 ++ 522. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.19 ++ 523. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20.2.3 ++ 524. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 525. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.4 ++ 526. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.2 ++ 527. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22.3 ++ 528. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 529. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 530. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.3 ++ 531. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x5.2.1 ++ 532. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.1 ++ 533. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.2 ++ 534. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6 ++ 535. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii ++ 536. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#xiii ++ 537. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1489.txt ++ 538. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2319.txt ++ 539. http://www.unicode.org/ ++ 540. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.2 ++ 541. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.5.1 ++ 542. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2640.txt ++ 543. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.6.2 ++ 544. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.0 ++ 545. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.5 ++ 546. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.4 ++ 547. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 548. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.21 ++ 549. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x6.5 ++ 550. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.8 ++ 551. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.7 ++ 552. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.2 ++ 553. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.19 ++ 554. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 555. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1 ++ 556. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 557. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.1 ++ 558. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2 ++ 559. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.11 ++ 560. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.10 ++ 561. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#ferrstring ++ 562. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.5 ++ 563. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x2.1.10 ++ 564. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.1 ++ 565. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.23 ++ 566. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.23 ++ 567. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22 ++ 568. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 569. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.23 ++ 570. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.24 ++ 571. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.24 ++ 572. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.3 ++ 573. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.12 ++ 574. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9 ++ 575. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 576. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 577. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 578. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 579. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 580. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 581. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.8.4 ++ 582. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.2.5 ++ 583. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.8 ++ 584. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 585. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 586. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.19 ++ 587. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.16 ++ 588. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9.1 ++ 589. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 590. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.3 ++ 591. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 592. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.5.1 ++ 593. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10 ++ 594. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.10 ++ 595. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 596. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.23 ++ 597. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 598. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.7 ++ 599. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11.3 ++ 600. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.11 ++ 601. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 602. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.3 ++ 603. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.3 ++ 604. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.9.2 ++ 605. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 606. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.17.2 ++ 607. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22 ++ 608. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 609. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22 ++ 610. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 611. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 612. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.22 ++ 613. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 614. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 615. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 616. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.19 ++ 617. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9.1 ++ 618. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x9.3 ++ 619. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.5 ++ 620. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 621. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.4 ++ 622. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.20.2 ++ 623. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.5 ++ 624. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.10.9 ++ 625. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.10 ++ 626. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 627. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7.1 ++ 628. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 629. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.19 ++ 630. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.10 ++ 631. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.11 ++ 632. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.3 ++ 633. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ 634. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.20 ++ 635. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ 636. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 637. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x7.3 ++ 638. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu ++ 639. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#top ++ 640. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 641. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckccfg.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,1766 @@ ++ ++ C-Kermit Configuration Options ++ ++ Frank da Cruz ++ [1]The Kermit Project ++ [2]Columbia University ++ ++ As of: C-Kermit 8.0.211, 10 April 2004 ++ This page last updated: Sun Apr 11 16:45:55 2004 (New York USA Time) ++ ++ IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, note that ++ this file is a plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the ++ original (and possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ ++ [3]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ ++ [ [4]C-Kermit Home ] [ [5]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CONTENTS ++ ++ 1. [6]FILE TRANSFER ++ 2. [7]SERIAL COMMUNICATION SPEEDS ++ 3. [8]FULLSCREEN FILE TRANSFER DISPLAY ++ 4. [9]CHARACTER SETS ++ 5. [10]APC EXECUTION ++ 6. [11]PROGRAM SIZE ++ 7. [12]MODEM DIALING ++ 8. [13]NETWORK SUPPORT ++ 9. [14]EXCEPTION HANDLING ++ 10. [15]SECURITY FEATURES ++ 11. [16]ENABLING SELECT() ++ 12. [17]I/O REDIRECTION ++ 13. [18]FLOATING-POINT NUMBERS, TIMERS, AND ARITHMETIC ++ 14. [19]SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS ++ I. [20]SUMMARY OF COMPILE-TIME OPTIONS ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ OVERVIEW ++ ++ This document describes configuration options for C-Kermit (5A and ++ later). The major topics covered include program size (and how to ++ reduce it), how to include or exclude particular features, notes on ++ serial-port, modem, and network support, and a list of C-Kermit's ++ compile-time options. ++ ++ For details about your particular operating system, also see the ++ system-specific installation instructions file, such as the ++ [21]C-Kermit Installation Instructions for Unix. ++ ++ [ [22]C-Kermit Home ] [ [23]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1. FILE TRANSFER ++ ++ [ [24]Top ] [ [25]Contents ] [ [26]Next ] [ [27]Previous ] ++ ++ Prior to version 7.0, C-Kermit was always built with the most ++ conservative Kermit file-transfer protocol defaults on every platform: ++ no control-character prefixing, 94-byte packets, and a window size of ++ 1. ++ ++ Starting in version 7.0, fast settings are the default. To override ++ these at compile time, include: ++ ++ -DNOFAST ++ ++ in the C compiler CFLAGS. Even with the fast defaults, C-Kermit ++ automatically drops down to whatever window and packet sizes requested ++ by the other Kermit, if these are smaller, when sending files (except ++ for control-character unprefixing, which is not negotiated, and which ++ is now set to CAUTIOUS rather than NONE at startup). C-Kermit's ++ settings prevail when it is receiving. ++ ++ [ [28]C-Kermit Home ] [ [29]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2. SERIAL COMMUNICATION SPEEDS ++ ++ [ [30]Top ] [ [31]Contents ] [ [32]Next ] [ [33]Previous ] ++ ++ As of 6 September 1997, a new simplified mechanism for obtaining the ++ list of legal serial interface speeds is in place: ++ ++ * If the symbol TTSPDLIST is defined, the system-dependent routine ++ ttspdlist() is called at program initialization to obtain the ++ list. ++ * This symbol should be defined only for C-Kermit implementations ++ that have implemented the ttspdlist() function, typically in the ++ ck?tio.c module. See [34]ckutio.c for an example. ++ * TTSPDLIST is automatically defined in [35]ckcdeb.h for UNIX. Add ++ the appropriate #ifdefs for other platforms when the corresponding ++ ttspdlist() functions are filled in. ++ * If TTSPDLIST is (or normally would be) defined, the old code ++ (described below) can still be selected by defining NOTTSPDLIST. ++ ++ The ttspdlist() function can obtain the speeds in any way that works. ++ For example, based simply on #ifdef Bnnnn..#endif (in UNIX). Although ++ it might be better to actually check each speed against the currently ++ selected hardware interface before allowing it in the array, there is ++ usually no passive and/or reliable and safe way to do this, and so ++ it's better to let some speeds into the array that might not work, ++ than it is to erroneously exclude others. Speeds that don't work are ++ caught when the SET SPEED command is actually given. ++ ++ Note that this scheme does not necessarily rule out split speed ++ operation, but effectively it does in C-Kermit as presently ++ constituted since there are no commands to set input and output speed ++ separately (except the special case "set speed 75/1200"). ++ ++ Note that some platforms, notably AIX 4.2 and 4.3, implement high ++ serial speeds transparently to the application, e.g. by mapping 50 bps ++ to 57600 bps, and so on. ++ ++ That's the whole deal. When TTSPDLIST is not defined, the following ++ applies: ++ ++ Speeds are defined in two places: the SET SPEED keyword list in the ++ command parser (as of this writing, in the [36]ckuus3.c source file), ++ and in the system- dependent communications i/o module, ck?tio.c, ++ functions ttsspd() (set speed) and ttgspd() (get speed). The following ++ speeds are assumed to be available in all versions: ++ ++ 0, 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 ++ ++ If one or more of these speeds is not supported by your system, you'll ++ need to change the source code (this has never happened so far). Other ++ speeds that are not common to all systems have Kermit-specific ++ symbols: ++ ++ Symbol Symbol ++ Speed (bps) to enable to disable ++ 50 BPS_50 NOB_50 ++ 75 BPS_75 NOB_75 ++ 75/1200 BPS_7512 NOB_7512 ++ 134.5 BPS_134 NOB_134 ++ 150 BPS_150 NOB_150 ++ 200 BPS_200 NOB_200 ++ 1800 BPS_1800 NOB_1800 ++ 3600 BPS_3600 NOB_3600 ++ 7200 BPS_7200 NOB_7200 ++ 14400 BPS_14K NOB_14K ++ 19200 BPS_19K NOB_19K ++ 28800 BPS_28K NOB_28K ++ 38400 BPS_38K NOB_38K ++ 57600 BPS_57K NOB_57K ++ 76800 BPS_76K NOB_76K ++ 115200 BPS_115K NOB_155K ++ 230400 BPS_230K NOB_230K ++ 460800 BPS_460K NOB_460K ++ 921600 BPS_921K NOB_921K ++ ++ The [37]ckcdeb.h header file contains default speed configurations for ++ the many systems that C-Kermit supports. You can override these ++ defaults by (a) editing ckcdeb.h, or (b) defining the appropriate ++ enabling and/or disabling symbols on the CC command line, for example: ++ ++ -DBPS_14400 -DNOB_115200 ++ ++ or the "make" command line, e.g.: ++ ++ make blah "KFLAGS=-DBPS_14400 -DNOB_115200" ++ ++ Note: some speeds have no symbols defined for them, because they have ++ never been needed: 12.5bps, 45.5bps, 20000bps, etc. These can easily ++ be added if required (but they will work only if the OS supports ++ them). ++ ++ IMPORTANT: Adding one of these flags at compile time does not ++ necessarily mean that you will be able to use that speed. A particular ++ speed is usable only if your underlying operating system supports it. ++ In particular, it needs to be defined in the appropriate system header ++ file (e.g. in UNIX, cd to /usr/include and grep for B9600 in *.h and ++ sys/*.h to find the header file that contains the definitions for the ++ supported speeds), and supported by the serial device driver, and of ++ course by the physical device itself. ++ ++ ALSO IMPORTANT: The list of available speeds is independent of how ++ they are set. The many UNIXes, for example, offer a wide variety of ++ APIs that are BSD-based, SYSV-based, POSIX-based, and purely made up. ++ See the ttsspd(), ttgspd(), and ttspdlist() routines in [38]ckutio.c ++ for illustrations. ++ ++ The latest entries in this horserace are the tcgetspeed() and ++ ttsetspeed() routines found in UnixWare 7. Unlike other methods, they ++ accept the entire range of integers (longs really) as speed values, ++ rather than certain codes, and return an error if the number is not, ++ in fact, a legal speed for the device/driver in question. In this ++ case, there is no way to build a list of legal speeds at compile time, ++ since no Bnnnn symbols are defined (except for "depracated, legacy" ++ interfaces like ioctl()) and so the legal speed list must be ++ enumerated in the code -- see ttspdlist() in [39]ckutio.c. ++ ++ [ [40]C-Kermit Home ] [ [41]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3. FULLSCREEN FILE TRANSFER DISPLAY ++ ++ [ [42]Top ] [ [43]Contents ] [ [44]Next ] [ [45]Previous ] ++ ++ New to edit 180 is support for an MS-DOS-Kermit-like local-mode full ++ screen file transfer display, accomplished using the curses library, ++ or something equivalent (for example, the Screen Manager on DEC VMS). ++ To enable this feature, include the following in your CFLAGS: ++ ++ -DCK_CURSES ++ ++ and then change your build procedure (if necessary) to include the ++ necessary libraries. For example, in Unix these are usually "curses" ++ or "ncurses" (and more recenlty, "ncursesw" and "slang"), perhaps also ++ "termcap", "termlib", or "tinfo": ++ ++ "LIBS= -lcurses -ltermcap" ++ "LIBS= -lcurses -ltermlib" ++ "LIBS= -lncurses" ++ "LIBS= -ltermlib" ++ "LIBS= -ltinfo" ++ ++ "man curses" for further information, and search through the Unix ++ [46]makefile for "CK_CURSES" to see many examples, and also see the ++ relevant sections of the [47]Unix C-Kermit Installation Instructions, ++ particularly Sections [48]4 and [49]9.2. ++ ++ There might still be a complication. Some implementations of curses ++ reserve the right to alter the buffering on the output file without ++ restoring it afterwards, which can leave Kermit's command processing ++ in a mess when the prompt comes back after a fullscreen file transfer ++ display. The typical symptom is that characters you type at the prompt ++ after a local-mode file transfer (i.e. after seeing the curses ++ file-transfer display) do not echo until you press the Return (Enter) ++ key. If this happens to you, try adding ++ ++ -DCK_NEWTERM ++ ++ to your makefile target (see comments in screenc() in [50]ckuusx.c for ++ an explanation). ++ ++ If that doesn't fix the problem, then use a bigger hammer and replace ++ -DCK_NEWTERM with: ++ ++ -DNONOSETBUF ++ ++ which tells Kermit to force stdout to be unbuffered so CBREAK mode can ++ work. ++ ++ In SCO Xenix and SCO UNIX, there are two separate curses libraries, ++ one based on termcap and the other based on terminfo. The default ++ library, usually terminfo, is established when the development system ++ is installed. To manually select terminfo (at compile time): ++ ++ compile -DM_TERMINFO and link -ltinfo ++ ++ and to manually select termcap: ++ ++ compile -DM_TERMCAP and link -ltcap -ltermlib ++ ++ looks at M_TERMINFO and M_TERMCAP to decide which header ++ files to use. /usr/lib/libcurses.a is a link to either libtinfo.a or ++ libtcap.a. The C-Kermit compilation options must agree with the ++ version of the curses library that is actually installed. ++ ++ NOTE: If you are doing an ANSI-C compilation and you get compile time ++ warnings like the following: ++ ++ Warning: function not declared in ckuusx.c: wmove, printw, wclrtoeol, ++ wclear, wrefresh, endwin, etc... ++ ++ it means that your file does not contain prototypes for ++ these functions. The warnings should be harmless. ++ ++ New to edit 190 is the ability to refresh a messed-up full-screen ++ display, e.g. after receiving a broadcast message. This depends on the ++ curses package including the wrefresh() and clearok() functions and ++ the curscr variable. If your version has these, or has code to ++ simulate them, then add: ++ ++ -DCK_WREFRESH ++ ++ The curses and termcap libraries add considerable size to the program ++ image (e.g. about 20K on a SUN-4, 40K on a 386). On some small ++ systems, such as the AT&T 6300 PLUS, curses can push Kermit over the ++ edge... even though it compiles, loads, and runs correctly, its ++ increased size apparently makes it swap constantly, slowing it down to ++ a crawl, even when the curses display is not in use. Some new makefile ++ targets have been added to take care of this (e.g. sys3upcshcc), but ++ similar tricks might be necessary in other cases too. ++ ++ On the curses file-transfer display, just below the "thermometer", is ++ a running display of the transfer rate, as a flat quotient of file ++ characters per elapsed seconds so far. You can change this to an ++ average that gives greater weight to recent history (0.25 * ++ instantaneous cps + 0.75 * historical cps) by adding -DCPS_WEIGHTED to ++ your CFLAGS (sorry folks, this one is not worth a SET command). You ++ can choose a second type of weighted average in which the weighting ++ smooths out progressively as the transfer progresses by adding ++ -DCPS_VINCE to -DCPS_WEIGHTED. ++ ++ An alternative to curses is also available at compile time, but should ++ be selected if your version of Kermit is to be run in local mode only ++ in an ANSI terminal environment, for example on a desktop workstation ++ that has an ANSI console driver. To select this option in place of ++ curses, define the symbol MYCURSES: ++ ++ -DMYCURSES ++ ++ instead of CK_CURSES. The MYCURSES option uses built-in ANSI (VT100) ++ escape sequences, and depends upon your terminal or console driver to ++ interpret them correctly. ++ ++ In some C-Kermit builds, we replace printf() via #define printf... ++ However, this can cause conflicts with the [n]curses header files. ++ Various hacks are required to get around this -- see [51]ckutio.c, ++ [52]ckufio.c, [53]ckuusx.c, [54]ckucmd.c, etc. ++ ++ [ [55]C-Kermit Home ] [ [56]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4. CHARACTER SETS ++ ++ [ [57]Top ] [ [58]Contents ] [ [59]Next ] [ [60]Previous ] ++ ++ Since version 5A, C-Kermit has included support for conversion of ++ character sets for Western European languages (i.e. languages that ++ originated in Western Europe, but are now also spoken in the Western ++ Hemisphere and other parts of the world), via ISO 8859-1 Latin ++ Alphabet 1, for Eastern European languages (ISO Latin-2), Hebrew (and ++ Yiddish), Greek, and Cyrillic-alphabet languages (ISO Latin/Cyrillic). ++ Many file (local) character sets are supported: ISO 646 7-bit national ++ sets, IBM code pages, Apple, DEC, DG, NeXT, etc. ++ ++ To build Kermit with no character-set translation at all, include ++ -DNOCSETS in the CFLAGS. To build with no Latin-2, add -DNOLATIN2. To ++ build with no Cyrillic, add -DNOCYRIL. To omit Hebrew, add -DNOHEBREW. ++ If -DNOCSETS is *not* included, you'll always get LATIN1. To build ++ with no KANJI include -DNOKANJI. There is presently no way to include ++ Latin-2, Cyrillic, Hebrew, or Kanji without also including Latin-1. ++ ++ [61]Unicode support was added in C-Kermit 7.0, and it adds a fair ++ amount of tables and code (and this is only a "Level 1" implementation ++ -- a higher level would also require building in the entire Unicode ++ database). On a PC with RH 5.2 Linux, building C-Kermit 7.0, we get ++ the following sizes: ++ ++ NOCSETS NOUNICODE NOKANJI Before After ++ [ ] [ ] [ ] 1329014 (Full) ++ [ ] [ ] [ X ] 1325686 (Unicode but no Kanji) ++ [ ] [ X ] [ ] 1158837 (All charsets except Unicode) ++ [ X ] [ x ] [ x ] 1090845 (NOCSETS implies the other two) ++ ++ Note, by the way, that NOKANJI without NOUNICODE only removes the ++ non-Unicode Kanji sets (Shift-JIS, EUC-JP, JIS-7, etc). Kanji is still ++ representable in UCS-2 and UTF-8. ++ ++ [ [62]C-Kermit Home ] [ [63]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5. APC EXECUTION ++ ++ [ [64]Top ] [ [65]Contents ] [ [66]Next ] [ [67]Previous ] ++ ++ The Kermit CONNECT and INPUT commands are coded to execute Application ++ Program Command escape sequences from the host: ++ ++ _\ ++ ++ where is a C-Kermit command, or a list of C-Kermit commands ++ separated by commas, up to about 1K in length. ++ ++ To date, this feature has been included in the OS/2, Windows, VMS, ++ OS-9, and Unix versions, for which the symbol: ++ ++ CK_APC ++ ++ is defined automatically in [68]ckuusr.h. For OS/2, APC is enabled at ++ runtime by default, for UNIX it is disabled. It is controlled by the ++ SET TERMINAL APC command. Configuring APC capability into a version ++ that gets it by default (because CK_APC is defined in [69]ckuusr.h) ++ can be overridden by including: ++ ++ -DNOAPC ++ ++ on the CC command line. ++ ++ C-Kermit's autodownload feature depends on the APC feature, so ++ deconfiguring APC also disables autodownload (it doesn't use APC ++ escape sequences, but uses the APC switching mechanism internally). ++ ++ [ [70]C-Kermit Home ] [ [71]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6. PROGRAM SIZE ++ ++ [ [72]Top ] [ [73]Contents ] [ [74]Next ] [ [75]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 6.1. [76]Feature Selection ++ 6.2. [77]Changing Buffer Sizes ++ 6.3. [78]Other Size-Related Items ++ 6.4. [79]Space/Time Tradeoffs ++ ++ (Also see [80]Section 4) ++ ++ Each release of C-Kermit is larger than the last. On some computers ++ (usually old ones) the size of the program prevents it from being ++ successfully linked and loaded. On some others (also usually old ++ ones), it occupies so much memory that it is constantly swapping or ++ paging. In such cases, you can reduce C-Kermit's size in various ways, ++ outlined in this section. The following options can cut down on the ++ program's size at compile time by removing features or changing the ++ size of storage areas. ++ ++ If you are reading this section because all you want is a small, fast, ++ quick-to-load Kermit file-transfer application for the remote end of ++ your connection, and the remote end is Unix based, take a look at ++ G-Kermit: ++ ++ [81]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ ++ 6.1. Feature Selection ++ ++ Features can be added or removed by defining symbols on the CC (C ++ compiler) command line. "-D" is the normal CC directive to define a ++ symbol so, for example, "-DNODEBUG" defines the symbol NODEBUG. Some C ++ compilers might use different syntax, e.g. "-d NODEBUG" or ++ "/DEFINE=NODEBUG". For C compilers that do not accept command-line ++ definitions, you can put the corresponding #define statements in the ++ file ckcsym.h, for example: ++ ++ #define NODEBUG ++ ++ The following table shows the savings achieved when building C-Kermit ++ 8.0 (Beta.04) with selected feature-deselection switches on an ++ Intel-based PC with Red Hat Linux 7.0 and gcc 2.96. The sizes are for ++ non-security builds. The fully configured non-security build is ++ 2127408 bytes. ++ ++ Option Size Savings Effect ++ NOICP 545330 74.4% No Interactive Command Parser (command-line only) ++ NOLOCAL 1539994 27.6% No making connections. ++ NOXFER 1551108 27.1% No file transfer. ++ IKSDONLY 1566608 26.4% Internet Kermit Server only. ++ NOCSETS 1750097 17.7% No character-set conversion. ++ NOSPL 1800293 15.4% No Script Programming Language. ++ NONET 1808575 15.0% No making network connections. ++ NOUNICODE 1834426 13.8% No Unicode character-set conversion. ++ NOHELP 1837877 13.6% No built-in help text. ++ NODEBUG 1891669 11.1% No debug log. ++ NOFRILLS 1918966 9.8% No "frills". ++ NOFTP 1972496 7.3% No FTP client. ++ NODIAL 1984488 6.7% No automatic modem dialing. ++ NOPUSH 2070184 2.7% No shell access, running external programs, etc. ++ NOIKSD 2074129 2.5% No Internet Kermit Server capability. ++ NOHTTP 2082610 2.1% No HTTP client. ++ NOFLOAT 2091332 1.7% No floating-point arithmetic. ++ NOCHANNELIO 2095978 1.5% No FOPEN/FREAD/FWRITE/FCLOSE, etc. ++ MINIDIAL 2098035 1.4% No built-in support for many kinds of modems. ++ NOSERVER 2098987 1.3% No server mode. ++ NOSEXP 2105898 1.0% No S-Expressions. ++ NOPTY 2117743 0.5% No pseudoterminal support. ++ NORLOGIN 2121089 0.3% No RLOGIN connections. ++ NOOLDMODEMS 2124038 0.2% No built-in support for old kinds of modems. ++ NOSSH 2125696 0.1% No SSH command. ++ ++ And here are a few combinations ++ ++ Options Size Savings Effect ++ NODEBUG NOICP NOCSETS NOLOCAL 281641 86.7% No debug log, parser, ++ character sets, or making connections. ++ NOICP NOCSETS NOLOCAL 376468 82.3% No parser, character sets, or ++ making connections. ++ NOICP NOCSETS NONET 427510 79.9% No parser, character sets, or network ++ connections. ++ NOSPL NOCSETS 1423784 33.1% No script language, or character sets. ++ ++ -DNOFRILLS removes various command synonyms; the following top-level ++ commands: CLEAR, DELETE, DISABLE, ENABLE, GETOK, MAIL, RENAME, TYPE, ++ WHO; and the following REMOTE commands: KERMIT, LOGIN, LOGOUT, PRINT, ++ TYPE, WHO. ++ ++ 6.2. Changing Buffer Sizes ++ ++ Most modern computers have so much memory that (a) there is no need to ++ scrimp and save, and (b) C-Kermit, even when fully configured, is ++ relatively small by today's standards. ++ ++ Two major factors affect Kermit's size: feature selection and buffer ++ sizes. Buffer sizes affect such things as the maximum length for a ++ Kermit packet, the maximum length for a command, for a macro, for the ++ name of a macro, etc. Big buffer sizes are used when the following ++ symbol is defined: ++ ++ BIGBUFOK ++ ++ as it is by default for most modern platforms (Linux, AIX 4 and 5, ++ HP-UX 10 and 11, Solaris, etc) in [82]ckuusr.h. If your build does not ++ get big buffers automatically (SHOW FEATURES tells you), you can ++ include them by rebuilding with BIGBUFOK defined; e.g. in Unix: ++ ++ make xxxx KFLAGS=-DBIGBUFOK ++ ++ where xxxx is the makefile target. On the other hand, if you want to ++ build without big buffers when they normally would be selected, use: ++ ++ make xxxx KFLAGS=-DNOBIGBUF ++ ++ There are options to control Kermit's packet buffer allocations. The ++ following symbols are defined in [83]ckcker.h in such a way that you ++ can override them by redefining them in CFLAGS: ++ ++ -DMAXSP=xxxx - Maximum send-packet length. ++ -DMAXRP=xxxx - Maximum receive-packet length. ++ -DSBSIZ=xxxx - Total allocation for send-packet buffers. ++ -DRBSIZ=xxxx - Total allocation for receive-packet buffers. ++ ++ The defaults depend on the platform. ++ ++ Using dynamic allocation (-DDYNAMIC) reduces storage requirements for ++ the executable program on disk, and allows more and bigger packets at ++ runtime. This has proven safe over the years, and now most builds ++ (e.g. all Unix, VMS, Windows, and OS/2 ones) use dynamic memory ++ allocation by default. If it causes trouble, however, then omit the ++ -DDYNAMIC option from CFLAGS, or add -DNODYNAMIC. ++ ++ 6.3. Other Size-Related Items ++ ++ To make Kermit compile and load successfully, you might have to change ++ your build procedure to: ++ ++ a. Request a larger ("large" or "huge") compilation / code-generation ++ model. This is needed for 16-bit PC-based UNIX versions (most or ++ all of which fail to build C-Kermit 7.0 and later anyway). This is ++ typically done with a -M and/or -F switch (see your cc manual or ++ man page for details). ++ b. Some development systems support overlays. If the program is too ++ big to be built as is, check your loader manual ("man ld") to see ++ if an overlay feature is available. See the 2.10/2.11 BSD example ++ in the UNIX makefile. (Actually, as of version 7.0, C-Kermit is ++ too big to build, period, even with overlays, on 2.xx BSD). ++ c. Similarly, some small and/or segment-based architectures support ++ "code mapping", which is similar to overlays (PDP11-based VENIX ++ 1.0, circa 1984, was an example). See the linker documentation on ++ the affected platform. ++ ++ It is also possible to reduce the size of the executable program file ++ in several other ways: ++ ++ a. Include the -O (optimize) compiler switch if it isn't already ++ included in your "make" entry (and if it works!). If your compiler ++ supports higher levels of optimization (e.g. -O2 or higher number, ++ -Onolimit (HP-UX), etc), try them; the greater the level of ++ optimization, the longer the compilation and more likely the ++ compiler will run out of memory. The the latter eventuality, some ++ compilers also provide command-line options to allocate more ++ memory for the optimizer, like "-Olimit number" in Ultrix. ++ b. If your platofrm supports shared libraries, change the make entry ++ to take advantage of this feature. The way to do this is, of ++ course, platform dependent; see the NeXT makefile target for an ++ example. some platforms (like Solaris) do it automatically and ++ give you no choice. But watch out: executables linked with shared ++ libraries are less portable than statically linked executables. ++ c. Strip the program image after building ("man strip" for further ++ info), or add -s to the LNKFLAGS (UNIX only). This strips the ++ program of its symbol table and relocation information. ++ d. Move character strings into a separate file. See the 2.11 BSD ++ target for an example. ++ ++ 6.4. Space/Time Tradeoffs ++ ++ There are more than 6000 debug() statements in the program. If you ++ want to save both space (program size) and time (program execution ++ time), include -DNODEBUG in the compilation. If you want to include ++ debugging for tracking down problems, omit -DNODEBUG from the make ++ entry. But when you include debugging, you have two choices for how ++ it's done. One definition defines debug() to be a function call; this ++ is cheap in space but expensive in execution. The other defines debug ++ as "if (deblog)" and then the function call, to omit the function call ++ overhead when the debug log is not active. But this adds a lot of ++ space to the program. Both methods work, take your choice; IFDEBUG is ++ preferred if memory is not a constraint but the computer is likely to ++ be slow. The first method is the default, i.e. if nothing is done to ++ the CFLAGS or in [84]ckcdeb.h (but in some cases, e.g. VMS, it is). To ++ select the second method, include -DIFDEBUG in the compilation (and ++ don't include -DNODEBUG). ++ ++ [ [85]C-Kermit Home ] [ [86]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7. MODEM DIALING ++ ++ [ [87]Top ] [ [88]Contents ] [ [89]Next ] [ [90]Previous ] ++ ++ -DNODIAL removes automatic modem dialing completely, including the ++ entire [91]ckudia.c module, plus all commands that refer to dialing in ++ the various ckuus*.c modules. ++ ++ -DMINIDIAL leaves the DIAL and related commands (SET/SHOW MODEM, ++ SET/SHOW DIAL) intact, but removes support for all types of modems ++ except CCITT, Hayes, Unknown, User-defined, Generic-high-speed, and ++ None (= Direct). The MINIDIAL option cuts the size of the dial module ++ approximately in half. Use this option if you have only Hayes or CCITT ++ modems and don't want to carry the baggage for the other types. ++ ++ A compromise between full dialer support and MINIDIAL is obtained by ++ removing support for "old" modems -- all the strange non-Hayes ++ compatible 1200 and 2400 bps modems that C-Kermit has been carrying ++ around since 1985 or so. To remove support for these modems, add ++ -DNOOLDMODEMS to CFLAGS at compilation time. ++ ++ Finally, if you keep support for old modems, you will notice that ++ their names appear on the "set modem ?" menu. That's because their ++ names are, by default, "visible". But the list is confusing to the ++ younger generation, who have only heard of modems from the ++ V.32bis-and-later era. If you want to be able to use old modems, but ++ don't want their names cluttering up menus, add this to CFLAGS: ++ ++ -DM_OLD=1 ++ ++ [ [92]C-Kermit Home ] [ [93]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8. NETWORK SUPPORT ++ ++ [ [94]Top ] [ [95]Contents ] [ [96]Next ] [ [97]Previous ] ++ ++ SECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 8.1. [98]TCP/IP ++ 8.2. [99]X.25 ++ 8.3. [100]Other Networks ++ ++ C-Kermit supports not only serial-port and modem connections, but also ++ TCP/IP and X.25 network connections. Some versions support other ++ network types too like DECnet, LAT, NETBIOS, etc. If you define the ++ following symbol: ++ ++ NONET ++ ++ then all network support is compiled away. ++ ++ 8.1. TCP/IP ++ ++ SUBSECTION CONTENTS ++ ++ 8.1.1. [101]Firewalls ++ 8.1.2. [102]Compilation and Linking Problems ++ 8.1.3. [103]Enabling Host Address Lists ++ 8.1.4. [104]Enabling Telnet NAWS ++ 8.1.5. [105]Enabling Incoming TCP/IP Connections ++ 8.1.6. [106]Disabling SET TCP Options ++ ++ C-Kermit's TCP/IP features require the Berkeley sockets library or ++ equivalent, generally available on any Unix system, as well as in ++ Windows 9x/NT, OS/2, VMS, AOS/VS, VOS, etc. The TCP/IP support ++ includes built-in TELNET, FTP, and HTTP protocol. To select TCP/IP ++ support, include -DTCPSOCKET in your makefile target's CFLAGS, or (in ++ VMS) the appropriate variant (e.g. -DWOLLONGONG, -DMULTINET, ++ -DEXCELAN, -DWINTCP, etc). ++ ++ The VMS and/or early Unix third-party TCP/IP products are often ++ incompatible with each other, and sometimes with different versions of ++ themselves. For example, Wollongong reportedly put header files in ++ different directories for different UNIX versions: ++ ++ * in.h can be in either /usr/include/sys or /user/include/netinet. ++ * telnet.h can be in either /usr/include/arpa or ++ /user/include/netinet. ++ * inet.h can be in either /usr/include/arpa or /user/include/sys. ++ ++ In cases like this, use the -I cc command-line option when possible; ++ otherwise it's better to make links in the file system than it is to ++ hack up the C-Kermit source code. Suppose, for example, Kermit is ++ looking for telnet.h in /usr/include/arpa, but on your computer it is ++ in /usr/include/netinet. Do this (as root, or get the system ++ administrator to do it): ++ ++ cd /usr/include/arpa ++ ln /usr/include/netinet/telnet.h telnet.h ++ ++ ("man ln" for details about links.) ++ ++ The network support for TCP/IP and X.25 is in the source files ++ [107]ckcnet.h, [108]ckctel.c, [109]ckctel.c, [110]ckctel.h, ++ [111]ckcftp.c, with miscellaneous SHOW commands, etc, in the various ++ ckuus*.c modules, plus code in the ck*con.c or ckucns.c (CONNECT ++ command) and several other modules to detect TELNET negotiations, etc. ++ ++ Within the TCPSOCKET code, some socket-level controls are included if ++ TCPSOCKET is defined in the C-Kermit CFLAGS and SOL_SOCKET is defined ++ in in the system's TCP-related header files, such as . ++ These are: ++ ++ SET TCP KEEPALIVE ++ SET TCP LINGER ++ SET TCP RECVBUF ++ SET TCP SENDBUF ++ ++ In addition, if TCP_NODELAY is defined, the following command is also ++ enabled: ++ ++ SET TCP NODELAY (Nagle algorithm) ++ ++ See the [112]C-Kermit user documentation for descriptions of these ++ commands. ++ ++ 8.1.1. Firewalls ++ ++ There exist various types of firewalls, set up to separate users of an ++ internal TCP/IP network ("Intranet") from the great wide Internet, but ++ then to let selected users or services get through after all. ++ ++ One firewall method is called SOCKS, in which a proxy server allows ++ users inside a firewall to access the outside world, based on a ++ permission list generally stored in a file. SOCKS is enabled in one of ++ two ways. First, the standard sockets library is modified to handle ++ the firewall, and then all the client applications are relinked (if ++ necessary, i.e. if the libraries are not dynamically loaded) with the ++ modified sockets library. The APIs are all the same, so the ++ applications do not need to be recoded or recompiled. ++ ++ In the other method, the applications must be modified to call ++ replacement routines, such as Raccept() instead of accept(), Rbind() ++ instead of bind(), etc, and then linked with a separate SOCKS library. ++ This second method is accomplished (for SOCKS4) in C-Kermit by ++ including -DCK_SOCKS in your CFLAGS, and also adding: ++ ++ -lsocks ++ ++ to LIBS, or replacing -lsockets with -lsocks (depending on whether the ++ socks library also includes all the sockets entry points). ++ ++ For SOCKS5, use -DCK_SOCKS5. ++ ++ Explicit firewall support can, in general, not be a standard feature ++ or a feature that is selected at runtime, because the SOCKS library ++ tends to be different at each site -- local modifications abound. ++ ++ The ideal situation occurs when firewalls are supported by the first ++ method, using dynamically linked sockets-replacement libraries; in ++ this case, all your TCP/IP client applications negotiate the firewall ++ transparently. ++ ++ 8.1.2. Compilation and Linking Problems ++ ++ If you get a compilation error in [113]ckcnet.c, with a complaint like ++ "incompatible types in assignment", it probably has something to do ++ with the data type your system uses for the inet_addr() function, ++ which is declared (usually) in . Kermit uses "unsigned ++ long" unless the symbol INADDRX is defined, in which case "struct ++ inaddr" is used instead. Try adding -DINADDRX to CFLAGS in your make ++ entry, and if that fixes the problem, please send a report to ++ kermit@columbia.edu. ++ ++ Compilation errors might also have to do with the data type used for ++ getsockopt() and setsockopt() option-length field. This is normally an ++ int, but sometimes it's a short, a long, or an unsigned any of those, ++ or a size_t. To fix the compilation problem, add -DSOCKOPT_T=xxx to ++ the CFLAGS in your makefile target, where xxx is the appropriate type ++ (use "man getsockopt" or grep through your system/network header files ++ to find the needed type). ++ ++ 8.1.3. Enabling Host Address Lists ++ ++ When you give Kermit an IP host name, it calls the socket routine ++ gethostbyname() to resolve it. gethostbyname() returns a hostent ++ struct, which might or might not not include a list of addresses; if ++ it does, then if the first one fails, Kermit can try the second one, ++ and so on. However, this will only work if the symbol "h_addr" is a ++ macro defined as "h_addr_list[0]", usually in netdb.h. If it is, then ++ you can activate this feature by defining the following symbol in ++ CFLAGS: ++ ++ HADDRLIST ++ ++ 8.1.4. Enabling Telnet NAWS ++ ++ The Telnet Negotiation About Window Size (NAWS) option requires the ++ ability to find out the terminal screen's dimensions. E.g. in Unix, we ++ need something like ioctl(0, TIOCGWINSZ, ...). If your version of ++ Kermit was built with NAWS capability, SHOW VERSIONS includes CK_NAWS ++ among the compiler options. If it doesn't, you can add it by defining ++ CK_NAWS at compile time. Then, if the compiler or linker complain ++ about undefined or missing symbols, or there is no complaint but SHOW ++ TERMINAL fails to show reasonable "Rows =, Columns =" values, then ++ take a look at (or write) the appropriate ttgwsiz() routine. On the ++ other hand, if CK_NAWS is defined by default for your system (in ++ [114]ckcnet.h), but causes trouble, you can override this definition ++ by including the -DNONAWS switch on your CC command line, thus ++ disabling the NAWS feature. ++ ++ This appears to be needed at least on the AT&T 3B2, where in ++ [115]ckutio.c, the routine ttgwsiz() finds that the TIOCGWINSZ symbol ++ is defined but lacks definitions for the corresponding winsize struct ++ and its members ws_col and ws_row. ++ ++ The UNIX version of C-Kermit also traps SIGWINCH, so it can send a ++ NAWS to the Telnet server any time the local console terminal window ++ size changes, e.g. when you stretch it with a mouse. The ++ SIGWINCH-trapping code is enabled if SIGWINCH is defined (i.e. in ++ signal.h). If this code should cause problems, you can disable it ++ without disabling the NAWS feature altogether, by defining NOSIGWINCH ++ at compile time. ++ ++ 8.1.5. Enabling Incoming TCP/IP Connections ++ ++ This feature lets you "set host * port" and wait for an incoming ++ connection on the given port. This feature is enabled automatically at ++ compile if TCPSOCKET is defined and SELECT is also defined. But watch ++ out, simply defining SELECT on the cc command line does not guarantee ++ successful compilation or linking (see [116]Section 11). ++ ++ If you want to disable incoming TCP/IP connections, then build ++ C-Kermit with: ++ ++ -DNOLISTEN ++ ++ 8.1.6. Disabling SET TCP Options ++ ++ The main reason for this is because of header file / prototype ++ conflicts at compile time regardting get- / setsockopt(). If you can't ++ fix them (without breaking other builds), add the following in CFLAGS: ++ ++ -DNOTCPOPTS ++ ++ 8.2. X.25 ++ ++ X.25 support requires (a) a Sun, (b) the SunLink product (libraries ++ and header files), and (c) an X.25 connection into your Sun. Similarly ++ (in C-Kermit 7.0 or later) Stratus VOS and IBM AIX. ++ ++ In UNIX, special makefile targets sunos4x25 and sunos41x25 (for SUNOS ++ 4.0 and 4.1, respectively), or aix41x25, are provided to build in this ++ feature, but they only work if conditions (a)-(c) are met. To request ++ this feature, include -DSUNX25 (or -DIBMX25) in CFLAGS. ++ ++ SUNX25 (or -DIBMX25) and TCPSOCKET can be freely mixed and matched, ++ and selected by the user at runtime with the SET NETWORK TYPE command ++ or SET HOST switches. ++ ++ 8.3. Other Networks ++ ++ Support for other networking methods -- NETBIOS, LAT, Named Pipes, etc ++ -- is included in ck*net.h and ck*net.c for implementations (such as ++ Windows or OS/2) where these methods are supported. ++ ++ Provision is made in the organization of the modules, header files, ++ commands, etc, for addition of new network types such as DECnet, X.25 ++ for other systems (HP-UX, VMS, etc), and so on. Send email to ++ [117]kermit@columbia.edu if you are willing and able to work on such a ++ project. ++ ++ [ [118]C-Kermit Home ] [ [119]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9. EXCEPTION HANDLING ++ ++ [ [120]Top ] [ [121]Contents ] [ [122]Next ] [ [123]Previous ] ++ ++ The C language setjmp/longjmp mechanism is used for handling ++ exceptions. The jump buffer is of type jmp_buf, which almost ++ everywhere is typedef'd as an array, in which case you should have no ++ trouble compiling the exception-handling code. However, if you are ++ building C-Kermit in/for an environment where jmp_buf is something ++ other than an array (e.g. a struct), then you'll have to define the ++ following symbol: ++ ++ JBNOTARRAY ++ ++ [ [124]C-Kermit Home ] [ [125]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 10. SECURITY FEATURES ++ ++ [ [126]Top ] [ [127]Contents ] [ [128]Next ] [ [129]Previous ] ++ ++ Security, in the sense of secure authentication and strong encryption, ++ can be built into versionf of C-Kermit for which the appropriate ++ libraries and header files are available (Kerberos IV, Kerberos V, ++ OpenSSL, SRP), as explained in great detail in the Kermit Security ++ Reference ++ . The following symbols govern C-Kermit's security features at build ++ time: ++ ++ NO_AUTHENTICATION ++ Means do not configure any TELNET AUTHENTICATION support. It ++ implies NO_ENCRYPTION and undefines any of the auth and encrypt ++ types. It does not undefine CK_SSL even though builds with ++ CK_SSL cannot succeed without CK_AUTHENTICATION. (This will be ++ supported in a future release. It will be needed to allow ++ C-Kermit to be built only as an FTP client.) ++ ++ NO_KERBEROS ++ Means do not compile in any KERBEROS support when ++ CK_AUTHENTICATION has been defined. ++ ++ NO_SRP ++ Do not compile in any SRP support when CK_AUTHENTICATION has ++ been defined. ++ ++ NO_SSL ++ Do not compile in any SSL/TLS support ++ ++ NO_ENCRYPTION ++ Do not compile in any Telnet encryption support. It does not ++ affect the use of SSL/TLS ++ ++ NOSSH ++ Do not compile in any SSH support whether internal or external ++ ++ CK_AUTHENTICATION ++ Telnet AUTHENTICATION support. (Also, required if SSL/TLS ++ support is desired.) On most platforms this does not autodefine ++ any authentication mechanisms such as Kerberos V, Kerberos IV, ++ SRP, ... Those need to be defined separately. ++ ++ CK_KERBEROS ++ Defined automatically when KRB4, KRB5, or KRB524 are defined. ++ Implies that some version of Kerberos is in use. ++ ++ KRB4 ++ Should be defined when Kerberos IV support is desired. ++ ++ KRB5 ++ Should be defined when Kerberos V support is desired. ++ ++ KRB524 ++ Should be defined if both Kerberos V and Kerberos IV are used ++ and the Kerberos IV support is provided by the MIT Kerberos IV ++ compatibility library in the current Kerberos 5 distribution. ++ ++ KRB5_U2U ++ Should be defined if KRB5 is defined and Kerberos 5 User to ++ User mode is desired. ++ ++ HEIMDAL ++ Should be defined if Kerberos V support is provided by HEIMDAL. ++ Support for this option is not complete in C-Kermit 8.0. Anyone ++ interested in working on this should contact kermit-support. ++ ++ CK_SRP ++ Should be defined if SRP support is desired. ++ ++ CK_ENCRYPTION ++ Should be defined if TELNET ENCRYPTION option support is ++ desired. This option does not define any particular encryption ++ types. That should be done by defining CK_DES or CK_CAST. ++ ++ CK_DES ++ Should be defined if either DES or 3DES Telnet Encryption ++ option support is desired. ++ ++ LIBDES ++ If CK_DES is defined and DES support is being provided by ++ either Eric Young's libdes.a or OpenSSL 0.9.6x or earlier, this ++ option must be defined. If it is not defined, it will be ++ assumed that DES support is provided by the MIT Kerberos IV ++ libraries. ++ ++ CK_CAST ++ Should be defined if CAST Telnet Encryption option support is ++ desired ++ ++ CK_SSL ++ Should be defined if SSL/TLS support (OpenSSL) is desired. ++ ++ SSL_KRB5 ++ If KRB5 is defined, and OpenSSL is built to support the ++ Kerberos 5 ciphers, then you should define SSL_KRB5 ++ ++ NOSSLKRB5 ++ If you are using OpenSSL 0.9.7 or higher and do not wish to ++ build with support for Kerberos 5 TLS ciphers, this option must ++ be defined. ++ ++ ZLIB ++ If you are using OpenSSL 0.9.6 or higher and it has been ++ compiled with support for ZLIB compression, this option should ++ be defined to enable Kermit to properly enable the use of ++ compression. ++ ++ SSHCMD ++ Defined for C-Kermit to enable the use of external SSH clients ++ from the Kermit command language ++ ++ SSHBUILTIN ++ Defined for Kermit implementations that have integrated SSH ++ support. Currently only Windows. ++ ++ ANYSSH ++ Defined if either SSHCMD or SSHBUILTIN are defined. ++ ++ CK_SNDLOC ++ Telnet Send Location support. ++ ++ NOSNDLOC ++ Do not include Telnet Send Location support. ++ ++ CK_XDISPLOC ++ Telnet X-Display Location support. Determines if the X-Display ++ location information is sent to the Telnet server either via ++ Telnet XDISPLOC or NEW-ENV options. ++ ++ NOXDISPLOC ++ Do not include Telnet X-Display Location support. ++ ++ CK_FORWARD_X ++ Telnet Forward X Windows Session Data option. Used to protect ++ the privacy and integrity of X Windows Sessions when secure ++ telnet sessions are in use. ++ ++ NOFORWARDX ++ Do not include Telnet Forward X Windows Session Data option. ++ ++ Besides the strong forms of security listed above, C-Kermit also ++ embodies various internal security features, including: ++ ++ NOPUSH ++ Compiling with the NOPUSH symbol defined removes all the "shell ++ escape" features from the program, including the PUSH, RUN, and ++ SPAWN commands, the "!" and "@" command prefixes, OPEN !READ, ++ OPEN !WRITE, job control (including the SUSPEND command), the ++ REDIRECT command, shell/DCL escape from CONNECT mode, as well ++ as the server's execution of REMOTE HOST commands (and, of ++ course, the ENABLE HOST command). Add NODISPO to also prevent ++ acceptance of incoming MAIL or REMOTE PRINT files. For UNIX, ++ also be sure to read [130]Section 11 of the [131]Unix C-Kermit ++ Installation Instructions. about set[ug]id configuration. ++ Additional restrictions can be enforced when in server mode; ++ read about the DISABLE command in the user manual. ++ ++ NOCCTRAP ++ Compiling with NOCCTRAP prevents the trapping of SIGINT by ++ Kermit. Thus if the user generates a SIGINT signal (e.g. by ++ typing the system's interrupt character), Kermit will exit ++ immediately, rather than returning to its prompt. ++ ++ NOPUSH and NOCCTRAP together allow Kermit to be run from restricted ++ shells, preventing access to system functions. ++ ++ [ [132]C-Kermit Home ] [ [133]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11. ENABLING SELECT() ++ ++ [ [134]Top ] [ [135]Contents ] [ [136]Next ] [ [137]Previous ] ++ ++ Kermit works best if it can do nonblocking reads, nondestructive input ++ buffer checking, and millisecond sleeps. All of these functions can be ++ accomplished by the select() function, which, unfortunately, is not ++ universally available. Furthermore, select() is required if incoming ++ TCP/IP connections are to be supported. ++ ++ select() was introduced with Berkeley UNIX, rejected by AT&T for ++ System V, but is gradually creeping in to all UNIX versions (and other ++ operating systems too) by virtue of its presence in the sockets ++ library, which is needed for TCP/IP. AT&T SVID for System V R4 ++ includes select(), but that does not mean that all SVR4 ++ implementations have it. ++ ++ Furthermore, even when select() is available, it might work only on ++ socket file descriptors, but not on others like serial ports, pipes, ++ etc. For example, in AOS/VS and BeOS, it works only with file ++ descriptors that were created by socket() and opened by connect() or ++ accept(). ++ ++ Other alternatives include poll() and rdchk(). Only one of these three ++ functions should be included. The following symbols govern this: ++ ++ SELECT Use select() (BSD, or systems with sockets libraries) ++ CK_POLL Use poll() (System V) ++ RDCHK Use rdchk() (SCO XENIX and UNIX) ++ ++ If your system supports the select() function, but your version of ++ C-Kermit does not, try adding: ++ ++ -DSELECT ++ ++ to the CFLAGS, and removing -DRDCHK or -DCK_POLL if it is there. If ++ you get compilation errors, some adjustments to ck*tio.c and/or ++ ck*net.c might be needed; search for SELECT (uppercase) in these files ++ (note that there are several variations on the calling conventions for ++ select()). ++ ++ Various macros and data types need to be defined in order to use ++ select(). Usually these are picked up from or . ++ But on some systems, they are in . In that case, add the ++ following: ++ ++ -DSELECT_H ++ ++ to the CFLAGS to tell C-Kermit to #include . A good ++ indication that you need to do this would be if you get compile-time ++ complaints about "fd_set" or "FD_SET" not being declared or defined. ++ ++ In UNIX, the use of select() vs fork() in the CONNECT command is ++ independent of the above considerations, and is governed by choosing a ++ particular makefile target. ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, select() is also the preferred control mechanism ++ for the CONNECT command. Unfortunately, the structures used by the ++ original UNIX CONNECT command, based on fork(), and those used by ++ select(), are so different, it was not practical to implement them ++ both in one module. So the select()-based CONNECT command module for ++ UNIX is [138]ckucns.c, and the fork-based one remains [139]ckucon.c. ++ To choose the fork-based one, which is more portable (but slower and ++ more fragile), use "wermit" as the make target. To choose the ++ select-based one, use "xermit". Only do this if you can verify that ++ the CONNECT command works on serial connections and PIPE connections ++ as well as TCP connections. ++ ++ The select()-based Unix CONNECT module, ckucns.c, must be used if ++ encryption is to be done, since the fork() version (ckucon.c) loses ++ its ability to share vital state information between the two forks. ++ Also note that the select() version is superior in many other ways ++ too. For example, it recovers better from exterior killing, forced ++ disconnections, etc, plus it goes faster. ++ ++ SHOW VERSIONS tells whether the CONNECT module uses fork() or ++ select(). ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 adds learned script capability, which depends on ++ select(). All the "wermit" based targets (as opposed to "xermit") had ++ NOLEARN added to them. Whenever changing a target over from wermit to ++ xermit, also remember to remove NOLEARN. ++ ++ [ [140]C-Kermit Home ] [ [141]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 12. I/O REDIRECTION ++ ++ [ [142]Top ] [ [143]Contents ] [ [144]Next ] [ [145]Previous ] ++ ++ The REDIRECT command allows a local program to be run with its i/o ++ redirected over the communications connection. Your version of ++ C-Kermit has a REDIRECT command if it was built with the following ++ CFLAG: ++ ++ -DCK_REDIR ++ ++ This, in turn, is possible only if the underlying API is there. In the ++ case of UNIX this is just the wait() system call, so all UNIX versions ++ get this feature as of 6.0.192 (earlier versions needed a ++ header file defining the symbols WIFEXITED and WEXITSTATUS). ++ ++ As of version 7.0, file transfer can be done using pipes and filters. ++ To enable this feature, #define PIPESEND (and fill in the code). To ++ disable on systems where it is normally enabled, define NOPIPESEND. ++ This feature is, of course, also disabled by building with NOPUSH (or ++ giving the "nopush" command at runtime). ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 also adds the PIPE and SET HOST /COMMAND commands, which ++ provide another form of redirection. This feature is selected with ++ -DNETCMD. CK_RDIR must also be defined, since the same mechanisms are ++ used internally. ++ ++ [ [146]C-Kermit Home ] [ [147]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 13. FLOATING-POINT NUMBERS, TIMERS, AND ARITHMETIC ++ ++ [ [148]Top ] [ [149]Contents ] [ [150]Next ] [ [151]Previous ] ++ ++ Floating-point support was added in C-Kermit 7.0. ++ ++ Floating-point numbers are enabled internally, at least for use in ++ high-precision file-transfer timers and statistics, unless the ++ following symbol is defined at compile time: ++ ++ -DNOFLOAT ++ ++ This might be necessary on old PCs that do not have built-in ++ floating-point hardware. ++ ++ When NOFLOAT is not defined, the following symbol tells which ++ floating-point type to use: ++ ++ -DCKFLOAT=xxxx ++ ++ The value is either "double" (normal for 32- and 16-bit architectures) ++ or "float" (normal for 64-bit architectures). ++ ++ C-Kermit can be configured to use high-precision file-transfer timers ++ for more accurate statistics. This feature is enabled with: ++ ++ -DGFTIMER ++ ++ and disabled with: ++ ++ -DNOGFTIMER ++ ++ If you try to build with -DGFTIMER but you get compilation errors, ++ either fix them (and send email to kermit@columbia.edu telling what ++ you did), or else give up and use -DNOGFTIMER (or -DNOFLOAT) instead. ++ Hint: depending on your machine architecture, you might have better ++ luck using double than float as the data type for floating-point ++ numbers, or vice versa. Look in [152]ckcdeb.h for the CKFLOAT ++ definition. ++ ++ Floating-point arithmetic is also supported in the script programming ++ language. First via the \fpp...() functions, such as \fppadd(), which ++ adds two floating-point numbers, second in S-Expressions. Addition, ++ subtraction, multiplication, and division are always available. But ++ other functions such as logs, raising to powers, sines and cosines, ++ etc, require the C Math library. To include user-level floating-point ++ math you must put: ++ ++ -DFNFLOAT ++ ++ and in Unix you must link with the Math library: ++ ++ LIBS=".... -lm" ++ ++ In K95 and VMS, FNFLOAT is defined automatically if CKFLOAT is ++ defined. In Unix, however, FNFLOAT must be added to each makefile ++ target individually, because of the special linking instructions that ++ must also be added to each target. ++ ++ Note: S-Expressions require FNFLOAT. ++ ++ [ [153]C-Kermit Home ] [ [154]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 14. SPECIAL CONFIGURATIONS ++ ++ [ [155]Top ] [ [156]Contents ] [ [157]Previous ] ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, if you build C-Kermit normally, but with -DNOICP ++ (No Interactive Command Parser), you get a program capable of making ++ serial connections (but not dialing) and network connections (if ++ TCPSOCKET or other network option included), and can also transfer ++ files using Kermit protocol, but only via autodownload/upload. ++ Furthermore, if you call the executable "telnet", it will act like ++ Telnet -- using the command-line options. However, in this case there ++ is nothing to escape back to, so if you type Ctrl-\c, it just prints a ++ message to this effect. ++ ++ You can also build C-Kermit with -DNOXFER, meaning omit all the ++ file-transfer features. This leaves you with a scriptable ++ communications program that is considerably smaller than the full ++ C-Kermit. ++ ++ [ [158]C-Kermit Home ] [ [159]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ APPENDIX I: SUMMARY OF COMPILE-TIME OPTIONS ++ ++ [ [160]Top ] [ [161]Contents ] ++ ++ These are the symbols that can be specified on the cc command line, ++ listed alphabetically. Others are used internally, including those ++ taken from header files, those defined by the compiler itself, and ++ those inferred from the ones given below. Kermit's SHOW VERSIONS ++ command attempts to display most of these. See [162]ckcdeb.h and ++ [163]ckcnet.h for inference rules. For example SVR3 implies ATTSV, ++ MULTINET implies TCPSOCKET, and so on. ++ ++ Here is the complete list of the Kermit-specific compile-time ++ switches: ++ ++ ACUCNTRL Select BSD 4.3-style acucntrl() bidirectional tty control. ++ aegis Build for Apollo Aegis (predefined on Apollo systems). ++ AIX370 Build for IBM AIX/370 for IBM mainframes. ++ AIXESA Build for IBM AIX/ESA for IBM mainframes. ++ AIXPS2 Build for IBM AIX 3.0 for PS/2 series (never formally ++ released). ++ AIXRS Build for IBM AIX 3.x on RS/6000. ++ AIX41 Build for IBM AIX 4.x on RS/6000. ++ AMIGA Build for Commodore Amiga with Intuition OS. ++ ATT6300 Build for AT&T 6300 PLUS. ++ ATT7300 Build for AT&T 7300 UNIX PC (3B1). ++ ATTSV Build for AT&T System III or V UNIX. ++ AUX Build for Apple A/UX for the Macintosh. ++ BIGBUFOK OK to use big buffers - "memory is not a problem" ++ BPS_xxxx Enable SET SPEED xxxx ++ BSD29 Build for BSD 2.9 or 2.10. ++ BSD4 Build for BSD 4.2. ++ BSD41 Build for BSD 4.1. ++ BSD43 Build for BSD 4.3. ++ BSD44 Build for BSD 4.4. ++ C70 Build for BBN C/70. ++ CIE Build for CIE Systems 680/20. ++ CKCONINTB4CB Work around prompt-disappears after escape back from ++ CONNECT. ++ CKLEARN Build with support for learned scripts. ++ CKLOGDIAL Enable connection log. ++ CKMAXPATH Maximum length for a fully qualified filename. ++ CKREGEX (misnomer) Include [...] or {xxx,xxx,xxx} matching in ++ ckmatch(). ++ CKSYSLOG Enable syslogging. ++ CK_ANSIC Enable ANSI C constructs - prototypes, etc. ++ CK_ANSILIBS Use header files for ANSI C libraries. ++ CK_APC Enable APC execution by CONNECT module. ++ CK_CURSES Enable fullscreen file transfer display. ++ CK_DSYSINI Use system-wide init file, with name supplied by Kermit. ++ CK_DTRCD DTR/CD flow control is available. ++ CK_FAST Build with fast Kermit protocol defaults. ++ CK_FORK_SIG UNIX only: signal() number for CONNECT module forks. ++ CK_IFRO IF REMOTE command is available (and can run in remote mode). ++ CK_INI_A System-wide init file takes precedence over user's. ++ CK_INI_B User's init file takes precedence over the system-wide one. ++ CK_LABELED Include support for SET FILE TYPE LABELED. ++ CK_LBRK This version can send Long BREAK. ++ CK_LINGER Add code to turn of TCP socket "linger" parameter. ++ CK_MKDIR This version has a zmkdir() command to create directories. ++ CK_NAWS Include TELNET Negotiate About Window Size support. ++ CK_NEWTERM Use newterm() rather than initscr() to initialize curses. ++ CK_PAM Include PAM authentication (might also require -lpam). ++ CK_PCT_BAR Fullscreen file transfer display should include ++ "thermometer". ++ CK_POLL System-V or POSIX based UNIX has poll() function. ++ CK_POSIX_SIG Use POSIX signal handing: sigjmp_buf, sigsetjmp, ++ siglongjmp. ++ CK_READ0 read(fd,&x,0) can be used to test TCP/IP connections. ++ CK_REDIR Enable the REDIRECT command. ++ CK_RESEND Include the RESEND command (needs zfseek() + append). ++ CK_RTSCTS RTS/CTS flow control is available. ++ CK_SHADOW Include support for shadow passwords (e.g. for IKSD ++ authentication). ++ CK_SOCKBUF Enable TCP socket-buffer-size-increasing code. ++ CK_SOCKS UNIX only: Build with socks library rather than regular ++ sockets ++ CK_SOCKS5 UNIX only: Build with socks 5 lib rather than regular ++ sockets ++ CK_SPEED Enable control-character unprefixing. ++ CK_SYSINI="xxxxx" Quoted string to be used as system-wide init file ++ name. ++ CK_TIMERS Build with support for dynamically calculated packet ++ timeouts. ++ CK_TMPDIR This version of Kermit has an isdir() function. ++ CK_TTYFD Defined on systems where the communications connection file ++ descriptor (ttyfd) can be passed to other processes as a command-line ++ argument via \v(ttyfd). ++ CK_URL Parse URLs as well as hostnames, etc. ++ CK_XONXOFF Xon/Xoff flow control available. ++ CK_XYZ Include support for XYZMODEM protocols. ++ CK_WREFRESH Curses package includes wrefresh(),clearok() for screen ++ refresh. ++ CKFLOAT=type Floating-point data type, "double" or "float". ++ CKTYP_H=xxx Force include of xxx as file. ++ CLSOPN When hanging up a tty device, also close and reopen it. ++ CMDDEP Maximum recursion depth for self-referential user-defined fn's. ++ COHERENT Build for Mark Williams Coherent UNIX ++ CONGSPD Define if this version has congspd() routine in ck?tio.c ++ datageneral Build for Data General AOS/VS or AOS/VS II ++ DCLPOPEN popen() is available but needs to be declared ++ DEC_TCPIP Build with support for DEC TCP/IP (UCX) for (Open)VMS ++ DGUX430 Build for DG/UX 4.30 ++ DGUX540 Build for DG/UX 5.40 ++ DEFPAR=x Default parity, 0, 'e', 'o', 'm', or 's'. ++ DFTTY=xxx Default communications device name. ++ DIRENT UNIX directory structure to be taken from . ++ DIRPWDRP Prompt for password in REMOTE CWD command. ++ DTILDE Include UNIX ~ notation for username/home-directory ++ DYNAMIC Allocate file transfer packet buffers dynamically with malloc. ++ ENCORE Build for Encore Multimax computers. ++ EXCELAN Build with excelan TCP/IP. ++ FNFLOAT Include floating-point math functions (logs, sin, cos, exp, ++ etc) ++ FT18 Build for Fortune For:Pro 1.8. ++ FT21 Build for Fortune For:Pro 2.1. ++ GEMDOS Build for Atari ST GEMDOS. ++ GFTIMER Use high-precision floating-point file-transfer timers. ++ GID_T=xxx Group IDs are of type xxx (usually int, short, or gid_t). ++ HADDRLIST If gethostbyname() hostent struct contains a list of ++ addresses. ++ HDBUUCP Build with support for Honey DanBer UUCP. ++ HPUX Build for Hewlett Packard HP-UX. ++ HPUX9 Build for Hewlett Packard HP-UX 9.x. ++ HPUX10 Build for Hewlett Packard HP-UX 10.x. ++ HWPARITY Define if this version can SET PARITY HARDWARE { EVEN, ++ ODD...} ++ I386IX Build for Interactive System V R3. ++ IFDEBUG Add IF stmts "if (deblog)" before "debug()" calls. ++ INADDRX TCP/IP inet_addr() type is struct inaddr, not unsigned long. ++ INTERLAN Build with support for Racal/Interlan TCP/IP. ++ ISDIRBUG System defs of S_ISDIR and S_ISREG have bug, define ++ ourselves. ++ ISIII Build for Interactive System III. ++ IX370 Build for IBM IX/370. ++ KANJI Build with Kanji character-set translation support. ++ LCKDIR UUCP lock directory is /usr/spool/uucp/LCK/. ++ LFDEVNO UUCP lockfile name uses device numbers, as in SVR4. ++ LINUXFSSTND For Linux, use FSSTND UUCP lockfile conventions (default). ++ LOCK_DIR=xxx UUCP lock directory is xxx (quoted string). ++ LOCKF Use lockf() (in addition to lockfiles) on serial lines ++ LONGFN BSD long filenames supported using and opendir(). ++ LYNXOS Build for Lynx OS 2.2 or later (POSIX-based). ++ MAC Build for Apple Macintosh with Mac OS. ++ MATCHDOT Make wildcards match filenames that start with period (.) ++ MAXRP=number Maximum receive-packet length. ++ MAXSP=number Maximum send-packet length. ++ MDEBUG Malloc-debugging requested. ++ MINIDIAL Minimum modem dialer support: CCITT, Hayes, Unkown, and None. ++ MINIX Build for MINIX. ++ MIPS Build for MIPS workstation. ++ MULTINET Build with support for TGV MultiNet TCP/IP (VAX/VMS). ++ M_UNIX Defined by SCO. ++ NAP The nap() is available (conflicts with SELECT and USLEEP) ++ NAPHACK The nap() call is available but only as syscall(3112,...) ++ NDIR BSD long filenames supported using and opendir(). ++ NDGPWNAM Don't declare getpwnam(). ++ NDSYSERRLIST Don't declare sys_errlist[]. ++ NEEDSELECTDEFS select() is avaible but we need to define FD_blah ++ ourselves. ++ NETCMD Build with support for SET HOST /COMMAND and PIPE commands. ++ NEXT Build for NeXT Mach 1.x or 2.x or 3.0, 3.1, or 3.2. ++ NEXT33 Build for NeXT Mach 3.3. ++ NOANSI Disable ANSI C function prototyping. ++ NOAPC Do not include CK_APC code. ++ NOARROWKEYS Exclude code to parse ANSI arrow-key sequences. ++ NOB_xxxx Disable SET SPEED xxxx ++ NOBIGBUF Override BIGBUFOK when it is the default ++ NOBRKC Don't try to refer to t_brkc or t_eof tchars structure members. ++ NOCKFQHOSTNAME Exclude code to get fully qualified hostname in case it ++ causes core dumps. ++ NOCCTRAP Disable Control-C (SIGINT) trapping. ++ NOCKSPEED Disable control-prefix removal feature (SET CONTROL). ++ NOCKTIMERS Build without support for dynamic timers. ++ NOCKXYZ Overrides CK_XYZ. ++ NOCKREGEX Do not include [...] or {xxx,xxx,xxx} matching in ckmatch(). ++ NOCMDL Build with no command-line option processing. ++ NOCOTFMC No Close(Open()) To Force Mode Change (UNIX version). ++ NOCSETS Build with no support for character set translation. ++ NOCYRIL Build with no support for Cyrillic character set translation. ++ NOCYRILLIC Ditto. ++ NODEBUG Build with no debug logging capability. ++ NODIAL Build with no DIAL or SET DIAL commands. ++ NODISPO Build to always refuse incoming MAIL or REMOTE PRINT files. ++ DNODISPLAY Build with no file-transfer display. ++ NOESCSEQ Build with no support for ANSI escape sequence recognition. ++ NOFAST Do not make FAST Kermit protocol settings the default. ++ NOFDZERO Do not use file descriptor 0 for remote-mode file transfer. ++ NOFILEH Do not #include . ++ NOFLOAT Don't include any floating-point data types or operations. ++ NOFRILLS Build with "no frills" (this should be phased out...) ++ NOFTRUNCATE Include this on UNIXes that don't have ftruncate(). ++ NOGETUSERSHELL Include this on UNIXes that don't have getusershell(). ++ NOGFTIMER Don't use high-precision floating-point file-transfer ++ timers. ++ NOHEBREW Build with no support for Hebrew character sets. ++ NOHELP Build with no built-in help. ++ NOIKSD Build with IKSD support excluded. ++ NOINITGROUPS Include this on UNIXes that don't have initgroups(). ++ NOICP Build with no interactive command parser. ++ NOJC Build with no support for job control (suspend). ++ NOKANJI Build with no support for Japanese Kanji character sets. ++ NOKVERBS Build with no support for keyboard verbs (\Kverbs). ++ NOLATIN2 Build with no ISO Latin-2 character-set translation support. ++ NOLEARN Build with no support for learned scripts. ++ NOLINKBITS Use of S_ISLNK and _IFLNK untrustworthy; use readlink() ++ instead. ++ NOLOCAL Build without any local-mode features: No Making Connections. ++ NOLOGDIAL Disable connection log. ++ NOLOGIN Build without IKSD (network login) support. ++ NOLSTAT Not OK to use lstat(). ++ NOMDMHUP Build without "modem-specific hangup" (e.g. ATH0) feature. ++ NOMHHOST Exclude the multihomed-host TCP/IP code (if compilcation ++ errors) ++ NOMINPUT Build without MINPUT command. ++ NOMSEND Build with no MSEND command. ++ NONAWS Do not include TELNET Negotiate About Window Size support. ++ NONET Do not include any network support. ++ NONOSETBUF (See NOSETBUF) ++ NOPARSEN Build without automatic parity detection. ++ NOPIPESEND Disable file transfer using pipes and filters. ++ NOPOLL Override CK_POLL definition. ++ NOPOPEN The popen() library call is not available. ++ NOPURGE Build with no PURGE command. ++ NOPUSH Build with no escapes to operating system. ++ NOREALPATH In UNIX, realpath() function is not available. ++ NORECALL Disable the command-recall feature. ++ NOREDIRECT Disable REDIRECT command. ++ NORENAME Don't use rename() system call, use link()/unlink() (UNIX). ++ NORESEND Build with no RESEND command. ++ NORETRY Build with no command-retry feature. ++ NOSCRIPT Build with no SCRIPT command. ++ NOSELECT Don't try to use select(). ++ NOSERVER Build with no SERVER mode and no server-related commands. ++ NOSETBUF Don't make console writes unbuffered. ++ NONOSETBUF DO make console writes unbuffered. ++ NOSETREU setreuid() and/or setregid() not available. ++ NOSHOW Build with no SHOW command (not recommended!). ++ NOSIGWINCH Disable SIGWINCH signal trapping. ++ NOSPL Build with no script programming language. ++ NOSTAT Don't call stat() from mainline code. ++ NOSYMLINK Include this for UNIXes that don't have readlink(). ++ NOSYSIOCTLH Do not #include . ++ NOSYSTIMEH Co not include . ++ NOSYSLOG Disable syslogging code. ++ NOTCPOPTS Build with no SET TCP options or underlying support. ++ NOTLOG Build with no support for transaction logging. ++ NOTM_ISDST Struct tm has no tm_isdst member. ++ NOUNICODE Build with no support for Unicode character-set translation. ++ NOURL Don't parse URLs ++ NOUUCP Build with no UUCP lockfile support (dangerous!). ++ NOWARN Make EXIT WARNING be OFF by default (otherwise it's ON). ++ NOWREFRESH Override built-in definition of CK_WREFRESH (q.v.). ++ NOXFER Build with no Kermit or other file-transfer protocols. ++ NOXMIT Build with no TRANSMIT command. ++ NOXPRINT Disables transparent print code. ++ OLDMSG Use old "entering server mode" message (see [164]ckcmai.c). ++ OLINUXHISPEED Build in old Linux hi-serial-speed code (for Linux <= ++ 1.0). ++ OPENBSD Build for OpenBSD. ++ OS2 Build for OS/2. ++ OSF Build for OSF/1. ++ OSFPC Build for OSF/1 on a PC. ++ OSF32 Digital UNIX 3.2 or later. ++ OSF40 Build for Digital UNIX 4.0. ++ OSF50 Build for Digital UNIX 5.0. ++ OSK Build for OS-9. ++ OXOS Build for Olivetti X/OS 2.3. ++ PCIX Build for PC/IX ++ PID_T=xxx Type for pids is xxx (normally int or pid_t). ++ POSIX Build for POSIX: use POSIX header files, functions, etc. ++ _POSIX_SOURCE Disable non-POSIX features. ++ PROVX1 Build for Venix 1.0 on DEC Professional 3xx. ++ PTX Build for Dynix/PTX ++ PWID_T=xxx getpwid() type is xxx. ++ RBSIZ=xxx Define overall size of receive-packet buffer (with DYNAMIC). ++ RDCHK rdchk() system call is available. ++ RENAME rename() system call is available (UNIX). ++ RTAIX Build for AIX 2.2.1 on IBM RT PC. ++ RTU Build for Masscomp / Concurrent RTU. ++ SAVEDUID BSD or other non-AT&T UNIX has saved-setuid feature. ++ SBSIZ=xxx Define overall size of send-packet buffer (use with ++ DYNAMIC). ++ SDIRENT Directory structure specified in . ++ SELECT select() function available (conflicts with RDCHK and CK_POLL) ++ SELECT_H Include for select()-releated definitions. ++ SETEUID BSD 4.4-style seteXid() functions available. ++ SIG_V Type for signal() is void. Used to override normal assumption. ++ SIG_I Type for signal() is int. Used to override normal assumption. ++ SOCKOPT_T Override default data type for get/setsockopt() option ++ length. ++ SOLARIS Build for Solaris. ++ SOLARIS25 Build for Solaris 2.5 or later. ++ SONYNEWS Build for Sony NEWS-OS. ++ STERMIOX is available. ++ STRATUS Build for Stratus VOS. ++ STRATUSX25 Include Stratus VOS X.25 support. ++ SUN4S5 Build for SUNOS 4.x in the System V R3 environment. ++ SUNOS4 Build for SUNOS 4.0 in the BSD environment. ++ SUNOS41 Build for SUNOS 4.1 in the BSD environment. ++ SUNX25 Build with support for SunLink X.25. ++ SVR3 Build for AT&T System V Release 3. ++ SVR3JC Allow job control support on System V Release 3 UNIX versions. ++ SVR4 Build for AT&T System V Release 4. ++ SW_ACC_ID UNIX only -- swap real & effective ids around access() ++ calls. ++ sxaE50 Build for PFU Compact A Series SX/A TISP. ++ SYSLOGLEVEL=n Force syslogging at given level. ++ SYSTIMEH Include . ++ SYSUTIMEH Include for setting file dates (88OPEN) ++ TCPSOCKET Build with support for TCP/IP via Berkeley sockets library. ++ TERMIOX header file is available (mostly SVR4). ++ TNCODE Include TELNET-specific code. ++ TOWER1 Build for NCR Tower 1632 with OS 1.02. ++ TRS16 Build for Tandy 16/6000. ++ UID_T=xxx Type for uids is xxx (normally int or uid_t). ++ UNIX Must be defined for all UNIX versions. ++ UNIX351M AT&T UNIX 3.51m on the AT&T 7300 UNIX PC. ++ USE_ARROWKEYS Include code to parse ANSI arrow-key sequences. ++ USE_LSTAT OK to use lstat(). ++ USE_MEMCPY Define this if memcpy()/memset()/memmove() available. ++ USE_STRERROR Define this if strerror() is available. ++ USLEEP usleep() system call available (conflicts with NAP & SELECT). ++ UTEK Build for Tektronix workstations with UTEK OS. ++ UTIMEH Include for setting file dates (SVR4, POSIX) ++ UTS24 Build for Amdahl UTS 2.4. ++ V7 Build for Version 7 UNIX. ++ VMS Build for VAX/VMS. ++ VOID=xxx VOID type for functions (int or void). ++ VXVE Build for CDC VX/VE 5.2.1. ++ WAIT_T=xxx Type of argument passed to wait(). ++ WINTCP Build with Wollongong VAX/VMS TCP/IP (implies TCPSOCKET) ++ WOLLONGONG Build with Wollongong UNIX TCP/IP (implies TCPSOCKET) ++ XENIX Build for Xenix (SCO, Tandy, others). ++ XNDIR Support for BSD long filenames via . ++ XYZ_INTERNAL Support for XYZMODEM protocols is internal, not external. ++ ZFCDAT Define this if zfcdat() function is available in Kermit. ++ ZILOG Build for Zilog ZEUS. ++ ZJDATE Has zjdate() function that converts date to Julian format. ++ XPRINT Transparent print code included in CONNECT module. ++ ++ [ [165]Top ] [ [166]Contents ] [ [167]C-Kermit Home ] [ [168]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ++ C-Kermit Configuration Options / [169]The Kermit Project / ++ [170]Columbia University / [171]kermit@columbia.edu / 14 March 2003 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 4. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x1 ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x2 ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x3 ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x4 ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x5 ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6 ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x7 ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8 ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x9 ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x10 ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x11 ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x12 ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x13 ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x14 ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#xa1 ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x2 ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x0 ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x3 ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x1 ++ 34. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 35. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 36. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuus3.c ++ 37. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 38. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 39. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x4 ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x2 ++ 46. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/makefile ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x4 ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x9.2 ++ 50. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusx.c ++ 51. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 52. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 53. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusx.c ++ 54. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucmd.c ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x5 ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x3 ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/unicode.html ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6 ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x4 ++ 68. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusr.h ++ 69. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusr.h ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x7 ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x5 ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6.1 ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6.2 ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6.3 ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6.4 ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x4 ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/gkermit.html ++ 82. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusr.h ++ 83. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcker.h ++ 84. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8 ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x6 ++ 91. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckudia.c ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 94. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x9 ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x7 ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1 ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.2 ++ 100. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.3 ++ 101. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.1 ++ 102. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.2 ++ 103. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.3 ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.4 ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.5 ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8.1.6 ++ 107. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.h ++ 108. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckctel.c ++ 109. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckctel.c ++ 110. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckctel.h ++ 111. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcftp.c ++ 112. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 113. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.c ++ 114. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.h ++ 115. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x11 ++ 117. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu ++ 118. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 119. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 120. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x10 ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x8 ++ 124. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 125. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x11 ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x9 ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x11 ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x12 ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x10 ++ 138. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucns.c ++ 139. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucon.c ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x13 ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x11 ++ 146. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 147. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 148. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x14 ++ 151. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x12 ++ 152. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 153. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 154. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 155. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 156. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 157. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#x13 ++ 158. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 160. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 161. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 162. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 163. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.h ++ 164. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcmai.c ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#top ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html#contents ++ 167. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 170. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 171. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckcbwr.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,1467 @@ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 General Hints and Tips ++ ++ Frank da Cruz ++ [1]The Kermit Project, [2]Columbia University ++ ++ As of: C-Kermit 8.0.211, 17 March 2003 ++ This page last updated: Sat Apr 10 16:37:37 2004 (New York USA Time) ++ ++ IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, it is a ++ plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the original (and ++ possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ ++ [3]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ ++ This document contains platform-independent C-Kermit hints and tips. ++ Also see the platform-specific C-Kermit hints and tips document for ++ your platform, for example: ++ ++ [4]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ ++ for Unix. This document also applies to [5]Kermit 95 for Windows, ++ which is based on C-Kermit. ++ ++ [ [6]C-Kermit ] [ [7]TUTORIAL ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CONTENTS ++ ++ 0. [8]PATCHES ++ 1. [9]INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES ++ 2. [10]THE C-KERMIT COMMAND PARSER ++ 3. [11]MULTIPLE SESSIONS ++ 4. [12]NETWORK CONNECTIONS ++ 5. [13]MODEMS AND DIALING ++ 6. [14]DIALING HINTS AND TIPS ++ 7. [15]TERMINAL SERVERS ++ 8. [16]TERMINAL EMULATION ++ 9. [17]KEY MAPPING ++ 10. [18]FILE TRANSFER ++ 11. [19]SCRIPT PROGRAMMING ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 0. PATCHES ++ ++ [ [20]Top ] [ [21]Contents ] [ [22]Next ] ++ ++ Source-level patches for C-Kermit 8.0.211: ++ ++ (None) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1. INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES ++ ++ [ [23]Top ] [ [24]Contents ] [ [25]Next ] ++ ++ These are not necessarily exhaustive lists. ++ ++ 1.1. C-Kermit 6.0 ++ ++ C-Kermit 6.0 was released 6 September 1996 and is completely ++ documented in [26]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition. The following ++ incompatible changes were made in C-Kermit 6.0: ++ ++ * Unless you tell C-Kermit otherwise, if a serial or network ++ connection seems to be open, and you attempt to EXIT or to open a ++ new connection, C-Kermit warns you that an active connection ++ appears to be open and asks you if you really want to close it. If ++ you do not want these warnings, add SET EXIT WARNING OFF to your ++ customization file or script, or give this command at the prompt. ++ * The default for SET { SEND, RECEIVE } PATHNAMES was changed from ++ ON to OFF, to prevent unexpected creation of directories and ++ depositing of incoming files in places you might not know to look. ++ * The default for SET FILE INCOMPLETE was changed from DISCARD to ++ KEEP to allow for file transfer recovery. ++ * The default file-transfer block-check is now 3, rather than 1. If ++ the other Kermit does not support this, the two will drop back to ++ type 1 automatically unless the other Kermit fails to follow the ++ protocol specification. ++ * The default flow-control is now "auto" ("do the right thing for ++ each type of connection"), not Xon/Xoff. ++ * Backslash (\) is no longer a command continuation character. Only ++ - (hyphen, dash) may be used for this in C-Kermit 6.0 and later. ++ * Negative INPUT timeout now results in infinite wait, rather than 1 ++ second. ++ ++ 1.2. C-Kermit 7.0 ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 was released 1 January 2000. Its new features are ++ documented in the C-Kermit 7.0 Supplement, ++ [27]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit2.html. The following ++ incompatible changes were made in C-Kermit 7.0: ++ * The "multiline GET" command is gone. Now use either of the ++ following forms instead: ++ get remote-name local-name ++ get /as-name:local-name remote-name ++ If either name contains spaces, enclose it in braces (or, in ++ C-Kermit 8.0, doublequotes). ++ * To include multiple file specifications in a GET command, you must ++ now use MGET rather than GET: ++ mget file1 file2 file3 ... ++ * C-Kermit 7.0 and later use FAST Kermit protocol settings by ++ default. This includes "unprefixing" of certain control ++ characters. Because of this, file transfers that worked with ++ previous releases might not work in the new release especially ++ against a non-Kermit-Project Kermit protocol implementation (but ++ it is more likely that they will work, and much faster). If a ++ transfer fails, you'll get a context-sensitive hint suggesting ++ possible causes and cures. Usually SET PREFIXING ALL does the ++ trick. ++ * By default C-Kermit 7.0 and later send files in text or binary ++ mode by looking at each file to see which is the appropriate mode. ++ To restore the previous behavior, put SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL and ++ the desired SET FILE TYPE (TEXT or BINARY) in your C-Kermit ++ initialization file. ++ * The RESEND and REGET commands automatically switch to binary mode; ++ previously if RESEND or REGET were attempted when FILE TYPE was ++ TEXT, these commands would fail immediately, with a message ++ telling you they work only when the FILE TYPE is BINARY. Now they ++ simply do this for you. ++ * SET PREFIXING CAUTIOUS and MINIMAL now both prefix linefeed (10 ++ and 138) in case rlogin, ssh, or cu are "in the middle", since ++ otherwise ~ might appear in Kermit packets, and this would ++ cause rlogin, ssh, or cu to disconnect, suspend,escape back, or ++ otherwise wreck the file transfer. Xon and Xoff are now always ++ prefixed too, even when Xon/Xoff flow control is not in effect, ++ since unprefixing them has proven dangerous on TCP/IP connections. ++ * In UNIX, VMS, Windows, and OS/2, the DIRECTORY command is built ++ into C-Kermit itself rather than implemented by running an ++ external command or program. The built-in command might not behave ++ the way the platform-specific external one did, but many options ++ are available for customization. Of course the underlying ++ platform-specific command can still be accessed with "!", "@", or ++ "RUN" wherever the installation does not forbid. In UNIX, the "ls" ++ command can be accessed directly as "ls" in C-Kermit. ++ * SEND ? prints a list of switches rather than a list of filenames. ++ If you want to see a list of filenames, use a (system-dependent) ++ construction such as SEND ./? (for UNIX, Windows, or OS/2), SEND ++ []? (VMS), etc. ++ * In UNIX, OS-9, and Kermit 95, the wildcard characters in previous ++ versions were * and ?. In C-Kermit 7.0 they are *, ?, [, ], {, and ++ }, with dash used inside []'s to denote ranges and comma used ++ inside {} to separate list elements. If you need to include any of ++ these characters literally in a filename, precede each one with ++ backslash (\). ++ * SET QUIET { ON, OFF } is now on the command stack, just like SET ++ INPUT CASE, SET COUNT, SET MACRO ERROR, etc, as described on p.458 ++ of [28]Using C-Kermit, 2nd Edition. This allows any macro or ++ command file to SET QUIET ON or OFF without worrying about saving ++ and restoring the global QUIET value. For example, this lets you ++ write a script that tries SET LINE on lots of devices until it ++ finds one free without spewing out loads of error messages, and ++ also without disturbing the global QUIET setting, whatever it was. ++ * Because of the new "." operator (which introduces assignments), ++ macros whose names begin with "." can not be invoked "by name". ++ However, they still can be invoked with DO or \fexecute(). ++ * The syntax of the EVALUATE command has changed. To restore the ++ previous syntax, use SET EVALUATE OLD. ++ * The \v(directory) variable now includes the trailing directory ++ separator; in previous releases it did not. This is to allow ++ constructions such as: ++ cd \v(dir)data.tmp ++ to work across platforms that might have different directory ++ notation, such as UNIX, Windows, and VMS. ++ * Prior to C-Kermit 7.0, the FLOW-CONTROL setting was global and ++ sticky. In C-Kermit 7.0, there is an array of default flow-control ++ values for each kind of connection, that are applied automatically ++ at SET LINE/PORT/HOST time. Thus a SET FLOW command given before ++ SET LINE/PORT/HOST is likely to be undone. Therefore SET FLOW can ++ be guaranteed to have the desired effect only if given after the ++ SET LINE/PORT/HOST command. ++ * Character-set translation works differently in the TRANSMIT ++ command when (a) the file character-set is not the same as the ++ local end of the terminal character-set, or (b) when the terminal ++ character-set is TRANSPARENT. ++ ++ 1.3. C-Kermit 8.0 ++ ++ The following incompatible changes were made in C-Kermit 8.0: ++ * C-Kermit now accepts doublequotes in most contexts where you ++ previously had to use braces to group multiple words into a single ++ field, or to force inclusion of leading or trailing blanks. This ++ might cause problems in contexts where you wanted the doublequote ++ characters to be taken literally. Consult [29]Section 5 of the ++ [30]C-Kermit 8.0 Update Notes for further information. ++ * Using the SET HOST command to make HTTP connections is no longer ++ supported. Instead, use the new [31]HTTP OPEN command. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2. THE C-KERMIT COMMAND PARSER ++ ++ [ [32]Top ] [ [33]Contents ] [ [34]Next ] [ [35]Previous ] ++ ++ Various command-related limits are shown in the following table, in ++ which the sample values are for a "large memory model" build of ++ C-Kermit, typical for modern platforms (Linux, Solaris, AIX, VMS, ++ etc). You can see the values for your version of Kermit by giving the ++ SHOW FEATURES command. The maximum length for a Kermit command (CMDBL) ++ also determines the maximum length for a macro definition, since ++ DEFINE is itself a command. The maximum length for a variable name is ++ between 256 and 4096 characters, depending on the platform; for array ++ declarations and references, that includes the subscript. ++ ______________________________________________________________ ++ ++ Item Symbol Sample ++ Value Definition ++ Number of characters in a command CMDBL 32763 ckucmd.h ++ Number of chars in a field of a command ATMBL 10238 ckucmd.h ++ Nesting level for command files MAXTAKE 54 ckuusr.h ++ Nesting level for macros MACLEVEL 128 ckuusr.h ++ Nesting level for FOR / WHILE loops FORDEPTH 32 ckuusr.h ++ Number of macros MAC_MAX 16384 ckuusr.h ++ Size of INPUT buffer INPBUFSIZ 4096 ckuusr.h ++ Maximum files to match a wildcard MAXWLD 102400 ckcdeb.h ++ Filespecs in MSEND command MSENDMAX 1024 ckuusr.h ++ Length for GOTO target label LBLSIZ 50 ckuusr.h ++ \fexecute() recursion depth limit CMDDEP 64 ckucmd.h ++ ______________________________________________________________ ++ ++ If you need to define a macro that is longer than CMDBL, you can break ++ the macro up into sub-macros or rewrite the macro as a command file. ++ In a pinch you can also redefine CMDBL and recompile C-Kermit. All of ++ these numbers represent tradeoffs: the bigger the number, the more ++ "powerful" Kermit in the corresponding area, but also the bigger the ++ program image and possibly disk footprint, and the longer it takes to ++ load and initialize. ++ ++ In the interactive command parser: ++ ++ * EMACS- or VI-style command line editing is not supported. ++ * Editing keys are hardwired (Ctrl-U, Ctrl-W, etc). ++ ++ If you interrupt C-Kermit before it has issued its first prompt, it ++ will exit. This means that you cannot interrupt execution of the ++ initialization file, or of an "application file" (file whose name is ++ given as the first command-line argument), or of an alternative ++ initialization file ("-y filename"), and get to the prompt. There is, ++ however, one exception to this rule: you *can* interrupt commands -- ++ including TAKE commands -- given in the '-C "command list"' ++ command-line argument and -- if there were no action commands among ++ the command-line arguments -- you will be returned to the C-Kermit ++ prompt. So, for example, if you want to start C-Kermit in such a way ++ that it executes a command file before issuing its first prompt, and ++ you also want to be able to interrupt the command file and get to the ++ prompt, include a TAKE command for the desired command in the -C ++ argument, for example: ++ ++ kermit -C "take dial.scr" ++ ++ At the command prompt, if you use the backslash (\) prefix to enter a ++ control character, space, or question mark into a command literally, ++ the backslash disappears and is replaced by the quoted character. If ++ it was a control character, it is shown as a circumflex (^). This ++ allows editing (backspace, delete, Ctrl-W) to work correctly even for ++ control characters. ++ ++ Priot to C-Kermit 8.0, the only way to include a comma literally in a ++ macro definition -- as opposed to having it separate commands within ++ the definition -- is to enter its ASCII value (44) in backslash ++ notation, e.g.: ++ ++ DEFINE ROWS RUN MODE CO80\{44}\%1 ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0 you can use constructions like this: ++ ++ DEFINE ROWS RUN MODE "CO80,\%1" ++ ++ If you quote special characters in a filename (e.g. in the SEND ++ command), filename completion may seem to work incorrectly. For ++ example, if you have a file whose name is a*b (the name really ++ contains an asterisk), and you type "send a\\*", the "b" does not ++ appear, nor will Ctrl-R redisplay the completed name correctly. But ++ internally the file name is recognized anyway. ++ ++ Question-mark help does not work during execution of an ASKQ command. ++ The question marks are simply accepted as text. ++ ++ In OUTPUT commands only, \B sends a BREAK signal, \L sends a Long ++ BREAK signal, and \N sends a NUL (ASCII 0). BREAK and Long BREAK are ++ special signals, not characters, and NUL is a character that normally ++ cannot be included in a C string, since it is the C string terminator. ++ If you really want to output a backslash followed by a B, an L, or an ++ N (as is needed to configure certain modems, etc), double the ++ backslash, e.g. "output \\B". In C-Kermit 7.0 or later, you can disarm ++ and re-arm the special OUTPUT-command escapes (\B, \L, and \N) with ++ SET OUTPUT SPECIAL-ESCAPES { OFF, ON }. ++ ++ When using the command-line processor ("kermit -l /dev/tty00 -b ++ 19200", etc), note that in some cases the order of the command-line ++ options makes a difference, contrary to the expectation that order of ++ command-line options should not matter. For example, the -b option ++ must be given after the -l option if it is to affect the device ++ specified in the -l option. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3. MULTIPLE SESSIONS ++ ++ [ [36]Top ] [ [37]Contents ] [ [38]Next ] [ [39]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and earlier do not support multiple sessions. When you ++ SET LINE (or SET PORT, same thing) to a new device, or SET HOST to a ++ new host, the previous SET LINE device or network host connection is ++ closed, resulting in hangup of the modem or termination of the network ++ connection. In windowing environments like HP-VUE, NeXTSTEP, Windows, ++ OS/2, etc, you can run separate copies of Kermit in different windows ++ to achieve multiple sessions. ++ ++ To achieve multiple sessions through a single serial port (e.g. when ++ dialing up), you can install SLIP or PPP on your computer and then use ++ C-Kermit's TCP/IP support over the SLIP or PPP connection, assuming ++ you also have TCP/IP networking installed on your computer. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 has the same restriction on SET LINE and SET HOST ++ sessions: only one regular session (dialout, Telnet, etc) can be open ++ at a time. However, version 8.0 adds two new kinds of sessions: FTP ++ and HTTP; one or both of these can be open at the same as a regular ++ session. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4. NETWORK CONNECTIONS ++ ++ [ [40]Top ] [ [41]Contents ] [ [42]Next ] [ [43]Previous ] ++ ++ FTP Client Bugs ++ ++ The Unix C-Kermit 8.0.206 FTP client had the following bugs at the ++ time most of the 8.0.206 binaries were built for the C-Kermit 8.0 ++ CDROM: ++ ++ 1. FTP MGET fails when directory segments contain wildcards, as in ++ "ftp mget */data/*.dat". Work around by doing a separate MGET for ++ each source directory. ++ 2. FTP MGET can fail or produce random side effects if you have a ++ TMPDIR or CK_TMP environment variable definition in effect, or a ++ SET TEMP-DIRECTORY value, longer than 7 characters. Work around by ++ giving a SET TEMP-DIRECTORY command with a short value, such as ++ "/tmp". ++ ++ These two bugs are fixed in the source code that is included on the ++ CDROM, and also in Kermit 95 2.1.1. You can tell if a C-Kermit 8.0.206 ++ binary has these fixes by typing SHOW VERSION; if it says "FTP Client, ++ 8.0.200, 24 Oct 2002" it has the fixes; if the edit number is less ++ that 200, it doesn't, in which case can build a new binary from the ++ source code (or contact us and we'll try to get get one for you). ++ ++ Making TCP/IP Connections Can Take a Long Time ++ ++ The most frequently asked question in many newsgroups is "Why does it ++ take such a long time to make a Telnet connection to (or from) my ++ (e.g.) Linux PC?" (this applies to Kermit as well as to regular Telnet ++ clients): ++ ++ 1. Most Telnet servers perform reverse DNS lookups on the client for ++ security and/or logging reasons. If the Telnet client's host ++ cannot be found by the server's local DNS server, the DNS request ++ goes out to the Internet at large, and this can take quite some ++ time. The solution to this problem is to make sure that both ++ client and host are registered in DNS. ++ 2. C-Kermit itself performs reverse DNS lookups unless you tell it ++ not to. This is to allow C-Kermit to let you know which host it is ++ actually connected to in case you have made a connection to a ++ "host pool" (multihomed host). You can disable C-Kermit's reverse ++ DNS lookup with SET TCP REVERSE-DNS-LOOKUP OFF. ++ 3. C-Kermit 7.0 and later strictly enforce Telnet protocol rules. One ++ such rule is that certain negotiations must be responded to. If ++ C-Kermit sends a such a negotiation and the host does not respond, ++ C-Kermit waits a long time for the reply (in case the network is ++ congested or the host is slow), but eventually will time out. To ++ eliminate the waits (and therefore risk possible protocol ++ mismatches -- or worse -- between Telnet client and server), tell ++ C-Kermit to SET TELNET WAIT OFF (or include the /NOWAIT switch ++ with the TELNET command). ++ ++ The Rlogin Client ++ ++ In multiuser operating systems such as UNIX and VMS, TCP/IP Rlogin ++ connections are available only to privileged users, since "login" is a ++ privileged socket. Assuming you are allowed to use it in the first ++ place, it is likely to behave differently depending on what type of ++ host you are rlogging in to, due to technical reasons having to do ++ with conflicting interpretations of RFC793 (Out-Of-Band Data) and ++ Rlogin (RFC1122)... "Specifically, the TCP urgent pointer in BSD ++ points to the byte after the urgent data byte, and an RFC-compliant ++ TCP urgent pointer points to the urgent data byte. As a result, if an ++ application sends urgent data from a BSD-compatible implementation to ++ an [44]RFC-1122 compatible implementation then the receiver will read ++ the wrong urgent data byte (it will read the byte located after the ++ correct byte in the data stream as the urgent data byte)." Rlogin ++ requires the use of OOB data while Telnet does not. Therefore, it is ++ possible for Telnet to work between all systems while BSD and System V ++ TCP/IP implementations are almost always a bad mix. ++ ++ The Telnet Client ++ ++ On a TCP/IP TELNET connection, you should normally have PARITY set to ++ NONE and (except in VMS C-Kermit) FLOW-CONTROL also set to NONE. If ++ file transfer does not work with these settings (for example, because ++ the remote TELNET server only gives a 7-bit data path), use SET PARITY ++ SPACE. Do not use SET PARITY MARK, EVEN, or ODD on a TELNET connection ++ -- it interferes with TELNET protocol. ++ ++ If echoing does not work right after connecting to a network host or ++ after dialing through a TCP/IP modem server, it probably means that ++ the TELNET server on the far end of the connection is executing the ++ TELNET protocol incorrectly. After initially connecting and ++ discovering incorrect echoing (characters are echoed twice, or not at ++ all), escape back, give the appropriate SET DUPLEX command (FULL or ++ HALF), and then CONNECT again. For a consistently misbehaving ++ connection, you can automate this process in a macro or TAKE file. ++ ++ TELNET sessions are treated just like serial communications sessions ++ as far as "terminal bytesize" and "command bytesize" are concerned. If ++ you need to view and/or enter 8-bit characters during a TELNET ++ session, you must tell C-Kermit to SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE 8, SET ++ COMMAND BYTESIZE 8, and SET PARITY NONE. ++ ++ If you SET TELNET DEBUG ON prior to making a connection, protocol ++ negotiations will be displayed on your screen. You can also capture ++ them in the debug log (along with everything else) and then extract ++ them easily, since all Telnet negotiations lines begin with ++ (uppercase) "TELNET". ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 5. MODEMS AND DIALING ++ ++ [ [45]Top ] [ [46]Contents ] [ [47]Next ] [ [48]Previous ] ++ ++ External modems are recommended because: ++ ++ * They don't need any special drivers. ++ * They are less likely to interfere with normal operation of your ++ computer. ++ * You can use the lights and speaker to troubleshoot dialing. ++ * You can share them among all types of computers. ++ * You can easily turn them off and on when power-cycling seems ++ warranted. ++ * They are more likely to have manuals. ++ ++ Modems can be used by C-Kermit only when they are visible as or ++ through a regular serial port device. Certain modems can not be used ++ in this normal way on many kinds of computers: Winmodems, RPI modems, ++ Controllerless modems, the IBM Mwave, etc; all of these require ++ special drivers that perform some, most, or all of the modem's ++ functions in software. Such drivers are generally NOT available in ++ UNIX or other non-Windows (or non-OS/2, in the case of the Mwave) ++ platforms. ++ ++ In order to dial a modem, C-Kermit must know its repertoire of ++ commands and responses. Each modem make and model is likely to have a ++ different repertoire. Since Kermit has no way of knowhing which kind ++ of modem will be dialed, normally you have to tell it with a SET MODEM ++ TYPE command, e.g.: ++ ++ set modem type usrobotics ++ set line /dev/cua0 ++ set speed 57600 ++ dial 7654321 ++ ++ In the early days, there was a wide variety of modems and command ++ languages. Nowadays, almost every modem uses the Hayes AT command set ++ (but with some differences in the details) and its startup ++ configuration includes error correction, data compression, and ++ hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. As long as C-Kermit is capable of ++ hardware flow control (as it is on many, but not all, the platforms ++ where it runs, since some operating systems don't support it), the ++ modem can be dailed immediately, without lengthy configuration ++ dialogs, and in fact this is what SET MODEM TYPE GENERIC-HIGH-SPEED ++ does. In C-Kermit 8.0, GENERIC-HIGH-SPEED has become the default modem ++ type, so now it is usually possible to SET LINE, SET SPEED, and DIAL ++ without having to identify your modem. If this doesn't work, of ++ course, then you might have to fall back to the tradiational method: ++ Give a SET MODEM TYPE for a specific modem first, then SET LINE, SET ++ SPEED, and DIAL. ++ ++ An important change in C-Kermit 6.0 is that when you give a SET MODEM ++ TYPE command to tell Kermit what kind of modem you have, Kermit also ++ sets a number of other modem-related parameters automatically from its ++ internal modem database. Thus, the order in which you give ++ modem-related commands is significant, whereas in prior releases they ++ could be given in any order. ++ ++ In particular, MODEM SPEED-MATCHING is set according to whether the ++ modem is known to be capable of speed buffering. SET MODEM TYPE ++ HAYES-2400 automatically turns SPEED-MATCHING ON, because when the ++ Hayes 2400 reports a particular speed in its CONNECT message, that ++ means its interface speed has changed to that speed, and C-Kermit's ++ must change accordingly if it is to continue communicating. This might ++ cause some confusion if you use "set modem type hayes" for dialing a ++ more advanced type of modem. ++ ++ The new default for flow control is "auto", meaning "do the right ++ thing for each type of connection". So (for example) if your version ++ of C-Kermit supports SET FLOW RTS/CTS and your modem also supports ++ RTS/CTS, then Kermit automatically sets its flow control to RTS/CTS ++ and set modem's flow control to RTS/CTS too before attempting to use ++ the modem. ++ ++ For these reasons, don't assume that "set modem type hayes" should be ++ used for all modems that uses the Hayes AT command set. "set modem ++ type hayes" really does mean Hayes 1200 or 2400, which in turn means ++ no hardware flow control, and no speed buffering. This choice will ++ rarely work with a modern high-speed modem. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 6. DIALING HINTS AND TIPS ++ ++ [ [49]Top ] [ [50]Contents ] [ [51]Next ] [ [52]Previous ] ++ ++ If you have a high-speed, error-correcting, data-compressing, ++ speed-buffering modem, you should fix the modem's interface speed as ++ high as possible, preferably (at least) four times higher than its ++ maximum connection (modulation) speed to allow compression to work at ++ full advantage. In this type of setup, you must also have an effective ++ means of flow control enabled between C-Kermit and the modem, ++ preferably hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. On platforms that do not ++ support hardware flow control, it is usually possible to select ++ software flow control (Xon/Xoff), and C-Kermit will do its best to set ++ the modem for local Xon/Xoff flow control too (but then, of course, ++ Ctrl-S and Ctrl-Q characters can not be transmitted on the ++ connection). ++ ++ If you are having trouble dialing your modem, SET DIAL DISPLAY ON to ++ watch the dialing interactions between C-Kermit and your modem. ++ Consult Chapters 3-4 of [53]Using C-Kermit (2nd Ed) for modem-dialing ++ troubleshooting instructions. The following sections offer some ++ addtional hints and tips. ++ ++ 6.1. Syntax ++ ++ If you want to dial a number that starts with #, you'll need to quote ++ the "#" character (as \# or \{35}), since it is also a comment ++ introducer: ++ ++ C-Kermit>dial #98765421-1-212-5551212 ; Looks like a comment ++ ?You must specify a number to dial ++ C-Kermit>dial \#98765421-1-212-5551212 ; Works OK ++ C-Kermit>dial =#98765421-1-212-5551212 ; This works too ++ ++ When using a dialing directory, remember what happens if a name is not ++ found: ++ ++ C-Kermit>dial xyzcorp ++ Lookup: "xyzcorp" - not found - dialing as given ++ ++ This normally does no harm, but some modems might behave strangely ++ when given dial strings that contain certain letters. For example, a ++ certain German modem treats any dial string that contains the letter ++ "s" as a command to fetch a number from its internal list, and replies ++ OK to the ATD command, which is normally not a valid response except ++ for partial dialing. To avoid this situation, use: ++ ++ lookup xyzcorp ++ if success dial ++ ++ 6.2. The Carrier Signal ++ ++ Remember: In many C-Kermit implementations (depending on the ++ underlying operating system -- mostly Windows, OS/2, and ++ System-V-based UNIX versions, and in C-Kermit 7.0, also VMS), you ++ can't CONNECT to a modem and type the modem's dialing command (like ++ "ATDT7654321") manually, unless you first tell C-Kermit to: ++ ++ SET CARRIER-WATCH OFF ++ ++ This is because (in these implementations), the CONNECT command ++ requires the modem's Carrier Detect (CD) signal to be on, but the CD ++ signal doesn't come on until after dialing is complete. This ++ requirement is what allows C-Kermit to pop back to its prompt ++ automatically when the connection is hung up. See the description of ++ SET CARRIER-WATCH in "Using C-Kermit". ++ ++ Similarly, if your dialed connection drops when CARRIER-WATCH is set ++ to AUTO or ON, you can't CONNECT back to the (now disconnected) screen ++ to see what might have happened unless you first SET CARRIER-WATCH ++ OFF. But sometimes not even SET CARRIER-WATCH OFF will help in this ++ situation: certain platforms (for example Unixware 2.1), once carrier ++ drops, won't let the application do i/o with the device any more. In ++ that case, if you want to use the device again, you have to CLOSE it ++ and OPEN it again. Or you can have Kermit do this for you ++ automatically by telling it to SET CLOSE-ON-DISCONNECT ON. ++ ++ 6.3. Dialing and Flow Control ++ ++ Don't SET FLOW RTS/CTS if your modem is turned off, or if it is not ++ presenting the CTS signal. Otherwise, the serial device driver can get ++ stuck waiting for this signal to appear. ++ ++ Most modern modems support RTS/CTS (if they support any hardware flow ++ control at all), but some computers use different RS-232 circuits for ++ the same purposes, e.g. DTR and CD, or DTR and CTS. In such cases, you ++ might be able to make your computer work with your modem by ++ appropriately cross-wiring the circuits in the cable connector, for ++ example the computer's DTR to the modem's RTS, and modem's CD to the ++ computer's CTS. HOWEVER, C-Kermit does not know you have done this. So ++ if you have (say) SET FLOW DTR/CD, C-Kermit will make no attempt to ++ tell the modem to use RTS/CTS. You probably did this yourself when you ++ configured the modem. ++ ++ 6.4. The Dial Timeout ++ ++ If it takes your call longer to be completed than the timeout interval ++ that C-Kermit calculates, you can use the SET DIAL TIMEOUT command to ++ override C-Kermit's value. But beware: the modem has its own timeout ++ for completing the call. If it is a Hayes-like modem, C-Kermit adjusts ++ the modem's value too by setting register S7. But the maximum value ++ for S7 might be smaller than the time you need! In that case, C-Kermit ++ sets S7 to 0, 255, or other (modem-specific) value to signify "no ++ timeout". If Kermit attempts to set register S7 to a value higher than ++ your modem's maximum, the modem will say "ERROR" and you will get a ++ "Failure to initialize modem" error. In that case, use SET DIAL ++ TIMEOUT to override C-Kermit's calculation of the timeout value with ++ the highest value that is legal for your modem, e.g. 60. ++ ++ 6.5. Escape Sequence Guard Time ++ ++ A "TIES" (Time-Independent Escape Sequence) modem does not require any ++ guard time around its escape sequence. The following text: ++ ++ +++ATH0 ++ ++ if sent through a TIES modem, for example because you were uploading ++ this file through it, could pop the modem back into command mode and ++ make it hang up the connection. Later versions of the Telebit T1600 ++ and T3000 (version LA3.01E firmware and later), and all WorldBlazers, ++ use TIES. ++ ++ Although the probability of "+++" appearing in a Kermit packet is ++ markedly lower than with most other protocols (see the [54]File ++ Transfer section below), it can still happen under certain ++ circumstances. It can also happen when using C-Kermit's TRANSMIT ++ command. If you are using a Telebit TIES modem, you can change the ++ modem's escape sequence to an otherwise little-used control character ++ such as Ctrl-_ (Control-Underscore): ++ ++ AT S2=31 ++ ++ A sequence of three consecutive Ctrl-_ characters will not appear in a ++ Kermit packet unless you go to extraordinary lengths to defeat more ++ than a few of Kermit's built-in safety mechanisms. And if you do this, ++ then you should also turn off the modem's escape-sequence recognition ++ altogether: ++ ++ AT S48=0 S2=255 ++ ++ But when escape sequence recognition is turned off, "modem hangup" ++ (+++ATH0) will not work, so you should also SET ++ MODEM HANGUP RS232-SIGNAL (rather then MODEM-COMMAND). ++ ++ 6.6. Adaptive Dialing ++ ++ Some modems have a feature called adaptive dialing. When they are told ++ to dial a number using Tone dialing, they check to make sure that ++ dialtone has gone away after dialing the first digit. If it has not, ++ the modem assumes the phone line does not accept Tone dialing and so ++ switches to Pulse. When dialing out from a PBX, there is almost always ++ a secondary dialtone. Typically you take the phone off-hook, get the ++ PBX dialtone, dial "9" to get an outside line, and then get the phone ++ company's dialtone. In a situation like this, you need to tell the ++ modem to expect the secondary dialtone. On Hayes and compatible ++ modems, this is done by putting a "W" in the dial string at the ++ appropriate place. For example, to dial 9 for an outside line, and ++ then 7654321, use ATDT9W7654321: ++ ++ SET PBX-OUTSIDE-PREFIX 9W ++ ++ (replace "9" with whatever your PBX's outside-line prefix is). ++ ++ 6.7. The Busy Signal ++ ++ Some phone companies are eliminating the busy signal. Instead, they ++ issue a voice message such as "press 1 to automatically redial until ++ the number answers, or...". Obviously this is a disaster for modem ++ calls. If your service has this feature, there's nothing Kermit can do ++ about it. Your modem will respond with NO CARRIER (after a long time) ++ rather than BUSY (immediately), and Kermit will declare the call a ++ failure, rather than trying to redial the same number. ++ ++ 6.8. Hanging Up ++ ++ There are two ways to hang up a modem: by turning off the serial ++ port's DTR signal (SET MODEM HANGUP-METHOD RS232-SIGNAL) or sending ++ the modem its escape sequence followed by its hangup command (SET ++ MODEM HANGUP-METHOD MODEM-COMMAND). If one doesn't work, try the ++ other. If the automatic hangup performed at the beginning of a DIAL ++ command causes trouble, then SET DIAL HANGUP OFF. ++ ++ The HANGUP command has no effect when C-Kermit is in remote mode. This ++ is on purpose. If C-Kermit could hang up its own controlling terminal, ++ this would (a) most likely leave behind zombie processes, and (b) pose ++ a security risk. ++ ++ If you DIAL a modem, disconnect, then SET HOST or TELNET, and then ++ HANGUP, Kermit sends the modem's hangup command, such as "+++ATHO". ++ There is no good way to avoid this, because this case can't reliably ++ be distinguished from the case in which the user does SET HOST ++ terminal-server, SET MODEM TYPE name, DIAL. In both cases we have a ++ valid modem type selected and we have a network connection. If you ++ want to DIAL and then later make a regular network connection, you ++ will have to SET MODEM TYPE NONE or SET DIAL HANGUP OFF to avoid this ++ phenomenon. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 7. TERMINAL SERVERS ++ ++ [ [55]Top ] [ [56]Contents ] [ [57]Next ] [ [58]Previous ] ++ ++ Watch out for terminal server's escape character -- usually a control ++ character such as Ctrl-Circumflex (Ctrl-^). Don't unprefix it in ++ Kermit! ++ ++ Ciscos -- must often be told to "terminal download"... Cisco ASM ++ models don't have hardware flow control in both directions. ++ ++ Many terminal servers only give you a 7-bit connection, so if you ++ can't make it 8-bit, tell Kermit to "set parity space". ++ ++ The following story, regarding trouble transferring 8-bit files ++ through a reverse terminal server, was contributed by an Annex ++ terminal server user: ++ ++ Using C-Kermit on an HP 9000 712/80 running the HP-UX 10.0 ++ operating system. The HP was connected to a Xylogics Annex ++ MICRO-ELS-UX R7.1 8 port terminal server via ethernet. On the ++ second port of the terminal server is an AT&T Paradyne 3810 modem, ++ which is connected to a telephone line. There is a program which ++ runs on the HP to establish a Telnet connection between a serial ++ line on the Annex and a character special file on the HP (/dev ++ file). This is an Annex specific program called rtelnet (reverse ++ telnet) and is provided with the terminal server software. The ++ rtelnet utility runs on top of the pseudo-terminal facility ++ provided by UNIX. It creates host-originiated connections to ++ devices attached ot Annex serial ports. There are several command ++ line arguments to be specified with this program: the IP address of ++ the terminal server, the number of the port to attach to, and the ++ name of the pseudo-device to create. In addition to these there are ++ options to tell rtelnet how to operate on the connect: -b requests ++ negotiation for Telnet binary mode, -d turns on socket-leve ++ debugging, -f enables "connect on the fly" mode, -r removes the ++ device-name if it already exists, etc. The most important of these ++ to be specified when using 8 data bits and no parity, as we found ++ out, was the -t option. This creates a transparent TCP connection ++ to the terminal server. Again, what we assumed to be happening was ++ that the rtelnet program encountered a character sequence special ++ to itself and then "eating" those kermit packets. I think this is ++ all of the information I can give you on the configuration, short ++ of the values associated with the port on the terminal server. ++ ++ How to DIAL from a TCP/IP reverse terminal server (modem server): ++ ++ 1. (only if necessary) SET TELNET ECHO REMOTE ++ 2. SET HOST terminal-server-ip-name-or-address [ port ] ++ 3. SET MODEM TYPE modem-type ++ 4. (only if necessary) SET DIAL HANGUP OFF ++ 5. (for troubleshooting) SET DIAL DISPLAY ON ++ 6. DIAL phone-number ++ ++ The order is important: SET HOST before SET MODEM TYPE. Since this is ++ a Telnet connection, serial-port related commands such as SET SPEED, ++ SET STOP-BITS, HANGUP (when MODEM HANGUP-METHOD is RS232), etc, have ++ no effect. However, in C-Kermit 8.0, if the modem server supports ++ [59]RFC-2217 Telnet Com-Port Control protocol, these commands do ++ indeed take effect at the server's serial port. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8. TERMINAL EMULATION ++ ++ [ [60]Top ] [ [61]Contents ] [ [62]Next ] [ [63]Previous ] ++ ++ Except for the Windows, OS/2, and Macintosh versions, C-Kermit does ++ not emulate any kind of terminal. Rather, it acts as a ++ "semitransparent pipe", passing the characters you type during a ++ CONNECT session to the remote host, and sending the characters ++ received from the remote host to your screen. Whatever is controlling ++ your keyboard and screen provides the specific terminal emulation: a ++ real terminal, a PC running a terminal emulator, etc, or (in the case ++ of a self-contained workstation) your console driver, a terminal ++ window, xterm, etc. ++ ++ Kermit is semitrantsparent rather than fully transparent in the ++ following ways: ++ ++ * During a TELNET ("set host") session, C-Kermit itself executes the ++ TELNET protocol and performs TELNET negotiations. (But it does not ++ perform TN3270 protocol or any other type of 3270 terminal ++ emulation.) ++ * If you have changed your keyboard mapping using SET KEY, C-Kermit ++ replaces the characters you type with the characters or strings ++ they are mapped to. ++ * If you SET your TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET to anything but ++ TRANSPARENT, C-Kermit translates your keystrokes (after applying ++ any SET KEY definitions) before transmitting them, and translates ++ received characters before showing them on your screen. ++ * If your remote and/or local TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET is an ISO 646 ++ 7-bit national character set, such as German, French, Italian, ++ Swedish, etc, or Short KOI used for Cyrillic, C-Kermit's CONNECT ++ command automatically skips over ANSI escape sequences to avoid ++ translating their characters. Only ANSI/ISO standard ++ (VT100/200/300-like) 7-bit escape sequence formats are supported ++ for this purpose, no proprietary schemes like H-P, Televideo, ++ Tektronix, etc. ++ * If your version of C-Kermit includes SET TERMINAL APC command, ++ then C-Kermit's CONNECT command will handle APC escape sequences ++ if TERMINAL APC is not set to OFF (which is the default). ++ ++ You can make C-Kermit fully transparent by starting it with the -0 ++ (dash zero) command-line option. ++ ++ If you are running C-Kermit under a console driver, or in a terminal ++ window, that emulates the VT100, and use C-Kermit to log in to a VMS ++ system, the console driver or terminal window (not Kermit) is supposed ++ to reply to the "what are you?" query (ESC Z) from the VAX. If it ++ doesn't, and you can't make it do so, then you can (a) live with the ++ "unknown terminal" problem; (b) tell VMS to SET TERMINAL/DEVICE=VT100; ++ (c) program a key using SET KEY to send the appropriate sequence and ++ then punch the key at the right time; or (d) use the VMSLOGIN macro ++ that is defined in CKERMIT.INI to do this for you automatically. ++ ++ SET SESSION-LOG { TEXT, BINARY }, which is effective in UNIX and ++ AOS/VS but not other C-Kermit versions, removes CR, DEL, NUL, XON, and ++ XOFF characters (Using C-Kermit neglects to mention that XON and XOFF ++ are removed). The TEXT-mode setting is ineffective during SCRIPT ++ command execution, as well as on X.25 connections. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9. KEY MAPPING ++ ++ [ [64]Top ] [ [65]Contents ] [ [66]Next ] [ [67]Previous ] ++ ++ Except in the terminal-emulating versions, C-Kermit's key mapping ++ facilities are limited to normal "ASCII" keys, and cannot be used with ++ function keys, arrow keys, arcane key combinations, etc. Since ++ C-Kermit runs on such a wide variety of hardware platforms (including, ++ for example, more than 360 different UNIX platforms), it is not ++ possible for C-Kermit to support every conceivable keyboard under ++ every release of every UNIX (or VMS, or ...) product on every ++ different kind of computer possibly under all manner of different ++ console drivers, even if it had the means to do so. ++ ++ In technical terms, C-Kermit uses the read() function to read ++ keystrokes, and read() returns a single byte (value 0 through 255). ++ C-Kermit's SET KEY function applies to these single-byte codes. ++ "Extended function" keys, such as F-keys, arrow keys, etc, usually ++ return either a 2-byte "scan code" or else a character string (such as ++ an escape sequence like " O p"). In both cases, C-Kermit has no ++ way to tell the difference between such multibyte key values, and the ++ corresponding series of single-byte key values. This could only be ++ done by accessing the keyboard at a much lower level in a highly ++ platform-dependent manner, probably requiring tens of thousands of ++ lines of code to support even a sampling of the most popular ++ workstation / OS combinations. ++ ++ However, most workstation console drivers (terminal emulation windows, ++ etc) include their own key-mapping facility. For example in AIX, the ++ AIXterm program (in whose window you would run C-Kermit) allows ++ rebinding of the F1-F12 keys to arbitrary strings. The same is true of ++ Xterm and DECterm windows, etc. Consult the technical documentation ++ for your workstation or emulator. See sample Xterm (Xmodmap) mappings ++ in the [68]Unix C-Kermit Hints and Tips document. ++ ++ The SET KEY command (except in Kermit 95) does not allow a key ++ definition to be (or contain) the NUL (\0) character. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 10. FILE TRANSFER ++ ++ [ [69]Top ] [ [70]Contents ] [ [71]Next ] [ [72]Previous ] ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 is the first release of C-Kermit to use fast (rather than ++ robust and therefore slow) protocol defaults: long packets, sliding ++ windows, control-character unprefixing, and streaming where possible. ++ This makes most transfers (partner willing) dramatically faster "out ++ of the box" but might break some combinations that worked before. If ++ transfers with C-Kermit 7.0 or later fail where transfers worked with ++ earlier C-Kermit versions, try the following (one at a time, in this ++ order): ++ ++ 1. SET PREFIXING ALL: Disables control-character unprefixing. ++ 2. SET STREAMING OFF: Disables streaming. ++ 3. CAUTIOUS: Selects medium but cautious protocol settings. ++ 4. ROBUST: this command reverts to the most conservative protocol ++ settings. ++ ++ Execution of multiple file transfers by C-Kermit from a command file ++ when in remote mode might exhibit long delays between each transfer. ++ To avoid this, just include the command "SET DELAY 0" in your command ++ file before any of the file-transfer commands. ++ ++ File transfer failures can occur for all sorts of reasons, most of ++ them listed in Chapter 10 of [73]Using C-Kermit. The following ++ sections touch on some that aren't. ++ ++ The [74]C-Kermit 7.0 Release Notes document SEND /COMMAND as taking an ++ argument, but it doesn't. Instead of SEND /COMMAND:{some command}, ++ use: ++ ++SEND /COMMAND [ other switches such as /AS-NAME: ] command [ arguments... ] ++ ++ 10.1. Laptops ++ ++ Watch out for laptops and their assorted power-saver features; for ++ example, a built-in modem's "auto timeout delay" hanging up the ++ connection in the middle of a file transfer. Most modems, even if they ++ have this feature, do not have it enabled by default. But if you ++ experience otherwise inexplicable disconnections in the midst of your ++ Kermit sessions, check the modem manual for such things as "idle ++ timeout", "auto timeout", etc, and add the command to disable this ++ feature to Kermit's init string for this modem. ++ ++ 10.2. NFS ++ ++ If uploading a large file to an NFS-mounted disk fails (or is ++ painfully slow), try uploading it to a local disk (e.g. /tmp on Unix) ++ and then copying to the NFS disk later. ++ ++ 10.3. Modems ++ ++ If you are dialing out and find that downloads work but uploads don't, ++ try again with a lower serial-port speed. Case in point: dialing out ++ on a certain PC from Linux at 115200 bps using a USR Courier 56K ++ "V.Everything" external modem and RTS/CTS flow control. Downloads ++ worked flawlessly, uploads stopped dead after the first few packets ++ were sent. The modem lights showed constant retraining (ARQ light ++ blinks slowly), and the CTS light was off 95% of the time, allowing ++ nothing to get through. Reducing the serial port speed to 57600 bps ++ made the problems go away. Evidently the PC in question has a very ++ fast serial port, since dialing the same modem with a different PC at ++ 115200 bps works without incident. ++ ++ 10.4. TCP/IP Connections ++ ++ If you have trouble transferring files over a TCP/IP connection, tell ++ Kermit to SET PARITY SPACE and try again. If that doesn't work, also ++ try a shorter packet length or smaller window size (to compensate for ++ certain well-known broken Telnet servers), and/or SET RELIABLE OFF. ++ ++ 10.5. Multihop Connections ++ ++ If you have a multihop connection, with the interior nodes in CONNECT ++ mode (Kermit, Telnet, Rlogin, or any other), you can expect (a) file ++ transfer to be slower, and (b) the connection to be less transparent ++ (to control characters, perhaps to the 8th bit) than a more direct ++ connection. C-Kermit 7.0 and later have a "-0" (dash-zero) ++ command-line option to make it 100% transparent in cases where it is ++ to be used in the middle. ++ ++ 10.6. Recovery ++ ++ The recovery feature (RESEND command) that was added in version ++ 5A(190) works only for binary-mode transfers. In order for this ++ feature to be useful at all, the default for SET FILE INCOMPLETE was ++ changed from DISCARD to KEEP. Otherwise an interrupted transfer would ++ leave no partial file behind unless you had remembered to change the ++ default. But now you have to pay closer attention to Kermit's messages ++ to know whether a transfer succeeded or failed -- previously, if it ++ failed, the file would not show up on the receiving end at all; in ++ 5A(190) and later, you'll get a partial file which could easily be ++ mistaken for the complete file unless you change the default back to ++ DISCARD or read the screen messages, or keep a transaction log. ++ ++ 10.7. Filename Collisions ++ ++ SET FILE COLLISION BACKUP is the default. This means: ++ ++ * If you send the same file lots of times, there will be many backup ++ files. There is no automatic mechanism within Kermit to delete ++ them, no notion of a "version retention count", etc, but you can ++ use the PURGE command to clean them up. ++ * If a file arrives that has the same name as a directory, the file ++ transfer fails because Kermit will not rename a directory. Send ++ the file with another name, or use SET FILE COLLISION RENAME. ++ * If the directory lacks write permission, the file transfer fails ++ even if you have write access to the file that is being backed up; ++ in that case, switch to SET FILE COLLISION OVERWRITE or APPEND, or ++ send to a different directory. ++ ++ SET FILE COLLISION UPDATE depends on the date/time stamp in the ++ attribute packet. However, this is recorded in local time, not ++ Universal Time (GMT), and there is no indication of time zone. The ++ time is expressed to the precision of 1 second, but some file systems ++ do not record with this precision -- for example, MS-DOS records the ++ file date/time only to the nearest 2 seconds. This might cause update ++ operations to send more files than necessary. ++ ++ (This paragraph does NOT apply to UNIX, where, as of C-Kermit 7.0, ++ C-Kermit pipes incoming mail and print material directly the mail or ++ print program): When C-Kermit is receiving files from another Kermit ++ program that has been given the MAIL or REMOTE PRINT command, C-Kermit ++ follows the current filename collision action. This can be ++ disconcerting if the action was (for example) BACKUP, because the ++ existing file will be renamed, and the new file will be mailed (or ++ printed) and then deleted. Kermit cannot temporarily change to RENAME ++ because the file collision action occurs when the filename packet is ++ received, and the PRINT or MAIL disposition only comes later, in the ++ Attribute packet. ++ ++ Watch out for SET FILE COLLISION RENAME, especially when used in ++ conjunction with recovery. Recall that this option (which is NOT the ++ default) renames the incoming file if a file already exists with the ++ same name (the default is to rename the previously existing file, and ++ store the incoming file with its own name). It is strongly recommended ++ that you do not use SET FILE COLLISION RENAME if you ever intend to ++ use the recovery feature: ++ ++ * When the file is first received by C-Kermit, its name is changed ++ if another file already has the same name. When you RESEND the ++ same file after a failure, C-Kermit will probably try to append ++ the re-sent portion to the wrong file. ++ * Assuming that you get RESEND to work with FILE COLLISION RENAME, ++ C-Kermit, when receiving the remainder of the file during a RESEND ++ operation, will report back the wrong name. Nothing can be done ++ about this because the name is reported back before the receiving ++ Kermit program finds out that it is a recovery operation. ++ ++ Also watch out for DISABLE DELETE, since this implicitly sets FILE ++ COLLISION to RENAME. And note tht DELETE is DISABLEd automatically any ++ time you Kermit is in local mode (i.e. it makes a connection). Also ++ note that for purposes of DISABLE and ENABLE, "set host *" connections ++ do not count as local mode even though, strictly speaking, they are. ++ ++ 10.8. DOS Pathnames ++ ++ When referring to foreign MS-DOS, Windows, Atari ST, OS/2, or other ++ file specifications that contain backslash characters in a C-Kermit ++ command, you might have to double each backslash, for example: ++ ++ C-Kermit>get c:\\directory\\foo.txt ++ ++ This is because backslash is used in C-Kermit commands for introducing ++ special character codes, variables, functions, etc. ++ ++ 10.9. Cancellation ++ ++ If attempting to cancel local-mode file reception at a very early ++ stage (i.e. before data packets are exchanged) with X or Z does not ++ work, use E or Ctrl-C instead, or wait until the first data packets ++ are sent. ++ ++ If you cancel a transfer that is underway using X or Z, and a lot of ++ window slots are in use, it might take a while for the cancellation to ++ take effect, especially if you do this on the receiving end; that's ++ because a lot of packets might already be on their way to you. In that ++ case, just be patient and let Kermit "drain" them. ++ ++ If C-Kermit is sending a file, remote-mode packet-mode breakout (three ++ consecutive Ctrl-C's by default) is not effective until after C-Kermit ++ sends its first packet. If C-Kermit is receiving a file or is in ++ server mode, it is effective right away. In the former case, the SET ++ DELAY value determines the earliest time at which you can break out of ++ packet mode. ++ ++ 10.10. Partner Peculiarities ++ ++ When one or both partners is on an SCO operating system such as OSR5, ++ you might issue the command: ++ ++mapchan -n ++ ++ to disable character-set conversion by the terminal driver. Similarly ++ for AIX: ++ ++setmaps -t NOMAP ++ ++ When using C-Kermit to transfer files with the HP48SX calculator, you ++ must SET FLOW NONE. The HP48SX does not support flow control, and ++ evidently also becomes confused if you attempt to use it. You might ++ also need to use SET SEND PAUSE 100 (or other number). For greater ++ detail about transferring files the the HP-48, see: ++ ++ [75]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/hp48.html ++ ++ Some communication programs have errors in their implementation of ++ Kermit attribute packets. If you get an error message from your ++ communication program like "Attribute error", tell C-Kermit to SET ++ ATTRIBUTES OFF. Better yet, switch to a real Kermit program. ++ ++ Some communication software claims to implement Kermit sliding ++ windows, but does so incorrectly. If sliding window transfers fail, ++ set C-Kermit's window size to the smallest one that works, for ++ example, SET WINDOW 1. ++ ++ For lots more detail about how to cope with defective Kermit partners, ++ see: ++ ++ * [76]Coping with Faulty Kermit Implementations (C-Kermit 7.0 and ++ later). ++ * [77]Coping with Broken Kermit Partners (C-Kermit 8.0 and later). ++ ++ The UNIX version of C-Kermit discards carriage returns when receiving ++ files in text mode. Thus, "bare" carriage returns (sometimes used to ++ achieve overstriking) are lost. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11. SCRIPT PROGRAMMING ++ ++ [ [78]Top ] [ [79]Contents ] [ [80]Previous ] ++ ++ 11.1. Comments Versus the SCRIPT Command ++ ++ Remember that ";" and "#" introduce comments when (a) they are the ++ first character on the line, or (b) they are preceded by at least one ++ blank or tab within a line. Thus constructions like: ++ ++ INPUT 5 ; ++ SCRIPT ~0 #--#--# ++ ++ must be coded using backslash notation to keep the data from being ++ ignored: ++ ++ INPUT 5 \59 ; 59 is the decimal ASCII code for ";" ++ SCRIPT ~0 \35--#--# ; 43 is the decimal ASCII code for "#" ++ ++ or, more simply: ++ ++ INPUT 5 \; ; Just quote the semicolon ++ SCRIPT ~0 \#--#--# ; Just quote the "#" ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.2. Alphabetic Case and the INPUT Command ++ ++ INPUT and MINPUT caseless string comparisons do not work for non-ASCII ++ (international) characters. Workaround: SET INPUT CASE OBSERVE. Even ++ then, the "lexically less than" and "lexically greater than" ++ operations (IF LLT, IF LGT) probably won't work as expected. The same ++ is true for the case-conversion functions \Flower() and \Fupper(). ++ C-Kermit does not know the collating sequence for different character ++ sets and languages. (On the other hand, it might work depending on ++ such items as how Kermit was linked, whether your operating supports ++ "locales", etc) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.3. NUL (0) Characters in C-Kermit Commands ++ ++ You can't include a NUL character (\0) in C-Kermit command text ++ without terminating the character string in which it appears. For ++ example: ++ ++ echo In these brackets [\0] is a NUL ++ ++ will echo "In these brackets [". This applies to ECHO, INPUT, OUTPUT, ++ and all other commands (but you can represent NUL by "\N" in an OUTPUT ++ string). This is because C-language strings are terminated internally ++ by the NUL character, and it allows all of C-Kermit's string ++ comparison and manipulation functions to work in the normal "C" way. ++ ++ To illustrate: ++ ++ INPUT 5 \0 ++ ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++ INPUT 5 ++ ++ and: ++ ++ INPUT 5 ABC\0DEF ++ ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++ INPUT 5 ABC ++ ++ INPUT operations discard and ignore NUL characters that arrive from ++ the communication device, meaning that they do not figure into ++ matching operations (e.g. AB matches AB); they are not deposited ++ in the INPUT buffer (\v(input)); and they are not counted in ++ \v(incount), with two exceptions: ++ ++ 1. An arriving NUL character restarts the INPUT SILENCE timer. ++ 2. An arriving NUL character terminates the INPUT command with the ++ SUCCESS condition if the INPUT command was given an empty search ++ string. In this case \v(incount) is set to 1. ++ ++ Also, the \v(inchar) variable is null (completely empty) if the last ++ INPUT character was NUL. That is, there is no way to tell only by ++ looking at \v(inchar) the difference between a NUL that was INPUT and ++ no INPUT at all. If the INPUT command succeeded but \v(inchar) is ++ empty, then a NUL character was input. Also, \v(incount) will be set ++ to 1. ++ ++ Here's a sample script fragment to read characters, possibly including ++ NUL, from the communication connection and write them to a file: ++ ++ while true { ++ input 1 ; read one byte ++ if fail break ; timed out or connection closed ++ fwrite /char \%c \v(inchar) ; record the byte ++ } ++ ++ This works because when \v(inchar) is NUL, that's equivalent to FWRITE ++ /CHAR having no text argument at all, in which case it writes a NUL ++ character. ++ ++ \v(incount) and \v(inchar) are NOT affected by the CLEAR command. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.4. \ffiles() and \fnextfile() Peculiarities ++ ++ The following script program: ++ ++ for \%i 1 \ffiles(oofa.*) 1 { ++ send \fnextfile() ++ } ++ ++ did not work as expected in C-Kermit 6.0 and earlier but does work in ++ C-Kermit 7.0 and later. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.5. Commands That Have Only Local Effect ++ ++ Certain settings are local to each command level, meaning that ++ subordinate command levels (macros or command files) can change them ++ without affecting their values at higher command levels. When a new ++ command level is invoked, the value is inherited from the previous ++ level. These settings are: ++ ++ CASE ++ COUNT and \v(count) ++ INPUT CASE ++ INPUT TIMEOUT ++ MACRO ERROR ++ QUIET ++ TAKE ERROR ++ ++ This arrangement allows CASE, TIMEOUT, and ERROR settings, which are ++ used to control automatic exit from a command file or macro upon ++ error, to be automatically restored when the command file or macro ++ exits. ++ ++ The COUNT variable follows this rule too, which permits nested SET ++ COUNT / IF COUNT loops, as in this example in which the inner loop ++ counts down from the current COUNT value of the outer loop (try it): ++ ++ DEFINE INNER WHILE COUNT { WRITE SCREEN { Inner:}, SHOW COUNT } ++ SET COUNT 5 ++ WHILE COUNT { WRITE SCREEN Outer:, SHOW COUNT, DO INNER } ++ ++ Keep in mind that an inferior command level cannot manipulate the ++ COUNT value held by a higher level. For example: ++ ++ DEFINE OOFA SHOW COUNT, IF COUNT GOTO LOOP ++ SET COUNT 5 ++ :LOOP ++ OOFA ++ ECHO Done ++ ++ results in an infinite loop; the COUNT value remains at 5 because it ++ is never decremented at the same level at which it was set. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.6. Literal Braces in Function Calls ++ ++ Since braces are used in function calls to indicate grouping, there is ++ no way to pass literal braces to the function itself. Solution: Define ++ a variable containing the string that has braces. Example: ++ ++ define \%a ab{cd ++ echo \fsubstring(\%a) ++ ab{cd ++ ++ If the string is to start with a leading brace and end with a closing ++ brace, then double braces must appear around the string (which itself ++ is enclosed in braces): ++ ++ define \%a {{{foo}}} ++ echo \fsubstring(\%a) ++ {foo} ++ ++ This also works for any other kind of string: ++ ++ define \%a {{ab{cd}} ++ echo \fsubstring(\%a) ++ ab{cd ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.7. Defining Variables on the C-Kermit Command Line ++ ++ To define variables on the C-Kermit command line, use the -C ++ command-line option with one or more DEFINE or ASSIGN commands. Note ++ that the C-Kermit command line must cope with the quoting rules of ++ your shell. Examples: ++ ++ kermit -C "define \\%a foo, define phonenumber 7654321" ++ ++ In this case we follow UNIX quoting rules by doubling the backslash. ++ Once C-Kermit starts, the \%a and \m(phonenumber) variables are ++ defined as indicated and can be used in the normal way. ++ ++ In DOS or Windows or OS/2 the command would be: ++ ++ kermit -C "define \%%a foo, define phonenumber 7654321" ++ ++ Here we need to double the percent sign rather than the backslash ++ because of DOS shell quoting rules. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.8. Per-Character Echo Check with the OUTPUT Command ++ ++ Sometimes the OUTPUT command must be used to send commands or data to ++ a device in "echoplex" mode, meaning that characters must be sent one ++ at a time, and the next character can not be sent until the echo from ++ the previous one has been received. For example, a certain PBX might ++ have this characteristic. Let's say a Kermit script is used to program ++ the PBX. If characters are sent too fast, they can be lost. It would ++ seem that the command: ++ ++ SET OUTPUT PACING milliseconds ++ ++ could be used to take care of this, but the pacing interval is ++ constant and must be set large enough to allow even the slowest echo ++ to finish. If the script is large (an actual example is 14,000 lines ++ long), this can cause it to take hours longer than it needs to. ++ ++ Here is a macro you can use to OUTPUT a string in an Echoplex ++ environment: ++ ++ define XOUTPUT { ++ local \%c \%i ++ set output pacing 0 ++ for \%i 1 \flen(\%*) 1 { ++ asg \%c \fsubstr(\%*,\%i,1) ++ output \%c ++ input 2 \%c ++ } ++ } ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 or later is required. ++ ++ It sends one character at a time and then waits up to 2 seconds for ++ the character to be echoed back, but continues to the next character ++ as soon as the echo appears, so no time is wasted. You can add an IF ++ FAIL clause after the INPUT in case you want to do something special ++ about failure to detect an echo within the timeout period. Obviously ++ you can also change the 2-second limit, and adjust the script in any ++ other desired way. ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.9. Scripted File Transfer ++ ++ Sometimes a user complains that when she makes a connection by hand, ++ logs in, and transfers a file, there are no problems, but when she ++ scripts the the exact same sequence, the file transfer always fails ++ after a few packets. Here's a scenario where this can happen: ++ ++ 1. Upon logging in to the remote computer, it sends a "What Are You?" ++ escape sequence. ++ 2. When you log in interactively, your terminal emulator sends the ++ response. This is invisible to you; you don't know it's happening. ++ 3. When you script the login, and begin a file transfer immediately ++ upon logging in, the host still sends the "What Are You?" ++ sequence. Kermit's INPUT ECHO setting is ON by default, so the ++ escape sequence passes through to the terminal, and the terminal ++ sends its response. But by this time Kermit has already started ++ the file transfer. ++ 4. By default, the local Kermit program examines the keyboard for ++ interruption characters between every packet. The "What Are You" ++ response is sitting in the keyboard buffer. Eventually Kermit will ++ read a character such as "c" that is a valid interruption ++ character, and the file transfer stops with "User cancelled". ++ ++ The right way to handle this situation is to have your look for the ++ "What Are You?" sequence and send the response itself, as described in ++ Using C-Kermit, pp.429-431. Or you can work around it by telling the ++ local Kermit to "set input echo off" and/or "set transfer interruption ++ off". ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 11.10. Other... ++ ++ Escape sequences (or any strings that contain control characters) ++ can't be used as labels, GOTO targets, or SWITCH cases. ++ ++ [ [81]Top ] [ [82]Contents ] [ [83]C-Kermit Home ] [ [84]C-Kermit 8.0 ++ Overview ] [ [85]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Unix Hints and Tips / [86]The Kermit Project / ++ [87]Columbia University / [88]kermit@columbia.edu / 10 April 2004 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 4. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x0 ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x1 ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x2 ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x3 ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x4 ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x5 ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x6 ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x7 ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x8 ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x9 ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x10 ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x11 ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x2 ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x2 ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit2.html ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x5 ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2 ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x3 ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x1 ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x4 ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x2 ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x5 ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x3 ++ 44. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1122.txt ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x6 ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x4 ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x7 ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x5 ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x10 ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x8 ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x6 ++ 59. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2217.txt ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x9 ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x7 ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x10 ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x8 ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x11 ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x9 ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/hp48.html ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.22 ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x15 ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#x10 ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#top ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html#contents ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80.html ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 88. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckermod.ini +@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ ++; File CKERMOD.INI, Sample C-Kermit 7.0 customization file. ++; ++; This file, which is ONLY A SAMPLE, should be called: ++; ++; .mykermrc (UNIX, OS-9, Aegis, BeBox, Plan 9) ++; CKERMOD.INI (VMS, OpenVMS, AOS/VS, OS/2, Amiga, Atari ST) ++; ckermod.ini (Stratus VOS) ++; ++; This file is executed automatically by the standard C-Kermit initialization ++; file, CKERMIT.INI (or .kermrc). This file is not executed by C-Kermit itself ++; unless the initialization file is not found. ++; ++; MODify this file to suit your needs and preferences, and install it in your ++; home directory. Or replace it entirely with a new file. ++; ++; The design of this sample customization file lets you fill in a section for ++; each different operating system where you run C-Kermit. ++; ++; In UNIX, if you give this file execute permission and make sure the top ++; line indicates the full path of the C-Kermit 7.0-or-later executable, you ++; can execute this file directly, as if it was a shell script, except it is ++; interpreted by Kermit rather than the shell. This lets you have as many ++; different startup files as you like, each suited to a particular purpose. ++; ++; Authors: Christine Gianone, Frank da Cruz, Jeffrey Altman, ++; The Kermit Project, Columbia University. ++; Creation: 23 November 1992 for C-Kermit 5A(188). ++; Modified: 30 June 1993 for edit 189. ++; 04 October 1994 for edit 190. ++; 17 April 1995 for edit 191. ++; 6 September 1996 for version 6.0, edit 192. ++; 1 January 2000 for version 7.0, edit 196. ++; 14 October 2001 for version 8.0, edit 200. ++ ++ECHO ++ECHO Executing SAMPLE C-Kermit customization file \v(cmdfile) for \v(system)... ++ECHO { Please edit this file to reflect your needs and preferences.} ++ECHO ++; ++; ... and then remove the ECHO commands above. ++ ++COMMENT - Settings that apply to all the systems I use: ++; ++set delay 1 ; I escape back quickly ++set dial display on ; I like to watch C-Kermit dial ++ ++; Dialing locale and method ++; ++; SET DIAL COUNTRY-CODE 1 ; Uncomment and replace with yours ++; SET DIAL AREA-CODE 000 ; Uncomment and replace with yours ++; SET DIAL LD-PREFIX 1 ; Uncomment and replace with yours ++; SET DIAL INTL-PREFIX 011 ; Uncomment and replace with yours ++; SET DIAL METHOD TONE ; Uncomment and replace with PULSE if necessary ++; SET DIAL DIRECTORY ... ... ; List dialing directory files here ++ ++if < \v(version) 600192 - ++ stop 1 \v(cmdfile): C-Kermit 6.0.192 or later required. ++ ++set take error on ; Make errors fatal temporarily ++check if ; Do we have an IF command? ++set take error off ; Yes we do, back to normal ++ ++; The ON_EXIT macro is executed automatically when C-Kermit exits. ++; Define as desired. ++; ++define ON_EXIT echo Returning you to \v(system) now. ++ ++; System-independent quick dialing macro. Depends on having the ++; macros MYMODEM, MYPORT, and (optionally) MYSPEED defined in the ++; system-dependent sections below. ++; ++define MYDIAL { ++ if not defined MYMODEM end 1 {\%0: Modem type not defined.} ++ set modem type \m(MYMODEM) ++ if fail end 1 {\%0: \m(MYMODEM): Unsupported modem type.} ++ if not defined MYPORT end 1 {\%0: Communication port not defined.} ++ set port \m(MYPORT) ++ if fail end 1 {\%0: SET PORT \m(MYPORT) failed.} ++ if defined MYFLOW set flow \m(MYFLOW) ++ if fail end 1 {\%0: SET FLOW \m(MYFLOW) failed.} ++ if defined MYSPEED set speed \m(MYSPEED) ++ if fail end 1 {\%0: SET SPEED \m(MYSPEED) failed.} ++ dial \%1\%2\%3\%4\%5\%6\%7\%8\%9 ++ end \v(status) ++} ++ ++forward \v(system) ; Go execute system-dependent commands ++ ++:UNIX ; UNIX, all versions... ++define MYPORT /dev/cua ; My dialing environment ++define MYMODEM usr ; Replace these by what you actually have ++define MYSPEED 57600 ++; ++; If you want all your downloads to go to the same directory, no matter ++; what your current directory is, uncomment and edit the following command: ++; ++; set file download-directory ~/download ; Download directory for UNIX ++ ++; Put other UNIX-specific commands here... ++end ; End of UNIX section ++ ++:VMS ; VMS and OpenVMS ++define MYPORT TXA0: ; My dialing environment ++define MYMODEM usr ; Replace these by what you actually have ++define MYSPEED 57600 ++; set file download-directory [\$(USER).DOWNLOAD] ; Download directory for VMS ++; Put other VMS-specific commands here... ++end ; End of VMS section ++ ++:WIN32 ; Windows and OS/2 customizations... ++:OS/2 ++define MYPORT COM1 ; My dialing environment ++define MYMODEM usr ; Replace these by what you actually have ++define MYSPEED 57600 ++set command byte 8 ; Use 8 bits between Kermit and console ++set xfer char latin1 ; Use Latin-1 for text file transfer ++set term char latin1 ; And use Latin-1 during CONNECT mode ++; set file download-directory C:\DOWNLOADS ++end ++ ++:OS9/68K ; OS-9/68000 ++define MYPORT /t3 ; My dialing environment ++define MYMODEM usr ; Replace these by what you actually have ++define MYSPEED 9600 ++; set file download-directory ~/downloads ++end ; End of OS-9 section ++ ++:AOS/VS ; Data General AOS/VS ++define MYPORT @con3 ; My dialing environment ++define MYMODEM usr ; Replace these by what you actually have ++define MYSPEED 9600 ++; set file download-directory \v(home)DOWNLOADS ++end ++ ++; And so on, you get the idea... ++; Fill in the sections that apply to you. ++ ++:Stratus_VOS ; Stratus VOS ++:Amiga ; Commodore Amiga ++:Atari_ST ; Atari ST ++:Macintosh ; Apple Macintosh ++:unknown ; Others ++ ++; (End of CKERMOD.INI) +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckermit80.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,10349 @@ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Update Notes ++ ++ [ [1]Contents ] [ [2]C-Kermit ] [ [3]Kermit Home ] ++ ++ Second Supplement to Using C-Kermit, Second Edition ++ ++For C-Kermit 8.0 ++ ++ As of C-Kermit version: 8.0.211 ++ Date of C-Kermit release: 10 April 2003 ++ This file last updated: Sat Apr 10 16:36:11 2004 ++ ++ * IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, note ++ that it is a plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the ++ original (and possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ [4]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ * If you are reading the HTML version of this file with a GUI Web ++ browser, the features added since C-Kermit 8.0.201 are shown in ++ red if your browser and monitor permit. Features that were new to ++ versions 8.0.200 and 201 are in black. ++ ++Authors: Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone ++Address: The Kermit Project ++ Columbia University ++ 612 West 115th Street ++ New York NY 10025-7799 ++ USA ++Fax: +1 (212) 662-6442 ++E-Mail: [5]kermit-support@columbia.edu ++Web: [6]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++Or: [7]http://www.kermit-project.org/ ++Or: [8]http://www.columbia.nyc.ny.us/kermit/ ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ NOTICES ++ ++ This document: ++ Copyright © 1997, 2002, Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone. ++ All rights reserved. ++ ++ Kermit 95: ++ Copyright © 1995, 2002, Trustees of Columbia University in the ++ City of New York. All rights reserved. ++ ++ C-Kermit: ++ Copyright © 1985, 2002, ++ Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York. All ++ rights reserved. See the C-Kermit [9]COPYING.TXT file or the ++ copyright text in the [10]ckcmai.c module for disclaimer and ++ permissions. ++ ++ When Kerberos(TM) and/or SRP(TM) (Secure Remote Password) and/or ++ SSL/TLS protocol are included: ++ Portions Copyright © 1990, Massachusetts Institute of ++ Technology. ++ Portions Copyright © 1991, 1993 Regents of the University of ++ California. ++ Portions Copyright © 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 by AT&T. ++ Portions Copyright © 1997, Stanford University. ++ Portions Copyright © 1995-1997, Eric Young ++ . ++ ++ For the full text of the third-party copyright notices, see ++ [11]Appendix V. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ WHAT IS IN THIS FILE ++ ++ This file lists changes made to C-Kermit since version 7.0 was ++ released in January 2000. Use this file as a supplement to: ++ ++ * The second edition of [12]Using C-Kermit; and: ++ * The [13]C-Kermit 7.0 Update Notes. Also available in plain-text ++ form as [14]ckermit70.txt. ++ ++ until the third edition of Using C-Kermit is published. We apologize ++ for the scattered documentation and will consolidate it when we are ++ able. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ADDITIONAL FILES Several other files accompany this new Kermit ++ release: ++ ++ [15]ckututor.html ++ C-Kermit Tutorial (for Unix). Also distributed in Nroff form as ++ [16]ckuker.nr, the Unix C-Kermit manual page. ++ ++ [17]security.htm ++ Discussion of Kermit's new authentication and encryption ++ features, updated for C-Kermit 8.0. ++ ++ [18]telnet.htm ++ Detailed documentation of Kermit's Telnet client, updated for ++ C-Kermit 8.0. ++ ++ [19]ftpscripts.html ++ Tutorial: Writing FTP automation scripts ++ ++ [20]ckcbwr.html ++ Platform-independent C-Kermit hints and tips. Also distributed ++ in plain text form as [21]ckcbwr.txt ++ ++ [22]ckubwr.html ++ Unix-specific C-Kermit hints and tips. Also distributed in ++ plain text form as [23]ckubwr.txt. ++ ++ [24]ckvbwr.html ++ VMS-specific C-Kermit hints and tips. Also distributed in plain ++ text form as [25]ckvbwr.txt. ++ ++ [26]ckuins.html ++ Unix C-Kermit installation instructions. Also distributed in ++ plain text form as [27]ckuins.txt. ++ ++ [28]ckvins.html ++ VMS C-Kermit installation instructions. Also distributed in ++ plain text form as [29]ckvins.txt. ++ ++ [30]ckccfg.html ++ Compile-time configuration options. Also distributed in plain ++ text form as [31]ckccfg.txt. ++ ++ [32]ckcplm.html ++ C-Kermit Program Logic Manual. Also distributed in plain text ++ form as [33]ckcplm.txt. ++ ++ [34]iksd.html ++ Internet Kermit Service Aministrators Guide for Unix. ++ ++ [35]skermit.html ++ C-Kermit as an SSH Subsystem (SFTP server replacement). ++ ++ [ [36]Top ] [ [37]C-Kermit ] [ [38]Kermit Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++CONTENTS ++ ++ [39]0. WHAT'S NEW ++ [40]1. FIXES SINCE VERSION 7.0.196 ++ [41]2. SSH AND HTTP ++ [42]2.1. SSH Connections ++ [43]2.2. HTTP Connections ++ [44]2.2.1. HTTP Command Switches ++ [45]2.2.2. HTTP Action Commands ++ [46]2.2.3. HTTP Headers ++ [47]2.2.4. Secure HTTP Connections ++ [48]2.2.5. HTTP Variables ++ [49]2.2.6. The HTTP Command-Line Personality ++ [50]3. THE BUILT-IN FTP CLIENT ++ [51]3.1. Making and Managing FTP Connections ++ [52]3.1.1. Kermit Command-Line Options for FTP ++ [53]3.1.2. The FTP Command-Line Personality ++ [54]3.1.3. The FTP URL Interpreter ++ [55]3.1.4. Interactive FTP Session Establishment ++ [56]3.2. Making Secure FTP Connections ++ [57]3.3. Setting FTP Preferences ++ [58]3.4. Managing Directories and Files ++ [59]3.5. Uploading Files With FTP ++ [60]3.5.1. FTP PUT Switches ++ [61]3.5.2. Update Mode ++ [62]3.5.3. Recovery ++ [63]3.6. Downloading Files With FTP ++ [64]3.6.1. FTP GET Switches ++ [65]3.6.2. Filename Collisions ++ [66]3.6.3. Recovery ++ [67]3.7. Translating Character Sets ++ [68]3.7.1. Character Sets and Uploading ++ [69]3.7.2. Character Sets and Downloading ++ [70]3.8. FTP Command Shortcuts ++ [71]3.9. Dual Sessions ++ [72]3.10. Automating FTP Sessions ++ [73]3.10.1. FTP-Specific Variables and Functions ++ [74]3.10.2. Examples ++ [75]3.10.3. Automating Secure FTP Connections ++ [76]3.11. Advanced FTP Protocol Features [77]4. FILE SCANNING ++ [78]5. FILE AND DIRECTORY NAMES CONTAINING SPACES ++ [79]6. OTHER COMMAND PARSING IMPROVEMENTS ++ [80]6.1. Grouping Macro Arguments ++ [81]6.2. Directory and File Name Completion ++ [82]6.3. Passing Arguments to Command Files ++ [83]6.4. More-Prompting ++ [84]6.5. Commas in Macro Definitions ++ [85]6.6. Arrow Keys ++ [86]7. NEW COMMANDS AND SWITCHES ++ [87]8. SCRIPTING IMPROVEMENTS ++ [88]8.1. Performance and Debugging ++ [89]8.2. Using Macros as Numeric Variables ++ [90]8.3. New IF Conditions ++ [91]8.4. The ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND and ON_CD Macros ++ [92]8.5. The SHOW MACRO Command ++ [93]8.6. Arrays ++ [94]8.7. New or Improved Built-in Variables and Functions ++ [95]8.8. The RETURN and END Commands ++ [96]8.9. UNDEFINing Groups of Variables ++ [97]8.10. The INPUT and MINPUT Commands ++ [98]8.11. Learned Scripts ++ [99]8.12. Pattern Matching ++ [100]8.13. Dates and Times ++ [101]8.14. Trapping Keyboard Interruption ++ [102]9. S-EXPRESSIONS ++ [103]9.1. What is an S-Expression? ++ [104]9.2. Integer and Floating-Point-Arithmetic ++ [105]9.3. How to Use S-Expressions ++ [106]9.4. Summary of Built-in Constants and Operators ++ [107]9.5. Variables ++ [108]9.6. Assignments and Scope ++ [109]9.7. Conditional Expressions ++ [110]9.8. Extensibility ++ [111]9.9. Examples ++ [112]9.10. Differences from Algebraic Notation ++ [113]9.11.Differences from Lisp ++ [114]10. FILE TRANSFER ++ [115]11. MODEMS AND DIALING ++ [116]12. TERMINAL CONNECTION ++ [117]13. CHARACTER SETS ++ [118]14. DIALOUT FROM TELNET TERMINAL SERVERS ++ [119]15. COPING WITH BROKEN KERMIT PARTNERS ++ [120]16. NEW COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS ++ [121]17. LOGS ++ ++ [ [122]Top ] [ [123]C-Kermit ] [ [124]Kermit Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++0. WHAT'S NEW ++ ++ The Initialization and Customization Files ++ C-Kermit 8.0 now supports specification of the initialization ++ file name (path) in an environment variable, CKERMIT_INI. It ++ also relies far less than before on the initialization for ++ functioning. See [125]Section 5 of the Unix C-Kermit ++ [126]installation instructions for details. As of version ++ 8.0.201, C-Kermit also executes your customization file (if you ++ have one) even if the initialization file was not found. ++ Previously, the customization file was executed by a TAKE ++ command in the initialization file (and it still is, if an ++ initialization is found). ++ ++ Incompatible Changes ++ As always, we do our best to avoid changes that break existing ++ scripts. However, C-Kermit 8.0 does include a rather pervasive ++ syntax change that might alter the behavior of scripts that ++ depend on the previous behavior. As described in [127]Section ++ 5, C-Kermit now accepts doublequotes in most contexts where you ++ previously had to use braces to group multiple words into a ++ single field, or to force inclusion of leading or trailing ++ blanks. Most noticeably, in C-Kermit 7.0 and earlier: ++ ++ echo {this is a string} ++ ++ would print: ++ ++ this is a string ++ ++ whereas: ++ ++ echo "this is a string" ++ ++ printed: ++ ++ "this is a string" ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, both print: ++ ++ this is a string ++ ++ To force the doublequotes to be treated as part of the string, ++ use either of the following forms: ++ ++ echo {"this is a string"} ++ echo ""this is a string"" ++ ++ Similarly, to force braces to be treated as part of the string: ++ ++ echo "{this is a string}" ++ echo {{this is a string}} ++ ++ Other incompatibilities: ++ ++ 1. Using the SET HOST command to make HTTP connections is no ++ longer supported. Instead, use the new HTTP OPEN command, ++ described in [128]Section 2.2. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.1 Alpha.01 (8 December 2000) ++ ++ Its major new features are those listed in the [129]Table of ++ Contents: the FTP client, file scanning, command parsing and ++ scripting improvements, S-Expressions, and support for the ++ Telnet Com Port Option, plus wider availability of the ++ Kerberos, SSL/TLS, and SRP security options for secure Internet ++ connections. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.1.199 Alpha.02 (4 January 2001) ++ ++ + C-Kermit now accepts [130]FTP, TELNET, and IKSD URLs as its ++ first command-line argument. ++ + Character-set translation added to the FTP client for ++ [131]filenames. ++ + Optional [132]setting of date of incoming files by FTP [M]GET ++ from the server date. ++ + [133]FTP CHECK filename added to let FTP client check the ++ existence of a file on the server. ++ + [134]FTP GET /NAMELIST:filename added to get list of server ++ filenames into a local file. ++ + [135]FTP [M]PUT /SERVER-RENAME:template added to make server ++ rename a file as indicated by the template after it has ++ arrived completely. ++ + FTP [M]GET /SERVER-RENAME:template added to make server ++ rename a file as indicated by the template after it has been ++ sent completely. ++ + FTP [136]VDIRECTORY added for getting verbose directory ++ listings from TOPS-20. ++ + [137]FTP TYPE TENEX added for transferring 8-bit binary files ++ with PDP-10s. ++ + Added [138]automatic text/binary mode switching for FTP ++ [M]GET, based on filename patterns (e.g. *.zip, *.gz, *.exe ++ are binary; *.txt, *.c are text). ++ + [139]SET SEND I-PACKETS OFF added for coping with Kermit ++ servers that do not support I packets. ++ + A new option was added to [140]\fword() and \fsplit() for ++ parsing comma-separated lists that might contain empty ++ elements. ++ + Bug fixes including: ++ o {} or "" could not be used as expected to represent the ++ empty string. ++ o ,- on a line by itself in a macro definition caused ++ subsequent statements to be skipped. ++ o FTP [M]GET didn't work right if path segments were ++ included in the filespec. ++ o FTP MGET, if interrupted, did not clear its file list. ++ o Various problems with FTP PUT /AS-NAME that nobody ++ noticed. ++ o Some FTP messages and displays interfered with each ++ other. ++ o Parsing of YESTERDAY, TODAY, and TOMORROW in date-time ++ fields was broken. ++ o Automatic old-to-new dialing directory format conversion ++ was broken on VMS. ++ o Various source-code portability problems fixed. ++ + Improvement of various HELP and SHOW messages. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.1.199 Alpha.04 (1 April 2001) ++ ++ + Big changes: ++ o Changed default modem type from NONE to GENERIC. ++ o Generic dialing now sends no init string at all. ++ o Changed default terminal bytesize from 7 to 8. ++ + New features: ++ o SET SESSION-LOG TIMESTAMPED-TEXT for timestamped session ++ log. ++ + New modem types: ++ o Conexant modem family ++ o Lucent VENUS chipset ++ o PCTel V.90 chipset ++ o Zoom V.90 ++ o Zoom V.92 ++ + FTP client: ++ o FTP OPEN /PASSIVE and /ACTIVE switches added. ++ o Now works with servers that that don't include path in ++ NLST response. ++ o Fixed SEND /RECURSIVE not to follow symlinks (UNIX). ++ o SET FTP VERBOSE-MODE default is now OFF instead of ON. ++ + Kermit protocol: ++ o Fixed what I hope is the last "Receive window full" ++ error. ++ o SET PREFIXING or SET CONTROL PREFIX now automatically ++ sets CLEARCHANNEL OFF. ++ o Fixed incorrect report of number of files transferred at ++ end of transfer. ++ o Fixed SEND /RECURSIVE not to follow symlinks (UNIX). ++ + UNIX: ++ o HTTP and shadow passwords enabled for SCO 5.0.6. ++ o Even with SET FILENAMES CONVERTED, spaces were still ++ accepted in incoming filenames; now they are converted ++ to underscores. ++ o Added support for compile-time mktemp()/mkstemp() ++ selection. ++ + VMS: ++ o Session-log format for scripted sessions fixed. ++ + Scripting: ++ o Fixed \frdir() not to follow symlinks (UNIX). ++ o Fixed \fday() not to dump core for dates prior to 17 Mar ++ 1858. ++ + General: ++ o "Closing blah..." message upon exit could not be ++ surpressed. ++ o Added /PAGE and /NOPAGE to DELETE switches. ++ o Added GO response for DELETE /ASK (delete all the rest ++ without asking). ++ o Added GO response to "more?" prompt (for multi-page ++ screen output). ++ o Updated HELP texts. ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.1.199 Beta.01 (10 May 2001) ++ ++ + FTP client verbosity adjustments. ++ + Bug with generic modem dialing pausing several secs fixed. ++ + SET HOST /USER:, SET LOGIN USERID, etc, fixed when given no ++ user ID. ++ + A couple \v(dm_blah) dial modifier variables added. ++ + "--version" command-line switch added. ++ + Fixed NetBSD serial-port DTR handling. ++ + Lots of syntax cleanups for Flexelint and gcc -Wall. ++ + Fixed modem-type aliases to not take precedence over real ++ names. ++ + Fixed funny treatment of doublequotes by ECHO command. ++ + Enabled SET SESSION-LOG for VMS and other non-UNIX platorms. ++ + Fixed changing direction in command history buffer. ++ + Fixed handling of IKSD URLs. ++ + Made sure DELETE prints a message if it got any errors. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.200 Beta.02 (28 June 2001) ++ ++ + Major version number increased from 7 to 8. ++ + [141]SSH command. ++ + More-consistent Kermit protocol defaults. ++ + CONNECT idle timeout and action selection. ++ + CONNECT status variable. ++ + A way to allocate more space for filename lists. ++ + Pseudoterminal handler fixed for late-model Linuxes. ++ + Command-line option -dd for timestamped debug log. ++ + Download directory now works for external protocols too. ++ + GREP /COUNT:variable. ++ + SET ATTRIBUTE RECORD-FORMAT { OFF, ON }. ++ + Bug fixes. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.200 Beta.03 (9 Sep 2001) ++ ++ + [142]HTTP 1.1 connections and scripting ++ + [143]ON_CTRLC macro for trapping Ctrl-C in scripts ++ + [144]Date-time parsing improvements, timezones, comparison, ++ arithmetic ++ + [145]Pattern-matching improvements ++ + FTP improvements ++ + SET EXIT HANGUP { ON, OFF } ++ + SET FILE EOF { CTRL-Z, LENGTH } ++ + ASK[Q] /TIMEOUT ++ + Bug fixes ++ + New platforms ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.200 Beta.04 (16 Nov 2001) ++ ++ + [146]New Unix man page ++ + [147]New Unix installation instructions ++ + SET TELOPT policies are now enforced on non-Telnet ports if ++ the server begins Telnet negotiations. ++ + SET TERMINAL IDLE-ACTION { TELNET-NOP, TELNET-AYT }. ++ + UUCP lockfile creation race condition fixed. ++ + Dialout, modem signals, hangup, hardware flow control, etc, ++ tested extensively on many platforms, numerous problems ++ fixed. ++ + Improved hints when dialing fails. ++ + SET STOP-BITS 2 can now be given without SET FLOW HARDWARE. ++ + Major improvements in RFC 2217 Telnet Com-Port Control. ++ + Improved ability to REDIAL a modem server port. ++ + kermit -h now shows the command name in the usage usage ++ string. ++ + kermit -h now shows ALL command-line options. ++ + kermit -s blah, where blah is a symlink, now works. ++ + --noperms command-line option = SET ATTRIBUTE PERMISSIONS ++ OFF. ++ + HTTP and HTTPS URLs now supported on the command line. ++ + An http command-line personality is now available. ++ + Initialization file streamlined to load faster, anachronisms ++ removed. ++ + Updated NEWS, INTRO, HELP text, SHOW commands. In particular, ++ see SHOW COMM, HELP SET LINE, HELP WAIT. ++ + Date/time arithmetic routines converted from floating-point ++ to integer arithmetic (internally) for greater accuracy and ++ portability. ++ + Quoted strings containing commas no longer break macro ++ execution. ++ + Dynamic Kermit file-transfer timeouts are now much more ++ aggressive. ++ + New "hot keys" to turn debug.log on/off during file transfer. ++ + Improved hints when file transfer fails. ++ + FTP CD orientation messages are now printed. ++ + -R now accepted on the FTP command line to request Recursion. ++ + -m allows Active or Passive mode to be chosen on the FTP ++ command line. ++ + -dd on the FTP command line creates a timestamped debug.log. ++ + FTP command-line security options filled in. ++ + Improved automatic text/binary mode switching for MGET. ++ + Removed spurious error messages that sometimes occur during ++ MGET. ++ + DIRECTORY, GREP, TYPE, HEAD, and TAIL now have a /OUTPUT:file ++ option. ++ + TYPE /NUMBER adds line numbers. ++ + CAT = TYPE /NOPAGE; MORE = TYPE /PAGE. ++ + GETOK ?-help fixed. ++ + \v(timestamp) (= "\v(ndate) \v(time)") ++ + \v(hour) (hour of the day, 0-23) ++ + \funix2dospath() converts a UNIX path (/) to a DOS one (\). ++ + \fdos2unixpath() converts a DOS (Windows, OS/2) path to a ++ UNIX one. ++ + \fkeywordval() parses name=value pair, allows macro keyword ++ parameters. ++ + We now make every attempt to not write passwords to the ++ debug.log. ++ + New Certficate Authority certificates file, includes the ++ Kermit Project at Columbia University so you can access our ++ IKSD securely. ++ + Secure targets improved and better documented in Unix ++ makefile. ++ + All Linux (libc and glibc) builds consolidated under "make ++ linux". ++ + HP-UX makefile targets now have consistent names. ++ + New aix50 and aix51 targets added. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.200 Final (12 Dec 2001) ++ ++ + Remote/local-mode confusion on some platforms introduced in ++ Beta.04, fixed. ++ + Many of the makefile targets adjusted, new ones added. ++ + New "make install" target should please most people. ++ + New command: SHOW IKSD. ++ + FTP over TLS. ++ + Last-minute touchups to text messages, HELP text, etc. ++ + Enable modem-signal reading for SCO OSR5 and Unixware 7. ++ + Special superfast TRANSMIT /BINARY /NOECHO /NOWAIT mode ++ added. ++ + Fixed PBX dialing in unmarked-area-code case. ++ + Improved SHOW COMMUNICATIONS tells lockfile directory, ++ typical dialout device name. ++ + Some FTP OPEN command parsing problems fixed. ++ + Some errors in date arithmetic fixed. ++ + New command: SET TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD { ..., ERROR { STOP, ++ CONTINUE } } ++ + New command: HELP FIREWALL. ++ + SET MODEM HANGUP-METHOD DTR added as synomym for RS232-SIGNAL ++ + Support for secure URL protocols added: telnets:, ftps:, ++ https:. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.201 (8 Feb 2002) ++ ++ + Installability as an [148]SSH v2 Subsystem. ++ + [149]SET LOCUS command. ++ + [150]L-versions of CD, DIR, DELETE, MKDIR, etc, to force ++ local execution. ++ + [151]USER and ACCOUNT added as synonyms for FTP USER and FTP ++ ACCOUNT. ++ + [152]SHOW VARIABLES now accepts a list of variables. ++ + Rudimentary support for [153]Caller ID when receiving phone ++ calls. ++ + Up/Down [154]Arrow-key navigation of command history buffer. ++ + [155]Automatic execution of customization file if init file ++ is missing. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0.206 Beta.01 (11 Oct 2002) ++ ++ New commands: ++ ++ o ORIENTATION lists location-related variables and their ++ values. ++ o KCD changes to special directories by their symbolic ++ names ("kcd ?" for a list). ++ o SET CD HOME path to specify home directory for CD and ++ KCD commands. ++ o CONTINUE given at top level is equivalent to END -- ++ handy when PROMPT'ed out of a script, to continue the ++ script. ++ ++ New switches or operands for existing commands: ++ ++ o GETOK /TIMEOUT ++ o ASK, ASKQ, GETOK /QUIET (suppresses error message on ++ timeout) ++ o COPY /APPEND now allows concatenating multiple source ++ files into one dest file. ++ o SET TCP { HTTP-PROXY, SOCKS-SERVER } /USER, /PASSWORD. ++ o DIRECTORY command now accepts multiple filespecs, e.g. ++ "dir a b c". ++ ++ SET QUIET ON now also applies to: ++ ++ o SET HOST connection progress messages. ++ o "Press the X or E key to cancel" file-transfer message. ++ o REMOTE CD response. ++ o REMOTE LOGIN response. ++ ++ Improvements and new features: ++ ++ o Numerous FTP client fixes and new features, listed ++ below. ++ o C-Kermit, when in remote mode at the end of a file ++ transfer, now prints a one-line "where" message. Control ++ with SET TRANSFER REPORT. ++ o Unix makefile "install" target now creates an UNINSTALL ++ script. ++ o Improved operation and performance on RFC 2217 Telnet ++ connections. ++ o Improved CONNECT (interactive terminal connection) ++ performance. ++ o HELP text updated for many commands. ++ ++ New or fixed makefile targets: ++ ++ o Solaris 9 (several variations) ++ o Concurrent PowerMAX ++ o Mac OS X 10.2 ++ o FreeBSD 1.0 ++ o FreeBSD 4.6, 5.0 ++ o AIX 5.2, 5.3 ++ ++ Bugs fixed (general): ++ ++ o Failure to run in VMS Batch fixed. ++ o LDIRECTORY fixed to run Kermit's built-in DIRECTORY ++ command rather than an external one. ++ o Fixed Solaris and other SVORPOSIX builds to find out ++ their full hostnames rather than just the "uname -n" ++ name. ++ o Fixed some problems matching strings that start with ++ ".". ++ o Fixed some problems matching pattern that contain ++ {a,b,c} lists. ++ o Fixed erroneous reporting of text-mode reception as ++ binary when sender did not report the file size ++ (cosmetic only). ++ o Many problems with SWITCH statements fixed. ++ o Fixed SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY /DOTFILES to work for server ++ too. ++ o Fixed DELETE to print an error message if the file was ++ not found. ++ o Fixed SET CONTROL UNPREFIX ALL and SET PREFIXING NONE to ++ do the same thing. ++ o Fixed bugs executing macros from within the ON_EXIT ++ macro. ++ o \fday() and \fnday() fixed for dates prior to 17 Nov ++ 1858. ++ o Serial speed-changing bug in Linux fixed. ++ o "Unbalanced braces" script parsing errors when using ++ \{number} fixed. ++ o "if defined \v(name)" fixed to behave as described in ++ the book. ++ o Fixed Problems caused by LOCAL variables whose names are ++ left substrings of macro names. ++ o The INPUT command was fixed to honor the PARITY setting. ++ o Fixed bug with COPY to existing file that is longer than ++ source file. ++ o REINPUT command failed to strip braces/quotes around its ++ target string. ++ o Network directory lookups didn't work for SSH ++ connections. ++ o REMOTE SET { FILE, TRANSFER } CHARACTER-SET fixed. ++ o Closed some holes whereby an incompletely received file ++ was not deleted when SET FILE INCOMPLETE is DISCARD, ++ e.g. when the Kermit is hung up upon. ++ o SET XFER CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT fixed to do the same ++ as SET XFER TRANSLATION OFF. ++ o SET HOST PTY (e.g. SSH) connection fixed to pass along ++ window-size changes. ++ o C-Kermit search path for TAKE files was accidentally ++ disabled. ++ ++ FTP client bugs fixed: ++ ++ o Character set translation was broken on little-endian ++ (e.g. PC) architectures. ++ o FTP PUT /SERVER-RENAME:, /RENAME-TO:, /MOVE-TO: switches ++ were sticky. ++ o Make SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL apply to FTP. ++ o Make SET FILE INCOMPLETE { KEEP, DISCARD } apply to FTP. ++ o FTP MGET /UPDATE handled equal times incorrectly. ++ o FTP MGET /RECOVER fixed to ignore file dates, use only ++ size. ++ o FTP MGET /RECOVER sometimes downloaded files it didn't ++ need to. ++ o FTP downloads with TRANSFER DISPLAY BRIEF could give ++ misleading error messages. ++ o FTP MGET temp file not deleted if FTP DEBUG set to OFF ++ after it was ON. ++ o LOCUS not switched back when FTP connection is lost. ++ o Set incoming file date even if it was not completely ++ received. ++ o FTP MGET sent SIZE and MDTM commands even when it didn't ++ have to. ++ o FTP MGET sent SIZE and MDTM commands even when it knew ++ they wouldn't work. ++ o FTP MGET failed if no files were selected for download. ++ o FTP MGET a* b* c* would fail to get any c*'s if no b*'s ++ existed. ++ o Big problems canceling MGET with Ctrl-C. ++ o Some extraneous LOCUS dialogs squelched. ++ o Some inconsistencies in SET FTP FILENAMES AUTO fixed. ++ o Fixed file-descriptor pileup after multiple MGETs when ++ using mkstemp(). ++ o Fixed "mget foo", where foo is a directory name. ++ ++ FTP improvements: ++ ++ o New [156]FTP protocol features added (FEAT, MLSD). ++ o FTP MGET /RECURSIVE now works as expected if server ++ supports MLSD. ++ o FTP MGET /DATES-DIFFER to download if local and remote ++ file dates differ. ++ o FTP DATES default changed to ON. ++ o FTP MPUT, MGET /EXCEPT now allows up to 64 patterns (up ++ from 8). ++ o Top-level SITE and PASSIVE commands added for ++ convenience. ++ o MGET /COLLISION:APPEND /AS-NAME:newfile *.* puts all ++ remote files into one local file. ++ o SET FTP SERVER-TIME-OFFSET for when server has wrong ++ timezone set. ++ o Allow for alternative server interpretations of [M]MPUT ++ /UNIQUE. ++ o SET FTP ANONOMOUS-PASSWORD lets you specify the default ++ anonymous password. ++ o Allow "GET /RECURSIVE path/file" to force local ++ subdirectory creation. ++ o SET FTP DISPLAY is like SET TRANSFER DISPLAY but applies ++ only to FTP. ++ o FTP { ENABLE, DISABLE } new-protocol-feature-name. ++ o FTP MGET /NODOTFILES. ++ o Debug log now records FTP commands and responses in ++ grep-able format. ++ ++ [ [157]Top ] [ [158]Contents ] [ [159]C-Kermit ] [ [160]Kermit Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++1. FIXES SINCE VERSION 7.0.196 First, the changes from 7.0.196 to 7.0.197... ++Source and makefile tweaks to get successful builds on platforms that were not ++available in time for the 7.0 release: ++ ++ * 4.2BSD ++ * 4.3BSD ++ * AIX 4.3 ++ * AT&T 3B2 and 3B20 ++ * BeOS 4.5 ++ * CLIX ++ * Interactive UNIX System V/386 R3.2 V4.1.1 ++ * OS-9/68000 ++ * OSF/1 1.3. ++ * PS/2 AIX 1.2.1 ++ * SCO OSR5.0.x ++ * SCO Xenix 2.3.4 ++ * SINIX 5.41/Intel ++ * Stratus FTX ++ * Stratus VOS ++ * SunOS 4.1 with X.25 ++ * Ultrix 4.2 ++ * Unixware 2.0 ++ ++ There were no functional changes from 196 to 197. ++ ++ Fixes applied after C-Kermit 7.0.197 was released: ++ ++ Source code: Big flexelint and "gcc -Wall" audit and cleanup. ++ ++ Configuration: ++ * Solaris RTS/CTS (hardware flow control) didn't work. ++ * BSDI RTS/CTS worked only in one direction. ++ * FreeBSD 4.0 with ncurses 5.0 broke interactive command parsing. ++ * QNX-32 build lacked -DBIGBUFOK so couldn't execute big macros. ++ ++ Connections: ++ * SET HOST /PTY didn't work on some platforms. ++ * Broken SET HOST /USER:xxx /PASSWORD:yyy /ACCOUNT:zzz switches ++ fixed. ++ * Transparent printing was broken in Unix. ++ * ANSWER 0 (wait forever) didn't work. ++ * Some problems in Multitech modem command strings. ++ * Spurious "?Sorry, can't condition console terminal" errors. ++ * Disabling modem command strings by setting them to nothing broke ++ dialing. ++ * SET DIAL TIMEOUT value was usually ignored. ++ * SET DIAL METHOD PULSE didn't work. ++ * Certain modem commands, if changed, not refreshed if modem type ++ changed. ++ * SET SESSION-LOG command was missing from VMS. ++ * VMS session log format fixed for scripts. ++ * HANGUP by dropping DTR didn't work in NetBSD. ++ * SET FLOW /AUTO versus SET FLOW confusion fixed. ++ * Spurious secondary Solaris lockfile removed. ++ * SCO OSR5 DTR On/Off hangup. ++ * UUCP lockfile race condition. ++ ++ Commands and scripts: ++ * Missing CAUTIOUS and FAST commands restored. ++ * Broken PTY command in late-model Linuxes fixed (API changed). ++ * Fixed off-by-one error in command recall when switching direction. ++ * Fixed recall of commands that contain '?'. ++ * COPY /SWAP-BYTES didn't work on some architectures. ++ * Various combinations of COPY switches didn't work. ++ * Various problems with COPY or RENAME with a directory name as ++ target. ++ * SHIFT didn't decrement \v(argc) if used within IF, ELSE, or SWITCH ++ block. ++ * SHIFT didn't affect the \%* variable. ++ * Divide by zero improperly handled in some \function()s. ++ * Problems with RETURN from right-recursive functions. ++ * FSEEK /LINE \%c LAST didn't work if already at end. ++ * Some buffer vulnerabilities and potential memory leaks were ++ discovered and fixed. ++ * \frdirectory() fixed not to follow symbolic links. ++ * SET EXIT WARNING OFF fixed to work when EXIT given in a script. ++ * Missing DELETE and MKDIR error message fixed. ++ * \fday() core dump for ancient dates fixed. ++ ++ File transfer: ++ * SEND /COMMAND was broken. ++ * CRECEIVE was broken (but RECEIVE /COMMAND was OK). ++ * Quoting wildcard chars in filenames didn't work. ++ * Problems canceling streaming file transfers with X or Z. ++ * Problems shifting between streaming and windowing file transfer. ++ * Non-FULL file-transfer displays erroneously said STREAMING when ++ not. ++ * An active SEND-LIST prevented GET from working. ++ * SET SERVER GET-PATH interpretation of relative names like "." was ++ wrong. ++ * The MAIL command was broken. ++ * "kermit -s *" might have skipped some files. ++ * Transaction log entries were not made for external protocol ++ transfers. ++ * File count report fixed to show number of files actually ++ transferred. ++ * Fixed filename conversion to convert spaces to underscores. ++ * Made SET PREFIXING / SET CONTROL PREFIX also adjust CLEARCHANNEL. ++ * More "Receive window full" errors fixed. ++ * Broken terminal buffering after curses display in Solaris fixed. ++ * SET FILE INCOMPLETE DISCARD did not work in all cases. ++ * Packet log changed to reformat the start-of-packet character ++ printably. ++ * Dynamic timeouts could grow ridiculously large. ++ ++ Character sets: ++ * Hebrew-7 translations missed the letter Tav. ++ * C1 area of CP1252 was ignored. ++ * SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT could give garbage ++ translations. ++ * TRANSLATE might not work on Little Endian architectures. ++ * Insufficient range checking in certain TRANSLATE operations. ++ ++ The following bugs in C-Kermit 8.0.200 were fixed in 8.0.201: ++ ++ * An obscure path through the code could cause the Unix version of ++ C-Kermit to dump core during its startup sequence. This happened ++ to only one person, but now it's fixed. ++ * When C-Kermit 8.0 is in Kermit server mode and the client says ++ "get blah", where blah (on the server) is a symlink rather than a ++ real file, the server unreasonably refused to send the linked-to ++ file. ++ * When C-Kermit is an FTP client and says "get foo/bar" (i.e. a ++ filename that includes one or more path segments), it failed to ++ accept the incoming file (this happened only with GET, not MGET). ++ * Array references should be case insensitive but only lowercase ++ array letters were accepted. ++ * SHOW VARIABLES dumped core on \v(sexpression) and \v(svalue). ++ * Spurious refusals of remote directory listings if the remote ++ server's date was set in the past. ++ * In AIX, and maybe elsewhere too, Kermit's COPY command always ++ failed with "Source and destination are the same file" when the ++ destination file didn't exist. ++ * The VMS version of C-Kermit did not work in Batch or when SPAWN'd. ++ To compound the problem, it also pretty much ignored the -B and -z ++ command-line options, whose purpose is to work around such ++ problems. ++ * C-Kermit 8.0 could not be built on IRIX 5.x. ++ * The C-Kermit 8.0 build for QNX6 said it was an "(unknown ++ version)". ++ ++ Other fixes are listed in the [161]previous section. ++ ++ [ [162]Top ] [ [163]Contents ] [ [164]C-Kermit ] [ [165]Kermit Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++2. SSH AND HTTP ++ ++ 2.1. SSH Connections ++ ++ This section does not apply to [166]Kermit 95 2.0, which has its ++ own built-in SSH client, which is documented [167]SEPARATELY. ++ ++ On most UNIX platforms, C-Kermit can make SSH (Secure SHell) ++ connection by running the external SSH command or program through its ++ pseudoterminal interface. The command is: ++ ++ SSH text ++ Tells Kermit to start the external SSH client, passing the ++ given text to it on the command line. Normally the text is just ++ the hostname, but it can be anything else that is acceptable to ++ the ssh client. If the command succeeds, the connection is made ++ and Kermit automatically enters CONNECT (terminal) mode. You ++ can use the SSH command to make a connection to any host that ++ has an SSH server. ++ ++ Kermit's SSH command gives you all the features of Kermit on an SSH ++ connection: command language, file transfer, character-set ++ translation, scripting, and all the rest. By default, C-Kermit invokes ++ SSH with "-e none", which disables the ssh escape character and makes ++ the connection transparent for purposes of file transfer. You can, ++ however, change the SSH invocation to whatever else you might need (an ++ explicit path, additional command-line arguments, etc) with: ++ ++ SET SSH COMMAND text ++ Specifies the system command that Kermit's SSH command should ++ use to invoke the external SSH client. Use this command to ++ supply a specific path or alternative name, or to include ++ different or more command-line options. ++ ++ In most cases, these connections work quite well. They can be scripted ++ like any other connection, and file transfer goes as fast as, or ++ faster than, on a regular Telnet connection. In some cases, however, ++ the underlying pseudoterminal driver is a limiting factor, resulting ++ in slow or failed file transfers. Sometimes you can work around such ++ problems by reducing the Kermit packet length. Note that Kermit does ++ not consider SSH connections to be reliable, so it does not offer to ++ use streaming in Kermit protocol transfers (but you can force it with ++ SET RELIABLE or SET STREAMING if you wish). ++ ++ The SSH command is like the TELNET command: it enters CONNECT mode ++ automatically when the connection is made. Therefore, to script an SSH ++ connection, use: ++ ++ set host /pty ssh -e none [ other-options ] host ++ if fail ... ++ ++ to make the connection. ++ ++ Here's a sequence that can be used to make a connection to a given ++ host using Telnet if the host accepts it, otherwise SSH: ++ ++ if not defined \%1 exit 1 Usage: \%0 host ++ set quiet on ++ set host \%1 23 /telnet ++ if fail { ++ set host /pty ssh -l \m(user) -e none \%1 ++ if fail exit 1 \%1: Telnet and SSH both fail ++ echo SSH connection to \%1 successful ++ } else { ++ echo Telnet connection to \%1 successful ++ } ++ ++ In SSH v2, it is possible to make an SSH connection direct to a Kermit ++ server system if the host administrator has configured the SSH server ++ to allow this; [168]CLICK HERE for details. ++ ++ Since Kermit uses external ssh client software, and since there are ++ different ssh clients (and different releases of each one), the exact ++ command to be used to make an SSH/Kermit connection can vary. Here is ++ the command for the OpenSSH 3.0.2p1 client: ++ ++set host /pipe ssh -e none [ -l username ] -T -s hostname kermit ++ ++ Example: ++ ++set host /pipe ssh -e none -l olga -T -s hq.xyzcorp.com kermit ++ ++ The SSH client might or might not prompt you for a password or other ++ information before it makes the connection; this depends on your SSH ++ configuration (your public and private keys, your authorized hosts ++ file, etc). Here's a brief synopsis of the OpenSSH client command ++ syntax ("man ssh" for details): ++ ++ -e none ++ This tells the SSH client to use no escape character. Since we ++ will be transferring files across the connection, we don't want ++ the connection to suddenly block because some character in the ++ data. ++ ++ -l username ++ This is the username on the remote host. You can omit the -l ++ option and its argument if your local and remote usernames are ++ the same. If they are different, you must supply the remote ++ username. ++ ++ -T ++ This tells the SSH client to tell the SSH server not to ++ allocate a pseudoterminal. We are not making a terminal ++ connection, we don't need a terminal, and in fact if a terminal ++ were allocated on the remote end, the connection would not ++ work. ++ ++ -s ... kermit ++ This tells the SSH client to tell the SSH server to start the ++ specified subsystem ("kermit") once the connection is made. The ++ subsystem name comes after the hostname. ++ ++ hostname ++ The IP host name or address of the desired host. ++ ++ You might want to include other or additional ssh command-line ++ options; "man ssh" explains what they are. Here are some examples for ++ the OpenSSH 3.0.2p1 client: ++ ++ -oClearAllForwardings yes ++ -oForwardAgent no ++ -oForwardX11 no ++ -oFallbackToRsh no ++ These ensure that a secure connection is used and that the ++ connection used for file transfer is not also used for ++ forwarding other things that might be specified in the ++ ssh_config file. ++ ++ -oProtocol 2 ++ (i.e. SSH v2) Ensures that the negotiated protocol supports ++ subsystems. ++ ++ Once you have an SSH connection to a Kermit server, it's just like any ++ other connection to a Kermit server (and very similar to a connection ++ to an FTP server). You give the client file transfer and management ++ commands for the server, and the server executes them. Of course you ++ can also give the client any other commands you wish. ++ ++ [ [169]SSH Kermit Server Subsystem ] [ [170]Kermit 95 Built-in SSH ++ Client ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2.2. HTTP Connections ++ ++ Hypertext Transfer Protocol, or HTTP, is the application protocol of ++ the World Wide Web (WWW), used between Web browsers (clients) and Web ++ servers. It allows a client to get files from websites, upload files ++ to websites, delete files from websites, get information about website ++ directories and files, and interact with server-side CGI scripts. ++ C-Kermit includes an HTTP client capable of both clear-text and secure ++ HTTP connections, that can do all these tasks and can be automated ++ through the Kermit scripting language. ++ ++ Although C-Kermit 7.0 could make HTTP connections to Web servers, it ++ could do so only when no other connection was open, and the procedure ++ was somewhat awkward. C-Kermit 8.0 improves matters by: ++ ++ * Allowing an HTTP connection to be open at the same time as a ++ regular SET LINE or SET HOST connection, and also at the same time ++ as an FTP connection ([171]Section 3); ++ * Upgrading the HTTP protocol level from 1.0 to 1.1, thus allowing ++ for persistent connections, in which a series of commands can be ++ sent on the same connection, rather than only one as in HTTP 1.0 ++ (and C-Kermit 7.0); ++ * Providing for "one-shot" URL-driven HTTP operations such as GET or ++ PUT. ++ * Providing a distinct HTTP command-line personality. ++ ++ Persistent HTTP connections are managed with the following commands: ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] OPEN [ security-options ] host-or-url [ port ] ++ Opens a persistent connection to the specified host (IP host ++ name or address) on the specified port. If any switches ++ (options, listed in the next section) are included, their ++ values are saved and used for all subsequent HTTP action ++ commands on the same connection. If no port is specified, HTTP ++ (80) is used. A Uniform Resource Locator (URL, [172]RFC 1738) ++ can be given instead of a hostname (or address) and port (but ++ the URL can not include a directory/file path). The security ++ options are explained [173]below. The HTTP OPEN command ++ replaces the C-Kermit 7.0 SET HOST hostname HTTP command, which ++ no longer works with HTTP GET and related commands. ++ ++ HTTP CLOSE ++ Closes any open HTTP connection and clears any saved switch ++ values. ++ ++ A URL starts with a protocol name, which must be http or https in this ++ case; optionally includes a username and password; and must contain a ++ host name or address: ++ ++ protocol://[user[.password]]@host[:port][URI] ++ ++ HTTP is Hypertext Transfer Protocol. HTTPS is the secure (SSL/TLS) ++ version of HTTP. The TCP service port is derived from the protocol ++ prefix (so normally the ":port" field is omitted). Thus the URL ++ protocol name specifies a default TCP service port and the URL user ++ and password fields can take the place of the /USER and /PASSWORD ++ switches ([174]Section 2.2.1). The optional URI is a "compact string ++ of characters for identifying an abstract or physical resource" ++ ([175]RFC 2396), such as a file. It must begin with a slash (/); if ++ the URI is omitted, "/" is supplied. Examples: ++ ++ http open http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ Equivalent to http open www.columbia.edu or http open ++ www.columbia.edu http. ++ ++ http open https://olga.secret@www1.xyzcorp.com/ ++ Equivalent to http /user:olga /pass:secret open ++ www1.xyzcorp.com https. ++ ++ Persistence is accomplished unilaterally by C-Kermit 8.0. An HTTP 1.0 ++ server closes the connection after each action. Although HTTP 1.1 ++ allows multiple actions on the same connection, an HTTP 1.1 server ++ tends to close the connection if it is idle for more than a few ++ seconds, to defend itself against denial-of-service attacks. But when ++ you use Kermit's HTTP OPEN command to create a connection, Kermit ++ reopens it automatically (if necessary) for each HTTP action until you ++ close it with HTTP CLOSE, regardless of the server's HTTP protocol ++ version, or how many times it closes the connection. ++ ++ Firewalls can be negotiated through proxies with the following ++ commands: ++ ++ SET TCP HTTP-PROXY [ host[:port] ] ++ If a host (by hostname or IP address) is specified, Kermit uses ++ it as a proxy server when attempting outgoing TCP connections ++ -- not only HTTP connections, but all TCP/IP connections, ++ Telnet and FTP included. This allows Kermit to adapt to the ++ HTTP firewall penetration method (as opposed to other methods ++ such as SOCKS4). If no hostname or ip-address is specified, any ++ previously specified Proxy server is removed. If no port number ++ is specified, the "http" service is used. This command must be ++ given before the HTTP OPEN command if a proxy is to be used or ++ canceled. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] CONNECT host[:port] ++ Instructs the HTTP server to act as a proxy, establishing a ++ connection to the specified host (IP hostname or address) on ++ the given port (80 = HTTP by default) and to redirect all data ++ transmitted between Kermit and itself to the given host for the ++ life of the connection. This command is to be used only for ++ debugging HTTP proxy connections. If a proxy connection is ++ required, instruct Kermit to use the proxy with the SET TCP ++ HTTP-PROXY command. ++ ++ 2.2.1. HTTP Command Switches ++ ++ HTTP switches, like all other switches, are optional. When HTTP ++ switches are included with the HTTP OPEN command, they apply ++ automatically to this and all subsequent HTTP actions (GET, PUT, ...) ++ on the same connection until an HTTP CLOSE command is given. So if you ++ include switches (or the equivalent URL fields, such as user and ++ password) in the HTTP OPEN command, you can omit them from subsequent ++ commands on the same connection. If the connection has closed since ++ your last command, it is automatically reopened with the same options. ++ ++ If you include switches with an HTTP action command (such as GET or ++ PUT), they apply only to that command. ++ ++ /USER:name ++ To be used in case a page requires a username for access. The ++ username is sent with page requests. If it is given with the ++ OPEN command it is saved until needed. If a username is ++ included in a URL, it overrides the username given in the ++ switch. CAUTION: Username and password (and all other ++ information, including credit card numbers and other material ++ that you might prefer to protect from public view) are sent ++ across the network in clear text on regular HTTP connections, ++ but authentication is performed securely on HTTPS connections. ++ ++ /PASSWORD:text ++ To be used in case a web page requires a password for access. ++ The password is sent with page requests. If it is given with ++ the OPEN command it is saved until needed. If a password is ++ given in a URL, it overrides the one given here. CAUTION: (same ++ as for /USER:). ++ ++ /AGENT:user-agent ++ Identifies the client to the server. Overrides the default ++ agent string, which is "C-Kermit" (for C-Kermit) or "Kermit-95" ++ (for Kermit 95). ++ ++ /ARRAY:array-designator ++ Tells Kermit to store the response headers in the given array, ++ one line per element. The array need not be declared in ++ advance. Example: /array:&a. ++ ++ /TOSCREEN ++ Tells Kermit to display any response text on the screen. It ++ applies independently of the output file specification; thus it ++ is possible to have the server response go to the screen, a ++ file, both, or neither. ++ ++ /HEADER:header-item(s) ++ Used for specifying any optional headers to be sent with HTTP ++ requests. ++ ++ /HEADER:tag:value ++ ++ To send more than one header, use braces for grouping: ++ ++ /HEADER:{{tag:value}{tag:value}...} ++ ++ For a list of valid tags and value formats see [176]RFC 2616, ++ "Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1". A maximum of eight ++ headers may be specified. ++ ++ 2.2.2. HTTP Action Commands ++ ++ HTTP actions can occur within a persistent connection, or they can be ++ self-contained ("connectionless"). A persistent HTTP connection begins ++ with an HTTP OPEN command, followed by zero or more HTTP action ++ commands, and is terminated with an HTTP CLOSE command: ++ ++ http open www.columbia.edu ++ if failure stop 1 HTTP OPEN failed: \v(http_message) ++ http get kermit/index.html ++ if failure stop 1 HTTP GET failed: \v(http_message) ++ (more actions possible here...) ++ http close ++ ++ A self-contained HTTP action occurs when a URL is given instead of a ++ remote file name to an HTTP action command. In this case, Kermit makes ++ the HTTP connection, takes the action, and then closes the connection. ++ If an HTTP connection was already open, it is closed silently and ++ automatically. ++ ++ http get http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ ++ Kermit's HTTP action commands are as follows. Switches may be included ++ with any of these to override switch (or default) values given in the ++ HTTP OPEN command. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] GET remote-filename [ local-filename ] ++ Retrieves the named file from the server specified in the most ++ recent HTTP OPEN command for which a corresponding HTTP CLOSE ++ command has not been given. The filename may not include ++ wildcards (HTTP protocol does not support them). If no HTTP ++ OPEN command is in effect, this form of the HTTP GET command ++ fails. The default local filename is the same as the remote ++ name, but with any pathname stripped. For example, the command ++ http get kermit/index.html stores the file in the current local ++ directory as index.html. If the /HEADERS: switch is included, ++ information about the file is also stored in the specified ++ array (explained in [177]Section 2.2.3). All files are ++ transferred in binary mode. HTTP does not provide for ++ record-format or character-set conversion. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] GET url [ local-filename ] ++ When HTTP GET is given a URL rather than a filename, Kermit ++ opens a connection to the designated server (closing any ++ previously open HTTP connection), gets the file, and then ++ closes the connection. If the URL does not include a filename, ++ index.html is supplied. This is the self-contained one-step ++ "connectionless" method for getting a file from a Web server. ++ The data is not interpreted; HTTP GET is like "lynx -source" ++ rather than "lynx -dump". ++ ++ In the remaining HTTP action commands, the distinction between a ++ remote filename and a URL are the same as in the HTTP GET command. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] HEAD remote-filename-or-url [ local-filename ] ++ Like GET except without actually getting the file; instead it ++ retrieves only the headers. If the /ARRAY: or /TOSCREEN switch ++ is included, there is no default local output filename but you ++ can still specify one. If neither of these switches is ++ included, the default local filename is the same as the remote ++ filename, but with any path stripped and with ".head" appended. ++ The HEAD command can be used in a script with the /ARRAY: ++ switch to retrieve information about the requested resource to ++ determine whether the resource should actually be retrieved ++ with a subsequent GET request. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] INDEX remote-directory-or-url [ local-filename ] ++ Asks the server to send a listing of the files in the given ++ server directory. This command is not supported by most Web ++ servers. Even when it is supported, there is no standard format ++ for the listing. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] POST [ /MIME-TYPE:type ] source-file ++ remote-path-or-url [ result-file ] ++ Sends data to a process running on the remote host; the result ++ is usually an HTML file but could be anything. The data to be ++ posted must be read from a local file (the source-file). If a ++ result file is specified, Kermit stores the server's response ++ in it. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] PUT [ MIME-TYPE:type ] local-file [ ++ remote-file-or-url [ result-file ] ] ++ Uploads a local file to the server. Only the name of a single ++ file can be given; wildcards (and group transfers) are not ++ supported by HTTP protocol. If no remote filename is given, the ++ file is sent with the same name as the local file, but with any ++ pathname stripped. ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] DELETE remote-file-or-url [ local-result-file ] ++ Asks the server to delete the specified single file. If a ++ result file is specified, it will contain any response data ++ returned by the server. ++ ++ Note the limitations of HTTP protocol compared to (say) FTP or Kermit. ++ There is no command for changing directories, no standard way to get ++ file or directory lists, no way to transfer file groups by using ++ wildcard notation, etc, and therefore no good way to (say) fetch all ++ pages, descend through subdirectories, perform automatic updates, etc. ++ There is no assurrance a connection will stay open and, as noted, ++ there is no provision for data conversion between unlike platforms. ++ The data's MIME headers can be used for postprocessing. ++ ++ 2.2.3. HTTP Headers ++ ++ Each HTTP request and response contains a set of name/value pairs ++ called headers. HTTP headers are specified in [178]RFC 2616. For ++ example, an HTTP GET request for /index.html on www.columbia.edu ++ contains the following headers: ++ ++ GET /index.html HTTP/1.1 ++ Host: www.columbia.edu:80 ++ User-agent: C-Kermit 8.0 ++ Authorization: Basic base64-encoded-username-password ++ ++ These might be followed by any others specified with a /HEADERS: ++ switch: ++ ++ Accept: image/gif, image/x-xbitmap, image/jpeg, *.* ++ Accept-Encoding: gzip ++ Accept-Language: en ++ Accept-Charset: iso-8859-1,utf-8 ++ Cookie: cookie-data ++ ++ The server sends back a short report about the file prior to sending ++ the file contents. Example: ++ ++ HTTP/1.1 200 OK ++ Date: Fri, 24 Aug 2001 21:09:39 GMT ++ Server: Apache/1.3.4 (Unix) ++ Last-Modified: Mon, 06 Aug 2001 21:16:13 GMT ++ ETag: "1fa137-10d7-3b6f091d" ++ Accept-Ranges: bytes ++ Content-Length: 4311 ++ Content-Type: text/html ++ ++ If you want to have this information available to a Kermit script you ++ can use the /ARRAY switch to have Kermit put it in array, one line per ++ array element. Example: ++ ++ set exit warning off ++ http open www.columbia.edu ++ if fail exit 1 Can't reach server ++ http /array:&a get /index.html ++ if fail exit 1 Can't get file ++ echo Header lines: \fdim(&a) ++ for \%i 1 \fdim(&a) 1 { ++ echo \%i. \&a[\%i] ++ } ++ ++ Note that the "Date:" item is the current date and time; the ++ "Last-Modifed:" item is the file's modification date and time. An ++ example showing how to use this information is presented in ++ [179]Section 8.13.7. ++ ++ 2.2.4. Secure HTTP Connections ++ ++ SSL/TLS (Secure Sockets Layer / Transport Layer Security) is the ++ protocol used to secure HTTP, SMTP, and other Internet applications. ++ See the [180]C-Kermit Reference Section 5.4 for an introduction to ++ SSL/TLS. To make a secure HTTP connection, you need: ++ ++ 1. A secure client (a version of C-Kermit or Kermit 95 with SSL/TLS ++ security built in). Type "check ssl" at the Kermit prompt to make ++ sure you have it. ++ 2. A secure server to connect to. ++ 3. The CA Root Certificate used to authenticate the server to the ++ client. (see [181]Section 15 of the security reference for an ++ introduction to certificates). ++ ++ And you must make a connection to the secure HTTP port: service name ++ HTTPS, port number 443 (as opposed to service HTTP, port 80). You can ++ also make secure connections to other ports by including the /TLS or ++ /SSL switch with the HTTP OPEN command, if the host supports SSL/TLS ++ on the given port: ++ ++ The quality of the SSL/TLS connection depends on the cipher suite. ++ There are several possibilities: ++ ++ Anonymous cipher suite: ++ If an anonymous cipher suite is negotiated, the connection is ++ encrypted but there is no authentication. This connection is ++ subject to a Man-In-The-Middle (MITM) attack. ++ ++ X.509 certificate on the server: ++ When you connect to certain secure servers, an X.509 ++ certificate is returned. This certificate is issued to a ++ special hostname, something like www1.xyzcorp.com or ++ wwws.xyzcorp.com (rather than the normal www.xyzcorp.com). It ++ is signed by the host's Certificate Authority (CA). If the host ++ certificate is configured on the client, it can be used to ++ verify the certificate received from the server. If the ++ certificate it verified as authentic, a check is made to ensure ++ it has not expired and it was issued to the host you were ++ attempting to connect to. If you had asked to connect to (say) ++ www.xyzcorp.com but were given a certificate for ++ www1.xyzcorp.com, you would be prompted for permission to ++ continue. ++ ++ If the verification succeeded, the connection would be ++ encrypted with one-way (server-to-client) authentication. This ++ connection is not subject to a MITM attack. ++ ++ If a username and password are transmitted over this ++ connection, they are not subject to interception. However, the ++ standard risks associated with passing the password to the host ++ for verification apply; for example, if the host has been ++ compromised, the password will be compromised. ++ ++ X.509 client certificate: ++ If a connection has been established with an X.509 server ++ certificate, the server can ask the client to send a ++ certificate of its own. This certificate must be verified ++ against a CA Root certificate. The certificate itself (or ++ subject info from the certificate) is used to determine the ++ authorization for the client, and if successful, the username ++ and password need not be sent to the server. ++ ++ Kerberos 5: ++ Instead of using X.509 certifcates, Kerberos 5 can be used to ++ perform the authentication and key exchange. In this situation, ++ there is mutual authentication between the client and server. ++ The Kerberos 5 principal is used by the server to look up the ++ appropriate authorization data. There is no need to send ++ username and password. ++ ++ An HTTP connection is made with the HTTP OPEN command: ++ ++ HTTP [ switches ] OPEN [ { /SSL, /TLS } ] host [ port ] ++ If /SSL or /TLS switches are included (these are synonyms), or ++ if the service is HTTPS or the port is 443, a secure connection ++ is attempted using the current authentication settings; see ++ HELP SET AUTHENTICATION for details ([182]Section 6.2 of the ++ security reference). If the no /SSL or /TLS switch is included ++ but the port is 443 or the service is HTTPS, a secure ++ connection is attempted. If an /SSL or /TLS switch is included ++ but a port is not specified, an SSL/TLS connection is attempted ++ on the default port (80). ++ ++ Certificates are covered in the separate [183]Kermit Security ++ Reference for C-Kermit 8.0. You should let Kermit know to verify ++ certificates with the SET AUTHENTICATION TLS command. For example: ++ ++ SET AUTHENTICATION TLS CRL-DIR directory ++ Specifies a directory that contains certificate revocation ++ files where each file is named by the hash of the certificate ++ that has been revoked. ++ ++ SET AUTHENTICATION TLS CRL-FILE filename ++ Specifies a file that contains a list of certificate ++ revocations. ++ ++ SET AUTHENTICATION TLS VERIFY-DIR directory ++ Specifies a directory that contains root CA certificate files ++ used to verify the certificate chains presented by the peer. ++ Each file is named by a hash of the certificate. ++ ++ SET AUTHENTICATION TLS VERIFY-FILE filename ++ Specifies a file that contains root CA certificates to be used ++ for verifying certificate chains. ++ ++ SET AUTHENTICATION TLS VERIFY OFF ++ Tells Kermit not to require a certificate and accept any ++ certificate that is presented regardless of whether it is ++ valid. ++ ++ There are many other options; see the security document for details. ++ ++ Now suppose you need need to fetch the file denoted by the following ++ URL: ++ ++ https://myuserid:mypassword@wwws.xyzcorp.com/clients/info/secret.html ++ ++ Once you have set up the handling of certificates as desired, you can ++ use the following Kermit commands: ++ ++ http /user:myuserid /password:mypassword open www1.xyzcorp.com https ++ if success { ++ http get /clients/info/secret.html ++ http close ++ } ++ ++ As another example, let's say that you have a web form you need to ++ populate with three fields: red,white and blue. ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ You can handle this with the HTTP POST command. The data to be posted ++ is stored in the local file data.txt. ++ ++ Red=seven stripes&White=six stripes&Blue=fifty stars ++ ++ and the response from the server will be stored into response.txt. ++ ++ http open www.xyzcorp.com http ++ if success { ++ http /array:c post data.txt /cgi-bin/form.cgi response.txt ++ http close ++ } ++ ++ In this scenario, the Common Gateway Interface (CGI) sends a response ++ whether it succeeds or fails in a script-dependent manner. The script ++ can either report success and enclose the response data; or it might ++ send a 302 Found error which indicates that the "Location:" header ++ should be used to determine the URL at which the data can be found. ++ ++ 2.2.5. HTTP Variables ++ ++ \v(http_code) ++ The HTTP protocol code number of the most recent server reply, ++ e.g. 404 for "not found". ++ ++ \v(http_connected) ++ 1 when an HTTP connection is open, 0 when there is no HTTP ++ connection. ++ ++ \v(http_host) ++ If an HTTP connection is open, the hostname:port, e.g. ++ www.columbia.edu:80; otherwise, empty. ++ ++ \v(http_message) ++ Server error message, if any, from most recent HTTP command. ++ ++ \v(http_security) ++ A list of the security parameters and values for the current ++ connection, if any. Empty if the connection is not to a secure ++ server, or there is no connection. ++ ++ To display all the HTTP variables at once, type SHOW VAR HTTP: ++ ++ C-Kermit> http open www.columbia.edu ++ C-Kermit> http get lkjlkjlkjlkj ++ C-Kermit> sho var http ++ \v(http_code) = 404 ++ \v(http_connected) = 1 ++ \v(http_host) = www.columbia.edu:80 ++ \v(http_message) = Not Found ++ \v(http_security) = NULL ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ 2.2.6. The HTTP Command-Line Personality ++ ++ If you invoke C-Kermit with the name "http" or "https", you can use a ++ special set of HTTP-specific command-line options. You can do this by ++ creating a symbolic linke "http" or "https" to the C-Kermit 8.0 ++ executable, or by having a separate copy of it called "http" or ++ "https". Here's the usage message ("http -h"): ++ ++ Usage: ./http host [ options... ] ++ -h This message. ++ -d Debug to debug.log. ++ -S Stay (issue command prompt when done). ++ -Y Do not execute Kermit initialization file. ++ -q Quiet (suppress most messages). ++ -u name Username. ++ -P password Password. ++ -g pathname Get remote pathname. ++ -p pathname Put remote pathname. ++ -H pathname Head remote pathname. ++ -l pathname Local path for -g, -p, and -H. ++ -z opt[=value] Security options... ++ cert=file Client certificate file ++ certsok Accept all certificates ++ key=file Client private key file ++ secure Use SSL ++ verify=n 0 = none, 1 = peer , 2 = certificate required ++ ++ The "host" argument is the name of a Web host, e.g. www.columbia.edu. ++ The action options are -p, -g, and -H. If you give an action option, ++ Kermit does the action and then exits. If you give a host without an ++ action option, Kermit makes an HTTP connection to the host and then ++ gives you the C-Kermit prompt. Here's a simple example that fetches a ++ publicly readable Web page: ++ ++ http www.columbia.edu -g kermit/index.html ++ ++ If you need to access a website for which a username and password are ++ required, you can supply them on the command line with -u and -P. If ++ you include a username but omit the password, Kermit prompts you for ++ it: ++ ++ http www.columbia.edu -u olga -p kermit/index.html -l index.html ++ Password: ++ ++ Note that when PUT'ing files to websites, you have to supply both the ++ -p (remote pathname) and -l (local path) options. ++ ++ If your version of Kermit is built with SSL/TLS security, you can also ++ use the -z option to make secure HTTP (https) connections. ++ ++ Finally, as noted in [184]Section 16, you can also give a URL instead ++ of a host name and options. ++ ++ [ [185]Top ] [ [186]Contents ] [ [187]C-Kermit Home ] [ [188]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++3. THE BUILT-IN FTP CLIENT ++ ++ 3.1. [189]Making and Managing FTP Connections ++ 3.2. [190]Making Secure FTP Connections ++ 3.3. [191]Setting FTP Preferences ++ 3.4. [192]Managing Directories and Files ++ 3.5. [193]Uploading Files With FTP ++ 3.6. [194]Downloading Files With FTP ++ 3.7. [195]Translating Character Sets ++ 3.8. [196]FTP Command Shortcuts ++ 3.9. [197]Dual Sessions ++ 3.10. [198]Automating FTP Sessions ++ 3.11. [199]Advanced FTP Protocol Features ++ ++ Earlier versions of C-Kermit and K95 included an FTP command, but it ++ simply invoked an external FTP client. Now, by popular demand, Kermit ++ includes its own built-in FTP client that offers the following ++ advantages over traditional FTP clients (and its previous interface to ++ them): ++ ++ * Any of Kermit's built-in [200]security methods can be used to ++ establish and conduct secure FTP sessions with [201]FTP servers ++ that support these methods. (Security modules can be subject to ++ export restrictions.) ++ * Kermit's FTP client uses "passive mode" by default to avoid ++ blockage by firewalls and network address translators. Of course ++ active mode can be chosen too when needed. ++ * [202]Character sets can be translated as part of the transfer ++ process even when the FTP server does not support character-set ++ translation, including to/from the new Internet standard ++ international character set, [203]Unicode UTF-8. This includes ++ both the file's name and (for text files only) its contents. ++ * All of C-Kermit's [204]file-selection mechanisms are available: ++ size, date, name patterns and lists, exception lists, etc. ++ * [205]Atomic file movement capabilities are provided (delete, move, ++ or rename files automatically after successful transfer). ++ * The correct file type, "ascii" (i.e. text) or binary, is chosen ++ automatically for each file (explained in [206]Section 4), and any ++ mixture of text and binary files can be sent in a single ++ operation, even across platforms. ++ * Update mode ("don't bother transferring files that didn't change ++ since last time") and recovery (resumption of an interrupted ++ transfer from the point of failure) are available in both ++ directions. ++ * When uploading files from UNIX to UNIX, the file's permissions can ++ be preserved if desired. ++ * Recursive directory-tree PUTs are supported between any two ++ platforms that have tree-structured file systems. Recursive GETs ++ are supported between like platforms if the server cooperates and ++ between like or unlike platforms if the server supports MLSD ++ ([207]Section 3.11). ++ * When receiving files, all of Kermit's file collision actions are ++ available: backup, update, refuse, rename, etc. ++ * Multi-file transfers can be interrupted on a per-file basis, ++ automatically skipping to the next file. ++ * FTP sessions are [208]fully scriptable. ++ * An entire FTP session (connect, login, CD, upload or download, ++ logout) can be specified on the command line without using a ++ script. ++ * All of Kermit's logging options and formats are available to keep ++ an accurate and complete record of each connection and file ++ transfer, and to aid in troubleshooting. ++ * All of Kermit's file-transfer display options are available ++ (fullscreen, brief, CRT, serial, none). ++ ++ And best of all: ++ * Kermit doesn't give you those annoying per-file prompts every time ++ you start a multi-file transfer without remembering to give a ++ "prompt" command first :-). ++ ++ [ [209]Top ] [ [210]FTP Top ] [ [211]FTP Client Overview ] [ [212]FTP ++ Script Tutorial ] [ [213]C-Kermit Home ] [ [214]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1. Making and Managing FTP Connections ++ ++ Each copy of Kermit can have one FTP connection open at a time. FTP ++ connections are independent of regular terminal connections; a ++ terminal connection (serial or network via SET LINE, DIAL, SET HOST, ++ TELNET, etc) may be, but need not be, open at the same time as an FTP ++ connection, and terminal connections can also be closed, and new ++ connections opened, without interfering with the FTP connection (and ++ vice versa). Thus, for example, Kermit can have an FTP connection and ++ a TELNET connection open to the same host simultaneously, using the ++ TELNET connection (e.g.) to send mail or take other desired actions as ++ various FTP actions complete. Of course, each copy of Kermit can do ++ only one thing at a time, so it can't (for example) transfer a file ++ with FTP and another file with Kermit protocol simultaneously. ++ ++ A Kermit FTP session can be established by [215]command-line options, ++ by [216]URL, or by [217]interactive commands. ++ ++ 3.1.1. Kermit Command-Line Options for FTP ++ ++ The new command-line option '-9' (sorry, we're out of letters) can be ++ used when starting C-Kermit, telling it to make an FTP connection: ++ ++ kermit -9 hostname ++ ++ or if a non-default FTP port is needed: ++ ++ kermit -9 hostname:port ++ ++ You can also specify the username on the command line with the -M ("My ++ User ID") option that was already there for other connection types: ++ ++ kermit -9 hostname -M olga ++ ++ If you specify the username on the command line, Kermit uses it when ++ making the connection and does not prompt you for it (but it does ++ prompt you for the password if one is required). ++ ++ Once the connection is made, you get the regular Kermit prompt, and ++ can give interactive commands such as the ones described below. When ++ you give a BYE command, Kermit closes the session and exits, just as a ++ regular FTP client would do. If you don't want Kermit to exit when you ++ give a BYE command, include the -S ("Stay") option on the command ++ line. ++ ++ Other Kermit command-line options that are not specific to non-FTP ++ connections should affect the FTP session in the expected ways; for ++ example, -i and -T force binary and text mode transfers, respectively. ++ ++ File transfers can not be initiated on the "kermit -9" command line; ++ for that you need to use Kermit's FTP personality (next section) or ++ you can use URLs ([218]Section 3.1.3). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.2. The FTP Command-Line Personality ++ ++ If you want to replace your regular FTP client with C-Kermit, you can ++ make a link called "ftp" to the C-Kermit binary (or you can store a ++ copy of the C-Kermit binary under the name "ftp"). When C-Kermit is ++ invoked with a program name of "ftp" (or "FTP", case doesn't matter), ++ it assumes the command-line personality of the regular FTP client: ++ ++ ftp [ options ] hostname [ port ] ++ ++ In this case the options are like those of a regular FTP client: ++ ++ -d Debug: enables debug messages and creates a debug.log file. ++ -n No autologin: Kermit should not send your user ID automatically. ++ -t Packet trace: accepted but is treated the same as -d. ++ -v Verbose: accepted but ignored (operation is verbose by default). ++ -i Not interactive: accepted but ignored. ++ ++ and the hostname can also be a URL (explained in [219]Section 3.1.3). ++ To specify a non-default TCP port for the FTP server, include the port ++ number or name after the hostname. ++ ++ There are also some bonus options that allow you to execute an entire ++ FTP session from the shell command line, as long as you don't include ++ the -n option. These are not available with regular FTP clients, and ++ at least one of these options (-g) conflicts with UNIX ftp (where -g ++ means "no globbing", which does not apply to Kermit), and some of them ++ (like the options above) also conflict with regular Kermit ++ command-line options: ++ ++ -m mode = "passive" (default) or "active" ++ -Y Don't execute the Kermit initialization file [1] ++ -q Quiet, suppresses all but error messages [1] ++ -S Stay, don't exit automatically [1] ++ -A Autologin anonymously [2] ++ -u name Username for autologin [2] (synonym: -M [1]) ++ -P password Password for autologin (see cautions below) [2] ++ -D directory cd after autologin [2] ++ -b Binary mode [2] ++ -a Text ("ascii") mode [2] (synonym: -T [1]) ++ -R Recursive (works with -p) [4] ++ -p files Files to put (upload) after autologin [2] (synonym: -s [1]) ++ -g files Files to get (download) after autologin [3] ++ ++ [1] Same as Kermit, not available in regular FTP clients. ++ [2] Conflicts with Kermit, not available in regular FTP clients. ++ [3] Same as Kermit, conflicts with regular FTP clients. ++ [4] Conflicts with Kermit, available in some FTP clients. ++ ++ Fancier options such as restart, character-set translation, filename ++ collision selection, automatic move/rename/delete, etc, are not ++ available from the command line; for these you can use the commands ++ described in the following sections. The -R option might also work ++ with -g (GET) but that depends on the server. ++ ++ The following security options are also available, explained in ++ [220]Section 3.2: ++ ++ -k realm Kerberos 4 realm [4] ++ -f Kerberos 5 credentials forwarding [4] ++ -x autoencryption mode [4] ++ -c cipher SRP cipher type [4] ++ -H hash SRP encryption hash [4] ++ -z option Security options [4] ++ ++ If you include -A or specify a name of "anonymous" or "ftp", you are ++ logged in anonymously and, in the absence of -P, Kermit automatically ++ supplies a password of "user@host", where "user" is your local user ++ ID, and "host" is the hostname of the computer where Kermit is ++ running. If you do not include -p or -g, Kermit enters command mode so ++ you can type commands or execute them from a script. ++ ++ If you include -p or -g, Kermit attempts to transfer the specified ++ files and then exits automatically at the end of the transfer unless ++ you also included -S (Stay). It uses the "brief" file transfer display ++ (one line per file) unless you include the -q option to suppress it. ++ ++ When uploading files with -p, Kermit switches automatically between ++ text and binary mode for each file. ++ ++ When downloading, you can either specify a particular mode (text or ++ binary) to be used for all the files, or you can let Kermit select the ++ type for each file automatically, based on its name (see [221]Sections ++ 3.5 and [222]3.6 for greater detail). In UNIX be sure to quote any ++ wildcard characters to prevent the shell from expanding them, as shown ++ in the examples just below. Filename collisions are handled according ++ Kermit's FILE COLLISION setting (if specified in your Kermit ++ customization file; otherwise the default, which is BACKUP). ++ ++ It should go without saying that the -P option should be used with ++ caution. In addition to the well-known risks of transmitting plaintext ++ passwords over the Internet, in this case the password also echos to ++ the screen if you type it, and can be seen in ps and w listings that ++ show the user's currently active command and command-line arguments. ++ Thus command-line FTP sessions are most appropriate for secure or ++ anonymous connections (those that do not require passwords). ++ ++ Here's an example in which you download the latest C-Kermit "tarball" ++ from the Columbia University FTP archive: ++ ++ ftp -A kermit.columbia.edu -bg kermit/archives/ckermit.tar.gz ++ ++ This assumes that "ftp" is a symbolic link to C-Kermit. It logs you in ++ anonymously and gets the ckermit.tar.gz file in binary mode from the ++ kermit/archives directory. ++ ++ Here's a slightly more ambitious example that illustrates CD'ing to ++ the desired server directory to get a group of files in text mode (in ++ this case the C-Kermit source files): ++ ++ ftp -A kermit.columbia.edu -D kermit/f -ag "ck[cuw]*.[cwh]" makefile ++ ++ In this case we CD to the kermit/f directory so we don't have to ++ include it in each file specification, and we quote the ck[cuw]*.[cwh] ++ specification so the shell doesn't expand it, since we have to pass it ++ as-is to the server. Note also that the quotes don't go around the ++ entire file list; only around each file specification that needs to be ++ quoted. ++ ++ Here's one more example, that uploads a debug log file in binary mode ++ to the Kermit incoming directory (as we might ask you to do when ++ following up on a problem report): ++ ++ ftp -A kermit.columbia.edu -D kermit/incoming -bp debug.log ++ ++ In this case the -D option is required to tell the server where to put ++ the incoming file. ++ ++ Unless the -Y option is included, your Kermit initialization file ++ (.mykermrc in UNIX, K95.INI in Windows) is executed before the command ++ line options, so you can set any FTP-related preferences there, as ++ described in the subsequent sections. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.3. The FTP URL Interpreter ++ ++ If Kermit is invoked with either its regular personality (as "kermit") ++ or its FTP personality (as "ftp"), you can also give a URL ++ (Universal Resource Locator) instead of a hostname and options, ++ with or without a username and password: ++ ftp ftp://user:password@host/path ++ ftp ftp://user@host/path ++ ftp ftp://@host/path (or ftp://:@host/path) ++ ftp ftp://host/path ++ kermit ftp://host/path ++ ++ If the FTP personality is used, the service must be "ftp". In all ++ cases, a hostname or address must be included. If a user is included ++ but no password, you are prompted for the password. If a path ++ (filename) is included: ++ * If "@" is included without a user, Kermit prompts for the username ++ and password. ++ * If no user and no "@" are included, "anonymous" is used. ++ * GET is assumed. ++ ++ If no path (and no action options) are included, an interactive FTP ++ session is started, as in this example: ++ ftp ftp://kermit.columbia.edu ++ ++ If a path is included, but a username is not included, "anonymous" is ++ used and an appropriate user@host password is supplied automatically. ++ If authentication is successful, Kermit attempts to GET the file ++ indicated by the path or, if the path is the name of a directory, it ++ asks the server for a directory listing. In both cases, Kermit ++ disconnects from the server and exits after the operation is complete ++ (unless you have included the -S option on the command line). ++ ++ Here's an example that gets a listing of the Kermit directory at the ++ Kermit ftp site: ++ ftp ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ ++ This example gets the top-level READ.ME file from the same directory: ++ ftp ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/READ.ME ++ ++ Here's the same example, but requesting a text-mode transfer: ++ ftp -T ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/READ.ME ++ This illustrates that you can mix command-line options and URLs ++ if you desire. ++ ++ Here's an example that logs in as a (fictitious) real user to get a ++ file: ++ ftp ftp://olga@ftp.xyzcorp.com/resume.txt ++ The password is not included, so Kermit prompts for it. ++ ++ This scheme allows Kermit to be used as the FTP helper of other ++ applications, such as Web browsers, with all its advantages over other ++ FTP clients (especially the ones that are built in to most Web ++ browsers), e.g. that it can be given wildcards, and it can pick text ++ and binary mode automatically for each file. ++ ++ HINT: suppose somebody sends you an FTP URL in email, or you see it in ++ some text. If your terminal screen supports copy/paste, copy the url, ++ and then at the shell prompt type "kermit", a space, and then paste ++ the URL, e.g.: ++ ++ $ kermit ftp://alpha.greenie.net/pub/mgetty/source/1.1/mgetty1.1.27-O ++ ++ "$ is the shell prompt; the part you type is underlined, the rest is ++ pasted in. Kermit does the rest. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1.4. Interactive FTP Session Establishment ++ ++ As you read this and the following sections, bear in mind that any ++ command that can be given at the prompt can also be used in a script ++ program. Kermit's script programming language is the same as its ++ interactive command language. [223]CLICK HERE if you would like to ++ learn a bit more about script writing. ++ ++ An FTP session is established with the FTP OPEN command: ++ ++ FTP [ OPEN ] [ { /SSL, /TLS } ] hostname [ switches ] [ port ] ++ Opens an FTP connection to the given host on the given port ++ and, if FTP AUTOLOGIN is ON, also logs you in to the server, ++ prompting for username and password if necessary. If no port is ++ specified, the regular FTP protocol port (21) is used. The OPEN ++ keyword is optional (unless the hostname conflicts with one of ++ the FTP command keywords, which you can list by typing "ftp ++ ?"). ++ ++ The hostname can be an IP host name, numeric IP address, or if you ++ have a network directory active (SET NETWORK DIRECTORY; see Chapter 6 ++ of [224]Using C-Kermit), an entry name in the directory. In the latter ++ case, if the given hostname matches exactly one entry, the associated ++ name or address is used; if it matches more than one, Kermit cycles ++ through them until one is found that can be opened; if it matches ++ none, then the hostname is used as-is. If a directory is active but ++ you want to bypass directory lookup, include an "=" sign at the ++ beginning of the hostname, and/or use a numeric IP address. ++ ++ When an FTP connection is opened, the default file-transfer mode is ++ set to binary if the client and server platforms are alike (e.g. both ++ of them are some kind of UNIX), and to text ("ascii") if they are not ++ alike. This has no particular effect for uploading since Kermit ++ automatically switches between text and binary mode for each file, but ++ might be important for downloading. The connection is also set to ++ Stream mode and File structure. Record- or page-oriented file ++ transfers are not supported by C-Kermit's FTP client. ++ ++ The optional FTP OPEN switches are: ++ ++ /ANONYMOUS ++ Logs you in anonymously, automatically supplying username ++ "anonymous" and user@host as the password, based on your local ++ user and host names. ++ ++ /NOLOGIN ++ ++ Overrides SET FTP AUTOLOGIN ON for this connection only. ++ ++ /USER:name ++ Uses the given username to log you in, thus avoiding the Name: ++ prompt. ++ Overrides SET FTP AUTOLOGIN OFF for this connection only. ++ ++ /PASSWORD:text ++ Uses the given text as your password, thus avoiding the ++ Password: prompt. This switch is not recommended for use in ++ script files, which would be a security risk. ++ ++ /ACCOUNT:text ++ Uses the given text as your account (or secondary password, ++ depending on the requirements of the server; most servers do ++ not require or accept an account name). If an account is not ++ supplied, you are not prompted for one. ++ ++ /PASSIVE ++ Opens the connection in passive mode. Passive mode is the ++ default in Kermit's FTP client, unlike in most others, since it ++ works better through firewalls. The /PASSIVE and /ACTIVE ++ switches apply only to the connection that is being opened, and ++ do not affect the global FTP PASSIVE-MODE setting. ++ ++ /ACTIVE ++ Opens the connection in active mode. Use this switch if the ++ server does not support passive mode, or use the command SET ++ FTP PASSIVE-MODE OFF. ++ ++ /NOINIT ++ Added in C-Kermit 8.0.201. Tells C-Kermit not to send REST, ++ STRU, FEAT, and MODE commands to the server when the connection ++ is opened, since these have been reported to cause confusion in ++ certain servers. ++ ++ When a username or password is missing, a prompt is issued at the ++ controlling terminal and you must type the response; the response can ++ not be scripted. Use the switches to avoid prompts, or one of the ++ secure authentication methods described in the next section, or see ++ [225]SET FTP AUTOLOGIN and the [226]FTP USER and similar commands ++ described later in this section. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ ftp open kermit.columbia.edu /anonymous ; Open and log in anonymously ++ ftp kermit.columbia.edu /anonymous ; The OPEN keyword can be omitted ++ ftp xyzcorp.com ; Open and maybe prompt for username ++ ftp xyzcorp.com /user:olga ; Open and log in as olga ++ ftp testing.abccorp.com 449 ; Specify a special TCP port number ++ ftp testing.abccorp.com /user:olaf /password:secret 449 ++ ++ The FTP OPEN command succeeds if a connection was opened to the server ++ (even if the given username and password were not valid) and fails ++ otherwise (see [227]Section 3.8 for details). ++ ++ When your FTP session is complete, you can terminate it as follows: ++ ++ FTP BYE ++ Closes the FTP connection if one was open. The FTP prefix can ++ be omitted if no other connection is open at the same time (see ++ [228]Section 3.8 for details). If a connection log is active, ++ an FTP record is written to it. If Kermit was started with the ++ -9 command-line option or with its FTP command-line ++ personality, and the -S (Stay) option was not given, AND there ++ is no other active connection, the FTP BYE command also exits, ++ just as it does on a regular FTP client. Synonyms: FTP CLOSE, ++ FTP QUIT (but if the FTP prefix is omitted from QUIT, this ++ becomes the regular Kermit QUIT command, which is equivalent to ++ EXIT; i.e. it closes the connection and exits from Kermit). ++ ++ The following commands can be used to achieve greater control over the ++ connection and login process: ++ ++ SET FTP ANONYMOUS-PASSWORD text ++ Allows you to choose the password text to be sent automatically ++ by Kermit when you open an FTP connection with the /ANONYMOUS ++ switch. ++ ++ SET FTP AUTOLOGIN { ON, OFF } ++ If you give this command prior to opening an FTP connection, it ++ controls whether Kermit tries to log you in automatically as ++ part of the connection process. Normally ON, which means the ++ username and password are sent automatically (and prompted for ++ if they are not yet known). When OFF, FTP OPEN connects to the ++ server without logging in. OFF is equivalent to the -n ++ command-line option when using Kermit's FTP command-line ++ personality. ++ ++ FTP USER name [ password [ account ] ] ++ Used to log in to an FTP server to which a connection has been ++ made without autologin, or when autologin failed. If the ++ password is furnished on the command line, it is used; ++ otherwise you are prompted for a password. An account may also ++ be furnished if required by the server; it is not required by ++ Kermit and is not prompted for if omitted. Synonyms: USER, FTP ++ LOGIN. ++ ++ FTP ACCOUNT text ++ Sends an account name to a server that supports accounts. If ++ the server does not support accounts, an error response occurs. ++ If the server does support accounts, the account is accepted if ++ it is valid and rejected if it is not. The account might be ++ used for charging purposes or it might be a secondary password, ++ or it might be used for any other purpose, such as an access ++ password for a particular disk. Servers that support accounts ++ might or might not allow or require the account to be sent ++ prior to login; usually it is sent after login, if at all. ++ Synonym: ACCOUNT. ++ ++ Example: ++ ++set ftp autologin off ; One thing at a time please ++ftp xyzcorp.com ; Try to make the connection ++if fail exit 1 FTP connection failed ; Check that it was made ++ftp user olga secret ; Now log in to the server ++if fail exit 1 FTP login failed ; Check that it worked ++ftp account 103896854 ; Login OK - send account ++if fail echo WARNING - FTP ACCT failed ; Warn if problem ++... ; (have session here) ++bye ; Log out and disconnect ++ ++ The following commands are used to control or get information about ++ the FTP connection. Any particular FTP server does not necessarily ++ support all of them. ++ ++ FTP RESET ++ Terminates a user session but leaves the connection open, ++ allowing a new login via FTP USER. ++ ++ FTP IDLE [ number ] ++ Most FTP servers automatically log you out and and disconnect ++ your session if there has been no activity for a certain amount ++ of time. Use this command to ask the server to set its idle ++ limit to the given number of seconds. Omit the number to ask ++ the server to inform you of its current idle limit. ++ ++ FTP STATUS [ filename ] ++ Asks the FTP server to send information about the current ++ session. The result is a free-format report that might include ++ server identification, username and login time, FTP protocol ++ settings, and file-transfer statistics. If a filename is given, ++ the server is supposed to send detailed information about the ++ file. ++ ++ FTP SYSTEM ++ Asks the FTP server to identify its operating system (Listed in ++ Internet Assigned Numbers, Operating System Names). Examples: ++ UNIX, VMS, VM/CMS, WINDOWS-NT. Unfortunately many variations ++ are allowed (e.g. LINUX-2.0, LINUX-2.2, FREEBSD, ULTRIX, etc, ++ instead of UNIX; WINDOWS-NT-3, WINDOWS-NT-3.5, WINDOWS-NT-3.51, ++ WINDOWS-NT-4, etc). The report might also include other ++ information like "Type L8", "Type I", or "Type A", indicating ++ the file-transfer mode. ++ ++ FTP HELP [ keyword [ keyword [ ... ] ] ++ Asks the server to list the commands it supports. The response ++ is usually cryptic, listing FTP command mnemonics, not the ++ commands used by the client (since the server has no way of ++ knowing anything about the client's user interface). For ++ example, the PUT command is STOR in FTP protocol. If a keyword ++ is given, which should be an FTP protocol command, ++ slightly-more- detailed help is given about the corresponding ++ command (if the FTP server supports this feature). Examples: ++ "ftp help", "ftp help stor". ++ ++ FTP SITE text ++ (Advanced) Sends an FTP SITE (site-specific) command. Usually ++ this means that the FTP server is asked to run an external ++ command with the given arguments. You might be able to find out ++ what SITE commands are available by sending "ftp help site" to ++ the server, but in general the availability of and response to ++ SITE commands is (not surprisingly) site specific. ++ ++ FTP QUOTE text ++ (Advanced) Sends an FTP command in FTP protocol format. Use ++ this command to send commands to the server that the FTP client ++ might not know about. ++ ++ SHOW FTP ++ Lists client (Kermit) FTP settings and information. Also SHOW ++ CONNECTION, SHOW COMMUNICATIONS. ++ ++ HELP FTP [ keyword ] ++ Asks Kermit to list and describe its built-in FTP commands. ++ ++ HELP SET FTP [ keyword ] ++ Asks Kermit to list and describe its built-in SET FTP commands. ++ ++ [ [229]Top ] [ [230]FTP Top ] [ [231]C-Kermit Home ] [ [232]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2. Making Secure FTP Connections ++ ++ Also see: [233]Accessing IBM Information Exchange with Kermit. ++ ++ In the previous section, you can see several examples of traditional ++ insecure authentication: username and password sent across the network ++ in clear text. Of course this is bad practice on at least two counts: ++ (1) storing passwords in files (such as script files) gives access to ++ the target systems to anybody who can obtain read access to your ++ scripts; and (2) sending this information over the network leaves it ++ open to interception by network sniffers or compromised hosts. ++ ++ Because of the increasing need for security on the Internet, FTP ++ servers are beginning to appear that offer secure forms of ++ authentication, in which no information is sent over the network that ++ would allow anyone who intercepts it to usurp your identity and gain ++ your access rights. ++ ++ Kermit provides an equivalent form of FTP security for each type of ++ IETF standard security implemented in Telnet. These include ++ GSSAPI-KERBEROS5, KERBEROS4, Secure Remote Password (SRP), and ++ Transport Layer Security (SSL and TLS). It does not presently include ++ SSL tunneling nor any form of SSH v1 or v2. When Kermit is built with ++ the necessary libraries, secure FTP connections are attempted by ++ default, in which all connections are authenticated and the command ++ and data channels are private. ++ ++ The use of authentication and encryption for FTP connections can be ++ adjusted with the commands listed below, which are available only if ++ your version of Kermit was built with the corresponding security ++ options and libraries: ++ ++ SET FTP AUTHTYPE { AUTOMATIC, GSSAPI-KRB5, KERBEROS4, SRP, SSL, TLS } ++ Specifies an ordered list of authentication methods to be ++ attempted when AUTOAUTHENTICATION is ON. The default list is: ++ GSSAPI-KRB5, SRP, KERBEROS_V4, TLS, SSL. If none of the ++ selected methods are supported by the server, an insecure login ++ is used as a fallback. Note, by the way, that SSL or TLS can be ++ used to secure an anonymous connection. ++ ++ SET FTP AUTOAUTHENTICATION { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether authentication should be negotiated by the FTP ++ OPEN command. Default is ON. Use SET FTP AUTOAUTHENTICATION OFF ++ to force a clear-text, unencrypted connection to FTP servers ++ (such as the one at the Kermit FTP site) that normally would ++ try to negotiate secure authentication and encryption. ++ ++ SET FTP AUTOENCRYPTION { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether encryption (privacy) should be negotiated by the ++ FTP OPEN command, which can happen only if secure ++ authentication is also negotiated. Default is ON. ++ ++ SET FTP AUTOLOGIN { ON, OFF } ++ Tells Kermit whether to try logging in automatically when you ++ make an FTP connection, as opposed to letting you do it "by ++ hand" with the FTP USER command. ++ ++ SET FTP COMMAND-PROTECTION-LEVEL { CLEAR, CONFIDENTIAL, PRIVATE, SAFE ++ } ++ Determines the level of protection applied to the command ++ channel: ++ ++ CLEAR Data is sent in plaintext and not protected against tampering. ++ CONFIDENTIAL Data is encrypted but not protected against tampering. ++ PRIVATE Data is encrypted and is protected against tampering. ++ SAFE Data is sent in plaintext but protected against tampering. ++ ++ The default is PRIVATE. ++ ++ SET FTP CREDENTIAL-FORWARDING { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether end-user credentials are to be forwarded to the ++ server if supported by the authentication method (GSSAPI-KRB5 ++ only). This is often required to allow access to distributed ++ file systems (e.g. AFS.) ++ ++ SET FTP DATA-PROTECTION-LEVEL { CLEAR, CONFIDENTIAL, PRIVATE, SAFE } ++ Tells what level of protection is applied to subsequent data ++ channels. The meanings of the protection-level keywords are the ++ same as for SET FTP COMMAND-PROTECTION-LEVEL. The default is ++ PRIVATE. ++ ++ SET FTP SRP CIPHER name ++ Specifies the cipher to be used for encryption when SRP ++ authentication is in use. The list of possible choices is ++ computed based on the capabilities of the local SRP library and ++ includes NONE plus zero or more of the following: ++ ++ BLOWFISH_ECB CAST5_ECB DES_ECB DES3_ECB ++ BLOWFISH_CBC CAST5_CBC DES_CBC DES3_CBC ++ BLOWFISH_CFB64 CAST5_CFB64 DES_CFB64 DES3_CFB64 ++ BLOWFISH_OFB64 CAST5_OFB64 DES_OFB64 DES3_OFB64 ++ ++ The default is DES3_ECB. ++ ++ SET FTP SRP HASH name ++ Specifies the hash to be used for data protection when SRP ++ authentication is in use. The choices are MD5 and SHA. The ++ default is SHA. ++ ++ Command-line options: ++ ++ -k name ++ Specifies the realm to be used with Kerberos 4 authentication ++ (= SET AUTH K4 REALM name). ++ ++ -f ++ Enables forwarding of Kerberos 5 credentials to the host when ++ using GSSAPI authentication (= SET AUTH K5 FORWARDABLE ON). ++ ++ -x ++ Enables autoencryption (= SET FTP AUTOENCRYPTION ON). ++ ++ -c cipher ++ Specifies the kind of cipher to be used for encryption with SRP ++ authentication. Equivalent to SET FTP SRP CIPHER, with the same ++ choices. If this option is not given, CAST5_CBC is used. ++ ++ -H hash ++ Specifies the hash to be used for encryption with SRP ++ authentication. Equivalent to SET FTP SRP HASH, with the same ++ choices. If this option is not given, SHA is used. ++ ++ -z debug ++ Turns on SSL/TLS debugging. ++ ++ -z secure ++ Requires secure connection. ++ ++ -z certsok ++ Says to accept all certificates without checking validity. ++ ++ -z verify=n ++ Sets certificate verification mode to the given number, n: ++ 0 = no verification ++ 1 = verify certificate if presented ++ 2 = require verification of certificate ++ ++ -z cert=filename ++ Specifies a file containing a client certificate to be ++ presented to the FTP server. ++ ++ -z key=filename ++ Specifies a file containing a private key matching the client ++ certificate. ++ ++ -z !krb4 ++ (nokrb4) Disables the use of Kerberos 4. ++ ++ -z !gss ++ -z nogss ++ Disables the use of GSSAPI - Kerberos 5. ++ ++ -z !srp ++ -z nosrp ++ Disables use of SRP. ++ ++ -z !ssl ++ -z nossl ++ Disables the use of SSL. ++ ++ -z !tls ++ -z notls ++ Disables the use of TLS. ++ ++ Caution: If your FTP connection is secured via AUTH TLS, it is not ++ possible to interrupt a file transfer. This is a limitation of all ++ known FTP servers that support AUTH TLS. ++ ++ Note that when using certain security methods, such as SSL or TLS, you ++ may be prompted to confirm or verify certain actions or conditions, ++ for example, whether to accept self-signed certificates. This can ++ interfere with unattended operation of scripts; see [234]Section 3.10. ++ ++ [ [235]Top ] [ [236]FTP Top ] [ [237]C-Kermit Home ] [ [238]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.3. Setting FTP Preferences FTP preferences can be set globally and ++ persistently with the commands in the following sections; many of ++ these can also be overridden on a per-command basis with switches that ++ have the same name. ++ ++ 3.3.1. Logs, Messages, and Other Feedback ++ ++ You can control the amount of feedback received from your FTP session ++ with the commands in this section. First, you can create a log of your ++ FTP transfers with the following commands: ++ ++ SET TRANSACTION-LOG { VERBOSE, FTP, BRIEF } ++ Selects the log format. VERBOSE is the default, and is ++ described in [239]the manual. FTP chooses a WU-FTPD format, the ++ same as is used by the popular FTP server. BRIEF creates ++ per-file records in comma-separated-list format. For greater ++ detail, see [240]Section 4.17 of the [241]C-Kermit 7.0 Update ++ Notes. ++ ++ LOG TRANSACTIONS filename ++ Records FTP (or Kermit, or any other protocol) uploads and ++ downloads in the given file using the format selected by the ++ most recent SET TRANSACTION-LOG command, if any, or else the ++ default format. ++ ++ FTP screen messages and displays are controlled by the following ++ commands: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER DISPLAY { FULLSCREEN, CRT, SERIAL, BRIEF, NONE, OFF } ++ FTP transfers use Kermit's normal file-transfer display styles. ++ Use this command to choose the desired format; the default on ++ most platforms is FULLSCREEN. The display is automatically ++ disabled if Kermit is running in the background or in batch. ++ BRIEF is always used for command-line initiated transfers ++ (unless suppressed by -q). While a file-transfer is in ++ progress, you can interrupt it in the normal Kermit way by ++ typing one of the following keys or key combinations: ++ X - Cancel current file but go on to the next one (if any). ++ Z - Cancel the entire transfer. Ctrl-L or Ctrl-W - Refresh ++ the file-transfer display (if any). ++ ++ SET FTP DISPLAY { FULLSCREEN, CRT, SERIAL, BRIEF, NONE, OFF } ++ Like SET TRANSFER DISPLAY, but applies only to FTP connections, ++ and does not affect Kermit- or other protocol file transfers. ++ ++ SET QUIET { ON, OFF } ++ This command applies to Kermit in general, not just FTP. OFF by ++ default; when ON, it surpresses most messages from most ++ commands as well as the file-transfer display. ++ ++ SET FTP PROGRESS-MESSAGES { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether Kermit should print locally-generated feedback ++ messages for each non-file-transfer command. ON by default. ++ ++ SET FTP VERBOSE-MODE { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether to display all responses from the FTP server. OFF ++ by default. This shows all responses to all commands, except ++ when the file-transfer display is active, and unless you have ++ SET QUIET ON. When OFF, responses are shown only for commands ++ such as FTP PWD whose purpose is to display a response. ++ ++ SET FTP DEBUG { ON, OFF } ++ Tells whether local client debugging information should be ++ displayed. OFF by default. When ON, the commands that are sent ++ to the server are shown, as well as its responses (even if ++ VERBOSE-MODE is OFF), plus additional informational messages ++ are printed regarding the progress of secure operations. Also, ++ the temporary file created by the [242]MGET command is not ++ deleted so you can see what's in it. ++ ++ Set all of these to OFF when silent running is desired. ++ ++ 3.3.2. Operational Preferences ++ ++ FTP DISABLE new-protocol-feature-name ++ FTP ENABLE new-protocol-feature-name ++ Explained in [243]Section 3.11. ++ ++ SET FTP AUTOLOGIN { ON, OFF } ++ If you give this command prior to opening an FTP connection, it ++ controls whether Kermit tries to log you in automatically as ++ part of the connection process. Normally ON, which means the ++ username and password are sent automatically (and prompted for ++ if they are not yet known). When OFF, FTP OPEN connects to the ++ server without logging in. OFF is equivalent to the -n ++ command-line option when using Kermit's FTP command-line ++ personality. See [244]Section 3.1.4 for usage. ++ ++ SET FTP PASSIVE-MODE { ON, OFF } ++ ON by default, to avoid random TCP port assignment for data ++ connections, which can prevent FTP protocol from working ++ through firewalls and network address translators (for more on ++ these topics, see the [245]Kermit security reference. Set to ++ OFF in case the FTP server does not support passive mode, or in ++ case the client has problems with it (it has been observed, for ++ example, that when using passive mode, the SCO XENIX 2.3.4 ++ TCP/IP stack hangs in the connect() call forever). Synonyms: ++ PASSIVE [ ON ], PASSIVE OFF, PASV [ ON ], PASV OFF. ++ ++ SET FTP SEND-PORT-COMMANDS { ON, OFF } ++ This command determines whether the FTP client sends a new PORT ++ command to the server when accepting incoming data connections ++ (as when not using passive mode.) When PASSIVE-MODE is OFF and ++ SET SEND-PORT is OFF, the port that was originally specified is ++ reused. This is the default behavior for normal FTP clients but ++ it is not compatible with many firewalls. ++ ++ SET FTP CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Whether to translate character sets when transferring files ++ with FTP (explained in [246]Section 3.7). OFF by default. ++ ++ SET FTP SERVER-CHARACTER-SET name ++ Tells Kermit the character set used by the FTP server, UTF-8 by ++ default ([247]Section 3.7). ++ ++ SET FTP SERVER-TIME-OFFSET delta-time ++ Tells Kermit to apply the given [248]delta time to file ++ timestamps provided by the server for its files; for use when ++ (for example) the server does not have its timezone set ++ correctly. ++ ++ SET FTP ERROR-ACTION { PROCEED, QUIT } ++ When transferring a group of files with FTP, and an error ++ occurs with one of the files, Kermit normally goes on the next ++ file. Use SET FTP ERROR-ACTION to QUIT to make Kermit stop the ++ transfer immediately and fail if an error occurs with any ++ single file in the group. Example: you have given Kermit a list ++ of files to send, and one of the files can not be found, or ++ read permission is denied. Note that cancelling a file by ++ typing 'X' during transfer is not considered an error (if you ++ want to cancel the entire transfer, type 'Z' or Ctrl-C). ++ ++ SET FTP PERMISSIONS { AUTO, ON, OFF } ++ When uploading files with PUT or MPUT, this tells whether ++ Kermit should send each file's permissions. The default is OFF, ++ which means not to send permissions, in which case the uploaded ++ file's permissions are set by the FTP server according to its ++ own criteria. ON means to send them, AUTO means to send them ++ only if the client (Kermit) and server are on like platforms ++ (e.g. both UNIX). This command has no effect when downloading, ++ since the FTP protocol does not include a way for the server to ++ inform the client of a file's permissions. Also see [249]FTP ++ PUT /PERMISSIONS. Note that setting permissions after uploading ++ is likely to work (correctly or at all) only when the client ++ and server platforms are alike (e.g. both of them are some form ++ of UNIX). Also note that Windows files don't have permissions. ++ Also see [250]FTP CHMOD. ++ ++ SET FTP DATES { ON, OFF } ++ When downloading files with GET or MGET, this tells whether ++ Kermit should try to set the received file's date from the ++ server's date. FTP DATES is ON by default. Note, however, that ++ FTP protocol does not allow date preservation when uploading. ++ So at best, SET FTP DATES ON can work only when downloading, ++ and then only when the server agrees to furnish file dates. ++ ++ SET FTP FILENAMES { AUTO, CONVERTED, LITERAL } ++ When uploading (sending) files, this tells whether to convert ++ outbound filenames to "common form". This means allowing only ++ one period in a name, uppercasing any lowercase letters, ++ replacing spaces by underscores, etc. AUTOMATIC is the default, ++ meaning LITERAL when client and server are the same type of ++ system (e.g. UNIX) and CONVERTED otherwise. Special case: if ++ the setting is AUTOMATIC and the client is not UNIX and the ++ server identifies itself as UNIX, Kermit uses a less-strict ++ form of conversion, in which lowercase letters are not ++ uppercased and the filename can contain any number of periods, ++ but spaces are still converted to underscore. When receiving, ++ conversion generally means to change all-uppercase names to ++ lowercase and spaces to underscore. ++ ++ SET FTP UNIQUE-SERVER-NAMES { ON, OFF } ++ Applies only to uploads. Tells the server to create new, unique ++ names for incoming files that have the same names as existing ++ files. OFF by default, in which case the server overwrites ++ existing files with new files of the same name. When ON, the ++ server uses its own built-in method for creating new names for ++ incoming files; for example, appending a period (.) and a ++ number to the name. CAUTION: Use this option only if you do not ++ need to refer to the file after it is uploaded, since FTP ++ protocol provides no mechanism for the client to find out what ++ name was assigned by the server. ++ ++ SET FTP COLLISION { ... } ++ When downloading, what to do if an incoming file has the same ++ name as an existing file. Options are the same as for SET FILE ++ COLLISION. If this command is not given, Kermit's regular FILE ++ COLLISION setting is used. If this command is given, it ++ overrides the FILE COLLISION setting for FTP transfers only. ++ See [251]Section 3.6.2 for details. ++ ++ SET FTP TYPE { TEXT, BINARY, TENEX } ++ Changes the default transfer mode. When sending (uploading) ++ files, this command has no effect unless you disable automatic ++ text/binary mode switching ([252]Section 4) with SET FILE SCAN ++ OFF or SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL. When receiving (downloading) ++ files, this command establishes the transfer mode to be used ++ when a filename does not match any of Kermit's text or binary ++ filename patterns, unless you use SET FTP ++ GET-FILETYPE-SWITCHING or SET TRANSFER MODE MANUAL to disable ++ automatic switching, in which case, this command establishes ++ the transfer mode for all downloaded files. In all cases, ++ however, the FTP TYPE can be overridden in any GET or PUT ++ command by including a /TEXT (/ASCII), /BINARY, or /TENEX ++ switch. The FTP TYPE is independent of the Kermit FILE TYPE ++ setting. TENEX is used for sending 8-bit binary files to 36-bit ++ platforms such as TOPS-10, TOPS-20, and TENEX, and getting them ++ back again. Synonym: ASCII = TEXT. Note: there is also an FTP ++ TYPE command, which does what SET FTP TYPE does but also sends ++ a TYPE command to the server immediately if the given type is ++ different from the current one. ++ ++ If you want want specific FTP preference settings to be in effect for ++ all your Kermit FTP sessions, put the desired SET FTP commands in your ++ Kermit customization file (~/.mykermrc in UNIX, K95CUSTOM.INI in ++ Windows). ++ ++ [ [253]Top ] [ [254]FTP Top ] [ [255]C-Kermit Home ] [ [256]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.4. Managing Directories and Files ++ ++ In Kermit, commands for directory and file management can refer to: ++ ++ * The local computer ++ * A remote computer when you have a connection to a Kermit server or ++ IKSD. ++ * A remote computer when you have a connection to an FTP server. ++ ++ (There can also be an HTTP connection, but the commands in this ++ section don't apply to HTTP connections.) ++ ++ Thus in general, each such command comes in three forms: ++ ++ 1. With no prefix in C-Kermit 8.0.200, it refers to the local ++ computer (CD, DIR, etc). In C-Kermit 8.0.201 and later, however, ++ the "locus" switches to automatically to the remote FTP server ++ when you make an FTP connection (see the SET LOCUS description ++ [257]Section 7); thus C-Kermit 8.0.201 acts almost exactly like a ++ regular FTP client when it has an FTP connection, yet still acts ++ like itself on other kinds of connections. ++ 2. With the REMOTE prefix, it is for a Kermit server (REMOTE CD, ++ REMOTE DIR). ++ 3. With the FTP prefix, it's for an FTP server (FTP CD, FTP DIR). ++ 4. Also see [258]Section 3.8, which explains "R-commands" and ++ "L-commands". ++ ++ Kermit's FTP file and directory management commands are as follows. ++ When an R-command is included in the Synonyms list, be sure to read ++ [259]Section 3.8 about rules for use of R-commands. ++ ++ FTP CD [ directory ] ++ Tells the FTP server to change its default (working) directory ++ to the one given, which usually must be expressed in the syntax ++ of the server platform (UNIX, VMS, etc). If the directory is ++ not specified, the result depends on the FTP server -- it might ++ complain that the command is illegal, or it might change to ++ your original login directory. Synonyms: FTP CWD (Change ++ Wording Directory); RCD. ++ ++ FTP CDUP ++ Tells the FTP server to change its default (working) directory ++ to the parent directory of its current one (equivalent to ++ "cd .." in UNIX, or "cd [-]" in VMS). Synonyms: RCDUP, FTP UP. ++ ++ FTP PWD ++ Asks the FTP server to report ("print") its current working ++ directory. Synonym: RPWD. ++ ++ FTP MKDIR directory ++ Asks the FTP server to create the directory whose name is ++ given. In general, the name must be in the syntax of the ++ server's file system, and it must be either absolute (a full ++ pathname) or relative to the server's current (working) ++ directory. This command fails if the directory can't be created ++ for any reason, including that it exists already. Synonym: ++ RMKDIR. ++ ++ FTP RMDIR directory ++ Asks the FTP server to remove the directory whose name is ++ given. The rules are the same as for MKDIR, plus in most cases, ++ the server will not remove any directory unless it is empty. ++ Synonym: RRMDIR. ++ ++ FTP DIRECTORY [ filespec ] [ redirectors ] ++ Tells the FTP server to send a directory listing of the ++ specified files. If no filespec is given, the server lists all ++ files in its current working directory. The results are in ++ whatever format the server chooses to send them. You can use ++ UNIX-like redirectors to send the listing to a file or a ++ pipeline, exactly as with the regular Kermit client/server ++ REMOTE DIRECTORY command ([260]Using C-Kermit, Chapter 11). ++ Synonym: RDIRECTORY. Examples: ++ ++ ftp dir ; Show listing of all files on screen ++ ftp dir *.txt ; List *.txt files on screen ++ ftp dir *.txt > somefile ; Put listing in somefile ++ ftp dir *.txt >> somefile ; Append listing to somefile ++ ftp dir *.txt | sort > somefile ; Put sorted listing in somefile ++ ftp dir | more ; Runs list through "more" ++ ftp dir | sort | more ; Runs list through "sort" and "more" ++ ++ FTP VDIRECTORY [ filespec ] [ redirectors ] ++ "Verbose" directory. This is an alternative FTP DIRECTORY ++ command primarily for use with DECSYSTEM-20 (TOPS-20) FTP ++ servers, which send only filenames when given a DIRECTORY ++ command; the VDIRECTORY command makes them also send file ++ sizes, dates, and attributes. ++ ++ FTP CHECK filespec ++ Asks the FTP server whether the given file exists or, if the ++ filespec contains wildcards, if any files match, and this ++ command succeeds or fails accordingly. ++ ++ FTP MODTIME filename ++ Asks the FTP server, via the not-yet-standard FTP MDTM command, ++ to send the modification date and time of the given file. The ++ response should be a numeric string in the format: ++ yyyymmddhhmmssxxxxx... where yyyy is the year, mm is the month, ++ dd is the day, hh is the hour (0-23), mm is the minute, ss is ++ the second, and xxx... is the optional fraction of the second ++ (0 or more digits). The date and time is expressed in UTC (GMT, ++ Zulu, Zero-Meridian). The result is available programmatically ++ in the [261]\v(ftp_message) variable, and is understandable by ++ Kermit's date-time switches and functions. For example, suppose ++ we want to upload all local files that are newer than a ++ particular file on the server: ++ ++ C-Kermit> ftp modtime signpost ++ C-Kermit> echo \v(ftp_message) ++ 20010807113542.014 ++ C-Kermit> ftp mput /after:\v(ftp_message)GMT * ++ ++ Note that we must append "GMT" to the date-time string to let ++ the /AFTER switch know the time is GMT rather than local. ++ ++ FTP SIZE filename ++ Asks the FTP server to send the size (in bytes) of the given ++ file. The result might vary depending on whether the current ++ FTP TYPE is binary or text ("ascii"). For a reliable byte ++ count, do FTP TYPE BINARY first. The result is available ++ programmatically in the [262]\v(ftp_message) variable. ++ ++ FTP CHMOD permissions filename ++ Tells the FTP server to set the permissions (protection) of the ++ given file to the ones given. The permissions and filename must ++ be given in whatever syntax is required by the server. Example ++ (for a UNIX-based FTP server): ++ ++ ftp chmod 664 oofa.txt ++ ++ Not all servers support this command. For non-UNIX-based ++ servers, you might need to use FTP QUOTE or FTP SITE and the ++ appropriate platform-specific FTP server command. ++ ++ FTP UMASK [ number ] ++ This command is probably specific to UNIX-based servers; it ++ sets the UNIX "umask", which is the default permissions mask ++ for new (in this case, incoming) files. Crudely put, the UNIX ++ umask is an octal representation of a binary number in in which ++ a 1 bit stands for a permission bit that must be 0, and a 0 bit ++ stands for a permission bit that can be 0 or 1 depending on ++ other factors, such as the permissions of the parent directory. ++ Example: "umask 007" requires that new files are created ++ without read/write/execute world permission. If the number is ++ not specified, the server's current umask is reported. ++ ++ FTP RENAME filename newname ++ Asks the FTP server to rename the file whose name is "filename" ++ to "newname". Works only for one file; can not be used with ++ wildcards. The server's interpretation of "newname" can vary ++ (in some cases it must be a filename, in others perhaps it can ++ also be a directory name, in which case if the filename denote ++ a regular file, the file might be moved to the given ++ directory). Some servers might allow files to be renamed ++ ("moved") between physical disks or partitions, others might ++ not. Synonym: RRENAME. ++ ++ FTP DELETE [ switches ] filespec [ filespec [ ... ] ] ++ Tells the FTP server to delete the file or files listed. Each ++ file specification may, but need not, contain wildcard ++ characters to match multiple files. File specifications and ++ wildcard syntax must be those of the server. Any file ++ specifications that contain spaces must be enclosed in braces ++ or doublequotes. FTP DELETE switches are: ++ ++ /ERROR-ACTION: /FILENAMES: /NOBACKUPFILES /QUIET ++ /EXCEPT: /LARGER-THAN: /NODOTFILES /NOPAGE ++ /PAGE /RECURSIVE /SMALLER-THAN: ++ ++ When used with FTP DELETE, the /RECURSIVE switch deletes files ++ but not directories, and furthermore depends on the server ++ providing recursive file lists, which is not the normal ++ behavior. For further details, see the decriptions of these ++ switches in [263]Section 3.6. Synonyms: FTP MDELETE (Kermit ++ makes no distinction between DELETE and MDELETE); RDELETE. ++ ++ FTP TYPE { TEXT, BINARY, TENEX } ++ Tells the FTP server to change its file-transfer type to the ++ one given, immediately. See [264]SET FTP TYPE for details. ++ ++ [ [265]Top ] [ [266]FTP Top ] [ [267]C-Kermit Home ] [ [268]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.5. Uploading Files With FTP ++ ++ Uploading means sending files from the client (Kermit) to the FTP ++ server. The basic command for uploading files with FTP is PUT: ++ ++ FTP PUT [ switches ] [ filespec [ as-name ] ] ++ Uploads (sends) the file or files that match the file ++ specification, which may include wildcards, to the server. If ++ no filespec is given, the names of files to send are taken from ++ the /LISTFILE: file, if any, otherwise from the SEND-LIST, if ++ any. Unless you go out of your way to prevent it, Kermit ++ determines the transfer mode (text or binary) for each file ++ automatically, and switches automatically on a per-file basis. ++ If an as-name is given, the file is sent under that name ++ instead of its own (if an as-name is given with a wildcard ++ filespec, the result is a bit more complicated, and is ++ explained later in this section). ++ ++ Unlike normal FTP clients, Kermit does not prompt you by default (or ++ at all) for each file; it just sends them, just as it does with Kermit ++ protocol. The filespec can be a literal filename or a Kermit pattern, ++ described in: ++ ++ [269]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ ++ Kermit patterns are equivalent to C-Shell patterns and provide a fair ++ amount of flexibility in selecting which files to send, which is ++ augmented by the file-selection switches presented in [270]Section ++ 3.5.1. ++ ++ FTP MPUT [ switches ] filespec [ filespec [ ... ] ] ++ FTP MPUT is just like FTP PUT except it allows you to give more ++ than one file specification, and it does not allow an as-name ++ in the file list. However, as-names can be given to either PUT ++ or MPUT with the /AS-NAME: switch. ++ ++ If a PUT or MPUT command results in one file being uploaded, it ++ succeeds if the file is uploaded completely and fails otherwise. If ++ more than one file is selected for upload, success or failure depends ++ on the [271]FTP ERROR-ACTION setting; if it is PROCEED (the default ++ setting), then the [M]PUT command succeeds if at least one of the ++ files was completely uploaded, and fails otherwise, If FTP ++ ERROR-ACTION is QUIT, the [M]PUT command succeeds if all selected ++ files were uploaded successfully, and fails if any file failed. ++ ++ FTP uploads may be interrupted just like Kermit uploads. While the ++ transfer is in progress, type: ++ ++ X to interrupt the current file and go on to the next file. ++ Z to cancel the current file and all remaining files. ++ ^C (Control-C): Like Z, but might act more quickly. ++ ++ MPUT may be used as in regular FTP clients, but it is not required to ++ send multiple files; in Kermit it is required only if you want to give ++ multiple file specifications. Examples: ++ ++ ftp put oofa.txt ; Send a single file oofa.txt ++ ftp put oofa.txt budget.txt ; Send single file oofa.txt as budget.txt ++ ftp put *.txt ; Send all *.txt files ++ ftp mput *.txt ; Send all *.txt files (same as "put *.txt") ++ ftp mput *.txt foo.bar ; Send all *.txt files plus foo.bar ++ ++ The distinction between PUT and MPUT is important only when more than ++ one filespec is given, just like the distinction between Kermit SEND ++ and MSEND: ++ ++ ftp put oofa.txt budget.txt ; Send oofa.txt AS budget.txt ++ ftp mput oofa.txt budget.txt ; Send oofa.txt AND budget.txt ++ ++ If the source file specification includes any path segments, for ++ example: ++ ++ put /tmp/oofa.txt ++ put subdir/another/andanother/oofa.txt ++ ++ the path portion is stripped from the filename that is sent to the ++ server. However, if an as-name contains a path, it is retained. ++ Examples: ++ ++ ftp put /usr/doc/oofa.txt ; Send as "oofa.txt". ++ ftp put oofa.txt /tmp/oofa.txt ; Send as "/tmp/oofa.txt" ++ ++ The latter example sends the file oofa.txt from your current local ++ directory to the server's /tmp directory. This works only if the ++ server uses the same directory notation that you used in the as-name ++ AND the given directory already exists on the server AND if you have ++ write access to it. ++ ++ Use caution when uploading from a case-sensitive file system, such as ++ UNIX, to a file system that is not case sensitive, such as Windows or ++ VMS. If you have two files in UNIX, AA and aa and upload both of them, ++ the second one will overwrite the first. The only way around this ++ provided by FTP protocol is its "unique server names" feature (SET FTP ++ UNIQUE-SERVER-NAMES or the /UNIQUE switch described below). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.5.1. FTP PUT Switches ++ ++ FTP PUT and MPUT are similar in format and behavior to the regular ++ Kermit SEND and MSEND commands, and they allow most of the same ++ optional switches: ++ ++C-Kermit>ftp put ? Filename, or switch, one of the following: ++ /after: /larger-than: /rename-to: ++ /array: /listfile: /server-character-set: ++ /as-name: /local-character-set: /server-rename-to: ++ /before: /move-to: /simulate ++ /binary /nobackupfiles /smaller-than: ++ /command /nodotfiles /tenex ++ /delete /nofollowlinks /text ++ /dotfiles /not-after: /transparent ++ /error-action: /not-before: /type: ++ /except: /permissions: /update ++ /filenames: /quiet /unique-server-names ++ /filter: /recover ++ /followlinks /recursive ++ ++ Since most of these switches are common to Kermit's SEND and MSEND ++ commands, they described only briefly here. For greater detail see: ++ ++ [272]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 (explanation ++ of switches) ++ [273]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7 ++ (file-transfer switches) ++ ++ First the file-selection switches: ++ ++ /AFTER:date-time ++ /BEFORE:date-time ++ /NOT-AFTER:date-time ++ /NOT-BEFORE:date-time ++ Only send those files modified on or after or before the given ++ date and time. These switches can be combined to select files ++ modified between two date/times. Various date-time formats are ++ accepted; if the date-time contains spaces, it must be enclosed ++ in braces or doublequotes. See ++ [274]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 and ++ [275]Section 8.13 of this document for details about date-time ++ formats. Examples: ++ ++ ftp put /after:{1 jan 2000 0:00:00} * ++ ftp put /after:-5days * ++ ++ /LARGER-THAN:number ++ /SMALLER-THAN:number ++ Only send files larger (smaller) than the given number of bytes ++ (octets). These switches can be combined to select files in a ++ certain size range. ++ ++ /TYPE:{TEXT,BINARY} ++ Only send files that are the given type, which is determined ++ for each file just before sending it by file scanning. BINARY ++ includes TENEX; if you have included a /TENEX switch, or ++ previously given a [SET] FTP TYPE TENEX command, binary files ++ are sent in TENEX, rather than BINARY mode. ++ ++ /[NO]DOTFILES ++ [Don't] include files whose names begin with dot (.). By ++ default, such files are not included unless your filespec ++ explicitly mentions them. ++ ++ /NOBACKUPFILES ++ Don't include files whose names end with .~nnn~, where nnn is a ++ number, e.g. oofa.txt.~27~. These are backup files created by ++ Kermit, EMACS, and other applications. By default, backup files ++ are included. ++ ++ /NOFOLLOWLINKS ++ (UNIX only) Skip over symbolic links rather than following them ++ (default). This applies to wildcard and/or recursive [M]PUTs; ++ if a single filename is given, and it happens to be a symbolic ++ link, the file it points to is sent. ++ ++ /FOLLOWLINKS ++ (UNIX only) Always follow (resolve) symbolic links, even in ++ wildcard or recursive [M]PUTs. Use with caution. Watch out for ++ circular links, endless loops, etc. ++ ++ /EXCEPT:pattern ++ Exception list -- don't send files whose names match the given ++ pattern. See [276]Section 1.5.4 of the [277]C-Kermit 7.0 Update ++ Notes for details. If you want to exclude a directory from a ++ recursive [M]PUT, use /EXCEPT:{dirname/*}. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ Sends the desired files from the current (or given) directory, ++ plus all directories beneath it, including empty directories, ++ replicating the directory structure on the server. No special ++ capabilities are required in the server, but of course your ++ login ID on the server must have the appropriate access and ++ permission to create directories. Recursive PUTs work not only ++ between like platforms (e.g. UNIX to UNIX) but also between ++ unlike ones (e.g. UNIX to VMS or Windows), in which case ++ text-file format differences are handled by Kermit's automatic ++ text/binary mode switching ([278]Section 4) and character-set ++ translation ([279]Section 3.7). Synonym: /SUBDIRECTORIES. ++ ++ /UPDATE ++ Send only files that have changed since last time ([280]Section ++ 3.5.2). ++ ++ /ARRAY:arrayname ++ The "file" to be sent is an array, or a segment of one, rather ++ than a real file. In this case the other selection switches ++ don't apply. The array contents are sent in text mode, and each ++ array element is treated as a line. Example: ++ ++ ftp put /as-name:array.txt /array:&a ++ ++ (or, to send a segment of the array, /array:&a[100:199]). If ++ you don't include an /AS-NAME, a name of "_array_x_" is used ++ (where x is the array letter). If you include this switch, most ++ other switches are meaningless and ignored. ++ ++ /COMMAND ++ The "file" to be sent is the standard output of a command, ++ rather than a real file. It is sent in text or binary mode ++ according to the prevailing FTP TYPE, which can be overridden ++ with a /TEXT or /BINARY switch. Example: Example: ++ ++ ftp put /command /as-name:{userlist} {finger | sort -r} ++ ++ /LISTFILE:filename ++ Tells Kermit to obtain the list of files to be sent from the ++ file whose name is given. This file must contain one file ++ specification (which may be wild) per line. If the list ++ includes files from different directories, such as a recursive ++ listing of a directory tree, the paths are recreated on the ++ server (if possible) if you include the /RECURSIVE switch; ++ otherwise all the files are sent to the current directory on ++ the server. ++ ++ Now the other switches: ++ ++ /AS-NAME:text ++ If a single file is being sent, send it with the given text as ++ its name. If multiple files are being sent, the text must be a ++ template that includes variables such as \v(filename), ++ \v(filenumber), \v(ntime), to allow dynamic creation of each ++ name. The same applies to the as-name field of the FTP PUT ++ command. If this switch is not included (and an as-name is not ++ included as the second filename to PUT), each file is sent with ++ its own name. ++ ++ /BINARY ++ /TEXT ++ /TENEX ++ Forces this upload to take place in the given mode, regardless ++ of the current FTP TYPE setting, and without automatic ++ text/binary switching. /ASCII is a synonym for /TEXT. ++ ++ /FILTER:command ++ Specifies that the file(s) is/are to be passed through the ++ given command or pipeline on their way to the server. Example: ++ ++ ftp put /binary /filter:{gzip -c \v(filename)} /as-name:\v(filename).gz * ++ ++ /TRANSPARENT ++ /LOCAL-CHARACTER-SET:name ++ /SERVER-CHARACTER-SET:name ++ Character-set translation for text files, explained in ++ [281]Section 3.7. ++ ++ /ERROR-ACTION:{PROCEED,QUIT} ++ Overrides the prevailing [282]FTP ERROR-ACTION for the duration ++ of this PUT or MPUT command only. ++ ++ /RECOVER ++ Resume an interrupted transfer where from the point of ++ interruption (explained in [283]Section 3.5.2). Synonym: ++ /RESTART. ++ ++ /DELETE ++ Tells Kermit to delete each source file immediately after, and ++ only if, it has been uploaded completely and successfully. ++ This, in effect, moves the file from the client to the server. ++ ++ /MOVE-TO:directory ++ Tells Kermit to move each source file to the named local ++ directory after, and only if, it has been uploaded completely ++ and successfully. ++ ++ /RENAME-TO:template ++ Tells Kermit to rename each (local) source file according to ++ the given template after, and only if, it has been uploaded ++ completely and successfully. The template works as in /AS-NAME. ++ ++ /SERVER-RENAME-TO:template ++ Tells Kermit to ask the server to rename each file according to ++ the given template as soon as, and only if, it has been ++ received completely and successfully. The template works as in ++ /AS-NAME. Requires write and rename access on the server, so ++ doesn't usually work with (e.g.) anonymous uploads to public ++ incoming areas where the permissions don't allow renaming. ++ Examples: ++ ++ ftp mput /server-rename:\v(filename).ok * ++ Appends ".ok" to each filename on the server when it's ++ finished uploading. ++ ++ ftp mput /as-name:\v(filename).tmp /server-rename:\v(filename) * ++ This is the reverse of the previous example; it uses a ++ temporary name while uploading is in progress and reverts ++ the file to its real name when uploading is complete. ++ ++ ftp mput /as-name:\v(filename) ++ /server-rename:../final/\v(filename) * ++ Moves the file from the working directory to a final ++ directory when the upload is complete, but in this case ++ you have to know the pathname syntax of the server. If ++ the rename fails, the [M]PUT command fails according to ++ the [284]FTP ERROR-ACTION selection. ++ ++ /FILENAMES:{AUTOMATIC,CONVERTED,LITERAL} ++ Overrides the [285]FTP FILENAMES setting for this upload only. ++ ++ /PERMISSIONS:{ON,OFF} ++ Overrides the [286]FTP PERMISSIONS setting for this upload ++ only. ++ ++ /UNIQUE ++ Tells Kermit to tell the server to give [287]unique names to ++ incoming files that would otherwise overwrite existing files ++ that have the same name. This switch conflicts with /UPDATE, ++ /RECOVER, /PERMISSIONS, and /SERVER-RENAME since the client has ++ no way of knowing the name assigned by the server. ++ ++ /QUIET ++ Don't display file-transfer progress or statistics. ++ ++ /SIMULATE ++ Shows which files would be sent without actually sending them. ++ Useful (for example) with /UPDATE (next section). The results ++ are shown in the file-transfer display (if it is not disabled) ++ and in the transaction log (if one is active). Hint: use SET ++ TRANSFER DISPLAY BRIEF. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.5.2. Update Mode ++ ++ When you include the /UPDATE switch, this means to skip sending any ++ file that already exists on the server if the local file's ++ modification date/time is not later than that of the corresponding ++ file on the server. Here is a typical application for update mode: ++ Suppose that on Computer A, you maintain a large set of files (say, a ++ collection of Web pages and graphics images, or the source files for a ++ software application), and you need to keep a parallel copy on another ++ Computer, B. Of course you could upload the entire collection every ++ day: ++ ++ cd source-directory ++ ftp computerb.xyzcorp.com ++ ( authentication details... ) ++ ftp cd target-directory ++ ftp put [ switches ] * ++ ++ But if the total size is large or the network slow, this would be ++ unnecessarily time-consuming. Worse, if other users or sites had to ++ update whenever new files appeared in B's directory, this would cause ++ them unnecessary work. By including the /UPDATE switch: ++ ++ ftp put /update [ other-switches ] * ++ ++ only those files that changed since last time are uploaded. Here's how ++ it works. For each local file that is selected for uploading: ++ ++ * The remote filename is determined in the normal way, according to ++ the [288]FTP FILENAMES setting, /FILENAMES switch, or the as-name, ++ if any. ++ * Kermit sends an MDTM (modification time) command for the ++ corresponding remote filename to the server. ++ * If the server does not understand the MDTM command, the file is ++ sent. ++ * If the server can't find a file with the given name, the file is ++ sent. ++ * If the local file's modification time is later than that of the ++ remote file, the file is sent. ++ * Otherwise -- the remote file exists but its modification time is ++ equal to or earlier than that of the local file -- the file is ++ skipped. ++ ++ All time comparisons take place in Coordinated Universal Time ++ (UTC)([289]1), also known as GMT or Zulu time: Timezone 0; standard ++ time, without daylight savings. ++ ++ WARNING: Some FTP servers, such as Novell NWFTPD.NLM, ignore or ++ misimplement the FTP specification and send local time rather than ++ UTC. ++ ++ Update mode is useful only when always used in the same direction. ++ When you upload (PUT) a file with FTP, the destination file receives ++ the current timestamp on the server's computer, not the original ++ file's timestamp ([290]2). If you try to FTP PUT /UPDATE the same file ++ again, it will be skipped (as expected) since the remote copy is ++ newer. However, if you try to FTP GET /UPDATE the same file ++ ([291]Section 3.6), it will be transferred for the same reason. ++ ++ To check the availability of PUT /UPDATE on a particular connection, ++ issue an FTP MODTIME command for a file that is known to exist on the ++ server. If it succeeds, PUT /UPDATE should work and in that case, you ++ can run a procedure like the one above every day: the first time, it ++ sends all the files; after that, it sends only the ones that changed. ++ If a transaction log is active, a notation is included for any files ++ that are skipped. ++ ++ Notes: ++ 1. Why is Coordinated Universal Time abbreviated UTC? From the ++ [292]National Institute of Standards and Technology FAQ: "In 1970 ++ the Coordinated Universal Time system was devised by an ++ international advisory group of technical experts within the ++ International Telecommunication Union (ITU). The ITU felt it was ++ best to designate a single abbreviation for use in all languages ++ in order to minimize confusion. Since unanimous agreement could ++ not be achieved on using either the English word order, CUT, or ++ the French word order, TUC, the acronym UTC was chosen as a ++ compromise." ++ 2. The Kermit FTP client is unusual in that, when downloading only, ++ it can set the received file's date from the file's date on the ++ server, but this should not affect the update feature. When ++ uploading to an FTP server, however, there is no mechanism for the ++ client to set the date of the uploaded file on the server. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.5.3 Recovery ++ ++ Suppose that while you are uploading a large file over a slow ++ connection, the connection is lost before the entire file is ++ transferred. With most FTP clients, you would have to start over, thus ++ resending the portion of the file that was sent already, and that is ++ already on the server. But Kermit's /RECOVER switch (Synonym: ++ /RESTART) lets you continue an interrupted transfer from the point of ++ failure, thus transferring only the part that wasn't sent already. The ++ prerequisites for recovery are: ++ ++ * The transfer must be in BINARY mode, or else the client and server ++ must reside on like systems (e.g. both on some form of UNIX). ++ * The FTP server must support the SIZE command. ++ ++ Here's how it works. When you include the /RECOVER switch: ++ ++ * Kermit checks for conflicting switches, such as /UPDATE and ++ /UNIQUE; if /RECOVER is given with these switches an error occurs. ++ If /RECOVER is given in other circumstances where it could serve ++ no useful purpose (e.g. with arrays, pipes, or filters), it is ++ ignored. ++ ++ If the switch is accepted, then for each selected file: ++ ++ * If it is not binary (determined by scanning) and the client and ++ server are not on like platforms, recovery is canceled (the entire ++ file is sent). Otherwise: ++ * A SIZE command is sent for the file (using its remote name). If ++ the reply indicates the file was not found, or the SIZE command ++ was not understood, or any other kind of error, recovery is ++ canceled. Otherwise: ++ * A MDTM (modification time) command is sent for the file. If a ++ valid reply is received, and the modification time of the local ++ file is later than that of the remote file, recovery is canceled. ++ Otherwise: ++ * If the sizes of the two files are identical, the file is not sent. ++ Otherwise: ++ * Kermit seeks to the recovery spot in the local file, tells the ++ server to APPEND the data which is about to arrive to the remote ++ file, and then sends the data starting at the recovery point. ++ ++ To safeguard file integrity, recovery is not attempted unless all the ++ preconditions are met. For the widest possible usefulness, APPEND is ++ used rather than RESTART. For stream transfers (the only kind that ++ Kermit supports) the results are the same. ++ ++ By design, the /RECOVER switch can be included with any FTP PUT or ++ MPUT command, even if it specifies a group of files. This allows you ++ to resume an interrupted batch transfer from where it left off. The ++ files that were already completely sent are skipped, the file that was ++ interrupted is recovered, and the remaining files are uploaded. ++ ++ By the way, it doesn't matter how the original partial file was ++ uploaded -- FTP, Kermit, Zmodem, etc: as long as the preconditions are ++ met, it can be recovered with FTP PUT /RECOVER, or for that matter ++ also using Kermit protocol and SEND /RECOVER. ++ ++ A word of caution, however, when the original upload was in text mode ++ with character-set translation ([293]Section 3.7): ++ ++ * If the original upload involved a translation from one single-byte ++ character set to another (e.g. Code Page 850 to Latin-1), recovery ++ is safe if you specify the same translations for the recovery. If ++ you don't, the resulting file will contain a mixture of character ++ sets. ++ * If the original upload involved a translation that changed the ++ size of the file (e.g. from an alphabetic Code Page or Latin ++ Alphabet to Unicode, or vice versa), recovery is NOT safe, even if ++ you specify the same translations. ++ ++ Kermit has no way of knowing anything about the previous upload. As a ++ safeguard, an error occurs if you include /RECOVER and also specify a ++ character-set of UCS2 or UTF8, since recovery can't possibly work in ++ that situation. Otherwise, it's up to you to avoid unsafe recovery ++ operations. ++ ++ [ [294]Top ] [ [295]FTP Top ] [ [296]C-Kermit Home ] [ [297]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6. Downloading Files With FTP ++ ++ Although uploading files with Kermit's FTP client is just as easy and ++ flexible as sending files with Kermit protocol, the same is not always ++ true for downloading because FTP servers lack some of the capabilities ++ of a Kermit server: ++ ++ * If you want to get more than one file, you have to use MGET, not ++ GET, since the underlying FTP protocol is different in the two ++ cases. Kermit can't "autodetect" which one you mean, as it can ++ with PUT and MPUT, since it can't be expected to know the wildcard ++ syntax of the remote platform and/or FTP server (the same is true ++ for all other FTP clients). To complicate matters, FTP protocol ++ now includes two underlying mechanisms (NLST and MLSD) for ++ accomplishing MGET operations and, as explained in [298]Section ++ 3.11, the two behave differently. ++ * Automatic text-binary mode switching is not done by the server. It ++ can be done by the client (Kermit), but in this case it is not ++ based on a file scan (since there is no way for Kermit prescan a ++ server file), but rather on the filename, using C-Kermit 7.0 ++ [299]filename patterns. ++ * Some options that are available with FTP PUT can not be used with ++ FTP [M]GET or don't work the same way: ++ /PERMISSIONS (FTP protocol has no mechanism for this). ++ /[NOT-]BEFORE, /[NOT-]AFTER (because of the timezone problem). ++ /RECOVER works only in binary mode. /RECURSIVE has limited ++ utility. ++ ++ The commands for downloading are: ++ ++ SET FILE DOWNLOAD-DIRECTORY [ directory ] ++ As with Kermit transfers, this command, if given, tells ++ C-Kermit where to store incoming files in the absence of a ++ specific as-name. If not given, incoming files are stored as ++ indicated by the as-name, if any, otherwise in the current ++ directory, just as with Kermit transfers. The more verbose ++ transfer display formats give the full pathname of each ++ received file, and, in case you have trouble finding a ++ downloaded file afterwards, its full path is also listed in the ++ transaction log (if you kept one), and you can also ask Kermit ++ where it went with the [300]WHERE command. ++ ++ SET FTP GET-FILETYPE-SWITCHING { ON, OFF } ++ ON by default, causing Kermit to switch automatically into text ++ or binary mode for each file based on whether its name matches ++ a text pattern or binary pattern. Set this OFF, or use a /TEXT, ++ /BINARY, or /TENEX switch to defeat this feature. Use SHOW ++ PATTERNS to see the current pattern list. ++ ++ [ FTP ] GET [ switches ] filename [ as-name ] ++ Asks the server to send the given file, and if it comes, stores ++ it locally under the given as-name, if any, otherwise under its ++ original name (modified according to the selected filename ++ conversion option), in your download directory, if you have ++ specified one, otherwise in the directory indicated in the ++ as-name, if any, otherwise in your current directory. If you ++ accidentally use a wildcard in the filename ("get *.txt") the ++ server will reply with a message like "File not found" (unless ++ there is a file whose name actually is "*.txt"). If FTP ++ GET-FILETYPE-SWITCHING is ON, and in the absence of any GET ++ switches to override it, the file is transferred in binary mode ++ if it matches any of Kermit's binary name patterns, and in text ++ mode if it matches any of Kermit's text name patterns, and in ++ the prevailing FTP TYPE if it matches none of these patterns. ++ ++ [ FTP ] MGET [ switches ] filespec [ filespec [ filespec [ ... ] ] ] ++ Like GET, but for multiple files. One or more file ++ specifications can be given, and any or all (or none) of them ++ can contain wildcards or can be directory names. The file list ++ may not include an as-name, but you can still give one with the ++ /AS-NAME: switch. ++ ++ In both the FTP GET and MGET commands, any filenames that contain ++ spaces must be enclosed in braces or doublequotes (see [301]Section 5 ++ for details). ++ ++ FTP downloads may be interrupted just like Kermit transfers. While the ++ transfer is in progress, type: ++ ++ * X to interrupt the current file and go on to the next file. ++ * Z (or Control-C) to cancel the current file and all remaining ++ files. ++ ++ Before proceeding, a brief word about temporary files. In FTP ++ protocol, the MGET command works by requesting a file list from the ++ server, and then (internally) issuing a GET command (FTP RETR protocol ++ directive) for each file. The file list returned by the server can be ++ any size at all, so in case it is huge, we don't store it in memory; ++ instead we put it in a temporary file. For troubleshooting purposes, ++ you should be aware of two points: ++ ++ 1. The location of the temporary file is chosen according the TMP or ++ TEMP environment variables. If neither of these variables is ++ defined, you might need to define it. In case there is not enough ++ space on the indicated disk or partition for the server's file ++ list, you might need to either clean up the temporary area, or ++ redefine the environment variable to indicate a different area ++ that has sufficient space. ++ 2. If you want to look at the list yourself, use SET FTP DEBUG ON. ++ This tells Kermit to (a) give you the full pathname of the ++ temporary file at the end of each MGET command, and (b) not to ++ delete it, as it normally does. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.1. FTP GET Switches ++ ++ The following switches are available with FTP GET and MGET: ++ ++ /TEXT ++ Specifies a text-mode transfer. Overrides the global FTP TYPE ++ setting and filename pattern-matching for the duration of the ++ current command only, All files are downloaded in text mode. ++ Synonym: /ASCII. ++ ++ /BINARY ++ Specifies a binary-mode transfer. Overrides the global FTP TYPE ++ setting and filename pattern-matching for the duration of the ++ current command only. All files are downloaded in binary mode. ++ ++ /TENEX ++ Like /BINARY but specifies a special binary transfer mode to be ++ used when getting 8-bit binary files from a 36-bit platform ++ such as TOPS-10, TOPS-20, or TENEX. All files are downloaded in ++ the special binary mode. ++ ++ /RECOVER ++ This instructs Kermit to try to recover an incomplete download ++ from the point of failure. Works only in binary mode, and only ++ if the server supports the (not-yet-standard) FTP "REST" ++ directive. See [302]Section 3.6.3 for details. Synonym: ++ /RESTART. ++ ++ /FILENAMES:{CONVERTED,LITERAL} ++ Overrides the [303]FTP FILENAMES (filename conversion) setting ++ for this download only, forcing incoming filenames to be either ++ converted or taken literally. ++ ++ /AS-NAME:text ++ For GET, this is equivalent to giving an as-name after the ++ filename. For MGET, this is the only way to specify alternative ++ names for the incoming files. With MGET, the /AS-NAME text ++ should (must) contain a Kermit variable, usually \v(filename) ++ or \v(filenumber). Example: ++ ++ mget /text /as-name:\v(filename).new *.c ++ ++ This gets all ".c" files and stores them with " ++ ++ .new" appended to their names. See the [304]C-Kermit 7.0 Update ++ Notes for details. ++ ++ /COMMAND ++ This specifies that the incoming file is to be written to the ++ standard input of a command, rather than to a file. The command ++ name is the as-name from the GET command or the /AS-NAME ++ argument. If you need to refer to the incoming file's name in ++ the command, use \v(filename). See the description of the ++ regular Kermit [305]GET /COMMAND command for details and ++ examples. ++ ++ /QUIET ++ Transfers the files quietly; don't put up a file-transfer ++ display. ++ ++ /ERROR-ACTION:{QUIT,PROCEED} ++ This switch affects only MGET. If an error occurs with a ++ particular file, this tells whether to go on to the next file ++ (PROCEED) or to stop right away and fail (QUIT). The default is ++ PROCEED. ++ ++ The file selection switches are: ++ ++ /EXCEPT:{pattern} or /EXCEPT:{{pattern}{pattern}{...}} ++ Exception list for MGET; skip downloading any file whose name ++ matches any of the given patterns (when using the second ++ format, up to 64 patterns may be specified). [306]CLICK HERE ++ for syntax details. ++ ++ /SMALLER-THAN:number ++ Download only files whose size is smaller than the given number ++ of bytes (octets). Requires that the FTP server support the ++ SIZE or MLSD directive. ++ ++ /LARGER-THAN:number ++ Download only files whose size is greater than the given number ++ of bytes. Requires that the FTP server support the SIZE or MLSD ++ directive. ++ ++ /NOBACKUPFILES ++ During MGET, don't download any files whose names end with ++ backup suffixes (.~n~ where n is a number). ++ ++ /NODOTFILES ++ During MGET, don't download any files whose names begin with ++ period (.). Equivalent to /EXCEPT:{.*}. ++ ++ /LISTFILE:local-filename ++ The given file contains a list of files to GET, one per line. ++ Filenames in the listfile can contain wildcard characters in ++ the syntax of the server. There is no limit on the number of ++ lines in the listfile. ++ ++ /NAMELIST:local-filename ++ If this switch is given, then instead of actually retrieving ++ the selected files, the GET command retrieves a list of the ++ names of the files that would be retrieved, and places it in ++ the specifed file. The resulting file is an ordinary text file, ++ with one filename per line, suitable for reading by a person, ++ or processing by a computer program, including Kermit itself ++ (FOPEN / FREAD / FWRITE / FCLOSE), and as /FILELIST: file. If ++ the filename is omitted or given as "-" (dash, hyphen), the ++ list goes to the screen. NOTE: if you want a copy of the ++ complete list sent by the server, use SET FTP DEBUG ON, perform ++ an MGET, and the temporary file containing the list will be ++ kept rather than deleted (and Kermit tells you its name). ++ ++ /UPDATE, /COLLISION:keyword ++ Explained in [307]Section 3.6.2. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ This means to try to download an entire directory tree, rather ++ than just files from a particular directory. In fact, FTP ++ protocol does not provide a method to request a recursive ++ download (unless the server supports MLSD; see [308]Section ++ 3.11), so this works only if the FTP server does it anyway, ++ without being asked, as some do. In this case, Kermit detects ++ that names in the returned file list contain directory ++ separators, and therefore attempts to create the needed ++ directories as the files arrive. But this can work only if the ++ server is on the same kind of platform as the client, so the ++ pathname syntax can be recognized, and also because the server ++ does not switch between text and binary mode, which would be ++ vital for cross-platform transfers. Use with caution. Synonym: ++ /SUBDIRECTORIES. ++ ++ Even when the server does not provide recursive file lists, ++ [M]GET /RECURSIVE forces Kermit to replicate any directory ++ structure implied or expressed by the server's file list. For ++ example: ++ ++ get somepath/somefile ++ ++ Gets the file named somefile from the server's somepath ++ directory and puts it Kermit's current (or download) directory, ++ whereas: ++ ++ get /recursive somepath/somefile ++ ++ creates the path locally and then puts the file in it. ++ Similarly for MGET: ++ ++ mget */data/* ++ ++ downloads all the files in all the data subdirectories of all ++ the subdirectories of the server's current directory and stores ++ them locally in Kermit's current (or download) directory, ++ whereas: ++ ++ mget /recursive */data/* ++ ++ re-creates the server's directory structure locally. ++ ++ The FTP protocol does not include explicit mechanisms for recursion, ++ so Kermit builds upon what is available. Although an Internet draft ++ describes a mechanism ("MLSD") that would allow protocol-driven ++ recursion, similar to Kermit's File Attribute packets (circa 1984), it ++ has not yet attained RFC or standard status, and servers are not yet ++ widely available that offer this feature. In the meantime, the ++ effectiveness of MGET /RECURSIVE depends on the FTP server ++ implementation. If the server returns a recursive list in response to ++ the standard NLST command (whose behavior is ill-defined), Kermit's ++ FTP MGET /RECURSIVE command uses it to re-create the remote directory ++ tree locally. If the server supports MLSD, C-Kermit 8.0.206 and Kermit ++ 95 2.1 and later are able to sense it automatically and use it, as ++ described below in [309]Section 3.11. ++ ++ The /BEFORE:, /AFTER:, /NOT-BEFORE:, and /NOT-AFTER: switches are not ++ available for downloading because of the confusion with timezones. ++ Would the given times be in the local timezone, the server's timezone, ++ or GMT? The FTP server's directory listings show its own local times ++ but since we don't know what timezone the server is in, there's no way ++ to reconcile our local times with the server's. Similarly, ++ /PERMISSIONS can't be preserved in downloads because FTP protocol ++ provides no means of querying the server for a file's permission. ++ ++ Source-file disposition switches: ++ ++ /DELETE ++ Each file that is downloaded successfully is to be deleted from ++ the server. Requires the appropriate file access rights on the ++ server. ++ ++ /SERVER-RENAME-TO:template ++ Asks the server to rename each (remote) source file immediately ++ after, and only if, it is sent correctly. See [310]PUT ++ /SERVER-RENAME-TO: for details. ++ ++ Destination-file disposition switches: ++ ++ /TO-SCREEN ++ Displays the incoming file on the screen rather than storing it ++ on disk. If this switch is given, the /RENAME-TO and /MOVE-TO ++ switches are ignored, the file-transfer display is suppressed, ++ and the given file(s) is/are shown on the screen. Can be used ++ with /FILTER, e.g. ++ ++ get /text /to-screen /filter:more oofa.txt ++ ++ In fact, you should always use /TO-SCREEN with /FILTER or ++ /COMMAND when the command would result in displaying the ++ incoming file on the screen; otherwise C-Kermit would have no ++ way of knowing to suppress its file transfer display (since it ++ can't be expected to know what the command or filter does). ++ ++ /RENAME-TO:template ++ Each file that is downloaded is to be renamed as indicated if ++ and only if it was received completely and without error. The ++ template can be literal text or can contain variables that are ++ evaluated for each file. For MGET, the text must contain ++ variables; for GET it can be a literal string. The \v(filename) ++ variable contains the name of the current file, so: ++ ++ ftp mget /rename-to:\v(filename).ok * ++ ++ causes each file that is successfully downloaded to have ".ok" ++ appended to its name. For details see [311]Section 4.1 of the ++ [312]C-Kermit 7.0 Update Notes. ++ ++ /MOVE-TO:text ++ Just like /RENAME-TO:, except the text denotes the name of a ++ directory to which successfully downloaded files are to be ++ moved. If the directory does not exist, it is created. ++ ++ The file transfer display does not show the /MOVE-TO or /RENAME-TO ++ value, since the incoming file has not yet been moved or renamed. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.2. Filename Collisions ++ ++ What should happen if an incoming file has the same name as an ++ existing file in the same directory? By default, Kermit's FILE ++ COLLISION setting applies: BACKUP, RENAME, UPDATE, DISCARD, etc, as ++ described in [313]Using C-Kermit. Kermit's default FILE COLLISION ++ setting is BACKUP (rename the existing file and store the incoming ++ file under its own name) and therefore this is also the default FTP ++ collision action. ++ ++ The name under which an incoming file is to be stored is determined as ++ follows: ++ ++ * If an as-name was given, the as-name is used. Otherwise: ++ * If the client and server platforms are alike or [314]FTP FILENAMES ++ is set to LITERAL (or the /FILENAMES:LITERAL switch was given for ++ this download), the incoming filename is used literally. ++ Otherwise: ++ * The incoming filename is converted to a form that is friendly to ++ the local platform. For UNIX, for example, incoming filenames that ++ are all uppercase (as they might be from, say, VMS or an IBM ++ mainframe) are converted to lowercase. ++ ++ If the resulting name coincides with the name of a local file that ++ already exists, we have a filename collision. Collisions are handled ++ according to the currently selected collision action: ++ ++ SET FTP COLLISION { BACKUP, RENAME, UPDATE, DISCARD, APPEND, OVERWRITE ++ } ++ This establishes a filename collision for FTP, separate from ++ the Kermit one. The initial FTP collision setting is inherited ++ from Kermit's FILE COLLISION setting when the first FTP command ++ is given, but subsequent changes to Kermit's FILE COLLISION ++ setting do not affect the FTP COLLISION setting. SHOW FTP tells ++ the current FTP COLLISION setting. ++ ++ FTP GET /COLLISION:{BACKUP,RENAME,UPDATE,DISCARD,APPEND,OVERWRITE} ++ Overrides the current FTP COLLISION action for this download ++ only. ++ ++ FTP GET /UPDATE ++ This is equivalent to GET /COLLISION:UPDATE, and is included ++ for symmetry with PUT /UPDATE ++ ++ FTP GET /UPDATE and /COLLISION:UPDATE mean to download only those ++ files whose modification dates on the server are later than those on ++ the client. Date-time comparisons are done in Coordinated Universal ++ Time (UTC, GMT, ZULU). The command: ++ ++ FTP MGET /COLLISION:APPEND /AS-NAME:newfilename *.* ++ ++ Downloads all matching remote files into a single local file (in ++ whatever order the server sends them). ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.6.3. Recovery ++ ++ Recovery is available for downloads too, but there are some ++ differences from the uploading case described in [315]Section 3.5.3: ++ ++ * The transfer must be in BINARY mode. It can not be in text mode, ++ even if the FTP server is on the same kind of platform as Kermit, ++ and even if there is no character-set translation. The original ++ download must also have been in binary mode. ++ * The FTP server must support the REST ("restart") directive. ++ Unfortunately, this is not a standard command; at this writing, it ++ is described only in an Internet Draft, not an RFC or Internet ++ Standard, but nevertheless it is found in several popular FTP ++ servers, such as [316]ProFTPD. ++ ++ Here's how download recovery works: ++ ++ * Kermit checks for conflicting switches, such as /UPDATE, /COMMAND, ++ or /FILTER. If /RECOVER is given with these switches an error ++ occurs. ++ * The prevailing transfer mode (SET FTP TYPE) must be BINARY. If it ++ is not, the /BINARY switch must have been included with the FTP ++ [M]GET command. ++ ++ If the /RECOVER switch is accepted, then for each selected file: ++ ++ * A SIZE command is sent for the file (using its remote name). If ++ the reply indicates the file was not found, or the SIZE command ++ was not understood, or any other kind of error, recovery is ++ canceled (i.e. the entire file is downloaded). ++ * If the sizes of the two files are identical, the file is not sent. ++ Otherwise: ++ * Kermit sends the REST directive to the server, indicating the size ++ of the local file. If the server responds affirmatively, Kermit ++ opens the local file in append mode and appends the incoming data ++ to it. Otherwise, recovery is canceled and the entire file is ++ downloaded. ++ ++ The /RECOVER switch can be included with any FTP GET or MGET command, ++ even if it specifies a group of files. This lets you resume an ++ interrupted batch transfer from where it left off. The files that were ++ already completely sent are skipped, the file that was interrupted is ++ recovered, and the remaining files are uploaded. BUT... unlike with ++ uploading, where this can be done with any mixture of text and binary ++ files, when downloading, it can only be done if all the files are ++ binary. ++ ++ It doesn't matter how the original partial file was downloaded -- FTP, ++ Kermit, HTTP, Zmodem, etc: as long as the preconditions are met, it ++ can be recovered with FTP [M]GET /RECOVER, or for that matter also ++ with GET /RECOVER (using Kermit protocol). ++ ++ [ [317]Top ] [ [318]FTP Top ] [ [319]C-Kermit Home ] [ [320]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7. Translating Character Sets ++ ++ A possibly unique feature of Kermit's FTP client is its ability to ++ convert character sets when transferring files in text mode, ++ independent of the capabilites of the FTP server, as well as to ++ translate the character sets of filenames regardless of transfer mode. ++ For compatibility with existing FTP clients, and because there is a ++ certain performance penalty, Kermit won't do this unless you ask for ++ it. If you enable this feature, you need to inform Kermit of the ++ character set (to be) used on the server and in some cases (explained ++ below) also the local file character set. This discussion assumes you ++ know a bit about character sets (as you must if you have to use them); ++ see Chapter 16 of [321]Using C-Kermit for a detailed treatment. The ++ Kermit commands for FTP character-set conversion are: ++ ++ SET FTP CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Whether to translate character sets when transferring text ++ files with FTP. OFF by default. Set this to ON to enable ++ character-set translation for subsequent FTP uploads and ++ downloads. ++ ++ SET FTP SERVER-CHARACTER-SET [322]name ++ Text character set (to be) used by the server. Most FTP servers ++ are ignorant of character sets, so all translations are done ++ unilaterally by Kermit's FTP client. This means that when ++ downloading files, you must know in advance the character-set ++ used in the files you are downloading (and in their names). ++ When uploading, you must specify the character-set to which ++ local filenames and text-file contents are to be translated for ++ transmission to the server. If you SET FTP ++ CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION ON but do not specify an FTP ++ SERVER-CHARACTER-SET, [323]UTF8 is used, since this is the new ++ Internet standard international character set; it is upwards ++ compatible with ASCII and it encompasses most written languages ++ and therefore does not favor any particular group of people, as ++ any other default would do. If you SET FTP SERVER-CHARACTER-SET ++ to something (anything) when FTP CHARACTER-SET TRANSLATION is ++ OFF, this also sets the latter ON. ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET [324]name ++ This is the regular Kermit (non-FTP-specific) command for ++ identifying the character set (to be) used in local text files ++ and filenames. ++ ++ TO REITERATE: If you SET FTP CHARACTER-SET TRANSLATION ON but do not ++ specify an FTP SERVER-CHARACTER-SET, outbound text files are converted ++ to UTF-8 and inbound text files are assumed to be UTF-8. If this is ++ not appropriate, be sure to also specify the desired FTP ++ SERVER-CHARACTER-SET. ++ ++ You can use "special" (non-ASCII) characters in filenames in all the ++ client / server file management commands (FTP MKDIR, RMDIR, DIRECTORY, ++ VDIRECTORY, DELETE, etc), and also in file-transfer commands. When ++ giving commands such as FTP DIR (RDIR) and FTP PWD (RPWD), the reply ++ is translated too, so you can read it. In this example, the client and ++ server use entirely different codes to represent the special ++ characters of German: ++ ++ C-Kermit> ftp xyzcorp.de /anonymous ++ C-Kermit> set ftp server-character-set latin1 ++ C-Kermit> set file character-set german ++ C-Kermit> rcd Städte ++ C-Kermit> rpwd ++ "/pub/ftp/Städte is current directory" ++ C-Kermit> rdir ++ -rw-rw---- 1 olaf 54018 Jan 6 17:58 Adenbüttel.txt ++ -rw-rw---- 1 ursula 373 Jan 5 15:19 Aßlar.txt ++ -rw-rw---- 1 gisbert 482 Jan 5 15:20 Blowatz.txt ++ -rw-rw---- 1 gudrun 124 Jan 5 15:19 Böblingen.txt ++ -rw-rw---- 1 olga 14348 Jan 7 14:23 Köln.txt ++ ++ When the client and server file systems use different character sets, ++ you should take care to use only those characters that the two sets ++ share in common when creating filenames or text-file contents. For ++ example, PC code pages contain a lot line- and box-drawing characters, ++ and sometimes "smart quotes", etc, that are not found in ISO standard ++ 8-bit character sets. You should be especially careful to avoid using ++ such characters in filenames. ++ ++ [ [325]C-Kermit Character Sets ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.1. Character Sets and Uploading ++ ++ Kermit's PUT and MPUT commands include full file-scanning ++ capabilities, as described in [326]Section 4. Thus if FTP ++ CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION is ON and your character-set associations ++ are set up appropriately, Kermit automatically switches on a per-file ++ basis between text and binary mode, and for each text file between ++ your chosen 7-bit text character set (e.g. ASCII or ISO 646 German), ++ 8-bit text (e.g. Latin-1 or Japanese EUC), UCS-2, and UTF-8, and ++ converts each of these automatically to the server character-set, and ++ furthermore automatically differentiates between the Little and Big ++ Endian forms of UCS-2, always sending in Big Endian form. ++ ++ WARNING: It is not advisable to use UCS-2 (or any Unicode ++ transformation other than UTF-8) "on the wire", i.e. as a server ++ character set. Most FTP servers are not able to cope with it, since ++ it contains lots of 0 (NUL) characters. If you do use it, Kermit ++ does not translate filenames to or from UCS-2, for reasons well ++ known to C programmers (for example, UNIX APIs assume filename ++ strings are NUL-terminated). [327]UTF-8 is the preferred (and ++ standard) Unicode format for the Internet. ++ ++ FTP character-set translations differ from the regular Kermit ones by ++ not restricting translations to a file-character-set / ++ transfer-character-set pair. You can have Kermit's FTP client ++ translate between any pair of character sets it knows about. You can ++ see the list of supported character sets by typing either of the ++ following: ++ ++ set ftp server-character-set ? ++ set file character-set ? ++ ++ A typical list looks like this ([328]CLICK HERE for an explanation of ++ the names): ++ ++ C-Kermit>set file char ? One of the following: ++ ascii cp869-greek hebrew-7 mazovia-pc ++ british cyrillic-iso hebrew-iso next-multinational ++ bulgaria-pc danish hp-roman8 norwegian ++ canadian-french dec-kanji hungarian portuguese ++ cp1250 dec-multinational iso2022jp-kanji shift-jis-kanji ++ cp1251-cyrillic dg-international italian short-koi ++ cp1252 dutch jis7-kanji spanish ++ cp437 elot927-greek koi8 swedish ++ cp850 elot928-greek koi8r swiss ++ cp852 euc-jp koi8u ucs2 ++ cp855-cyrillic finnish latin1-iso utf8 ++ cp858 french latin2-iso ++ cp862-hebrew german latin9-iso ++ cp866-cyrillic greek-iso macintosh-latin ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Thus you can translate not only between private sets (like PC code ++ pages) and standard ones (like Latin-1) as in Kermit protocol, but ++ also between any given pair of private sets (e.g. CP852 and Mazovia). ++ All conversions go through Unicode as the intermediate character set, ++ resulting in a minimum of character loss, since Unicode is a superset ++ of all other character sets known to Kermit. ++ ++ In addition to the SET commands listed above, the FTP PUT and MPUT ++ commands include switches that apply only to the current command: ++ ++ /LOCAL-CHARACTER-SET:name ++ /SERVER-CHARACTER-SET:name ++ Use these switches to force a particular translation. These ++ switches override the global FTP CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION and ++ SERVER-CHARACTER-SET settings and also character-set ++ differentiation by file scanning for the duration of the PUT or ++ MPUT command. The file scan is still performed, however, to ++ determine whether the file is text or binary; thus these ++ switches do not affect binary files unless you also include the ++ /TEXT switch to force all files to be treated as text. ++ ++ In other words, if you include one or both of these switches with a ++ PUT or MPUT command, they are used. Similarly, the /TRANSPARENT switch ++ disables character-set translation for the PUT or MPUT command despite ++ the prevailing FTP CHARACTER-SET-TRANSLATION and SERVER-CHARACTER-SET ++ settings. ++ ++ When uploading, the FILE CHARACTER-SET setting is ignored unless you ++ have forced Kermit not to [329]scan local files by including a /TEXT ++ or /BINARY switch with your [M]PUT command, or by disabling automatic ++ text/binary switching in some other way. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ 1. Suppose you have a CP852 (East European) text file that you want ++ to upload and store in ISO Latin Alphabet 2 encoding: ++ ftp put /local-char:cp852 /server-char:latin2 magyar.txt ++ 2. Suppose you always want your text files converted to Latin-2 when ++ uploading with FTP. Then put: ++ set ftp server-character-set latin2 ++ in your Kermit customization file, and then you can omit the ++ /SERVER-CHARACTER-SET: switch from your FTP PUT commands: ++ ftp put /local-char:cp852 magyar.txt ++ 3. Now suppose that all the text files on your PC are written in ++ Hungarian, but they have a variety of encodings, and you don't ++ want to have to include the /LOCAL-CHARACTER-SET: switch on every ++ FTP PUT command, or (more to the point) you want to be able to ++ send a mixture of these files all at once. Put these commands in ++ your Kermit customization file: ++ set ftp server-character-set latin2 ; ISO 8859-2 ++ set file default 7-bit-character-set hungarian ; ISO 646 Hungarian ++ set file default 8-bit-character-set cp852 ; PC East European Code Page ++ and now PUT and MPUT will automatically detect and switch among ++ ISO 646 Hungarian, Code Page 852, UTF-8, and UCS-2 encodings, ++ translating each one to Latin-2 for uploading: ++ ftp put *.txt ++ ++ And since binary files are also detected automatically, the latter can ++ be simplified to: ++ ++ ftp put * ++ ++ even when "*" matches a diverse collection of binary and text files, ++ because translations are skipped automatically for binary files. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.2. Character Sets and Downloading ++ ++ The commands and switches are the same as for uploading, but automatic ++ character-set switching works differently, since Kermit can't scan the ++ server files in advance. Instead, the transfer mode (text or binary) ++ is based on the filenames; each name is compared with Kermit's list of ++ text name patterns and binary name patterns. If the name matches a ++ binary pattern (for example, if the filename is oofa.tar.gz and one of ++ the filename patterns is "*.gz"), the file is downloaded in binary ++ mode; otherwise if it matches a text pattern (e.g. oofa.txt matches ++ "*.txt"), it is transferred in text ("ascii") mode. Otherwise, it is ++ transferred in the prevailing FTP TYPE. ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, the pattern lists used with FTP GET are not the same ++ lists used with Kermit transfers, and can not be viewed with SHOW ++ PATTERNS, nor adjusted with ADD and REMOVE TEXT-PATTERNS and ++ BINARY-PATTERNS, or SET FILE TEXT-PATTERNS and BINARY-PATTERNS. ++ Configuration of the FTP patterns list will be added in a future ++ release. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ get /server-char:latin1 /local-char:cp850 Grüße.txt ++ In this command, the filename contains special characters, ++ which you enter using whatever character set your local ++ computer uses, in this case PC Code Page 850 (cp850). The ++ command tells Kermit (in case it didn't know already from its ++ FILE CHARACTER-SET setting) that the local character set is ++ cp850 and the server's character-set is ISO 8859-1 Latin ++ Alphabet 1 (latin1). Kermit translates the filename from cp850 ++ to latin1 and sends the latin1 name to the server. Since it's a ++ text file (matches "*.txt"), its contents are translated to ++ cp850 on arrival, and it is saved with a cp850 name. ++ ++ mget /text /server:latin1 /local:utf8 *.txt ++ This command: ++ ++ + Tells C-Kermit that the server's files are encoded in ISO ++ 8859-1 Latin Alphabet 1. ++ + Tells C-Kermit to translate the incoming files into Unicode ++ UTF-8 for storage. ++ + Asks the server to send all ".txt" files in text mode. ++ ++ mget /server:latin1 /local:utf8 * ++ Tells Kermit to get all files from the server's directory, ++ switching between text and binary mode based on the filename. ++ The names of all the files are translated (to UTF-8 in this ++ case), but contents are translated (also to UTF-8) only for ++ text files. ++ ++ Note that any pair of 8-bit character sets is likely to have some ++ incompatibilities. Any characters in the source file that do not have ++ equivalents in the destination file's character set are converted to ++ question marks. This applies to both filenames and to text file ++ contents. ++ ++ Also note that the server's ability to accept special characters in ++ filenames depends on the particular server. For example: ++ ++ get Grüße.txt ++ ++ works with WU-FTPD, but: ++ ++ mget Grüß*.txt ++ ++ does not. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.7.3. RFC2640 ++ ++ [330]RFC2640, July 1999, specifies a method by which the FTP client ++ and server can negotiate the use of UTF8. However, RFC2640-capable ++ servers are rare to nonexistent at this writing, and in any case you ++ don't need them to be able to transfer text in UTF8. C-Kermit lets you ++ upload and download text files in any character set it knows about, ++ converting to or from any other character set it knows about, without ++ the knowledge, permission, or cooperation of the server, and ++ regardless of its capabilities. ++ ++ [ [331]Top ] [ [332]FTP Top ] [ [333]C-Kermit Home ] [ [334]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.8. FTP Command Shortcuts ++ ++ C-Kermit's FTP client coexists with other C-Kermit functions by ++ requiring the "ftp" prefix for each FTP-related command: FTP OPEN, FTP ++ GET, FTP BYE, and so on. For interactive use, however, this can be ++ rather awkward and sometimes surprising, for example when a GET ++ command starts a Kermit GET rather than an FTP GET. In fact, many ++ Kermit commands might just as easily apply to an FTP connection: GET, ++ PUT (SEND), BYE, and CLOSE. The following command lets you choose how ++ these commands are interpreted: ++ ++ SET GET-PUT-REMOTE { AUTO, KERMIT, FTP } ++ Controls the orientation of GET, PUT, REMOTE and other ++ file-transfer and client/server commands that might apply to ++ either Kermit or FTP. The default setting is AUTO, meaning that ++ these commands apply to FTP if an FTP connection is open, and ++ to Kermit otherwise. KERMIT means they always apply to Kermit, ++ FTP means they always apply to FTP. ++ ++ Here is a complete list of affected commands: ++ ++ Kermit Command FTP Equivalent ++ (none) FTP [ OPEN ] ++ LOGIN FTP USER ++ LOGOUT FTP RESET ++ BYE FTP BYE ++ FINISH FTP BYE ++ CLOSE FTP BYE ++ HANGUP FTP BYE ++ BINARY FTP TYPE BINARY ++ TEXT (or ASCII) FTP TYPE ASCII ++ SEND (or PUT) FTP PUT ++ MSEND (or MPUT) FTP MPUT ++ RESEND FTP PUT /RECOVER ++ CSEND FTP PUT /COMMAND ++ GET FTP GET ++ MGET FTP MGET ++ REGET FTP GET /RECOVER ++ REMOTE HELP (RHELP) FTP HELP ++ REMOTE CD (RCD) FTP CD (CWD) ++ REMOTE PWD (RPWD) FTP PWD ++ REMOTE DIRECTORY (RDIR) FTP DIRECTORY ++ REMOTE DELETE (RDEL) FTP DELETE ++ REMOTE MKDIR (RMKDIR) FTP MKDIR ++ REMOTE RMDIR (RRMDIR) FTP RMDIR ++ REMOTE RENAME (RRENAME) FTP RENAME ++ REMOTE TYPE (RTYPE) FTP TYPE ++ REMOTE EXIT (REXIT) FTP BYE ++ ++ The commands in the right-hand column always access FTP. The commands ++ in the left column can access either Kermit protocol or FTP: ++ ++ * When GET-PUT-REMOTE is set to KERMIT, or to AUTO when there is no ++ FTP connection, the commands in the left-hand column access Kermit ++ protocol, and those right-hand column are required for FTP. ++ * When GET-PUT-REMOTE is set to FTP, or to AUTO when there is an ++ active FTP connection, the commands in the left-hand column access ++ the FTP connection and can not be used to access Kermit protocol. ++ In this case, if you want to be able to use both Kermit protocol ++ and the FTP connection, you must SET GET-PUT-REMOTE KERMIT, and ++ then use the FTP commands in the right-hand column to access the ++ FTP connection. ++ ++ Note that file-management commands such as DIRECTORY, DELETE, CD, PWD, ++ MKDIR, RMDIR, HELP, RENAME, COPY, TYPE, and so on, always apply ++ locally, no matter what kind of connection you have. This is the ++ opposite of most FTP clients, where these commands are intended for ++ the server, and require an "L" prefix for local execution (e.g. "dir" ++ gets a directory listing from the server, "ldir" gets a local ++ directory listing). To illustrate with the CD command and a typical ++ UNIX FTP client: ++ ++ Client Server Change Local Directory Change Remote Directory ++ FTP FTP lcd cd (cwd) ++ Kermit Kermit cd rcd, remote cd ++ Kermit FTP cd ftp cd, rcd, remote cd ++ ++ Also note that not all REMOTE commands are useful with FTP, since FTP ++ servers do not offer the corresponding functions. These include: ++ ++ * REMOTE ASSIGN - FTP servers don't have variables ++ * REMOTE COPY - FTP servers don't copy files ++ * REMOTE HOST - FTP servers don't execute host (shell) commands ++ * REMOTE KERMIT - FTP servers don't execute Kermit commands ++ * REMOTE PRINT - FTP servers don't print files ++ * REMOTE QUERY - FTP servers don't have variables ++ * REMOTE SET - FTP servers don't have Kermit settings ++ * REMOTE WHO - FTP servers don't send user lists ++ ++ Finally note that command shortcuts do not apply to the HELP command. ++ For help about an FTP command, use (for example) "help ftp delete", ++ not "help delete" or "help rdelete". ++ ++ [ [335]Top ] [ [336]FTP Top ] [ [337]C-Kermit Home ] [ [338]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.9. Dual Sessions ++ ++ You can have an FTP session open at the same time as a regular Kermit ++ SET LINE or SET HOST (terminal) session. In this case, the default SET ++ GET-PUT-REMOTE AUTO setting should ensure that all "two-faced" ++ commands like GET, PUT, REMOTE, HANGUP, BYE, etc, apply to the Kermit ++ session, and all commands for the FTP session must include the FTP ++ prefix. To be absolutely certain, you can use SET GET-PUT-REMOTE ++ KERMIT. ++ ++ ftp foo.bar.baz.com ++ if fail ... ++ (log in) ++ set host foo.bar.baz.com ++ if fail ... ++ (log in) ++ ++ Now you have both an FTP and Telnet connection to the same host (of ++ course they could also be to different hosts, and you could also have ++ a direct or dialed serial connection instead of a Telnet connection). ++ Now assuming you have a Kermit server on the far end of the Kermit ++ connection: ++ ++ rcd incoming ; Changes Kermit server's directory (= REMOTE CD) ++ ftp cd incoming ; Changes FTP server's directory ++ put oofa.txt ; Sends a file on the Kermit connection ++ ftp put oofa.txt ; Sends a file on the FTP connection ++ bye ; Shuts down the Kermit connection ++ ftp bye ; Shuts down the FTP connection ++ ++ Note that PUT and SEND are synonyms for both FTP and Kermit ++ connections. ++ ++ You can also establish dual sessions on the Kermit command line: ++ ++ kermit -j host1 -9 host2 ++ ++ This makes a Telnet connection to host1 and an FTP connection to ++ host2. ++ ++ [ [339]Top ] [ [340]FTP Top ] [ [341]C-Kermit Home ] [ [342]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.10. Automating FTP Sessions ++ ++ Most of Kermit's scripting features can be used to make and control ++ FTP sessions: FOR and WHILE loops, IF-ELSE and SWITCH constructions, ++ variables, arrays, built-in functions, and all the rest. You can't use ++ INPUT, MINPUT, OUTPUT, CLEAR, or SCRIPT on an FTP session, but these ++ are not needed since the FTP protocol is well defined. ++ ++ [343]CLICK HERE for an FTP scripting tutorial. ++ ++ 3.10.1. FTP-Specific Variables and Functions ++ ++ The following variable tells whether an FTP connection is open: ++ ++ \v(ftp_connected) ++ 1 if there is an active FTP connection, 0 if there isn't. ++ ++ The FTP OPEN command sets: ++ ++ \v(ftp_host) ++ The host to which the most recent FTP connection was made. ++ ++ \v(ftp_security) ++ The security method negotiated for the current FTP session. The ++ value is "NULL" when no security is used. See [344]3.2. Making ++ Secure FTP Connections. ++ ++ \v(ftp_server) ++ The OS type (UNIX, VMS, etc) of the FTP server host. ++ ++ The FTP USER command (or FTP OPEN /USER:, or FTP with automatic login) ++ sets: ++ ++ \v(ftp_loggedin) ++ 1 if you are logged in to an FTP server, 0 if you are not. ++ ++ The current COMMAND-PROTECTION-LEVEL and DATA-PROTECTION-LEVEL values ++ are reflected in: ++ ++ \v(ftp_cpl) ++ \v(ftp_dpl) ++ The values are "clear", "confidential", "safe" or "private". ++ See [345]3.2. Making Secure FTP Connections. ++ ++ The FTP GET-PUT-REMOTE setting is reflected in: ++ ++ \v(ftp_getputremote) ++ The values are "auto", "ftp", or "kermit". ++ ++ Every FTP command sets the \v(success) variable, as well as the ++ following two FTP-specific variables: ++ ++ \v(ftp_code) ++ The standardized numeric FTP protocol code from the server's ++ response to the last client command, a 3-digit decimal number ++ defined in [346]RFC959. Briefly: ++ ++ 1xx = Positive Preliminary Reply ++ 2xx = Positive Completion Reply ++ 3xx = Positive Intermediate Reply ++ 4xx = Transient Negative Completion Reply ++ 5xx = Permanent Negative Completion Reply ++ ++ \v(ftp_message) ++ The text message, if any, from the server's response to the ++ last client command. If the most recent response had multiple ++ lines, this variable has only the final line. These messages ++ are not standardized and vary in format and content from server ++ to server. Synonym: \v(ftp_msg). ++ ++ FTP file transfers set the regular Kermit transfer status variables: ++ ++ \v(cps) Characters per second of most recent transfer. ++ \v(filespec) File specification used in most recent transfer. ++ \v(fsize) Size of file most recently transferred. ++ \v(tfsize) Total size of file group most recently transferred. ++ \v(xferstatus) Status of most recent transfer (0 = success, 1 = failure). ++ \v(tftime) Elapsed time of most recent transfer, in seconds. ++ ++ During an FTP transfer, the per-file variables are: ++ ++ \v(filename) Name of current file. ++ \v(filenumber) Ordinal file number in group (1, 2, 3, ...) ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.10.2. Examples ++ ++ Let's begin with a simple example showing how to log in, send some ++ files, and log out: ++ ++ define error if fail { ftp bye, stop 1 Error: \%1 } ++ set transact brief ++ log t ++ ftp ftp.xyzcorp.com /anonymous ++ if fail stop 1 Connection failed ++ if not \v(ftp_loggedin) stop 1 Login failed ++ ftp cd incoming ++ error {ftp cd} ++ cd upload ++ error {local cd} ++ ftp put /delete * ++ error {put} ++ ftp bye ++ ++ First we define an error handling macro to be used after the ++ connection is made. Then we set up a brief-format transaction log to ++ keep a record of our file transfers. Then we make a connection to the ++ host and log in anonymously. The "if fail" command checks whether the ++ connection was made. The "if not" command checks whether login was ++ successful. Obviously the script should not continue unless both tests ++ succeed. ++ ++ Next we change to the server's 'incoming' directory and to our own ++ 'upload' directory, and send all the files that are in it (they can be ++ any mixture of text and binary files), deleting each source file ++ automatically after it is successfully uploaded. Each of these ++ operations is checked with the ERROR macro, which prevents the script ++ from continuing past a failure. ++ ++ Finally we close the FTP session with the "bye" command. ++ ++ Just like any other Kermit script, this one can be used in many ways: ++ ++ * It can be stored in a file, and Kermit can be told to TAKE the ++ file. ++ * In UNIX, it can be a "[347]kerbang" script and therefore run ++ directly from the shell prompt or as a cron job. ++ ++ We could have used command shortcuts like "rcd", "put", and "bye", but ++ since they can be ambiguous under certain circumstances, it is better ++ to avoid them in scripts; they are intended mainly for convenience ++ during interactive use. However, if you wish to use the shortcuts in a ++ script, you can do it this way (error handling omitted for brevity): ++ ++ local \%t ; Declare a local temporary veriable ++ assign \%t \v(ftp_getputremote) ; Save current FTP GET-PUT-REMOTE setting ++ set ftp get-put-remote ftp ; Choose FTP orientation ++ ftp xyzcorp.com /anonymous ; Open an FTP connection ++ get oofa.txt ; GET a file ++ put foo.bar ; PUT a file ++ rdel yesterday.log ; Delete a file on the server ++ bye ; Log out and disconnect from server. ++ set ftp get-put-remote \%t ; Restore previous GET-PUT-REMOTE setting ++ ++ Of course, FTP scripts can also be written as macros. This lets you ++ pass parameters such as hostnames, usernames, and filenames to them: ++ ++ define doftpget { ++ if < \v(argc) 4 end 1 Usage: \%0 host user remotefile [ localfile ] ++ ftp \%1 /user:\%2 ++ if fail end 1 FTP OPEN \%1 failed ++ if not \v(ftp_loggedin) end 1 FTP LOGIN failed ++ ftp get {\%3} {\%4} ++ if fail end 1 FTP GET \%3 failed ++ ftp bye ++ } ++ ++ Add this definition to your Kermit customization file, and it will ++ always be available when you start Kermit. This macro lets you ++ download a file with FTP by giving a single command, e.g.: ++ ++ doftpget xyzcorp.com anonymous oofa.txt ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.10.3. Automating Secure FTP Sessions ++ ++ Often when making secure connections, you are prompted interactively ++ for certain information or permission to proceed. These prompts can ++ stop an automated procedure. To avoid them, you must give the ++ appropriate commands to disable them, and/or supply the prompted-for ++ information beforehand. Here are a few hints: ++ ++ * Make sure that SET TAKE ERROR and SET MACRO ERROR are both OFF. ++ This is the default, but in case you have set either one of these ++ ON in your script or initialization file, this makes the script ++ halt on any kind of error. Normally you would want to check each ++ operation for success or failure and take appropriate action. ++ * On SSL and TLS connections, you may be asked whether it is OK to ++ proceed with a connection to server that presents a self-signed ++ certificate. You can use the SET AUTHENTICATION SSL (or TLS) ++ VERIFY or SET AUTH SSL (or TLS) CERTS-OK commands to avoid this ++ prompt by not requesting a certificate from the peer. ++ * (More to be added...) ++ ++ [ [348]Top ] [ [349]FTP Top ] [ [350]FTP Script Tutorial ] [ ++ [351]C-Kermit Home ] [ [352]Kermit Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11. Advanced FTP Protocol Features ++ ++ The remainder of the FTP documention (through the end of Section 3) is ++ new to C-Kermit 8.0.206, but we leave it in black to prevent ++ headaches. Except for titles. ++ * [353]TERMINOLOGY ++ * [354]FEATURE NEGOTIATION ++ * [355]USING MGET: NLST VERSUS MLSD ++ * [356]EXAMPLES ++ * [357]REFERENCES ++ ++ The new releases of [358]C-Kermit (8.0.206) and [359]Kermit 95 (2.1) ++ support new FTP protocol features from RFC 2389 as well as most of ++ what's in the Elz and Hethmon Extensions to FTP Internet Draft (see ++ [360]References). Some of these features, such as SIZE (request a ++ file's size), MDTM (request file's modification time), and REST ++ (restart interrupted transfer) have been widely implemented in FTP ++ clients and servers for years (as well as in the initial release of ++ the Kermit FTP clients). Others such as FEAT and MLSD are rarely seen ++ and are new to the upcoming Kermit releases. TVFS (Trivial Virtual ++ File Store) is supported implicitly, and the UTF-8 character-set is ++ already fully supported at the protocol and data-interchange level. ++ ++ For Kermit users, the main benefit of the new FTP protocol extensions ++ is the ability to do recursive downloads. But the extensions also ++ introduce complications and tradeoffs that you should be aware of. Of ++ course Kermit tries to "do the right thing" automatically in every ++ case for backwards compatibility. But (as noted later) some cases are ++ inherently ambiguous and/or can result in nasty surprises, and for ++ those situations new commands and switches are available to give you ++ precise control over Kermit's behavior, in case the defaults don't ++ produce the desired results. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11.1. Terminology Command-line FTP clients such as Kermit (as well ++ as the traditional FTP programs found on Unix, VMS, ..., even Windows) ++ have commands like PUT, MPUT, GET, MGET, and BYE, which they convert ++ into zero or more FTP protocol commands, such as NLST, RETR, QUIT. For ++ clarity, we'll use "command" to refer to commands given by the user to ++ the FTP client, and "directive" for FTP protocol commands sent by the ++ FTP client to the FTP server. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11.2. Feature Negotiation New FTP protocol features are negotiated ++ by the client sending a FEAT directive and the server responding with ++ a list of (new) features it supports, or else with an error indication ++ if it does not support the FEAT directive at all, in which case the ++ client has to guess which new features it supports (Kermit guesses ++ that it supports SIZE and MDTM but not MLST). Note that the MLST ++ feature includes MLSD, which is not listed separately as a feature. ++ ++ Guessing is nice when it works, but sometimes it doesn't, and some FTP ++ servers become confused when you send them a directive they don't ++ understand, or they do something you didn't want, sometimes to the ++ point of closing the connection. For this reason, Kermit lets you ++ override default or negotiated features with the following new ++ commands: ++ ++ FTP { ENABLE, DISABLE } FEAT ++ Enables or disables the automatic sending of a FEAT directive ++ upon connection to an FTP server. Note that ++ FTP [ OPEN ] /NOINIT also inhibits sending the FEAT directive ++ (and several others) for the connection being OPEN'd, but ++ without necessarily disabling FEAT for subsequent connections ++ in the same Kermit instance. FEAT is ENABLED by default, in ++ which case many FTP servers are likely to reply: ++ ++500 'FEAT': command not understood ++ ++ which is normally harmless (but you never know). (In C-Kermit ++ 8.0.208, this error message is suppressed unless you SET FTP ++ DEBUG ON.) ++ ++ FTP ENABLE { MDTM, MLST, SIZE } ++ Enables the given directive for implicit use by the FTP GET and ++ MGET commands in case it has been disabled or erroneously ++ omitted by the server in its FEAT response. Note: MLSD can be ++ used in the FTP ENABLE and DISABLE commands as a synonym for ++ MLST. YOU MUST GIVE THIS COMMAND AFTER MAKING THE FTP ++ CONNECTION. ++ ++ FTP DISABLE { MDTM, MLST, SIZE } ++ Disables implicit use of the given directive by GET or MGET in ++ case it causes problems; for example, because it makes ++ multifile downloads take too long or the server announces it ++ erroneously or misimplements it. Use DISABLE FEAT before making ++ a connection to prevent Kermit from sending the FEAT directive ++ as part of its initial sequence. Note that disabling FEAT, ++ SIZE, or MDTM does not prevent you from executing explicit FTP ++ FEATURES, FTP SIZE, or FTP MODTIME commands. Also note that ++ disabling SIZE prevents PUT /RESTART (recovery of interrupted ++ uploads) from working. YOU MUST GIVE THIS COMMAND AFTER MAKING ++ THE FTP CONNECTION. ++ ++ To enable or disable more than one feature, use multiple FTP ENABLE or ++ FTP DISABLE commands. The SHOW FTP command shows which features are ++ currently enabled and disabled. ++ ++ FTP FEATURES ++ This command sends a FEAT directive to the server. In case you ++ have been disabling and enabling different features, this ++ resynchronizes Kermit's feature list with the server's. If the ++ server does not support the FEAT directive, Kermit's feature ++ list is not changed. ++ ++ FTP OPTIONS directive ++ Informational only: the server tells what options, if any, it ++ supports for the given directive, e.g. MLST. Fails if the ++ server does not support the OPTS directive or if the directive ++ for which options are requested is not valid. The directive is ++ case-insensitive. ++ ++ FTP SIZE filename ++ Sends a SIZE directive to the server for the given file. The ++ filename must not contain wildcards. The server responds with ++ an error if the file can't be found, is not accessible, or the ++ SIZE directive is not supported, otherwise with the length of ++ the file in bytes, which Kermit displays and also makes ++ available to you in its \v(ftp_message) variable. If the ++ directive is successful, Kermit (re-)enables it for internal ++ use by the GET and MGET directives on this connection. ++ ++ FTP MODTIME filename ++ Works just like the SIZE directive except it sends an MDTM ++ directive. Upon success, the server sends modification ++ date-time string, which Kermit interprets for you and also ++ makes available in its \v(ftp_message) variable. ++ ++ Whenever a SIZE or MDTM directive is sent implicitly and rejected by ++ the server because it is unknown, Kermit automatically disables it. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11.3. Using MGET: NLST versus MLSD When you give an MGET command to ++ an FTP client, it sends a request to the FTP server for a list of ++ files, and then upon successful receipt of the list, goes through it ++ and issues a RETR (retrieve) directive for each file on the list (or ++ possibly only for selected files). ++ ++ With the new FTP protocol extensions, now there are two ways to get ++ the list of files: the NLST directive, which has been part of FTP ++ protocol since the beginning, and the new MLSD directive, which is new ++ and not yet widely implemented. When NLST is used and you give a ++ command like "mget *.txt", the FTP client sends: ++ ++NLST *.txt ++ ++ and the server sends back a list of the files whose names match, e.g. ++ ++foo.txt ++bar.txt ++baz.txt ++ ++ Then when downloading each file, the client sends SIZE (if it wants ++ have a percent-done display) and MDTM (if it wants to set the ++ downloaded file's timestamp to match that of the original), as well as ++ RETR (to retrieve the file). ++ ++ But when MLSD is used, the client is not supposed to send the filename ++ or wildcard to the server; instead it sends an MLSD directive with no ++ argument (or the name of a directory), and the server sends back a ++ list of all the files in the current or given directory; then the ++ client goes through the list and checks each file to see if it matches ++ the given pattern, the rationale being that the user knows only the ++ local conventions for wildcards and not necessarily the server's ++ conventions. So with NLST the server interprets wildcards; with MLSD ++ the client does. ++ ++ The interpretation of NLST wildcards by the server is not ++ necessarily required or even envisioned by the FTP protocol ++ definition (RFC 959), but in practice most clients and servers work ++ this way. ++ ++ The principal advantage of MLSD is that instead of sending back a ++ simple list of filenames, it sends back a kind of database in which ++ each entry contains a filename together with information about the ++ file: type, size, timestamp, and so on; for example: ++ ++size=0;type=dir;perm=el;modify=20020409191530; bin ++size=3919312;type=file;perm=r;modify=20000310140400; bar.txt ++size=6686176;type=file;perm=r;modify=20001215181000; baz.txt ++size=3820092;type=file;perm=r;modify=20000310140300; foo.txt ++size=27439;type=file;perm=r;modify=20020923151312; foo.zip ++(etc etc...) ++ ++ (If the format of the file list were the only difference between NLST ++ and MLSD, the discussion would be finished: it would always be better ++ to use MLSD when available, and the MGET user interface would need no ++ changes. But there's a lot more to MLSD than the file-list format; ++ read on...) ++ ++ The client learns whether the server supports MLSD in FEAT exchange. ++ But the fact that the server supports MLSD doesn't mean the client ++ should always use it. It is better to use MLSD: ++ ++ * On connections where the server imposes a time penalty for every ++ command, e.g. the Red Hat Rawhide server. With MLSD, the client ++ needs to send only one command (RETR) per file, whereas NLST ++ requires three (SIZE, RETR, and MDTM). Suppose there is a ++ 30-second delay for each command and 1000 files are to be fetched; ++ in that case, MLSD saves 60,000 seconds = 1000 minutes = 16 hours ++ and 40 minutes. ++ * For recursive downloads since there is no dependable way to ++ download directory trees with NLST. ++ ++ But it is better to use NLST: ++ ++ * If you want only a couple short files out of a large directory. In ++ this case, NLST is the better choice since the server sends a list ++ of only the files you want, not a list of (say) a million files, ++ which can make a big difference on slow connections. For example, ++ suppose your wildcard matches three files of 1K each, but the ++ million-file listing is 80MB long, and your connection is through ++ a modem. The overhead of using MLSD is practically infinite. ++ * If the server supports wildcarding features not known to the ++ client, but that can be used to achieve desirable effects ++ otherwise unobtainable, such as "[dir...]*.txt" in VMS or AOS/VS ++ "except" clauses. ++ * If you have been given a wildcard string by an FTP site ++ administrator for fetching a specific group of files out of a ++ larger directory, e.g. "mget ck[cuw]*.[cwh] makefile", that is ++ expected to work with any client (an FTP site administrator can't ++ be expected to know the wildcard syntax of every FTP client). ++ ++ But when using MLSD there are complications: ++ ++ * MLSD wants either a blank argument (meaning the current directory) ++ or else the name of a specific directory. The client must not send ++ it a wildcard or a filename. ++ * But if the user's command is "mget xxx", how does the client know ++ whether to send "xxx" in the MLSD directive? It might be the name ++ of a directory on on the server, in which case it should be sent, ++ or it might be the name of a file on the server (or a wildcard), ++ in which case it must not be sent. Since the client knows its own ++ wildcard syntax, then in most cases it would be right to send ++ "MLSD" with no argument if xxx is wild, and to send "MLSD xxx" if ++ it is not. ++ * But suppose the server's file system allows filename characters ++ that correspond with the client's wildcard syntax? For example: ++ "[abc]" could be either a valid VMS directory name or a wildcard ++ pattern used by the FTP client. What should the client do with ++ "mget [abc]"? In this case there must be a way for the user to ++ force sending the MGET argument as the MLSD argument. ++ * If "xxx" is a regular file in the server's current directory, ++ "mget xxx" works with NLST but not with MLSD. ++ ++ To further complicate matters, NLST can (in theory) work just like ++ MLSD: if sent with a blank argument or a directory name, it is ++ supposed to return a complete list of files in the current or given ++ directory, which the client can match locally against some pattern. It ++ is not known if any FTP server or client does this but nevertheless, ++ it should be possible since this behavior can be inferred from RFC ++ 959. ++ ++ In view of these considerations, and given the need to preserve the ++ traditional FTP client command structure and behavior so the software ++ will be usable by most people: ++ ++ 1. The MGET command should produce the expected result in the common ++ cases, regardless of whether NLST or MLSD is used underneath. ++ 2. For anomalous cases, the user needs a way to control whether the ++ MGET argument is sent to the server or kept for local use. ++ 3. At the same time, the user might need a way to send a directory ++ name to the server, independent of any wildcard pattern. ++ 4. The user needs a way to force NLST or MLSD for a given MGET ++ command. ++ ++ By default, Kermit's MGET command uses MLSD if MLST is reported by the ++ server in its FEAT list. When MLSD is used, the filespec is sent to ++ the server if it is not wild (according to Kermit's own definition of ++ "wild" since it can't possibly know the server's definition). If the ++ filespec is wild it is held for local use to select files from the ++ list returned by the server. If MLST is not reported by the server or ++ is disabled, Kermit sends the MGET filespec with the NLST directive. ++ ++ The default behavior can be overridden globally with FTP DISABLE MLST, ++ which forces Kermit to use NLST to get file lists. And then for ++ situations in which MLSD is enabled, the following MGET switches can ++ be used to override the defaults for a specific MGET operation: ++ ++ /NLST ++ Forces the client to send NLST. Example: ++ ++mget /nlst foo.* ++ ++ /MLSD ++ Forces the client to send MLSD (even if MLST is disabled). ++ Example: ++ ++mget /mlsd foo.* ++ ++ /MATCH:pattern ++ When this switch is given, it forces the client to hold the ++ pattern for local use against the returned file list. If a ++ remote filespec is also given (e.g. the "blah" in "mget ++ /match:*.txt blah"), then it is sent as the NLST or MLSD ++ argument, presumably to specify the directory whose files are ++ to be listed. When the /MATCH switch is not given, the MGET ++ filespec is sent to the server if the directive is NLST or if ++ the filespec is not wild. Examples: ++ ++ Command: With NLST: With MLSD: ++ mget NLST MLSD ++ mget *.txt NLST *.txt MLSD ++ mget foo NLST foo MLSD foo ++ mget /match:*.txt NLST MLSD ++ mget /match:*.txt foo NLST foo MLSD foo ++ ++ In other words, the pattern is always intepreted locally unless MGET ++ uses NLST and no /MATCH switch was given. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11.4. Examples ++ ++ 3.11.4.1. Downloading a Single File ++ ++ There are no choices here, just use the FTP GET command. Kermit always ++ sends the RETR directive, and possibly SIZE and/or MDTM. The small ++ advantage of using MLST in this case is outweighed by the risk and ++ effort of coding a special case. ++ ++ 3.11.4.2. Downloading a Group of Files from a Single Directory ++ ++ This case presents tradeoffs, especially on slow connections: ++ ++ * For downloading all or most of the files in a directory, MLSD is ++ better because it eliminates the need to send SIZE and MDTM for ++ each file. No special actions are required in this case; Kermit ++ uses MLSD automatically if the server supports it (unless you have ++ disabled it). ++ * For a small number of files from a large directory, NLST is better ++ because it bypasses downloading of a potentially huge file list ++ prior to the files themselves. If you have a connection to a ++ server that supports MLSD, use the /NLST switch to force NLST: ++ ++mget /nlst t[1234].h ++ ++ * If the server supports MLSD but does not support separate SIZE or ++ MDTM directives, and you need the size and/or timestamp ++ information, MLSD is better; no special actions required. ++ * If the server supports MLSD but does not support the "size" and ++ "modify" facts, but it does support the SIZE or MDTM directives, ++ and you need the size and/or timestamp information, NLST is ++ better. ++ ++ 3.11.4.3. Downloading a Directory Tree ++ ++ MLSD is the only choice for recursive downloads; they rarely, if ever, ++ work with NLST (the few cases where they do work rely on ++ extra-protocol "secret" notations for the NLST argument). No special ++ actions are required to force MLSD when the server supports it, unless ++ you have disabled it. Examples: ++ ++ MGET /RECURSIVE ++ This tells the server to send all files and directories in the ++ tree rooted at its current directory. ++ ++ MGET /RECURSIVE *.txt ++ This tells the server to send all *.txt files in the tree ++ rooted at its current directory. ++ ++ MGET /MLSD /RECURSIVE *.txt ++ Same as the previous example but forces Kermit to send MLSD in ++ case it was disabled, or in case the server is known to support ++ it even though it did not announce it in its FEAT listing. ++ ++ MGET /RECURSIVE /MATCH:*.zip archives ++ Tells the server to send all ZIP files in the tree rooted at ++ its "archives" directory. ++ ++ MGET /RECURSIVE /MATCH:* [abc] ++ The server is running on VMS and you want it to send all the ++ files in the directory tree rooted at [ABC]. But since "[abc]" ++ looks just like a wildcard, you have to include a /MATCH: ++ switch to force Kermit to send "[abc]" as the MLSD argument. ++ ++ In all cases in which the /RECURSIVE switch is included, the server's ++ tree is duplicated locally. ++ ++ Although MLSD allows recursion and NLST does not, the MLSD ++ specification places a heavy burden on the client; the obvious, ++ straightforward, and elegant implementation (depth-first, the one ++ that Kermit currently uses) requires as many open temporary files ++ as the server's directory tree is deep, and therefore client ++ resource exhaustion -- e.g. exceeding the maximum number of open ++ files -- is a danger. Unfortunately MLSD was not designed with ++ recursion in mind. (Breadth-first traversal could be problematic ++ due to lack of sufficient navigation information.) ++ ++ Of course all of Kermit's other MGET switches can be used too, e.g. ++ for finer-grained file selection (by date, size, etc), for moving or ++ renaming files as they arrive, to override Kermit's automatic per-file ++ text/binary mode switching, to pass the incoming files through a ++ filter, to convert text-file character sets, and so on. ++ ++ 3.11.4.4. NLST/MLSD Summary Table ++ ++ Here's a table summarizing MGET behavior when the server supports both ++ NLST and MLSD. /NLST and /MLSD switches are included for clarity to ++ indicate which protocol is being used, and the expected effects. In ++ practice you can omit the /NLST and /MLSD switches and the Kermit ++ client chooses the appropriate or desired protocol as described above. ++ Sample commands presume a Unix file system on the server, but of ++ course the server can have any file system or syntax at all. ++ ++ User's Command FTP Sends Remarks ++ mget /nlst NLST Gets a list of all the files in the server's current ++ and downloads each file. The list includes names only, so Kermit also ++ must send SIZE and MDTM directives if size and timestamp information ++ is required (this is always true of NLST). Sending NLST without an ++ argument is allowed by the RFC959 NLST definition and by the Kermit ++ FTP client, but might not work with other clients, and also might not ++ work with every server. ++ mget /nlst foo NLST foo If "foo" is a directory, this gets a list of ++ all the files from the server's "foo" directory and downloads each ++ file; otherwise this downloads the file named "foo" (if any) from the ++ server's current directory. ++ mget /nlst *.txt NLST *.txt Gets a list of the files in the server's ++ current directory whose names match the pattern *.txt, and then ++ downloads each file from the list. Because we are using NLST, we send ++ the filespec (*.txt) to the server and the server interprets any ++ wildcards. ++ mget /nlst foo/*.txt NLST foo/*.txt Gets a list of the files in the ++ server's "foo" directory whose names match the pattern *.txt, and then ++ downloads each file from the list (server interprets wildcards). ++ mget /nlst /match:*.txt NLST Gets a list of all the files in the ++ server's current directory and then downloads each one whose name ++ matches the pattern *.txt (client interprets wildcards). ++ mget /nlst /match:*.txt foo NLST foo Gets a list of all the files in ++ the server's "foo" directory and then downloads each one whose name ++ matches the pattern *.txt (client interprets wildcards). ++ mget /mlsd MLSD Gets a list of all the files from the server's current ++ directory and then downloads each one. The list might include size and ++ timestamp information, in which case Kermit does not need to send SIZE ++ and MDTM directives for each file (this is always true of MLSD). ++ mget /mlsd foo MLSD foo Gets a list of all the files from the server's ++ "foo" directory (where the string "foo" does not contain wildcards) ++ and then downloads each one. If "foo" is a regular file and not a ++ directory, this command is supposed to fail, but some servers have ++ been observed that send the file. ++ mget /mlsd *.txt MLSD Gets a list of all the files from the server's ++ current directory and then downloads only the ones whose names match ++ the pattern "*.txt". Because we are using MLSD and the MGET filespec ++ is wild, we do not send the filespec to the server, but treat it as ++ though it had been given in a /MATCH: switch and use it locally to ++ match the names in the list. ++ mget /mlsd foo/*.txt MLSD This one won't work because MLSD requires ++ that the notions of server directory and filename-matching pattern be ++ separated. However, the client, which can't be expected to know the ++ server's file-system syntax, winds up sending a request that the ++ server will (or should) reject. ++ mget /mlsd /match:*.txt MLSD Gets a list of all the files from the ++ server's current directory and then downloads only the ones whose ++ names match the pattern "*.txt" (client interprets wildcards). ++ mget /mlsd /match:*.txt foo MLSD foo If "foo" is a directory on the ++ server, this gets a list of all the files from the server's "foo" ++ directory and then downloads only the ones whose names match the ++ pattern "*.txt" (client interprets wildcards). This leaves the server ++ CD'd to the "foo" directory; there's no way the client can restore the ++ server's original directory because MLSD doesn't give that ++ information, and since the client can not be expected to know the ++ server's file-system syntax, it would not be safe to guess. If "foo" ++ is a regular file, MLSD fails. ++ mget /mlsd foo bar MLSD This one is problematic. You're supposed to be ++ able to give MGET a list a filespecs; in this case we name two ++ directories. The client must change the server's directory to "foo" to ++ get the list of files, and then the files themselves. But then it has ++ no way to return to the server's previous directory in order to do the ++ same for "bar", as explained in the previous example. ++ mget /mlsd /match:* [abc] MLSD [abc] Including a /MATCH: switch forces ++ [abc] to be sent to the server even though the client would normally ++ think it was a wildcard and hold it for local interpretation. In this ++ example, [abc] might be a VMS directory name. ++ mget /mlsd /match:* t*.h MLSD t*.h Contrary to the MLSD specification, ++ some MLSD-capable FTP servers do interpret wildcards. This form of the ++ MGET command can be used to force a wildcard to be sent to the server ++ for interpretation. ++ ++ When MLSD is used implicitly (that is, without an /MLSD switch given ++ to force the use of MLSD) and an MGET command such as "mget foo/*.txt" ++ fails, Kermit automatically falls back to NLST and tries again. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.11.5. References ++ ++ 1. Postel, J., and J. Reynolds, File Transfer Protocol (FTP), RFC ++ 959, October 1985: [361]ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc959.txt. ++ 2. Hethmon, P, and R. Elz, Feature negotiation mechanism for the File ++ Transfer Protocol, RFC 2389, August 1998: ++ [362]ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2389.txt. ++ 3. Elz, R, and P. Hethmon, Extensions to FTP, Internet Draft ++ draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-16.txt, September 2002: ++ [363]http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-16 ++ .txt. ++ 4. [364]The Kermit FTP Client (overview). ++ ++ [ [365]Top ] [ [366]FTP Top ] [ [367]C-Kermit Home ] [ [368]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++4. FILE SCANNING ++ ++ A new feature called file scanning is used in various contexts to ++ determine if a file is text or binary, and if it is text, what kind of ++ text. The overhead of file scanning is surprisingly tolerable, usually ++ about a quarter second per file. File scanning is now used instead of ++ filename patterns unless you SET FILE SCAN OFF, which restores the ++ previous behavior. ++ ++ The primary benefit of file scanning is in file transfer. For all ++ practical purposes, now you can stop worrying about whether a file ++ should be sent in binary or text mode, or about sending mixtures of ++ text and binary files in a single operation, or configuring and ++ fine-tuning your lists of binary-file and text-file name patterns: now ++ it all just works. ++ ++ File scanning is done by the file sender, which determines the type of ++ each file before it sends it and informs the receiver (Kermit or FTP ++ server) of the type. File scanning is NOT done by the receiver, ++ because it is the sender's responsibility to determine each file's ++ type, send the file in the right mode, and inform the receiver of the ++ mode. If both transfer partners are capable of this (or any other) ++ form of automatic text/binary mode switching, then files can be sent ++ in both directions with no worries about corruption due to ++ inappropriate transfer mode. (As noted in [369]Section 3, FTP servers ++ don't do this, so this discussion does not apply when using Kermit to ++ download from an FTP server.) ++ ++ The rest of this section is mainly for the curious. If you don't read ++ it and simply accept all defaults, every file you send should go in ++ the appropriate mode automatically. As always, however, for ++ character-set translation to work for 7- and 8-bit character-set ++ files, the appropriate SET FILE CHARACTER-SET command(s) must have ++ been executed to identify their encoding (Kermit's default file ++ character-set is neutral ASCII except on platforms like HP-UX or ++ DG/UX, where the default file character-set is known). And of course, ++ receiving is another matter -- obviously the other Kermit must also ++ send each file in the appropriate mode. ++ ++ Scanning is more reliable than filename patterns simply because ++ filenames are not reliable indicators of the file's contents. Classic ++ examples include ".doc" files, which are binary if Microsoft Word ++ documents but text on most other platforms, and ".com" files, which ++ are binary on DOS and Windows but text on VMS. Anyway, nobody knows ++ the naming conventions (if any) of all the applications (and persons!) ++ on your computer. Scanning, on the other hand, determines each file's ++ type by inspecting its contents rather than just looking at its name. ++ ++ Also, file patterns -- even when they work as intended -- categorize ++ each file only as text or binary, whereas file scanning can make finer ++ distinctions: ++ ++ BINARY ++ Binary data, not to be converted in any way. Examples include ++ binary machine code (executable programs), graphics images ++ (GIF, JPG, etc), compressed files (Z, GZ, etc), archives and ++ packages (ZIP, TAR, RPM, etc), object files and libraries (OBJ, ++ DLL, etc). ++ ++ 7-BIT TEXT ++ Text encoded in a 7-bit character set such as ASCII or one of ++ the ISO 646 national versions. Kermit has no way to tell which ++ character is used, only that it's 7-bit text. Typical examples ++ include program source code, README files, Perl or Kermit ++ scripts, plain-text email, HTML, TeX, and various textual ++ encodings of binary files: Hex, Base64, etc. When sending such ++ files, the FILE DEFAULT 7BIT-CHARACTER-SET is used as the file ++ character-set, and then the appropriate transfer character set ++ is chosen from the associations list (ASSOCIATE, SHOW ++ ASSOCIATIONS). ++ ++ 8-BIT TEXT ++ Text encoded in an 8-bit character set such as Latin-1, ++ Latin-2, Latin/Hebrew, Latin/Cyrillic, KOI8, HP-Roman8, JIS X ++ 0208, Code Page 437, or Code Page 1252. Again, Kermit has no ++ way of knowing which particular set is in use, only that it's ++ 8-bit text. When sending such files, the FILE DEFAULT ++ 8BIT-CHARACTER-SET is used as the file character-set, and then ++ the appropriate transfer character set is chosen from the ++ associations list. ++ ++ UCS2 TEXT ++ Unicode in its basic form, 16 bits (2 octets) per character. ++ When sending such files, UCS2 is the file character-set and the ++ byte order is identified automatically; the appropriate ++ transfer character set is chosen from the associations list. ++ Normally this would be UTF8. UTF-16 is not supported yet; ++ Kermit's Unicode translations are restricted to Plane 0, the ++ Base Multilingual Plane (BMP). ++ ++ UTF8 TEXT ++ Unicode in its 8-bit transformation format. When sending such ++ files, UTF8 is the file character-set; the appropriate transfer ++ character set is chosen from the associations list, normally ++ UCS2 or UTF8. ++ ++ File scanning is available in UNIX C-Kermit, in K-95, and to a limited ++ extent, in VMS C-Kermit (full scanning is problematic in VMS because ++ even plain-text files might contain binary record-format information). ++ The relevant commands are: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER MODE { AUTOMATIC, MANUAL } ++ Tells whether the file-transfer mode (text or binary) should be ++ set by automatic or "manual" means. AUTOMATIC is the default, ++ which allows any of the automatic methods that are enabled to ++ do their jobs: FILE SCAN, FILE PATTERNS, peer recognition, etc. ++ MANUAL lets you control the transfer mode with the SET FILE ++ TYPE commands. As always, /TEXT and /BINARY switches on your ++ file-transfer commands override all other methods; if you give ++ one of these switches, scanning is not done. SHOW TRANSFER ++ displays the current TRANSFER MODE setting. ++ ++ SET FILE SCAN { ON [ number ], OFF } ++ Turns this feature on and off. It's ON by default. When OFF, ++ the previous rules apply (SET FILE PATTERNS, etc). When ON is ++ given, you can also specify a number of bytes to be scanned. ++ The default is 49152 (= 48K). If a negative number is given, ++ the entire file is scanned, no matter how big, for maximum ++ certainty (for example, a PostScript file that appears to be ++ plain text might include an embedded graphic past the normal ++ scanning limit). SHOW FILE displays the current FILE SCAN ++ setting. ++ ++ SET FILE DEFAULT 7BIT-CHARACTER-SET name ++ Tells the 7-bit character-set to use if scanning identifies a ++ 7-bit text file, e.g. GERMAN. SHOW FILE displays the current ++ SET FILE DEFAULT settings. So does SHOW CHARACTER-SETS. ++ ++ SET FILE DEFAULT 8BIT-CHARACTER-SET name ++ Tells the 8-bit character-set to use if scanning identifies an ++ 8-bit text file, e.g. LATIN1. SHOW FILE and SHOW CHARACTER-SET ++ display this. ++ ++ ASSOCIATE FILE-CHARACTER-SET fcs tcs ++ When sending files and a file character-set (fcs) is identified ++ by scanning, this tells C-Kermit which transfer character-set ++ (tcs) to translate it to. It also allows C-Kermit to set the ++ appropriate transfer character-set automatically whenever you ++ give a SET FILE CHARACTER-SET command. ++ ++ ASSOCIATE TRANSFER-CHARACTER-SET tcs fcs ++ When receivinging files and a file arrives whose transfer ++ character-set (tcs) is announced by the sender, this command ++ tells C-Kermit which file character-set (fcs) to translate it ++ to. It also allows C-Kermit to set the appropriate file ++ character-set whenever you give a SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET ++ command. ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET name ++ When given for a 7-bit set, also sets FILE DEFAULT ++ 7BIT-CHARACTER-SET to the same set. When given for an 8-bit ++ set, also sets FILE DEFAULT 8BIT-CHARACTER-SET to the same set. ++ If an ASSOCIATE FILE-CHARACTER-SET command has been given for ++ this set, also sets the corresponding transfer character-set. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /XFERMODE [ filespec ] ++ Performs a file scan of the given files, listing the result for ++ each file. If FILE SCAN is OFF but PATTERNS are ON, the result ++ shown according to the current FILE TEXT-PATTERNS and ++ BINARY-PATTERNS, and are restricted to (B) and (T). When FILE ++ SCAN is ON, the results are: ++ ++ (B) Binary ++ (T)(7BIT) Text: 7-bit ++ (T)(8BIT) Text: 8-bit ++ (T)(UTF8) Text: Unicode UTF8 ++ (T)(UCS2BE) Text: Unicode UCS2 Big Endian ++ (T)(UCS2LE) Text: Unicode UCS2 Little Endian ++ ++ So you can use DIR /XFER to get a preview of how each file in a ++ selected group will be transferred. Everything to the right of ++ the (B) or (T) is new. If FILE SCAN is OFF, you only get the ++ (B) or (T) as before. ++ ++ Note: Big and Little Endian refer to the ordering of bytes ++ within a computer word. Big Endian architecture is standard and ++ is used on most non-PC computers. Little Endian architecture is ++ used on PCs. ++ ++ To illustrate file-transfer with scanning, suppose you have a ++ directory containing a mixture of text and binary files, and each text ++ file can be 7-bit German ISO 646, 8-bit Latin-1, or Unicode in any of ++ the following forms: UCS2 Little Endian, UCS2 Big Endian, or UTF8 ++ ([370]UTF-16 is not supported yet). Assuming all the built-in defaults ++ are in effect, the following three commands do the job: ++ ++ set file char german ; This sets the default for 7-bit text files ++ set file char latin1 ; This sets the default for 8-bit text files ++ send * ++ ++ Each file is sent in the appropriate mode (text or binary), with text ++ files converted to the appropriate transfer character-set and labeled ++ so the receiver can convert them according to its own local ++ conventions. ++ ++ By the way, what if you want to inhibit character-set translation but ++ still allow automatic text/binary mode switching? Previously, you ++ could simply SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT. But now with file ++ scanning, the file and transfer character-sets are set automatically ++ per file. A new command was added for this purpose: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER TRANSLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Enables and disables file-transfer character-set translation. ++ It is enabled by default. ++ ++ When TRANSFER TRANSLATION is OFF but FILE SCAN is ON, files are still ++ scanned to see if they are text or binary, but no character-set ++ translation is done when they text: only the normal record-format ++ conversion. ++ ++ Like all SET commands, SET TRANSFER TRANSLATION is global and ++ persistent. You can also force a particular file-transfer command ++ (SEND, MSEND, GET, RECEIVE, TRANSMIT, etc) to not translate without ++ affecting the global translation settings by including the new ++ /TRANSPARENT switch, e.g. ++ ++ send /transparent oofa.txt ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 8.0.206, SET TRANSFER CHARACTER-SET TRANSPARENT implies ++ SET TRANSFER TRANSLATION OFF. ++ ++ File scanning is also used in the TYPE command. The source file type ++ and character set are determined as above, and then the file is ++ automatically converted to your display character-set, line by line. ++ In Kermit 95, the display character-set is Unicode, perhaps converted ++ to your current console code page; in other versions of C-Kermit, it ++ is your current file character-set. Thus if you have the following set ++ appriately: ++ ++ SET FILE CHARACTER-SET (necessary in Unix but not K95) ++ SET FILE DEFAULT 7BIT CHARACTER-SET ++ SET FILE DEFAULT 8BIT CHARACTER-SET ++ ++ then you should be able to TYPE any text file and see something ++ reasonable. For example, in Unix, if your DEFAULT 7BIT-CHARACTER-SET ++ is ITALIAN and your DEFAULT 8BIT-CHARACTER-SET is LATIN1, and your ++ FILE CHARACTER-SET is LATIN1, you can TYPE an Italian ISO 646 file, a ++ Latin-1 file, or any kind of Unicode file, and have it translated ++ automatically to Latin-1 for your display. ++ ++ In the GUI version of Kermit 95, you can see mixtures of many ++ different scripts if the file is UTF8 or UCS2: Roman, Cyrillic, ++ Hebrew, Greek, Armenian, Georgian, etc, all on the same screen at ++ once. ++ ++ File scanning also adds a new criterion for file selection, i.e. to ++ select only text (or binary) files. Several commands now include a new ++ switch, /TYPE:{BINARY,TEXT,ALL}. BINARY means select only binary ++ regular files (not directories). TEXT means select only text files. ++ ALL means don't scan; select all files. Examples: ++ ++ SEND /TYPE:BINARY *.* ++ Sends only binary files, skipping over text files. ++ ++ NOTE: File scanning is NOT done when using external protocols (because ++ the external protocol programs, such as sz, are processing each file, ++ not Kermit). ++ ++ DIRECTORY /TYPE:TEXT ++ Lists only text files but not binary files. ++ ++ DELETE /TYPE:BINARY foo.* ++ Deletes all foo.* files that are regular binary files but does ++ not delete any text files. ++ ++ CHMOD /TYPE:BINARY 775 * ++ (UNIX) Changes the permissions of all binary files to 775. ++ ++ When FILE SCAN is OFF and FILE PATTERNS are ON, behavior is as before ++ with PATTERNS ON, but with some improvements: ++ ++ * Pathnames are now stripped prior to pattern matching. ++ * Backup suffixes (like .~3~) are stripped prior to pattern ++ matching. ++ ++ [ [371]Top ] [ [372]Contents ] [ [373]C-Kermit Home ] [ [374]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++5. FILE AND DIRECTORY NAMES CONTAINING SPACES ++ ++ Prior to the introduction of the graphical user interface (GUI), it ++ was inconceivable that file or directory names could contain spaces, ++ because space is a field delimiter in all command languages. GUIs, ++ however, use dialog boxes for filenames, so there is never any ++ question of distinguishing a filename from adjacent fields -- because ++ there are no adjacent fields -- and therefore it has become quite ++ common on computers that have GUIs to have file and directory names ++ composed of multiple words. Of course this poses problems for command ++ shells and other text-oriented programs. ++ ++ Most command shells address these problems by allowing such names to ++ be enclosed in doublequotes, e.g.: ++ ++ cd "c:\Program Files" ++ ++ C-Kermit previously used braces for this: ++ ++ cd {c:\Program Files} ++ ++ which was not what most people expected. And even when braces were ++ used, Kermit had difficulties with completion, file menus, and so ++ forth, within braced fields. ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 allows either doublequotes or braces to be used for ++ grouping: ++ ++ send "this file" ++ send {this file} ++ rename "this file" "that file" ++ rename {this file} "that file" ++ rename "this file" {that file} ++ cd {Program Files} ++ cd "Program Files" ++ ++ Note that the doublequotes or brackets must enclose the whole file or ++ directory specification: ++ ++ "c:\My Directory" ++ ++ not: ++ ++ c:\"My Directory" ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, you can also use completion on these filenames, in ++ which case Kermit supplies the quotes (or braces) automatically. ++ Example (in which the current directory contains only one file whose ++ name starts with "th" and its full name is "this file" (without the ++ quotes, but with the space)): ++ ++ cat th ++ ++ Kermit repaints the filename field like this: ++ ++ cat "this file" ++ ++ That is, it backspaces over the original "th" and then writes the ++ filename in doublequotes. ++ ++ If completion is only partial, Kermit still supplies the quotes, but ++ in this case also beeps. To continue the filename, you must first ++ backspace over the closing quote. The closing quote is supplied in ++ this case to make sure that you can see the spaces, especially if they ++ are trailing. For example, if the current directory contains two files ++ whose names start with "th", and their fill names are "this file" and ++ "this other file": ++ ++ cat th ++ ++ Kermit prints: ++ ++ cat "this " ++ ++ If it didn't print the closing quote, you would probably wonder why it ++ was beeping. ++ ++ Also, if you begin a filename field with a doublequote or opening ++ brace, now you can use completion or get ?-help; this was never ++ possible before. ++ ++ C-Kermit>type "thi? Input file specification, one of the following: ++ this file this other file ++ C-Kermit>type "thi_ ++ ++ [ [375]Top ] [ [376]Contents ] [ [377]C-Kermit Home ] [ [378]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++6. OTHER COMMAND PARSING IMPROVEMENTS ++ ++ 6.1. Grouping Macro Arguments ++ ++ Doublequotes now can be used in macro invocations to group arguments ++ containing spaces, where previously only braces could be used: ++ ++ define xx show args ++ xx one "this is two" three ++ ++ Result: ++ ++ Macro arguments at level 0 (\v(argc) = 4): ++ \%0 = xx ++ \%1 = one ++ \%2 = this is two ++ \%3 = three ++ ++ Also, you can now quote braces and quotes in macro args (this didn't ++ work before). Examples: ++ ++ xx "{" ; The argument is a single left brace ++ xx {"} ; The argument is a doublequote character ++ ++ In case this new behavior interferes with your scripts, you can ++ restore the previous behavior with: ++ ++ SET COMMAND DOUBLEQUOTING OFF ++ ++ 6.2. Directory and File Name Completion ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 also includes better completion for directory names, e.g. ++ in the CD command. If the name typed so far uniquely matches a ++ directory name, it is completed (as before), but now if the directory ++ contains any subdirectories, completion is partial (allowing you to ++ supply additional path segments without backspacing); otherwise it is ++ complete. ++ ++ Completion has also been improved for file and directory names that ++ contain not only spaces (as described above) but also "metacharacters" ++ such as asterisk (*) and tilde (~): now the field is repainted if ++ necessary. For example, if the current directory contains only one ++ file whose name contains "blah", then in: ++ ++ type *blah ++ ++ "*blah" is replaced by the filename. In earlier releases, the part ++ typed so far was left on the command line (and in the history buffer), ++ so even when the original command worked, the recalled version would ++ not. Similarly for ~ (the nearly-universal Unix notation for ++ username): ++ ++ type ~olga/x ++ ++ is repainted as (e.g.): ++ ++ type /users/home/olga/x(Beep) ++ ++ Speaking of command history, the new SHOW HISTORY command shows your ++ command history and recall buffer. SAVE COMMAND HISTORY saves it into ++ a file of your choice. ++ ++ 6.3. Passing Arguments to Command Files ++ ++ The method for passing arguments to command files has been improved. ++ Prior to C-Kermit 7.0 there was no provision for doing this. In ++ C-Kermit 7.0, the TAKE command was changed to allow arguments to be ++ given after the filename: ++ ++ take commandfile arg1 arg2 ... ++ ++ This was accomplished by replacing the current \%1, \%2, etc, with the ++ given arguments, since a new set of macro argument variables is ++ created only when a macro is executed, not a command file. It is much ++ more intuitive, however, if arguments to command files worked like ++ those to macros: the command file sees the arguments as its own \%1, ++ \%2, etc, but the caller's variables are not disturbed. C-Kermit 8.0 ++ accomplishes this by automatically creating an intermediate temporary ++ macro to start the command file (if any arguments were given), thus ++ creating a new level of arguments as expected. ++ ++ 6.4. More-Prompting ++ ++ The familiar --more?-- prompt that appears at the end of each ++ screenful of command-response output now accepts a new answer: G (Go) ++ meaning "show all the rest without pausing and asking me any more ++ questions". P (Proceed) is a synonym for G. ++ ++ 6.5. Commas in Macro Definitions ++ ++ As noted in the [379]C-Kermit manual, comma is used to separate ++ commands in a macro definition. Even when the macro is defined on ++ multiple lines using curly-brace block-structure notation without ++ commas, the definition is still stored internally as a comma-separated ++ list of commands. Therefore special tricks are needed to include a ++ comma in a command. The classic example is: ++ ++ define foo { ++ (some command) ++ if fail echo Sorry, blah failed... ++ } ++ ++ This would result in Kermit trying to execute a "blah" command. This ++ could always be handled by enclosing the text in braces: ++ ++ define foo { ++ (some command) ++ if fail echo {Sorry, blah failed...} ++ } ++ ++ but doublequotes (more intuitive) should have worked too. Now they do: ++ ++ define foo { ++ (some command) ++ if fail echo "Sorry, blah failed..." ++ } ++ ++ 6.6. Arrow Keys ++ ++ As of version 8.0.201, C-Kermit on most platforms lets you access the ++ command history buffer with arrow keys, just as you always could with ++ control characters. The restrictions are: ++ ++ 1. Only Up and Down arrow keys are accepted. ++ 2. Only 7-bit ANSI arrow-key sequences are understood (ESC followed ++ by [ or uppercase letter O, followed by uppercase letter A or (up) ++ B (down). ++ ++ This change was made to facilitate command recall in Linux-based PDAs ++ that don't have a Control key, or at least not one that's easily (or ++ always) accessible, such as the Sharp Zaurus SL5500. ++ ++ [ [380]Top ] [ [381]Contents ] [ [382]C-Kermit Home ] [ [383]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++7. NEW COMMANDS AND SWITCHES ++ ++ See [384]Section 4 for more about file scanning and the /TYPE: switch. ++ ++ ASK[Q] [ /TIMEOUT:number /QUIET /DEFAULT:text ] variable [ prompt ] ++ The new optional /TIMEOUT: switch for ASK and ASKQ causes the ++ command to time out and and fail if no response is given within ++ the specified number of seconds, 1 or greater (0 or less means ++ no timeout, wait forever). This works just like SET ASK-TIMER, ++ except its effect is local to the ASK command with which it is ++ given and it does not disturb the global ask timer setting. The ++ new /QUIET switch tells Kermit not to print an error message if ++ the ASK or ASKQ command times out waiting for a response. ++ ++ Version 8.0.211 adds the /DEFAULT:text switch for ASK-Class ++ commands (ASK, ASKQ, and GETOK). This lets you supply a default ++ answer in case the user supplies an empty answer or the ++ /TIMEOUT: switch was included and the time limit expired ++ without an answer. In both these cases, the command succeeds. ++ ++ CAT filename ++ Equivalent to TYPE /NOPAGE. ++ ++ CDUP ++ Changes Kermit's local working directory to the parent of the ++ current one. Equivalent to "cd .." in UNIX or Windows, "cd [-]" ++ in VMS, "cd ^" in AOS/VS, etc; in other words, it's a ++ platform-independent way of moving one level up in a directory ++ tree. ++ ++ CHMOD [ switches ] permission files ++ UNIX only. Sets file permissions for one or more files or ++ directories. The permission must be given as an octal number, ++ e.g. 664, 755. Switches: /DIRECTORIES, /FILES, /NOLIST, /PAGE, ++ /DOTFILES, /LIST, /NOPAGE, /RECURSIVE, /TYPE:{TEXT,BINARY,ALL}, ++ /SIMULATE. The /TYPE: switch allows selection of only text or ++ binary files. For example, if you have a mixture of source ++ files and executables, you can use "chmod /files /type:text ++ 664" to give owner/group read/write and world read permission ++ to the text files, and "chmod /files /type:binary 775" to give ++ the same plus execute permission to the executables. Use ++ /SIMULATE to see which files would be affected, without ++ actually changing their permissions. ++ ++ CLEAR KEYBOARD-BUFFER ++ Flushes any as-yet unread characters from the keyboard input ++ buffer. Useful for flushing typeahead in scripts. ++ ++ CONTINUE ++ When given at an interactive command prompt that was reached by ++ issuing a PROMPT command (described in this section) from a ++ script, this command returns to the script, continuing its ++ execution at the command after the PROMPT command. In this ++ context, CONTINUE is simply a more-intuitive synonym for END. ++ ++ COPY, RENAME, and TRANSLATE ++ These commands now work on file groups if the target filename ++ is a directory, e.g. "copy oofa.* ..", "rename * ~olga/tmp/" ++ ++ COPY /APPEND source destination ++ The source file specification can now include wildcards, in ++ which case all of the source files that match will go into the ++ destination file in alphabetical order by name. ++ ++ DELETE /ASK ++ Asks permission to delete each file before deleting it. In ++ C-Kermit 7.0, the answers were "yes" (or "ok") and "no". ++ C-Kermit 8.0 adds "go" (meaning, delete all the rest without ++ asking) and "quit" (cancel the DELETE command and return to the ++ prompt). ++ ++ DELETE /DIRECTORIES ++ Deletes not only files but also directories. ++ ++ DELETE /RECURSIVE ++ Deletes all files that match the given file specification in ++ the current (or given) directory and all directories beneath ++ it. ++ ++ DELETE /SUMMARY ++ Prints only the number of files deleted and total size freed, ++ without listing each file. ++ ++ DELETE /TREE ++ Shorthand for DELETE /RECURSIVE /DIRECTORIES /DOTFILES/. ++ Equivalent to Windows DELTREE or Unix "rm -Rf". If no file ++ specification is given, the contents of the current directory, ++ plus all of its subdirectories and their contents, are deleted. ++ ++ DELETE /TYPE:BINARY ++ Delete only regular binary files (requires FILE SCAN ON). ++ ++ DELETE /TYPE:TEXT ++ Delete only regular text files (requires FILE SCAN ON). ++ ++ DIRECTORY [ switches ] [ filespec [ filespec [ filespec ... ] ] ] ++ The DIRECTORY command now accepts more than one file ++ specification; e.g. "directory moon.txt sun.doc stars.*". ++ ++ DIRECTORY /NORECURSIVE xxx ++ If xxx is a directory name, forces listing of the directory ++ itself rather than its contents. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /FOLLOWLINKS xxx ++ (UNIX only) Tells the DIRECTORY command to follow symbolic ++ links. This not the default because it can cause endless loops. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /NOFOLLOWLINKS xxx ++ (UNIX only) Tells the DIRECTORY command not to follow symbolic ++ links, but rather, merely to list them. This is the default. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /OUTPUT:filename ++ Sends the results of the DIRECTORY command to the given file. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /SUMMARY ++ Prints only the number of directories and files and the total ++ size, without listing each file. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /TYPE:{TEXT,BINARY} ++ Shows only files of the selected type, based on file scan. ++ ++ DIRECTORY /XFERMODE ++ Now shows results of file scan (see [385]Section 4). ++ ++ FOPEN [ switches ] channel filename ++ ++ As of version 8.0.211, FOPEN allows /dev/tty as a filename in ++ Unix-based operating systems. ++ ++ FREAD /TRIM ++ (8.0.211) Trims any trailing blanks or tabs from the item (such ++ as a line of text) that it has read. ++ ++ FREAD /UNTABIFY ++ (8.0.211) Converts Horizontal Tab characters to the appropriate ++ number of spaces, based on VT100-like tab stops ++ (1,9,17,25,...). ++ ++ GREP [ switches ] pattern files ++ Similar to Unix grep command: displays file lines that match ++ the given [386]pattern. Switches: ++ ++ /COUNT[:variable] ++ Don't show the matching lines, just tell how many lines ++ match. If a variable name is specified, the count is ++ stored in the given variable. ++ ++ /DOTFILES ++ Include files whose names begin with dot. ++ ++ /LINENUMBERS ++ Show line numbers of matching lines. ++ ++ /NAMEONLY ++ only list the names of files that contain matching lines, ++ but not the lines themselves. ++ ++ /NOBACKUP ++ Skip backup files. ++ ++ /NOCASE ++ Ignore alphabetic case while pattern matching. ++ ++ /NODOTFILES ++ skip files whose names start with dot (period). ++ ++ /NOLIST ++ Suppress output but set SUCCESS or FAILURE according to ++ search result. ++ ++ /NOMATCH ++ Look for lines that do not match the pattern. ++ ++ /NOPAGE ++ Don't pause between screens of output. ++ ++ /OUTPUT:filename ++ Write results into the given file. ++ ++ /PAGE ++ Pause between screens of output. ++ ++ /RECURSIVE ++ Search files in subdirectories too. ++ ++ /TYPE:{TEXT,BINARY} ++ Search only files of the specified type. ++ ++ Synonyms: FIND, SEARCH. ++ ++ GETOK /TIMEOUT:n /QUIET /DEFAULT:text ++ The new /QUIET switch instructs GETOK, when given a timeout, ++ not to print an error message if it times out. As of 8.0.211, a ++ default answer can be supplied (see ASK). ++ ++ HEAD [ switches ] filename ++ Equivalent to TYPE /HEAD [ other-switches ] filename. ++ ++ HELP DATE ++ Explains date-time formats, including timezone notation and ++ delta times. ++ ++ HELP FIREWALLS ++ Explains the firewall negotiation capabilities of your version ++ of Kermit. ++ ++ KCD [ symbolic-directory-name ] ++ Changes Kermit's working directory to the named symbolic ++ directory, such as such as exedir, inidir, startup, download, ++ or and home. Type "kcd ?" for a list of symbolic directory ++ names known to your copy of Kermit, or give the new ORIENTATION ++ command for a more detailed explanation. If you give a KCD ++ command without a directory name, Kermit returns to its "home" ++ directory, which is determined in some way that depends on the ++ underlying operating system, but which you can redefine with ++ the (new) SET CD HOME command. Your home directory is shown by ++ SHOW CD and it's also the value of the \v(home) variable. ++ ++ LICENSE ++ Displays the C-Kermit license. ++ ++ L-commands ++ When Kermit has a connection to a Kermit or FTP server, file ++ managment commands such as CD, DIRECTORY, and DELETE might be ++ intended for the local computer or the remote server. C-Kermit ++ 8.0.200 and earlier always executes these commands on the local ++ computer. If you want them executed by the remote server, you ++ have to prefix them with REMOTE (e.g. REMOTE CD) or use special ++ R-command aliases (e.g. RCD = REMOTE CD, RDIR = REMOTE DIR, ++ etc). But this feels unnatural to FTP users, who expect ++ unprefixed file management commands to be executed by the ++ remote server, rather than locally. C-Kermit 8.0.201 adds ++ automatic locus switching to present an FTP-like interface for ++ FTP connections and the normal Kermit interface for Kermit ++ connections, and a SET LOCUS command (described below) to ++ control whether or how this is done. For when LOCUS is REMOTE, ++ a new set of commands was added for local management: LCD ++ (Local CD), LDIR (Local DIR), etc. These are described below ++ under SET LOCUS. ++ ++ MORE filename ++ Equivalent to TYPE /PAGE. ++ ++ ORIENTATION ++ Displays symbolic directory names and the corresponding ++ variable names and values. The symbolic names, such as exedir, ++ inidir, startup, download, and home, can be used as arguments ++ to the new KCD command. ++ ++ PROMPT [ text ] ++ For use in a macro or command file: enters interactive command ++ mode within the current context ([387]Section 8.1). If the ++ optional text is included, the prompt is set to it. The text ++ can include variables, functions, etc, as in the SET PROMPT ++ command. They are evaluated each time the prompt is printed. ++ Unlike the SET PROMPT command, the text argument applies only ++ to the current command level. Thus you can have different ++ prompts at different levels. ++ ++ REMOTE SET MATCH { DOTIFILE, FIFO } { ON, OFF } ++ Allows the client to tell the server whether wildcards sent to ++ the server should match dot files (files whose names begin with ++ period) or FIFOs (named pipes). See SET MATCH. ++ ++ SET ATTRIBUTE RECORD-FORMAT { ON, OFF } ++ Allows control of the Kermit's Record-Format attribute. Set ++ this to OFF in case incoming file are refused due to unknown or ++ invalid record formats if you want to accept the file anyway ++ (and, perhaps, postprocess it to fix its record format). ++ ++ SET CD HOME [ directory ] ++ Specifies the target directory for the CD and KCD commands, ++ when they are given without an argument, and also sets the ++ value of the \v(home) variable. ++ ++ SET EXIT HANGUP { OFF, ON } ++ Normally ON, meaning that when Kermit exits, it also explicitly ++ hangs up the current SET LINE / SET PORT serial port according ++ to the current SET MODEM TYPE and SET MODEM HANGUP METHOD, and ++ closes the port device if it was opened by Kermit in the first ++ place (as opposed to inherited). SET EXIT HANGUP OFF tells ++ Kermit not to do this. This can't prevent the operating system ++ from closing the device when Kermit exits (and it's a "last ++ close") but if the port or modem have been conditioned to ++ somehow ignore the close and keep the connection open, at least ++ Kermit itself won't do anything explicit to hang it up or close ++ it. ++ ++ SET FILE EOF { CTRL-Z, LENGTH } ++ Specifies the end-of-file detection method to be used by ++ C-Kermit when sending and receiving text files, and in the TYPE ++ and similar text-file oriented commands. The normal and default ++ method is LENGTH. You can specify CTRL-Z when handling CP/M or ++ MS-DOS format text files, in which a Ctrl-Z (ASCII 26) ++ character within the file marks the end of the file. ++ ++ SET FILE LISTSIZE number ++ Allocates space for the given number of filenames to be filled ++ in by the wildcard expander. The current number is shown by ++ SHOW FILE. If you give a command that includes a filename ++ containing a wildcard (such as "*") that matches more files ++ that Kermit's list has room for, you can adjust the list size ++ with this command. ++ ++ SET FILE STRINGSPACE number ++ Allocates space for the given amount of filename strings for ++ use by the wildcard expander. The current number is shown by ++ SHOW FILE. The number is the total number of bytes of all the ++ file specifications that match the given wildcard. ++ ++ If you need to process a bigger list of files than your computer ++ has memory for, you might be able use an external file list. The ++ Kermit SEND and the FTP PUT and GET commands accept a /LISTFILE: ++ switch, which gives the name of a file that contains the list of ++ files to be transferred. Example for UNIX: ++ ++ !find . -print | grep / > /tmp/names ++ ftp put /update /recursive /listfile:/tmp/names ++ ++ SET LOCUS { AUTO, LOCAL, REMOTE } ++ Added in C-Kermit 8.0.201. Sets the locus for unprefixed file ++ management commands such as CD, DIRECTORY, MKDIR, etc. When ++ LOCUS is LOCAL these commands act locally and a REMOTE (or R) ++ prefix (e.g. REMOTE CD, RCD, RDIR) is required to send file ++ management commands to a remote server. When LOCUS is REMOTE, ++ an L prefix is required to issue local file management commands ++ (e.g. LCD, LDIR). The word LOCAL can't be used as a prefix ++ since it is already used for declaring local variables. LOCUS ++ applies to all types of connections, and thus is orthogonal to ++ SET GET-PUT-REMOTE, which selects between Kermit and FTP for ++ remote file-transfer and management commands. The default LOCUS ++ is AUTO, which means we switch to REMOTE whenever an FTP ++ connection is made, and to LOCAL whenever a non-FTP connection ++ is made, and switch back accordingly whenever a connnection is ++ closed. So by default, Kermit behaves in its traditional manner ++ unless you make an FTP connection, in which case it acts like a ++ regular FTP client (but better :-) LOCUS applies to the ++ following commands: ++ ++ Unprefixed Remote Local Description ++ CD (CWD) RCD LCD Change (Working) Directory ++ CDUP RCDUP LCDUP CD Up ++ PWD RPWD LPWD Print Working Directory ++ DIRECTORY RDIR LDIR Request a directory listinga ++ DELETE RDEL LDEL Delete (a) file(s) ++ RENEME RREN LREN Rename a file ++ MKDIR RMKDIR LMKDIR Create a directory ++ RMDIR RRMDIR LRMDIR Remove a directory ++ ++ SET MATCH { DOTIFILE, FIFO } { ON, OFF } ++ Whether C-Kermit filename patterns (wildcards) should match ++ filenames that start with dot (period), or (Unix only) FIFOs ++ (named pipes). The defaults are to skip dotfiles in Unix but ++ match them elsewhere, and to skip FIFOs. Applies to both ++ interactive use and to server mode, when the server receives ++ wildcards, e.g. in a GET command. Also see REMOTE SET MATCH. ++ ++ SET OPTIONS DIRECTORY /DOTFILES ++ Now works for server listings too (UNIX only). Give this ++ command prior to having Kermit enter server mode, and then it ++ will show files whose names begin with dot (period) when sent a ++ REMOTE DIRECTORY command. ++ ++ SET QUIET ON ++ (as well as the -q command-line option) Now applies also to: ++ ++ + SET HOST connection progress messages. ++ + "Press the X or E key to cancel" file-transfer message. ++ + REMOTE CD response. ++ + REMOTE LOGIN response. ++ ++ SET RECEIVE PERMISSIONS { ON, OFF } ++ Tells C-Kermit whether to set the permissions of incoming files ++ (received with Kermit protocol) from the permissions supplied ++ in the file's Attribute packet (if any). Normally ON. Also see ++ SET SEND PERMISSIONS. ++ ++ SET ROOT directory ++ Like UNIX chroot, without requiring privilege. Sets the root ++ for file access, does not allow reference to or creation of ++ files outside the root, and can't be undone. ++ ++ SET SEND PERMISSIONS { ON, OFF } ++ Tells C-Kermit whether to include file permissions in the ++ attributes it includes with each file when sending with Kermit ++ protocol. Also see SET RECEIVE PERMISSIONS. ++ ++ SET TCP { HTTP-PROXY, SOCKS-SERVER } /USER:name /PASSWORD:text ++ These commands now allow specification of username and ++ password. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL . . . ++ (See [388]Section 12.) ++ ++ SET TRANSFER MESSAGE [ text ] ++ Sets an initial text message to be displayed in the ++ file-transfer display. The transfer message is automatically ++ deleted once used, so must be set each time a message a ++ desired. Any variables in the message are evaluated at the time ++ the SET command is given. If the optional text is omitted, any ++ transfer message that is currently set is removed. Synonym: SET ++ XFER MSG. SHOW TRANSFER displays it if it has been set but not ++ yet used. ++ ++ SHOW COMMUNICATIONS ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, SHOW COMMUNICATIONS, when given in remote mode ++ (i.e. before any connection has been established), tells the ++ typical dialout device name for the particular platform on ++ which it's running (e.g. TXA0: for VMS, or /dev/cua0p0 for ++ HP-UX). On Unix platforms, it also tells the name of the ++ lockfile directory. This way, you have an idea of what the SET ++ LINE device name should look like, and if the SET LINE command ++ fails, you know the name of the directory or device that is ++ protected against you. ++ ++ SHOW VARIABLES [ name [ name [ ... ] ] ] ++ In C-Kermit 8.0.201 you can request values of a list of ++ built-in (\v(xxx)) variables. Each name is a pattern, as ++ before, but now it a free pattern rather than an anchored one ++ (explained in [389]Section 8.12) so now "show var date time" ++ shows the values of all variables whose names include the ++ strings "date" or "time". ++ ++ TAIL [ switches ] filename ++ Equivalent to TYPE /TAIL [ other-switches ] filename. ++ ++ TRANSMIT /NOECHO [ other switches ] filename ++ The /NOECHO switch is equivalent to giving the command SET ++ TRANSMIT ECHO OFF prior to the TRANSMIT command, except the ++ switch affects only the command with which it was given and ++ does not affect the prevailing global setting. ++ ++ TRANSMIT /NOWAIT [ other switches ] filename ++ The /NOWAIT switch is equivalent to giving the command SET ++ TRANSMIT PROMPT 0 prior to the TRANSMIT command, except the ++ switch affects only the command with which it was given and ++ does not affect the prevailing global setting. ++ ++ TRANSMIT /NOWAIT /NOECHO /BINARY [ other switches ] filename ++ When the TRANSMIT command is given with the /NOWAIT, /NOECHO, ++ and /BINARY switches, this activates a special "blast the whole ++ file out the communications connection all at once" mode that ++ Kermit didn't have prior to version 8.0. There has been ++ increasing demand for this type of transmission with the advent ++ of devices that expect image (e.g. .JPG) or sound (e.g. .MP3) ++ files as raw input. The obvious question is: how does the ++ receiving device know when it has the whole file? This depends ++ on the device, of course; usually after a certain amount of ++ time elapses with nothing arriving, or else when Kermit hangs ++ up or closes the connection. ++ ++ TYPE /CHARACTER-SET:name ++ Allows you to specify the character set in which the file to be ++ typed is encoded. ++ ++ TYPE /NUMBER ++ Adds line numbers. ++ ++ TYPE /OUTPUT:filename ++ Sends the results of the TYPE command to the given file. ++ ++ TYPE /TRANSLATE-TO:name ++ Used in conjunction with TYPE /CHARACTER-SET:xxx; allows you to ++ specify the character set in which the file is to be displayed. ++ ++ TYPE /TRANSPARENT ++ Used to disable character-set translation in the TYPE command, ++ which otherwise can take place automatically based on file ++ scanning, even when /CHARACTER-SET and /TRANSLATE-TO switches ++ are not given. ++ ++ VOID text ++ Parses the text, evaluating any backslash items in it (such as ++ function calls) but doesn't do anything further, except ++ possibly printing error messages. Useful for invoking functions ++ that have side effects without using or printing their direct ++ results, e.g. "void \fsplit(\%a,&a)". ++ ++ Symbolic Links in UNIX ++ ++ The UNIX versions of C-Kermit have had /FOLLOWLINKS and /NOFOLLOWLINKS ++ switches added to several commands to control the treatment of ++ symbolic links. Different commands deal differently with symbolic ++ links: ++ ++ Kermit SEND, FTP MPUT ++ /NOFOLLOWLINKS is the default, which means symbolic links are ++ skipped entirely. The alternative, /FOLLOWLINKS, should be used ++ with caution, since an innocent link might point to a whole ++ file system, or it might cause a loop. There is no way in ++ Kermit or FTP protocol to send the link itself. We either skip ++ them or follow them; we can't duplicate them. ++ ++ DIRECTORY ++ /NOFOLLOWLINKS is the default, which means the DIRECTORY ++ command lists symbolic links in a way that shows they are ++ links, but it does not follow them. The alternative, ++ /FOLLOWLINKS, follows links and gives information about the ++ linked-to directories and files. ++ ++ DELETE, RMDIR ++ The DELETE command does not have link-specific switches. DELETE ++ never follows links. If you tell Kermit to delete a symbolic ++ link, it deletes the link itself, not the linked-to file. Ditto ++ for RMDIR. ++ ++ COPY ++ The COPY command behaves just like the UNIX cp command; it ++ always follows links. ++ ++ RENAME ++ The RENAME command behaves just like the UNIX mv command; it ++ operates on links directly rather than following. ++ ++ [ [390]Top ] [ [391]Contents ] [ [392]C-Kermit Home ] [ [393]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++8. OTHER SCRIPTING IMPROVEMENTS ++ ++ 8.1. Performance and Debugging ++ ++ A command cache for frequently used commands plus some related ++ optimizations increases the speed of compute-bound scripts by anywhere ++ from 50% to 1000%. ++ ++ The new PROMPT command can be used to set breakpoints for debugging ++ scripts. If executed in a command file or macro, it gives you an ++ interactive command prompt in the current context of the script, with ++ all its variables, arguments, command stack, etc, available for ++ examination or change, and the ability to resume the script at any ++ point (END resumes it, Ctrl-C or STOP cancels it and returns to top ++ level). ++ ++ The new Ctrl-C trapping feature ([394]Section 8.14) lets you intercept ++ interruption of scripts. This can be used in combination with the ++ PROMPT command to debug scripts. Example: ++ ++define ON_CTRLC { ++ echo INTERRUPTED BY CTRL-C... ++ echo The command stack has not yet been rolled back: ++ show stack ++ echo Type Ctrl-C again or use the END command to return to top level. ++ prompt Debug> ++} ++ ++ Adding this ON_CTRL definition to your script lets you interrupt it at ++ any point and get prompt that is issued at the current command level, ++ so you can query local variables, etc. ++ ++ [ [395]Top ] [ [396]Contents ] [ [397]C-Kermit Home ] [ [398]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.2. Using Macros as Numeric Variables ++ ++ A macro is a way to assign a value to a name, and then use the name to ++ refer to the value. Macros are used in two ways in Kermit: as ++ "subroutines" or functions composed of Kermit commands, which are ++ executed, or as variables to hold arbitrary values -- text, numbers, ++ filenames, etc. ++ ++ When a macro is to be executed, its name is given as if it were a ++ C-Kermit command, optionally preceded by the word "do". When a macro ++ is used as a variable, it must be "escaped" with \m(xxx) (or ++ equivalent function, e.g. \s(xxx), \:(xxx), \fdefinition(xxx)), where ++ xxx is the macro name, for example: ++ ++ define filename /usr/olga/oofa.txt ++ send \m(filename) ++ ++ Of course variables can also hold numbers: ++ ++ define size 17 ++ declare \&a[\m(size)] ++ ... ++ define index 3 ++ if ( == \m(index) 3 ) echo The third value is: \&a[\m(index)] ++ evaluate index (\m(index) * 4) ++ if ( > \m(index) \m(size) ) echo Out of range! ++ ++ But these are contexts in which only numbers are valid. C-Kermit 8.0 ++ has been changed to treat non-escaped non-numeric items in strictly ++ numeric contexts as macro names. So it is now possible (but not ++ required) to omit the \m(...) notation and just use the macro name in ++ these contexts: ++ ++ define size 17 ++ declare \&a[size] ++ ... ++ define index 3 ++ if ( == index 3 ) echo The third value is: \&a[index] ++ evaluate index (index * 4) ++ if ( > index size ) echo Out of range! ++ ++ This is especially nice for loops that deal with arrays. Here, for ++ example, is a loop that reverses the order of the elements in an ++ array. Whereas formerly it was necessary to write: ++ ++ .\%n ::= \fdim(&a) ++ for \%i 1 \%n/2 1 { ++ .tmp := \&a[\%n-\%i+1] ++ .\&a[\%n-\%i+1] := \&a[\%i] ++ .\&a[\%i] := \m(tmp) ++ } ++ ++ Recoding this to use macro names "i" and "n" instead of the backslash ++ variables \%i and \%n, we have: ++ ++ .n ::= \fdim(&a) ++ for i 1 n/2 1 { ++ .tmp := \&a[n-i+1] ++ .\&a[n-i+1] := \&a[i] ++ .\&a[i] := \m(tmp) ++ } ++ ++ which reduces the backslash count to less than half. The final ++ statement in the loop could be written ".\&a[i] ::= tmp" if the array ++ contained only numbers (since ::= indicates arithmetic expression ++ evaluation). ++ ++ Also, now you can use floating-point numbers in integer contexts (such ++ as array subscripts), in which case they are truncated to an integer ++ value (i.e. the fractional part is discarded). ++ ++ Examples of numeric contexts include: ++ ++ * Array subscripts. ++ * Any numeric function argument. ++ * Right-hand side of ::= assignments. ++ * EVALUATE command or \fevaluate() function expression. ++ * The INCREMENT or DECREMENT by-value. ++ * IF =, >, <, !=, >=, and <= comparands. ++ * The IF number construct. ++ * FOR-loop variables. ++ * STOP, END, and EXIT status codes. ++ * The INPUT timeout value. ++ * PAUSE, WAIT, SLEEP, MSLEEP intervals. ++ * The SHIFT argument. ++ * Numeric switch arguments, e.g. TYPE /WIDTH:number, SEND ++ /LARGER:number. ++ * SCREEN MOVE-TO row and column number. ++ * Various SET DIAL parameters (timeout, retry limit, etc). ++ * Various SET SEND or RECEIVE parameters (packet length, window ++ size, etc). ++ * Various other SET parameters. ++ ++ and: ++ ++ * S-Expressions (explained in [399]Section 9). ++ ++ Macro names used in numeric contexts must not include mathematical ++ operators. Although it is legal to create a macro called "foo+bar", in ++ a numeric context this would be taken as the sum of the values of ++ "foo" and "bar". Any such conflict can be avoided, of course, by ++ enclosing the macro name in \m(...). ++ ++ [ [400]Top ] [ [401]Contents ] [ [402]C-Kermit Home ] [ [403]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.3. New IF Conditions ++ ++ Several new IF conditions are available: ++ ++ IF DECLARED arrayname ++ Explained in [404]Section 8.6. ++ ++ IF KBHIT ++ Allows a script to test whether a key was pressed without ++ actually trying to read it. ++ ++ IF KERBANG (Unix only) ++ True if Kermit was started from a Kerbang script. This is ++ useful for knowing how to interpret the \&@[] and \&_[] ++ argument vector arrays, and under what conditions to exit. ++ ++ IF INTEGER n ++ This is just a synonym for IF NUMERIC, which is true if n ++ contains only digits (or, if n is a variable, its value ++ contains only digits). ++ ++ By contrast, IF FLOAT n succeeds if n is a floating-point number OR an ++ integer (or a variable with floating-point or integer value). ++ Therefore, IF FLOAT should be used whenever any kind of number is ++ acceptable, whereas IF INTEGER (or IF NUMERIC) when only an integer ++ can be used. ++ ++ [ [405]Top ] [ [406]Contents ] [ [407]C-Kermit Home ] [ [408]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.4. The ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND Macro ++ ++ The new ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND macro, if defined, is executed whenever you ++ give a command that is not known to C-Kermit; any operands are passed ++ as arguments. Here are some sample definitions: ++ ++ DEF ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND telnet \%1 ; Treat unknown commands as hostnames ++ DEF ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND dial \%1 ; Treat unknown commands phone numbers ++ DEF ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND take \%1 ; Treat unknown commands as filenames ++ DEF ON_UNKNOWN_COMMAND !\%* ; Treat unknown commands as shell commands ++ ++ The ON_CD macro, if defined, is executed whenever Kermit is given a CD ++ (change directory) command (8.0.211). Upon entry to this macro, the ++ directory has already changed and the new directory string is ++ available in the \v(directory) variable, and also as the first ++ argument (\%1). ++ ++ [ [409]Top ] [ [410]Contents ] [ [411]C-Kermit Home ] [ [412]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.5. The SHOW MACRO Command ++ ++ The SHOW MACRO command has been changed to accept more than one macro ++ name: ++ ++ (setq a 1 b 2 c 3) ++ show mac a b c ++ a = 1 ++ b = 2 ++ c = 3 ++ ++ An exact match is required for each name (except that case doesn't ++ matter). If you include wildcard characters, however, a pattern match ++ is performed: ++ ++ show mac [a-c]*x ++ ++ shows all macros whose names start with a, b, or c, and end with x. ++ ++ [ [413]Top ] [ [414]Contents ] [ [415]C-Kermit Home ] [ [416]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.6. Arrays ++ ++ A clarification regarding references to array names (as opposed to ++ array elements): You can use array-name "abbreviations" like &a only ++ in contexts that expect array names, like ARRAY commands or array-name ++ function arguments such as the second argument of \fsplit(). In a ++ LOCAL statement, however, you have to write \&a[], since "local &a" ++ might refer to a macro named "&a". ++ ++ In function arguments, however, you MUST use the abbreviated form: ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a) or \fsplit(\%a,&a[]). If you include the backslash (as ++ in "\fsplit(\%a,\&a[])") a parse error occurs. ++ ++ Here are the new array-related commands: ++ ++ IF DECLARED arrayname ++ Allows a script to test whether an array has been declared. The ++ arrayname can be a non-array backslash variable such as \%1 or ++ \m(name), in which case it is evaluated first, and the result ++ is treated as the array name. Otherwise, arrayname is treated ++ as in the ARRAY commands: it can be a, &a, &a[], \&a, \&a[], ++ \&a[3], \&a[3:9], etc, with the appropriate results in each ++ case. Synonym: IF DCL. ++ ++ UNDECLARE arrayname ++ UNDECLARE is a new top-level command to undeclare an array. ++ Previously this could only be done with "declare \&a[0]" (i.e. ++ re-declare the array with a dimension of 0). ++ ++ ARRAY LINK linkname arrayname ++ Creates a symbolic link from the array named by linkname (which ++ must be the name of an array that is not yet declared in the ++ current context) to the array named by arrayname (which must ++ the name of a currently declared array that is not itself a ++ link, or a variable containing the name of such an array). The ++ two names indicate the same array: if you change an array ++ element, the change is reflected in the link too, and vice ++ versa. If you undeclare the link, the real array is unaffected. ++ If you undeclare the real array, all links to it disappear. If ++ you resize an array (directly or through a link), all links to ++ it are updated automatically. ++ ++ Array links let you pass array names as arguments to macros. For ++ example, suppose you had a program that needed to uppercase all the ++ elements of different arrays at different times. You could write a ++ macro to do this, with the array name as an argument. But without ++ array links, there would be no way to refer to the argument array ++ within the macro. Array links make it easy: ++ ++ define arrayupper { ++ local \&e[] \%i ++ array link \&e[] \%1 ++ for i 1 \fdim(&e) 1 { .\&e[i] := \fupper(\&e[i]) } ++ } ++ declare \&a[] = these are some words ++ arrayupper &a ++ show array &a ++ ++ The macro declares the array link LOCAL, which means it doesn't ++ conflict with any array of the same name that might exist outside the ++ macro, and that the link is destroyed automatically when the macro ++ exits. This works, by the way, even if the link name and the macro ++ argument name are the same, as long as the link is declared LOCAL. ++ ++ As noted, you can't make a link to a nonexistent array. So when ++ writing a macro whose job is to create an array whose name is passed ++ as an argument, you must declare the array first (the size doesn't ++ matter as long as it's greater than 0). Example: ++ ++ define tryme { ; Demonstration macro ++ local \&e[] ; We only need this inside the macro ++ array link \&e[] \%1 ; Make local link ++ shift ; Shift argument list ++ void \fsplit(\%*,&e) ; Split remainder of arg list into array ++ } ++ declare \&a[1] ; Declare target array in advance ++ tryme &a here are some words ; Invoke the macro with array name and words ++ show array a ; See the results ++ ++ One final improvement allows the macro itself to declare the array ++ (this was not possible in earlier Kermit releases): if the array name ++ in the DECLARE command is a variable (and not an array name), or ++ includes variables, the resulting value is used as the array name. So: ++ ++ define tryme { ; Demonstration macro ++ declare \%1[1] ; Preliminary declaration for target array ++ local \&e[] ; We only need this inside the macro ++ array link \&e[] \%1 ; Make local link ++ shift ; Shift argument list ++ void \fsplit(\%*,&e) ; Split remainder of arg list into array ++ } ++ tryme &a here are some words ; Invoke the macro with array name and words ++ show array a ; See the results ++ ++ The SHOW ARRAY command now indicates whether an array name is a link. ++ ++ Also see the descriptions of [417]\fjoin() and [418]\fsplit(), plus ++ [419]Section 8.10 on the MINPUT command, which shows how an entire ++ array (or segment of it) can be used as the MINPUT target list. ++ ++ [ [420]Top ] [ [421]Contents ] [ [422]C-Kermit Home ] [ [423]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.7. New or Improved Built-in Variables and Functions ++ ++ The following new built-in variables are available: ++ ++ \v(buildid) A date string like "20000808" indicating when C-Kermit was ++built. ++ \v(ftime) Current time, secs since midnight, including fraction of se ++cond. ++ \v(iprompt) The current SET PROMPT value ++ \v(sexp) The most recent S-Expression (see [424]Section 9) ++ \v(sdepth) The current S-Expression invocation depth ([425]Section 9) ++ \v(svalue) The value of the most recent S-Expression ([426]Section 9) ++ ++ \v(ftp_code) Most recent FTP response code ([427]Section 3) ++ \v(ftp_connected) FTP connection status ([428]Section 3) ++ \v(ftp_cpl) FTP Command Protection Level ([429]Section 3.2) ++ \v(ftp_dpl) FTP Data Protection Level ([430]Section 3.2) ++ \v(ftp_getputremote) The current SET GET-PUT-REMOTE setting ([431]Section 3.8 ++) ++ \v(ftp_host) Name or IP address of FTP server ([432]Section 3) ++ \v(ftp_loggedin) FTP login status ([433]Section 3) ++ \v(ftp_message) Most recent FTP response message ([434]Section 3) ++ \v(ftp_security) FTP Security method ([435]Section 3.2) ++ \v(ftp_server) OS type of FTP server ([436]Section 3) ++ ++ \v(http_code) Most recent HTTP response code ++ \v(http_connected) HTTP connection status ++ \v(http_host) Name or IP address of HTTP server ++ \v(http_message) Most recent HTTP response message ++ \v(http_security) TLS cipher used to secure the HTTP session ++ ++ \v(hour) Hour of the day, 0 to 23. ++ \v(timestamp) Equivalent to "\v(ndate) \v(time)". ++ ++ \v(log_debug) Current debug log file, if any. ++ \v(log_packet) Current packet log file, if any. ++ \v(log_session) Current session log file, if any. ++ \v(log_transaction) Current transaction log file, if any. ++ \v(log_connection) Current connection log file, if any. ++ ++ The following new or improved built-in functions are available: ++ ++ \fcmdstack() Allows programmatic access to the command stack. ++ \fcvtdate() [437]Section 8.13, format options added ++ \fdelta2secs() [438]Section 8.13 ++ \fdostounixpath(s1) Converts a DOS filename to Unix format. ++ \fsplit() Now allows grouping/nesting in source string. ++ \fword() Allows the same grouping and nesting. ++ \fjoin(&a,s1,n1,n2) Copies an array into a single string. ++ \fsubstitute(s1,s2,s3) Substitutes characters within a string. ++ \freplace() Has new 4th "occurrence" argument. ++ \fsexpression() Evaluates an S-Expression (explained in [439]Section ++9). ++ \ftrim(), \fltrim() Now trim CR and LF by default, as well as SP and Tab. ++ \funixtodospath(s1) Converts a Unix filename to DOS format. ++ \fkeywordval(s1,c1) Assigns values to keywords (macros) (explained below) ++. ++ ++ Most functions that have "2" in their names to stand for the word "to" ++ can now also be written with "to", e.g. "\fdelta2secs()," ++ \fdeltatosecs()." ++ ++ \funtabify(string) ++ (New to 8.0.211) Replaces Horizontal Tab characters in the ++ given string with spaces based on VT100-like tab stops. ++ ++ \fverify(s1,s2,n) ++ As of version 8.0.211, returns -1 if s2 is an empty string. ++ Previously it returned 0, making \fverify(abc,\%a) look as if ++ \%a was a string combosed of a's, b's, and/or c's when in fact ++ it contained nothing. ++ ++ \fcode(string) ++ As of version 8.0.211, returns 0 if string is empty or missing. ++ Previously it returned the empty string, which made it unsafe ++ to use in arithmetic or boolean expressions. ++ ++ \v(inscale) ++ New to version 8.0.211, its value is the INPUT SCALE-FACTOR ++ ([440]Section 8.10), default 1.0. ++ ++ 8.7.1. The \fkeywordval() Function ++ ++ \fkeywordval(s1,c1) is new to C-Kermit 8.0. Given a string s1 of the ++ form "name=value", it creates a macro with the given name and assigns ++ it the given value. If no value appears after the equal sign, any ++ existing macro of the given name is undefined. Blanks are ++ automatically trimmed from around the name and value. The optional c1 ++ parameter is the assignment operator character, equal sign (=) by ++ default. This function is handy for processing keyword parameters or ++ any other form of parameter-value pair. Suppose, for example, you want ++ to write a macro that accepts keyword parameters rather than ++ positional ones: ++ ++ define MYDIAL { ++ local \%i modem hangup method device speed number ++ def number 5551234 ; Assign default parameter values ++ def speed 57600 ++ def modem usrobotics ++ def hangup rs232 ++ def method tone ++ def country 1 ++ for \%i 1 \v(argc)-1 1 { ; Parse any keyword parameters... ++ if not \fkeywordval(\&_[\%i]) end 1 Bad parameter: "\&_[\%i]" ++ } ++ set dial country \m(country) ++ set modem type \m(modem) ++ set modem hang \m(hangup) ++ set dial method \m(tone) ++ set line \m(device) ++ if fail stop 1 ++ set speed \m(speed) ++ if fail stop 1 ++ show comm ++ set dial display on ++ dial \m(number) ++ if success connect ++ } ++ ++ In this example, all the defaults are set up inside the macro, and ++ therefore it can be invoked with no parameters at all. But if you want ++ to have the macro dial a different number, you can supply it as ++ follows: ++ ++ mydial number=7654321 ++ ++ You can supply any number of keyword parameters, and you can give them ++ in any order: ++ ++ mydial number=7654321 hangup=modem speed=115200 ++ ++ 8.7.2. The \fsplit(), \fjoin(), and \fword() Functions ++ ++ \fjoin(&a,s1,n1,n2) is also new; it creates a string from an array (or ++ a piece of one). &a is the name of the array (a range specifier can be ++ included); s1 is a character or string to separate each element in the ++ result string (can be omitted, in which case the elements are not ++ separated at all), and n1 is a grouping mask, explained below. If s1 ++ is empty or not specified, the array elements are separated with ++ spaces. If you want the elements concatenated with no separator, ++ include a nonzero n2 argument. Given the array: ++ ++ declare \&a[] = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ++ ++ you can get effects like this: ++ ++ \fjoin(&a) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ++ \fjoin(&a,:) 0:1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9 ++ \fjoin(&a,{,}) 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 ++ \fjoin(&a,...) 0...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9 ++ \fjoin(&a,,,1) 0123456789 ++ ++ \fsplit(), \fword(), \fstripb(), and \fjoin() accept a "grouping mask" ++ argument, n1, which is a number from 0 to 63, in which: ++ ++ 1 = "" doublequotes ++ 2 = {} braces ++ 4 = '' singlequotes ++ 8 = () parentheses ++ 16 = [] square brackets ++ 32 = <> angle brackets ++ ++ These can be OR'd (added) together to make any number 0-63 (-1 is ++ treated the same as 63, 0 means no grouping). If a bit is on, the ++ corresponding kind of grouping is selected. (If more than 1 bit is set ++ for \fjoin(), only the lowest-order one is used.) ++ ++ If you include the same character in the grouping mask and the include ++ list, the grouping mask takes precedence. Example: ++ ++ def \%a a "b c d" e ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a[],,,-1) = 3 <-- doublequote used for grouping ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a[],,",-1) = 3 <-- doublequote still used for grouping ++ ++ Nesting of matched left and right grouping characters (parentheses, ++ braces, and brackets, but not quotes) is recognized. Example: ++ ++ def \%a a (b c n o) p ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,0) = 16 (no grouping) ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,2) = 15 (braces only) ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,16) = 11 (square brackets only) ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,32) = 7 (angle brackets only) ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,63) = 3 (all) ++ \fsplit(\%a,&a,,,-1) = 3 (all) ++ ++ \fsplit() and \fjoin() are "reciprocal" functions. You can split a ++ string up into an array and join it back into a new string that is ++ equivalent, as long as \fsplit() and \fjoin() are given equivalent ++ grouping masks, except that the type of braces might change. Example: ++ ++ def \%a a {b c [d e] f g} "h i" j m ++ echo STRING=[\%a] ++ echo WORDS=\fsplit(\%a,&a,,,-1) ++ show array a ++ asg \%b \fjoin(&a,{ },2) ++ echo JOIN =[\%b] ++ echo WORDS=\fsplit(\%b,&b,,,-1) ++ show array b ++ ++ The arrays a and b are identical. The strings a and b are as follows: ++ ++ \%a: a {b c [d e] f g} "h i" j m ++ \%b: a {b c [d e] f g} {h i} j {k l} m ++ ++ It is possible to quote separator grouping characters with backslash ++ to override their grouping function. And of course to include ++ backslash itself in the string, it must be quoted too. Furthermore, ++ each backslash must be doubled, so the command parser will still pass ++ one backslash to \fsplit() for each two that it sees. Here are some ++ examples using \fsplit() with a grouping mask of 8 (treat parentheses ++ as grouping characters). ++ ++ String Result ++ a b c d e f 6 ++ a b\\ c d e f 5 ++ a b (c d e) f 4 ++ a b \\(c d e\\) f 6 ++ a b \\\\(c d e\\\\) f 7 ++ ++ \fsplit() has also been changed to create its array (if one is given) ++ each time it is called, so now it can be conveniently called in a loop ++ without having to redeclare the array each time. ++ ++ Incidentally... Sometimes you might want to invoke \fsplit() in a ++ situation where you don't care about its return value, e.g. when you ++ just want to fill the array. Now you can "call" \fsplit() or any other ++ function with the new [441]VOID command: ++ ++ void \fsplit(\%a,&a) ++ ++ \fsplit() and \fjoin() also accept a new, optional 6th argument, an ++ options flag, a number that can specify a number of options. So far ++ there is just one option, whose value is 1: ++ ++ separator-flag ++ Normally separators are collapsed. So, for example, ++ ++ \fword(Three little words,2) ++ ++ returns "little" (the second word). Space is a separator, but ++ there are multiple spaces between each word. If the value 1 is ++ included in the option flag, however, each separator counts. If ++ two separators are adjacent, an empty word is produced between ++ them. This is useful for parsing (e.g.) comma-separated lists ++ exported from databases or spreadsheets. ++ ++ 8.7.3. The \fcmdstack() Function ++ ++ The new \fcmdstack() function gives access to the command stack: ++ ++ \fcmdstack(n1,n2) ++ Arguments: n1 is the command stack level. If omitted, the ++ current level, \v(cmdlevel), is used. n2 is a function code ++ specifying the desired type of information: ++ ++ 0 (default) = name of object at level n1. ++ 1 (nonzero) = object type (0 = prompt; 1 = command file; 2 = macro). ++ ++ The default for n2 is 0. ++ ++ The name associated with prompt is "(prompt)". Here's a loop that can ++ be included in a macro or command file to show the stack (similar to ++ what the SHOW STACK command does): ++ ++ for \%i \v(cmdlevel) 0 -1 { ++ echo \%i. [\fcmdstack(\%i,1)] \fcmdstack(\%i,0) ++ } ++ ++ In this connection, note that \v(cmdfile) always indicates the most ++ recently invoked active command file (if any), even if that file is ++ executing a macro. Similarly, \v(macro) indicates the most recently ++ invoked macro (if any), even if the current command source is not a ++ macro. The name of the "caller" of the currently executing object ++ (command file or macro) is: ++ ++ \fcmdstack(\v(cmdlevel)-1) ++ ++ and its type is: ++ ++ \fcmdstack(\v(cmdlevel)-1,1) ++ ++ To find the name of the macro that invoked the currently executing ++ object, even if one or more intermediate command files (or prompting ++ levels) are involved, use a loop like this: ++ ++ for \%i \v(cmdlevel)-1 0 -1 { ++ if = \fcmdstack(\%i,1) 2 echo CALLER = \fcmdstack(\%i,0) ++ } ++ ++ Of course if you make a macro to do this, the macro must account for ++ its own additional level: ++ ++ define CALLER { ++ for \%i \v(cmdlevel)-2 0 -1 { ++ if = \fcmdstack(\%i,1) 2 return \fcmdstack(\%i,0) ++ } ++ return "(none)" ++ } ++ ++ The built-in variable \v(cmdsource) gives the current command source ++ as a word ("prompt", "file", or "macro"). ++ ++ 8.7.4. The VOID Command ++ ++ VOID is like ECHO in that all functions and variables in its argument ++ text are evaluated. but it doesn't print anything (except possibly an ++ error message if a function was invocation contained or resulted in ++ any errors). VOID sets FAILURE if it encounters any errors, SUCCESS ++ otherwise. ++ ++ [ [442]Top ] [ [443]Contents ] [ [444]C-Kermit Home ] [ [445]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.8. The RETURN and END Commands ++ ++ The execution of a macro is terminated in any of the following ways: ++ ++ * With an END [ number [ message ] ] command. If a number is given, ++ the macro succeeds if the number is 0, and fails if it is not ++ zero; if a number is not given, the macro succeeds. ++ * With a STOP command, which works just like END except it peels ++ back the command stack all the way to top level. ++ * With a RETURN [ text ] command, in which case the macro always ++ succeeds. ++ * By running out of commands to execute, in which case the macro ++ succeeds or fails according the most recently executed command ++ that sets success or failure. ++ ++ The same considerations apply to command files invoked by the TAKE ++ command. ++ ++ If a macro does not execute any commands that set success or failure, ++ then invoking the macro does not change the current SUCCESS/FAILURE ++ status. It follows, then, that the mere invocation of a macro does not ++ change the SUCCESS/FAILURE status either. This makes it possible to ++ write macros to react to the status of other commands (or macros), for ++ example: ++ ++ define CHKLINE { ++ if success end 0 ++ stop 1 SET LINE failed - please try another device. ++ } ++ set modem type usrobotics ++ set line /dev/cua0 ++ chkline ++ set speed 57600 ++ dial 7654321 ++ ++ By the way, none of this is news. But it was not explicitly documented ++ before, and C-Kermit 7.0 and earlier did not always handle the RETURN ++ statement as it should have. ++ ++ [ [446]Top ] [ [447]Contents ] [ [448]C-Kermit Home ] [ [449]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.9. UNDEFINing Groups of Variables ++ ++ The UNDEFINE command, which previously accepted one variable name, now ++ accepts a list of them, and also accepts wildcard notation to allow ++ deletion of variables that match a given pattern. ++ ++ UNDEFINE [ switches ] name [ name [ name [ ... ] ] ] ++ Undefines the variables whose names are given. Up to 64 names ++ may be given in one UNDEFINE command. ++ ++ If you omit the switches and include only one name, the UNDEFINE ++ command works as before. ++ ++ Switches include: ++ ++ /MATCHING ++ Specifies that the names given are to treated as patterns ++ rather than literal variable names. Note: pattern matching ++ can't be used with array references; use the ARRAY command to ++ manipulate arrays and subarrays. ++ ++ /LIST ++ List the name of each variable to be undefined, and whether it ++ was undefined successfully ("ok" or "error"), plus a summary ++ count at the end. ++ ++ /SIMULATE ++ List the names of the variables that would be deleted without ++ actually deleting them. Implies /LIST. ++ ++ The UNDEFINE command fails if there were any errors and succeeds ++ otherwise. ++ ++ The new _UNDEFINE command is like UNDEFINE, except the names are ++ assumed to be variable names themselves, which contain the names (or ++ parts of them) of the variables to be undefined. For example, if you ++ have the following definitions: ++ ++ define \%a foo ++ define foo This is some text ++ ++ then: ++ ++ undef \%a ++ ++ undefines the variable \%a, but: ++ ++ _undef \%a ++ ++ undefines the macro foo. ++ ++ Normal Kermit patterns are used for matching; metacharacters include ++ asterisk, question mark, braces, and square brackets. Thus, when using ++ the /MATCHING switch, if the names of the macros you want to undefine ++ contain any of these characters, you must quote them with backslash to ++ force them to be taken literally. Also note that \%* is not the name ++ of a variable; it is a special notation used within a macro for "all ++ my arguments". The command "undef /match \%*" deletes all \%x ++ variables, where x is 0..9 and a..z. Use "undef /match \%[0-9]" to ++ delete macro argument variables or "undef /match \%[i-n]" to delete a ++ range of \%x variables. ++ ++ [ [450]Top ] [ [451]Contents ] [ [452]C-Kermit Home ] [ [453]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.10. The INPUT and MINPUT Commands ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 8.0.211, the INPUT and MINPUT commands accept a switch: ++ ++ [M]INPUT /NOMATCH timeout ++ The /NOMATCH switch allows INPUT or MINPUT to read incoming ++ material for the specified amount of time, without attempting ++ to match it with any text or patterns. When this switch is ++ included, the [M]INPUT command succeeds when the timeout ++ interval expires, with \v(instatus) set to 1, meaning "timed ++ out", or fails upon interruption or i/o error. ++ ++ Also in version 8.0.211, there is a new way to apply a scale factor to ++ [M]INPUT timeouts: ++ ++ SET INPUT SCALE-FACTOR floating-point-number ++ This scales all [M]INPUT timeouts by the given factor, allowing ++ time-sensitive scripts to be adjusted to changing conditions ++ such as congested networks or different-speed modems without ++ having to change each INPUT-class command. This affects only ++ those timeouts that are given in seconds, not as wall-clock ++ times. Although the scale factor can have a fractional part, ++ the INPUT timeout is still an integer. The new built-in ++ variable \v(inscale) tells the current INPUT SCALE-FACTOR. ++ ++ The MINPUT command can be used to search the incoming data stream for ++ several targets simultaneously. For example: ++ ++ MINPUT 8 one two three ++ ++ waits up to 8 seconds for one of the words "one", "two", or "three" to ++ arrive. Words can be grouped to indicate targets that contain spaces: ++ ++ MINPUT 8 nineteeen twenty "twenty one" ++ ++ And of course you can also use variables in place of (or as part of) ++ the target names: ++ ++ MINPUT 8 \%a \&x[3] \m(foo) ++ ++ Until now you had to know the number of targets in advance when ++ writing the MINPUT statement. Each of the examples above has exactly ++ three targets. ++ ++ But suppose your script needs to look for a variable number of ++ targets. For this you can use arrays and \fjoin(), described in ++ [454]Section 8.7. Any number of \fjoin() invocations can be included ++ in the MINPUT target list, and each one is expanded into the ++ appropriate number of separate targets each time the MINPUT command is ++ executed. Example: ++ ++ declare \&a[10] = one two three ++ minput 10 foo \fjoin(&a) bar ++ ++ This declares an array of ten elements, and assigns values to the ++ first three of them. The MINPUT command looks for these three (as well ++ as the words "foo" and "bar"). Later, if you assign additional ++ elements to the array, the same MINPUT command also looks for the new ++ elements. ++ ++ If an array element contains spaces, each word becomes a separate ++ target. To create one target per array element, use \fjoin()'s ++ grouping feature: ++ ++ dcl \&a[] = {aaa bbb} {ccc ddd} {xxx yyy zzz} ++ ++ minput 10 \fjoin(&a) <-- 7 targets ++ minput 10 \fjoin(&a,,2) <-- 3 targets ++ ++ [ [455]Top ] [ [456]Contents ] [ [457]C-Kermit Home ] [ [458]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.11. Learned Scripts ++ ++ C-Kermit now includes a simple script recorder that monitors your ++ commands, plus your actions during CONNECT mode, and automatically ++ generates a script program that mimics what it observed. You should ++ think of this feature as a script-writing ASSISTANT since, as you will ++ see [459]later in this section, the result generally needs some ++ editing to make it both secure and flexible. The script recorder is ++ controlled by the new LEARN command: ++ ++ LEARN [ /ON /OFF /CLOSE ] [ filename ] ++ If you give a filename, the file is opened for subsequent ++ recording. The /ON switch enables recording to the current file ++ (if any); /OFF disables recording. /CLOSE closes the current ++ script recording file (if any). If you give a filename without ++ any switches, /ON is assumed. ++ ++ The /OFF and /ON switches let you turn recording off and on during a ++ session without closing the file. ++ ++ When recording: ++ ++ * All commands that you type (or recall) at the prompt are recorded ++ in the file except: ++ + LEARN commands are not recorded. ++ + The CONNECT command is not recorded. ++ + The TELNET command is converted to SET HOST /NETWORK:TCP. ++ * Commands obtained from macros or command files are not recorded. ++ * During CONNECT: ++ + Every line you type is converted to an OUTPUT command. ++ + The last prompt before any line you type becomes an INPUT ++ command. ++ + Timeouts are calculated automatically for each INPUT command. ++ + A PAUSE command is inserted before each OUTPUT command just ++ to be safe. ++ ++ Thus the script recorder is inherently line-oriented. It can't be used ++ to script character-oriented interactions like typing Space to a ++ "More?" prompt or editing a text file with VI or EMACS. ++ ++ But it has advantages too; for example it takes control characters ++ into account that might not be visible to you otherwise, and it ++ automatically converts control characters in both the input and output ++ streams to the appropriate notation. It can tell, for example that the ++ "$ " prompt on the left margin in UNIX is really {\{13}\{10}$ }, ++ whereas in VMS it might be {\{13}\{10}\{13}$ }. These sequences are ++ detected and recorded automatically. ++ ++ A learned script should execute correctly when you give a TAKE command ++ for it. However, it is usually appropriate to edit the script a bit. ++ The most important change would be to remove any passwords from it. ++ For example, if the script contains: ++ ++ INPUT 9 {\{13}\{10}Password: } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT bigsecret\{13} ++ ++ you should replace this by something like: ++ ++ INPUT 9 {\{13}\{10}Password: } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ ASKQ pswd Please type your password: ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT \m(pswd)\{13} ++ ++ The LEARN command can't do this for you since it knows nothing about ++ "content"; it only knows about lines and can't be expected to parse or ++ understand them -- after all, the Password prompt might be in some ++ other language. So remember: if you use the LEARN command to record a ++ login script, be sure edit the resulting file to remove any passwords. ++ Also be sure to delete any backup copies your editor or OS might have ++ made of the file. ++ ++ Other manual adjustments might also be appropriate: ++ ++ * If the target of an INPUT command can vary, you can replace the ++ INPUT command with MINPUT and the appropriate target list, and/or ++ the target with a \fpattern(). For example, suppose you are ++ dialing a number that can be answered by any one of 100 terminal ++ servers, whose prompts are ts-00>, ts-01>, ts-02>, ... ts-99>. The ++ script records a particular one of these, but you want it to work ++ for all of them, so change (e.g.): ++ INPUT 10 ts-23> ; or whatever ++ to: ++ INPUT 10 \fpattern(ts-[0-9][0-9]>) ++ * The INPUT timeout values are conservative, but they are based only ++ on a single observation; you might need to tune them. ++ * The PAUSE commands might not be necessary, or the PAUSE interval ++ might need adjustment. ++ * In case you made typographical errors during recording, they are ++ incorporated in your script; you can edit them out if you want to. ++ ++ Here is a sample script generated by Kermit ("learn vms.ksc") in which ++ a Telnet connection is made to a VMS computer, the user logs in, ++ starts Kermit on VMS, sends it a file, and then logs out: ++ ++ ; Scriptfile: vms.ksc ++ ; Directory: /usr/olga ++ ; Recorded: 20001124 15:21:23 ++ ++ SET HOST /NETWORK:TCP vms.xyzcorp.com ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 Connection failed ++ ++ INPUT 7 {\{13}\{10}\{13}Username: } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT olga\{13} ++ INPUT 3 {\{13}\{10}\{13}Password: } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT secret\{13} ++ INPUT 18 {\{13}\{10}\{13}$ } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT set default [.incoming]\{13} ++ INPUT 12 {\{13}\{10}\{13}$ } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT kermit\{13} ++ INPUT 15 {\{13}\{10}\{13}ALTO:[OLGA.INCOMING] C-Kermit>} ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT receive\{13} ++ send myfile.txt ++ ++ INPUT 18 {\{13}\{10}\{13}ALTO:[OLGA.INCOMING] C-Kermit>} ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT exit\{13} ++ INPUT 6 {\{13}\{10}\{13}$ } ++ IF FAIL STOP 1 INPUT timeout ++ PAUSE 1 ++ OUTPUT logout\{13} ++ close ++ exit ++ ++ The commands generated by Kermit during CONNECT (INPUT, IF FAIL, ++ PAUSE, and OUTPUT) have uppercase keywords; the commands typed by the ++ user are in whatever form the user typed them (in this case, ++ lowercase). ++ ++ [ [460]Top ] [ [461]Contents ] [ [462]C-Kermit Home ] [ [463]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.12. Pattern Matching ++ ++ A pattern is a character string that is used to match other strings. ++ Patterns can contain metacharacters that represent special actions ++ like "match any single character", "match zero or more characters", ++ "match any single character from a list", and so on. The best known ++ application of patterns is in file specifications that contain ++ wildcards, as in "send *.txt", meaning "send all files whose names end ++ with .txt". ++ ++ Patterns are also used in increasingly many other ways, to the extent ++ it is useful to point out certain important distinctions in the ways ++ in which they are used: ++ ++ Anchored Patterns ++ If an anchored pattern does not begin with "*", it must match ++ the beginning of the string, and if it does not end with "*", ++ it must match the end of the string. For example, the anchored ++ pattern "abc" matches only the string "abc", not "abcde" or ++ "xyzabc" or "abcabc". The anchored pattern "abc*" matches any ++ string that starts with "abc"; the anchored pattern "*abc" ++ matches any string that ends with "abc"; the anchored pattern ++ "*abc*" matches any string that contains "abc" (including any ++ that start and/or end with it). ++ ++ Floating Patterns ++ A floating pattern matches any string that contains a substring ++ that matches the pattern. In other words, a floating pattern ++ has an implied "*" at the beginning and end. You can anchor a ++ floating pattern to the beginning by starting it with "^", and ++ you can anchor it to the end by ending it with "$" (see ++ examples below). ++ ++ Wildcards ++ A wildcard is an anchored pattern that has the additional ++ property that "*" does not match directory separators. ++ ++ This terminology lets us describe Kermit's commands with a bit more ++ precision. When a pattern is used for matching filenames, it is a ++ wildcard, except in the TEXT-PATTERNS and BINARY-PATTERNS lists and ++ /EXCEPT: clauses, in which case directory separators are not ++ significant (for example, a BINARY-PATTERN of "*.exe" matches any file ++ whose name ends in .exe, no matter how deeply it might be buried in ++ subdirectories). When Kermit parses a file specification directly, ++ however, it uses the strict wildcard definition. For example, "send ++ a*b" sends all files whose names start with "a" and end with "b" in ++ the current directory, and not any files whose names end with "b" that ++ happen to be in subdirectories whose names start with "a". And as ++ noted, wildcards are anchored, so "delete foo" deletes the file named ++ "foo", and not all files whose names happen to contain "foo". ++ ++ Most other patterns are anchored. For example: ++ ++ if match abc bc ... ++ ++ does not succeed (and you would be surprised if it did!). In fact, the ++ only floating patterns are the ones used by commands or functions that ++ search for patterns in files, arrays, or strings. These include: ++ ++ * The GREP and TYPE /MATCH commands. ++ * The \fsearch(), \frsearch(), and \farraylook() functions. ++ ++ Thus these are the only contexts in which explicit anchors ("^" and ++ "$") may be used: ++ ++ grep abc *.txt ++ Prints all lines containing "abc" in all files whose names end ++ with ".txt". ++ ++ grep ^abc *.txt ++ Prints all lines that start with "abc" in all ".txt" files. ++ ++ grep abc$ *.txt ++ Prints all lines that end with "abc" in all ".txt" files. ++ ++ grep ^a*z$ *.txt ++ Prints all lines that start with "a" and end with "z" in all ++ ".txt" files. ++ ++ Similarly for TYPE /PAGE, /fsearch(), /frsearch(), and \farraylook(). ++ ++ Here is a brief summary of anchored and floating pattern equivalences: ++ ++ Anchored Floating ++ abc ^abc$ ++ *abc abc$ ++ abc* ^abc ++ *abc* abc ++ ++ [ [464]Top ] [ [465]Contents ] [ [466]C-Kermit Home ] [ [467]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.13. Dates and Times ++ ++ C-Kermit's comprehension of date-time formats is considerably expanded ++ in version 8.0. Any command that reads dates, including the DATE ++ command itself, or any switch, such as the /BEFORE: and /AFTER: ++ switches, or any function such as \fcvtdate(), now can understand ++ dates and times expressed in any ISO 8601 format, in Unix "asctime" ++ format, in FTP MDTM format, and in practically any format used in RFC ++ 822 or RFC 2822 electronic mail, with or without timezones, and in a ++ great many other formats as well. HELP DATE briefly summarizes the ++ acceptable date-time formats. ++ ++ Furthermore, C-Kermit 8.0 includes a new and easy-to-use form of ++ date-time arithmetic, in which any date or time can be combined with a ++ "delta time", to add or subtract the desired time interval (years, ++ months, weeks, days, hours, minutes, seconds) to/from the given date. ++ And new functions are available to compare dates and to compute their ++ differences. ++ ++ As you can imagine, all this requires quite a bit of "syntax". The ++ basic format is: ++ ++ [ date ] [ time ] [ delta ] ++ ++ Each field is optional, but in most cases (depending on the context) ++ there must be at least one field. If a date is given, it must come ++ first. If no date is given, the current date is assumed. If no time is ++ given, an appropriate time is supplied depending on whether a date was ++ supplied. If no delta is given, no arithmetic is done. If a delta is ++ given without a date or time, the current date and time are used as ++ the base. ++ ++ Date-time-delta fields are likely to contain spaces (although they ++ need not; space-free forms are always available). Therefore, in most ++ contexts -- and notably as switch arguments -- date-time information ++ must be enclosed in braces or doublequotes, for example: ++ ++ send /after:"8-Aug-2001 12:00 UTC" *.txt ++ ++ Kermit's standard internal format for dates and times is: ++ ++ yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss ++ ++ for example: ++ ++ 20010208 10:28:01 ++ ++ Date-times can always be given in this format. yyyy is the 4-digit ++ year, mm is the two-digit month (1-12; supply leading zero for ++ Jan-Sep), dd is the 2-digit day (leading zero for 1-9), hh is the hour ++ (0-23), mm the minute (0-59), ss the second (0-59), each with leading ++ zero if less than the field width. The date and time can be separated ++ by a space, an underscore, a colon, or the letter T. The time is in ++ 24-hour format. Thus the various quantites are at the following fixed ++ positions: ++ ++Position Contents ++ 1-4 Year (4 digits, 0000-9999) ++ 5-6 Month (2 digits, 1-12) ++ 7-8 Day (2 digits, 1-31) ++ 9 Date-Time Separator (space, :, _, or the letter T) ++ 10-11 Hour (2 digits, 0-23) ++ 12 Hour-Minute Separator (colon) ++ 13-14 Minute (2 digits, 0-59) ++ 15 Minute-Second Separator (colon) ++ 16-17 Second (2 digits, 0-59) ++ ++ Example: ++ ++ 19800526 13:07:12 26 May 1980, 13:07:12 (1:07:12PM) ++ ++ This is the format produced by the DATE command and by any function ++ that returns a date-time. It is suitable for lexical comparison and ++ sorting, and for use as a date-time in any Kermit command. When this ++ format is given as input to a command or function, various date-time ++ separators (as noted) are accepted: ++ ++ 19800526 13:07:12 26 May 1980, 13:07:12 (1:07:12PM) ++ 20010208_10:28:35 2 February 2001, 10:28:35 AM ++ 18580101:12:00:00 1 January 1858, noon ++ 20110208T00:00:00 2 February 2011, midnight ++ ++ Certain other special date-time formats that are encountered on ++ computer networks are recognized: ++ ++ Asctime Format ++ This is a fixed format used by Unix, named after Unix's ++ asctime() ("ASCII time") function. It is always exactly 24 ++ characters long. Example: Fri Aug 10 16:38:01 2001 ++ ++ Asctime with Timezone ++ This is like Asctime format, but includes a 3-character ++ timezone between the time and year. It is exactly 28 characters ++ long. Example: Fri Aug 10 16:38:01 GMT 2001 ++ ++ E-Mail Format ++ E-mail date-time formats are defined in [468]RFC 2822 with a ++ fair amount of flexibility and options. The following examples ++ are typical of e-mails and HTTP (web-page) headers: ++ ++ Sat, 14 Jul 2001 11:49:29 (No timezone) ++ Fri, 24 Mar 2000 14:19:59 EST (Symbolic timezone) ++ Tue, 26 Jun 2001 10:19:45 -0400 (EDT) (GMT Offset + comment) ++ ++ FTP MDTM Format ++ This is the date-time format supplied by FTP servers that ++ support the (not yet standard but widely used nevertheless) ++ MDTM command, by which the FTP client asks for a file's ++ modification time: ++ ++ yyyymmddhhmmss[.ffff] ++ ++ where yyyy is the 4-digit year, mm is the 2-digit month, and so ++ on, exactly 14 digits long. An optional fractional part ++ (fraction of second) may also be included, separated by a ++ decimal point (period). Kermit rounds to the nearest second. ++ Example: ++ ++ 20020208102835.515 (8 February 2002 10:28:36 AM) ++ ++ 8.13.1. The Date ++ ++ The date, if given, must precede the time and/or delta, and can be in ++ many, many formats. For starters, you can use several symbolic date ++ names in place of actual dates: ++ ++ NOW ++ This is replaced by the current date and time. The time can not ++ be overriden (if you want to supply a specific time, use TODAY ++ rather than NOW). ++ ++ TODAY ++ This is replaced by the current date and a default time of ++ 00:00:00 is supplied, but can be overridden by a specific time; ++ for example, if today is 8 February 2002, then "TODAY" is ++ "20020802 00:00:00" but "TODAY 10:28" is "20020802 10:28:00". ++ ++ TOMORROW ++ Like TODAY, but one day later (if today is 8 February 2002, ++ then "TOMORROW" is "20020803 00:00:00" but "TOMORROW 16:30" is ++ "20020803 16:30:00"). ++ ++ YESTERDAY ++ Like TODAY, but one day earlier. ++ ++ MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY, ..., SUNDAY ++ The date on the given day of the week, today or later. A ++ default time of 00:00:00 is supplied but can be overridden. ++ Example: "SATURDAY 12:00" means next Saturday (or today, if ++ today is Saturday) at noon. ++ ++ You can give an explicit date in almost any conceivable format, but ++ there are some rules: ++ ++ * If a date is given, it must have three fields: day, month, and ++ year; the order can vary (except that the month can not be last). ++ * If names are used for days, months, etc, they must be English. ++ * The year must lie between 0000 and 9999, inclusive. ++ * All calendar calculations use Gregorian dating, so calculated ++ dates for years prior to 1582 (or later, depending on the country) ++ will not agree with historical dates. Other forms of dating (e.g. ++ Hebrew, Chinese) are not supported. ++ ++ Various date-field separators are accepted: hyphen, slash, space, ++ underscore, period. The same field separator (if any) must be used in ++ both places; for example 18-Sep-2001 but not 18-Sep/2001. Months can ++ be numeric (1-12) or English names or abbreviations. Month name ++ abbreviations are normally three letters, e.g. Apr, May, Jun, Jul. ++ Capitalization doesn't matter. ++ ++ Here are a few examples: ++ ++ 18 Sep 2001 (English month, abbreviated) ++ 18 September 2001 (English month, spelled out) ++ 2001 Sept 18 (Year, month, day) ++ 18-Sep-2001 (With hyphens) ++ 18/09/2001 (All numeric with slashes) ++ 18.09.2001 (Ditto, with periods) ++ 18_09_2001 (Ditto, with underscores) ++ 09/18/2001 (See below) ++ 2001/09/18 (See below) ++ September 18, 2001 (Correspondence style) ++ Sep-18-2001 (Month-day-year) ++ 20010918 (Numeric, no separators) ++ ++ You can also include the day of the week with a specific date, in ++ which case it is accepted (if it is a valid day name), but not ++ verified to agree with the given date: ++ ++ Tue, 18 Sep 2001 (Abbreviated, with comma) ++ Tue,18 Sep 2001 (Comma but no space) ++ Tue 18 Sep 2001 (Abbreviated, no comma) ++ Tuesday 18 Sep 2001 (Spelled out) ++ Tuesday, 18 Sep 2001 (etc) ++ Friday, 18 Sep 2001 (Accepted even if not Friday) ++ ++ In all-numeric dates with the year last, such as 18/09/2001, Kermit ++ identifies the year because it's 4 digits, then decides which of the ++ other two numbers is the month or day based on its value. If both are ++ 12 or less and are unequal, the date is ambiguous and is rejected. In ++ all-numeric dates with the year first, the second field is always the ++ month and the third is the day. The month never comes last. A date ++ with no separators is accepted only if it is all numeric and has ++ exactly eight digits, and is assumed to be in yyyymmdd format. ++ ++ 20010918 (18-Sep-2001 00:00:00) ++ ++ or 14 digits (as in FTP MDTM format): ++ ++ 20010918123456 (18-Sep-2001 12:34:56) ++ ++ You can always avoid ambiguity by putting the year first, or by using ++ an English, rather than numeric, month. A date such as 09/08/2001 ++ would be ambiguous but 2001/09/08 is not, nor is 09-Aug-2001. ++ ++ Until the late 1990s, it was common to encounter 2-digit years, and ++ these are found to this day in old e-mails and other documents. Kermit ++ accepts these dates if they have English months, and interprets them ++ according to the windowing rules of [469]RFC 2822: "If a two digit ++ year is encountered whose value is between 00 and 49, the year is ++ interpreted by adding 2000, ending up with a value between 2000 and ++ 2049. If a two digit year is encountered with a value between 50 and ++ 99, or any three digit year is encountered, the year is interpreted by ++ adding 1900." ++ ++ If you need to specify a year prior to 1000, use leading zeros to ++ ensure it is not misinterpreted as a "non-Y2K-compliant" modern year: ++ ++ 7-Oct-77 (19771007 00:00:00) ++ 7-Oct-0077 (00771007 00:00:00) ++ ++ 8.13.2. The Time ++ ++ The basic time format is hh:mm:dd; that is hours, minutes, seconds, ++ separated by colons, perhaps with an optional fractional second ++ separated by a decimal point (period). The hours are in 24-hour ++ format; 12 is noon, 13 is 1pm, and so on. Fields omitted from the ++ right default to zero. Fields can be omitted from the left or middle ++ by including the field's terminating colon. Examples: ++ ++ 11:59:59 (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59 (11:59:00 AM) ++ 11 (11:00:00 AM) ++ 11:59:59.33 (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59.66 (Noon) ++ 03:21:00 (3:21:00 AM) ++ 3:21:00 (3:21:00 AM) ++ 15:21:00 (3:21:00 PM) ++ :21:00 (00:21:00 AM) ++ ::01 (00:00:01 AM) ++ 11::59 (11:00:59 AM) ++ ++ Leading zeros can be omitted, but it is customary and more readable to ++ keep them in the minute and second fields: ++ ++ 03:02:01 (03:02:01 AM) ++ 3:02:01 (03:02:01 AM) ++ 3:2:1 (03:02:01 AM) ++ ++ AM/PM notation is accepted if you wish to use it: ++ ++ 11:59:59 (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59AM (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59A.M. (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59am (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59a.m. (11:59:59 AM) ++ 11:59:59PM (11:59:59 PM = 23:59:59) ++ 11:59:59P.M. (11:59:59 PM = 23:59:59) ++ 11:59:59pm (11:59:59 PM = 23:59:59) ++ 11:59:59p.m. (11:59:59 PM = 23:59:59) ++ ++ You can omit the colons if you wish, in which case Kermit uses the ++ following rules to interpret the time: ++ ++ 1. 6 digits is hh:mm:ss, e.g. 123456 is 12:34:56. ++ 2. 5 digits is h:mm:ss, e.g. 12345 is 1:23:45. ++ 3. 4 digits is hh:mm, e.g. 1234 is 12:34. ++ 4. 3 digits is h:mm, e.g. 123 is 1:23. ++ 5. 2 digits is hh, e.g. 12 is 12:00. ++ 6. 1 digit is h (the hour), e.g. 1 is 1:00. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ 1 (01:00:00 AM) ++ 10 (10:00:00 AM) ++ 230 (02:30:00 AM) ++ 230pm (02:30:00 PM = 14:30:00) ++ 1115 (11:15:00 AM) ++ 2315 (11:15:00 PM = 23:15:00 PM) ++ 23150 (02:31:50 AM) ++ 231500 (23:15:00 PM) ++ ++ 8.13.3. Time Zones ++ ++ If a time is given, it can (but need not) be followed by a time zone ++ designator. If no time zone is included, the time is treated as local ++ time and no timezone conversions are performed. ++ ++ The preferred time zone designator is the UTC Offset, as specified in ++ [470]RFC 2822: a plus sign or minus sign immediately followed by ++ exactly four decimal digits, signifying the difference in hh (hours) ++ and mm (minutes) from Universal Coordinated Time (UTC, also known as ++ Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT), with negative numbers to the West and ++ positive numbers to the East. For example: ++ ++ Fri, 13 Jul 2001 12:54:29 -0700 ++ ++ indicates a local time of 12:54:29 that is 07 hours and 00 minutes ++ behind (less than, East of) Universal Time. The space is optional, so ++ the example could also be written as: ++ ++ Fri, 13 Jul 2001 12:54:29-0700 ++ ++ The following symbolic time zones are also accepted, as specified by ++ [471]RFC 2822 and/or in ISO 8601: ++ ++ GMT = +0000 Greenwich Mean Time ++ Z = +0000 Zulu (Zero Meridian) Time ++ UTC = +0000 Universal Coordinated Time ++ UT = +0000 Universal Time ++ EDT = -0400 Eastern (USA) Daylight Time ++ EST = -0500 Eastern (USA) Standard Time ++ CDT = -0500 Central (USA) Daylight Time ++ CST = -0600 Central (USA) Standard Time ++ MDT = -0600 Mountain (USA) Daylight Time ++ MST = -0700 Mountain (USA) Standard Time ++ PDT = -0700 Pacific (USA) Daylight Time ++ PST = -0800 Pacific (USA) Standard Time ++ ++ Note that GMT, Z, UTC, and UT all express the same concept: standard ++ (not daylight) time at the Zero Meridian. UTC, by the way, is an ++ international standard symbol and does not correspond to the order of ++ the English words, Universal Coordinated Time, but it happens to have ++ the same initial letters as these words. Of course hundreds of other ++ symbolic timezones and variations exist, but they are not ++ standardized, and are therefore not supported by Kermit. ++ ++ When a time zone is included with a time, the time is converted to ++ local time. In case the conversion crosses a midnight boundary, the ++ date is adjusted accordingly. Examples converting to EST (Eastern USA ++ Standard Time = -0500): ++ ++ 11:30:00 = 11:30:00 ++ 11:30:00 EST = 11:30:00 ++ 11:30:00 GMT = 06:30:00 ++ 11:30:00 PST = 14:30:00 ++ 11:30:00Z = 06:30:00 ++ 11:30PM GMT = 18:30:00 ++ 11:30 -0500 = 11:30:00 ++ 11:30 -0800 = 08:30:00 ++ 11:30 +0200 = 04:30:00 ++ ++ Unlike most of Kermit's other date-time conversions, timezone ++ knowledge (specifically, the offset of local time from UTC) is ++ embodied in the underlying operating system, not in Kermit itself, and ++ any conversion errors in this department are the fault of the OS. For ++ example, most UNIX platforms do not perform conversions for years ++ prior to 1970. ++ ++ 8.13.4. Delta Time ++ ++ Date/time expressions can be composed of a date and/or time and a ++ delta time, or a delta time by itself. When a delta time is given by ++ itself, it is relative to the current local date and time. Delta times ++ have the following general format: ++ ++ {+,-}[number units][hh[:mm[:ss]]] ++ ++ In other words, a delta time always starts with a plus or minus sign, ++ which is followed by a "part1", a "part2", or both. The "part1", if ++ given, specifies a number of days, weeks, months, or years; "part2" ++ specifies a time in hh:mm:ss notation. In arithmetic terms, these ++ represents some number of days or other big time units, and then a ++ fraction of a day expressed as hours, minutes, and seconds; these are ++ to be added to or subtracted from the given (or implied) date and ++ time. The syntax is somewhat flexible, as shown by the following ++ examples: ++ ++ +1 day (Plus one day) ++ +1day (Ditto) ++ +1d (Ditto) ++ + 1 day (Ditto) ++ + 1 day 3:00 (Plus one day and 3 hours) ++ +1d3:00 (Ditto) ++ +1d3 (Ditto) ++ +3:00:00 (Plus 3 hours) ++ +3:00 (Ditto) ++ +3 (Ditto) ++ +2 days (Plus 2 days) ++ -12 days 7:14:22 (Minus 12 days, 7 hours, 14 minutes, and 22 seconds) ++ ++ The words "week", "month", and "year" can be used like "day" in the ++ examples above. A week is exactly equivalent to 7 days. When months ++ are specified, the numeric month number of the date is incremented or ++ decremented by the given number, and the year and day adjusted ++ accordingly if necessary (for example, 31-Jan-2001 +1month = ++ 03-Mar-2001 because February does not have 31 days). When years are ++ specified, they are added or subtracted to the base year. Examples ++ (assuming the current date is 10-Aug-2001 and the current time is ++ 19:21:11): ++ ++ 18-Sep-2001 +1day (20010918 00:00:00) ++ today +1day (20010811 00:00:00) ++ now+1d (20010811 19:21:11) ++ + 1 day (20010811 19:21:11) ++ + 1 day 3:14:42 (20010811 22:35:54) ++ + 7 weeks (20010928 19:21:11) ++ +1d3:14:42 (20010811 22:35:54) ++ +1w3:14:42 (20010817 22:35:54) ++ +1m3:14:42 (20010910 22:35:54) ++ +1y3:14:42 (20020810 22:35:54) ++ 2 feb 2001 + 10 years (20110208 00:00:00) ++ 2001-02-08 +10y12 (20110208 12:00:00) ++ 31-dec-1999 23:59:59+00:00:01 (20000101 00:00:00) ++ 28-feb-1996 +1day (19960229 00:00:00) (leap year) ++ 28-feb-1997 +1day (19970301 00:00:00) (nonleap year) ++ 28-feb-1997 +1month (19970328 00:00:00) ++ 28-feb-1997 +1month 11:59:59 (19970328 11:59:59) ++ 28-feb-1997 +20years (20170228 00:00:00) ++ 28-feb-1997 +8000years (99970228 00:00:00) ++ ++ For compatibility with VMS, the following special delta-time format is ++ also accepted: ++ ++ +number-hh:mm:ss ++ -number-hh:mm:ss ++ ++ (no spaces). The hyphen after the number indicates days. It ++ corresponds exactly to the Kermit notation: ++ ++ +numberdhh:mm:ss ++ -numberdhh:mm:ss ++ ++ The following forms all indicate exactly the same date and time: ++ ++ 18-Sep-2001 12:34:56 +1-3:23:01 ++ 18-Sep-2001 12:34:56 +1d3:23:01 ++ 18-Sep-2001 12:34:56 +1 day 3:23:01 ++ ++ and mean "add a day plus 3 hours, 23 minutes, and 1 second" to the ++ given date. ++ ++ Note that delta times are not at all the same as UTC offsets; the ++ former specifies an adjustment to the given date/time and the latter ++ specifies that the local time is a particular distance from Universal ++ Time, for example: ++ ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -0800 (20010811 16:34:56 -- UTC Offset) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -08:00 (20010811 04:34:56 -- Delta time) ++ ++ If you give a time followed by a modifer that starts with a + or - ++ sign, how does Kermit know whether it's a UTC offset or a delta time? ++ It is treated as a UTC offset if the sign is followed by exactly four ++ decimal digits; otherwise it is a delta time. Examples (for USA ++ Eastern Daylight Time): ++ ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -0800 (20010811 16:34:56 -- UTC Offset) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -08:00 (20010811 04:34:56 -- Delta time) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -800 (20010811 04:34:56 -- Delta time) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -8 (20010811 04:34:56 -- Delta time) ++ ++ The first example says that at some unknown place which is 8 hours ++ ahead of Universal Time, the time is 12:34:56, and this corresponds to ++ 16:34:56 in Eastern Daylight time. The second example says to subtract ++ 8 hours from the local time. The third and fourth are delta times ++ because, even though a colon is not included, the time does not ++ consist of exactly 4 digits. ++ ++ When a delta time is written after a timezone, however, there is no ++ ambiguity and no syntax distinction is required: ++ ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -0800 -0800 (20010811 08:34:56) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -0800 -08:00 (Ditto) ++ 11-Aug-2001 12:34:56 -08:00 -08:00 (Illegal) ++ ++ 8.13.5. The DATE Command ++ ++ Obviously a great many combinations of date, time, time zone, and ++ delta time are possible, as well as many formatting options. The ++ purpose of all this flexibility is to comply with as many standards as ++ possible -- Internet RFCs, ISO standards, and proven corporate ++ standards -- as well as with notations commonly used by real people, ++ in order that dates and times from the widest variety of sources can ++ be assigned to a variable and used in any date-time field in any ++ Kermit command. ++ ++ You can test any date-and/or-time format with the DATE command, which ++ converts it to standard yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss format if it is understood, ++ or else gives an explicit error message (rather than just "BAD DATE" ++ as in previous C-Kermit releases) to indicate what is wrong with it. ++ Examples (on Tuesday, 31 July 2001 in New York City, Eastern Daylight ++ Time, UTC -0400): ++ ++ DATE command argument Result ++ 12:30 20010731 12:30:00 ++ 12:30:01 20010731 12:30:01 ++ 12:30:01.5 20010731 12:30:02 ++ 1230 20010731 12:30:00 ++ 230 20010731 02:30:00 ++ 230+1d 20010801 02:30:00 ++ 230+1d3:00 20010801 05:30:00 ++ 20010718 19:21:15 20010718 19:21:15 ++ 20010718_192115 20010718 19:21:15 ++ 20010718T192115 20010718 19:21:15 ++ 18 Jul 2001 +0400 20010717 23:59:59 ++ 18 Jul 2001 192115 20010718 19:21:15 ++ 18 Jul 2001 192115.8 20010718 19:21:16 ++ 18-Jul-2001T1921 20010718 19:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921Z 20010718 15:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921 GMT 20010718 15:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921 UTC 20010718 15:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921 Z 20010718 15:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921Z 20010718 15:21:00 ++ 18-Jul-2001 1921 -04:00:00 20010718 19:21:00 ++ 21-Jul-2001_08:20:00am 20010721 08:20:00 ++ 21-Jul-2001_8:20:00P.M. 20010721 20:20:00 ++ Fri Jul 20 11:26:25 2001 20010720 11:26:25 ++ Fri Jul 20 11:26:25 GMT 2001 20010720 07:26:25 ++ Sun, 9 Apr 2000 06:46:46 +0100 20000409 01:46:46 ++ Sunday, 9 Apr 2000 06:46:46 +0100 20000409 01:46:46 ++ now 20010731 19:41:12 ++ today 20010731 00:00:00 ++ today 09:00 20010731 09:00:00 ++ tomorrow 20010801 00:00:00 ++ tomorrow 09:00 20010801 09:00:00 ++ tomorrow 09:00 GMT 20010801 05:00:00 ++ yesterday 20010730 00:00:00 ++ yesterday 09:00 20010730 09:00:00 ++ + 3 days 20010803 00:00:00 ++ +3 days 20010803 00:00:00 ++ +3days 20010803 00:00:00 ++ + 3days 20010803 00:00:00 ++ + 3 days 09:00 20010803 09:00:00 ++ + 2 weeks 20010814 00:00:00 ++ + 1 month 20010831 00:00:00 ++ - 7 months 20001231 00:00:00 ++ + 10 years 20110731 00:00:00 ++ friday 20010803 00:00:00 ++ saturday 20010804 00:00:00 ++ sunday 20010805 00:00:00 ++ monday 20010806 00:00:00 ++ tuesday 20010731 00:00:00 ++ wednesday 20010801 00:00:00 ++ thursday 20010802 00:00:00 ++ friday 07:00 20010803 07:00:00 ++ thursday 1:00pm 20010802 13:00:00 ++ thursday 1:00pm GMT 20010802 09:00:00 ++ Thu, 10 Nov 94 10:50:47 EST 19941110 10:50:47 ++ Fri, 20 Oct 1995 18:35:15 -0400 (EDT) 19951020 18:35:15 ++ 31/12/2001 20011231 00:00:00 ++ 12/31/2001 20011231 00:00:00 ++ 2001-July-20 20010720 00:00:00 ++ 2001-September-30 20010930 00:00:00 ++ 30-September-2001 20010930 00:00:00 ++ Sep 30, 2001 12:34:56 20010930 12:34:56 ++ September 30, 2001 20010930 00:00:00 ++ September 30, 2001 630 20010930 06:30:00 ++ September 30 2001 630 20010930 06:30:00 ++ Sep-30-2001 12:34:59 20010930 12:34:59 ++ 20010807113542.014 20010807 11:35.42 ++ 20010807113542.014Z 20010807 07:35:42 ++ ++ 8.13.6. New Date-Time Functions ++ ++ In the following descriptions, date-time function arguments are the ++ same free-format date-time strings discussed above, with the same ++ defaults for missing fields. They are automatically converted to ++ standard format internally prior to processing. ++ ++ \fcvtdate(d1) ++ Converts the date-time d1 to standard format and local time. ++ This function is not new, but now it accepts a wider range of ++ argument formats that can include timezones and/or delta times. ++ If the first argument is omitted, the current date and time are ++ assumed. The optional second argument is a format code for the ++ result: ++ ++ n1 = 1: yyyy-mmm-dd hh:mm:ss (mmm = English 3-letter month ++ abbreviation) ++ n1 = 2: dd-mmm-yyyy hh:mm:ss (ditto) ++ n1 = 3: yyyymmddhhmmss (all numeric) ++ ++ \futcdate(d1) ++ Converts the date-time d1 to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC), ++ also known as GMT or Zulu or Zero-Meridian time. The default d1 ++ is NOW. If d1 is a valid date-time, the UTC result is returned ++ in standard format, yyyymmdd hh:ss:mm. ++ ++ \fcmpdates(d1,d2) ++ Compares two free-format date-times, d1 and d2, and, if both ++ arguments are valid, returns a number: -1 if d1 is earlier than ++ (before) d2; 0 if d1 is the same as d2; 1 if d1 is later than ++ (after) d2. ++ ++ \fdiffdates(d1,d2) ++ Computes the difference between two free-format date-times, d1 ++ and d2. If both arguments are valid, returns a delta time which ++ is negative if d1 is earlier than (before) d2 and positive ++ otherwise. If d1 and d2 are equal, the result is "+0:00". ++ Otherwise, the result consists of the number of days, hours, ++ minutes, and seconds that separate the two date-times. If the ++ number of days is zero, it is omitted. If the number of days is ++ nonzero but the hours, minutes, and seconds are all zero, the ++ time is omitted. if the seconds are zero, they are omitted. ++ ++ \fdelta2secs(dt) ++ Converts a delta time to seconds. For example, "+1d00:00:01" to ++ 86401. Valid delta times must start with a + or - sign. Days ++ are accepted as time units, but not years, months, or weeks. If ++ the result would overflow a computer long word (as would happen ++ with 32-bit long words when the number of days is greater than ++ 24854), the function fails. ++ ++ HINT: Although Kermit has a number of built-in date and time ++ variables, it doesn't have a single one suitable for writing a ++ timestamp. For this you would normally use something like "\v(ndate) ++ \v(time)". But \fcvtdate() (with no arguments) is equivalent: it ++ returns the current date and time in yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss format, ++ suitable for time stamping. ++ ++ 8.13.7. Date-Time Programming Examples ++ ++ Here's a macro that converts any date-time to UTC, which you might use ++ if C-Kermit didn't already have a \futcdate() function: ++ ++ define utcdate { ++ .local := \fcvtdate(\%*) ; 1. ++ .tmp := \fcvtdate(\m(local)UTC) ; 2. ++ .offset := \fdiffdate(\m(local),\m(tmp)) ; 3. ++ .utc := \fcvtdate(\m(local)\m(offset)) ; 4. ++ sho mac utc ; 5. ++ } ++ ++ Brief explanation: Line 1 converts the macro argument, a free-format ++ date-time, to standard-format local time. Line 2 appends the "UTC" ++ timezone to the local time and converts the result to local time. In ++ other words, we take the same time as the local time, but pretend it's ++ UTC time, and convert it to local time. For example, if New York time ++ is 4 hours ahead of UTC, then 6:00pm New York time is 2:00pm UTC. Line ++ 3 gets the difference of the two results (e.g. "+04:00"). Line 4 ++ appends the difference (delta time) to the local time, and converts it ++ again, which adds (or subtracts) the UTC offset to the given time. ++ Line 5 displays the result. ++ ++ Here's a script that opens a web page, gets its headers into an array, ++ scans the array for the "Last-Modified:" header, and inteprets it: ++ http open www.columbia.edu ++ if fail stop 1 HTTP OPEN failed ++ http /array:a head index.html /dev/null ++ if fail stop 1 HTTP GET failed ++ show array a ++ for \%i 1 \fdim(&a) 1 { ++ .\%x := \findex(:,\&a[\%i]) ++ if not \%x continue ++ .tag := \fleft(\&a[\%i],\%x-1) ++ .val := \fltrim(\fsubstr(\&a[\%i],\%x+1)) ++ if ( eq "\m(tag)" "Last-Modified" ) { ++ echo HTTP Date: \m(val) ++ .rdate := \fcvtdate(\m(val)) ++ echo {Standard Date (local): \m(rdate)} ++ echo {Standard Date (UTC): \futcdate(\m(rdate))} ++ break ++ } ++ } ++ http close ++ ++ The result: ++ ++ HTTP Date: Mon, 13 Aug 2001 20:05:42 GMT ++ Standard Date (local): 20010813 16:05:42 ++ Standard Date (UTC): 20010813 20:05:42 ++ ++ As you can see, Kermit had no trouble decoding the date-time-string ++ from the website, converting to local time, and converting back to UTC ++ with no conflicts or loss of information. If it had been in any other ++ known format, the result would have been the same. ++ ++ Now suppose we want to download the web page only if it is newer than ++ our local copy. The \fdate(filename) function (which returns the ++ modification date-time of the given file) and the new \fcmpdates() ++ function make it easy. Insert the following just before the BREAK ++ statement: ++ ++ if ( < 0 \fcmpdates(\m(rdate),\fdate(index.html)) ) { ++ echo GETTING index.html... ++ http get index.html index.html ++ if success echo HTTP GET OK ++ } else { ++ echo index.html: no update needed ++ } ++ http close ++ exit ++ ++ This says, "if 0 is less than the comparison of the remote file date ++ and the local file date, get the remote file, otherwise skip it." And ++ it automatically reconciles the time-zone difference (if any). ++ ++ It would be nice to be able to extend this script into a ++ general-purpose website updater, but unfortunately HTTP protocol ++ doesn't provide any mechanism for the client to ask the server for a ++ list of files, recursive or otherwise. ++ ++ [ [472]Top ] [ [473]Contents ] [ [474]C-Kermit Home ] [ [475]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 8.14. Trapping Keyboard Interruption ++ ++ Normally when you type Ctrl-C and Kermit is in command mode (as ++ opposed to CONNECT mode) with COMMAND INTERRUPTION ON (as it is unless ++ you have set it OFF), Kermit interrupts any command that is currently ++ in progress, and if a command file or macro is executing, rolls the ++ command stack back to top level, closing all open command files, ++ deactivating all macros, deallocating all local variables and arrays, ++ and leaving you at the command prompt. ++ ++ Suppose, however, you want certain actions to occur when a script is ++ interrupted; for example, closing open files, writing log entries, or ++ displaying summary results. You can do this by defining a macro named ++ ON_CTRLC. When Ctrl-C is detected, and a macro with this name is ++ defined, Kermit executes it from the current command level, thus ++ giving it full access to the environment in which the interruption ++ occurred, including local variables and open files. Only when the ++ ON_CTRLC macro completes execution is the command stack rolled back to ++ top level. ++ ++ Once the ON_CTRLC macro is defined, it can be executed only once. This ++ is to prevent recursion if the user types Ctrl-C while the ON_CTRLC ++ macro is executing. If you type Ctrl-C while the Ctrl-C macro is ++ active, this does not start a new copy of ON_CTRLC; rather, it returns ++ to the top-level command prompt. After the ON_CTRLC macro returns, it ++ has been removed from the macro table so if you want to use it again ++ or install a different Ctrl-C trap, you must execute a new DEFINE ++ ON_CTRLC command. In any case, as always when you interrupt a script ++ with Ctrl-C, its completion status is FAILURE. ++ ++ Normally the ON_CTRLC macro would be defined in the command file or ++ macro to which it applies, and should be declared LOCAL. This way, if ++ the command file or macro completes successfully without being ++ interrupted, the ON_CTRLC definition disappears automatically. ++ Otherwise the definition would still be valid and the macro would be ++ executed, probably out of context, the next time you typed Ctrl-C. ++ ++ Here's a simple example of a command file that sets a Ctrl-C trap for ++ itself: ++ ++ local on_ctrlc ; Make Ctrl-C trap local to this command file. ++ define on_ctrlc { ; Define the ON_CTRLC macro. ++ echo Interrupted at \v(time). ++ echo Iterations: \%n ++ } ++ xecho Type Ctrl-C to quit ++ for \%n 1 999 1 { ; Prints a dot every second until interrupted. ++ sleep 1 ++ xecho . ++ } ++ echo Finished normally at \v(time) ; Get here only if not interrupted. ++ decrement \%n ++ echo Iterations: \%n ++ ++ This prints a summary no matter whether it completes normally or is ++ interrupted from the keyboard. In both cases the trap is automatically ++ removed afterwards. ++ ++ For an example of how to use ON_CTRLC to debug scripts, see ++ [476]Section 8.1. ++ ++ [ [477]Top ] [ [478]Contents ] [ [479]C-Kermit Home ] [ [480]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++9. S-EXPRESSIONS ++ ++ This section is primarily for those who want to write ++ calculation-intensive scripts, especially if they require ++ floating-point arithmetic, and/or for those who are familiar with the ++ LISP programming language. ++ ++ Ever since C-Kermit version 5 was released in 1988, scripting has been ++ one of its major attractions, and arithmetic is a key part of it. ++ Versions 5 and 6 included integer arithmetic only, using traditional ++ algebraic notation, e.g.: ++ ++ echo \fevaluate(3*(2+7)/2) ++ 13 ++ ++ C-Kermit 7.0 added support for floating-point arithmetic, but only ++ through function calls: ++ ++ echo \ffpdivide(\ffpmultiply(3.0,\ffpadd(2.0,7.0)),2.0) ++ 13.5 ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 introduces a third form of arithmetic that treats ++ integers and floating-point numbers uniformly, is easier to read and ++ write, and executes very quickly: ++ ++ (/ (* 3 (+ 2 7)) 2) ++ 13.5 ++ ++ But first some background. ++ ++ The Kermit command and scripting language differs from true ++ programming languages (such as C or Fortran) in many ways; one of the ++ most prominent differences is the way in which variables are ++ distinguished from constants. In a command language, words are taken ++ literally; for example, the Unix shell: ++ ++ cat foo.bar ++ ++ displays the file named foo.bar. Whereas in a programming language ++ like C, words are assumed to be variables: ++ ++ s = foo.bar; /* Assigns the value of foo.bar to the variable s */ ++ ++ To make a programming language take words literally, you have to quote ++ or "escape" them: ++ ++ s = "foo.bar"; /* Assigns a pointer to the string "foo.bar" to the variable ++s */ ++ ++ The opposite holds for command languages: to get them to treat a word ++ as a variable rather than a constant, you have to escape them. For ++ example, in the Unix shell: ++ ++ foo=123 ; Assign value 123 to variable foo. ++ echo foo ; Prints "foo" ++ echo $foo ; Prints "123" ++ ++ And in Kermit: ++ ++ define foo 123 ; Assign value 123 to variable foo. ++ echo 123 ; This prints "123". ++ echo foo ; This prints "foo". ++ echo \m(foo) ; This prints "123". ++ ++ In other words, character strings (such as "foo" above) are ++ interpreted as literal strings, rather than variable names, except in ++ special commands like DEFINE that deal specifically with variable ++ names (or in numeric contexts as explained in [481]Section 8.2). The ++ special "escape" character (dollar sign ($) for the shell, backslash ++ (\) for Kermit) indicates that a variable is to be replaced by its ++ value. ++ ++ The requirement to escape variable names in command languages normally ++ does not impose any special hardship, but can add a considerable ++ notational burden to arithmetic expressions, which are typically full ++ of variables. Especially in Kermit when floating point numbers are ++ involved, where you must use special \ffpxxx() functions, e.g. ++ "\ffpadd(\m(a),\m(b))" rather than the simple "+" operator to add two ++ floating-point numbers together, because the original arithmetic ++ handler doesn't support floating point (this might change in the ++ future). To illustrate, the general formula for the area of a triangle ++ is: ++ ++ sqrt(s * (s - a) * (s - b) * (s - c)) ++ ++ where a, b, and c are the lengths of the triangle's three sides and: ++ ++ s = (a + b + c) / 2 ++ ++ Except in special cases (e.g. a = 3, b = 4, c = 5), the result has a ++ fractional part so the computation must be done using floating-point ++ arithmetic. We can create a Kermit 7.0 function for this as follows: ++ ++ def area { ++ local s t1 t2 t3 ++ assign s \ffpdiv(\ffpadd(\ffpadd(\%1,\%2),\%3),2.0) ++ assign t1 \ffpsub(\m(s),\%1) ++ assign t2 \ffpsub(\m(s),\%2) ++ assign t3 \ffpsub(\m(s),\%3) ++ return \ffpsqrt(\ffpmul(\m(s),\ffpmul(\m(t1),\ffpmul(\m(t2),\m(t3))))) ++ } ++ ++ But as you can see, this is rather cumbersome. Note, in particular, ++ that arithmetic functions like \ffpadd(), \ffpmul(), etc, take exactly ++ two operands (like their symbolic counterparts + and *), so obtaining ++ the product of three or more numbers (as we do in this case) is ++ awkward. ++ ++ Using the alternative S-Expression notation, we can reduce this to a ++ form that is both easier to read and executes faster (the details are ++ explained later): ++ ++ def newarea { ++ (let s (/ (+ \%1 \%2 \%3) 2.0)) ++ (sqrt (* s (- s \%1) (- s \%2) (- s \%3))) ++ } ++ ++ In both examples, the \%1..3 variables are the normal Kermit macro ++ arguments, referenced by the normal escaping mechanism. For increased ++ readability, we can also assign the macro arguments \%1, \%2, and \%3 ++ to the letters a, b, and c corresponding to our formula: ++ ++def newarea { ++ (let a \%1 b \%2 c \%3) ++ (let s (/ (+ a b c) 2.0)) ++ (sqrt (* s (- s a) (- s b) (- s c))) ++} ++ ++ And now the Kermit function reads almost like the original formula. ++ Here Kermit behaves more like a regular programming language. In an ++ S-Expression, macro names need not be escaped when they are used as ++ the names of numeric variables. ++ ++ [ [482]Top ] [ [483]Contents ] [ [484]C-Kermit Home ] [ [485]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.1. What is an S-Expression? ++ ++ The S-Expression concept is borrowed from the Lisp programming ++ language. "S-Expression" is short for Symbolic Expression (itself ++ sometimes shortened to SEXP). S-Expressions provide a kind of ++ Alternative Mini-Universe within the Kermit command language when the ++ regular rules don't apply, a universe enclosed in parentheses. ++ ++ C-Kermit does not pretend to be a full Lisp interpreter; only the ++ arithmetic parts of Lisp have been incorporated: S-Expressions that ++ operate on numbers and return numeric values (plus extensibility ++ features described in [486]Section 9.8, which allow some degree of ++ string processing). ++ ++ An S-Expression is a list of zero or more items, separated by spaces, ++ within parentheses. Examples: ++ ++ () ++ (1) ++ (a) ++ (+ a 1) ++ (* 2 a b) ++ ++ If the S-Expression is empty, it has the NIL (empty) value. If it is ++ not empty and the first item is an operator (such as + or *), there ++ can be zero or more subsequent items, called the operands: ++ ++ (+ 1 2) ++ ++ Here the operator is "+" and the operands are "1" and "2", and the ++ value of the S-Expression is the value of the operation (in this case ++ 3). The operator always comes first, which is different from the ++ familiar algebraic notation; this because S-Expression operators can ++ have different numbers of operands: ++ ++ (+ 1) ++ (+ 1 2) ++ (+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9) ++ ++ If the first item in the S-Expression is not an operator, then it must ++ be a variable or a number (or a macro; see [487]Section 9.8), and the ++ S-Expression can only contain one item; in this case, the ++ S-Expression's value is the value of the variable or number: ++ ++ (a) ++ (3) ++ ++ Operands can be numbers, variables that have numeric values, functions ++ that return numbers, or other S-Expressions. To illustrate an ++ S-Expression within an S-Expression, observe that: ++ ++ (+ 1 2) ++ ++ is equivalent to any of the following (plus an infinite number of ++ others): ++ ++ (+ 1 (+ 1 1)) ++ (+ (- 3 2) (/ 14 (+ 3 4))) ++ ++ S-Expressions can be nested to any reasonable level; for example, the ++ value of the following S-Expression is 64: ++ ++ (- (* (+ 2 (* 3 4)) (- 9 (* 2 2))) 6) ++ ++ Operators have no precedence, implied or otherwise, since they can't ++ be mixed. The only exceptions are unary + and -, which simply indicate ++ the sign of a number: ++ ++ (* 3 -1) ++ ++ Order of evaluation is specified entirely by parentheses, which are ++ required around each operator and its operands: (+ a (* b c)) instead ++ of (a + b * c). ++ ++ S-Expressions provide a simple and isolated environment in which ++ Kermit's macro names can be used without the \m(...) escaping that is ++ normally required. Given: ++ ++ define a 1 ++ define b 2 ++ define c 3 ++ ++ Then: ++ ++ (+ \m(a) \m(b) \m(c)) ++ ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++ (+ a b c) ++ ++ Within an S-Expression, as in other strictly numeric contexts ++ ([488]Section 8.2), any operand that starts with a letter is treated ++ as a Kermit macro name. In this context, abbreviations are not ++ accepted; variable names must be spelled out in full. Alphabetic case ++ is not significant; "a" and "A" are the same variable, but both are ++ different from "area". ++ ++ Of course, regular Kermit variables and functions can be used in ++ S-Expressions in the normal ways: ++ ++ (* \v(math_pi) (^ \%r 2)) ; Area of a circle with radius \%r ++ (+ \fjoin(&a)) ; Sum of all elements of array \&a[] ++ ++ [ [489]Top ] [ [490]Contents ] [ [491]C-Kermit Home ] [ [492]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.2. Integer and Floating-Point-Arithmetic ++ ++ Normally, if all numbers in an S-Expression are integers, the result ++ is an integer: ++ ++ (+ 1 1) ; Result is 2 ++ (/ 9 3) ; Result is 3 ++ ++ If any of the operands is floating point, however, the result is also ++ floating point: ++ ++ (+ 1 1.0) ; Result is 2.0 ++ (/ 9.0 3) ; Result is 3.0 ++ ++ If all the operands are integers but the result has a fractional part, ++ the result is floating point: ++ ++ (/ 10 3) ; Result is 3.333333333333333 ++ ++ To force an integer result in such cases, use the TRUNCATE operator: ++ ++ (truncate (/ 10 3)) ; Result is 3 ++ ++ Similarly, to force a computation to occur in floating point, you can ++ coerce one of its operands to FLOAT: ++ ++ (+ 1 (float 1)) ; Result is 2.0 ++ ++ The result is also floating point if the magnitude of any integer ++ operand, intermediate result, or the result itself, is larger than the ++ maximum for the underlying machine architecture: ++ ++ (^ 100 100) ++ ++ If the result is too large even for floating-point representation, ++ "Infinity" is printed; if it is too small to be distinguished from 0, ++ 0.0 is returned. ++ ++ Large numbers can be used and large results generated, but they are ++ accurate only to the precision of the underlying machine. For example, ++ the result of: ++ ++ (+ 111111111111111111111 222222222222222222222) ++ ++ should be 333333333333333333333, but 333333333333333300000.0 is ++ produced instead if the machine is accurate to only about 16 decimal ++ digits, even with coercion to floating-point. The order of magnitude ++ is correct but the least significant digits are wrong. The imprecise ++ nature of the result is indicated by the ".0" at the end. Contrast ++ with: ++ ++ (+ 111111111 222222222) ++ ++ which produces an exact integer result. ++ ++ [ [493]Top ] [ [494]Contents ] [ [495]C-Kermit Home ] [ [496]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.3. How to Use S-Expressions ++ ++ S-Expressions may be given as commands to C-Kermit. Any command whose ++ first character is "(" (left parenthesis) is interpreted as an ++ S-Expression. ++ ++ If you enter an S-Expression at the C-Kermit> prompt, its result is ++ printed: ++ ++ C-Kermit>(/ 10.0 3) ++ 3.333333333333333 ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ If an S-Expression is executed within a macro or command file, its ++ value is not printed. However, you can control the printing action ++ with: ++ ++ SET SEXPRESSION ECHO { AUTO, ON, OFF } ++ AUTO is the default, meaning print the value at top level only; ++ ON means always print the value; OFF means never print it. ++ ++ In any case, the value of the most recent S-Expression (and the ++ S-Expression itself) may be accessed programmatically through the ++ following variables: ++ ++ \v(sexpression) ++ The S-Expression most recently executed. ++ ++ \v(svalue) ++ The value of the S-Expression most recently executed. ++ ++ Besides issuing S-Expressions as commands in themselves, you can also ++ execute them anywhere within a Kermit command, but in this case they ++ must be enclosed in a function call (otherwise they are taken ++ literally): ++ ++ \fsexpression(s) ++ The argument "s" is an S-Expression; the outer parentheses may ++ be omitted. The value of the S-Expression is returned. Note ++ that since S-Expressions usually contain spaces, some form of ++ grouping or quoting might be needed in some contexts: ++ ++ echo \fsexpression((+ 1 1)) ; Outer parentheses may be included ++ echo \fsexpr(+ 1 1) ; Outer parentheses may be omitted ++ echo Value = "\fsexp(+ 1 a)" ; Can be embedded in strings ++ echo Value = \&a[\fsexp(/ b 2)] ; Can be used in array subscripts ++ if = {\fsexp(+ 1 1)} 2 { ; Braces needed here for grouping ++ echo One plus one still equals two ++ } ++ ++ The IF statement illustrates how to use S-Expressions as (or in) IF or ++ WHILE conditions: ++ ++ * Although S-Expressions and IF conditions are similar in ++ appearance, they are not interchangeable. Therefore you must use ++ \fsexpr() to let Kermit know it's an S-Expression rather than a ++ regular IF condition, or a boolean or algebraic expression within ++ an IF condition. ++ * In contexts where a single "word" is expected, you must enclose ++ the \fsexp() invocation in braces if the S-Expression contains ++ spaces (and most of them do). ++ ++ If an S-Expression is the last command executed in a macro, its value ++ becomes the return value of the macro; no RETURN command is needed. ++ Example: ++ ++ def newarea { ++ (let s (/ (+ \%1 \%2 \%3) 2.0)) ++ (sqrt (* s (- s \%1) (- s \%2) (- s \%3))) ++ } ++ ++ This is equivalent to (but more efficient than): ++ ++ def newarea { ++ (let s (/ (+ \%1 \%2 \%3) 2.0)) ++ return \fsexp(sqrt (* s (- s \%1) (- s \%2) (- s \%3))) ++ } ++ ++ When an S-Expression is entered as a command -- that is, the first ++ nonblank character of the command is a left parenthesis -- then it is ++ allowed to span multiple lines, as many as you like, until the first ++ left parenthesis is matched: ++ ++ (let s (/ ++ (+ ++ \%1 ++ \%2 ++ \%3 ++ ) ++ 2.0 ++ ) ++ ) ++ (sqrt (* ++ s ++ (- s \%1) ++ (- s \%2) ++ (- s \%3) ++ ) ++ ) ++ ++ The S-Expression concept lends itself easily to embedding and ++ recursion, but the depth to which recursion can occur is limited by ++ the resources of the computer (memory size, address space, swap space ++ on disk) and other factors. There is no way that C-Kermit can know ++ what this limit is, since it varies not only from computer to ++ computer, but also from moment to moment. If resources are exhausted ++ by recursion, C-Kermit simply crashes; there's no way to trap this ++ error. However, you can set a depth limit on S-Expressions: ++ ++ SET SEXPRESSION DEPTH-LIMIT number ++ Limits the number of times the S-Expression reader can invoke ++ itself without returning to the given number. The default limit ++ is 1000. This limit applies to S-Expressions embedded within ++ other S-Expressions as well as to S-Expressions that invoke ++ recursive macros. If the limit is exceeded, Kermit prints ++ "?S-Expression depth limit exceeded" and returns to its prompt. ++ More about recursion in [497]Section 9.8. ++ ++ You can also test the depth programmatically: ++ ++ \v(sdepth) ++ The current S-Expression invocation depth. The depth includes ++ both nesting level and recursion. For example, in: ++ (foo (foo (foo (foo (foo))))), the innermost (foo) is at depth ++ 5. ++ ++ Help, completion, and syntax checking are not available within an ++ S-Expression. If you type ? within an S-Expression, it says: ++ ++ C-Kermit>(? S-Expression ("help sexp" for details) ++ ++ As it says, typing "help sexp" will display a brief help text. ++ ++ The SHOW SEXPRESSION command displays current SET SEXPRESSION settings ++ and related information. ++ ++ [ [498]Top ] [ [499]Contents ] [ [500]C-Kermit Home ] [ [501]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.4. Summary of Built-in Constants and Operators ++ ++ Three constants are built in: ++ ++ * PI, whose value is the value of pi (the quotient of circumference ++ of any circle and its diameter, 3.141592653...) to the underlying ++ machine's precision; ++ * T, which always has the value 1, which signifies truth in Kermit ++ logical expressions or S-Expressions; ++ * NIL, which always has the empty value, and can serve as a False ++ truth value. ++ ++ These constants are specific to S-Expressions and are not visible ++ outside them. They may not be used as the target of an assignment. So, ++ for example: ++ ++ (setq t 0) Fails ++ assign t 0 Succeeds but this is not the same T! ++ ++ E (the base of natural logarithms, 2.7182818184...) is not built in ++ since it is not intrinsic in most Lisp dialects. If you want E to be ++ the base of natural logarithms you can: ++ ++ (setq e (exp 1)) ++ ++ Operators are either symbols (such as "+") or words. Words must be ++ spelled out in full, not abbreviated. Differences of alphabetic case ++ are ignored. ++ ++ The most basic operation in S-Expressions is evaluation: ++ ++ EVAL [ s-expression or variable or number [ another [ another ... ] ] ++ ] ++ Evaluates its operands and returns the value of the last one ++ evaluated. Examples: ++ ++ (eval) 0 ++ (eval 1) 1 ++ (eval a) value of a ++ (eval (+ 1 a)) value of a+1 ++ (eval (setq a 1) (setq b (+ a 0.5))) value of b (= a+0.5) ++ ++ You can use "." as a shorthand for EVAL: ++ ++ (.) ++ (. 1) ++ (. a) ++ (. (+ 1 a)) ++ (. (setq a 1) (setq b (+ a 0.5))) ++ ++ Opposite of EVAL is the operator that suppresses evaluation of its ++ operand: ++ ++ QUOTE item ++ The value (quote item) is "item". If the item is itself an ++ S-Expression, the result is the S-Expression with the outer ++ parentheses stripped. Examples: ++ ++ (quote) (illegal) ++ (quote a) a ++ (quote hello) hello ++ (quote (this is a string)) this is a string ++ (quote this is a string) (illegal) ++ ++ A shorthand notation is also accepted for quoting: ++ 'a is equivalent to (quote a). And therefore: ++ '(a b c) is equivalent to (quote (a b c)). ++ More about quoting in [502]Section 9.8. ++ ++ STRING item ++ Is a combination of EVAL and QUOTE. It evaluates the item as an ++ S-Expression, and then puts quotes around the result (more ++ about this in [503]Section 9.8). ++ ++ The following operators assign values to variables: ++ ++ SETQ [ variable [ value [ variable [ value [ ... ] ] ] ] ] ++ Applies to global variables. For each variable given: if a ++ value is not given, the variable is undefined. If a value is ++ given, assigns the value to the variable. The value may be a ++ number, a variable, or anything that resolves to a number ++ including an S-Expression. Returns the value of the last ++ assignment. Examples: ++ ++ (setq) Does nothing, returns NIL. ++ (setq a) Undefines a, returns NIL. ++ (setq a 1) Assigns 1 to a, returns 1. ++ (setq a 1 b 2) Assigns 1 to a, 2 to b, returns 2. ++ (setq a 1 b 2 c) Assigns 1 to a, 2 to b, undefines c, returns NIL. ++ ++ To undefine a variable that is not the final one in the list, give it ++ a value of "()" or NIL: ++ ++ (setq a () b 2) Undefines a, assigns 2 to b, returns 2. ++ (setq a nil b 2) Ditto. ++ ++ Note that a variable can be used right away once it has a value: ++ ++ (setq a 1 b a) Assigns 1 to a, the value of a (1) to b, returns 1. ++ ++ The results of SETQ (when used with macro names) can be checked ++ conveniently with SHOW MACRO, e.g: ++ ++ show mac a b c ++ ++ LET [ variable [ value [ variable [ value [ ... ] ] ] ] ] ++ Like SETQ, but applies to local variables. Note that "local" is ++ used in the Kermit sense, not the Lisp sense; it applies to the ++ current Kermit command level, not to the current S-Expression. ++ ++ If you want to use SETQ or LET to assign a value to a backslash ++ variable such as \%a or \&a[2], you must double the backslash: ++ ++ (setq \\%a 3) ++ (setq \\%b (+ \%a 1)) ++ (setq \\&a[2] (setq (\\%c (+ \%a \%b)))) ++ ++ In other words: ++ ++ * Double the backslash when you want to indicate the variable's ++ NAME; ++ * Don't double the backslash when you want its VALUE. ++ ++ See [504]Section 9.6 for a fuller explanation of variable syntax and ++ scope. ++ ++ Here's a summary table of arithmetic operators; in the examples, a is ++ 2 and b is -1.3: ++ ++ Operator Description Example Result ++ + Adds all operands (0 or more) (+ a b) 0.7 ++ - Subtracts all operands (0 or more) (- 9 5 2 1) 1 ++ * Multiplies all operands (0 or more) (* a (+ b 1) 3) -1.80 ++ / Divides all operands (2 or more) (/ b a 2) -0.325 ++ ^ Raise given number to given power (^ 3 2) 9 ++ ++ Increments variables (++ a 1.2) 3.2 ++ -- Decrements variables (-- a) 1 ++ ABS Absolute value of 1 operand (abs (* a b 3)) 7.8 ++ MAX Maximum of all operands (1 or more) (max 1 2 3 4) 4 ++ MIN Minimum of all operands (1 or more) (min 1 2 3 4) 1 ++ MOD (%) Modulus of all operands (1 or more) (mod 7 4 2) 1 ++ FLOAT Convert an integer to floating-point (float 1) 1.0 ++ TRUNCATE Integer part of floating-point operand (truncate 3.333) 3 ++ CEILING Ceiling of floating-point operand (ceiling 1.25) 2 ++ FLOOR Floor of floating-point operand (floor 1.25) 1 ++ ROUND Operand rounded to nearest integer (round 1.75) 2 ++ SQRT Square root of 1 operand (sqrt 2) 1.414.. ++ EXP e (2.71828..) to the given power (exp -1) 0.367.. ++ SIN Sine of angle-in-radians (sin (/ pi 2)) 1.0 ++ COS Cosine of angle-in-radians (cos pi) -1.0 ++ TAN Tangent of angle-in-radians (tan pi) 0.0 ++ LOG Natural log (base e) of given number (log 2.7183) 1.000.. ++ LOG10 Log base 10 of given number (log10 1000) 3.0 ++ ++ The ++ and -- operators are also assignment operators and work just ++ like SETQ and LET in their interpretations of operators and operands, ++ but: ++ ++ * Each target variable must already be defined and have a numeric ++ value; ++ * The assignment value is the amount by which to increment or ++ decrement the variable. ++ * If an assignment value is not given, 1 is used. ++ ++ If you include more than one variable-value pair in a ++ or -- ++ expression, every variable (except, optionally, the last) must be ++ followed by a value. Examples: ++ ++ (++ a) Equivalent to (setq a (+ a 1)) and to (++ a 1) ++ (++ a 2) Equivalent to (setq a (+ a 2)) ++ (-- a (* 2 pi)) Equivalent to (setq a (- a (* 2 pi))) ++ (++ a 1 b 1 c 1 d) Equivalent to four SETQs incrementing a,b,c,d by 1. ++ ++ Another group of operators forms the predicates. These return a "truth ++ value", in which 0 (or NIL) is false, and 1 or any other nonzero ++ number is true. ++ ++ Operator Description Example Result ++ = (or ==) Operands are equal (= 1 1.0) 1 ++ != Operands are not equal (!= 1 1.0) 0 ++ < Operands in strictly ascending order (< 1 2 3) 1 ++ <= Operands in ascending order (<= 1 1 2 3) 1 ++ > Operands in strictly descending order (> 3 2 1) 1 ++ >= Operands in descending order (<= 3 3 2 1) 1 ++ AND (&&) Operands are all true (and 1 1 1 1 0) 0 ++ OR (||) At least one operand is true (or 1 1 1 1 0) 1 ++ XOR Logical Exclusive OR (xor 3 1) 0 ++ NOT (!) Reverses truth value of operand (not 3) 0 ++ ++ The Exclusive OR of two values is true if one value is true and the ++ other value is false. ++ ++ And another group operates on bits within an integer word: ++ ++ Operator Description Example Result ++ & Bitwise AND (& 7 2) 2 ++ | Bitwise OR (| 1 2 3 4) 7 ++ # Bitwise Exclusive OR (# 3 1) 2 ++ ~ Reverses all bits (~ 3) -4 ++ ++ These operators coerce their operands to integer by truncation if ++ necessary. The result of bit reversal is hardware dependent. ++ ++ The final category of operator works on truth values: ++ ++ Operator Description Example Result ++ IF Conditional evaluation (if (1) 2 3) 2 ++ ++ IF (predicate) (s1) [ (s2) ] ++ The IF operator is similar to Kermit's IF command. If the ++ predicate is true (i.e. evaluates to a nonzero number), the ++ first S-Expression (s1) is evaluated and its value is returned. ++ Otherwise, if (s2) is given, it is evaluated and its value ++ returned; if (s2) is not given, nothing happens and the NIL ++ (empty) value is returned. ++ ++ You can group multiple expressions in the s1 and s2 expressions using ++ EVAL (or "."): ++ ++ (if (< a 0) (eval (setq x 0) (setq y 0)) (eval (setq x a) (setq y b))) ++ ++ or equivalently: ++ ++ (if (< a 0) (. (setq x 0) (setq y 0)) (. (setq x a) (setq y b))) ++ ++ Each operator has its own requirement as to number and type of ++ operands. In the following table, "number" means any kind of number -- ++ integer or floating-point -- or a variable, function, macro, or ++ S-Expression that returns a number; "vname" means variable name, ++ "fpnumber" means a floating-point number (or anything that resolves to ++ one), and "integer" means integer (or anything that resolves to one). ++ "truthvalue" means anything that resolves to a value of zero or an ++ empty value (which indicates false) or a nonzero value (which ++ indicates true). "any" means any kind of value, including none at all. ++ ++ Operator Number of operands Type of operands Returns ++ EVAL (.) 0 or more S-Expression Last value (default NIL) ++ STRING 1 S-Expression string ++ QUOTE (') 1 word string ++ SETQ 0 or more vname value pairs Last value (default NIL) ++ LET 0 or more vname value pairs Last value (default NIL) ++ + 0 or more number number (default 0) ++ - 0 or more number number (default 0) ++ * 0 or more number number (see note (1)) ++ / 2 or more number number ++ ^ 2 or more number number ++ ++ 1 or more vname value pairs Result of last increment ++ -- 1 or more vname value pairs Result of last decrement ++ ABS 1 number number ++ MAX 1 or more number number ++ MIN 1 or more number number ++ MOD (%) 2 number number ++ FLOAT 1 number fpnumber ++ TRUNCATE 1 number integer ++ CEILING 1 number integer ++ FLOOR 1 number integer ++ ROUND 1 number integer ++ SQRT 1 number fpnumber ++ EXP 1 number fpnumber ++ SIN 1 number fpnumber ++ COS 1 number fpnumber ++ TAN 1 number fpnumber ++ LOG 1 number fpnumber ++ LOG10 1 number fpnumber ++ = (==) 1 or more number truthvalue ++ != 1 or more number truthvalue ++ < 1 or more number truthvalue ++ <= 1 or more number truthvalue ++ > 1 or more number truthvalue ++ >= 1 or more number truthvalue ++ AND (&&) 1 or more truthvalue truthvalue ++ OR (||) 1 or more truthvalue truthvalue ++ XOR 2 truthvalue truthvalue ++ NOT (!) 1 truthvalue truthvalue ++ & 1 or more number (see note 2) integer ++ | 1 or more number (see note 2) integer ++ # 2 number (see note 2) integer ++ ~ 1 number (see note 2) integer ++ IF 2 or 3 truthvalue,any,any any ++ ++ Operators that don't require any arguments return the default values ++ shown. ++ ++ 1. The value of "*", when used as an operator, is initially "1" and ++ the value of the most recent S-Expression thereafter, as in Franz ++ Lisp. This is handy when doing a series of calculations by hand: ++ C-Kermit>(* 13272.42 0.40) ++ 5308.968 ++ C-Kermit>(/ * 2) ++ 2654.4840 ++ C-Kermit> ++ 2. The bitwise operators coerce their operands to integer by ++ truncation. ++ ++ [ [505]Top ] [ [506]Contents ] [ [507]C-Kermit Home ] [ [508]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.5. Variables ++ ++ As noted elsewhere in this discussion, all backslash items (variables ++ such as \%a, macro parameters such as \%1, array elements such as ++ \&a[\%i], built-in variables such as \v(ndate), built-in functions ++ such as \fjoin(), macro names enclosed in \m(), \s(), or \:(), etc) ++ are evaluated at "top level" before the S-Expression is sent to the ++ S-Expression reader. To use a backslash variable as the target of an ++ assignment (e.g. by SETQ, LET, ++, or --), you must double the ++ backslash, e.g. (setq \\%r 1234). This is discussed at greater length ++ in the next section. ++ ++ Thus S-Expression reader generally deals only with macro names (not ++ backslash items) as variables. It is important to understand how the ++ reader handles macro names. There are fundamentally two kinds of ++ S-Expressions: those that contain a single element, such as: ++ ++ (foo) ++ ++ and those that contain more than one element: ++ ++ (foo a b c) ++ ++ If an S-Expression contains only one element, and it is the name of a ++ macro, the macro's definition is examined. If the definition is a ++ number (integer or floating-point, positive or negative), then this ++ becomes the value of the expression. If the definition starts with ' ++ (apostrophe), then the quoted word or string is the value of the ++ expression (explained in [509]Section 9.8). Otherwise, the macro is ++ assumed to be composed of Kermit commands (possibly including ++ S-Expressions), which are executed. If the macro has a RETURN value, ++ or it executes an S-Expression as its last command, the result becomes ++ the value of the S-Expression; otherwise the result is empty. ++ ++ For S-Expressions that contain more than one element, and the first ++ element is the name of a macro, then this macro is executed with the ++ arguments that are given, after the arguments are evaluated by the ++ S-Expression reader. Likewise, If the first element is a built-in ++ operator, then it is applied to the operands after they are evaluated. ++ In both cases, each operand is fed to the S-Expression reader ++ recursively for evaluation. If an operand is a number or a quoted ++ string, it is used as-is. But if it's a macro name, this degenerates ++ into the first case, and the previous paragraph applies. ++ ++ Examples: ++ ++ define foo 123 ++ (foo) Result: 123 ++ define foo 'abc ++ (foo) Result: abc ++ define foo '(one two three) ++ (foo) Result: one two three ++ define foo return \frandom(1000) ++ (foo) Result: 713 (or other number) ++ define foo (+ a b) ++ (foo) Result: The sum of a and b ++ ++ A more difficult example: ++ ++ define foo abc ++ (foo) Result: ??? ++ ++ The result in the last example depends on the definition of abc: ++ ++ * If it has no definition, an error occurs; otherwise: ++ * If the definition is an S-Expression, the result is the ++ S-Expression's value; otherwise: ++ * If the definition consists of Kermit commands, they are executed. ++ But in this case "(foo)" produces the empty result, because it ++ doesn't RETURN anything. ++ ++ The use of macros as S-Expression operators is described in ++ [510]Section 9.8. ++ ++ [ [511]Top ] [ [512]Contents ] [ [513]C-Kermit Home ] [ [514]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.6. Assignments and Scope ++ ++ The assignment operators SETQ and LET apply to global and local ++ variables, respectively. SETQ and LET are standard Lisp operators ++ adapted to Kermit scoping rules. When the operands are numeric or ++ arithmetic, SETQ is equivalent to Kermit's EVALUATE command: ++ ++ (setq a (+ 1 2)) ++ evaluate a 1 + 2 ++ ++ When the operand is a string, SETQ is equivalent to DEFINE: ++ ++ (setq a '(this is a string)) ++ define a this is a string ++ ++ In the first case, both statements create a macro named "a" with a ++ value of 3. But in neither case is the macro "a" necessarily global. ++ If either of these commands executes in an environment (i.e. macro ++ invocation level) where a "local a" command has been given, the "a" ++ macro is global to that environment, but is not visible outside it. ++ ++ LET is equivalent to the Kermit LOCAL command, followed by the ++ corresponding EVALUATE: ++ ++ (let a (+ 1 2)) ++ ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++ local a ++ evaluate a 1 + 2 ++ ++ Again, "local" in this context applies to the Kermit macro invocation ++ stack, not to the S-Expression nesting level. To illustrate, recall ++ our "newarea" macro: ++ ++def newarea { ++ (let a \%1 b \%2 c \%3) ++ (let s (/ (+ a b c) 2.0)) ++ (sqrt (* s (- s a) (- s b) (- s c))) ++} ++ ++ Because SETQ and LET expressions return a value, they can be placed ++ within a larger S-Expression. In this case we can replace the first ++ reference to the "s" variable by its defining expression: ++ ++def newarea { ++ (let a \%1 b \%2 c \%3) ++ (sqrt (* (let s (/ (+ a b c) 2.0)) (- s a) (- s b) (- s c))) ++} ++ ++ This would not work if LET were local to the S-Expression, but it ++ works nicely in the context of Kermit macros. The previous definition ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++def newarea { ++ local a b c s ++ (setq a \%1 b \%2 c \%3) ++ (sqrt (* (setq s (/ (+ a b c) 2.0)) (- s a) (- s b) (- s c))) ++} ++ ++ In both cases, the variables a, b, c, and s are local to the "newarea" ++ macro, and global within it. ++ ++ Multiple assignments can be handled in several ways. Here is the ++ obvious way to initialize a series of variables to the same value: ++ ++ (setq a 0) ++ (setq b 0) ++ (setq c 0) ++ (setq s 0) ++ ++ Here is a more compact and efficient way of doing the same thing: ++ ++ (setq a 0 b 0 c 0 s 0) ++ ++ However, in case the value was more complex, it's better to put only ++ one copy of it in the S-Expression; in this case we rely on the fact ++ that SETQ returns the value of its last assignment: ++ ++ (setq a (setq b (setq c (setq s (* x (^ y 2)))))) ++ ++ Similarly, to set a series of variables to x, x+1, x+2, ... ++ ++ (setq c (+ (setq b (+ (setq a (+ (setq s x) 1)) 1)) 1)) ++ ++ In the last example, you can see why "last" does not always correspond ++ to "rightmost" (the leftmost variable "c" is assigned last). ++ ++ If you are working with backslash variables like \%a or array elements ++ like \&a[1], remember two rules: ++ 1. Don't put spaces inside array brackets. ++ 2. You must double the backslash when using SETQ, LET, ++, or -- to ++ assign a value to a backslash variable. ++ ++ Examples of assigning to a backslash variable: ++ ++ (setq x 1) ++ (setq \\%a 0) ++ (setq \\&a[x+1] 1) ++ (++ \\%x) ++ (-- \\&a[x+2]) ++ ++ Examples of referring to a backslash variable's value: ++ ++ (setq a (+ \%a 1)) ++ (setq b (+ \%a \&a[1])) ++ (++ a \%x) ++ (-- b \&a[1]) ++ ++ The special notation is required because all backslashed items (\%x ++ variables, array elements, built-in \v(xxx) variables, and \fxxx() ++ function invocations) are evaluated in a single pass BEFORE the ++ S-Expression is executed; any other approach would result in ++ unacceptable performance. So, for example, in: ++ ++ declare \&a[] = 1 2 3 ++ define \%x 4 ++ define \%y 0 ++ (setq \\%y (+ \%x \&a[1])) ++ ++ the S-Expression becomes: ++ ++ (setq \%y (+ 4 1)) ++ ++ before it is sent to the S-Expression evaluator. If the backslash had ++ not been doubled on the assignment target, the result would have been: ++ ++ (setq 0 (+ 4 1)) ++ ++ which is illegal because you can't assign a value to a number. ++ Conversely, if backslashes were doubled on right-hand-side values: ++ ++ (setq \\%y (+ \\%x \\&a[1]) ++ ++ this too, would give an error (not numeric - "\%x"). ++ ++ If you omit the double backslash in the assignment target, the result ++ depends on whether the variable already has a value: ++ ++ (setq \%a (* 3 3)) ++ ++ If \%a has a non-numeric single-word value, then this becomes the name ++ of the variable that is assigned by SETQ. To illustrate: ++ ++ define \%a foo ++ echo \%a ++ foo ++ (setq \%a (* 3 3)) ++ echo \%a ++ foo ++ show macro foo ++ foo = 9 ++ ++ If \%a has no value, a numeric value, or a multiword value, an ++ "invalid assignment" error occurs. ++ ++ [ [515]Top ] [ [516]Contents ] [ [517]C-Kermit Home ] [ [518]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.7. Conditional Expressions ++ ++ The IF operator provides a compact form of decision-making within ++ S-Expressions. An IF expression can stand wherever a number might ++ stand, as long is it returns a number. Here's a quick way to obtain ++ the average value of all the elements in an array that contains only ++ numbers: ++ ++ (/ (+ \fjoin(&a)) (float \fdim(&a))) ++ ++ This results in a "Divide by zero" error if the array is empty. If you ++ want to define the average value of an empty array to be 0 instead of ++ getting an error, you can use IF to check the array size: ++ ++ (if \fdim(&a) (/ (+ \fjoin(&a)) (float \fdim(&a))) 0) ++ ++ or equivalently: ++ ++ (if (not \fdim(&a)) 0 (/ (+ \fjoin(&a)) (float \fdim(&a)))) ++ ++ Of course, IF can fit anywhere else into an S-Expression: ++ ++ (setq a (+ b (if (< c 0) 0 c))) ++ ++ and the IF expression can be as complex as you like: ++ ++ (setq a (+ b (if (and (or (> x 0) (> y 0)) (< c 0) (> d 1) (!= e 0)) 1 0))) ++ ++ and the "then" and "else" parts can contain multiple S-Expressions ++ enclosed within (EVAL ...): ++ ++ (if x (eval (...) (...) (...)) (eval (...) (...) (...))) ++ ++ AND and OR operators are guaranteed to "short circuit". If any operand ++ of AND is false, none of the subsequent operands is evaluated; ++ likewise, if an OR operand is true, no further operands are evaluated. ++ ++ Bear in mind that the S-Expression IF is not the same as Kermit IF; ++ the condition is only allowed to be an S-Expression or a variable or ++ number, not the whole list of possibilities you see when you type "if ++ ?" at the C-Kermit> prompt. But keep reading... ++ ++ [ [519]Top ] [ [520]Contents ] [ [521]C-Kermit Home ] [ [522]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.8. Extensibility ++ ++ To extend the capabilities of S-Expressions, you can use Kermit macro ++ names as operators, with the following limitations: ++ ++ * The macro must not have the same name as a built-in operator. ++ * You must use the full macro name, not an abbreviation. ++ ++ And with the following enhancement: ++ ++ * If the last statement executed by the macro is an S-Expression, ++ its value is returned automatically. In other words: ++ ++ define bump (++ \%1) ++ ++ is equivalent to: ++ ++ define bump return \fsexpression(++ \%1) ++ ++ Here's an example in which we define a FIBONACCI operator that returns ++ the nth element, n >= 0, of the Fibonacci series, 0 1 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 ++ 34 55, . . ., in which the first element is 0, the second is 1, and ++ each subsequent element is the sum of the two before it. This series ++ was devised by Leonardo Pisano, Filius Bonacci (Fibonacci for short) ++ in 1202 to describe how fast rabbits can breed, and also forms the ++ basis for the Golden Mean, the branching behavior of plants, the ++ spiral of a nautilus shell, etc. (Thanks to [523]Dat Thuc Nguyen for ++ December 2003 corrections to this section!) ++ ++ We can write a FIBONACCI function as a macro easily with ++ S-Expressions: ++ ++ define FIBONACCI { ++ (if (== \%1 0) 0 ++ (if (== \%1 1) 1 (+ (fibonacci (- \%1 2)) (fibonacci (- \%1 1))))) ++ } ++ ++ You can read this as: ++ ++ If the argument (\%1) is 0, return a result of 0; if it is 1, ++ return 1; otherwise: ++ return the sum of fibonacci(argument - 2) and fibonacci(argument - ++ 1) ++ ++ Note that a RETURN statement is not needed, since S-Expressions ++ automatically set the return value of their containing macros. ++ ++ For comparison, here's how it would be coded without S-Expressions: ++ ++ define FIBONACCI { ++ if == \%1 0 { ++ return 0 ++ } else if == \%1 1 { ++ return 1 ++ } else { ++ return \feval(\fexec(fibonacci \feval(\%1-2)) - ++ + \fexec(fibonacci \feval(\%1-1))) ++ } ++ } ++ ++ Now we can use the FIBONACCI function (whichever way you write it) ++ just as if it were a built-in operator: ++ ++ (fibonacci 6) ++ ++ Or: ++ ++ (setq a 10) ++ (fibonacci a) ++ ++ Within S-Expressions only (not outside them), S-Expressions themselves ++ can be used as macro arguments: ++ ++ (setq a 2 b 4) ++ (setq x (fibonacci (* a b ))) ++ ++ The value of the S-Expression (in this case "8"), and not the ++ S-Expression itself, is sent to the macro. ++ ++ Your macro is responsible for argument validation and error handling. ++ A robust Fibonacci macro would be more like this: ++ ++ define FIBONACCI { ++ if < \v(argc) 2 end 1 ?\%0: Missing argument ++ if > \v(argc) 2 end 1 ?\%0: Too many arguments ++ if not integer \%1 end 1 ?\%0: Integers only ++ if < \%1 1 end 1 ?\%0: Argument out of range ++ (if (== \%1 0) 0 ++ (if (== \%1 1) 1 (+ (fibonacci (- \%1 2)) (fibonacci (- \%1 1))))) ++ } ++ ++ Recall that "END nonzero-number [ message ]" causes a macro invocation ++ to fail. When the macro is the operator in an S-Expression, this makes ++ the S-Expression fail too. Also note that our Fibonacci macro is just ++ an illustration, not a practical example. Since it is recursive (calls ++ itself), it won't work for large arguments because the call stack can ++ exceed available memory. See [524]Section 9.9.2 for a practical ++ alternative. ++ ++ Kermit macros, when used as S-Expression operators, can do anything at ++ all except initiate file transfers: they can print messages on the ++ screen, read and write files, interact with the user, and so on. For ++ example, here's a macro ASKME that asks you to enter a number, makes ++ sure that you did, and then returns its value for use in the ++ S-Expression: ++ ++ define ASKME { ++ local \%n ++ while true { ++ ask \%n { Number: } ++ if not def \%n continue ++ if not numeric \%n { ++ echo Not numeric - "\%n" ++ continue ++ } ++ break ++ } ++ return \%n ++ } ++ (setq a (* 2 (askme))) ; Get number from user, double it, assign result to a. ++ ++ Here's a macro you can use to validate that a number is in a given ++ range: ++ ++ define inrange { ++ if != \v(argc) 4 end 1 ?\%0: Wrong number of arguments ++ if ( < \%1 \%2 || > \%1 \%3 ) return 0 ++ return 1 ++ } ++ ++ The first argument is the number to be checked, the second is the ++ minimum acceptable value, the third is the maximum. You can use this ++ (for example) in IF conditions: ++ ++ define yes echo \%1 IS OK ++ define no echo \%1 IS NOT OK ++ ++ (setq a -1 b 999) ++ (if (inrange a 0 100) (yes a) (no a)) ++ (if (inrange b -1000 +1000) (yes b) (no b)) ++ ++ This is just an illustration, of course; there's already a built-in ++ operator to let you do range checking without help from macros: ++ ++ (if (<= 0 a 100) (yes a) (no a)) ++ (if (<= -1000 b +1000) (yes b) (no b)) ++ ++ To send string parameters to a macro, some kind of quoting is required ++ to tell the S-Expression parser to take a given "word" literally ++ rather than replacing it by its value. For this we use the Lisp QUOTE ++ operator: ++ ++ define length return \flength(\%1) ++ (length (quote abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz)) ++ 26 ++ ++ This causes the string "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz" to be sent ++ literally to the LENGTH macro. Kermit, like Lisp, also offers a ++ shortcut for QUOTE, that lets us quote a word by prefixing it with a ++ single quote (') character, also called apostophe (ASCII 39): ++ ++ (length 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz) ++ 26 ++ ++ The two forms are equivalent. ++ ++ How the macro treats its arguments is up to the macro. In the example ++ above, the argument is treated as a literal string. However, it can ++ also be treated as a variable name: ++ ++ define string This is a string ++ define length return \flength(\m(\%1)) ++ (length 'string) ++ 16 ++ ++ Note the construct \m(\%1). This means "the value of the macro whose ++ name is the value of ++ \%1". The value of \%1 in this case is the word "string", and the ++ value of the macro whose name is "string" is "This is a string". ++ ++ What if the macro takes multiple arguments, or a variable number of ++ them? Here's a simple macro that prints a phrase that includes its ++ arguments: ++ ++ define complain echo It's too \%*! ++ ++ (Recall that \%* means "all arguments".) ++ ++ It can be called in the traditional way: ++ ++ complain hot Result: "It's too hot!" ++ complain cold and wet Result: "It's too cold and wet!" ++ ++ Or from an S-Expression if you quote the arguments: ++ ++ (complain 'hot) Result: "It's too hot!" ++ (complain 'cold 'and 'wet) Result: "It's too cold and wet!" ++ ++ To group multiple words into a single argument, use parentheses: ++ ++ (complain (quote (cold and wet))) Result: "It's too cold and wet!" ++ (complain '(cold and wet)) Result: "It's too cold and wet!" ++ ++ Note the difference: ++ ++ (complain 'cold 'and 'wet) Three arguments ++ (complain '(cold and wet)) One argument ++ ++ Since the COMPLAIN macro uses \%* to refer to all its arguments, no ++ matter how many, it doesn't care which form you use. But it makes a ++ difference in cases where the macro refers to its arguments ++ individually. ++ ++ To illustrate, let's consider a macro that receives the name of a ++ macro and its argument list and executes it with its arguments, ++ without knowing how many arguments there are. The following LOOP macro ++ is used to execute the given macro with the given argument list the ++ requested number of times: ++ ++ def loop { local i, for i 1 \%1 1 do \%2 \%3 } ++ ++ Within the LOOP macro, the first argument (\%1) is the loop count, \%2 ++ is the macro name, and \%3 is the argument list. When the LOOP macro ++ is invoked traditionally like this: ++ ++ loop 3 complain hot ++ ++ it prints "It's too hot!" three times. To invoke it from an ++ S-Expression, you must quote both the macro name as well as the ++ argument, since in this case the macro name itself is an argument: ++ ++ (loop 3 'complain 'hot) ++ ++ Now what if you need to send different or variable numbers of ++ arguments to the LOOP macro? The LOOP macro can handle it already, ++ provided you group the arguments into LOOP's third argument (\%3). In ++ Kermit syntax, without grouping: ++ ++ loop 3 complain cold and wet ++ ++ prints "It's too cold!" three times ("and wet" is lost); but with ++ grouping (either of the following two forms): ++ ++ loop 3 complain {cold and wet} ++ loop 3 complain "cold and wet" ++ ++ the LOOP macro prints "It's too cold and wet!" three times as desired. ++ ++ To do the same thing in an S-Expression, just use the Lisp forms of ++ quoting instead of the Kermit forms; the following two are equivalent: ++ ++ (loop 3 'complain (quote (cold and wet))) ++ (loop 3 'complain '(cold and wet)) ++ ++ Here's a similar example in which we write a macro that shows both the ++ name and the value of one or more other macros, whose names are given ++ as arguments (similar to "show macro"): ++ ++ define display { ++ local \%i ++ for \%i 1 \v(argc)-1 1 { ++ echo \&_[\%i] = \m(\&_[\%i]) ++ } ++ } ++ ++ (Recall that \&_[] is the macro's argument vector array, equivalent to ++ \%1, \%2, ...) The DISPLAY macro can be used in S-Expressions like ++ this: ++ ++ (setq a 1 b 2 c 3) ++ (display 'a 'b 'c 'd) ++ ++ which prints: ++ ++ a = 1 ++ b = 2 ++ c = 3 ++ d = ++ ++ The names must be quoted to prevent their evaluation before they are ++ sent to the macro. This ability to pass variables "by name" to macros, ++ rather than by value, lets you write macros that change the values of ++ argument variables. For example, here's a macro that doubles the value ++ of its argument variable: ++ ++ define double (++ \%1 \%1) ++ ++ which you can call like this: ++ ++ (setq a 12) ++ (double 'a) ++ ++ In the macro, \%1 is replace by the variable name "a"; "(++ a a)" adds ++ "a" to itself, and sets the value of "a" to the result. ++ ++ There are no built-in operators other than QUOTE, ', and STRING for ++ handling strings in S-Expressions, but using just these, plus macros ++ that use Kermit's regular string-handling features, you can easily ++ extend S-Expressions to do string manipulation: ++ ++ define len return \flen(\%1) Returns length of argument string ++ define cap return \fupper(\%1) Uppercase argument string ++ define rev return \freverse(\%1) Reverses argument string ++ define sub return \fsubstr(\%1,\%2,\%3) Returns substring of arg string ++ ++ (len '(this is a string)) Result: 16 ++ (rev '(this is a string)) Result: gnirts a si siht ++ (rev (cap '(this is a string))) Result: GNIRTS A SI SIHT ++ (sub (rev (cap '(this is a string))) 5 9) Result: TS A SI S ++ ++ You can assign a string to a macro name as follows: ++ ++ (setq foo '(this is a string)) ++ (setq foo (quote (this is a string))) ++ ++ The two are exactly equivalent. In both cases, the macro "foo" has the ++ value: ++ ++ '(this is a string) ++ ++ so when it is retrieved it can be identified as a string rather than a ++ number or commands to be executed. Thus: ++ ++ (setq foo (quote (this is a string))) ++ show macro foo ++ foo = '(this is a string) ++ (foo) ++ this is a string ++ ++ Note the different results for "show macro foo" and "(foo)". The ++ former shows the internal definition; the latter evaluates the ++ variable, which removes the quoting. And perhaps more important, note ++ that if the apostrophe and surrounding parentheses were not stored as ++ part of the definition, (foo) would try to execute "this is a string" ++ as a command. ++ ++ Given the assignment above, the following work as expected: ++ ++ (len foo) Result: 16 ++ (rev foo) Result: gnirts a si siht ++ (rev (cap foo)) Result: GNIRTS A SI SIHT ++ (sub (rev (cap foo)) 5 8) Result: TS A SI S ++ ++ Note that, unlike built-in S-Expression operators that return numbers ++ or truth values, these operators return strings. If you want to assign ++ their return values to other variables, you can do so: ++ ++ (setq bar (rev (cap foo))) Result: GNIRTS A SI SIHT ++ ++ But now the S-Expression processor doesn't know the value of "bar" is ++ supposed to be a string, rather than a macro to execute. For this you ++ need one final special operator, STRING. The STRING operator takes an ++ S-Expression as an operand, evaluates it, and then returns its value ++ enclosed in '(), so you can use the value as a string is subsequent ++ S-Expressions. Use STRING for referencing macros that return strings: ++ ++ (setq bar (string (rev (cap foo)))) Result: '(GNIRTS A SI SIHT) ++ ++ STRING is like QUOTE, except that it evaluates its operand before ++ applying the quoting, rather than taking the operand literally. ++ ++ To reference backslash variables or functions that return string ++ values, you must use the regular quoting mechanisms: ++ ++ (setq time '(\v(time))) ++ (setq date '(\v(date))) ++ assign \%r this is a string ++ (setq s1 '(\%r)) ++ ++ That's because backslash items are evaluated BEFORE the S-Expression ++ parser ever sees them, and the values of \v(time) and so on are not ++ valid S-Expressions, so STRING won't like them. ++ ++ Finally a brief word on the touchy topic of quoting. Suppose you want ++ to include (say) literal parentheses in a string that will later be ++ processed by the S-Expression reader (or \fsplit() or \fword()). ++ Normally, you can't do this because parentheses are meaningful in ++ these contexts. To defeat the normal parsing rules, you can quote the ++ parentheses with backslash. However, due to the many levels of string ++ processing involved, a surprisingly large amount of backslashes might ++ be required, for example: ++ ++ (setq s '(a b (c d) \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\(e f (g h) x\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\) j k)) ++ ++ This is nearly impossible to explain(*). Instead, just remember two ++ points: ++ ++ * In situations like this, it's better to use DEFINE to create the ++ string, rather than SETQ. The example above requires only double ++ backslashes when DEFINE is used: ++ define s '(a b (c d) \\(e f (g h) x\\) j k) ++ * The level of quoting depends on how many levels of evaluation the ++ string must pass through, which is not always obvious. However, ++ the number of backslashes required in any given situation is ++ always a power of 2. So if 1 doesn't work, try 2; if 2 doesn't ++ work, try 4; if 4 doesn't work, try 8, 16, 32, and so on. ++ ++ Considerations like this apply in any scripting language (shell, Tcl, ++ Perl, Python, etc). The situation is known as "Quoting Hell". ++ ++ (*) If you really want an explanation, here it is: ++ ++ * Every SEXP has its backslash items evaluated in a single pass at ++ top level before being passed to the SEXP reader, so \%1, ++ \v(ftime), etc, can be evaluated up front, freeing the SEXP reader ++ of having to know about such things, which in turn makes it much ++ more efficient. Therefore one level of quoting is lost right away, ++ and therefore you must double each backslash that is to be used as ++ a quote. ++ * When the SEXP reader sees '\', it treats it as a quote; discards ++ it and keeps the next character. Thus '\\' becomes '\'. This would ++ be the end of it, except that: ++ * The SEXP reader must call itself recursively on its operands, so ++ we must double any quotes in the operands: 2^2 = 4. ++ * If the result is to be passed as an argument to a macro, the ++ backslashes must again be doubled, because the macro processor ++ evaluates the arguments before sending them to the macro: 2^3 = 8. ++ * If the macro itself is to see the quotes, rather than just the ++ result of the quoting, the quotes must be doubled again: 2^4 = 16. ++ ++ Moral: To create string constants in which grouping characters must be ++ quoted, use DEFINE rather than SETQ. ++ ++ [ [525]Top ] [ [526]Contents ] [ [527]C-Kermit Home ] [ [528]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.9. Examples ++ ++ 9.9.1. Statistics ++ ++ The following program computes statistics -- means, maxima, mimima, ++ variance, standard deviation, and correlation -- from data stored in ++ parallel arrays, \&x[] and \&y[], which can contain any mixture of ++ integer and floating-point numbers: positive, negative, or zero. Array ++ setup and validation are not shown. Except for the traditional FOR ++ loop and printing the results at the end, the entire computation is ++ done with S-Expressions: ++ ++; Initialize sums, maxima, minima, and number of elements ++ ++ (setq xsum 0 ysum 0 xsum2 0 ysum2 0 xysum 0) ++ (setq xmin (setq xmax \&x[1]) ymin (setq ymax \&y[1])) ++ (setq n \fdim(&x)) ++ ++; Loop through elements and accumulate sums, maxima, and minima ++ ++ for i 1 n 1 { ++ (setq x \&x[i] y \&y[i]) ; Notational convenience ++ (setq xmax (max xmax x) ymax (max ymax y)) ; X and Y maxima ++ (setq xmin (min xmin x) ymin (min ymin y)) ; X and Y minima ++ (++ xsum x ysum y) ; X and Y sums ++ (++ xsum2 (^ x 2) ysum2 (^ y 2)) ; Sum of X and Y squares ++ (++ xysum (* x y)) ; Sum of XY products ++ } ++ ++; Calculate results ++ ++ (setq xmean (/ xsum n) ymean (/ ysum n)) ; Mean X and Y ++ (setq xss (- xsum2 (/ (^ xsum 2) n))) ; Intermediate values ++ (setq yss (- ysum2 (/ (^ ysum 2) n))) ++ (setq xyss (- xysum (/ (* xsum ysum) n))) ++ (setq xvar (/ xss n) yvar (/ yss n)) ; X and Y variance ++ (setq sdx (sqrt xvar) sdy (sqrt yvar)) ; Std deviation in X and Y ++ (setq tmp (* xss yss)) ++ (setq cc (if tmp (/ xyss (sqrt tmp)) 1.0)) ; Correlation coefficient ++ show macro xmean ymean xvar yvar sdx sdy cc ; Print the results ++ ++ The final "if tmp" check accounts for the possibility that both arrays ++ contain all 0's. Results can also be printed with "echo CC = \m(cc)", ++ or any other desired way. Interestingly, if we had not needed the sum ++ of the squares and products, we could have obtained the sums, maxima, ++ and minima of the X's and Y's without a loop like this: ++ ++ (setq xsum (+ \fjoin(&x)) ysum (+ \fjoin(&y))) ++ (setq xmax (max \fjoin(&x)) ymax (max \fjoin(&y))) ++ (setq xmin (min \fjoin(&x)) ymin (min \fjoin(&y))) ++ ++ Any Kermit function that returns numbers or lists of numbers can be ++ included in an S-Expression as an operand. ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.9.2. Practical Fibonacci Series ++ ++ The recursive Fibonacci example given previously is simple and ++ elegant, but not very useful since it causes memory occupation to grow ++ each time it calls itself, until eventually both physical memory and ++ disk swap space are filled and the program crashes. Even for small ++ arguments, like 17, execution time can be prohibitive: ++ ++ (setq t1 \v(ftime)) ++ (setq result (fibonacci 17)) ++ (setq t2 (- \v(ftime) t1)) ++ echo FIBONACCI(17) = \m(result): TIME = \ffpround(t2,3) ++ ++ prints (on a certain rather slow computer): ++ ++ FIBONACCI(17) = 1597: TIME = 5.861 ++ ++ Any recursive function can be recoded iteratively. The result is not ++ as pretty, but execution is far less expensive: ++ ++ define FIBITER { ++ (if (== \%3 0) (\%2) (fibiter (+ \%1 \%2) \%1 (- \%3 1))) ++ } ++ define FIBONACCI { ++ (fibiter 1 0 \%1) ++ } ++ ++ Here's the result on the same computer for the same argument of 17: ++ ++ FIBONACCI(17) = 1597: TIME = 0.015 ++ ++ (47 times faster.) Execution time increases proportionally to the size ++ of the argument in the iterative case, whereas in the recursive case ++ it goes up geometrically, quickly reaching infinity. ++ ++ [ [529]Top ] [ [530]Contents ] [ [531]C-Kermit Home ] [ [532]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.10. Differences from Algebraic Notation ++ ++ In C-Kermit: ++ ++ * Algebraic notation uses infix operators and normal rules of ++ operator precedence, with parentheses used to force exceptions to ++ the rules; many operations can be included in an expression. ++ S-Expressions use prefix operators with no intrinsic precedence; ++ each operation is enclosed in parentheses, and the arrangement of ++ parentheses determines precedence. ++ * Algebraic infix operators require two operands; S-Expression ++ prefix operators can accept a variable number of operands. ++ * You can use algebraic notation anywhere that C-Kermit accepts a ++ number, e.g. "echo \&a[((1+1)*2-1]", but you can use S-Expressions ++ only as top-level commands. You can, however, use either algebraic ++ or S-Expressions anywhere at all by enclosing them in \fevaluate() ++ or \fsexpression(), respectively. ++ * You can use any mixture of integer and floating-point numbers in ++ S-Expressions, but only integers are permitted in algebraic ++ expressions. Outside of S-Expressions, floating point arithmetic ++ is supported only by \ffp...() function calls. ++ * Operators and operands in S-Expressions must be separated by ++ spaces, e.g. "(+ a b)". Spaces are not required in algebraic ++ expressions: "((a+b)*c)". ++ * When assigning values to backslash variables (such as \%x or ++ \&a[2]) using SETQ or LET, you must double the backslash. ++ ++ [ [533]Top ] [ [534]Contents ] [ [535]C-Kermit Home ] [ [536]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 9.11. Differences from Lisp ++ ++ * Kermit has a lot of built-in operators not found in Lisp: ++, ^, ++ etc. ++ * Most dialects of real Lisp do not allow S-Expressions that don't ++ start with an operator, for example: ++ (a) ++ This expression can cause an error in Lisp (even if "a" has a ++ value), but is acceptable in Kermit, where it returns the value of ++ the variable "a". Similarly, (1) returns the value "1". ++ * In real Lisp, EVAL requires exactly one operand. In Kermit, it can ++ have 0, 1, 2, or more operands. It returns the value of the last ++ operand evaluated. ++ * Real Lisp SETQ and LET usually require an even number of operands. ++ Kermit allows an odd number, in which case the last (or only) ++ variable is undefined (i.e. deleted, destroyed). ++ * Kermit does not support ratios such as "7/8". Some Lisp dialects ++ accept ratios as numbers, and generate ratios when told to divide ++ two integers whose quotient is not a whole number; e.g. in Common ++ Lisp: ++ [13] USER(37): (/ (+ 1 2 3 4) 3) ++ 10/3 ++ [13] USER(38): ++ * The result of (/ 10 3) is 3.333.... Some Lisp dialects truncate ++ the result to 3 since both operands are integers, some don't; some ++ give the result as a ratio. C-Kermit always gives a floating point ++ result when there is a fractional part. If you want an integer ++ result, you can use TRUNCATE, FLOOR, or CEILING, e.g. (truncate (/ ++ 10 3)). ++ * There is currently no "bignum" support. Large numbers can be used ++ and large results generated, but (as noted in [537]Section 9.2) ++ they are accurate only to the precision of the underlying machine. ++ \v(math_precision) gives the machine precision as a number of ++ decimal digits, e.g. 16. ++ * Scientific notation for floating-point numbers is not supported. ++ If the magnitude of a number is greater than the precision of the ++ underlying hardware, the less-significant digits are shown but ++ their values are meaningless. If it the number is too small to be ++ represented internally, it is shown as "0.0". ++ * Many Lisp features are omitted: List processing (CAR, CDR, etc), ++ DEFUN, Lisp-specific control structures, and so on. ++ ++ [ [538]Top ] [ [539]Contents ] [ [540]C-Kermit Home ] [ [541]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++10. FILE TRANSFER ++ ++ New commands and switches: ++ ++ SET TRANSFER REPORT { OFF, ON } ++ Enables or disables the (new) one-line message printed by ++ Kermit after a remote-mode file transfer to indicate the source ++ and destination file, complete with path, to let you know where ++ the file went. ++ ++ SEND /TYPE:{TEXT,BINARY} ++ Sends only files of the given type (see [542]Section 4). ++ ++ SEND /NOFOLLOWLINKS: ++ (UNIX only) Skip over symbolic links rather than following them ++ (default). This applies to wildcard and/or recursive SENDs; if ++ a single filename is given, and it happens to be a symbolic ++ link, the file it points to is sent. ++ ++ SEND /FOLLOWLINKS: ++ (UNIX only) Follow (resolve) symbolic links. Watch out for ++ circular links, endless loops, etc. ++ ++ SET SEND I-PACKETS { OFF, ON } ++ When sending commands to a Kermit server, this tells whether ++ command packets should be preceded by an I (information) ++ packet, which is used to synchronize parameters prior to ++ executing the command. Normally ON. The only reason to set this ++ OFF is for communicating with buggy Kermit servers that ++ misbehave when an I packet is sent to them. There is also a SET ++ RECEIVE I-PACKETS command, but presently it has no effect. ++ ++ SET TRANSFER MESSAGE [ text ] ++ Sets an initial message to be shown in the Last Message field ++ of the fullscreen file-transfer display. ++ ++ SET TRANSFER TRANSLATION { ON, OFF } ++ Inhibits or re-enables text-file transfer character-set ++ translation globally. ++ ++ { SEND, MSEND, GET, RECEIVE } /TRANSPARENT ++ Inhibits character-set translation for this transfer only. ++ ++ { GET, RECEIVE } /PIPES:{ON,OFF} ++ Overrides global TRANSFER PIPES setting for this transfer only; ++ ON allows incoming files with names like "!tar xf -" to be ++ opened as pipelines rather than regular files. ++ ++ The following new "hot keys" are available when Kermit's file-transfer ++ display is visible: ++ ++ D: Turn on debugging, open "debug.log" if not already open. ++ d: Turn off debugging but leave log open (if it was open). ++ T: Turn on debug-log timestamps. ++ t: Turn off debug-log timestamps. ++ ++ Other improvements: ++ * SET FILE DOWNLOAD-DIRECTORY now works for external protocols (e.g. ++ sz/rz) too. ++ * Improved automatic per-file text/binary switching, described in ++ [543]Section 4. ++ * When sending a file group (e.g. "send *.*"), failure to open a ++ file is no longer fatal; now C-Kermit simply goes ahead to the ++ next file. ++ * Transaction log entries are now made for external protocols too. ++ ++ [ [544]Top ] [ [545]Contents ] [ [546]C-Kermit Home ] [ [547]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++11. MODEMS AND DIALING ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, the default modem type for dialing has changed from ++ NONE (= DIRECT, meaning no modem) to GENERIC. This change should have ++ no impact on direct connections. For dialing, it means that, unless ++ you SET MODEM TYPE to a specific type, such as USROBOTICS or CONEXANT, ++ Kermit assumes: ++ ++ 1. The modem uses the Hayes AT command set. ++ 2. The modem supports error correction, data compression, and ++ hardware flow control and is already configured to use them. ++ ++ In fact, Kermit assumes the modem is completely configured, and ++ therefore does not send it an initialization string or any ++ configuration commands. Instead, it sends only the simplest and most ++ portable commands: ++ ++ ATQ0V1 Give dial result codes. ++ ATDTnumber Dial the number. ++ ++ (or ATD or ATDP, as appropriate). ++ ++ The new defaults work for direct connections and for most modern ++ modems on most platforms, and they work much faster than ++ "full-treatment" dialing. If the new defaults don't work for you, or ++ if you need to perform explicit modem configuations or interactions, ++ then set a specific modem type and use the SET MODEM and SET DIAL ++ commands as documented in Using C-Kermit. ++ ++ WARNING: Don't use the generic modem on hosts that do not support ++ RTS/CTS flow control. If Xon/Xoff is in use on the serial port, ++ you'll need to select a particular modem type so Kermit knows what ++ command to give it to enable Xon/Xoff flow control between itself ++ and your serial port. ++ ++ The following new modem types were added in C-Kermit 8.0: ++ ++ lucent: Lucent Venus chipset ++ pctel: PCTel V.90 chipset ++ conexant: Conexant (ex-Rockwell) modem family ++ zoom-v32bis: New name for "Zoom" ++ zoom-v34 Zoom V.34 ++ zoom-v90 Zoom V.90 56K ++ zoom-v92: Zoom V.92 with V.44 data compression ++ zoltrix-v34: New name for "zoltrix" ++ zoltrix-hsp-v90: Synonym for PCTel ++ zoltrix-hcf-v90: Synonym for ITU-T-V250 ++ smartlink-v90: Synonym for usrobotics (same chipset) ++ acer-v90: Synonym for Rockwell-v90 ++ ++ New DIAL-related variables: ++ ++ \v(dm_hf): Dial modifier: Wait for Hook-Flash. ++ \v(dm_wb): Dial modifier: Wait for Bong. ++ ++ Finally, if dialing fails, Kermit now prints a context-sensitive hint ++ suggesting possible reasons and remedies. ++ ++ Added in C-Kermit 8.0.201: Rudimentary support for Caller ID, for ++ use with the ANSWER command. If the modem reports Caller ID ++ information, Kermit stores it in variables that you can access after ++ the call is answered: ++ ++ \v(callid_date) The date of the call ++ \v(callid_time) The time of the call ++ \v(callid_name) The name of the caller ++ \v(callid_nmbr) The telephone number of the caller ++ \v(callid_mesg) A message ++ ++ The format of these items depends on the originating and answering ++ phone companies and the modems and their configuration. ++ ++ Not very many modems support Caller ID, and those that do (a) tend to ++ have it disabled by default, and (b) use different commands to enable ++ it. A quick survey shows of some current models shows: ++ ++ - USR V.90: No ++ - ITU-T V.250: No ++ - Lucent Venus: No ++ - Diamond Supra: #CID=1 ++ - Rockwell 56K: #CID=1 ++ - PCTEL: #CID=1 ++ - Zoltrix: +VCID=1 ++ - Conexant: +VCID=1 ++ ++ To use Kermit's Caller ID feature, you have to set the modem to wait ++ for at least two rings before answering, and you have to give the ++ command to enable Caller ID; for example (after choosing a modem with ++ SET MODEM TYPE): ++ ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=2#CID=1\{13} ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=2+VCID=1\{13} ++ ++ These commands can be undone with: ++ ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=1#CID=0\{13} ++ set modem command autoanswer on ATS0=1+VCID=0\{13} ++ ++ Kermit presently has no built-in knowledge of the Caller ID ++ capabilities or commands of the modems in its database. ++ ++ Since the variables can be accessed only after the call is answered, ++ the only way to refuse a call is to answer it, inspect the variables, ++ and then hang it up if desired. ++ ++ [ [548]Top ] [ [549]Contents ] [ [550]C-Kermit Home ] [ [551]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++12. TERMINAL CONNECTION ++ ++ Now that 7-bit connections are no longer the norm, the default ++ terminal bytesize (also called "data size" or "word size") in C-Kermit ++ 8.0 is 8 bits, rather than 7 bits as it was in C-Kermit 7.0 and ++ earlier: ++ ++ SET ESCAPE character ++ This command, which specifies your CONNECT-mode escape ++ character, allows you to specify any ASCII control character in ++ a variety of formats. C-Kermit 8.0.201 now also lets you ++ specify any 8-bit value, 128-255, as the escape character. In ++ the SET ESCAPE command, you can type the 8-bit character ++ literally or you can enter its numeric code. Here are examples ++ that you can enter from a terminal or console that uses the ISO ++ Latin-1 character set: ++ ++ C-Kermit> set escape à ++ C-Kermit> set escape 195 ++ C-Kermit> show escape ++ Escape character: Code 195 (Ã): enabled ++ C-Kermit> ++ ++ Both of these commands set the escape character value to 195 ++ (decimal), which happens to be uppercase letter A with Tilde in ++ Latin-1. SHOW ESCAPE and SHOW TERMINAL show the value, as does ++ the CONNECT message. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL AUTODOWNLOAD ERROR { STOP, CONTINUE } ++ When Kermit has a terminal connection to another computer, and ++ a file transfer is initiated automatically because a Kermit ++ packet was received in CONNECT mode (i.e. in the terminal ++ screen), this command tells what Kermit should do if the ++ transfer fails. The default is to STOP, which leaves Kermit in ++ command mode with its file-transfer display showing, so you can ++ see that the transfer failed and why. If you SET TERMINAL ++ AUTODOWNLOAD ERROR CONTINUE, this causes Kermit to return ++ automatically to its terminal screen (i.e. resume its CONNECT ++ session) as if the transfer had succeeded; this can be ++ desirable if the entire session is under control of a ++ host-based script. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL BYTESIZE { 7, 8 } ++ The byte size to use during CONNECT and INPUT command ++ execution, which can be more restrictive than the bytesize ++ implied by the current PARITY setting, but not less ++ restrictive. In C-Kermit 7.0 and earlier, the terminal bytesize ++ was 7 by default to protect against the likelihood that parity ++ was in use on the connection without the user's knowledge. When ++ the terminal bytesize is 8 (as it is in C-Kermit 8.0 and ++ later), the user will see garbage in this (increasingly ++ unlikely) situation. Note that 8 data bits are required for ++ most character sets other than ASCII: Latin-1, UTF-8, and so ++ on. ++ ++ A new command has been added to produce timestamped session logs: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL SESSION-LOG TIMESTAMPED-TEXT ++ Records the terminal session in text mode (like SET TERMINAL ++ SESSION-LOG TEXT) but adds a timestamp at the beginning of each ++ line. The timestamp format is hh:mm:ss.nnn, and indicates the ++ time at which the first character of the line appeared. ++ ++ In most UNIX versions (those built with the select()-capable CONNECT ++ module -- pretty much all the ones that have or could have TELNET ++ included), an idle timeout feature has been added: ++ ++ SET TERMINAL IDLE-TIMEOUT number ++ If the number is not 0, then Kermit is to take an action when ++ the given amount of time passes with no activity during CONNECT ++ mode. If the number is positive it is the maximum number of ++ idle seconds; if number is negative it represents milliseconds ++ (thousandths of seconds). If 0 is given as the number, there ++ are no idle timeouts. Synonym: SET TERMINAL IDLE-LIMIT. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL IDLE-ACTION { RETURN, HANGUP, EXIT, OUTPUT [ string ] } ++ The action to be taken upon an idle timeout in CONNECT mode. ++ RETURN to the prompt, HANGUP the connection, EXIT from Kermit, ++ or OUTPUT the given string (if no string is given, a NUL (ASCII ++ 0) character is sent). ++ ++ SET TERMINAL IDLE-ACTION { TELNET-NOP, TELNET-AYT } ++ Actions that can be selected on Telnet connections only, that ++ might be useful if idle limits are enforced by the Telnet ++ server or in the TCP/IP protocol: TELNET-NOP sends a "NO ++ Operation" (do-nothing) command, which causes no response from ++ the server; TELNET-AYT sends an "Are You There" message to the ++ server, which should make the server send back a message. ++ Neither of these actions interferes with your remote session. ++ ++ SET TERMINAL IDLE-ACTION is useful for connections to hosts or ++ services that automatically log you out after a certain amount of idle ++ time, e.g.: ++ ++ set term idle-timeout 300 ++ set term idle-action output \32 ++ ++ sends a space (as if you had pressed the space bar) every 300 seconds ++ (five minutes) while there is no activity (32 is the ASCII code for ++ space). ++ ++ When C-Kermit returns from CONNECT to command mode, the reason for the ++ transition is given in a new variable, \v(cx_status): ++ ++ 0 No CONNECT command given yet. ++ 1 User escaped back manually. ++ 2 A trigger string was encountered. ++ 3 IKSD entered server mode. ++ 4 Application Program Command received from host. ++ 5 Idle timeout. ++ 6 Telnet protocol error. ++ 7 Keystroke macro. ++ 8 Time limit exceeded. ++ 100 Internal error. ++ 101 Carrier required by not detected. ++ 102 I/O error on connection. ++ 103 Disconnected by host. ++ 104 Disconnected by user. ++ 105 Session limit exceeded. ++ 106 Rejected due to Telnet policy. ++ 107 Received kill signal. ++ ++ Values 100 and above indicate there is no connection. ++ ++ [ [552]Top ] [ [553]Contents ] [ [554]C-Kermit Home ] [ [555]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++13. CHARACTER SETS ++ ++ See the section on [556]file scanning above, and the section on ++ character-set conversion in [557]FTP. Also: ++ ++ * True support for CP1252 (rather than treating it as Latin-1). ++ * Proper handling of C1 values when converting ISO 8-bit text to ++ UTF-8. ++ * TYPE /CHARACTER-SET: /TRANSLATE-TO: allows specific translations. ++ * The TRANSLATE command now works on multiple files. ++ * K_CHARSET environment variable to set the file character-set. ++ * SET TRANSFER TRANSLATION OFF. ++ * FTP client character-set translation ([558]Section 3.7). ++ ++ [ [559]Top ] [ [560]Contents ] [ [561]C-Kermit Home ] [ [562]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++14. DIALOUT FROM TELNET TERMINAL SERVERS ++ ++ For years, C-Kermit has supported dialing out from Telnet modem ++ servers (also called reverse terminal servers or access servers), but ++ until now there was no way for Kermit to control the communication ++ parameters (speed, parity, etc) on the serial port of the terminal ++ server; it had to use whatever was there. ++ ++ But now, if you make a connection to a server that supports the Telnet ++ Com Port Control Option, [563]RFC 2217, you have the same degree of ++ control as you would have over a serial port on the computer where ++ Kermit is running: SET SPEED, SET FLOW, SET PARITY, SET STOP-BITS, ++ SHOW COMM, WAIT, SET CARRIER-WATCH, the modem-signal variables, ++ sending Break, and so on, apply to the connection between the terminal ++ server and the modem. ++ ++ For example, using a Cisco Access Server 2509, where specifying a TCP ++ port in the 6000's selects a serial port that can be used for dialing ++ out: ++ ++ set host xxx 6001 ; xxx is the IP hostname or address of the server ++ (log in if necessary) ; With a script or by hand ++ set modem type usr ; Tell Kermit what kind of modem it has ++ set speed 57600 ; This affects the server's port ++ set flow rts/cts ; Ditto ++ dial 7654321 ++ ++ The modem server might or might not require a login sequence. It might ++ also allow for automatic authentication, e.g. via Kerberos tickets. ++ NOTE: If the modem server requires a login sequence, then REDIAL might ++ not work as expected. ++ ++ When you have a Telnet Com Port connection, your SET SPEED and SET ++ FLOW options change automatically to reflect the capabilities of the ++ server, rather than those of your local computer. ++ ++ See the configuration manual for your server for additional ++ information. For example, how to set up the server to drop the Telnet ++ connection automatically when the telephone call is hung up (e.g. ++ "autohangup" on Cisco models). ++ ++ For a Linux-based Telnet Com-Port server, click the Srdird link: ++ ++ [ [564]Top ] [ [565]Contents ] [ [566]Sredird ] [ [567]C-Kermit Home ] ++ [ [568]Kermit Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++15. COPING WITH BROKEN KERMIT PARTNERS ++ ++ There are lots of faulty Kermit protocol implementations out there, ++ found mainly in 3rd-party products ranging from communications ++ software packages to file-transfer functions imbedded within devices. ++ This topic is covered [569]HERE for C-Kermit 7.0, but C-Kermit 8.0 ++ adds some additional tricks. ++ ++ SET ATTRIBUTE RECORD-FORMAT { ON, OFF } ++ Allows control of the Kermit's Record-Format attribute. Set ++ this to OFF in case incoming file are refused due to unknown or ++ invalid record formats if you want to accept the file anyway. ++ ++ SET SEND I-PACKETS { ON, OFF } ++ A Kermit server is supposed to accept I-packets; this is how ++ the client lets the server know its capabilities and ++ preferences before sending a command. Apparently there is at ++ least one Kermit server implementation that does not accept ++ I-packets, and does not properly respond with an Error packet ++ if it gets one. To get around such situations in C-Kermit 8.0, ++ you can use SET SEND I-PACKETS OFF to inhibit the sending of I ++ packets. In this case, the client must be able to adjust to the ++ server's configuration, rather than the other way around as we ++ are used to. ++ ++ SET PROTOCOL KERMIT {} {} {} ++ C-Kermit 6.0 and later automatically send "autoupload" and ++ "autodownload" commands when in local mode and you give a file ++ transfer command. For example, if you tell kermit to "send ++ oofa.txt", Kermit sends "kermit -r" and a carriage return, in ++ case you had forgotten to start Kermit on the far end and told ++ it to receive a file. If a Kermit program had already been ++ started on the far end, it should harmlessly absorb this ++ string. However, some Kermit programs violate the Kermit ++ protocol definition and treat such strings as Kermit packets ++ even though they are not. In such cases, give this command to ++ set the Kermit protocol autoupload and download strings to ++ nothing, which tells Kermit not to send them. (This is not a ++ new feature, but it was not previously included in the "Coping" ++ section of the documentation.) ++ ++ [ [570]Top ] [ [571]Contents ] [ [572]C-Kermit Home ] [ [573]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++16. NEW COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS ++ ++ kermit -h Now prints a complete listing of its command-line options, ++ rather than an abbreviated list squeezed into a 24x80 space. ++ ++ -dd Debug, like -d but adds timestamps ++ --version Shows C-Kermit version number. ++ --noperms Equivalent to SET ATTRIBUTE PROTECTION OFF. ++ ++ Kermit now accepts a selection of URLs (Universal Resource Locators) ++ as its first command-line argument. These are: ++ ++ telnet:hostname ++ Makes a Telnet connection to the given host (IP hostname or ++ address). ++ ++ ftp://[user[:password]@]hostname[/path...] ++ Makes an FTP connection to the given host (IP hostname or ++ address). If a username is given, Kermit tries to log you in; ++ if a password is given, it is used; if not, you are prompted ++ for one. If no username is given, an anonymous login is ++ performed. If a pathname is included, Kermit tries to GET the ++ given file. See [574]Section 3.1.3 for details. ++ ++ ftps://[user[:password]@]hostname[/path...] ++ Makes a secure FTP connection over SSL. ++ ++ telnets://[user[:password]@]hostname ++ Makes a secure Telnet connection over SSL. ++ ++ kermit://[user[:password]@]hostname[/path...] ++ Makes a connection to an [575]Internet Kermit Server. ++ ++ http://[user[:password]@]hostname[/path...] ++ Makes a connection to Web server. ++ ++ https://[user[:password]@]hostname[/path...] ++ Makes a connection to secure Web server. ++ ++ [ [576]Top ] [ [577]Contents ] [ [578]C-Kermit Home ] [ [579]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ __________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++17. LOGS ++ ++ In C-Kermit 8.0, we make an effort to keep passwords out of the debug ++ log. This can never be 100% effective, but it's better than before, ++ when there were no precautions at all. Whenever Kermit knows it's ++ prompting for, parsing, or transmitting a password, it temporarily ++ turns off logging and then turns it back on afterwards. This keeps the ++ debug log password-free in most common cases, but there can be no ++ guarantees. ++ ++ As noted elsewhere, the new "-dd" command-line option selects a ++ timestamped debug log (equivalent to "set debug timestamps on", "log ++ debug debug.log"). ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 also supports a new timestamped session log via "set ++ session-log timestamped-text", "log session". ++ ++ There have been requests for other kinds of logs, for example a ++ command log. These might be added at some point. One person wanted to ++ be able to log commands with timestamps, but only commands issued at ++ the prompt, not commands from files or macros, and also wanted a ++ header line at the beginning showing the date, user, and host. This ++ can be done as follows: ++ ++ .filename := \v(home)commands.log ; (for example) ++ fopen /write \%c \m(filename) ++ if success { ++ fwrite /line \%c \v(date): User=\v(user) Host=\v(host) ++ fclose \%c ++ set debug timestamps on ++ log debug {| grep "CMD(P)" >> \m(filename)} append ++ } ++ ++ [ [580]Top ] [ [581]Contents ] [ [582]C-Kermit Home ] [ [583]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ C-Kermit 8.0 Update Notes / [584]The Kermit Project / Columbia ++ University / 15 Dec 2003 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 4. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html ++ 5. mailto:kermit-support@columbia.edu ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 7. http://www.kermit-project.org/ ++ 8. http://www.columbia.nyc.ny.us/kermit/ ++ 9. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/COPYING.TXT ++ 10. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckcmai.c ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#xv ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.html ++ 14. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckermit70.txt ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html ++ 16. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckuker.nr ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/telnet.htm ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscripts.html ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcbwr.html ++ 21. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckcbwr.txt ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckubwr.html ++ 23. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckubwr.txt ++ 24. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvbwr.html ++ 25. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckvbwr.txt ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 27. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckuins.txt ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckvins.html ++ 29. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckvins.txt ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckccfg.html ++ 31. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckccfg.txt ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ 33. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/f/ckcplm.txt ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/iksd.html ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x0 ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x1 ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2 ++ 42. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.1 ++ 43. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2 ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.1 ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.2 ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.3 ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.4 ++ 48. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.5 ++ 49. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.6 ++ 50. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 51. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1 ++ 52. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.1 ++ 53. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.2 ++ 54. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.3 ++ 55. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.4 ++ 56. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 57. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.3 ++ 58. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.4 ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5 ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.1 ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.2 ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.3 ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.1 ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.2 ++ 66. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.3 ++ 67. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 68. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7.1 ++ 69. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7.2 ++ 70. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 71. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.9 ++ 72. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10 ++ 73. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10.1 ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10.2 ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10.3 ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 78. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x5 ++ 79. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6 ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.1 ++ 81. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.2 ++ 82. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.3 ++ 83. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.4 ++ 84. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.5 ++ 85. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.6 ++ 86. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x7 ++ 87. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8 ++ 88. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.1 ++ 89. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.2 ++ 90. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.3 ++ 91. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.4 ++ 92. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.5 ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.6 ++ 94. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.7 ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.8 ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.9 ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.10 ++ 98. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.11 ++ 99. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.12 ++ 100. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 101. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.14 ++ 102. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 103. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.1 ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.2 ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.3 ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.4 ++ 107. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.5 ++ 108. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.6 ++ 109. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.7 ++ 110. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 111. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.9 ++ 112. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.10 ++ 113. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.11 ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x10 ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x11 ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x12 ++ 117. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x13 ++ 118. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x14 ++ 119. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x15 ++ 120. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x16 ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x17 ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 124. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 125. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html#x5 ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x5 ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2 ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x15 ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 132. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpdates ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpcheck ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpnamelist ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#srvrename ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpvdir ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#setftptype ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x15 ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.7 ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.1 ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2 ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.14 ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 145. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 146. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckututor.html ++ 147. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 148. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ 149. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#setlocus ++ 150. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#lcommands ++ 151. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpuser ++ 152. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#showvar ++ 153. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#callerid ++ 154. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x6.6 ++ 155. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x0 ++ 156. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 157. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 158. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 159. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 160. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 161. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x0 ++ 162. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 163. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 164. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 165. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 166. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 167. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/sshclient.html ++ 168. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ 169. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/skermit.html ++ 170. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/sshclien.htm ++ 171. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 172. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1738.txt ++ 173. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.2 ++ 174. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.1 ++ 175. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2396.txt ++ 176. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2616.txt ++ 177. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x2.2.3 ++ 178. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2616.txt ++ 179. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13.7 ++ 180. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm#x5.4 ++ 181. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm#x15 ++ 182. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm#x6.2 ++ 183. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 184. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x16 ++ 185. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 186. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 187. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 188. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 189. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1 ++ 190. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 191. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.3 ++ 192. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.4 ++ 193. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5 ++ 194. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 195. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 196. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 197. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.9 ++ 198. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10 ++ 199. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 200. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm ++ 201. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.htm#servers ++ 202. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcsets.html ++ 203. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/unicode.html ++ 204. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x1.5.4 ++ 205. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/case10.html ++ 206. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 207. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 208. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscripts.html ++ 209. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 210. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 211. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpclient.html ++ 212. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscripts.html ++ 213. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 214. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 215. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.1 ++ 216. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.3 ++ 217. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.4 ++ 218. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.3 ++ 219. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.3 ++ 220. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 221. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5 ++ 222. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 223. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscripts.html ++ 224. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 225. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpautolog ++ 226. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpuser ++ 227. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 228. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 229. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 230. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 231. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 232. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 233. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ibm_ie.html ++ 234. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10 ++ 235. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 236. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 237. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 238. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 239. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck60manual.html ++ 240. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.17 ++ 241. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 242. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 243. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 244. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.4 ++ 245. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/security.html ++ 246. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 247. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 248. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13.4 ++ 249. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#permswitch ++ 250. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpchmod ++ 251. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.2 ++ 252. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 253. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 254. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 255. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 256. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 257. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x7 ++ 258. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 259. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 260. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 261. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10 ++ 262. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.10 ++ 263. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 264. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#setftptype ++ 265. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 266. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 267. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 268. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 269. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.9 ++ 270. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.1 ++ 271. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#erroraction ++ 272. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.5 ++ 273. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x4.7 ++ 274. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html#x1.6 ++ 275. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 276. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x1.5.4 ++ 277. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm ++ 278. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 279. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 280. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.2 ++ 281. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 282. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#erroraction ++ 283. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.2 ++ 284. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#erroraction ++ 285. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpfilenames ++ 286. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpperms ++ 287. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpunique ++ 288. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpfilenames ++ 289. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#note_utc ++ 290. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#note_date ++ 291. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6 ++ 292. http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/faq/faq.htm#10: ++ 293. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 294. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 295. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 296. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 297. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 298. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 299. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x4.3 ++ 300. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit70.html ++ 301. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x5 ++ 302. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.3 ++ 303. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpfilenames ++ 304. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x4.1 ++ 305. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x4.2.2 ++ 306. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x1.5.4 ++ 307. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.6.2 ++ 308. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 309. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11 ++ 310. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#srvrename ++ 311. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x4.1 ++ 312. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm ++ 313. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 314. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftpfilenames ++ 315. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.5.3 ++ 316. http://www.proftpd.net/ ++ 317. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 318. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 319. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 320. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 321. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 322. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcsets.html ++ 323. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/unicode.html ++ 324. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcsets.html ++ 325. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcsets.html ++ 326. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 327. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/utf8.html ++ 328. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcsets.html ++ 329. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 330. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2640.txt ++ 331. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 332. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 333. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 334. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 335. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 336. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 337. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 338. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 339. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 340. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 341. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 342. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 343. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscripts.html ++ 344. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 345. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 346. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc959.txt ++ 347. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckscripts.html ++ 348. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 349. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 350. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpscript.html ++ 351. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 352. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 353. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.1 ++ 354. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.2 ++ 355. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.3 ++ 356. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.4 ++ 357. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.5 ++ 358. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 359. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/k95.html ++ 360. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.11.5 ++ 361. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc959.txt ++ 362. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2389.txt ++ 363. http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-ftpext-mlst-16.txt ++ 364. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ftpclient.html ++ 365. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 366. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ftp ++ 367. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 368. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 369. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 370. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#ucs2 ++ 371. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 372. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 373. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 374. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 375. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 376. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 377. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 378. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 379. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckb2.htm ++ 380. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 381. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 382. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 383. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 384. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 385. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 386. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.12 ++ 387. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.1 ++ 388. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x12 ++ 389. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.12 ++ 390. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 391. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 392. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 393. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 394. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.14 ++ 395. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 396. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 397. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 398. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 399. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 400. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 401. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 402. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 403. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 404. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.6 ++ 405. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 406. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 407. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 408. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 409. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 410. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 411. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 412. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 413. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 414. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 415. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 416. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 417. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#fjoin ++ 418. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#fsplit ++ 419. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.10 ++ 420. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 421. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 422. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 423. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 424. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 425. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 426. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 427. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 428. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 429. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 430. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 431. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.8 ++ 432. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 433. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 434. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 435. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.2 ++ 436. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3 ++ 437. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 438. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.13 ++ 439. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9 ++ 440. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.10 ++ 441. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.7.4 ++ 442. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 443. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 444. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 445. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 446. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 447. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 448. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 449. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 450. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 451. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 452. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 453. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 454. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.7 ++ 455. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 456. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 457. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 458. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 459. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#scriptedit ++ 460. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 461. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 462. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 463. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 464. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 465. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 466. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 467. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 468. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2822.txt ++ 469. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2822.txt ++ 470. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2822.txt ++ 471. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2822.txt ++ 472. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 473. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 474. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 475. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 476. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.1 ++ 477. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 478. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 479. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 480. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 481. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.2 ++ 482. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 483. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 484. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 485. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 486. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 487. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 488. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x8.2 ++ 489. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 490. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 491. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 492. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 493. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 494. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 495. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 496. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 497. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 498. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 499. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 500. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 501. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 502. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 503. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 504. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.6 ++ 505. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 506. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 507. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 508. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 509. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 510. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.8 ++ 511. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 512. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 513. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 514. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 515. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 516. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 517. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 518. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 519. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 520. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 521. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 522. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 523. mailto:thucdat@hotmail.com ++ 524. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.9.2 ++ 525. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 526. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 527. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 528. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 529. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 530. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 531. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 532. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 533. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 534. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 535. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 536. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 537. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x9.2 ++ 538. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 539. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 540. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 541. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 542. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 543. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 544. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 545. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 546. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 547. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 548. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 549. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 550. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 551. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 552. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 553. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 554. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 555. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 556. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x4 ++ 557. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 558. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.7 ++ 559. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 560. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 561. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 562. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 563. ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2217.txt ++ 564. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 565. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 566. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/sredird/ ++ 567. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 568. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 569. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermi70.htm#x4.22 ++ 570. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 571. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 572. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 573. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 574. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#x3.1.3 ++ 575. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/cuiksd.html ++ 576. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 577. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 578. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 579. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 580. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#top ++ 581. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit80.html#contents ++ 582. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 583. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 584. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckcplm.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,3076 @@ ++ ++ C-Kermit Program Logic Manual ++ ++ Frank da Cruz ++ [1]The Kermit Project ++ [2]Columbia University ++ ++ As of: C-Kermit 8.0.211, 10 April 2004 ++ This page last updated: Sat Apr 10 16:45:30 2004 (New York USA Time) ++ ++ IF YOU ARE READING A PLAIN-TEXT version of this document, note that ++ this file is a plain-text dump of a Web page. You can visit the ++ original (and possibly more up-to-date) Web page here: ++ ++ [3]http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ ++ [ [4]C-Kermit Home ] [ [5]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ CONTENTS ++ ++ 1. [6]INTRODUCTION ++ 2. [7]FILES ++ 3. [8]SOURCE CODE PORTABILITY AND STYLE ++ 4. [9]MODULES ++ 4.A. [10]Group A: Library Routines ++ 4.B. [11]Group B: Kermit File Transfer ++ 4.C. [12]Group C: Character-Set Conversion ++ 4.D. [13]Group D: User Interface ++ 4.E. [14]Group E: Platform-Dependent I/O ++ 4.F. [15]Group F: Network Support ++ 4.G. [16]Group G: Formatted Screen Support ++ 4.H. [17]Group H: Pseudoterminal Support ++ 4.I. [18]Group I: Security ++ I. [19]APPENDIX I: FILE PERMISSIONS ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 1. INTRODUCTION ++ ++ The Kermit Protocol is specified in the book Kermit, A File Transfer ++ Protocol by Frank da Cruz, Digital Press / Butterworth Heinemann, ++ Newton, MA, USA (1987), 379 pages, ISBN 0-932376-88-6. It is assumed ++ the reader is familiar with the Kermit protocol specification. ++ ++ This file describes the relationship among the modules and functions ++ of C-Kermit 5A and later, and other programming considerations. ++ C-Kermit is designed to be portable to any kind of computer that has a ++ C compiler. The source code is broken into many files that are grouped ++ according to their function, as shown in the [20]Contents. ++ ++ C-Kermit has seen constant development since 1985. Throughout its ++ history, there has been a neverending tug-of-war among: ++ ++ a. Functionality: adding new features, fixing bugs, improving ++ performance. ++ b. Adding support for new platforms. ++ c. "Buzzword 1.0 compliance". ++ ++ The latter category is the most frustrating, since it generally ++ involves massive changes just to keep the software doing what it did ++ before in some new setting: e.g. the K&R-to-ANSIC conversion (which ++ had to be done, of course, without breaking K&R); Y2K (not a big deal ++ in our case); the many and varied UNIX and other API "standards"; ++ IPv6. ++ ++ [ [21]Contents ] [ [22]C-Kermit ] [ [23]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 2. FILES ++ ++ C-Kermit source files begin with the two letters "ck", for example ++ ckutio.c. Filenames are kept short (6.3) for maximum portability and ++ (obviously I hope) do not contain spaces or more than one period. The ++ third character in the name denotes something about the function group ++ and the expected level of portability: ++ ++ a General descriptive material and documentation (text) ++ b BOO file encoders and decoders (obsolete) ++ c All platforms with C compilers (*) ++ d Data General AOS/VS ++ e Reserved for "ckermit" files, like ckermit.ini, ckermit2.txt ++ f (reserved) ++ g (reserved) ++ h (reserved) ++ i Commodore Amiga (Intuition) ++ j (unused) ++ k (unused) ++ l Stratus VOS ++ m Macintosh with Mac OS 1-9 ++ n Microsoft Windows NT/2000/XP ++ o OS/2 and/or Microsoft Windows 9x/ME/NT/2000/XP ++ p Plan 9 from Bell Labs ++ q (reserved) ++ r DEC PDP-11 with RSTS/E (never used, open for reassigment) ++ s Atari ST GEMDOS (last supported in version 5A(189)) ++ t DEC PDP-11 with RT-11 (never used, open for reassigment) ++ u Unix-based operating systems (*) ++ v VMS and OpenVMS ++ w Wart (Lex-like preprocessor, platform independent) ++ x (reserved) ++ y (reserved) ++ z (reserved) ++ 0-3 (reserved) ++ 4 IBM AS/400 ++ 5-8 (reserved) ++ 9 Microware OS-9 ++ _ Encryption modules ++ ++ (*) In fact there is little distinction between the ckc*.* and cku*.* ++ categories. It would make more sense for all cku*.* modules to be ++ ckc*.* ones, except ckufio.c, ckutio.c, ckucon.c, ckucns.c, and ++ ckupty.c, which truly are specific to Unix. The rest (ckuus*.c, ++ ckucmd.c, etc) are quite portable. ++ ++ One hint before proceeding: functions are scattered all over the ++ ckc*.c and cku*.c modules, where function size has begun to take ++ precedence over the desirability of grouping related functions ++ together, the aim being to keep any particular module from growing ++ disproportionately large. The easiest way (in UNIX) to find out in ++ what source file a given function is defined is like this (where the ++ desired function is foo()...): ++ ++ grep ^foo\( ck*.c ++ ++ This works because the coding convention has been to make function ++ names always start on the left margin with their contents indented, ++ for example: ++ ++static char * ++foo(x,y) int x, y; { ++ ... ++} ++ ++ Also note the style for bracket placement. This allows ++ bracket-matching text editors (such as EMACS) to help you make sure ++ you know which opening bracket a closing bracket matches, particularly ++ when the opening bracket is above the visible screen, and it also ++ makes it easy to find the end of a function (search for '}' on the ++ left margin). ++ ++ Of course EMACS tags work nicely with this format too: ++ ++ $ cd kermit-source-directory ++ $ etags ck[cu]*.c ++ $ emacs ++ Esc-X Visit-Tags-Table ++ ++ (but remember that the source file for ckcpro.c is [24]ckcpro.w!) ++ ++ Also: ++ ++ * Tabs should be set every 8 spaces, as on a VT100. ++ * All lines must no more than 79 characters wide after tab ++ expansion. ++ * Note the distinction between physical tabs (ASCII 9) and the ++ indentation conventions, which are: 4 for block contents, 2 for ++ most other stuff (obviously this is not a portability issue, just ++ style). ++ ++ [ [25]Contents ] [ [26]C-Kermit ] [ [27]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3. SOURCE CODE PORTABILITY AND STYLE ++ ++ C-Kermit was designed in 1985 as a platform-independent replacement ++ for the earlier Unix Kermit. c-Kermit's design was expected to promote ++ portability, and judging from the number of platforms to which it has ++ been adapted since then, the model is effective, if not ideal ++ (obviously if we had it all to do over, we'd change a few things). To ++ answer the oft-repeated question: "Why are there so many #ifdefs?", ++ it's because: ++ ++ * Many of them are related to feature selection and program size, ++ and so need to be there anyway. ++ * Those that treat compiler, library, platform, header-file, and ++ similar differences have built up over time as hundreds of people ++ all over the world adapted C-Kermit to their particular ++ environments and sent back their changes. There might be more ++ politically-correct ways to achieve portability, but this one is ++ natural and proven. The basic idea is to introduce changes that ++ can be selected by defining a symbol, which, if not defined, ++ leaves the program exactly as it was before the changes. ++ * Although it might be possible to "clean up" the "#ifdef mess", ++ nobody has access to all the hundreds of platforms served by the ++ #ifdefs to check the results. ++ ++ And to answer the second-most-oft-repeated question: "Why don't you ++ just use GNU autoconfig / automake / autowhatever instead of ++ hard-coding all those #ifdefs?" Answers: ++ ++ * The GNU tools are not available on all the platforms where ++ C-Kermit must be built and I wouldn't necessarily trust them if ++ they were. ++ * Each platform is a moving target, so the tools themselves would ++ need to updated before Kermit could be updated. ++ * It would only add another layer of complexity to an already ++ complex process. ++ * Conversion at this point would not be practical unless there was a ++ way to test the results on all the hundreds of platforms where ++ C-Kermit is supposed to build. ++ ++ When writing code for the system-indendent C-Kermit modules, please ++ stick to the following coding conventions to ensure portability to the ++ widest possible variety of C preprocessors, compilers, and linkers, as ++ well as certain network and/or email transports. The same holds true ++ for many of the "system dependent" modules too; particularly the Unix ++ ones, since they must be buildable by a wide variety of compilers and ++ linkers, new and old. ++ ++ This list does not purport to be comprehensive, and although some ++ items on it might seem far-fetched, they would not be listed unless I ++ had encountered them somewhere, some time. I wish I had kept better ++ records so I could cite specific platforms and compilers. ++ ++ * Try to keep variable and function names unique within 6 ++ characters, especially if they are used across modules, since 6 is ++ the maximum for some old linkers (actually, this goes back to ++ TOPS-10 and -20 and other old DEC OS's where C-Kermit never ran ++ anyway; a more realistic maximum is probably somewhere between 8 ++ and 16). We know for certain that VAX C has a 31-character max ++ because it complains -- others might not complain, but just ++ silently truncate, thus folding two or more routines/variables ++ into one. ++ * Keep preprocessor symbols unique within 8 characters; that's the ++ max for some preprocessors (sorry, I can't give a specific ++ example, but in 1988 or thereabouts, I had to change character-set ++ symbols like TC_LATIN1 and TC_LATIN2 to TC_1LATIN and TC_2LATIN ++ because the digits were being truncated and ignored on a platform ++ where I actually had to build C-Kermit 5A; unfortunately I didn't ++ note which platform -- maybe some early Ultrix version?) ++ * Don't create preprocessor symbols, or variable or function names, ++ that start with underscore (_). These are usually reserved for ++ internal use by the compiler and header files. ++ * Don't put #include directives inside functions or { blocks }. ++ * Don't use the #if or #elif preprocessor constructions, only use ++ #ifdef, #ifndef, #define, #undef, and #endif. ++ * Put tokens after #endif in comment brackets, e.g. ++ #endif /* FOO */. ++ * Don't indent preprocessor statements - # must always be first char ++ on line. ++ * Don't put whitespace after # in preprocessor statements. ++ * Don't use #pragma, even within #ifdefs -- it makes some ++ preprocessors give up. ++ * Same goes for #module, #if, etc - #ifdefs do NOT protect them. ++ * Don't use logical operators in preprocessor constructions. ++ * Avoid #ifdefs inside argument list to function calls (I can't ++ remember why this one is here, but probably needn't be; we do this ++ all the time). ++ * Always cast strlen() in expressions to int: ++ if ((int)strlen(foo) < x)... ++ * Any variable whose value might exceed 16383 should be declared as ++ long, or if that is not possible, then as unsigned. ++ * Avoid typedefs; they might be portable but they are very confusing ++ and there's no way to test for their presence or absence at ++ compile time. Use preprocessor symbols instead if possible; at ++ least you can test their definitions. ++ * Unsigned long is not portable; use a preprocessor symbol (Kermit ++ uses ULONG for this). ++ * Long long is not portable. If you really need it, be creative. ++ * Similarly 1234LL is not portable, nor almost any other constant ++ modifier other than L. ++ * Unsigned char is not portable, use CHAR (a preprocessor symbol ++ defined in the Kermit header files) and always take precautions ++ against character signage (more about this [28]below). ++ * Don't use initializers with automatic arrays or structs: it's not ++ portable. ++ * Don't use big automatic arrays or structs in functions that might ++ be called recursively; some platforms have fixed-size stacks (e.g. ++ Windows 9x: 256K) and recursive functions crash with stack ++ overflow. Even when there is not a compiler limitation, this ++ causes memory to be consumed without bound, and can end up filling ++ swap space. ++ * Don't assume that struct assignment performs a copy, or that it ++ even exists. ++ * Don't use sizeof to get the size of an array; someone might come ++ along later and and change it from static to malloc'd. Always use ++ a symbol to refer to the array's size. ++ * Don't put prototypes for static functions into header files that ++ are used by modules that don't contain that function; the link ++ step can fail with unresolved references (e.g. on AOS/VS). ++ * Avoid the construction *++p (the order of evaluation varies; it ++ shouldn't but at least one compiler had a bug that made me include ++ this item). ++ * Don't use triple assignments, like a = b = c = 0; (or quadruple, ++ etc). Some compilers generate bad code for these, or crash, etc ++ (some version of DEC C as I recall). ++ * Some compilers don't allow structure members to have the same ++ names as other identifiers. Try to give structure members unique ++ names. ++ * Don't assume anything about order of evaluation in boolean ++ expressions, or that they will stop early if a required condition ++ is not true, e.g.: ++ if (i > 0 && p[i-1] == blah) ++ can still dump core if i == 0 (hopefully this is not true of any ++ modern compiler, but I would not have said this if it did not ++ actually happen somewhere). ++ * Don't have a switch() statement with no cases (e.g. because of ++ #ifdefs); this is a fatal error in some compilers. ++ * Don't put lots of code in a switch case; move it out to a separate ++ function; some compilers run out of memory when presented with a ++ huge switch() statement -- it's not the number of cases that ++ matters; it's the overall amount of code. ++ * Some compilers might also limit the number of switch() cases, e.g. ++ to 254. ++ * Don't put anything between "switch() {" and "case:" -- switch ++ blocks are not like other blocks. ++ * Don't jump into or out of switches. ++ * Don't make character-string constants longer than about 250 bytes. ++ Longer strings should be broken up into arrays of strings. ++ * Don't write into character-string constants (obviously). Even when ++ you know you are not writing past the end; the compiler or linker ++ might have put them into read-only and/or shared memory, and/or ++ coalesced multiple equal constants so if you change one you change ++ them all. ++ * Don't depend on '\r' being carriage return. ++ * Don't depend on '\n' being linefeed or for that matter any SINGLE ++ character. ++ * Don't depend on '\r' and '\n' being different (e.g. as separate ++ switch() cases). ++ * In other words, don't use \n or \r to stand for specific ++ characters; use \012 and \015 instead. ++ * Don't code for "buzzword 1.0 compliance", unless "buzzword" is K&R ++ and "1.0" is the first edition. ++ * Don't use or depend on anything_t (size_t, pid_t, etc), except ++ time_t, without #ifdef protection (time_t is the only one I've ++ found that is accepted everywhere). This is a tough one because ++ the same function might require (say) a size_t arg on one ++ platform, whereas size_t is unheard of on another; or worse, it ++ might require a totally different data type, like int or long or ++ some other typedef'd thing. It has often proved necessary to ++ define a symbol to stand for the type of a particular argument to ++ a particular library or system function to get around this ++ problem. ++ * Don't use or depend on internationalization ("i18n") features, ++ wchar_t, locales, etc, in portable code; they are not portable. ++ Anyway, locales are not the right model for Kermit's ++ multi-character-set support. Kermit does all character-set ++ conversion itself and does not use any external libraries or ++ functions. ++ * In particular, don't use any library functions that deal with wide ++ characters or Unicode in any form. These are not only nonportable, ++ but a constantly shifting target (e.g. the ones in glibc). ++ * Don't make any assumption about signal handler type. It can be ++ void, int, long, or anything else. Always declare signal handlers ++ as SIGTYP (see definition in ckcdeb.h and augment it if necessary) ++ and always use SIGRETURN at exit points from signal handlers. ++ * Signals should always be re-armed to be used again (this barely ++ scratches the surface -- the differences between BSD/V7 and System ++ V and POSIX signal handling are numerous, and some platforms do ++ not even support signals, alarms, or longjmps correctly or at all ++ -- avoid all of this if you can). ++ * On the other hand, don't assume that signals are disarmed after ++ being raised. In some platforms you have to re-arm them, in others ++ they stay armed. ++ * Don't call malloc() and friends from a signal handler; don't do ++ anything but setting integer global variables in a signal handler. ++ * malloc() does not initialize allocated memory -- it never said it ++ did. Don't expect it to be all 0's. ++ * Did You Know: malloc() can succeed and the program can still dump ++ core later when it attempts to use the malloc'd memory? (This ++ happens when allocation is deferred until use and swap space is ++ full.) ++ * memset(), memmove(), and memcpy() are not portable, don't use them ++ without protecting them in ifdefs (we have USE_MEMCPY for this). ++ bzero()/bcopy() too, except we're guaranteed to have ++ bzero()/bcopy() when using the sockets library (not really). See ++ examples in the source. ++ * Don't assume that strncpy() stops on the first null byte -- most ++ versions always copy the number of bytes given in arg 3, padding ++ out with 0's and overwriting whatever was there before. Use ++ C-Kermit ckstrncpy() if you want predictable non-padding behavior, ++ guaranteed NUL-termination, and a useful return code. ++ * DID YOU KNOW.. that some versions of inet_blah() routines return ++ IP addresses in network byte order, while others return them local ++ machine byte order? So passing them to ntohs() or whatever is not ++ always the right thing to do. ++ * Don't use ANSI-format function declarations without #ifdef ++ CK_ANSIC, and always provide an #else for the non-ANSI case. ++ * Use the Kermit _PROTOTYP() macro for declaring function ++ prototypes; it works in both the ANSI and non-ANSI cases. ++ * Don't depend on any other ANSI preprocessor features like ++ "pasting" -- they are often missing or nonoperational. ++ * Don't assume any C++ syntax or semantics. ++ * Don't use // as a comment introducer. C is not C++. ++ * Don't declare a string as "char foo[]" in one module and "extern ++ char * foo" in another, or vice-versa: this causes core dumps. ++ * With compiler makers falling all over themselves trying to outdo ++ each other in ANSI strictness, it has become increasingly ++ necessary to cast EVERYTHING. This is increasingly true for char ++ vs unsigned char. We need to use unsigned chars if we want to deal ++ with 8-bit character sets, but most character- and string-oriented ++ APIs want (signed) char arguments, so explicit casts are ++ necessary. It would be nice if every compiler had a ++ -funsigned-char option (as gcc does), but they don't. ++ * a[x], where x is an unsigned char, can produce a wild memory ++ reference if x, when promoted to an int, becomes negative. Cast it ++ to (unsigned), even though it ALREADY IS unsigned. ++ * Be careful how you declare functions that have char or long ++ arguments; for ANSI compilers you MUST use ANSI declarations to ++ avoid promotion problems, but you can't use ANSI declarations with ++ non-ANSI compilers. Thus declarations of such functions must be ++ hideously entwined in #ifdefs. Example: latter: ++ int /* Put character in server command buffer */ ++ #ifdef CK_ANSIC ++ putsrv(char c) ++ #else ++ putsrv(c) char c; ++ #endif /* CK_ANSIC */ ++ /* putsrv */ { ++ *srvptr++ = c; ++ *srvptr = '\0'; /* Make sure buffer is null-terminated */ ++ return(0); ++ } ++ * Be careful how you return characters from functions that return ++ int values -- "getc-like functions" -- in the ANSI world. Unless ++ you explicitly cast the return value to (unsigned), it is likely ++ to be "promoted" to an int and have its sign extended. ++ * At least one compiler (the one on DEC OSF/1 1.3) treats "/*" and ++ "*/" within string constants as comment begin and end. No amount ++ of #ifdefs will get around this one. You simply can't put these ++ sequences in a string constant, e.g. "/usr/local/doc/*.*". ++ * Avoid putting multiple macro references on a single line, e.g.: ++ putchar(BS); putchar(SP); putchar(BS) ++ ++ This overflows the CPP output buffer of more than a few C ++ preprocessors (this happened, for example, with SunOS 4.1 cc, which ++ evidently has a 1K macro expansion buffer). ++ ++ C-Kermit needs constant adjustment to new OS and compiler releases. ++ Every new OS release shuffles header files or their contents, or ++ prototypes, or data types, or levels of ANSI strictness, etc. Every ++ time you make an adjustment to remove a new compilation error, BE VERY ++ CAREFUL to #ifdef it on a symbol unique to the new configuration so ++ that the previous configuration (and all other configurations on all ++ other platforms) remain as before. ++ ++ Assume nothing. Don't assume header files are where they are supposed ++ to be, that they contain what you think they contain, that they define ++ specific symbols to have certain values -- or define them at all! ++ Don't assume system header files protect themselves against multiple ++ inclusion. Don't assume that particular system or library calls are ++ available, or that the arguments are what you think they are -- order, ++ data type, passed by reference vs value, etc. Be conservative when ++ attempting to write portable code. Avoid all advanced features. ++ ++ If you see something that does not make sense, don't assume it's a ++ mistake -- it might be there for a reason, and changing it or removing ++ is likely to cause compilation, linking, or runtime failures sometime, ++ somewhere. Some huge percentage of the code, especially in the ++ platform-dependent modules, is workarounds for compiler, linker, or ++ API bugs. ++ ++ But finally... feel free to violate any or all of these rules in ++ platform-specific modules for environments in which the rules are ++ certain not to apply. For example, in VMS-specific code, it is OK to ++ use #if, because VAX C, DEC C, and VMS GCC all support it. ++ ++ [ [29]Contents ] [ [30]C-Kermit ] [ [31]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.1. Memory Leaks ++ ++ The C language and standard C library are notoriously inadequate and ++ unsafe. Strings are arrays of characters, usually referenced through ++ pointers. There is no native string datatype. Buffers are fixed size, ++ and C provides no runtime bounds checking, thus allowing overwriting ++ of other data or even program code. With the popularization of the ++ Internet, the "buffer exploit" has become a preferred method for ++ hackers to hijack privileged programs; long data strings are fed to a ++ program in hopes that it uses unsafe C library calls such as strcpy() ++ or sprintf() to copy strings into automatic arrays, thus overwriting ++ the call stack, and therefore the routine's return address. When such ++ a hole is discovered, a "string" can be constructed that contains ++ machine code to hijack the program's privileges and penetrate the ++ system. ++ ++ This problem is partially addressed by the strn...() routines, which ++ should always be used in preference to their str...() equivalents ++ (except when the copy operation has already been prechecked, or there ++ is a good reason for not using them, e.g. the sometimes undesirable ++ side effect of strncpy() zeroing the remainder of the buffer). The ++ most gaping whole, however, is sprintf(), which performs no length ++ checking on its destination buffer, and is not easy to replace. ++ Although snprintf() routines are starting to appear, they are not yet ++ widespread, and certainly not universal, nor are they especially ++ portable, or even full-featured. ++ ++ For these reasons, we have started to build up our own little library ++ of C Library replacements, ckclib.[ch]. These are safe and highly ++ portable primitives for memory management and string manipulation, ++ such as: ++ ++ ckstrncpy() ++ Like strncpy but returns a useful value, doesn't zero buffer. ++ ++ ckitoa() ++ Opposite of atoi() ++ ++ ckltoa() ++ Opposite of atol() ++ ++ ckctoa() ++ Returns character as string ++ ++ ckmakmsg() ++ Used with ck?to?() as a safe sprintf() replacement for up to 4 ++ items ++ ++ ckmakxmsg() ++ Like ckmakmsg() but accepts up to 12 items ++ ++ More about library functions in [32]Section 4.A. ++ ++ [ [33]Contents ] [ [34]C-Kermit ] [ [35]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 3.2. The "char" vs "unsigned char" Dilemma ++ ++ This is one of the most aggravating and vexing characteristics of the ++ C language. By design, chars (and char *'s) are SIGNED. But in the ++ modern era, however, we need to process characters that can have (or ++ include) 8-bit values, as in the ISO Latin-1, IBM CP 850, or UTF-8 ++ character sets, so this data must be treated as unsigned. But some C ++ compilers (such as those based on the Bell UNIX V7 compiler) do not ++ support "unsigned char" as a data type. Therefore we have the macro or ++ typedef CHAR, which we use when we need chars to be unsigned, but ++ which, unfortunately, resolves itself to "char" on those compilers ++ that don't support "unsigned char". AND SO... We have to do a lot of ++ fiddling at runtime to avoid sign extension and so forth. ++ ++ Some modern compilers (e.g. IBM, DEC, Microsoft) have options that say ++ "make all chars be unsigned" (e.g. GCC "-funsigned-char") and we use ++ them when they are available. Other compilers don't have this option, ++ and at the same time, are becoming increasingly strict about type ++ mismatches, and spew out torrents of warnings when we use a CHAR where ++ a char is expected, or vice versa. We fix these one by one using ++ casts, and the code becomes increasingly ugly. But there remains a ++ serious problem, namely that certain library and kernel functions have ++ arguments that are declared as signed chars (or pointers to them), ++ whereas our character data is unsigned. Fine, we can can use casts ++ here too -- but who knows what happens inside these routines. ++ ++ [ [36]Contents ] [ [37]C-Kermit ] [ [38]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4. MODULES ++ ++ When C-Kermit is on the far end of a connection, it is said to be in ++ remote mode. When C-Kermit has made a connection to another computer, ++ it is in local mode. (If C-Kermit is "in the middle" of a multihop ++ connection, it is still in local mode.) ++ ++ On another axis, C-Kermit can be in any of several major states: ++ ++ Command State ++ Reading and writing from the job's controlling terminal or ++ "console". In this mode, all i/o is handled by the Group E ++ conxxx() (console i/o) routines. ++ ++ Protocol State ++ Reading and writing from the communicatons device. In this ++ mode, all i/o is handled by the Group E ttxxx() (terminal i/o) ++ routines. ++ ++ Terminal State ++ Reading from the keyboard with conxxx() routines and writing to ++ the communications device with ttxxx() routines AND vice-versa. ++ ++ When in local mode, the console and communications device are ++ distinct. During file transfer, Kermit may put up a file-transfer ++ display on the console and sample the console for interruption ++ signals. ++ ++ When in remote mode, the console and communications device are the ++ same, and therefore there can be no file-transfer display on the ++ console or interruptions from it (except for "in-band" interruptions ++ such as ^C^C^C). ++ ++ [ [39]Contents ] [ [40]C-Kermit ] [ [41]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.A. Group A: Library Functions ++ ++ Library functions, strictly portable, can be used by all modules on ++ all platforms: [42]ckclib.h, [43]ckclib.c. ++ ++ (To be filled in... For now, see [44]Section 3.1 and the comments in ++ ckclib.c.) ++ ++ [ [45]Contents ] [ [46]C-Kermit ] [ [47]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.B. Group B: Kermit File Transfer ++ ++ The Kermit protocol kernel. These files, whose names start with "ckc ++ are supposed to be totally portable C, and are expected to compile ++ correctly on any platform with any C compiler. "Portable" does not ++ mean the same as as "ANSI" -- these modules must compile on 10- and ++ 20-year old computers, with C preprocessors, compilers, and/or linkers ++ that have all sorts of restrictions. The Group B modules do not ++ include any header files other than those that come with Kermit ++ itself. They do not contain any library calls except from the standard ++ C library (e.g. printf()). They most certainly do not contain any ++ system calls. Files: ++ ++ [48]ckcsym.h ++ For use by C compilers that don't allow -D on the command line. ++ ++ [49]ckcasc.h ++ ASCII character symbol definitions. ++ ++ [50]ckcsig.h ++ System-independent signal-handling definitions and prototypes. ++ ++ [51]ckcdeb.h ++ Originally, debugging definitions. Now this file also contains ++ all definitions and prototypes that are shared by all modules ++ in all groups. ++ ++ [52]ckcker.h ++ Kermit protocol symbol definitions. ++ ++ [53]ckcxla.h ++ Character-set-related symbol definitions (see next section). ++ ++ [54]ckcmai.c ++ The main program. This module contains the declarations of all ++ the protocol-related global variables that are shared among the ++ other modules. ++ ++ [55]ckcpro.w ++ The protocol module itself, written in "wart", a lex-like ++ preprocessor that is distributed with Kermit under the name ++ CKWART.C. ++ ++ [56]ckcfns.c, [57]ckcfn2.c, [58]ckcfn3.c ++ The protocol support functions used by the protocol module. ++ ++ [59]Group B modules may call upon functions from [60]Group E, but not ++ from [61]Group D modules (with the single exception that the main ++ program invokes the user interface, which is in Group D). (This last ++ assertion is really only a conjecture.) ++ ++ [ [62]Contents ] [ [63]C-Kermit ] [ [64]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.C. Group C: Character-Set Conversion ++ ++ Character set translation tables and functions. Used by the [65]Group ++ B, protocol modules, but may be specific to different computers. (So ++ far, all character character sets supported by C-Kermit are supported ++ in [66]ckuxla.c and [67]ckuxla.h, including Macintosh and IBM ++ character sets). These modules should be completely portable, and not ++ rely on any kind of system or library services. ++ ++ [68]ckcxla.h ++ Character-set definitions usable by all versions of C-Kermit. ++ ++ ck?xla.h ++ Character-set definitions for computer "?", e.g. [69]ckuxla.h ++ for UNIX, [70]ckmxla.h for Macintosh. ++ ++ [71]ck?xla ++ Character-set translation tables and functions for computer ++ "?", For example, CKUXLA.C for UNIX, CKMXLA.C for Macintosh. So ++ far, these are the only two such modules. The UNIX module is ++ used for all versions of C-Kermit except the Macintosh version. ++ ++ [72]ckcuni.h ++ Unicode definitions ++ ++ [73]ckcuni.c ++ Unicode module ++ ++ Here's how to add a new file character set in the original ++ (non-Unicode modules). Assuming it is based on the Roman (Latin) ++ alphabet. Let's call it "Barbarian". First, in ck?xla.h, add a ++ definition for FC_BARBA (8 chars maximum length) and increase ++ MAXFCSETS by 1. Then, in ck?xla.c: ++ ++ * Add a barbarian entry into the fcsinfo array. ++ * Add a "barbarian" entry to file character set keyword table, ++ fcstab. ++ * Add a "barbarian" entry to terminal character set keyword table, ++ ttcstab. ++ * Add a translation table from Latin-1 to barbarian: yl1ba[]. ++ * Add a translation table from barbarian to Latin-1: ybal1[]. ++ * Add a translation function from Barbarian to ASCII: xbaas(). ++ * Add a translation function from Barbarian to Latin-1: xbal1(). ++ * Add a translation function from Latin-1 to Barbarian: xl1ba(). ++ * etc etc for each transfer character set... ++ * Add translation function pointers to the xls and xlr tables. ++ ++ Other translations involving Barbarian (e.g. from Barbarian to ++ Latin-Cyrillic) are performed through these tables and functions. See ++ ckuxla.h and ckuxla.c for extensive examples. ++ ++ To add a new Transfer Character Set, e.g. Latin Alphabet 9 (for the ++ Euro symbol), again in the "old" character-set modules: ++ ++ In ckcxla.h: ++ ++ + Add a TC_xxxx definition and increase MAXTCSETS accordingly. ++ ++ In ck?xla.h (since any transfer charset is also a file charset): ++ ++ + Add an FC_xxxx definition and increase MAXFCSETS accordingly. ++ ++ In ck?xla.c: ++ ++ + Add a tcsinfo[] entry. ++ + Make a tcstab[] keyword table entry. ++ + Make an fcsinfo[] table entry. ++ + Make an fcstab[] keyword table entry. ++ + Make a tcstab[] keyword table entry. ++ + If necessary, make a langinfo[] table entry. ++ + Make entries in the function pointer arrays. ++ + Provide any needed functions. ++ ++ As of C-Kermit 7.0, character sets are also handled in parallel by the ++ new (and very large) Unicode module, ckcuni.[ch]. Eventually we should ++ phase out the old way, described just above, and operate entirely in ++ (and through) Unicode. The advantages are many. The disadvantages are ++ size and performance. To add a character to the Unicode modules: ++ ++ In ckcuni.h: ++ ++ + (To be filled in...) ++ ++ In ckcuni.c: ++ ++ + (To be filled in...) ++ ++ [ [74]Contents ] [ [75]C-Kermit ] [ [76]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.D. Group D: User Interface ++ ++ This is the code that communicates with the user, gets her commands, ++ informs her of the results. It may be command-line oriented, ++ interactive prompting dialog, menus and arrow keys, windows and mice, ++ speech recognition, telepathy, etc. The one provided is command-and ++ prompt, with the ability to read commands from various sources: the ++ console keyboard, a file, or a macro definition. The user interface ++ has three major functions: ++ ++ 1. Sets the parameters for the file transfer and then starts it. This ++ is done by setting certain (many) global variables, such as the ++ protocol machine start state, the file specification, file type, ++ communication parameters, packet length, window size, character ++ set, etc. ++ 2. Displays messages on the user's screen during the file transfer, ++ using the screen() function, which is called by the group-1 ++ modules. ++ 3. Executes any commands directly that do not require Kermit ++ protocol, such as the CONNECT command, local file management ++ commands, parameter-setting commands, FTP client commands, etc. ++ ++ If you plan to imbed the [77]Group B, files into a program with a ++ different user interface, your interface must supply an appropriate ++ screen() function, plus a couple related ones like chkint() and ++ intmsg() for handling keyboard (or mouse, etc) interruptions during ++ file transfer. The best way to find out about this is to link all the ++ C-Kermit modules together except the ckuu*.o and ckucon.o modules, and ++ see which missing symbols turn up. ++ ++ C-Kermit's character-oriented user interface (as opposed to the ++ Macintosh version's graphical user interface) consists of the ++ following modules. C-Kermit can be built with an interactive command ++ parser, a command-line-option-only parser, a graphical user interface, ++ or any combination, and it can even be built with no user interface at ++ all (in which case it runs as a remote-mode Kermit server). ++ ++ [78]ckucmd.h ++ [79]ckucmd.c ++ The command parsing primitives used by the interactive command ++ parser to parse keywords, numbers, filenames, etc, and to give ++ help, complete fields, supply defaults, allow abbreviations and ++ editing, etc. This package is totally independent of Kermit, ++ but does depend on the [80]Group E functions. ++ ++ [81]ckuusr.h ++ Definitions of symbols used in Kermit's commands. ++ ++ ckuus*.c ++ Kermit's interactive command parser, including the script ++ programming language: [82]ckuusr.c (includes top-level keyword ++ tables); [83]ckuus2.c (HELP command text); [84]ckuus3.c (most ++ of the SET command); [85]ckuus4.c (includes variables and ++ functions); ckuus[567].c (miscellaneous); ++ ++ [86]ckuusy.c ++ The command-line-option parser. ++ ++ [87]ckuusx.c ++ User interface functions common to both the interactive and ++ command-line parsers. ++ ++ [88]ckuver.h ++ Version heralds for different implementations. ++ ++ [89]ckuscr.c ++ The (old, uucp-like) SCRIPT command ++ ++ [90]ckudia.c ++ The DIAL command. Includes specific knowledge of many types of ++ modems. ++ ++ Note that none of the above files is actually Unix-specific. Over time ++ they have proven to be portable among all platforms where C-Kermit is ++ built: Unix, VMS, AOS/VS, Amiga, OS-9, VOS, etc etc. Thus the third ++ letter should more properly be "c", but changing it would be too ++ confusing. ++ ++ ck?con.c, ckucns.c ++ The CONNECT command. Terminal connection, and in some cases ++ (Macintosh, Windows) also terminal emulation. NOTE: As of ++ C-Kermit 7.0, there are two different CONNECT modules for UNIX: ++ [91]ckucon.c -- the traditional, portable, fork()-based version ++ -- and [92]ckucns.c, a new version that uses select() rather ++ than forks so it can handle encryption. ckucns.c is the ++ preferred version for Unix; ckucon.c is not likely to keep pace ++ with it in terms of upgrades, etc. However, since select() is ++ not portable to every platform, ckucon.c will be kept ++ indefinitely for those platforms that can't use ckucns.c. NOTE: ++ SunLink X.25 support is available only in ckucon.c. ++ ++ ck_*.*, ckuat*.* ++ Modules having to do with authentication and encryption. Since ++ the relaxation of USA export laws, they are included with the ++ general source-code distribution. Secure C-Kermit binaries can ++ be built using special targets in the standard makefile. ++ However, secure prebuilt binaries may not be distributed. ++ ++ For other implementations, the files may, and probably do, have ++ different names. For example, the Macintosh graphical user interface ++ filenames start with "ckm". Kermit 95 uses the ckucmd and ckuus* ++ modules, but has its own CONNECT command modules. And so on. ++ ++ Here is a brief description of C-Kermit's "user interface interface", ++ from ckuusr.c. It is nowhere near complete; in particular, hundreds of ++ global variables are shared among the many modules. These should, some ++ day, be collected into classes or structures that can be passed around ++ as needed; not only for purity's sake, but also to allow for multiple ++ simultaneous communication sessions and or user interfaces. Our list ++ of things to do is endless, and reorganizing the source is almost ++ always at the bottom. ++ ++ The ckuus*.c modules (like many of the ckc*.c modules) depend on the ++ existence of C library features like fopen, fgets, feof, (f)printf, ++ argv/argc, etc. Other functions that are likely to vary among ++ operating systems -- like setting terminal modes or interrupts -- are ++ invoked via calls to functions that are defined in the [93]Group E ++ platform-dependent modules, ck?[ft]io.c. The command line parser ++ processes any arguments found on the command line, as passed to main() ++ via argv/argc. The interactive parser uses the facilities of the cmd ++ package (developed for this program, but, in theory, usable by any ++ program). Any command parser may be substituted for this one. The only ++ requirements for the Kermit command parser are these: ++ ++ 1. Set parameters via global variables like duplex, speed, ttname, ++ etc. See [94]ckcmai.c for the declarations and descriptions of ++ these variables. ++ 2. If a command can be executed without the use of Kermit protocol, ++ then execute the command directly and set the sstate (start state) ++ variable to 0. Examples include SET commands, local directory ++ listings, the CONNECT command. ++ 3. If a command requires the Kermit protocol, set the following ++ variables: ++ sstate string data ++ 'x' (enter server mode) (none) ++ 'r' (send a 'get' command) cmarg, cmarg2 ++ 'v' (enter receive mode) cmarg2 ++ 'g' (send a generic command) cmarg ++ 's' (send files) nfils, cmarg & cmarg2 OR cmlist ++ 'c' (send a remote host command) cmarg ++ ++ cmlist is an array of pointers to strings. ++ cmarg, cmarg2 are pointers to strings. ++ nfils is an integer (hmmm, probably should be an unsigned long). ++ ++ cmarg can be: ++ A filename string (possibly wild), or: ++ a pointer to a prefabricated generic command string, or: ++ a pointer to a host command string. ++ ++ cmarg2 is: ++ The name to send a single file under, or: ++ the name under which to store an incoming file; must not ++ be wild. ++ If it's the name for receiving, a null value means to ++ store the file under the name it arrives with. ++ ++ cmlist is: ++ A list of nonwild filenames, such as passed via argv. ++ ++ nfils is an integer, interpreted as follows: ++ -1: filespec (possibly wild) in cmarg, must be expanded ++ internally. ++ 0: send from stdin (standard input). ++ >0: number of files to send, from cmlist. ++ ++ The screen() function is used to update the screen during file ++ transfer. The tlog() function writes to a transaction log (if TLOG is ++ defined). The debug() function writes to a debugging log (if DEBUG is ++ defined). The intmsg() and chkint() functions provide the user i/o for ++ interrupting file transfers. ++ ++ [ [95]Contents ] [ [96]C-Kermit ] [ [97]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.E. Group E: Platform-Dependent I/O ++ ++ Platform-dependent function definitions. All the Kermit modules, ++ including the command package, call upon these functions, which are ++ designed to provide system-independent primitives for controlling and ++ manipulating devices and files. For Unix, these functions are defined ++ in the files [98]ckufio.c (files), [99]ckutio.c (communications), and ++ [100]ckusig.c (signal handling). ++ ++ For VMS, the files are [101]ckvfio.c, ckvtio.c, and [102]ckusig.c (VMS ++ can use the same signal handling routines as Unix). It doesn't really ++ matter what the files are called, except for Kermit distribution ++ purposes (grouping related files together alphabetically), only that ++ each function is provided with the name indicated, observes the same ++ calling and return conventions, and has the same type. ++ ++ The Group E modules contain both functions and global variables that ++ are accessed by modules in the other groups. These are now described. ++ ++ (By the way, I got this list by linking all the C-Kermit modules ++ together except ckutio and ckufio. These are the symbols that ld ++ reported as undefined. But that was a long time ago, probably circa ++ Version 6.) ++ ++ 4.E.1. Global Variables ++ ++ char *DELCMD; ++ Pointer to string containing command for deleting files. ++ Example: char *DELCMD = "rm -f "; (UNIX) ++ Example: char *DELCMD = "delete "; (VMS) ++ Note trailing space. Filename is concatenated to end of this ++ string. NOTE: DELCMD is used only in versions that do not ++ provide their own built-in DELETE command. ++ ++ char *DIRCMD; ++ Pointer to string containing command for listing files when a ++ filespec is given. ++ Example: char *DIRCMD = "/bin/ls -l "; (UNIX) ++ Example: char *DIRCMD = "directory "; (VMS) ++ Note trailing space. Filename is concatenated to end of this ++ string. NOTE: DIRCMD is used only in versions that do not ++ provide their own built-in DIRECTORY command. ++ ++ char *DIRCM2; ++ Pointer to string containing command for listing files when a ++ filespec is not given. (currently not used, handled in another ++ way.) ++ Example: char *DIRCMD2 = "/bin/ls -ld *"; ++ NOTE: DIRCMD2 is used only in versions that do not provide ++ their own built-in DIRECTORY command. ++ ++ char *PWDCMD; ++ Pointer to string containing command to display current ++ directory. ++ Example: char *PWDCMD = "pwd "; ++ NOTE: PWDCMD is used only in versions that do not provide their ++ own built-in PWD command. ++ ++ char *SPACMD; ++ Pointer to command to display free disk space in current ++ device/directory. ++ Example: char *SPACMD = "df ."; ++ NOTE: SPACMD is used only in versions that do not provide their ++ own built-in SPACE command. ++ ++ char *SPACM2; ++ Pointer to command to display free disk space in another ++ device/directory. ++ Example: char *SPACM2 = "df "; ++ Note trailing space. Device or directory name is added to this ++ string. NOTE: SPACMD2 is used only in versions that do not ++ provide their own built-in SPACE command. ++ ++ char *TYPCMD; ++ Pointer to command for displaying the contents of a file. ++ Example: char *TYPCMD = "cat "; ++ Note trailing space. Device or directory name is added to this ++ string. NOTE: TYPCMD is used only in versions that do not ++ provide their own built-in TYPE command. ++ ++ char *WHOCMD; ++ Pointer to command for displaying logged-in users. ++ Example: char *WHOCMD = "who "; ++ Note trailing space. Specific user name may be added to this ++ string. ++ ++ int backgrd = 0; ++ Flag for whether program is running in foreground (0) or ++ background (nonzero). Background operation implies that screen ++ output should not be done and that all errors should be fatal. ++ ++ int ckxech; ++ Flag for who is to echo console typein: ++ 1: The program (system is not echoing). ++ 0: The OS, front end, terminal, etc (not this program). ++ ++ char *ckxsys; ++ Pointer to string that names the computer and operating system. ++ Example: char *ckxsys = " NeXT Mach 1.0"; ++ Tells what computer system ckxv applies to. In UNIX Kermit, ++ this variable is also used to print the program herald, and in ++ the SHOW VERSION command. ++ ++ char *ckxv; ++ Pointer to version/edit info of ck?tio.c module. ++ Example: char *ckxv = "UNIX Communications Support, 6.0.169, 6 ++ Sep 96"; ++ Used by SHOW VERSION command. ++ ++ char *ckzsys; ++ Like ckxsys, but briefer. ++ Example: char *ckzsys = " 4.3 BSD"; ++ Tells what platform ckzv applies to. Used by the SHOW VERSION ++ command. ++ ++ char *ckzv; ++ Pointer to version/edit info of ck?fio.c module. ++ Example: char *ckzv = "UNIX File support, 6.0.113, 6 Sep 96"; ++ Used by SHOW VERSION command. ++ ++ int dfflow; ++ Default flow control. 0 = none, 1 = Xon/Xoff, ... (see FLO_xxx ++ symbols in ckcdeb.h) ++ Set by Group E module. Used by [103]ckcmai.c to initialize flow ++ control variable. ++ ++ int dfloc; ++ Default location. 0 = remote, 1 = local. Set by Group E module. ++ Used by ckcmai.c to initialize local variable. Used in various ++ places in the user interface. ++ ++ int dfprty; ++ Default parity. 0 = none, 'e' = even, 'o' = odd, 'm' = mark, ++ 's' = space. Set by Group E module. Used by ckcmai.c to ++ initialize parity variable. ++ ++ char *dftty; ++ Default communication device. Set by Group E module. Used in ++ many places. This variable should be initialized the the symbol ++ CTTNAM, which is defined in ckcdeb.h, e.g. as "/dev/tty" for ++ UNIX, "TT:" for VMS, etc. Example: char *dftty = CTTNAM; ++ ++ char *mtchs[]; ++ Array of string pointers to filenames that matched the most ++ recent wildcard match, i.e. the most recent call to zxpand(). ++ Used (at least) by command parsing package for partial filename ++ completion. ++ ++ int tilde_expand; ++ Flag for whether to attempt to expand leading tildes in ++ directory names (used in UNIX only, and then only when the ++ symbol DTILDE is defined. ++ ++ int ttnproto; ++ The protocol being used to communicate over a network device. ++ Values are defined in ckcnet.h. Example: NP_TELNET is network ++ protocol "telnet". ++ ++ int maxnam; ++ The maximum length for a filename, exclusive of any device or ++ directory information, in the format of the host operating ++ system. ++ ++ int maxpath; ++ The maximum length for a fully specified filename, including ++ device designator, directory name, network node name, etc, in ++ the format of the host operating system, and including all ++ punctuation. ++ ++ int ttyfd; ++ File descriptor of the communication device. -1 if there is no ++ open or usable connection, including when C-Kermit is in remote ++ mode. Since this is not implemented everywhere, references to ++ it are in #ifdef CK_TTYFD..#endif. ++ ++ [ [104]Contents ] [ [105]C-Kermit ] [ [106]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.E.2. Functions ++ ++ These are divided into three categories: file-related functions (B.1), ++ communication functions (B.2), and miscellaneous functions (B.3). ++ ++ 4.E.2.1. File-Related Functions ++ ++ In most implementations, these are collected together into a module ++ called ck?fio.c, where ? = "u" ([107]ckutio.c for Unix), "v" ++ ([108]ckvtio.c for VMS), [109]etc. To be totally platform-independent, ++ C-Kermit maintains its own file numbers, and provides the functions ++ described in this section to deal with the files associated with them. ++ The file numbers are referred to symbolically, and are defined as ++ follows in ckcker.h: ++ ++ #define ZCTERM 0 /* Console terminal */ ++ #define ZSTDIO 1 /* Standard input/output */ ++ #define ZIFILE 2 /* Current input file for SEND command */ ++ #define ZOFILE 3 /* Current output file for RECEIVE command */ ++ #define ZDFILE 4 /* Current debugging log file */ ++ #define ZTFILE 5 /* Current transaction log file */ ++ #define ZPFILE 6 /* Current packet log file */ ++ #define ZSFILE 7 /* Current session log file */ ++ #define ZSYSFN 8 /* Input from a system function (pipe) */ ++ #define ZRFILE 9 /* Local file for READ command */ (NEW) ++ #define ZWFILE 10 /* Local file for WRITE command */ (NEW) ++ #define ZMFILE 11 /* Auxilliary file for internal use */ (NEW) ++ #define ZNFILS 12 /* How many defined file numbers */ ++ ++ In the descriptions below, fn refers to a filename, and n refers to ++ one of these file numbers. Functions are of type int unless otherwise ++ noted, and are listed mostly alphabetically. ++ ++ int ++ chkfn(n) int n; ++ Checks the file number n. Returns: ++ -1: File number n is out of range ++ 0: n is in range, but file is not open ++ 1: n in range and file is open ++ ++ int ++ iswild(filspec) char *filespec; ++ Checks if the file specification is "wild", i.e. contains ++ metacharacters or other notations intended to match multiple ++ filenames. Returns: ++ 0: not wild ++ 1: wild. ++ ++ int ++ isdir(string) char *string; ++ Checks if the string is the name of an existing directory. The ++ idea is to check whether the string can be "cd'd" to, so in ++ some cases (e.g. DOS) it might also indicate any file ++ structured device, such as a disk drive (like A:). Other ++ nonzero returns indicate system-dependent information; e.g. in ++ VMS isdir("[.FOO]") returns 1 but isdir("FOO.DIR;1") returns 2 ++ to indicate the directory-file name is in a format that needs ++ conversion before it can be combined with a filename. Returns: ++ 0: not a directory (including any kind of error) ++ 1: it is an existing directory ++ ++ char * ++ zfcdat(name) char *name; ++ Returns modification (preferably, otherwise creation) date/time ++ of file whose name is given in the argument string. Return ++ value is a pointer to a string of the form yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss, ++ for example 19931231 23:59:59, which represents the local time ++ (no timezone or daylight savings time finagling required). ++ Returns the null string ("") on failure. The text pointed to by ++ the string pointer might be in a static buffer, and so should ++ be copied to a safe place by the caller before any subsequent ++ calls to this function. ++ ++ struct zfnfp * ++ zfnqfp(fn, buflen, buf) char * fn; int buflen; char * buf; ++ Given the filename fn, the corresponding fully qualified, ++ absolute filename is placed into the buffer buf, whose length ++ is buflen. On failure returns a NULL pointer. On success ++ returns a pointer to a struct zfnfp containing pointers to the ++ full pathname and to just the filename, and an int giving the ++ length of the full pathname. All references to this function in ++ mainline code must be protected by #ifdef ZFNQFP..#endif, ++ because it is not present in all of the ck*fio.c modules. So if ++ you implement this function in a version that did not have it ++ before, be sure to add #define ZFNQFP in the appropriate spot ++ in ckcdeb.h or in the build-procedure CFLAGS. ++ ++ int ++ zcmpfn(s1,s2) char * s2, * s2; ++ Compares two filenames to see if they refer to the same. ++ Internally, the arguments can be converted to fully qualified ++ pathnames, e.g. with zfnqfp(), realpath(), or somesuch. In Unix ++ or other systems where symbolic links exist, the link should be ++ resolved before making the comparison or looking at the inodes. ++ Returns: ++ 0: Files are not identical. ++ 1: Files are identical. ++ ++ int ++ zfseek(pos) long pos; ++ Positions the input pointer on the current input file to the ++ given position. The pos argument is 0-based, the offset ++ (distance in bytes) from beginning of the file. Needed for ++ RESEND, PSEND, and other recovery operations. This function is ++ not necessarily possible on all systems, e.g. record-oriented ++ systems. It should only be used on binary files (i.e. files we ++ are sending in binary mode) and stream-oriented file systems. ++ Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: On success. ++ ++ int ++ zchdir(dirnam) char *dirnam; ++ Changes current or default directory to the one given in ++ dirnam. Returns: ++ 0: On failure. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ long ++ zchki(fn) char *fn; ++ Check to see if file with name fn is a regular, readable, ++ existing file, suitable for Kermit to send -- not a directory, ++ not a symbolic link, etc. Returns: ++ -3: if file exists but is not accessible (e.g. ++ read-protected); ++ -2: if file exists but is not of a readable type (e.g. a ++ directory); ++ -1: on error (e.g. file does not exist, or fn is garbage); ++ >=0: (length of file) if file exists and is readable. ++ Also see isdir(), zgetfs(). ++ ++ int ++ zchkpid(pid) unsigned long pid; ++ Returns: ++ 1: If the given process ID (e.g. pid in UNIX) is valid and ++ active ++ 0: otherwise. ++ ++ long ++ zgetfs(fn) char *fn; ++ Gets the size of the given file, regardless of accessibility. ++ Used for directory listings. Unlike zchki(), should return the ++ size of any kind of file, even a directory. zgetfs() also ++ should serve as a mini "get file info" function that can be ++ used until we design a better one, by also setting some global ++ variables: ++ int zgfs_link = 1/0 = file is (not) a symbolic link. ++ int zgfs_dir = 1/0 = file is (not) a directory. ++ char linkname[] = if zgfs_link != 0, name of file link points ++ to. ++ Returns: ++ -1: on error (e.g. file does not exist, or fn is garbage); ++ >=0: (length of file) if file exists and is readable. ++ ++ int ++ zchko(fn) char *fn; ++ Checks to see if a file of the given name can be created. ++ Returns: ++ -1: if file cannot be created, or on any kind of error. ++ 0: if file can be created. ++ ++ int ++ zchkspa(fn,len) char *f; long len; ++ Checks to see if there is sufficient space to store the file ++ named fn, which is len bytes long. If you can't write a ++ function to do this, then just make a dummy that always returns ++ 1; higher level code will recover from disk-full errors. The ++ receiving Kermit uses this function to refuse an incoming file ++ based on its size, via the attribute mechanism. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: if there is not enough space. ++ 1: if there is enough space. ++ ++ int ++ zchin(n,c) int n; int *c; ++ Gets a character from file number n, return it in c (call with ++ &c). Returns: ++ -1: on failure, including EOF. ++ 0: on success with character in c. ++ ++ int ++ zchout(n,c) int n; char c; ++ Writes the character c to file number n. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zclose(n) int n; ++ Closes file number n. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zdelet(fn) char *name; ++ Attempts to delete (remove, erase) the named file. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 1: if file was deleted successfully. ++ ++ char * ++ zgperm(char * f) ++ Returns a pointer to the system-dependent numeric ++ permissions/protection string for file f, or NULL upon failure. ++ Used if CK_PERMS is defined. ++ ++ char * ++ ziperm(char * f) ++ Returns a pointer to the system-dependent symbolic ++ permissions/protection string for file f, or NULL upon failure. ++ Used if CK_PERMS is defined. Example: In UNIX zgperm(f) might ++ return "100770", but ziperm() might return "-rwxrwx---". In ++ VMS, zgperm() would return a hexadecimal string, but ziperm() ++ would return something like "(RWED,RWED,RE,)". ++ ++ char * ++ zgtdir() ++ Returns a pointer to the name of the current directory, folder, ++ etc, or a NULL pointer if the current directory cannot be ++ determined. If possible, the directory specification should be ++ (a) fully specified, e.g. as a complete pathname, and (b) be ++ suitable for appending a filename. Thus, for example, Unix ++ directory names should end with '/'. VMS directory names should ++ look like DEV:[NAME] (rather than, say, NAME.DIR;1). ++ ++ char * ++ zhome() ++ Returns a pointer to a string containing the user's home ++ directory, or NULL upon error. Should be formatted like ++ zgtdir() (q.v.). ++ ++ int ++ zinfill() ++ Fill buffer from input file. This function is used by the macro ++ zminchar(), which is defined in ckcker.h. zminchar() manages ++ its own buffer, and calls zinfill() to fill it whenever it ++ becomes empty. It is used only for sending files, and reads ++ characters only from file number ZIFILE. zinfill() returns -1 ++ upon end of file, -2 upon fatal error, and -3 upon timeout ++ (e.g. when reading from a pipe); otherwise it returns the first ++ character from the buffer it just read. ++ ++ int ++ zkself() ++ Kills the current job, session, process, etc, logs out, ++ disappears. Used by the Kermit server when it receives a BYE ++ command. On failure, returns -1. On success, does not return at ++ all! This function should not be called until all other steps ++ have been taken to close files, etc. ++ ++ VOID ++ zstrip(fn,&fn2) char *fn1, **fn2; ++ Strips device and directory, etc, from file specification fn, ++ leaving only the filename (including "extension" or "filetype" ++ -- the part after the dot). For example DUA0:[PROGRAMS]OOFA.C;3 ++ becomes OOFA.C, or /usr/fdc/oofa.c becomes oofa.c. Returns a ++ pointer to result in fn2. ++ ++ int ++ zsetperm(char * file, unsigned int code) ++ Set permissions of file to given system-dependent code. 0: On ++ failure. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zsetroot(char * dir) ++ Sets the root for the user's file access, like Unix chroot(), ++ but does not require privilege. In Unix, this must be ++ implemented entirely by Kermit's own file access routines. ++ Returns: ++ 1: Success ++ -1: Invalid argument ++ -2: ++ -3: Internal error ++ -4: Access to given directory denied ++ -5: New root not within old root ++ ++ int ++ zinroot(char * file) ++ If no root is set (zsetroot()), returns 1. ++ Otherwise, if given file is in the root, returns 1. ++ Otherwise, returns 0. ++ ++ VOID ++ zltor(fn,fn2) char *fn1, *fn2; ++ Local-To-Remote filename translation. OBSOLETE: replaced by ++ nzltor() (q.v.). Translates the local filename fn into a format ++ suitable for transmission to an arbitrary type of computer, and ++ copies the result into the buffer pointed to by fn2. ++ Translation may involve (a) stripping the device and/or ++ directory/path name, (b) converting lowercase to uppercase, (c) ++ removing spaces and strange characters, or converting them to ++ some innocuous alphabetic character like X, (d) discarding or ++ converting extra periods (there should not be more than one). ++ Does its best. Returns no value. name2 is a pointer to a ++ buffer, furnished by the caller, into which zltor() writes the ++ resulting name. No length checking is done. ++ ++ #ifdef NZLTOR ++ VOID ++ nzltor(fn,fn2,convert,pathnames,max) char *fn1,*fn2; int ++ convert,pathnames,max; ++ Replaces zltor(). This new version handles pathnames and checks ++ length. fn1 and fn2 are as in zltor(). This version is called ++ unconditionally for each file, rather than only when filename ++ conversion is enabled. Pathnames can have the following values: ++ ++ PATH_OFF: Pathname, if any, is to be stripped ++ PATH_REL: The relative pathname is to be included ++ PATH_ABS: The full pathname is to be included ++ ++ After handling pathnames, conversion is done to the result as ++ in the zltor() description if convert != 0; if relative or ++ absolute pathnames are included, they are converted to UNIX ++ format, i.e. with slash (/) as the directory separator. The max ++ parameter specifies the maximum size of fn2. If convert > 0, ++ the regular conversions are done; if convert < 0, minimal ++ conversions are done (we skip uppercasing the letters, we allow ++ more than one period, etc; this can be used when we know our ++ partner is UNIX or similar). ++ ++ #endif /* NZLTOR */ ++ ++ int ++ nzxpand(fn,flags) char *fn; int flags; ++ Replaces zxpand(), which is obsolete as of C-Kermit 7.0. ++ Call with: ++ fn = Pointer to filename or pattern. ++ flags = option bits: ++ flags & ZX_FILONLY Match regular files ++ flags & ZX_DIRONLY Match directories ++ flags & ZX_RECURSE Descend through directory tree ++ flags & ZX_MATCHDOT Match "dot files" ++ flags & ZX_NOBACKUP Don't match "backup files" ++ flags & ZX_NOLINKS Don't follow symlinks. ++ ++ Returns the number of files that match fn, with data structures ++ set up so the first file (if any) will be returned by the next ++ znext() call. If ZX_FILONLY and ZX_DIRONLY are both set, or ++ neither one is set, files and directories are matched. Notes: ++ ++ 1. It is essential that the number returned by nzxpand() reflect ++ the actual number of filenames that will be returned by ++ znext() calls. In other words: ++ for (n = nzxpand(string,flags); n > 0; n--) { ++ znext(buf); ++ printf("%s\n", buf); ++ } ++ should print all the file names; no more, no less. ++ 2. In UNIX, DOS, OS-9, etc, where directories contain entries ++ for themselves (.) and the superior directory (..), these ++ should NOT be included in the list under any circumstances, ++ including when ZX_MATCHDOT is set. ++ 3. Additional option bits might be added in the future, e.g. for ++ sorting (sort by date/name/size, reverse/ascending, etc). ++ Currently this is done only in higher level code (through a ++ hack in which the nzxpand() exports its filename array, which ++ is not portable because not all OS's can use this mechanism). ++ ++ int ++ zmail(addr,fn) char *addr, fn; ++ Send the local, existing file fn as e-mail to the address addr. ++ Returns: ++ 0: on success ++ 2: if mail delivered but temp file can't be deleted ++ -2: if mail can't be delivered ++ ++ int ++ zmkdir(path) char *path; ++ The path can be a file specification that might contain ++ directory information, in which the filename is expected to be ++ included, or an unambiguous directory specification (e.g. in ++ UNIX it must end with "/"). This routine attempts to create any ++ directories in the given path that don't already exist. Returns ++ 0 or greater success: no directories needed creation, or else ++ all directories that needed creation were created successfully; ++ the return code is the number of directories that were created. ++ Returns -1 on failure to create any of the needed directories. ++ ++ int ++ zrmdir(path) char *path; ++ Attempts to remove the given directory. Returns 0 on success, ++ -1 on failure. The detailed semantics are open -- should it ++ fail if the directory contains any files or subdirectories, ++ etc. It is probably best for this routine to behave in whatever ++ manner is customary on the underlying platform; e.g. in UNIX, ++ VMS, DOS, etc, where directories can not be removed unless they ++ are empty. ++ ++ VOID ++ znewn(fn,s) char *fn, **s; ++ Transforms the name fn into a filename that is guaranteed to be ++ unique. If the file fn does not exist, then the new name is the ++ same as fn; Otherwise, it's different. this function does its ++ best, returns no value. New name is created in caller's space. ++ Call like this: znewn(old,&new);. The second parameter is a ++ pointer to the new name. This pointer is set by znewn() to ++ point to a static string in its own space, so be sure to the ++ result to a safe place before calling this function again. ++ ++ int ++ znext(fn) char *fn; ++ Copies the next file name from a file list created by zxpand() ++ into the string pointed to by fn (see zxpand). If no more ++ files, then the null string is placed there. Returns 0 if there ++ are no more filenames, with 0th element the array pointed to by ++ fn set to NUL. If there is a filename, it is stored in the ++ array pointed to by fn and a positive number is returned. NOTE: ++ This is a change from earlier definitions of this function ++ (pre-1999), which returned the number of files remaining; thus ++ 0 was the return value when returning the final file. However, ++ no mainline code ever depended on the return value, so this ++ change should be safe. ++ ++ int ++ zopeni(n,fn) int n; char *fn; ++ Opens the file named fn for input as file number n. Returns: ++ 0: on failure. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zopeno(n,fn,zz,fcb) int n; char *name; struct zattr *zz; struct ++ filinfo *fcb; ++ Attempts to open the named file for output as file number n. zz ++ is a Kermit file attribute structure as defined in ckcdeb.h, ++ containing various information about the file, including its ++ size, creation date, and so forth. This function should attempt ++ to honor as many of these as possible. fcb is a "file control ++ block" in the traditional sense, defined in ckcdeb.h, ++ containing information relevant to complicated file systems ++ like VMS (RMS), IBM MVS, etc, like blocksize, record length, ++ organization, record format, carriage control, etc. Returns: ++ 0: on failure. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zoutdump() ++ Dumps a file output buffer. Used with the macro zmchout() ++ defined in ckcker.h. Used only with file number ZOFILE, i.e. ++ the file that is being received by Kermit during file transfer. ++ Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zprint(p,fn) char *p, *f; ++ Prints the file with name fn on a local printer, with options ++ p. Returns: ++ 0: on success ++ 3: if file sent to printer but can't be deleted ++ -3: if file can't be printed ++ ++ int ++ zrename(fn,fn2) char *fn, *fn2; ++ Changes the name of file fn to fn2. If fn2 is the name of an ++ existing directory, or a file-structured device, then file fn ++ is moved to that directory or device, keeping its original ++ name. If fn2 lacks a directory separator when passed to this ++ function, an appropriate one is supplied. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zcopy(source,dest) char * source, * dest; ++ Copies the source file to the destination. One file only. No ++ wildcards. The destination string may be a filename or a ++ directory name. Returns: ++ 0: on success. ++ <0: on failure: ++ -2: source file is not a regular file. ++ -3: source file not found. ++ -4: permission denied. ++ -5: source and destination are the same file. ++ -6: i/o error. ++ -1: other error. ++ ++ char * ++ zlocaltime(char *) ++ Call with: "yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss" GMT/UTC date-time. Returns ++ pointer to local date-time string "yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss" on ++ success, NULL on failure. ++ ++ VOID ++ zrtol(fn,fn2) char *fn, *fn2; ++ Remote-To-Local filename translation. OBSOLETE: replaced by ++ nzrtol(). Translates a "standard" filename to a local filename. ++ For example, in Unix this function might convert an ++ all-uppercase name to lowercase, but leave lower- or mix-case ++ names alone. Does its best, returns no value. New name is in ++ string pointed to by fn2. No length checking is done. ++ ++ #ifdef NZLTOR ++ int ++ nzrtol(fn,fn2,convert,pathnames,max) char *fn1,*fn2; int ++ convert,pathnames,max; ++ Replaces zrtol. Like zrtol but handles pathnames and checks ++ length. See nzltor for detailed description of parameters. ++ ++ #endif /* NZLTOR */ ++ ++ int ++ zsattr(xx) struct zattr *xx; ++ Fills in a Kermit file attribute structure for the file which ++ is to be sent, namely the currently open ZIFILE. Note that this ++ is not a very good design, but we're stuck with it. Callers ++ must ensure that zsattr() is called only on real files, not on ++ pipes, internally generated file-like objects such as server ++ REMOTE command responses, etc. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success with the structure filled in. ++ If any string member is null, it should be ignored by the ++ caller. ++ If any numeric member is -1, it should be ignored by the ++ caller. ++ ++ int ++ zshcmd(s) char *s; ++ s contains to pointer to a command to be executed by the host ++ computer's shell, command parser, or operating system. If the ++ system allows the user to choose from a variety of command ++ processors (shells), then this function should employ the ++ user's preferred shell. If possible, the user's job ++ (environment, process, etc) should be set up to catch keyboard ++ interruption signals to allow the user to halt the system ++ command and return to Kermit. The command must run in ordinary, ++ unprivileged user mode. If possible, this function should ++ return -1 on failure to start the command, or else it should ++ return 1 if the command succeeded and 0 if it failed. ++ ++ int ++ pexitstatus ++ zshcmd() and zsyscmd() should set this to the command's actual ++ exit status code if possible. ++ ++ int ++ zsyscmd(s) char *s; ++ s contains to pointer to a command to be executed by the host ++ computer's shell, command parser, or operating system. If the ++ system allows the user to choose from a variety of command ++ processors (shells), then this function should employ the ++ system standard shell (e.g. /bin/sh for Unix), so that the ++ results will always be the same for everybody. If possible, the ++ user's job (environment, process, etc) should be set up to ++ catch keyboard interruption signals to allow the user to halt ++ the system command and return to Kermit. The command must run ++ in ordinary, unprivileged user mode. If possible, this function ++ should return -1 on failure to start the command, or else it ++ should return 1 if the command succeeded and 0 if it failed. ++ ++ VOID ++ z_exec(s,args) char * s; char * args[]; ++ This one executes the command s (which is searched for using ++ the system's normal searching mechanism, such as PATH in UNIX), ++ with the given argument vector, which follows the conventions ++ of UNIX argv[]: the name of the command pointed to by element ++ 0, the first arg by element 1, and so on. A null args[] pointer ++ indicates the end of the arugment list. All open files must ++ remain open so the exec'd process can use them. Returns only if ++ unsuccessful. ++ ++ int ++ zsinl(n,s,x) int n, x; char *s; ++ Reads a line from file number n. Writes the line into the ++ address s provided by the caller. Writing terminates when ++ newline is read, but with newline discarded. Writing also ++ terminates upon EOF or if length x is exhausted. Returns: ++ -1: on EOF or error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zsout(n,s) int n; char *s; ++ Writes the string s out to file number n. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zsoutl(n,s) int n; char *s; ++ Writes the string s out to file number n and adds a line ++ (record) terminator (boundary) appropriate for the system and ++ the file format. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ zsoutx(n,s,x) int n, x; char *s; ++ Writes exactly x characters from string s to file number n. If ++ s has fewer than x characters, then the entire string s is ++ written. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ >= 0: on success, the number of characters actually written. ++ ++ int ++ zstime(fn,yy,x) char *fn; struct zattr *yy; int x; ++ Sets the creation date (and other attributes) of an existing ++ file, or compares a file's creation date with a given date. ++ Call with: ++ ++ fn: pointer to name of existing file. ++ yy: Pointer to a Kermit file attribute structure in which yy->date.val ++ is a date of the form yyyymmdd hh:mm:ss, e.g. 19900208 13:00:00, which ++ is to be used for setting or comparing the file date. Other attributes ++ in the struct can also be set, such as the protection/permission (See ++ [110]Appendix I), when it makes sense (e.g. "yy->lprotect.val" can be ++ set if the remote system ID matches the local one). ++ x: A function code: 0 means to set the file's creation date as given. ++ 1 means compare the date from the yy struct with the file's date. ++ ++ Returns: ++ -1: on any kind of error. ++ 0: if x is 0 and the file date was set successfully. ++ 0: if x is 1 and date from attribute structure > file ++ creation date. ++ 1: if x is 1 and date from attribute structure <= file ++ creation date. ++ ++ VOID ++ zstrip(name,name2) char *name, **name2; ++ Strips pathname from filename "name". Constructs the resulting ++ string in a static buffer in its own space and returns a ++ pointer to it in name2. Also strips device name, file version ++ numbers, and other "non-name" material. ++ ++ int ++ zxcmd(n,s) char *s; ++ Runs a system command so its output can be accessed as if it ++ were file n. The command is run in ordinary, unprivileged user ++ mode. ++ If n is ZSTDIO or ZCTERM, returns -1. ++ If n is ZIFILE or ZRFILE, then Kermit reads from the command, ++ otherwise Kermit writes to the command. ++ Returns 0 on error, 1 on success. ++ ++ int ++ zxpand(fn) char *fn; ++ OBSOLETE: Replaced by nzxpand(), q.v. ++ ++ #ifdef ZXREWIND ++ int ++ zxrewind() ++ Returns the number of files returned by the most recent ++ nzxpand() call, and resets the list to the beginning so the ++ next znext() call returns the first file. Returns -1 if zxpand ++ has not yet been called. If this function is available, ++ ZXREWIND should be defined; otherwise it should not be ++ referenced. ++ ++ #endif /* ZXREWIND */ ++ ++ int ++ xsystem(cmd) char *cmd; ++ Executes the system command without redirecting any of its i/o, ++ similar (well, identical) to system() in Unix. But before ++ passing the command to the system, xsystem() ensures that all ++ privileges are turned off, so that the system command executes ++ in ordinary unprivileged user mode. If possible, xsystem() ++ returns the return code of the command that was executed. ++ ++ 4.E.2.2. IKSD Variables and Functions ++ ++ These must be implemented in any C-Kermit version that is to be ++ installed as an Internet Kermit Service Daemon (IKSD). IKSD is ++ expected to be started by the Internet Daemon (e.g. inetd) with its ++ standard i/o redirected to the incoming connection. ++ ++ int ckxanon; ++ Nonzero if anonymous logins allowed. ++ ++ extern int inserver; ++ Nonzero if started in IKSD mode. ++ ++ extern int isguest; ++ Nonzero if IKSD and user logged in anonymously. ++ ++ extern char * homdir; ++ Pointer to user's home directory. ++ ++ extern char * anonroot; ++ Pointer to file-system root for anonymous users. ++ ++ Existing functions must make "if (inserver && isguest)" checks for ++ actions that would not be legal for guests: zdelete(), zrmdir(), ++ zprint(), zmail(), etc. ++ ++ int ++ zvuser(name) char * name; ++ Verifies that user "name" exists and is allowed to log in. If ++ the name is "ftp" or "anonymous" and ckxanon != 0, a guest ++ login is set up. Returns 0 if user not allowed to log in, ++ nonzero if user may log in. ++ ++ int ++ zvpass(string) char * string; ++ Verifies password of the user from the most recent zvuser() ++ call. Returns nonzero if password is valid for user, 0 if it ++ isn't. Makes any appropriate system log entries (IKSD logins, ++ failed login attempts, etc). If password is valid, logs the ++ user in as herself (if real user), or sets up restricted ++ anonymous access if user is guest (e.g. changes file-system ++ root to anonroot and sets isguest = 1). ++ ++ VOID ++ zsyslog() ++ Begins any desired system logging of an IKSD session. ++ ++ VOID ++ zvlogout() ++ Terminates an IKSD session. In most cases this is simply a ++ wrapper for exit() or doexit(), with some system logging added. ++ ++ 4.E.2.3. Privilege Functions ++ ++ These functions are used by C-Kermit to adapt itself to operating ++ systems where the program can be made to run in a "privileged" mode, ++ e.g. setuid or setgid in Unix. C-Kermit should NOT read and write ++ files or start subprocesses as a privileged program. This would ++ present a serious threat to system security. The security package has ++ been installed to prevent such security breaches by turning off the ++ program's special privileges at all times except when they are needed. ++ ++ In UNIX, the only need Kermit has for privileged status is access to ++ the UUCP lockfile directory, in order to read, create, and destroy ++ lockfiles, and to open communication devices that are normally ++ protected against the user (see the [111]Unix C-Kermit Installation ++ Instructions for discussion). Therefore, privileges should only be ++ enabled for these operations and disabled at all other times. This ++ relieves the programmer of the responsibility of putting expensive and ++ unreliable access checks around every file access and subprocess ++ creation. ++ ++ Strictly speaking, these functions are not required in all C-Kermit ++ implementations, because their use (so far, at least) is internal to ++ the Group E modules. However, they should be included in all C-Kermit ++ implementations for operating systems that support the notion of a ++ privileged program (UNIX, RSTS/E, what others?). ++ ++ int ++ priv_ini() ++ Determine whether the program is running in privileged status. ++ If so, turn off the privileges, in such a way that they can be ++ turned on again when needed. Called from sysinit() at program ++ startup time. Returns: ++ 0 on success ++ nonzero on failure, in which case the program should halt ++ immediately. ++ ++ int ++ priv_on() ++ If the program is not privileged, this function does nothing. ++ If the program is privileged, this function returns it to ++ privileged status. priv_ini() must have been called first. ++ Returns: ++ 0 on success ++ nonzero on failure ++ ++ int ++ priv_off() ++ Turns privileges off (if they are on) in such a way that they ++ can be turned back on again. Returns: ++ 0 on success ++ nonzero on failure ++ ++ int ++ priv_can() ++ Turns privileges off in such a way that they cannot be turned ++ back on. Returns: ++ 0 on success ++ nonzero on failure ++ ++ int ++ priv_chk() ++ Attempts to turns privileges off in such a way that they can be ++ turned on again later. Then checks to make sure that they were ++ really turned off. If they were not really turned off, then ++ they are cancelled permanently. Returns: ++ 0 on success ++ nonzero on failure ++ ++ 4.E.2.4. Console-Related Functions ++ ++ These relate to the program's "console", or controlling terminal, i.e. ++ the terminal that the user is logged in on and types commands at, or ++ on a PC or workstation, the actual keyboard and screen. ++ ++ int ++ conbin(esc) char esc; ++ Puts the console into "binary" mode, so that Kermit's command ++ parser can control echoing and other treatment of characters ++ that the user types. esc is the character that will be used to ++ get Kermit's attention during packet mode; puts this in a ++ global place. Sets the ckxech variable. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ concb(esc) char esc; ++ Put console in "cbreak" (single-character wakeup) mode. That ++ is, ensure that each console character is available to the ++ program immediately when the user types it. Otherwise just like ++ conbin(). Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ conchk() ++ Returns a number, 0 or greater, the number of characters ++ waiting to be read from the console, i.e. the number of ++ characters that the user has typed that have not been read yet ++ by Kermit. ++ ++ long ++ congspd(); ++ Returns the speed ("baud rate") of the controlling terminal, if ++ known, otherwise -1L. ++ ++ int ++ congks(timo) int timo; ++ Get Keyboard Scancode. Reads a keyboard scan code from the ++ physical console keyboard. If the timo parameter is greater ++ than zero, then times out and returns -2 if no character ++ appears within the given number of seconds. Upon any other kind ++ of error, returns -1. Upon success returns a scan code, which ++ may be any positive integer. For situations where scan codes ++ cannot be read (for example, when an ASCII terminal is used as ++ the job's controlling terminal), this function is identical to ++ coninc(), i.e. it returns an 8-bit character value. congks() is ++ for use with workstations whose keyboards have Alternate, ++ Command, Option, and similar modifier keys, and Function keys ++ that generate codes greater than 255. ++ ++ int ++ congm() ++ Console get modes. Gets the current console terminal modes and ++ saves them so that conres() can restore them later. Returns 1 ++ if it got the modes OK, 0 if it did nothing (e.g. because ++ Kermit is not connected with any terminal), -1 on error. ++ ++ int ++ coninc(timo) int timo; ++ Console Input Character. Reads a character from the console. If ++ the timo parameter is greater than zero, then coninc() times ++ out and returns -2 if no character appears within the given ++ number of seconds. Upon any other kind of error, returns -1. ++ Upon success, returns the character itself, with a value in the ++ range 0-255 decimal. ++ ++ VOID ++ conint(f,s) SIGTYP (*f)(), (*s)(); ++ Sets the console to generate an interrupt if the user types a ++ keyboard interrupt character, and to transfer control the ++ signal-handling function f. For systems with job control, s is ++ the address of the function that suspends the job. Sets the ++ global variable "backgrd" to zero if Kermit is running in the ++ foreground, and to nonzero if Kermit is running in the ++ background. See ckcdeb.h for the definition of SIGTYP. No ++ return value. ++ ++ VOID ++ connoi() ++ Console no interrupts. Disable keyboard interrupts on the ++ console. No return value. ++ ++ int ++ conoc(c) char c; ++ Writes character c to the console terminal. Returns: ++ 0 on failure, 1 on success. ++ ++ int ++ conol(s) char *s; ++ Writes string s to the console. Returns -1 on error, 0 or ++ greater on success. ++ ++ int ++ conola(s) char *s[]; { ++ Writes an array of strings to the console. Returns -1 on error, ++ 0 or greater on success. ++ ++ int ++ conoll(s) char *s; ++ Writes string s to the console, followed by the necessary line ++ termination characters to put the console cursor at the ++ beginning of the next line. Returns -1 on error, 0 or greater ++ on success. ++ ++ int ++ conres() ++ Restores the console terminal to the modes obtained by congm(). ++ Returns: -1 on error, 0 on success. ++ ++ int ++ conxo(x,s) int x; char *s; ++ Write x characters from string s to the console. Returns 0 or ++ greater on success, -1 on error. ++ ++ char * ++ conkbg(); ++ Returns a pointer to the designator of the console keyboard ++ type. For example, on a PC, this function would return "88", ++ "101", etc. Upon failure, returns a pointer to the empty ++ string. ++ ++ 4.E.2.5. Communications Functions ++ ++ The communication device is the device used for terminal emulation and ++ file transfer. It may or may not be the same device as the console, ++ and it may or may not be a terminal (serial-port) device; it could ++ also be a network connection. For brevity, the communication device is ++ referred to here as the "tty". When the communication device is the ++ same as the console device, Kermit is said to be in remote mode. When ++ the two devices are different, Kermit is in local mode. ++ ++ int ++ ttchk() ++ Returns the number of characters that have arrived at the ++ communication device but have not yet been read by ttinc(), ++ ttinl(), and friends. If communication input is buffered (and ++ it should be), this is the sum of the number of unread ++ characters in Kermit's buffer PLUS the number of unread ++ characters in the operating system's internal buffer. The call ++ must be nondestructive and nonblocking, and as inexpensive as ++ possible. Returns: ++ 0: or greater on success, ++ 0: in case of internal error, ++ -1: or less when it determines the connection has been broken, ++ or there is no connection. ++ ++ That is, a negative return from ttchk() should reliably ++ indicate that there is no usable connection. Furthermore, ++ ttchk() should be callable at any time to see if the connection ++ is open. When the connection is open, every effort must be made ++ to ensure that ttchk returns an accurate number of characters ++ waiting to be read, rather than just 0 (no characters) or 1 (1 ++ or more characters), as would be the case when we use select(). ++ This aspect of ttchk's operation is critical to successful ++ operation of sliding windows and streaming, but "nondestructive ++ buffer peeking" is an obscure operating system feature, and so ++ when it is not available, we have to do it ourselves by ++ managing our own internal buffer at a level below ttinc(), ++ ttinl(), etc, as in the UNIX version (non-FIONREAD case). ++ ++ An external global variable, clsondisc, if nonzero, means that ++ if a serial connection drops (carrier on-to-off transition ++ detected by ttchk()), the device should be closed and released ++ automatically. ++ ++ int ++ ttclos() ++ Closes the communication device (tty or network). If there were ++ any kind of exclusive access locks connected with the tty, ++ these are released. If the tty has a modem connection, it is ++ hung up. For true tty devices, the original tty device modes ++ are restored. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttflui() ++ Flush communications input buffer. If any characters have ++ arrived but have not yet been read, discard these characters. ++ If communications input is buffered by Kermit (and it should ++ be), this function flushes Kermit's buffer as well as the ++ operating system's internal input buffer. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttfluo() ++ Flush tty output buffer. If any characters have been written ++ but not actually transmitted (e.g. because the system has been ++ flow-controlled), remove them from the system's output buffer. ++ (Note, this function is not actually used, but it is ++ recommended that all C-Kermit programmers add it for future ++ use, even if it is only a dummy function that returns 0 ++ always.) ++ ++ int ++ ttgmdm() ++ Looks for the modem signals CTS, DSR, and CTS, and returns ++ those that are on in as its return value, in a bit mask as ++ described for ttwmdm, in which a bit is on (1) or off (0) ++ according to whether the corresponding signal is on (asserted) ++ or off (not asserted). Return values: ++ -3: Not implemented ++ -2: if the line does not have modem control ++ -1: on error ++ >=0: on success, with bit mask containing the modem signals. ++ ++ long ++ ttgspd() ++ Returns the current tty speed in BITS (not CHARACTERS) per ++ second, or -1 if it is not known or if the tty is really a ++ network, or upon any kind of error. On success, the speed ++ returned is the actual number of bits per second, like 1200, ++ 9600, 19200, etc. ++ ++ int ++ ttgwsiz() ++ Get terminal window size. Returns -1 on error, 0 if the window ++ size can't be obtained, 1 if the window size has been ++ successfully obtained. Upon success, the external global ++ variables tt_rows and tt_cols are set to the number of screen ++ rows and number of screen columns, respectively. As this ++ function is not implemented in all ck*tio.c modules, calls to ++ it must be wrapped in #ifdef CK_TTGWSIZ..#endif. NOTE: This ++ function must be available to use the TELNET NAWS feature ++ (Negotiate About Window Size) as well as Rlogin. ++ ++ int ++ tthang() ++ Hang up the current tty device. For real tty devices, turn off ++ DTR for about 1/3-1/2 second (or other length of time, ++ depending on the system). If the tty is really a network ++ connection, close it. Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: if it does not even try to hang up. ++ 1: if it believes it hung up successfully. ++ ++ VOID ++ ttimoff() ++ Turns off all pending timer interrupts. ++ ++ int ++ ttinc(timo) int timo; (function is old, return codes are new) ++ Reads one character from the communication device. If timo is ++ greater than zero, wait the given number of seconds and then ++ time out if no character arrives, otherwise wait forever for a ++ character. Returns: ++ -3: internal error (e.g. tty modes set wrong) ++ -2: communications disconnect ++ -1: timeout or other error ++ >=0: the character that was read. ++ It is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that ttinc() be internally buffered so ++ that calls to it are relatively inexpensive. If it is possible ++ to to implement ttinc() as a macro, all the better, for example ++ something like: ++ ++ #define ttinc(t) ( (--txbufn >= 0) ? txbuf[ttbufp++] : txbufr(t) ) ++ ++ (see description of txbufr() below) ++ ++ int ++ ttinl(dest,max,timo,eol,start,turn) int max,timo,turn; CHAR ++ *dest, eol, start; ++ ttinl() is Kermit's packet reader. Reads a packet from the ++ communications device, or up to max characters, whichever ++ occurs first. A line is a string of characters starting with ++ the start character up to and including the character given in ++ eol or until the length is exhausted, or, if turn != 0, until ++ the line turnaround character (turn) is read. If turn is 0, ++ ttinl() *should* use the packet length field to detect the end, ++ to allow for the possibility that the eol character appears ++ unprefixed in the packet data. (The turnaround character is for ++ half-duplex linemode connections.) ++ ++ If timo is greater than zero, ttinl() times out if the eol ++ character is not encountered within the given number of seconds ++ and returns -1. ++ ++ The characters that were input are copied into "dest" with ++ their parity bits stripped if parity is not none. The first ++ character copied into dest should be the start character, and ++ the last should be the final character of the packet (the last ++ block check character). ttinl() should also absorb and discard ++ the eol and turn characters, and any other characters that are ++ waiting to be read, up until the next start character, so that ++ subsequent calls to ttchk() will not succeed simply because ++ there are some terminators still sitting in the buffer that ++ ttinl() didn't read. This operation, if performed, MUST NOT ++ BLOCK (so if it can't be performed in a guaranteed nonblocking ++ way, don't do it). ++ ++ On success, ttinl() returns the number of characters read. ++ Optionally, ttinl() can sense the parity of incoming packets. ++ If it does this, then it should set the global variable ttprty ++ accordingly. ttinl() should be coded to be as efficient as ++ possible, since it is at the "inner loop" of packet reception. ++ ttinl() returns: ++ -1: Timeout or other possibly correctable error. ++ -2: Interrupted from keyboard. ++ -3: Uncorrectable i/o error -- connection lost, configuration ++ problem, etc. ++ >=0: on success, the number of characters that were actually ++ read and placed in the dest buffer, not counting the trailing ++ null. ++ ++ int ++ ttoc(c) char c; ++ Outputs the character c to the communication line. If the ++ operation fails to complete within two seconds, this function ++ returns -1. Otherwise it returns the number of characters ++ actually written to the tty (0 or 1). This function should only ++ be used for interactive, character-mode operations, like ++ terminal connection, script execution, dialer i/o, where the ++ overhead of the signals and alarms does not create a ++ bottleneck. (THIS DESCRIPTION NEEDS IMPROVEMENT -- If the ++ operation fails within a "certain amount of time"... which ++ might be dependent on the communication method, speed, etc. In ++ particular, flow-control deadlocks must be accounted for and ++ broken out of to prevent the program from hanging indefinitely, ++ etc.) ++ ++ int ++ ttol(s,n) int n; char *s; ++ Kermit's packet writer. Writes the n characters of the string ++ pointed to to by s. NOTE: It is ttol's responsibility to write ++ ALL of the characters, not just some of them. Returns: ++ -1: on a possibly correctable error (so it can be retried). ++ -3: on a fatal error, e.g. connection lost. ++ >=0: on success, the actual number of characters written (the ++ specific number is not actually used for anything). ++ ++ int ++ ttopen(ttname,lcl,modem,timo) char *ttname; int *lcl, modem, ++ timo; ++ Opens a tty device, if it is not already open. ttopen must ++ check to make sure the SAME device is not already open; if it ++ is, ttopen returns successfully without doing anything. If a ++ DIFFERENT device is currently open, ttopen() must call ttclos() ++ to close it before opening the new one. ++ ++ Parameters: ++ ++ ttname: ++ character string - device name or network host ++ name. ++ ++ lcl: ++ If called with lcl < 0, sets value of lcl as ++ follows: ++ 0: the terminal named by ttname is the job's ++ controlling terminal. ++ 1: the terminal named by ttname is not the job's ++ controlling terminal. ++ If the device is already open, or if the requested ++ device can't be opened, then lcl remains (and is ++ returned as) -1. ++ ++ modem: ++ Less than zero: this is the negative of the network ++ type, and ttname is a network host name. Network ++ types (from [112]ckcnet.h: ++ ++ NET_TCPB 1 TCP/IP Berkeley (socket) (implemented in [113]ckutio.c) ++ NET_TCPA 2 TCP/IP AT&T (streams) (not yet implemented) ++ NET_DEC 3 DECnet (not yet implemented) ++ ++ Zero or greater: ttname is a terminal device name. ++ Zero means a direct connection (don't use modem ++ signals). Positive means use modem signals ++ depending on the current setting of ttcarr (see ++ ttscarr()). ++ ++ timo: ++ > 0: number of seconds to wait for open() to return ++ before timing out. ++ <=0: no timer, wait forever (e.g. for incoming ++ call). ++ For real tty devices, ttopen() attempts to gain ++ exclusive access to the tty device, for example in ++ UNIX by creating a "lockfile" (in other operating ++ systems, like VMS, exclusive access probably ++ requires no special action). ++ ++ Side effects: ++ Copies its arguments and the tty file descriptor to ++ global variables that are available to the other ++ tty-related functions, with the lcl value altered as ++ described above. Gets all parameters and settings ++ associated with the line and puts them in a global area, ++ so that they can be restored by ttres(), e.g. when the ++ device is closed. ++ ++ Returns: ++ 0: on success ++ -5: if device is in use ++ -4: if access to device is denied ++ -3: if access to lock mechanism denied ++ -2: upon timeout waiting for device to open ++ -1: on other error ++ ++ int ++ ttpkt(speed,flow,parity) long speed; int flow, parity; ++ Puts the currently open tty device into the appropriate modes ++ for transmitting and receiving Kermit packets. ++ ++ Arguments: ++ ++ speed: ++ if speed > -1, and the device is a true tty device, ++ and Kermit is in local mode, ttpkt also sets the ++ speed. ++ ++ flow: ++ if in the range 0-3, ttpkt selects the ++ corresponding type of flow control. Currently 0 is ++ defined as no flow control, 1 is Xon/Xoff, and no ++ other types are defined. If (and this is a horrible ++ hack, but it goes back many years and will be hard ++ to eradicate) flow is 4, then the appropriate tty ++ modes are set for modem dialing, a special case in ++ which we talk to a modem-controlled line without ++ requiring carrier. If flow is 5, then we require ++ carrier. ++ ++ parity: ++ This is simply copied into a global variable so ++ that other functions (like ttinl, ttinc, etc) can ++ use it. ++ ++ Side effects: ++ Copies its arguments to global variables, flushes the ++ terminal device input buffer. ++ ++ Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttsetflow(int) ++ Enables the given type of flow control on the open serial ++ communications device immediately. Arguments are the FLO_xxx ++ values from ckcdeb.h, except FLO_DIAL, FLO_DIAX, or FLO_AUTO, ++ which are not actual flow-control types. Returns 0 on success, ++ -1 on failure. ++ ++ #ifdef TTSPDLIST ++ long * ++ ttspdlist() ++ Returns a pointer to an array of longs, or NULL on failure. On ++ success, element 0 of the array contains number, n, indicating ++ how many follow. Elements 1-n are serial speeds, expressed in ++ bits per second, that are legal on this platform. The user ++ interface may use this list to construct a menu, keyword table, ++ etc. ++ ++ #endif /* TTSPDLIST */ ++ ++ int ++ ttres() ++ Restores the tty device to the modes and settings that were in ++ effect at the time it was opened (see ttopen). Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttruncmd(string) char * string; ++ Runs the given command on the local system, but redirects its ++ input and output to the communication (SET LINE, SET PORT, or ++ SET HOST) device. Returns: ++ 0: on failure. ++ 1: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttscarr(carrier) int carrier; ++ Copies its argument to a variable that is global to the other ++ tty-related functions, and then returns it. The values for ++ carrier are defined in ckcdeb.h: CAR_ON, CAR_OFF, CAR_AUTO. ++ ttopen(), ttpkt(), and ttvt() use this variable when deciding ++ how to open the tty device and what modes to select. The ++ meanings are these: ++ ++ CAR_OFF: Ignore carrier at all times. ++ CAR_ON: Require carrier at all times, except when dialing. This means, ++ for example, that ttopen() could hang forever waiting for carrier if ++ it is not present. ++ CAR_AUTO: If the modem type is zero (i.e. the connection is direct), ++ this is the same as CAR_OFF. If the modem type is positive, then heed ++ carrier during CONNECT (ttvt mode), but ignore it at other times ++ (packet mode, during SET LINE, etc). Compatible with pre-5A versions ++ of C-Kermit. This should be the default carrier mode. ++ ++ Kermit's DIAL command ignores the carrier setting, but ++ ttopen(), ttvt(), and ttpkt() all honor the carrier option in ++ effect at the time they are called. None of this applies to ++ remote mode (the tty device is the job's controlling terminal) ++ or to network host connections (modem type is negative). ++ ++ int ++ ttsndb() ++ Sends a BREAK signal on the tty device. On a real tty device, ++ send a real BREAK lasting approximately 275 milliseconds. If ++ this is not possible, simulate a BREAK by (for example) ++ dropping down some very low baud rate, like 50, and sending a ++ bunch of null characters. On a network connection, do the ++ appropriate network protocol for BREAK. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ ttsndlb() ++ Like ttsndb(), but sends a "Long BREAK" (approx 1.5 seconds). ++ For network connections, it is identical to ttsndb(). ++ Currently, this function is used only if CK_LBRK is defined (as ++ it is for UNIX and VMS). ++ ++ int ++ ttsspd(cps) int cps; ++ For serial devices only, set the device transmission speed to ++ (note carefully) TEN TIMES the argument. The argument is in ++ characters per second, but transmission speeds are in bits per ++ second. cps are used rather than bps because high speeds like ++ 38400 are not expressible in a 16-bit int but longs cannot be ++ used because keyword-table values are ints and not longs. If ++ the argument is 7, then the bps is 75, not 70. If the argument ++ is 888, this is a special code for 75/1200 split-speed ++ operation (75 bps out, 1200 bps in). Returns: ++ -1: on error, meaning the requested speed is not valid or ++ available. ++ >=0: on success (don't try to use this value for anything). ++ ++ int ++ ttvt(speed,flow) long speed; int flow; ++ Puts the currently open tty device into the appropriate modes ++ for terminal emulation. The arguments are interpreted as in ++ ttpkt(). Side effects: ttvt() stores its arguments in global ++ variables, and sets a flag that it has been called so that ++ subsequent calls can be ignored so long as the arguments are ++ the same as in the last effective call. Other functions, such ++ as ttopen(), ttclose(), ttres(), ttvt(), etc, that change the ++ tty device in any way must unset this flag. In UNIX Kermit, ++ this flag is called tvtflg. ++ ++ int ++ ttwmdm(mdmsig,timo) int mdmsig, timo; ++ Waits up to timo seconds for all of the given modem signals to ++ appear. mdmsig is a bit mask, in which a bit is on (1) or off ++ (0) according to whether the corresponding signal is to be ++ waited for. These symbols are defined in ckcdeb.h: ++ BM_CTS (bit 0) means wait for Clear To Send ++ BM_DSR (bit 1) means wait for Data Set Ready ++ BM_DCD (bit 2) means wait for Carrier Detect ++ Returns: ++ -3: Not implemented. ++ -2: This line does not have modem control. ++ -1: Timeout: time limit exceeded before all signals were ++ detected. ++ 1: Success. ++ ++ int ++ ttxin(n,buf) int n; CHAR *buf; ++ Reads x characters from the tty device into the specified buf, ++ stripping parity if parity is not none. This call waits ++ forever, there is no timeout. This function is designed to be ++ called only when you know that at least x characters are ++ waiting to be read (as determined, for example, by ttchk()). ++ This function should use the same buffer as ttinc(). ++ ++ int ++ txbufr(timo) int timo; ++ Reads characters into the internal communications input buffer. ++ timo is a timeout interval, in seconds. 0 means no timeout, ++ wait forever. Called by ttinc() (and possibly ttxin() and ++ ttinl()) when the communications input buffer is empty. The ++ buffer should be called ttxbuf[], its length is defined by the ++ symbol TXBUFL. The global variable txbufn is the number of ++ characters available to be read from ttxbuf[], and txbufp is ++ the index of the next character to be read. Should not be ++ called if txbufn > 0, in which case the buffer does not need ++ refilling. This routine returns: ++ -2: Communications disconnect ++ -1: Timeout ++ >=0: A character (0 - 255) On success, the first character that ++ was read, with the variables txbufn and txbufp set ++ appropriately for any remaining characters. ++ NOTE: Currently this routine is used internally only by the ++ UNIX and VMS versions. The aim is to make it available to all ++ versions so there is one single coherent and efficient way of ++ reading from the communications device or network. ++ ++ 4.E.2.6. Miscellaneous system-dependent functions ++ ++ VOID ++ ztime(s) char **s; ++ Returns a pointer, s, to the current date-and-time string in s. ++ This string must be in the fixed-field format associated with ++ the C runtime asctime() function, like: "Sun Sep 16 13:23:45 ++ 1973\n" so that callers of this function can extract the ++ different fields. The pointer value is filled in by ztime, and ++ the data it points to is not safe, so should be copied to a ++ safe place before use. ztime() has no return value. As a side ++ effect, this routine can also fill in the following two ++ external variables (which must be defined in the ++ system-dependendent modules for each platform): ++ long ztusec: Fraction of seconds of clock time, microseconds. ++ long ztmsec: Fraction of seconds of clock time, milliseconds. ++ If these variables are not set by zstime(), they remain at ++ their initial value of -1L. ++ ++ int ++ gtimer() ++ Returns the current value of the elapsed time counter in ++ seconds (see rtimer), or 0 on any kind of error. ++ ++ #ifdef GFTIMER ++ CKFLOAT ++ gftimer() ++ Returns the current value of the elapsed time counter in ++ seconds, as a floating point number, capable of representing ++ not only whole seconds, but also the fractional part, to the ++ millisecond or microsecond level, whatever precision is ++ available. Requires a function to get times at subsecond ++ precision, as well as floating-point support. That's why it's ++ #ifdef'd. ++ ++ #endif /* GFTIMER */ ++ ++ int ++ msleep(m) int m; ++ Sleeps (pauses, does nothing) for m milliseconds (a millisecond ++ is one thousandth of a second). Returns: ++ -1: on failure. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ VOID ++ rtimer() ++ Sets the elapsed time counter to zero. If you want to time how ++ long an operation takes, call rtimer() when it starts and ++ gtimer when it ends. rtimer() has no return value. ++ ++ #ifdef GFTIMER ++ VOID ++ rftimer() ++ Sets the elapsed time counter to zero. If you want to time how ++ long an operation takes, call rftimer() when it starts and ++ gftimer when it ends. rftimer() has no return value. Note: ++ rftimer() is to be used with gftimer() and rtimer() is to be ++ used with gtimer(). See the rftimer() description. ++ ++ #endif /* GFTIMER */ ++ ++ int ++ sysinit() ++ Does whatever needs doing upon program start. In particular, if ++ the program is running in any kind of privileged mode, turns ++ off the privileges (see priv_ini()). Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ syscleanup() ++ Does whatever needs doing upon program exit. Returns: ++ -1: on error. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ int ++ psuspend() ++ Suspends the Kermit process, puts it in the background so it ++ can be continued ("foregrounded") later. Returns: ++ -1: if this function is not supported. ++ 0: on success. ++ ++ [ [114]Contents ] [ [115]C-Kermit ] [ [116]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F. Group F: Network Support ++ ++ As of version 5A, C-Kermit includes support for several networks. ++ Originally, this was just worked into the ttopen(), ttclos(), ttinc(), ++ ttinl(), and similar routines in [117]ckutio.c. But this made it ++ impossible to share this code with non-UNIX versions, like VMS, ++ AOS/VS, OS/2, etc. So as of edit 168, network code has been separated ++ out into its own module and header file, ckcnet.c and ckcnet.h: ++ ++ [118]ckcnet.h: Network-related symbol definitions. ++ [119]ckcnet.c: Network i/o (TCP/IP, X.25, etc), shared by most ++ platforms. ++ [120]cklnet.c: Network i/o (TCP/IP, X.25, etc) specific to Stratus ++ VOS. ++ ++ The routines and variables in these modules fall into two categories: ++ ++ 1. Support for specific network packages like SunLink X.25 and TGV ++ MultiNet, and: ++ 2. support for specific network virtual terminal protocols like CCITT ++ X.3 and TCP/IP Telnet. ++ ++ Category (1) functions are analogs to the tt*() functions, and have ++ names like netopen, netclos, nettinc, etc. Group A-D modules do not ++ (and must not) know anything about these functions -- they continue to ++ call the old Group E functions (ttopen, ttinc, etc). Category (2) ++ functions are protocol specific and have names prefixed by a protocol ++ identifier, like tn for telnet x25 for X.25. ++ ++ ckcnet.h contains prototypes for all these functions, as well as ++ symbol definitions for network types, protocols, and network- and ++ protocol- specific symbols, as well as #includes for the header files ++ necessary for each network and protocol. ++ ++ The following functions are to be provided for networks that do not ++ use normal system i/o (open, read, write, close): ++ ++ int ++ netopen() ++ To be called from within ttopen() when a network connection is ++ requested. Calling conventions and purpose same as Group E ++ ttopen(). ++ ++ int ++ netclos() ++ To be called from within ttclos() when a network connection is ++ being closed. Calling conventions and purpose same as Group E ++ ttclos(). ++ ++ int ++ nettchk() ++ To be called from within ttchk(). Calling conventions and ++ purpose same as Group E ttchk(). ++ ++ int ++ netflui() ++ To be called from within ttflui(). Calling conventions and ++ purpose same as Group E ttflui(). ++ ++ int ++ netbreak() ++ To send a network break (attention) signal. Calling conventions ++ and purpose same as Group E ttsndbrk(). ++ ++ int ++ netinc() ++ To get a character from the network. Calling conventions same ++ as Group E ttsndbrk(). ++ ++ int ++ nettoc() ++ Send a "character" (byte) to the network. Calling conventions ++ same as Group E ttoc(). ++ ++ int ++ nettol() ++ Send a "line" (sequence of bytes) to the network. Calling ++ conventions same as Group E ttol(). ++ ++ Conceivably, some systems support network connections simply by ++ letting you open a device of a certain name and letting you do i/o to ++ it. Others (like the Berkeley sockets TCP/IP library on UNIX) require ++ you to open the connection in a special way, but then do normal i/o ++ (read, write). In such a case, you would use netopen(), but you would ++ not use nettinc, nettoc, etc. ++ ++ VMS TCP/IP products have their own set of functions for all network ++ operations, so in that case the full range of netxxx() functions is ++ used. ++ ++ The technique is to put a test in each corresponding ttxxx() function ++ to see if a network connection is active (or is being requested), test ++ for which kind of network it is, and if necessary route the call to ++ the corresponding netxxx() function. The netxxx() function must also ++ contain code to test for the network type, which is available via the ++ global variable ttnet. ++ ++ [ [121]Contents ] [ [122]C-Kermit ] [ [123]Kermit Home ] ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F.1. Telnet Protocol ++ ++ (This section needs a great deal of updating...) ++ ++ As of edit 195, Telnet protocol is split out into its own files, since ++ it can be implemented in remote mode, which does not have a network ++ connection: ++ ++ [124]ckctel.h: Telnet protocol symbol definitions. ++ [125]ckctel.c: Telnet protocol. ++ ++ The Telnet protocol is supported by the following variables and ++ routines: ++ ++ int tn_init ++ Nonzero if telnet protocol initialized, zero otherwise. ++ ++ int ++ tn_init() ++ Initialize the telnet protocol (send initial options). ++ ++ int ++ tn_sopt() ++ Send a telnet option. ++ ++ int ++ tn_doop() ++ Receive and act on a telnet option from the remote. ++ ++ int ++ tn_sttyp() ++ Send terminal type using telnet protocol. ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F.2. FTP Protocol ++ ++ (To be filled in...) ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F.3. HTTP Protocol ++ ++ (To be filled in...) ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F.4. X.25 Networks ++ ++ These routines were written SunLink X.25 and have since been adapted ++ to at least on one other: IBM AIXLink/X.25. ++ ++ int ++ x25diag() ++ Reads and prints X.25 diagnostics ++ ++ int ++ x25oobh() ++ X.25 out of band signal handler ++ ++ int ++ x25intr() ++ Sends X.25 interrupt packet ++ ++ int ++ x25reset() ++ Resets X.25 virtual circuit ++ ++ int ++ x25clear() ++ Clear X.25 virtual circuit ++ ++ int ++ x25stat() ++ X.25 status ++ ++ int ++ setqbit() ++ Sets X.25 Q-bit ++ ++ int ++ resetqbit() ++ Resets X.25 Q-bit ++ ++ int ++ x25xin() ++ Reads n characters from X.25 circuit. ++ ++ int ++ x25inl() ++ Read a Kermit packet from X.25 circuit. ++ ++ [ [126]Contents ] [ [127]C-Kermit ] [ [128]Kermit Home ] ++ ______________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.F.5. Adding New Network Types ++ ++ Example: Adding support for IBM X.25 and Hewlett Packard X.25. First, ++ add new network type symbols for each one. There are already some ++ network types defined for other X.25 packages: ++ ++ NET_SX25 is the network-type ID for SunLink X.25. ++ NET_VX25 is the network-type ID for VOS X.25. ++ ++ So first you should new symbols for the new network types, giving them ++ the next numbers in the sequence, e.g.: ++ ++#define NET_HX25 11 /* Hewlett-Packard X.25 */ ++#define NET_IX25 12 /* IBM X.25 */ ++ ++ This is in ckcnet.h. ++ ++ Then we need symbols to say that we are actually compiling in the code ++ for these platforms. These would be defined on the cc command line: ++ ++ -DIBMX25 (for IBM) ++ -DHPX25 (for HP) ++ ++ So we can build C-Kermit versions for AIX and HP-UX both with and ++ without X.25 support (since not all AIX and IBM systems have the ++ needed libraries, and so an executable that was linked with them might ++ no load). ++ ++ Then in ckcnet.h: ++ ++#ifdef IBMX25 ++#define ANYX25 ++#endif /* IBMX25 */ ++ ++#ifdef HPX25 ++#define ANYX25 ++#endif /* HPX25 */ ++ ++ And then use ANYX25 for code that is common to all of them, and IBMX25 ++ or HPX25 for code specific to IBM or HP. ++ ++ It might also happen that some code can be shared between two or more ++ of these, but not the others. Suppose, for example, that you write ++ code that applies to both IBM and HP, but not Sun or VOS X.25. Then ++ you add the following definition to ckcnet.h: ++ ++#ifndef HPORIBMX25 ++#ifdef HPX25 ++#define HPORIBMX25 ++#else ++#ifdef IBMX25 ++#define HPORIBMX25 ++#endif /* IBMX25 */ ++#endif /* HPX25 */ ++#endif /* HPORIBMX25 */ ++ ++ You can NOT use constructions like "#if defined (HPX25 || IBMX25)"; ++ they are not portable. ++ ++ [ [129]Contents ] [ [130]C-Kermit ] [ [131]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.G. Group G: Formatted Screen Support ++ ++ So far, this is used only for the fullscreen local-mode file transfer ++ display. In the future, it might be extended to other uses. The ++ fullscreen display code is in and around the routine screenc() in ++ [132]ckuusx.c. ++ ++ In the UNIX version, we use the curses library, plus one call from the ++ termcap library. In other versions (OS/2, VMS, etc) we insert dummy ++ routines that have the same names as curses routines. So far, there ++ are two methods for simulating curses routines: ++ ++ 1. In VMS, we use the Screen Management Library (SMG), and insert ++ stubs to convert curses calls into SMG calls. ++ 2. In OS/2, we use the MYCURSES code, in which the stub routines ++ actually emit the appropriate escape sequences themselves. ++ ++ Here are the stub routines: ++ ++ int ++ tgetent(char *buf, char *term) ++ Arguments are ignored. Returns 1 if the user has a supported ++ terminal type, 0 otherwise. Sets a global variable (for ++ example, "isvt52" or "isdasher") to indicate the terminal type. ++ ++ VOID ++ move(int row, int col) ++ Sends the escape sequence to position the cursor at the ++ indicated row and column. The numbers are 0-based, e.g. the ++ home position is 0,0. ++ ++ int ++ clear() ++ Sends the escape sequence to clear the screen. ++ ++ int ++ clrtoeol() ++ Sends the escape sequence to clear from the current cursor ++ position to the end of the line. ++ ++ In the MYCURSES case, code must be added to each of the last three ++ routines to emit the appropriate escape sequences for a new terminal ++ type. ++ ++ clearok(curscr), wrefresh() ++ In real curses, these two calls are required to refresh the ++ screen, for example after it was fractured by a broadcast ++ message. These are useful only if the underlying screen ++ management service keeps a copy of the entire screen, as curses ++ and SMG do. C-Kermit does not do this itself. ++ ++ [ [133]Contents ] [ [134]C-Kermit ] [ [135]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.H. Group H: Pseudoterminal Support ++ ++ (To be filled in...) ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ 4.I. Group I: Security ++ ++ (To be filled in...) ++ ++ [ [136]Contents ] [ [137]C-Kermit ] [ [138]Kermit Home ] ++ ________________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ APPENDIX I. FILE PERMISSIONS ++ ++ I.1. Format of System-Dependent File Permissions in A-Packets ++ ++ The format of this field (the "," attribute) is interpreted according ++ to the System ID ("." Attribute). ++ ++ For UNIX (System ID = U1), it's the familiar 3-digit octal number, the ++ low-order 9 bits of the filemode: Owner, Group, World, e.g. 660 = ++ read/write access for owner and group, none for world, recorded as a ++ 3-digit octal string. High-order UNIX permission bits are not ++ transmitted. ++ ++ For VMS (System ID = D7), it's a 4-digit hex string, representing the ++ 16-bit file protection WGOS fields (World,Group,Owner,System), in that ++ order (which is the reverse of how they're shown in a directory ++ listing); in each field, Bit 0 = Read, 1 = Write, 2 = Execute, 3 = ++ Delete. A bit value of 0 means permission is granted, 1 means ++ permission is denied. Sample: ++ ++ r-01-00-^A/!FWERMIT.EXE'" ++ s-01-00-^AE!Y/amd/watsun/w/fdc/new/wermit.exe.DV ++ r-02-01-^A]"A."D7""B8#119980101 18:14:05!#8531&872960,$A20B-!7(#512@ #.Y ++ s-02-01-^A%"Y.5! ++ ++ A VMS directory listing shows the file's protection as (E,RWED,RED,RE) ++ which really means (S=E,O=RWED,G=RED,W=RE), which is reverse order ++ from the internal storage, so (RE,RED,RWED,E). Now translate each ++ letter to its corresponding bit: ++ ++ RE=0101, RED=1101, RWED=1111, E=0010 ++ ++ Now reverse the bits: ++ ++ RE=1010, RED=0010, RWED=0000, E=1101 ++ ++ This gives the 16-bit quantity: ++ ++ 1010001000001101 ++ ++ This is the internal representation of the VMS file permission; in ++ hex: ++ ++ A20B ++ ++ as shown in the sample packet above. ++ ++ The VMS format probably would also apply to RSX or any other FILES-11 ++ system. ++ ++ I.2. Handling of Generic Protection ++ ++ To be used when the two systems are different (and/or do not recognize ++ or understand each other's local protection codes). ++ ++ First of all, the book is wrong. This should not be the World ++ protection, but the Owner protection. The other fields should be set ++ according to system defaults (e.g. UNIX umask, VMS default protection, ++ etc), except that no non-Owner field should give more permissions than ++ the Owner field. ++ ++ [ [139]Top ] [ [140]Contents ] [ [141]C-Kermit Home ] [ [142]Kermit ++ Home ] ++ _________________________________________________________________ ++ ++ ++ C-Kermit Program Logic Manual / [143]The Kermit Project / ++ [144]Columbia University / [145]kermit@columbia.edu / 10 April 2004 ++ ++References ++ ++ 1. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ ++ 2. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 3. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html ++ 4. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 5. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 6. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x1 ++ 7. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x2 ++ 8. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x3 ++ 9. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4 ++ 10. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.A ++ 11. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.B ++ 12. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.C ++ 13. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.D ++ 14. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.E ++ 15. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.F ++ 16. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.G ++ 17. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.H ++ 18. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.I ++ 19. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#xa1 ++ 20. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 21. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 22. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 23. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 24. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcpro.w ++ 25. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 26. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 27. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 28. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x3.2 ++ 29. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 30. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 31. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 32. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.A ++ 33. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 34. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 35. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 36. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 37. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 38. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 39. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 40. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 41. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 42. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckclib.h ++ 43. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckclib.c ++ 44. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x3.1 ++ 45. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 46. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 47. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 48. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcsym.h ++ 49. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcasc.h ++ 50. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcsig.h ++ 51. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcdeb.h ++ 52. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcker.h ++ 53. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcxla.h ++ 54. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcmai.c ++ 55. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcpro.w ++ 56. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcfns.c ++ 57. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcfn2.c ++ 58. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcfn3.c ++ 59. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.B ++ 60. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.E ++ 61. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.D ++ 62. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 63. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 64. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 65. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.B ++ 66. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuxla.c ++ 67. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuxla.h ++ 68. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcxla.h ++ 69. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuxla.h ++ 70. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckmxla.h ++ 71. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ck?xla ++ 72. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcuni.h ++ 73. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcuni.c ++ 74. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 75. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 76. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 77. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.B ++ 78. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucmd.h ++ 79. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucmd.c ++ 80. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.E ++ 81. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusr.h ++ 82. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusr.c ++ 83. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuus2.c ++ 84. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuus3.c ++ 85. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuus4.c ++ 86. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusy.c ++ 87. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusx.c ++ 88. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuver.h ++ 89. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuscr.c ++ 90. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckudia.c ++ 91. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucon.c ++ 92. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckucns.c ++ 93. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x4.E ++ 94. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcmai.c ++ 95. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 96. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 97. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 98. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckufio.c ++ 99. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 100. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckusig.c ++ 101. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckvfio.c ++ 102. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckusig.c ++ 103. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcmai.c ++ 104. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 105. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 106. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 107. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 108. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckvtio.c ++ 109. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#x2 ++ 110. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#xa1 ++ 111. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckuins.html ++ 112. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.h ++ 113. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 114. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 115. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 116. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 117. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckutio.c ++ 118. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.h ++ 119. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckcnet.c ++ 120. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/cklnet.c ++ 121. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 122. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 123. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 124. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckctel.h ++ 125. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckctel.c ++ 126. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 127. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 128. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 129. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 130. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 131. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 132. ftp://kermit.columbia.edu/kermit/c-kermit/ckuusx.c ++ 133. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 134. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 135. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 136. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 137. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 138. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 139. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#top ++ 140. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckcplm.html#contents ++ 141. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ 142. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 143. http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/index.html ++ 144. http://www.columbia.edu/ ++ 145. mailto:kermit@columbia.edu +--- /dev/null ++++ ckermit-212/ckaaaa.txt +@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@ ++ckaaaa.txt 10 Apr 2004 ++ ++ C-KERMIT VERSION 8.0.211 ++ OVERVIEW OF FILES ++ ++ Communications software for UNIX and (Open)VMS. ++ ++ And in former versions also for: ++ Stratus VOS, AOS/VS, QNX, ++ Plan 9, OS-9, Apollo Aegis, and the Commodore Amiga. ++ The Apple Macintosh, the Atari ST. ++ ++ The Kermit Project - Columbia University ++ ++ http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ - kermit@columbia.edu ++ ++ ++ Copyright (C) 1985, 2004, ++ Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York. ++ All rights reserved. See the C-Kermit COPYING.TXT file or the ++ copyright text in the ckcmai.c module for disclaimer and permissions. ++ ++ ++DOCUMENTATION ++ ++ C-Kermit is documented in the book "Using C-Kermit", Second Edition, by ++ Frank da Cruz and Christine M. Gianone, Digital Press, ISBN 1-55558-164-1, ++ supplementated by Web-based updates for C-Kermit 7.0 and 8.0. ++ ++PLATFORMS ++ Security ++ Name Included Last Updated ++ ++ Unix Yes 8.0.211 10 Apr 2004 ++ (Open)VMS No 8.0.208 10 Apr 2004 ++ Windows (K95) Yes 8.0.208 14 Mar 2003 (K95 2.1) ++ OS/2 (K95) Yes 8.0.208 14 Mar 2003 (K95 2.1) ++ DG AOS/VS No 7.0.196 1 Jan 2000 ++ Stratus VOS No 7.0.196 1 Jan 2000 ++ Bell Plan 9 No 7.0.196 1 Jan 2000 ++ Microware OS-9 No 7.0.196 1 Jan 2000 ++ Commodore Amiga No 7.0.196 1 Jan 2000 ++ Macintosh No 5A(190) 16 Aug 1994 (Mac Kermit 0.991) ++ Atari ST No 5A(189) 30 Jun 1993 ++ ++QUICK START FOR FTP USERS ++ ++ If you have a Web browser, go to: ++ ++ http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ckermit.html ++ ++ And take it from there. Otherwise... ++ ++ The definitive FTP source for Kermit software is kermit.columbia.edu. ++ Kermit software obtained from other FTP sites is not necessarily complete ++ or up to date, and may have been modified. ++ ++C-Kermit for UNIX computers that have a C compiler and 'make' program: ++ ++ Directory kermit/archives, binary mode, file cku211.tar.Z or cku211.tar.gz ++ ++ This is a compressed tar archive of UNIX C-Kermit source code, makefile, and ++ other files. It unpacks into its current directory, so download it into a ++ fresh directory. Transfer in binary mode, uncompress (or gunzip), untar (tar ++ xvf cku211.tar), and then give the appropriate "make" command to build for ++ your UNIX system; read the comments in the makefile and ckuins.txt for ++ further info. ++ ++C-Kermit for VMS: ++ ++ If you have VMS UNZIP, get the file kermit/archives/ckv211.zip in binary ++ mode, unzip, and build with CKVKER.COM. ++ ++Others: In the kermit/f or kermit/test directories under the appropriate ++prefixes, explained below. ++ ++ ++INSTALLATION ++ ++Installation procedures depend on the system. Please read the CK?INS.TXT, ++if any, file for your system (?=U for UNIX, V for VMS, etc). Please note ++the naming and placement for the initialization files: ++ ++ CKERMIT.INI ++ The standard initialization file. Please leave it as is unless you ++ know what you are doing and (if you are changing it or replacing it ++ for others to use) you are prepared to support it. Rename this file ++ to .kermrc in UNIX, OS-9, BeBox, or Plan 9. In Stratus VOS, rename ++ it ckermit.ini (lowercase). On multiuser systems, it goes either in the ++ (or EACH) user's home (login) directory, or else in a common shared ++ place if C-Kermit has been configured to look in that place (see ++ ckccfg.txt for details). ++ ++ CKERMOD.INI ++ A *sample* customization file. On multiuser OS's, a copy of this file ++ goes in each user's home directory, and then each user edits it to suit ++ her needs and preferences; e.g. by defining macros for their common ++ connections. ++ ++ DIALING DIRECTORIES ++ Dialing directory files can be system-wide, per-group, or per-user, or ++ any combination. For example, there can be a corporate wide directory ++ shared by all users, a supplemental directory for each division or ++ department, and a personal directory for each user. Simply be sure the ++ dialing directory files are identified a SET DIAL DIRECTORY command in ++ the user's (or the system-wide) C-Kermit initialization file, or in the ++ environment variable (logical name, symbol) K_DIAL_DIRECTORY. (The ++ standard initialization file looks by default in the user's home or login ++ directory.) When installing C-Kermit on multiuser platforms from which ++ users will dial out, you can also set environment variables for area ++ code, country code, and the various dialing prefixes as described on page ++ 478 of "Using C-Kermit" (second edition), so users don't have to worry ++ about defining these items themselves. Network directories and service ++ directories can also be set up in a similar manner. ++ ++ DOCUMENTATION ++ In UNIX, the general C-Kermit man page (or one of the versions tailored ++ for a specific platform, like HP-UX or Solaris) should be installed in ++ the appropriate place. In VMS, the VMS help topic (CKVKER.HLP) should ++ be installed as described in CKVINS.TXT. Plain-text documentation such ++ as CKERMIT2.TXT should be put in whatever place people are accustomed ++ to looking. ++ ++FILES AND FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS ++ ++C-Kermit is a family of Kermit programs for many different computer systems. ++The program shares a common set of system-independent file transfer protocol ++modules, written in the C language. System-dependent operations are collected ++into system-specific modules for each system. ++ ++C-Kermit file names all start with the letters "CK", followed by a single ++letter indicating the subgroup. When referring to these files in the UNIX, ++AOS/VS, or VOS environments, use lowercase letters, rather than the uppercase ++letters shown here. Subgroups: ++ ++ _: Security/Authentication/Encryption code, possibly regulated by law ++ a: General descriptive material and documentation ++ b: BOO file encoders and decoders (obsolete) ++ c: All platforms with C compilers ++ d: Data General AOS/VS ++ e: Reserved for "ckermit" files, like CKERMIT.INI, CKERMIT80.TXT ++ f: (reserved) ++ g: (reserved) ++ h: (reserved) ++ i: Commodore Amiga (Intuition) ++ j: (unused) ++ k: (unused) ++ l: Stratus VOS ++ m: Macintosh with Mac OS ++ n: Microsoft Windows NT ++ o: OS/2 and/or Microsoft Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP/... ++ p: Bell Labs Plan 9 ++ q: (reserved) ++ r: DEC PDP-11 with RSTS/E (reserved) ++ s: Atari ST GEMDOS (last supported in version 5A(189)) ++ t: DEC PDP-11 with RT-11 (reserved) ++ u: UNIX or environments with UNIX-like C libraries ++ v: VMS and OpenVMS ++ w: Wart (Lex-like preprocessor, used with all systems) ++ x: (reserved) ++ y: (reserved) ++ z: (reserved) ++ 0-3: (reserved) ++ 4: IBM AS/400 (reserved) ++ 5-8: (reserved) ++ 9: Microware OS-9 ++ ++Examples: ++ ++ ckaaaa.txt - This file ++ ckufio.c - File i/o for UNIX ++ ckstio.c - Communications i/o for the Atari ST ++ makefile - makefile for building UNIX C-Kermit ++ ckpker.mk - makefile for building Plan 9 C-Kermit ++ ckvker.com - build procedure for VMS C-Kermit ++ ++IMPORTANT FILES (use lowercase names on UNIX, VOS, or AOS/VS): ++ ++ ckaaaa.txt - This file (overview of the C-Kermit files). ++ For system-specific distributions, this will normally ++ be replaced by a system-specific READ.ME file. ++ ++ ckermit70.txt - Updates: Supplement to "Using C-Kermit", 2nd Ed, for 7.0. ++ ckermit80.txt - Updates: Supplement to "Using C-Kermit", 2nd Ed, for 8.0. ++ ckututor.txt - C-Kermit Tutorial for Unix (plain text) ++ ckcbwr.txt - "Beware file" (limitations, known bugs, hints), general. ++ ckermit.ini - Standard initialization file (rename to .kermrc in UNIX, OS-9) ++ ckermod.ini - Sample customization file (rename to .mykermrc in UNIX, OS-9) ++ ++The following can be found at the Kermit FTP site: ++ ++ ckermit.kdd - Sample dialing directory file (rename to .kdd in UNIX, OS-9) ++ ckermit.knd - Sample dialing directory file (rename to .knd in UNIX, OS-9) ++ ckermit.ksd - Sample services directory file (rename to .ksd in UNIX, OS-9) ++ ckedemo.ksc - Demonstration macros from "Using C-Kermit" ++ ckepage.ksc - Ditto ++ ckevt.ksc - Ditto ++ ++UNIX-specific files: ++ ++ ckuins.txt - UNIX-specific installation instructions. ++ ckubwr.txt - UNIX-specific beware file. ++ ckuker.nr - "man page" for UNIX. ++ ++VMS-specific files: ++ ++ ckvins.txt - VMS-specific installation instructions. ++ ckvbwr.txt - VMS-specific beware file ++ ckvker.hlp - VMS C-Kermit HELP topic (needs updating). ++ ++DG AOS/VS-specific files: ++ ++ ckdins.txt - Data General AOS/VS C-Kermit installation instructions ++ ckdbwr.txt - AOS/VS "beware" file ++ ckd*.cli - Procedures for building AOS/VS C-Kermit ++ ++The following files are of interest mainly to programmers and historians ++(find them at the Kermit ftp site): ++ ++ ckcker.ann - Release announcements. ++ ckccfg.txt - Configuration information (feature selection), general. ++ ckcplm.txt - Program logic manual (for programmers). ++ ckc211.txt - Program update history for edit 201-211. ++ ckc200.txt - Program update history for edit 198-200 (big) ++ ckc197.txt - Program update history for edit 195-197 (big) ++ ckc190.txt - Program update history for edits 189-190 (big). ++ ckc188.txt - Program update history, edits 179-188 (big). ++ ckc178.txt - Program edit history, 5A edits through 178 (very big). ++ ckcv4f.txt - Program edit history, version 4F. ++ ckcv4e.txt - Program edit history, version 4E. ++ ++BINARIES ++ ++If you have FTP access to kermit.columbia.edu (also known as ++kermit.cc.columbia.edu, ftp.cc.columbia.edu), you can also retrieve various ++C-Kermit binaries from the directory kermit/bin/ck*.*, or more conventiently ++from the web page: ++ ++ http://www.columbia.edu/kermit/ck80binaries.html ++ ++Test versions would be in kermit/test/bin/ck*.*. Be sure to transfer these ++files in binary mode. The READ.ME file in that directory explains what's ++what. ++ ++SOURCE FILES ++ ++The source files for the UNIX version (all UNIX versions) are available in ++kermit/archives/ckuNNN.tar.Z, approximately 1MB in size. Transfer this file ++in binary mode. This is a compressed tar archive. There is also a gzip'd ++version, cku211.tar.gz. To get the binary tar archive: ++ ++ mkdir kermit (at shell prompt, make a Kermit directory) ++ cd kermit (make it your current directory) ++ ++ ftp kermit.columbia.edu (make an ftp connection) ++ user: anonymous (log in as user "anonymous", lower case!) ++ password: (use your email id as a password) ++ cd kermit/archives (go to the archives directory) ++ type binary (specify binary file transfer) ++ get cku211.tar.Z (get the tar archive) (or get cku192.tar.gz) ++ bye (disconnect and exit from ftp) ++ ++ uncompress cku211.tar.Z (at the shell prompt, uncompress the archive) ++ tar xvf cku211.tar (extract the files from the tar archive) ++ make xxx (build C-Kermit for your system) ++ ++(where "xxx" is the makefile entry appropriate for your system.) ++ ++All C-Kermit source and other text files are also kept separately in the ++kermit/f directory. The files necessary to build a particular implementation ++of C-Kermit are listed in the appropriate makefile or equivalent: ++ ++ UNIX: makefile (or rename ckuker.mak to makefile) ++ 2.11 BSD: ckubs2.mak (rename to makefile), ckustr.sed ++ Plan 9: ckpker.mk (rename to mkfile) ++ Macintosh: ckmker.mak (rename to kermit.make, use MPW C 3.2) ++ VMS: CKVKER.COM (DCL) (and optionally also CKVKER.MMS) ++ or CKVOLD.COM (for VMS 4.x) ++ Amiga: CKIKER.MAK (Aztec C) or CKISAS.MAK (SAS C) ++ Atari ST: CKSKER.MAK ++ OS-9: ck9ker.mak or ck9ker.gcc ++ AOS/VS: ckdmak.cli, ckdcc.cli, ckdlnk.cli ++Stratus VOS: cklmak.cm ++ ++Minimal source files for building selected versions (these patterns get all ++the files you need, and in some cases maybe a few extra): ++ ++ UNIX: ck[cuw]*.[cwh] (including QNX, Plan 9, and BeBox) ++ UNIX: ck[cuw_]*.[cwh] (Unix with security modules) ++ VMS: ck[cuwv]*.[cwh] ++ Mac: ck[cuwm]*.[cwhr] ++ AOS/VS: ck[cuwd]*.[cwh] ++ VOS: ck[cwhl]*.[cwh] ++ Amiga: ck[cuwi]*.[cwh] ++ Atari: ck[cuws]*.[cwh] ++ OS-9: ck[cuw9]*.[cwha] ++ ++For a detailed, specific source file list for this C-Kermit release, see the ++file ckcxxx.txt, where xxx is the current C-Kermit edit number, such as 211. ++ ++Finally, here is a more detailed description of the C-Kermit file naming ++conventions. A C-Kermit filename has the form: ++ ++ CK. ++ ++where: ++ ++ is described earlier in this file; ++ ++ is the file type (use lowercase on UNIX, VOS, or AOS/VS): ++ ++ c: C language source ++ h: Header file for C language source ++ w: Wart preprocessor source, converted by Wart (or Lex) to a C program ++ r: Macintosh resource file (8-bit text) ++ a: Assembler source ++ ++ txt: Plain text. ++ nr: Nroff/Troff text formatter source for UNIX "man page" ++ mss: Scribe text formatter source ++ ps: Typeset material to be printed on a PostScript printer ++ hlp: A VMS Help topic ++ ++ ini: Initialization file ++ ksc: A Kermit Script to be executed by the TAKE command ++ kdd: A Kermit Dialing Directory ++ knd: A Kermit Network Directory ++ ksd: A Kermit Services Directory ++ ++ mak: A Makefile or other build procedure (often needs renaming) ++ com: (VMS only) a DCL command procedure ++ cli: (AOS/VS only) a command procedure ++ cmd: (OS/2 only) a Rexx command procedure ++ ++ boo: "boo"-encoded executable program, decode with CKBUNB program. ++ hex: "hex"-encoded executable program, decode with CKVDEH program (VMS only). ++ hqx: BinHex'd Macintosh Kermit program, decode with BinHex version 4.0. ++ uue: A uuencoded binary file, decode with uudecode or (DG only) CKDECO. ++ ++ def: An OS/2 linker definitions file. ++ sh: A UNIX shell script. ++ sed: A UNIX sed (editor) script. ++ str: A file of character strings extracted from C-Kermit (BSD 2.1x only). ++ ++ is mnemonic (up to 3 characters) for what's in the file: ++ ++NOTE: After C-Kermit 6.0, text filetypes such as .DOC and .HLP were changed ++to .TXT to avoid confusion in Windows-based Web browsers, which would ++otherwise mistake them for Microsoft Word or Windows Help documents. ++ ++ aaa: A "read-me" file, like this one ++ ins: Installation instructions or procedures ++ bwr: "Beware" file -- things to watch out for, hints and tips ++ plm: Program Logic Manual ++ ker: General C-Kermit definitions, information, documentation ++ ++ nnn: Digits: C-Kermit edit number (e.g. cku211.tar.gz) ++ cmd: Command parsing ++ con: CONNECT command ++ cns: CONNECT command (UNIX only - version that uses select(), not fork()) ++ deb: Debug/Transaction Log formats, Typedefs ++ dia: Modem/Dialer control ++ fio: System-depdendent File I/O ++ fns: Protocol support functions ++ fn2: More protocol support functions (and FN3, ...) ++ lib: Common library routines module ++ mai: Main program ++ net: Network i/o module ++ pro: Protocol ++ scr: SCRIPT command ++ tel: Telnet protocol module ++ tio: System-dependent communications i/o & control and interrupt handing ++ sig: Signal handling module ++ usr: Interactive/script user interface ++ us2: More user interface (mainly help text) ++ us3: Still more user interface (and USR4, USR5, USR6, USR7) ++ usx: Common user interface functions ++ usy: Command-line parsing ++ xla: Character set translation module ++ uni: Unicode support ++ pty: Pseudoterminal support ++ mdb: Malloc-debugging module (not included in real builds) ++ str: Strings module (only for 2.xBSD) ++ ++(End of ckaaaa.txt) diff --git a/debian/patches/series b/debian/patches/series new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13f815c --- /dev/null +++ b/debian/patches/series @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +01_docs_from_211.patch -- 2.11.0